5/29/2023 0 Comments Terry Pratchett's the truth
William de Worde is the accidental editor of the Discworld's first newspaper. Now he must cope with the traditional perils of a journalist's life - people who want him dead, a recovering vampire with a suicidal fascination for flash photography, some more people who want him dead in a different way and, worst of all, the man who keeps begging him to publish pictures of his humorously shaped potatoes.
William just wants to get at THE TRUTH. Unfortunately, everyone else wants to get at William. And it's only the third edition...
Terry Pratchett
THE TRUTH
A Novel of Discworld®
Contents
Begin Reading
Author’s Note About the Author Praise Other Books by Terry Pratchett Copyright
Begin ReadingThe rumor spread through the city like wildfire (which had quite often spread through Ankh-Morpork since its citizens had learned the words “fire insurance”).
The dwarfs can turn lead into gold…
It buzzed through the fetid air of the Alchemists’ quarter, where they had been trying to do the same thing for centuries without success but were certain that they’d manage it by tomorrow, or next Tuesday at least, or the end of the month for definite.
It caused speculation among the wizards at Unseen University, where they knew you could turn one element into another element, provided you didn’t mind it turning back again next day, and where was the good in that? Besides, most elements were happy where they were.
It seared into the scarred, puffy, and sometimes totally missing ears of the Thieves’ Guild, where people put an edge on their crowbars. Who cared where the gold came from?
The dwarfs can turn lead into gold…
It reached the cold but incredibly acute ears of the Patrician, and it did that fairly quickly, because you did not stay ruler of Ankh-Morpork for long if you were second with the news. He sighed and made a note of it, and added it to a lot of other notes.
The dwarfs can turn lead into gold… It reached the pointy ears of the dwarfs. “Can we?” “Damned if I know. I can’t.”
“Yeah, but if you could, you wouldn’t say. I wouldn’t say, if I could.” “Can you?” “No!”
“Ah-ha!”
It came to the ears of the night watch of the city guards, as they did gate duty at ten o’clock on an icy night. Gate duty in Ankh-Morpork was not taxing. It consisted mainly of waving through anything that wanted to go through, although traffic was minimal in the dark and freezing fog.
They hunched in the shelter of the gate arch, sharing one damp cigarette.
“You can’t turn something into something else,” said Corporal Nobbs. “The Alchemists have been trying it for years.”
“They a can gen’rally turn a house into a hole in the ground,” said Sergeant Colon.
“That’s what I’m talking about,” said Corporal Nobbs. “Can’t be done. It’s all to do with… elements. An alchemist told me. Everything’s made up of elements, right? Earth, Water, Air, Fire, and…sunnink. Well-known fact. Everything’s got ’em all mixed up just right.”
He stamped his feet in an effort to get some warmth into them.
“If it was possible to turn lead into gold, everyone’d be doing it,” he said. “Wizards could do it,” said Sergeant Colon. “Oh, well, magic,” said Nobby dismissively.
A large cart rumbled out of the yellow clouds and entered the arch, splashing Colon as it wobbled through one of the puddles that were such a feature of Ankh-Morpork’s highways.
“Bloody dwarfs,” he said, as it continued on into the city. But he didn’t say it too loudly.
“There were a lot of them pushing that cart,” said Corporal Nobbs reflectively. It lurched slowly around a corner and was lost to view.
“Prob’ly all that gold,” said Colon. “Hah. Yeah. That’d be it, then.”
And the rumor came to the ears of William de Worde, and in a sense it stopped there, because he dutifully wrote it down.
It was his job. Lady Margolotta of Uberwald sent him five dollars a month to do it. The Dowager Duchess of Quirm also sent him five dollars. So did King Verence of Lancre, and a few other Ramtop notables. So did the Seriph of Al-Khali, although in this case the payment was half a cartload of figs, twice a year.
All in all, he considered, he was onto a good thing. All he had to do was write one letter very carefully, trace it backwards onto a piece of boxwood provided for him by Mr. Cripslock, the engraver in the Street of Cunning Artificers, and then pay Mr. Cripslock twenty dollars to carefully remove the wood that wasn’t letters and make five impressions on sheets of paper.
Of course, it had to be done thoughtfully, with spaces left after “To my Noble Client the,” and so on, which he had to fill in later, but even deducting expenses it still left him the best part of thirty dollars for little more than one day’s work a month.
A young man without too many responsibilities could live modestly in Ankh-Morpork on thirty or forty dollars a month; he always sold the figs, because although it was possible to live on figs you soon wished you didn’t.
And there were always additional sums to be picked up here and there. The world of letters was a closed bo—mysterious papery object to many of Ankh-Morpork’s citizens, but if they ever did need to commit things to paper quite a few of them walked up the creaky stairs past the sign “William de Worde: Things Written Down.”
Dwarfs, for example. Dwarfs were always coming to seek work in the city, and the first thing they did was send a letter home saying how well they were doing. This was such a predictable occurrence, even if the dwarf in question was so far down on his luck that he’d been forced to eat his helmet, that William had Mr. Cripslock produce several dozen stock letters which only needed a few spaces filled in to be perfectly acceptable.
Fond dwarf parents all over the mountains treasured letters that looked something like this:
Dear Mume & Dad,
Well, I arrived here all right and I am staying, at 109 Cockbill Street The Shades Ankh- Morpk. Everythyng is fine. I have got a goode job working for Mr. CMOT Dibbler, Merchant Venturer and will be makinge lots of money really soon now. I am rememberinge alle your gode advyce and am not drinkynge, in bars or mixsing with Trolls. Well thas about itte muƒt goe now, looking forwade to seing you and Emelia agane, your loving son,
Tomas Brokenbrow
…who was usually swaying while he dictated it. It was twenty pence easily made, and as an additional service William carefully tailored the spelling to his clients and allowed them to choose their own punctuation.
On this particular evening, with the sleet gurgling in the downspouts outside his lodgings, William sat in the tiny office over the Guild of Conjurors and wrote carefully, half listening to the hopeless but painstaking catechism of the trainee conjurors at their evening class in the room below.
“…pay attention. Are you ready? Right. Egg. Glass…” “Egg. Glass,” the class droned listlessly. “…Glass. Egg…” “Glass. Egg…” “…Magic word…” “Magic word…” “Fazammm. Just like that. Ahahahahaha…”
“Faz-ammm. Just like that. Aha-ha-ha-ha-ha…”
William pulled another sheet of paper towards him, sharpened a fresh quill, stared at the wall for a moment, and then wrote as follows:
And finally, on the lighter Side, it is being said that the Dwarfs can Turn Lead into Gold, though no one knows whence the rumor comes, and Dwarfs going about their lawful occaƒions in the City are hailed with cries such as, e.g., “Hollah, short stuff, let’s see you make some Gold then!” although only Newcomers do this because all here know what happens if you call a Dwarf “short stuff,” viz., you are Dead. Yr. obdt. servant, William de Worde.
He always liked to finish his letters on a happier note.
He fetched a sheet of boxwood, lit another candle, and laid the letter facedown on the wood. A quick rub with the back of a spoon transferred the ink, and thirty dollars and enough figs to make you really ill were as good as in the bank.
He’d drop it in to Mr. Cripslock tonight, pick up the copies after a leisurely lunch tomorrow, and with any luck should have them all away by the middle of the week.
William put on his coat, wrapped the woodblock carefully in some waxed paper, and stepped out into the freezing night.
The world is made up of four elements: Earth, Air, Fire, and Water. This is a fact well known even to Corporal Nobbs. It’s also wrong. There’s a fifth element, and generally it’s called Surprise.
For example, the dwarfs found out how to turn lead into gold by doing it the hard way. The difference between that and the easy way is that the hard way works.
The dwarfs dwarfhandled their overloaded, creaking cart along the street, peering ahead in fog. Ice formed on the cart and hung from their beards.
All it needed was one frozen puddle.
Good old Dame Fortune. You can depend on her.
The fog closed in, making every light a dim glow and muffling all sounds. It was clear to Sergeant Colon and Corporal Nobbs that no barbarian horde would be including the invasion of Ankh- Morpork in their travel plans for this evening. The watchmen didn’t blame them.
They closed the gates. This was not the ominous activity that it might appear, since the keys had been lost long ago and latecomers usually threw gravel at the windows of the houses built on top of the wall until they found a friend to lift the bar. It was assumed that foreign invaders wouldn’t know which windows to throw gravel at.
Then the two watchmen trailed through the slush and muck to the Water Gate, by which the river Ankh had the good fortune to enter the city. The water was invisible in the dark, but the occasional ghostly shape of an ice floe drifted past below the parapet.
“Hang on,” said Nobby, as they laid hands on the windlass of the portcullis. “There’s someone down there.”
“In the river?” said Colon.
He listened. There was the creak of an oar, far below.
Sergeant Colon cupped his hands around his mouth and issued the traditional policeman’s cry of challenge.
“Oi! You!”
For a moment there was no sound but the wind and the gurgling of the water. Then a voice said: “Yes?”
“Are you invading the city or what?” There was another pause. Then: “What?” “What what?” said Colon, raising the stakes.
“What were the other options?”
“Don’t mess me about…are you, down there in the boat, invading this city?” “No.” “Fair enough,” said Colon, who on a night like this would happily take someone’s word for it. “Get a move on, then, ’cos we’re going to drop the gate.”
After a while the splash of the oars resumed, and disappeared downriver. “You reckon that was enough, just askin’ ’em?” said Nobby. “Well, they ought to know,” said Colon. “Yeah, but—” “It was a tiny little rowin’ boat, Nobby. Of course, if you want to go all the way down to them nice icy steps on the jetty—”
“No, Sarge.”
“Then let’s get back to the Watch House, all right?”
William turned up his collar as he hurried towards Cripslock the engraver. The usual busy streets were deserted. Only those with the most pressing business were out of doors. It was turning out to be a very nasty winter indeed, a gazpacho of freezing fog, snow, and Ankh-Morpork’s ever-present, ever-rolling smog.
His eye was caught by a little pool of light by the Watchmakers’ Guild. A small hunched figure was outlined in the glow.
He wandered over.
A hopeless sort of voice said, “Hot sausages? Inna bun?” “Mr. Dibbler?” said William. Cut-Me-Own-Throat Dibbler, Ankh-Morpork’s most enterprisingly unsuccessful businessman, peered at William over the top of his portable sausage-cooking tray. Snowflakes hissed in the congealing fat. William sighed.
“You’re out late, Mr. Dibbler,” he said, politely.
“Ah, Mr. Worde. Times is hard in the hot sausage trade,” said Dibbler.
“Can’t make both ends meat, eh?” said William. He couldn’t have stopped himself for a hundred dollars and a shipload of figs.
“Definitely in a period of slump in the comestibles market,” said Dibbler, too sunk in gloom to notice. “Don’t seem to find anyone ready to buy a sausage in a bun these days.”
William looked down at the tray. If Cut-Me-Own-Throat Dibbler was selling hot sausages, it was a sure sign that one of his more ambitious enterprises had gone wahooni-shaped yet again. Selling hot sausages from a tray was by way of being the ground state of Dibbler’s existence, from which he constantly sought to extricate himself and back to which he constantly returned when his latest venture went all fruity. Which was a shame, because Dibbler was an extremely good hot sausage salesman. He had to be, given the nature of his sausages.
“I should have got a proper education like you,” said Dibbler despondently. “A nice job indoors with no heavy lifting. I could have found my nitch, if’n I have got a good education.”
“Nitch?”
“One of the wizards told me about ’em,” said Dibbler. “Everything’s got a nitch. You know. Like: where they ought to be. What they was cut out for?”
William nodded. He was good with words. “Niche?” he said.
“One of them things, yes.” Dibbler sighed. “I missed out on the semaphore. Just didn’t see it coming. Next thing you know, everyone’s got a clacks company. Big money. Too rich for my blood. I could’ve done all right with the Fung Shooey, though. Sheer bloody bad luck there.”
“I’ve certainly felt better with my chair in a different position,” said William. That advice had cost him two dollars, along with an injunction to keep the lid on the privy down so that the Dragon of Unhappiness wouldn’t fly up his bottom.
“You were my first customer and I thank you,” said Dibbler. “I was all set up, I’d got the Dibbler wind chimes and the Dibbler mirrors, it was all gravy all the way—I mean, everything was positioned for maximum harmony, and then…smack. Bad karma plops on me once more.”
“It was a week before Mr. Passmore was able to walk again, though,” said William. The case of Dibbler’s second customer had been very useful for his newsletter, which rather made up for the two dollars.
“I wasn’t to know there really is a Dragon of Unhappiness,” said Dibbler.
“I don’t think there was until you convinced him that one exists,” said William.
Dibbler brightened a little. “Ah, well, say what you like, I’ve always been good at selling ideas. Can I convince you the idea that a sausage in a bun is what you desire at this time?”
“Actually I’ve really got to get this along to—” William began, and then said, “Did you just hear someone shout?”
“I’ve got some cold pork pies, too, somewhere,” said Dibbler, ferreting in his tray. “I can give you a convincingly bargain price on—”
“I’m sure I heard something,” said William. Dibbler cocked an ear. “Sort of like a rumbling?” he said. “Yes.” They stared into the slowly rolling clouds that filled Broad Way.
Which became, quite suddenly, a huge tarpaulin-covered cart, moving unstoppably and very fast…
And the last thing William remembered, before something flew out of the night and smacked him between the eyes, was someone shouting, “Stop the press!”
The rumor, having been pinned to the page by William’s pen like a butterfly to a cork, didn’t come to the ears of some people, because they had other, darker things on their mind.
Their rowboat slid through the hissing waters of the river Ankh, which closed behind it slowly. Two men were bent over the oars. The third sat in the pointy end. Occasionally it spoke. It said things like, “My nose itches.”
“You’ll just have to wait till we get there,” said one of the rowers. “You could let me out again. It really itches.” “We let you out when we stopped for supper.” “It didn’t itch then.” The other rower said, “Shall I hit him up alongside the —ing head with the —ing oar again, Mr. Pin?”
“Good idea, Mr. Tulip.”
There was a dull thump in the darkness.
“Ow.”
“Now no more fuss, friend, otherwise Mr. Tulip will lose his temper.” “Too —ing right.” Then there was a sound like an industrial pump. “Hey, go easy on that stuff, why don’t you?” “Ain’t —ing killed me yet, Mr. Pin.”
The boat oozed to a halt alongside a tiny, little-used landing stage. The tall figure who had so recently been the focus of Mr. Pin’s attention was bundled ashore and hustled away down an alley.
A moment later there was the sound of a carriage rolling away into the night.
It would seem quite impossible, on such a mucky night, that there could have been anyone to witness this scene.
But there was. The universe requires everything to be observed, lest it cease to exist.
A figure shuffled out from the shadows of the alley, close by. There was a smaller shape wobbling uncertainly by its side.
Both of them watched the departing coach as it disappeared into the snow.
The smaller of the two figures said, “Well, well, well. There’s a fing. Man all bundled up and hooded. An interesting fing, eh?”
The taller figure nodded. It wore a huge old greatcoat several sizes too big, and a felt hat that had been reshaped by time and weather into a soft cone that overhung the wearer’s head.
“Scraplit,” it said. “Thatch and trouser, a blewit the grawney man. I told ’im. I told ’im. Millennium hand and shrimp. Bugrit.”
After a bit of a pause it reached into its pocket and produced a sausage, which broke into two pieces. One bit disappeared under the hat, and the other got tossed to the smaller figure who was doing most of the talking or, at least, most of the coherent talking.
“Looks like a dirty deed to me,” said the smaller figure, which had four legs. The sausage was consumed in silence. Then the pair set off into the night again. In the same way that a pigeon can’t walk without bobbing its head, the taller figure appeared unable to walk without a sort of low-key, random mumbling:
“I told ’em, I told ’em. Millennium hand and shrimp. I said, I said, I said. Oh, no. But they only
run out, I told ’em. Sod ’em. Doorsteps. I said, I said, I said. Teeth. Wassa name of age, I said I told ’em, not my fault, matterofact, matterofact, stand to reason…”
The rumor did come to its ears later on, but by then it was part of it.
As for Mr. Pin and Mr. Tulip, all that need be known about them at this point is that they are the kind of people who call you “friend.” People like that aren’t friendly.
William opened his eyes. I’ve gone blind, he thought.
Then he moved the blanket. And then the pain hit him. It was a sharp and insistent sort of pain, centered right over the eyes. He reached up gingerly. There seemed to be some bruising and what felt like a dent in the flesh, if not the bone.
He sat up. He was in a sloping-ceilinged room. A bit of grubby snow crusted the bottom of a small window. Apart from the bed, which was just a mattress and blanket, the room was unfurnished.
A thump shook the building. Dust drifted down from the ceiling.
He got up, clutching at his forehead, and staggered to the door. It opened into a much larger room or, more accurately, a workshop.
Another thump rattled his teeth. William tried to focus. The room was full of dwarfs, toiling over a couple of long benches. But at the far end several of them were clustered around something like a complex piece of weaving machinery.
It went thump again. William winced. “What’s happening?” he said.
The nearest dwarf looked up at him and nudged a colleague urgently. The nudge passed itself along the rows, and the room was suddenly filled wall to wall with a cautious silence. A dozen solemn dwarf faces looked hard to William.
No one can look harder than a dwarf. Perhaps it’s because there is only quite a small amount of face between the statutory round iron helmet and the beard. Dwarf expressions are more concentrated.
“Um,” he said. “Hello?”
One of the dwarfs in front of the big machine was the first to unfreeze.
“Back to work, lads,” he said, and came and looked William sternly in the groin. “You all right, Your Lordship?” he said. William rubbed his forehead.
“Um…what happened?” he said. “I, uh, remember seeing a cart, and then something hit…” “It ran away from us,” said the dwarf. “Load slipped, too. Sorry about that.” “What happened to Mr. Dibbler?” The dwarf put his head on one side. “Was he the skinny man with the sausages?” he said. “That’s right. Was he hurt?” “I don’t think so,” said the dwarf carefully. “He sold young Thunderaxe a sausage in a bun, I do know that.”
William thought about this. Ankh-Morpork had many traps for the unwary newcomer. “Well, then is Mr. Thunderaxe all right?” he said. “Probably. He shouted under the door just now that he was feeling a lot better but would stay where he was for the time being,” said the dwarf. He reached under a bench and solemnly handed William a rectangle wrapped in grubby paper.
“Yours, I think.”
William unwrapped his wooden block. It was split right across where a wheel of the cart had run over it, and the writing had been smudged. He sighed.
“’Scuse me,” said the dwarf, “but what was it meant to be?”
“It’s a block prepared for a woodcut,” said William. He wondered how he could possibly explain the idea to a dwarf from outside the city. “You know? Engraving? A…a sort of very nearly magical way of getting lots of copies of writing? I’m afraid I shall have to go and make another one now.”
The dwarf gave him an odd look, and then took the block from him and turned it over and over in
his hands.
“You see,” said William, “the engraver cuts away bits of—” “Have you still got the original?” said the dwarf. “Pardon?”
“The original,” said the dwarf patiently.
“Oh, yes.” William reached inside his jacket and produced it. “Can I borrow it for a moment?” “Well, all right, but I shall need it again to—”
The dwarf scanned the letter a while, and then turned and hit the nearest dwarf a resounding boing on the helmet.
“Ten point across three,” he said. The struck dwarf nodded, and then its right hand moved quickly across the rack of little boxes, selecting things.
“I ought to be getting back so I can—” William began.
“This won’t take long,” said the head dwarf. “Just you step along this way, will you? This might be of interest to a man of letters such as yourself.”
William followed him along the avenue of busy dwarfs to the machine, which had been thumping away steadily.
“Oh. It’s an engraving press,” said William vaguely.
“This one’s a bit different,” said the dwarf. “We’ve…modified it.” He took a large sheet of paper off a pile by the press and handed it to William, who read:
“What do you think?” said the dwarf shyly.
“Are you Gunilla Goodmountain?” “Yes. What do you think?” “We—ell…you’ve got the letters nice and regular, I must say,” said William. “But I can’t see what’s so new about it. And you’ve spelled hitherto’ wrong. There should be another H after the first
“Just give me a ninety-six-point uppercase H, will you, Caslong? Thank you.” Goodmountain bent over the press, picked up a spanner, and busied himself somewhere in the mechanical gloom.
“You must have a really steady hand to get the letters so neat,” said William. He felt a bit sorry that he’d pointed out the mistake. Probably no one would have noticed in any case. Ankh-Morpork people considered that spelling was a sort of optional extra. They believed in it in the same way they believed in punctuation; it didn’t matter where you put it, so long as it was there.
The dwarf finished whatever arcane activity he had been engaged in, dabbed with an inked pad at something inside the press, and got down.
“I’m sure it won’t”--thump—“matter about the spelling,” said William.
Goodmountain opened the press again and wordlessly handed William a damp sheet of paper. William read it. The extra H was in place. “How—?” he began. “This is a very nearly magical way of getting lots of copies quickly,” said Goodmountain. Another dwarf appeared at his elbow, holding a big metal rectangle. It was full of little metal letters, back to front. Goodmountain took it and gave William a big grin.
“Want to make any changes before we go to press?” he said. “Just say the word. A couple of dozen prints be enough?”
“Oh dear,” said William. “This is printing, isn’t it…”
The Bucket was a tavern, of sorts. There was no passing trade. The street was, if not a dead end, then seriously wounded by the area’s change in fortunes. Few businesses fronted onto it. It consisted mainly of the back ends of yards and warehouses. No one even remembered why it was called Gleam Street. There was nothing very sparkling about it.
Besides, calling a tavern the Bucket was not a decision destined to feature in Great Marketing Decisions of History. Its owner was Mr. Cheese, who was thin, dry, and only smiled when he heard news of some serious murder. Traditionally he had sold short measure but, to make up for it, had shortchanged as well. However, the pub had been taken over by the City Watch as the unofficial policemen’s pub, because policemen like to drink in places where no one else goes and they don’t have to be reminded that they are policemen.
This had been a benefit in some ways. Not even licensed thieves tried to rob the Bucket now. Policemen didn’t like their drinking disturbed. On the other hand, Mr. Cheese had never found a bigger bunch of petty criminals than those wearing the Watch uniform. He saw more dud dollars and strange pieces of foreign currency cross his bar in the first month than he’d found in ten years in the business. It made you depressed, it really did. But some of the murder descriptions were quite funny.
He made part of his living by renting out the rat’s nest of old sheds and cellars that backed onto the pub. They tended to be occupied very temporarily by the kind of enthusiastic manufacturer who believed that what the world really, really needed today was an inflatable dartboard.
But there was a crowd outside the Bucket now, reading one of the slightly misprinted posters that Goodmountain had nailed up on the door. He followed William out and nailed up the corrected version.
“Sorry about your head,” he said. “Looks like we made a bit of an impression on you. Have this one on the house.”
William skulked home, keeping in the shadows in case he met Mr. Cripslock. But he folded his printed sheets into their envelopes and took them down to Hub Gate and gave them to the messengers, reflecting as he did so that he was doing this several days before he had expected to.
The messengers gave him some very odd looks.
He went back to his lodgings and had a look at himself in the mirror over the washbasin. A large R, printed in bruise colors, occupied a lot of his forehead. He stuck a bandage over it.
And he still had eighteen more copies. As an afterthought, and feeling rather daring, he looked through his notes for the addresses of eighteen prominent citizens who could probably afford it, wrote a short covering letter to each one offering this service for…he thought for a while, and then carefully wrote “$5”…and folded the free sheets into eighteen envelopes. Of course, he could always have asked Mr. Cripslock to do more copies as well, but it had never seemed right. After the old boy had spent all day chipping out the words, asking him to sully his craftsmanship by making dozens of duplicates seemed disrespectful. But you didn’t have to respect lumps of metal and machines. Machines weren’t alive.
That, really, was where the trouble was going to start. And there was going to be trouble. The dwarfs had seemed quite unconcerned when he’d told them how much of it there was going to be.
The coach arrived at a large house in the city. A door was opened. A door was shut. Another door was knocked on. It was opened. It shut. The carriage pulled away.
One ground-floor room was heavily curtained, and only the barest gleam of light filtered out. Only the faintest of noises filtered out, too, but any listener would have heard a murmur of conversation die down. Then a chair was knocked over and several people shouted, all at once.
“That is him!”
“It’s a trick…isn’t it?” “I’ll be damned!” “If it is him, so are we all!”
The hubbub died away. And then, very calmly, someone began to talk.
“Good. Good. Take him away, gentlemen. Make him comfortable in the cellar.” There were footsteps. A door opened and closed. A more querulous voice said: “We could simply replace—”
“No, we could not. I understand that our guest is, fortunately, a man of rather low intelligence.” There was this about the first speaker’s voice. It spoke as if disagreeing was not simply unthinkable, but impossible. It was used to being in the company of listeners.
“But he looks the spit and image—”
“Yes. Astonishing, isn’t it. Let us not overcomplicate matters, though. We are a bodyguard of lies, gentlemen. We are all that stands between the city and oblivion, so let us make this one chance work. Vetinari may be quite willing to see humans become a minority in their greatest city, but frankly his death by assassination would be…unfortunate. It would cause turmoil, and turmoil is hard to steer. And we all know that there are people who take too much of an interest. No. There is a third way. A gentle slide from one condition to another.”
“And what will happen to our new friend?”
“Oh, our employees are known to be men of resource, gentlemen. I’m sure they know how to deal with a man whose face no longer fits, eh?”
There was laughter.
Things were a little fraught in Unseen University just at the moment. The wizards tended to scuttle from building to building, glancing at the sky.
The problem, of course, was the frogs. Not rains of frogs, which were uncommon now in Ankh- Morpork, but specifically foreign treefrogs from the humid jungles of Klatch. They were small, brightly colored, and happy little creatures who secreted some of the nastiest toxins in the world, which is why the job of looking after the large vivarium where they happily passed their days was given to first-year students, on the basis that if they got things wrong there wouldn’t be too much education wasted.
Very occasionally, a frog was removed from the vivarium and put into a rather smaller jar where it briefly became a very happy frog indeed, and then went to sleep and woke up in that great big jungle in the sky.
And thus the university got the active ingredient that it made up into pills and fed to the Bursar, to keep him sane. At least, apparently sane, because nothing was that simple at good old UU. In fact he was incurably insane and hallucinated more or less continually, but by a remarkable stroke of lateral thinking his fellow wizards had reasoned, in that case, that the whole business could be sorted out if only they could find a formula that caused him to hallucinate that he was completely sane.*
This had worked well. There had been a few false starts. For several hours, at one point, he had hallucinated that he was a bookcase. But now he was permanently hallucinating that he was a bursar, and that almost made up for the small side effect which also led him to hallucinate that he could fly.
Of course, many people in the universe have also had the misplaced belief that they can safely ignore gravity, mostly after taking some local equivalent of dried frog pills, and that has led to much extra work for elementary physics and caused brief traffic jams in the street below. When a wizard hallucinates that he can fly, things are different.
“Bursaar! You come down here right this minute!” Archchancellor Mustrum Ridcully barked through his megaphone. “You know what I said about going higher than the walls!”
The Bursar floated gently down towards the lawn. “You wanted me, Archchancellor?” Ridcully waved a piece of paper at him.
“You were tellin’ me the other day we were spendin’ a ton of money with the engraver, weren’t you?” he barked.
The Bursar got his mind up to something approaching the correct speed.
“I was?” he said.
“Breakin’ the budget, you said. Remember it distinctly.”
A few cogs meshed in the jittery gearbox of the Bursar’s brain.
“Oh, yes. Yes. Very true,” he said. Another gear clonked into place. “A fortune every year, I’m afraid. The Guild of Engravers—”
“Chap here says”—the Archchancellor glanced at the sheet—“he can do us ten copies of a thousand words each for a dollar. Is that cheap?”
“I think, uh, there must be a miscarving there, Archchancellor,” said the Bursar, finally managing to get his voice into the smooth and soothing tones he found best in dealing with Ridcully. “That sum would not keep him in boxwood.”
“Says here”—rustle—“down to ten-point size,” said Ridcully. The Bursar lost control for a moment. “Ridiculous!” “What?” “Sorry, Archchancellor. I mean, that can’t be right. Even if anyone could consistently carve that fine, the wood would crumble after a couple of impressions.”
“Know about this sort of thing, do you?”
“Well, my great-uncle was an engraver, Archchancellor. And the print bill is a major drain, as you know. I think I can say with some justification that I have been able to keep the Guild down to a very—”
“Don’t they invite you to their annual blowout?”
“Well, as a major customer of course the University is invited to their official dinner, and as the designated officer I naturally see it as part of my duties to—”
“Fifteen courses, I heard.”
“—and of course there is our policy of maintaining a friendly relationship with the other Gui—” “Not including the nuts and coffee.” The Bursar hesitated. The Archchancellor tended to combine wooden-headed stupidity with distressing insight.
“The problem, Archchancellor,” he tried, “is that we have always been very much against using movable type printing for magic purposes because—”
“Yes, yes, I know all about that,” said the Archchancellor. “But there’s all the other stuff, more of it every day…forms and charts and gods know what. You know I’ve always wanted a paperless office—”
“Yes, Archchancellor, that’s why you hide it all in cupboards and throw it out of the window at night.”
“Clean desk, clean mind,” said the Archchancellor. He thrust the leaflet into the Bursar’s hand. “Just you trot down there, why don’t you, and see if it’s just a lot of hot air. But walk, please.”
William felt drawn back to the sheds behind the Bucket next day. Apart from anything else, he had nothing to do and he didn’t like being useless.
There are, it has been said, two types of people in the world. There are those who, when presented with a glass that is exactly half full, say: this glass is half full. And then there are those who say: this glass is half empty.
The world belongs, however, to those who can look at the glass and say: What’s up with this glass? Excuse me? Excuse me? This is my glass? I don’t think so. My glass was full! And it was a bigger glass! Who’s been pinching my beer?
And at the other end of the bar the world is full of the other type of person, who has a broken glass, or a glass that has been carelessly knocked over (usually by one of the people calling for a larger glass), or who had no glass at all, because he was at the back of the crowd and had failed to catch the barman’s eye.
William was one of the glassless. And this was odd, because he’d been born into a family that not only had a very large glass indeed but could afford to have people discreetly standing around with bottles to keep it filled up.
It was self-imposed glasslessness, and it had started at a fairly early age when he’d been sent away to school.
William’s brother, Rupert, being the elder, had gone to the Assassins’ School in Ankh-Morpork, widely regarded as being the best school in the world for the full-glass class. William, as the less important son, had been sent to Hugglestones, a boarding school so bleak and spartan that only the upper glasses would send their sons there.
Hugglestones was a granite building on a rain-soaked moor, and its stated purpose was to make men from boys. The policy employed involved a certain amount of wastage, and consisted, in
William’s recollection at least, of very simple and violent games in the healthy outdoor sleet. The small, slow, fat, or merely unpopular were mown down, as nature intended, but natural selection operates in many ways and William found that he had a certain capacity for survival. A good way to survive on the playing fields of Hugglestones was to run very fast and shout a lot while inexplicably always being a long way from the ball. This had earned him, oddly enough, a reputation for being keen, and keenness was highly prized at Hugglestones, if only because actual achievement was so rare.
He had been truly keen on anything involving words. At Hugglestones this had not counted for a great deal, since most of its graduates never expected to have to do much more with a pen than sign their names, a feat that most of them could manage after three or four years, but it had meant long mornings peacefully reading anything that took his fancy while the hulking front-row forwards who would one day be at least the deputy-leaders of the land learned how to hold a pen without crushing it.
William left with a good report, which tends to be the case with pupils that most of the teachers could only vaguely remember. Those who could recall William had a hazy picture of someone always arriving just too late at some huge and painful collision of bodies. A keen boy, they decided. The staff at Hugglestones prized keenness, believing that in sufficient quantities it could take the place of lesser attributes like intelligence, foresight, and training.
Afterwards, his father had faced the problem of what to do with him.
He was the younger son in any case, and family tradition sent youngest sons into some church or other, where they couldn’t do much harm on a physical level. But too much reading had taken its toll. William found that he now thought of prayer as a sophisticated way of pleading with thunderstorms.
Going into land management was just about acceptable, but it seemed to William that land managed itself pretty well, on the whole. He was all in favor of the countryside, provided that it was on the other side of a window.
A military career somewhere was unlikely. William had a rooted objection to killing people he didn’t know.
He enjoyed reading and writing. He liked words. Words didn’t shout or make loud noises, which pretty much defined the rest of his family. They didn’t involve getting muddy in the freezing cold. They didn’t hunt inoffensive animals, either. They did what he told them to. So, he’d said, he wanted to write.
His father had erupted. In his personal world, a scribe was only one step higher than a teacher. Good gods, man, they didn’t even ride a horse! So there had been Words.
As a result, William had gone off to Ankh-Morpork, the usual destination for the lost and the aimless. There he’d made words his living, in a quiet sort of way, and considered that he’d got off easy compared to brother Rupert, who was big and good-natured and a Hugglestones natural apart
from the accident of birth.
And then there had been the war against Klatch…
It was an insignificant war, which was over before it started, the kind of war that both sides pretended hadn’t really happened, but one of the things that did happen in the few confused days of wretched turmoil was the death of Rupert de Worde. He had died for his beliefs; chief among them was the very Hugglestonian one that bravery could replace armor, and that Klatchians would turn and run if you shouted loud enough.
William’s father, during their last meeting, had gone on at some length about the proud and noble traditions of the de Wordes. They had mostly involved unpleasant deaths, preferably of foreigners, but somehow, William gathered, the de Wordes had always considered that it was a decent second prize to die themselves. A de Worde was always to the fore when the city called. That was why they existed. Wasn’t the family motto Le Mot Juste? The Right Word in the Right Place, said Lord de Worde. He simply could not understand why William did not want to embrace this fine tradition and he dealt with it, in the manner of his kind, by not dealing with it.
And now a great frigid silence had descended between the de Wordes, which made the winter chill seem like a sauna.
In this gloomy frame of mind, it was positively cheering to wander into the print room to find the Bursar arguing the theory of words with Goodmountain.
“Hold on, hold on,” said the Bursar. “Yes, indeed, figuratively a word is made up of individual letters but they have only a—” he waved his long fingers gracefully “--theoretical existence, if I may put it that way. They are, as it were, words partis in potentia, and it is, I am afraid, unsophisticated in the extreme to imagine that they have any real existence unis et separato. Indeed, the very concept of letters having their own physical existence is, philosophically, extremely worrying. Indeed, it would be like noses and fingers running around the world all by themselves—”
That’s three “indeeds,” thought William, who noticed things like this. Three “indeeds” used by a person in one brief speech generally meant an internal spring was about to break. “We got whole boxes of letters,” said Goodmountain flatly. “We can make any words you want.” “That’s the trouble, you see,” said the Bursar. “Supposing the metal remembers the words it has printed? At least engravers melt down their plates, and the cleansing effect of fire will—”
“’Scuse me, Your Reverence,” said Goodmountain. One of the dwarfs had tapped him gently on the shoulder and handed him a square of paper. He passed it up to the Bursar.
“Young Caslong here thought you might like this as a souvenir,” he said. “He took it down directly from the case and pulled it off on the stone. He’s very quick like that.”
The Bursar tried to look the young dwarf sternly up and down, although this was a pretty pointless intimidatory tactic to use on dwarfs, since they had very little up to look down from.
“Really?” he said. “How very…” His eyes scanned the paper. And then bulged. “But these are…when I said…I only just said…how did you know I was going to say…I mean, my actual words…” he stuttered.
“Of course they’re not properly justified,” said Goodmountain. “Now just a moment—” the Bursar began. William left them to it. The stone he could work out—even the engravers used a big flat stone as a workbench. And he’d seen dwarfs pulling paper sheets off the metal letters, so that made sense too. And what the Bursar said had been unjustified. It wasn’t as if metal had a soul.
He looked over the head of a dwarf who was busily assembling letters in a little metal hod, the stubby fingers darting from box to box in the big tray of type in front of him. Capital letters all in the top, small letters all in the bottom. It was even possible to get an idea of what the dwarf was assembling, just by watching the movements of his hands across the tray.
“M-a-k-e-$-$-$-I-n-n-Y-o-u-r-e-S-p-a-r-e-T-y-m—” he murmured.
A certainty formed. He glanced down at the sheets of grubby paper beside the tray.
They were covered with the dense spiky handwriting that identified its owner as an anal retentive with a poor grip.
There were no flies on C.M.O.T. Dibbler. He would have charged them rent.
With barely a conscious thought, William pulled out his notebook, licked his pencil, and wrote, very carefully, in his private shorthand:
“Amzg scenes hv ocrd in the Ct with the Openg o t Prntg Engn at the Sgn o t Bucket by G. Goodmountain, Dwf, which hs causd mch intereƒt amng all prts inc. chfs of comerƒe.”
He paused. The conversation at the other end of the room was definitely taking a more conciliatory turn.
“How much a thousand?” said the Bursar.
“Even cheaper for bulk rates,” said Goodmountain. “Small runs no problem.”
The Bursar’s face had that warm glaze of someone who deals in numbers and can see one huge
and inconvenient number getting smaller in the very near future, and in those circumstances philosophy doesn’t stand much of a chance. And what was visible of Goodmountain’s face had the cheerful scowl of someone who’s worked out how to turn lead into still more gold.
“Well, of course, a contract of this size would have to be ratified by the Archchancellor himself,” said the Bursar, “but I can assure you that he listens very carefully to everything I say.”
“I’m sure he does, Your Lordship,” said Goodmountain cheerfully.
“Uh, by the way,” said the Bursar, “do you people have an Annual Dinner?” “Oh, yes. Definitely,” said the dwarf. “When is it?”
“When would you like it?”
William scribbled: “Mch businƒs sms likly wth a Certain Educational Body in t Ct,” and then, because he had a truly honest nature, he added, “we hear.”
Well, that was pretty good going. He’d got one letter away only this morning and already he had an important note for the next one--
—except, of course, the customers weren’t expecting another one for almost a month. He had another certain feeling that by then no one would be very interested. On the other hand, if he didn’t tell them about it, someone would be bound to complain. There had been all that trouble with the rain of dogs in Treacle Mine Road last year, and it wasn’t as if that had even happened.
But even if he got the dwarfs to make the type really big, one item of gossip wasn’t really going to go very far.
Blast.
He’d have to scuttle around a bit and find some more.
On an impulse, he wandered over to the departing Bursar. “Excuse me, sir,” he said. The Bursar, who was feeling in a very cheerful mood, raised an eyebrow in a good-humored
way.
“Hmm?” he said. “It’s Mr. de Worde, isn’t it?” “Yes, sir. I—”
“I’m afraid we do all our own writing down at the University,” said the Bursar.
“I wonder if I could just ask you what you think of Mr. Goodmountain’s new printing engine, sir?” said William.
“Why?”
“Er…Because I’d quite like to know? And I’d like to write it down for my newsletter. You know? Views of a leading member of Ankh-Morpork’s thaumaturgical establishment?”
“Oh?” The Bursar hesitated. “This is the little thing you send out to the Duchess of Quirm and the Duke of Sto Helit and people like that, isn’t it?”
“Yes, sir,” said William. Wizards were terrible snobs.
“Er. Well, then…you can say that I said it is a step in the right direction that will…er…be welcomed by all forward-thinking people and will drag the city kicking and screaming into the Century of the Fruitbat.” He watched eagle-eyed as William wrote this down. “And my name is Dr.
“Yes, Dr. Dinwiddie. Er…the Century of the Fruitbat is nearly over, sir. Would you like the city to be dragged kicking and screaming out of the Century of the Fruitbat?”
“Indeed.”
William wrote this down. It was a puzzle why things were always dragged kicking and screaming. No one ever seemed to want to, for example, lead them gently by the hand.
“And I’m sure you will send me a copy when it comes out, of course,” said the Bursar. “Yes, Dr. Dinwiddie.” “And if you want anything from me at any other time, don’t hesitate to ask.”
“Thank you, sir. But I’d always understood, sir, that Unseen University was against the use of movable type?”
“Oh, I think it’s time to embrace the exciting challenges presented to us by the Century of the Fruitbat,” said the Bursar.
“We…that’s the one we’re just about to leave, sir.” “Then it’s high time we embraced them, don’t you think?” “Good point, sir.”
“And now I must fly,” said the Bursar. “Except that I mustn’t.”
Lord Vetinari, the Patrician of Ankh-Morpork, poked at the ink in his inkwell. There was ice in it. “Don’t you even have a proper fire?” said Hughnon Ridcully, High Priest of Blind Io and unofficial spokesman for the city’s religious establishment. “I mean, I’m not one for stuffy rooms, but it’s freezing in here!”
“Brisk, certainly,” said Lord Vetinari. “It’s odd, but the ice isn’t as dark as the rest of the ink. What causes that, do you think?”
“Science, probably,” said Hughnon vaguely. Like his wizardly brother, Archchancellor Mustrum, he didn’t like to bother himself with patently silly questions. Both gods and magic required solid, sensible men, and the brothers Ridcully were solid as rocks. And, in some respects, as sensible.
“Ah. Anyway…you were saying?”
“You must put a stop to this, Havelock. You know the…understanding.” Vetinari seemed engrossed in the ink. “Must, Your Reverence?” he said calmly, without looking up. “You know why we’re all against this movable type nonsense!” “Remind me again…look, it bobs up and down…” Hughnon sighed. “Words are too important to be left to machinery. We’ve got nothing against engraving, you know that. We’ve nothing against words being nailed down properly. But words that can be taken apart and used to make other words…well, that’s downright dangerous. And I thought you weren’t in favor, either?”
“Broadly, yes,” said the Patrician. “But many years of ruling this city, Your Reverence, have taught me that you cannot apply brakes to a volcano. Sometimes it is best to let these things run their course. They generally die down again after a while.”
“You have not always taken such a relaxed approach, Havelock,” said Hughnon.
The Patrician gave him a cool stare that went on for a couple of seconds beyond the comfort barrier.
“Flexibility and understanding have always been my watchwords,” he said. “My god, have they?”
“Indeed. And what I would like you and your brother to understand now, Your Reverence, in a flexible way, is that this enterprise is being undertaken by dwarfs. And do you know where the largest dwarf city is, Your Reverence?”
“What? Oh…let’s see…there’s that place in—”
“Yes, everyone starts by saying that. But it’s Ankh-Morpork, in fact. There are more than fifty thousand dwarfs here now.”
“Surely not?”
“I assure you. We have currently very good relationships with the dwarf communities in Copperhead and Uberwald. In dealings with the dwarfs, I have seen to it that the city’s hand of friendship is permanently outstretched in a slightly downward direction. And in this current cold snap I am sure we are all very glad that bargeloads of coal and lamp oil are coming down from the dwarf mines every day. Do you catch my meaning?”
Hughnon glanced at the fireplace. Against all probability, one lump of coal was smoldering all by itself.
“And of course,” the Patrician went on, “it is increasingly hard to ignore this new type, aha, of printing when vast printeries now exist in the Agatean Empire and, as I am sure you are aware, in Omnia. And from Omnia, as you no doubt know, the Omnians import vast amounts of their holy Book of Om and these pamphlets they’re so keen on.”
“Evangelical nonsense,” said Hughnon. “You should have banned them long ago.” Once again the stare went on a good deal too long. “Ban a religion, Your Reverence?” “Well, when I say ban, I mean—” “I’m sure no one could call me a despot, Your Reverence,” said Lord Vetinari severely.
Hughnon Ridcully made a misjudged attempt to lighten the mood. “Not twice at any any rate, ahaha.”
“I’m sorry?”
“I said…not twice at any rate…ahaha.”
“I do apologize, but you seem to have lost me there.” “It was, uh, a minor witticism, Hav—my lord.”
“Oh. Yes. Ahah,” said Vetinari, and the words withered in the air. “No, I’m afraid you will find that the Omnians are quite free to distribute their good news about Om. But take heart! Surely you have some good news about Io.” “What? Oh. Yes, of course. He had a bit of a cold last month, but he’s up and about again.” “Capital. That is good news. No doubt these printers will happily spread the word on your behalf. I’m sure they will work to your exacting requirements.”
“And these are your reasons, my lord?”
“Do you think I have others?” said Lord Vetinari. “My motives, as ever, are entirely transparent.”
Hughnon reflected that “entirely transparent” meant either that you could see right through them or that you couldn’t see them at all.
Lord Vetinari shuffled through a file of paper. “However, the Guild of Engravers has put its rates up three times in the past year.”
“Ah. I see,” said Hughnon.
“A civilization runs on words, Your Reverence. Civilization is words. Which, on the whole, should not be too expensive. The world turns, Your Reverence, and we must spin with it.” He smiled. “Once upon a time nations fought like great grunting beasts in a swamp. Ankh-Morpork ruled a large part of that swamp because it had the best claws. But today gold has taken the place of steel and, my goodness, the Ankh-Morpork dollar seems to be the currency of choice. Tomorrow…perhaps the weaponry will be just words. The most words, the quickest words, the last words. Look out of the window. Tell me what you see.”
“Fog,” said the High Priest.
Vetinari sighed. Sometimes the weather had no sense of narrative convenience.
“If it was a fine day,” he said sharply, “you would see the big semaphore tower on the other side of the river. Words flying out and back from every corner of the continent. Not long ago it would take me the better part of a month to exchange letters with our ambassador in Genua. Now I can have a reply tomorrow. Certain things become easier, but this makes them harder in other ways. We have to change the way we think. We have to move with the times. Have you heard of c-commerce?”
“Certainly. The merchant ships are always—”
“I mean that you may now send a clacks all the way to Genua to order a…a pint of shrimps, if you like. Is that not a notable thing?”
“They would be pretty high when they got here, my lord!”
“Certainly. That was just an example. But now think of a prawn as merely an assemblage of information!” said Lord Vetinari, his eyes sparkling.
“Are you suggesting that prawns could travel by semaphore?” said the High Priest. “I suppose that you might be able to flick them from—”
“I was endeavoring to point up the fact that information is also bought and sold,” said Lord Vetinari. “And also that what was once considered impossible is now quite easily achieved. Kings and lords come and go and leave nothing but statues in a desert, while a couple of young men tinkering in a workshop change the way the world works.”
He walked over to a table on which was spread out a map of the world. It was a workman’s map; this is to say, it was a map used by someone who needed to refer to it a lot. It was covered with notes and markers.
“We’ve always looked beyond the walls for the invaders,” he said. “We always thought change came from outside, usually on the point of a sword. And then we look around and find that it comes from the inside of the head of someone you wouldn’t notice in the street. In certain circumstances it may be convenient to remove the head, but there seem to be such a lot of them these days.”
He gestured towards the busy map.
“A thousand years ago we thought the world was a bowl,” he said. “Five hundred years ago we knew it was a globe. Today we know it is flat and round and carried through space on the back of a turtle.” He turned and gave the High Priest another smile. “Don’t you wonder what shape it will turn out to be tomorrow?”
But a family trait of all the Ridcullys was not to let go of a thread until you’ve unraveled the whole garment.
“Besides, they have these little pincer things, you know, and would probably hang on like—” “What do?” “Prawns. They’d hang on to—”
“You are taking me rather too literally, Your Reverence,” said Vetinari sharply. “Oh.” “I was merely endeavoring to indicate that if we do not grab events by the collar they will have us by the throat.”
“It’ll end in trouble, my lord,” said Ridcully. He’d found it a good general comment in
practically any debate. Besides, it was so often true.
Lord Vetinari sighed. “In my experience, practically everything does,” he said. “That is the nature of things. All we can do is sing as we go.”
He stood up. “However, I will pay a personal visit to the dwarfs in question.” He reached out to ring a bell on his desk, stopped, and with a smile at the priest moved his hand instead to a brass-and- leather tube that had hung from two brass hooks. The mouthpiece was in the shape of a dragon.
He whistled into it, and then said:
“Mr. Drumknott? My coach, please.”
“Is it me,” said Ridcully, giving the newfangled speaking tube a nervous glance, “or is there a terrible smell in here?”
Lord Vetinari gave him a quizzical look and glanced down.
There was a basket just underneath his desk. In it was what appeared to be, at first glance and certainly at first smell, a dead dog. It lay with all four legs in the air. Only the occasional gentle expulsion of wind suggested that some living process was going on.
“It’s his teeth,” he said coldly. The dog Wuffles turned over and regarded the priest with one baleful black eye.
“He’s doing very well for a dog of his age,” said Hughnon, in a desperate attempt to climb a suddenly tilting slope. “How old would he be now?”
“Sixteen,” said the Patrician. “That’s over a hundred in dog years.”
Wuffles dragged himself into a sitting position and growled, releasing a gust of stale odors from the depths of his basket.
“He’s very healthy,” said Hughnon, while trying not to breathe. “For his age, I mean. I expect you get used to the smell.”
“What smell?” said Lord Vetinari. “Ah. Yes. Indeed,” said Hughnon.
As Lord Vetinari’s coach rattled off through the slush towards Gleam Street it may have surprised its occupant to know that, in a cellar quite nearby, someone looking very much like him was chained to the wall.
It was quite a long chain, giving him access to a table and chair, a bed, and a hole in the floor.
Currently, he was at the table. On the other side of it was Mr. Pin. Mr. Tulip was leaning menacingly against the wall. It would be clear to any experienced person that what was going on here was “good cop, bad cop” with the peculiar drawback that there were no cops. There was just an apparently endless supply of Mr. Tulip.
“So…Charlie,” said Mr. Pin, “how about it?”
“It’s not illegal, is it?” said the man addressed as Charlie.
Mr. Pin spread his hands. “What’s legality, Charlie? Just words on paper. But you won’t be doing anything wrong.”
Charlie nodded uncertainly.
“But ten thousand dollars doesn’t sound like the kind of money you get for doing something right,” he said. “Not for just saying a few words.”
“Mr. Tulip here once got even more money than that for saying just a few words, Charlie,” said Mr. Pin soothingly.
“Yeah, I said, ‘Give me all the —ing cash or the girl gets it,’” said Mr. Tulip.
“Was that right?” said Charlie, who seemed to Mr. Pin to have a highly developed death wish. “Absolutely right for that occasion, yes,” he said. “Yes, but it’s not often people make money like that,” said the suicidal Charlie. His eyes kept straying to the monstrous bulk of Mr. Tulip, who was holding a paper bag in one hand and, in the other hand, a spoon. He was using the spoon to ferry a fine white powder to his nose, his mouth, and once, Charlie would have sworn, his ear.
“Well, you are a special man, Charlie,” said Mr. Pin. “And afterwards you will have to stay out of sight for a long time.” “Yeah,” said Mr. Tulip, in a spray of powder. There was a sudden strong smell of mothballs. “All right, but why did you have to kidnap me, then? One minute I was locking up for the night, next minute—bang! And you’ve got me chained up.”
Mr. Pin decided to change tack. Charlie was arguing too much for a man in the same room as Mr. Tulip, especially a Mr. Tulip who was halfway through a bag of powdered mothballs. He gave him a big friendly smile.
“There’s no point in dwelling on the past, my friend,” he said. “This is business. All we want is a few days of your time, and then you end up with a fortune and—and I believe this is important, Charlie—a lifetime in which to spend it.”
Charlie was turning out to be very stupid indeed.
“But how do you know I won’t tell someone?” he insisted. Mr. Pin sighed. “We trust you, Charlie.” The man had run a clothes shop in Pseudopolis. Small shopkeepers had to be smart, didn’t they? They were usually sharp as knives when it came to making just the right amount of wrong change. So much for physiognomy, thought Mr. Pin. This man could pass for the Patrician even in a good light, but while by all accounts Lord Vetinari would have already worked out all the nasty ways the future could go, Charlie was actually entertaining the idea that he was going to come out of this alive and might even outsmart Mr. Pin. He was actually trying to be cunning! He was sitting a few feet away from Mr. Tulip, a man trying to snort crushed moth repellent, and he was trying guile. You almost had to admire the man.
“I’ll need to be back by Friday,” said Charlie. “It’ll all be over by Friday, will it?”
The shed that was now leased by the dwarfs had in the course of its rickety life been a forge and a laundry and a dozen other enterprises, and had last been used as a rocking horse factory by someone who had thought something was the Next Big Thing when it was by then one day away from becoming the Last Big Thing. Stacks of half-finished rocking horses that Mr. Cheese had been unable to sell for the back rent still filled one wall all the way to the tin roof. There was a shelf of corroding paint tins. Brushes had fossilized in their jars.
The press occupied the center of the floor, with several dwarfs at work. William had seen presses. The engravers used them. This one had an organic quality, though. The dwarfs spent as much time changing the press as they did using it. Extra rollers appeared, endless belts were threaded into the works. The press grew by the hour.
Goodmountain was working in front of several of the large sloped boxes, each one of which divided into several dozen compartments.
William watched the dwarf’s hand fly over the little boxes of leaden letters. “Why’s there a bigger box for the E’s?” “’Cos that’s the letter we use most of.”
“Is that why it’s in the middle of the box?” “Right. E’s then T’s then A’s…” “I mean, people would expect to see A in the middle.”
“We put E.”
“But you’ve got more N’s than U’s. And U is a vowel.” “People use more N’s than you think.” On the other side of the room, Caslong’s stubby dwarf fingers danced across his own boxes of letters.
“You can almost read what he’s working on—” William began. Goodmountain glanced up. His eyes narrowed for a moment. “‘…Make…more…money…inn…youre…Spare…Time…’” he said. “Sounds like Mr. Dibbler has been back.”
William stared down at the box of letters again. Of course, a quill pen potentially contained anything you wrote with it. He could understand that. But it did so in a clearly theoretical way, a safe way. Whereas these dull gray blocks looked threatening. He could understand why they worried people. Put us together in the right way, they seemed to say, and we can be anything you want. We could even be something you don’t want. We can spell anything. We can certainly spell trouble.
The ban on movable type wasn’t exactly a law. But he knew the engravers didn’t like it, because they had the world operating just as they wanted it, thank you very much. And Lord Vetinari was said not to like it, because too many words only upset people. And the wizards and the priests didn’t like it because words were important.
An engraved page was an engraved page, complete and unique. But if you took the leaden letters that had previously been used to set the words of a god, and then used them to set a cookery book, what did that do to the holy wisdom? For that matter, what would it do to the pie? As for printing a book of spells, and then using the same type for a book of navigation—well, the voyage might go anywhere.
On cue, because history likes neatness, he heard the sound of a carriage drawing up in the street outside. A few moments later Lord Vetinari stepped inside and stood leaning heavily on his stick and surveying the room with mild interest.
“Why…Lord de Worde,” he said, looking surprised. “I had no idea that you were involved in this enterprise…” William colored as he hurried over to the city’s supreme ruler. “It’s Mister de Worde, my lord.” “Ah, yes. Of course. Indeed.” Lord Vetinari’s gaze traversed the inky room, paused a moment on the pile of madly smiling rocking horses, and then took in the toiling dwarfs. “Yes. Of course. And are you in charge?”
“No one is, my lord,” said William. “But Mr. Goodmountain over there seems to do most of the talking.”
“So what exactly is your purpose here?”
“Er…” William paused, which he knew was never a good tactic with the Patrician. “Frankly, sir, it’s warm, my office is freezing, and…well, it’s fascinating. Look, I know it’s not really—”
Lord Vetinari nodded and raised a hand.
“Be so good as to ask Mr. Goodmountain to come over here, will you?”
William tried to whisper a few instructions into Gunilla’s ear as he hustled him over to the tall figure of the Patrician.
“Ah, good,” said the Patrician. “Now, I would just like to ask one or two questions, if I may?” Goodmountain nodded. “Firstly, is Mr. Cut-My-Own-Throat Dibbler involved in this enterprise in any significant managerial capacity?”
“What?” said William. He hadn’t been expecting this. “Shifty fellow, sells sausages—” “Oh, him. No. Just the dwarfs.”
“I see. And is this building built on a crack in space-time?” “What?” said Gunilla. The Patrician sighed.
“When one has been ruler of this city as long as I have,” he said, “one gets to know with a sad certainty that whenever some well-meaning soul begins a novel enterprise they always, with some kind of uncanny foresight, site it at the point where it will do maximum harm to the fabric of reality. There was that Holy Wood moving picture fiasco a few years ago, yes? And that Music with Rocks business not long after, we never got to the bottom of that. And of course the wizards seem to break into the Dungeon Dimensions so often they might as well install a revolving door. And I’m sure I don’t have to remind you what happened when the late Mr. Hong chose to open his Three Jolly Luck Take-Away Fish Bar in Dagon Street during the lunar eclipse. Yes? You see, gentlemen, it would be nice to think that someone, somewhere in this city, is engaged in some simple enterprise that is not going to end up causing tentacled monsters and dread apparitions to stalk the streets eating people. So…”
“What?” said Goodmountain.
“We haven’t noticed any cracks,” said William.
“Ah, but possibly on this very site a strange cult once engaged in eldritch rites, the very essence of which permeated the neighborhood, and which seeks only the rite, ahaha, circumstances to once again arise and walk around eating people?”
“What?” said Gunilla. He looked helplessly at William, who could only add: “They made rocking horses here.” “Really? I’ve always thought there was something slightly sinister about rocking horses,” said Lord Vetinari, but he looked subtly disappointed. Then he brightened up. He pointed to the big stone on which the type was arranged.
“Aha,” he said. “Innocently taken from the overgrown ruins of a megalithic stone circle, this stone is redolent with the blood of thousands, I have no doubt, who will emerge to seek revenge, you may depend upon it.”
“It was cut specially for me by my brother,” said Gunilla. “And I don’t have to take that kind of talk, mister. Who do you think you are, coming in here and talking daft like that?”
William stepped forward at a healthy fraction of the speed of terror.
“I wonder if I might just take Mr. Goodmountain aside and explain one or two things to him?” he said quickly.
The Patrician’s bright, enquiring smile did not so much as flicker.
“What a good idea,” he said, as William frog-marched the dwarf to a corner. “He will be sure to thank you for it later.”
Lord Vetinari stood leaning on his stick and looking at the press with an air of benevolent interest, while behind him William de Worde explained the political realities of Ankh-Morpork, especially those relating to sudden death. With gestures.
After thirty seconds of this, Goodmountain came back and stood foursquare in front of the Patrician, with his thumbs in his belt.
“I speak as I find, me,” he said. “Always have done, always will—” “And what is it that you call a spade?” said Lord Vetinari. “What? Never use spades,” said the glowering dwarf. “Farmers use spades. But I call a shovel a shovel.”
“Yes, I thought you would,” said Lord Vetinari.
“Young William here says you’re a ruthless despot who doesn’t like printing. But I say you’re a fair-minded man who won’t stand in the way of an honest dwarf making a bit of a living, am I right?”
Once again, Lord Vetinari’s smile remained in place. “Mr. de Worde, a moment, please…” The Patrician put his arm companionably around his shoulders and walked William gently away from the watching dwarfs.
“I only said that some people call you—” William began.
“Now, sir,” said the Patrician, waving this away, “I think I might just be persuaded, against all experience, that we have here a little endeavor that might just be pursued without filling my streets with inconvenient occult rubbish. It is hard to imagine such a thing in Ankh-Morpork, but I could just about accept it as a possibility. And it so happens that I feel the question of ‘printing’ is one that might, with care, be reopened.”
“You do?”
“Yes. So I am minded to allow your friends to proceed with their folly.” “Er, they’re not exactly—” William began. “Of course, I should add that, in the event of there being any problems of a tentacular nature, you would be held personally responsible.”
“Me? But I—”
“Ah. You feel that I am being unfair? Ruthlessly despotic, perhaps?” “Well, I, er—” “Apart from anything else, the dwarfs are a very hardworking and valuable ethnic grouping in the city,” said the Patrician. “On the whole, I wish to avoid any low-level difficulties at this time, what with the unsettled situation in Uberwald and the whole Muntab question.”
“Where’s Muntab?” said William.
“Exactly. How is Lord de Worde, by the way? You should write to him more often, you know.” William said nothing. “I always think it is a very sad thing when families fall out,” said Lord Vetinari. “There is far too
much mutton-headed ill feeling in the world.” He gave William a companionable pat. “I’m sure you will see to it that the printing enterprise stays firmly in the realms of the cult, the canny, and the scrutable. Do I make myself clear?”
“But I don’t have any control ov—” “Hmm?” “Yes, Lord Vetinari,” said William.
“Good. Good!” The Patrician straightened up, turned, and beamed at the dwarfs.
“Jolly good,” he said. “My word. Lots of little letters, all screwed together. Possibly an idea whose time has come. I may even have an occasional job for you myself.”
William waved frantically at Gunilla from behind the Patrician’s back. “Special rate for government jobs,” the dwarf muttered. “Oh, but I wouldn’t dream of paying any less than other customers,” said the Patrician. “I wasn’t going to charge you less than—” “Well, I’m sure we’ve all been very pleased to see you here, Your Lordship,” said William brightly, swiveling the Patrician in the direction of the door. “We look forward to the pleasure of your custom.”
“Are you quite sure Mr. Dibbler isn’t involved in this concern?”
“I think he’s having some things printed, but that’s all,” said William.
“Astonishing. Astonishing,” said Lord Vetinari, getting into his coach. “I do hope he isn’t ill.” Two figures watched his departure from the rooftop opposite. One of them said, very, very quietly, “—!”
The other said, “You have a point of view, Mr. Tulip?” “And he’s the man who runs the city?” “Yeah.”
“So where’s his —ing bodyguards?”
“If we wanted to scrag him, here and now, how useful would, say, four bodyguards be?”
“As a —ing chocolate kettle, Mr. Pin.” “There you are, then.” “But I could knock him over from here with a —ing brick!”
“I gather there are many organizations who hold Views on that, Mr. Tulip. People tell me this dump is thriving. The man at the top has a lot of friends when everything is going well. You would soon run out of bricks.”
Mr. Tulip looked down at the departing coach.
“From what I hear he mostly doesn’t do a —ing thing!” he complained.
“Yeah,” said Mr. Pin smoothly. “One of the hardest things to do properly, in politics.”
Both Mr. Tulip and Mr. Pin brought different things to their partnership, and in this instance what Mr. Pin brought was political savvy. Mr. Tulip respected this, even if he didn’t understand it. He contented himself with muttering, “It’d be simpler to —ing kill him.”
“Oh, for a —ing simple world,” said Mr. Pin. “Look, lay off the Honk, eh? That stuff’s for trolls. It’s worse than Slab. And they cut it with ground glass.” “’s chemical,” said Mr. Tulip sullenly. Mr. Pin sighed.
“Shall I try again?” he said. “Listen carefully. Drugs equals chemicals, but, and please listen to this part, sheesh, chemicals do not equal drugs. Remember all that trouble with the calcium carbonate? When you paid the man five dollars?”
“Made me feel good,” muttered Mr. Tulip.
“Calcium carbonate?” said Mr. Pin. “Even for you, I mean…look, you put up your actual nose enough chalk that someone could probably cut your head off and write on a blackboard with your neck.”
That was the major problem with Mr. Tulip, he thought as they made their way to the ground. It wasn’t that he had a drug habit. He wanted to have a drug habit. What he had was a stupidity habit, which cut in whenever he found anything being sold in little bags, and this had resulted in Mr. Tulip seeking heaven in flour, salt, baking powder, and pickled beef sandwiches. In a street where furtive people were selling Clang, Slip, Chop, Rhino, Skunk, Triplin, Floats, Honk, Double Honk, Gongers, and Slack, Mr. Tulip had an unerring way of finding the man who was retailing curry powder at what worked out as six hundred dollars a pound. It was so —ing embarrassing.
Currently he was experimenting with the whole range of recreational chemicals available to
Ankh-Morpork’s troll population, because at least when dealing with trolls Mr. Tulip had a moderate chance of outsmarting somebody. In theory Slab and Honk shouldn’t have any effect on the human brain, apart from maybe dissolving it. Mr. Tulip was hanging in there. He’d tried normality once, and hadn’t liked it.
Mr. Pin sighed again. “Come on,” he said. “Let’s feed the geek.”
In Ankh-Morpork it is very hard to watch without being watched in turn, and the two barely visible heads were indeed under observation.
They were being watched by a small dog, variously colored but mainly a rusty gray. Occasionally it scratched itself, with a noise like someone trying to shave a wire brush.
There was a piece of string around its neck. It was attached to another piece of string or, rather, to a length made up of pieces of string inexpertly knotted together.
The string was being held in the hand of a man. At least, such might be deduced from the fact that it disappeared into the same pocket of the grubby coat as one sleeve, which presumably had an arm in it, and theoretically therefore a hand on the end.
It was a strange coat. It stretched from the pavement almost to the brim of the hat above it, which was shaped rather like a sugarloaf. There was a suggestion of gray hair around the join. One arm burrowed in the suspicious depths of a pocket and produced a cold sausage.
“Two men spyin’ on the Patrician,” said the dog. “An interestin’ fing.” “Bug’rem,” said the man and broke the sausage into two democratic halves.
William wrote a short paragraph about Patrician Visits The Bucket and examined his notebook.
Amazing, really. He’d found no less than a dozen items for his newsletter in only a day. It was astonishing what people would tell you if you asked them.
Someone had stolen one of the golden fangs of the statue of Offler the Crocodile God; he’d promised Sergeant Colon a drink for telling him that, but in any case had got some way towards payment by appending to his paragraph the phrase: “The Watch Are Mightily in Pursuit of the Wrongdoer, and Are Confident of Apprehenƒion at an Early Juncture.”
He was not entirely sure about this, although Sergeant Colon had looked very sincere when he said it.
The nature of truth always bothered William. He had been brought up to tell it or, more correctly, to “own up” and some habits are hard to break if they’ve been beaten in hard enough. And Lord de Worde had inclined to the old proverb that as you bend the twig, so grows the tree. William had not
been a particularly flexible twig. Lord de Worde had not, himself, been a violent man. He’d merely employed them. Lord de Worde, as far as William could recall, had no great enthusiasm for anything that involved touching people.
Anyway, William always told himself, he was no good at making things up; anything that wasn’t the truth simply unraveled for him. Even little white lies, like “I shall definitely have the money by the end of the week,” always ended in trouble. That was “telling stories,” a sin in the de Worde compendium that was worse than lying; it was trying to make lies interesting. So William de Worde told the truth, out of cosmic self-defense. He’d found a hard truth less hard than an easy lie.
There had been rather a good fight in the Mended Drum. William was very pleased with that one: “Whereupon Brezock the Barbarian picked up a table and delivered a blow to Moltin the Snatcher, who in his turn seized hold of the Chandeliers and swung thereon, the while crying, ‘Take that, thou B*st*rd that you are!!!’ at which juncture, a ruckus commenced and 5 or 6 people were hurt…”
He took it all down to the Bucket.
Gunilla read it with interest; it seemed to take very little time for the dwarfs to set it up in type. And it was odd, but……once it was in type, all the letters so neat and regular… …it looked more real.
Boddony, who seemed to be second in command of the print room, squinted at the columns of type over Goodmountain’s shoulder.
“Hmm,” he said.
“What do you think?” said William.
“Looks a bit…gray,” said the dwarf. “All the type bunched up. Looks like a book.”
“Well, that’s all right, isn’t it?” said William. Looks like a book sounded like a good thing. “Maybe you want it more sort of spaced out?” said Gunilla. William stared at the printed page. An idea crept over him. It seemed to evolve from the page itself.
“How about,” he said, “if we put a little title on each piece?”
He picked up a scrap of paper and doodled: 5/6 Hurt in Tavern Brawl. Boddony read it solemnly.
“Yes,” he said eventually. “That looks…suitable.” He passed the paper across the table. “What do you call this news sheet?” he said. “I don’t,” said William.
“You’ve got to call it something,” said Boddony. “What do you put at the top?” “Generally something like ‘To my Lord The…’” William began. Boddony shook his head. “You can’t put that,” he said. “You want something a bit more general. More snappy.” “How about ‘Ankh-Morpork Items,’” said William. “Sorry, but I’m not much good at names.”
Gunilla pulled his little hod out of his apron and selected some letters from one of the cases on the table. He screwed them together, inked them, and rolled a sheet of paper over them.
William read: Ankh-Morpork tImes.
“Messed that up a bit. Wasn’t paying attention,” muttered Gunilla, reaching for the type. William stopped him.
“I don’t know,” he said. “Er. Leave it as it is…just make it a bigger T and a smaller i.” “That’s it, then,” said Gunilla. “All done. All right, lad? How many copies do you want?” “Er…twenty? Thirty?” “How about a couple of hundred?” Gunilla nodded at the dwarfs, who set to work. “It’s hardly worth going to press for less.”
“Good grief! I can’t imagine there’s enough people in the city that’d pay five dollars!”
“All right, charge ’em half a dollar. Then it’ll be a fifty dollars for us and the same for you.” “My word, really?” William stared at the beaming dwarf.
“But I’ve still got to sell them,” he said. “It’s not as though they’re cakes in a shop. It’s not like —”
He sniffed. His eyes began to water. “Oh dear,” he said. “We’re going to have another visitor. I know that smell.” “What smell?” said the dwarf.
The door creaked open.
There was this to be said about the Smell of Foul Ole Ron, an odor so intense that it took on a personality of its own and fully justified the capital letter: after the initial shock the organs of smell just gave up and shut down, as if no more able to comprehend the thing than an oyster can comprehend the ocean. After some minutes in its presence, wax would start to trickle out of people’s ears and their hair would begin to bleach.
It had developed to such a degree that it now led a semi-independent life of its own, and often went to the theater by itself, or read small volumes of poetry. Ron was outclassed by his smell.
Foul Ole Ron’s hands were thrust deeply into his pockets, but from one pocket issued a length of string, or rather a great many lengths of string tied into one length. The other was attached to a small dog of the grayish persuasion. It may have been a terrier. It walked with a limp and also in a kind of oblique fashion, as though it was trying to insinuate its way through the world. It walked like a dog who has long ago learned that the world contains more thrown boots than meaty bones. It walked like a dog that was prepared, at any moment, to run.
It looked up at William with crusted eyes and said: “Woof.” William felt that he ought to stand up for mankind. “Sorry about the smell,” he said. Then he stared at the dog.
“What’s this smell you keep on about?” said Gunilla. The rivets on his helmet were beginning to tarnish.
“It, er, belongs to Mr…. er…Ron,” said William, stillgiving the dog a suspicious look. “People say it’s glandular.”
He was sure he’d seen the dog before. It was always in the corner of the picture, as it were— ambling through the streets, or just sitting on a corner, watching the world go by.
“What does he want?” said Gunilla. “D’you think he wants us to print something?”
“Shouldn’t think so,” said William. “He’s a sort of beggar. Only they won’t let him in the Beggars’ Guild anymore.”
“He isn’t saying anything.”
“Well, usually he just stands there until people give him something to go away. Er…you heard of things like the Welcome Wagon, where various neighbors and traders greet newcomers to an area?”
“Yes.”
“Well, this is the dark side.”
Foul Ole Ron nodded, and held out a hand. “’S’right, Mister Push. Don’t try the blarney gobble on me, juggins, I told ’em, I ain’t slanging the gentry, bugrit. Millennium hand and shrimp. Dang.”
“Woof.”
William glared at the dog again. “Growl,” it said. Gunilla scratched somewhere in the recesses of his beard.
“One thing I already noticed about this here town,” he said, “is that people’ll buy practically anything off a man in the street.”
He picked up a handful of the news sheets, still damp from the press. “Can you understand me, mister?” he said. “Bugrit.”
Gunilla nudged William in the ribs. “Does that mean yes or no, d’you think?” “Probably yes.” “Okay. Well, see here now, if you sell these things at, oh, twenty pence each, you can keep—” “Hey, you can’t sell it that cheap,” said William. “Why not?”
“Why? Because…because…because, well, anyone will be able to read it, that’s why!”
“Good, ’cos that means anyone’ll be able to pay twenty pence,” said Gunilla calmly. “There’s lots more poor folk than rich folk and it’s easier to get money out of ’em.” He grimaced at Foul Ole Ron. “This may seem a strange question,” he said, “but have you got any friends?”
“I told ’em! I told ’em! Bug’rem!”
“Probably yes,” said William. “He hangs out with a bunch of…er…unfortunates that live under one of the bridges. Well, not exactly ‘hangs out.’ More ‘droops.’”
“Well, now,” said Gunilla, waving the copy of the Times at Ron, “you can tell them that if they can sell these to people for twenty pence each, I’ll let you keep one nice shiny penny.”
“Yeah? And you can put yer nice shiny penny where the sun don’t shine,” said Ron. “Oh, so you—” Gunilla began. William laid a hand on his arm. “Sorry, just a minute—What was that you said, Ron?” he said. “Bugrit,” said Foul Ole Ron. It had sounded like Ron’s voice and it had seemed to come from the general area of Ron’s face, it was just that it had demonstrated a coherence you didn’t often get.
“You want more than a penny?” said William carefully.
“Got to be worth five pence a time,” said Ron. More or less.
For some reason William’s gaze was dragged down to the small gray dog. It returned it amiably and said “Woof?”
He looked back up again.
“Are you all right, Foul Ole Ron?” he said.
“Gottle o’geer, gottle o’geer,” said Ron mysteriously. “All right…two pence,” said Gunilla. “Four,” Ron seemed to say. “But let’s not mess about, okay? One dollar per thirty?”
“It’s a deal,” said Goodmountain, who spat on his hand and would have held it out to seal the contract if William hadn’t gripped it urgently.
“Don’t.”
“What’s wrong?”
William sighed. “Have you got any horribly disfiguring diseases?” “No!” “Do you want some?”
“Oh.” Gunilla lowered his hand. “You tell your friends to get round here right now, okay?” he said. He turned to William.
“Trustworthy, are they?”
“Well…sort of,” said William. “It’s probably not a good idea to leave paint thinners around.”
Outside, Foul Ole Ron and his dog ambled down the street. And the strange thing was that a conversation was going on, even though there was technically only one person there.
“See? I told you. You just let me do the talkin’, all right?” “Bugrit.” “Right. You stick with me and you won’t go far wrong.” “Bugrit.” “Really? Well, I spose that’ll have to do. Bark, bark.”
Twelve people lived under the Misbegot Bridge and in a life of luxury, although luxury is not hard to achieve when you define it as something to eat at least once a day and especially when you have such a broad definition of “something to eat.” Technically they were beggars, although they seldom had to beg. Possibly they were thieves, although they only took what had been thrown away, usually by people hurrying to be out of their presence. Outsiders considered that the leader of the group was Coffin Henry, who would have been the city’s champion expectorator if anyone else had wanted the title. But the group had the true democracy of the voteless. There was Arnold Sideways, whose lack of legs only served to give him an extra advantage in any pub fight, where a man with good teeth at groin height had it all his own way. And if it wasn’t for the duck whose presence on his head he consistently denied, the Duck Man would have been viewed as well-spoken and educated and as sane as the next man. Unfortunately, the next man was Foul Ole Ron.
The other eight people were Altogether Andrews.
Altogether Andrews was one man with considerably more than one mind. In a rest state, when he had no particular problem to confront, there was no sign of this except a sort of background twitch and flicker as his features passed randomly under the control of, variously, Jossi, Lady Hermione, Little Sidney, Mr. Viddle, Curly, the Judge, and Tinker; there was also Burke, but the crew had only ever seen Burke once and never wanted to again, so the other seven personalities kept him buried. Nobody in the body answered to the name of Andrews. In the opinion of the Duck Man, who was probably the best in the crew at thinking in a straight line, Andrews had probably been some innocent and hospitable person of a psychic disposition who had simply been overwhelmed by the colonizing souls.
Only among the gentle crew under the bridge could a consensus person like Andrews find an accommodating niche. They’d welcomed him, or them, to the fraternity around the smoky fire. Someone who wasn’t the same person for more than five minutes at a time could fit right in.
One other thing that united the crew—although probably nothing could unite Altogether Andrews —was a readiness to believe that a dog could talk. The group around the smoldering fire believed
they had heard a lot of things talk, such as walls. A dog was easy by comparison. Besides, they respected the fact that Gaspode had the sharpest mind of the lot and never drank anything that corroded the container.
“Let’s try this again, shall we?” he said. “If you sell thirty of the things, you’ll get a dollar. A whole dollar. Got that?”
“Bugrit.”
“Quack.” “Haaargghhh…gak!” “How much is that in old boots?”
Gaspode sighed. “No, Arnold. You can use the money to buy as many old—”
There was a rumble from Altogether Andrews, and the rest of the crew went very still. When Altogether Andrews was quiet for a while, you never knew who he was going to be.
There was always the possibility that it would be Burke.
“Can I ask a question?” said Altogether Andrews, in a rather hoarse treble. The crew relaxed. That sounded like Lady Hermione. She wasn’t a problem. “Yes…Your Ladyship?” said Gaspode. “This wouldn’t be…work, would it?”
The mention of the word sent the rest of the crew into a fugue of stress and bewildered panic. “Haaaruk…gak!” “Bugrit!”
“Quack!”
“No, no, no,” said Gaspode hurriedly. “It’s hardly work, is it? Just handing out stuff and takin’ money? Doesn’t sound like work to me.”
“I ain’t working!” shouted Coffin Henry. “I am socially inadequate in the whole area of doing anything!”
“We do not work,” said Arnold Sideways. “We is gentlemen of les-u-are.”
“Ahem,” said Lady Hermione.
“Gentlemen and ladies of les-u-are,” said Arnold gallantly.
“This is a very nasty winter. Extra money would certainly come in handy,” said the Duck Man. “What for?” said Arnold. “We could live like kings on a dollar a day, Arnold.” “What, you mean someone’d chop our heads off?” “No, I—” “Someone’d climb up inside the privy with a red-hot poker and—” “No! I meant—” “Someone’d drown us in a butt of wine?” “No, that’s dying like kings, Arnold.” “I shouldn’t reckon there is a butt of wine big enough that you couldn’t drink your way out of it,” muttered Gaspode. “So, what about it, masters? Oh, and mistress, o’course. Shall I—shall Ron tell that lad we’re up for it?”
“Indeed.”
“Okay.” “Gawwwark…pt!” “Bugrit!” They looked at Altogether Andrews. His lips moved, his face flickered. Then he held up five democratic fingers.
“The ayes have it,” said Gaspode.
Mr. Pin lit a cigar. Smoking was his one vice. At least, it was his only vice that he thought of as a vice. The others were just job skills.
Mr. Tulip’s vices were also limitless, but he owned up to cheap aftershave because a man has to drink something. The drugs didn’t count, if only because the only time he’d ever got real ones was when they’d robbed a horse doctor and he’d taken a couple of big pills that had made every vein on
his body stand out like a purple hosepipe.
The pair were not thugs. At least, they did not see themselves as thugs. Nor were they thieves. At least, they never thought of themselves as thieves. They did not think of themselves as assassins. Assassins were posh, and had rules. Pin and Tulip—the New Firm, as Mr. Pin liked to refer to them —did not have rules.
They thought of themselves as facilitators. They were men who made things happen, men who were going places.
It has to be added that when one says “they thought” it means “Mr. Pin thought.” Mr. Tulip used his head all the time, from a distance of about eight inches, but he was not, except in one or two unexpected areas, a man given much to using his brain. On the whole, he left Mr. Pin to do the polysyllabic cogitation.
Mr. Pin, on the other hand, was not very good at sustained, mindless violence, and admired the fact that Mr. Tulip had an apparently bottomless supply. When they had first met, and had recognized in each other the qualities that would make their partnership greater than the sum of its parts, he’d seen that Mr. Tulip was not, as he appeared to the rest of the world, just another nut job. Some negative qualities can reach a pitch of perfection that changes their very nature, and Mr. Tulip had turned anger into an art.
It was not anger at anything. It was just pure, platonic anger from somewhere in the reptilian depths of the soul, a fountain of never-ending red-hot grudge; Mr. Tulip lived his life on that thin line most people occupy just before they haul off and hit someone repeatedly with a wrench. For Mr. Tulip, anger was the ground state of being. Pin had occasionally wondered what had happened to the man to make him as angry as that, but to Tulip the past was another country with very, very well guarded borders. Sometimes Mr. Pin heard him screaming at night.
It was quite hard to hire Mr. Tulip and Mr. Pin. You had to know the right people. To be more accurate, you had to know the wrong people, and you got to know them by hanging around a certain kind of bar and surviving, which was kind of a first test. The wrong people, of course, would not know Mr. Tulip and Mr. Pin. But they would know a man. And that man would, in a general sense, express the guarded opinion that he may know how to get in touch with men of a Pin-like or Tulipolitic disposition. He could not exactly recall much more than that at the moment, due to memory loss brought on by lack of money. Once cured, he may indicate in a general kind of way another address where you would meet, in a dark corner, a man who would tell you emphatically that he had never heard of anyone called Tulip or Pin. He would also ask where you would be at, say, nine o’clock tonight.
And then you would meet Mr. Tulip and Mr. Pin. They would know you had money, they would know you had something on your mind, and, if you had been really stupid, they now knew your address.
And it had therefore come as a surprise to the New Firm that their latest client had come straight to them. This was worrying. It was also worrying that he was dead. Generally the New Firm had no problem with corpses, but they didn’t like them to speak.
Mr. Slant coughed. Mr. Pin noticed that this created a small cloud of dust. For Mr. Slant was a zombie.
“I must reiterate,” said Mr. Slant, “that I am a mere facilitator in this matter—” “Just like us,” said Mr. Tulip. Mr. Slant indicated with a look that he would never in a thousand years be just like Mr. Tulip, but he said: “Quite so. My clients wished me to find some…experts. I found you. I gave you some sealed instructions. You have accepted the contract. And I understand that as a result of this you have made certain…arrangements. I do not know what those arrangements are. I will continue not to know what those arrangements are. My relationship with you is, as they say, on the long finger. Do you understand me?”
“What —ing finger is that?” said Mr. Tulip. He was getting jittery in the presence of the dead lawyer.
“We see each other only when necessary, we say as little as possible.”
“I hate —ing zombies,” said Mr. Tulip. That morning he’d tried something he’d found in a box under the sink. If it cleaned drains, he’d reasoned, that meant it was chemical. Now he was getting strange messages from his large intestine.
“I am sure the feeling is mutual,” said Mr. Slant.
“I understand what you’re saying,” said Mr. Pin. “You’re saying that if this goes bad you’ve never seen us in your life—”
“Ahem…” Mr. Slant coughed.
“Your afterlife,” Mr. Pin corrected himself. “Okay. What about the money?”
“As requested, thirty thousand dollars for special expenses will be included in the sum already agreed.”
“In gems. Not cash.”
“Of course. And my clients would hardly write you a check. It will be delivered tonight. And perhaps I should mention one other matter.” His dry fingers shuffled through the dry papers in his dry briefcase, and he handed Mr. Pin a folder.
Mr. Pin read it. He turned a few pages quickly.
“You may show it to your monkey,” said Mr. Slant.
Mr. Pin managed to grab Mr. Tulip’s arm before it reached the zombie’s head. Mr. Slant did not even flinch.
“He’s got the story of our lives, Mr. Tulip!”
“So? I can still rip his —ing stitched-on head right off!”
“No, you cannot,” said Mr. Slant. “Your colleague will tell you why.”
“Because our legal friend here will have made a lot of copies, won’t you, Mr. Slant? And probably lodged them in all kinds of places in case he di—in case—”
“…of accidents,” said Mr. Slant smoothly. “Well done. You have had an interesting career so far, gentlemen. You are quite young. Your talents have taken you a long way in a short time and given you quite a reputation in your chosen profession. While of course I have no idea about the task you are undertaking—no idea whatsoever, I must stress—I have no doubt that you will impress us all.”
“Does he know about the contract in Quirm?” said Mr. Tulip. “Yes,” said Mr. Pin. “That stuff with the wire netting and the crabs and that —ing banker?” “Yes.” “And the thing with the puppies and that kid?”
“He does now,” said Mr. Pin. “He knows nearly everything. Very clever. You believe you know where the bodies are buried, Mr. Slant.”
“I’ve talked to one or two of them,” said Mr. Slant. “But it would appear that you have never committed a crime within Ankh-Morpork, otherwise, of course, I could not talk to you.”
“Who says we’ve never committed a —ing crime in Ankh-Morpork?” Mr. Tulip demanded. “As I understand it, you have never been to this city before.” “Well? We’ve had all —ing day.” “Have you been caught?” said Mr. Slant. “No!”
“Then you have committed no crime. May I express the hope that your business here does not involve any kind of criminal activity?”
“Perish the thought,” said Mr. Pin.
“The City Watch here are quite dogged in some respects. And the various Guilds jealously guard their professional territories.”
“We hold the police in high regard,” said Mr. Pin. “We have a great respect for the work they
do.”
“We —ing love policemen,” said Mr. Tulip. “If there was a policeman’s ball, we would be among the first to buy a ticket,” said Mr. Pin. “’Specially if it was mounted on a plinth, or a little display stand of some sort,” said Mr. Tulip,
“’cos we like beautiful things.”
“I just wanted to be sure that we understood one another,” said Mr. Slant, snapping his case closed. He stood up, nodding to them, and walked stiffly out of the room.
“What a—” Mr. Tulip began, but Mr. Pin raised a finger to his lips. He crossed silently to the door and opened it. The lawyer had gone.
“He knows what we’re —ing here for,” Mr. Tulip whispered hotly. “What’s he —ing pretending for?”
“Because he’s a lawyer,” said Mr. Tulip. “Nice place, this,” he added, in a slightly overloud voice.
Mr. Tulip looked around.
“Nah,” he said dismissively. “I fort that at the start, but it’s just a late eighteenth-century copy of the —ing Baroque Style. They got dimensions all wrong. Didja see them pillars in the hall? Didja? — ing sixth-century Ephebian with Second Empire Djelibeybian —ing finials! It was all I could do not to laugh.”
“Yes,” said Mr. Pin. “As I have remarked before, Mr. Tulip, in many ways you are a very unexpected man.”
Mr. Tulip walked over to a shrouded picture and tweaked the cloth aside. “Well, —me, it’s a — ing de Quirm,” he said. “I seen a print of it. Woman Holding Ferret. He did it just after he moved from Genua and was influenced by —ing Caravati. Look at that —ing brushwork, will ya? See the way the line of the hand draws the —ing eye into the picture? Look at the quality of the light on the landscape you can see through the —ing window there. See the way the ferret’s nose follows you
around the room? That’s —ing genius, that is. I don’t mind telling you that if I was here by myself I’d be in —ing tears.”
“It’s very pretty.”
“Pretty?” said Mr. Tulip, despairing of his colleague’s taste. He walked over to a statue by the door and stared hard at it, then ran his fingers lightly across the marble.
“I fort so! This is a —ing Scolpini! I’d bet anything. But I’ve never seen it in a catalogue. And it’s been left in an empty house, where anyone could just —ing walk in and nick it!”
“This place is under powerful protection. You saw the seals on the door.”
“Guilds? Bunch of —ing amateurs. We could go through this place like a hot knife through —ing thin ice, and you know it. Amateurs and rocks and lawn ornaments and dead men walking about…we could knock this —ing place over.”
Mr. Pin said nothing. A similar idea had occurred to him, but in him, unlike his colleague, deed did not automatically follow upon what passed for thought.
The Firm had, indeed, not operated in Ankh-Morpork before. Mr. Pin had kept away because, well, there were plenty of other cities, and an instinct for survival had told him that the Big Wahooni* should wait a while. He’d had a Plan, ever since he’d met Mr. Tulip and found that his own inventiveness combined with Tulip’s incessant anger promised a successful career. He’d developed their business in Genua, Pseudopolis, Quirm—cities smaller and easier to navigate than Ankh- Morpork, although, these days, it seemed they increasingly resembled it.
The reason that they had done well, he’d realized, was that sooner or later people went soft. Take the trollish Breccia, f’rinstance. Once the Honk and Slab route had been established all the way to Uberwald, and the rival clans had been eliminated, the trolls had got soft. The tons acted like society lords. It was the same everywhere—the big old gangs and families reached some kind of equilibrium with society and settled down to be a specialist kind of businessman. They cut down on henchmen and employed butlers instead. And then, where there was a bit of difficulty, they needed muscle that could think…and there was the New Firm, ready and willing.
And waiting.
One day there’d be time for a new generation, Mr. Pin thought. One with a new way of doing things, one without the shackles of tradition holding them back. Happening people. Mr. Tulip, for example, happened all the time.
“Hey, will you —ing look at this?” said the happening Tulip, who had uncovered another painting. “Signed by Gogli, but it’s a —ing fake. Look at the way the light falls here, wilya? And the leaves on this tree? If —ing Gogli painted that, it was with his —ing foot. Probably by some —ing pupil…”
While they had been marking time in the city, Mr. Pin had followed Mr. Tulip, trailing scouring powder and canine worming tablets, through one after another of the city’s art galleries. The man had insisted. It had been an education, mostly for the curators.
Mr. Tulip had the instinct for art which he did not have for chemistry. Sneezing icing sugar and dribbling foot powder, he was ushered into private galleries, where he ran his bloodshot eye over nervously proffered trays of ivory miniatures.
Mr. Pin had watched in silent admiration while his colleague spoke colorfully and at length on the differences between ivory faked the old way, with bones, and the —ing new way the —ing dwarfs have come up with, using —ing refined oil, chalk and —ing Spirits of Nacle.
He’d lurched over to the tapestries, declaimed at length about high and low weaving, burst into tears in front of a verdant scene, and then demonstrated that the gallery’s prized thirteenth-century Sto Lat tapestry couldn’t be more than a hundred years old because, “see that —ing bit of purple there? No way was that —ing dye around then. And…what’s this? An Agatean embalming pot from the P’gi Su Dynasty? Someone took you to the —ing cleaners, mister. The glaze is rubbish.”
It was astounding, and Mr. Pin had been so enthralled that he had all but forgotten to slip a few small valuable items into his pocket. But in truth he was familiar with Tulip on art. When they had occasionally to torch a premises, Mr. Tulip always made sure that any truly irreplaceable pieces were removed first, even though that meant taking extra time to tie the inhabitants to their beds. Somewhere under that self-inflicted scar tissue and at the heart of that shuddering anger was the soul of a true connoisseur with an unerring instinct for beauty. It was a strange thing to find in the body of a man who would mainline bath salts.
The big doors at the other end of the room swung open, revealing the dark space beyond. “Mr. Tulip?” said Mr. Pin. Tulip drew himself away from a painstaking examination of a possible Tapasi table, with its magnificent inlay work involving dozens of —ing rare veneers.
“Huh?”
“Time to meet the bosses again,” said Mr. Pin.
William was just getting ready to leave his office for good when someone knocked at his door.
He opened it cautiously, but it was pushed the rest of the way. “You utter, utter—ungrateful person!” It wasn’t a nice thing to be called, especially by a young lady. She could use a simple word like
“ungrateful” in a way that would require a dash and an “ing” in the mouth of Mr. Tulip.
William had seen Sacharissa Cripslock before, generally helping her grandfather in his tiny workshop. He’d never paid her much attention. She wasn’t particularly attractive, but she wasn’t particularly bad-looking, either. She was just a girl in an apron, doing slightly dainty things in the background, such as light dusting and arranging flowers. Insofar as he’d formed any opinion of her, it was that she suffered from misplaced gentility and the mistaken belief that etiquette meant good breeding. She mistook mannerisms for manners.
Now he could see her a lot plainer, mostly because she was advancing towards him across the room, and in the light-headed way of people who think they’re just about to die he realized that she was quite good-looking if considered over several centuries. Concepts of beauty change over the years, and two hundred years ago Sacharissa’s eyes would have made the great painter Caravati bite his brush in half; three hundred years ago the sculptor Mauvaise would have taken one look at her chin and dropped his chisel on his foot; a thousand years ago the Ephebian poets would have agreed that her nose alone was capable of launching at least forty ships. And she had good medieval ears.
Her hand was quite modern, though, and it caught William a stinging blow on the cheek. “That twenty dollars a month was nearly all we had!” “Sorry? What?”
“All right, he isn’t very fast, but in his day he was one of the best engravers in the business!” “Oh…yes. Er…” He had a sudden flash of guilt about Mr. Cripslock. “And you took it away, just like that!”
“I didn’t mean to! The dwarfs just…things just happened!” “You’re working for them?” “Sort of…with them…” said William. “While we starve, I suppose?” Sacharissa stood there panting. She had a well-crafted supply of other features that never go out of fashion at all and are perfectly at home in any century. She clearly believed that severe, old- fashioned dresses toned these down. They did not.
“Look, I’m stuck with them,” said William, trying not to stare. “I mean, stuck with the dwarfs. Lord Vetinari was very…definite about it. And it’s suddenly all become very complicated—”
“The Guild of Engravers is going to be livid about this, you do know that?” she demanded.
“Er…yes.” A desperate idea struck William rather harder than her hand. “That’s a point. You wouldn’t like to, er, be official about that, would you? You know: ‘We are livid,’ says spokesm— spokeswoman for the Guild of Engravers?”
“Why?” she said suspiciously.
“I’m desperate for things to put in my next edition,” said William desperately. “Look, can you help me? I can give you—oh, twenty pence an item, and I could use at least five a day.”
She opened her mouth to snap a reply, but calculation cut in. “A dollar a day?” she said. “More, if they’re nice and long,” said William wildly. “For that letter thing you do?” “Yes.”
“A dollar?” “Yes.” She eyed him with mistrust. “You can’t afford that, can you? I thought you only got thirty dollars yourself. You told Grandfather.”
“Things have moved on a bit. I haven’t caught up with it myself, to tell you the truth.”
She was still looking at him doubtfully, but natural Ankh-Morpork interest in the distant prospect of a dollar was gaining the upper hand.
“Well, I hear things,” she began. “And…well, writing things down? I suppose that’s a suitable job for a lady, isn’t it? It’s practically cultural.”
“Er…close, I suppose.”
“I wouldn’t like to do anything that wasn’t…proper.” “Oh, I’m sure it’s proper.” “And the Guild can’t object to that, can they? You’ve been doing it for years, after all…”
“Look, I’m just me,” said William. “If the Guild object, they’ll have to sort it out with the Patrician.”
“Well…all right…if you’re sure it’s an acceptable job for a young lady…”
“Come down to the printing works tomorrow, then,” said William. “I think we ought to be able to produce another paper of news in a few days.”
This was a ballroom, still plush in red and gold, but musty in the semidarkness and ghostly with its shrouded chandeliers. The candlelight in the center was dimly reflected from the mirrors around the walls; they had probably once brightened the place up considerably, but over the years some sort of curious tarnish had blotched its way across them, so that the reflections of the candles looked like dim subaqueous glows through a forest of seaweed.
Mr. Pin was halfway across the floor when he realized that the only footsteps he could hear were his own. Mr. Tulip had veered off in the gloom and was dragging the shroud off something that had been pushed against one wall.
“Well, I’ll be a…” the man began. “This is a —ing treasure! I fort so! A genuine —ing Intaglio Ernesto, too. See that mother-of-pearl work there?”
“This isn’t the time, Mr. Tulip—”
“He only made six of them. Oh, no, they haven’t even kept it —ing tuned!” “Godsdammit, we’re supposed to be professionals…” “Perhaps your…colleague would like it as a present?” said a voice from the center of the room.
There were half a dozen chairs around the circle of candlelight. They were an old-fashioned kind, and the backs curved out and up to form a deep leathery arch that had, presumably, been designed to keep out the drafts but now gave the occupants their own deep pools of shadow.
Mr. Pin had been here before. He’d admired the setup. Anyone in the ring of candles couldn’t see who was in the depths of the chairs, while at the same time being fully visible themselves.
It occurred to him now that the arrangement also meant that the people in the chairs couldn’t see who was in the other chairs.
Mr. Pin was a rat. He was quite happy with the description. Rats had a lot to recommend them. And this layout had been dreamed up by someone who thought like him.
One of the chairs said: “Your friend Daffodil—” “Tulip,” said Mr. Pin. “Your friend Mr. Tulip would perhaps like part of your payment to be the harpsichord?” said the chair.
“It’s not a —ing harpsichord, it’s a —ing virginal,” growled Mr. Tulip. “One —ing string to a
note instead of two! So called because it was an instrument for —ing young ladies!”
“My word, was it?” said one of the chairs. “I thought it was just a sort of early piano!”
“Intended to be played by young ladies,” said Mr. Pin smoothly. “And Mr. Tulip does not collect art, he merely…appreciates it. Our payment will be in gems, as agreed.”
“As you wish. Please step into the circle…” “—ing harpsichord,” muttered Mr. Tulip. The New Firm came under the hidden gaze of the chairs as they took up their positions. What the chairs saw was this: Mr. Pin was small and slim and, like his namesake, slightly larger in the head than ought to be the case. If there was a word for him apart from “rat” it was “dapper”; he drank little, he watched what he ate and considered that his body, slightly malformed though it was, was a temple. He also used too much oil on his hair and parted it in the middle in a way that was twenty years out of style, and his black suit was on the greasy side, and his little eyes were constantly moving, taking in everything.
It was hard to see Mr. Tulip’s eyes, because of a certain puffiness probably caused by too much enthusiasm for things in bags.* The bags had also possibly caused the general blotchiness and the thick veins that stood out on his forehead, but Mr. Tulip was in any case the kind of heavyset man who is on the verge of bursting out of his clothes and, despite his artistic inclinations, projected the image of a would-be wrestler who had failed the intelligence test. If his body was a temple, it was one of those strange ones where people did odd things to animals in the basement, and if he watched what he ate, it was only to see it wriggle.
Several of the chairs wondered, not if they were doing the right thing, since that was indisputable, but whether they were doing it with the right people. Mr. Tulip, after all, wasn’t a man you’d want to see standing too close to a naked flame.
“When will you be ready?” said a chair. “How is your…protégé today?”
“We think Tuesday morning would be a good time,” said Mr. Pin. “By then he’ll be as good as he’s going to get.”
“And there will be no deaths involved,” said a chair. “This is important.” “Mr. Tulip will be as gentle as a lamb,” said Mr. Pin. Unseen gazes avoided the sight of Mr. Tulip, who had chosen this moment to suck up his nose a large quantity of Slab.
“Er, yes,” said a chair. “His Lordship is not to be harmed any more than strictly necessary. Vetinari dead would be more dangerous than Vetinari alive.” “And at all costs there must be no trouble with the Watch.” “Yeah, we know about the Watch,” said Mr. Pin. “Mr. Slant told us.” “Commander Vimes is running a very…efficient Watch.” “No problem,” said Mr. Pin. “And it employs a werewolf.” White powder fountained into the air. Mr. Pin had to slap his colleague on the back. “A —ing werewolf? Are you —ing crazy?” “Uh…why does your partner keep saying ‘ing,’ Mr. Pin?” said a chair. “You must be out of your —ing minds!” Tulip growled. “Speech impediment,” said Pin. “A werewolf? Thank you for telling us. Thank you very much. They’re worse than vampires when they’re on the trail! You do know that, do you?” “You were recommended to us as men of resource.” “Expensive men of resource,” said Mr. Pin.
A chair sighed. “There are seldom any other kind. Very well, very well. Mr. Slant will discuss this with you.”
“Yeah, but they’ve got a sense a’smell that you wouldn’t believe,” Mr. Tulip went on. “Money’s no use to a —ing dead man.”
“Are there any other surprises?” said Mr. Pin. “You’ve got bright watchmen and one of ’em’s a werewolf. Anything else? They’ve got trolls too?”
“Oh, yes. Several. And dwarfs. And zombies.”
“In a Watch? What kind of a city are you running here?” “We are not running the city,” said a chair. “But we care about the way it is going,” said another.
“Ah,” said Mr. Pin. “Right. I remember. You are concerned citizens.” He knew about concerned
citizens. Wherever they were, they all spoke the same private language, where “traditional values” meant “hang someone.” He did not have a problem with this, broadly speaking, but it never hurt to understand your employer.
“You could have got someone else,” he said. “You’ve got a guild of Assassins here.” A chair made a sucking sound between its teeth. “The trouble with the city at present,” it said, “is that a number of otherwise intelligent people find the status quo…convenient, even though it will undoubtedly ruin the city.”
“Ah,” said Mr. Pin. “They are unconcerned citizens.” “Precisely, gentlemen.” “There’s a lot of them?” The chair ignored this. “We look forward to seeing you again, gentlemen. Tomorrow night. When, I trust, you will announce your readiness. Good evening.”
The circle of chairs was silent for a while after the New Firm had left. Then a black-clad figure entered soundlessly through the big doors, approached the light, nodded, and hurried away.
“They’re well outside the building,” said a chair. “What ghastly people.” “We should have used the Assassins’ Guild, though.”
“Hah! They’ve done rather well out of Vetinari. In any case, we do not want him dead. However, it occurs to me that the Guild may eventually have a contract…”
“Quite so. When our friends have safely left the city…the roads can be so dangerous at this time of year.”
“No, gentlemen. We will stick to our plan. The one called Charlie will be kept around until everything is entirely settled, in case he could be of further use, and then our gentlemen will take him a long, long way away to, hah, pay him off. Perhaps later we will call the Assassins in, just in case Mr. Pin has any clever ideas.”
“Good point. Although it does seem such a waste. The things one could do with Charlie…” “I told you, it would not work. The man is a clown.”
“I suppose you are right. Better something once-and-for-all, then.”
“I’m sure we understand one another. And now…this meeting of the Committee to Unelect the Patrician is declared closed. And hasn’t happened.”
Lord Vetinari by habit rose so early that bedtime was merely an excuse to change his clothes.
He liked the time just before a winter’s dawn. It was generally foggy, which made it hard to see the city, and for a few hours there was no sound but the occasional brief scream.
But the tranquillity was broken this morning by a cry just outside the Palace gates. “Hoinarylup!” He went to the window. “Squidaped-oyt!” The Patrician walked back to his desk and rang the bell for his clerk Drumknott, who was dispatched to the walls to investigate.
“It is the beggar known as Foul Ole Ron, sir,” he reported five minutes later. “Selling this… paper full of things.”
Drumknott held it between two fingers as though expecting it to explode. Lord Vetinari took it and read through it. Then he read through it again.
“Well, well,” he said. “‘The Ankh-Morpork Times.’ Was anyone else buying this?”
“A number of people, my lord. People coming off the night shifts, market people, and so on.” “I see no mention of Hoinarylup or Squidaped-oyt.” “No, my lord.”
“How very strange.” Lord Vetinari read for a moment, and said, “Hm-hm. Clear my appointments this morning, will you? I will see the Guild of Town Criers at nine o’clock and the Guild of Engravers at ten past.”
“I wasn’t aware they had appointments, sir.”
“They will have,” said Lord Vetinari. “When they see this, they will have. Well, well…I see fifty-six people were hurt in a tavern brawl.”
“That seems rather a lot, my lord.”
“It must be true, Drumknott,” said the Patrician. “It’s in the paper. Oh, and send a message to that nice Mr. de Worde, too. I will see him at nine-thirty.”
He ran his eye down the gray type again.
“And please also put out the word that I wish to see no harm coming to Mr. de Worde, will you?”
Drumknott, usually so adept in his understanding of his master’s requirements, hesitated a moment.
“My lord, do you mean that you want no harm to come to Mr. de Worde, or that you want no harm to come to Mr. de Worde?”
“Did you wink at me, Drumknott?” “No, sir!” “Drumknott, I believe it is the right of every citizen of Ankh-Morpork to walk the streets unmolested.”
“Good gods, sir! Is it?” “Indeed.” “But I thought you were very much against movable type, sir. You said that it would make printing too cheap, and people would—”
“Sheearna-plp!” shouted the newspaper seller, down by the gates.
“Are you poised for the exciting new millennium that lies before us, Drumknott? Are you ready to grasp the future with a willing hand?”
“I don’t know, my lord. Is special clothing required?”
The other lodgers were already at the breakfast table when William hurried down. He was hurrying because Mrs. Arcanum had Views about people who were late for meals.
Mrs. Arcanum, proprietress of Mrs. Eucrasia Arcanum’s Lodging House for Respectable Working Men, was what Sacharissa was unconsciously training to be. She wasn’t just respectable, she was Respectable; it was a lifestyle, religion, and hobby combined. She liked respectable people who were Clean and Decent; she used the phrase as if it was impossible to be one without being the other. She kept respectable beds and cooked cheap but respectable meals for her respectable lodgers, who, apart from William, were mostly middle-aged, unmarried, and extremely sober. They were mainly craftsmen in small trades, and were almost all heavily built, well scrubbed, owned serious
boots, and were clumsily polite at the dining table.
Oddly enough—or at least, oddly enough to William’s expectations of people like Mrs. Arcanum —she wasn’t adverse to dwarfs and trolls. At least, the Clean and Decent ones. Mrs. Arcanum rated Decency above species.
“It says here fifty-six people were hurt in a brawl,” said Mr. Mackleduff, who by dint of being the longest-surviving lodger acted as a kind of president at mealtimes. He had bought a copy of the Times on his way home from the bakery, where he was night-shift foreman.
“Fancy,” said Mrs. Arcanum.
“I think it must have been five or six,” said William.
“Says fifty-six here,” said Mr. Mackleduff sternly. “In black and white.”
“It must be right,” said Mrs. Arcanum, to general agreement, “otherwise they wouldn’t let them put it in.”
“I wonder who’s doing it?” said Mr. Prone, who traveled in wholesale boots and shoes. “Oh, they’d be special people for doing this,” said Mr. Mackleduff. “Really?” said William.
“Oh, yes,” said Mr. Mackleduff, who was one of those large men who were instantly expert on anything. “They wouldn’t allow just anyone to write what they like. That stands to reason.”
So it was in a thoughtful mood that William made his way to the shed behind the Bucket. Goodmountain looked up from the stone where he was carefully setting the type for a playbill. “There’s a spot of cash for you over there,” he said, nodding to a bench. It was mostly in coppers. It was almost thirty dollars. William stared at it. “This can’t be right,” he whispered.
“Mr. Ron and his friends kept coming back for more,” said Goodmountain.
“But…but it was only the usual stuff,” said William. “It wasn’t even anything very important. Just…stuff that happened.”
“Ah, well, people like to know about stuff that happened,” said the dwarf. “And I reckon we can
sell three times as many tomorrow if we halve the price.” “Halve the price?” “People like to be in the know. Just a thought.” The dwarf grinned again. “There’s a young lady in the back room.”
In the days when this place had been a laundry, back before the pre–rocking horse age, one area had been partitioned off with some cheap paneling to waist height, to segregate the clerks and the person whose job it was to explain to customers where their socks had gone. Sacharissa was sitting primly on a stool, clutching her handbag to her with her elbows close to her sides in order to expose herself to as little of the grime as possible.
She gave him a nod.
Now, why had he asked her to come along? Oh, yes…she was sensible, more or less, and did her grandfather’s books and, frankly, William didn’t meet many literate people. He met the sort to whom a pen was a piece of difficult machinery.
If she knew what an apostrophe was, he could put up with the fact that she acted as if she was living in a previous century.
“Is this your office now?” she whispered. “I suppose so.” “You didn’t tell me about the dwarfs!” “Do you mind?” “Oh, no. Dwarfs are very law-abiding and respectable, in my experience.”
William now realized that he was talking to a girl who had never been in certain streets when the bars were closing.
“I’ve already got two good items for you,” Sacharissa went on, as if imparting State secrets. “Er…yes?” “My grandfather says this is the longest, coldest winter he can remember.” “Yes?” “Well, he’s eighty. That’s a long time.” “Oh.”
“And the meeting of the Dolly Sisters Baking and Flower Circle Annual Competition had to be canceled last night because the cake table got knocked over. I found out all about it from the secretary, and I’ve written it all down neatly…”
“Oh? Um. Is that really interesting, do you think?”
She handed him a page torn from a cheap exercise book. He read: “The Dolly Sisters Baking and Flower Circle Annual Competition was held in the Reading Room in Lobbin Clout Street, Dolly Sisters. Mrs. H. Rivers was the President. She welcomed all members and commented on the Sumptuous Offerings. Prizes were awarded as follows…”
William ran his eye down the meticulous list of names and awards. “‘Specimen in Jar’?” he queried. “That was the competition for dahlias,” said Sacharissa.
William carefully inserted the word “dahlia” after the word “specimen,” and read on. “‘A fine display of Loose Stool Covers’?” “Well?”
“Oh…nothing.” William carefully changed this to “Loose Covers for Stools,” which was barely an improvement, and continued to read with the air of a jungle explorer who might expect any kind of exotic beast to spring out of the peaceful undergrowth. The piece concluded:
“…however, everyone’s Spirits were Dampened when a naked man, hotly pursued by Members of the Watch, burst through the Window and ran around the Room, causing much Disarray of the Tarts before being Apprehended by the Trifles.
“The meeting closed at 9 P.M. Mrs. Rivers thanked all Members.” “What do you think?” said Sacharissa, with just a hint of nervousness. “You know,” said William, in a sort of distant voice, “I think it is quite likely that it would be impossible to improve this piece in any way. Um…what would you say was the most important thing that happened at the meeting?”
Her hand flew to her mouth in dismay.
“Oh, yes! I forgot to put that in! Mrs. Flatter won first prize for her sponge! She’s been runner-up for six years, too.”
William stared at the wall.
“Well done,” he said. “I should put that in, if I was you. But you could drop in at the Watch House in Dolly Sisters and ask about the naked man—”
“I shall do no such thing! Respectable women don’t have anything to do with the Watch!” “I meant, ask why he was being chased, of course.” “But why should I do that?”
William tried to put words around a vague idea. “People will want to know,” he said. “But won’t the Watch mind me asking?”
“Well, they’re our Watch. I don’t see why they should. And perhaps you could find some more really old people to ask about the weather. Who is the oldest inhabitant in the city?”
“I don’t know. One of the wizards, I expect.”
“Could you go to the university and find him and ask him if he ever remembers it being colder than this?”
“Is this where you put things in the paper?” said a voice at the doorway.
It belonged to a small man with a beaming red face, one of those people blessed with the permanent expression of someone who has just heard a rather saucy joke.
“Only I grew this carrot,” he went on, “and I reckon it’s grown into a very interesting shape. Eh? What d’you think, eh? Talk about a giggle, eh? I took it down to the pub and everyone was killin’ ’emselves! They said I should put it in your paper!” He held it aloft. It was a very interesting shape. And William went a very interesting shade. “That’s a very strange carrot,” said Sacharissa, eyeing it critically. “What do you think, Mr. de Worde?”
“Er…er…you go along to the university, why don’t you? And I’ll see to this…gentleman,” said William, when he felt he could speak again.
“My wife couldn’t stop laughin’!”
“What a lucky man you are, sir,” said William, solemnly.
“It’s a shame you can’t put pictures in your paper, eh?”
“Yes, but I think I may be in enough trouble already,” said William, opening his notebook.
When the man and his hilarious vegetable had been dealt with, William wandered out into the printing shop. The dwarfs were talking in a group, around a trapdoor in the floor.
“Pump’s frozen again,” said Goodmountain. “Can’t mix up any more ink. Old man Cheese says there used to be a well somewhere round here…”
There was a shout from below. A couple of dwarfs descended the ladder.
“Mr. Goodmountain, can you think of any reason I should put this in the paper?” said William, handing him Sacharissa’s report of the Flowers and Cookery meeting. “It’s a bit…dull…”
The dwarf read the copy.
“There’s seventy-three reasons,” he said. “That’s ’cos there’s seventy-three names. I expect people like to see their names in the paper.”
“But what about the naked man?” “Yeah…shame she didn’t get his name.” There was another shout from below. “Shall we have a look?” said Goodmountain.
To William’s complete lack of surprise, the little cellar under the shed was much better built than the shed itself. But then, practically everywhere in Ankh-Morpork had cellars that were once the first or even second or third floors of ancient buildings, built at the time of one of the city’s empires when men thought that the future was going to last forever. And then the river had flooded and brought mud with it, and walls had gone higher and, now, what Ankh-Morpork was built on was mostly Ankh- Morpork. People said that anyone with a good sense of direction and a pickax could cross the city underground by simply knocking holes in walls.
Rusted tins and piles of timber rotted to tissue strength were piled up against one wall. And in the middle of the wall was a bricked-up doorway, the more recent bricks already looking worn and tatty compared to the ancient stone surrounding them.
“What’s through there?” said Boddony. “The old street, probably,” said William. “The street has a cellar? What does it keep there?”
“Oh, when parts of the city keep getting badly flooded, people just keep building on up,” said William. “This was probably a ground-floor room once, you see. People just bricked up the doors and windows and built on another story. In some part of the city, they say, there’s six or seven levels underground. Mostly full of mud. And that’s choosing my words with care—”
“I am looking for Mister William der Worde,” rumbled a voice above them. An enormous troll was blocking out the light from the cellar trapdoor. “That’s me,” said William. “Der Patrician will see you now,” said the troll. “I didn’t have an appointment with Lord Vetinari!” “Ah, well,” said the troll, “you’d be amazed at how many people has appointments wid der Patrician an’ dey don’t know it. So you’d better hurry. I would hurry, if I was you.”
There was no sound but the ticking of the clock. William watched in apprehension as, apparently forgetting his presence, Lord Vetinari read his way through the Times again.
“What a very…interesting document,” said the Patrician, suddenly laying it aside. “But I’m forced to ask…why?”
“It’s just my news sheet,” said William. “But bigger. Er…people like to know things.” “Which people?” “Well…everyone, really.”
“Do they? Did they tell you this?”
William swallowed. “Well…no. But you know I’ve been writing my newsletter for some time now—”
“For various foreign notables and similar people.” Lord Vetinari nodded. “People who need to know. Knowing things is part of their profession. But you are selling this to anyone in the street, is that correct?”
“I suppose so, sir.”
“Interesting. Then you wouldn’t entertain the idea, would you, that a state is, say, rather like one of those old rowing galleys? The ones which had banks of oarsmen down below, and a helmsman and so on above? It is certainly in everyone’s interest that the ship does not founder but, I put it to you, it is perhaps not in the interest of the rowers that they know of every shoal avoided, every collision
fended off…it would only serve to worry them and put them off their stroke. What the rowers need to know is how to row, hmm?”
“And that the helmsman is a good one,” said William. He couldn’t stop the sentence. It said itself. It was out there, hanging in the air.
Lord Vetinari gave him a stare, then went on for several seconds beyond the necessary time. Then his face instantly broke into a broad smile.
“To be sure. And so they should, so they should. This is the age of words, after all. Fifty-six hurt in tavern brawl, eh? Astounding. What further news do you have for us, sir?”
“Well, er…it’s been very cold…”
“Has it? Has it, indeed? My word!” On his desk, the tiny iceberg bumped against the side of Lord Vetinari’s inkwell.
“Yes, and there was a bit of a…fracas…at some cookery meeting last night…” “A fracas, eh?” “Well, probably more of a rumpus, really.* And someone has grown a funny-shaped vegetable.” “That’s the stuff. What shape?” “A…an amusing shape, sir.”
“Could I give you a little bit of advice, Mr. de Worde?” “Please do, sir.” “Be careful. People like to be told what they already know. Remember that. They get uncomfortable when you tell them new things. New things…well, new things aren’t what they expect. They like to know that, say, a dog will bite a man. That is what dogs do. They don’t want to know that a man bites a dog, because the world is not supposed to happen like that. In short, what people think they want is news, but what they really crave is olds. I can see you’ve got the hang of it already.”
“Yes, sir,” said William, not at all sure he fully understood this, but certain that he didn’t like the bit he did understand.
“I believe the Guild of Engravers has some things it wishes to discuss with Mr. Goodmountain, William, but I have always thought that we should go forward to the future.”
“Yes, sir. Quite hard to go any other way.”
Once again, there was the too-long stare and then the sudden unfreezing of the face.
“Indeed. Good day, Mr. de Worde. Oh…and do tread carefully. I’m sure you wouldn’t want to become news…would you?”
William turned over the Patrician’s words as he walked back to Gleam Street, and it is not wise to be thinking too deeply when walking the streets of Ankh-Morpork.
He walked past Cut-Me-Own-Throat Dibbler with barely a nod, but in any case Mr. Dibbler was otherwise engaged.
He had two customers. Two at once, unless one was daring another, was a great rarity. But these two were worrying him. They were inspecting the merchandise.
C.M.O.T. Dibbler sold his buns and pies all around the city, even outside the Assassins’ Guild. He was a good judge of people, especially when it involved judging when to step innocently around a corner and then run like hell, and he had just decided that he was really unlucky to be standing here and also that it was too late.
He didn’t often meet killers. Murderers, yes, but murderers usually had some strange reason and in any case generally murdered friends and relations. And he’d met plenty of assassins, but assassination had a certain style and even certain rules.
These men were killers. The big one with the powdery streaks down his jacket and the smell of mothballs was just a vicious thug, no problem there, but the small one with the lank hair had the smell of violent and spiteful death about him.
You didn’t often look into the eyes of someone who’d kill because it seemed like a good idea at the time.
Moving his hands carefully, Dibbler opened the special section of his tray, the high-class one that contained sausages whose contents were (1) meat (2) from a known four-footed creature (3) probably land-dwelling.
“Or may I recommend these, gentlemen,” he said, and because old habits die hard he couldn’t stop himself from adding, “Finest pork.”
“Good, are they?”
“You’ll never want to eat another, sir.”
The other man said, “How about the other sort?” “Pardon?” “Hooves and pig snot and rats what fell in the —ing mincer.”
“What Mr. Tulip here means,” said Mr. Pin, “is a more organic sausage.” “Yeah,” said Mr. Tulip. “I’m very —ing environmental like that.” “Are you sure? No, no, fine!” Dibbler raised a hand. The manner of the two men had changed. They were clearly very sure of everything. “We-ell, you want a bad—a less good sausage, then…er?”
“With —ing fingernails in it,” said Mr. Tulip.
“Well, er…I do…I could…” Dibbler gave up. He was a salesman. You sold what you sold. “Let me tell you about these sausages,” he went on, smoothly shifting an internal motor into reverse. “When someone chopped off his thumb in the abattoir, they didn’t even stop the grinder. You prob’ly won’t find any rat in them ’cos rats don’t go near the place. There’s animals in there that…well, you know how they say life began in some kind of big soup? Same with these sausages. If you want a bad sausage, you won’t get better than these.”
“You keep ’em for your special customers, do you?” said Mr. Pin. “To me, sir, every customer is special.” “And you got mustard?”
“People call it mustard,” Dibbler began, getting carried away, “but I call it—” “I like —ing mustard,” said Mr. Tulip. “—really great mustard,” said Dibbler, not missing a beat. “We’ll take two,” said Mr. Pin. He did not reach for his wallet. “On the house!” said Dibbler. He stunned two sausages, enbunned them, and thrust them forward. Mr. Tulip took both of them, and the mustard pot.
“Do you know what they called a sausage-in-a-bun in Quirm?” said Mr. Pin, as the two walked away.
“No?” said Mr. Tulip.
“They call it le sausage-in-le-bun.”
“What, in a —ing foreign language? You’re —ing kidding!” “I’m not a —ing kidder, Mr. Tulip.” “I mean, they ought to call it a…a…sausage dans lar derriere,” said Mr. Tulip. He took a bite of his Dibbler delight. “Hey, that’s what this —ing thing tastes of,” he added, with his mouth full.
“In a bun, Mr. Tulip.”
“I know what I meant. This is a —ing awful sausage…”
Dibbler watched them go. It wasn’t often you heard language like that in Ankh-Morpork. Most people talked without leaving gaps in their sentences, and he wondered what the word “ing” meant.
A crowd was gathered outside a large building in Welcome Soap, and the cart traffic was already backed up all the way to Broad Way. And, thought William, wherever a large crowd is gathered, someone ought to write down why.
The reason in this case was clear. A man was standing on the flat parapet just outside the fourth- story window, back against the wall, staring downwards with a frozen expression.
Far below, the crowd were trying to be helpful. It was not in the robust Ankh-Morpork nature to dissuade anyone in this position. It was a free city, after all. So was the advice.
“Much better to try the Thieves’ Guild!” a man yelled. “Six floors, and then you’re on good solid cobbles! Crack your skull first go!”
“There’s proper flagstones around the Palace,” advised the man next to him.
“Well, certainly,” said his immediate neighbor. “But the Patrician’ll kill him if he tries to jump from up there, am I right?”
“Well?”
“Well…it’s a question of style, isn’t it?”
“Tower of Art’s good,” said a woman confidently. “Nine hundred feet, almost. And you get a good view.”
“Granted, granted. But you also get a long time to think about things. On the way down, I mean. Not a good time for introspection, in my view.”
“Look, I’ve got a load of prawns on my wagon and if I’m held up any longer they’re gonna be walking home,” moaned a carter. “Why doesn’t he just jump?” “He’s thinking about it. It’s a big step, after all.” The man on the edge turned his head when he heard a shuffling noise. William was sidling along the ledge, trying hard not to look down.
“Morning. Come to try and talk me out of it, ’ave yer?”
“I…I…” William really tried not to look down. The ledge had looked a lot wider from below. He was regretting the whole thing. “I wouldn’t dream of it…” “I’m always open to being talked out of it.” “Yes, yes…er…would you care to give me your name and address?” said William. There was a hitherto unsuspected nasty breeze up here, gusting treacherously around the rooftops. It fluttered the pages of his notebook.
“Why?”
“Er…because from this height onto solid ground it’s often hard to find out that sort of thing afterwards,” said William, trying not to breathe out too much. “And if I’m going to put this in the paper, it’d look much better if I say who you were.”
“What paper?”
William pulled a copy of the Times out of his pocket. It rattled in the wind as he wordlessly handed it over.
The man sat down and read it, his lips moving, his legs dangling over the drop.
“So this is, like, things that happen?” he said. “Like a town crier, but written down?” “That’s right. So…what was your name?” “What do you mean, was?”
“Well, you know…obviously…” said William wretchedly. He waved his hand towards the void, and almost lost his balance. “If you…”
“Arthur Crank.”
“And where did you live, Arthur?” “Prattle Alley.” “And what was your job?”
“There you go with the was again. The Watch usually give me a cup of tea, you know.” A warning bell went off in William’s head. “You…jump a lot, do you?” “Only the difficult bits.”
“And they are…?”
“The climbing-up bits. I don’t do the actual jumping, obviously. That’s not a skilled job. I’m more into the ‘cry for help’ aspect.”
William tried to grip sheer wall. “And the help you want is…?” “Could you make it twenty dollars?” “Or you jump?” “Ah, well, not exactly jump, obviously. Not the whole jump. Not as per such. But I shall continue to threaten to jump, if you get my drift.”
The building seemed a lot higher to William than it had when he climbed the stairs. The people below were a lot smaller. He could make out faces looking up. Foul Ole Ron was there, with his scabby dog and the rest of the crew, because they had an uncanny gravitational attraction to impromptu street theater. He could even make out Coffin Henry’s “Will Threaten for Food” sign. And he could see the queues of wagons, by now paralyzing half the city. He could feel his knees buckling…
Arthur grabbed him.
“Oi, this is my patch,” he said. “Find your own spot.”
“You said the jumping off wasn’t a skilled job,” said William, trying to concentrate on his notes as the world spun gently around him. “What was your job, Mr. Crank?”
“Steeplejack.”
“Arthur Crank, you come down here right this minute!”
Arthur looked down.
“Oh gawds, they’ve gone and fetched the wife,” he said.
“Constable Fiddyment here says you’re…” the distant pink face of Mrs. Crank paused to listen again to the watchman standing next to her, “interferin’ with the merc-ant-ile well-bein’of the city, you ole fool!”
“Can’t argue with the wife,” said Arthur, giving William a sheepish look.
“I’ll hide your trousers another time, you silly ole man! You come down here or I’ll give you what for!”
“Three happy married years,” said Arthur cheerfully, waving at the distant figure. “The other thirty-two haven’t been too bad, either. But she can’t cook cabbage worth a damn.”
“Really?” said William, and dreamily fell forward.
He woke up lying on the ground, which was what he’d expected, but still in a three-dimensional shape, which he hadn’t. He realized that he was not dead. One reason for this was the face of Corporal Nobbs of the Watch looking down at him. William considered that he had lived a relatively blameless life and, if he died, did not expect to encounter anything with a face like Corporal Nobbs’s, the worst thing ever to hit a uniform if you didn’t count seagulls.
“Ah, you’re all right,” said Nobbs, looking slightly disappointed. “Feel…faint,” William murmured. “I could give you the kiss of life if you like,” said Nobbs.
Unbidden by William, various muscles spasmed and jerked him vertical so fast that his feet momentarily left the ground.
“Much better now!” he shouted.
“Only we learned it down the Watch House and I haven’t had a chance to try it yet…” “Fit as a fiddle!” William wailed. “…I’ve been practicing on my hand and everything…” “Never felt better!” “Old Arthur Crank’s always doing that,” said the watchman. “He’s just after tobacco money. Still, everyone clapped when he carried you down. It’s amazing how he can still climb drainpipes like that.”
“Is it really…” William felt oddly empty.
“It was great when you were sick. I mean, from four stories up, it looked quite pretty. Someone ought to have taken a picture—”
“Got to be going!” William screamed.
I must be going mad, he thought, as he hurried towards Gleam Street. Why the hell did I do it? It wasn’t as if it was my business.
Except, come to think of it, it is now.
Mr. Tulip burped.
“What’re we going to do now?” he said.
Mr. Pin had acquired a map of the city, and was examining it closely.
“We are not your old-style bother boys, Mr. Tulip. We are thinking men. We learn. We learn fast.” “What’re we going to do now?” Mr. Tulip repeated. Sooner or later he’d be able to catch up. “We’re going to buy ourselves a little insurance, that’s what we’re going to do. I don’t like no lawyer having all that muck on us. Ah…here we are. It’s the other side of the university.” “We’re going to buy some magic?” said Mr. Tulip. “Not exactly magic.”
“I fort you said this city was a —ing pushover?” “It has its good points, Mr. Tulip.” Mr. Tulip grinned. “—ing right,” he said. “I want to go back to the Museum of Antiquities!” “Now, now, Mr. Tulip. Business first, pleasure later,” said Mr. Pin. “I want to —ing see all of ’em!”
“Later on. Later on. Can you wait twenty minutes without exploding?”
The map led them to the Thaumatological Park, just hub-wards of Unseen University. It was still so new that the modern flat-roofed buildings, winners of several awards from the Guild of Architects, hadn’t even begun to let in water and shed window-panes in a breeze.
An attempt had been made to pretty up the immediate area with grass and trees, but since the site had been partly built on the old ground known as the “unreal estate” this had not worked as planned. The area had been a dump for Unseen University for thousands of years. There was a lot more below that turf than old mutton bones, and magic leaks. On any map of thaumic pollution, the unreal estate would be the center of some worrying concentric circles.
Already the grass was multicolored and some of the trees had walked away.
Nevertheless, several businesses were thriving there, products of what the Archchancellor, or at least his speechwriter, had called “a marriage between magic and modern business; after all, the modern world doesn’t need very many magic rings and magic swords, but it does need some way to keep its appointments in order. Lot of garbage, really, but I suppose it makes everyone happy. Is it
time for that lunch yet?”
One of the results of this joyful union was now on the counter in front of Mr. Pin.
“It’s the Mk II,” said the wizard, who was glad there was a counter between him and Mr. Tulip. “Er…cutting edge.”
“That’s good,” said Mr. Tulip. “We —ing love cutting edges.” “How does it work?” said Mr. Pin. “It’s got contextual help,” said the wizard. “All you have to do is, er, open the lid.”
To the wizard’s horror a very thin knife appeared magically in his customer’s hand and was used to release the catch.
The lid sprang back. A small green imp sprang up. “Bingely-bingely-bee—” It froze. Even a creation of biothaumic particles will hesitate when a knife is pressed to its throat.
“What the hell’s this?” said Mr. Pin. “I said I want something that listens!”
“It does listen, it does listen!” said the wizard hurriedly. “But it can say things too!” “Like what? Bingely-bingely?” The imp gave a nervous cough.
“Good for you!” it said. “You have wisely purchased the Dis-organizer Mk II, the latest in biothaumaturgic design, with a host of useful features and no resemblance whatsoever to the Mk I, which you may have inadvertently destroyed by stamping on it heavily!” it said, adding, “This device is provided without warranty of any kind as to reliability, accuracy, existence or otherwise or fitness for any particular purpose and Bioalchemic Products specifically does not warrant, guarantee, imply or make any representations as to its merchantability for any particular purpose and furthermore shall have no liability for or responsibility to you or any other person, entity or deity with respect of any loss or damage whatsoever caused by this device or object or by any attempts to destroy it by hammering it against a wall or dropping it into a deep well or any other means whatsoever and moreover asserts that you indicate your acceptance of this agreement or any other agreement that may be substituted at any time by coming within five miles of the product or observing it through large telescopes or by any other means because you are such an easily cowed moron who will happily accept arrogant and unilateral conditions on a piece of highly priced garbage that you would not dream of accepting on a bag of dog biscuits and is used solely at your own risk.”
The imp took a deep breath. “May I introduce to you the rest of my wide range of interesting and amusing sounds, Insert Name Here?”
Mr. Pin glanced at Mr. Tulip. “All right.” “For example, I can go ‘tra-la!’” “No.”
“An amusing bugle call?” “No.” “‘Ding!’?” “No.” “Or I can be instructed to make droll and diverting comments when performing various actions.” “Why?” “Er…some people like us to say things like ‘I’ll be back when you open the box again,’ or something like that…”
“Why do you do noises?” said Mr. Pin. “People like noises.” “We don’t,” said Mr. Pin.
“We —ing hate noises,” said Mr. Tulip.
“Good for you! I can do lots of silence,” the imp volunteered. But suicidal programming forced it to continue: “And would you like a different color scheme?”
“What?”
“What color would you like me to be?” As it spoke, one of the imp’s long ears slowly turned purple and its nose became a vaguely disquieting shade of blue.
“We don’t want any colors,” said Mr. Pin. “We don’t want noises. We don’t want cheerfulness. We just want you to do what you’re told.”
“Perhaps you would like to take a moment to fill in your registration card?” said the imp desperately, holding it up.
A knife thrown at snake speed snapped the card out of its hand and nailed it to the desk. “Or perhaps you would like to leave it until later…” “Your man here—” Mr. Pin began. “Where did he go?”
Mr. Tulip reached behind the counter and hauled up the wizard.
“Your man here says you’re one of those imps that can repeat everything you hear,” said Pin. “Yes, Insert Name Here, sir,” said the imp. “And you don’t make stuff up?”
“They can’t,” the wizard panted. “They have no imagination at all.” “So if someone heard it, they’d know it was real?” “Yes, indeed.”
“Sounds just the thing we’re looking for,” said Mr. Pin. “And how will you be paying?” said the wizard. Mr. Pin snapped his fingers. Mr. Tulip drew himself up and out, squared his shoulders, and cracked knuckles that were like two bags of pink walnuts.
“Before we —ing talk about paying,” said Mr. Tulip, “we want to talk to the bloke that wrote that —ing warranty.”
What William now had to think of as his office had changed quite a lot. The old laundry fixings, dismembered rocking horses, and other rubbish had been spirited away, and two desks stood back to back in the middle of the floor.
They were ancient and battered and to stop them wobbling they needed, against all common sense, bits of folded cardboard under all four legs.
“I got them from the secondhand shop along the road,” said Sacharissa, nervously. “They weren’t very expensive.”
“Yes, I can see that. Er…Miss Cripslock…I’ve been thinking…your grandfather can engrave a picture, can he?”
“Yes, of course. Why have you got mud all over you?”
“And if we got an iconograph and learned how to use it to take pictures,” William went on, ignoring this, “could he engrave the picture that the imp paints?”
“I suppose so.”
“And do you know any good iconographers in the city?” “I could ask around. What happened to you?” “Oh, there was a threatened suicide in Welcome Soap.”
“Any good?” Sacharissa looked startled at the sound of her own voice. “I mean, obviously I wouldn’t wish anyone to die, but, er, we’ve got quite a lot of space…”
“I might be able to make something off it. He, er, saved the life of the man who climbed up to talk him down.”
“How brave. Did you get the name of the man who climbed up after him?” “Um, no. Er…he was a Mystery Man,” said William. “Oh, well, that’s something. There’s some people waiting to see you outside,” said Sacharissa. She glanced at her notes. “There’s a man who’s lost his watch, a zombie who…well, I can’t make out what he wants, there’s a troll who wants a job, and there’s someone who’s got a complaint about the story of the fight at the Mended Drum and wants to behead you.”
“Oh, dear. All right…one at a time…” The watch loser was easy. “It was one of the new clockwork ones my father gave to me,” said the man. “I’ve been looking for it all week!”
“It’s not exactly—”
“If you can put in the paper that I’ve lost it, maybe someone who has found it will turn it in?” said the man, with unwarranted hopefulness. “And I will give you sixpence for your trouble.”
Sixpence was sixpence. William made a few notes.
The zombie was more difficult. For a start he was gray, shading to green in places, and smelled very strongly of artificial hyacinth aftershave, some of the more recent zombies having realized that their chance of making friends in their new life would be greatly improved if they smelled of flowers rather than just smelled.
“People like to know about people who are dead,” he said. His name was Mr. Bendy, and he
pronounced it in a way that made it clear that the “Mr.” was very much a part of the name. “They do?” “Yes,” said Mr. Bendy, emphatically. “Dead people can be very interesting. I expect people would be very interested in reading about dead people.”
“Do you mean obituaries?”
“Well…yes, I suppose they would be. I could write them in an interesting way.” “All right. Twenty pence each, then.” Mr. Bendy nodded. It was clear that he would have done it for nothing. He handed William a wad of yellow, crackling paper. “Here’s an interesting one to start you off,” he said.
“Oh? Whose is it?”
“Mine. It is very interesting. Especially the bit where I died.”
The next man to come in was in fact a troll. Unusually for trolls, who usually wore just enough to satisfy humanity’s mysterious demands for decency, this one actually wore a suit. At least, it was largely tubes of cloth that covered his body, and “suit” was about the only word.
“’m Rocky,” he mumbled, looking down. “I’ll take any job, guv.” “What was your last job?” said William. “Boxer, guv. But I wasn’t happy wiv it. Kept getting knocked down.” “Can you write or take pictures?” said William, wincing. “No, guv. I can do heavy liftin’. ’n’ I can whistle tunes, guv.” “That’s…a good talent, but I don’t think we—” The door flew open and a thick-shouldered, leather-clad man burst in, flourishing an ax.
“You got no right putting that about me in the paper!” he said, waving the blade under William’s nose.
“Who are you?”
“I’m Brezock the Barbarian, and I—”
The brain works fast when it thinks it is about to be cut in half.
“Oh, if it’s a complaint you have, you have to take it up with the Complaints, Beheadings, and Horsewhippings Editor,” said William. “Mr. Rocky here.”
“Dat’s me,” boomed Rocky cheerfully, laying a hand on the man’s shoulder. There was only room for three of his fingers. Brezock sagged.
“I…just…want to say,” said Brezock, slowly, “that you put in I hit someone with a table. I never done that. What’d people think of me if they heard I go around hitting people with a table? What’d that do to my reputation?”
“I see.”
“I knifed him. A table’s a sissy weapon.”
“We shall certainly print a correction,” said William, picking up his pencil.
“You couldn’t add that I tore Slicer Gadley’s ear off with my teeth, could you? That’d make people sit up. Ears aren’t easy to do.”
When they had all gone, Rocky to sit on a chair outside the door, William and Sacharissa stared at one another.
“It’s been a very strange morning,” he said.
“I’ve found out about the winter,” said Sacharissa. “And there was an unlicensed theft from a jewelry shop in the Artificers Street. They got quite a lot of silver.”
“How did you find that out?”
“One of the journeyman jewelers told me.” Sacharissa gave a little cough. “He, um, always comes to have a little chat with me when he sees me walking past.”
“Really? Well done!”
“And while I was waiting for you I had an idea. I got Gunilla to set this in type.” She shyly pushed a piece of paper across the desk.
“It looks more impressive at the top of the page,” she said nervously. “What do you think?” “What are all the fruit salads and leaves and things?” said William.
Sacharissa blushed. “I did that. A bit of unofficial engraving. I thought it might make it look… you know, high class and impressive. Er…do you like it?”
“It’s very good,” said William hurriedly. “Very nice…er, cherries—” “Grapes.” “Yes, of course, I meant grapes. What’s the quote from? It’s very meaningful without, er, meaning anything very much.”
“I think it’s just a quote,” said Sacharissa.
Mr. Pin lit a cigarette and blew a stream of smoke into the still damp air of the wine cellar.
“Now, it seems to me what we got here is a failure to communicate,” he said. “I mean, it’s not like we’re asking you to memorize a book or anything. You just got to look at Mr. Tulip here. Is this hard? Lots of people do it without any kinda special training.”
“I sort of…l-l-lose my bottle,” said Charlie. His feet clanked against several empty ones.
“Mr. Tulip is not a scary man,” said Mr. Pin. This was flying in the face of the current evidence, he had to admit. His partner had bought a twist of what the dealer had sworn was Devil Dust but which looked to Mr. Pin very much like powdered copper sulfate, and this had apparently reacted to the chemicals from the Slab which had been Mr. Tulip’s afternoon snack and turned one of his sinuses into a small bag of electricity. His right eye was spinning slowly, and sparks twinkled on his nasal hairs.
“I mean, does he look scary?” Mr. Pin went on. “Remember, you are Lord Vetinari. Understand? You’re not going to take anything from some guard. If he talks back to you, just look at him.” “Like this,” said Mr. Tulip, half his face flashing on and off. Charlie leapt back.
“Not quite like that, perhaps,” said Mr. Pin. “But close.” “I don’t want to do this anymore!” Charlie wailed. “Ten thousand dollars, Charlie,” said Mr. Pin. “That’s a lot of money.”
“I’ve heard of this Vetinari,” said Charlie. “If this goes wrong, he’ll have me thrown in the scorpion pit!”
Mr. Pin spread his hands expansively. “Well, the scorpion pit isn’t as bad as it’s cracked up to be, you know?”
“It’s a —ing picnic compared to me,” rumbled Mr. Tulip, his nose lighting up.
Charlie’s eyes sought a way out. Unfortunately, one of them was cleverness. Mr. Pin hated the sight of Charlie trying to be clever. It was like watching a dog try to play the trombone.
“I’m not doing it for ten thousand dollars,” he said. “I mean…you need me…”
He let it hang in the air, which was very much what Mr. Pin was considering doing with Charlie. “We had a deal, Charlie,” he said mildly. “Yeah, well…I reckon there’s more money in this now,” said Charlie. “What do you think, Mr. Tulip?” Tulip opened his mouth to reply, but sneezed instead. A thin bolt of lightning earthed itself on Charlie’s chain.
“Maybe we could go to fifteen thousand,” said Mr. Pin. “And that’s coming out of our share, Charlie.”
“Yeah, well…” said Charlie. He was as far away from Mr. Tulip as possible now, because the man’s dry hair was standing out from his head.
“But we want to see some extra effort, right?” said Mr. Pin. “Starting right now. All you have to do is say…what do you have to say?”
“‘You are relieved of your post, my man. Go away,’” said Charlie.
“Except we don’t say it like that, do we, Charlie?” said Mr. Pin. “It’s an order. You are his boss. And you have to give him a haughty stare…look, how can I put it? You’re a shopkeeper. Imagine that he’s asked for credit.”
It was six in the morning. Freezing fog held the city in its breathless grip.
Through the mists they came, and into the press room behind the Bucket they lurched, and out into the mists they went again, on a variety of legs, crutches, and wheels.
“Mrpikeerah-Tis!”
Lord Vetinari heard the cry and sent the overnight clerk down to the gate again. He noted the title. He smiled at the motto. He read the words:
And Lord Vetinari smiled.
And someone knocked softly at the door. And he glanced at the clock. “Come,” he said.
Nothing happened. After a few seconds, the soft knock came again. “Come in.” And there was the pregnant silence again.
And Lord Vetinari touched an apparently ordinary part of his desktop.
And a long drawer appeared out of what had seemed to be the solid walnut of the desk, sliding forward as though on oil. It contained a number of slim devices on a bed of black velvet, and a description of any one of them would certainly involve the word “sharp.”
And he chose one, held it casually by his side, crossed soundlessly towards the door and turned the handle, stepping back quickly in case of a sudden rush.
No one pushed.
And the door, yielding to an unevenness in the hinges, swung inwards.
Mr. Mackleduff smoothed out the paper. It was already accepted by all around the breakfast table that, as the man who bought the paper, he was not simply its owner but, as it were, its priest, replaying its contents to the appreciative masses.
“It says here a man in Martlebury Street has grown a vegetable that’s a funny shape,” he said.
“I should very much like to see that,” said Mrs. Arcanum. There was a choking noise from further down the table. “Are you all right, Mister de Worde?” she added, as Mr. Prone thumped him on the back.
“Yes…yes, really,” gasped William. “S…sorry. Some tea went down the wrong way.” “There’s good soil over that way,” opined Mr. Cartwright, traveling seed salesman. William concentrated desperately on his toast, while over his head every item was presented with the care and veneration of a blessed relic.
“Someone held up a shopkeeper at knifepoint,” Mr. Mackleduff went on. “Soon we will not be safe in our beds,” said Mrs. Arcanum. “I don’t think this is the coldest winter for more than a hundred years, though,” said Mr. Cartwright. “I’m sure that one we had ten years ago was worse. Hit my sales something cruel.” “It’s in the paper,” said Mr. Mackleduff, in the quiet voice of someone laying down an ace. “It was a very strange obituary that you read out, too,” said Mrs. Arcanum. William nodded silently over his boiled egg. “I’m sure it’s not usual to talk about the things someone’s done since they died.”
Mr. Longshaft, who was a dwarf and something in the jewelry business, helped himself to another slice of toast.
“I suppose it takes all sorts,” he said, calmly.
“The city is getting rather crowded, though,” said Mr. Windling, who had some unspecified clerical job. “Still, at least zombies are human. No offense meant, of course.”
Mr. Longshaft smiled faintly as he buttered the toast, and William wondered why he always disliked people who said “no offense meant.” Maybe it was because they found it easier to say “no offense meant” than actually to refrain from giving offense.
“Well, I suppose we have to move with the times,” said Mrs. Arcanum. “And I hope that other poor man finds his watch.”
In fact Mr. Harry was waiting outside the office when William arrived. He grabbed his hand and shook it.
“Amazing, sir, amazing!” he said. “How did you do it? It must be magic! You put that notice in your newspaper and when I got home, blow me down if the watch wasn’t in my other jacket! Gods bless your paper, say I!”
Inside, Goodmountain gave William the news. The Times had sold eight hundred copies so far today. At five pence each, William’s share came to forty dollars. In pennies, it came to quite a large heap on the desk.
“This is insane,” said William. “All we did was write things down!”
“There is a bit of a problem, lad,” said Goodmountain. “Are you going to want to do another one for tomorrow?”
“Good gods, I hope not!”
“Well, I’ve got a story for you,” said the dwarf glumly. “I hear the Guild of Engravers are already setting up their own press. They’ve got a lot of money behind ’em, too. They could put us right out of business when it comes to general printing.”
“Can they do that?”
“Of course. They use presses anyway. Type isn’t hard to make, especially when you’ve got a lot of engravers. They can do really good work. To be honest, we didn’t reckon they’d cotton on this soon.”
“I’m amazed!”
“Well, younger members of the Guild have seen the work coming out of Omnia and the Agatean Empire. Turns out they’ve been looking for a chance like this. I hear there was a special meeting last night. A few changes of officers.”
“That must have been worth seeing.”
“So if you could keep your paper going…” said the dwarf. “I don’t want all this money!” William wailed. “Money causes problems!” “We could sell the Times cheaper,” said Sacharissa, giving him an odd look. “We’d only make more money,” said William gloomily.
“We could…we could pay the street vendors more,” said Sacharissa. “Tricky,” said Goodmountain. “A body can only take so much turpentine.” “Then we could at least make sure they get a good breakfast,” said Sacharissa. “A big stew with named meat, perhaps.”
“But I’m not even sure there is enough news to fill a—” William began, and stopped. That wasn’t the way it worked, was it. If it was in the paper, it was news. If it was news it went in the paper, and if it was in the paper it was news. And it was the truth.
He remembered the breakfast table. “They” wouldn’t let “them” put it in the paper if it wasn’t true, would they?
William wasn’t a very political person. But he found himself using unfamiliar mental muscles when he thought about “they.” Some of them had to do with memory.
“We could employ more people to help us get the news,” said Sacharissa. “And what about news from other places? Pseudopolis and Quirm? We just have to talk to passengers getting off the coaches—”
“Dwarfs would like to hear what’s been happening in Uberwald and Copperhead,” said Goodmountain, stroking his beard.
“It takes nearly a week for a coach to get there from here!” said William. “So? It’s still news.” “I suppose we couldn’t use the clacks, could we?” said Sacharissa.
“The semaphore towers? Are you mad?” said William. “That’s really expensive!” “Well? You were the one who was worried we had too much money!” There was a flash of light. William spun around.
A…thing occupied the doorway. There was a tripod. There were a pair of skinny, black-clad legs behind it and a large black box on top of it. One black-clad arm extended out from behind the box and was holding a sort of small hod, which was smoking.
“Nice vun,” said a voice from behind the box. “The light vas shinink so good off the dvarf’s helmet, I could not resist it. You vanted an iconographer? My name is Otto Chriek.”
“Oh. Yes?” said Sacharissa. “Are you any good?”
“I am a vizard in zer darkroom. I am experimenting all the time,” said Otto Chriek. “And I have
all my own equipment and also a keen and positive attitude!” “Sacharissa!” hissed William urgently. “We could probably start you at a dollar a day—”
“Sacharissa!” “Yes? What?” “He’s a vampire!” “I object most stronkly,” said the hidden Otto. “It iss such an easy assumption to believe that everyvun with an Uberwald accent is a vampire, is it not? There are many thousands of people from Uberwald who are not vampires!”
William waved his hand aimlessly, trying to shrug off the embarrassment. “All right, I’m sorry, but—” “I am a vampire, as it happens,” Otto went on. “But if I had said, ‘Hello my cheeky cock sparrow mate old boy by crikey,’ what vould you have said zen, eh?”
“We’d have been completely taken in,” said William.
“Anyway, your notice did say ‘vanted,’ so I thought it vas, you know, affirmative action,” said Otto. “Alzo, I have zis…” A thin, blue-veined hand was held up, gripping a small twist of shiny black ribbon.
“Oh? You’ve signed the pledge?” said Sacharissa.
“At the Meeting Rooms in Abattoirs Lane,” said Otto triumphantly, “where I attend every veek for our big singsong and tea and a bun and wholesome conversation on themes of positive reinforcement keeping off the whole subject of bodily fluids by stvict instruction. I am not any longer any stupid sucker!”
“What do you think, Mr. Goodmountain?” said William.
Goodmountain scratched his nose. “It’s up to you,” he said. “If he tries anything with my lads, he’ll be looking for his legs. What’s this pledge?”
“It’s the Uberwald Temperance Movement,” said Sacharissa. “A vampire signs up and forswears any human blood—”
Otto shuddered. “Ve prefer zer ‘b-vord,’” he said.
“The b-word,” Sacharissa corrected herself. “The movement is becoming very popular. They know it’s the only chance they’ve got.”
“Well…okay,” said William. He was uneasy about vampires himself, but turning the newcomer down after all this would be like kicking a puppy. “Do you mind setting up your stuff in the cellar?”
“A cellar?” said the Otto. “Top hole!”
First the dwarfs had come, William thought as he went back to his desk. They’d been insulted because of their diligence and because of their height, but they had kept their heads down* and prospered. Then the trolls had come, and they got on a little better, because people don’t throw as many stones at creatures seven feet tall who could throw rocks back. Then the zombies had come out of the casket. One or two werewolves had crept in under the door. The gnomes had integrated quickly, despite a bad start, because they were tough and even more dangerous to cross than a troll; at least a troll couldn’t run up your trouser leg. There weren’t that many species left.
The vampires had never made it. They weren’t sociable, even amongst themselves; they didn’t think as a species; they were unpleasantly weird; and they sure as hell didn’t have their own food shops.
So now it was dawning on some of the brighter ones that the only way people would accept vampires was if they stopped being vampires. That was a high price to pay for social acceptability, but perhaps not so high as the one that involved having your head cut off and your ashes scattered on the river. A life of steak tartare wasn’t too bad if you compared it with a death of stake au naturel.†
“Er…I think we’d like to see who we’re employing, though,” he said aloud.
Otto emerged, very slowly and nervously, from behind the lens. He was thin, pale, and wore little oval dark glasses. He still clutched the twist of black ribbon as if it was a talisman, which it more or less was.
“It’s all right, we won’t bite you,” said Sacharissa.
“And one good turn deserves another, eh?” said Goodmountain. “That was a bit tasteless, Mr. Goodmountain,” said Sacharissa. “So am I,” said the dwarf, turning back to the stone. “Just so long as people know where I stand, that’s all.”
“You vill not be sorry,” said Otto. “I am completely reformed, I assure you. Vot is it you want me to take pictures of, please?”
“News,” said William.
box.
“What is news, please?”
“News is…” William began. “News…is what we put in the newspaper—” “What d’you think of this, eh?” said a cheerful voice. William turned. There was a horribly familiar face, looking at him over the top of a cardboard
“Hello, Mr. Wintler,” he said. “Er…Sacharissa, I wonder if you could go and—”
He wasn’t quick enough. Mr. Wintler, a man of the variety that thinks a whoopee cushion is the
last word in repartee, was not the kind to let a mere freezing reception stand in his way. “I was digging my garden this morning and up came this parsnip, and I thought: that young man at the paper will laugh himself silly when he sees it, ’cos my lady wife couldn’t keep a straight face, and—”
To William’s horror he was already reaching into the box. “Mr. Wintler, I really don’t think—” But the hand was already rising, and there was the sound of something scraping on the side of the box. “I bet the young lady here would like a good chuckle too, eh?”
William shut his eyes.
He heard Sacharissa gasp. Then she said, “Golly, it’s amazingly lifelike!” William opened his eyes.
“Oh, it’s a nose,” he said. “A parsnip with a sort of knobbly face and a huge nose!” “You vant I should take a picture?” said Otto. “Yes!” said William, drunk with relief. “Take a big picture of Mr. Wintler and his wonderfully nasal parsnip, Otto! Your first job! Yes, indeed!”
Mr. Wintler beamed.
“And shall I run back home and fetch my carrot?” he said. “No!” said William and Goodmountain, in whiplash unison. “You vant the picture right now?” said Otto. “We certainly do!” said William. “The sooner we can let him go home, the sooner our Mr. Wintler can find another wonderful vegetable, eh, Mr. Wintler? What will it be next time? A bean with ears? A beetroot shaped like a potato? A sprout with an enormous hairy tongue?”
“Right here and now is ven you vant the picture?” said Otto, anxiety hanging off every syllable. “Right now, yes!” “As a matter of fact, there is a rutabaga coming along that I’ve got great hopes of—” Mr. Wintler began.
“Oh, vell…if you vill look zis vay, Mr. Vintler,” said Otto. He got behind the iconograph and uncovered the lens. William got a glimpse of the imp peering out, brush poised. In his spare hand Otto slowly held up, on a stick, a cage containing a fat and drowsing salamander, and positioned his finger on the trigger that would bring a small hammer down on its head just hard enough to annoy it.
“Be smiling, please!”
“Hold on,” said Sacharissa, “should a vampire really—”
Click.
The salamander flared, etching the room with searing white light and dark shadows.
Otto screamed. He fell to the floor, clutching at his throat. He sprang to his feet, goggle-eyed and gasping, and staggered, knock-kneed and wobbly legged, the length of the room and back again. He sank down behind a table, scattering paperwork with a wildly flailing hand.
“Aarghaarghaaargh…”
And then there was a shocked silence.
Otto stood up, adjusted his cravat, and dusted himself off. Only then did he look up at the row of shocked faces.
“Vell?” he said sternly. “Vot you all looking at? It is just a normal reaction, zat is all. I am vorking on it. Light in all itz forms is mine passion. Light is my canvas, shadows are my brush.”
“But strong light hurts you!” said Sacharissa. “It hurts vampires!” “Yes. It iss a bit of a bugger, but zere you go.” “And, er, that happens every time you take a picture, does it?” said William. “No, sometimes it iss a lot vorse.” “Worse?”
“I sometimes crumble to dust. But zat which does not kill us makes us stronk.”
“Stronk?”
“Indeed!”
William caught Sacharissa’s gaze. Her look said it all: We’ve hired him. Have we got the heart to fire him now? And don’t make fun of his accent unless your Uberwaldean is really good, okay?
Otto adjusted the iconograph and inserted a fresh sheet
“And now, shall ve try vun more?” he said brightly. “And zis time—everybody zmile!”
Mail was arriving. William was used to a certain amount, usually from clients of his newsletter complaining that he hadn’t told them about the double-headed giants, plagues, and rains of domestic animals that they had heard had been happening in Ankh-Morpork; his father was right about one thing, at least, when he’d said that lies could run around the world before the truth could get its boots on. And it was amazing how people wanted to believe them.
These were…well, it was as if he’d shaken a tree, and all the nuts had fallen out. Several letters were complaining that there had been much colder winters than this, although no two of them could agree when it was. One said vegetables were not as funny as they used to be, especially leeks. Another asked what the Guild of Thieves was doing about unlicensed crime in the city. There was one saying that all these robberies were down to dwarfs who shouldn’t be allowed into the city to steal the work out of honest humans’ mouths.
“Put a title like ‘Letters’ on the top and put them in,” said William. “Except the one about the dwarfs. That sounds like Mr. Windling. It sounds like my father, too, except that at least he can spell ‘undesirable’ and wouldn’t use crayon.”
“Why not that letter?” “Because it’s offensive.” “Some people think it’s true, though,” said Sacharissa. “There’s been a lot of trouble.” “Yes, but we shouldn’t print it.” William called Goodmountain over and showed him the letter. The dwarf read it. “Put it in,” he suggested. “It’ll fill a few inches.” “But people will object,” said William. “Good. Put their letters in, too.” Sacharissa sighed. “We’ll probably need them,” she said. “William, Grandfather says no one in
the Guild will engrave the iconographs for us.” “Why not? We can afford the rates.” “We’re not Guild members. It’s all getting unpleasant. Will you tell Otto?” William sighed, and walked over to the ladder. The dwarfs used the cellar as a bedroom, being naturally happier with a floor over their head. Otto had been allowed to use a dank corner, which he’d made his own by hanging an old sheet across on a rope.
“Oh, hello, Mr. Villiam,” he said, pouring something noxious from one bottle to another. “I am afraid it looks as if we won’t get anyone to engrave your pictures,” said William. The vampire seemed unmoved by this. “Yes, I vundered about that.” “So I’m sorry to say that—” “No problem, Villiam. Zere is alvays a vay.” “How? You can’t engrave, can you?” “No, but…all we are printing is black and vite, yes? And zer paper is vite zo all ve are really printink is black, okay? I looked at how zer dwarfs do the letters, and zey haf all zese bits of metal lying around and…you know how zer engravers can engrave metal wiz acid?”
“Yes?”
“Zo, all I haf to do is teach zer imps to paint wiz acid. End of problem. Getting gray took a bit of thought, but I zink I haf—”
“You mean you can get the imps to etch the picture straight onto a plate?”
“Yes. It is vun of those ideas that are obvious when you zink about it.” Otto looked wistful. “And I zink about light all zer time. All zer…time.”
William vaguely remembered something someone had once said: the only thing more dangerous than a vampire crazed with blood lust was a vampire crazed with anything else. All the meticulous single-mindedness that went into finding young women who slept with their bedroom window open got channeled into some other interest, with merciless and painstaking efficiency.
“Er…why do you need to work in a darkroom, though?” he said. “The imps don’t need it, do
they?”
“Ah, zis is for my experiment,” said Otto proudly. “You know zat another term for an iconographer would be ‘photographer’? From the old word ‘photus’ in Latation, vhich means—”
“‘To prance around like an idiot ordering everyone about as if you owned the place,’” said William.
“Ah, you know it!”
William nodded. He’d always wondered about that word. “Vell, I am working on an obscurograph.” William’s forehead wrinkled. It was turning into a long day. “Taking pictures with darkness?” he ventured. “Wiz true darkness, to be precise,” said Otto, excitement entering his voice. “Not just absence of light. Zer light on zer ozzer side of darkness. You could call it…living darkness. Ve can’t see it, but imps can. Did you know zer Uberwaldean Deep Cave land eel emits a burst of dark light ven startled?”
William glanced at a large glass jar on the bench. A couple of ugly things were coiled up in the bottom.
“And that will work, will it?” “I zink so. Hold it vun minute.” “I really ought to be getting back—” “Zis vill not take a second…” Otto gently lifted one of the eels out of its jar and put it into the hod usually occupied by a salamander. He carefully aimed one of his iconographs at William, and nodded.
“Vun…two…three…BOO!” There was-- —there was a soft noiseless implosion, a very brief sensation of the world being screwed up small, frozen, smashed into tiny little sharp pins, and hammered through every cell of William’s body.* Then the gloom of the cellar flowed back.
“That was…very strange,” said William, blinking. “It was like something very cold walking
through me…”
“Much may be learned about dark light now ve have left our disgusting past behind us and haf emerged into zer bright new future vhere ve do not zink about the b-word all day in any way at all,” said Otto, fiddling with the iconograph. He looked hard at the picture the imp had painted, and then glanced up at William. “Oh vell, back to zer drawink board,” he said.
“Can I see?”
“It vould embarrass me,” said Otto, putting the square of cardboard down on his makeshift bench. “All the time I am doing things wronk.”
“Oh, but I’d—”
“Mister de Worde, dere’s something happening!”
The bellow came from Rocky, whose head eclipsed the hole. “What is it?” “Something at der Palace. Someone’s been killed!”
William sprang up the ladder. Sacharissa was sitting at her desk, looking pale. “Someone’s assassinated Vetinari?” said William. “Er…no,” said Sacharissa. “Not…exactly.”
Down in the cellar, Otto Chriek picked up the dark light iconograph and looked at it again. Then he scratched it with a long pale finger, as if trying to remove something.
“Strange…” he said.
The imp hadn’t imagined it, he knew. Imps had no imagination whatsoever. They didn’t know how to lie.
He looked around the bare cellar suspiciously.
“Is there anyvun zere?” he said. “Is anyvun playink the silly buggers?” Thankfully, there was no answer. He looked at the picture again. Dark light. Oh, dear. There were lots of theories about dark light… “Otto!” He glanced up, shoving the picture into his pocket.
“Yes, Mr. Villiam?”
“Get your stuff together and come with me! Lord Vetinari’s murdered someone! Er, it is alleged,” William added. “And it can’t possibly be true.”
It sometimes seemed to William that the whole population of Ankh-Morpork was simply a mob waiting to happen. It was mostly spread thin, like some kind of great amoeba, all across the city. But when something happened somewhere, it contracted around that point, like a cell around a piece of food, filling the streets with people.
It was growing around the main gates to the Palace. It came together apparently at random. A knot of people would attract other people and become a bigger, more complicated knot. Carts and sedan chairs would stop to find out what was going on. The invisible beast grew bigger.
There were watchmen on the gate, instead of the Palace Guard. This was a problem. “Let me in, I’m nosy” was not a request likely to achieve success. It lacked a certain authority.
“Vy are ve stoppink?” said Otto.
“That’s Sergeant Detritus on the gate,” said William. “Ah. A troll. Very stupid,” opined Otto. “But hard to fool. I’m afraid I shall have to try the truth.” “Vy vill that vork?” “He’s a policeman. The truth usually confuses them. They don’t often hear it.”
The big troll sergeant watched William impassively as he approached. It was a proper policeman’s stare. It gave nothing away. It said: I can see you, now I’m waiting to see what you’re going to do that’s wrong.
“Good morning, sergeant,” said William.
A nod from the troll indicated that he was prepared to accept, on available evidence, that it was morning and, in certain circumstances, by some people, might be considered good.
“I urgently need to see Commander Vimes.” “Oh yes?” “Yes. Indeed.”
“And does he urgently need to see you?” The troll leaned closer. “You’re Mr. de Worde, right?”
“Yes. I work for the Times.”
“I don’t read dat,” said the troll.
“Really? We’ll bring out a large-print edition,” said William.
“Dat was a very funny joke,” said Detritus. “Fing is, fick though I am, I am der one that’s sayin’ you can stay outside, so—what’s dat vampire doing?”
“Hold it just vun second!” said Otto. WHOOMPH. “—damndamndamn!”
Detritus watched Otto roll around on the cobbles, screaming. “What was dat about?” he said, eventually. “He’s taken a picture of you not letting me into the Palace,” said William.
Detritus, although born above the snow line on some distant mountain, a troll who had never seen a human until he was five years old, nevertheless was a policeman to his craggy, dragging fingertips and reacted accordingly.
“He can’t do dat,” he said.
William pulled out his notebook and poised his pencil. “Could you explain to my readers exactly why not?” he said. Detritus looked around, a little worried. “Where are dey?”
“No, I mean I’m going to write down what you say.” Basic policing rushed to Detritus’s aid once again. “You can’t do dat,” he said. “Then can I write down why I can’t write anything down?” William said, smiling brightly.
Detritus reached up and moved a little lever on the side of his helmet. A barely audible whirring noise became fractionally louder. The troll had a helmet with a clockwork fan, to blow air across his silicon brain when overheating threatened to reduce its operating efficiency. Right now he obviously
needed a cooler head.
“Ah. Dis is some kind of politics, right?” he said. “Um…maybe. Sorry.” Otto had staggered to his feet and was fiddling with the iconograph again. Detritus reached a decision. He nodded to a constable. “Fiddyment, you take dese…two to Mister Vimes. Dey are not to fall down any steps on der way or any stuff like dat.”
Mister Vimes, thought William, as they hurried after the constable. All the watchmen called him that. The man had been a knight and was now a duke and a commander, but they called him Mister. And it was Mister, too, the full two syllables, not the everyday unheeded “Mr.”; it was the “mister” you used when you wanted to say things like “put down that crossbow and turn around real slow, mister.” He wondered why.
William had not been brought up to respect the Watch. They weren’t our kind of people. It was conceded that they were useful, like sheepdogs, because clearly someone had to keep people in order, heavens knew, but only a fool would let a sheepdog sleep in the parlor. The Watch, in other words, were a regrettably necessary subset of the criminal classes, a section of the population informally defined by Lord de Worde as anyone with less than a thousand dollars a year.
William’s family and everyone they knew also had a mental map of the city that was divided into parts where you found upstanding citizens, and other parts where you found criminals. It had come as a shock to them…no, he corrected himself, it had come as an affront to learn that Vimes operated on a different map. Apparently he’d instructed his men to use the front door when calling on any building, even in broad daylight, when sheer common sense said that they should use the back, just like any other servant.* The man simply had no idea. That Vetinari had made him a duke was just another example of the Patrician’s lack of grip. William therefore felt predisposed to like Vimes, if only because of the type of enemies he made, but as far as he could see, everything about the man could be prefaced by the word “badly”—as in - spoken, -educated, and -in need of a drink.
Fiddyment stopped in the big hall of the Palace.
“Don’t you go anywhere and don’t you do anything,” he said. “I’ll go and—”
But Vimes was already coming down the wide stairs, trailed by a giant of a man William recognized as Captain Carrot.
You could add “-dressed” to Vimes’s list. It wasn’t that he wore bad clothes. He just seemed to generate an internal scruffiness field. The man could rumple a helmet.
Fiddyment met them halfway. There was a muttered conversation, out of which the unmistakable words “He’s what?” arose, in Vimes’s voice. He glared darkly at William. The expression was clear. It said: it’s been a bad day, and now there’s you.
Vimes walked the rest of the way down the stairs and looked William up and down. “What is it you’re wanting?” he demanded. “I want to know what’s happened here, please,” said William. “Why?” “Because people will want to know.” “Hah! They’ll find out soon enough!” “But who from, sir?” Vimes walked around William as if he was examining some strange new thing. “You’re Lord de Worde’s boy, aren’t you?” “Yes, Your Grace.”
“Commander will do,” said Vimes sharply. “And you write that little gossipy thing, right?” “Broadly, sir.” “What was it you did to Sergeant Detritus?” “I only wrote down what he said, sir.” “Aha, pulled a pen on him, eh?” “Sir?”
“Writing things down at people? Tch, tch…that sort of thing only causes trouble.”
Vimes stopped walking around William, but having him glare from a few inches away was no improvement.
“This has not been a nice day,” he said. “And it’s going to get a lot worse. Why should I waste my time talking to you?”
“I can tell you one good reason,” said William. “Well, go on then.” “You should talk to me so that I can write it down, sir. All neat and correct. The actual words you say, right down there on the paper. And you know who I am, and if I get them wrong you know where to find me.”
“So? You’re telling me that if I do what you want, you’ll do what you want?”
“I’m saying, sir, that a lie can run round the world before the truth has got its boots on.” “Ha! Did you just make that up?” “No, sir. But you know it’s true.” Vimes sucked on his cigar. “And you’ll let me see what you’ve written?”
“Of course. I’ll make sure you get one of the first papers off the press, sir.” “I meant before it gets published, and you know it.” “To tell you the truth, no, I don’t think I should do that, sir.” “I am the commander of the Watch, lad.” “Yes, sir. And I’m not. I think that’s my point, really, although I’ll work on it some more.” Vimes stared at him a little too long. Then, in a slightly different tone of voice, he said: “Lord Vetinari was seen by three cleaning maids of the household staff, all respectable ladies, after they were alerted by the barking of His Lordship’s dog at about seven o’clock this morning. He said” —here Vimes consulted his own notebook—“‘I’ve killed him, I’ve killed him, I’m sorry.’ They saw what looked very much like a body on the floor. Lord Vetinari was holding a knife. They ran downstairs to fetch someone. On their return, they found His Lordship missing. The body was that of Rufus Drumknott, the Patrician’s personal secretary. He had been stabbed and is seriously ill. A search of the buildings located Lord Vetinari in the stables. He was unconscious on the floor. A horse was saddled. The saddlebags contained…seventy thousand dollars…Captain, this is damn stupid.”
“I know, sir,” said Carrot. “They are the facts, sir.” “But they’re not the right facts! They’re stupid facts!” “I know, sir. I can’t imagine His Lordship trying to kill anyone.”
“Are you mad?” said Vimes. “I can’t imagine him saying sorry!”
Vimes turned and glared at William, as if surprised to find him still there. “Yes?” he demanded. “Why was His Lordship unconscious, sir?”
Vimes shrugged. “It looks as though he was trying to get on the horse. He’s got a game leg. Maybe he slipped—I can’t believe I’m saying this. Anyway, that’s your lot, understand?” “I’d like to get an iconograph of you, please,” William persisted. “Why?”
William thought fast. “It will reassure the citizens that you are on the case and handling this personally, Commander. My iconographer is just downstairs. Otto!”
“Good gods, a damn vamp—” Vimes began.
“He’s a Black Ribboner, sir,” Carrot whispered. Vimes rolled his eyes.
“Good mornink,” said Otto. “Do not movink, please, you are making a good pattern of light and shade.” He kicked out the legs of the tripod, peered into the iconograph, and raised a salamander in its cage.
“Looking this way, please—”
Click.
WHOOMPH
“—oh, shee-yut!”
Dust floated to the floor. In the midst of it, a twist of black ribbon spiraled down. There was a moment of shocked silence. Then Vimes said, “What the hell happened just then?” “Too much flash, I think,” said William. He reached down with a trembling hand and retrieved a small square of card that was sticking out of the little gray cone of the late Otto Chriek.
“DO NOT BE ALARMED,” he read. “The former bearer of this card has suffered a minor accident. You vill need a drop of blood from any species, and a dustpan and brush.”
“Well, the kitchens are that way,” said Vimes. “Sort him out. I don’t want my men treading him in all over the damn place.”
“One last thing, sir. Would you like me to say that if anyone saw anything suspicious they should tell you, sir?” said William.
“In this town? We’d need every man on the Watch just to control the queue. Just you be careful what you write, that’s all.”
The two watchmen strode away, Carrot giving William a wan smile as he passed.
William busied himself in carefully scraping up Otto with two pages from his notebook and depositing the dust in the bag the vampire used to carry his equipment.
Then it dawned on him that he was alone—Otto probably didn’t count at the moment—in the place with Commander Vimes’s permission to be there, if “the kitchens are over that way” could be parlayed into “permission.” And William was good with words. Truth was what he told. Honesty was sometimes not the same thing.
He picked up the bag and found his way to the back stairs and the kitchen, from whence came a hubbub.
Staff were wandering around with the bewildered air of people with nothing to do who were nevertheless still being paid to do it. William sidled over to a maid who was sobbing into a grubby handkerchief.
“Excuse me, miss, but could you let me have a drop of blood—Yes, perhaps that wasn’t the right moment,” he added nervously, as she fled shrieking.
“’Ere, what did you say to our Mary?” said a thickset man, putting down a tray of hot loaves. “Are you the baker?” said William. The man gave him a look. “What does it look like?” “I can see what it looks like,” said William. There was another look, but this time there was just a measure of respect in it. “I’m still asking the question,” he went on.
“I’m the butcher, as it happens,” said the man. “Well done. The baker’s off sick. And who are you, askin’ me questions?”
“Commander Vimes sent me down here,” said William. He was appalled at the ease with which the truth so easily turned into something that was almost a lie, just by being positioned correctly. He opened his notebook. “I’m from the Times. Did you—”
“What, the paper?” said the butcher.
“That’s right. Did you—”
“Hah! You got it completely up your bum about the winter, y’know. You should’ve said it was the Year of the Ant, that was the worst. You should’ve arsked me. I could’ve put you right.”
“And you are—?”
“Sidney Clancy and Son, aged thirty-nine, Eleven Long Hogmeat, Purveyors of Finest Cat and Dog Meats to the Gentry…why aren’t you writing it down?”
“Lord Vetinari eats pet food?”
“He doesn’t eat much of anything from what I hear. No, I delivers for his dog. Finest stuff. Prime. We sell only the best at Eleven Long Hogmeat, open every day from six A.M. to mid—”
“Oh, his dog. Right,” said William. “Er…” He looked around at the throng. Some of those people could tell him things, and he was talking to a dogsmeat man. Still…
“Could you let me have a tiny piece of meat?” he said. “Are you going to put it in the paper?” “Yes. Sort of. In a way.”
William found a quiet alcove hidden from the general excitement, and gingerly let the piece of meat dribble one drop of blood onto the little gray pile.
The dust mushroomed up into the air, became a mass of colored flecks, became Otto Chriek. “How was that vun?” he said. “Oh…” “I think you got the picture,” said William. “Er…your jacket…”
Part of the sleeve of the vampire’s jacket was now the color and texture of the stair carpet in the big hall, a rather dull pattern of red and blue.
“Carpet dust got mixed in, I expect,” said Otto. “Do not be alarmed. Happens all zer time.” He sniffed the sleeve. “Finest steak? Thank you!”
“It was dog food,” said William the Truthful. “Dog food?” “Yes. Grab your stuff and follow me—”
“Dog food?”
“You did say it was finest steak. Lord Vetinari is kind to his dog. Look, don’t complain to me. If this sort of thing happens a lot, then you ought to carry a little bottle of emergency blood! Otherwise people will do the best they can!”
“Vell, yes, fine, zank you anyvay,” the vampire mumbled, trailing behind him. “Dog food, dog food, oh dear me…vere are we goink now?”
“To the Oblong Office to see where the attack was made,” said William. “I just hope it isn’t being guarded by someone clever.”
“Ve will get into a lot off trouble.”
“Why?” said William. He’d been thinking the same thing, but: why? The Palace belonged to the city, more or less. The Watch probably wouldn’t like him going in there, but William felt in his bones that you couldn’t run a city on the basis of what the Watch liked. The Watch would probably like it if everyone spent their time indoors, with their hands on the table where people could see them.
The door to the Oblong Office was open. Guarding it, if you could truly be said to be on guard whilst leaning against the wall staring at the opposite wall, was Corporal Nobbs. He was smoking a surreptitious cigarette.
“Ah, just the man I was looking for!” said William. That was true. Nobby was more than he’d hoped for.
The cigarette disappeared by magic.
“Am I?” wheezed Nobbs, smoke curling out of his ears.
“Yes, I’ve been talking to Commander Vimes, and now I would like to see the room where the crime was committed.” William had great hopes of that sentence. It seemed to contain the words “and he gave me permission to” without actually doing so.
Corporal Nobbs looked uncertain, but then he noticed the notebook. And Otto. The cigarette appeared between his lips again.
“’Ere, are you from that newspaper?”
“That’s right,” said William. “I thought people would be interested in seeing how our brave Watch swings into action at a time like this.”
Corporal Nobbs’s skinny chest visibly swelled.
“Corporal Nobby Nobbs, sir, probably thirty-four, bin in uniform since prob’ly ten years old, man and boy.”
William felt he ought to make a show of writing this down. “Probably thirty-four?” “Our mam has never been one for numbers, sir. Always a bit vague on fine detail, our mam.”
“And…” William took a closer look at the corporal. You had to assume he was a human being because he was broadly the right shape, could talk, and wasn’t covered in hair. “Man and boy and…?” he heard himself say.
“Just man and boy, sir,” said Corporal Nobbs reproachfully. “Just man and boy.” “And were you first on the scene, corporal?” “Last on the scene, sir.”
“And your important job is to…?”
“Stop anyone going through this door, sir,” said Corporal Nobbs, trying to read William’s notes upside down. “That’s ‘Nobbs’ without a ‘K,’ sir. It’s amazing how people get that wrong. What’s he doing with that box?”
“Got to take a picture of Ankh-Morpork’s finest,” said William, easing himself towards the door. Of course, that was a lie, but since it was such an obvious lie, he considered that it didn’t count. It was like saying the sky was green.
By now Corporal Nobbs was almost leaving the floor under the lifting power of pride. “Could I have a copy for my mam?” he said. “Smile, please…” “I am smilin’.” “Stop smiling, please.” Click. WHOOMPH. “Aaarghaarghaargh…” A screaming vampire is always the center of attention. William slipped into the Oblong Office. Just inside the door was a chalk outline. In colored chalk. It must have been done by Corporal Nobbs, because he was the only person who would add a pipe and draw in some flowers and clouds.
There was also a stink of peppermint. There was a chair, knocked over. There was a basket, kicked upside down in the corner of the room.
There was a short, evil-looking metal arrow sticking into the floor at an angle; it had a City Watch label tied to it now.
There was a dwarf. He—no, William corrected himself, on seeing the heavy leather skirt and the slight raised heels to the iron boots--she was lying down on her stomach, picking at something on the floor with a pair of tweezers. It looked like a smashed jar.
She glanced up.
“Are you new? Where’s your uniform?” she said. “Well, er, I, er…” She narrowed her eyes.
“You’re not a watchman, are you? Does Mister Vimes know you’re here?”
The way of the truthful-by-nature is as a bicycle race in a pair of sandpaper underpants, but William clung to an indisputable fact.
“I spoke to him just now,” he said.
But the dwarf wasn’t Sergeant Detritus, and certainly not Corporal Nobbs. “And he said you could come in here?” she demanded. “Not exactly said—”
The dwarf walked across and swiftly opened the door. “Then get—” “Ah, a vonderful framing effect!” said Otto, who’d been on the other side of the door. Click! William shut his eyes. WHOOMPH. “Ohhbuggerrrrr…”
This time William caught the little piece of paper before it hit the ground.
The dwarf stood open-mouthed. Then she closed her mouth. Then she opened it again to say: “What the hell just happened?”
“I suppose you could call it a sort of industrial injury,” said William. “Hang on, I think I’ve still got a piece of dog food somewhere…honestly, there’s got to be a better way than this…”
He unwrapped it from a grubby piece of newspaper and gingerly dropped it onto the heap. The ash fountained and Otto arose, blinking. “How vas that? Vun more? This time wizt the obscurograph?” he said. He was already reaching for his bag.
“Get out of here right now!” said the dwarf.
“Oh, please”—William glanced at the dwarf’s shoulder—“corporal, let him do his job. Give him a chance, eh? He’s a Black Ribboner, after all…” Behind the watchman, Otto took an ugly, newtlike creature out of its jar.
“Do you want me to arrest the pair of you? You’re interfering with the scene of a crime!” “What crime, would you say?” said William, flipping open his notebook. “Out, the pair of—” “Boo,” said Otto softly. The land eel must have been quite tense already. In response to thousands of years of evolution in a high magical environment, it discharged a nighttime’s worth of darkness all at once. It filled the room for a moment, sheer solid black laced with traceries of blue and violet. Again, for a moment William thought he could feel it wash through him in a flood. Then light flowed back, like chilly water after a pebble has been dropped in the lake.
The corporal glared at Otto. “That was dark light, wasn’t it?” “Ah, you too are from Ubervald—” Otto began happily. “Yes, and I did not expect to see that here! Get out!” They hurried past the startled Corporal Nobbs, down the wide stairs, and out into the frosty air of the courtyard.
“Is there something you ought to be telling me, Otto?” said William. “She seemed extremely angry when you took that second picture.”
“Vell, it’s a little hard to explain—” said the vampire awkwardly. “It’s not harmful, is it?” “Oh, no, zere are no physical effects vhatsoever—”
“Or mental effects?” said William, who had spun words too often to miss such a carefully misleading statement.
“Perhaps zis is not zer time—”
“That’s true. Tell me about it later. Before you try it again, okay?”
William’s head buzzed as he ran along Filigree Street. Barely an hour ago he’d been agonizing over what stupid letters to put in the newspaper and the world had seemed more or less normal. Now it had been turned upside down. Lord Vetinari was supposed to have tried to kill someone, and that didn’t make sense, if only because the person he had tried to kill was apparently still alive. He had been trying to get away with a load of money, too, and that didn’t make sense either. Oh, it wasn’t hard to imagine a person trying to embezzle money and attacking someone, but if you mentally inserted someone like the Patrician into the picture, it all fell apart. And what about the peppermint? The room had reeked of it.
There were a lot more questions. The look in the corporal’s eye as she’d chased him out of the office suggested firmly to William that he was unlikely to get any more answers from the Watch.
And, looming up in his mind, was the gaunt shape of the press. Somehow he was going to have to make some kind of coherent story about all this, and he’d have to do it now…
The happy figure of Mr. Wintler greeted him as he strode into the pressroom. “What do you think of this funny marrow, eh, Mr. de Worde?” “I suggest you stuff it, Mr. Wintler,” said William, pushing past. “Just as you say, sir, that’s just what my lady wife said, too.” “I’m sorry, but he insisted on waiting for you,” Sacharissa whispered as William sat down. “What’s going on?”
“I’m not sure…” said William, staring hard at his notes. “Who’s been killed?”
“Er…no one…I think…”
“That’s a mercy, then.” Sacharissa looked down at the papers covering her desk. “I’m afraid we’ve had five other people in here with humorous vegetables,” she said. “Oh.” “Yes. They weren’t all that funny, to tell truth.” “Oh.” “No, they mainly looked like…um, you know.” “Oh…what?” “You know,” she said, beginning to go red. “A man’s…um, you know.”
“Oh.”
“Not even very much like, um, you know, too. I mean, you had to want to see a…um, you know…there, if you understand me.”
William hoped that no one was making notes about this conversation. “Oh,” he said.
“But I took their names and addresses, just in case,” said Sacharissa. “I thought it might be worth it if we’re short of stuff.”
“We’re never going to be that short,” said William quickly. “You don’t think so?” “I’m positive.”
“You may be right,” she said, looking at the mess of paper on her desk. “It’s been very busy in here while you were out. People have been queuing up with all sorts of news. Things that are going to happen, lost dogs, things they want to sell—” “That’s advertising,” said William, trying to concentrate on his notes. “If they want it in the paper, they have to pay.”
“I don’t see that it’s up to us to decide—”
William thumped the desk, to his own amazement and Sacharissa’s shock. “Something is happening, do you understand? Something really real is happening! And it’s not an amusing shape! It’s really serious! And I’ve got to write it down as soon as possible! Can you just let me do that?”
He realized Sacharissa was staring not at him but at his fist. He followed her gaze.
“Oh, no…what the hell is this?”
A long sharp nail projected straight upwards from the desk, an inch from his hand. It must have been at least six inches long. Pieces of paper had been impaled on it. When he picked it up, he saw that it remained upright because it had been hammered through a wooden block.
“It’s a spike,” said Sacharissa quietly. “I…I, er, brought it in to keep our papers tidy. M…my grandfather always uses one. All…all the engravers do. It’s…it’s sort of a cross between a filing cabinet and a wastepaper basket. I thought it would be useful. Er…it’ll save you using the floor.”
“Er…right, yes, good idea,” said William, looking at her reddening face. “Er…” He couldn’t think straight. “Mr. Goodmountain?” he yelled.
The dwarf looked up from a playbill he was setting. “Can you put stuff in type if I dictate to you?” “Yes.” “Sacharissa, please go and find Ron and his…friends. I want to get a small paper out as soon as possible. Not tomorrow morning. Right now. Please?”
She was about to protest, and then she saw the look in his eye. “Are you sure you’re allowed to do this?” she said. “No! I’m not! I won’t know until after I’ve done it! That’s why I’ve got to do it! Then I’ll know! And I’m sorry I’m shouting!”
He pushed his chair aside and went over to Goodmountain, who was standing patiently by a case of type.
“All right…we need a line at the top…” William shut his eyes and pinched the bridge of his nose while he thought. “Er…Amazing Scenes in Ankh-Morpork…got that? In very big type. Then in smaller type, underneath…Patrician Attacks Clerk With Knife…er…” That didn’t sound right, he knew. It was grammatically inexact. It was the Patrician who had the knife, not the clerk. “We can sort that out later…er…in smaller type again…‘Mysterious Events in Stables’…go down another size of type…‘Watch Baffled.’ Okay? And now we’ll start the story…”
“Start it?” said Goodmountain, his hand dancing across the boxes of type. “Aren’t we nearly finished?”
William flicked back and forth through his notes. How to begin, how to begin…Something
interesting…no, something amazing…Some amazing things…no…no…the story was surely the strangeness of it all…
“Suspicious circumstances surround the attack…make that alleged attack…”
“I thought you said he admitted it,” said Sacharissa, dabbing at her eyes with a handkerchief.
“I know, I know, it’s just that I think that if Lord Vetinari wanted to kill someone they’d be dead…look him up in Twurp’s Peerage, will you, I’m sure he was educated in the Assassins’ Guild —”
“Alleged or not?” said Goodmountain, his hand hovering over the A’s. “Just say the word.”
“Make it the apparent attack,” said William, “‘by Lord Vetinari on Rufus Drumknott, his clerk, in the Palace today. Er…er…Palace staff heard—’”
“Do you want me to work on this or do you want me to find the beggars?” Sacharissa demanded. “I can’t do both.”
William gave her a blank stare. Then he nodded. “Rocky?” The troll by the door awoke with a snort. “Yessir?” “Go and find Foul Ole Ron and the others and get them up here as soon as possible. Tell them there’ll be a bonus. Now, where was I?”
“‘Palace staff heard,’” Goodmountain prompted. “—heard His Lordship—” “—who graduated with full honors from the Guild of Assassins in 1968,” Sacharissa called out.
“Put that in,” said William urgently. “And then go on with…say ‘I killed him, I killed him, I’m sorry’…good grief, Vimes is right, this is insane, he’d have to be mad to talk like this—”
“Mr. de Worde, is it?”
“Oh, what the hell is it this time—”
William turned. He saw the trolls first, because even when they’re standing at the back, a group of four big trolls is metaphorically to the fore of any picture. The two humans in front of them were a mere detail, and in any case one of them was only human by tradition. He had the pale gray pallor of a
zombie and the expression of one who, while not seeking to be unpleasant in himself, was the cause of much unpleasantness in other people.
“Mr. de Worde? I believe you know me. I am Mr. Slant of the Guild of Lawyers,” said Mr. Slant, bowing stiffly. “This”—he indicated the slight young man next to him—“is Mr. Ronald Carney, the new chairman of the Guild of Engravers and Printers. The four gentlemen behind me do not belong to any guild, as far as I am aware—”
“Engravers and Printers?” said Goodmountain.
“Yes,” said Carney. “We have expanded our charter. Guild membership is two hundred dollars a year—”
“I’m not—” William began, but Goodmountain laid a hand on his arm. “This is the shakedown, but it isn’t as bad as I thought it might be,” he whispered. “We haven’t got time to argue and at this rate we’ll make it back in a few days. End of problem!”
“However,” said Mr. Slant, in his special lawyer’s voice that sucked in money at every pore, “in this instance, in view of the special circumstances, there will also be a one-off payment of, say, two thousand dollars.”
The dwarfs went quiet. Then there was a metallic chorus. Each dwarf had laid down his type, reached under the stone, and pulled out a battle-ax.
“That’s agreed, then, is it?” said Mr. Slant, stepping aside. The trolls were straightening up. It didn’t take a major excuse for trolls and dwarfs to fight; sometimes, being on the same world was enough.
This time it was William who restrained Goodmountain. “Hold on, hold on, there must be a law against killing lawyers.”
“Are you sure?”
“There’re still some around, aren’t there? Besides, he’s a zombie. If you cut him in half, both bits will sue you.” William raised his voice. “We can’t pay, Mr. Slant.”
“In that case, accepted law and practice allows me—”
“I want to see your charter!” Sacharissa snapped. “I’ve known you since we were kids, Ronnie Carney, and you’re always up to something…”
“Good afternoon, Miss Cripslock,” said Mr. Slant. “As a matter of fact we thought someone might ask, so I brought the new charter with me…I hope we are all law-abiding here.”
Sacharissa snatched the impressive-looking scroll, with its large dangling seal, and glared at it
as if trying to burn the words off the parchment by the mere friction of reading. “Oh,” she said. “It…seems to be in order.” “Quite so.”
“Except for the Patrician’s signature,” Sacharissa added, handing back the scroll. “That is a mere formality, my dear.” “I’m not your dear and it’s not on there, formal or not. So this isn’t legal, is it?”
Mr. Slant twitched. “Clearly we cannot get a signature from a man in prison on a very serious charge,” he said.
Aha, that’s a wallpaper word, thought William. When people say clearly something, that means there’s a huge crack in their argument and they know things aren’t clear at all.
“Then who is running the city?” he said.
“I don’t know,” said Mr. Slant. “That is not my concern. I—” “Mr. Goodmountain?” said William. “Large type, please.” “Got you,” said the dwarf. His hand hovered over a fresh case. “In caps, size to fit, ‘Who Runs Ankh-Morpork?’” said William. “Now into body type, upper and lowercase, across two columns: ‘Who is governing the city while Lord Vetinari is imprisoned? Asked for an opinion today, a leading legal figure said he did not know and it was no concern of his. Mr. Slant of the Lawyers’ Guild went on to say—’”
“You can’t put that in your newspaper!” barked Slant. “Set that directly, please, Mr. Goodmountain.” “Setting it already,” said the dwarf, the leaden slugs clicking into place. Out of the corner of his eye William saw Otto emerging from the cellar and looking puzzled at the noise.
“‘Mr. Slant went on to say…’?” said William, glaring at the lawyer.
“You will find it very hard to print that,” said Mr. Carney, ignoring the lawyer’s frantic hand signals, “with no damn press!”
“‘…was the view of Mr. Carney of the Guild of Engravers,’ spelled with an e before the y,” said William, “‘who earlier today tried to put the Times out of business by means of an illegal document.’” William realized that, although his mouth felt full of acid, he was enjoying this immensely. “‘Asked
for his opinion of this flagrant abuse of the city laws, Mr. Slant said…’?” “STOP TAKING DOWN EVERYTHING WE SAY!” yelled Slant. “…Full caps for the whole sentence please, Mr. Goodmountain.”
The trolls and the dwarfs were staring at William and the lawyer. They understood that a fight was going on, but they couldn’t see any blood.
“And when you are ready, Otto?” said William, turning around.
“If the dwarfs vould just close up a bit more,” said Otto, squinting into the iconograph. “Oh, zat’s good, let’s see the light gleam on zose big choppers…trolls, please vave your fists, zat’s right… big smile, everyvun…”
It is amazing how people will obey a man pointing a lens at them. They’ll come to their senses in a fraction of a second, but that’s all he needs.
Click.
WHOOMPH.
“Aaarghaaarghaaarghaaaaaagh…”
William reached the falling iconograph just ahead of Mr. Slant, who could move very fast for a man with no apparent knees.
“It’s ours,” he said, holding it firmly, while the dust of Otto Chriek fell around them. “What are you intending to do with this picture?” “I don’t have to tell you. This is our workshop. We didn’t ask you to come here.” “But I am here on legal business!” “Then it can’t be wrong to take a picture of you, can it,” said William. “But if you think differently, then I will, of course, be happy to quote you!”
Slant glared at him, and then marched back to the group by the door. William heard him say, “It is my considered legal opinion that we leave at this juncture.”
“But you said you could—,” Carney began, glaring at William.
“My very considered opinion,” said Mr. Slant again, “is that we go right now, in silence.” “But you said—”
“In silence, I suggest!” They left. There was a group sigh of relief from the dwarfs, and a replacement of axes. “You want me to set this properly?” said Goodmountain. “There’ll be trouble over it,” said Sacharissa.
“Yes, but how much trouble are we in already?” said William. “On a scale of one to ten?”
“At the moment…about eight,” said Sacharissa. “But when the next edition is on the streets”— she shut her eyes a moment, and her lips moved in calculation—“about two thousand, three hundred and seventeen?”
“Then we’ll put it in,” said William. Goodmountain turned to his workers. “Leave the axes where you can see ’em, boys,” he said.
“Look, I don’t want anyone else to get into trouble,” said William. “I’ll even set the rest of the type myself, and I can run some copies off on the press.”
“Needs three to operate and you won’t get much speed,” said Goodmountain. He saw William’s expression, grinned, and slapped him as high up the back as a dwarf could manage. “Don’t worry, lad. We want to protect our investment.”
“And I’m not leaving,” said Sacharissa. “I need that dollar!”
“Two dollars,” said William, absently. “It’s time for a raise. What about you, Ott—oh…can someone sweep up Otto, please?”
A few minutes later the restored vampire pulled himself upright against his tripod and lifted out a copper plate with trembling fingers.
“Vot is happenink next, please?”
“Are you staying with us? It could be dangerous,” said William, realizing that he was saying this to a vampire iconographer who undied every time he took a picture.
“Vot kind of danger?” said Otto, tilting the plate this way and that in order to examine it better. “Well…legal, to start with.”
“Has anyvon mentioned garlic zo far?” “No.” “Can I have one hundred and eighty dollars for the Akina TR-10 dual-imp iconograph viz the telescopic seat and big shiny lever?”
“Er…not yet.”
“Okay,” said Otto philosophically. “Zen I shall require five dollars for repairs and improvements. I can see ziz is a different kind of job.”
“All right. All right, then…” William looked around the pressroom. Everyone was silent, and everyone was watching him.
A few days ago he’d have expected today to be…well, dull. It usually was, just after he’d sent out his newsletter. He generally spent the time wandering around the city or reading in his tiny office while waiting for the next client with a letter to be written or, sometimes, read out.
Often both kinds were difficult. People prepared to trust a postal system that largely depended on handing an envelope to some trustworthy-looking person who was heading in the right direction generally had something important to say. But the point was that they weren’t his difficulties. It wasn’t him making a last-minute plea to the Patrician, or hearing the terrible news about the collapse of Shaft #3, although of course he did his best to make things easier for the customer. It had worked very well. If stress were food, he’d succeeded in turning his life into porridge.
The press waited. It looked now like a great big beast. Soon he’d throw a lot of words into it. And in a few hours it would be hungry again, as if those words had never happened. You could feed it, but you could never fill it up.
He shuddered. What had he got them all into?
But he felt on fire. There was a truth somewhere, and he hadn’t found it yet. He was going to, because he knew, he knew that once this edition hit the streets--
“Bugrit!” “Hawrrak…pwit!” “Quack!” He glanced at the crowd coming in. Of course, the truth hid in some unlikely places and had some strange handmaidens.
“Let’s go to press,” he said.
It was an hour later. The sellers were already coming back for more. The rumbling of the press made the tin roof shake. The piles of copper mounting up in front of Goodmountain leapt into the air at every thump.
William examined his reflection in a piece of polished brass. Somehow he’d got ink all over him. He did the best he could with his handkerchief.
He’d sent Altogether Andrews to sell the papers near Pseudopolis Yard, reckoning him to be the most consistently sane of the fraternity. At least five of his personalities could hold a coherent conversation.
By now, surely, the Watch would have had time to read the story, even if they’d had to send out for help with the longer words.
He was aware of someone staring at him. He turned and saw Sacharissa’s head bend down over her work again.
Someone sniggered behind him.
There was no one there who was paying him any attention. There was a three-way argument over a matter of sixpence going on between Goodmountain, Foul Ole Ron, and Foul Ole Ron, Ron being capable of keeping a pretty good row going all by himself. The dwarfs were hard at work around the press. Otto had retired to his darkroom, where he was once again mysteriously at work.
Only Ron’s dog was watching William. He considered that it had, for a dog, a very offensive and knowing look.
A couple of months ago someone had tried to hand William the old story about there being a dog in the city that could talk. That was the third time this year. William had explained that it was an urban myth. It was always a friend of a friend who had heard it talk, and it was never anyone who had seen the dog. The dog in front of William didn’t look as if it could talk, but it did look as if it could swear.
There seemed to be no stopping that kind of story. People swore that there was some long-lost heir to the throne of Ankh living incognito in the town. William certainly recognized wishful thinking when he heard it. There was the other old chestnut about a werewolf being employed in the Watch, too. Until recently he’d dismissed that one, but he was having some doubts lately. After all, the Times employed a vampire…
He stared at the wall, tapping his teeth with his pencil.
“I’m going to see Commander Vimes,” he said at last. “It’s better than hiding.”
“We’re being invited to all sorts of things,” said Sacharissa, looking up from her paperwork. “Well, I say invited…Lady Selachii has ordered us to attend her ball on Thursday next week and
write at least five hundred words which we will, of course, let her see before publication.” “Good idea,” Goodmountain called over his shoulder. “Lots of names at balls, and—” “—names sell newspapers,” said William. “Yes. I know. Do you want to go?” “Me? I haven’t got anything to wear!” said Sacharissa. “It’d cost forty dollars for the kind of dress you wear to that sort of thing. And we can’t afford that kind of money.”
William hesitated. Then he said: “Stand up and twirl around, could you?” She actually blushed. “Whatever for?” “I want to see what size you are…you know, all over.”
She stood up and turned around nervously. There was a chorus of whistles from the crew and a number of untranslatable comments in Dwarfish.
“You’re pretty close,” said William. “If I could get you a really good dress, could you find someone to make any adjustments you need? It might have to be let out a bit in the, in the, you know… in the top.”
“What kind of dress?” she said, suspiciously.
“My sister’s got hundreds of evening dresses and she spends all her time at our place in the country,” said William. “The family never comes back to the city these days. I’ll give you the key to the town house this evening and you can go and help yourself.”
“Won’t she mind?”
“She’ll probably never notice. Anyway, I think she’d be shocked to find that anyone could spend as little as forty dollars on a dress. Don’t worry about it.”
“Town house? Place in the country?” said Sacharissa, displaying an inconveniently journalistic trait of picking on the words you hoped wouldn’t be noticed.
“My family’s rich,” said William. “I’m not.”
He glanced at the rooftop opposite when he stepped outside, because something in its outline was different, and saw a spiky head outlined against the afternoon sky.
It was a gargoyle. William had got used to seeing them everywhere in the city. Sometimes one would stay in the same place for months at a time. You seldom saw them actually moving from one roof to another. But you also seldom saw them at all in districts like this. Gargoyles liked high stone buildings with lots of gutters and fiddly architecture, which attracted pigeons. Even gargoyles have to eat.
There was also something going on further down the street. Several large carts were outside one of the old warehouses, and crates were being carried inside.
He spotted several more gargoyles on the way across the bridge to Pseudopolis Yard. Every single one of them turned its head to watch him.
Sergeant Detritus was on duty at the desk. He looked at William in surprise. “By damn, dat was quick. You run all der way?” he said. “What are you talking about?”
“Mister Vimes only sent for you a coupla minutes ago,” said Detritus. “Go on up, I should. Don’t worry, he’s stopped shoutin’.” He gave William a rather-you-than-me look. “But he are not glad about being in a tent, as dey say.”
“Has he ever been a happy camper?” “Not much,” said Detritus, grinning evilly. William climbed the stairs and knocked at the door, which swung open. Commander Vimes looked up from his desk. His eyes narrowed. “Well, well, that was quick,” he said. “Ran all the way, did you?” “No, sir, I was coming here hoping to ask you some questions.” “That was kind of you,” said Vimes. There was a definite feeling that although the little village was quiet at the moment—women hanging out washing, cats sleeping in the sun—soon the volcano was going to explode and hundreds were going to be buried in the ash.
“So—” William began.
“Why did you do this?” said Vimes. William could see the Times on the desk in front of the commander. He could read the headlines from here:
“Baffled, am I?” said Vimes.
“If you are telling me that you are not, Commander, I will be happy to make a note of the fa—” “Leave that notebook alone!” William looked surprised. The notebook was the cheapest kind, made of paper recycled so many times you could use it as a towel, but once again someone was glaring at it as if it were a weapon.
“I won’t have you doing to me what you did to Slant,” said Vimes. “Every word of that story is true, sir.” “I’d bet on it. It sounds like his style.”
“Look, Commander, if there’s something wrong with my story, tell me what it is.” Vimes sat back and waved his hands. “Are you going to print everything you hear?” said Vimes. “Do you intend to run around my city like some loose…loose siege weapon? You sit there clutching your precious integrity like a teddy bear and you haven’t the faintest idea, have you, not the faintest idea how hard you can make my job?”
“It’s not against the law to—”
“Isn’t it? Isn’t it, though? In Ankh-Morpork? Stuff like this? It reads like Behavior Likely to Cause a Breach of the Peace to me!”
“It might upset people, but this is important—” “And what will you write next, I wonder?” “I haven’t printed that you have a werewolf employed in the Watch,” said William. He regretted it instantly, but Vimes was getting on his nerves.
“Where did you hear that?” said a quiet voice behind him. He turned in his chair. A fair-haired young woman in Watch uniform was leaning against the wall. She must have been there all the time.
“This is Sergeant Angua,” said Vimes. “You can speak freely in front of her.”
“I’ve…heard rumors,” said William. He’d seen the sergeant in the streets. She had a habit of staring a bit too sharply at people, he’d considered.
“And?”
“Look, I can see this is worrying you,” said William. “Please let me assure you that Corporal Nobbs’s secret is safe with me.”
No one spoke. William congratulated himself. It had been a shot in the dark, but he could tell by Sergeant Angua’s face that he’d won this one. It seemed to have shut down, locking away all expression.
“We don’t often talk about Corporal Nobbs’s species,” said Vimes after a while. “I would deem it a small favor if you take the same approach.”
“Yes, sir. So could I ask you why you’re having me watched?” “I am?” “The gargoyles. Everyone knows a lot of them work for the Watch these days.”
“We’re not watching you. We’re watching to see what happens to you,” said Sergeant Angua. “Because of this,” said Vimes, slapping the newspaper. “But I’m not doing anything wrong,” said William.
“No, it may just be you’re not doing anything illegal,” said Vimes. “Although you’re coming damn close. Other people do not have my kind and understanding disposition, though. All I ask is that you try not to bleed all over the street.”
“I’ll try.”
“And don’t write that down.” “Fine.” “And don’t write down that I said don’t write that down.”
“Okay. Can I write down that you said that I shouldn’t write down that you said—” William stopped. The mountain was rumbling. “Only joking.”
“Haha. And no tapping my officers for information.”
“And no giving dog biscuits to Corporal Nobbs,” said Sergeant Angua. She walked around behind Vimes and peered over his shoulder. “‘The Truth Shall Make Ye Fret’?”
“Printer’s error,” said William shortly. “Anything else I shouldn’t do, Commander?” “Just don’t get in the way.” “I’ll make a—I’ll remember,” said William. “But…if you don’t mind me asking, what’s in it for me?”
“I’m commander of the Watch and I’m asking you politely.” “And that’s it?” “I could ask you impolitely, Mr. de Worde.” Vimes sighed. “Look, can you see things my way? A crime has been committed. The Guilds are in an uproar. You’ve heard of too many chiefs? Well, right now there’s a hundred too many chiefs. I’ve Captain Carrot and a lot of men I really can’t spare guarding the Oblong Office and the rest of the clerks, which means I’m shorthanded everywhere else. I’ve got to deal with all this and…actively pursue a state of nonbafflement. I’ve got Vetinari in the cells. And Drumknott, too—”
“But wasn’t he the victim, sir?” “One of my men is tending him.” “Not one of the city doctors?” Vimes stared fixedly at the notebook. “The doctors of this city are a fine body of men,” he said in a level tone, “and I would not see a word written against them. One of my staff just happens to have… special skills.”
“You mean he can tell someone else’s arse from their elbow?”
Vimes was a fast learner. He sat with his hands folded, and a completely impassive expression. “Can I ask another question?” said William. “Nothing will stop you, will it?” “Have you found Lord Vetinari’s dog?” Again, total blankness. But this time William had the impression that behind it several dozen wheels had begun to spin.
“Dog?” said Vimes.
“Wuffles, I believe he’s called,” said William. Vimes sat watching him impassively. “A terrier, I think,” said William. Vimes failed to move a muscle. “Why was there a crossbow bolt sticking in the floor?” said William. “That doesn’t make sense to me, unless there was someone else in the room. And it had gone in a long way. That’s not a rebound. Someone was firing at something on the floor. Dog-sized, perhaps?”
Not a feature twitched on the commander’s face.
“And then there’s the peppermint,” William went on. “There’s a puzzle. I mean, why peppermint? And then I thought, maybe someone didn’t want to be traced by their smell? Perhaps they’d heard about your werewolf, too? A few jars of peppermint oil thrown down would confuse things a bit?”
There it was, a faint flicker as Vimes glanced momentarily at some paperwork in front of him. Lotto! thought William.*
At last, like some oracle that speaks once a year, Vimes said, “I don’t trust you, Mr. de Worde. And I’ve just realized why. It’s not just that you’re going to cause trouble. Dealing with trouble is my job, it’s what I’m paid for, that’s why they give me an armor allowance. But who are you responsible to? I have to answer for what I do, although right now I’m damned if I know who to. But you? It seems to me you can do what the hell you like.”
“I suppose I’m answerable to the truth, sir.” “Oh, really? How, exactly?” “Sorry?”
“If you tell lies, does the Truth come and smack you in the face? I’m impressed. Ordinary everyday people like me are responsible to other people. Even Vetinari always had—has one eye on the Guilds. But you…you are answerable to the Truth. Amazing. What’s its address? Does it read the paper?”
“She, sir,” said Sergeant Angua. “There’s a goddess of Truth, I believe.”
“Can’t have many followers, then,” said Vimes. “Except our friend here.” He stared at William again over the top of his fingers, and once again the wheels turned.
“Supposing…just supposing…you came into possession of a line drawing of a dog,” he said. “Could you print it in your paper?”
“We are talking about Wuffles, are we?” said William. “Could you?” “I’m sure I could.”
“We would be interested in knowing why he barked just before the…event,” said Vimes.
“And if you could find him, Corporal Nobbs could speak to him in dog language, yes?” said William.
Once again, Vimes did his impression of a statue.
“We could get a drawing of the dog to you in an hour,” he said. “Thank you. Who is running the city at the moment, Commander?”
“I’m just a copper,” said Vimes. “They don’t tell me these things. But I imagine a new Patrician will be elected. It’s all laid down in the city statutes.” “Who can tell me more about them?” said William, mentally adding, “Just a copper” my bum! “Mr. Slant is your man there,” said Vimes, and this time he smiled. “Very helpful, I believe. Good afternoon, Mr. de Worde. Sergeant, show Mr. de Worde out, will you?”
“I want to see Lord Vetinari,” said William. “You what?” “It’s a reasonable request, sir.”
“No. Firstly, he is still unconscious. Secondly, he is my prisoner.” “Aren’t you even letting a lawyer see him?” “I think His Lordship is in enough trouble already, lad.” “What about Drumknott? He isn’t a prisoner, is he?” Vimes glanced up at Sergeant Angua, who shrugged. “All right. There’s no law against that, and we can’t have people saying he’s dead,” he said. He unhooked a speaking tube from a brass-and-leather construction on his desk and hesitated.
“Have they got that problem sorted out, Sergeant?” he said, ignoring William.
“Yes, sir. The pneumatic message system and the speaking tubes are definitely separated now.”
“Are you sure? You do know Constable Keenside had all his teeth knocked out yesterday?” “They say it can’t happen again, sir.” “Well, obviously it can’t. He hasn’t got any more teeth. Oh, well…” Vimes picked up the tube, held it away from him for a moment, and then spoke into it.
“Put me through to the cells, will you?” “Wizzip? Wipwipwip?” “Say again?” “Sneedle flipsock?” “This is Vimes!” “Scitscrit?” Vimes put the tube back on its cradle and stared at Sergeant Angua.
“They’re still working on it, sir,” she said. “They say rats have been nibbling at the tubes.” “Rats?” “I’m afraid so, sir.”
Vimes groaned and turned to William.
“Sergeant Angua will take you to the cells,” he said. And then William was on the other side of the door. “Come on,” said the sergeant. “How did I do?” said William. “I’ve seen worse.” “Sorry to mention Corporal Nobbs, but—”
“Oh, don’t worry about it,” said Sergeant Angua. “Your powers of observation will be the talk of the station. Look, he’s being kind to you because he hasn’t worked out what you are yet, okay? Just be careful, that’s all.”
“And you have worked out what I am, have you?” said William.
“Let’s just say I don’t rely on first impressions, shall we? Mind the step.”
She led the way down into the cells. William noted, without being so crass as to write it down, that there were two watchmen on duty at the bottom.
“Are there usually guards down here? I mean, the cells have locks on, don’t they?” “I hear you’ve got a vampire working for you,” said Sergeant Angua. “Otto? Oh, yes. Well, we’re not prejudiced about that sort of thing…”
The sergeant did not answer. Instead, she opened a door off the main cell corridor and called out: “Visitor for the patients, Igor.”
“Right with you, Thargent.”
The room within was brightly lit by an uncanny, flickering blue light. Jars lined shelves on one wall. Some had strange things moving in them—very strange things. Other things just floated. Blue sparks sizzled on some complex machine, all copper balls and glass rods, in the corner. But what mainly drew William’s attention was the great big eye.
Before he could actually scream, a hand reached up and what he’d thought was a huge eyeball was revealed as the largest magnifying glass he’d ever seen, swiveling up on a metal bracket attached to the forehead of its owner. But the face it revealed was barely an improvement, when it came to mouth-desiccating horror.
The eyes were on different levels. One ear was larger than the other. The face was a network of scars. But that was nothing compared to the deformed hairstyle; Igor’s greasy black hair had been brushed forward into an overhanging quiff in the manner of some of the city’s noisier young musicians, but to a length that could take out the eye of any innocent pedestrian. By the looks of the…organic nature of Igor’s work area, he could then help put it back.
There was a fish tank bubbling on one bench. Inside it, some potatoes were idly swimming backwards and forwards.
“Young Igor here is part of our forensic department,” said Sergeant Angua. “Igor, this is Mr. de Worde. He wants to see the patients.” William saw the quick glance Igor gave the sergeant, who added, “Mister Vimes says it’s okay.” “Right this way, then,” said Igor, lurching past William and into the corridor. “Always nice to get visitors down here, Mr. de Worde. You will find we keep a very relaxed thell down here. I’ll just go and get the keyth.”
“Why does he only lisp the occasional S?” said William, as Igor limped towards a cupboard.
“He’s trying to be modern. You never met an Igor before?” “Not one like that, no! He’s got two thumbs on his right hand!” “He’s from Uberwald,” said the sergeant. “Igors are very much into self-improvement. Fine surgeons, though. Just don’t shake hands with one in a thunderstorm—”
“Here we are, then,” said Igor, lurching back. “Who first?” “Lord Vetinari?” said William. “He’s still athleep,” said Igor. “What, after all this time?” “Not surprithing. It was a nasty blow he had—” Sergeant Angua coughed loudly. “I thought he fell off a horse,” said William.
“Well, yes…and caught himthelf a blow when he hit the floor, I’ve no doubt,” said Igor, glancing at Angua.
He turned the key again.
Lord Vetinari lay on a narrow bed. His face looked pale, but he seemed to be sleeping peacefully.
“He’s not woken up at all?” said William.
“No. I look in on him every fifteen minutes or tho. It can be like that. Sometimeth the body just says: thleep.”
“I heard he hardly ever sleeps,” said William.
“Maybe he’s taking the opportunity,” said Igor, gently closing the door. He unlocked the next cell.
Drumknott was sitting up in bed, his head bandaged. He was drinking some soup. He looked startled when he saw them, and nearly spilled it.
“And how are we?” said Igor, as cheerfully as a face full of stitches can allow.
“Er…I’m feeling much better…” The young man looked from one face to another, uncertain.
“Mr. de Worde here would like to talk to you,” said Sergeant Angua. “I’ll go and help Igor sort out his eyeballs. Or something.”
William was left in an awkward silence. Drumknott was one of those people with no discernible character. “You’re Lord de Worde’s son, aren’t you,” said Drumknott. “You write that news sheet.”
“Yes,” said William. It seemed he’d always be his father’s son. “Um. They say Lord Vetinari stabbed you.”
“So they say,” said the clerk. “You were there, though.” “I knocked on the door to take him his copy of the paper as he’d requested, His Lordship opened it, I walked into the room…and the next thing I know I was waking up here with Mr. Igor looking at me.”
“That must have come as a shock,” said William, with a momentary flash of pride that the Times had figured in this in some small way.
“They say I’d have lost the use of my arm if Igor hadn’t been so good with a needle,” said Drumknott earnestly.
“But your head’s bandaged, too,” said William.
“I think I must have fallen over when…when whatever it was happened,” said Drumknott. My gods, thought William, he’s embarrassed. “I have every confidence that there has been a mistake,” Drumknott went on. “Has His Lordship been preoccupied lately?” “His Lordship is always preoccupied. It’s his job,” said the clerk. “Do you know that three people heard him say that he’d killed you?” “I cannot explain that. They must have been mistaken.” The words were clipped sharp. Any moment now, William thought… “Why do you think—” he began, and was proved right. “I think I don’t have to talk to you,” said Drumknott. “Do I?” “No, but—”
“Sergeant!” Drumknott shouted.
There were swift footsteps and the cell door opened. “Yes?” said Sergeant Angua. “I have finished talking to this gentleman,” said Drumknott. “And I am tired.” William sighed, and put his notebook away. “Thank you,” he said. “You’ve been very…helpful.”
As he walked along the corridor he said, “He doesn’t want to believe His Lordship might have attacked him.”
“Really,” said the sergeant.
“Looks like quite a bang he had on his head,” William went on. “Does it?” “Look, even I can see this smells funny.” “Can you?” “I see,” said William. “You went to the Mister Vimes School of Communication, yes?” “Did I?” said Sergeant Angua. “Loyalty is a wonderful thing.” “Is it? The way out is this way—” After the sergeant had ushered William into the street she went back upstairs into Vimes’s office and quietly shut the door behind her.
“So he only spotted the gargoyles?” said Vimes, who was watching William walk down the street.
“Apparently. But I wouldn’t underestimate him, sir. He notices things. He was dead right about the peppermint bomb. And how many officers would have noticed how deeply that arrow went into the floor?”
“That’s unfortunately true.”
“And he spotted Igor’s second thumb, and hardly anyone else has noticed the swimming
potatoes.”
“Igor hasn’t got rid of them yet?”
“No, sir. He believes that instant fish and chips is only a generation away.” Vimes sighed. “All right, Sergeant. Forget the potatoes. What are the odds?” “Sir?” “I know what goes on in the duty room. They wouldn’t be watchmen if someone wasn’t running a book.”
“On Mr. de Worde?” “Yes.” “Well…six’ll get you ten that he’ll be dead by next Monday, sir.”
“You might just spread the word that I don’t like that sort of thing, will you?” “Yes, sir.” “Find out who’s running the book, and when you have found out that it is Nobby, take it off him.” “Right, sir. And Mr. de Worde?” Vimes stared at the ceiling.
“How many officers are watching him?” he said. “Two.” “Nobby’s usually good at judging odds. Think that’ll be enough?” “No.” “Me neither. But we’re stretched. He’s going to have to learn the hard way. And the trouble with the hard way is, you only get one lesson.”
Mr. Tulip emerged from the alleyway where he had just negotiated the purchase of a very small packet of what would later prove to be rat poison cut with powdered washing crystals.
He found Mr. Pin reading a large piece of paper.
“What’s that?” he said.
“Trouble, I expect,” said Mr. Pin, folding it up and putting it in his pocket. “Yes, indeed.”
“This city is getting on my —ing nerves,” said Mr. Tulip, as they continued down the street. “I got a —ing headache. And my leg hurts.”
“So? It bit me, too. You made a big mistake with that dog.” “Are you saying I shouldn’t’ve shot at it?” “No, I’m saying you shouldn’t’ve missed. It got away.”
“It’s only a dog,” Mr. Tulip grumbled. “What’s such a problem about a dog? It’s not like it’s a reliable —ing witness. They never told us about no —ing dog.” His ankle was beginning to get that hot, dark sensation that suggested that someone hadn’t been brushing their teeth lately. “You just try carrying a guy with a —ing dog snapping at your legs! And how come the —ing zombie never told us the guy was so —ing fast? If he hadn’t been staring at the geek he’d have —ing got me!”
Mr. Pin shrugged. But he’d made a note of that. Mr. Slant had failed to tell the New Firm quite a lot of things, and one of them was that Vetinari moved like a snake.
This was going to cost the lawyer a lot of money. Mr. Pin had nearly got cut.
But he was proud of stabbing the clerk and shoving Charlie out of the landing to babble to the stupid servants. That hadn’t been in the script. That was the kind of service you got from the New Firm. He snapped his fingers as he walked. Yeah! They could react, they could extemporize, they could get creative…
“Excuse me, gentlemen?”
A figure had stepped out of the alleyway ahead of them, a knife in each hand. “Thieves’ Guild,” it said. “Excuse me? This is an official robbery.” To the surprise of the thief, Mr. Pin and Mr. Tulip seemed neither shocked nor frightened, despite the size of the knives. Instead, they looked like a pair of lepidopterists who’d stumbled across an entirely new kind of butterfly, and found it trying to wave a tiny little net.
“Official robbery?” said Mr. Tulip, slowly.
“Ah, you’re visitors to our fair city?” said the thief. “Then this is your lucky day, sir and…sir. A theft of twenty-five dollars entitles you to immunity from further street theft for a period of a full six months plus, for this week only, the choice of this handsome box of crystal wine glasses or a useful set of barbecue tools, which will be the envy of your friends.”
“You mean…you’re legal?” said Mr. Pin. “What —ing friends?” said Mr. Tulip. “Yes, sir. Lord Vetinari feels that since there’ll always be some crime in the city, it might as well be organized.”
Mr. Tulip and Mr. Pin looked at one another.
“Well, ‘Legal’ is my middle name,” said Mr. Pin, shrugging. “Over to you, Mr. Tulip.”
“And since you are newcomers, I can offer you an introductory hundred-dollar theft which will give you subsequent immunity for a full twenty-six months plus this booklet of restaurant, livery hire, clothing, and entertainment vouchers worth a full twenty-five dollars at today’s prices. Your neighbors will admire—”
Mr. Tulip’s arm moved in a blur. One banana-bunch hand caught the thief around the neck and slammed his head against the wall.
“Unfortunately, Mr. Tulip’s middle name is ‘Bastard,’” said Mr. Pin, lighting a cigarette. The meaty sounds of his colleague’s permanent anger continued behind him as he picked up the wineglasses and examined them critically.
“Tch…cheap paste, not crystal at all,” he said. “Who can you trust these days? It makes you despair.”
The body of the thief slumped to the ground.
“I think I will go for the —ing barbecue set,” said Mr. Tulip, stepping over it. “I see here where it contains a number of oh-so-useful skewers and spatulas that will add a —ing new dimension of enjoyment to those Al Fresco patio meals.” He ripped open the box and dragged out a blue and white apron, which he examined critically. “‘Kill the Cook!!!’” he said, slipping it over his head. “Hey, this is classy stuff. I’ll have to get some —ing friends, so’s they can envy me when I’m having meals with —ing Al Fresco. How about them —ing vouchers?”
“There’s never any good stuff in these things,” said Mr. Pin. “It’s just a way of shifting stuff no one can sell. See here…‘Twenty-five Percent Off Happy Hour Prices at Furby’s Castle of Cabbage’…” He tossed it aside.
“Not bad, though,” said Mr. Tulip. “And he only had twenty dollars on him, so it’s a —ing bargain.”
“I’ll be glad when we leave this place,” said Mr. Pin. “It’s too strange. Let’s just frighten the
dead man and get out of here.”
“Eyinnngg…GUT!”
The cry of the wild newspaper seller rang out across the twilight square as William set off back to Gleam Street. They were still selling well, he could see.
It was only by accident, as a citizen hurried past him, that he saw the headline:
WOMAN GIVES BIRTH TO COBRA
Surely Sacharissa hadn’t got out another edition by herself, had she? He ran back to the seller.
It wasn’t the Times. The title, in big bold type that was rather better than the stuff the dwarfs made, was:
“What’s all this?” he said to the seller, who was socially above Ron’s group by several layers of grime.
“All this what?”
“All this this!” The stupid interview with Drumknott had left William very annoyed. “Don’t ask me, guv. I get a penny for every one I sell, that’s all I know.” “‘Rain of Soup in Genua’? ‘Hen Lays Egg Three Times in Hurricane’? Where’d all this come from?”
“Look, guv, if I was a readin’ man I wouldn’t be flogging papers, right?”
“Someone else has started a paper!” said William. He cast his eyes down to the small print at the bottom of the single page and, in this paper, even the small print wasn’t very small. “In Gleam Street?”
He recalled the workmen bustling around outside the old warehouse. How could—but the Engravers’ Guild could, couldn’t they? They already had presses, and they certainly had the money. Tuppence was ridiculous, though, even for this single sheet of…of rubbish. If the seller got a penny, then how in the world could the printer make any money?
Then he realized: that wouldn’t be the point, would it…the point was to put the Times out of business.
A big red and white sign for the Inquirer was already in place across the street from the Bucket. More carts were queuing outside.
One of Goodmountain’s dwarfs was peering around from behind the wall.
“There’s three presses in there already,” he said. “You saw what they’ve done? They got it out in half an hour!”
“Yes, but it’s only one sheet. And it’s made-up stuff.” “Is it? Even the one about the snake?” “I’d bet a thousand dollars.” William remembered that the smaller print had said this had happened in Lancre. He revised his estimate. “I’d bet at least a hundred dollars.”
“That’s not the worst of it,” said the dwarf. “You’d better come in.”
At least the press was creaking away, but most of the dwarfs were idle. “Shall I give you the headlines?” said Sacharissa, as he entered. “You’d better,” said William, sitting down at his crowded desk. “Engravers Offer Dwarfs One Thousand Dollars for Press.” “Oh, no…”
“Vampire Iconographer and Hard-Working Writer Tempted with Five-Hundred-Dollar Salaries,” Sacharissa went on.
“Oh, really…”
“Dwarfs Buggered for Paper.”
“What?”
“That’s a direct quote from Mr. Goodmountain,” said Sacharissa. “I don’t pretend to know exactly what it means, but I understand they’ve got enough for only one more edition.”
“And if we want any more it’s five times the old price,” said Goodmountain, coming up. “The Engravers are buying it up. Supply and demand, King says.”
“King?” William’s brow wrinkled. “You mean Mr. King?”
“Yeah, King of the Golden River,” said the dwarf. “And, yeah, we could just about pay that but if them across the road are going to sell their sheet for tuppence we’ll be working for practically nothing.”
“Otto told the man from the Guild that he’d break his pledge if he saw him here again,” said Sacharissa. “He was very angry because the man was angling to find out how he was taking printable iconographs.”
“What about you?”
“I’m staying. I don’t trust them, especially when they’re so sneaky. They seemed very…low- class people,” said Sacharissa. “But what are we going to do?”
William bit his thumbnail and stared at his desk. When he moved his feet, a boot fetched up against the money chest with a reassuring thud.
“We could cut down a bit, I daresay,” said Goodmountain.
“Yes, but then people won’t buy the paper,” said Sacharissa. “And they ought to buy our paper, because it’s got real news in it.”
“The news in the Inquirer looks more interesting, I have to admit,” said Goodmountain.
“That’s because it doesn’t actually have to have any facts in it!” she snapped. “Now, I don’t mind going back to a dollar a day and Otto says he’d work for half a dollar if he can go on living in the cellar.”
William was still staring at nothing.
“Apart from the truth,” he said, in a distant voice, “what have we got that the Guild hasn’t got? Can we print faster?”
“One press against three? No,” said Goodmountain. “But I bet we can set type faster.” “And that means…?” “We can probably beat them in getting the first paper onto the street.” “Okay. That might help. Sacharissa, do you know anyone who wants a job?” “Know? Haven’t you been looking at the letters?” “Not as such…”
“Lots of people want a job! This is Ankh-Morpork!”
“All right, find the three letters with the fewest spelling mistakes and send Rocky around to hire the writers.”
“One of them was Mr. Bendy,” Sacharissa warned. “He wants more work. Not many interesting people are dying. Did you know he attends meetings for fun and very carefully writes down everything that’s said?”
“Does he do it accurately?” “I’m sure he does. He’s exactly that sort of person. But I don’t think we’ve got the space—” “Tomorrow morning we’ll go to four pages. Don’t look like that. I’ve got more stuff about Vetinari, and we’ve got, oh, twelve hours to get some paper.”
“I told you, King won’t sell us any more paper at a decent price,” said Goodmountain. “There’s a story right there, then,” said William. “I mean—”
“Yes, I know. I’ve got some stuff to write, and then you and me will go to see him. Oh, and send someone to the semaphore tower, will you? I want to send a clacks to the King of Lancre. I think I met him once.”
“Clacks cost money. Lots of money.”
“Do it anyway. We’ll find the money somehow.” William leaned over towards the cellar ladder. “Otto?”
The vampire emerged to waist height. He was holding a half-dismantled iconograph in his hand. “Vot can I do for you?” “Can you think of anything extra we can do to sell more papers?”
“Vot do you vant now? Pictures that jump out of zer page? Pictures zat talk? Pictures vere zer eyes follow you around zer room?”
“There’s no need to take offense,” said William. “It wasn’t as if I asked for color or anything—” “Color?” said the vampire. “Is that all? Color iss eazypeazy. How soon do you vant it?” “Can’t be done,” said Goodmountain firmly.
“Oh, zo you say? Is there somevhere here that makes colored glass?”
“Yeah, I know the dwarf who runs the stained-glass works in Phedre Road,” said Goodmountain. “They do hundreds of shades, but—”
“I vish to see samples right now. And of inks, too. You can get colored inks alzo?”
“That’s easy,” said the dwarf, “but you’d need hundreds of different ones…wouldn’t you?”
“No, ziz is not so. I vill make you a list of vot I require. I cannot promise an absolutely vunderful job first cat out of zer bag, off course. I mean you should not ask me for zer subtle play of light of autumn leafs or anyzing like zat. But zomething with stronk shades should be fine. Zis vill be fine?”
“It’d be amazing.” “Zank you.” William stood up. “And now,” he said, “let’s go and see the King of the Golden River.”
“I’ve always been puzzled why people call him that,” said Sacharissa. “I mean, there’s no river of gold around here, is there?”
“Gentlemen.”
Mr. Slant was waiting in the hall of the empty house. He stood up when the New Firm entered, and clutched his briefcase. He looked as if he was in an unusually bad temper.
“Where have you been?”
“Getting a bite, Mr. Slant. You didn’t turn up this morning, and Mr. Tulip gets hungry.” “I told you to maintain a very low profile.” “Mr. Tulip isn’t good at low profiles. Anyway, it all went off well. You must have heard. Oh, we nearly got killed because you didn’t tell us a lot of stuff, and that’s going to cost you but, hey, who cares about us? What’s the problem?”
Mr. Slant glared at them.
“My time is valuable, Mr. Pin. So I will not spin this out. What did you do with the dog?”
“No one said anything to us about that dog,” said Mr. Tulip, and Mr. Pin knew he’d got the tone wrong. “Ah, so you encountered the dog,” said Mr. Slant. “Where is it?” “Gone. Ran off. Bit our —ing legs and ran off.”
Mr. Slant sighed. It was like the wind from an ancient tomb.
“I did tell you that the Watch has a werewolf on the staff,” he said. “Well? So what?” said Mr. Pin. “A werewolf would have no difficulty in talking to a dog.”
“What? You’re telling us people will listen to a dog?” said Mr. Pin.
“Unfortunately, yes,” said Mr. Slant. “A dog has got personality. Personality counts for a lot. And the legal precedents are clear. In the history of this city, gentlemen, we have put on trial at various times seven pigs, a tribe of rats, four horses, one flea, and a swarm of bees. Last year a parrot was allowed as a prosecution witness in a serious murder case, and I had to arrange a witness protection scheme for it. I believe it is now pretending to be a very large budgerigar a long way away.”
Mr. Slant shook his head. “Animals, alas, have their place in a court of law. There are all kinds of objections that could be made but the point is, Mr. Pin, that Commander Vimes will build a case on it. He will start questioning…people. He already knows things are not right, but he has to work within the bounds of proof and evidence, and he has neither. If he finds the dog, I think things will unravel.”
“Slip him a few thousand dollars,” said Mr. Pin. “That always works with watchmen.”
“I believe that the last person who tried to bribe Vimes still doesn’t have full use of one of his fingers,” said Mr. Slant.
“We did everything you —ing told us!” shouted Mr. Tulip, pointing a sausage-thick finger. Mr. Slant looked him up and down, as if seeing him for the first time. “‘Kill the Cook!!!’” he said. “How amusing. However, I understood that we were employing professionals.”
Mr. Pin had seen this one coming and once again caught Mr. Tulip’s fist in midair, being momentarily lifted off his feet.
“The envelopes, Mr. Tulip,” he sang. “This man knows things…” “Hard to know any —ing thing when you’re dead,” snarled Mr. Tulip. “Actually the mind becomes crystal clear,” said Mr. Slant. He stood up, and Mr. Pin noticed how a zombie rises, using pairs of muscles in turn, not so much standing as unfolding upwards.
“Your…other assistant is still safe?” Slant said.
“Back down in the cellar, drunk as a skunk,” said Mr. Pin. “I don’t see why we don’t just scrag
him right now. He nearly turned and ran when he saw Vetinari. If the man hadn’t been so surprised we’d have been in big trouble. Who’d notice one more corpse in a city like this?”
“The Watch, Mr. Pin. How many times must I tell you this? They are uncannily good at noticing things.”
“Mr. Tulip here won’t leave ’em much to notice—” Mr. Pin stopped. “The Watch frighten you that much, do they?”
“This is Ankh-Morpork,” snapped the lawyer. “We are a very cosmopolitan city. Being dead in Ankh-Morpork is sometimes only an inconvenience, do you understand? We have wizards, we have mediums of all sizes. And bodies do have a habit of turning up. We want nothing that is going to give the Watch a clue, do you understand?”
“They’d listen to a —ing dead man?” said Mr. Tulip.
“I don’t see why not. You are,” said the zombie. He relaxed a little. “Anyway, it is always possible that there may be further use for your…colleague. Some further little outing to convince the unconvinced. He is too valuable an asset to…retire just yet.”
“Yeah, okay. We’ll keep him in a bottle. But we want extra for the dog,” said Mr. Pin.
“It’s only a dog, Mr. Pin,” said Slant, raising his eyebrows. “Even Mr. Tulip could outthink a dog, I expect.”
“Got to find the dog first,” said Mr. Pin, stepping smartly in front of his colleague. “Lots of dogs in this town.”
The zombie sighed again.
“I can add another five thousand dollars in jewels to your fee,” he said. He held up a hand. “And please don’t insult both of us by saying ‘ten’ automatically. The task is not hard. Lost dogs in this town either end up running with one of the feral packs or begin a new life as a pair of gloves.”
“I want to know who’s giving me these orders,” said Mr. Pin. He could feel the weight of the Dis-organizer inside his jacket.
Mr. Slant looked surprised. “Me, Mr. Pin.” “Your clients, I meant.” “Oh, really!”
“This is going to get political,” Mr. Pin persisted. “You can’t fight politics. I’m going to need to know how far we’ve got to run when people find out what happened. And who’s going to protect us if we’re caught.”
“In this city, gentlemen,” said Mr. Slant, “the facts are never what they seem. Take care of the dog, and…others will look after you. There are plans afoot. Who can say what really happened? People are easily confused, and here I speak as one who has spent centuries in courtrooms. Apparently, they say, a lie can run around the world before the truth has got its boots on. What an obnoxious little phrase, don’t you think? So…do not panic, all will be well. And do not be stupid either. My…clients have long memories and deep pockets. Other killers can be hired. Do you understand me?” He snapped the catches on his case. “Good day to you.”
The door swung to after him.
There was a rattling behind Mr. Pin as Mr. Tulip pulled out his set of stylish executive barbecue tools.
“What are you doing?”
“That —ing zombie is going to end up on the end of a couple of —ing handy and versatile kebab skewers,” said Mr. Tulip. “An’ then I’m gonna put an edge on this —ing spatula. An’ then…then I’m gonna get medieval on his arse.”
There were more pressing problems, but this one intrigued Mr. Pin. “How, exactly?” he said. “I thought maybe a maypole,” said Mr. Tulip reflectively. “An’ then a display of country dancing, land tillage under the three-field system, several plagues, and, if my —ing hand ain’t too tired, the invention of the —ing horse collar.”
“Sounds good,” said Mr. Pin. “Now let’s find that damn dog.” “How we gonna do that?” “Intelligently,” said Mr. Pin. “I hate that —ing way.”
He was called King of the Golden River. This was a recognition of his wealth and achievements and the source of his success, which was not quite the classical river of gold. It was a considerable advance on his former nickname, which was Piss Harry.
Harry King had made his fortune by the careful application of the old adage: where there’s muck there’s brass. There was money to be made out of things that people threw away. Especially the very human things that people threw away.
The real foundations of his fortune came when he started leaving empty buckets at various
hostelries around the city center, especially those that were more than a gutter’s length from the river. He charged a very modest fee to take them away when they were full. It became part of the life of every pub landlord; they’d hear a clank in the middle of the night and turn over in their sleep content in the knowledge that one of Piss Harry’s men was, in a small way, making the world a better- smelling place.
They didn’t wonder what happened to the full buckets, but Harry King had learned something that can be the key to great riches: there is very little, however disgusting, that isn’t used somewhere in some industry. There are people out there who want large quantities of ammonia and saltpeter. If you can’t sell it to the alchemists then the farmers probably want it. If even the farmers don’t want it then there is nothing, nothing, however gross, that you can’t sell to the tanners.
Harry felt like the only man in a mining camp who knows what gold looks like.
He started taking on a whole street at a time, and branched out. In the well-to-do areas the householders paid him, paid him to take away night soil, the by now established buckets, the horse manure, the dustbins, and even the dog muck. Dog muck? Did they have any idea how much the tanners paid for the finest white dog muck? It was like being paid to take away squishy diamonds.
Harry couldn’t help it. The world fell over itself to give him money. Someone, somewhere, would pay him for a dead horse or two tons of prawns so far beyond their best-before date it couldn’t be seen with a telescope, and the most wonderful part of all was that someone had already paid him to take them away. If anything absolutely failed to find a buyer, not even from the cats-meat men, not even from the tanners, not even from Mr. Dibbler himself, there were the mighty compost heaps downstream of the city, where the volcanic heat of decomposition made fertile soil (“10p a bag, bring your own bag…”) out of everything that was left including, according to rumor, various shadowy businessmen who had come second in a takeover battle (“…brings your dahlias up a treat”).
He’d kept the wood-pulp-and-rags business closer to home, though, along with the huge vats that contained the golden foundations of his fortune, because it was the only part of his business that his wife, Effie, would talk about. Rumor had it that she had also been behind the removal of the much admired sign over the entrance to his yard, which said: H. King—Taking the Piss Since 1961. Now it read: H. King—Recycling Nature’s Bounty.
A small door within the large gates was opened by a troll. Harry was very forward-looking when it came to employing the nonhuman races, and had been among the first employers in the city to give a job to a troll. As far as organic substances were concerned, they had no sense of smell.
“Yus?”
“I’d like to speak to Mr. King, please.” “What abarht?” “I want to buy a considerable amount of paper from him. Tell him it’s Mr. de Worde.”
“Right.”
The door slammed shut. They waited. After a few minutes the door opened again. “Der King will see you now,” the troll announced. And so they were led into the yard of a man who, rumor said, was stockpiling used paper hankies against the day somebody found a way of extracting silver from bogeys.
On either side of the door huge black Rottweilers flung themselves against the bars of their day cages. Everyone knew Harry let them have the run of the yard at night. He made sure that everyone knew. And any nocturnal miscreant would have to be really good with dogs unless they wanted to end up as a few pounds of Tanners Grade 1 (White).
The King of the Golden River had his office in a two-story shed that overlooked the yard, from where he could survey the steaming mounds and cisterns of his empire.
Even half-hidden by his big desk, Harry King was an enormous man, pink and shiny-faced, with a few strands of hair teased across his head; it was hard to imagine him not in shirtsleeves and braces, even when he wasn’t, or smoking a huge cigar, which he’d never been seen without. Perhaps it was some kind of defense against the odors which were, in a way, his stock in trade.
“Evenin’, lads,” he said amiably. “What can I do for you? As if I didn’t know.” “Do you remember me, Mr. King?” said William. Harry nodded. “You’re Lord de Worde’s son, right? You put a piece in that letter of yourn last year when our Daphne got wed, right? My Effie was that impressed, all those nobs reading about our Daphne.”
“It’s a rather bigger letter now, Harry.”
“Yes, I did hear about that,” said the fat man. “Some of ’em’s already turnin’ up in our collections. Useful stuff, I’m getting the lads to store it sep’rate.”
His cigar shifted from one side of his mouth to the other. Harry could not read or write, a fact which had never stopped him besting those who could. He employed hundreds of workers to sort through the garbage; it was cheap enough to employ a few more who could sort through words.
“Mr. King—” William began.
“I ain’t daft, lads,” said Harry. “I know why you’re here. But business is business. You know how it is.”
“We won’t have a business without paper!” Goodmountain burst out.
The cigar shifted again. “And you’d be—?” “This is Mr. Goodmountain,” said William. “My printer.”
“Dwarf, eh?” said Harry, looking Goodmountain up and down. “Nothing against dwarfs, me, but you ain’t good sorters. Gnolls don’t cost much but the grubby little buggers eat half the rubbish. Trolls are okay. They stop with me ’cos I pays ’em well. Golems is best—they’ll sort stuff all day and all night. Worth their weight in gold, which is bloody near what they want payin’ these days.” The cigar began another journey back across the mouth. “Sorry, lads. A deal’s a deal. Wish I could help you. Sold right out of paper. Can’t.”
“You’re knocking us back, just like that?” said Goodmountain. Harry gave him a narrow-eyed look through the haze. “You talking to me about knocking back? Don’t know what a tosheroon is, do you?” he said. The dwarf shrugged.
“Yes. I do,” said William. “There’s several meanings, but I think you’re referring to a big caked ball of mud and coins, such as you might find in some crevice in an old drain where the water forms an eddy. They can be quite valuable.”
“What? You’ve got hands on you like a girl,” said Harry, so surprised that the cigar momentarily drooped. “How come you know that?”
“I like words, Mr. King.”
“I started out as a muckraker when I was three,” said Harry, pushing his chair back. “Found me first tosheroon on day one. O’course, one of the big kids nicked it off me right there. And you tell me about being knocked back? But I had a nose for the job even then. Then I—”
They sat and listened, William more patiently than Goodmountain. It was fascinating, anyway, if you had the right kind of mind, although he knew a lot of the story; Harry King told it at every opportunity.
Young Harry King had been a mudlark with vision, combing the banks of the river and even the surface of the turbid Ankh itself for lost coins, bits of metal, useful lumps of coal, anything that had some value somewhere. By the time he was eight he was employing other kids. Whole stretches of the river belonged to him. Other gangs kept away, or were taken over. Harry wasn’t a bad fighter, and he could afford to employ those who were better.
And so it had gone on, the ascent of the King through horse manure sold by the bucket (guaranteed well stamped down) to rags and bones and scrap metal and household dust and the
famous buckets, where the future really was golden. It was a kind of history of civilization, but seen from the bottom looking up.
“You’re not a member of a Guild, Mr. King?” said William, during a pause for breath.
The cigar traveled from one side to the other and back quite fast, a sure sign that he’d hit a nerve.
“Damn Guilds,” said its owner. “They said I should join the Beggars! Me! I never begged for nothin’, not in my whole life! The nerve! But I’ve seen ’em all off. I won’t deal with no Guild. I pay my lads well, and they stand by me.”
“It’s the Guilds that are trying to break us, Mr. King. You know that. I know you get to hear about anything. If you can’t sell us paper, we’ve lost.”
“What’d I be if I broke a deal?” said Harry King.
“This is my tosheroon, Mr. King,” said William. “And the kids who want to take it off me are
big.”
Harry was silent for a while, and then lumbered to his feet and crossed to the big window. “Come and look here, lads,” he said. At one end of the yard was a big treadmill, operated by a couple of golems. It powered a
creaking endless belt that crossed most of the yard. At the other end, several trolls with broad shovels fed the belt from a heap of trash that was itself constantly refilled by a line of carts.
Lining the belt itself were golems and trolls and even the occasional human. In the flicking torchlight they watched the moving debris carefully. Occasionally a hand would dart out and pitch something into a bin behind the worker.
“Fish heads, bones, rags, paper…I got twenty-seven different bins so far, including one for gold and silver, ’cos you’d be amazed what gets thrown away by mistake. Tinkle, tinkle, little spoon, wedding ring will follow soon…that’s what I used to sing to my little girls. Stuff like your paper of news goes in Bin Six, Low Grade Paper Waste. I sells most of that to Bob Holtely up in Five and Seven Yard.”
“What does he do with it?” said William, noting the “Low Grade.”
“Pulps it for lavatory paper,” said Mr. King. “The wife swears by it. Pers’nly I cut out the middleman.” He sighed, apparently oblivious of the sudden sag in William’s self-esteem. “Y’know, sometimes I stand here of an evenin’ when the line is rumbling and the sunset is shinin’ on the settlin’ tanks and, I don’t mind admitting it, a tear comes to my eye.”
“To tell you the truth, it comes to mine, too, sir,” said William.
“Now then, lad…when that kid nicked my first tosheroon, I didn’t go around complaining, did I? I knew I’d got an eye for it, see? I carried on, and I found plenty more. And on my eighth birthday I paid a couple of trolls to seek out the man who’d pinched my first one and slap seven kinds of snot out of him. Did you know that?”
“No, Mr. King.”
Harry King stared at William through the smoke. William felt that he was being turned over and examined, like something found in the trash.
“My youngest daughter, Hermione…she’s getting married at the end of next week,” said Harry. “Big show. Temple of Offler. Choirs and everything. I’m inviting all the top nobs. Effie insisted. They won’t come, o’course. Not for Piss Harry.”
“The Times would have been there, though,” said William. “With colored pictures. Except we go out of business tomorrow.”
“Colored, eh? You get someone to paint ’em in, do you?”
“No. We’ve…got a special way,” said William, hoping against hope that Otto was serious. He wasn’t just out on a limb here, he was dangerously out of the tree.
“That’d be something to see,” said Harry. He took out his cigar, stared reflectively at the end, and put it back in his mouth. Through the smoke, he watched William carefully.
William felt the distinct unease of a well-educated man who has to confront the fact that the illiterate man watching him could probably outthink him three times over.
“Mr. King, we really need that paper,” he said, to break the thoughtful silence.
“There’s something about you, Mr. de Worde,” said the King. “I buy and sell clerks when I need them, and you don’t smell like a clerk to me. You’ve got the air about you of a man who’d scrabble through a ton o’ shit to find a farthin’, and I’m wonderin’ why that is.”
“Look, Mr. King, will you please sell us some paper at the old price?” said William. “Couldn’t do that. I told you. A deal’s a deal. The Engravers’ve paid me,” said Harry shortly. William opened his mouth, but Goodmountain laid a hand on his arm. The King was clearly working his way to the end of a line of thought.
Harry went over to the window again, and stared pensively at the yard with its steaming piles. Then…
“Oh, will you look at that,” said Harry, stepping back from the window in tremendous astonishment. “See that cart at the other gate down there?”
They saw the cart.
“I must’ve told the lads a hundred times, don’t leave a cart all laden up and ready to go right by an open gate like that. Someone’ll nick it, I told ’em.”
William wondered who would steal anything from the King of the Golden River, a man with all those red-hot compost heaps.
“That’s the last quarter of the order for the Engravers’ Guild,” said Harry, to the world in general. “I’d have to repay ’em if it got half-inched right out of my yard. I’ll have to tell the foreman. He’s getting forgetful these days.”
“We should be leaving, William,” said Goodmountain, grabbing William’s arm. “Why? We haven’t—” “However can we repay you, Mr. King?” said the dwarf, dragging William towards the door.
“The bridesmaids’ll be wearing oh-de-nill, whatever that is,” said the King of the Golden River. “Oh, and if I don’t get eighty dollars from you by the end of the month, you lads will be in deep”—the cigar did a double length of the mouth—“trouble. Head downwards.”
Two minutes later the cart was creaking out of the yard, under the curiously uninterested eyes of the troll foreman.
“No, it’s not stealing,” said Goodmountain emphatically, shaking the reins. “The King pays the bastards back their money and we pay him the old price. So we’re all happy except for the Inquirer, and who cares about them?”
“I didn’t like the bit about the deep pause trouble,” said William. “Head downwards.” “I’m shorter’n you so I lose out either way up,” said the dwarf. After watching the cart disappear, the King yelled downstairs for one of his clerks and told him to fetch a copy of the Times from Bin Six. He sat impassively, except for the oscillating cigar, while the stained and crumpled paper was read to him.
After a while his smile broadened, and he asked the clerk to read a few extracts again.
“Ah,” he said, when the man had finished. “I reckoned that was it. The boy’s a born muckraker. Shame for him he was born a long way from honest muck.” “Shall I do a credit note for the Engravers, Mr. King?” “Aye.”
“You reckon you’ll get your money back, Mr. King?”
Harry King usually didn’t take this sort of thing from clerks. They were there to do the adding- up, not discuss policy. On the other hand, Harry had made a fortune seeing the sparkle in the mire, and sometimes you had to recognize expertise when you saw it.
“What color’s oh-de-nill?” he said.
“Oh, one of those difficult colors, Mr. King. A sort of light blue with a hint of green.” “Could you get ink that color?” “I could find out. It’d be expensive.”
The cigar made its traverse from one side of Harry King to the other. He was known to dote on his daughters, who he felt had rather suffered from having a father who needed to take two baths just to get dirty.
“We shall just have to keep an eye on our little writing man,” he said. “Tip off the lads, will you? I wouldn’t like to see our Effie disappointed.”
The dwarfs were working on the press again, Sacharissa noticed. It seldom stayed the same shape for more than a couple of hours. The dwarfs designed as they went along.
It looked to Sacharissa that the only tools a dwarf needed were his ax and some means of making fire. That’d eventually get him a forge, and with that he could make simple tools, and with those he could make complex tools, and with complex tools a dwarf could more or less make anything.
A couple of them were rummaging around in the industrial junk that was piled against the walls. A couple of metal mangles had been melted down for their iron already, and the rocking horses were being used to melt lead. One or two of the dwarfs had left the shed on mysterious errands, too, and returned carrying small sacks and furtive expressions. A dwarf is also very good at making use of things other people have thrown away, even if they haven’t actually thrown them away yet.
She was turning her attention to a report of the Nap Hill Jolly Pals annual meeting when a crash and some cursing in Uberwaldean, a good cursing language, made her run over to the cellar entrance.
“Are you all right, Mr. Chriek? Do you want me to get the dustpan and brush?”
“Bodrozvachski zhaltziet!…oh, sorry, Miss Sacharissa! Zere has been a minor pothole on zer road to progress…”
Sacharissa made her way down the ladder.
Otto was at his makeshift bench. Boxes of demons hung on the wall. Some salamanders dozed in
their cages. In a big dark jar, land eels slithered. But a jar next to it was broken.
“I vas clumsy and knocked it over,” said Otto, looking embarrassed. “And now zer stupid eel as gone behind the bench.”
“Does it bite?”
“Oh no, zey are very lazy wretches—”
“What is this you’ve been working on, Otto?” Sacharissa said, turning to look closer at something big on the bench. He tried to dart in front of her.
“Oh, it is all very experimental—” “The way of making colored plates?” “Yes, but it is just a crude lash-up—” Sacharissa caught sight of a movement out of the corner of her eye. The escaped land eel, having got bored behind the bench, was making a very sluggish bid for new horizons where an eel could wriggle proud and horizontal.
“Please don’t—” Otto began.
“Oh, it’s all right, I’m not at all squeamish—” Sacharissa’s hand closed on the eel. She came around with Otto’s black handkerchief being flapped desperately in her face. “Oh, my goodness…” she said, trying to sit up. Otto’s face was a picture of such terror that Sacharissa forgot her own splitting headache for a moment.
“What’s happened to you?” she said. “You look terrible.” Otto jerked back, tried to stand up, and half-collapsed against the bench, clutching at his chest. “Cheese!” he moaned. “Please get me some cheese! Or a big apple! Something to bite! Pleeease!”
“There’s nothing like that down here—”
“Keep avay from me! And do not breathe like zat!” Otto wailed.
“Like what?”
“Zer bosoms going in and out and up and down like zat! I am a vampire! A fainting young lady, please understand, zer panting, zer heaving of zer bosoms…it calls somezing terrible from within…” With a lurch he pushed himself upright and gripped the black twist of ribbon from his lapel. “But I vill be stronk!” he screamed. “I vill not let everyvun down!”
He stood stiffly to attention, although slightly blurred because the vibration shaking him from head to foot, and in a trembling voice sang: “Oh vill you come to zer mission, vill you come, come, come, Zere’s a nice cup of tea and a bun, and a bun—”
The ladder was suddenly alive with tumbling dwarfs.
“Are you all right, miss?” said Boddony, running forward with his ax. “Has he tried anything?” “No, no! He’s—” “—zer drink zat’s in zer livink vein, Is not zer drink for me—” Sweat was running down Otto’s face. He stood with one hand pressed over his heart.
“That’s right, Otto!” shouted Sacharissa. “Fight it! Fight it!” She turned to the dwarfs. “Have any of you got any raw meat?”
“…to life anew and temperance too, And to pure cold vater ve’ll come…” Veins were throbbing on Otto’s pale head.
“Got some fresh rat fillets upstairs,” muttered one of the dwarfs. “Cost me tuppence…” “You get them right now, Gowdie,” snapped Boddony. “This looks bad!” “—oh ve can drink brandy and gin if it’s handy, and ve can sup vhiskey and rum, but zer drink ve abhor and ve drink no more is zer—”
“Tuppence is tuppence, that’s all I’m saying!” “Look, he’s starting to twitch!” said Sacharissa. “And he can’t sing, either,” said Gowdie. “All right, all right, I’m going, I’m going…” Sacharissa patted Otto’s clammy hand. “You can beat it!” she said urgently. “We’re all here for you! Aren’t we, everyone? Aren’t we?” Under her baleful gaze the dwarfs responded with a chorus of half-hearted “yesses,” even though Boddony’s expression suggested that he wasn’t certain what Otto was here for.
Gowdie came back with a small package. She snatched it out of his hand and held it out to Otto,
who reared back.
“No, it’s just rat!” said Sacharissa. “Perfectly okay! You’re allowed rat, right?” Otto froze for a moment, and then snatched up the packet. He bit into it.
In the sudden silence Sacharissa wondered if she wasn’t hearing a very faint sound, like the straw at the bottom of a milkshake.
After a few seconds Otto opened his eyes, and then looked sidelong at the dwarfs. He dropped the packet.
“Oh, vot shame! Vere can I put my face? Oh, vot must you zink of me…” Sacharissa clapped with desperate enthusiasm. “No, no! We’re all very impressed! Aren’t we, everyone?” Out of Otto’s sight, she waved one hand very deliberately at the dwarfs. There was another ragged chorus of agreement.
“I mean, I haf been going through ‘cold bat’ now for more zan three months,” muttered Otto. “It is such a disgusting thing to break down now and—”
“Oh, raw meat’s nothing,” said Sacharissa. “That’s allowed, isn’t it?” “Yes, but for a second zere I nearly—” “Yes, but you didn’t,” said Sacharissa. “That’s what’s important. You wanted to and didn’t.” She turned to the dwarfs. “You can all go back to what you were doing,” she said. “Otto is perfectly all right now.”
“Are you sure—” Boddony began, and then nodded. He’d rather have argued with a wild vampire than Sacharissa at this moment. “Right you are, miss.”
Otto sat down, wiping his forehead, as the dwarfs filed out. Sacharissa patted his hand. “Do you want a drink—”
“Oh!”
“—of water, Otto?” said Sacharissa.
“No, no, everyzink is okay, I think…Uh. Oh dear. My goodness. I am zo sorry. You zink you are on top of it, and zen suddenly it all comes back to you. Vot a day…”
“Otto?”
“Yes, miss?”
“What actually happened when I grabbed the eel, Otto?” He winced. “I zink zis is maybe not the time—”
“Otto, I saw things. There were…flames. And people. And noise. Just for a moment. It was like watching a whole day go past in a second! What happened?”
“Vell,” Otto said reluctantly, “you know how salamanders absorb light?” “Yes, of course.” “Vell, zer eels absorb dark light. Not darkness, exactly, but zer light vithin darkness. Dark light…you see, dark light…vell, it has not been properly studied. It is heavier than normal light, you see, so most of it is under zer sea or in zer really deep caves in Ubervald, but zere is always a little of it even in normal darkness. It really is very fascinating—”
“It’s a kind of magical light. Right. Could we just get more towards the point a bit?”
“I haf heard it said that dark light is zer original light from which all other types of light came —”
“Otto!”
He held up a pale hand. “I haf to tell you zese things! Haf you heard the theory zat zere is no such thing as zer present? Because if it is divisible, zen it cannot be zer present, and if it is not divisible, zen it cannot have a beginning which connects to zer past and an end zat connects to zer future? Zer philosopher Heidehollen tells us zat the universe is just a cold soup of time, all time mixed up together, and vot we call zer passage of time is merely qvantum fluctuations in zer fabric of space- time.”
“You have very long winter evenings in Uberwald, don’t you?”
“You see, dark light is held to be zer proof of zis,” Otto went on, ignoring her. “It is a light without time. Vot it illuminates, you see…is not necessarily now.”
He paused, as if waiting for something.
“Are you saying it takes pictures of the past?” said Sacharissa. “Or zer future. Or somevhere else. Of course, in reality zere is no difference.” “And all this you point at people’s heads?”
Otto looked worried. “I am finding strange side things. Oh, zer dwarfs say that dark light had odd…effects, but zey are very superstitious people so I did not take that seriously. However…”
He scrabbled among the debris on his bench, and picked up an iconograph.
“Oh, dear. Zis is so complicated,” said Otto. “Look, zer philosopher Kling says zer mind has a dark side and a light side, you see, and dark light…is seen by zer dark eyes of zer mind…”
He paused again.
“Yes?” said Sacharissa politely.
“I vas vaiting for zer roll of thunder,” said the vampire. “But, alas, zis is not Ubervald.” “You’ve lost me there,” said Sacharissa. “Vell, you see, if I vas to say something portentous like ‘zer dark eyes of zer mind’ back home in Ubervald, zere would be a sudden crash of thunder,” said Otto. “And if I vas to point at a castle on a towering crag and say ‘Yonder is…zer castle,’ a volf would be bound to howl mournfully.” He sighed. “In zer old country, zer scenery is psychotropic and knows vot is expected of it. Here, alas, people just look at you in a funny vay.”
“All right, all right, it’s a magical light that takes uncanny pictures,” said Sacharissa.
“That’s a very…newspaper vay of putting it,” said Otto politely. He showed her the iconograph. “Look at zis one. I vanted a picture of a dwarf vorking in the Patrician’s study and I got zis.”
The picture was a wash of blurs and swirls, and there was a vague outline of a dwarf, lying down on the floor and examining something. But superimposed on this was quite a clear picture of Lord Vetinari. Two pictures of Lord Vetinari, each figure staring at the other.
“Well, it’s his office and he’s always in there,” said Sacharissa. “Does the…magic light pick that up?”
“Maybe,” said Otto. “Ve know that vot is physically zere is not alvays vot is really zere. Look at zis vun.”
He handed her another picture.
“Oh, that’s a good one of William,” she said. “In the cellar. And…that’s Lord de Worde standing just behind him, isn’t it?”
“Is it?” said the vampire. “I don’t know zer man. I do know that he vas not in zer cellar ven I took the picture. But…you only have to talk to Villiam for any length of time to see that, in a vay, his father is alvays looking over his shoulder—”
“That’s creepy.”
Sacharissa looked around the cellar. The stone walls were old and stained, but they certainly weren’t blackened.
“I just saw…people. Men fighting. Flames. And…silver rain. How can it rain underground?” “I do not know. That’s vhy I study dark light.” Noises above suggested that William and Goodmountain had returned.
“I wouldn’t mention this to anyone else,” said Sacharissa, heading for the ladder. “We’ve got enough to deal with. That’s creepy.”
There was no name outside the bar, because those who knew what it was didn’t need one. Those who didn’t know what it was shouldn’t go in. Ankh-Morpork’s undead were, on the whole, a law-abiding bunch, if only because they knew the law paid them a certain amount of special attention, but if you walked into the place known as Biers on a dark night and had no business there, who would ever know?
For the vampires (those, that is, that weren’t gathered around a harmonium at the Temperance Mission nervously singing songs about how much they liked cocoa) it was a place to hang up. For the werewolves, it was where you let your hair down. For the bogeymen, it was a place to come out of the closet. For the ghouls, it did a decent meat pasty and chips.
All eyes, and that was not the same thing as the number of heads multiplied by two, turned to the door when it creaked open. The newcomers were surveyed from dark corners. They wore black, but that didn’t mean anything. Anyone could wear black.
They walked up to the bar, and Mr. Pin rapped on the stained wood.
The barman nodded. The important thing, he’d found, was to make sure ordinary people paid for their drinks as they bought them. It wasn’t good business to let them run a tab. That showed an unwarranted optimism about the future.
“What can I—” he began, before Mr. Tulip’s hand caught him around the back of the neck and rammed his head down hard on the bar.
“I am not having a nice day,” said Mr. Pin, turning to the world in general, “and Mr. Tulip here suffers from unresolved personality conflicts. Has anyone got any questions?” An indistinct hand rose in the gloom. “What cook?” said a voice.
Mr. Pin opened his mouth to reply, and then turned to his colleague, who was examining the bar’s array of very strange drinks. All cocktails are sticky; the ones in Biers tended to be stickier.
“Says ‘Kill the Cook!!!’” said the voice.
Mr. Tulip rammed two long kebab skewers into the bar, where they vibrated. “What cooks’ve you got?” he said. “It’s a good apron,” said the voice in the gloom.
“It is the —ing envy of all my friends,” Mr. Tulip growled.
In the silence Mr. Pin heard the unseen drinkers calculating the likely number of friends of Mr. Tulip. It was not a calculation that would involve a simple thinker taking off his shoes. “Ah. Right,” said someone. “Now, we don’t want any trouble with you people,” said Mr. Pin. “Not as such. We simply wish to meet a werewolf.”
Another voice in the gloom said: “Vy?” “Got a job for him,” said Mr. Pin. There was some muffled laughter in the darkness and a figure shuffled forwards. It was about the size of Mr. Pin; it had pointy ears; it had a hairstyle that clearly continued to its ankles, inside its ragged clothes. Tufts of hair stuck out of holes in its shirt and densely thatched the backs of its hands.
“’m part werewolf,” it said. “Which part?” “That’s a funny joke.” “Can you talk to dogs?” The self-confessed part-werewolf looked around at its unseen audience, and for the first time Mr. Pin felt a twinge of disquiet. The sight of Mr. Tulip’s slowly spinning eye and throbbing forehead was not having the usual effect. There were rustlings in the dark. He was sure he heard a snigger.
“Yep,” said the werewolf.
The hell with this, thought Mr. Pin. He pulled out his pistol bow in one practiced movement, and held it an inch from the werewolf’s face.
“This is tipped with silver,” he said.
He was amazed at the speed of movement. Suddenly a hand was against his neck, and five sharp points pressed into his skin.
“These ain’t,” said the werewolf. “Let’s see who finishes squeezin’ first, eh?” “Yeah, right,” said Mr. Tulip, who was also holding something. “That’s just a barbecue fork,” said the werewolf, giving it barely a glance. “You want to see how —ing fast I can throw it?” said Mr. Tulip. Mr. Pin tried to swallow, but only got halfway. Dead people, he knew, didn’t squeeze that hard, but it was at least ten steps to the door and the space seemed to be getting wider by the heartbeat.
“Hey,” he said. “There’s no need for this, right? Why don’t we all loosen up? And, hey, it would help me talk to you if you were your normal shape…”
“No problem, my friend.”
The werewolf winced and shuddered, without at any point letting go of Mr. Pin’s neck. The face contorted so much, features flowing together, that even Mr. Pin, who in other circumstances quite enjoyed that sort of thing, had to look away.
This allowed him to see the shadow on the wall. It was, contrary to expectations, growing. So were its ears.
“Any qvestions?” said the werewolf. Now its teeth seriously interfered with its speech. Its breath smelled even worse than Mr. Tulip’s suit.
“Ah…” said Mr. Pin, standing on tiptoe. “I think we’ve come to the wrong place.” “I think zat also.” At the bar, Mr. Tulip bit the top off a bottle in a meaningful way.
Once again, the room was filled with the ferocious silence of calculation and the personal mathematics of profit and loss.
Mr. Tulip smashed a bottle against his forehead. At this point, he did not appear to be paying much attention to the room. He’d just happened to have a bottle in his hand which he did not need anymore. Putting it onto the bar would have required an unnecessary expenditure of hand-eye coordination.
People recalculated.
“Is he human?” said the werewolf.
“Well, of course, ‘human’ is just a word,” said Mr. Pin.
He felt weight slowly press down onto his toes as he was lowered to the floor. “I think perhaps we’ll just be going,” he said carefully. “Right,” said the werewolf. Mr. Tulip had smashed open a big jar of pickles, or at least things that were long, chubby, and green, and was trying to insert one up his nose.
“If we wanted to stay, we would,” said Mr. Pin.
“Right. But you want to go. So does your…friend,” said the werewolf. Mr. Pin backed towards the door. “Mr. Tulip, we have business elsewhere,” he said. “Sheesh, take the damn pickle out of your nose, will you? We’re supposed to be professionals!”
“That’s not a pickle,” said a voice in the dark.
Mr. Pin was uncharacteristically thankful when the door slammed behind them. To his surprise, he also heard the bolts shoot home.
“Well, that could have gone better,” he said, brushing dust and hair off his coat. “What now?” said Mr. Tulip. “Time to think of a plan B,” said Mr. Pin.
“Why don’t we just —ing hit people until someone tells us where the dog is?” said Mr. Tulip. “Tempting,” said Mr. Pin. “But we’ll leave that for plan C—” “Bugrit.”
They both turned.
“Bent treacle edges, I told ’em,” said Foul Ole Ron, lurching across the street, a wad of Timeses under one arm and the string of his nondescript mongrel in his other hand. He caught sight of the New Firm.
“Harglegarlyurp?” he said. “LayarrrBnip! You gents want a paper?”
It seemed to Mr. Pin that the last sentence, while in pretty much the same voice, had an intrusive,
not-quite-right quality. Apart from anything else, it made sense.
“You got some change?” he said to Mr. Tulip, patting his pockets. “You’re going to —ing buy one?” said his partner. “There’s a time and a place, Mr. Tulip, a time and a place. Here you are, mister.” “Millennium hand and shrimp, bugrit,” said Ron, adding, “Much obliged, gents.” Mr. Pin opened the Times. “This thing has got—” He stopped, and looked closer. “‘Have You Seen This Dog?’” he said. “Sheesh…” He stared at Ron.
“You sell lots of these things?” he said. “Qeedle the slops, I told ’em. Yeah, hundreds.” There it was again, the slight sensation of two voices.
“Hundreds,” said Mr. Pin. He looked down at the paper seller’s dog. It looked pretty much like the one in the paper, but all terriers looked alike. Anyway, this one was on a string. “Hundreds,” he said again, and read the short article again.
He stared.
“I think we have a plan B,” he said.
At ground level, the newspaper seller’s dog watched them carefully as they walked away. “That was too close for comfort,” it said, when they’d turned the corner. Foul Ole Ron put down his papers in a puddle and pulled a cold sausage from the depths of his hulking coat.
He broke it in three equal pieces.
William had dithered over that, but the Watch had supplied quite a good drawing and he felt right now a little friendly gesture in that direction would be a good idea. If he found himself in deep trouble, head downwards, he’d need someone to pull him out.
He’d rewritten the Patrician story, too, adding as much as he was certain of, and there wasn’t much of that. He was, frankly, stuck.
Sacharissa had penned a story about the opening of the Inquirer. William had hesitated about this, too. But it was news, after all. They couldn’t just ignore it, and it filled some space.
Besides, he liked the opening line, which began: “A would-be rival to Ankh-Morpork’s old established newspaper, the Times, has opened in Gleam Street…”
“You’re getting good at this,” he said, looking across the desk.
“Yes,” she said, “I now know that if I see a naked man I should definitely get his name and address, because—”
William joined in the chorus: “—names sell newspapers.”
He sat back and drank the really horrible tea the dwarfs made. Just for a moment there was an unusual feeling of bliss. Strange word, he thought. It’s one of those words that describe something that does not make a noise but, if it did make a noise, would sound just like that. Bliss. It’s like the sound of a soft meringue melting gently on a warm plate.
Here and now, he was free. The paper was put to bed, tucked up, had its prayers listened to. It was finished. The crew were already filing back in for more copies, cursing and spitting; they’d commandeered a variety of old trolleys and prams to cart their papers out into the streets. Of course, in an hour or so, the mouth of the press would be hungry again and he’d be back pushing the huge rock uphill, just like that character in mythology…what was his name…
“Who was that hero who was condemned to push a rock up a hill and every time he got it to the top it rolled down again?” he said.
Sacharissa didn’t look up.
“Someone who needed a wheelbarrow?” she said, spiking a piece of paper with some force. William recognized the voice of someone who still has an annoying job to do. “What are you working on?” he said.
“A report from the Ankh-Morpork Recovering Accordion Players Society,” she said, scribbling
fast.
“Is there something wrong with it?” “Yes. The punctuation. There isn’t any. I think we might have to order an extra box of commas.” “Why are you bothering with it, then?”
“Twenty-six people are mentioned by name.” “As accordionists?” “Yes.”
“Won’t they complain?”
“They didn’t have to play the accordion. Oh, and there was a big crash on Broad Way. A cart overturned and several tons of flour fell onto the road, causing a couple of horses to rear and upset their cartload of fresh eggs, and that caused another cart to shed thirty churns of milk…so what do you think of this as a headline?”
She held up a piece of paper on which she’d written:
CITY’S BIGGEST CAKE MIX-UP!!
William looked at it. Yes. Somehow it had everything. The sad attempt at humor was exactly right. It was just the sort of thing that would cause much mirth around Mrs. Arcanum’s table.
“Lose the second exclamation mark,” he said. “Otherwise I think it’s perfect. How did you hear about it?”
“Oh, Constable Fiddyment dropped in and told me,” said Sacharissa. She took down and shuffled papers unnecessarily. “I think he’s a bit sweet on me, to tell you the truth.”
A tiny, hitherto unregarded bit of William’s ego instantly froze solid. An awful lot of young men seemed happy to tell Sacharissa things. He heard himself say: “Vimes doesn’t want any of his officers to speak to us.”
“Yes, well, I don’t think telling me about a lot of smashed eggs counts, does it?” “Yes, but—” “Anyway, I can’t help it if young men want to tell me things, can I?” “I suppose not, but—” “Anyway, that’s it for tonight.” Sacharissa yawned. “I’m going home.” William got up so quickly he skinned his knees on the desk. “I’ll walk you there,” he said.
“Good grief, it’s nearly a quarter to eight,” said Sacharissa, putting on her coat. “Why do we keep on working?”
“Because the press doesn’t go to sleep,” said William.
As they stepped out into the silent street he wondered if Lord Vetinari had been right about the press. There was something…compelling about it. It was like a dog that stared at you until you fed it. A slightly dangerous dog. Dog bites man, he thought. But that’s not news. That’s olds.
Sacharissa let him walk her to the end of her street, where she made him stop.
“It’ll embarrass Grandfather if you’re seen with me,” she said. “I know it’s stupid, but… neighbors, you know? And all this Guild stuff…”
“I know. Um.”
The air hung heavy for a moment as they looked at each other.
“Er…I don’t know how to put this,” said William, knowing that sooner or later it had to be said, “but I ought to say that, though you are a very attractive girl, you’re not my type.”
She gave him the oldest look he had ever seen, and then said: “That took a lot of saying, and I would like to thank you.”
“I just thought that with me and you working together all the time—”
“No, I’m glad one of us said it,” she said. “And with smooth talk like that I bet you have the girls just lining up, right? See you tomorrow.”
He watched her walk down the street to her house. After a few seconds a lamp went on in an upper window.
By running very fast he arrived back at his lodgings just late enough for a Look from Mrs. Arcanum, but not so late as to be barred from the table for impoliteness; serious latecomers had to eat their supper at the table in the kitchen.
It was curry tonight. And one of the strange things about eating at Mrs. Arcanum’s was that you got more leftovers than you got original meals. That is, there were far more meals made up from what were traditionally considered the prudently usable remains of earlier meals—stews, bubble-and- squeak, curry—than there were meals at which those remains could have originated.
The curry was particularly strange, since Mrs. Arcanum considered foreign parts only marginally less unspeakable than private parts and therefore added the curious yellow curry powder with a very small spoon, lest everyone should suddenly tear their clothes off and do foreign things. The main ingredients appeared to be turnip and gritty rainwater-tasting sultanas and the remains of
some cold mutton, although William couldn’t remember when they’d had the original mutton, at any temperature.
This was not a problem for the other lodgers. Mrs. Arcanum provided big helpings, and they were men who measured culinary achievement by the amount you got on your plate. It might not taste astonishing, but you went to bed full and that was what mattered.
At the moment the news of the day was being discussed. Mr. Mackleduff had bought both the Inquirer and the two editions of the Times, in his role as keeper of the fire of communication.
It was generally agreed that the news in the Inquirer was more interesting, although Mrs. Arcanum ruled that the whole subject of snakes was not one for the dinner table and papers ought not to be allowed to disturb people like this. Rains of insects and so on, though, fully confirmed everyone’s view of distant lands.
Olds, thought William, forensically dissecting a sultana. His Lordship was right. Not news but olds, telling people that what they think they already know is true…
The Patrician, it was agreed, was a shifty one. The meeting concurred that they were all alike, the lot of them. Mr. Windling said the city was in a mess and there ought to be some changes. Mr. Longshaft said that he couldn’t speak for the city, but from what he had heard the gemstone business had been very brisk of late. Mr. Windling said that it was all right for some. Mr. Prone put forth the opinion that the Watch could not find their bottom with both hands, a turn of phrase that almost earned him a place at the kitchen table to finish his meal. It was agreed that Vetinari had done it all right and should be put away. The main course adjourned at 8:35 P.M., and was followed by disintegrating plums in runny custard, Mr. Prone getting slightly fewer plums as an unspoken reprimand.
William went up to his room early. He had adapted to Mrs. Arcanum’s cuisine, but nothing except radical surgery would make him like her coffee.
He lay down on the narrow bed in the dark (Mrs. Arcanum supplied one candle weekly, and what with one thing and another he had forgotten to buy any extra) and tried to think.
Mr. Slant walked across the floor of the empty ballroom, his feet echoing on the wood.
He took his position in the circle of candlelight with a slight twanging of nerves. As a zombie, he was always a little edgy about fire.
He coughed. “Well?” said a chair. “They didn’t get the dog,” said Mr. Slant. “In all other respects, I have to say, they did a masterly job.”
“How bad could it be if the Watch find it?”
“As I understand it, the dog in question is quite old,” said Mr. Slant into the candlelight. “I have instructed Mr. Pin to look for it, but I don’t believe he will find it easy to get access to the city’s canine underground.”
“There are other werewolves here, aren’t there?”
“Yes,” said Mr. Slant smoothly. “But they won’t help. There are very few of them, and Sergeant Angua of the Watch is very important in the werewolf community. They won’t help strangers, because she will find out.”
“And bring the Watch down on them?”
“I believe she would not bother with the Watch,” said Slant.
“The dog is probably in some dwarf’s stewpot by now,” said a chair. There was general laughter.
“If things go…wrong,” said a chair, “who do these men know?” “They know me,” said Mr. Slant. “I would not worry unduly. Vimes works by the rules.”
“I’ve always understood him to be a violent and vicious man,” said a chair.
“Quite so. And because this is what he knows himself to be, he always works by the rules. In any case, the Guilds will be meeting tomorrow.”
“Who will be the new Patrician?” said a chair.
“That will be a matter for careful discussion and the consideration of all shades of opinion,” said Mr. Slant. His voice could have oiled watches.
“Mr. Slant?” said a chair. “Yes?” “Do not try that on us. It is going to be Scrope, isn’t it?”
“Mr. Scrope is certainly well thought of by many of the leading figures in the city,” said the lawyer.
“Good.”
And the musty air was loud with unspoken conversation.
Absolutely no one needed to say: A lot of the most powerful men in the city owe their positions
to Lord Vetinari.
And nobody replied: Certainly. But to the kind of men who seek power, gratitude has very poor keeping qualities. The kind of men who seek power tend to deal with matters as they are. They would never try to depose Vetinari, but if he was gone, then they would be practical.
No one said: Will anyone speak up for Vetinari?
Silence replied: Oh, everyone. They’ll say things like “Poor fellow…it was the strain of office, you know.” They’ll say: “It’s the quiet ones that crack.” They’ll say: “Quite so…we should put him someplace where he can do no harm to himself or others. Don’t you think?” They’ll say: “Perhaps a small statue would be in order, too?”
They’ll say: “The least we can do is call off the Watch, we owe him that much.” They’ll say: “We must look to the future.” And so, quietly, things change. No fuss, and very little mess.
No one said: Character assassination. What a wonderful idea. Ordinary assassination only works once, but this one works every day.
A chair did say: “I wondered whether Lord Downey or even Mr. Boggis—” Another chair said: “Oh, come now! Why should they? Much better this way.” “True, true. Mr. Scrope is a man of fine qualities.” “A good family man, I understand.” “Listens to the common people.” “Not just to the common people, I trust?”
“Oh, no. He’s very open to advice. From informed…focus groups.” “He’ll need plenty of that.” No one said: He’s a useful idiot.
“Nevertheless…the Watch will have to be brought to heel.”
“Vimes will do what he is told. He must do. Scrope will be at least as legitimate a choice as Vetinari was. Vimes is the kind of man who must have a boss, because that gives him legitimacy.”
Slant coughed.
“Is that all, gentlemen?” he said.
“What about the Ankh-Morpork Times?” said a chair. “Bit of a problem shaping up there?”
“People find it amusing,” said Mr. Slant. “And nobody takes it seriously. The Inquirer outsells it two to one already, after just one day. And it is underfinanced. And it has, uh, difficulty with supplies.”
“Good tale in the Inquirer about that woman and the snake,” said a chair. “Was there?” said Mr. Slant. The chair that had first mentioned the Times had something on its mind. “I’d feel happier if a few likely lads smashed up the press,” it said. “That would attract attention,” said a chair. “The Times wants attention. The…writer craves to be noticed.”
“Oh, well, if you insist.”
“I would not dream of insisting. But the Times will collapse,” said the chair, and this was the chair that other chairs listened to. “The young man is also an idealist. He has yet to find out that what’s in the public interest is not what the public is interested in.”
“Say again?”
“I mean, gentlemen, that people probably think he’s doing a good job, but what they are buying is the Inquirer. The news is more interesting. Did I ever tell you, Mr. Slant, that a lie will go round the world before the truth can get its boots on?”
“A great many times, sir,” said Slant, with slightly less than his usual keen diplomacy. He realized this, and added, “A valuable insight, I’m sure.”
“Good.” The most important chair sniffed. “Keep an eye on our…workmen, Mr. Slant.”
It was midnight in the Temple of Om in the Street of Small Gods, and one light burned in the vestry. It was a candle in a very heavy ornate candlestick and it was, in a way, sending a prayer to heaven. The prayer, from the Gospel According to The Miscreants, was: don’t let anyone find us pinching this stuff.
Mr. Pin rummaged in a cupboard.
“I can’t find anything in your size,” he said. “It looks as though—oh, no…sheesh, incense is for burning.”
Tulip sneezed, pebble-dashing the opposite wall with sandalwood.
“You could’ve —ing told me before,” he muttered. “I’ve got some papers.”
“Have you been Chasing the Oven Cleaner again?” said Mr. Pin accusingly. “I want you focused, understand? Now, the only thing I can find in here that will fit you—”
The door creaked open, and a small elderly priest wandered into the room. Mr. Pin instinctively grasped the big candlestick.
“Hello? Are you here for the, mm, midnight service?” said the old man, blinking in the light. This time it was Mr. Tulip that grabbed Mr. Pin’s arm, as he raised the candlestick. “Are you mad? What kind of person are you?” he growled. “What? We can’t let him—” Mr. Tulip snatched the silver stick out of his partner’s hand.
“I mean, look at the —ing thing, will you?” he said, ignoring the bemused priest. “That’s a genuine Sellini! Five hundred years old! Look at the chasing work on that snuffer, will you? Sheesh, to you it’s nothing more than five —ing pounds of silver, right?” “Actually, mm, it’s a Futtock,” said the old priest, who still hadn’t yet got up to mental speed. “What, the pupil?” said Mr. Tulip, his eyes ceasing their spin out of surprise. He turned the candlestick over and looked at the base. “Hey, that’s right! There’s the Sellini mark, but it’s stamped with a little f, too. First time I’ve ever seen his —ing early stuff. He was a better —ing silversmith, too, it’s just a shame he had such a —ing stupid name. You know how much it’d sell for, Reverend?”
“We thought about seventy dollars,” said the priest, looking hopeful. “It was in a lot of furniture that an old lady left to the church. Really, we kept it for sentimental value…”
“Have you still got the box it came in?” said Mr. Tulip, turning the candlestick over and over in his hands. “He did wonderful —ing presentation boxes. Cherrywood.”
“Er…no, I don’t think so…” “—ing shame.” “Er…is it still worth anything? I think we’ve got another one somewhere.”
“To the right collector, maybe four thousand —ing dollars,” said Mr. Tulip. “But I reckon you could get twelve thousand if you’ve got a —ing pair. Futtock is very collectable at the moment.”
“Twelve thousand!” burbled the old man. His eyes gleamed with a deadly sin.
“Could be more,” Mr. Tulip nodded. “It’s a —ing delightful piece. I feel quite privileged to have seen it.” He looked sourly at Mr. Pin. “And you were going to use it as a —ing blunt instrument.”
He put the candlestick reverentially on the vestry table, and buffed it carefully with his sleeve. Then he spun around and brought his fist down hard on the head of the priest, who folded up with a sigh.
“And they were just keepin’ it in a —ing cupboard,” he said. “Honestly, I could —ing spit!” “You want to take it with us?” said Mr. Pin, stuffing clothes into a bag. “Nah, all the fences round here’d probably just melt it down for the silver,” said Mr. Tulip. “I couldn’t have something like that on my —ing conscience. Let’s find this —ing dog and get right out of this dump, shall we? It makes me so —ing despondent.”
William turned over, woke up, and stared wide-eyed at the ceiling.
Two minutes later Mrs. Arcanum came downstairs and into the kitchen armed with a lamp, a poker, and, most important, with her hair in curlers. The combination would be a winner against all but the most iron-stomached intruder.
“Mr. de Worde! What are you doing? It’s midnight!”
William glanced up, and then went back to opening cupboards. “Sorry I knocked the saucepans over, Mrs. Arcanum. I’ll pay for any damage. Now, where are the scales?”
“Scales?”
“Scales! Kitchen scales! Where are they!” “Mr. de Worde, I—” “Where are the damn scales, Mrs. Arcanum?” said William desperately. “Mr. de Worde! For shame!” “The future of the city hangs in the balance, Mrs. Arcanum!”
Perplexity slowly took the place of stern affront. “What, in my scales?” “Yes! Yes! It could very well be!” “Well, er…they’re in the pantry by the flour bag…the whole city, you say?”
“Quite possibly!” William felt his jacket sag as he forced the big brass weights into his pocket.
“Use the old potato sack, do,” said Mrs. Arcanum, now quite flustered by events. William grabbed the sack, rammed everything in, and ran for the door. “The university and the river and everything?” said the landlady, nervously. “Yes! Yes indeed!” Mrs. Arcanum set her jaw. “You will wash it out thoroughly afterwards, won’t you,” she said to his retreating back.
William’s progress slowed towards the end of the road. Big iron kitchen scales and a full set of weights aren’t carried lightly.
But that was the point, wasn’t it? Weight! He ran and walked and dragged them through the freezing, foggy night until he reached Gleam Street.
The lights were still on in the Inquirer building. How late do you need to stay up when you can make up the news as you go along? thought William. But this is real. Heavy, even.
He hammered on the door of the Times shed until a dwarf opened up. The dwarf was amazed to see a frantic William de Worde rushing past and dropping the scales and weights on a desk.
“Please get Mr. Goodmountain up. We’ve got to get out another edition! And can I have ten dollars, please?”
It took Goodmountain to sort things out as, nightshirted but still firmly helmeted, he clambered out of the cellar.
“No, ten dollars,” William explained to the bewildered dwarfs. “Ten dollar coins. Not ten dollars worth of money.”
“Why?”
“To see how much seventy thousand dollars weighs!” “We haven’t got seventy thousand dollars!” “Look, even one dollar coin would do,” said William patiently. “Ten dollars would just be more accurate, that’s all. I can work it out from there.”
Ten assorted coins were eventually procured from the dwarfs’ cash box and were duly weighed. Then William turned to a fresh page in his notebook, and bent his head in ferocious calculation. The dwarfs watched him solemnly, as if he were conducting an alchemical experiment. Finally he looked up from his figures, the light of revelation in his eyes.
“That’s almost a third of a ton,” he said. “That’s how much seventy thousand dollar coins weigh. I suppose a really good horse could carry that and a rider, but…Vetinari walks with a stick, you saw him. It’d take him forever to load the horse up, and even if he got away he could hardly travel fast. Vimes must have worked it out…he said the facts were stupid facts!”
Goodmountain had stationed himself before the rows of cases. “Ready when you are, chief,” he said. “All right…” William hesitated. He knew the facts, but what did the facts suggest?
“Er…make the heading ‘Who Framed Lord Vetinari?’ and then the story starts…er…” William watched the hand pounce and grab among the little boxes of type. “A…er…Ankh-Morpork City Watch now believe that at least one other person was involved in the…the…”
“Fracas?” suggested Goodmountain. “No…” “Rumpus?”
“…in the attack at the Palace on Monday night.” William waited until the dwarf had caught up. It was getting easier and easier to read the words forming in Goodmountain’s hands as the fingers jumped from box to box…m-ig-h-t…“You got an M for an N there,” he said.
“Oh, yes. Sorry. Carry on.”
“Er…Evidence suggests that far from attacking his clerk as believed, Lord Vetinari may have discovered a crime in progress.”
The hand flew across the type. C-r-i-m-e-space-i-n… It stopped. “Are you sure about this?” said Goodmountain.
“No, but it’s as good a theory as any other,” said William. “That horse hadn’t been loaded to escape, it had been loaded to be discovered. Someone had some plan and it went wrong. I’m sure of that at least. Right…new paragraph. A horse in the stables had been loaded with a third of a ton of coins, but in his current state of health the Patrician—”
One of the dwarfs had lit the stove. Another was stripping out the forms that contained the last edition. The room was coming alive again.
“That’s about eight inches plus the heading,” said Goodmountain, when William had finished. “That should rattle people. You want to add any more stuff? Miss Sacharissa did something about
Lady Selachii’s ball, and there’s a few small things.”
William yawned. He didn’t seem to be getting enough sleep these days. “Put them in,” he said. “And there’s this clacks from Lancre that came in when you’d gone home,” said the dwarf. “That’ll cost us another fifty pence for the messenger. You remember you sent a clacks this afternoon? About snakes?” he added, in the face of William’s blank expression.
William read the flimsy sheet of paper. The message had been carefully transcribed in the neat handwriting of the semaphore operator. It was probably the strangest message yet sent on the new technology.
King Verence of Lancre had also mastered the idea that the clacks charged by the word.
WOMEN OF LANCRE NOT RPT NOT IN HABIT BEARING SNAKES STOP CHILDREN BORN THIS MONTH WILLIAM WEAVER CONSTANCE THATCHER CATASTROPHE CARTER ALL PLUS ARMS LEGS MINUS SCALES FANGS
“Hah! We have them!” said William. “Give me five minutes and I’ll put together a story on this. We shall soon see if the sword of truth can’t beat the dragon of lies.”
Boddony gave him a kind look. “Didn’t you say a lie can run around the world before the truth has got its boots on?” he said.
“But this is the truth.” “So? Where’s its boots?” Goodmountain nodded to the other dwarfs, who were yawning. “You get back to bed, lads. I’ll pull it all together.” He watched them disappear down the ladder to the cellar. Then he sat down, took out a small silver box, and opened it.
“Snuff?” he said, offering the box to William. “Best thing you humans ever invented. Watson’s Red Roasted. Clears the mind a treat. No?”
William shook his head.
“What are you doing all this for, Mr. de Worde?” said Goodmountain, taking a monstrous suction of snuff up each nostril.
“What do you mean?”
“I’m not saying we don’t appreciate it, mark you,” said Goodmountain. “It’s keeping the money coming in. The jobbing stuff is drying up more every day. Seems like every engraving shop was poised to go over to printing. All we did was give the young rips an opening. They’ll get us in the end, though. They’ve got money behind them. I don’t mind saying some of the lads are talking about selling up and going back to the lead mines.”
“You can’t do that!”
“Ah, well,” said Goodmountain. “You mean you don’t want us to. I understand that. But we’ve been putting money by. We should be all right. I daresay we can flog the press to someone. We might have a spot of cash to take back home. That’s what this was all about, money. What were you doing it for?”
“Me? Because—” William stopped. The truth was that he’d never decided to do anything. He’d never really made that kind of decision in his whole life. One thing had just gently led to another, and then the press had to be fed. It was waiting there now. You worked hard, you fed it, and it was still just as hungry an hour later, and out in the world all your work was heading for Bin Six in Piss Harry’s and that was only the start of its troubles. Suddenly he had a proper job, with working hours, and yet everything he did was only as real as a sand castle, on a beach where the tide forever came in.
“I don’t know,” he admitted. “I suppose it’s because I’m no good at anything else. Now I can’t imagine doing anything else.”
“But I heard your family’s got pots of money.”
“Look, Mr. Goodmountain, I’m useless. I was educated to be useless. What we’ve always been supposed to do is hang around until there’s a war and do something really stupidly brave and then get killed. What we’ve mainly done is hang on to things. Ideas, mostly.”
“You don’t get on with them, then.”
“Look, I don’t need a heart-to-heart about this, can you understand? My father is not a nice man. Do I have to draw you a picture? He doesn’t much like me, and I don’t like him. If it comes to that, he doesn’t like anyone very much. Especially dwarfs and trolls.”
“No law says you have to like dwarfs and trolls,” said Goodmountain.
“Yes, but there ought to be a law against disliking them the way he does.” “Ah. Now you’ve drawn me a picture.” “Maybe you’ve heard the term ‘lesser races’?” “And now you’ve colored it in.” “He won’t even live in Ankh-Morpork anymore. Says it’s polluted.” “That’s observant of him.” “No, I mean—”
“Oh, I know what you mean,” said Goodmountain. “I’ve met humans like him.” “You said this was all about money?” said William. “Is that true?” The dwarf nodded at the ingots of lead stacked up neatly by the press.
“We wanted to turn lead into gold,” he said. “We’d got a lot of lead. But we need gold.” William sighed. “My father used to say that gold is all dwarfs think about.” “Pretty much.” The dwarf took another pinch of snuff. “But where people go wrong is…see, if all a human thinks about is gold, well, he’s a miser. If a dwarf thinks about gold, he’s just being a dwarf. It’s diff ’rent. What do you call them black humans that live in Howondaland?”
“I know what my father calls them,” said William. “But I call them ‘people who live in Howondaland.’”
“Do you really? Well, I hear tell where there’s one tribe where, before he can get married, a man has to kill a leopard and give the skin to the woman? It’s the same as that. A dwarf needs gold to get married.”
“What…like a dowry? But I thought dwarfs didn’t differentiate between—”
“No, no, the two dwarfs getting married each buy the other dwarf off their parents.”
“Buy?” said William. “How can you buy people?”
“See? Cultural misunderstanding once again, lad. It costs a lot of money to raise a young dwarf to marriageable age. Food, clothes, chain mail…it all adds up over the years. It needs repaying. After all, the other dwarf is getting a valuable commodity. And it has to be paid for in gold. That’s traditional. Or gems. They’re fine, too. You must’ve heard our saying ‘worth his weight in gold’? Of course, if a dwarf’s been working for his parents, that gets taken into account on the other side of the
ledger. Why, a dwarf who’s left off marrying till late in life is probably owed quite a tidy sum in wages—You’re still looking at me in that funny way…”
“It’s just that we don’t do it like that…” mumbled William. Goodmountain gave him a sharp look. “Don’t you, now?” he said. “Really? What do you use instead, then?”
“Er…gratitude, I suppose,” said William. He wanted this conversation to stop, right now. It was heading out over thin ice.
“And how’s that calculated?” “Well…it isn’t, as such…” “Doesn’t that cause problems?” “Sometimes.” “Ah. Well, we know about gratitude, too. But our way means the couple start their new lives in a state of…g’daraka…er, free, unencumbered, new dwarfs. Then their parents might well give them a huge wedding present, much bigger than the dowry. But it is between dwarf and dwarf, out of love and respect, not between debtor and creditor…though I have to say these human words are not really the best way of describing it. It works for us. It has worked for a thousand years.”
“I suppose to a human it sounds a bit…chilly,” said William. Goodmountain gave him another studied look. “You mean by comparison to the warm and wonderful ways humans conduct their affairs?” he said. “You don’t have to answer that one. Anyway, me and Boddony want to open up a mine together, and we’re expensive dwarfs. We know how to work lead, so we thought a year or two of this would see us right.”
“You’re getting married?”
“We want to,” said Goodmountain.
“Oh…well, congratulations,” said William. He knew enough not to comment on the fact that both dwarfs looked like small barbarian warriors with long beards. All traditional dwarfs looked like that.*
Goodmountain grinned. “Don’t worry too much about your father, lad. People change. My grandmother used to think humans were sort of hairless bears. He doesn’t anymore.”
“What changed his mind?”
“I reckon it was the dying that did it.”
Goodmountain stood up and patted William on the shoulder. “Come on, let’s get the paper finished. We’ll start the run when the lads wake up.”
Breakfast was cooking when William got back, and Mrs. Arcanum was waiting. Her mouth was set in the firm line of someone hot on the trail of unrespectable behavior.
“I shall require an explanation of last night’s affair,” she said, confronting him in the hallway, “and a week’s notice, if you please.”
William was too exhausted to lie. “I wanted to see how much seventy thousand dollars weighed,” he said.
Muscles moved in various areas of the landlady’s face. She knew William’s background, being the kind of woman who finds out about that kind of thing very quickly, and the twitching was a sign of some internal struggle based around the definite fact that seventy thousand dollars was a respectable sum.
“I may perhaps have been a little hasty,” she ventured. “Did you find out how much the money weighed?”
“Yes, thank you.”
“Would you like to keep the scales for a few days in case you want to weigh any more?” “I think I’ve finished the weighing, Mrs. Arcanum, but thank you all the same.” “Breakfast has already begun, Mr. de Worde, but…well, perhaps I can make allowances this time.”
He got given a second boiled egg, too. This was a rare sign of favor. The latest news was already the subject of deep discussion. “I am frankly amazed,” said Mr. Cartwright. “It beats me how they find this stuff out.” “It certainly makes you wonder what’s going on that we aren’t told,” said Mr. Windling. William listened for a while, until he couldn’t wait any longer. “Something interesting in the paper?” he asked innocently.
“A woman in Kicklebury Street says her husband has been kidnapped by elves,” said Mr. Mackleduff, holding up the Inquirer. The heading was very clear on the subject:
ELVES STOLE MY HUSBAND!
“That’s made up!” said William.
“Can’t be,” said Mackleduff. “There’s the lady’s name and address, right there. They wouldn’t put that in the paper if they were telling lies, would they?”
William looked at the name and address. “I know this lady,” he said. “There you are, then!” “She was the one last month who said her husband had been carried off by a big silver dish that came out of the sky,” said William, who had a good memory for this sort of thing. He’d nearly put it in his newsletter as an “On a lighter note” but had thought better of it. “And you, Mr. Prone, said everyone knew her husband had carried himself off with a lady called Flo who used to work as a waitress in Harga’s House of Ribs.”
Mrs. Arcanum gave William a sharp look which said that the whole subject of nocturnal kitchenware theft could be reopened at any time, extra egg or no.
“I am not partial to that kind of talk at the table,” she said coldly.
“Well then, it’s obvious,” said Mr. Cartwright. “He must’ve come back.” “From the silver dish or from Flo?” said William. “Mr. de Worde!”
“I was only asking,” said William. “Ah, I see they’re revealing the name of the man who broke into the jeweler’s the other day. Shame it’s Done It Duncan, poor old chap.”
“A notorious criminal, by the sound of it,” said Mr. Windling. “It’s shocking that the Watch won’t arrest him.”
“Especially since he calls on them every day,” said William. “Whatever for?” “A hot meal and a bed for the night,” said William. “Done It Duncan confesses to everything, you see. Original sin, murders, minor thefts…everything. When he’s desperate he tries to turn himself in for the reward.”
“Then they ought to do something about him,” said Mrs. Arcanum.
“I believe they generally give him a mug of tea,” said William. He paused, and then ventured: “Is there anything in the other paper?”
“Oh, they’re still trying to say that Vetinari didn’t do it,” said Mr. Mackleduff. “And the King of Lancre says women in Lancre don’t give birth to snakes.”
“Well, he would say that, wouldn’t he?” said Mrs. Arcanum. “Vetinari must’ve done something,” said Mr. Windling. “Otherwise why would he be helping the Watch with their inquiries? That’s not the action of an innocent man, in my humble opinion.”*
“I believe there’s plenty of evidence that throws doubt on his guilt,” said William.
“Really,” said Mr. Windling, making the word suggest that William’s opinion was considerably more humble than his. “Anyway, I understand the Guild leaders are meeting today.” He sniffed. “It’s time for a change. Frankly, we could do with a ruler who is a little more responsive to the views of ordinary people.”
William glanced at Mr. Longshaft, the dwarf, who was peacefully cutting some toast into soldiers. Perhaps he hadn’t noticed. Perhaps there was nothing to notice and William was being overly sensitive. But years of listening to Lord de Worde’s opinions had given him a certain ear. It told him when phrases like “the views of ordinary people,” innocent and worthy in themselves, were being used to mean that someone should be whipped.
“How do you mean?” he said.
“The…city is getting too big,” said Mr. Windling. “In the old days the gates were kept shut, not left open to all and sundry. And people could leave their doors unlocked.”
“We didn’t have anything worth stealing,” said Mr. Cartwright. “That’s true. There’s more money around,” said Mr. Prone. “It doesn’t all stay here, though,” said Mr. Windling. That was true, at least. “Sending money home” was the major export activity of the city, and dwarfs were right at the front of it. William also knew that most of it came back again, because dwarfs bought from the best dwarf craftsmen and, mostly, the best dwarf craftsmen worked in Ankh-Morpork these days. And they sent money back home. A tide of gold coins rolled back and forth, and seldom had a chance to go cold. But it upset the Windlings of the city.
Mr. Longshaft quietly picked up his boiled egg and inserted it into an eggcup.
“There’s just too many people in the city,” Mr. Windling repeated. “I’ve nothing against… outsiders, heavens know, but Vetinari let it go far too far. Everyone knows we need someone who is
prepared to be a little more firm.”
There was a metallic noise. Mr. Longshaft, still staring fixedly at his egg, had reached down and drawn a smallish but still impressively axlike ax from his bag. Watching the egg carefully, as if it was about to run away, he leaned slowly back, paused for a moment, then brought the blade around in an arc of silver.
The top of the egg flew up with hardly a noise, turned over in midair several feet above the plate, and landed beside the eggcup.
Mr. Longshaft nodded to himself, and then looked up at the frozen expressions. “I’m sorry?” he said. “I wasn’t listening.” At which point, as Sacharissa would have put it, the meeting broke up.
William purchased his own copy of the Inquirer on the way to Gleam Street and wondered, not for the first time, who was writing this stuff. They were better at it than he would be, that was certain. He’d wondered once about making up a few innocent paragraphs, when not much was happening in the city, and found that it was a lot harder than it looked. Try as he might, he kept letting common sense and intelligence get the better of him. Besides, telling lies was Wrong.
He noted glumly that they’d used the talking dog story. Oh, and one he hadn’t heard before: a strange figure had been seen swooping around the rooftops of Unseen University at night, HALF MAN, HALF MOTH? Half invented and half made up, more likely.
The curious thing was, if the breakfast table jury was anything to go by, that denying stories like this only proved that they were true. After all, no one would bother to deny something if it didn’t exist, would they?
He took a shortcut through the stables in Creek Alley. Like Gleam Street, Creek Alley was there to mark the back of places. This part of the city had no real existence other than as a place you passed through to somewhere more interesting. The dull street was made up of high-windowed warehouses and broken-down sheds and, significantly, Hobson’s Livery Stable.
It was huge, especially since Hobson had realized that you could go multistory.
Willie Hobson was another businessman in the mold of King of the Golden River; he’d found a niche, occupied it, and forced it open so wide that lots of money dropped in. Many people in the city occasionally needed a horse, and hardly anyone had a place to park one. You needed a stable, you needed a groom, you needed a hayloft…but to hire a horse from Willie, you just needed a few dollars.
Lots of people kept their own horses there, too. People came and went all the time. The bandy- legged, goblinlike little men who ran the place never bothered to stop anyone unless they appeared to have hidden a horse about their person.
William looked around when a voice out of the gloom of the loose boxes said, “’Scuse me, friend.”
He peered into the shadows. A few horses were watching him. In the distance, around him, other horses were being moved, people were shouting, there was the general bustle of the stables. But the voice had come out of a little pool of ominous silence.
“I’ve still got two months to go on my last receipt,” he said to the darkness. “And may I say that the free canteen of cutlery seemed to be made of an alloy of lead and horse manure?”
“I’m not a thief, friend,” said the shadows. “Who’s there?” “Do you know what’s good for you?”
“Er…yes. Healthy exercise, regular meals, a good night’s sleep.” William stared at the long lines of loose boxes. “I think what you meant to ask was: do I know what’s bad for me, in the general context of blunt instruments and sharp edges. Yes?”
“Broadly, yes. No, don’t move, mister. You stand where I can see you, and no harm will come to you.”
William analyzed this. “Yes, but if I stand where you can’t see me, I don’t see how any harm could come to me there, either.”
Something sighed. “Look, meet me halfway here—No! Don’t move!” “But you said to—” “Just stand still and shut up and listen, will you?” “All right.” “I am hearing where there’s a certain dog that people are lookin’ for,” said the mystery voice.
“Ah. Yes. The Watch want him, yes. And…?” William thought he could just make out a slightly darker shape. More important, he could smell a smell, even above the general background odor of the horses.
“Ron?” he said.
“Do I sound like Ron?” said the voice. “Not…exactly. So who am I talking to?”
“You can call me…Deep Bone.”
“Deep Bone?”
“Anything wrong with that?”
“I suppose not. What can I do for you, Mr. Bone?”
“Just supposin’ someone knew where the doggie was but didn’t want to get involved with the Watch?” said the voice of Deep Bone.
“Why not?”
“Let’s just say the Watch can be trouble to a certain kind of a person, eh? That’s one reason.” “All right.” “And let’s just say there’s people around who’d much prefer the little doggie didn’t tell what it knew, shall we? The Watch might not take enough care. They’re very uncaring about dogs, the Watch.”
“Are they?”
“Oh yes, the Watch fink a dog has no human rights at all. That’s another reason.” “Is there a third reason?” “Yes. I read in the paper where there’s a reward.” “Ah. Yes?” “Only it got printed wrong, ’cos it said twenty-five dollars instead of a hundred dollars, see?” “Oh. I see. But a hundred dollars for a dog is a lot of money for a dog, Mr. Bone.” “Not for this dog, if you know what I mean,” said the shadows. “This dog’s got a story to tell.” “Oh, yes? It’s the famous talking dog of Ankh-Morpork, is it?” Deep Bone growled. “Dogs can’t talk, everyone knows that,” it said. “But there’s them as can understand dog language, if you catch my drift.”
“Werewolves, you mean?”
“Could be people of that style of kidney, yes.”
“But the only werewolf I know is in the Watch,” said William. “So you’re just telling me to pay you a hundred dollars so that I could hand Wuffles over to the Watch?”
“That’d be a feather in your cap with old Vimes, wouldn’t it?” said Deep Bone.
“But you said you didn’t trust the Watch, Mr. Bone. I do listen to what people say, you know.” Deep Bone went quiet for a while. Then: “All right, the dog and an interpreter, one hundred and fifty dollars.”
“And the story this dog could tell deals with events in the Palace a few mornings ago?” “Could be. Could be. Could very well be. Could be exactly the kind of fing I’m referrin’ to.” “I want to see who I’m talking to,” said William. “Can’t do that.”
“Oh, well,” said William. “That’s reassuring. I’ll just go and get a hundred and fifty dollars, shall I, and bring it back to this place and hand it over to you, just like that?”
“Good idea.” “Not a chance.” “Oh, so you don’t trust me, eh?” said Deep Bone. “That’s right.” “Er…supposin’ I was to tell you a little piece of free news information for gratis and nothin’. A lick of the lolly. A little taste, as you might say.”
“Go on…”
“It wasn’t Vetinari who stabbed the other man. It was another man.” William wrote this down, and then looked at it. “Exactly how helpful is this?” he said.
“That’s a good bit of news, that is. Hardly anyone knows it.” “There’s not a lot to know! Isn’t there a description?” “He’s got a dog bite on his ankle,” said Deep Bone.
“That’ll make him easy to find in the street, won’t it? What are you expecting me to do, try a little surreptitious trouser lifting?”
Deep Bone sounded hurt. “That’s kosher news, that is. It’d worry certain people, if you put that in your paper.”
“Yes, they’d worry that I’d gone mad! You’ve got to tell me something better than that! Can you give me a description?”
Deep Bone went silent for a while, and when it spoke again it sounded uncertain. “You mean, what he looked like?” it said. “Well, yes!”
“Ah…well, it dun’t work like that with dogs, see? What w—what your average dog does, basic’ly, is look up. People are mostly just a wall with a pair of nostril holes at the top, is my point.”
“Not a lot of help, then,” said William. “Sorry we can’t do busin—”
“What he smells like, now, that’s somethin’ else,” said the voice of Deep Bone, hurriedly. “All right, tell me what he smells like.” “Do I see a pile of cash in front of me? I don’t think so.”
“Well, Mr. Bone, I’m not even going to think about getting that kind of money together until I’ve got some proof that you really know something.”
“All right,” said the voice from the shadows, after a while. “You know there’s a Committee to Unelect the Patrician? Now that’s news.”
“What’s new about that? People have plotted to get rid of him for years.” There was another pause. “Y’know,” said Deep Bone, “it’d save a lot of trouble if you just gave me the money and I told you everything.”
“So far you haven’t told me anything. Tell me everything, and then I’ll pay you, if it’s the truth.” “Oh, yes, pull one of the others, it’s got bells on!” “Then it looks like we can’t do business,” said William, putting his notebook away. “Wait, wait…this’ll do. You ask Vimes what Vetinari did just before the attack.” “Why, what did he do?”
“See if you can find out.” “That’s not a lot to go on.” There was no reply. William thought he heard a shuffling noise. “Hello?” He waited a moment, and then very carefully stepped forward.
In the gloom a few horses turned to look at him. Of an invisible informant, there was no sign.
A lot of thoughts jostled for space in his mind as he headed out into the daylight, but surprisingly enough it was a small and theoretically unimportant one which kept oozing into center stage. What kind of phrase was “pull one of the others, it’s got bells on”? Now, “pull the other one, it’s got bells on,” he’d heard of—it stemmed from the days of a crueler than usual ruler in Ankh-Morpork who had any Morris dancers ritually tortured. But “one of the others”…where was the sense in that?
Then it struck him.
Deep Bone must be a foreigner. It made sense. It was like the way Otto spoke perfectly good Morporkian but hadn’t got the hang of colloquialisms.
He made a note of this.
He smelled the smoke at the same time as he heard the pottery clatter of golem feet. Four of the clay people thudded past him, carrying a long ladder. Without thinking, he fell in behind, automatically turning to a new page in his notebook.
Fire was always the terror in those parts of the city where wood and thatch predominated. That was why everyone had been so dead set against any form of fire brigade, reasoning—with impeccable Ankh-Morpork logic—that any bunch of men who were paid to put out fires would naturally see to it that there was a plentiful supply of fires to put out.
Golems were different. They were patient, hardworking, intensely logical, virtually indestructible, and they volunteered. Everyone knew golems couldn’t harm people.
There was some mystery about how the golem fire brigade had got formed. Some said the idea had come from the Watch, but the generally held theory was that golems simply would not allow people and property to be destroyed. With eerie discipline and no apparent communication they would converge on a fire from all sides, rescue any trapped people, secure and carefully pile up all portable property, form a bucket chain along which the buckets moved at a blur, trample every last ember…and then hurry back to their abandoned tasks.
These four were hurrying to a blaze in Treacle Mine Road. Tongues of fire curled out of first-
floor rooms.
“Are you from the paper?” said a man in the crowd. “Yes,” said William. “Well, I reckon this is another case of mysterious spontaneous combustion, just like you reported yesterday,” and he craned his neck to see if William was writing this down.
William groaned. Sacharissa had reported a fire in Lobbin Clout, in which one poor soul had died, and left it at that. But the Inquirer had called it a Mystery Fire.
“I’m not sure that one was very mysterious,” he said. “Old Mr. Hardy decided to light a cigar and forgot that he was bathing his feet in turpentine.” Apparently someone had told him this was a cure for athlete’s foot and, in a way, they had been right. “That’s what they say,” said the man, tapping his nose. “But there’s a lot we don’t get told.” “That’s true,” said William. I heard only the other day that giant rocks hundreds of miles across crash into the country every week, but the Patrician hushes it up.”
“There you are, then,” said the man. “It’s amazing the way they treat us as if we’re stupid.” “Yes, it’s a puzzle to me, too,” said William. “Gangvay, gangvay, please!”
Otto pushed his way through the onlookers, struggling under the weight of a device the size and general shape of an accordion. He elbowed his way to the front of the crowd, balanced the device on its tripod, and aimed it towards a golem who was climbing out of a smoking window holding a small child.
“All right, boys, zis is zer big vun!” he said, and raised the flash cage. “Vun, two, thre— aarghaarghaarghaargh…”
The vampire became a cloud of gently settling dust. For a moment something hovered in the air. It looked like a small jar on a necklace made of string.
Then it fell and smashed on the cobbles.
The dust mushroomed up, took on a shape…and Otto stood blinking and running his hands over himself to check that he was all there. He caught sight of William and gave him the kind of big broad smile that only a vampire can give.
“Mister Villiam! It vorked, your idea!”
“Er…which one?” said William. A thin plume of yellow smoke was creeping out from under the lid of the big iconograph.
“You said carry a little drop of emergency b-word,” said Otto. “Zo I thought: if it is in a little bottle around my neck, zen if I crumble to dust, hoopla! It vill crash and smash unt here I am!”
He lifted the lid of the iconograph and waved the smoke away. There was the sound of very small coughing from within. “And if I am not mistaken, ve have a successfully etched picture! All of vhich only goes to show vot ve can achieve when our brains are not clouded by thoughts of open vindows and bare necks, vhich never cross my mind at all zese days because I am completely beetotal.”
Otto had made changes to his clothing. Away had gone the traditional black evening dress preferred by his species, to be replaced by an armless vest containing more pockets than William had ever seen on one garment. Many of them were stuffed with packets of imp food, extra paint, mysterious tools, and other essentials of the iconographer’s art.
In deference to tradition, though, Otto had made it black, with a red silk lining, and added tails.
On making gentle inquiries of a family watching disconsolately as the smoke from the fire was turned to steam, William ascertained that the blaze had been mysteriously caused by mysterious spontaneous combustion in an overflowing mysterious chip pan full of boiling fat.
William left them picking through the blackened remains of their home.
“And it’s just a story,” he said, putting the notebook away. “It does makes me feel a bit of a vampire—oh…sorry.”
“It is okay,” said Otto. “I understand. And I should like to thank you for givink me zis job. It means a lot to me, especially since I can see how nervous you are. Vhich is understandable, of course.”
“I’m not nervous! I’m very much at home with other species!” said William hotly. Otto’s expression was amicable, but it was also as penetrative as the smile of a vampire can be. “Yes, I notice how careful you are to be friendly with the dwarfs and you are kind to me, also. It is a big effort vhich is very commendable—”
William opened his mouth to protest, and gave up. “All right, look, it’s the way I was brought up, all right? My father was definitely very…in favor of humanity, well, ha, not humanity in the sense of…I mean, it was more that he was against—”
“Yes, yes, I understand.”
“And that’s all there is to it, okay? We can all decide who we’re going to be!” “Yes, yes, sure. And if you vant any advice about vimmin, you only have to ask.” “Why should I want advice about vi—women?” “Oh, no reason. No reason at all,” said Otto innocently.
“Anyway, you’re a vampire. What advice could a vampire give me about women?”
“Oh, my vord, vake up and smell zer garlic! Oh, zer stories I could tell you”—Otto paused —“but I von’t because I don’t do zat sort of thing anymore, now zat I have seen the daylight.” He nudged William, who was red with embarrassment. “Let us just say, zey don’t alvays scream.”
“That’s a bit tasteless, isn’t it?”
“Oh, that vas in zer bad old days,” said Otto hurriedly. “Now I like nothing better than a nice mug of cocoa and a good singsong around zer harmonium, I assure you. Oh, yes. My vord.”
Getting into the office to write up the story turned out to be a problem. In fact, so was getting into Gleam Street.
Otto caught William up as he stood and stared.
“Vell, I suppose ve asked for it,” he shouted. “Tventy-five dollars is a lot of money.” “What?” shouted William. “I SAID TVENTY-FIVE DOLLARS IS A LOT OF MONEY, VILLIAM!” “WHAT?” Several people pushed past them. They were carrying dogs. Everyone in Gleam Street was carrying a dog, or leading a dog, or being dragged by a dog, or being savaged, despite the owner’s best efforts, by a dog belonging to someone else. The barking had already gone beyond mere sounds, and was now some kind of perceptible force, hitting the eardrums like a hurricane made of scrap iron.
William pulled the vampire into a doorway, where the din was merely unbearable. “Can’t you do something?” he screamed. “Otherwise we’ll never get through!” “Like vot?” “Well, you know…all that children of the night business?”
“Oh, zat,” said Otto. He looked glum. “Zat’s really very stereotypical, you know. Vy don’t you
ask me to turn into a bat vhile you’re about it? I told you, I don’t do zat stuff no more!” “Have you got a better idea?”
A few feet away a Rottweiler was doing its best to eat a spaniel. “Oh, very vell.” Otto waved his hands vaguely.
The bark ceased instantly. And then every dog sat on its haunches and howled. “Not a huge improvement but at least they’re not fighting,” said William, hurrying forward. “Vell, I’m sorry. Stake me as you pass,” said Otto. “I shall have a very embarrassing five minutes explaining this at the next meeting, you understand? I know it’s not zer…sucking item, but I mean, vun should care about zer look of zer thing…”
They climbed over a rotting fence and entered the shed via the back door.
People and dogs were squeezing in through the other door and were only held at bay by a barricade of desks and also by Sacharissa, who was looking harassed as she faced a sea of faces and muzzles. William could just make out her voice above the din.
“No, that’s a poodle. It doesn’t look a bit like the dog we’re after—”
“—no, that’s not it. How do I know? Because it’s a cat. All right, then why’s it washing itself? No, I’m sorry, dogs don’t do that—” “—no, madam, that’s a bulldog—” “—no, that’s not it. No, sir, I know that’s not it. Because it’s a parrot, that’s why. You’ve taught it to bark and you’ve painted ‘DoG’ on the side of it but it’s still a parrot—”
Sacharissa pushed her hair out of her eyes and caught sight of William. “Well, now, who’s been a clever boy?” she said. “Wh’s a cl’r boy?” said the DoG. “How many more out there?” “Hundreds, I’m afraid,” said William. “Well, I’ve just had the most unpleasant half hour of—That’s a chicken! It’s a chicken, you stupid woman, it’s just laid an egg!—of my life and I would like to thank you very much. You’ll never guess what happened. No, that’s a Schnauswitzer! And you know what, William?”
“What?” said William.
“Some complete muffin offered a reward! In Ankh-Morpork! Can you believe that? They were queuing three deep when I got here! I mean, what kind of idiot would do a thing like that? I mean, one man had a cow! A cow! I had a huge argument about animal physiology before Rocky hit him over the head! The poor troll’s out there now trying to keep order! There’s ferrets out there!”
“Look, I’m sorry—”
“I wonder, ah, if we can be of any assistance?” They turned. The speaker was a priest, dressed in the black, unadorned, and unflattering habit of the Omnians. He had a flat, broad-brimmed hat, the Omnia’s turtle symbol around his neck, and an expression of almost terminal benevolence.
“Mm, I am Brother Upon-Which-the-Angels-Dance Pin,” said the priest, stepping aside to reveal a mountain in black, “and this is Sister Jennifer, who is under a vow of silence.”
They stared up at the apparition of Sister Jennifer, while Brother Pin went on: “That means she does not, mm, talk. At all. In any circumstances.”
“Oh dear,” said Sacharissa weakly. One of Sister Jennifer’s eyes was revolving, in a face that was like a brick wall.
“Yes, mm, and we happened to be in Ankh-Morpork as part of the Bishop Horn Ministry to Animals and heard that you were looking for a little doggie who is in trouble,” said Brother Pin. “I can see you are, mm, a little overwhelmed, and perhaps we can help? It would be our duty.”
“The dog’s a little terrier,” said Sacharissa, “but you’d be amazed at what people are bringing in —”
“Dear me,” said Brother Pin. “But Sister Jennifer is very good at this sort of thing…” Sister Jennifer strode to the front desk. A man hopefully held up what was clearly a badger. “He’s been a bit ill—” Sister Jennifer brought her fist down on his head. William winced. “Sister Jennifer’s order believes in tough love,” said Brother Pin. “A little correction at the right time can prevent a lost soul taking the wrong path.”
“Vhich order is this she belongs to, please?” said Otto, as the lost soul carrying his badger staggered out, his legs trying to take several paths at once.
Brother Pin gave him a damp smile.
“The Little Flowers of Perpetual Annoyance,” he said.
“Really? I had not heard of zis vun. Very…outreaching. Vell, I must go and see if the imps have done zer job properly…”
Certainly the crowd was thinning rapidly under the stress of seeing the advancing Sister Jennifer, especially the segment of it that had brought dogs that purred or ate sunflower seeds. Many of those who had brought an actual living dog were looking nervous, as well.
A sense of unease crept over William. He knew that some sections of the Omnian Church still believed that the way to send a soul to heaven was to give the body hell. And Sister Jennifer couldn’t be blamed for her looks, or even the size of her hands. And even if the backs of said hands were rather hairy, well, that was the sort of thing that happened out in the rural districts.
“What exactly is she doing?” he said. There were yelps and shouts in the queue as dogs were grabbed, glared at, and thrust back with more than minimum force. “As I said, we’re trying to find the little dog,” said Brother Pin. “It may need ministering to.” “But…that wirehaired terrier there looks pretty much like the picture,” said Sacharissa. “And she’s just ignored it.”
“Sister Jennifer is very sensitive in these matters,” said Brother Pin.
“Oh well, this is not getting the next edition filled,” said Sacharissa, heading back to her desk.
“I expect it would help if we could print in color,” said William, when he was left alone with Brother Pin.
“Probably,” said the reverend brother. “It was a kind of grayish brown.” William knew then that he was dead. It was only a matter of time. “You know what color you’re looking for,” he said quietly.
“You just get on with sorting out the words, writer boy,” said Brother Pin, for his ears only. He opened the jacket of his frock coat just enough for William to see the range of cutlery holstered there, and closed it again. “This isn’t anything to do with you, okay? Shout out, and someone gets killed. Try to be a hero, and someone gets killed. Make any kind of sudden move, and someone gets killed. In fact, we might as well kill someone anyway and save some time, eh? You know that stuff about the pen being mightier than the sword?”
“Yes,” said William hoarsely. “Want to try?” “No.”
William caught sight of Goodmountain, who was staring at him. “What’s that dwarf doing?” said Brother Pin. “He’s setting type, sir,” said William. It was always wise to be polite to edged weapons. “Tell him to get on with it,” said Pin. “Er…if you could just get on with it, Mr. Goodmountain,” said William, raising his voice over the growls and yelps. “Everything is fine.”
Goodmountain nodded, and turned his back. He held up one hand theatrically, and then started to assemble type.
William watched. It was better than semaphore, as the hand dipped from box to box.
Hes a fawe?
W was in the box next to K…
“Yes indeed,” said William. Pin glanced at him. “Yes indeed, what?”
“I, er, it was just nerves,” said William. “I’m always nervous in the presence of swords.” Pin glanced at the dwarfs. They all had their backs to them. Goodmountain’s hand moved again, flicking letter after letter from its nest.
Armed? coff 4 yes
“Something wrong with your throat?” said Pin, after William coughed. “Just nerves again…sir.” OK will get Otto
“Oh no,” William muttered.
“Where’s that dwarf going?” said Pin, his hand reaching into his coat.
“Just into the cellar, sir. To…fetch some ink.”
“Why? Looks like you’ve got lots of ink up here already.”
“Er, the white ink, sir. For the spaces. And the middle of the O’s.” William leaned towards Mr. Pin, and shuddered when the hand reached inside the jacket again. “Look, the dwarfs are all armed, too. With axes. And they get excited very easily. I’m the only person anywhere near you who hasn’t got a weapon. Please? I don’t want to die just yet. Just do whatever you came to do and go?”
It was a pretty good impression of an abject coward, he thought, because it was casting for type. Pin glanced away. “How are we doing, Sister Jennifer?” he said. Sister Jennifer held a struggling sack. “Got all the —ing terriers,” he said. Brother Pin shook his head sharply. “Got all the —ing terriers!” fluted Sister Jennifer, in a much higher register. “And there’s —ing watchmen at the end of the street!”
Out of the corner of his eye, William saw Sacharissa sit bolt upright. Death was certainly somewhere on the agenda now.
Otto was climbing unconcernedly up the cellar steps, one of his iconograph boxes swinging from his shoulder.
He nodded at William. Behind him, Sacharissa was pushing her chair back. Back in front of his case of type, Goodmountain was feverishly setting: Hide your eyes
Mr. Pin turned to William. “What do you mean, white ink for the spaces?”
Sacharissa was looking angry and determined, like Mrs. Arcanum after an uncalled-for remark. The vampire raised his box. William saw the hod above it, crammed with Uberwaldean land eels. Mr. Pin thrust back his coat. William leapt towards the advancing girl, rising through the air like a frog through treacle. Dwarfs started to jump over the low barrier to the print room with axes in their hands. And…
“Boo,” said Otto.
Time stopped. William felt the universe fold away, the little globe of walls and ceilings peeling back like the skin of an orange, leaving a chilly, rushing darkness filled with needles of ice. There were voices, cut off, random syllables of sound, and again the feeling that he’d felt before, that his body was as thin and insubstantial as a shadow.
Then he landed on top of Sacharissa, threw his arms around her, and rolled them both behind the welcome barrier of the desks.
Dogs howled. People swore. Dwarfs yelled. Furniture smashed. William lay still until the thunder died away.
It was replaced by groans and swearing.
Swearing was a positive indication. It was dwarfish swearing, and it meant that the swearer was not only alive but angry too.
He raised his head carefully.
The far door was open. There was no queue, no dogs. There was the sound of running feet and furious barking out in the street.
The back door was swinging on its hinges.
William was aware of the pneumatic warmth of Sacharissa in his arms. This was an experience of the sort which, in a life devoted to arranging words in a pleasing order, he had not dreamed would —well, obviously dreamed, his inner editor corrected him, better make that expected—would have come his way.
“I’m dreadfully sorry,” he said. That was technically a white lie, the editor said. Like thanking your aunt for the lovely handkerchiefs. It’s okay. It’s okay. He drew away carefully, and got unsteadily to his feet. The dwarfs were also staggering upright. One or two of them were being noisily sick.
The body of Otto Chriek was crumpled on the floor. The departing Brother Pin had gone one expert cut in, at neck height, before leaving.
“Oh, my gods,” said William. “What a dreadful thing to happen…”
“What, having your head cut off?” said Boddony, who’d never liked the vampire. “Yes, I expect you could say that.”
“We…ought to do something for him…”
“Really?”
“Yes! I’d have been killed for sure if he hadn’t used those eels!” “Excuse me? Excuse me, please?” The singsong voice was coming from under the printers’ bench. Goodmountain knelt down. “Oh no…” he said. “What is it?” said William. “It’s…er…well, it’s Otto.” “Excuse, please? Could somevun get me out of here?” Goodmountain, grimacing, pushed his hand into the darkness, while the voice continued: “Oh, crikey, zere is a dead rat under here, somevun must’ve dropped zere lunch, how sordid—not zer ear please, not zer ear…by the hair, please…”
The hand came out again, holding Otto’s head by the hair, as requested. The eyes swiveled. “Everyvun all right?” said the vampire. “Zat vas a close shave, yes?” “Are you…all right, Otto?” said William, realizing that this was a winning entrant in the Really Stupid Things to Say contest.
“Vot? Oh, yes. Yes, I zink so. Mustn’t grumble. Pretty good, really. It’s just that I seem to have my head cut off, vhich you could say is a bit of a drawback—”
“That’s not Otto,” said Sacharissa. She was shaking.
“Of course it is,” said William. “I mean, who else could it—”
“Otto’s taller than that,” said Sacharissa, and burst out laughing. The dwarfs started to laugh, too, because at that moment they would laugh at anything. Otto didn’t join in very enthusiastically.
“Oh, yes. Ho ho ho,” he said. “Zer famous Ankh-Morpork sense of humor. Vot a funny joke. Talk about laugh. Do not mind me.”
Sacharissa was gasping for breath. William grabbed her as gently as he could, because this was the kind of laughter you died of. And now she was crying, great racking sobs that bubbled up through the laughs.
“I wish I was dead!” she sobbed.
“You should try it some time,” said Otto. “Mr. Goodmountain, take me to my body, please? It is around here somevhere.”
“Do you…should we…do you have to sew—” Goodmountain tried.
“No. Ve heal easily,” said Otto. “Ah, zere it is. If you could just put me down by me, please? And turn around? Zis is a bit, you know, embarrassing? Like the making of zer vater?” Still wincing in the aftereffects of the dark light, the dwarfs obeyed.
After a moment they heard: “Okay, you can look now.”
Otto, all in one piece, was sitting up and dabbing at his neck with a black handkerchief.
“Got to be a stake in zer heart as vell,” he said, as they stared. “Zo…what vas all zat about, please? Zer dwarf said to make a distraction—”
“We didn’t know you used dark light!” snapped Goodmountain.
“Excuse me? All I had ready was the land eels and you said it looked urgent! Vot did you expect me to do? I’m reformed!”
“That’s bad luck, that stuff!” said a dwarf William had come to know.
“Oh yes? You zink? Vell, I’m zer one who is going to have to have his collar laundered!” snapped Otto.
William did his best to comfort Sacharissa, who was still trembling. “Who were they?” she said. “I’m…not sure, but they certainly wanted Lord Vetinari’s dog…” “I’m sure that she wasn’t a proper virgin, you know!” “Sister Jennifer certainly looked very odd,” was the most William was going to concede.
Sacharissa snorted. “Oh, no, I was taught by worse than her at school,” she said. “Sister Credenza could bite through a door…no, it was the language! I’m sure ‘—ing’ is a bad word. She certainly used it like one. I mean, you could tell it was a bad word. And that priest, he had a knife!”
Behind them, Otto was in trouble.
“You use it to take pictures?” said Goodmountain. “Vy, yes.” Several of the dwarfs slapped their thighs, half turned away and did the usual little pantomime that people do to indicate that they just can’t believe someone else could be so damn stupid.
“You know it is dangerous!” said Goodmountain.
“Mere superstition!” said Otto. “All zat possibly happens is that a subject’s own morphic signature aligns zer resons, or thing-particles, in phase-space according to zer Temporal Relevance Theory, creating zer effect of multiple directionless vindows vhich intersect vith the illusion of zer Present and create metaphoric images according to zer dictates of quasi-historical extrapolation. You see? Nothing mysterious about it at all!”
“It certainly frightened off those people,” said William. “It was the axes that did that,” said Goodmountain firmly. “No, it was the feeling that the top of your head has been opened and icicles have been pounded into your brain,” said William.
Goodmountain blinked. “Yeah, okay, that too,” he said, mopping his forehead. “You’ve got a way with words, right enough…”
A shadow appeared in the doorway. Goodmountain grabbed his ax.
William groaned. It was Vimes. Worse, he was smiling, in a humorless predatory way.
“Ah, Mr. de Worde,” he said, stepping inside. “There are several thousand dogs stampeding through the city at the moment. This is an interesting fact, isn’t it?”
He leaned against the wall and produced a cigar. “Well, I say dogs,” he said, striking a match on Goodmountain’s helmet. “Mostly dogs, perhaps I should say. Some cats. More cats now, in fact, ’cos, hah, there’s nothing like a, yes, a tidal wave of dogs, fighting and biting and howling, to sort of, how can I put it, give a city a certain…busyness. Especially underfoot, because—did I mention it?— they’re very nervous dogs too. Oh, and did I mention cattle?” he went on conversationally. “You know how it is, market day and so on, people are driving the cows and, my goodness, around the corner comes a wall of wailing dogs…oh, and I forgot about the sheep. And the chickens, although I imagine there’s not much left of the chickens now…”
He stared at William.
“Anything you feel you want to tell me?” he said. “Uh…we had a bit of a problem…” “Never! Really? Do tell!”
“The dogs took fright when Mr. Chriek took a picture of them,” said William. This was absolutely true. Dark light was frightening enough even if you knew what was happening.
Vimes glared at Otto, who looked miserably at his feet.
“Well now,” said Vimes. “Shall I tell you something? They’re electing a new Patrician today—” “Who?” said William. “I don’t know,” said Vimes.
Sacharissa blew her nose and said: “It’ll be Mr. Scrope, of the Shoemakers and Leatherworkers.”
Vimes gave William a suspicious look. “How do you know that?” he said. “Everyone knows,” said Sacharissa. “That’s what the young man in the bakery said this morning.”
“Oh, where would we be without rumor,” said Vimes. “So this is not a day, Mr. de Worde, for… things to go wrong. My men are talking to some of the people who brought dogs along. Not many of them, I have to admit. Most of them don’t want to talk to the Watch. Can’t think why, we’re very good listeners. Now is there anything you want to tell me?” Vimes looked around the room and back to William. “Everyone’s staring at you. I notice.”
“The Times does not need any help from the Watch,” said William. “Helping wasn’t what I had in mind.” “We haven’t done anything wrong.” “I’ll decide that.” “Really? That’s an interesting point of view.”
Vimes glanced down. William had taken his notebook out of his pocket. “Oh,” he said. “I see.” He reached down to his own belt and pulled out a blunt, dark length of wood. “You know what this is?” he said. “It’s a truncheon,” said William. “A big stick.”
“Always the last resort, eh?” said Vimes evenly. “Rosewood and Llamedos silver, a lovely piece of work. And it says on this little plate here that I’m supposed to keep the peace and you, Mr. de Worde, don’t look like part of that right now.”
They locked gazes.
“What was the odd thing Lord Vetinari did just before the…accident?” said William, so quietly that probably only Vimes heard it.
Vimes didn’t even blink. But after a moment he laid the truncheon down on the desk, with a click that sounded unnaturally loud in the silence.
“Now you put your notebook down, lad,” he suggested in a quiet voice. “That way, it’s just me and you. No…clash of symbols.”
This time, William could see where the path of wisdom lay. He put down the book.
“Right,” said Vimes. “And now you and me are going to go over to the corner there, while your friends tidy up. Amazing, isn’t it, how much furniture can get broken, just by taking a picture.”
He went and sat down on an upturned washtub. William made do with a rocking horse. “All right, Mr. de Worde, we’ll do this your way,” he said. “I didn’t know I had a way.”
“You’re not going to tell me what you know, are you?”
“I’m not sure what I know,” said William. “But I…think…Lord Vetinari did something remarkable not long before the crime.”
Vimes pulled out his own notebook and thumbed through it.
“He entered the Palace by the stables some time before seven o’clock and dismissed the guard,” he said.
“He’d been out all night?”
Vimes shrugged. “His Lordship comes and goes. The guards don’t ask him where and why. Have they been talking to you?”
William was ready for the question. He just didn’t have an answer. But the Palace Guard, insofar as he’d met them, weren’t men chosen for imagination or flair but for a kind of obstructive loyalty. They didn’t sound like a potential Deep Bone.
“I don’t think so,” he said. “Oh, you don’t think so?” Hold on, hold on…Deep Bone claimed to know the dog Wuffles, and a dog ought to know if his
master was acting oddly…dogs liked routine…
“I think it’s very unusual for His Lordship to be outside the Palace at that time,” said William carefully. “Not part of the…routine.”
“Nor is stabbing your clerk and trying to run off with a very heavy sack of cash,” said Vimes. “Yes, we noticed that, too. We’re not stupid. We only look stupid. Oh…and the guard said he smelled spirits on His Lordship’s breath.”
“Does he drink?”
“Not so’s you’d notice.”
“He’s got a drinks cabinet in his office.”
Vimes smiled. “You noticed that? He likes other people to drink.”
“But all that might mean was that he was plucking up the courage to—” William began, and stopped. “No, that’s not Vetinari. He’s not that sort.”
“No. He isn’t,” said Vimes. He sat back. “Perhaps you’d better…think again, Mr. de Worde. Maybe…maybe…you can find someone to help you think better.”
Something in his manner suggested that the informal part of the discussion was well and truly over.
“Do you know much about Mr. Scrope?” said William.
“Tuttle Scrope? Son of old Tuskin Scrope. President of the Guild of Shoemakers and Leatherworkers for the past seven years,” said Vimes. “Family man. Old established shop in Wixon’s Alley.”
“That’s all?”
“Mr. de Worde, that’s all the Watch knows about Mr. Scrope. You understand? You wouldn’t want to know about some of the people we know a lot about.”
“Ah.” William’s brow wrinkled. “But there’s not a shoe shop in Wixon’s Alley.” “I never mentioned shoes.” “In fact the only shop that is even, er, remotely connected with leather is—” “That’s the one,” said Vimes. “But that sells—”
“Comes under the heading of leatherwork,” said Vimes, picking up his truncheon.
“Well, yes…and rubber work, and…feathers…and whips…and…little jiggly things,” said William, blushing. “But—”
“Never been in there myself, although I believe Corporal Nobbs gets their catalogue,” said Vimes. “I don’t think there’s a Guild of Makers of Little Jiggly Things, although it’s an interesting thought. Anyway, Mr. Scrope is all nice and legal, Mr. de Worde. Nice old family atmosphere, I understand. Makes buying…this and that, and little jiggly things…as pleasant as half a pound of humbugs, I don’t doubt. And what rumor is telling me is that the first thing nice Mr. Scrope will do is pardon Lord Vetinari.”
“What? Without a trial?”
“Won’t that be nice?” said Vimes, with horrible cheerfulness. “A good start to his term of office, eh? Clean sheet, fresh start, no sense in raking up unpleasantness. Poor chap. Overwork. Bound to crack. Didn’t get enough fresh air. And so on. So he can be put away in some nice quiet place and we’ll be able to stop worrying about this whole wretched affair. A bit of a relief, eh?”
“But you know he didn’t—”
“Do I?” said Vimes. “This is an official truncheon of office, Mr. de Worde. If it was a club with a nail in it, this’d be a different sort of city. I’m off now. You’ve been thinking, you tell me. Maybe you ought to think some more.”
William watched him go.
Sacharissa had pulled herself together, perhaps because no one was trying to comfort her anymore.
“What are we going to do now?” she said.
“I don’t know. Get a paper out, I suppose. That’s our job.” “But what happens if those men come back?” “I don’t think they will. This place is being watched now.”
Sacharissa started to pick papers up off the floor. “I suppose I’ll feel better if I do something…” “That’s the spirit.” “If you can give me a few paragraphs about that fire…”
“Otto got a decent picture,” said William. “Didn’t you, Otto?”
“Oh yes. That vun is okay. But…”
The vampire was staring down at his iconograph. It was smashed. “Oh, I’m so sorry,” said William. “I have ozzers.” Otto sighed. “You know, I thought it vould be easy in zer big city,” he said. “I thought it would be civilized. Zey told me mobs don’t come after you viz pitchforks in zer big city like zey do back in Schüschien. I mean, I try. Gods know I try. Three months, four days, and seven hours on zer vagon. I give up zer whole thing! Even zer pale ladies viz the velvet basques vorn on zer outside and zer fetching black lace dresses and zose little tiny, you know, high-heeled boots, and zat vas a wrench, I don’t mind telling you…” He shook his head miserably, and stared at his ruined shirt. “And stuff all gets broken and now my best shirt is all covered viz…blood…covered viz red, red blood…rich dark blood…zer blood…covered with zer blood…zer blood…”
“Quick!” said Sacharissa, pushing past William. “Mister Goodmountain, you hold his arms!” She waved at the dwarfs. “I was ready for this! Two of you hold his legs! Dozy, there’s a huge blutwurst in my desk drawer!”
“…Let me valk in sunshine, living not in vein…” Otto crooned.
“Oh, my gods, his eyes are glowing red!” said William. “What shall we do?” “We could try cutting his head off again?” said Boddony. “That was a very poor joke, Boddony,” Sacharissa snapped. “Joke? I was smiling?” Otto stood up, the cursing dwarfs hanging off his sparse frame.
“Through thunderstorm and dreadful night, ve will carry on zer fight…”
“He’s as strong as an ox!” said Goodmountain.
“Hang on, maybe it would help if we joined in!” said Sacharissa. She fumbled in her bag and produced a slim blue pamphlet. “I picked this up this morning, from the mission in Abattoirs Lane. It’s their songbook! And”—she started to sniff again—“it’s so sad, it’s called ‘Walking in Sunshine’ and it’s so—”
“You want us to have a singsong?” said Goodmountain, as the struggling Otto lifted him off the ground.
“Just to give him moral support!” Sacharissa dabbed at her eyes with a handkerchief. “You can see he’s trying to fight it! And he did lay down his life for us!”
“Yes, but then he picked it up again!”
William bent down and took up something from the wreckage of Otto’s iconograph. The imp had escaped, but the picture that it had painted was just visible. Perhaps it’d show--
It wasn’t a good one of the man who’d called himself Brother Pin; his face was just a white blob in the glare of the light that humans couldn’t see. But the shadows behind him…
He looked closer. “Oh, my gods…” The shadows behind him were alive.
It was sleeting. Brother Pin and Sister Tulip slid and slithered through the freezing drops. Behind them, whistles were blowing in the murk.
“Come on!” Pin yelled.
“These —ing sacks are heavy!”
There were whistles blowing off to one side now, too. Mr. Pin wasn’t used to this. Watchmen shouldn’t be enthusiastic, or organized. He had been chased by watchmen before, when plans hadn’t quite worked out. Their job was to give up at the second corner, out of breath. He felt quite angry about that. The watchmen here were doing it wrong.
He was aware of an open space to one side of him, full of damp swirling flakes. Below him there was a sluggish sucking noise, like a very bad digestion.
“This is a bridge! Chuck ’em in the river!” he commanded. “I fort we wanted to find—” “Doesn’t matter! Get rid of all of ’em! Right now! End of problem!”
Sister Tulip grunted a reply, and skidded to a halt at the parapet. The two whining, yapping sacks went straight on over.
“Did that sound like a —ing splash to you?” said Sister Tulip, peering through the sleet. “Who cares? Now run!” Mr. Pin shivered as he sped on. He didn’t know what had been done to him back there, but he’d felt like he’d walked over his own grave.
He felt he had more than just watchmen after him. He speeded up.
In reluctant but marvelous harmony, because no one could sing like a group of dwarfs, even if the song was “May I Suck of Water Pure,”* the dwarfs seemed to be calming Otto down.
Besides, the horrible black emergency blutwurst had finally been produced. For a vampire this was the equivalent of a cardboard cigarette to a terminal nicotine addict, but it was at least something he could get his teeth into. When William finally tore his gaze away from the horror of the shadows, Sacharissa was mopping Otto’s brow.
“Oh, vunce again I am so ashamed, vhere can I put my head, it’s so—” William held up the picture. “Otto, what’s this?”
In the shadows were mouths, screaming. In the shadows were eyes, wide. They didn’t move while you watched them, but if you looked at the picture a second time you got a feeling that they weren’t quite in the same place.
Otto shuddered.
“Oh, I used all zer eels I had,” he said. “And—?” “Oh, they’re awful,” breathed Sacharissa, looking away from the tortured shadows. “I feel so wretched,” said Otto. “Obviously they vere too stronk—” “Tell us, Otto!”
“Vell…the iconograph does not lie, you have heard zis?” “Of course.” “Yes? Vell…under stronk dark light, the picture really does not lie. Dark light reveals zer truth to the dark eyes of zer mind…” He paused, and sighed. “Ah, vunce again no ominous roll of thunder, vot a vaste. But at least you could look apprehensively at the shadows.”
All heads turned towards the shadows, in the corner of the room and under the roof. They were simply shadows, haunted by nothing more than dust and spiders.
“But there’s just dust and—” Sacharissa began.
Otto held up a hand.
“Dear lady…I have told you. Philosophically, the truth can be vot is metaphorically there…” William stared at the picture again. “I had hoped that I could use filters and so on to cut down zer, er, unvanted effects,” said Otto behind him. “But alas—” “This is getting worse and worse,” said Sacharissa. “It gives me the humorous vegetables.” Goodmountain shook his head. “This is unholy stuff,” he said. “No more meddling with it, understand?”
“I didn’t think dwarfs were religious,” said William.
“We’re not,” said Goodmountain. “But we know unholy when we see it, and I’m looking at it right now, I’m telling you. I don’t want any more of these, these…prints of darkness!”
William grimaced. It shows the truth, he thought. But how do we know the truth when we see it? The Ephebian philosophers think that a hare can never outrun a tortoise, and they can prove it. Is that the truth? I heard a wizard say that everything is made of little numbers, whizzing around so fast that they become stuff. Is that true? I think a lot of things that have been happening over the last few days are not what they seem, and I don’t know why I think that, but I think it’s not the truth…
“Yes, no more of this stuff, Otto,” he said. “Damn right,” said Goodmountain. “Let’s just try to get back to normal and get a paper out, shall we?”
“You mean normal where mad priests start to collect dogs, or normal where vampires mess around with evil shadows?” said Gowdie.
“I mean like normal before that,” said William.
“Oh, I see. You mean like back in the old days,” said Gowdie.
After a while, though, silence settled on the pressroom, although there was an occasional sniff from the desk opposite.
William wrote a story about the fire. That was easy. Then he tried to write a coherent account of the recent events, but found he couldn’t get beyond the first word. He’d written “The.” It was a reliable word, the definite article. The trouble was, all the things he was definite about were bad.
He’d expected that to…what? Inform people? Yes. Annoy people? Well, some people, at least. What he hadn’t expected was that it wouldn’t make any difference. The paper came out, and it didn’t matter.
People just seemed to accept things. What was the point of writing another story of the Vetinari business? Well, of course, it had a lot of dogs in it, and there was always a lot of human interest in a story about animals.
“What did you expect?” said Sacharissa, as if she was reading his thoughts. “Did you think people would be marching in the streets? Vetinari isn’t a very nice man, from what I hear. People say he probably deserves to be locked up.”
“Are you saying people aren’t interested in the truth?”
“Listen, what’s true to a lot of people is that they need the money for the rent by the end of the week. Look at Mr. Ron and his friends. What’s the truth mean to them? They live under a bridge!”
She held up a piece of lined paper, crammed edge to edge with the careful looped handwriting of someone for whom holding a pen was not a familiar activity.
“This is a report of the annual meeting of the Ankh-Morpork Caged Birds Society,” she said. “They’re just ordinary people who breed canaries and things as a hobby. Their chairman lives next door to me, which is why he gave me this. This stuff is important to him! My goodness, but it’s dull. It’s all about Best of Breed and some changes in the rules about parrots which they argued about for two hours. But the people who were arguing were people who mostly spend their day mincing meat or sawing wood and basically leading little lives that are controlled by other people, do you see? They’ve got no say in who runs the city but they can damn well see to it that cockatoos aren’t lumped in with parrots. It’s not their fault. It’s just how things are. Why are you sitting there with your mouth open like that?”
William closed his mouth. “All right, I understand—” “No, I don’t think you do,” she snapped. “I looked you up in Twurp’s Peerage. Your family have
never had to worry about the small stuff, have they? They’ve been some of the people who really run things. This…paper is a kind of hobby for you, isn’t it? Oh, you believe in it, I’m sure you do, but if it all goes wahooni-shaped, you’ll still have money. I won’t. So if the way it can be kept going is by filling it with what you sneer at as olds, then that’s what I’ll do.”
“I don’t have money! I make my own living!”
“Yes, but you were able to choose! Anyway, aristocrats don’t like to see other toffs starving. They find them silly jobs to do for serious wages—”
She stopped, panting, and pushed some hair out of her eyes. Then she looked at him like someone who has lit the fuse and is now wondering if the barrel at the other end is bigger than she thought.
William opened his mouth, went to shape a word, and stopped. He did it again. Finally, a little hoarsely, he said: “You’re more or less right—”
“The next word’s going to be ‘But,’ I just know it,” said Sacharissa. William was aware that the printers were all watching. “Yes, it is—”
“Aha!”
“But it’s a big but. Do you mind? It’s important! Someone has to care about the…the big truth. What Vetinari mostly does not do is a lot of harm. We’ve had rulers who were completely crazy and very, very nasty. And it wasn’t that long ago, either. Vetinari might not be ‘a very nice man,’ but I had breakfast today with someone who’d be a lot worse if he ran the city, and there are lots more like him. And what’s happening now is wrong. And as for your damn parrot fanciers, if they don’t care about anything much beyond things that go squawk in cages then one day there’ll be someone in charge of this place who’ll make them choke on their own budgies. You want that to happen? If we don’t make an effort all they’ll get is silly…stories about talking dogs and Elves Ate My Gerbil, so don’t give me lectures on what’s important and what’s not, understand?”
They glared at one another. “Don’t you talk to me like that.” “Don’t you talk to me like that.” “We’re not getting enough advertising. The Inquirer’s getting huge adverts from the big Guilds,” said Sacharissa. “That’s what’ll keep us going, not stories about how much gold weighs.”
“What am I supposed to do about it?”
“Find a way of getting more ads!” “That’s not my job!” William shouted. “It’s part of saving your job! We’re just getting penny-a-line advertisements from people wanting to sell surgical supports and backache cures!”
“So? The pennies add up!”
“So you want us to be known as The Paper You Can Put Your Truss In?”
“Er…excuse me, but are we producing an edition?” said Goodmountain. “Not that we aren’t enjoying all this, but the color’s going to take a lot of extra time.”
William and Sacharissa looked around. They were the focus of attention.
“Look, I know this means a lot to you,” said Sacharissa, lowering her voice, “but all this… political stuff, this is the Watch’s job, not ours. That’s all I’m saying.”
“They’re stuck. That’s what Vimes was telling me.”
Sacharissa stared at his frozen expression. Then she leaned over and, to his shock, patted his hand.
“Perhaps you are having an effect, then.” “Hah!” “Well, if they’re going to pardon Vetinari, maybe it’s because they’re worried about you.” “Hah! Anyway, who are ‘they’?” “Well…you know…them. The people who run things. They notice things. They probably read the paper.”
William gave her a wan smile.
“Tomorrow we’ll find someone to get more ads,” he said. “And we’ll definitely need those extra staff. Er…I’m going to go for a little walk,” he added. “And I’ll get you that key.”
“Key?”
“You wanted a dress for the ball?” “Oh. Yes. Thank you.”
“And I don’t think those men will be back,” said William. “I’ve got a feeling that there isn’t a shed anywhere in town that’s as well guarded as this one right at the moment.”
Because Vimes is waiting to see who tries to get at us next, he thought. But he decided not to say
so.
“What exactly are you going to do?” said Sacharissa.
“First, I’m going to the nearest apothecary,” said William, “and then I’m going to drop in at my
lodgings for that key, and then…I’m going to see a man about a dog.”
The New Firm hurtled through the door of the empty mansion and bolted it behind them.
Mr. Tulip ripped off the bride of innocence outfit and hurled it onto the floor. “I told you —ing clever plans never work!” he said. “A vampire,” said Mr. Pin. “This is a sick city, Mr. Tulip.” “What was that he —ing did to us?” “He took some kind of picture,” said Mr. Pin. He closed his eyes for a moment. His head was aching.
“Well, I was in disguise,” said Mr. Tulip.
Mr. Pin shrugged. Even with a metal bucket over his head, which would probably begin to corrode after a few minutes, there was something recognizable about Mr. Tulip.
“I don’t think that will do any good,” he said.
“I —ing hates pictures,” snarled Mr. Tulip. “Remember that time in Mouldavia? All them posters they did? It’s bad for a man’s health, seeing his —ing phiz on every wall with ‘Dead or Alive’ under it. It’s like they can’t —ing decide.”
Mr. Tulip fished out a small bag of what he had been assured was primo Smudge, but which would turn out to be sugar and powdered pigeon guano.
“Anyway, we must’ve got the —ing dog,” he said. “We can’t be sure,” said Mr. Pin. He winced again. The headache was getting quite strong. “Look, we done the —ing job,” said Mr. Tulip. “I don’t recall no one telling us about —ing werewolves and vampires. That’s their —ing problem! I say we scrag the geek, take the money, and head for Pseudopolis or someplace!”
“You mean quit on a contract?”
“Yeah, when it’s got small print you can’t —ing see!”
“Someone’ll recognize Charlie, though. Seems it’s hard for the dead to stay dead around here.” “I reckon I could help in that —ing respect,” said Mr. Tulip. Mr. Pin chewed his lip. He knew better than Mr. Tulip that men in their business needed a certain…reputation. Things didn’t get written down. But the word got about. The New Firm sometimes dealt with very serious players, and they were people who took a lot of notice of the word…
But Tulip did have a point. This place was getting to Mr. Pin. It jarred his sensibilities. Vampires and werewolves…springing that sort of thing on a body, that wasn’t according to the rules. That was taking liberties. Yes…there was more than one way to keep a reputation.
“I think we should go and explain things to our lawyer friend,” he said slowly. “Right!” said Mr. Tulip. “And then I’ll rip his head off.” “That doesn’t kill zombies.”
“Good, ’cos then he’ll be able to see where I’m gonna —ing shove it.” “And then…we’ll pay another visit to that newspaper. When it’s dark.” To get that picture, he thought. That was a good reason. It was a reason that you could tell the world. But there was another reason. That…burst of darkness had frightened Mr. Pin to his shriveled soul. A lot of memories had come pouring back, all at once.
Mr. Pin had made a lot of enemies, but that hadn’t worried him up until now because all his enemies were dead. But the dark light had fired off bits of his mind and it had seemed to him that those enemies had not vanished from the universe but had merely gone a long way away, from which point they were watching him. And it was a long way away only from his point of view—from their point of view they could reach out and touch him.
What he wouldn’t say, even to Mr. Tulip, was this: they’d need all the money from this job because, in a flash of dark, he’d seen that it was time to retire.
Theology was not a field in which Mr. Pin had much knowledge, despite accompanying Mr. Tulip to a number of the more well-designed temples and chapels, on one occasion to scrag a high priest who’d tried to double-cross Frank “Nutboy” Nabbs, but the little he had absorbed was suggesting to him that this might be the very best time to take a bit of an interest. He could send them some money, maybe, or at least return some of the stuff he’d taken. Hell, maybe he could start not
eating beef on Tuesdays or whatever it was you had to do. Maybe that would stop this feeling that the back of his head had just been unscrewed.
He knew that would have to be later, though. Right now, the code allowed them to do one of two things: they could follow Slant’s instructions to the letter, which would mean they’d maintain a reputation for efficiency, or they could scrag Slant and that damn vampire and maybe a couple of bystanders and leave, perhaps setting fire to a few things on the way out. That was also news that got around. People would understand how upset they were.
“But first we’ll…” Mr. Pin stopped, and in a strangled voice said: “Is someone standing behind me?”
“No,” said Mr. Tulip.
“I thought I heard…footsteps.” “No one here but us.” “Right. Right.” Mr. Pin shuddered, straightened his jacket, and then looked Mr. Tulip up and down.
“Clean yourself up a bit, will you? Sheesh, you’re leaking dust!”
“I can handle it,” said Mr. Tulip. “Keeps me sharp. Keeps me alert.”
Pin sighed. Mr. Tulip always had amazing faith in the contents of the next bag, whatever it was. And it was usually cat flea powder cut with dandruff. “Force isn’t going to work on Slant,” he said. Mr. Tulip cracked his knuckles. “Works on everyone,” he said. “No. A man like him will have a lot of muscle to call on,” said Pin. He patted his jacket. “It’s time Mr. Slant said hello to my little friend.”
A plank thumped down onto the crusted surface of the river Ankh. Shifting his weight with care, and gripping the rope tightly in his teeth, Arnold Sideways swung himself onto it. It sunk a little in the ooze, but stayed—for want of a better word—afloat.
A few feet away the depression that had been left by the first sack landing in the river was already filling up with—for want of a better word—water.
He reached the end of the plank, steadied himself, and managed to lasso the remaining sack. It
was moving.
“He’s got it,” shouted the Duck Man, who was watching from under the bridge. “Heave away, everybody!”
The sack came out of the muck with a sucking sound, and Arnold pushed himself aboard as it was dragged back to the bank.
“Oh, very well done, Arnold,” said the Duck Man, helping him off the sodden sack and back onto his trolley. “I really doubted if the surface would support you at this stage of the tide!”
“Bit of luck for me, eh, when that cart ran over my legs all them years ago!” said Arnold Sideways. “I’d have drowned, else!”
Coffin Henry slit the sacking with his knife and tipped the second lot of little terriers onto the ground, where they coughed and sneezed.
“One or two of the little buggers look done for,” he said. “I’ll give ’em mouth-to-mouth respiritoriation, shall I?”
“Certainly not, Henry,” said the Duck Man. “Have you no idea of hygiene?” “Jean who?” “You can’t kiss dogs!” said the Duck Man. “They could catch something dreadful.”
The crew looked at the dogs that were clustering round their fire. How the dogs had landed in the river was something they didn’t bother to wonder about. All sorts of things landed in the river. It was the sort of thing that happened all the time. The crew took a keen interest in floating things. But it was unusual to get this many all at once.
“Maybe it’s been raining dogs?” said Altogether Andrews, who was being steered by the mind known as Curly at the moment. The crew liked Curly. He was easy to get along with. “I heard the other day that’s been happening lately.”
“You know what?” said Arnold Sideways. “What we ort to do, right, is get some stuff, like… wood and stuff, and make a boat. We could get a lot more stuff if we had a boat.”
“Ah, yes,” said the Duck Man. “I used to mess about in boats when I was a boy.” “We could boat about in mess,” said Arnold. “Same thing.” “Not…exactly,” said the Duck Man. He looked at the circle of steaming, retching dogs. “I wish Gaspode was here,” he said. “He knows how to think about this sort of thing.”
“A jar,” said the apothecary, carefully. “Sealed with wax,” William repeated. “And you want an ounce each of…” “Oil of aniseed, oil of rampion, and oil of scallatine,” said William.
“I can do the first two,” said the apothecary, looking at the little list he’d been given. “But there is no such thing as a whole ounce of oil of scallatine in the city, you realize? It’s fifteen dollars for enough to go on a pinhead. We’ve got about enough to fill a mustard spoon and we have to keep that in a soldered lead box under water.”
“I’ll take a pinhead’s worth, then.”
“You’ll never get it off your hands, you know. It isn’t really for—” “In a bottle,” said William patiently. “Sealed with wax.” “You won’t even smell the other oils! What do you want them for?”
“Insurance,” said William. “Oh, and after you’ve sealed it, wash off the bottle with ether, and then wash the ether off.”
“Is this going to be used for some illegal purpose?” said the apothecary. He caught William’s expression. “Just interested,” he added quickly.
When he’d gone to make up the order, William called in at a couple of other shops and bought a pair of thick gloves.
When he returned, the apothecary was just bringing the oils to the counter. He held a small glass flask, filled with liquid. Inside floated a much smaller phial.
“The outer liquid’s water,” he said, pulling some plugs out of his nose. “Take it carefully, if you don’t mind. Drop it in here and we can kiss our sinuses goodbye.”
“What does it smell of?” said William.
“Well, if I said ‘cabbage,’” said the apothecary, “I wouldn’t be saying the half of it.”
Next, William went to his lodgings. Mrs. Arcanum was averse to boarders coming back to their rooms during the day, but at the moment William appeared to be outside her frame of reference and she merely gave him a nod as he went upstairs.
The keys were in the old trunk at the end of his bed. It was the one he’d taken to Hugglestones; he’d kept it ever since, so that he could kick it occasionally.
His checkbook was also in there. He took that, too. His sword rattled as his hand brushed against it. He’d enjoyed swordsmanship at Hugglestones. It was in the dry, you were allowed to wear protective clothing, and no one attempted to stamp your face into the mud. He’d actually been the champion of the school. But this wasn’t because he was much good. It was simply that most of the other boys were so bad. They approached the sport like they approached all others, in a great big keen screaming rush, using the sword as a sort of club. That meant that if William could avoid the first wild stroke, then he was going to win.
He left the sword in the box.
After some reflection, he pulled out one of his old socks and put it over the apothecary’s bottle. Hurting people with broken glass wasn’t part of the plan, either.
Peppermint! Not a bad choice, but they hadn’t known what else was available, had they…
Mrs. Arcanum was a great believer in net curtains, so that she could see out while outsiders couldn’t see in. William lurked behind the ones in his room until he was certain that an indistinct shape among the rooftops opposite was a gargoyle.
This wasn’t natural gargoyle territory, any more than Gleam Street.
The thing about gargoyles, he reflected as he stepped back and headed down the stairs, was that they didn’t get bored. They were happy to stay and watch anything for days. But, while they moved faster than people thought, they didn’t move faster than people.
He ran through the kitchen so quickly that he only heard Mrs. Arcanum gasp, and then he was through the back door and over the wall into the alley beyond.
Someone was sweeping it. For a moment William wondered if it was a watchman in disguise, or even Sister Jennifer in disguise, but probably there was no one who’d disguise themselves as a gnoll. You’d have to strap a compost heap to your back, to begin with. Gnolls ate almost everything. What they didn’t eat, they collected obsessively. No one had ever studied them to find out why. Perhaps a carefully sorted collection of rotted cabbage stalks was a sign of big status in gnoll society.
“’Ar’t’n, M’r. W’rd,” croaked the creature, leaning on its shovel. “Er…hello…er…” “Sn’g’k.”
“Ah? Yes. Thank you. Goodbye.”
He hurried down another alley, crossed the street, and found yet another alley. He wasn’t sure
how many gargoyles were watching him, but it took them some time to cross streets…
How was it that the gnoll had known his name? It wasn’t as though they’d met at a party or something. Besides, the gnolls all worked for…Harry King…
Well, they did say that King of the Golden River never forgot a debtor…
William ducked and dodged across several blocks, making as much use as he could of the alleys and walkthroughs and noisome courts. He was sure a normal person wouldn’t be able to keep track of him. But then, he’d be amazed if a normal person was following him. Mister Vimes liked to refer to himself as a simple copper, just as Harry King thought of himself as a rough diamond. William suspected that the world was littered with the remains of those people who had taken them at their word.
He slowed down, and climbed some outside stairs. And then he waited.
You’re a fool, said the internal editor. Some people have tried to kill you. You’re concealing information from the Watch. You’re mixing with strange people. You’re about to do something that’s going to get so far up Mister Vimes’s nose it will raise his hat. And why?
Because it makes my blood tingle, he thought. And because I’m not going to be used. By anyone.
There was a faint sound at the end of the alley, which might not have been heard by anyone who wasn’t expecting it. It was the sound of something sniffing.
William looked down and saw, in the gloom, a four-legged shape break into a trot while keeping its muzzle close to the ground.
William measured the distance carefully. Declaring independence was one thing. Assaulting a member of the Watch was a very different thing.
He lobbed the fragile bottle so that it landed about twenty feet ahead of the werewolf, dropped from the stairs onto the top of a wall, and jumped down onto a privy roof as the glass broke with a “pof!” inside the sock.
There was a yelp, and the sound of scrabbling claws.
William jumped from the roof onto another wall, inched along the top of it, and climbed down into another alley. Then he ran.
It took five minutes, dodging into convenient cover and cutting through buildings, to arrive at the livery stables. In the general bustle no one took any notice of him. He was just another man coming to fetch his horse.
The stall that may or may not have contained Deep Bone was occupied by a horse now. It looked
down its nose at him.
“Don’t turn around, Mr. Paper Man,” said a voice behind him.
William tried to remember what had been behind him. Oh, yes…the hay loft. And huge bags of straw. Plenty of room for someone to hide.
“All right,” he said.
“Hark, hark, the dogs do bark,” said Deep Bone. “You must be ment’l.” “But I’m on the right track,” said William. “I think I’ve—” “’Ere, you sure you weren’t followed?”
“Corporal Nobbs was on my trail,” said William. “But I shook him off.” “Hah! Walkin’ round the corner’d shake off Nobby Nobbs!” “Oh, no, he kept right up. I knew Vimes would have me tracked,” said William proudly. “By Nobbs?” “Yes. Obviously…in his werewolf shape…” There. He’d said it. But today was a day for shadows and secrets.
“A werewolf shape,” said Deep Bone flatly.
“Yes. I’d be grateful if you didn’t tell anyone else.”
“Corporal Nobbs,” said Deep Bone, still in the same dull monotone. “Yes. Look, Vimes told me not to—” “Vimes told you Nobby Nobbs was a werewolf?”
“Well…no, not exactly. I worked that out for myself, and Vimes told me not to tell anyone else…”
“About Corporal Nobbs bein’ a werewolf…” “Yes.” “Corporal Nobbs is not a werewolf, mister. In any way, shape, or form. Whether he’s human is another matter, but he ain’t a lycr—a lynco—a lycantro—a bloody werewolf, that’s for sure!”
“Then whose nose did I just drop a scent bomb in front of?” said William triumphantly.
There was silence. And then there was the sound of a thin trickle of water. “Mr. Bone?” said William. “What kind of a scent bomb?” said the voice. It sounded rather strained. “I think oil of scallatine was probably the most active ingredient.” “Right in front of a werewolf’s nose?” “More or less, yes.”
“Mister Vimes is going to go round the twist,” said the voice of Deep Bone. “He’s going to go totally Librarian-poo. He’s going to invent new ways of being angry just so’s he can try them out on you—”
“Then I’d better get hold of Lord Vetinari’s dog as soon as possible,” said William. “I can give you a check for fifty dollars, and that’s all I can afford.”
“What’s one of them, then?” “It’s like a legal IOU.” “Oh, great,” said Deep Bone. “Not much good to me when you’re locked up, though.”
“Right now, Mr. Bone, there’s a couple of very nasty men hunting down every terrier in the city, by the sound of it—”
“Terriers?” said Deep Bone. “All terriers?” “Yes, and while I don’t expect you to—” “Like…pedigree terriers, or just people who might happen to look a bit terrierlike?”
“They didn’t look like they were inspecting any paperwork. Anyway, what do you mean, people who look like terriers?”
Deep Bone went silent again.
William said, “Fifty dollars, Mr. Bone.”
At length the sacks of straw said, “All right. Tonight. On the Misbegot Bridge. Just you. Er…I won’t be there but there will be…a messenger.”
“Who shall I make the check out to?” said William.
There was no answer. He waited a while, and then eased himself into a position where he could peer around the sacks. There was a rustling from them. Probably rats, he thought, because certainly none of them could hold a man.
Deep Bone was a very tricky customer.
Some time after William had gone, looking surreptitiously into the shadows, one of the grooms turned up with a trolley and began to load up the sacks.
One of them said: “Put me down, mister.”
The man dropped the sack, and then opened it cautiously.
A small terrierlike dog struggled up, shaking itself free of clinging wisps.
Mr. Hobson did not encourage independence of thought and an enquiring mind, and at fifty pence a day plus all the oats you could steal he didn’t get them. The groom looked owlishly at the dog.
“Did you just say that?” he said.
“’Course not,” said the dog. “Dogs can’t talk. Are you stupid or somethin’? Someone’s playin’ a trick on you. Gottle o’geer, gottle o’geer, vig viano.”
“You mean like, throwing their voice? I saw a man do that down at the music hall.” “That’s the ticket. Hold on to that thought.” The groom looked around.
“Is that you playin’ a trick, Tom?” he said.
“That’s right, it’s me, Tom,” said the dog. “I got the trick out of a book. Throwin’ my voice into this harmless little dog what cannot talk at all.”
“What? You never told me you were learnin’ to read!”
“There were pictures,” said the dog hurriedly. “Tongues an’ teeth an’ that. Dead easy to understand. Oh, now the little doggie’s wanderin’ off…”
The dog edged its way to the door.
“Sheesh,” it appeared to say. “A couple of thumbs and they’re lords of bloody creation…” Then it ran for it.
“How will this work?” said Sacharissa, trying to look intelligent. It was much better to concentrate on something like this than think about strange men getting ready to invade again.
“Slowly,” mumbled Goodmountain, fiddling with the press. “You realize that this means it’ll take us much longer to print each paper?”
“You vanted color, I gif you color,” said Otto sulkily. “You never said qvick.”
Sacharissa looked at the experimental iconograph. Most pictures were painted in color these days. Only really cheap imps painted in black and white, even though Otto insisted that monochrome “vas an art form in itself.” But printing color…
Four imps were sitting on the edge of it, passing a very small cigarette from hand to hand and watching with interest the work on the press. Three of them wore goggles of colored glass—red, blue, and yellow.
“But not green…” she said. “So…if something’s green—have I got this right?—Guthrie there sees the…blue in the green and paints that on the plate in blue”—one of the imps gave her a wave —“and Anton sees the yellow and paints that, and when you run it through the press—”
“…very, very slowly,” muttered Goodmountain. “It’d be quicker to go around to everyone’s house and tell ’em the news.”
Sacharissa looked at the test sheets that had been done of the recent fire. It was definitely a fire, with red, yellow, and orange flames, and there was some, yes, blue sky, and the golems were a pretty good reddish brown, but the flesh tones…well, “flesh-colored” was a bit of a tricky one in Ankh- Morpork, where if you picked your subject it could be any color except maybe light blue, but the faces of many of the bystanders did suggest that a particularly virulent plague had passed through the city. Possibly the Multicolored Death, she decided.
“Zis is only the beginning,” said Otto. “Ve vill get better.”
“Better maybe, but we’re as fast as we can go,” said Goodmountain. “We can do maybe two hundred an hour. Maybe two hundred and fifty, but someone’s going to be looking for their fingers before this day’s out. Sorry, but we’re doing the best we can. If we had a day to redesign and rebuild properly—”
“Print a few hundred and do the rest in black and white, then,” said Sacharissa, and sighed. “At least it’ll catch people’s attention.”
“Vunce zey see it, the Inqvirer vill vork out how it vas done,” said Otto.
“Then at least we’ll go down with our colors flying,” said Sacharissa. She shook her head, as a little dust floated down from the room.
“Hark at that,” said Boddony. “Can you feel the floor shake? That’s their big presses again.”
“They’re undermining us everywhere,” said Sacharissa. “And we’ve all worked so hard. It’s so unfair.”
“I’m surprised the floor takes it,” said Goodmountain. “It’s not as though anything’s on solid ground round here.”
“Undermining us, eh?” said Boddony.
One or two of the dwarfs looked up when he said this. Boddony said something in Dwarfish. Goodmountain snapped something in reply. A couple of other dwarfs joined in. “Excuse me,” said Sacharissa tartly. “The lads were…wondering about going in and having a look,” said Goodmountain.
“I tried going in the other day,” said Sacharissa. “But the troll on the door was most impolite.” “Dwarfs…approach matters differently,” said Goodmountain. Sacharissa saw a movement. Boddony had pulled his ax out from under the bench. It was a traditional dwarf ax. One side was a pickax, for the extraction of interesting minerals, and the other side was a war ax, because the people who own the land with the valuable minerals in it can be so unreasonable sometimes.
“You’re not going to attack anyone, are you?” she said, shocked.
“Well, someone did say that if you want a good story you have to dig and dig,” said Boddony. “We’re just going to go for a walk.”
“In the cellar?” said Sacharissa, as they headed for the steps. “Yeah, a walk in the dark,” said Boddony. Goodmountain sighed. “The rest of us will get on with the paper, shall we?” he said.
After a minute or two there was the sound of a few ax blows below them, and then someone swore in Dwarfish, very loudly.
“I’m going to see what they’re doing,” said Sacharissa, unable to resist anymore, and hurried away.
The bricks that once had filled the old doorway were already down when she got there. Since the stones of Ankh-Morpork were recycled over the generations, no one had ever seen the point of making strong mortar, and especially not for blocking up an old doorway. Sand, dirt, water, and
phlegm would do the trick, they felt. They always had done up to now, after all.
The dwarfs were peering into the darkness beyond. Each one had stuck a candle on his helmet. “I thought your man said they filled up the old street,” said Boddony. “He’s not my man,” said Sacharissa evenly. “What’s in there?” One of the dwarfs had stepped through with a lantern. “There’s like…tunnels,” he said. “The old pavements,” said Sacharissa. “It’s like this all round this area, I think. After the big floods they built up the sides of the road with timber and filled it in, but they left the pavements on either side because not all the properties had built up yet and people objected.”
“What?” said Boddony. “You mean the roads were higher than the pavements?” “Oh, yes,” said Sacharissa, following him into the gap. “What happens if a horse pi…if a horse made water on the street?” “I’m sure I don’t know,” sniffed Sacharissa. “How did people cross the street?” “Ladders.” “Oh, come on, miss!”
“No, they used ladders. And a few tunnels. It wasn’t going to be for very long. And then it was simpler just to put heavy slabs over the old pavements. And so there’s these—well, forgotten spaces.”
“There’s rats up here,” said Dozy, who was wandering into the distance.
“Hot damn!” said Boddony. “Anyone brought the cutlery? Only joking, miss. Hey, what do we have here…?”
He hacked at some planks, which crumbled away under the blows. “Someone didn’t want to use a ladder,” he said, peering into another hole. “It goes right under the street?” said Sacharissa. “Looks like it. Must have been allergic to horses.”
“And…er…you can find your way?”
“I’m a dwarf. We are underground. Dwarf. Underground. What was your question again?” “You’re not proposing to hack through to the cellars of the Inquirer, are you?” said Sacharissa. “Who, us?” “You are, aren’t you.”
“We wouldn’t do anything like that.” “Yes, but you are, aren’t you.” “That’d be tantamount to breaking in, wouldn’t it?” “Yes, and that’s what you’re planning to do, isn’t it.” Boddony grinned. “Well…a little bit. Just to have a look round. You know.” “Good.” “What? You don’t mind?”
“You’re not going to kill anyone, are you?” “Miss, we don’t do that sort of thing!” Sacharissa looked a little disappointed. She’d been a respectable young woman for some time. In certain people, that means there’s a lot of dammed-up disreputability just waiting to burst out. “Well…perhaps just make them a bit sorry, then?” “Yes, we can probably do that.”
The dwarfs were already creeping along the tunnel at the other side of the buried street. By the light of their torches she saw old frontages, bricked-up doors, windows filled with rubble.
“This should be about the right place,” said Boddony, pointing to a faint rectangle filled with more low-grade brick.
“You’re just going to break in?” said Sacharissa. “We’ll say we were lost,” said Boddony. “Lost underground? Dwarfs?”
“All right, we’ll say we’re drunk. People’ll believe that. Okay, lads…”
The rotten bricks fell away. Light streamed out. In the cellar beyond, a man looked up from his desk, mouth open.
Sacharissa squinted through the dust.
“You?” she said.
“Oh, it’s you, miss,” said Cut-Me-Own-Throat Dibbler. “Hello, boys. Am I glad to see you…”
The canting crew were just leaving when Gaspode arrived at the gallop. He took one look at the other dogs that were huddled around the fire, then dived under the trailing folds of Foul Ole Ron’s dreadful coat and whined.
It took some time for the whole of the crew to understand what was going on. These were, after all, people who could argue and expectorate and creatively misunderstand their way through a three- hour argument after someone says “Good morning.”
It was the Duck Man who finally got the message. “These men are hunting terriers?” he said. “Right! It was the bloody newspaper! You can’t bloody trust people who write in newspapers!” “They threw these doggies in the river?” “Right!” said Gaspode. “It’s all gone fruit-shaped!” “Well, we can protect you too.” “Yeah, but I’ve got to be out and about! I’m a figure in this town! I can’t lie low! I need a disguise! Look, we could be looking at fifty dollars here, right? But you need me to get it!”
The crew were impressed with this. In their cashless economy, fifty dollars was a fortune. “Blewitt,” said Foul Ole Ron. “A dog’s a dog,” said Arnold Sideways. “On account of bein’ called a dog.” “Gaarck!” crowed Coffin Henry. “That’s true,” said the Duck Man. “A false beard isn’t going to work.”
“Well, your huge brains had better come up with somethin’, ’cos I’m staying put until you do,”
said Gaspode. “I’ve seen these men. They are not nice.”
There was a rumble from Altogether Andrews. His face flickered as the various personalities reshuffled themselves, and then settled into the waxy bulges of Lady Hermione.
“We could disguise him,” she said.
“What could you disguise a dog as?” said the Duck Man. “A cat?”
“Ae dog is not just ae dog,” said Lady Hermione. “Ai think Ai have an idea…”
The dwarfs were in a huddle when William got back. The epicenter of the huddle, its huddlee, turned out to be Mr. Dibbler, who looked just like anyone would look if they’re being harangued. William had never seen anyone to whom the word “harangued” could be so justifiably applied. It meant someone who had been talked at by Sacharissa for twenty minutes.
“Is there a problem?” he said. “Hello, Mr. Dibbler…”
“Tell me, William,” said Sacharissa, while pacing slowly around Dibbler’s chair, “if stories were food, what kind of food would be Goldfish Eats Cat?”
“What?” William stared at Dibbler. Realization dawned. “I think it would be a sort of long, thin kind of food,” he said.
“Filled with rubbish of suspicious origin?”
“Now, there’s no need for anyone to take that tone—” Dibbler began, and then subsided under Sacharissa’s glare.
“Yes, but rubbish that’s sort of attractive. You’d keep on eating it even though you wished you didn’t,” said William. “What’s going on here?”
“Look, I didn’t want to do it,” Dibbler protested. “Do what?” said William. “Mr. Dibbler’s been writing those stories for the Inquirer,” said Sacharissa. “I mean, no one believes what they read in the paper, right?” said Dibbler. William pulled up a chair and sat straddling it, resting his arms on the back. “So, Mr. Dibbler…when did you start pissing in the fountain of Truth?” “William!” snapped Sacharissa.
“Look, times haven’t been good, see?” said Dibbler. “And I thought, this news business…well, people like to hear about stuff from a long way away, you know, like in the Almanacke—”
“‘Plague of Giant Weasels in Hersheba’?” said William.
“That’s the style. Well, I thought…it doesn’t sort of matter if they’re, you know, really true…I mean…” William’s glassy grin was beginning to make Dibbler uncomfortable. “I mean…they’re nearly true, aren’t they? Everyone knows that sort of thing happens…”
“You didn’t come to me,” said William.
“Well, of course not. Everyone knows you’re a bit…a bit unimaginative about that sort of thing.” “You mean I like to know that things have actually happened?” “That’s it, yes. Mr. Carney says people won’t notice the difference anyway. He doesn’t like you very much, Mr. de Worde.”
“He’s got wandering hands,” said Sacharissa. “You can’t trust a man like that.”
William pulled the latest copy of the Inquirer towards him and picked a story at random.
“‘Man Stolen by Demons,’” he said. “This refers to Mr. Ronnie ‘Trust Me’ Begholder, known to owe Chrysoprase the troll more than two thousand dollars, last seen buying a very fast horse?”
“Well?”
“Where do the demons fit in?”
“Well, he could’ve been stolen by demons,” said Dibbler. “It could happen to anybody.” “What you mean, then, is that there is no evidence that he wasn’t stolen by demons?” “That way people can make up their own minds,” said Dibbler. “That’s what Mr. Carney says. People should be allowed to choose, he said.” “To choose what’s true?” “He doesn’t clean his teeth properly, either,” said Sacharissa. “I mean, I’m not one of those people who think cleanliness is next to godliness, but there are limits.”*
Dibbler shook his head sadly. “I’m losin’ my touch,” he said. “Imagine…me, working for someone? I must’ve been mad. It’s the cold weather getting to me, that’s what it is. Even…wages”— he said the word with a shudder—“looked attractive. D’you know,” he added, in a horrified voice, “he was telling me what to do? Next time I’ll have a quiet lie-down until the feeling goes away.”
“You are an immoral opportunist, Mr. Dibbler,” said William. “It’s worked so far.” “Can you sell some advertising for us?” said Sacharissa. “I’m not going to work for anyone ag—” “On commission,” snapped Sacharissa.
“What? You want to employ him?” said William.
“Why not? You can tell as many lies as you like if it’s advertising. That’s allowed,” said Sacharissa. “Please? We need the money!”
“Commission, eh?” said Dibbler, rubbing his unshaven chin. “Like…fifty percent for you two and fifty percent for me, too?”
“We’ll discuss it, shall we?” said Goodmountain, patting him on the shoulder. Dibbler winced. When it came to hard bargaining, dwarfs were diamond-tipped. “Have I got a choice?” he mumbled. Goodmountain leaned forward. His beard was bristling. He wasn’t currently holding a weapon but Dibbler could see, as it were, the great big ax that wasn’t there.
“Absolutely,” he said.
“Oh,” said Dibbler. “So…what would I be selling, exactly?” “Space,” said Sacharissa. Dibbler beamed again. “Just space? Nothing? Oh, I can do that. I can sell nothing like anything!” He shook his head sadly. “It’s only when I try to sell something that everything goes wrong.”
“How did you come to be here, Mr. Dibbler?” William asked. He was not happy with the answer. “That sort of thing could work both ways,” he said. “You can’t just dig into other people’s property!” He glared at the dwarfs. “Mr. Boddony, I want that hole blocked up right now, understand?”
“We only—”
“Yes, yes, you did it for the best. And now I want it bricked up, properly. I want the hole to look as though it had never been there, thank you. I don’t want anyone coming up the cellar ladder that didn’t climb down it. Right now, please!”
“I think I’m onto a real story,” said William, as the disgruntled dwarfs filed away. “I think I’m going to see Wuffles. I’ve got—”
As he pulled out his notebook something dropped onto the floor with a tinkle. “Oh, yes…and I got the key to our town house,” he said. “You wanted a dress…” “It’s a bit late,” said Sacharissa. “I’d forgotten all about it, to tell the truth.” “Why not go and have a look while everyone else is busy? You could take Rocky, too. You know…to be on the safe side. But the place is empty. My father stays at his club if he has to come to town. Go on. There’s got to be more to life than correcting copy.”
Sacharissa looked uncertainly at the key in her hand.
“My sister has quite a lot of dresses,” said William. “You want to go to the ball, don’t you?”
“I suppose Mrs. Hotbed could adjust it for me if I take it to her in the morning,” said Sacharissa, expressing mildly peeved reluctance while her body language begged to be persuaded. “That’s right,” said William. “And I’m sure you can find someone to do your hair properly.” Sacharissa’s eyes narrowed. “It’s true, you know, you have got an amazing way with words,” she said. “What are you going to do?”
“I’m going,” said William, “to see a dog about a man.”
Sergeant Angua peered up at Vimes through the steam from the bowl in front of her. “Sorry about this, sir,” she said. “His feet won’t touch the ground,” said Vimes.
“You can’t arrest him, sir,” said Captain Carrot, putting a fresh towel over Angua’s head. “Oh? Can’t arrest him for assaulting an officer, eh?” “Well, that’s where it gets tricky, doesn’t it, sir,” said Angua.
“You’re an officer, Sergeant, whatever shape you happen to be currently in!”
“Yes, but…it’s always been a bit convenient to let the werewolf thing stay a rumor, sir,” said Carrot. “Don’t you think so? Mr. de Worde writes things down. Angua and I aren’t particularly keen on that. Those who need to know, know.”
“Then I’ll ban him from doing it!” “How, sir?” Vimes looked a little deflated.
“You can’t tell me that as commander of police I can’t stop some little ti—some idiot from writing down anything he likes?”
“Oh, no, sir. Of course you can. But I’m not sure you can stop him writing down that you stopped him writing things down,” said Carrot.
“I’m amazed. Amazed! She’s your…your—”
“Friend,” said Angua, taking another deep sniff of the steam. “But Carrot’s right, Mister Vimes. I don’t want this going any further. It was my fault for underestimating him. I walked right into it. I’ll be fine in an hour or two.”
“I saw what you were like when you came in,” said Vimes. “You were a mess.”
“It was a shock. The nose just shuts down. It was like walking around a corner and running into Foul Ole Ron.”
“Ye gods! That bad?”
“Maybe not quite as bad as that. Let it lie, sir. Please.”
“He’s a quick learner, our Mr. de Worde,” said Vimes, sitting down at his desk. “He’s got a pen and a printing press and everyone acts like he’s suddenly a major player. Well, he’s going to have to learn a bit more. He doesn’t want us watching? Well, we won’t anymore. He can reap what he sows for a while. We’ve got more than enough other things to do, heavens know.”
“But he is technically—”
“See this sign on my desk, Captain? See it, Sergeant? It says ‘Commander Vimes.’ That means the buck starts here. It was a command you just got. Now, what else is new?”
Carrot nodded. “Nothing good, sir. No one’s found the dog. The Guilds are all battening down. Mr. Scrope has been getting a lot of visitors. Oh, and High Priest Ridcully is telling everyone that he thinks Lord Vetinari went mad, because the day before he’d been telling him about a plan to make lobsters fly through the air.”
“Lobsters flying through the air,” said Vimes flatly. “And something about sending ships by semaphore, sir.” “Oh dear. And what is Mr. Scrope saying?” “Apparently he says he’s looking forward to a new era in our history and will put Ankh- Morpork back on the path of responsible citizenship, sir.”
“Is that the same as the lobsters?”
“It’s political, sir. Apparently he wants a return to the values and traditions that made the city great, sir.”
“Does he know what those values and traditions were?” said Vimes, aghast. “I assume so, sir,” said Carrot, keeping a straight face. “Oh my gods. I’d rather take a chance on the lobsters.”
It was sleeting again, out of a darkening sky. The Misbegot Bridge was more or less empty; William lurked in the shadows, his hat pulled down over his eyes.
Eventually a voice out of nowhere said, “So…you got your bit of paper?” “Deep Bone?” said William, startled out of the reverie. “I’m sending a…a guide for you to follow,” said the hidden informant. “Name of…name of… Trixiebell. Just you follow him and everything will be okay. Ready?”
“Yes.”
Deep Bone is watching me, William thought. He must be really close. Trixiebell trotted out of the shadows. It was a poodle. More or less.
The staff at Le Poil du Chien, the doggie beauty salon, had done their very best, and a craftsman will give of his or her all if it means getting Foul Ole Ron out of the shop any faster. They’d cut, blown, permed, crimped, primped, colored, woven, shampooed, and the manicurist had locked herself in the lavatory and refused to come out.
The result was…pink. The pinkness was only one aspect of the thing, but it was so…pink that it dominated everything else, even the topiary-effect tail with the fluffy knob on the end. The front of the
dog looked as though it had been fired through a large pink ball, and had only got halfway. Then there was also the matter of the large glittery collar. It glittered altogether too much; sometimes glass glitters more than diamonds because it has more to prove.
All in all, the effect was not of a poodle, but of malformed poodlosity. That is to say, everything about it suggested “poodle” except for the whole thing itself, which suggested walking away.
“Yip,” it said, and there was something wrong with this, too. William was aware that dogs like this yipped, but this one, he was sure, had said “yip.”
“There’s a good…” he began, and finished, “…dog?” “Yip yipyip sheesh yip,” said the dog, and walked off. William wondered about the “sheesh,” but decided the dog must have sneezed. It trotted away through the slush, and disappeared down an alley. A moment later its muzzle appeared around the corner. “Yip? Whine?” “Oh, yes. Sorry,” said William.
Trixiebell led the way down greasy steps to the old path that ran along the riverside. It was littered with rubbish, and anything that stays thrown away in Ankh-Morpork is real rubbish. The sun seldom got down here, even on a fine day. The shadows contrived to be freezing and running with water at the same time.
Nevertheless, there was a fire among the dark timbers under the bridge. William realized, as his nostrils shut down, that he was visiting the canting crew.
The old towpath had been deserted to start with, but Foul Ole Ron and the rest of them were the reason that it stayed that way. They had nothing to steal. They had precious little even to keep. Occasionally the Beggars’ Guild considered running them out of town, but without much enthusiasm. Even beggars need someone to look down on, and the crew were so far down that in a certain light they sometimes appeared to be on top. Besides, the Guild recognized craftsmanship when they saw it; no one could spit and ooze like Coffin Henry, no one could be as legless as Arnold Sideways, and nothing in the world could smell like Foul Ole Ron. He could have used oil of scallatine as a deodorant.
And, as that thought tripped through William’s brain, he knew where Wuffles was.
Trixiebell’s ridiculous pink tail disappeared into the mass of old packing cases and cardboard known variously to the crew as “What?,” “Bugrit!,” “Ptooi!,” and Home.
William’s eyes were already watering. There wasn’t much breeze down here. He made his way to the pool of firelight.
“Oh…good evening, gentlemen,” he managed, nodding to the figures around the green-edged flames.
“Let’s see the color of your bit of paper,” commanded the voice of Deep Bone, from out of the shadows.
“It’s, er, off-white,” said William, unfolding the check. It was taken by the Duck Man, who scanned it carefully and added noticeably to its off-whiteness.
“It seems to be in order. Fifty dollars, signed,” he said. “I have explained the concept to my associates, Mr. de Worde. It was not easy, I have to tell you.”
“Yeah, and if you don’t put up we’ll come to your house!” said Coffin Henry. “Er…and do what?” said William. “Stand outside forever and ever and ever!” said Arnold Sideways. “Lookin’ at people in a funny way,” said the Duck Man. “Gobbin’ on their boots!” said Coffin Henry.
William tried not to think about Mrs. Arcanum. He said: “Now can I see the dog?” “Show him, Ron,” commanded the voice of Deep Bone. Ron’s heavy coat fell open, revealing Wuffles blinking in the firelight. “You had him?” said William. “That was all there was to it?” “Bugrit!” “Who’s going to search Foul Ole Ron?” said Deep Bone.
“Good point,” said William. “Very good point. Or smell him out.”
“Now, you got to remember he’s old,” said Deep Bone. “An’ he wasn’t exactly Mr. Brain to start with. I mean, we’re talkin’ dogs here—not talking dogs,” said the voice hurriedly, “but talking about dogs, I mean—so don’t expect a philosophical treatise, is what I’m sayin’.”
Wuffles begged, geriatrically, when he saw William looking at him.
“How did he come to be with you?” said William, as Wuffles sniffed his hand.
“He came running out of the Palace straight under Ron’s coat,” said Deep Throat. “Which is, as you point out, the last place anyone would look,” said William. “You’d better believe it.” “And not even a werewolf would find him there.” William took out his notebook, turned to a fresh page, and wrote: “Wuffles.” He said, “How old is he?”
Wuffles barked.
“Sixteen,” said Deep Bone. “Is that important?”
“It’s a newspaper thing,” said William. He wrote: “Wuffles (16), formerly of The Palace, Ankh- Morpork.”
I’m interviewing a dog, he thought. Man Interviews Dog. That’s nearly news. “So…er, Wuffles, what happened before you ran out of the Palace?” he said. Deep Bone, from his hiding place, whined and growled. Wuffles cocked an ear, and then growled back.
“He woke up and experienced a moment of horrible philosophical uncertainty,” said Deep Bone. “I thought you said—” “I’m translatin’, right? And this was on account of there being two Gods in the room. That’s two Lord Vetinaris, Wuffles being an old-fashioned kind of dog. But he knew one was wrong because he smelled wrong. And there were two other men. And then—”
William scribbled furiously.
Twenty seconds later, Wuffles bit him hard on the ankle.
The clerk in Mr. Slant’s front office looked down from his high desk at the two visitors, sniffed, and carried on with his laborious copperplate. He did not have a lot of time for the notion of customer service. The Law could not be hurried…
A moment later his head was rammed into the desktop, and held down by some enormous weight.
Mr. Pin’s face appeared in his limited vision.
“I said,” said Mr. Pin, “that Mr. Slant wants to see us…”
“Sngh,” said the clerk. Mr. Pin nodded, and the pressure was relieved slightly.
“Sorry? You were saying?” said Mr. Pin, watching the man’s hand creep along the edge of the desk.
“He’s…not…seeing…anyone…” The words ended in a muffled yelp.
Mr. Pin leaned down. “Sorry about the fingers,” he said, “but we can’t have them naughty little fingers creeping to that little lever there, can we? No telling what might happen if you pulled that lever. Now…which one’s Mr. Slant’s office?” “Second…door…on…left…” the man groaned.
“See? It’s so much nicer when we’re polite. And in a week, two at the outside, you’ll be able to pick up a pen again.” Mr. Pin nodded to Mr. Tulip, who let the man go. He slithered to the floor.
“You want I should —ing scrag him?”
“Leave him,” said Mr. Pin. “I think I’m going to be nice to people today.”
He had to hand it to Mr. Slant. When the New Firm stepped into his office the lawyer looked up and his expression barely flickered.
“Gentlemen?” he said.
“Don’t press a —ing thing,” said Mr. Tulip.
“There’s something you should know,” said Mr. Pin, pulling a box out of his jacket. “And what is that?” said Mr. Slant. Mr. Pin flicked a catch on the side of the box. “Let’s hear about yesterday,” he said. The imp blinked. “…nyip…nyapnyip…nyapdit…nyip…” it said. “It’s just working its way backwards,” said Mr. Pin. “What is this?” said the lawyer. “…nyapnyip…sipnyap…nip…is valuable, Mr. Pin. So I will not spin this out. What did you do with the dog?” Mr. Pin’s finger touched another lever. “…wheedle-wheedle whee…My…clients have long memories and deep pockets. Other killers can be hired. Do you understand me?”
There was a tiny “ouch” as the “Off” lever hit the imp on the head.
arm.
Mr. Slant got up and walked across to an ancient cabinet.
“Would you like a drink, Mr. Pin? I am afraid I have only embalming fluid…” “Not yet, Mr. Slant.” “…and I think I probably have a banana somewhere…”
Mr. Slant turned, smiling beatifically, at the sound of the smack of Mr. Pin catching Mr. Tulip’s
“I told you I’m gonna —ing kill him—”
“Too late, alas,” said the lawyer, sitting down again. “Very well, Mr. Pin. This is about money,
is it?”
“All we’re owed, plus another fifty thousand.” “But you haven’t found the dog.” “Nor have the Watch. And they’ve got a werewolf. Everyone’s looking for the dog. The dog’s gone. But that doesn’t matter. This little box matters.”
“That is very little in the way of evidence…”
“Really? You asking us about the dog? Talking about killers? I reckon that Vimes character will niggle away at something like that. He doesn’t sound like the sort to let things go.” Mr. Pin smiled humorlessly. “You’ve got stuff on us but, well, between you and me”—he leaned closer—“some of the things we’ve done might be considered, well, tantamount to crimes—”
“All them —ing murders, for a start,” said Mr. Tulip, nodding.
“Which, since we are criminals, could be called typical behavior. Whereas,” Pin went on, “you’re a respectable citizen. Doesn’t look good, respectable citizens getting involved in this sort of thing. People talk.”
“To save…misunderstandings,” said Mr. Slant, “I will do you a draft of—” “Jewels,” said Mr. Pin. “We like jewels,” said Mr. Tulip.
“You have made copies of that…thing?” said Slant.
“I’m not saying anything,” said Mr. Pin, who hadn’t and didn’t even know how. But he took the view that Mr. Slant was in no position to be other than cautious, and it looked as though Mr. Slant
thought so, too.
“I wonder if I can trust you?” said Mr. Slant, as if to himself.
“Well, you see, it’s like this,” said Mr. Pin, as patiently as he could. His head was feeling worse. “If news got around that we’d betrayed a client, that wouldn’t be good. People would say, you can’t trust a person of that kind of ilk. They do not know how to behave. But if the people we deal with heard we’d scragged a client because the client had not played fair, then they would say to themselves, these are businessmen. They are businesslike. They do business…”
He stopped, and looked at the shadows in the corner of the room. “And?” said Mr. Slant. “And…and…the hell with this,” said Mr. Pin, blinking and shaking his head. “Give us the jewels, Slant, or Mr. Tulip’ll do the asking, understand? We’re getting out of here, with your damn dwarfs and vampires and trolls and dead men walking. This city gives me the creeps! So give me the diamonds! Right now!”
“Very well,” said Mr. Slant. “And the imp?”
“It goes with us. We get caught, it gets caught. We die mysteriously, then…some people find out about things. When we are safely away…you’re in no position to argue, Slant.” Mr. Pin shuddered. “I am not having a good day!”
Mr. Slant pulled open a desk drawer and tossed three small velvet bags onto the leather top. Mr. Pin mopped his brow with a handkerchief. “Take a look at ’em, Mr. Tulip.” There was a pause while both men watched Mr. Tulip pour the gems into one enormous palm. He scrutinized several through an eyeglass. He sniffed at them. He gingerly licked one or two.
Then he picked four out of the heap and tossed them back to the lawyer. “You think I’m some kind of a —ing idiot?” he said. “Don’t even think of arguing,” said Mr. Pin.
“Perhaps the jewelers made a mistake,” said Mr. Slant.
“Yeah?” said Mr. Pin. His hand darted into his jacket again, but this time came out holding a weapon.
Mr. Slant looked into the muzzle of a spring-gonne. It was technically and legally a crossbow, in that human strength compressed the spring, but it had been reduced by patient technology to a point
where it was more or less a pipe with a handle and a trigger. Anyone caught with one by the Assassins’ Guild, it was rumored, would find its ability to be hidden on the human body tested to extremes; any city Watch that found one used against them would see to it that the offender’s feet did not touch the ground, but instead swung gently as the breeze pushed them around.
There must have been a switch in this desk, too. A door flew open and two men burst in, one armed with two long knives, one with a crossbow.
It was quite horrible, what Mr. Tulip did to them.
It was, in its way, a kind of skill. When an armed man runs into a room in the knowledge that there is trouble, he needs a fraction of a second to assess, to decide, to calculate, to think. Mr. Tulip didn’t need a fraction of a second. He didn’t think. His hands moved by themselves.
It required, even to the calculating eyes of Mr. Slant, a mental action replay. And even in the slow-mo of horror, it was hard to see Mr. Tulip grab the nearest chair and swing it. At the end of the blur two men lay unconscious, one with an arm twisted in a disconcerting way, and a knife was shuddering in the ceiling.
Mr. Pin hadn’t turned around. He kept the gonne pointed at the zombie. But he produced from a pocket a small cigarette lighter in the shape of a dragon, and then Mr. Slant…Mr. Slant, who crackled when he walked, and smelled of dust…Mr. Slant saw, wrapped around the evil little bolt that just projected from the tube, a wad of cotton.
Without taking his eyes off the lawyer, Mr. Pin applied the flame. The cloth flared. And Mr. Slant was very dry indeed.
“This is a bad thing I’m about to do,” he said, as if hypnotized. “But I done so many bad things, this one’ll hardly count. It’s like…a killing is a big thing, but another killing, that’s kind of half the size. You know? So it’s, like, when you’ve done twenty killings, they barely notice, on average. But… it’s a nice day today, the birds is singing, there’s stuff like…kittens and stuff, and the sun is shining off the snow, bringin’ the promise of Spring to come, with flowers, and fresh grass, and more kittens and hot summer days an’ the gentle kiss of the rain and wonderful clean things which you won’t ever see if you don’t give us what’s in that drawer ’cos you’ll burn like a torch you double-dealing twisty dried-up cheating son of a bitch!”
Mr. Slant scrabbled in the drawer and threw down another velvet bag. Glancing nervously at his partner, who’d never even mentioned kittens before except in the same sentence as “water barrel,” Mr. Tulip took it and examined the contents.
“Rubies,” he said. “—ing good ones.”
“Now go away from here,” rasped Mr. Slant. “Right away. Never come back. I’ve never heard of you. I’ve never seen you.”
He stared at the spluttering flame.
Mr. Slant had faced many bad things in the last few hundred years, but right now nothing seemed more menacing than Mr. Pin. Or more erratically deranged, either. The man was swaying, and his gaze kept flickering into the shadowy corners of the room.
Mr. Tulip shook his partner’s shoulder.
“Let’s —ing scrag him and go?” he suggested. Pin blinked. “Right,” he said, appearing to return to his own head. “Right.” He glanced at the zombie. “I think I shall let you live today,” he said, blowing out the flame. “Tomorrow…who knows?”
It wasn’t a bad threat, but somehow his heart wasn’t in it. Then the New Firm had gone. Mr. Slant sat down and stared at the closed door. It was clear to him, and a dead man has experience in these matters, that his two armed clerks, veterans of many a legal battle, were beyond help. Mr. Tulip was an expert.
He took a sheet of writing paper from a drawer, wrote a few words in block letters, sealed it in an envelope, and sent for another clerk.
“Have arrangements made,” he said, when the man stared at his fallen colleagues. “And then take this to de Worde.”
“Which one, sir?”
For a moment Mr. Slant had forgotten that point.
“Lord de Worde,” he said. “Definitely not the other one.”
William de Worde turned a page in his notebook and continued to scribble. The crew were watching him as if he was a public entertainment.
“That’s a grand gift you have there, sur,” said Arnold Sideways. “It does the heart good to see the pencil waggling like that. I wish I had the knowing of it, but I’ve never been mechanical.”
“Would you care for a cup of tea?” said the Duck Man. “You drink tea down here?”
“Of course. Why not? What kind of people do you think we are?” The Duck Man held up a blackened teapot and a rusty mug.
It was probably a good moment to be polite, thought William. Besides, the water would have been boiled, wouldn’t it?
“No milk, though,” he said quickly. He could imagine what the milk would be like.
“Ah, I said you were a gentleman,” said the Duck Man, pouring a tarry brown liquid into the mug. “Milk in tea is an abomination.” He picked up, with a dainty gesture, a plate and a pair of tongs. “Slice of lemon?” he added.
“Lemon? You have lemon?”
“Oh, even Mr. Ron here would rather wash under his arms than have anything but lemon in his tea,” said the Duck Man, plopping a slice into William’s mug.
“And four sugars,” said Arnold Sideways.
William took a deep draught of the tea. It was thick and stewed, but it was also sweet and hot. And slightly lemony. All in all, he considered, it could have been much worse.
“Yes, we’re very fortunate when it comes to slices of lemon,” said the Duck Man, busily fussing over the tea things. “Why, it is indeed a bad day when we can’t find two or three slices floating down the river.”
William stared fixedly at the river wall.
Spit or swallow, he thought, the eternal conundrum. “Are you all right, Mr. de Worde?” “Mmf.”
“Too much sugar?” “Mmf.” “Not too hot?”
William gratefully sprayed the tea in the direction of the river.
“Ah!” he said. “Yes! Too hot! That’s what it was! Too hot! Lovely tea but—too hot! I’ll just put the rest down here by my foot to cool down, shall I?”
He snatched up his pencil and pad.
“So…er, Wuffles, which man was it that you bit on the leg?” Wuffles barked. “He bit all of them,” said the voice of Deep Bone. “When you’re biting, why stop?” “Would you know them if you bit them again?” “He says he would. He says the big man tasted of…you know…” Deep Bone paused. “Like a… wossname…big, big bowl with hot water and soap in it.”
“A bath?” Wuffles growled. “That’d…be the word,” said Deep Bone. “An’ the other one smelled of cheap hair oil. And the one who looked like G—like Lord Vetinari, he smelled of wine.”
“Wine?”
“Yes. Wuffles also says he’d like to apologize for biting you just now, but he got carried away with the recollection. We—that is to say, dogs have very physical memories, if you see what I mean.”
William nodded, and rubbed his leg. The description of the invasion of the Oblong Office had been carried out in a succession of yelps, barks, and growls, with Wuffles running around in circles and snapping at his own tail until he bumped into William’s ankle.
“And Ron’s been carrying him around in his coat ever since?” “No one bothers Foul Ole Ron,” said Deep Bone. “I believe you,” said William. He nodded at Wuffles.
“I want to get an iconograph of him,” he said. “This is…amazing stuff. But we must have a picture to prove I’ve really talked to Wuffles. Well…via an interpreter, obviously, I wouldn’t want people to think this is one of the Inquirer’s stupid ‘talking dog’ stories…” There was some muttering amongst the crew. The request was not being favorably received. “This is a select neighborhood, you know,” said the Duck Man. “We don’t allow just anybody down here.”
“But there’s a path running right under the bridge!” said William. “Anyone could walk right past!”
“Werll, yerss,” said Coffin Henry. “They could.” He coughed and spat with great expertise into
the fire. “Only they don’t no more.”
“Bugrit,” explained Foul Ole Ron. “Choking a tinker? Garn! I told ’em. Millennium hand and shrimp!”
“Then you’d better come back to the office with me,” said William. “After all, you’ve been carrying him around while you’ve been selling the papers, haven’t you?”
“Too dangerous now,” said Deep Bone.
“Would it be less dangerous for another fifty dollars?” said William.
“Another fifty dollars?” said Arnold Sideways. “That’ll make it fifteen dollars!”
“A hundred dollars,” said William wearily. “You do realize, don’t you, that this is in the public interest?”
The crew craned their necks.
“Don’t see anyone watching,” said Coffin Henry.
William stepped forward, quite accidentally knocking over his tea. “Come on, then,” he said.
Mr. Tulip was beginning to worry now. This was unusual. In the area of worry, he had tended to be the cause rather than the recipient. But Mr. Pin was not acting right, and since Mr. Pin was the man who did the thinking, this was a matter of some concern. Mr. Tulip was good at thinking in split seconds, and when it came to art appreciation he could easily think in centuries, but he was not happy over middle distances. He needed Mr. Pin for that.
But Mr. Pin was talking to himself, and kept staring at shadows.
“We’ll be heading off now?” said Mr. Tulip, in the hope of directing matters. “We’ve got the — ing payment with a —ing big bonus, no —ing point in hanging around?”
He was also worried about the way Mr. Pin had acted with the —ing lawyer. It wasn’t like him to point a weapon at someone and then not use it. The New Firm didn’t go round threatening people. They were the threat. All that —ing stuff about “letting you live for today”…that was amateur stuff.
“I said, are we heading—?” “What do you think happens to people when they die, Tulip?” Mr. Tulip was taken aback.
“What kind of —ing question is that? You know what happens!” “Do I?” “Certainly. Remember when we had to leave that guy in that —ing barn and it was a week before we got to bury him properly? Remember how his—”
“I don’t mean bodies!” “Ah. Religion stuff, then?” “Yes!” “I never worry about that —ing stuff.” “Never?” “Never —ing give it a thought. I’ve got my potato.”
Then Mr. Tulip found that he’d walked a few feet alone, because Mr. Pin had stopped dead. “Potato?” “Oh, yeah. Keep it on a string round my neck.” Mr. Tulip tapped his huge chest. “And that’s religious?” “Well, yeah. When you die, if you’ve got your potato, everything will be okay.” “What religion is that?” “Dunno. Never ran across it outside our village. I was only a kid. I mean, it’s like gods, right? When you’re a kid, they say ‘That’s God, that is.’ Then you grow up and you find there’s —ing millions of ’em. Same with religion.”
“And it’s all okay if you have a potato when you die?” “Yep. You’re allowed to come back and have another life.” “Evenif…” Mr. Pinswallowed, for he was in territory that had never before existed on his internal atlas, “…even if you’ve done things that people might think were bad?”
“Like chopping up people and —ing shovin’ ’em off cliffs?” “Yeah, that kind of thing…” Mr. Tulip sniffed, causing his nose to flash. “We-ell, it’s okay so long as you’re really —ing
sorry about it.”
Mr. Pin was amazed, and a little suspicious. But he could feel things…catching up. There were faces in the darkness and voices on the cusp of hearing. He dared not turn his head now, in case he saw anything behind him.
You could buy a sack of potatoes for a dollar. “It works?” he said. “Sure. Back home people’d been doing it for hundreds of —ing years. They wouldn’t do it if it didn’t —ing work, would they?”
“Where was that?”
Mr. Tulip tried to concentrate on this question, but there were many scabs in his memory.
“There was…forests,” he said. “And…bright candles,” he muttered. “An’…secrets,” he added, staring into nothing.
“And potatoes?”
Mr. Tulip came back to the here and now.
“Yeah, them,” he said. “Always lots of —ing potatoes. If you’ve got your potato, it will be all right.”
“But…I thought you had to pray in deserts, and go to a temple every day, and sing songs, and give stuff to the poor…?”
“Oh, you can do all that too, sure,” said Mr. Tulip. “Just so long as you’ve got your —ing potato.”
“And you come back alive?” said Mr. Pin, still trying to find the small print. “Sure. No point in coming back dead. Who’d notice the —ing difference?” Mr. Pin opened his mouth to reply, and Mr. Tulip saw his expression change. “Someone’s got their hand on my shoulder!” he hissed. “You feeling all right, Mr. Pin?” “You can’t see anyone?” “Nope.”
Clenching his fists, Mr. Pin turned around. There were plenty of people in the street, but no one gave him a second glance.
He tried to reorganize the jigsaw that his mind was rapidly becoming.
“Okay. Okay,” he said. “What we’ll do…we’ll go back to the house, okay, and…and we’ll get the rest of the diamonds, and we’ll scrag Charlie, and, and…we’ll find a vegetable shop…any special kind of potato?”
“Nope.”
“Right…but first…” Mr. Pin stopped, and his mind’s ear heard footsteps stop behind him, a moment later. The damn vampire had done something to him, he knew. The darkness had been like a tunnel, and there had been things…
Mr. Pin believed in threats, and in violence, and at a time like this he believed in revenge. An inner voice that currently passed for sanity was making a clamor, but it was overruled by a deeper and more automatic response.
“That bloody vampire did this,” he said. “And killing a vampire…hey…that’s practically good, right?” He brightened. Salvation beckoned through Holy Works. “Everyone knows they have evil occult powers. Could even count in a man’s favor, eh?”
“Yeah. But…who cares?”
“I do.”
“Okay.” Even Mr. Tulip didn’t argue with that tone of voice. Mr. Pin could be inventively unpleasant. Besides, part of the code was that you did not leave an insult unavenged. Everyone knew that.
It was just that nervousness was beginning to percolate even into the bath salt and worming powder–ravaged pathways of his own brain. He admired the way Mr. Pin wasn’t frightened of difficult things, like long sentences.
“What’ll we use?” he said. “A stake?”
“No,” said Mr. Pin. “With this one, I want to be certain.”
He lit a cigarette, with a hand that shook just a little, and then let the match flare up. “Ah. Right,” said Mr. Tulip. “Let’s just do it,” said Mr. Pin.
Rocky’s brow furrowed as he looked at the seals nailed around the doors of the de Worde town house.
“What’s dem things?” he said.
“They’re to say the Guilds will interest themselves in anyone who breaks in,” said Sacharissa, fumbling with the key. “It’s a sort of curse. Only it works.”
“Dat one’s the Assassins?” said the troll, indicating a crude shield with the cloak-and-dagger and double-cross.
“Yes. It means there’s an automatic contract out on anyone who breaks in.” “Wouldn’t want dem interested in me. Good job you got a key…” The lock clicked. The door opened at a push.
Sacharissa had been in a number of Ankh-Morpork’s great houses, when the owners had thrown parts of them open to the public in aid of some of the more respectable charities. She hadn’t realized how a building could change when people no longer wanted to live in it. It felt threatening and out of scale. The doorways were too big, the ceilings too high. The musty, empty atmosphere descended on her like a headache.
Behind her, Rocky lit a couple of lanterns. But even their light left her surrounded by shadows.
At least the main staircase wasn’t hard to find, and William’s hasty directions led her to a suite of rooms bigger than her house. The wardrobe, when she found it, was simply a room full of rails and hangers.
Things glittered in the gloom. The dresses also smelled strongly of mothballs. “Dat’s interestin’,” said Rocky, behind her. “Oh, it’s just to keep the moths away,” said Sacharissa.
“I’m lookin’ at all the footprints,” said the troll. “Der were in the hall, too.”
She tore her gaze away from the rows of dresses, and looked down. The dust was certainly disturbed.
“Er…cleaning lady?” she said. “Someone must come in to keep an eye on things?” “What she do, kick der dust to death?” “I suppose there must be…caretakers and things?” said Sacharissa uncertainly. A blue dress was saying: Wear me, I’m just your type. See me shimmer.
dust.
Rocky prodded a box of mothballs that had spilled out across a dressing table and rolled into the
“Looks like dem moths are really keen on dese things,” he said.
“You don’t think a dress like this would be a bit…forward, do you?” said Sacharissa, holding
the dress against herself.
Rocky looked worried. He hadn’t been hired for his dress sense, and certainly not for his grasp of colloquial Middle Class.
“You’re quite a lot forward already,” he opined. “I meant, make me look like a fast woman!” “Ah, right,” said Rocky, getting there. “No. Def’nitly not.” “Really?” “Sure. No one could run much in a dress like dat.”
Sacharissa gave up. “I suppose Mrs. Hotbed could let it out a bit,” she said, reflectively. It was tempting to stay, because some of the racks were quite full, but she felt like a trespasser here and part of her was certain that a woman with hundreds of dresses was more likely to miss one than a woman with a dozen or so. In any case, the empty darkness was getting on her nerves. It was full of other people’s ghosts. “Let’s get back.”
When they were halfway across the hall, someone started to sing. The words were incoherent, and the tune was being modulated by alcohol, but it was singing of a sort and it was under their feet.
Rocky shrugged when Sacharissa glanced at him. “Maybe all dem moths is having a ball?” he said. “There must be a caretaker, mustn’t there? Maybe we’d better just, you know, mention we’ve been here?” Sacharissa agonized. “It hardly seems polite, just taking things and running…”
She headed for a green door tucked away beside the staircase, and pushed it open. The singing went louder for a moment, but stopped as soon as she said “Excuse me?” into the darkness.
After a few moments’ silence a voice said: “Hello! How are you? I’m fine!”
“It’s only, er, me? William said it was all right?” She presented the statement like a question, in the voice of someone who was apologizing to a burglar for discovering him.
“Mr. Mothball Nose? Whoops!” said the voice in the shadows at the bottom of the stairs.
“Er…are you all right?”
“Can’t get…it’s a…hahaha…it’s all chains…hahaha…” “Are you…ill?” “No, I’m fine, not ill at all, jus’ had a few too many…”
“Few too many what?” said Sacharissa, speaking from a sheltered upbringing. “…wazza…things you put drink in…barrels?” “You’re drunk?”
“Tha’s right! Tha’s the word! Drunk as a…thing…smelly thing…ahahaha…” There was a tinkle of glass. The lantern’s weak glow showed what looked like a wine cellar, but a man was slumped on a bench against one wall and a chain ran from his ankle to a ring set in the floor.
“Are you…a prisoner?” said Sacharissa. “Ahaha…” “How long have you been down here?” She crept down. “Years…” “Years?”
“Got lots of years…” The man picked up a bottle and peered at it. “Now…Year of the Amending Camel…that was bloodigoodyear…and this one…Year of the Translated Rat…another bloodigoodyear…bloodigoodyears, the lot of them. Could do with a biscuit, though.”
Sacharissa’s knowledge of vintages extended just as far as knowing that Château Maison was a very popular wine. But people didn’t have to be chained up to drink wine, even the stuff from Ephebe that stuck the glass to the table.
She moved a little closer, and the light fell on the man’s face. It was locked in the grin of the seriously drunk, but it was very recognizable. She saw it every day, on coins.
“Er…Rocky,” she said. “Er…can you come down here a minute?”
The door burst open and the troll came down the steps at speed. Unfortunately, it was because he was rolling.
Mr. Tulip appeared at the top of the stairs, massaging his fist.
“It’s Mr. Sneezy!” said Charlie, raising a bottle. “The gang’s all here! Whoopee!”
Rocky got up, weaving slightly. Mr. Tulip strolled down the steps, ripping out the doorpost as he passed. The troll raised his fists in the classic boxer’s pose, but Mr. Tulip didn’t bother with niceties of that kind and hit him hard with the length of ancient wood. Rocky went over like a tree.
Only then did the huge man with the revolving eyes try to focus them on Sacharissa. “Who the —ing hell are you?” “Don’t you dare swear at me!” she said. “How dare you swear in the presence of a lady!” This seemed to nonplus him. “I don’t —ing swear!”
“Here, I’ve seen you before, you’re that—I knew you weren’t a proper virgin!” said Sacharissa triumphantly.
There was the click of a crossbow. Some tiny sounds carry well and have considerable stopping power.
“There are some thoughts too dreadful to think,” said the skinny man looking at her from the top of the steps and down the length of a pistol bow. “What are you doing here, lady?”
“And you were Brother Pin! You haven’t got any right here! I’ve got a key!” Some areas of Sacharissa’s mind that dealt with things like death and terror were signaling to be heard at this point, but, being part of Sacharissa, they were trying to do it in a ladylike way, and so she ignored them.
“A key?” said Brother Pin, advancing down the stairs. The bow stayed pointing at her. Even in his current state of mind, Mr. Pin knew how to aim. “Who’d give you a key?”
“Don’t you come near me! Don’t you dare come near me! If you come near me I’ll—I’ll write it down!”
“Yeah? Well, one thing I know is, words don’t hurt,” said Mr. Pin. “I’ve heard lots of—”
He stopped, and grimaced, and for a moment it looked as if he’d fall to his knees. He righted himself and focused on her again.
“You are coming with us,” he said. “An’ don’t say you’re going to scream, because we’re all alone here and I’ve…heard…lots…of…screams…”
Once again he seemed to run down, and again he recovered. Sacharissa stared in horror at the
weaving crossbow. Those parts of her advocating silence as a survival aid had finally made themselves heard.
“What about these two?” said Mr. Tulip. “We’re scragging ’em now?” “Chain them up and leave them.” “But we always—” “Leave them!” “You sure you feel all right?” said Mr. Tulip.
“No! I don’t! Just leave them, okay? We haven’t got time!” “We’ve got lots of—” “I haven’t!” Mr. Pin strode up to Sacharissa. “Who gave you that key?” “I’m not going to—” “Do you want Mr. Tulip here to say goodbye to our drunken friends?” In his buzzing head, and with his shaky grasp of how things were supposed to work in a moral universe, Mr. Pin reckoned that this was all right. After all, their shadows would follow Mr. Tulip, not him…
“This house belongs to Lord de Worde and his son gave me the key!” said Sacharissa triumphantly. “There! He was the one you met at the newspaper! Now you know what you’ve got yourself into, eh?”
Mr. Pin stared at her.
Then he said, “I’m going to find out. Don’t run. Really don’t scream. Walk normally and everything—” He paused. “I was going to say it will be all right,” he said. “But that would be silly, wouldn’t it…”
It wasn’t fast, going through the streets with the crew. To them the world was a permanent theater, art gallery, music hall, restaurant, and spittoon, and in any case no member of the crew would dream of going anywhere in a straight line.
The poodle Trixiebell accompanied them, keeping as close to the center of the group as possible. Of Deep Bone there was no sign. William had offered to carry Wuffles, because in a way he felt he owned him. A hundred dollars worth of him, at least. It was a hundred dollars he hadn’t got but, well, surely tomorrow’s edition would pay for that. And anyone after the dog now surely wouldn’t try anything out here on the street, in broad daylight, especially since it was barely narrow daylight now. Clouds filled the sky like old eiderdowns, the fog that was descending was meeting the
river mist coming up, and the light was draining out of everything.
He tried to think of the headline. He couldn’t quite get a grip on it yet. There was too much to say, and he wasn’t good at getting the huge complexities of the world into fewer than half a dozen words. Sacharissa was better at it, because she treated words as lumps of letters that could be hammered together any old how. Her best one had been on some tedious inter-Guild squabble and, in a single column, read:
PROBE INTO SHOCK GUILD RUMPUS
William just wasn’t used to the idea of evaluating words purely in terms of their length, whereas she’d picked up the habit in two days. He’d already had to stop her calling Lord Vetinari CITY BOSS. It was technically correct that if you spent some time with a thesaurus you could arrive at that description, and it did fit in a single column, but the sight of the words had made William feel extremely exposed.
It was self-absorption like this that allowed him to walk into the printing shed, with the crew tagging along, and not notice anything wrong until he saw the expression on the faces of the dwarfs.
“Ah, our writer man,” said Mr. Pin, stepping forward. “Shut the door, Mr. Tulip.”
Mr. Pin slammed the door with one hand. The other was clamped over Sacharissa’s mouth. She rolled her eyes at William.
“And you’ve brought me the little doggie,” said Mr. Pin. Wuffles started to growl as he approached. William backed away.
“The Watch will be here soon,” said William. Wuffles still growled, on a rising note.
“Doesn’t worry me now,” said Mr. Pin. “Not with what I know. Not with who I know. Where’s the damn vampire?”
“I don’t know! He’s not always with us!” snapped William.
“Really? In that case let me retort!” said Mr. Pin, his pistol bow inches from William’s face. “If it doesn’t arrive within two minutes, I will—”
Wuffles leapt out of William’s arms. His bark was the frantic whurwhur of a small dog mad with fury. Pin reared back, one arm raised to protect his face. The bow fired. The arrow hit one of the
lamps over the press. The lamp exploded.
A cloud of burning oil rained down. It splattered across type metal and old rocking horses and dwarfs.
Mr. Tulip let go of Sacharissa to help his colleague, and in the slow dance of rushing events Sacharissa spun around and planted her knee hard and firmly in the place that made a parsnip a very funny thing indeed.
William grabbed her on the way past and rushed her out into the freezing air. When he fought his way back in through the stampeding crew, who had the same instinctive reaction to fire as they did to soap and water, it was into a room full of burning debris. Dwarfs were fighting fires in the rubbish. Dwarfs were fighting fires in their beards. Several were advancing on Mr. Tulip, who was on his hands and knees and throwing up. And Mr. Pin was spinning around, flailing at an enraged Wuffles, who was managing to growl while sinking his teeth into Pin’s arm all the way to the bone.
William cupped his hands.
“Get out right now!” he yelled. “The tins!”
One or two dwarfs heard him, and looked around at the shelves of old paint tins just as the first one blew its lid off.
The tins were ancient, no more now than rust held together with chemical sludge. Several others were starting to burn.
Mr. Pin danced across the floor, trying to shake the enraged dog from his ankle. “Get the damn thing off’f me!” he yelled. “Forget the —ing dog, my —ing suit’s on fire!” shouted Mr. Tulip, flailing at his own sleeve.
A tin of what had once been enamel paint took off from the blazing mess, spinning with a wzipwzip noise, and exploded on the press.
William grabbed Goodmountain’s shoulder. “I said come on!” “My press! It’s on fire!” “Better it than us! Come on!”
It was said of the dwarfs that they cared more about things like iron and gold than they did about people, because there was only a limited supply of iron and gold in the world whereas there seemed
to be more and more people everywhere you looked. It was said mostly by people like Mr. Windling.
But they did care fiercely about things. Without things, people were just bright animals.
The printers clustered around the doorway, axes at the ready. Choking brown smoke billowed out. Flames licked out among the roof eaves. Several sections of tin roof itself buckled and collapsed.
As they did so a smoldering ball rocketed through the door and three dwarfs who took a swipe only just missed hitting one another.
It was Wuffles. Patches of fur were still on fire, but his eyes gleamed and he was still whining and growling.
He let William pick him up. He had a triumphant air about him, and turned to watch the burning doorway with his ears cocked.
“That must be it, then,” said Sacharissa.
“They might have got out of the back door,” said Goodmountain. “Boddony, some of you go around and check, will you?”
“Plucky dog, this,” said William.
“‘Brave’ would be better,” said Sacharissa distantly. “It’s only five letters. It would look better in a single-column sidebar. No…‘Plucky’ would work, because then we’d get:
PLUCKY DOG PUTS BITE ON VILLAINS
…although that first line is a bit shy.”
“I wish I could think in headlines,” said William, shivering.
It was cool and damp down here in the cellar.
Mr. Pin dragged himself to a corner and slapped at the burns on his suit. “We’re —ing trapped,” moaned Tulip. “Yeah? This is stone,” said Pin. “Stone floor, stone walls, stone ceiling! Stone doesn’t burn, okay? We just stay nice and calm down here and wait it out.”
Mr. Tulip listened to the sound of the fire above them. Red and yellow light danced on the floor under the cellar hatchway.
“I don’t —ing like it,” he said. “We’ve seen worse.” “I don’t —ing like it!”
“Just keep cool. We’re going to get out of this. I wasn’t born to fry!”
The flames roared around the press. A few late paint tins pinwheeled through the heat, spraying burning droplets.
The fire was yellow-white at the heart, and now it crackled around the metal forms that held the type.
Silver beads appeared around the leaden, inky slugs. Letters shifted, settled, ran together. For a moment the words themselves floated on the melting metal, innocent words like “the” and “Truth” and “shall make ye fere,” and then they were lost.
From the red-hot press, and the wooden boxes, and amongst the racks and racks of type, and even out of the piles of carefully stockpiled metal, thin streams began to flow. They met and merged and spread. Soon the floor was a moving, rippling mirror in which the orange and yellow flames danced upside down.
On Otto’s workbench the salamanders detected the heat. They liked heat. Their ancestors had evolved in volcanoes. They woke up and began to purr.
Mr. Tulip, walking up and down the cellar like a trapped animal, picked up one of the cages and glared at the creatures.
“What’re these —ing things?” he said, and dropped it back on the bench. Then he noticed the dark jar next to it. “And why’s it —ing got ‘Handle viz Care!!!’ on this one?”
The eels were already edgy. They could detect heat too, and they were creatures of deep caves and buried, icy streams.
There was a flash of dark.
Most of it went straight through the brain of Mr. Tulip. But such as was left of that ragged organ had survived every attempt at scrambling, and in any case Mr. Tulip didn’t use it much, because it hurt such a lot.
But there was a brief remembrance of snow, and fir woods, and burning buildings, and the church. They’d sheltered there. He’d been small. He remembered big shining paintings, more colors than he’d ever seen before…
He blinked, and dropped the jar.
It shattered on the floor. There was another burst of dark from the eels. They wriggled desperately out of the wreckage and slithered along the edge of the wall, squeezing into the cracks between the stones.
Mr. Tulip turned at a sound behind him. His colleague had collapsed to his knees and was clutching at his head.
“You all right?”
“They’re right behind me!” Pin whispered. “Nah, just you and me down here, old friend.” Mr. Tulip patted Pin on the shoulder. The veins on his forehead stood out with the effort of thinking of something to do next. The memory had gone. Young Tulip had learned how to edit memories. What Mr. Pin needed, he decided, was to remember the good times.
“Hey, remember when Gerhardt the Boot and his lads had us cornered in that —ing cellar in Quirm?” he said. “Remember what we did to him afterwards?”
“Yes,” said Mr. Pin, staring at the blank wall. “I remember.”
“And that time with that old man who was in that house in Genua and we didn’t —ing know? So we nailed up the door and—”
“Shut up! Shut up!”
“Just trying to look on the —ing bright side.”
“We shouldn’t have killed all those people…” Mr. Pin whispered, almost to himself.
“Why not?” said Mr. Tulip, but Pin’s nervousness had got through to him again. He pulled at the leather cord around his neck, and felt the reassuring lump on the end. A potato can be a great help in times of trial. A pattering behind him made him turn around, and he brightened up. “Anyway, we’re okay now,” he said. “Looks like it’s —ing raining.” Silver droplets were pouring through the cellar hatch.
“That’s not water!” screamed Pin, standing up.
The drops ran together, became a steady stream. It splashed oddly and mounded up under the hatch, but more liquid poured on top of it and spread out across the floor.
Pin and Tulip backed against the far wall.
“That’s hot lead,” said Pin. “They print their paper with it!” “How —ing much is there going to be?” “Down here? Can’t end up more than a couple of inches, can it?”
At the other side of the cellar Otto’s bench started to smolder as the pool touched it.
“We need something to stand on,” said Pin. “Just while it cools! It won’t take long in this chill!” “Yeah, but there’s nothing here but us! We’re —ing trapped!” Mr. Pin put his hand over his eyes for a moment, and took a deep breath of air that was already getting very warm in the soft silver rain.
He opened his eyes again. Mr. Tulip was watching him obediently. Mr. Pin was the thinker. “I’ve…got a plan,” he said. “Yeah, good. Right.”
“My plans are pretty good, right?”
“Yeah, you come up with some —ing wonders, I’ve always said. Like when you said we should twist the—”
“And I’m always thinking about the good of the Firm, right?” “Yeah, sure, right.” “So…this plan…it’s not, like, a perfect plan, but…oh, the hell with it. Give me your potato.” “What?” Suddenly Mr. Pin’s arm was stretched out, his crossbow an inch from Mr. Tulip’s neck. “No time to argue! Gimme the damn potato right now! This is no time for you to think!” Uncertain, but trusting as ever in Mr. Pin’s survival abilities in a tight corner, Mr. Tulip pulled the thong of the potato over his head and handed it over.
“Right,” said Mr. Pin, one side of his face beginning to twitch. “The way I see it—” “You better hurry!” said Mr. Tulip. “It’s only a coupla inches away!” “--the way I see it, I’m a small man, Mr. Tulip. You couldn’t stand on me. I wouldn’t do. You’re a big man, Mr. Tulip. I wouldn’t want to see you suffer.”
And he pulled the trigger. It was a good shot.
“Sorry,” he whispered, as the lead splashed. “Sorry. I’m sorry. Sorry. But I wasn’t born to fry…”
Mr. Tulip opened his eyes.
There was darkness around him, but with a suggestion of stars overhead behind an overcast sky. The air was still, but there was distant soughing, as of wind in dead trees.
He waited a while to see if anything would happen, and then said: “Anyone —ing there?” JUST ME, MR. TULIP. Some of the darkness opened its eyes, and two blue glows looked down at Mr. Tulip. “The —ing bastard stole my potato. Are you —ing Death?” JUST DEATH WILL SUFFICE, I THINK. WHO WERE YOU EXPECTING?
“Eh? For what?”
TO CLAIM YOU AS ONE OF THEIRS.
“Dunno, really. I never —ing thought…” YOU NEVER SPECULATED? “All I know is, you got to have your potato, and then it will be all right.” Mr. Tulip parroted the sentence without thinking, but it was all coming back now in the total recall of the dead, from a vantage point of two feet off the ground and three years of age. Old men mumbling. Old women weeping. Shafts of light through holy windows. The sound of wind under the doors, and every ear straining to hear the soldiers. Ours or theirs didn’t matter, when a war had gone on this long…
Death gave the shade of Mr. Tulip a long, cool stare. AND THAT’S IT?
“Right.”
YOU DON’T THINK THERE WERE ANY BITS YOU MIGHT HAVE MISSED?
…the sound of wind under the doors, the smell of the oil lamps, the fresh acid smell of snow, blowing in through the…
“And…if I’m sorry for everything…” he mumbled. He was lost in a world of darkness, without a potato to his name.
…candlesticks…they’d been made of gold, hundreds of years ago…there were only ever potatoes to eat, grubbed up from under the snow, but the candlesticks were of gold…and some old woman, she’d said: “It’ll all turn out right if you’ve got a potato”…
WAS ANY GOD OF SOME SORT MENTIONED TO YOU AT ANY POINT?
“No…”
DAMN. I WISH THEY DIDN’T LEAVE ME TO DEAL WITH THIS SORT OF THING, DEATH SIGHED. YOU BELIEVE, BUT YOU DON’T BELIEVE IN ANYTHING.
Mr. Tulip stood with his head bowed. More memories were trickling back now, like blood under a locked door. And the knob was rattling, and the lock had failed.
Death nodded at him.
AT LEAST YOU STILL HAVE YOUR POTATO, I SEE.
Mr. Tulip’s hand flew to his neck. There was something wizened and hard there, on the end of a string. It had a ghostly shimmer to it.
“I thought he got it!” he said, his face alight with hope. AH, WELL. YOU NEVER KNOW WHEN A POTATO MAY TURN UP. “So it’s all going to be all right?” WHAT DO YOU THINIK? Mr. Tulip swallowed. Lies did not survive long out here. And more recent memories were squeezing under the door now, bloody and vengeful.
“I think it’s gonna take more than a potato,” he said.
ARE YOU SORRY FOR EVERYTHING?
More unused bits of Mr. Tulip’s brain, which had shut down long ago or never even opened up, came into play.
“How will I know?” he said.
Death waved a hand through the air. Along the arc described by the bony fingers appeared a line of hourglasses.
I UNDERSTAND YOU ARE A CONNOISSEUR, MR. TULIP. IN A SMALL WAY, SO AM I. Death selected one of the glasses and held it up. Images appeared around it, bright but insubstantial as shadow. “What are they?” said Tulip. LIVES, MR. TULIP. JUST LIVES. NOT ALL MASTERPIECES, OBVIOUSLY, OFTEN RATHER NAIF IN THEIR USE OF EMOTION AND ACTION, BUT NEVERTHELESS FULL OF INTEREST AND SURPRISE AND, EACH IN ITS OWN WAY, A WORK OF SOME GENIUS. AND CERTAINLY VERY…COLLECTABLE. Death picked up an hourglass, as Mr. Tulip tried to back away. YES. COLLECTABLE. BECAUSE, IF I HAD TO FIND A WORD TO DESCRIBE THESE LIVES, MR. TULIP, THAT WORD WOULD BE “SHORTER.”
Death selected another hourglass. AH. NUGGA VELSKI. YOU WILL NOT REMEMBER HIM, OF COURSE. HE WAS SIMPLY A MAN WHO WALKED INTO HIS RATHER SIMPLE LITTLE HUT AT THE WRONG TIME, AND YOU ARE A BUSY MAN AND CANNOT BE EXPECTED TO REMEMBER EVERYONE. NOTE THE MIND, A BRILLIANT MIND THAT MIGHT IN OTHER CIRCUMSTANCES HAVE CHANGED THE WORLD, DOOMED TO BE BORN INTO A TIME AND PLACE WHERE LIFE WAS NOTHING BUT A DAILY HOPELESS STRUGGLE. NEVERTHELESS, IN HIS TINY VILLAGE, RIGHT UP UNTIL THE DAY HE FOUND YOU STEALING HIS COAT, HE DID HIS BEST TO--
Mr. Tulip raised a trembling hand.
“Is this the bit where my whole life passes in front of my eyes?” he said. NOW, THAT WAS THE BIT JUST NOW. “Which bit?”
THE BIT, said Death, BETWEEN YOU BEING BORN AND YOU DYING. NO, THIS…MR. TULIP, THIS IS YOUR WHOLE LIFE AS IT PASSED BEFORE OTHER PEOPLE’S EYES…
By the time the golems arrived, it was all over. The fire had been fierce but short-lived. It had stopped because there wasn’t anything left to burn. The crowd that always turns up to watch a fire had already dispersed until the next one, reckoning that this one had not scored very high, what with no one dying. The walls were still standing. Half the tin roof had fallen in. Sleet had began to fall, too, and now it hissed on the hot stone as William picked his way cautiously through the debris.
The press was visible in the light of the few fires still smoldering. William heard it sizzling under the sleet.
“Repairable?” he said to Goodmountain, who was following him. “Not a chance. The frame, maybe. We’ll salvage what we can.” “Look, I’m so sorry—” “Not your fault,” said the dwarf, kicking at a smoking can. “And look on the bright side…we still owe Harry King a lot of money.”
“Don’t remind me…”
“I don’t need to. He’ll remind you. Us, rather.”
William wrapped his jacket around his sleeve and pushed aside some of the roof. “The desks are still here!” “Fire can be funny like that,” said Goodmountain gloomily. “And the roof probably kept the worst of it away.”
“I mean, they’re half charred but they’re still usable!”
“Oh, well, we’re home and dry, then,” said the dwarf. “How soon do you want the next edition?” “Look, even the spike…there’s even bits of paper that are hardly charred!” “Life is full of unexpected treasure,” said Goodmountain. “I don’t think you should come in here, miss!”
This was to Sacharissa, who was picking her way across the smoldering ruins. “It’s where I work,” she said. “Can you repair the press?” “No! It’s…done for! It’s scrap! We’ve got no press and no type and no metal! Can you both hear me?”
“Okay, so we’ve got to get another press,” said Sacharissa evenly.
“Even an old scrap one would cost a thousand dollars!” said Goodmountain. “Look, it’s over. There is nothing left!”
“I’ve got some savings,” said Sacharissa, pushing the rubble off her desk. “Perhaps we can get one of those little handpresses to be going on with.”
“I’m in debt,” said William. “But I could probably go into debt another few hundred dollars.”
“Do you think we could go on working if we put a tarpaulin over the roof, or should we move to somewhere else?” said Sacharissa.
“I don’t want to move. A few days’ work should get this place in shape,” said William.
Goodmountain cupped his hands around his mouth. “Hellooo! This is sanity calling! We have no money.”
“There’s not much room to expand, though,” said Sacharissa. “In what way?” “Magazines,” said Sacharissa, as the sleet settled in her hair. Around her the other dwarfs spread out on a hopeless salvage operation. “Yes, I know the paper’s important, but there’s a lot of dead time on the press and, well, I’m sure there’d be a market for something like, well, a magazine for ladies…”
“Dead time on the press?” said Goodmountain. “The press is dead!” “What about?” said William, completely ignoring him. “Oh…fashion. Pictures of women wearing new clothes. Knitting. That sort of thing. And don’t you go telling me it’s too dull. People will buy it.”
“Clothes? Knitting?”
“People are interested in that sort of thing.”
“I don’t like that idea much,” said William. “You might as well say we should have a magazine just for men.”
“Why not? What would you put in it?”
“Oh, I don’t know. Articles about drink. Pictures of women not wearing…anyway, we’d need more people to write for them.”
“Excuse me?” said Goodmountain.
“Lots of people can write well enough for that sort of thing,” said Sacharissa. “If it was clever, we wouldn’t be able to do it.” “That’s true.” “And there’s another magazine that would sell, too,” said Sacharissa. Behind her, a piece of the press collapsed.
“Hello? Hello? I know my mouth is opening and shutting,” said Goodmountain. “Is any sound getting out?”
“Cats,” said Sacharissa. “Lots of people like cats. Pictures of cats. Stories about cats. I’ve been thinking about it. It could be called…Completely Cats.”
“To go with Completely Women, and Completely Men? Completely Knitting? Completely Cake?”
“I had thought of calling it something like the Ladies’ Home Companion,” said Sacharissa, “but your title has got a certain ring, I must admit. Ring…yes. Now, that’s another thing. There’s all these dwarfs in the city. We could produce a magazine for them. I mean…what’s the modern dwarf wearing this season?”
“Chain mail and leather,” said Goodmountain, suddenly perplexed. “What are you talking about? It’s always chain mail and leather!”
Sacharissa ignored him. The two of them were in a world of their own, Goodmountain realized. It had nothing to do with the real one anymore.
“Seems a bit of a waste, though,” said William. “A waste of words, I mean.”
“Why? There’s always more of them.” Sacharissa patted him gently on the cheek. “You think you’re writing words that’ll last forever? It’s not like that. This newspaper stuff…that’s words that last for a day. Maybe a week.”
“And then they get thrown away,” said William. “Perhaps a few hang on. In people’s heads.” “That’s not where the paper ends up,” said William. “Quite the reverse.”
“What did you expect? These aren’t books, they’re…words that come and go. Cheer up.” “There’s a problem,” said William. “Yes?”
“We haven’t got enough money for a new press. Our shed has been burned down. We are out of business. It’s all over. Do you understand?”
Sacharissa looked down.
“Yes,” she said meekly. “I just hoped you didn’t.”
“And we were so close. So close.” William pulled out his notebook. “We could have run with
this. I’ve got nearly the whole thing. All I can do with it now is give it to Vimes—” “Where’s the lead?” William looked across the wreckage. Boddony was crouching by the smoking press, trying to see under it.
“There’s not a sign of the lead!” he said.
“It’s got to be somewhere,” said Goodmountain. “In my experience, twenty tons of lead do not just get up and walk away.”
“It must’ve melted,” said Boddony. “There’s a few blobs on the floor…”
“The cellar,” said Goodmountain. “Give me a hand here, will you?” He grabbed a blackened beam.
“Here, I’ll help,” said William, coming around the stricken desk. “It’s not as though I’ve got anything better to do…”
He got a grip on a tangle of charred wood and pulled--
Mr. Pin arose from the pit like a demon king. Smoke poured off him and he was screaming one long, incoherent scream. He rose and rose and knocked Goodmountain aside with a round-arm sweep and then his hands clamped around William’s neck and still his leap propelled him up.
William fell backwards. He landed on the desk, and felt a stab of pain as some piece of debris went through the flesh of his arm. But there was no time to think about pain that had happened. It was imminent pain that occupied all his future. The face of the creature was inches away, eyes wide and staring through him at something horrible, but his hands tight around William’s neck.
William would never have dreamed of using a cliché as tired as “viselike grip” but, as consciousness became a red-walled tunnel, the editor inside him said, yes, that’s what it would be like, the sheer mechanical pressures that…
The eyes crossed. The scream stopped. The man staggered sideways, half crouched. As William raised his head he saw Sacharissa stepping backwards. The editor chittered away in his head, watching him watching her. She’d kicked the man in the… Er, You Know! It had to be the influence of those humorous vegetables. It had to be.
And he had to get the Story.
William got to his feet and waved frantically at the dwarfs, who were advancing with their axes at the ready.
“Wait! Wait! Look…you…er…Brother Pin…” He winced at the pain in his arm, looked down and saw, with horror, the evil length of the spike poking through the cloth of his jacket.
Mr. Pin tried to focus on the boy grappling with his own arm, but the shadows wouldn’t let him. He wasn’t certain, now, that he was still alive. Yes! That was it! He must be dead! All this smoke, people shouting, all the voices whispering in his ear, this was some kind of hell but, aha, he had a return ticket…
He managed to straighten up. He fished the potato of the late Mr. Tulip out of his shirt. He held it aloft.
“G’t m’ ’tato,” he said, proudly. “All right, okay?”
William stared at the smoke-stained, red-eyed face, with its horrible expression of triumph, and then at the shrunken vegetable on the end of its string. His grip of reality was at the moment almost as slippery as Mr. Pin’s, and people showing him a potato seemed to mean only one thing.
“Er…it’s not a very funny one, is it?” he said, wincing as he tugged at the spike.
Mr. Pin’s last train of thought jumped the rails. He let go of the potato and with a movement that owed nothing to thought and everything to instinct pulled a long dagger from inside his jacket. The figure before him was fading into just another shadow among many now, and he lunged madly.
William pulled the metal free, and his hand flew out in front of him— And that, for the moment, was everything that Mr. Pin ever knew. The sleet hissed on a few remaining embers.
William stared into the puzzled face as the light in the eyes went out and the attacker sagged slowly to the ground, one hand fiercely hanging onto the potato.
“Oh,” said Sacharissa distantly. “You spiked him…” Blood dripped down William’s sleeve. “I…er…I think I could do with a bandage,” he said. Ice shouldn’t be hot, he knew, but shock was filling his veins with a burning chill. He was sweating ice.
Sacharissa ran forward, tearing at the sleeve of her blouse.
“I don’t think it’s bad,” said William, trying to back away. “I just think it’s one of those… enthusiastic wounds.”
“Vot has been happening here?”
William looked at the blood on his hand, and then at Otto, standing on top of a pile of rubble with an amazed look on his face and a couple of packages in his hands.
“I just go avay for five minutes to buy some more acids and suddenly zer whole place…oh dear…oh dear…”
Goodmountain pulled a tuning fork out of his pocket and twanged it on his helmet. “Quick, lads!” He waved the fork in the air. “‘Oh will you come to the mission—’” Otto waved his hand gently as the dwarfs began to sing. “No, I am vell on top of it, thank you all the same,” he said. “Ve know vot all this is about, don’t ve. It vas a mob, yes? Zere is alvays a mob, sooner or later. Zey got my friend Boris. He showed them zer black ribbon but zey just laughed and—”
“I think they were after all of us,” said William. “I wish I’d had a chance to ask him a few questions, even so…”
“You mean like ‘Is this the first time you’ve strangled anyone?’” said Boddony. “Or ‘How old are you, Mr. Killer?’”
Something started to cough.
It seemed to be the pocket of the man’s jacket.
William looked around at the stunned dwarfs to see if anyone else had a clue about what he should do next. Then he reluctantly patted the greasy suit with extreme carefulness and pulled out a slim, polished box.
He opened it. A small green imp peered out of its slot. “’m?” it said. “What? A personal Dis-organizer?” said William. “A killer with a personal Dis-organizer?” “The Things to Do Today section is going to be interesting, then,” said Boddony. The imp blinked at him.
“Do you want me to reply or not?” it said. “Insert Name Here requested silence, despite my range of sounds to suit any mood or occasion.” “Um…your previous owner is…previous,” said William, looking down at the cooling Mr. Pin. “You’re a new owner?” said the imp.
“Well…possibly.”
“Congratulations!” said the imp. “Warranty not applicable if said device is sold, hired, transferred, gifted, or stolen unless in original packaging and extraneous materials which by then you will have thrown away and Part Two of the warranty card which you have lost has been filled in and sent to Thttv ggj, thhtfjhsssjk the Scors and quoting the reference number which you did not in fact make a note of.”
“Do you want me to wipe the contents of my memory?” It produced a cotton wool bud and prepared to insert it into one very large ear. “Erase Memory Y/N?”
“Your…memory…?”
“Yes. Erase Memory Y/N?”
“N!” said William. “And now tell me what exactly is it you are remembering,” he added. “You have to press the Recall button,” said the imp impatiently. “And that will do what?”
“A small hammer hits me on the head and I look to see what button you pressed.” “Why don’t you just, well, recall?” “Look, I don’t make the rules. You’ve got to press the button. It’s in the manual—” William carefully pushed the box to one side. There were several velvet bags in the dead man’s pocket. He put these on the desk, too.
Some of the dwarfs had gone a little way down the iron ladder into the cellar. Boddony climbed back out again, looking thoughtful.
“There’s a man down there,” he said. “Lying in…lead.” “Dead?” said William, looking carefully at the bags. “I hope so. I really hope so. You could say he made a bit of an impression. He’s a bit on the… cooked side. And there’s an arrow through his head.”
“William, you realize that you are robbing a corpse?” said Sacharissa.
“Good,” said William distantly. “Best time.” He upended a bag, and jewels spilled across the charred wood.
There was a strangled noise from Goodmountain. Next to gold, jewels were a dwarf’s best friend.
William emptied the other bags.
“How much do you think this lot is worth?” he said, when the gems stopped rolling and twinkling.
Goodmountain had already whipped an eyeglass from an inside pocket and was inspecting a few of the larger stones. “What? Hey? Oh? Tens of thousands. Could be a hundred thousand. Could be a lot more. This one here is worth fifteen hundred, I reckon, and it’s not the best of ’em.”
“He must’ve stolen them!” said Sacharissa.
“No,” said William calmly. “We’d have heard about a theft this big. We hear about things. A young man would certainly have told you. Check to see if he has a wallet, will you?”
“The very idea! And what—”
“Check for a damn wallet, will you?” said William. “This is a story. I’m going to check his legs, and I’m not looking forward to that, either. But this is a story. We can have hysterics later. Do it. Please?”
There was a half-healed bite on the dead man’s leg. William rolled up his own trouser leg for comparison while Sacharissa, her eyes averted, pulled a brown leather wallet out of the jacket.
“Any clue to who he is?” said William, carefully measuring toothmarks with his pencil. His mind felt strangely calm. He wondered if he was actually thinking at all. It all seemed like some dream, happening in another world.
“Er…there’s something done on the leather in pokerwork,” said Sacharissa. “What does it say?” “‘Not A Very Nice Person At All,’” she read. “I wonder what kind of person would put that on a wallet?”
“Someone who wasn’t a very nice person,” said William. “Anything else in there?”
“There’s a piece of paper with an address,” said Sacharissa. “Er…I didn’t have time to tell you this, er, William. Um…”
“What does it say?”
“It’s Fifty Nonesuch Street. Er. Which is where those men caught me. They had a key and everything. Er…that’s your family’s house, isn’t it?”
“What do you want me to do with these jewels?” said Goodmountain.
“I mean, you gave me a key and everything,” said Sacharissa nervously. “But there was this man in the cellar, highly inebriated, and he looked just like Lord Vetinari, and then these men turned up and knocked out Rocky and then—”
“I’m not suggesting anything,” said Goodmountain, “but if these aren’t stolen, then I know plenty of places that’d give us top dollar, even at this time of night—”
“—and of course they were most impolite but really there was nothing I could do—” “—we could do with a bit of immediate cash, is the point I’m trying to make—” It dawned on the girl and the dwarf that William was no longer listening. He seemed locked, blank-faced, in a little bubble of silence.
Slowly, he pulled the Dis-organizer towards him, and pressed the button marked “Recall.” There was a muffled “ouch.”
“…nyip-nyap mapnyap nyee-wheedlewheedlewheee…” “What’s that noise?” said Sacharissa. “It’s how an imp remembers,” said William distantly. “It…sort of plays its life backwards. I used to have an early version of this,” he added.
The noise stopped. The imp said, very apprehensively, “What happened to it?” “I took it back to the shop because it wasn’t working properly,” said William. “That’s a relief,” said the imp. “You’d be amazed at some of the terrible things people did to the Mk I. What went wrong with it?”
“It got flung through a third-floor window,” said William, “for being unhelpful.” This imp was a little brighter than most of the species. It saluted smartly. “…wheeeewheedlewheedle nyap-nyark…Testing, testing…seems okay—” “That’s Brother Pin!” said Sacharissa. “—say something, Mr. Tulip,” and the voice became the damp growl of Sister Jennifer. “What’ll I say? It’s not natural, talkin’ to a —ing box. This box, Mr. Tulip, may be a passport to better times. I thought we were getting the —ing money. Yes, and this’ll help us keep it… nyipnyip…”
“Go forward a bit,” William commanded.
“—whee…nyip dog has got personality. Personality counts for a lot. And the legal precedents —”
“That’s Slant!” said Boddony. “That lawyer!”
“What shall I do with the jewels?” said Goodmountain.
“…nyipnyip…I can add another five thousand dollars in jewels to your fee…nyip…”
“I want to know who’s giving me these orders…nyip…not be stupid, either. My…clients have long memories and deep pockets…” In its terror the imp was skipping.
William pressed the Pause button.
“Slant gave him the money,” he said. “Slant was paying him. Did you hear him mention clients? You understand? This is one of the men who attacked Vetinari! And they had a key to our house?” “But we can’t just keep the money!” said Sacharissa. William pressed the button again.
“…nyip…they say, a lie can run around the world before the truth has got its boots on…”
“Obviously, we—” Sacharissa began. He pressed the button. “Wheeewheedlewheedle lie can run around the world before the truth has got its boots on.”
He pressed a button again.
“Wheeewheedlewheedle can run around the world before the truth has got its boots on.” “Wheeewheedlewheedle around the world before the truth has got its boots on.” “Wheeewheedle the truth has got its boots on.” “Are you all right, William?” said Sacharissa, as he stood motionless. “Delayed shock,” Goodmountain whispered. “It can take people that way.” “Mister Goodmountain,” said William sharply, still with his back to them, “did you say you could get me another press?”
“I said they cost a—”
“—handful of rubies, perhaps?” Goodmountain opened his hand. “Are these ours, then?” “Yes!”
“Well…in the morning I could buy a dozen presses, but it’s not like buying sweets—”
“I want go to press in half an hour,” said William. “Otto, I want pictures of Brother Pin’s leg. I want quotes from everyone, even Foul Ole Ron. And a picture of Wuffles, Otto. And I want a printing press!”
“I told you, where could we get a printing press at this time of ni—” The floor shook. The heaps of rubble shifted. All eyes turned to the high lighted windows of the Inquirer.
Sacharissa, who had been watching William wide-eyed, breathed so heavily that Otto groaned and averted his face and started to hum frantically.
“There’s your press!” she shouted. “All you have to do is get it!” “Yeah, but just stealing a—” the dwarf began. “Borrowing,” said William. “And half the jewels are yours.” Goodmountain’s nostrils flared. “Let’s just—” he began to yell, and then said, “You did say half, did you?” “Yes!” “Let’s just do it, lads!”
One of the Inquirer’s overseers knocked politely on Mr. Carney’s door.
“Yes, Causley? Has Dibbler turned up yet?” said the Inquirer’s proprietor.
“No, sir, but there’s a young lady to see you. It’s that Miss Cripslock,” said the overseer, wiping his hands on a rag.
Carney brightened up. “Really?”
“Yes, sir. She’s in a bit of a state. And that de Worde fellow is with her.”
Carney’s smile faded a little. He’d watched the fire from his window with great glee, but he had been bright enough not to step out into the street. Those dwarfs were pretty vicious, from what he’d heard, and would be bound to blame him. In fact, he hadn’t the faintest idea why the place had caught fire, but it was hardly unexpected, was it?
“So…it’s time for the humble pie, is it?” he said, half to himself. “Is it, sir?” “Send them up, will you?”
He sat back and looked at the paper spread out on his desk. Damn that Dibbler! The odd thing was, though, that those things he wrote were like the wretched sausages he sold—you knew them for what they were, but nevertheless you kept on going to the end, and coming back for more. Making them up wasn’t as easy as it looked, either. Dibbler had the knack. He’d make up some story about some huge monster being seen in the lake in Hide Park, and five readers would turn up swearing that they’d seen it, too. Ordinary, everyday people, such as you might buy a loaf off. How did he do it? Carney’s desk was covered with his own failed attempts. You needed a special kind of imagi--
“Why, Sacharissa,” he said, standing up as she crept into the room. “Do take the chair. I’m afraid I don’t have one for your…friend.” He nodded at William. “May I say how sad I was to hear about the fire?”
“It’s your office,” said William coldly. “You can say anything you like.” Beyond the window he could see the torches of the Watch, arriving at the ruins of the old shed. He took a step back.
“Don’t be like that, William,” said Sacharissa. “It’s because of that, you see, Ronnie, that we’ve come to you.”
“Really?” Carney smiled. “You have been a bit of a silly girl, haven’t you…”
“Yes, er…well, all our money was…” Sacharissa sniffed. “The fact is…well, we’ve just got nothing now. We…worked so hard, so hard, and now it’s all gone…” She started to sob.
Ronnie Carney leaned over the desk and patted her hand. “Is there anything I can do?” he said. “Well, I did hope…I wondered if…I mean, d’you think you could see your way clear to…letting us use one of your presses tonight?”
Carney rocked back. “You what? Are you mad?”
Sacharissa blew her nose. “Yes, I thought you’d probably say that,” she said sadly.
Carney, slightly mollified, leaned forward and patted her hand again. “I know we used to play together when we were children—” he began.
“I don’t think we actually played,” said Sacharissa, fishing in her handbag. “You used to chase me and I used to hit you over the head with a wooden cow. Ah, here it is…” She dropped the bag, stood up, and aimed one of the late Mr. Pin’s pistol bows straight at the editor.
“Let us use your ‘ing’ presses or I’ll ‘ing’ shoot your ‘ing’ head ‘ing’ off!” she screamed. “I think that’s how you’re supposed to say it, isn’t it?”
“You wouldn’t dare pull that trigger!” said Carney, trying to crouch in his chair.
“It was a lovely cow, and one day I hit you so hard one of the legs broke off,” said Sacharissa dreamily.
Carney looked imploringly at William. “Can’t you talk some sense into her?” he said. “We just need the loan of one of your presses for an hour or so, Mr. Carney,” said William, while Sacharissa kept the barrel of the bow aimed at the man’s nose with what he judged to be a very strange smile on her face. “And then we’ll be gone.”
“What are you going to do?” said Carney hoarsely. “Well, firstly, I’m going to tie you up,” said William. “No! I’ll call the overseers!” “I think they’re…busy at the moment,” said Sacharissa. Carney listened. It seemed unusually quiet downstairs. He sagged.
The printing staff of the Inquirer were in a ring around Goodmountain.
“Right, lads,” said the dwarf, “here’s how it works. Everyone who goes home early tonight ’cos of a headache gets a hundred dollars, all right? It’s an old Klatchian custom.” “And what happens if we don’t go?” said the foreman, picking up a mallet. “Vell,” said a voice by his ear, “that’s ven you get a…headache.”
There was a flash of lightning and a roll of thunder. Otto punched the air triumphantly.
“Yes!” he shouted, as the printers ran madly towards the doors. “Ven you really, really need it, zere it is! Let’s try vunce more…castle!” The thunder rolled again. The vampire jumped up and down excitedly, coattails flying. “Vow! Now ve are cooking! Vunce more mit feelink! Vot a big…castle…” The thunder was even louder this time.
Otto did a little jig, beside himself with joy, tears running down his gray face. “Music vid Rocks In!” he yelled.
In the silence after the thunder roll, William pulled a velvet bag from his pocket and tipped it out onto the desk blotter.
Carney stared goggle-eyed at the jewels.
“Two thousand dollars’ worth,” said William. “At least. Our admission to the Guild. I’ll just leave them here, shall I? No need for a receipt. We trust you.” Carney said nothing, because of the gag. He had been tied to his chair.
At this point, Sacharissa pulled the trigger. Nothing happened.
“I must’ve forgotten to put the pointy arrow bit in,” she said, as Carney fainted away. “What a silly girl I am. ‘Ing.’ I feel so much better for saying that, you know? ‘Ing.’ ‘Inginginginging.’ I wonder what it means?”
Gunilla Goodmountain looked expectantly at William, who swayed as he tried to think.
“All right,” he said, closing his eyes and pinching the bridge of his nose. “Triple-decker heading, as wide as you can. First line: Conspiracy Revealed! Got that? Next line: Lord Vetinari Is Innocent!” He hesitated at that one, but let it go. People could argue about its general application later on. That wasn’t the important thing at the moment.
“Yes?” said Goodmountain. “And the next line?”
“I’ve written it down,” said William, passing him a page torn from the notebook. “Caps, please. Big caps. Big as you can. The sort the Inquirer used for elves and exploding people.” “This?” said the dwarf, reaching for a case of huge black letters. “Is this news?” “It is now,” said William. He flicked back through the pages of his notebook. “Are you going to write the story down first?” said the dwarf.
“No time. Ready? ‘A plot to illegally seize control of Ankh-Morpork was exposed last night after days of patient detective work by the Watch. Paragraph. The Times understands that two assassins, both now dead, were hired from outside the city to blacken the character of Lord Vetinari and depose him as Patrician. Paragraph. They used an innocent man with a remarkable resemblance to Lord Vetinari in order to trick their way into the Palace. Once inside…’”
“Hold on, hold on,” said Goodmountain. “The Watch didn’t get to the bottom of this, did they? You did!”
“I just said they had been working for days,” said William. “That’s true. I don’t have to say they weren’t getting anywhere.” He saw the look in the dwarf’s eye. “Look, very soon I’m going to have a lot more unpleasant enemies than anyone really needs. I’d like Vimes to be angry at me for making him look good rather than for making him look bad. Okay?”
“Even so—”
“Don’t argue with me!”
Goodmountain didn’t dare. There was a look in William’s face. The boy had frozen when he was listening to the box, and now he’d unfrozen into…someone else.
Someone a lot more touchy and a lot less patient. He looked as though he was running a fever. “Now…where was I?” “‘Once inside…’” said the dwarf.
“Okay…once inside…no…make it: The Times understands that Lord Vetinari was…Sacharissa, you said the man in the cellar looked just like Vetinari?”
“Yes. Haircut and everything.”
“Right. The Times understands that Lord Vetinari was overwhelmed in the moment of shock on seeing himself entering his office—”
“Do we understand that?” said Sacharissa.
“Yes. It makes sense. Who’s going to argue? Where was I…Their plan was foiled by Lord Vetinari’s dog, Wuffles(16), who attacked both men. Paragraph. The noise of this attracted the attention of Lord Vetinari’s clerk, Rufus Drumknott…damn, I forgot to ask him how old he was…who was then knocked unconscious. Paragraph. The attackers tried to put the interruption to good use in their…what’s the good word? Oh, yes…their dastardly plan and stabbed Drumknott with one of Lord Vetinari’s own daggers in an attempt to make it look as if he was insane or murderous. Paragraph. Acting with vicious cunning—”
“You’re getting really good at this,” said Sacharissa.
“Don’t interrupt him,” hissed Boddony. “I want to find out what the dastards did next!” “—with vicious cunning, they forced the bogus Lord Vetinari—” “Good word, good word,” said Goodmountain, setting furiously. “Are you certain about ‘forced’?” said Sacharissa. “They aren’t—they weren’t the kind of men who ask nicely,” said William brusquely. “Er… forced the bogus Lord Vetinari…to make a false confession to some servants who were attracted by the noise. Then all three, carrying the unconscious Lord Vetinari and harried by the dog, Wuffles (16), took the stairs to the stables. Paragraph. There they had set up a scene to suggest that Lord Vetinari had been trying to rob the city, as already reported in—”
“Exclusively in,” Sacharissa said.
“Right, exclusively in the Times. Paragraph. However, the dog Wuffles escaped, dash, and caused a citywide search by the Watch and criminals alike. He was found by a group of public- spirited citizens. They—”
A piece of type dropped from Goodmountain’s fingers. “You mean Foul Ole Ron and that bunch?” “—public-spirited citizens,” William repeated, nodding furiously. “They kept him hidden, while —”
Cold winter storms had the whole of the Sto Plains in which to build up speed. By the time they hit Ankh-Morpork they were fast and heavy and laden with malice.
This time it took the form of hail. Fist-sized balls of ice smashed into tiles. They blocked gutters and filled the streets with shrapnel.
They hammered on the roof of the warehouse in Gleam Street. One or two windows smashed.
William paced up and down, shouting out his words above the force of the storm, occasionally flicking back and forth through the pages of his notebook. Otto came out and handed the dwarfs a couple of iconograph plates. The crew limped and sidled in, ready for the edition.
William stopped. The last letters clicked into place. “Let’s see what it looks like so far,” said William.
Goodmountain inked the type, put a piece of paper over the story, and ran a hand-roller over it. Wordlessly, he handed it to Sacharissa.
“Are you sure of all this, William?” she said. “Yes.” “I mean, some bits—are you sure it’s all true?” “I’m sure it’s all journalism,” said William. “And what is that supposed to mean?” “It means it’s true enough for now.”
“But do you know the names of these people?” William hesitated. Then he said: “Mr. Goodmountain, you can insert an extra paragraph anywhere in the story, can’t you?” “That’s not a problem.” “Right. Then set this: The Times can reveal that the assassins were hired by a group of prominent citizens led by…The Times can reveal that…” He took a deep breath. “Start again…The plotters, the Times can reveal, were headed by…” William shook his head. “Evidence points to…uh…Evidence, the Times can reveal…All the evidence, the Times can reveal…can reveal…” His voice trailed off.
“This is going to be a long paragraph?” said Goodmountain. William stared miserably at the damp proof. “No,” he said wretchedly. “I think that’s it. Let it go at that. Put in a line saying that the Times will be helping the Watch with its enquiries.”
“Why? We’re not guilty of anything, are we?” said Goodmountain.
“Just do it, please.” William screwed the proof into a ball, tossed it onto a bench, and wandered off towards the press.
Sacharissa found him a few minutes later. A print room offers a mass of holes and corners, mostly used by those whose duties require the occasional bunk-off for a quiet smoke. William was sitting on a pile of paper, staring at nothing.
“Is there something you want to talk about?” she said.
“No.”
“Do you know who the conspirators are?” “No.” “Then would it be true to say that you suspect you know who the conspirators are?” He gave her an angry look. “Are you trying journalism on me?” “I’m just supposed to try it on everyone else, then, am I? Not you, then?” she said, sitting down beside him.
William absentmindedly pressed a button of the Dis-organizer.
“Wheeewheedle the truth has got its boots on…”
“You don’t get on very well with your father, is tha—” Sacharissa began.
“What am I supposed to do?” said William. “That’s his favorite saying. He says it proves how gullible people are. Those men had the run of our house. He’s in this up to his neck!” “Yes, but perhaps he just did it as a favor to some other—”
“If my father is involved in anything, he’ll be the leader,” said William flatly. “If you don’t know that, you don’t know the de Wordes. We don’t join any team if we can’t be captain.”
“But it’d be a bit silly, wouldn’t it, to let them use your own house—”
“No, just very, very arrogant,” said William. “We’ve always been privileged, you see. Privilege just means ‘private law.’ That’s exactly what it means. He just doesn’t believe the ordinary laws apply to him. He really believes they can’t touch him, and that if they do he can just shout until they go away. That’s the de Worde tradition, and we’re good at it. Shout at people, get your own way, ignore the rules. It’s the de Worde way. Up until me, obviously.”
Sacharissa was careful not to let her expression change.
“And I didn’t expect this,” William finished, turning the box over and over in his hands. “You said you want to get at the truth, didn’t you?” “Yes, but not this! I…must have got something wrong. I must have. I must have. Even my father couldn’t be this…this stupid. I’ve got to find out what’s really been happening.” “You’re not going to see him, are you?” said Sacharissa. “Yes. By now he’ll know it’s over.”
“Then you ought to take someone with you!”
“No!” snapped William. “Look, you don’t know what my father’s friends are like. They are brought up to give orders, they know that they’re on the right side because if they are on it then it must be the right side, by definition, and when they feel threatened they are bare-knuckle fighters, except that they never take their gloves off. They are thugs. Thugs and bullies, bullies, and the worst kind of bully, because they aren’t cowards and if you stand up to them they only hit you harder. They grew up in a world where, if you were enough trouble, they could have you…disappeared. You think places like the Shades are bad? Then you don’t know what goes on in Park Lane! And my father is one of the worst. But I’m family. We…care about family. So I’ll be all right. You stay here and help them get the paper out, will you? Half a truth is better than nothing,” he added bitterly.
“Vot vas all zat about?” said Otto, coming up as William strode out of the room.
“Oh, he’s…he’s off to see his father,” said Sacharissa, still taken aback. “Who is not a nice man, apparently. He was very…heated about him. Very upset.”
“’Scuse me,” said a voice. The girl turned, but there was no one behind her. Now the invisible speaker sighed. “No, down here,” it said. She looked down at the malformed pink poodle.
“Let’s not mess around, eh?” it said. “Yeah, yeah, dogs can’t talk. Got it in one, well done. So maybe you’ve got some strange ment’l power. That’s that sorted out, then. I couldn’t help overhearin’, ’cos I was listenin’. The lad’s heading into trouble, right? I can smell trouble—”
“Are you some kind of verevolf?” said Otto.
“Yeah, right, I get very hairy every full moon,” said the dog dismissively. “Imagine how much that interferes with my social life. Now, look—”
“But surely dogs can’t talk—” Sacharissa began.
“Oh dear oh dear oh dear,” said Gaspode. “Did I say I was talking?” “Well, not in so many words—” “Right. Wonderful thing, phenomenology. Now, I just seen a hundred dollars walk out the door and I want to see it walk back, right? Lord de Worde is as nasty a piece of work as you find in this town.”
“You know nobility?” said Sacharissa.
“A cat can look at a king, right? That’s legal.”
“I suppose so—”
“So it works for dogs, too. Got to work for dogs if it works for ratbag moggies. I know everyone, I do. Lord de Worde used to get his butler to put down poisoned meat for the street dogs.”
“But he wouldn’t hurt William, would he?”
“I’m not a betting man,” said Gaspode. “But if he does, right, we still get the hundred dollars, yes?”
“We cannot stand by and let him do zis,” said Otto. “I like Villiam. He was not brought up nice but he tries to be a nice person, vithout even cocoa and a singsong to help him. It is hard to go against your nature. Ve must…help him.”
Death placed the final hourglass back onto the air, where it faded away.
THERE, he said. WASN’T THAT INTERESTING? WHAT NEXT, MR. TULIP? ARE YOU READY TO GO?
The figure sat on the cold sand, staring at nothing.
“I…got to be really sorry…?”
OH YES. IT IS SUCH A SIMPLE WORD. BUT HERE…IT HAS MEANING. IT HAS…SUBSTANCE.
“Yeah. I know.” Mr. Tulip looked up, his eyes redrimmed, his face puffy. “I reckon…to be that sorry, you got to take a —ing good run at it.”
YES.
“So…how long have I got?”
Death looked up at the strange stars. ALL THE TIME IN THE WORLD. “Yeah…well, maybe that’ll —ing do it. Maybe there won’t be no more world to go back to by then.”
I BELIEVE IT DOES NOT WORK LIKE THAT. I UNDERSTAND REINCARNATION CAN TAKE PLACE ANYWHEN. WHO SAYS LIVES ARE SERIAL
“You sayin’…I could be alive before I was born?”
YES.
“Maybe I can find me and kill myself,” said Mr. Tulip, staring at the sand.
NO, BECAUSE YOU WILL NEVER KNOW.. AND YOU MAY BE LEADING QUITE A DIFFERENT LIFE.
Death patted Mr. Tulip on the shoulder, which flinched under the touch. I SHALL LEAVE YOU NOW-- “That’s a good scythe you got there,” said Mr. Tulip, slowly and laboriously. “That silver work’s craftsmanship if ever I saw it.”
THANK YOU, said Death. AND NOW, I REALLY MUST BE GOING. BUT I WILL PASS THROUGH HERE, SOMETIMES. MY DOOR, he added, IS ALWAYS OPEN.
He strode off. The hunched figure disappeared into the darkness, but a new one appeared, running madly across the not-exactly-sand.
It was waving a potato on a string. It stopped when it saw Death and then, to Death’s amazement, turned to look behind it. This had never happened before. Most people, upon coming face-to-face with Death, ceased worrying about anything behind them.
“Is there anyone after me? Can you see anyone?” ER…NO. WHERE YOU EXPECTING ANYONE? “Oh, right. No one, eh? Right!” said Mr. Pin, squaring his shoulders. “Yeah! Hah! Hey, look, I’ve got my potato!”
Death blinked, and then took an hourglass out of his robe. MR. PIN? AH. THE OTHER ONE. I HAVE BEEN EXPECTING YOU. “That’s me! And I’ve got my potato, look, and I’m very sorry about everything!” Mr. Pin was feeling quite calm now. The mountains of madness have many little plateaus of sanity.
Death stared into the madly smiling face. YOU ARE VERY SORRY? “Oh, yes!”
ABOUT EVERYTHING?
“Yep!”
AT THIS TIME? IN THIS PLACE? YOU DECLARE YOU ARE SORRY?
“That’s right. You got it. You’re bright. So if you’ll just show me how to get back—” YOU WOULD NOT LIKE TO RECONSIDER? “No arguing, I want what’s due,” said Mr. Pin. “I’ve got my potato. Look.”
AND I SEE. Death reached into his robe and pulled out what looked to Mr. Pin, at first sight, like a miniature model of himself. But there was a rat skull looking out from under the tiny cowl.
Death grinned.
SSY HELLO TO MY LITTLE FRIEND, he said.
The Death of Rats reached out and snatched the string. “Hey—” DO NOT PUT ALL YOUR TRUST IN ROOT VEGETABLES. WHAT THINGS SEEM MAY NOT BE WHAT THEY ARE, said Death. YET LET NO ONE SAY I DON’T HONOR THE LAW. He snapped his fingers. RETURN, THEN, TO WHERE YOU SHOULD GO…
Blue light flicked for a moment around the astonished Pin, and then he vanished. Death sighed and shook his head. THE OTHER ONE…HAD SOMETHING IN HIM THAT COULD BE BETTER, he said. BUT THE ONE…He sighed deeply. WHO KNOWS WHAT EVIL LURKS IN THE HEART OF MEN?
The Death of Rats looked up from the feast of the potato. SQUEAK, he said. Death waved a hand dismissively.
WELL, YES, OBVIOUSLY ME, he said. I JUST WONDERED IF THERE WAS ANYONE ELSE.
William, ducking from doorway to doorway, realized that he was taking the long way round. Otto would have said that it was because he didn’t want to arrive.
The storm had abated slightly, although stinging hail still bounced off his hat. The much bigger balls from the initial onslaught filled the gutters and covered the roads. Carts had skidded, pedestrians were hanging onto the walls.
Despite the fire in his head, he took out his notebook and wrote: hlstns bggr than golf blls? and made a mental note to check one against a golf ball, just in case. Part of him was beginning to understand that his readers might have a very relaxed attitude about the guilt of politicians, but were red-hot on the things like the size of weather.
He stopped on the Brass Bridge and sheltered in the lee of one of the giant hippos. Hail peppered the surface of the river with a thousand tiny sucking noises.
The rage was cooling now.
For most of William’s life Lord de Worde had been a distant figure staring out of his study window, in a room lined with books that never got read, while William stood meekly in the middle of acres of good but threadbare carpet and listened to…well, viciousness mostly, now that he thought about it, the opinions of Mr. Windling dressed up in more expensive words.
The worst part, the worst part, was that Lord de Worde was never wrong. It was not a position he understood in relation to his personal geography. People who took an opposing view were insane, or dangerous, or possibly even not really people. You couldn’t have an argument with Lord de Worde. Not a proper argument. An argument, from arguer, meant to debate and discuss and persuade by reason. What you could have with William’s father was a flaming row.
Icy water dripped off one of the statues and ran down William’s neck.
Lord de Worde used words with a tone and a volume that made them as good as fists, but he’d never used actual violence.
He had people for that.
Another drop of thawed hail coursed down William’s spine. Surely even his father couldn’t be this stupid? He wondered if he should turn over everything to the Watch right now. But whatever they said about Vimes, in the end the man had a handful of men and a lot of influential enemies who had families going back a thousand years and the same amount of honor that you’d find in a dogfight.
No. He was a de Worde. The Watch was for other people, who couldn’t sort out their problems their own way. And what was the worst that could happen?
So many things, he thought as he set out again, that it would be hard to decide which one was the worst.
A galaxy of candles burned in the middle of the floor. In the corroded mirrors around the room they looked like the lights of a shoal of deep-sea fishes.
William walked past overturned chairs. There was one upright, though, behind the candles. He stopped. “Ah…William,” said the chair. Then Lord de Worde slowly unfolded his lanky form from the embracing leather and stood up in the light.
“Father,” said William.
“I thought you’d come here. Your mother always liked the place, too. Of course, it was… different in those days.”
William said nothing. It had been.
“I think this nonsense has got to stop now, don’t you?” said Lord de Worde. “I think it is stopping, Father.” “But I don’t think you mean what I mean,” said Lord de Worde.
“I don’t know what you think you mean,” said William. “I just want to hear the truth from you.”
Lord de Worde sighed. “The truth? I had the best interests of the city at heart, you know. You’ll understand, one day. Vetinari is ruining the place.”
“Yes…well…that’s where it all becomes difficult, doesn’t it?” said William, amazed that his voice hadn’t even begun to shake yet. “I mean, everyone says that sort of thing, don’t they? ‘I did it for the best,’ ‘the end justifies the means’…the same words, every time.”
“Don’t you agree, then, that it’s time for a ruler who listens to the people?” “Maybe. Which people did you have in mind?” Lord de Worde’s mild expression changed. William was surprised it had survived this long. “You are going to put this in your rag of a newspaper, aren’t you?” William said nothing.
“You can’t prove anything. You know that.”
William stepped into the light, and Lord de Worde saw the notebook.
“I can prove enough,” said William. “That’s all that matters, really. The rest will become a matter of…inquiry. Do you know they call Vimes ‘Vetinari’s terrier’? Terriers dig and dig and don’t let go.”
Lord de Worde put his hand on the hilt of his sword. And William heard himself think: Thank you. Thank you. Up until now, I couldn’t believe it… “You have no honor, do you?” said his father, still in the voice of infuriating calm. “Well, publish and be damned to you, and to the Watch. We gave no order to—”
“I expect you didn’t,” said William. “I expect you said ‘make it so’ and left the details to people like Pin and Tulip. Bloody hands at arm’s length.”
“As your father I order you to cease this…this…” “You used to order me to tell the truth,” said William. Lord de Worde drew himself up. “Oh, William, William! Don’t be so naive.”
William shut his notebook. The words came easier now. He’d leapt from the building and found that he could fly.
“And which one is this?” he said. “The truth that is so precious it must be surrounded by a bodyguard of lies? The truth that is stranger than fiction? Or the truth that is still putting on its boots when a lie is running around the world?” he went on, stepping forward. “That’s your little phrase, isn’t it? It doesn’t matter anymore. I think Mr. Pin was going to try blackmail and, you know, so am I, naive as I am. You’re going to leave the city, right now. That shouldn’t be too hard for you. And you had better hope that nothing happens to me, or anyone I work with, or anyone I know.”
“Really?”
“Right now!” screamed William, so loud that Lord de Worde rocked backwards. “Have you gone deaf as well as insane? Right now and don’t come back, because if you do I’ll publish every damn word you’ve just said!” William pulled the Dis-organizer out of his pocket. “Every damn word! D’you hear me? And not even Mr. Slant will be able to grease your way out of that! You even had the arrogance, the stupid arrogance, to use our house! How dare you! Get out of the city! And either draw that sword or take…your…hand…off…it!”
He stopped, red-faced and panting.
“The truth has got its boots on,” he said. “It’s going to start kicking.” His eyes narrowed. “I told you to take your hand off that sword!”
“So silly, so silly. And I believed you were my son…”
“Ah, yes. I nearly forgot that,” said William, now rocketing on rage. “You know one of the customs of the dwarfs? No, of course you don’t, because they’re not really people, are they? But I
know one or two of them, you see, and so…” He pulled a velvet bag out of his pocket and threw it down in front of his father.
“And this is…?” said Lord de Worde.
“There’s more than twenty thousand dollars in there, as close as a couple of experts could estimate,” said William. “I didn’t have a lot of time to work it out and I didn’t want you to think I was being unfair, so I’ve erred on the generous side. That must cover everything I’ve cost you, over the years. School fees, clothes, everything. I have to confess you didn’t make such a good job of it, given that I’m the end result. I’m buying myself off you, you see.”
“Oh, I see. The dramatic gesture. Do you really think that family is a matter of money?” said Lord de Worde.
“We-ll, yes, according to history. Money, land, and titles,” said William. “It’s amazing how often we failed to marry anyone who didn’t have at least two out of three.”
“Cheap jibe. You know what I mean.”
“I don’t know if I do,” said William. “But I do know I got that money a few hours ago off a man who tried to kill me.”
“Tried to kill you?” For the first time, there was a note of uncertainty.
“Why, yes. You’re surprised?” said William. “If you throw something into the air, don’t you have to worry about where it bounces?”
“Indeed you do,” said Lord de Worde. He sighed and made a little hand signal, and William saw shadows detach themselves from deeper shadows. And he remembered that you couldn’t run the de Worde estates without a lot of hired help, in every department of life. Hard men in little round hats, who knew how to evict and distrain and set mantraps…
“You have been overdoing it, I can see,” said his father, as they advanced. “I think you need… yes, a long sea voyage. The Isles of Fog, perhaps, or possibly Fourecks. Or Bhangbhangduc. There’s fortunes to be made there, I understand, by young men prepared to get their hands dirty. Certainly there’s nothing for you here…nothing good.”
William made out four figures now. He’d seen them around on the estates. They tended to have one-word names, like Jenks or Clamper, and no visible pasts at all.
One of them said, “Now, if you’ll just see a bit o’sense, Mr. William, we can all do this nice and quiet…”
“Small sums of money will be sent to you periodically,” said Lord de Worde. “You will be able to live in a style which—”
A few wisps of dust spiraled down from the shadowy ceiling, twirling like sycamore leaves. They landed next to the velvet bag. Overhead, a shrouded chandelier jingled gently. William looked up. “Oh, no,” he said. “Please…don’t kill anyone!” “What?” said Lord de Worde.
Otto Chriek dropped to the floor, hands raised like talons.
“Good evening!” he said to a shocked bailiff. He looked at his hand. “Oh, vot am I thinking of!” He bunched his fists, and danced from foot to foot. “Put zem up in the traditional Ankh-Morpork pugilism!”
“Put them up?” said the man, raising a cudgel. “Blow that!”
A jab from Otto lifted him off his feet. He landed on his back, spinning, and slid away across the polished floor. Otto spun around so fast that he blurred, and there was a smack as another man went down.
“Vot’s this? Vot’s this? I’m using your civilized fisticuffs, and you don’t vant to fight?” he said, springing back and forth like an amateur boxer. “Ah, you, sir, you show fight—” The fists blurred into invisibility and pummeled a man like a punchbag. Otto straightened up as the man fell, and absentmindedly punched sideway to catch the charging fourth man on the chin. The man actually spun in the air.
This happened in a few seconds. And then William got enough of a grip to shout a warning. He was too late.
Otto looked down at the length of sword blade sticking too far into his chest.
“Oh, vill you look at zis,” he said. “You know, in zis job I just cannot make a shirt last two days?”
He turned to Lord de Worde, who was backing away, and cracked his knuckles. “Keep it away from me!” barked His Lordship. William shook his head.
“Oh, yes?” said Otto, still advancing. “You think I am an it? Vell, let me act like an it.”
He grabbed Lord de Worde’s jacket and held him up in the air, with one hand, at arm’s length.
“Ve have people like you back home,” he said. “Zey are the ones that tell the mob vot to do. I come here to Ankh-Morpork, zey tell me things are different, but really it is alvays the same. Always zere are damn people like you! And now, vot shall I do with you?”
He wrenched at his own jacket, and tossed the black ribbon aside. “I never liked zer damn cocoa anyvay,” he said. “Otto!”
The vampire turned.
“Yes, Villiam? Vot is it you vish?”
“That’s going too far.” Lord de Worde had gone pale. William had never seen him so obviously frightened before.
“Oh? You say? You think I bite him? Shall I bite you, Mister Lordship? Vell, maybe not, because Villiam here thinks I am a good person.” He pulled Lord de Worde close, so their faces were a few inches apart. “Now, maybe I have to ask myself, how good am I? Or maybe I just have to ask myself…amI better zan you?” He hesitated for a second or two, and then in a sudden movement jerked the man towards him.
With great delicacy, he planted a kiss on Lord de Worde’s forehead. Then he put the trembling man back down on the floor and patted him on the head.
“Actually, maybe zer cocoa is not too bad and zer young lady who plays zer harmonium, sometimes she vinks at me,” he said, stepping aside.
Lord de Worde opened his eyes and looked at William. “How dare you—” “Shut up,” said William. “Now I’m going to tell you what’s going to happen. I’m not going to name names. That’s my decision. I don’t want my mother to have been married to a traitor, you see. Then there’s Rupert. And my sisters. And me, too. I’m protecting the name. That’s probably very wrong of me, and I’m going to do it anyway. I’m going to disobey you one more time, in fact. I won’t tell the truth. Not the whole truth. Besides, those who want to know these things will find out soon enough. And I daresay they’ll sort it out quietly. You know…just like you do.”
“Traitor?” whispered Lord de Worde. “That is what people would say.” Lord de Worde nodded, like a man caught in an unpleasant dream.
“I could not possibly take the money,” he said. “I wish you joy of it, my son. Because…you are most certainly a de Worde. Good day to you.” He turned and walked away. After a few seconds, the distant door creaked open and shut quietly.
William staggered to a pillar. He was shaking. He replayed the meeting in his head. His brain hadn’t touched the ground the whole time.
“Are you okay, Villiam?” said Otto.
“I feel sick. But…yeah, I’m all right. Of all the boneheaded, stubborn, self-centered, arrogant—” “But you make up for it in other vays,” said Otto. “I meant my father.” “Oh.” “He’s just so certain he’s in the right all the time—” “Sorry, this is still your father ve’re talking about?” “Are you saying I’m like him?” “Oh, no. Qvite different. Absolutely qvite different. No similarities votsoever.” “You didn’t need to go that far!” He stopped. “Did I say ‘thank you’?” “No, you did not.” “Oh dear.” “No, you noticed that you didn’t, so zat is okay,” said Otto. “Every day, in every vay, ve get better and better. By the vay, vould you mind pulling this sword out of me? Vot kind of idiot just stick it in vampire? All it does is mess up zer linen.”
“Let me help—” William gingerly withdrew the blade. “Can I put zis on my expenses?” “Yes, I think so.”
“Good. And now it is all over and time for rewards and medals,” said the vampire cheerfully, adjusting his jacket. “So vhere are your troubles now?”
“Just starting,” said William. “I think I’m going to be seeing the inside of the Watch House in less than an hour.”
In fact it was forty-three minutes later that William de Worde was Helping the Watch, as they say, with Their Inquiries.
On the other side of the table Commander Vimes was carefully rereading the Times. He was, William knew, taking longer than necessary in order to make him nervous.
“I can help you with any long words you don’t recognize,” he volunteered.
“It’s very good,” said Vimes, ignoring this. “But I need to know more. I need to know the names. I think you know the names. Where did they meet? Things like that. I need to know them.”
“Some things are a mystery to me,” said William. “You’ve got more than enough evidence to release Lord Vetinari.”
“I want to know more.” “Not from me.” “Come on Mr. de Worde. We’re on the same side here!”
“No. We’re just on two different sides that happen to be side by side.”
“Mr. de Worde, earlier today you assaulted one of my officers. Do you know how much trouble you are in already?”
“I expected better of you than that, Mr. Vimes,” said William. “Are you saying I assaulted an officer in uniform? An officer who identified themselves to me?”
“Be careful, Mr. de Worde.”
“I was being followed by a werewolf, Commander. I took steps to…inconvenience it so that I could get away. Would you like to debate this publicly?”
I’m being an arrogant, lying, supercilious bastard, thought William. And I’m good at it. “Then you give me no choice but to arrest you for concealing—” “I demand a lawyer,” said William.
“Really? And who did you have in mind at this time of night?” “Mr. Slant.” “Slant? You think he’ll come out for you?”
“No. I know he’ll come out. Believe me.” “Oh, he will, will he?” “Trust me.”
“Come now,” said Vimes, smiling. “Do we need this? It’s the duty of every citizen to help the Watch, isn’t it?”
“I don’t know. I know the Watch think it is. I’ve never seen it written down,” said William. “Then again, I never knew it was the right of the Watch to spy on innocent people.”
He saw the smile freeze.
“It was for your own good,” Vimes growled.
“I didn’t know it was your job to decide what was good for me.”
This time Vimes won a small prize. “I’m not going to be led, either,” he said. “But I have reason to believe that you are withholding information about a major crime, and that is an offense. That’s against the law.”
“Mr. Slant will come up with something. There’s some precedent, I’ll bet. He’ll go back hundreds of years. The Patricians have always set great store by precedent. Mr. Slant will dig and dig. For years if necessary. That’s how he got where he is today, by digging.”
Vimes leaned forward. “Between you and me, and without your notebook,” he muttered, “Mr. Slant is a devious dead bastard who can bend such law as we have into a puzzle ring.” “Yep,” said William. “And he’s my lawyer. I guarantee it.” “Why would Mr. Slant speak up on your behalf?” said Vimes, staring at William.
William matched him eyeball for eyeball. It’s true, he thought. I’m my father’s son. All I have to do is use it.
“Because he’s a very fair man?” he said. “Now, are you going to send a runner to fetch him? Because if you’re not, you’ve got to let me go.”
Without taking his gaze off William, Vimes reached down and unhooked a speaking tube from the side of his desk. He whistled into it, and then put it to his ear. There was a sound like a mouse pleading for mercy at the other end of a drainpipe.
“Yata whipsie poitl swup?”
Vimes put the tube to his mouth. “Sergeant, send someone up to take Mr. de Worde down to the
cells, will you?”
“Swyddle yumyumpwipwipwip?”
Vimes sighed, and hooked up the pipe again. He got up and opened the door.
“Fred, send someone to take Mr. de Worde down to the cells, will you?” he yelled. “I’m calling it protective custody for now,” he added, turning to William.
“Protecting me from whom?”
“Well, I personally have an overwhelming urge to give you a ding alongside the ear,” said Vimes. “But I suspect there are others out there without my self-control.”
It was in fact quite peaceful in the cells. The bunk was comfortable. The walls were covered with graffiti, and William passed the time correcting the spelling.
The door was unlocked again. A stony-faced constable escorted William back up to Vimes’s office.
Mr. Slant was there. He gave William an impassive nod. Commander Vimes was sitting in front of a small yet significant pile of paper, and had the look of a beaten man.
“I believe Mr. de Worde can go free,” said Mr. Slant.
Vimes shrugged. “I’m only amazed you aren’t asking me to give him a gold medal and an illuminated scroll of thanks. But I’m setting bail at one thou—”
“Ah?” said Mr. Slant, raising a gray finger. Vimes glowered. “One hun—” “Ah?”
Vimes grunted, and reached into his pocket. He tossed William a dollar.
“Here,” he said, with extensive sarcasm. “And if you aren’t in front of the Patrician tomorrow you’ve got to give it back. Satisfied?” he said to Slant.
“Which Patrician?” said William.
“Thank you for that smart answer,” said Vimes. “Just you be there.”
Mr. Slant was silent as he walked out into the night air with his new client, but after a while he said: “I have presented a writ of Exeo Carco Cum Nihil Pretii on the basis of Olfacere Violarum and Sini Plenus Piscis. Tomorrow I shall move that you are Ab Hamo, and in the event of this not working
I—”
“Smelling of Violets,” said William, who had been translating in his head, “and Pockets Full of Fish?”
“Based on a case some six hundred years ago when the defendant successfully pleaded that, although he had indeed pushed the victim into a lake, the man came out with his pockets full of fish, to his net benefit,” said Mr. Slant crisply. “In any case, I shall argue that if withholding information from the Watch is a crime, every person in the city is guilty.”
“Mr. Slant, I do not wish to have to say how and where I got my information,” said William. “If I have to, I shall have to reveal all of it.”
The light from the distant lamp over the Watch House door, behind its blue glass, illuminated the lawyer’s face. He looked ill.
“You really believe those two men had…accomplices?” he said. “I’m sure of it,” said William. “I’d say it’s a matter of…record.” At that point he almost felt sorry for the lawyer. But only almost. “That might not be in the public interest,” said Mr. Slant, slowly. “This ought to be a time for… reconciliation.”
“Absolutely. So I’m sure you will see to it that I don’t have to pour all those words into Commander Vimes’s ear.”
“Strangely enough, there was a precedent in 1497 when a cat successfully—”
“Good. And you will have one of your special quiet words with the Engravers’ Guild. You are good at quiet words.”
“Well, of course, I will do my best. The bill, however—” “—won’t exist,” said William. Only then did Mr. Slant’s parchment features really crease up in pain.
“Pro bono publico?” he croaked.
“Oh, yes. You will certainly be working for the public good,” said William. “And what is good for the public, of course, is good for you. Isn’t that nice?”
“On the other hand,” said Mr. Slant, “perhaps it would be in the interests of everyone to put this sorry affair behind us, and I will be, uh, happy to donate my services.”
“Thank you. Mr. Scrope is now Lo—is now the Patrician?” “Yes.” “By the vote of the Guilds.” “Yes. Of course.” “The unanimous vote?” “I don’t have to tell—” William raised a finger. “Ah?” he said. Mr. Slant squirmed.
“The Beggars and the Seamstresses voted to adjourn,” he said. “So did the Launderers and the Guild of Exotic Dancers.”
“So…that would be Queen Molly, Mrs. Palm, Mrs. Manger, and Miss Dixie Voom,” said William. “What an interesting, life Lord Vetinari must have led.”
“No comment.”
“And would you say Mr. Scrope is looking forward to getting to grips with the manifold problems of running the city?”
Mr. Slant considered this one.
“I think that may be the case,” he conceded.
“Not least of which is the fact that Lord Vetinari is, in fact, completely innocent? And that therefore there is a very large question mark over the appointment? Would you advise that he take up his duties with several spare pairs of underpants? You don’t have to answer that last one.”
“It is not my job to instruct the assembly of Guilds to reverse a legitimate decision, even if it turns out to have been based on…erroneous information. Nor is it my responsibility to advise Mr. Scrope on his choice of undergarments.”
“See you tomorrow, Mr. Slant.”
William barely had time to undress and lie down before it was time to get up again. He washed as best he could, changed his shirt, and went cautiously down to breakfast. He was in fact the first at the
table.
There was the usual stolid silence as the other guests gathered. Most of Mrs. Arcanum’s boarders didn’t bother to talk unless they had something to say. But when Mr. Mackleduff sat down, he pulled out a copy of the Times from his pocket.
“Couldn’t get the paper,” said Mr. Mackleduff, shaking it open. “So I got the other one.”
William coughed. “Anything much in it?” he said. He could see his headline from here, in huge bold caps:
DOG BITES MAN!
He’d made it news.
“Oh…Lord Vetinari got away with it,” said Mr. Mackleduff.
“Well, of course he would,” said Mr. Prone. “Very clever man, whatever they say.”
“And his dog’s all right,” said Mr. Mackleduff. William wanted to shake the man for reading so slowly.
“That’s nice,” said Mrs. Arcanum, pouring out the tea. “Is that it?” said William. “Oh, there’s a lot of political stuff,” said Mr. Mackleduff. “It’s all a bit far-fetched.” “Any good vegetables today?” said Mr. Cartwright. Mr. Mackleduff carefully inspected the other pages. “No,” he said. “My firm are thinking of approaching that man to see if he’d let us sell his seeds for him,” Mr. Cartwright went on. “It’s just the sort of thing people like.” He caught Mrs. Arcanum’s eye. “Only those vegetables suitable for a family environment, of course,” he added quickly.
“Aye, it does you good to laugh,” said Mr. Mackleduff solemnly.
It crossed William’s mind to wonder if Mr. Wintler could grow an obscene pea. But of course he could.
“I would have thought it’s quite important,” he said, “if Lord Vetinari isn’t guilty.”
“Oh, yes, I daresay, to them as has to deal with these things,” said Mr. Mackleduff. “I don’t quite see where we come into it, though.”
“But surely—” William began.
Mrs. Arcanum patted her hair. “I’ve always thought Lord Vetinari was a most handsome man,” she said, and then looked flustered when they all stared at her. “I meant, I’m just a little surprised there isn’t a Lady Vetinari. As it were. Ahem.”
“Oh well, you know what they say,” said Mr. Windling.
A pair of arms shot out across the table, grabbed the surprised man by the lapels, and pulled him up so that his face was a few inches from William’s.
“I don’t know what they say, Mr. Windling!” he shouted. “But you know what they say, Mr. Windling! Why don’t you tell us what they say, Mr. Windling! Why don’t you tell us who told you, Mr. Windling?”
“Mr. de Worde! Really!” said Mrs. Arcanum. Mr. Prone pulled the toast out of the way.
“I’m very sorry about this, Mrs. Arcanum,” said William, still holding the struggling man, “but I want to know what everyone knows and I want to know how they know it. Mr. Windling?”
“They say he’s got some sort of a lady friend who’s very important in Uberwald,” said Mr. Windling. “And I’ll thank you to let go of me!”
“And that’s it? What’s so sinister about that? It’s a friendly country!” “Yes, but, yes, but they say—” William let go. Windling rocked back into his chair, but William stayed standing, breathing heavily.
“Well, I wrote the article in the Times!” he snapped. “And what’s in there is what I say! Me! Because I found things out, and checked things, and people who say ‘ing’ a lot tried to kill me! I’m not the man that’s the brother of some man you met in the pub! I’m not some stupid rumor put about to make trouble! So just remember that, before you try any of that ‘everyone knows’ stuff! And in an hour or so I’ve got to go up to the Palace and see Commander Vimes and whoever is the Patrician and a lot of other people, to get this whole thing sorted out! And it’s not going to be very nice, but I’m going to have to do it, because I wanted you to know things that are important! Sorry about the teapot, Mrs. Arcanum, I’m sure it can be mended.” In the ensuing silence Mr. Prone picked up the paper and said: “You write this?” “Yes!”
“I…er…I thought they had special people…” All heads turned back to William. “There isn’t a they. There’s just me and a young lady. We write it all!” “But…who tells you what to put in?” The heads turned back to William again. “We just…decide.” “Er…is it true about big silver discs kidnapping people?” “No!” To William’s surprise, Mr. Cartwright actually raised his hand. “Yes, Mr. Cartwright?” “I’ve got quite an important question, Mr. de Worde. What with you knowing all this stuff…” “Yes?” “Have you got the address of the funny vegetable man?”
William arrived at the Palace at five minutes to ten, with Otto. There was a small crowd around the gates.
Commander Vimes was standing in the courtyard, talking to Slant and some of the Guild leaders. He smiled in a humorless way when he saw William. “You’re rather late, Mr. de Worde,” he said. “I’m early!” “I meant that things have been happening.”
Mr. Slant cleared his throat. “Mr. Scrope has sent a note,” he said. “It appears that he is ill.” William pulled out his notebook. The city’s leaders focused on it. He hesitated. And then uncertainty evaporated. I’m a de Worde, he thought, don’t you dare look down your nose at me! You’ve got to move with the Times. Oh well… here goes…
“Was it signed by his mother?” he said.
“I don’t follow your meaning,” said the lawyer, but several of the Guild leaders turned their heads away.
“What’s happening now, then?” said William. “We don’t have a ruler?”
“Happily,” said Mr. Slant, who looked like a man in a private hell, “Lord Vetinari is feeling very much better and expects to resume his duties tomorrow.”
“Excuse me, is he allowed to write that down?” said Lord Downey, head of the Assassins’ Guild, as William made a note.
“Allowed by who?” said Vimes. “Whom,” said William, under his breath. “Well, he can’t just write down anything, can he?” said Lord Downey. “Supposing he writes down something we don’t want him to write down?”
Vimes looked William firmly in the eye. “There’s no law against it,” he said. “Lord Vetinari is not going to go on trial, then, Lord Downey?” said William, holding Vimes’s gaze for a second.
Downey, baffled, turned to Slant.
“Can he ask me that?” he said. “Just come out with a question, just like that?” “Yes, my lord.” “Do I have to answer it?”
“It is a reasonable question in the circumstances, my lord, but you don’t have to.” “Do you have a message for the people of Ankh-Morpork?” said William sweetly. “Do we, Mr. Slant?” said Lord Downey. Mr. Slant sighed. “It may be advisable, my lord, yes.” “Oh well, then—no, there won’t be a trial. Obviously.” “And he’s not going to be pardoned?” said William.
Lord Downey turned to Mr. Slant, who gave a little sigh. “Again, my lord, it is—” “All right, all right…no, he’s not going to be pardoned because it is quite clear that he is quite guiltless,” said Downey testily.
“Would you say that this has become clear because of the excellent work done by Commander Vimes and his dedicated band of officers, aided in a small way by the Times?” said William.
Lord Downey looked blank. “Would I say that?” he said.
“I think you possibly would, yes, my lord,” said Slant, sinking further in gloom.
“Oh. Then I would,” said Downey. “Yes.” He craned his neck to see what William was writing down. Out of the corner of his eye William saw Vimes’s expression; it was a strange mixture of amusement and anger.
“And would you say, as spokesman for the Guild council, that you are commending Commander Vimes?” said William.
“Now see here—” Vimes began. “I suppose we would, yes.” “I expect there’s a Watch Medal or a commendation in the offing?” “Now look—” Vimes said. “Yes, very probably. Very probably,” said Lord Downey, now thoroughly buffeted by the winds of change.
William painstakingly noted this down, too, and closed his notebook. This caused a general air of relief among the others.
“Thank you very much, my lord, and ladies and gentlemen,” he said cheerfully. “Oh, Mister Vimes…do you and I have anything to discuss?”
“Not right at this moment,” growled Vimes.
“Oh, that’s good. Well, I must go and get this written up, so thank you once—”
“You will of course show this…article to us before you put it in the paper,” said Lord Downey, rallying a little.
William wore his haughtiness like an overcoat.
“Um, no, I don’t think I will, my lord. It’s my paper, you see.” “Can he—” “Yes, my lord, he can,” said Mr. Slant. “I’m afraid he can. The right to free speech is a fine old Ankh-Morpork tradition.”
“Good heavens, is it?” “Yes, my lord.” “How did that one survive?”
“I couldn’t say, my lord,” said Slant. “But Mr. de Worde,” he added, staring at William, “is, I believe, a young man who would not go out of his way to upset the smooth running of the city.”
William smiled at him, politely, nodded to the rest of the company, and walked back across the courtyard and out into the street. He waited until he was some distance away before he burst out laughing.
A week went past. It was notable because of the things that didn’t happen. There was no protest from Mr. Carney or the Engravers’ Guild. William wondered if he had been carefully moved into the “to be left alone” file. After all, people may be thinking, Vetinari probably owed the Times a favor, and no one would want to be that favor, would they? There was no visit from the Watch, either. There had been rather more street cleaners around than usual, but after William sent a hundred dollars to Harry King, plus a bouquet for Mrs. King, Gleam Street was no longer gleaming.
They’d moved to another shed while the old one was being rebuilt. Mr. Cheese had been easy to deal with. He just wanted money. You know where you stand with simple people like that, even if it is with your hand in your wallet.
A new press had been rolled in, and once again money had made the effort almost frictionless. It had already been substantially redesigned by the dwarfs.
This shed was smaller than the old one, but Sacharissa had contrived to partition off a tiny editorial space. She’d put a potted plant and a coatrack in it, and talked excitedly of the space they’d have when the new building was finished, but William reckoned that however big it was it would never be neat. Newspaper people thought the floor was a big flat filing cabinet.
He had a new desk, too. In fact it was better than a new desk; it was a genuine antique one, made of genuine walnut, inlaid with leather, and with two inkwells, lots of drawers, and genuine woodworm. At a desk like that, a man could write.
They hadn’t brought the spike.
William was pondering over a letter from the Ankh-Morpork League of Decency when the sense that someone was standing nearby made him look up.
Sacharissa had ushered in a small group of strangers, although after a second or two he recognized one of them as the late Mr. Bendy, who was merely strange.
“You remember you said we ought to get more writers?” she said. “You know Mr. Bendy, and this is Mrs. Tilly”—a small white-haired woman bobbed a curtsy to William—“who likes cats and really nasty murders, and Mr. O’Biscuit”—a rangy young man—“who’s all the way from Fourecks and looking for a job before he goes home.”
“Really? What did you do in Fourecks, Mr. O’Biscuit?” “I was at Bugarup University, mate.” “You’re a wizard?”
“No, mate. They threw me out, ’cos of what I wrote in the student magazine.” “What was that?” “Everything, really.”
“Oh. And…Mrs. Tilly, I think you wrote a lovely well-spelled and grammatical letter to us suggesting that everyone under the age of eighteen should be flogged once a week to stop them being so noisy?”
“Once a day, Mr. de Worde,” said Mrs. Tilly. “That’ll teach ’em to go around being young!”
William hesitated. But the press needed feeding, and he and Sacharissa needed time off. Rocky was supplying some sports news, and while it was unreadable to William, he put it in on the basis that anyone keen on sport probably couldn’t read.
There had to be more staff. It was worth a try.
“Very well, then,” he said. “We’ll give you all a trial, starting right—oh.” He stood up. Everyone turned around to see why. “Please don’t bother,” said Lord Vetinari, from the doorway. “This is meant to be an informal visit. Taking on new staff, I see?”
The Patrician walked across the floor, followed by Drumknott. “Er, yes,” said William. “Are you all right, sir?”
“Oh, yes. Busy, of course. Such a lot of reading to catch up on. But I thought I should take a moment to come and see this ‘free press’ Commander Vimes has told me about at considerable length.” He tapped one of the iron pillars of the press with his cane. “However, it appears to be firmly bolted down.”
“Er, no, sir. I mean ‘free’ in the sense of what is printed, sir,” said William. “But surely you charge money?” “Yes, but—”
“Oh, I see. You meant you should be free to print what you like?” There was no escape. “Well…broadly, yes, sir.” “Because that’s in the—what was the other interesting term? Ah, yes…the public interest?” Lord Vetinari picked up a piece of type and inspected it carefully.
“I think so, sir.”
“These stories about man-eating goldfish and people’s husbands disappearing in big silver dishes?”
“No, sir. That’s what people are interested in. We do the other stuff, sir.” “Amusingly shaped vegetables?” “Well, a bit of that, sir. Sacharissa calls them human interest stories.” “About vegetables and animals?” “Yes, sir. But at least they’re real vegetables and animals.”
“So…we have what the people are interested in, and human interest stories, which is what humans are interested in, and the public interest, which no one is interested in.”
“Except the public, sir,” said William, trying to keep up. “Which isn’t the same as people and humans?” “I think it’s more complicated than that, sir.”
“Obviously. Do you mean that the public is a different thing from the people you just see walking about the place? The public thinks big, sensible measured thoughts while people run around doing silly things?”
“I think so. I may have to work on that idea too, I admit.”
“Hmm. Interesting. I have certainly noticed that groups of clever and intelligent people are capable of really stupid ideas,” said Lord Vetinari. He gave William a look which said, “I can read your mind, even the small print,” and then gazed around the pressroom again. “Well, I can see you have an eventful future ahead of you, and I would not wish to make it any more difficult than it is clearly going to be. I notice you have work going on…?”
“We’re putting a semaphore post up,” said Sacharissa proudly. “We’ll be able to get a clacks straight from the big trunk tower. And we’re opening offices in Sto Lat and Pseudopolis!”
Lord Vetinari raised his eyebrows. “My word,” he said. “Many new deformed vegetables will become available. I shall look forward with interest to seeing them.”
William decided not to rise to this one.
“It amazes me how the news you have so neatly fits the space available,” Lord Vetinari went on, staring down at the page Boddony was working on. “No little gaps anywhere. And every day something happens that is important enough to be at the top of the first page, too. How strange—oh, ‘receive’ takes an E after the C…”
Boddony looked up. Lord Vetinari’s cane swung around with a hiss and hovered in the middle of a densely packed column. The dwarf looked closer, and nodded, and took out a small tool.
It’s upside down to him, and back to front, thought William. And the word’s in the middle of the text. And he spotted it.
“Things that are back to front are often easier to comprehend if they are upside down as well,” said Lord Vetinari, tapping his chin with the silver knob of his cane in an absent-minded way. “In life as in politics.”
“What have you done with Charlie?” said William.
Lord Vetinari looked at him in nothing but innocent surprise. “Why, nothing. Should I have done something?”
“Have you locked him up?” said Sacharissa suspiciously. “In a deep cell, and made him wear a mask all the time, and have all his meals brought by a deaf and dumb jailer?”
“Er…no, I don’t think so,” said Lord Vetinari, giving her a smile. “Although it would make a very good story, I’ve no doubt. No, I understand he’s enrolled in the Guild of Actors, although of course I realize that there are those who would consider a deep dungeon a preferred alternative. I foresee a happy career for him, nevertheless. Children’s parties, and so on.”
“What…as being you?”
“Indeed. Very risible.”
“And perhaps when you have some boring duty to perform, or have to sit for an oil painting, you’ll have a little job for him?” said William.
“Hmm?” said Vetinari. William had thought that Vimes had a blank look, but he’d been wreathed in smiles compared to His Lordship when Lord Vetinari wanted to look blank. “Do you have any more questions, Mr. de Worde?”
“I will have a lot,” said William, pulling himself together. “The Times will be taking a very close interest in civic affairs.”
“How commendable,” said the Patrician. “If you contact Drumknott here, I’m sure I will find time to grant you an interview.”
The Right Word in the Right Place, William thought. Unpleasant though the knowledge was, his ancestors had always been amongst the first to get to grips in any conflict. In every siege, every ambush, every stricken dash against fortified emplacements, some de Worde had galloped towards death or glory and sometimes both. No enemy was too strong, no wound was too dire, no sword was too heavy for a de Worde. No grave was too deep, either. As his instincts wrestled with his tongue, he could feel his ancestors behind him, pushing him into the fray. Vetinari was too obviously playing with him. Oh well, at least let’s die for something decent…onward to death or glory or both!
“I am sure, my lord, that whenever you wish for an interview, the Times will be quite prepared to grant you one,” he said. “If space allows.”
He hadn’t realized how much background noise there was until it stopped. Drumknott had closed his eyes. Sacharissa was staring straight ahead. The dwarfs stood like statues.
Finally, Lord Vetinari broke the silence.
“The Times? Oh, you mean you, and this young lady here?” he said, raising his eyebrows. “Oh, I see. It’s like the Public. Well, if I can be of any help to the Times—”
“We won’t be bribed, either,” said William. He knew he was galloping in among the sharpened stakes here, but he’d be damned before he’d be patronized.
“Bribed?” said Vetinari. “My dear sir, seeing what you’re capable of for nothing, I’d hesitate to press even a penny in your hand. No, I have nothing to offer you except thanks, which of course are notorious for their evaporative tendencies. Ah, a little idea occurs. I shall be having a small dinner on Saturday. Some of the Guild leaders, a few ambassadors…all rather dull, but perhaps you and your very bold young lady…I do beg your pardon, I meant of course the Times…would like to attend?”
“I don’t—” William began, and stopped suddenly. A shoe scraping down your shin can do that.
“The Times would be delighted,” said Sacharissa, beaming. “Capital. In that case—” “There is a favor I need to ask, to tell the truth,” said William. Vetinari smiled. “Of course. If I can do anything for the Ti—” “Will you be going to Harry King’s daughter’s wedding on Saturday?”
To his secret delight, the look that Vetinari gave him seemed to be blank because the man hadn’t got anything to fill it with. But Drumknott leaned towards him, and there were a few whispered words.
“Ah?” said the Patrician. “Harry King. Ah, yes. A positive incarnation of the spirit that has made our city what it is today. Haven’t I always said that, Drumknott?”
“Yes indeed, sir.”
“I shall certainly attend,” said Lord Vetinari. “I expect a lot of other civic leaders will be there?”
The question was left delicately spinning in the air. “As many as possible,” said William. “Fine carriages, tiaras, stately robes?” said Lord Vetinari to the knob of his cane. “Lots.” “Yes, I’m sure they will be there,” said Lord Vetinari, and William knew that Harry King would walk his daughter past more top nobs than he could count, and while the world of Mr. King did not have a lot of space for letters, he could count very carefully indeed. Mrs. King was going to have joyful hysterics out of sheer passive snobbery.
“In return, however,” said the Patrician, “I must ask you not to upset Commander Vimes.” He gave a little cough. “More than necessary.”
“I’m sure we can pull together, sir.”
Lord Vetinari raised his eyebrows. “Oh, I do hope not, I really do hope not. Pulling together is the aim of despotism and tyranny. Free men pull in all kinds of directions.” He smiled. “It’s the only way to make progress. That, and, of course, moving with the times. Good day to you.”
He nodded to them, and walked out of the building.
“Why is everyone still here?” William demanded, when the spell had broken. “Er…we still don’t know what we should be doing,” said Mrs. Tilly hopelessly. “Go and find out things that people want put in the paper,” said Sacharissa. “And things that people don’t want put in the paper,” William added. “And interesting things,” said Sacharissa.
“Like that rain of dogs there was a few months ago?” said O’Biscuit. “There was no rain of dogs two months ago!” William snapped. “But—” “One puppy is not a rain. It fell out of a window. Look, we are not interested in pet precipitation, spontaneous combustion, or people being carried off by weird things from out of the sky —”
“Unless it happens,” said Sacharissa.
“Well, obviously we are if it does happen,” said William. “But when it doesn’t, we’re not. Okay? News is unusual things happening—”
“And usual things happening,” said Sacharissa, screwing up a report from the Ankh-Morpork Funny Vegetable Society.
“And usual things, yes,” said William. “But news is mainly what someone somewhere doesn’t want you to put in the paper—”
“Except that sometimes it isn’t,” said Sacharissa again.
“News is—” said William, and stopped. They watched him politely as he stood with his mouth open and one finger raised.
“News,” he said, “all depends. But you’ll know it when you see it. Clear? Right. Now go and find some.”
“That was a bit abrupt,” said Sacharissa, after they’d filed out.
“Well, I was thinking,” said William. “I mean, it’s been a…a funny old time all round, what with one thing and another—”
“—people trying to kill us, you being imprisoned, a plague of dogs, the place catching on fire, you being cheeky to Lord Vetinari—” said Sacharissa.
“Yes, well…so would it really matter if you and I, you know…you and I…took the afternoon off? I mean,” he added desperately, “it doesn’t say anywhere that we have to publish every day, does it?”
“Except at the top of the newspaper,” said Sacharissa.
“Yes, but you can’t believe everything you read in the newspapers.” “Well…all right. I’ll just finish this report—” “Messages for you, Mr. William,” said one of the dwarfs, dropping a pile of paper on his desk. William grunted, and glanced through them. There were a few test clackses from Lancre and Sto Lat, and already he could see that pretty soon he’d have to go out into the country to train some real, yes, reporters of news, because he could see there was only a limited future in these earnest missives from village grocers and publicans who’d be paid a penny a line. There were a couple of carrier pigeon messages, too, from those people who couldn’t get a grip on the new technology.
“Ye gods,” he said, under his breath. “The Mayor of Quirm has been struck by a meteorite…again.”
“Can that happen?” said Sacharissa.
“Apparently. This from Mr. Pune at the council offices there. Sensible chap, not much imagination. He says that this time it was waiting for the mayor in an alley.”
“Really? The woman we get our linen from has got a son who is the lecturer in Vindictive Astronomy at the university.”
“Would he give us a quote?”
“He smiles at me when he sees me in the shop,” said Sacharissa firmly. “So he will.” “Okay. If you can—” “Afternoon, folks!”
Mr. Wintler was standing at the counter. He was holding a cardboard box. “Oh dear…” murmured William. “Just you take a look at this one,” said Mr. Wintler, a man who would not take a hint if it was wrapped around a lead pipe. “I think we’ve had enough funny ve—” William began. And stopped.
It was a big potato that the rubicund man was lifting from his box. It was knobbly, too. William had seen knobbly potatoes before. They could look like faces, if that was the way you wanted to amuse yourself. But with this one, you didn’t have to imagine a face. It had a face. It was made up of dents and knobs and potato eyes, but it looked very much like a face that had been staring madly into his and trying to kill him very recently. He remembered it quite well, because he still occasionally woke up around three A.M. with it in front of him.
“It’s…not…exactly…funny,” said Sacharissa, glancing sideways at William.
“Amazing, isn’t it?” said Mr. Wintler. “I wouldn’t have brought it round, but you’ve always been very interested in them.”
“A day without a bifurcated parsnip,” said Sacharissa sweetly, “is a day without sunshine, Mr. Wintler. William?”
“Huh?” said William, tearing his eyes away from the potato head. “Is it me, or does it look… surprised?”
“It does rather,” said Sacharissa.
“Did you just dig this up?” said William.
“Oh, no. It’s been in one of my sacks for months,” said Wintler.
…which upset an occult train of thought that had started to trundle through William’s head. But… the universe was a funny place. Cause and effect, effect and cause…
He’d rip off his right arm rather than write that down, though. “What are you going to do with it?” he said. “Boil it?” “Bless you, no. The variety’s far too floury. No, this one’s going to be chips.”
“Chips, eh?” said William. And it seemed, strangely, exactly the right thing to do. “Yes. Yes, that’s a good idea. Let it fry, Mr. Wintler. Let it fry.”
The clock moved on.
One of the reporters came in to say that the Alchemists’ Guild had exploded, and did this count as news? Otto was summoned from his crypt and sent out to get a picture.
William finished his piece about yesterday’s events, and passed it over to the dwarfs. Someone came in and said there was a big crowd in Sator Square because the Bursar (71) was sitting on a roof seven floors up, looking puzzled. Sacharissa, wielding her pencil with care, crossed out every adjective in a report of the Ankh-Morpork Floral Arranging Society, reducing its length by half.
William went out to find out about the Bursar (71), then wrote a few short paragraphs. Wizards doing odd things wasn’t news. Wizards doing odd things was wizards.
He threw the piece into the Out tray, and looked at the press.
It was black, and big, and complex. Without eyes, without a face, without life…it looked back at him.
He thought: you don’t need old sacrificial stones. Lord Vetinari was wrong about that. He touched his forehead. The bruise had long ago faded. You put your mark on me. Well, I’m wise to you. “Let’s go,” he said. Sacharissa looked up, still preoccupied. “What?” “Let’s go. Out. Now. For a walk, or tea, or shopping,” said William. “Let’s not be here. Don’t argue, please. Coat on. Now. Before it realizes. Before it finds a way to stop us.”
“What are you talking about?”
He pulled her coat off the peg and grabbed her arm. “No time to explain!” She allowed herself to be dragged out into the street, where William took a deep breath and relaxed.
“Now would you mind telling me what that was all about?” said Sacharissa. “I’ve got a pile of work in there, you know.”
“I know. Come on. We’re probably not far enough away. There’s a new noodle place opened in Elm Street. Everyone says it’s pretty good. How about it?”
“But there’s all that work to do!”
“So? It’ll still be there tomorrow, won’t it?” She hesitated. “Well, an hour or two won’t hurt, probably,” she admitted. “Good. Let’s go.” They’d reached the junction of Treacle Mine Road and Elm Street when it caught up with them.
There were cries further along the street. William swiveled his head, saw the four-horse brewer’s dray thundering out of control. He saw the people diving and scuttling out of the way. He saw the soup-plate hooves throw up mud and ice. He saw the brasses on the harness, the gleam, the steam…
His head swiveled the other way. He saw the old woman with two sticks, crossing the street, quite oblivious to the onrushing death. He saw the shawl, the white hair…
A blur went past him. The man twisted in the air, landed on his shoulder in the center of the street, rolled upright, grabbed the woman, and leapt--
The wayward wagon went by in a rush of mud and ice crystals. The team tried to corner at the crossroads. The dray behind them did not. A melee of hooves and horses and wheels and sleet and screams whirled onwards and took the windows out of several shops before the cart rammed up against a stone pillar and stopped dead.
In obedience to the laws of physics and the narrative of such things, its load did not. The barrels burst their bonds, crashed down onto the street, and rolled onwards.
A few smashed, filling the gutter with suds. The others, thumping and banging into one another, became the focus of attention of every upright citizen who could recognize a hundred gallons of beer which suddenly didn’t belong to anyone anymore and was heading for freedom.
William and Sacharissa looked at one another. “Okay—I’ll get the story, you go and find Otto!” They said that at the same time, and then stared defiantly at each other.
“All right, all right,” said William. “Find some kid, bribe him to get Otto, I’ll talk to that Plucky Watchman who grabbed the old lady in A Mercy Dash, you cover the Big Smash, okay?”
“I’ll find the kid,” said Sacharissa, pulling out her own notebook, “but you cover the accident and the Beer Barrel Bonanza and I’ll talk to the White-Haired Granny. Human interest, right?”
“All right!” William conceded. “That was Captain Carrot who did the rescue. Make sure Otto gets a picture and get his age!”
“Of course!”
William headed towards the crowd around the smashed wagon. Many people were in distant pursuit of the barrels, and the odd scream suggested that thirsty people seldom realize how hard it is to stop a hundred gallons of beer in a big oak cask when it’s on a roll.
He dutifully noted down the name on the side of the dray. A couple of men were helping the
horses up, but they did not appear to have much to do with beer delivery. They simply appeared to be men who wanted to help lost horses, and take them home and make them better. If this meant dyeing areas of their coat and swearing blind they’d owned them for the past two years, then so be it.
He approached a bystander not obviously engaged in any felonious activity. “Exc—” he began. But the citizen’s eyes had already detected the notebook. “I saw it all,” he said. “Did you?”
“It was a ter-ri-ble scene,” said the man, at dictation speed. “But the watch-man made a death- defying plunge to res-cue the old lady and he de-serves a med-al.”
“Really?” said William, scribbling fast. “And you are—”
“Sa-muel Arblaster (forty-three) stone-mason, of eleven-b The Scours,” said the man.
“I saw it too,” said a woman next to him, urgently, “Mrs. Florrie Perry, blond mother of three, from Dolly Sisters. It was a scene of car-nage.”
William risked a glance at his pencil. It was a kind of magic wand. “Where’s the iconographer?” said Mrs. Perry, looking around hopefully. “Er…not here yet,” said William. “Oh.” She looked disappointed. “Shame about the poor woman with the snake, wasn’t it? I expect he’s off taking pictures of her.”
“Er…I hope not,” said William.
It was a long afternoon. One barrel had rolled into a barber shop and exploded. Some of the brewer’s men turned up, and there was a fight with several of the barrels’ new owners, who claimed rights of salvage. One enterprising man tapped a barrel by the roadside and set up a temporary pub. Otto arrived. He took pictures of barrel rescuers. He took a picture of the fight. He took pictures of the Watch arriving to arrest everyone still standing. He took pictures of the white-haired old lady and the proud Captain Carrot and, in his excitement, of his thumb.
It was a good story all round. And William was halfway through writing his part of it back at the Times when he remembered.
He’d watched it happening. And he’d reached for his notebook. That was a worrying thought, he said.
“So?” said Sacharissa, from her side of the desk. “How many L’s in ‘gallant’?”
“Two,” said William. “I mean, I didn’t try to do anything. I thought: This is a Story, and I have to tell it.”
“Yep,” said Sacharissa, still bowed over her writing. “We’ve been press-ganged.” “But it’s not—” “Look at it like this,” said Sacharissa, starting a fresh page. “Some people are heroes. And some people jot down notes.”
“Yes, but that’s not very—”
Sacharissa glanced up, and flashed him a smile. “Sometimes they’re the same person,” she said. This time it was William who looked down modestly. “You think that’s really true?” he said. She shrugged. “Really true? Who knows? This is a newspaper, isn’t it? It just has to be true until tomorrow.”
William felt the temperature rise. Her smile had really been attractive. “Are you…sure?” “Oh, yes. True until tomorrow is good enough for me.”
And behind her the big black vampire of a printing press waited to be fed, and to be brought alive in the dark of the night for the light of the morning. It chopped the complexities of the world into little stories, and it was always hungry.
And it needed a double-column story for page 2, William remembered.
And, a few inches under his hand, a woodworm chewed its way contentedly through the ancient timber. Reincarnation enjoys a joke as much as the next philosophical hypothesis. As it chewed, the woodworm thought: This is —ing good wood!
Because nothing has to be true forever. Just for long enough, to tell you the truth.
Sometimes a fantasy author has to point out the strangeness of reality. The way Ankh-Morpork dealt with its flood problems (see page 249 and onward) is curiously similar to that adopted by the city of Seattle, Washington, toward the end of the nineteenth century. Really. Go and see. Try the clam chowder while you’re there.
About the Author
Terry Pratchett’s novels have sold more than thirty million (give or take a few million) copies worldwide. He lives in England.
Visit www.AuthorTracker.com for exclusive information on your favorite HarperCollins author.
A bestselling sensation in America and around the globe, Terry Pratchett’s profoundly irreverent novels are consistent number one bestsellers in England, and have been translated into twenty-seven languages.
Discover the world of Terry Pratchett.
It’s a lot like our own. Only different.
Outstanding Acclaim forThe Truth
“Pratchett’s witty reach is even longer than usual here, from Pulp Fiction to His Girl Friday. Readers who’ve never visited Discworld before may find themselves laughing out loud, even as they cheer on the good guys, while longtime fans are sure to call this Pratchett’s best one yet.”
Publishers Week ly (*Starred Review*)
“An engaging, surreal satire…Pratchett’s Monty Python-like plots are almost impossible to describe. His talent for characterization and dialogue and his pop-culture allusions steal the show.”
Chicago Tribune
“Offers more entertainment per page than anything this side of Wodehouse.”
Washington Post Book World
“With his humor and endless invention, Terry Pratchett has rightly dominated the fantasy genre. The Truth shows that he is still the master. Twenty-five novels into the Discworld series, and Terry Pratchett’s imagination shows no signs of flagging. On the contrary, The Truth is an unmitigated delight and very, very funny.”
The Times, London
and Terry Pratchett
“Trying to summarize the plot of a Pratchett novel is like describing Hamlet as a play about a troubled guy with an Oedipus complex and a murderous uncle.”
Barbara Mertz
“Superb popular entertainment.”
Washington Post Book World
“Pratchett has now moved beyond the limits of humorous fantasy, and should be recognized as one of the more significant contemporary English-language satirists.”
Publishers Week ly
“Think J.R.R. Tolkien with a sharper, more satiric edge.”
Houston Chronicle
“Discworld takes the classic fantasy universe through its logical, and comic evolution.”
Cleveland Plain Dealer
“Truly original…Discworld is more complicated and satisfactory than Oz…Has the energy of The Hitchhiker’s Guide to the Galaxy and the inventiveness of Alice in Wonderland…Brilliant!”
“Humorously entertaining…subtly thought-provoking…Pratchett’s Discworld books are filled with humor and with magic, but they’re rooted in—of all things—real life and cold, hard reason.”
Chicago Tribune
“Simply the best humorous writer of the twentieth century.”
Oxford Times
“A brilliant storyteller with a sense of humor…The Dickens of the twentieth century.”
Mail on Sunday (London)
“As always he is head and shoulders above the best of the rest. He is screamingly funny. He is wise. He has style.”
Daily Telegraph (London)
“Terry Pratchett does for fantasy what Douglas Adams did for science fiction.”
Today (Great Britain)
“What makes Terry Pratchett’s fantasies so entertaining is that their humor depends on the characters first, on the plot second, rather than the other way around. The story isn’t there simply to lead from one slapstick pratfall to another pun. Its humor is genuine and unforced.”
Ottawa Citizen
The Carpet People The Dark Side of the Sun Strata Truck ers Diggers Wings Only You Can Save Mankind Johnny and the Dead Johnny and the Bomb The Unadulterated Cat (with Gray Jollife)
Good Omens (with Neil Gaiman)
THE DISCWORLD SERIES
The Color of Magic* The Light Fantastic* Equal Rites* Mort* Sourcery* Wyrd Sisters* Pyramids* Guards! Guards!* Eric (with Josh Kirby) Moving Pictures Reaper Man Witches Abroad Small Gods* Lords and Ladies*
Men at Arms* Soul Music* Feet of Clay* Interesting Times* Maskerade* Hogfather* Jingo* The Last Continent* Carpe Jugulum* The Fifth Elephant* The Truth* Mort: A Discworld Big Comic (with Graham Higgins) The Streets of Ankh-Morpork (with Stephen Briggs) The Discworld Companion (with Stephen Briggs) The Discworld Mapp (with Stephen Briggs) AND IN HARDCOVER
Thief of Time
*Published by HarperCollins
Copyright
This book is a work of fiction. The characters, incidents, and dialogue are drawn from the author’s imagination and are not to be construed as real. Any resemblance to actual events or persons, living or dead, is entirely coincidental.
THE TRUTH. Copyright © 2000 by Terry and Lyn Pratchett. All rights reserved under International and Pan-American Copyright Conventions. By payment of the required fees, you have been granted the non-exclusive, non-transferable right to access and read the text of this e-book on-screen. No part of this text may be reproduced, transmitted, down-loaded, decompiled, reverse engineered, or stored in or introduced into any information storage and retrieval system, in any form or by any means, whether electronic or mechanical, now known or hereinafter invented, without the express written permission of HarperCollins e-books.
EPub Edition © August 2007 ISBN: 9780061807671 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
About the Publisher
Australia
HarperCollins Publishers (Australia) Pty. Ltd. 25 Ryde Road (PO Box 321) Pymble, NSW 2073, Australia http://www.harpercollinsebooks.com.au
Canada
HarperCollins Publishers Ltd. 55 Avenue Road, Suite 2900 Toronto, ON, M5R, 3L2, Canada http://www.harpercollinsebooks.ca
New Zealand
HarperCollinsPublishers (New Zealand) Limited P.O. Box 1 Auckland, New Zealand http://www.harpercollinsebooks.co.nz
United Kingdom
HarperCollins Publishers Ltd. 77-85 Fulham Palace Road London, W6 8JB, UK http://www.harpercollinsebooks.co.uk
United States
HarperCollins Publishers Inc. 10 East 53rd Street New York, NY 10022 http://www.harpercollinsebooks.com
*This is a very common hallucination, shared by most people.
*The world’s rarest and most evil-smelling vegetable, and consequently much prized by connoisseurs (who seldom prize anything cheap and common). Also a slang name for Ankh-Morpork, although it does not smell as bad as that.
*Your Brain on Drugs is a terrible sight, but Mr. Tulip was living proof of the fact that so was Your Brain on a cocktail of horse liniment, sherbet, and powdered water-retention pills.
*Words resemble fish in that some specialized ones can survive only in a kind of reef, where their curious shapes and usages are protected from the hurly-burly of the open sea. “Rumpus” and “fracas” are found only in certain newspapers (in much the same way that “beverages” are only found in certain menus). They are never used in normal conversation.
*Which was not hard, as unkind people pointed out.
†In any case anyone eating raw steak from an Ankh-Morpork slaughterhouse was embarking on a life of danger and excitement that should satisfy anyone.
*In many ways, William de Worde had quite a graphic imagination.
*William’s class understood that justice was like coal or potatoes. You ordered it when you needed it.
*At this point Bingo had not been introduced to nkh-Morpork.
*Most dwarfs were still referred to as “he” as well, even when they were getting married. It was generally assumed that somewhere under all that chain mail one of them was female and that both of them knew which one this was. But the whole subject of sex was one that traditionally minded dwarfs did not discuss, perhaps out of modesty, possibly because it didn’t interest them very much, and certainly because they took the view that what two dwarfs decided to do together was entirely their own business.
*The best way to describe Mr. Windling would be like this: You are at a meeting. You’d like to be away early. So would everyone else. There really isn’t very much to discuss, anyway. And just as everyone can see Any Other Business coming over the horizon and is already putting their papers neatly together, a voice says “If I can raise a minor matter, Mr. Chairman…” and with a horrible wooden feeling in your stomach you know, now, that the evening will go on for twice as long with much referring back to the minutes of earlier meetings. The man who has just said that, and is now sitting there with a smug smile of dedication to the committee process, is as near Mr. Windling as makes no difference. And something that distinguishes the Mr. Windlings of the universe is the term “in my humble opinion,” which they think adds weight to their statements rather than indicating, in reality, “these are the mean little views of someone with the social grace of duckweed.”
*In other circumstances it would have been as likely as cows singing “Let Me Be Covered in Rapturous Gravy.”
*Classically, very few people have considered that cleanliness was next to godliness, apart from in a very sternly abridged dictionary. A rank loincloth and hair in an advanced state of matted entanglement have generally been the badges of office of prophets whose injunction to disdain earthly things starts with soap.
Table of ContentsBegin Reading Author's Note About the Author Praise
0 Comments
5/29/2023 0 Comments Stephen King's the Shining
Jack Torrance's new job at the Overlook Hotel is the perfect chance for a fresh start. As the off-season caretaker at the atmospheric old hotel, he'll have plenty of time to spend reconnecting with his family and working on his writing. But as the harsh winter weather sets in, the idyllic location feels ever more remote...and more sinister. And the only one to notice the strange and terrible forces gathering around the Overlook is Danny Torrance, a uniquely gifted five-year-old.
THE SHINING
BY
STEPHEN KING
This is for Joe Hill King, who shines on.
— — — — — — --
My editor on this book, as on the previous two, was Mr. William G. Thompson, a man of wit and good sense. His contribution to this book has been large, and for it, my thanks
S.K.
Some of the most beautiful resort hotels in the world are located in Colorado, but the hotel in these pages is based on none of them. The Overlook and the people associated with it exist wholly within the author's imagination.
It was in this apartment, also, that there stood ... a gigantic clock of ebony. Its pendulum swung to and fro with a dull, heavy, monotonous clang; and when ... the hour was to be stricken, there came from the brazen lungs of the clock a sound which was clear and loud and deep and exceedingly musical, but of so peculiar a note and emphasis that, at each lapse of an hour, the musicians of the orchestra were constrained to pause ... to hearken to the sound; and thus the waltzers perforce ceased their evolutions; and there was a brief disconcert of the whole gay company; and; while the chimes of the clock yet rang, it was observed that the giddiest grew pale, and the more aged and sedate passed their hands over their brows as if in confused reverie or meditation. But when the echoes had fully ceased, a light laughter at once pervaded the assembly ... and [they] smiled as if at their own nervousness ... and made whispering vows,
each to the other, that the next chiming of the clock should produce in them no similar emotion; and then, after the lapse of sixty minutes ... there came yet another chiming of the clock, and then were the same disconcert and tremulousness and meditation as before. But in spite of these things, it was a gay and magnificent revel ...
-E. A. POE "THE MASQUE OF THE RED DEATH"
The sleep of reason breeds monsters. GOYA
It'll shine when it shines FOLK SAYING
P A R T O N E— — — — — — — — — — — — — — PREFATORY MATTERS — — — — — — — — — — — — — --
<< 1 >> JOB INTERVIEW
Jack Torrance thought: Officious little prick. Ullman stood five-five, and when he moved, it was with the prissy speed that seems to be the exclusive domain of all small plump men. The part in his hair was exact, and his dark suit was sober but comforting. I am a man you can bring your problems to, that suit said to the paying customer. To the hired help it
spoke more curtly: This had better be good, you. There was a red carnation in the lapel, perhaps so that no one on the street would mistake Stuart Ullman for the local undertaker. As he listened to Ullman speak, Jack admitted to himself that he probably could not have liked any man on that side of the desk — under the circumstances. Ullman had asked a question he hadn't caught. That was bad; Ullman was the type of man who would file such lapses away in a mental Rolodex for later consideration. "I'm sorry?" "I asked if your wife fully understood what you would be taking on here. And there's your son, of course." He glanced down at the application in front of him. "Daniel. Your wife isn't a bit intimidated by the idea?" "Wendy is an extraordinary woman." "And your son is also extraordinary?" Jack smiled, a big wide PR smile. "We like to think so, I suppose. He's quite self-reliant for a five-year-old." No returning smile from Ullman. He slipped Jack's application back into the file. The file went into a drawer. The desk top was now completely bare except for a blotter, a telephone, a Tensor lamp, and an in / out basket. Both sides of the in / out were empty, too. Ullman stood up and went to the file cabinet in the corner. "Step around the desk, if you will, Mr. Torrance. We'll look at the floor plans." He brought back five large sheets and set them down on the glossy walnut plain of the desk. Jack stood by his shoulder, very much aware of the scent of Ullman's cologne. All my men wear English Leather or they wear nothing at all came into his mind for no reason at all, and he had to clamp his tongue between his teeth to keep in a bray of laughter. Beyond the wall, faintly, came the sounds of the Overlook Hotel's kitchen, gearing down from lunch. "Top floor," Ullman said briskly. "The attic. Absolutely nothing up there now but bric-a-brac. The Overlook has changed hands several times since World War II and it seems that each successive manager has put everything they don't want up in the attic. I want rattraps and poison bait sowed around in it. Some of the third-floor chambermaids say they have heard rustling noises. I don't believe it, not for a moment, but there mustn't even be that one-in-a-hundred chance that a single rat inhabits the Overlook Hotel." Jack, who suspected that every hotel in the world had a rat or two, held his tongue. "Of course you wouldn't allow your son up in the attic under any circumstances." "No," Jack said, and flashed the big PR smile again. Humiliating situation. Did this officious little prick actually think he would allow his son to goof around in a rattrap attic full of junk furniture and God knew what else? Ullman whisked away the attic floor plan and put it on the bottom of the pile. "The Overlook has one hundred and ten guest quarters," he said in a scholarly voice. "Thirty of them, all suites, are here on the third floor. Ten in the west wing (including the Presidential Suite), ten in the center, ten more in the east wing. All of them command magnificent views." Could you at least spare the salestalk?
But he kept quiet. He needed the job. Ullman put the third floor on the bottom of the pile and they studied the second floor. "Forty rooms," Ullman said, "thirty doubles and ten singles. And on the first floor, twenty of each. Plus three linen closets on each floor, and a storeroom which is at the extreme east end of the hotel on the second floor and the extreme west end on the first. Questions?" Jack shook his head. Ullman whisked the second and first floors away. "Now. Lobby level: Here in the center is the registration desk. Behind it are the offices. The lobby runs for eighty feet in either direction from the desk. Over here in the west wing is the Overlook Dining Room and the Colorado Lounge. The banquet and ballroom facility is in the east wing. Questions?" "Only about the basement," Jack said. "For the winter caretaker, that's the most important level of all. Where the action is, so to speak." "Watson will show you all that. The basement floor plan is on the boiler room wall." He frowned impressively, perhaps to show that as manager, he did not concern himself with such mundane aspects of the Overlook's operation as the boiler and the plumbing. "Might not be a bad idea to put some traps down there too. Just a minute..." He scrawled a note on a pad he took from his inner coat pocket (each sheet bore the legend From the Desk of Stuart Ullman in bold black script), tore it off, and dropped it into the out basket. It sat there looking lonesome. The pad disappeared back into Ullman's jacket pocket like the conclusion of a magician's trick. Now you see it, Jacky-boy, now you don't. This guy is a real heavyweight. They had resumed their original positions, Ullman behind the desk and Jack in front of it, interviewer and interviewee, supplicant and reluctant patron. Ullman folded his neat little hands on the desk blotter and looked directly at Jack, a small, balding man in a banker's suit and a quiet gray tie. The flower in his lapel was balanced off by a small lapel pin on the other side. It read simply STAFF in small gold letters. "I'll be perfectly frank with you, Mr. Torrance. Albert Shockley is a powerful man with a large interest in the Overlook, which showed a profit this season for the first time in its history. Mr. Shockley also sits on the Board of Directors, but he is not a hotel man and he would be the first to admit this. But he has made his wishes in this caretaking matter quite obvious. He wants you hired. I will do so. But if I had been given a free hand in this matter, I would not have taken you on." Jack's hands were clenched tightly in his lap, working against each other, sweating. Officious little prick, officious "I don't believe you care much for me, Mr. Torrance. I little prick, officious -- don't care. Certainly your feelings toward me play no part in my own belief that you are not right for the job. During the season that runs from May fifteenth to September thirtieth, the Overlook employs one hundred and ten people full-time; one for every room in the hotel, you might say. I don't think many of them like me and I suspect that some of them think I'm a bit of a bastard. They would be correct in their judgment of my character. I have to be a bit of a bastard to run this hotel in the manner it deserves."
He looked at Jack for comment, and Jack flashed the PR smile again, large and insultingly toothy. Ullman said: "The Overlook was built in the years 1907 to 1909. The closest town is Sidewinder, forty miles east of here over roads that are closed from sometime in late October or November until sometime in April. A man named Robert Townley Watson built it, the grandfather of our present maintenance man. Vanderbilts have stayed here, and Rockefellers, and Astors, and Du Pouts. Four Presidents have stayed in the Presidential Suite. Wilson, Harding, Roosevelt, and Nixon." "I wouldn't be too proud of Harding and Nixon," Jack murmured. Ullman frowned but went on regardless. "It proved too much for Mr. Watson, and he sold the hotel in 1915. It was sold again in 1922, in 1929, in 1936. It stood vacant until the end of World War II, when it was purchased and completely renovated by Horace Derwent, millionaire inventor, pilot, film producer, and entrepreneur." "I know the name," Jack said. "Yes. Everything he touched seemed to turn to gold ... except the Overlook. He funneled over a million dollars into it before the first postwar guest ever stepped through its doors, turning a decrepit relic into a showplace. It was Derwent who added the roque court I saw you admiring when you arrived." "Roque?" "A British forebear of our croquet, Mr. Torrance. Croquet is bastardized roque. According to legend, Derwent learned the game from his social secretary and fell completely in love with it. Ours may be the finest roque court in America." "I wouldn't doubt it," Jack said gravely. A roque court, a topiary full of hedge animals out front, what next? A life-sized Uncle Wiggly game behind the equipment shed? He was getting very tired of Mr. Stuart Ullman, but he could see that Ullman wasn't done. Ullman was going to have his say, every last word of it. "When he had lost three million, Derwent sold it to a group of California investors. Their experience with the Overlook was equally bad. Just not hotel people. "In 1970, Mr. Shockley and a group of his associates bought the hotel and turned its management over to me. We have also run in the red for several years, but I'm happy to say that the trust of the present owners in me has never wavered. Last year we broke even. And this year the Overlook's accounts were written in black ink for the first time in almost seven decades." Jack supposed that this fussy little man's pride was justified, and then his original dislike washed over him again in a wave. He said: "I see no connection between the Overlook's admittedly colorful history and your feeling that I'm wrong for the post, Mr. Ullman." "One reason that the Overlook has lost so much money lies in the depreciation that occurs each winter. It shortens the profit margin a great deal more than you might believe, Mr. Torrance. The winters are fantastically cruel. In order to cope with the problem, I've installed a full-time winter caretaker to run the boiler and to heat different parts of the hotel on a daily rotating basis. To repair breakage as it occurs and to do repairs, so the elements can't get a
foothold. To be constantly alert to any and every contingency. During our first winter I hired a family instead of a single man. There was a tragedy. A horrible tragedy." Ullman looked at Jack coolly and appraisingly. "I made a mistake. I admit it freely. The man was a drunk." Jack felt a slow, hot grin — the total antithesis of the toothy PR grin — stretch across his mouth. "Is that it? I'm surprised Al didn't tell you. I've retired." "Yes, Mr. Shockley told me you no longer drink. He also told me about your last job ... your last position of trust, shall we say? You were teaching English in a Vermont prep school. You lost your temper, I don't believe I need to be any more specific than that. But I do happen to believe that Grady's case has a bearing, and that is why I have brought the matter of your ... uh, previous history into the conversation. During the winter of 1970-71, after we had refurbished the Overlook but before our first season, I hired this... this unfortunate named Delbert Grady. He moved into the quarters you and your wife and son will be sharing. He had a wife and two daughters. I had reservations, the main ones being the harshness of the winter season and the fact that the Gradys would be cut off from the outside world for five to six months." "But that's not really true, is it? There are telephones here, and probably a citizen's band radio as well. And the Rocky Mountain National Park is within helicopter range and surely a piece of ground that big must have a chopper or two." "I wouldn't know about that," Ullman said. "The hotel does have a two-way radio that Mr. Watson will show you, along with a list of the correct frequencies to broadcast on if you need help. The telephone lines between here and Sidewinder are still aboveground, and they go down almost every winter at some point or other and are apt to stay down for three weeks to a month and a half. There is a snowmobile in the equipment shed also." "Then the place really isn't cut off." Mr. Ullman looked pained. "Suppose your son or your wife tripped on the stairs and fractured his or her skull, Mr. Torrance. Would you think the place was cut off then?" Jack saw the point. A snowmobile running at top speed could get you down to Sidewinder in an hour and a half ... maybe. A helicopter from the Parks Rescue Service could get up here in three hours ... under optimum conditions. In a blizzard it would never even be able to lift off and you couldn't hope to run a snowmobile at top speed, even if you dared take a seriously injured person out into temperatures that might be twenty-five below-or forty-five below, if you added in the wind chill factor. "In the case of Grady," Ullman said, "I reasoned much as Mr. Shockley seems to have done in your case. Solitude can be damaging in itself. Better for the man to have his family with him. If there was trouble, I thought, the odds were very high that it would be something less urgent than a fractured skull or an accident with one of the power tools or some sort of convulsion. A serious case of the flu, pneumonia, a broken arm, even appendicitis. Any of those things would have left enough time. "I suspect that what happened came as a result of too much cheap whiskey, of
which Grady had laid in a generous supply, unbeknownst to me, and a curious condition which the old-timers call cabin fever. Do you know the term?" Ullman offered a patronizing little smile, ready to explain as soon as Jack admitted his ignorance, and Jack was happy to respond quickly and crisply. "It's a slang term for the claustrophobic reaction that can occur when people are shut in together over long periods of time. The feeling of claustrophobia is externalized as dislike for the people you happen to be shut in with. In extreme cases it can result in hallucinations and violence — murder has been done over such minor things as a burned meal or an argument about whose turn it is to do the dishes." Ullman looked rather nonplussed, which did Jack a world of good. He decided to press a little further, but silently promised Wendy he would stay cool. "I suspect you did make a mistake at that. Did he hurt them?" "He killed them, Mr. Torrance, and then committed suicide. He murdered the little girls with a hatchet, his wife with a shotgun, and himself the same way. His leg was broken. Undoubtedly so drunk he fell downstairs." Ullman spread his hands and looked at Jack self-righteously. "Was he a high school graduate?" "As a matter of fact, he wasn't," Ullman said a little stiffly. "I thought a, shall we say, less imaginative individual would be less susceptible to the rigors, the loneliness — " "That was your mistake," Jack said. "A stupid man is more prone to cabin fever just as he's more prone to shoot someone over a card game or commit a spur-of- the-moment robbery. He gets bored. When the snow comes, there's nothing to do but watch TV or play solitaire and cheat when he can't get all the aces out. Nothing to do but bitch at his wife and nag at the kids and drink. It gets hard to sleep because there's nothing to hear. So he drinks himself to sleep and wakes up with a hangover. He gets edgy. And maybe the telephone goes out and the TV aerial blows down and there's nothing to do but think and cheat at solitaire and get edgier and edgier. Finally... boom, boom, boom." "Whereas a more educated man, such as yourself?" "My wife and I both like to read. I have a play to work on, as Al Shockley probably told you. Danny has his puzzles, his coloring books, and his crystal radio. I plan to teach him to read, and I also want to teach him to snowshoe. Wendy would like to learn how, too. Oh yes, I think we can keep busy and out of each other's hair if the TV goes on the fritz." He paused. "And Al was telling the truth when he told you I no longer drink. I did once, and it got to be serious. But I haven't had so much as a glass of beer in the last fourteen months. I don't intend to bring any alcohol up here, and I don't think there will be an opportunity to get arty after the snow flies." "In that you would be quite correct," Ullman said. "But as long as the three of you are up here, the potential for problems is multiplied. I have told Mr. Shockley this, and he told me he would take the responsibility. Now I've told you, and apparently you are also willing to take the responsibility — " "I am." "All right. I'll accept that, since I have little choice. But I would still rather have an unattached college boy taking a year off. Well, perhaps you'll
and around the grounds. Unless you have further questions?" "No. None at all." Ullman stood. "I hope there are no hard feelings, Mr. Torrance. There is nothing personal in the things I have said to you. I only want what's best for the Overlook. It is a great hotel. I want it to stay that way." "No. No hard feelings." Jack flashed the PR grin again, but he was glad Ullman didn't offer to shake hands. There were hard feelings. All kinds of them.
<< 2 >> BOULDER
She looked out the kitchen window and saw him just sitting there on the curb, not playing with his trucks or the wagon or even the balsa glider that had pleased him so much all the last week since Jack had brought it home. He was just sitting there, watching for their shopworn VW, his elbows planted on his thighs and his chin propped in his hands, a five-year-old kid waiting for his daddy. Wendy suddenly felt bad, almost crying bad. She hung the dish towel over the bar by the sink and went downstairs, buttoning the top two buttons of her house dress. Jack and his pride! Hey no, Al, I don't need an advance. I'm okay for a while. The hallway walls were gouged and marked with crayons, grease pencil, spray paint. The stairs were steep and splintery. The whole building smelled of sour age, and what sort of place was this for Danny after the small neat brick house in Stovington? The people living above them on the third floor weren't married, and while that didn't bother her, their constant, rancorous fighting did. It scared her. The guy up there was Tom, and after the bars had closed and they had returned home, the fights would start in earnest — the rest of the week was just a prelim in comparison. The Friday Night Fights, Jack called them, but it wasn't funny. The woman — her name was Elaine — would at last be reduced to tears and to repeating over and over again: "Don't, Tom. Please don't. Please don't." And he would shout at her. Once they had even awakened Danny, and Danny slept like a corpse. The next morning Jack caught Tom going out and had spoken to him on the sidewalk at some length. Tom started to bluster and Jack had said something else to him, too quietly for Wendy to hear, and Tom had only shaken his head sullenly and walked away. That had been a week ago and for a few days things had been better, but since the weekend things had been working back to normal — excuse me, abnormal. It was bad for the boy. Her sense of grief washed over her again but she was on the walk now and she smothered it. Sweeping her dress under her and sitting down on the curb beside him, she said: "What's up, doc?"
He smiled at her but it was perfunctory. "Hi, Mom." The glider was between his sneakered feet, and she saw that one of the wings had started to splinter. "Want me to see what I can do with that, honey?" Danny had gone back to staring up the street. "No. Dad will fix it." "Your daddy may not be back until suppertime, doc. It's a long drive up into those mountains." "Do you think the bug will break down?" "No, I don't think so." But he had just given her something new to worry about. Thanks, Danny. I needed that. "Dad said it might," Danny said in a matter-of-fact, almost bored manner. "He said the fuel pump was all shot to shit." "Don't say that, Danny." "Fuel pump?" he asked her with honest surprise. She sighed. "No, `All shot to shit.' Don't say that." "Why?" "It's vulgar." "What's vulgar, Mom?" "Like when you pick your nose at the table or pee with the bathroom door open. Or saying things like `All shot to shit.' Shit is a vulgar word. Nice people don't say it." "Dad says it. When he was looking at the bugmotor he said, `Christ this fuel pump's all shot to sbit.' Isn't Dad nice?" How do you get into these things, Winnifred? Do you practice? "He's nice, but he's also a grown-up. And he's very careful not to say things like that in front of people who wouldn't understand." "You mean like Uncle Al?" "Yes, that's right." "Can I say it when I'm grown-up?" "I suppose you will, whether I like it or not." "How old?" "How does twenty sound, doc?" "That's a long time to have to wait." "I guess it is, but will you try?" "Hokay." He went back to staring up the street. He flexed a little, as if to rise, but the beetle coming was much newer, and much brighter red. He relaxed again. She wondered just how hard this move to Colorado had been on Danny. He was closemouthed about it, but it bothered her to see him spending so much time by himself. In Vermont three of Jack's fellow faculty members had had children about Danny's age — and there had been the preschool — but in this neighborhood there was no one for him to play with. Most of the apartments were occupied by students attending CU, and of the few married couples here on Arapahoe Street, only a tiny percentage had children. She had spotted perhaps a dozen of high school or junior high school age, three infants, and that was all. "Mommy, why did Daddy lose his job?" She was jolted out of her reverie and floundering for an answer. She and Jack had discussed ways they might handle just such a question from Danny, ways that
had varied from evasion to the plain truth with no varnish on it. But Danny had never asked. Not until now, when she was feeling low and least prepared for such a question. Yet he was looking at her, maybe reading the confusion on her face and forming his own ideas about that. She thought that to children adult motives and actions must seem as bulking and ominous as dangerous animals seen in the shadows of a dark forest. They were jerked about like puppets, having only the vaguest notions why. The thought brought her dangerously close to tears again, and while she fought them off she leaned over, picked up the disabled glider, and turned it over in her hands. "Your daddy was coaching the debate team, Danny. Do you remember that?" "Sure," he said. "Arguments for fun, right?" "Right." She turned the glider over and over, looking at the trade name (SPEEDOGLIDE) and the blue star decals on the wings, and found herself telling the exact truth to her son. "There was a boy named George Hatfield that Daddy had to cut from the team. That means he wasn't as good as some of the others. George said your daddy cut him because he didn't like him and not because he wasn't good enough. Then George did a bad thing. I think you know about that." "Was he the one who put the holes in our bug's tires?" "Yes, he was. It was after school and your daddy caught him doing it." Now she hesitated again, but there was no question of evasion now; it was reduced to tell the truth or tell a lie. "Your daddy ... sometimes he does things he's sorry for later. Sometimes he doesn't think the way he should. That doesn't happen very often, but sometimes it does." "Did he hurt George Hatfield like the time I spilled all his papers?" Sometimes -- (Danny with his arm in a cast) — he does things he's sorry for later. Wendy blinked her eyes savagely hard, driving her tears all the way back. "Something like that, honey. Your daddy hit George to make him stop cutting the tires and George hit his head. Then the men who are in charge of the school said that George couldn't go there anymore and your daddy couldn't teach there anymore." She stopped, out of words, and waited in dread for the deluge of questions. "Oh," Danny said, and went back to looking up the street. Apparently the subject was closed. If only it could be closed that easily for her -- She stood up. "I'm going upstairs for a cup of tea, doc. Want a couple of cookies and a glass of milk?" "I think I'll watch for Dad." "I don't think he'll be home much before five." "Maybe he'll be early." "Maybe," she agreed. "Maybe he will." She was halfway up the walk when he called, "Mommy?" "What, Danny?" "Do you want to go and live in that hotel for the winter?" Now, which of five thousand answers should she give to that one? The way she had felt yesterday or last night or this morning? They were all different, they
crossed the spectrum from rosy pink to dead black. She said: "If it's what your father wants, it's what I want." She paused. "What about you?" "I guess I do," he said finally. "Nobody much to play with around here." "You miss your friends, don't you?" "Sometimes I miss Scott and Andy. That's about all." She went back to him and kissed him, rumpled his lightcolored hair that was just losing its baby-fineness. He was such a solemn little boy, and sometimes she wondered just how he was supposed to survive with her and Jack for parents. The high hopes they had begun with came down to this unpleasant apartment building in a city they didn't know. The image of Danny in his cast rose up before her again. Somebody in the Divine Placement Service had made a mistake, one she sometimes feared could never be corrected and which only the most innocent bystander could pay for. "Stay out of the road, doc," she said, and hugged him tight. "Sure, Mom." She went upstairs and into the kitchen. She put on the teapot and laid a couple of Oreos on a plate for Danny in case he decided to come up while she was lying down. Sitting at the table with her big pottery cup in front of her, she looked out the window at him, still sitting on the curb in his bluejeans and his over-sized dark green Stovington Prep sweatshirt, the glider now lying beside him. The tears which had threatened all day now came in a cloudburst and she leaned into the fragrant, curling steam of the tea and wept. In grief and loss for the past, and terror of the future.
<< 3 >> WATSON
You lost your temper, Ullman had said. "Okay, here's your furnace," Watson said, turning on a light in the dark, musty-smelling room. He was a beefy man with fluffy popcorn hair, white shirt, and dark green chinos. He swung open a small square grating in the furnace's belly and he and Jack peered in together. "This here's the pilot light." A steady blue-white jet hissing steadily upward channeled destructive force, but the key word, Jack thought, was destructive and not channeled: if you stuck your hand in there, the barbecue would happen in three quick seconds. Lost your temper. (Danny, are you all right?) The furnace filled the entire room, by far the biggest and oldest Jack had ever seen. "The pilot's got a fail-safe," Watson told him. "Little sensor in there
measures heat. If the heat falls below a certain point, it sets off a buzzer in your quarters. Boiler's on the other side of the wall. I'll take you around." He slammed the grating shut and led Jack behind the iron bulk of the furnace toward another door. The iron radiated a stuporous heat at them, and for some reason Jack thought of a large, dozing cat. Watson jingled his keys and whistled. Lost your -- (When he went back into his study and saw Danny standing there, wearing nothing but his training pants and a grin, a slow, red cloud of rage had eclipsed Jack's reason. It had seemed slow subjectively, inside his head, but it must have all happened in less than a minute. It only seemed slow the way some dreams seem slow. The bad ones. Every door and drawer in his study seemed to have been ransacked in the time he had been gone. Closet, cupboards, the sliding bookcase. Every desk drawer yanked out to the stop. His manuscript, the three- act play he had been slowly developing from a novelette he had written seven years ago as an under-graduate, was scattered all over the floor. He had been drinking a beer and doing the Act II corrections when Wendy said the phone was for him, and Danny had poured the can of beer all over the pages. Probably to see it foam. See it foam, see it foam, the words played over and over in his mind like a single sick chord on an out-of-tune piano, completing the circuit of his rage. He stepped deliberately toward his threeyear-old son, who was looking up at him with that pleased grin, his pleasure at the job of work so successfully and recently completed in Daddy's study; Danny began to say something and that was when he had grabbed Danny's hand and bent it to make him drop the typewriter eraser and the mechanical pencil he was clenching in it. Danny had cried out a little ... no ... no ... tell the truth ... he screamed. It was all hard to remember through the fog of anger, the sick single thump of that one Spike Jones chord. Wendy somewhere, asking what was wrong. Her voice faint, damped by the inner mist. This was between the two of them. He had whirled Danny around to spank him, his big adult fingers digging into the scant meat of the boy's forearm, meeting around it in a closed fist, and the snap of the breaking bone had not been loud, not loud but it had been very loud, HUGE, but not loud. Just enough of a sound to slit through the red fog like an arrow — but instead of letting in sunlight, that sound let in the dark clouds of shame and remorse, the terror, the agonizing convulsion of the spirit. A clean sound with the past on one side of it and all the future on the other, a sound like a breaking pencil lead or a small piece of kindling when you brought it down over your knee. A moment of utter silence on the other side, in respect to the beginning future maybe, all the rest of his life. Seeing Danny's face drain of color until it was like cheese, seeing his eyes, always large, grow larger still, and glassy, Jack sure the boy was going to faint dead away into the puddle of beer and papers; his own voice, weak and drunk, slurry, trying to take it all back, to find a way around that not too loud sound of bone cracking and into the past — is there a status quo in the house? — saying: Danny, are you all right? Danny's answering shriek, then Wendy's shocked gasp as she came around them and saw the peculiar angle Danny's forearm had to his elbow; no arm was meant to hang quite that way in a world of normal families. Her own scream as she swept him into her arms, and a nonsense babble: Oh God Danny oh dear God oh sweet God your poor sweet arm; and Jack was standing there, stunned and stupid,
trying to understand how a thing like this could have happened. He was standing there and his eyes met the eyes of his wife and he saw that Wendy hated him. It did not occur to him what the hate might mean in practical terms; it was only later that he realized she might have left him that night, gone to a motel, gotten a divorce lawyer in the morning; or called the police. He saw only that his wife hated him and he felt staggered by it, all alone. He felt awful. This was what oncoming death felt like. Then she fled for the telephone and dialed the hospital with their screaming boy wedged in the crook of her arm and Jack did not go after her, he only stood in the ruins of his office, smelling beer and thinking — ) You lost your temper. He rubbed his hand harshly across his lips and followed Watson into the boiler room. It was humid in here, but it was more than the humidity that brought the sick and slimy sweat onto his brow and stomach and legs. The remembering did that, it was a total thing that made that night two years ago seem like two hours ago. There was no lag. It brought the shame and revulsion back, the sense of having no worth at all, and that feeling always made him want to have a drink, and the wanting of a drink brought still blacker despair — would he ever have an hour, not a week or even a day, mind you, but just one waking hour when the craving for a drink wouldn't surprise him like this? "The boiler," Watson announced. He pulled a red and blue bandanna from his back pocket, blew his nose with a decisive honk, and thrust it back out of sight after a short peek into it to see if he had gotten anything interesting. The boiler stood on four cement blocks, a long and cylindrical metal tank, copper-jacketed and often patched. It squatted beneath a confusion of pipes and ducts which zigzagged upward into the high, cobweb-festooned basement ceiling. To Jack's right, two large heating pipes came through the wall from the furnace in the adjoining room. "Pressure gauge is here." Watson tapped it. "Pounds per square inch, psi. I guess you'd know that. I got her up to a hundred now, and the rooms get a little chilly at night. Few guests complain, what the fuck. They're crazy to come up here in September anyway. Besides, this is an old baby. Got more patches on her than a pair of welfare overalls." Out came the bandanna. A honk. A peek. Back it went. "I got me a fuckin cold," Watson said conversationally. "I get one every September. I be tinkering down here with this old whore, then I be out cuttin the grass or rakin that rogue court. Get a chill and catch a cold, my old mum used to say. God bless her, she been dead six year. The cancer got her. Once the cancer gets you, you might as well make your will. "You'll want to keep your press up to no more than fifty, maybe sixty. Mr. Ullman, he says to heat the west wing one day, central wing the next, east wing the day after that. Ain't he a crazyman? I hate that little fucker. Yap-yap-yap all the livelong day, he's just like one a those little dogs that bites you on the ankle then run around an pee all over the rug. If brains was black powder he couldn't blow his own nose. It's a pity the things you see when you ain't got a gun. "Look here. You open an close these ducts by pullin these rings. I got em all marked for you. The blue tags all go to the rooms in the east wing. Red tags is
the middle. Yellow is the west wing. When you go to heat the west wing, you got to remember that's the side of the hotel that really catches the weather. When it whoops, those rooms get as cold as a frigid woman with an ice cube up her works. You can run your press all the way to eighty on west wing days. I would, anyway." "The thermostats upstairs — " Jack began. Watson shook his bead vehemently, making his fluffy hair bounce on his skull. "They ain't hooked up. They're just there for show. Some of these people from California, they don't think things is right unless they got it hot enough to grow a palm tree in their fuckin bedroom. All the heat comes from down here. Got to watch the press, though. See her creep?" He tapped the main dial, which had crept from a hundred pounds per square inch to a hundred and two as Watson soliloquized. Jack felt a sudden shiver cross his back in a hurry and thought: The goose just walked over my grave. Then Watson gave the pressure wheel a spin and dumped the boiler off: There was a great hissing, and the needle dropped back to ninety-one. Watson twisted the valve shut and the hissing died reluctantly. "She creeps," Watson said. "You tell that fat little peckerwood Ullman, he drags out the account books and spends three hours showing how he can't afford a new one until 1982. I tell you, this whole place is gonna go sky-high someday, and I just hope that fat fuck's here to ride the rocket. God, I wish I could be as charitable as my mother was. She could see the good in everyone. Me, I'm just as mean as a snake with the shingles. What the fuck, a man can't help his nature. "Now you got to remember to come down here twice a day and once at night before you rack in. You got to check the press. If you forget, it'll just creep and creep and like as not you an your fambly'll wake up on the fuckin moon. You just dump her off a little and you'll have no trouble." "What's top end?" "Oh, she's rated for two-fifty, but she'd blow long before that now. You couldn't get me to come down an stand next to her when that dial was up to one hundred and eighty." "There's no automatic shutdown?" "No, there ain't. This was built before such things were required. Federal government's into everything these days, ain't it? FBI openin mail, CIA buggin the goddam phones ... and look what happened to that Nixon. Wasn't that a sorry sight? "But if you just come down here regular an check the press, you'll be fine. An remember to switch those ducks around like he wants. Won't none of the rooms get much above forty-five unless we have an amazin warm winter. And you'll have your own apartment just as warm as you like it." "What about the plumbing?" "Okay, I was just getting to that. Over here through this arch." They walked into a long, rectangular room that seemed to stretch for miles. Watson pulled a cord and a single seventyfive-watt bulb cast a sickish, swinging glow over the area they were standing in. Straight ahead was the bottom of the elevator shaft, heavy greased cables descending to pulleys twenty feet in diameter and a huge, grease-clogged motor. Newspapers were everywhere, bundled
and banded and boxed. Other cartons were marked Records or Invoices or Receipts- SAV$1 The smell was yellow and moldy. Some of the cartons were falling apart, spilling yellow flimsy sheets that might have been twenty years old out onto the floor. Jack stared around, fascinated. The Overlook's entire history might be here, buried in these rotting cartons. "That elevator's a bitch to keep runnin," Watson said, jerking his thumb at it. "I know Ullman's buying the state elevator inspector a few fancy dinners to keep the repairman away from that fucker. "Now, here's your central plumbin core." In front of them five large pipes, each of them wrapped in insulation and cinched with steel bands, rose into the shadows and out of sight. Watson pointed to a cobwebby shelf beside the utility shaft. There were a number of greasy rags on it, and a looseleaf binder. "That there is all your plumbin schematics," he said. "I don't think you'll have any trouble with leaks — never has been — but sometimes the pipes freeze up. Only way to stop that is to run the faucets a little bit durin the nights, but there's over four hundred taps in this fuckin palace. That fat fairy upstairs would scream all the way to Denver when he saw the water bill. Ain't that right?" "I'd say that's a remarkably astute analysis." Watson looked at him admiringly. "Say, you really are a college fella aren't you? Talk just like a book. I admire that, as long as the fella ain't one of those fairy-boys. Lots of em are. You know who stirred up all those college riots a few years ago? The hommasexshuls, that's who. They get frustrated an have to cut loose. Comin out of the closet, they call it. Holy shit, I don't know what the world's comin to. "Now, if she freezes, she most likely gonna freeze right up in this shaft. No heat, you see. If it happens, use this." He reached into a broken orange crate and produced a small gas torch. "You just unstrap the insulation when you find the ice plug and put the heat right to her. Get it?" "Yes. But what if a pipe freezes outside the utility core?" "That won't happen if you're doin your job and keepin the place heated. You can't get to the other pipes anyway. Don't you fret about it. You'll have no trouble. Beastly place down here. Cobwebby. Gives me the horrors, it does." "Ullman said the first winter caretaker killed his family and himself." "Yeah, that guy Grady. He was a bad actor, I knew that the minute I saw him. Always grinnin like an egg-suck dog. That was when they were just startin out here and that fat fuck Ullman, he woulda hired the Boston Strangler if he'd've worked for minimum wage. Was a ranger from the National Park that found em; the phone was out. All of em up in the west wing on the third floor, froze solid. Too bad about the little girls. Eight and six, they was. Cute as cut-buttons. Oh, that was a hell of a mess. That Ullman, he manages some honky-tonky resort place down in Florida in the off-season, and he caught a plane up to Denver and hired a sleigh to take him up here from Sidewinder because the roads were closed — a sleigh, can you believe that? He about split a gut tryin to keep it out of the papers. Did pretty well, I got to give him that. There was an item in the Denver Post, and of course the bituary in that pissant little rag they have down in Estes Park, but that was just about all. Pretty good, considerin the
reputation this place has got. I expected some reporter would dig it all up again and just sorta put Grady in it as an excuse to rake over the scandals." "What scandals?" Watson shrugged. "Any big hotels have got scandals," he said. "Just like every big hotel has got a ghost. Why? Hell, people come and go. Sometimes one of em will pop off in his room, heart attack or stroke or something like that. Hotels are superstitious places. No thirteenth floor or room thirteen, no mirrors on the back of the door you come in through, stuff like that. Why, we lost a lady just this last July. Ullman had to take care of that, and you can bet your ass he did. That's what they pay him twenty-two thousand bucks a season for, and as much as I dislike the little prick, he earns it. It's like some people just come here to throw up and they hire a guy like Ullman to clean up the messes. Here's this woman, must be sixty fuckin years old — my age! — and her hair's dyed just as red as a whore's stoplight, tits saggin just about down to her belly button on account of she ain't wearin no brassy-ear, big varycoarse veins all up and down her legs so they look like a couple of goddam roadmaps, the jools drippin off her neck and arms an hangin out her ears. And she's got this kid with her, he can't be no more than seventeen, with hair down to his asshole and his crotch bulgin 'like he stuffed it with the funnypages. So they're here a week, ten days maybe, and every night it's the same drill. Down in the Colorado Lounge from five to seven, her suckin up singapore slings like they're gonna outlaw em tomorrow and him with just the one bottle of Olympia, suckin it, makin it last. And she'd be makin jokes and sayin all these witty things, and every time she said one he'd grin just like a fuckin ape, like she had strings tied to the corners of his mouth. Only after a few days you could see it was gettin harder an harder for him to grin, and God knows what he had to think about to get his pump primed by bedtime. Well, they'd go in for dinner, him walkin and her staggerin, drunk as a coot, you know, and he'd be pinchin the waitresses and grinnin at em when she wasn't lookin. Hell, we even had bets on how long he'd last." Watson shrugged. "Then he comes down one night around ten, sayin his 'wife' is 'indisposed' — which meant she was passed out again like every other night they was there — and he's goin to get her some stomach medicine. So off he goes in the little Porsche they come in, and that's the last we see of him. Next morning she comes down and tries to put on this big act, but all day she's gettin paler an paler, and Mr. Ullman asks her, sorta diplomatic-like, would she like him to notify the state cops, just in case maybe he had a little accident or something. She's on him like a cat. No-no-no, he's a fine driver, she isn't worried, everything's under control, he'll be back for dinner. So that afternoon she steps into the Colorado around three and never has no dinner at all. She goes up to her room around ten- thirty, and that's the last time anybody saw her alive." "What happened?" "County coroner said she took about thirty sleepin pills on top of all the booze. Her husband showed up the next day, some big-shot lawyer from New York. He gave old Ullman four different shades of holy hell. I'll sue this an I'll sue that an when I'm through you won't even be able to find a clean pair of underwear, stuff like that. But Ullman's good, the sucker. Ullman got him
quieted down. Probably asked that bigshot how he'd like to see his wife splashed all over the New York papers: Wife of Prominent New York Blah Blah Found Dead With Bellyful of Sleeping Pills. After playing hide-the-salami with a kid young enough to be her grandson. "The state cops found the Porsche in the back of this allnight burger joint down in Lyons, and Ullman pulled a few strings to get it released to that lawyer. Then both of them ganged up on old Archer Houghton, which is the county coroner, and got him to change the verdict to accidental death. Heart attack. Now ole Archer's driving a Chrysler. I don't begrudge him. A man's got to take it where he finds it, especially when he starts gettin along in years." Out came the bandanna. Honk. Peek. Out of sight. "So what happens? About a week later this stupid cunt of a chambermaid, Delores Vickery by name, she gives out with a helluva shriek while she's makin up the room where those two stayed, and she faints dead away. When she comes to she says she seen the dead woman in the bathroom, layin naked in the tub. 'Her face was all purple an puffy.' she says, 'an she was grinnin at me.' So Ullman gave her two weeks' worth of walking papers and told her to get lost. I figure there's maybe forty-fifty people died in this hotel since my grandfather opened it for business in 1910." He looked shrewdly at Jack. "You know how most of em go? Heart attack or stroke, while they're bangin the lady they're with. That's what these resorts get a lot of, old types that want one last fling. They come up here to the mountains to pretend they're twenty again. Sometimes somethin gives, and not all the guys who ran this place was as good as Ullman is at keepin it out of the papers. So the Overlook's got a reputation, yeah. I'll bet the fuckin Biltmore in New York City has got a reputation, if you ask the right people." "But no ghosts?" "Mr. Torrance, I've worked here all my life. I played here when I was a kid no older'n your boy in that wallet snapshot you showed me. I never seen a ghost yet. You want to come out back with me, I'll show you the equipment shed." "Fine." As Watson reached up to turn off the light, Jack said, "There sure are a lot of papers down here." "Oh, you're not kiddin. Seems like they go back a thousand years. Newspapers and old invoices and bills of lading and Christ knows what else. My dad used to keep up with them pretty good when we had the old wood-burning furnace, but now they've got all out of hand. Some year I got to get a boy to haul them down to Sidewinder and burn em. If Ullman will stand the expense. I guess he will if I holler `rat' loud enough." "Then there are rats?" "Yeah, I guess there's some. I got the traps and the poison Mr. Ullman wants you to use up in the attic and down here. You keep a good eye on your boy, Mr. Torrance. You wouldn't want nothing to happen to him." "No, I sure wouldn't." Coming from Watson the advice didn't sting. They went to the stairs and paused there for a moment while Watson blew his nose again. "You'll find all the tools you need out there and some you don't, I guess. And
there's the shingles. Did Ullman tell you about that?" "Yes, he wants part of the west roof reshingled." "Hell get all the for-free out of you that he can, the fat little prick, and then whine around in the spring about how you didn't do the job half right. I told him once right to his face, I said ..." Watson's words faded away to a comforting drone as they mounted the stairs. Jack Torrance looked back over his shoulder once into the impenetrable, musty- smelling darkness and thought that if there was ever a place that should have ghosts, this was it. He thought of Grady, locked in by the soft, implacable snow, going quietly berserk and committing his atrocity. Did they scream? he wondered. Poor Grady, feeling it close in on him more every day, and knowing at last that for him spring would never come. He shouldn't have been here. And he shouldn't have lost his temper. As he followed Watson through the door, the words echoed back to him like a knell, accompanied by a sharp snap-like a breaking pencil lead. Dear God, he could use a drink. Or a thousand of them.
<< 4 >> SHADOWLAND
Danny weakened and went up for his milk and cookies at quarter past four. He gobbled them while looking out the window, then went in to kiss his mother, who was lying down. She suggested that he stay in and watch "Sesame Street" — the time would pass faster — but he shook his head firmly and went back to his place on the curb. Now it was five o'clock, and although he didn't have a watch and couldn't tell time too well yet anyway, he was aware of passing time by the lengthening of the shadows, and by the golden cast that now tinged the afternoon light. Turning the glider over in his hands, he sang under his breath: "Skip to m Lou, n I don't care ... skip to m Lou, n I don't care ... my master's gone away ... Lou, Lou, skip to In Lou..." They had sung that song all together at the Jack and Jill Nursery School he had gone to back in Stovington. He didn't go to nursery school out here because Daddy couldn't afford to send him anymore. He knew his mother and father worried about that, worried that it was adding to his loneliness (and even more deeply, unspoken between them, that Danny blamed them), but he didn't really want to go to that old Jack and Jill anymore. It was for babies. He wasn't quite a big kid yet, but he wasn't a baby anymore. Big kids went to the big school and got a hot lunch. First grade. Next year. This year was someplace between being a baby and a real kid. It was all right. He did miss Scott and Andy-mostly Scott-but it was still all right. It seemed best to wait alone for whatever might happen next.
He understood a great many things about his parents, and he knew that many times they didn't like his understandings and many other times refused to believe them. But someday they would have to believe. He was content to wait. It was too bad they couldn't believe more, though, especially at times like now. Mommy was lying on her bed in the apartment, just about crying she was so worried about Daddy. Some of the things she was worried about were too grown-up for Danny to understand-vague things that had to do with security, with Daddy's selfimage feelings of guilt and anger and the fear of what was to become of them-but the two main things on her mind right now were that Daddy had had a breakdown in the mountains (then why doesn't he call?) or that Daddy had gone off to do the Bad Thing. Danny knew perfectly well what the Bad Thing was since Scotty Aaronson, who was six months older, had explained it to him. Scotty knew because his daddy did the Bad Thing, too. Once, Scotty told him, his daddy had punched his mom right in the eye and knocked her down. Finally, Scotty's dad and mom had gotten a DIVORCE over the Bad Thing, and when Danny had known him, Scotty lived with his mother and only saw his daddy on weekends. The greatest terror of Danny's life was DIVORCE, a word that always appeared in his mind as a sign painted in red letters which were covered with hissing, poisonous snakes. In DIVORCE, your parents no longer lived together. They had a tug of war over you in a court (tennis court? badminton court? Danny wasn't sure which or if it was some other, but Mommy and Daddy had played both tennis and badminton at Stovington, so he assumed it could be either) and you had to go with one of them and you practically never saw the other one, and the one you were with could marry somebody you didn't even know if the urge came on them. The most terrifying thing about DIVORCE was that he had sensed the word-or concept, or whatever it was that came to him in his understandings-floating around in his own parents' heads, sometimes diffuse and relatively distant, sometimes as thick and obscuring and frightening as thunderheads. It had been that way after Daddy punished him for messing the papers up in his study and the doctor had to put his arm in a cast. That memory was already faded, but the memory of the DIVORCE thoughts was clear and terrifying. It had mostly been around his mommy that time, and he had been in constant terror that she would pluck the word from her brain and drag it out of her mouth, making it real. DIVORCE. It was a constant undercurrent in their thoughts, one of the few he could always pick up, like the beat of simple music. But like a beat, the central thought formed only the spine of more complex thoughts, thoughts he could not as yet even begin to interpret. They came to him only as colors and moods. Mommy's DIVORCE thoughts centered around what Daddy had done to his arm, and what had happened at Stovington when Daddy lost his job. That boy. That George Hatfield who got pissed off at Daddy and put the holes in their bug's feet. Daddy's DIVORCE thoughts were more complex, colored dark violet and shot through with frightening veins of pure black. He seemed to think they would be better off if he left. That things would stop hurting. His daddy hurt almost all the time, mostly about the Bad Thing. Danny could almost always pick that up too: Daddy's constant craving to go into a dark place and watch a color TV and eat peanuts out of a bowl and do the Bad Thing until his brain would be quiet and leave him alone. But this afternoon his mother had no need to worry and he wished he could go to her and tell her that. The bug had not broken down. Daddy was not off
somewhere doing the Bad Thing. He was almost home now, put-putting along the highway between Lyons and Boulder. For the moment his daddy wasn't even thinking about the Bad Thing. He was thinking about ...about... Danny looked furtively behind him at the kitchen window. Sometimes thinking very hard made something happen to him. It made things — real things — go away, and then he saw things that weren't there. Once, not long after they put the cast on his arm, this had happened at the supper table. They weren't talking much to each other then. But they were thinking. Oh yes. The thoughts of DIVORCE hung over the kitchen table like a cloud full of black rain, pregnant, ready to burst. It was so bad he couldn't eat. The thought of eating with all that black DIVORCE around made him want to throw up. And because it had seemed desperately important, he had thrown himself fully into concentration and something had happened. When he came back to real things, he was lying on the floor with beans and mashed potatoes in his lap and his mommy was holding him and crying and Daddy had been on the phone. He had been frightened, had tried to explain to them that there was nothing wrong. that this sometimes happened to him when he concentrated on understanding more than what normallv came to him. He tried to explain about Tony, who they called his "invisible playmate." His father had said: "He's having a Ha Loo Sin Nation. He seems okay, but I want the doctor to look at him anyway." After the doctor left, Mommy had made him promise to never do that again, to never scare them that way, and Danny had agreed. He was frightened himself. Because when he bad concentrated his mind, it had flown out to his daddy, and for just a moment, before Tony had appeared (far away, as be always did, calling distantly) and the strange things had blotted out their kitchen and the carved roast on the blue plate, for just a moment his own consciousness had plunged through his daddy's darkness to an incomprehensible word much more frightening than DIVORCE, and that word was SUICIDE. Danny had never come across it again in his daddy's mind, and he had certainly not gone looking for it. He didn't care if he never found out exactly what that word meant. But he did like to concentrate, because sometimes Tony would come. Not every time. Sometimes things just got woozy and swimmy for a minute and then cleared — most times, in fact — but at other times Tony would appear at the very limit of his vision, calling distantly and beckoning ... It had happened twice since they moved to Boulder, and he remembered how surprised and pleased he had been to find Tony had followed him all the way from Vermont. So all his friends hadn't been left behind after all. The first time he had been out in the back yard and nothing much had happened. Just Tony beckoning and then darkness and a few minutes later he had come back to real things with a few vague fragments of memory, like a jumbled dream. The second time, two weeks ago, had been more interesting. Tony, beckoning, calling from four yards over: "Danny ... come see ..." It seemed that he was getting up, then falling into a deep hole, like Alice into Wonderland. Then he had been in the basement of the apartment house and Tony had been beside him, pointing into the shadows at the trunk his daddy carried all his important papers in, especially "THE PLAY." "See?" Tony had said in his distant, musical voice. "It's under the- stairs. Right under the stairs. The movers put it right ... under... the stairs."
Danny had stepped forward to look more closely at this marvel and then he was falling again, this time out of the back-yard swing, where he had been sitting all along. He had gotten the wind knocked out of himself, too. Three or four days later his daddy had been stomping around, telling Mommy furiously that he had been all over the goddam basement and the trunk wasn't there and he was going to sue the goddam movers who had left it somewhere between Vermont and Colorado. How was he supposed to be able to finish "THE PLAY" if things like this kept cropping up? Danny said, "No, Daddy. It's under the stairs. The movers put it right under the stairs." Daddy had given him a strange look and had gone down to see. The trunk had been there, just where Tony had shown him. Daddy had taken him aside, had sat him on his lap, and had asked Danny who let him down cellar. Had it been Tom from upstairs? The cellar was dangerous, Daddy said. That was why the landlord kept it locked. If someone was leaving it unlocked, Daddy wanted to know. He was glad to have his papers and his "PLAY" but it wouldn't be worth it to him, he said, if Danny fell down the stairs and broke his ... his leg. Danny told his father earnestly that he hadn't been down in the cellar. That door was always locked. And Mommy agreed. Danny never went down in the back hall, she said, because it was damp and dark and spidery. And he didn't tell lies. "Then how did you know, doc?" Daddy asked. "Tony showed me." His mother and father had exchanged a look over his head. This had happened before, from time to time. Because it was frightening, they swept it quickly from their minds. But he knew they worried about Tony, Mommy especially, and he was careful about thinking the way that could make Tony come where she might see. But now he thought she was lying down, not moving about in the kitchen yet, and so he concentrated hard to see if he could understand what Daddy was thinking about. His brow furrowed and his slightly grimy hands clenched into tight fists on his jeans. He did not close his eyes-that wasn't necessary-but he squinched them down to slits and imagined Daddy's voice, Jack's voice, John Daniel Torrance's voice, deep and steady, sometimes quirking up with amusement or deepening even more with anger or just staying steady because he was thinking. Thinking of. Thinking about. Thinking .. (thinking) Danny sighed quietly and his body slumped on the curb as if all the muscles had gone out of it. He was fully conscious; he saw the street and the girl and boy walking up the sidewalk on the other side, holding hands because they were (?in love?) so happy about the day and themselves together in the day. He saw autumn leaves blowing along the gutter, yellow cartwheels of irregular shape. He saw the house they were passing and noticed how the roof was covered with (shingles. i guess it'll be no problem if the flashing's ok yeah that'll be all right. that watson. christ what a character. wish there was a place for him in "THE PLAY. " i'll end up with the whole fucking human race in it if i don't watch out. yeah. shingles. are there nails out there? oh shit forgot to ask him well they're simple to get. sidewinder hardware store. wasps. they're nesting
this time of year. i might want to get one of those bug bombs in case they're there when i rip up the old shingles. new shingles. old) shingles. So that's what he was thinking about. He had gotten the job and was thinking about shingles. Danny didn't know who Watson was, but everything else seemed clear enough. And he might get to see a wasps' nest. Just as sure as his name was "Danny ... Dannee ..." He looked up and there was Tony, far up the street, standing by a stop sign and waving. Danny, as always, felt a warm burst of pleasure at seeing his old friend, but this time he seemed to feel a prick of fear, too, as if Tony had come with some darkness hidden behind his back. A jar-of wasps which when released would sting deeply. But there was no question of not going. He slumped further down on the curb, his hands sliding laxly from his thighs and dangling below the fork of his crotch. His chin sank onto his chest. Then there was a dim, painless tug as part of him got up and ran after Tony into funneling darkness. "Dannee — " Now the darkness was shot with swirling whiteness. A coughing, whooping sound and bending, tortured shadows that resolved themselves into fir trees at night, being pushed by a screaming gale. Snow swirled and danced. Snow everywhere. "Too deep," Tony said from the darkness, and there was a sadness in his voice that terrified Danny. "Too deep to get out." Another shape, looming, rearing. Huge and rectangular. A sloping roof. Whiteness that was blurred in the stormy darkness. Many windows. A long building with a shingled roof. Some of the shingles were greener, newer. His daddy put them on. With nails from the Sidewinder hardware store. Now the snow was covering the shingles. It was covering everything. A green witchlight glowed into being on the front of the building, flickered, and became a giant, grinning skull over two crossed bones: "Poison," Tony said from the floating darkness. "Poison." Other signs flickered past his eyes, some in green letters, some of them on boards stuck at leaning angles into the snowdrifts. NO SWIMMING. DANGER! LIVE WIRES. THIS PROPERTY CONDEMNED. HIGH VOLTAGE. THIRD RAIL. DANGER OF DEATH. KEEP OFF. KEEP OUT. NO TRESPASSING. VIOLATORS WILL BE SHOT ON SIGHT. He understood none of them completely — he couldn't read! — but got a sense of all, and a dreamy terror floated into the dark hollows of his body like light brown spores that would die in sunlight. They faded. Now he was in a room filled with strange furniture, a room that was dark. Snow spattered against the windows like thrown sand. His mouth was dry, his eyes like hot marbles, his heart triphammering in his chest. Outside there was a hollow booming noise, like a dreadful door being thrown wide. Footfalls. Across the room was a mirror, and deep down in its silver bubble a single word appeared in green fire and that word was: REDRUM. The room faded. Another room. He knew (would know)
this one. An overturned chair. A broken window with snow swirling in; already it had frosted the edge of the rug. The drapes had been pulled free and hung on their broken rod at an angle. A low cabinet lying on its face. More hollow booming noises, steady, rhythmic, horrible. Smashing glass. Approaching destruction. A hoarse voice, the voice of a madman, made the more terrible by its familiarity: Come out! Came out, you little shit! Take your medicine! Crash. Crash. Crash. Splintering wood. A bellow of rage and satisfaction. REDRUM. Coming. Drifting across the room. Pictures torn off the walls. A record player (?Mommy's record player?) overturned on the floor. Her records, Grieg, Handel, the Beatles, Art Garfunkel, Bach, Liszt, thrown everywhere. Broken into jagged black pie wedges. A shaft of light coming from another room, the bathroom, harsh white light and a word flickering on and off in the medicine cabinet mirror like a red eye, REDRUM, REDRUM, REDRUM -- "No," he whispered. "No, Tony please — " And, dangling over the white porcelain lip of the bathtub, a hand. Limp. A slow trickle of blood (REDRUM) trickling down one of the fingers, the third, dripping onto the tile from the carefully shaped nail -- No oh no oh no -- (oh please, Tony, you're scaring me) REDRUM REDRUM REDRUM (stop it, Tony, stop it) Fading. In the darkness the booming noises grew louder, louder still, echoing, everywhere, all around. And now he was crouched in a dark hallway, crouched on a blue rug with a riot of twisting black shapes woven into its pile, listening to the booming noises approach, and now a Shape turned the corner and began to come toward him, lurching, smelling of blood and doom. It had a mallet in one hand and it was swinging it (REDRUM) from side to side in vicious arcs, slamming it into the walls, cutting the silk wallpaper and knocking out ghostly bursts of plasterdust: Come on and take your medicine! Take it like a man! The Shape advancing on him, reeking of that sweet-sour odor, gigantic, the mallet head cutting across the air with a wicked hissing whisper, then the great hollow boom as it crashed into the wall, sending the dust out in a puff you could smell, dry and itchy. Tiny red eyes glowed in the dark. The monster was upon him, it had discovered him, cowering here with a blank wall at his back. And the trapdoor in the ceiling was locked. Darkness. Drifting. "Tony, please take me back, please, please — " And he was back, sitting on the curb of Arapahoe Street, his shirt sticking damply to his back, his body bathed in sweat. In his ears he could still hear that huge, contrapuntal booming sound and smell his own urine as he voided himself in the extremity of his terror. He could see that limp hand dangling over the edge of the tub with blood running down one finger, the third, and that
inexplicable word so much more horrible than any of the others: REDRUM. And now sunshine. Real things. Except for Tony, now six blocks up, only a speck, standing on the corner, his voice faint and high and sweet. "Be careful, doc..." Then, in the next instant, Tony was gone and Daddy's battered red bug was turning the corner and chattering up the street, farting blue smoke behind it. Danny was off the curb in a second, waving, jiving from one foot to the other, yelling: "Daddy! Hey, Dad! Hi! Hi!" His daddy swung the VW into the curb, killed the engine, and opened the door. Danny ran toward him and then froze, his eyes widening. His heart crawled up into the middle of his throat and froze solid. Beside his daddy, in the other front seat, was a short-handled mallet, its head clotted with blood and hair. Then it was just a bag of groceries. "Danny ... you okay, doc?" "Yeah. I'm okay." He went to his daddy and buried his face in Daddy's sheepskin-lined denim jacket and hugged him tight tight tight. Jack hugged him back, slightly bewildered. "Hey, you don't want to sit in the sun like that, doc. You're drippin sweat." "I guess I fell asleep a little. I love you, Daddy. I been waiting." "I love you too, Dan. I brought home some stuff. Think you're big enough to carry it upstairs?" "Sure am!" "Doc Torrance, the world's stroneest man," Jack said, and ruffled his hair. "Whose hobby is falling asleep on street corners." Then they were walking up to the door and Mommy had come down to the porch to meet them and he stood on the second step and watched them kiss. They were glad to see each other. Love came out of them the way love had come out of the boy and girl walking up the street and holding hands. Danny was glad. The bag of groceries — just a bag of groceries — crackled in his arms. Everything was all right. Daddy was home. Mommy was loving him. There were no bad things. And not everything Tony showed him always happened. But fear had settled around his heart, deep and dreadful, around his heart and around that indecipherable word he had seen in his spirit's mirror.
<< 5 >> PHONEBOOTH
Jack parked the VW in front of the Rexall in the Table Mesa shopping center and let the engine die. He wondered again if he shouldn't go ahead and get the fuel pump replaced, and told himself again that they couldn't afford it. If the little car could keep running until November, it could retire with full honors
anyway. By November the snow up there in the mountains would be higher than the beetle's roof ... maybe higher than three beetles stacked on top of each other. "Want you to stay in the car, doc. I'll bring you a candy bar." "Why can't I come in?" "I have to make a phone call. It's private stuff." "Is that why you didn't make it at home?" "Check." Wendy had insisted on a phone in spite of their unraveling finances. She had argued that with a small child — especially a boy like Danny, who sometimes suffered from fainting spells — they couldn't afford not to have one. So Jack had forked over the thirty-dollar installation fee, bad enough, and a ninety-dollar security deposit, which really hurt. And so far the phone had been mute except for two wrong numbers. "Can I have a Baby Ruth, Daddy?" "Yes. You sit still and don't play with the gearshift, right?" "Right. I'll look at the maps." "You do that." As Jack got out, Danny opened the bug's glovebox and took out the five battered gas station maps: Colorado, Nebraska, Utah, Wyoming, New Mexico. He loved road maps, loved to trace where the roads went with his finger. As far as he was concerned, new maps were the best part of moving West. Jack went to the drugstore counter, got Danny's candy bar, and newspaper, and a copy of the October Writer's Digest. He gave the girl a five and asked for his change in quarters. With the silver in his hand he walked over to the telephone booth by the keymaking machine and slipped inside. From here he could see Danny in the bug through three sets of glass. The boy's head was bent studiously over his maps. Jack felt a wave of nearly desperate love for the boy. The emotion showed on his face as a stony grimness. He supposed he could have made his obligatory thank-you call to Al from home; he certainly wasn't going to say anything Wendy would object to. It was his pride that said no. These days he almost always listened to what his pride told him to do, because along with his wife and son, six hundred dollars in a checking account, and one weary 1968 Volkswagen, his pride was all that was left. The only thing that was his. Even the checking account was joint. A year ago he had been teaching English in one of the finest prep schools in New England. There had been friends — although not exactly the same ones he'd had before going on the wagon — some laughs, fellow faculty members who admired his deft touch in the classroom and his private dedication to writing. Things had been very good six months ago. All at once there was enough money left over at the end of each two-week pay period to start a little savings account. In his drinking days there had never been a penny left over, even though Al Shockley had stood a great many of the rounds. He and Wendy had begun to talk cautiously about finding a house and making a down payment in a year or so. A farmhouse in the country, take six or eight years to renovate it completely, what the hell, they were young, they had time. Then he had lost his temper. George Hatfield.
The smell of hope had turned to the smell of old leather in Crommert's office, the whole thing like some scene from his own play: the old prints of previous Stovington headmasters on the walls, steel engravings of the school as it had been in 1879, when it was first built, and in 1895, when Vanderbilt money had enabled them to build the field house that still stood at the west end of the soccer field, squat, immense, dressed in ivy. April ivy had been rustling outside Crommert's slit window and the drowsy sound of steam heat came from the radiator. It was no set, he remembered thinking. It was real. His life. How could he have fucked it up so badly? "This is a serious situation, Jack. Terribly serious. The Board has asked me to convey its decision to you." The Board wanted lack's resignation and Jack had given it to them. Under different circumstances, he would have gotten tenure that June. What had followed that interview in Crommert's office had been the darkest, most dreadful night of his life. The wanting, the needing to get drunk had never been so bad. His hands shook. He knocked things over. And he kept wanting to take it out on Wendy and Danny. His temper was like a vicious animal on a frayed leash. He had left the house in terror that he might strike them. Had ended up outside a bar, and the only thing that had kept him from going in was the knowledge that if he did, Wendy would leave him at last, and take Danny with her. He would be dead from the day they left. Instead of going into the bar, where dark shadows sat sampling the tasty waters of oblivion, he had gone to Al Shockley's house. The Board's vote had been six to one. Al had been the one. Now he dialed the operator and she told him that for a dollar eighty-five he could be put in touch with Al two thousand miles away for three minutes. Time is relative, baby, he thought, and stuck in eight quarters. Faintly he could hear the electronic boops and beeps of his connection sniffing its way eastward. Al's father had been Arthur Longley Shockley, the steel baron. He had left his only son, Albert, a fortune and a huge range of investments and directorships and chairs on various boards. One of these had been on the Board of Directors for Stovington Preparatory Academy, the old man's favorite charity. Both Arthur and Albert Shockley were alumni and Al lived in Barre, close enough to take a personal interest in the school's affairs. For several years Al had been Stovington's tennis coach. Jack and Al had become friends in a completely natural and uncoincidental way: at the many school and faculty functions they attended together, they were always the two drunkest people there. Shockley was separated from his wife, and Jack's own marriage was skidding slowly downhill, although he still loved Wendy and had promised sincerely (and frequently) to reform, for her sake and for baby Danny's. The two of them went on from many faculty parties, hitting the bars until they closed, then stopping at some mom 'n' pop) store for a case of beer they would drink parked at the end of some back road. There were mornings when Jack would stumble into their leased house with dawn seeping into the sky and find Wendy and the baby asleep on the couch, Danny always on the inside, a tiny fist curled under the shelf of Wendy's jaw. He would look at them and the self-loathing would back up his throat in a bitter wave, even stronger than the taste of beer
and cigarettes and martinis — martians, as Al called them. Those were the times that his mind would turn thoughtfully and sanely to the gun or the rope or the razor blade. If the bender had occurred on a weeknight, he would sleep for three hours, get up, dress, chew four Excedrins, and go off to teach his nine o'clock American Poets still drunk. Good morning, kids, today the Red-Eyed Wonder is going to tell you about how Longfellow lost his wife in the big fire. He hadn't believed he was an alcoholic, Jack thought as Al's telephone began ringing in his ear. The classes he had missed or taught unshaven, still reeking of last night's martians. Not me, I can stop anytime. The nights he and Wendy had passed in separate beds. Listen, I'm fine. Mashed fenders. Sure I'm okay to drive. The tears she always shed in the bathroom. Cautious looks from his colleagues at any party where alcohol was served, even wine. The slowly dawning realization that he was being talked about. The knowledge that he was producing nothing at his Underwood but balls of mostly blank paper that ended up in the wastebasket. He had been something of a catch for Stovington, a slowly blooming American writer perhaps, and certainly a man well qualified to teach that great mystery, creative writing. He had published two dozen short stories. He was working on a play, and thought there might be a novel incubating in some mental back room. But now he was not producing and his teaching had become erratic. It had finally ended one night less than a month after Jack had broken his son's arm. That, it seemed to him, had ended his marriage. All that remained was for Wendy to gather her will ... if her mother hadn't been such a grade A bitch, he knew, Wendy would have taken a bus back to New Hampshire as soon as Danny had been okay to travel. It was over. It had been a little past midnight. Jack and Al were coming into Barre on U.S. 31, Al behind the wheel of his Jag, shifting fancily on the curves, sometimes crossing the double yellow line. They were both very drunk; the martians had landed that night in force. They came around the last curve before the bridge at seventy, and there was a kid's bike in the road, and then the sharp, hurt squealing as rubber shredded from the Jag's tires, and Jack remembered seeing Al's face looming over the steering wheel like a round white moon. Then the jingling crashing sound as they hit the bike at forty, and it had flown up like a bent and twisted bird, the handlebars striking the windshield, and then it was in the air again, leaving the starred safety glass in front of Jack's bulging eyes. A moment later he heard the final dreadful smash as it landed on the road behind them. Something thumped underneath them as the tires passed over it. The Jag drifted around broadside, Al still jockeying the wheel, and from far away Jack heard himself saying: "Jesus, Al. We ran him down. I felt it." In his ear the phone kept ringing. Come on, Al. Be home. Let me get this over with. Al had brought the car to a smoking halt not more than three feet from a bridge stanchion. Two of the Jag's tires were flat. They had left zigzagging loops of burned rubber for a hundred and thirty feet. They looked at each other for a moment and then ran back in the cold darkness. The bike was completely ruined. One wheel was gone, and looking back over his shoulder Al had seen it lying in the middle of the road, half a dozen spokes sticking up like piano wire. Al had said hesitantly: "I think that's what we ran
over, Tacky-boy." "Then where's the kid?" "Did you see a kid?" Jack frowned. It had all happened with such crazy speed. Coming around the corner. The bike looming in the Jag's headlights. Al yelling something. Then the collision and the long skid. They moved the bike to one shoulder of the road. Al went back to the Jag and put on its four-way flashers. For the next two hours they searched the sides of the road, using a powerful four-cell flashlight. Nothing. Although it was late, several cars passed the beached Jaguar and the two men with the bobbing flashlight. None of them stopped. Jack thought later that some queer providence, bent on giving them both a last chance, had kept the cops away, had kept any of the passersby from calling them. At quarter past two they returned to the Jag, sober but queasy. "If there was nobody riding it, what was it doing in the middle of the road?" Al demanded. "It wasn't parked on the side; it was right in the fucking middle!" Jack could only shake his head. "Your party does not answer," the operator said. "Would you like me to keep on trying?" "A couple more rings, operator. Do you mind?" "No, sir," the voice said dutifully. Come on, Al! Al had hiked across the bridge to the nearest pay phone, called a bachelor friend and told him it would be worth fifty dollars if the friend would get the Jag's snow tires out of the garage and bring them down to the Highway 31 bridge outside of Barre. The friend showed up twenty minutes later, wearing a pair of jeans and his pajama top. He surveyed the scene. "Kill anybody?" he asked. Al was already jacking up the back of the car and Jack was loosening lug nuts. "Providentially, no one," Al said. "I think I'll just head on back anyway. Pay me in the morning." "Fine," Al said without looking up. The two of them had gotten the tires on without incident, and together they drove back to Al Shockley's house. Al put the Jag in the garage and killed the motor. In the dark quiet he said: "I'm off drinking, Jacky-boy. It's all over. I've slain my last martian." And now, sweating in this phonebooth, it occurred to Jack that he had never doubted Al's ability to carry through. He had driven back to his own house in the VW with the radio turned up, and some disco group chanted over and over again, talismanic in the house before dawn: Do it anyway ... you wanta do it . . . do it anyway you want ... No matter how loud he heard the squealing tires, the crash. When he blinked his eyes shut, he saw that single crushed wheel with its broken spokes pointing at the sky. When he got in, Wendy was asleep on the couch. He looked in Danny's room and Danny was in his crib on his back, sleeping deeply, his arm still buried in the cast. In the softly filtered glow from the streetlight outside he could see the dark lines on its plastered whiteness where all the doctors and nurses in
pediatrics had signed it. It was an accident. He fell down the stairs. (o you dirty liar) It was an accident. l lost my temper. (you fucking drunken waste god wiped snot out of his nose and that was you) Listen, hey, come on, please, just an accident -- But the last plea was driven away by the image of that bobbing flashlight as they hunted through the dry late November weeds, looking for the sprawled body that by all good rights should have been there, waiting for the police. It didn't matter that Al had been driving. There had been other nights when he had been driving. He pulled the covers up over Danny, went into their bedroom, and took the Spanish Llama .38 down from the top shelf of the closet. It was in a shoe box. He sat on the bed with it for nearly an hour, looking at it, fascinated by its deadly shine. It was dawn when he put it back in the box and put the box back in the closet. That morning he had called Bruckner, the department head, and told him to please post his classes. He had the flu. Bruckner agreed, with less good grace than was common. Jack Torrance had been extremely susceptible to the flu in the last year. Wendy made him scrambled eggs and coffee. They ate in silence. The only sound came from the back yard, where Danny was gleefully running his trucks across the sand pile with his good hand. She went to do the dishes. Her back to him, she said: "Jack. I've been thinking." "Have you?" He lit a cigarette with trembling hands. No hangover this morning, oddly enough. Only the shakes. He blinked. In the instant's darkness the bike flew up against the windshield, starring the glass. The tires shrieked. The flashlight bobbed. "I want to talk to you about ... about what's best for me and Danny. For you too, maybe. I don't know. We should have talked about it before, I guess." "Would you do something for me?" he asked, looking at the wavering tip of his cigarette. "Would you do me a favor?" "What?" Her voice was dull and neutral. He looked at her back. "Let's talk about it a week from today. If you still want to.., Now she turned to him, her hands lacy with suds, her pretty face pale and disillusioned. "Jack, promises don't work with you. You just go right on with — " She stopped, looking in his eyes, fascinated, suddenly uncertain. "In a week," he said. His voice had lost all its strength and dropped to a whisper. "Please. I'm not promising anything. If you still want to talk then, we'll talk. About anything you want." They looked across the sunny kitchen at each other for a long time, and when she turned back to the dishes without saying anything more, he began to shudder. God, he needed a drink. Just a little pick-me-up to put things in their true perspective -- "Danny said he dreamed you had a car accident," she said abruptly. "He has funny dreams sometimes. He said it this morning, when I got him dressed. Did you, Jack? Did you have an accident?"
"No." By noon the craving for a drink had become a low-grade fever. He went to Al's. "You dry?" Al asked before letting him in. Al looked horrible. "Bone dry. You look like Lon Chaney in Phantom of the Opera." "Come on in." They played two-handed whist all afternoon. They didn't drink. A week passed. He and Wendy didn't speak much. But he knew she was watching, not believing. He drank coffee black and endless cans of Coca-Cola. One night he drank a whole six-pack of Coke and then ran into the bathroom and vomited it up. The level of the bottles in the liquor cabinet did not go down. After his classes he went over to Al Shockley's-she hated Al Shockley worse than she had ever hated anyone-and when he came home she would swear she smelled scotch or gin on his breath, but he would talk lucidly to her before supper, drink coffee, play with Danny after supper, sharing a Coke with him, read him a bedtime story, then sit and correct themes with cup after cup of black coffee by his hand, and she would have to admit to herself that she had been wrong. Weeks passed and the unspoken word retreated further from the back of her lips. Jack sensed its retirement but knew it would never retire completely. Things began to get a little easier. Then George Hatfield. He had lost his temper again, this time stone sober. "Sir, your party still doesn't — " "Hello?" Al's voice, out of breath. "Go ahead," the operator said dourly. "Al, this is Jack Torrance." "Jacky-boy!" Genuine pleasure. "How are you?" "Good. I just called to say thanks. I got the job. It's perfect. If I can't finish that goddam play snowed in all winter, I'll never finish it." "You'll finish." "How are things?" Jack asked hesitantly. "Dry," Al responded. "You?" "As a bone." "Miss it much?" "Every day." Al laughed. "I know that scene. But I don't know how you stayed dry after that Hatfield thing, Jack. That was above and beyond." "I really bitched things up for myself," he said evenly. "Oh, hell. I'll have the Board around by spring. Effinger's already saying they might have been too hasty. And if that play comes to something — " "Yes. Listen, my boy's out in the car, Al. He looks like he might be getting restless — " "Sure. Understand. You have a good winter up there, Jack. Glad to help." "Thanks again, Al." He hung up, closed his eyes in the hot booth, and again saw the crashing bike, the bobbing flashlight. There had been a squib in the paper the next day, no more than a space-filler really, but the owner had not been named. Why it had been out there in the night would always be a mystery to them, and perhaps that was as it should be. He went back out to the car and gave Danny his slightly melted Baby Ruth. "Daddy?"
"What, doc?" Danny hesitated, looking at his father's abstracted face. "When I was waiting for you to come back from that hotel, I had a bad dream. Do you remember? When I fell asleep?" "Um-hm." But it was no good. Daddy's mind was someplace else, not with him. Thinking about the Bad Thing again. (I dreamed that you hurt me, Daddy) "What was the dream, doc?" "Nothing," Danny said as they pulled out into the parking lot. He put the maps back into the glove compartment. "You sure?" "Yes." Jack gave his son a faint, troubled glance; and then his mind turned to his play.
<< 6 >> NIGHT THOUGHTS
Love was over, and her man was sleeping beside her. Her man. She smiled a little in the darkness, his seed still trickling with slow warmth from between her slightly parted thighs, and her smile was both rueful and pleased, because the phrase her man summoned up a hundred feelings. Each feeling examined alone was a bewilderment. Together, in this darkness floating to sleep, they were like a distant blues tune heard in an almost deserted night club, melancholy but pleasing.
Lovin' you baby, is just like rollin' off a log, But if I can't be your woman, I sure ain't goin' to be your dog.
Had that been Billie Holiday? Or someone more prosaic like Peggy Lee? Didn't matter. It was low and torchy, and in the silence of her head it played mellowly, as if issuing from one of those old-fashioned jukeboxes, a Wurlitzer, perhaps, half an hour before closing. Now, moving away from her consciousness, she wondered how many beds she had slept in with this man beside her. They had met in college and had first made love in his apartment ... that had been less than three months after her mother drove her from the house, told her never to come back, that if she wanted to go somewhere she could go to her father since she had been responsible for the divorce. That bad been in 1970. So long ago? A semester later they had moved
in together, had found jobs for the summer, and had kept the apartment when their senior year began. She remembered that bed the most clearly, a big double that sagged in the middle. When they made love, the rusty box spring had counted the beats. That fall she had finally managed to break from her mother. Jack had helped her. She wants to keep beating you, Jack had said. The more times you phone her, the more times you crawl back begging forgiveness, the more she can beat you with your father. It's good for her, Wendy, because she can go on making believe it was your fault. But it's not good for you. They had talked it over again and again in that bed, that year. (Jack sitting up with the covers pooled around his waist, a cigarette burning between his fingers, looking her in the eye — he had a half-humorous, half- scowling way of doing that — telling her: She told you never to come back, right? Never to darken her door again, right? Then why doesn't she hang up the phone when she knows it's you? Why does she only tell you that you can't come in if I'm with you? Because she thinks I might cramp her style a little bit. She wants to keep putting the thumbscrews right to you, baby. You're a fool if you keep letting her do it. She told you never to come back, so why don't you take her at her word? Give it a rest. And at last she'd seen it his way.) It had been Jack's idea to separate for a while — to get perspective on the relationship, he said. She had been afraid he had become interested in someone else. Later she found it wasn't so. They were together again in the spring and he asked her if she had been to see her father. She had jumped as if he'd struck her with a quirt. How did you know that? The Shadow knows. Have you been spying on me? And his impatient laughter, which had always made her feel so awkward — as if she were eight and he was able to see her motivations more clearly than she. You needed time, Wendy. For what? I guess ... to see which one of us you wanted to marry. Jack, what are you saying? I think I'm proposing marriage. The wedding. Her father had been there, her mother had not been. She discovered she could live with that, if she had Jack. Then Danny had come, her fine son. That had been the best year, the best bed. After Danny was born, Jack had gotten her a job typing for half a dozen English Department profs — quizzes, exams, class syllabi, study notes, reading lists. She ended up tvping a novel for one of them, a novel that never got published ... much to Jack's very irreverent and very private glee. The job was good for forty a week, and skyrocketed all the way up to sixty during the two months she spent typing the unsuccessful novel. They had their first car, a five-year-old Buick with a baby seat in the middle. Bright, upwardly mobile young marrieds. Danny forced a reconciliation between her and her mother, a reconciliation that was always tense and never happy, but a reconciliation all the same. When she took Danny to the house, she went without Jack. And she didn't tell Jack that her mother always remade Danny's diapers, frowned over his formula, could always spot the
accusatory first signs of a rash on the baby's bottom or privates. Her mother never said anything overtly, but the message came through anyway: the price she had begun to pay (and maybe always would) for the reconciliation was the feeling that she was an inadequate mother. It was her mother's way of keeping the thumbscrews handy. During the days Wendy would stay home and housewife, feeding Danny his bottles in the sunwashed kitchen of the four-room second-story apartment, playing her records on the battered portable stereo she had had since high school. Jack would come home at three (or at two if he felt he could cut his last class), and while Danny slept he would lead her into the bedroom and fears of inadequacy would be erased. At night while she typed, he would do his writing and his assignments. In those days she sometimes came out of the bedroom where the typewriter was to find both of them asleep on the studio couch, Jack wearing nothing but his underpants, Danny sprawled comfortably on her husband's chest with his thumb in his mouth. She would put Danny in his crib, then read whatever Jack had written that night before waking him up enough to come to bed. The best bed, the best year.
Sun gonna shine in my backyard someday ...
In those days, Jack's drinking had still been well in hand. On Saturday nights a bunch of his fellow students would drop over and there would be a case of beer and discussions in which she seldom took part because her field had been sociology and his was English: arguments over whether Pepys's diaries were literature or history; discussions of Charles Olson's poetry; sometimes the reading of works in progress. Those and a hundred others. No, a thousand. She felt no real urge to take part; it was enough to sit in her rocking chair beside Jack, who sat cross-legged on the floor, one hand holding a beer, the other gently cupping her calf or braceleting her ankle. The competition at UNH had been fierce, and Jack carried an extra burden in his writing. He put in at least an hour at it every night. It was his routine. The Saturday sessions were necessary therapy. They let something out of him that might otherwise have swelled and swelled until he burst. At the end of his grad work he had landed the job at Stovington, mostly on the strength of his stories — four of them published at that time, one of them in Esquire. She remembered that day clearly enough; it would take more than three years to forget it. She had almost thrown the envelope away, thinking it was a subscription offer. Opening it, she had found instead that it was a letter saying that Esquire would like to use Jack's story "Concerning the Black Holes" early the following year. They would pay nine hundred dollars, not on publication but on acceptance. That was nearly half a year's take typing papers and she had flown to the telephone, leaving Danny in his high chair to goggle comically after her, his face lathered with creamed peas and beef puree. Jack had arrived from the university forty-five minutes later, the Buick weighted down with seven friends and a keg of beer. After a ceremonial toast (Wendy also had a glass, although she ordinarily had no taste for beer), Jack had signed the acceptance letter, put it in the return envelope, and went down
the block to drop it in the letter box. When he came back he stood gravely in the door and said, "Veni, vidi, vici." There were cheers and applause. When the keg was empty at eleven that night, Jack and the only two others who were still ambulatory went on to hit a few bars. She had gotten him aside in the downstairs hallway. The other two were already out in the car, drunkenly singing the New Hampshire fight song. Jack was down on one knee, owlishly fumbling with the lacings of his moccasins. "Jack," she said, "you shouldn't. You can't even tie your shoes, let alone drive." He stood up and put his hands calmly on her shoulders. "Tonight I could fly to the moon if I wanted to." "No," she said. "Not for all the Esquire stories in the world." "I'll be home early." But he hadn't been home until four in the morning, stumbling and mumbling his way up the stairs, waking Danny up when he came in. He had tried to soothe the baby and dropped him on the floor. Wendy had rushed out, thinking of what her mother would think if she saw the bruise before she thought of anything else — God help her, God help them both — and then picked Danny up, sat in the rocking chair with him, soothed him. She had been thinking of her mother for most of the five hours Jack had been gone, her mother's prophecy that Jack would never come to anything. Big ideas, her mother had said. Sure. The welfare lines are full of educated fools with big ideas. Did the Esquire story make her mother wrong or right? Winnifred, you're not holding that baby right. Give him to me. And was she not holding her husband right? Why else would he take his joy out of the house? A helpless kind of terror had risen up in her and it never occurred to her that he had gone out for reasons that had nothing to do with her. "Congratulations," she said, rocking Danny — he was almost asleep again. "Maybe you gave him a concussion." "It's just a bruise." He sounded sulky, wanting to be repentant: a little boy. For an instant she hated him. "Maybe," she said tightly. "Maybe not." She heard so much of her mother talking to her departed father in her own voice that she was sickened and afraid. "Like mother like daughter," Jack muttered. "Go to bed!" she cried, her fear coming out sounding like anger. "Go to bed, you're drunk!" "Don't tell me what to do." "Jack ... please, we shouldn't ... it ..." There were no words. "Don't tell me what to do," he repeated sullenly, and then went into the bedroom. She was left alone in the rocking chair with Danny, who was sleeping again. Five minutes later Jack's snores came floating out to the living room. That had been the first night she had slept on the couch. Now she turned restlessly on the bed, already dozing. Her mind, freed of any linear order by encroaching sleep, floated past the first year at Stovington, past the steadily worsening times that had reached low ebb when her husband had broken Danny's arm, to that morning in the breakfast nook. Danny outside playing trucks in the sandpile, his arm still in the cast. Jack sitting at the table, pallid and grizzled, a cigarette jittering between his
fingers. She had decided to ask him for a divorce. She had pondered the question from a hundred different angles, had been pondering it in fact for the six months before the broken arm. She told herself she would have made the decision long ago if it hadn't been for Danny, but not even that was necessarily true. She dreamed on the long nights when Jack was out, and her dreams were always of her mother's face and of her own wedding. (Who giveth this woman? Her father standing in his best suit which was none too good — he was a traveling salesman for a line of canned goods that even then was going broke — and his tired face, how old he looked, how pale: I do.) Even after the accident — if you could call it an accident — she had not been able to bring it all the way out, to admit that her marriage was a lopsided defeat. She had waited, dumbly hoping that a miracle would occur and Jack would see what was happening, not only to him but to her. But there had been no slowdown. A drink before going off to the Academy. Two or three beers with lunch at the Stovington House. Three or four martinis before dinner. Five or six more while grading papers. The weekends were worse. The nights out with Al Shockley were worse still. She had never dreamed there could be so much pain in a life when there was nothing physically wrong. She hurt all the time. How much of it was her fault? That question haunted her. She felt like her mother. Like her father. Sometimes, when she felt like herself she wondered what it would be like for Danny, and she dreaded the day when he grew old enough to lay blame. And she wondered where they would go. She had no doubt her mother would take her in, and no doubt that after a year of watching her diapers remade, Danny's meals recooked and /or redistributed, of coming home to find his clothes changed or his hair cut or the books her mother found unsuitable spirited away to some limbo in the attic ... after half a year of that, she would have a complete nervous breakdown. And her mother would pat her hand and say comfortingly, Although it's not your fault, it's all your own fault. You were never ready. You showed your true colors when you came between your father and me. My father, Danny's father. Mine, his. (Who giveth this woman? I do. Dead of a heart attack six months later.) The night before that morning she had lain awake almost until he came in, thinking, coming to her decision. The divorce was necessary, she told herself. Her mother and father didn't belong in the decision. Neither did her feelings of guilt over their marriage nor her feelings of inadequacy over her own. It was necessary for her son's sake, and for herself, if she was to salvage anything at all from her early adulthood. The handwriting on the wall was brutal but clear. Her husband was a lush. He had a bad temper, one he could no longer keep wholly under control now that he was drinking so heavily and his writing was going so badly. Accidentally or not accidentally, he had broken Danny's arm. He was going to lose his job, if not this year then the year after. Already she had noticed the sympathetic looks from the other faculty wives. She told herself that she had stuck with the messy job of her marriage for as long as she could. Now she would have to leave it. Jack could have full visitation rights, and she would want support from him only until she could find something and get on her feet — and that would have to be fairly rapidly because she didn't know how long Jack would be able to pay support money. She would do it with as little bitterness as possible. But it had
to end. So thinking, she had fallen off into her own thin and unrestful sleep, haunted by the faces of her own mother and father. You're nothing but a home-wrecker, her mother said. Who giveth this, woman? the minister said. I do, her father said. But in the bright and sunny morning she felt the same. Her back to him, her hands plunged in warm dishwater up to the wrists, she had commenced with the unpleasantness. "I want to talk to you about something that might be best for Danny and I. For you too, maybe. We should have talked about it before, I guess." And then he had said an odd thing. She had expected to discover his anger, to provoke the bitterness, the recriminations. She had expected a mad dash for the liquor cabinet. But not this soft, almost toneless reply that was so unlike him. It was almost as though the Jack she had lived with for six years had never come back last night — as if he had been replaced by some unearthly doppelganger that she would never know or be quite sure of. "Would you do something for me? A favor?" "What?" She had to discipline her voice strictly to keep it from trembling. "Let's talk about it in a week. If you still want to" And she had agreed. It remained unspoken between them. During that week he had seen Al Shockley more than ever, but he came home early and there was no liquor on his breath. She imagined she smelled it, but knew it wasn't so. Another week. And another. Divorce went back to committee, unvoted on. What had happened? She still wondered and still had not the slightest idea. The subject was taboo between them. He was like a man who had leaned around a corner and had seen an unexpected monster lying in wait, crouching among the dried bones of its old kills. The liquor remained in the cabinet, but he didn't touch it. She had considered throwing them out a dozen times but in the end always backed away from the idea, as if some unknown charm would be broken by the act. And there was Danny's part in it to consider. If she felt she didn't know her husband, then she was in awe of her child — awe in the strict meaning of that word: a kind of undefined superstitious dread. Dozing lightly, the image of the instant of his birth was presented to her. She was again lying on the delivery table, bathed in sweat, her hair in strings, her feet splayed out in the stirrups (and a little high from the gas they kept giving her whiffs of; at one point she had muttered that she felt like an advertisement for gang rape, and the nurse, an old bird who had assisted at the births of enough children to populate a high school, found that extremely funny) the doctor between her legs, the nurse off to one side, arranging instruments and humming. The sharp, glassy pains had been coming at steadily shortening intervals, and several times she had screamed in spite of her shame. Then the doctor told her quite sternly that she must PUSH, and she did, and then she felt something being taken from her. It was a clear and distinct feeling, one she would never forget-the thing taken. Then the doctor held her son up by the legs-she had seen his tiny sex and known he was a boy immediately- and as the doctor groped for the airmask, she had seen something else, something
so horrible that she found the strength to scream again after she had thought all screams were used up: He has no face! But of course there had been a face, Danny's own sweet face, and the caul that had covered it at birth now resided in a small jar which she had kept, almost shamefully. She did not hold with old superstition, but she had kept the caul nevertheless. She did not hold with wives' tales, but the boy had been unusual from the first. She did not believe in second sight but -- Did Daddy have an accident? I dreamed Daddy had an accident. Something had changed him. She didn't believe it was just her getting ready to ask for a divorce that had done it. Something had happened before that morning. Something that had happened while she slept uneasily. Al Shockley said that nothing had happened, nothing at all, but he had averted his eyes when he said it, and if you believed faculty gossip, Al had also climbed aboard the fabled wagon. Did Daddy have an accident? Maybe a chance collision with fate, surely nothing much more concrete. She had read that day's paper and the next day's with a closer eye than usual, but she saw nothing she could connect with Jack. God help her, she had been looking for a hit-and-run accident or a barroom brawl that had resulted in serious injuries or ... who knew? Who wanted to? But no policeman came to call, either to ask questions or with a warrant empowering him to take paint scrapings from the WV's bumpers. Nothing. Only her husband's one hundred and eighty degree change and her son's sleepy question on waking: Did Daddy have an accident? I dreamed ... She had stuck with Jack more for Danny's sake than she would admit in her waking hours, but now, sleeping lightly, she could admit it: Danny had been Jack's for the asking, almost from the first. Just as she had been her father's, almost from the first. She couldn't remember Danny ever spitting a bottle back on Jack's shirt. Jack could get him to eat after she had given up in disgust, even when Danny was teething and it gave him visible pain to chew. When Danny had a stomachache, she would rock him for an hour before he began to quiet; Jack had only to pick him up, walk twice around the room with him, and Danny would be asleep on lack's shoulder, his thumb securely corked in his mouth. He hadn't minded changing diapers, even those he called the special deliveries. He sat with Danny for hours on end, bouncing him on his lap, playing finger games with him, making faces at him while Danny poked at his nose and then collapsed with the giggles. He made formulas and administered them faultlessly, getting up every last burp afterward. He would take Danny with him in the car to get the paper or a bottle of milk or nails at the hardware store even when their son was still an infant. He had taken Danny to a Stovington- Keene soccer match when Danny was only six months old, and Danny had sat motionlessly on his father's lap through the whole game, wrapped in a blanket, a small Stovington pennant clutched in one chubby fist. He loved his mother but he was his father's boy. And hadn't she felt, time and time again, her son's wordless opposition to the whole idea of divorce? She would be thinking about it in the kitchen, turning it over in her mind as she turned the potatoes for supper over in her hands for the
peeler's blade. And she would turn around to see him sitting cross-legged in a kitchen chair, looking at her with eyes that seemed both frightened and accusatory. Walking with him in the park, he would suddenly seize both her hands and say — almost demand: "Do you love me? Do you love daddy?" And, confused, she would nod or say, "Of course I do, honey." Then he would run to the duck pond, sending them squawking and scared to the other end, flapping their wings in a panic before the small ferocity of his charge, leaving her to stare after him and wonder. There were even times when it seemed that her determination to at least discuss the matter with Jack dissolved, not out of her own weakness, but under the determination of her son's will. I don't believe such things. But in sleep she did believe them, and in sleep, with her husband's seed still drying on her thighs, she felt that the three of them had been permanently welded together — that if their three / oneness was to be destroyed, it would not be destroyed by any of them but from outside. Most of what she believed centered around her love for Jack. She had never stopped loving him, except maybe for that dark period immediately following Danny's "accident." And she loved her son. Most of all she loved them together, walking or riding or only sitting, Jack's large head and Danny's small one poised alertly over the fans of old maid hands, sharing a bottle of Coke, looking at the funnies. She loved having them with her, and she hoped to dear God that this hotel caretaking job Al had gotten for Jack would be the beginning of good times again.
And the wind gonna rise up, baby, and blow my blues away ...
Soft and sweet and mellow, the song came back and lingered, following her down into a deeper sleep where thought ceased and the faces that came in dreams went unremembered.
<< 7 >>
IN ANOTHER BEDROOM
Danny awoke with the booming still loud in his ears, and the drunk, savagely pettish voice crying hoarsely: Come out here and take your medicine! I'll find you! I'll find youl But now the booming was only his racing heart, and the only voice in the night was the faraway sound of a police siren. He lay in bed motionlessly, looking up at the wind-stirred shadows of the
leaves on his bedroom ceiling. They twined sinuously together, making shapes like the vines and creepers in a jungle, like patterns woven into the nap of a thick carpet. He was clad in Doctor Denton pajamas, but between the pajama suit and his skin he had grown a more closely fitting singlet of perspiration. "Tony?" he whispered. "You there?" No answer. He slipped out of bed and padded silently across to the window and looked out on Arapahoe Street, now still and silent. It was two in the morning. There was nothing out there but empty sidewalks drifted with fallen leaves, parked cars, and the long-necked streetlight on the corner across from the Cliff Brice gas station. With its hooded top and motionless stance, the streetlight looked like a monster in a space show. He looked up the street both ways, straining his eyes for Tony's slight, beckoning form, but there was no one there. The wind sighed through the trees, and the fallen leaves rattled up the deserted walks and around the hubcaps of parked cars. It was a faint and sorrowful sound, and the boy thought that he might be the only one in Boulder awake enough to hear it. The only human being, at least. There was no way of knowing what else might be out in the night, slinking hungrily through the shadows, watching and scenting the breeze. I'll find you! I'll find you! "Tony?" he whispered again, but without much hope. Only the wind spoke back, gusting more strongly this time, scattering leaves across the sloping roof below his window. Some of them slipped into the raingutter and came to rest there like tired dancers. Danny ... Danneee ... He started at the sound of that familiar voice and craned out the window, his small hands on the sill. With the sound of Tony's voice the whole night seemed to have come silently and secretly alive, whispering even when the wind quieted again and the leaves were still and the shadows had stopped moving. He thought he saw a darker shadow standing by the bus stop a block down, but it was hard to tell if it was a real thing or an eye-trick. Don't go, Danny . . Then the wind gusted again, making him squint, and the shadow by the bus stop was gone ... if it had ever been there at all. He stood by his window for (a minute? an hour?) some time longer, but there was no more. At last he crept back into his bed and pulled the blankets up and watched the shadows thrown by the alien streetlight turn into a sinuous jungle filled with flesh-eating plants that wanted only to slip around him, squeeze the life out of him, and drag him down into a blackness where one sinister word flashed in red: REDRUM.
P A R T T W O — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — --
Closing Day
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — --
<< 8 >>
A VIEW OF THE OVERLOOK
Mommy was worried. She was afraid the bug wouldn't make it up and down all these mountains and that they would get stranded by the side of the road where somebody might come ripping along and hit them. Danny himself was more sanguine; if Daddy thought the bug would make this one last trip, then probably it would. "We're just about there," Jack said. Wendy brushed her hair back from her temples. "Thank God." She was sitting in the right-hand bucket, a Victoria Holt paperback open but face down in her lap. She was wearing her blue dress, the one Danny thought was her prettiest. It had a sailor collar and made her look very young, like a girl just getting ready to graduate from high school. Daddy kept putting his hand high up on her leg and she kept laughing and brushing it off, saying Get away, fly. Danny was impressed with the mountains. One day Daddy had taken them up in the ones near Boulder, the ones they called the Flatirons, but these were much bigger, and on the tallest of them you could see a fine dusting of snow, which Daddy said was often there year-round. And they were actually in the mountains, no goofing around. Sheer rock faces rose all around them, so high you could barely see their tops even by craning your neck out the window. When they left Boulder, the temperature had been in the high seventies. Now, just after noon, the air up here felt crisp and cold like November back in Vermont and Daddy had the heater going ... not that it worked all that well. They had passed several signs that said FALLING ROCK ZONE (Mommy read each one to him), and although Danny had waited anxiously to see some rock fall, none had. At least not yet. Half an hour ago they had passed another sign that Daddy said was very important. This sign said ENTERING SIDEWINDER PASS, and Daddy said that sign was
as far as the snowplows went in the wintertime. After that the road got too steep. In the winter the road was closed from the little town of Sidewinder, which they had gone through just before they got to that sign, all the way to Buckland, Utah. Now they were passing another sign. "What's that one, Mom?" "That one says SLOWER VEHICLES USE RIGHT LANE. That means us." "The bug will make it," Danny said. "Please, God," Mommy said, and crossed her fingers. Danny looked down at her open-toed sandals and saw that she had crossed her toes as well. He giggled. She smiled back, but he knew that she was still worried. The road wound up and up in a series of slow S curves, and Jack dropped the bug's stick shift from fourth gear to third, then into second. The bug wheezed and protested, and Wendy's eye fixed on the speedometer needle, which sank from forty to thirty to twenty, where it hovered reluctantly. "The fuel pump..." she began timidly. "The fuel pump will go another three miles," Jack said shortly. The rock wall fell away on their right, disclosing a slash valley that seemed to go down forever, lined a dark green with Rocky Mountain pine and spruce. The pines fell away to gray cliffs of rock that dropped for hundreds of feet before smoothing out. She saw a waterfall spilling over one of them, the early afternoon sun sparkling in it like a golden fish snared in a blue net. They were beautiful mountains but they were hard. She did not think they would forgive many mistakes. An unhappy foreboding rose in her throat. Further west in the Sierra Nevada the Donner Party had become snowbound and had resorted to cannibalism to stay alive. The mountains did not forgive many mistakes. With a punch of the clutch and a jerk, Jack shifted down to first gear and they labored upward, the bug's engine thumping gamely. "You know," she said, "I don't think we've seen five cars since we came through Sidewinder. And one of them was the hotel limousine." Jack nodded. "It goes right to Stapleton Airport in Denver. There's already some icy patches up beyond the hotel, Watson says, and they're forecasting more snow for tomorrow up higher. Anybody going through the mountains now wants to be on one of the main roads, just in case. That goddam Ullman better still be up there. I guess he will be." "You're sure the larder is fully stocked?" she asked, still thinking of the Donners. "He said so. He wanted Hallorann to go over it with you. Hallorann's the cook." "Oh," she said faintly, looking at the speedometer. It had dropped from fifteen to ten miles an hour. "There's the top," Jack said, pointing three hundred yards ahead. "There's a scenic turnout and you can see the Overlook from there. I'm going to pull off the road and give the bug a chance to rest." He craned over his shoulder at Danny, who was sitting on a pile of blankets. "What do you think, doc? We might see some deer. Or caribou." "Sure, Dad." The VW labored up and up. The speedometer dropped to just above the five-mile-
an-hour hashmark and was beginning to hitch when Jack pulled off the road ("What's that sign, Mommy?" "SCENIC TURNOUT ," she read dutifully.) and stepped on the emergency brake and let the VW run in neutral. "Come on," he said, and got out. They walked to the guardrail together. "That's it," Jack said, and pointed at eleven o'clock. For Wendy, it was discovering truth in a cliché: her breath was taken away. For a moment she was unable to breathe at all; the view had knocked the wind from her. They were standing near the top of one peak. Across from them — who knew how far? — an even taller mountain reared into the sky, its jagged tip only a silhouette that was now nimbused by the sun, which was beginning its decline. The whole valley floor was spread out below them, the slopes that they had climbed in the laboring bug falling away with such dizzying suddenness that she knew to look down there for too long would bring on nausea and eventual vomiting. The imagination seemed to spring to full life in the clear air, beyond the rein of reason, and to look was to helplessly see one's self plunging down and down and down, sky and slopes changing places in slow cartwheels, the scream drifting from your mouth like a lazy balloon as your hair and your dress billowed out ... She jerked her gaze away from the drop almost by force and followed Jack's finger. She could see the highway clinging to the side of this cathedral spire, switching back on itself but always tending northwest, still climbing but at a more gentle angle. Further up, seemingly set directly into the slope itself, she saw the grimly clinging pines give way to a wide square of green lawn and standing in the middle of it, overlooking all this, the hotel. The Overlook. Seeing it, she found breath and voice again. "Oh, Jack, it's gorgeous!" "Yes, it is," he said. "Ullman says he thinks it's the single most beautiful location in America. I don't care much for him, but I think he might be ... Danny! Danny, are you all right?" She looked around for him and her sudden fear for him blotted out everything else, stupendous or not. She darted toward him. He was holding onto the guardrail and looking up at the hotel, his face a pasty gray color. His eyes had the blank look of someone on the verge of fainting. She knelt beside him and put steadying hands on his shoulders. "Danny, what's — " Jack was beside her. "You okay, doc?" He gave Danny a brisk little shake and his eyes cleared. "I'm okay, Daddy. I'm fine." "What was it, Danny?" she asked. "Were you dizzy, honey?" "No, I was just ... thinking. I'm sorry. I didn't mean to scare you." He looked at his parents, kneeling in front of him, and offered them a small puzzled smile. "Maybe it was the sun. The sun got in my eyes." "We'll get you up to the hotel and give you a drink of water," Daddy said. "Okay." And in the bug, which moved upward more surely on the gentler grade, he kept looking out between them as the road unwound, affording occasional glimpses of the Overlook Hotel, its massive bank of westward-looking windows reflecting
back the sun. It was the place he had seen in the midst of the blizzard, the dark and booming place where some hideously familiar figure sought him down long corridors carpeted with jungle. The place Tony had warned him against. It was here. It was here. Whatever Redrum was, it was here.
<< 9 >> CHECKING IT OUT
Ullman was waiting for them just inside the wide, old-fashioned front doors. He shook hands with Jack and nodded coolly at Wendy, perhaps noticing the way heads turned when she came through into the lobby, her golden hair spilling across the shoulders of the simple navy dress. The hem of the dress stopped a modest two inches above the knee, but you didn't have to see more to know they were good legs. Ullman seemed truly warm toward Danny only, but Wendy had experienced that before. Danny seemed to be a child for people who ordinarily held W. C. Fields' sentiments about children. He bent a little from the waist and offered Danny his hand. Danny shook it formally, without a smile. "My son Danny," Jack said. "And my wife Winnifred." "I'm happy to meet you both," Ullman said. "How old are you, Danny?" "Five, sir." "Sir, yet." Ullman smiled and glanced at Jack. "He's well mannered." "Of course he is," Jack said. "And Mrs. Torrance." He offered the same little bow, and for a bemused instant Wendy thought he would kiss her hand. She half-offered it and he did take it, but only for a moment, clasped in both of his. His hands were small and dry and smooth, and she guessed that he powdered them. The lobby was a bustle of activity. Almost every one of the old-fashioned high-backed chairs was taken. Bellboys shuttled in and out with suitcases and there was a line at the desk, which was dominated by a huge brass cash register. The BankAmericard and Master Charge decals on it seemed jarringly anachronistic. To their right, down toward a pair of tall double doors that were pulled closed and roped off, there was an old-fashioned fireplace now blazing with birch logs. Three nuns sat on a sofa that was drawn up almost to the hearth itself. They were talking and smiling with their bags stacked up to either side, waiting for the check-out line to thin a little. As Wendy watched them they burst into a chord of tinkling, girlish laughter. She felt a smile touch her own lips; not one of them could be under sixty. In the background was the constant hum of conversation, the muted ding! of the silver-plated bell beside the cash register as one of the two clerks on duty struck it, the slightly impatient call of "Front, please!" It brought back
strong, warm memories of her honeymoon in New York with Jack, at the Beekman Tower. For the first time she let herself believe that this might be exactly what the three of them needed: a season together away from the world, a sort of family honeymoon. She smiled affectionately down at Danny, who was goggling around frankly at everything. Another limo, as gray as a banker's vest, had pulled up out front "The last day of the season," Ullman was saying. "Closing day. Always hectic. I had expected you more around three, Mr. Torrance." "I wanted to give the Volks time for a nervous breakdown if it decided to have one," Jack said. "It didn't." "How fortunate," Ullman said. "I'd like to take the three of you on a tour of the place a little later, and of course Dick Hallorann wants to show Mrs. Torrance the Overlook's kitchen. But I'm afraid —" One of the clerks came over and almost tugged his forelock. "Excuse me, Mr. Ullman — " "Well? What is it?" "It's Mrs. Brant," the clerk said uncomfortably. "She refuses to pay her bill with anything but her American Express card. I told her we stopped taking American Express at the end of the season last year, but she won't ..." His eyes shifted to the Torrance family, then back to Ullman. He shrugged. "I'll take care of it." "Thank you, Mr. Ullman." The clerk crossed back to the desk, where a dreadnought of a woman bundled into a long fur coat and what looked like a black feather boa was remonstrating loudly. "I have been coming to the Overlook Hotel since 1955," she was telling the smiling, shrugging clerk. "I continued to come even after my second husband died of a stroke on that tiresome roque court — I told him the sun was too hot that day — and I have never ... I repeat: never ... paid with anything but my American Express credit card. Call the police if you like! Have them drag me away! I will still refuse to pay with anything but my American Express credit card. I repeat: ..." "Excuse me," Mr. Ullman said. They watched him cross the lobby, touch Mrs. Brant's elbow deferentially, and spread his hands and nod when she turned her tirade on him. He listened sympathetically, nodded again, and said something in return. Mrs. Brant smiled triumphantly, turned to the unhappy desk clerk, and said loudly: "Thank God there is one employee of this hotel who hasn't become an utter Philistine!" She allowed Ullman, who barely came to the bulky shoulder of her fur coat, to take her arm and lead her away, presumably to his inner office. "Whooo!" Wendy said, smiling. "There's a dude who earns his money." "But he didn't like that lady," Danny said immediately. "He was just pretending to like her." Jack grinned down at him. "I'm sure that's true, doc. But flattery is the stuff that greases the wheels of the world." "What's flattery?" "Flattery," Wendy told him, "is when your daddy says he likes my new yellow slacks even if he doesn't or when he says I don't need to take off five pounds." "Oh. Is it lying for fun?"
"Something very like that." He had been looking at her closely and now said: "You're pretty, Mommy." He frowned in confusion when they exchanged a glance and then burst into laughter. "Ullman didn't waste much flattery on me," Jack said. "Come on over by the window, you guys. I feel conspicuous standing out here in the middle with my denim jacket on. I honest to God didn't think there'd be anybody much here on closing day. Guess I was wrong." "You look very handsome," she said, and then they laughed again, Wendy putting a hand over her mouth. Danny still didn't understand, but it was okay. They were loving each other. Danny thought this place reminded her of somewhere else (the beak-man place) where she had been happy. He wished he liked it as well as she did, but he kept telling himself over and over that the things Tony showed him didn't always come true. He would be careful. He would watch for something called Redrum. But he would not say anything unless he absolutely had to. Because they were happy, they had been laughing, and there were no bad thoughts. "Look at this view," Jack said. "Oh, it's gorgeous! Danny, look!" But Danny didn't think it was particularly gorgeous. He didn't like heights; they made him dizzy. Beyond the wide front porch, which ran the length of the hotel, a beautifully manicured lawn (there was a putting green on the right) sloped away to a long, rectangular swimming pool. A CLOSED sign stood on a little tripod at one end of the pool; closed was one sign he could read by himself, along with Stop, Exit, Pizza, and a few others. Beyond the pool a graveled path wound off through baby pines and spruces and aspens. Here was a small sign he didn't know: ROQUE. There was an arrow below it. "What's R-O-Q-U-E, Daddy?" "A game," Daddy said. "It's a little bit like croquet, only you play it on a gravel court that has sides like a big billiard table instead of grass. It's a very old game, Danny. Sometimes they have tournaments here." "Do you play it with a croquet mallet?" "Like that," Jack agreed. "Only the handle's a little shorter and the head has two sides. One side is hard rubber and the other side is wood." (Come out, you little shit!) "It's pronounced roke," Daddy was saying. "I'll teach you how to play, if you want." "Maybe," Danny said in an odd colorless little voice that made his parents exchange a puzzled look over his head. "I might not like it, though." "Well if you don't like it, doc, you don't have to play. All right?" "Sure." "Do you like the animals?" Wendy asked. "That's called a topiary." Beyond the path leading to roque there were hedges clipped into the shapes of various animals. Danny, whose eyes were sharp, made out a rabbit, a dog, a horse, a cow, and a trio of bigger ones that looked like frolicking lions. "Those animals were what made Uncle Al think of me for the job," Jack told him. "He knew that when I was in college I used to work for a landscaping company. That's a business that fixes people's lawns and bushes and hedges. I
used to trim a lady's topiary." Wendy put a hand over her mouth and snickered. Looking at her, Jack said, "Yes, I used to trim her topiary at least once a week" "Get away, fly," Wendy said, and snickered again. "Did she have nice hedges, Dad?" Danny asked, and at this they both stifled great bursts of laughter. Wendy laughed so hard that tears streamed down her cheeks and she had to get a Kleenex out of her handbag. "They weren't animals, Danny," Jack said when he had control of himself. "They were playing cards. Spades and hearts and clubs and diamonds. But the hedges grow, you see — " (They creep, Watson had said ... no, not the hedges, the boiler. You have to watch it all the time or you and your fambly will end up on the fuckin moon.) They looked at him, puzzled. The smile had faded off his face. "Dad?" Danny asked. He blinked at them, as if coming back from far away. "They grow, Danny, and lose their shape. So I'll have to give them a haircut once or twice a week until it gets so cold they stop growing for the year." "And a playground, too," Wendy said. "My lucky boy." The playground was beyond the topiary. Two slides, a big swing set with half a dozen swings set at varying heights, a jungle gym, a tunnel made of cement rings, a sandbox, and a playhouse that was an exact replica of the Overlook itself. "Do you like it, Danny?" Wendy asked. "I sure do," he said, hoping he sounded more enthused than he felt. "It's neat." Beyond the playground there was an inconspicuous chain link security fence, beyond that the wide, macadamized drive that led up to the hotel, and beyond that the valley itself, dropping away into the bright blue haze of afternoon. Danny didn't know the word isolation, but if someone had explained it to him he would have seized on it. Far below, lying in the sun like a long black snake that had decided to snooze for a while, was the road that led back through Sidewinder Pass and eventually to Boulder. The road that would be closed all winter long. He felt a little suffocated at the thought, and almost jumped when Daddy dropped his hand on his shoulder. "I'll get you that drink as soon as I can, doc. They're a little busy right now." "Sure, Dad." Mrs. Brant came out of the inner office looking vindicated. A few moments later two bellboys, struggling with eight suitcases between them, followed her as best they could as she strode triumphantly out the door. Danny watched through the window as a man in a gray uniform and a hat like a captain in the Army brought her long silver car around to the door and got out. He tipped his cap to her and ran around to open the trunk. And in one of those flashes that sometimes came, he got a complete thought from her, one that floated above the confused, low-pitched babble of emotions and colors that he usually got in crowded places. (i' d like to get into his pants) Danny's brow wrinkled as he watched the bellboys put her cases into the trunk.
She was looking rather sharply at the man in the gray uniform, who was supervising the loading. Why would she want to get that man's pants? Was she cold, even with that long fur coat on? And if she was that cold, why hadn't she just put on some pants of her own? His mommy wore pants just about all winter. The man in the gray uniform closed the trunk and walked back to help her into the car. Danny watched closely to see if she would say anything about his pants, but she only smiled and gave him a dollar bill — a tip. A moment later she was guiding the big silver car down the driveway. He thought about asking his mother why Mrs. Brant might want the car-man's pants, and decided against it. Sometimes questions could get you in a whole lot of trouble. It had happened to him before. So instead he squeezed in between them on the small sofa they were sharing and watched all the people check out at the desk. He was glad his mommy and daddy were happy and loving each other, but he couldn't help being a little worried. He couldn't help it.
<< 10 >> HALLORANN
The cook didn't conform to Wendy's image of the typical resort hotel kitchen personage at all. To begin with, such a personage was called a chef, nothing so mundane as a cook — cooking was what she did in her apartment kitchen when she threw all the leftovers into a greased Pyrex casserole dish and added noodles. Further, the culinary wizard of such a place as the Overlook, which advertised in the resort section of the New York Sunday Times, should be small, rotund, and pasty-faced (rather like the Pillsbury Dough-Boy); he should have a thin pencil- line mustache like a forties musical comedy star, dark eyes, a French accent, and a detestable personality. Hallorann had the dark eyes and that was all. He was a tall black man with a modest afro that was beginning to powder white. He had a soft southern accent and he laughed a lot, disclosing teeth too white and too even to be anything but 1950-vintage Sears and Roebuck dentures. Her own father had had a pair, which he called Roebuckers, and from time to time he would push them out at her comically at the supper table ... always, Wendy remembered now, when her mother was out in the kitchen getting something else or on the telephone. Danny had stared up at this black giant in blue serge, and then had smiled when Hallorann picked him up easily, set him in the crook of his elbow, and said: "You ain't gonna stay up here all winter." "Yes I am," Danny said with a shy grin. "No, you're gonna come down to St. Pete's with me and learn to cook and go out on the beach every damn evenin watchin for crabs. Right?"
Danny giggled delightedly and shook his head no. Hallorann set him down. "If you're gonna change your mind," Hallorann said, bending over him gravely, "you better do it quick. Thirty minutes from now and I'm in my car. Two and a half hours after that, I'm sitting at Gate 32, Concourse B, Stapleton International Airport, in the mile-high city of Denver, Colorado. Three hours after that, I'm rentin a car at the Miama Airport and on my way to sunny St. Pete's, waiting to get iota my swimtrunks and just laaafin up my sleeve at anybody stuck and caught in the snow. Can you dig it, my boy?" "Yes, sir," Danny said, smiling. Hallorann turned to Jack and Wendy. "Looks like a fine boy there." "We think he'll do," Jack said, and offered his hand. Hallorann took it. "I'm Jack Torrance. My wife Winnifred. Danny you've met." "And a pleasure it was. Ma'am, are you a Winnie or a Freddie?" "I'm a Wendy," she said, smiling. "Okay. That's better than the other two, I think. Right this way. Mr. Ullman wants you to have the tour, the tour you'll get." He shook his bead and said under his breath: "And won't I be glad to see the last of him." Hallorann commenced to tour them around the most immense kitchen Wendy had ever seen in her life. It was sparkling clean. Every surface was coaxed to a high gloss. It was more than just big; it was intimidating. She walked at Hallorann's side while Jack, wholly out of his element, hung back a little with Danny. A long wallboard hung with cutting instruments which went all the way from paring knives to twohanded cleavers hung beside a four-basin sink. There was a breadboard as big as their Boulder apartment's kitchen table. An amazing array of stainless-steel pots and pans hung from floor to ceiling, covering one whole wall. "I think I'll have to leave a trail of breadcrumbs every time I come in," she said. "Don't let it get you down," Hallorann said. "It's big, but it's still only a kitchen. Most of this stuff you'll never even have to touch. Keep it clean, that's all I ask. Here's the stove I'd be using, if I was you. There are three of them in all, but this is the smallest. Smallest, she thought dismally, looking at it There were twelve burners, two regular ovens and a Dutch oven, a heated well on top in which you could simmer sauces or bake beans, a broiler, and a warmer — plus a million dials and temperature gauges. "All gas," Hallorann said. "You've cooked with gas before, Wendy?" "Yes.. " "I love gas," he said, and turned on one of the burners. Blue flame popped into life and he adjusted it down to a faint glow with a delicate touch. "I like to be able to see the flame you're cookin with. You see where all the surface burner switches are?" "Yes." "And the oven dials are all marked. Myself, I favor the middle one because it seems to heat the most even, but you use whichever one you like — or all three, for that matter." "A TV dinner in each one," Wendy said, and laughed weakly. Hallorann roared. "Go right ahead, if you like. I left a list of everything
edible over by the sink. You see it?" "Here it is, Mommy!" Danny brought over two sheets of paper, written closely on both sides. "Good boy," Hallorann said, taking it from him and ruffling his hair. "You sure you don't want to come to Florida with me, my boy? Learn to cook the sweetest shrimp creole this side of paradise?" Danny put his hands over his mouth and giggled and retreated to his father's side. "You three folks could eat up here for a year, I guess," Hallorann said. "We got a cold-pantry, a walk-in freezer, all sorts of vegetable bins, and two refrigerators. Come on and let me show you." For the next ten minutes Hallorann opened bins and doors, disclosing food in such amounts as Wendy had never seen before. The food supplies amazed her but did not reassure her as much as she might have thought: the Donner Party kept recurring to her, not with thoughts of cannibalism (with all this food it would indeed be a long time before they were reduced to such poor rations as each other), but with the reinforced idea that this was indeed a serious business: when snow fell, getting out of here would not be a matter of an hour's drive to Sidewinder but a major operation. They would sit up here in this deserted grand hotel, eating the food that had been left them like creatures in a fairy tale and listening to the bitter wind around their snowbound eaves. In Vermont, when Danny had broken his arm (when Jack broke Danny's arm) she had called the emergency Medix squad, dialing the number from the little card attached to the phone. They had been at the house only ten minutes later. There were other numbers written on that little card. You could have a police car in five minutes and a fire truck in even less time than that, because the fire station was only three blocks away and one block over. There was a man to call if the lights went out, a man to call if the shower stopped up, a man to call if the TV went on the fritz. But what would happen up here if Danny had one of his fainting spells and swallowed his tongue? (oh God what a thought!) What if the place caught on fire? If Jack fell down the elevator shaft and fractured his skull? What if — ? (what if we have a wonderful time now stop it, Winnifred!) Hallorann showed them into the walk-in freezer first, where their breath puffed out like comic strip balloons. In the freezer it was as if winter had already come. Hamburger in big plastic bags, ten pounds in each bag, a dozen bags. Forty whole chickens hanging from a row of hooks in the wood-planked walls. Canned hams stacked up like poker chips, a dozen of them. Below the chickens, ten roasts of beef, ten roasts of pork, and a huge leg of lamb. "You like lamb, doc?" Hallorann asked, grinning. "I love it," Danny said immediately. He had never had it. "I knew you did. There's nothin like two good slices of lamb on a cold night, with some mint jelly on the side. You got the mint jelly here, too. Lamb eases the belly. It's a noncontentious sort of meat." From behind them Jack said curiously: "How did you know we called him doc?"
Hallorann turned around. "Pardon?" "Danny: We call him doc sometimes. Like in the Bugs Bunny cartoons." "Looks sort of like a doc, doesn't be?" He wrinkled his nose at Danny, smacked his lips, and said, "Ehhhh, what's up, doc?" Danny giggled and then Hallorann said something (Sure you don't want to go to Florida, doc?) to him, very clearly. He heard every word. He looked at Hallorann, startled and a little scared. Hallorann winked solemnly and turned back to the food. Wendy looked from the cook's broad, serge-clad back to her son. She had the oddest feeling that something had passed between them, something she could not quite follow. "You got twelve packages of sausage, twelve packages of bacon," Hallorann said. "So much for the pig. In this drawer, twenty pounds of butter." "Real butter?" Jack asked. "The A-number-one." "I don't think I've had real butter since I was a kid back in Berlin, New Hampshire." "Well, you'll eat it up here until oleo seems a treat," Hallorann said, and laughed. "Over in this bin you got your bread — thirty loaves of white, twenty of dark. We try to keep racial balance at the Overlook, don't you know. Now I know fifty loaves won't take you through, but there's plenty of makings and fresh is better than frozen any day of the week. "Down here you got your fish. Brain food, right, doc?" "Is it, Mom?" "If Mr. Hallorann says so, honey." She smiled. Danny wrinkled his nose. "I don't like fish." "You're dead wrong," Hallorann said. "You just never had any fish that liked you. This fish here will like you fine. Five pounds of rainbow trout, ten pounds of turbot, fifteen cans of tuna fish — " "Oh yeah, I like tuna." "and five pounds of the sweetest-tasting sole that ever swam in the sea. My boy, when next spring rolls around, you're gonna thank old ..." He snapped his fingers as if he had forgotten something. "What's my name, now? I guess it just slipped my mind." "Mr. Hallorann," Danny said, grinning. "Dick, to your friends." "That's right! And you bein a friend, you make it Dick." As he led them into the far corner, Jack and Wendy exchanged a puzzled glance, both of them trying to remember if Hallorann had told them his first name. "And this here I put in special," Hallorann said. "Hope you folks enjoy it." "Oh really, you shouldn't have," Wendy said, touched. It was a twenty-pound turkey wrapped in a wide scarlet ribbon with a bow on top. "You got to have your turkey on Thanksgiving, Wendy," Hallorann said gravely. "I believe there's a capon back here somewhere for Christmas. Doubtless you'll stumble on it. Let's come on out of here now before we all catch the peenumonia. Right, doc?" "Right!" There were more wonders in the cold-pantry. A hundred boxes of dried milk (Hallorann advised her gravely to buy fresh milk for the boy in Sidewinder as
long as it was feasible), five twelve-pound bags of sugar, a gallon jug of blackstrap molasses, cereals, glass jugs of rice, macaroni, spaghetti; ranked cans of fruit and fruit salad; a bushel of fresh apples that scented the whole room with autumn; dried raisins, prunes, and apricots ("You got to be regular if you want to be happy," Hallorann said, and pealed laughter at the coldpantry ceiling, where one old-fashioned light globe hung down on an iron chain); a deep bin filled with potatoes; and smaller caches of tomatoes, onions, turnips, squashes, and cabbages. "My word," Wendy said as they came out. But seeing all that fresh food after her thirty-dollar-a-week grocery budget so stunned her that she was unable to say just what her word was. "I'm runnin a bit late," Hallorann said, checking his watch, "so I'll just let you go through the cabinets and the fridges as you get settled in. There's cheeses, canned milk, sweetened condensed milk, yeast, bakin soda, a whole bagful of those Table Talk pies, a few bunches of bananas that ain't even near to ripe yet — " "Stop," she said, holding up a hand and laughing. "I'll never remember it all. It's super. And I promise to leave the place clean." "That's all I ask." He turned to Jack. "Did Mr. Ullman give you the rundown on the rats in his belfry?" Jack grinned. "He said there were possibly some in the attic, and Mr. Watson said there might be some more down in the basement. There must be two tons of paper down there, but I didn't see any shredded, as if they'd been using it to make nests." "That Watson," Hallorann said, shaking his head in mock sorrow. "Ain't he the foulest-talking man you ever ran on?" "He's quite a character," Jack agreed. His own father had been the foulest- talking man Jack had ever run on. "It's sort of a pity," Hallorann said, leading them back toward the wide swinging doors that gave on the Overlook dining room. "There was money in that family, long ago. It was Watson's granddad or great-granddad — I can't remember which — that built this place." "So I was told," Jack said. "What happened?" Wendy asked. "Well, they couldn't make it go," Hallorann said. "Watson will tell you the whole story — twice a day, if you let him. The old man got a bee in his bonnet about the place. He let it drag him down, I guess. He had two boys and one of them was killed in a riding accident on the grounds while the hotel was still a- building. That would have been 1908 or '09. The old man's wife died of the flu, and then it was just the old man and his youngest son. They ended up getting took back on as caretakers in the same hotel the old man had built." "It is sort of a pity," Wendy said. "What happened to him? The old man?" Jack asked. "He plugged his finger into a light socket by mistake and that was the end of him," Hallorann said. "Sometime in the early thirties before the Depression closed this place down for ten years. "Anyway, Jack, I'd appreciate it if you and your wife would keep an eye out for rats in the kitchen, as well. If you should see them ... traps, not
poison." Jack blinked. "Of course. Who'd want to put rat poison in the kitchen?" Hallorann laughed derisively. "Mr. Ullman, that's who. That was his bright idea last fall. I put it to him, I said: `What if we all get up here next May, Mr. Ullman, and I serve the traditional opening night dinner' — which just happens to be salmon in a very nice sauce — 'and everybody gits sick and the doctor comes and says to you, "Ullman, what have you been doing up here? You've got eighty of the richest folks in America suffering from rat poisoning!" "' Jack threw his head back and bellowed laughter. "What did Ullman say?" Hallorann tucked his tongue into his cheek as if feeling for a bit of food in there. "He said: `Get some traps, Hallorann.' " This time they all laughed, even Danny, although he was not completely sure what the joke was, except it had something to do with Mr. Ullman, who didn't know everything after all. The four of them passed through the dining room, empty and silent now, with its fabulous western exposure on the snow-dusted peaks. Each of the white linen tablecloths had been covered with a sheet of tough clear plastic. The rug, now rolled up for the season, stood in one corner like a sentinel on guard duty. Across the wide room was a double set of batwing doors, and over them an old- fashioned sign lettered in gilt script: The Colorado Lounge. Following his gaze, Hallorann said, "If you're a drinkin man, I hope you brought your own supplies. That place is picked clean. Employee's party last night, you know. Every maid and bellhop in the place is goin around with a headache today, me included." "I don't drink," Jack said shortly. They went back to the lobby. It had cleared greatly during the half hour they'd spent in the kitchen. The long main room was beginning to take on the quiet, deserted look that Jack supposed they would become familiar with soon enough. The high-backed chairs were empty. The nuns who had been sitting by the fire were gone, and the fire itself was down to a bed of comfortably glowing coals. Wendy glanced out into the parking lot and saw that all but a dozen cars had disappeared. She found herself wishing they could get back in the VW and go back to Boulder... or anywhere else. Jack was looking around for Ullman, but he wasn't in the lobby. A young maid with her ash-blond hair pinned up on her neck came over. "Your luggage is out on the porch, Dick." "Thank you, Sally." He gave her a peck on the forehead. "You have yourself a good winter. Getting married, I hear." He turned to the Torrances as she strolled away, backside twitching pertly. "I've got to hurry along if I'm going to make that plane. I want to wish you all the best. Know you'll have it." "Thanks," Jack said. "You've been very kind." "I'll take good care of your kitchen," Wendy promised again. "Enjoy Florida." "I always do," Hallorann said. He put his hands on his knees and bent down to Danny. "Last chance, guy. Want to come to Florida?" "I guess not," Danny said, smiling. "Okay. Like to give me a hand out to my car with my bags?" "If my mommy says I can."
"You can," Wendy said, "but you'll have to have that jacket buttoned." She leaned forward to do it but Hallorann was ahead of her, his large brown fingers moving with smooth dexterity. "I'll send him right back in," Hallorann said. "Fine," Wendy said, and followed them to the door. Jack was still looking around for Ullman. The last of the Overlooks guests were checking out at the desk.
<< 11 >> THE SHINING
There were four bags in a pile just outside the door. Three of them were giant, battered old suitcases covered with black imitation alligator hide. The last was an oversized zipper bag with a faded tartan skin. "Guess you can handle that one, can't you?" Hallorann asked him. He picked up two of the big cases in one hand and hoisted the other under his arm. "Sure," Danny said. He got a grip on it with both hands and followed the cook down the porch steps, trying manfully not to grunt and give away how heavy it was. A sharp and cutting fall wind had come up since they had arrived; it whistled across the parking lot, making Danny wince his eyes down to slits as he carried the zipper bag in front of him, bumping on his knees. A few errant aspen leaves rattled and turned across the now mostly deserted asphalt, making Danny think momentarily of that night last week when he had wakened out of his nightmare and had heard — or thought he heard, at least — Tony telling him not to go. Hallorann set his bags down by the trunk of a beige Plymouth Fury. "This ain't much car," he confided to Danny, "just a rental job. My Bessie's on the other end. She's a car. 1950 Cadillac, and does she run sweet? I'll tell the world. I keep her in Florida because she's too old for all this mountain climbing. You need a hand with that?" "No, sir," Danny said. He managed to carry it the last ten or twelve steps without grunting and set it down with a large sigh of relief. "Good boy," Hallorann said. He produced a large key ring from the pocket of his blue serge jacket and unlocked the trunk. As he lifted the bags in he said: "You shine on, boy. Harder than anyone I ever met in my life. And I'm sixty years old this January." "Huh?" "You got a knack," Hallorann said, turning to him. "Me, I've always called it shining. That's what my grandmother called it, too. She had it. We used to sit in the kitchen when I was a boy no older than you and have long talks without even openin our mouths."
"Really?" Hallorann smiled at Danny's openmouthed, almost hungry expression and said, "Come on up and sit in the car with me for a few minutes. Want to talk to you." He slammed the trunk. In the lobby of the Overlook, Wendy Torrance saw her son get into the passenger side of Hallorann's car as the big black cook slid in behind the wheel. A sharp pang of fear struck her and she opened her mouth to tell Jack that Hallorann had not been lying about taking their son to Florida — there was a kidnaping afoot. But they were only sitting there. She could barely see the small silhouette of her son's head, turned attentively toward Hallorann's big one. Even at this distance that small head had a set to it that she recognized — it was the way her son looked when there was something on the TV that particularly fascinated him, or when he and his father were playing old maid or idiot cribbage. Jack, who was still looking around for Ullman, hadn't noticed. Wendy kept silent, watching Hallorann's car nervously, wondering what they could possibly be talking about that would make Danny cock his head that way. In the car Hallorann was saying: "Get you kinda lonely, thinkin you were the only one?" Danny, who had been frightened as well as lonely sometimes, nodded. "Am I the only one you ever met?" he asked. Hallorann laughed and shook his head. "No, child, no. But you shine the hardest." "Are there lots, then?" "No," Hallorann said, "but you do run across them. A lot of folks, they got a little bit of shine to them. They don't even know it. But they always seem to show up with flowers when their wives are feelin blue with the monthlies, they do good on school tests they don't even study for, they got a good idea how people are feelin as soon as they walk into a room. I come across fifty or sixty like that. But maybe only a dozen, countin my gram, that knew they was shinin." "Wow," Danny said, and thought about it. Then: "Do you know Mrs. Brant?" "Her?" Hallorann asked scornfully. "She don't shine. Just sends her supper back two-three times every night." "I know she doesn't," Danny said earnestly. "But do you know the man in the gray uniform that gets the cars?" "Mike? Sure, I know Mike. What about him?" "Mr. Hallorann, why would she want his pants?" "What are you talking about, boy?" "Well, when she was watching him, she was thinking she would sure like to get into his pants and I just wondered why — " But he got no further. Hallorann had thrown his head back, and rich, dark laughter issued from his chest, rolling around in the car like cannonfire. The seat shook with the force of it. Danny smiled, puzzled, and at last the storm subsided by fits and starts. Hallorann produced a large silk handkerchief from his breast pocket like a white flag of surrender and wiped his streaming eyes. "Boy," he said, still snorting a little, "you are gonna know everything there is to know about the human condition before you make ten. I dunno if to envy you or not." "But Mrs. Brant — "
"You never mind her," he said. "And don't go askin your mom, either. You'd only upset her, dig what I'm sayin?" "Yes, sir," Danny said. He dug it perfectly well. He had upset his mother that way in the past. "That Mrs. Brant is just a dirty old woman with an itch, that's all you have to know." He looked at Danny speculatively. "How hard can you hit, doc?" "Huh?" "Give me a blast. Think at me. I want to know if you got as much as I think you do." "What do you want me to think?" "Anything. Just think it hard." "Okay," Danny said. He considered it for a moment, then gathered his concentration and flung it out at Hallorann. He had never done anything precisely like this before, and at the last instant some instinctive part of him rose up and blunted some of the thought's raw force-he didn't want to hurt Mr. Hallorann. Still the thought arrowed out of him with a force he never would have believed. It went like a Nolan Ryan fastball with a little extra on it. (Gee I hope I don't hurt him) And the thought was: (!!! HI, DICK!!!) Hallorann winced and jerked backward on the seat. His teeth came together with a hard click, drawing blood from his lower lip in a thin trickle. His hands flew up involuntarily from his lap to the level of his chest and then settled back again. For a moment his eyelids fluttered limply, with no conscious control, and Danny was frightened. "Mr. Hallorann? Dick? Are you okay?" "I don't know," Hallorann said, and laughed weakly. "I honest to God don't. My God, boy, you're a pistol." "I'm sorry," Danny said, more alarmed. "Should I get my daddy? I'll run and get him." "No, here I come. I'm okay, Danny. You just sit right there. I feel a little scrambled, that's all." "I didn't go as hard as I could," Danny confessed. "I was scared to, at the last minute." "Probably my good luck you did ... my brains would be leakin out my ears." He saw the alarm on Danny's face and smiled. "No harm done. What did it feel like to you?" "Like I was Nolan Ryan throwing a fastball," he replied promptly. "You like baseball, do you?" Hallorann was rubbing his temples gingerly. "Daddy and me like the Angels," Danny said. "The Red Sox in the American League East and the Angels in the West. We saw the Red Sox against Cincinnati in the World Series. I was a lot littler then. And Daddy was ..." Danny's face went dark and troubled. "Was what, Dan?" "I forget," Danny said. He started to put his thumb in his mouth to suck it, but that was a baby trick. He put his hand back in his lap. "Can you tell what your mom and dad are thinking, Danny?" Hallorann was watching him closely.
"Most times, if I want to. But usually I don't try." "Why not?" "Well ..." he paused a moment, troubled. "It would be like peeking into the bedroom and watching while they're doing the thing that makes babies. Do you know that thing?" "I have had acquaintance with it," Hallorann said gravely. "They wouldn't like that. And they wouldn't like me peeking at their thinks. It would be dirty." "I see." "But I know how they're feeling," Danny said. "I can't help that. I know how you're feeling, too. I hurt you. I'm sorry." "It's just a headache. I've had hangovers that were worse. Can you read other people, Danny?" "I can't read yet at all," Danny said, "except a few words. But Daddy's going to teach me this winter. My daddy used to teach reading and writing in a big school. Mostly writing, but he knows reading, too." "I mean, can you tell what anybody is thinking?" Danny thought about it. "I can if it's loud," he said finally. "Like Mrs. Brant and the pants. Or like once, when me and Mommy were in this big store to get me some shoes, there was this big kid looking at radios, and he was thinking about taking one without buying it. Then he'd think, what if I get caught? Then he'd think, I really want
really scared. He went away fast." Hallorann was grinning broadly. "I bet he did. Can you do anything else, Danny? Is it only thoughts and feelings, or is there more?" Cautiously: "Is there more for you?" "Sometimes," Hallorann said. "Not often. Sometimes ... sometimes there are dreams. Do you dream, Danny?" "Sometimes," Danny said, "I dream when I'm awake. After Tony comes." His thumb wanted to go into his mouth again. He had never told anyone but Mommy and Daddy about Tony. He made his thumb-sucking hand go back into his lap. "Who's Tony?" And suddenly Danny had one of those flashes of understanding that frightened him most of all; it was like a sudden glimpse of some incomprehensible machine that might be safe or might be deadly dangerous. He was too young to know which. He was too young to understand. "What's wrong?" he cried. "You're asking me all this because you're worried, aren't you? Why are you worried about me? Why are you worried about us?" Hallorann put his large dark hands on the small boy's shoulders. "Stop," he said. "It's probably nothin. But if it is somethin ... well, you've got a large thing in your head, Danny. You'll have to do a lot of growin yet before you catch up to it, I guess. You got to be brave about it." "But I don't understand things!" Danny burst out. "I do but I don't! People ... they feel things and I feel them, but I don't know what I'm feeling!" He looked down at his lap wretchedly. "I wish I could read. Sometimes Tony shows me
signs and I can hardly read any of them." "Who's Tony?" Hallorann asked again. "Mommy and Daddy call him my `invisible playmate, '" Danny said, reciting the words carefully. "But he's really real. At least, I think he is. Sometimes, when I try real hard to understand things, he comes. He says, 'Danny, I want to show you something.' And it's like I pass out. Only ... there are dreams, like you said." He looked at Hallorann and swallowed. "They used to be nice. But now ... I can't remember the word for dreams that scare you and make you cry." "Nightmares?" Hallorann asked. "Yes. That's right. Nightmares." "About this place? About the Overlook?" Danny looked down at his thumb-sucking hand again. "Yes," he whispered. Then he spoke shrilly, looking up into Hallorann's face: "But I can't tell my daddy, and you can't, either! He has to have this job because it's the only one Uncle Al could get for him and he has to finish his play or he might start doing the Bad Thing again and I know what that is, it's getting drunk, that's what it is, it's when he used to always be drunk and that was a Bad Thing to do!" He stopped, on the verge of tears. "Shh," Hallorann said, and pulled Danny's face against the rough serge of his jacket. It smelled faintly of mothballs. "That's all right, son. And if that thumb likes your mouth, let it go where it wants." But his face was troubled. He said: "What you got, son, I call it shinin on, the Bible calls it having visions, and there's scientists that call it precognition. I've read up on it, son. I've studied on it. They all mean seeing the future. Do you understand that?" Danny nodded against Hallorann's coat. "I remember the strongest shine I ever had that way ... I'm not liable to forget. It was 1955. I was still in the Army then, stationed overseas in West Germany. It was an hour before supper, and I was standin by the sink, givin one of the KPs hell for takin too much of the potato along with the peel. I says, 'Here, lemme show you how that's done.' He held out the potato and the peeler and then the whole kitchen was gone. Bang, just like that. You say you see this guy Tony before ... before you have dreams?" Danny nodded. Hallorann put an arm around him. "With me it's smellin oranges. All that afternoon I'd been smellin them and thinkin nothin of it, because they were on the menu for that night—we had thirty crates of Valencias. Everybody in the damn kitchen was smellin oranges that night. "For a minute it was like I had just passed out. And then I heard an explosion and saw flames. There were people screaming. Sirens. And I heard this hissin noise that could only be steam. Then it seemed like I got a little closer to whatever it was and I saw a railroad car off the tracks and laying on its side with Georgia aced South Carolina Railroad written on it, and I knew like a flash that my brother Carl was on that train and it jumped the tracks and Carl was dead. Just like that. Then it was gone and here's this scared, stupid little KP in front of me, still holdin out that potato and the peeler. He says, 'Are you okay, Sarge?' And I says, `No. My brother's just been killed down in Georgia' And when I finally got my momma on the overseas telephone, she told me how it
was. "But see, boy, I already knew how it was." He shook his head slowly, as if dismissing the memory, and looked down at the wide-eyed boy. "But the thing you got to remember, my boy, is this: Those things don't always come true. I remember just four years ago I had a job cookin at a boys' camp up in Maine on Long Lake. So I am sittin by the boarding gate at Logan Airport in Boston, just waiting to get on my flight, and I start to smell oranges. For the first time in maybe five years. So I say to myself, 'My God, what's comin on this crazy late show now?' and I got down to the bathroom and sat on one of the toilets to be private. I never did black out, but I started to get this feelin, stronger and stronger, that my plane was gonna crash. Then the feeling went away, and the smell of oranges, and I knew it was over. I went back to the Delta Airlines desk and changed my flight to one three hours later. And do you know what happened?" "What?" Danny whispered. "Nothin!" Hallorann said, and laughed. He was relieved to see the boy smile a little, too. "Not one single thing! That old plane landed right on time and without a single bump or bruise. So you see ... sometimes those feelins don't come to anything." "Oh," Danny said. "Or you take the race track. I go a lot, and I usually do pretty well. I stand by the rail when they go by the starting gate, and sometimes I get a little shine about this horse or that one. Usually those feelins help me get real well. I always tell myself that someday I'm gonna get three at once on three long shots and make enough on the trifecta to retire early. It ain't happened yet. But there's plenty of times I've come home from the track on shank's mare instead of in a taxicab with my wallet swollen up. Nobody shines on all the time, except maybe for God up in heaven." "Yes, sir," Danny said, thinking of the time almost a year ago when Tony had showed him a new baby lying in a crib at their house in Stovington. He had been very excited about that, and had waited, knowing that it took time, but there had been no new baby. "Now you listen," Hallorann said, and took both of Danny's hands in his own. "I've had some bad dreams here, and I've had some bad feelins. I've worked here two seasons now and maybe a dozen times I've had ... well, nightmares. And maybe half a dozen times I've thought I've seen things. No, I won't say what. It ain't for a little boy like you. Just nasty things. Once it had something to do with those damn hedges clipped to look like animals. Another time there was a maid, Delores Vickery her name was, and she had a little shine to her, but I don't think she knew it. Mr. Ullman fired her ... do you know what that is, doc?" "Yes, sir," Danny said candidly, "my daddy got fired from his teaching job and that's why we're in Colorado, I guess." "Well, Ullman fired her on account of her saying she'd seen something in one of the rooms where ... well, where a bad thing happened. That was in Room 217, and I want you to promise me you won't go in there, Danny. Not all winter. Steer right clear."
"All right," Danny said. "Did the lady — the maiden — did she ask you to go look?" "Yes, she did. And there was a bad thing there. But ... I don't think it was a bad thing that could hurt anyone, Danny, that's what I'm tryin to say. People who shine can sometimes see things that are gonna happen, and I think sometimes they can see things that did happen. But they're just like pictures in a book. Did you ever see a picture in a book that scared you, Danny?" "Yes," he said, thinking of the story of Bluebeard and the picture where Bluebeard's new wife opens the door and sees all the heads. "But you knew it couldn't hurt you, didn't you?" "Ye — ess..." Danny said, a little dubious. "Well, that's how it is in this hotel. I don't know why, but it seems that all the bad things that ever happened here, there's little pieces of those things still layin around like fingernail clippins or the boogers that somebody nasty just wiped under a chair. I don't know why it should just be here, there's bad goings-on in just about every hotel in the world, I guess, and I've worked in a lot of them and had no trouble. Only here. But Danny, I don't think those things can hurt anybody." He emphasized each word in the sentence with a mild shake of the boy's shoulders. "So if you should see something, in a hallway or a room or outside by those hedges ... just look the other way and when you look back, it'll be gone. Are you diggin me?" "Yes," Danny said. He felt much better, soothed. He got up on his knees, kissed Hallorann's cheek, and gave him a big hard hug. Hallorann hugged him back. When he released the boy he asked: "Your folks, they don't shine, do they?" "No, I don't think so." "I tried them like I did you," Hallorann said. "Your momma jumped the tiniest bit. I think all mothers shine a little, you know, at least until their kids grow up enough to watch out for themselves. Your dad ..." Hallorann paused momentarily. He had probed at the boy's father and he just didn't know. It wasn't like meeting someone who had the shine, or someone who definitely did not. Poking at Danny's father had been ... strange, as if Jack Torrance had something – something that he was hiding. Or something he was holding in so deeply submerged in himself that it was impossible to get to. "I don't think he shines at all," Hallorann finished. "So you don't worry about them. You just take care of you. I don't think there's anything here that can hurt you. So just be cool, okay?" "Okay." "Danny! Hey, doc!" Danny looked around. "That's Mom. She wants me. I have to go." "I know you do," Hallorann said. "You have a good time here, Danny. Best you can, anyway." "I will. Thanks, Mr. Hallorann. I feel a lot better." The smiling thought came in his mind: (Dick, to my friends) (Yes, Dick, okay) Their eyes met, and Dick Hallorann winked. Danny scrambled across the seat of the car and opened the passenger side door. As he was getting out, Hallorann said, "Danny?"
"What?" "If there Is trouble ... you give a call. A big loud holler like the one you gave a few minutes ago. I might hear you even way down in Florida. And if I do, I'll come on the run." "Okay," Danny said, and smiled. "You take care, big boy." "I will." Danny slammed the door and ran across the parking lot toward the porch, where Wendy stood holding her elbows against the chill wind. Hallorann watched, the big grin slowly fading. I don't think there's anything here that can hurt you. I don't think. But what if he was wrong? He had known that this was his last season at the Overlook ever since he had seen that thing in the bathtub of Room 217. It had been worse than any picture in any book, and from here the boy running to his mother looked so small ... I don't think -- His eyes drifted down to the topiary animals. Abruptly he started the car and put it in gear and drove away, trying not to look back. And of course he did, and of course the porch was empty. They had gone back inside. It was as if the Overlook had swallowed them.
<< 12 >> THE GRAND TOUR
"What were you talking about, hon?" Wendy asked him as they went back inside. "Oh, nothing much." "For nothing much it sure was a long talk." He shrugged and Wendy saw Danny's paternity in the gesture; Jack could hardly have done it better himself. She would get no more out of Danny. She felt strong exasperation mixed with an even stronger love: the love was helpless, the exasperation came from a feeling that she was deliberately being excluded. With the two of them around she sometimes felt like an outsider, a bit player who had accidentally wandered back onstage while the main action was taking place. Well, they wouldn't be able to exclude her this winter, her two exasperating males; quarters were going to be a little too close for that. She suddenly realized she was feeling jealous of the closeness between her husband and her son, and felt ashamed. That was too close to the way her own mother might have felt ... too close for comfort. The lobby was now empty except for Ullman and the head desk clerk (they were at the register, cashing up), a couple of maids who had changed to warm slacks
and sweaters, standing by the front door and looking out with their luggage pooled around them, and Watson, the maintenance man. He caught her looking at him and gave her a wink ... a decidedly lecherous one. She looked away hurriedly. Jack was over by the window just outside the restaurant, studying the view. He looked rapt and dreamy. The cash register apparently checked out, because now Ullman ran it shut with an authoritative snap. He initialed the tape and put it in a small zipper case. Wendy silently applauded the head clerk, who looked greatly relieved. Ullman looked like the type of man who might take any shortage out of the head clerk's hide ... without ever spilling a drop of blood. Wendy didn't much care for Ullman or his officious, ostentatiously bustling manner. He was like every boss she'd ever had, male or female. He would be saccharin sweet with the guests, a petty tyrant when he was backstage with the help. But now school was out and the head clerk's pleasure was written large on his face. It was out for everyone but she and Jack and Danny, anyway. "Mr. Torrance," Ullman called peremptorily. "Would you come over here, please?" Jack walked over, nodding to Wendy and Danny that they were to come too. The clerk, who had gone into the back, now came out again wearing an overcoat. "Have a pleasant winter, Mr. Ullman." "I doubt it," Ullman said distantly. "May twelfth, Braddock. Not a day earlier. Not a day later." "Yes, sir." Braddock walked around the desk, his face sober and dignified, as befitted his position, but when his back was entirely to Ullman, he grinned like a schoolboy. He spoke briefly to the two girls still waiting by the door for their ride, and he was followed out by a brief burst of stifled laughter. Now Wendy began to notice the silence of the place. It had fallen over the hotel like a heavy blanket muting everything but the faint pulse of the afternoon wind outside. From where she stood she could look through the inner office, now neat to the point of sterility with its two bare desks and two sets of gray filing cabinets. Beyond that she could see Hallorann's spotless kitchen, the big portholed double doors propped open by rubber wedges. "I thought I would take a few extra minutes and show you through the Hotel," Ullman said, and Wendy reflected that you could always hear that capital H in Ullman's voice. You were supposed to hear it. "I'm sure your husband will get to know the ins and outs of the Overlook quite well, Mrs. Torrance, but you and your son will doubtless keep more to the lobby level and the first floor, where your quarters are." "Doubtless," Wendy murmured demurely, and Jack shot her a private glance. "It's a beautiful place," Ullman said expansively. "I rather enjoy showing it off." I'll bet you do, Wendy thought. "Let's go up to third and work our way down," Ullman said. He sounded positively enthused. "If we're keeping you — " Jack began. "Not at all," Ullman said: "The shop is shut. Tout fins, for this season, at least. And I plan to overnight in Boulder — at the Boulderado, of course. Only decent hotel this side of Denver ... except for the Overlook itself, of
course. This way." They stepped into the elevator together. It was ornately scrolled in copper and brass, but it settled appreciably before Ullman pulled the gate across. Danny stirred a little uneasily, and Ullman smiled down at him. Danny tried to smile back without notable success. "Don't you worry, little man," Ullman said. "Safe as houses." "So was the Titanic," Jack said, looking up at the cut-glass globe in the center of the elevator ceiling. Wendy bit the inside of her cheek to keep the smile away. Ullman was not amused. He slid the inner gate across with a rattle and a bang. "The Titanic made only one voyage, Mr. Torrance. This elevator has made thousands of them since it was installed in 1926." "That's reassuring," Jack said. He ruffed Danny's hair. "The plane ain't gonna crash, doc." Ullman threw the lever over, and for a moment there was nothing but a shuddering beneath their feet and the tortured whine of the motor below them. Wendy had a vision of the four of them being trapped between floors like flies in a bottle and found in the spring ... with little bits and pieces gone ... like the Donner Party ... (Stop it!) The elevator began to rise, with some vibration and clashing and banging from below at first. Then the ride smoothed out. At the third floor Ullman brought them to a bumpy stop, retracted the gate, and opened the door. The elevator car was still six inches below floor level. Danny gazed at the difference in height between the third-floor hall and the elevator floor as if he had just sensed the universe was not as sane as he had been told. Ullman cleared his throat and raised the car a little, brought it to a stop with a jerk (still two inches low), and they all climbed out. With their weight gone the car rebounded almost to floor level, something Wendy did not find reassuring at all. Safe as houses or not, she resolved to take the stairs when she had to go up or down in this place. And under no conditions would she allow the three of them to get into the rickety thing together. "What are you looking at, doc?" Jack inquired humorously. "See any spots there?" "Of course not," Ullman said, nettled. "All the rugs were shampooed just two days ago." Wendy glanced down at the hall runner herself. Pretty, but definitely not anything she would choose for her own home, if the day ever came when she had one. Deep blue pile, it was entwined with what seemed to be a surrealistic jungle scene full of ropes and vines and trees filled with exotic birds. It was hard to tell just what sort of birds, because all the interweaving was done in unshaded black, giving only silhouettes. "Do you like the rug?" Wendy asked Danny. "Yes, Mom," he said colorlessly. They walked down the hall, which was comfortably wide. The wallpaper was silk, a lighter blue to go against the rug. Electric flambeaux stood at ten-foot intervals at a height of about seven feet. Fashioned to look like London gas lamps, the bulbs were masked behind cloudy, cream-hued glass that was bound with
crisscrossing iron strips. "I like those very much," she said. Ullman nodded, pleased. "Mr. Derwent had those installed throughout the Hotel after the war — number Two, I mean. In fact most — although not all — of the third- floor decorating scheme was his idea. This is 300, the Presidential Suite." He twisted his key in the lock of the mahogany double doors and swung them wide. The sitting room's wide western exposure made them all gasp, which had probably been Ullman's intention. He smiled. "Quite a view, isn't it?" "It sure is," Jack said. The window ran nearly the length of the sitting room, and beyond it the sun was poised directly between two sawtoothed peaks, casting golden light across the rock faces and the sugared snow on the high tips. The clouds around and behind this picture-postcard view were also tinted gold, and a sunbeam glinted duskily down into the darkly pooled firs below the timberline. Jack and Wendy were so absorbed in the view that they didn't look down at Danny, who was staring not out the window but at the red-and-white-striped silk wallpaper to the left, where a door opened into an interior bedroom. And his gasp, which had been mingled with theirs, had nothing to do with beauty. Great splashes of dried blood, flecked with tiny bits of grayish-white tissue, clotted the wallpaper. It made Danny feel sick. It was like a crazy picture drawn in blood, a surrealistic etching of a man's face drawn back in terror and pain, the mouth yawning and half the head pulverized -- (So if you should see something ... just look the other way and when you look back, it'll be gone. Are you diggin me?) He deliberately looked out the window, being careful to show no expression on his face, and when his mommy's hand closed over his own he took it, being careful not to squeeze it or give her a signal of any kind. The manager was saying something to his daddy about making sure to shutter that big window so a strong wind wouldn't blow it in. Jack was nodding. Danny looked cautiously back at the wall. The big dried bloodstain was gone. Those little gray-white flecks that had been scattered all through it, they were gone, too. Then Ullman was leading them out. Mommy asked him if he thought the mountains were pretty. Danny said he did, although he didn't really care for the mountains, one way or the other. As Ullman was closing the door behind them, Danny looked back over his shoulder. The bloodstain had returned, only now it was fresh. It was running. Ullman, looking directly at it, went on with his running commentary about the famous men who had stayed here. Danny discovered that he had bitten his lip hard enough to make it bleed, and he had never even felt it. As they walked on down the corridor, he fell a little bit behind the others and wiped the blood away with the back of his hand and thought about (blood) (Did Mr. Hallorann see blood or was it something worse?) (I don't think those things can hurt you.) There was an iron scream behind his lips, but he would not let it out. His mommy and daddy could not see such things; they never had. He would keep quiet. His mommy and daddy were loving each other, and that was a real thing. The other things were just like pictures in a book. Some pictures were scary, but they
couldn't hurt you. They ... couldn't ... hurt you. Mr. Ullman showed them some other rooms on the third floor, leading them through corridors that twisted and turned like a maze. They were all sweets up here, Mr. Ullman said, although Danny didn't see any candy. He showed them some rooms where a lady named Marilyn Monroe once stayed when she was married to a man named Arthur Miller (Danny got a vague understanding that Marilyn and Arthur had gotten a DIVORCE not long after they were in the Overlook Hotel). "Mommy?" "What, honey?" "If they were married, why did they have different names? You and Daddy have the same names." "Yes, but we're not famous, Danny," Jack said. "Famous women keep their same names even after they get married because their names are their bread and butter." "Bread and butter," Danny said, completely mystified. "What Daddy means is that people used to like to go to the movies and see Marilyn Monroe," Wendy said, "but they might not like to go to see Marilyn Miller." "Why not? She'd still be the same lady. Wouldn't everyone know that?" "Yes, but — " She looked at Jack helplessly. "Truman Capote once stayed in this room," Ullman interrupted impatiently. He opened the door. "That was in my time. An awfully nice man. Continental manners." There was nothing remarkable in any of these rooms (except for the absence of sweets, which Mr. Ullman kept calling them), nothing that Danny was afraid of. In fact, there was only one other thing on the third floor that bothered Danny, and he could not have said why. It was the fire extinguisher on the wall just before they turned the corner and went back to the elevator, which stood open and waiting like a mouthful of gold teeth. It was an old-fashioned extinguisher, a flat hose folded back a dozen times upon itself, one end attached to a large red valve, the other ending in a brass nozzle. The folds of the hose were secured with a red steel slat on a hinge. In case of a fire you could knock the steel slat up and out of the way with one hard push and the hose was yours. Danny could see that much; he was good at seeing how things worked. By the time he was two and a half he had been unlocking the protective gate his father had installed at the top of the stairs in the Stovington house. He had seen how the lock worked. His daddy said it was a NACK. Some people had the NACK and some people didn't. This fire extinguisher was a little older than others he had seen — the one in the nursery school, for instance — but that was not so unusual. Nonetheless it filled him with faint unease, curled up there against the light blue wallpaper like a sleeping snake. And he was glad when it was out of sight around the corner. "Of course all the windows have to be shuttered," Mr. Ullman said as they stepped back into the elevator. Once again the car sank queasily beneath their feet. "But I'm particularly concerned about the one in the Presidential Suite. The original bill on that window was four hundred and twenty dollars, and that was over thirty years ago. It would cost eight times that to replace today."
"I'll shutter it," Jack said. They went down to the second floor where there were more rooms and even more twists and turns in the corridor. The light from the windows had begun to fade appreciably now as the sun went behind the mountains. Mr. Ullman showed them one or two rooms and that was all. He walked past 217, the one Dick Hallorann had warned him about, without slowing. Danny looked at the bland number-plate on the door with uneasy fascination. Then down to the first floor. Mr. Ullman didn't show them into any rooms here until they had almost reached the thickly carpeted staircase that led down into the lobby again. "Here are your quarters," he said. "I think you'll find them adequate." They went in. Danny was braced for whatever might be there. There was nothing. Wendy Torrance felt a strong surge of relief. The Presidential Suite, with its cold elegance, had made her feel awkward and clumsy — it was all very well to visit some restored historical building with a bedroom plaque that announced Abraham Lincoln or Franklin D. Roosevelt had slept there, but another thing entirely to imagine you and your husband lying beneath acreages of linen and perhaps making love where the greatest men in the world had once lain (the most powerful, anyway, she amended). But this apartment was simpler, homier, almost inviting. She thought she could abide this place for a season with no great difficulty. "It's very pleasant," she said to Ullman, and heard the gratitude in her voice. Ullman nodded. "Simple but adequate. During the season, this suite quarters the cook and his wife, or the cook and his apprentice." "Mr. Hallorann lived here?" Danny broke in. Mr. Ullman inclined his head to Danny condescendingly. "Quite so. He and Mr. Nevers." He turned back to Jack and Wendy. "This is the sitting room." There were several chairs that looked comfortable but not expensive, a coffee table that had once been expensive but now had a long chip gone from the side, two bookcases (stuffed full of Reader's Digest Condensed Books and Detective Book Club trilogies from the forties, Wendy saw with some amusement), and an anonymous hotel TV that looked much less elegant than the buffed wood consoles in the rooms. "No kitchen, of course," Ullman said, "but there is a dumb-waiter. This apartment is directly over the kitchen." He slid aside a square of paneling and disclosed a wide, squarer tray. He gave it a push and it disappeared, trailing rope behind it. "It's a secret passage!" Danny said excitedly to his mother, momentarily forgetting all fears in favor of that intoxicating shaft behind the wall. "Just like in Abbott and Costello Meet the Monsters!" Mr. Ullman frowned but Wendy smiled indulgently. Danny ran over to the dumb- waiter and peered down the shaft., "This way, please." He opened the door on the far side of the living room. It gave on the bedroom, which was spacious and airy. There were twin beds. Wendy looked at her husband, smiled, shrugged. "No problem," Jack said. "We'll push them together."
Mr. Ullman looked over his shoulder, honestly puzzled. "Beg pardon?" "The beds," Jack said pleasantly. "We can push them together." "Oh, quite," Ullman said, momentarily confused. Then his face cleared and a red flush began to creep up from the collar of his shirt. "Whatever you like." He led them back into the sitting room, where a second door opened on a second bedroom, this one equipped with bunk beds. A radiator clanked in one corner, and the rug on the floor was a hideous embroidery of western sage and cactus — Danny bad already fallen in love with it, Wendy saw. The walls of this smaller room were paneled in real pine. "Think you can stand it in here, doc?" Jack asked. "Sure I can. I'm going to sleep in the top bunk. Okay?" "If that's what you want." "I like the rug, too. Mr. Ullman, why don't you have all the rugs like that?" Mr. Ullman looked for a moment as if he had sunk his teeth into a lemon. Then he smiled and patted Danny's head. "Those are your quarters," he said, "except for the bath, which opens off the main bedroom. It's not a huge apartment, but of course you'll have the rest of the hotel to spread out in. The lobby fireplace is in good working order, or so Watson tells me, and you must feel free to eat in the dining room if the spirit moves you to do so." He spoke in the tone of a man conferring a great favor. "All right," Jack said. "Shall we go down?" Mr. Ullman asked. "Fine," Wendy said. They went downstairs in the elevator, and now the lobby was wholly deserted except for Watson, who was leaning against the main doors in a rawhide jacket, a toothpick between his lips. "I would have thought you'd be miles from here by now," Mr. Ullman said, his voice slightly chill. "Just stuck around to remind Mr. Torrance here about the boiler," Watson said, straightening up. "Keep your good weather eye on her, fella, and she'll be fine. Knock the press down a couple of times a day. She creeps." She creeps, Danny thought, and the words echoed down a long and silent corridor in his mind, a corridor lined with mirrors where people seldom looked. "I will," his daddy said. "You'll be fine," Watson said, and offered Jack his hand. Jack shook it. Watson turned to Wendy and inclined his head. "Ma'am," he said. "I'm pleased," Wendy said, and thought it would sound absurd. It didn't. She had come out here from New England, where she had spent her life, and it seemed to her that in a few short sentences this man Watson, with his fluffy fringe of hair, had epitomized what the West was supposed to be all about. And never mind the lecherous wink earlier. "Young master Torrance," Watson said gravely, and put out his hand. Danny, who had known all about handshaking for almost a year now, put his own hand out gingerly and felt it swallowed up. "You take good care of em, Dan." "Yes, sir." Watson let go of Danny's hand and straightened up fully. He looked at Ullman. "Until next year, I guess," he said, and held his hand out. Ullman touched it bloodlessly. His pinky ring caught the lobby's electric
lights in a baleful sort of wink. "May twelfth, Watson," he said. "Not a day earlier or later." "Yes, sir," Watson said, and Jack could almost read the codicil in Watson's mind: ... you fucking little faggot. "Have a good winter, Mr. Ullman." "Oh, I doubt it," Ullman said remotely. Watson opened one of the two big main doors; the wind whined louder and began to flutter the collar of his jacket. "You folks take care now," he said. It was Danny who answered. "Yes, sir, we will." Watson, whose not-so-distant ancestor had owned this place, slipped humbly through the door. It closed behind him, muffling the wind. Together they watched him clop down the porch's broad front steps in his battered black cowboy boots. Brittle yellow aspen leaves tumbled around his heels as he crossed the lot to his International Harvester pickup and climbed in. Blue smoke jetted from the rusted exhaust pipe as he started it up. The spell of silence held among them as he backed, then pulled out of the parking lot. His truck disappeared over the brow of the hill and then reappeared, smaller, on the main road, heading west. For a moment Danny felt more lonely than he ever had in his life.
<< 13 >> THE FRONT PORCH
The Torrance family stood together on the long front porch of the Overlook Hotel as if posing for a family portrait, Danny in the middle, zippered into last year's fall jacket which was now too small and starting to come out at the elbow, Wendy behind him with one hand on his shoulder, and Jack to his left, his own hand resting lightly on his son's head. Mr. Ullman was a step below them, buttoned into an expensive-looking brown mohair overcoat. The sun was entirely behind the mountains now, edging them with gold fire, making the shadows around things look long and purple. The only three vehicles left in the parking lots were the hotel truck, Ullman's Lincoln Continental, and the battered Torrance VW. "You've got your keys, then," Ullman said to Jack, "and you understand fully about the furnace and the boiler?" Jack nodded, feeling some real sympathy for Ullman. Everything was done for the season, the ball of string was neatly wrapped up until next May 12 — not a day earlier or later — and Ullman, who was responsible for all of it and who referred to the hotel in the unmistakable tones of infatuation, could not help looking for loose ends. "I think everything is well in hand," Jack said. "Good. I'll be in touch." But he still lingered for a moment, as if waiting
for the wind to take a hand and perhaps gust him down to his car. He sighed. "All right. Have a good winter, Mr. Torrance, Mrs. Torrance. You too, Danny." "Thank you, sir," Danny said. "I hope you do, too." "I doubt it," Ullman repeated, and he sounded sad. "The place in Florida is a dump, if the out-and-out truth is to be spoken. Busywork. The Overlook is my real job. Take good care of it for me, Mr. Torrance." "I think it will be here when you get back next spring," Jack said, and a thought flashed through Danny's mind (but will we?) and was gone. "Of course. Of course it will." Ullman looked out toward the playground where the hedge animals were clattering in the wind. Then he nodded once more in a businesslike way. "Good-by, then." He walked quickly and prissily across to his car—a ridiculously big one for such a little man and tucked himself into it. The Lincoln's motor purred into life and the taillights flashed as he pulled out of his parking stall. As the car moved away, Jack could read the small sign at the head of the stall: RESERVED FOR MR. ULLMAN, MGR. "Right," Jack said softly. They watched until the car was out of sight, headed down the eastern slope. When it was gone, the three of them looked at each other for a silent, almost frightened moment. They were alone. Aspen leaves whirled and skittered in aimless packs across the lawn that was now neatly mowed and tended for no guest's eyes. There was no one to see the autumn leaves steal across the grass but the three of them. It gave Jack a curious shrinking feeling, as if his life force had dwindled to a mere spark while the hotel and the grounds had suddenly doubled in size and become sinister, dwarfing them with sullen, inanimate power. Then Wendy said: "Look at you, doc. Your nose is running like a fire hose. Let's get inside." And they did, closing the door firmly behind them against the restless whine of the wind.
P A R T T H R E E — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — --
The Wasps' Nest
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — --
<< 14 >>
UP ON THE ROOF
"Oh you goddam fucking son of a bitch!" Jack Torrance cried these words out in both surprise and agony as he slapped his right hand against his blue chambray workshirt, dislodging the big, slow- moving wasp that had stung him. Then he was scrambling up the roof as fast as he could, looking back over his shoulder to see if the wasp's brothers and sisters were rising from the nest he had uncovered to do battle. If they were, it could be bad; the nest was between him and his ladder, and the trapdoor leading down into the attic was locked from the inside. The drop was seventy feet from the roof to the cement patio between the hotel and the lawn. The clear air above the nest was still and undisturbed. Jack whistled disgustedly between his teeth, sat straddling the peak of the roof, and examined his right index finger. It was swelling already, and he supposed he would have to try and creep past that nest to his ladder so he could go down and put some ice on it. It was October 20. Wendy and Danny had gone down to Sidewinder in the hotel truck (an elderly, rattling Dodge that was still more trustworthy than the VW, which was now wheezing gravely and seemed terminal) to get three gallons of milk and do some Christmas shopping. It was early to shop, but there was no telling when the snow would come to stay. There had already been flurries, and in some places the road down from the Overlook was slick with patch ice. So far the fall had been almost preternaturally beautiful. In the three weeks they had been here, golden day had followed golden day. Crisp, thirty-degree mornings gave way to afternoon temperatures in the low sixties, the perfect temperature for climbing around on the Overlook's gently sloping western roof and doing the shingling. Jack had admitted freely to Wendy that he could have finished the job four days ago, but he felt no real urge to hurry. The view from up here was spectacular, even putting the vista from the Presidential Suite in the shade. More important, the work itself was soothing. On the roof he felt himself healing from the troubled wounds of the last three years. On the roof he felt at peace. Those three years began to seem like a turbulent nightmare. The shingles had been badly rotted, some of them blown entirely away by last winter's storms. He had ripped them all up, yelling "Bombs away!" as he dropped them over the side, not wanting Danny to get hit in case he had wandered over. He had been pulling out bad flashing when the wasp had gotten him. The ironic part was that he warned himself each time he climbed onto the roof to keep an eye out for nests; he had gotten that bug bomb just in case. But this morning the stillness and peace had been so complete that his watchfulness had
lapsed. He had been back in the world of the play he was slowly creating, roughing out whatever scene he would be working on that evening in his head. The play was going very well, and although Wendy had said little, he knew she was pleased. He had been roadblocked on the crucial scene between Denker, the sadistic headmaster, and Gary Benson, his young hero, during the last unhappy six months at Stovington, months when the craving for a drink had been so bad that he could barely concentrate on his in-class lectures, let alone his extracurricular literary ambitions. But in the last twelve evenings, as he actually sat down in front of the office-model Underwood he had borrowed from the main office downstairs, the roadblock had disappeared under his fingers as magically as cotton candy dissolves on the lips. He had come up almost effortlessly with the insights into Denker's character that had always been lacking, and he had rewritten most of the second act accordingly, making it revolve around the new scene. And the progress of the third act, which he had been turning over in his mind when the wasp put an end to cogitation, was coming clearer all the time. He thought he could rough it out in two weeks, and have a clean copy of the whole damned play by New Year's. He had an agent in New York, a tough red-headed woman named Phyllis Sandler who smoked Herbert Tareytons, drank Jim Beam from a paper cup, and thought the literary sun rose and set on Sean O'Casey. She had marketed three of Jack's short stories, including the Esquire piece. He had written her about the play, which was called The Little School, describing the basic conflict between Denker, a gifted student who had failed into becoming the brutal and brutalizing headmaster of a turn-of-the-century New England prep school, and Gary Benson, the student he sees as a younger version of himself. Phyllis had written back expressing interest and admonishing him to read O'Casey before sitting down to it. She had written again earlier that year asking where the hell was the play? He had written back wryly that The Little School had been indefinitely — and perhaps infinitely — delayed between hand and page "in that interesting intellectual Gobi known as the writer's block." Now it looked as if she might actually get the play. Whether or not it was any good or if it would ever see actual production was another matter. And he didn't seem to care a great deal about those things. He felt in a way that the play itself, the whole thing, was the roadblock, a colossal symbol of the bad years at Stovington Prep, the marriage he had almost totaled like a nutty kid behind the wheel of an old jalopy, the monstrous assault on his son, the incident in the parking lot with George Hatfield, an incident he could no longer view as just another sudden and destructive flare of temper. He now thought that part of his drinking problem had stemmed from an unconscious desire to be free of Stovington and the security he felt was stifling whatever creative urge he had. He had stopped drinking, but the need to be free had been just as great. Hence George Hatfield. Now all that remained of those days was the play on the desk in his and Wendy's bedroom, and when it was done and sent off to Phyllis's hole-in-the-wall New York agency, he could turn to other things. Not a novel, he was not ready to stumble into the swamp of another three-year undertaking, but surely more short stories. Perhaps a book of them. Moving warily, he scrambled back down the slope of the roof on his hands and
knees past the line of demarcation where the fresh green Bird shingles gave way to the section of roof he had just finished clearing. He came to the edge on the left of the wasps' nest he had uncovered and moved gingerly toward it, ready to backtrack and bolt down his ladder to the ground if things looked too hot. He leaned over the section of pulled-out flashing and looked in. The nest was in there, tucked into the space between the old flashing and the final roof undercoating of three-by-fives. It was a damn big one. The grayish paper ball looked to Jack as if it might be nearly two feet through the center. Its shape was not perfect because the space between the flashing and the boards was too narrow, but he thought the little buggers had still done a pretty respectable job. The surface of the nest was acrawl with the lumbering, slow- moving insects. They were the big mean ones, not yellow jackets, which are smaller and calmer, but wall wasps. They had been rendered sludgy and stupid by the fall temperatures, but Jack, who knew about wasps from his childhood, counted himself lucky that he had been stung only once. And, he thought, if Ullman had hired the job done in the height of summer, the workman who tore up that particular section of the flashing would have gotten one hell of a surprise. Yes indeedy. When a dozen wall wasps land on you all at once and start stinging your face and hands and arms, stinging your legs right through your pants, it would be entirely possible to forget you were seventy feet up. You might just charge right off the edge of the roof while you were trying to get away from them. All from those little things, the biggest of them only half the length of a pencil stub. He had read someplace — in a Sunday supplement piece or a back-of-the-book newsmagazine article — that 7 per cent of all automobile fatalities go unexplained. No mechanical failure, no excessive speed, no booze, no bad weather. Simply one-car crashes on deserted sections of road, one dead occupant, the driver, unable to explain what had happened to him. The article had included an interview with a state trooper who theorized that many of these so-called "foo crashes" resulted from insects in the car. Wasps, a bee, possibly even a spider or moth. The driver gets panicky, tries to swat it or unroll a window to let it out. Possibly the insect stings him. Maybe the driver just loses control. Either way it's bang! ... all over. And the insect, usually completely unharmed, would buzz merrily out of the smoking wreck, looking for greener pastures. The trooper had been in favor of having pathologists look for insect venom while autopsying such victims, Jack recalled. Now, looking down into the nest, it seemed to him that it could serve as both a workable symbol for what he had been through (and what he had dragged his hostages to fortune through) and an omen for a better future. How else could you explain the things that had happened to him? For he still felt that the whole range of unhappy Stovington experiences had to be looked at with Jack Torrance in the passive mode. He had not done things; things had been done to him. He had known plenty of people on the Stovington faculty, two of them right in the English Department, who were hard drinkers. Zack Tunney was in the habit of picking up a full keg of beer on Saturday afternoon, plonking it in a backyard snowbank overnight, and then killing damn near all of it on Sunday watching football games and old movies. Yet through the week Zack was as sober as a judge — a weak cocktail with lunch was an occasion.
He and Al Shockley had been alcoholics. They had sought each other out like two castoffs who were still social enough to prefer drowning together to doing it alone. The sea had been whole-grain instead of salt, that was all. Looking down at the wasps, as they slowly went about their instinctual business before winter closed down to kill all but their hibernating queen, he would go further. He was still an alcoholic, always would be, perhaps had been since Sophomore Class Night in high school when he had taken his first drink. It had nothing to do with willpower, or the morality of drinking, or the weakness or strength of his own character. There was a broken switch somewhere inside, or a circuit breaker that didn't work, and he had been propelled down the chute willynilly, slowly at first, then accelerating as Stovington applied its pressures on him. A big grease& slide and at the bottom had been a shattered, ownerless bicycle and a son with a broken arm. Jack Torrance in the passive mode. And his temper, same thing. All his life he had been trying unsuccessfully to control it. He could remember himself at seven, spanked by a neighbor lady for playing with matches. He had gone out and hurled a rock at a passing car. His father had seen that, and he had descended on little Jacky, roaring. He had reddened Jack's behind ... and then blacked his eye. And when his father had gone into the house, muttering, to see what was on television, Jack had come upon a stray dog and had kicked it into the gutter. There had been two dozen fights in grammar school, even more of them in high school, warranting two suspensions and uncounted detentions in spite of his good grades. Football had provided a partial safety valve, although he remembered perfectly well that he had spent almost every minute of every game in a state of high piss-off, taking every opposing block and tackle personally. He had been a fine player, making All-Conference in his junior and senior years, and he knew perfectly well that he had his own bad temper to thank ... or to blame. He had not enjoyed football. Every game was a grudge match. And yet, through it all, he hadn't felt like a son of a bitch. He hadn't felt mean. He had always regarded himself as Jack Torrance, a really nice guy who was just going to have to learn how to cope with his temper someday before it got him in trouble. The same way he was going to have to learn how to cope with his drinking. But he had been an emotional alcoholic just as surely as he had been a physical one the two of them were no doubt tied together somewhere deep inside him, where you'd just as soon not look. But it didn't much matter to him if the root causes were interrelated or separate, sociological or psychological or physiological. He had had to deal with the results: the spankings, the beatings from his old man, the suspensions, with trying to explain the school clothes torn in playground brawls, and later the hangovers, the slowly dissolving glue of his marriage, the single bicycle wheel with its bent spokes pointing into the sky, Danny's broken arm. And George Hatfield, of course. He felt that he had unwittingly stuck his hand into The Great Wasps' Nest of Life. As an image it stank. As a cameo of reality, he felt it was serviceable. He had stuck his hand through some rotted flashing in high summer and that hand and his whole arm had been consumed in holy, righteous fire, destroying conscious thought, making the concept of civilized behavior obsolete. Could you be expected to behave as a thinking human being when your hand was being impaled on red-hot darning needles? Could you be expected to live in the love of your
nearest and dearest when the brown, furious cloud rose out of the hole in the fabric of things (the fabric you thought was so innocent) and arrowed straight at you? Could you be held responsible for your own actions as you ran crazily about on the sloping roof seventy feet above the ground, not knowing where you were going, not remembering that your panicky, stumbling feet could lead you crashing and blundering right over the rain gutter and down to your death on the concrete seventy feet below? Jack didn't think you could. When you unwittingly stuck your hand into the wasps' nest, you hadn't made a covenant with the devil to give up your civilized self with its trappings of love and respect and honor. It just happened to you. Passively, with no say, you ceased to be a creature of the mind and became a creature of the nerve endings; from college-educated man to wailing ape in five easy seconds. He thought about George Hatfield. Tall and shaggily blond, George had been an almost insolently beautiful boy. In his tight faded jeans and Stovington sweatshirt with the sleeves carelessly pushed up to the elbows to disclose his tanned forearms, he had reminded Jack of a young Robert Redford, and he doubted that George had much trouble scoring — no more than that young footballplaying devil Jack Torrance had ten years earlier. He could say that he honestly didn't feel jealous of George, or envy him his good looks; in fact, he had almost unconsciously begun to visualize George as the physical incarnation of his play hero, Gary Benson — the perfect foil for the dark, slumped, and aging Denker, who grew to hate Gary so much. But he, Jack Torrance, had never felt that way about George. If he had, he would have known it. He was quite sure of that. George had floated through his classes at Stovington. A soccer and baseball star, his academic program had been fairly undemanding and he had been content with C's and an occasional B in history or botany. He was a fierce field contender but a lackadaisical, amused sort of student in the classrooms. Jack was familiar with the type, more from his own days as a high school and college student than from his teaching experience, which was at second hand. George Hatfield was a jock. He could be a calm, undemanding figure in the classroom, but when the right set of competitive stimuli was applied (like electrodes to the temples of Frankenstein's monster, Jack thought wryly), he could become a juggernaut. In January, George had tried out with two dozen others for the debate team. He had been quite frank with Jack. His father was a corporation lawyer, and he wanted his son to follow in his footsteps. George, who felt no burning call to do anything else, was willing. His grades were not top end, but this was, after all, only prep school and it was still early times. If should be came to must be, his father could pull some strings. George's own athletic ability would open still other doors. But Brian Hatfield thought his son should get on the debate team. It was good practice, and it was something that law-school admissions boards always looked for. So George went out for debate, and in late March Jack cut him from the team. The late winter inter-squad debates had fired George Hatfield's competitive soul. He became a grimly determined debater, prepping his pro or con position fiercely. It didn't matter if the subject was legalization of marijuana, reinstating the death penalty, or the oil-depletion allowance. George became
conversant, and he was just jingoist enough to honestly not care which side he was on—a rare and valuable trait, even in high-level debaters, Jack knew. The souls of a true carpetbagger and a true debater were not far removed from each other; they were both passionately interested in the main chance. So far, so good. But George Hatfield stuttered. This was not a handicap that had even shown up in the classroom, where George was always cool and collected (whether he had done his homework or not), and certainly not on the Stovington playing fields, where talk was not a virtue and they sometimes even threw you out of the game for too much discussion. When George got tightly wound up in a debate, the stutter would come out. The more eager he became, the worse it was. And when he felt he had an opponent dead in his sights, an intellectual sort of buck fever seemed to take place between his speech centers and his mouth and he would freeze solid while the clock ran out. It was painful to watch. "S-S-So I th-th-think we have to say that the fuh-fuh-facts in the c-case Mr. D-D-D-Dorsky cites are ren-ren-rendered obsolete by the ruh-recent duh-duh- decision handed down inin-in ... " The buzzer would go off and George would whirl around to stare furiously at Jack, who sat beside it. George's face at those moments would be flushed, his notes crumpled spasmodically in one hand. Jack had held on to George long after he had cut most of the obvious flat tires, hoping George would work out. He remembered one late afternoon about a week before he had reluctantly dropped the ax. George had stayed after the others had filed out, and then had confronted Jack angrily. "You s-set the timer ahead." Jack looked up from the papers he was putting back into his briefcase. "George, what are you talking about?" "I d-didn't get my whole five mih-minutes. You set it ahead. I was wuh- watching the clock." "The clock and the timer may keep slightly different times, George, but I never touched the dial on the damned thing. Scout's honor." "Yuh-yuh-you did!" The belligerent, I'm-sticking-up-for-my-rights way George was looking at him had sparked Jack's own temper. He had been off the sauce for two months, two months too long, and he was ragged. He made one last effort to hold himself in. "I assure you I did not, George. It's your stutter. Do you have any idea what causes it? You don't stutter in class." "I duh-duh-don't s-s-st-st-stutterl" "Lower your voice." "You w-want to g-get me! You duh-don't w-want me on your g-g-goddam team!" "Lower your voice, I said. Let's discuss this rationally." "F-fuh-fuck th-that!" "George, if you control your stutter, I'd be glad to have you. You're well prepped for every practice and you're good at the background stuff, which means you're rarely surprised. But all that doesn't mean much if you can't control that—" "I've neh-neh-never stuttered!" he cried out. "It's yuh-you! I-i-if suh- someone else had the d-d-deb-debate t-team, I could — "
Jack's temper slipped another notch. "George, you're never going to make much of a lawyer, corporation or otherwise, if you can't control that. Law isn't like soccer. Two hours of practice every night won't cut it. What are you going to do, stand up in front of a board meeting and say, `Nuh-nuh-now, g-gentlemen, about this t-ttort'?" He suddenly flushed, not with anger but with shame at his own cruelty. This was not a man in front of him but a seventeen-year-old boy who was facing the first major defeat of his life, and maybe asking in the only way he could for Jack to help him find a way to cope with it. George gave him a final, furious glance, his lips twisting and bucking as the words bottled up behind them struggled to find their way out. "Yuh-yuh-you s-s-set it ahead! You huh-hate me b-because you nuh-nuh-nuh-know ... you know ... nuh-nuh — " With an articulate cry he had rushed out of the classroom, slamming the door hard enough to make the wire-reinforced glass rattle in its frame. Jack had stood there, feeling, rather than hearing, the echo of George's Adidas in the empty hall. Still in the grip of his temper and his shame at mocking George's stutter, his first thought had been a sick sort of exultation: For the first time in his life George Hatfield had wanted something he could not have. For the first time there was something wrong that all of Daddy's money could not fix. You couldn't bribe a speech center. You couldn't offer a tongue an extra fifty a week and a bonus at Christmas if it would agree to stop flapping like a record needle in a defective groove. Then the exultation was simply buried in shame, and he felt the way he had after he had broken Danny's arm. Dear God, I am not a son of a bitch. Please. That sick happiness at George's retreat was more typical of Denker in the play than of Jack Torrance the playwright. You hate me because you know ... Because he knew what? What could he possibly know about George Hatfield that would make him hate him? That his whole future lay ahead of him? That he looked a little bit like Robert Redford and all conversation among the girls stopped when he did a double gainer from the pool diving board? That he played soccer and baseball with a natural, unlearned grace? Ridiculous. Absolutely absurd. He envied George Hatfield nothing. If the truth was known, he felt worse about George's unfortunate stutter than George himself, because George really would have made an excellent debater. And if Jack had set the timer ahead — and of course he hadn't — it would have been because both he and the other members of the squad were embarrassed for George's struggle, they had agonized over it the way you agonize when the Class Night speaker forgets some of his lines. If he had set the timer ahead, it would have been just to ... to put George out of his misery. But he hadn't set the timer ahead. He was quite sure of it. A week later he had cut him, and that time he had kept his temper. The shouts and the threats had all been on George's side. A week after that he had gone out to the parking lot halfway through practice to get a pile of sourcebooks that he had left in the trunk of the VW and there had been George, down on one knee with his long blond hair swinging in his face, a hunting knife in one hand. He was
sawing through the VW's right front tire. The back tires were already shredded, and the bug sat on the flats like a small, tired dog. Jack had seen red, and remembered very little of the encounter that followed. He remembered a thick growl that seemed to issue from his own throat: "All right, George. If that's how you want it, just come here and take your medicine." He remembered George looking up, startled and fearful. He had said: "Mr. Torrance — " as if to explain how all this was just a mistake, the tires had been flat when he got there and he was just cleaning dirt out of the front treads with the tip of this gutting knife he just happened to have with him and -- Jack had waded in, his fists held up in front of him, and it seemed that he had been grinning. But he wasn't sure of that. The last thing be remembered was George holding up the knife and saying: "You better not come any closer — " And the next thing was Miss Strong, the French teacher, holding Jack's arms, crying, screaming: "Stop it, Jack! Stop it! You're going to kill him!" He had blinked around stupidly. There was the hunting knife, glittering harmlessly on the parking lot asphalt four yards away. There was his Volkswagen, his poor old battered bug, veteran of many wild midnight drunken rides, sitting on three flat shoes. There was a new dent in the right front fender, he saw, and there was something in the middle of the dent that was either red paint or blood. For a moment he had been confused, his thoughts (jesus christ al we hit him after all) of that other night. Then his eyes had shifted to George, George lying dazed and blinking on the asphalt. His debate group had come out and they were huddled together by the door, staring at George. There was blood on his face from a scalp laceration that looked minor, but there was also blood running out of one of George's ears and that probably meant a concussion. When George tried to get up, Jack shook free of Miss Strong and went to him. George cringed. Jack put his hands on George's chest and pushed him back down. "Lie still," he said. "Don't try to move." He turned to Miss Strong, who was staring at them both with horror. "Please go call the school doctor, Miss Strong," be told her. She turned and fled toward the office. He looked at his debate class then, looked them right in the eye because he was in charge again, fully himself, and when he was himself there wasn't a nicer guy in the whole state of Vermont. Surely they knew that. "You can go home now," he told them quietly. "We'll meet again tomorrow." But by the end of that week six of his debaters had dropped out, two of them the class of the act, but of course it didn't matter much because he had been informed by then that he would be dropping out himself. Yet somehow he had stayed off the bottle, and he supposed that was something. And he had not hated George Hatfield. He was sure of that. He had not acted but had been acted upon. You hate me because you know ... But he had known nothing. Nothing. He would swear that before the Throne of Almighty God, just as he would swear that he had set the timer ahead no more than a minute. And not out of hate but out of pity. Two wasps were crawling sluggishly about on the roof beside the hole in the
flashing. He watched them until they spread their aerodynamically unsound but strangely efficient wings and lumbered off into the October sunshine, perchance to sting someone else. God had seen fit to give them stingers and Jack supposed they had to use them on somebody. How long had he been sitting there, looking at that hole with its unpleasant surprise down inside, raking over old coals? He looked at his watch. Almost half an hour. He let himself down to the edge of the roof, dropped one leg over, and felt around until his foot found the top rung of the ladder just below the overhang. He would go down to the equipment shed where he had stored the bug bomb on a high shelf out of Danny's reach. He would get it, come back up, and then they would be the ones surprised. You could be stung, but you could also sting back. He believed that sincerely. Two hours from now the nest would be just so much chewed paper and Danny could have it in his room if he wanted to — Jack had had one in his room when he was just a kid, it had always smelled faintly of woodsmoke and gasoline. He could have it right by the head of his bed. It wouldn't hurt him. "I'm getting better." The sound of his own voice, confident in the silent afternoon, reassured him even though he hadn't meant to speak aloud. He was getting better. It was possible to graduate from passive to active, to take the thing that had once driven you nearly to madness as a neutral prize of no more than occasional academic interest. And if there was a place where the thing could be done, this was surely it. He went down the ladder to get the bug bomb. They would pay. They would pay for stinging him.
<< 15 >>
DOWN IN THE FRONT YARD
Jack had found a huge white-painted wicker chair in the back of the equipment shed two weeks ago, and had dragged it around to the porch over Wendy's objections that it was really the ugliest thing she had ever seen in her whole life. He was sitting in it now, amusing himself with a copy of E. L. Doctorow's Welcome to Hard Times, when his wife and son rattled up the driveway in the hotel truck. Wendy parked it in the turn-around, raced the engine sportily, and then turned it off. The truck's single taillight died. The engine rumbled grumpily with post-ignition and finally stopped. Jack got out of his chair and ambled down to meet them.
"Hi, Dad!" Danny called, and raced up the hill. He had a box in one hand. "Look what Mommy bought me!" Jack picked his son up, swung him around twice, and kissed him heartily on the mouth. "Jack Torrance, the Eugene O'Neill of his generation, the American Shakespeare!" Wendy said, smiling. "Fancy meeting you here, so far up in the mountains." "The common ruck became too much for me, dear lady," he said, and slipped his arms around her. They kissed. "How was your trip?" "Very good. Danny complains that I keep jerking him but I didn't stall the truck once and ... oh, Jack, you finished it!" She was looking at the roof, and Danny followed her gaze. A faint frown touched his face as he looked at the wide swatch of fresh shingles atop the Overlook's west wing, a lighter green than the rest of the roof. Then he looked down at the box in his hand and his face cleared again. At night the pictures Tony had showed him came back to haunt in all their original clarity, but in sunny daylight they were easier to disregard. "Look, Daddy, look!" Jack took the box from his son. It was a model car, one of the Big Daddy Roth caricatures that Danny bad expressed an admiration for in the past. This one was the Violent Violet Volkswagen, and the picture on the box showed a huge purple VW with long '59 Cadillac Coupe de Ville taillights burning up a dirt track. The VW had a sunroof, and poking up through it, clawed hands on the wheel down below, was a gigantic warty monster with popping bloodshot eyes, a maniacal grin, and a gigantic English racing cap turned around backward. Wendy was smiling at him, and Jack winked at her. "That's what I like about you, doc," Jack said, handing the box back. "Your taste runs to the quiet, the sober, the introspective. You are definitely the child of my loins." "Mommy said you'd help me put it together as soon as I could read all of the first Dick and Jane." "That ought to be by the end of the week," Jack said. "What else have you got in that fine-looking truck, ma'am?" "Uh-uh." She grabbed his arm and pulled him back. "No peeking. Some of that stuff is for you. Danny and I will take it in. You can get the milk. It's on the floor of the cab." "That's all I am to you," Jack cried, clapping a hand to his forehead. "Just a dray horse, a common beast of the field. Dray here, dray there, dray everywhere." "Just dray that milk right into the kitchen, mister." "It's too much!" he cried, and threw himself on the ground while Danny stood over him and giggled. "Get up, you ox," Wendy said, and prodded him with the toe of her sneaker. "See?" he said to Danny. "She called me an ox. You're a witness." "Witness, witness!" Danny concurred gleefully, and broadjumped his prone father. Jack sat up. "That reminds me, chumly. I've got something for you. too. On the porch by my ashtray."
"What is it?" "Forgot. Go and see." Jack got up and the two of them stood together, watching Danny charge up the lawn and then take the steps to the porch two by two. He put an arm around Wendy's waist. "You happy, babe?" She looked up at him solemnly. "This is the happiest I've been since we were married." "Is that the truth?" "God's honest." He squeezed her tightly. "I love you." She squeezed him back, touched. Those had never been cheap words with John Torrance; she could count the number of times he had said them to her, both before and after marriage, on both her hands. "I love you too." "Mommy! Mommy!" Danny was on the porch now, shrill and excited. "Come and see! Wow! It's neat!" "What is it?" Wendy asked him as they walked up from the parking lot, hand in hand. "Forgot," Jack said. "Oh, you'll get yours," she said, and elbowed him. "See if you don't." "I was hoping I'd get it tonight," he remarked, and she laughed. A moment later he asked, "Is Danny happy, do you think?" "You ought to know. You're the one who has a long talk with him every night before bed." "That's usually about what he wants to be when he grows up or if Santa Claus is really real. That's getting to be a big thing with him. I think his old buddy Scott let some pennies drop on that one. No, he hasn't said much of anything about the Overlook to me." "Me either," she said. They were climbing the porch steps now. "But he's very quiet a lot of the time. And I think he's lost weight, Jack, I really do." "He's just getting tall." Danny's back was to them. He was examining something on the table by Jack's chair, but Wendy couldn't see what it was. "He's not eating as well, either. He used to be the original steam shovel. Remember last year?" "They taper off," he said vaguely. "I think I read that in Spock. He'll be using two forks again by the time he's seven." They had stopped on the top step. "He's pushing awfully hard on those readers, too," she said. "I know he wants to learn how, to please us ... to please you," she added reluctantly. "To please himself most of all," Jack said. "I haven't been pushing him on that at all. In fact, I do wish he wouldn't go quite so hard." "Would you think I was foolish if I made an appointment for him to have a physical? There's a G.P. in Sidewinder, a young man from what the checker in the market said — " "You're a little nervous about the snow coming, aren't you?" She shrugged. "I suppose. If you think it's foolish — "
"I don't. In fact, you can make appointments for all three of us. We'll get our clean bills of health and then we can sleep easy at night." "I'll make the appointments this afternoon," she said. "Mom! Look, Mommy!" He came running to her with a large gray thing in his hands, and for one comic-horrible moment Wendy thought it was a brain. She saw what it really was and recoiled instinctively. Jack put an arm around her. "It's all right. The tenants who didn't fly away have been shaken out. I used the bug bomb." She looked at the large wasps' nest her son was holding but would not touch it. "Are you sure it's safe?" "Positive. I had one in my room when I was a kid. My dad gave it to me. Want to put it in your room, Danny?" "Yeah! Right now!" He turned around and raced through the double doors. They could hear his muffled, running feet on the main stairs. "There were wasps up there," she said. "Did you get stung?" "Where's my purple heart?" he asked, and displayed his finger. The swelling had already begun to go down, but she ooohed over it satisfyingly and gave it a small, gentle kiss. "Did you pull the stinger out?" "Wasps don't leave them in. That's bees. They have barbed stingers. Wasp stingers are smooth. That's what makes them so dangerous. They can sting again and again." "Jack, are you sure that's safe for him to have?" "I followed the directions on the bomb. The stuff is guaranteed to kill every single bug in two hours' time and then dissipate with no residue." "I hate them," she said. "What... wasps?" "Anything that stings," she said. Her hands went to her elbows and cupped them, her arms crossed over her breasts. "I do too," he said, and hugged her.
<< 16 >> DANNY
Down the hall, in the bedroom, Wendy could hear the typewriter Jack had carried up from downstairs burst into life for thirty seconds, fall silent for a minute or two, and then rattle briefly again. It was like listening to machine- gun fire from an isolated pillbox. The sound was music to her ears; Jack had not been writing so steadily since the second year of their marriage, when he wrote
the story that Esquire had purchased. He said he thought the play would be done by the end of the year, for better or worse, and he would be moving on to something new. He said he didn't care if The Little School stirred any excitement when Phyllis showed it around, didn't care if it sank without a trace, and Wendy believed that, too. The actual act of his writing made her immensely hopeful, not because she expected great things from the play but because her husband seemed to be slowly closing a huge door on a roomful of monsters. He had had his shoulder to that door for a long time now, but at last it was swinging shut. Every key typed closed it a little more. "Look, Dick, look." Danny was hunched over the first of the five battered primers Jack had dug up by culling mercilessly through Boulder's myriad secondhand bookshops. They would take Danny right up to the second-grade reading level, a program she had told Jack she thought was much too ambitious. Their son was intelligent, they knew that, but it would be a mistake to push him too far too fast. Jack had agreed. There would be no pushing involved. But if the kid caught on fast, they would be prepared. And now she wondered if Jack hadn't been right about that, too. Danny, prepared by four years of "Sesame Street" and three years of "Electric Company," seemed to be catching on with almost scary speed. It bothered her. He hunched over the innocuous little books, his crystal radio and balsa glider on the shelf above him, as though his life depended on learning to read. His small face was more tense and paler than she liked in the close and cozy glow of the goosenecked lamp they had put in his room. He was taking it very seriously, both the reading and the workbook pages his father made up for him every afternoon. Picture of an apple and a peach. The word apple written beneath in Jack's large, neatly made printing. Circle the right picture, the one that went with the word. And their son would stare from the word to the pictures, his lips moving, sounding out, actually sweating it out, And with his double-sized red pencil curled into his pudgy right fist, he could now write about three dozen words on his own. His finger traced slowly under the words in the reader. Above them was a picture Wendy half-remembered from her own grammar school days, nineteen years before. A laughing boy with brown curly hair. A girl in a short dress, her hair in blond ringlets one hand holding a jump rope. A prancing dog running after a large red rubber ball. The first-grade trinity. Dick, Jane, and Jip. "See Jip run," Danny read slowly. "Run, Jip, run. Run, run, run." He paused, dropping his finger down a line. "See the ..." He bent closer, his nose almost touching the page now. "See the ..." "Not so close, doc," Wendy said quietly. "You'll hurt your eyes. It's-" "Don't tell me!" he said, sitting up with a jerk. His voice was alarmed. "Don't tell me, Mommy, I can get it!" "All right, honey," she said. "But it's not a big thing. Really it's not." Unheeding, Danny bent forward again. On his face was an expression that might be more commonly seen hovering over a graduate record exam in a college gym somewhere. She liked it less and less. "See the ... buh. Aw. El. El. See the buhaw-el-el? See the buhawl. Ball!" Suddenly triumphant. Fierce. The fierceness in his voice scared her. "See the
ball!" "That's right," she said. "Honey, I think that's enough for tonight." "A couple more pages, Mommy? Please?" "No, doc." She closed the red-bound book firmly. "It's bedtime." "Please?" "Don't tease me about it, Danny. Mommy's tired." "Okay." But he looked longingly at the primer. "Go kiss your father and then wash up. Don't forget to brush." "Yeah." He slouched out, a small boy in pajama bottoms with feet and a large flannel top with a football on the front and NEW ENGLAND PATRIOTS written on the back. Jack's typewriter stopped, and she heard Danny's hearty smack. "Night, Daddy." "Goodnight, doc. How'd you do?" "Okay, I guess. Mommy made me stop." "Mommy was right. It's past eight-thirty. Going to the bathroom?" "Yeah." "Good. There's potatoes growing out of your ears. And onions and carrots and chives and — " Danny's giggle, fading, then cut off by the firm click of the bathroom door. He was private about his bathroom functions, while both she and Jack were pretty much catch-as-catch-can. Another sign — and they were multiplying all the time — that there was another human being in the place, not just a carbon copy of one of them or a combination of both. It made her a little sad. Someday her child would be a stranger to her, and she would be strange to him ... but not as strange as her own mother had become to her. Please don't let it be that way, God. Let him grow up and still love his mother. Jack's typewriter began its irregular bursts again. Still sitting in the chair beside Danny's reading table, she let her eyes wander around her son's room. The glider's wing had been neatly mended. His desk was piled high with picture books, coloring books, old Spiderman comic books with the covers half torn off, Crayolas, and an untidy pile of Lincoln Logs. The VW model was neatly placed above these lesser things, its shrink-wrap still undisturbed. He and his father would be putting it together tomorrow night or the night after if Danny went on at this rate, and never mind the end of the week. His pictures of Pooh and Eyore and Christopher Robin were tacked neatly to the wall, soon enough to be replaced with pin-ups and photographs of dope- smoking rock singers, she supposed. Innocence to experience. Human nature, baby. Grab it and growl. Still it made her sad. Next year he would be in school and she would lose at least half of him, maybe more, to his friends. She and Jack had tried to have another one for a while when things had seemed to be going well at Stovington, but she was on the pill again now. Things were too uncertain. God knew where they would be in nine months. Her eyes fell on the wasps' nest. It held the ultimate high place in Danny's room, resting on a large plastic plate on the table by his bed. She didn't like it, even if it was empty. She wondered vaguely if it might have germs, thought to ask Jack, then decided he would laugh at her. But she would ask the doctor tomorrow, if she could catch him with Jack out of the room. She didn't like the idea of that thing,
constructed from the chewings and saliva of so many alien creatures, lying within a foot of her sleeping son's head. The water in the bathroom was still running, and she got up and went into the big bedroom to make sure everything was okay. Jack didn't look up; he was lost in the world he was making, staring at the typewriter, a filter cigarette clamped in his teeth. She knocked lightly on the closed bathroom room. "You okay, doc? You awake?" No answer. "Danny?" No answer. She tried the door. It was locked. "Danny?" She was worried now. The lack of any sound beneath the steadily running water made her uneasy. "Danny? Open the door, honey." No answer. "Danny!" "Jesus Christ, Wendy, I can't think if you're going to pound on the door all night." "Danny's locked himself in the bathroom and he doesn't answer me!" Jack came around the desk, looking put out. He knocked on the door once, hard. "Open up, Danny. No games." No answer. Jack knocked harder. "Stop fooling, doc. Bedtime's bedtime. Spanking if you don't open up." He's losing his temper, she thought, and was more afraid. He had not touched Danny in anger since that evening two years ago, but at this moment he sounded angry enough to do it. "Danny, honey — " she began. No answer. Only running water. "Danny, if you make me break this lock I can guarantee you you'll spend the night sleeping on your belly," Jack warned. Nothing. "Break it," she said, and suddenly it was hard to talk. "Quick." He raised one foot and brought it down hard against the door to the right of the knob. The lock was a poor thing; it gave immediately and the door shuddered open, banging the tiled bathroom wall and rebounding halfway. "Danny!" she screamed. The water was running full force in the basin. Beside it, a tube of Crest with the cap off. Danny was sitting on the rim of the bathtub across the room, his toothbrush clasped limply in his left hand, a thin foam of toothpaste around his mouth. He was staring, trancelike, into the mirror on the front of the medicine cabinet above the washbasin. The expression on his face was one of drugged horror, and her first thought was that he was having some sort of epileptic seizure, that he might have swallowed his tongue. "Danny!" Danny didn't answer. Guttural sounds came from his throat. Then she was pushed aside so hard that she crashed into the towel rack, and Jack was kneeling in front of the boy. "Danny," he said. "Danny, Danny!" He snapped his fingers in front of Danny's blank eyes.
"Ah-sure," Danny said. "Tournament play. Stroke. Nurrrrr ..." "Danny — " "Roque!" Danny said, his voice suddenly deep, almost manlike. "Roque. Stroke. The roque mallet ... has two sides. Gaaaaaa — " "Oh Jack my God what's wrong with him?" Jack grabbed the boy's elbows and shook him hard. Danny's head rolled limply backward and then snapped forward like a balloon on a stick. "Roque. Stroke. Redrum." Jack shook him again, and Danny's eyes suddenly cleared. His toothbrush fell out of his hand and onto the tiled floor with a small click. "What?" he asked, looking around. He saw his father kneeling before him, Wendy standing by the wall. "What?" Danny asked again, with rising alarm. "W-W-Wuh- What's wr-r-r — " "Don't stutter!" Jack suddenly screamed into his face. Danny cried out in shock, his body going tense, trying to draw away from his father, and then he collapsed into tears. Stricken, Jack pulled him close. "Oh, honey, I'm sorry. I'm sorry, doc. Please. Don't cry. I'm sorry. Everything's okay." The water ran ceaselessly in the basin, and Wendy felt that she had suddenly stepped into some grinding nightmare where time ran backward, backward to the time when her drunken husband had broken her son's arm and had then mewled over him in almost the exact same words. (Oh honey. I'm sorry. I'm sorry, doc. Please. So sorry.) She ran to them both, pried Danny out of Jack's arms somehow (she saw the look of angry reproach on his face but filed it away for later consideration), and lifted him up. She walked him back into the small bedroom, Danny's arms clasped around her neck, Jack trailing them. She sat down on Danny's bed and rocked him back and forth, soothing him with nonsensical words repeated over and over. She looked up at Jack and there was only worry in his eyes now. He raised questioning eyebrows at her. She shook her head faintly. "Danny," she said. "Danny, Danny, Danny. 'S okay, doc. 'S fine." At last Danny was quiet, only faintly trembling in her arms. Yet it was Jack he spoke to first, Jack who was now sitting beside them on the bed, and she felt the old faint pang (It's him first and it's always been him first) of jealousy. Jack had shouted at him, she had comforted him, yet it was to his father that Danny said, "I'm sorry if I was bad." "Nothing to be sorry for, doc." Jack ruffled his hair. "What the hell happened in there?" Danny shook his head slowly, dazedly. "I ... I don't know. Why did you tell me to stop stuttering, Daddy? I don't stutter." "Of course not," Jack said heartily, but Wendy felt a cold finger touch her heart. Jack suddenly looked scared, as if he'd seen something that might just have been a ghost. "Something about the timer..." Danny muttered. "What?" Jack was leaning forward, and Danny flinched in her arms. "Jack, you're scaring him!" she said, and her voice was high, accusatory. It
suddenly came to her that they were all scared. But of what? "I don't know, I don't know," Danny was saying to his father. "What ... what did I say, Daddy?" "Nothing," Jack muttered. He took his handkerchief from his back pocket and wiped his mouth with it. Wendy had a moment of that sickening time-is-running- backward feeling again. It was a gesture she remembered well from his drinking days. "Why did you lock the door, Danny?" she asked gently. "Why did you do that?" "Tony," he said. "Tony told me to." They exchanged a glance over the top of his head. "Did Tony say why, son?" Jack asked quietly. "I was brushing my teeth and I was thinking about my reading," Danny said. "Thinking real hard. And ... and I saw Tony way down in the mirror. He said he had to show me again." "You mean he was behind you?" Wendy asked. "No, he was in the mirror." Danny was very emphatic on this point. "Way down deep. And then I went through the mirror. The next thing I remember Daddy was shaking me and I thought I was being bad again." Jack winced as if struck. "No, doc," he said quietly. "Tony told you to lock the door?" Wendy asked, brushing his hair. "Yes." "And what did he want to show you?" Danny tensed in her arms; it was as if the muscles in his body had turned into something like piano wire. "I don't remember," he said, distraught. "I don't remember. Don't ask me. I ... I don't remember nothing!" "Shh," Wendy said, alarmed. She began to rock him again. "It's all right if you don't remember, hon. Sure it is." At last Danny began to relax again. "Do you want me to stay a little while? Read you a story?" "No. Just the night light." He looked shyly at his father. "Would you stay, Daddy? For a minute?" "Sure, doc." Wendy sighed. "I'll be in the living room, Jack." "Okay." She got up and watched as Danny slid under the covers. He seemed very small. "Are you sure you're okay, Danny?" "I'm okay. Just plug in Snoopy, Mom." "Sure." She plugged in the night light, which showed Snoopy lying fast asleep on top of his doghouse. He had never wanted a night light until they moved into the Overlook, and then he had specifically requested one. She turned off the lamp and the overhead and looked back at them, the small white circle of Danny's face, and Jack's above it. She hesitated a moment (and then I went through the mirror) and then left them quietly. "You sleepy?" Jack asked, brushing Danny's hair off his forehead. "Yeah."
"Want a drink of water?" "No..." There was silence for five minutes. Danny was still beneath his hand. Thinking the boy had dropped off, he was about to get up and leave quietly when Danny said from the brink of sleep: "Roque.” Jack turned back, all zero at the bone. "Danny — ?" "You'd never hurt Mommy, would you, Daddy?" "No." "Or me?" "No." Silence again, spinning out. "Daddy?" "What?" "Tony came and told me about roque." "Did he, doc? What did he say?" "I don't remember much. Except he said it was in innings. Like baseball. Isn't that funny?" "Yes." Jack's heart was thudding dully in his chest. How could the boy possibly know a thing like that? Roque was played by innings, not like baseball but like cricket. "Daddy ... ?" He was almost asleep now. "What?" "What's redrum?" "Red drum? Sounds like something an Indian might take on the warpath." Silence. "Hey, doc?" But Danny was alseep, breathing in long, slow strokes. Jack sat looking down at him for a moment, and a rush of love pushed through him like tidal water. Why had he yelled at the boy like that? It was perfectly normal for him to stutter a little. He had been coming out of a daze or some weird kind of trance, and stuttering was perfectly normal under those circumstances. Perfectly. And he hadn't said timer at all. It had been something else, nonsense, gibberish. How had he known roque was played in innings? Had someone told him? Ullman? Hallorann? He looked down at his hands. They were made into tight, clenched fists of tension (god how i need a drink) and the nails were digging into his palms like tiny brands. Slowly he forced them to open. "I love you, Danny," he whispered. "God knows I do." He left the room. He had lost his temper again, only a little, but enough to make him feel sick and afraid. A drink would blunt that feeling, oh yes. It would blunt that (Something about the timer) and everything else. There was no mistake about those words at all. None. Each had come out clear as a bell. He paused in the hallway, looking back, and
automatically wiped his lips with his handkerchief.
* * *
Their shapes were only dark silhouettes in the glow of the night light. Wendy, wearing only panties, went to his bed and tucked him in again; he had kicked the covers back. Jack stood in the doorway, watching as she put her inner wrist against his forehead. "Is he feverish?" "No." She kissed his cheek. "Thank God you made that appointment," he said as she came back to the doorway. "You think that guy knows his stuff?" "The checker said he was very good. That's all I know." "If there's something wrong, I'm going to send you and him to your mother's, Wendy." "No." "I know," he said, putting an arm around her, "how you feel." "You don't know how I feel at all about her." "Wendy, there's no place else I can send you. You know that." "If you came — " "Without this job we're done," he said simply. "You know that." Her silhouette nodded slowly. She knew it. "When I had that interview with Ullman, I thought he was just blowing off his bazoo. Now I'm not so sure. Maybe I really shouldn't have tried this with you two along. Forty miles from nowhere." "I love you," she said. "And Danny loves you even more, if that's possible. He would have been heartbroken, Jack. He will be, if you send us away." "Don't make it sound that way." "If the doctor says there's something wrong, I'll look for a job in Sidewinder," she said. "If I can't get one in Sidewinder, Danny and I will go to Boulder. I can't go to my mother, Jack. Not on those terms. Don't ask me. I . . . I just can't." "I guess I know that. Cheer up. Maybe it's nothing." "Maybe." "The appointment's at two?" "Yes." "Let's leave the bedroom door open, Wendy." "I want to. But I think he'll sleep through now." But he didn't.
* * *
Boom... boom.. boomboomBOOMBOOM — -- He fled the heavy, crashing, echoing sounds through twisting, mazelike corridors, his bare feet whispering over a deep-pile jungle of blue and black. Each time he heard the roque mallet smash into the wall somewhere behind him he wanted to scream aloud. But he mustn't. He mustn't. A scream would give him away and then
(then REDRUM) (Come out here and take your medicine, you fucking crybaby!) Oh and he could hear the owner of that voice coming, coming for him, charging up the hall like a tiger in an alien blue-black jungle. A man-eater. (Come out here, you little son of a bitch!) If he could get to the stairs going down, if he could get off this third floor, he might be all right. Even the elevator. If he could remember what had been forgotten. But it was dark and in his terror he had lost his orientation. He had turned down one corridor and then another, his heart leaping into his mouth like a hot lump of ice, fearing that each turn would bring him face to face with the human tiger in these halls. The booming was right behind him now, the awful hoarse shouting. The whistle the head of the mallet made cutting through the air (roque ... stroke ... roque ... stroke ... REDRUM) before it crashed into the wall. The soft whisper of feet on the jungle carpet. Panic squirting in his mouth like bitter juice. (You will remember what was forgotten ... but would he? What was it?) He fled around another corner and saw with creeping, utter horror that he was in a cul-de-sac. Locked doors frowned down at him from three sides. The west wing. He was in the west wing and outside he could hear the storm whooping and screaming, seeming to choke on its own dark throat filled with snow. He backed up against the wall, weeping with terror now, his heart racing like the heart of a rabbit caught in a snare. When his back was against the light blue silk wallpaper with the embossed pattern of wavy lines, his legs gave way and he collapsed to the carpet, hands splayed on the jungle of woven vines and creepers, the breath whistling in and out of his throat. Louder. Louder. There was a tiger in the hall, and now the tiger was just around the corner, still crying out in that shrill and petulant and lunatic rage, the roque mallet slamming, because this tiger walked on two legs and it was -- He woke with a sudden indrawn gasp, sitting bolt upright in bed, eyes wide and staring into the darkness, hands crossed in front of his face. Something on one hand. Crawling. Wasps. Three of them. They stung him then, seeming to needle all at once, and that was when all the images broke apart and fell on him in a dark flood and he began to shriek into the dark, the wasps clinging to his left hand, stinging again and again. The lights went on and Daddy was standing there in his shorts, his eyes glaring. Mommy behind him, sleepy and scared. "Get them off me!" Danny screamed. "Oh my God," Jack said. He saw. "Jack, what's wrong with him? What's wrong?" He didn't answer her. He ran to the bed, scooped up Danny's pillow, and slapped Danny's thrashing left hand with it. Again. Again. Wendy saw lumbering, insectile forms rise into the air, droning. "Get a magazine!" he yelled over his shoulder. "Kill them!" "Wasps?" she said, and for a moment she was inside herself, almost detached in her realization. Then her mind crosspatched, and knowledge was connected to
emotion. "Wasps, oh Jesus, Jack, you said — " "Shut the fuck up and kill them!" he roared. "Will you do what I say!" One of them had landed on Danny's reading desk. She took a coloring book off his worktable and slammed it down on the wasp. It left a viscous brown smear. "There's another one on the curtain," he said, and ran out past her with Danny in his arms. He took the boy into their bedroom and put him on Wendy's side of the makeshift double. "Lie right there, Danny. Don't come back until I tell you. Understand?" His face puffed and streaked with tears, Danny nodded. "That's my brave boy." Jack ran back down the hall to the stairs. Behind him he heard the coloring book slap twice, and then his wife screamed in pain. He didn't slow but went down the stairs two by two into the darkened lobby. He went through Ullman's office into the kitchen, slamming the heavy part of his thigh into the corner of Ullman's oak desk, barely feeling it. He slapped on the kitchen overheads and crossed to the sink. The washed dishes from supper were still heaped up in the drainer, where Wendy had left them to drip-dry. He snatched the big Pyrex bowl off the top. A dish fell to the floor and exploded. Ignoring it, he turned and ran back through the office and up the stairs. Wendy was standing outside Danny's door, breathing hard. Her face was the color of table linen. Her eyes were shiny and flat; her hair hung damply against her neck. "I got all of them," she said dully, "but one stung me. Jack, you said they were all dead." She began to cry. He slipped past her without answering and carried the Pyrex bowl over to the nest by Danny's bed. It was still. Nothing there. On the outside, anyway. He slammed the bowl down over the nest. "There," he said. "Come on." They went back into their bedroom. "Where did it get you?" he asked her. "My ... on my wrist." "Let's see." She showed it to him. Just above the bracelet of lines between wrist and palm, there was a small circular hole. The flesh around it was puffing up. "Are you allergic to stings?" he asked. "Think hard! If you are, Danny might be. The fucking little bastards got him five or six times." "No," she said, more calmly. "I ... I just hate them, that's all. Hate them." Danny was sitting on the foot of the bed, holding his left hand and looking at them. His eyes, circled with the white of shock, looked at Jack reproachfully. "Daddy, you said you killed them all. My hand ... it really hurts." "Let's see it, doc ... no, I'm not going to touch it. That would make it hurt even more. Just hold it out." He did and Wendy moaned. "Oh Danny ... oh, your poor hand!" Later the doctor would count eleven separate stings. Now all they saw was a dotting of small holes, as if his palm and fingers had been sprinkled with grains of red pepper. The swelling was bad. His hand had begun to look like one of those cartoon images where Bugs Bunny or Daffy Duck had just slammed himself
with a hammer. "Wendy, go get that spray stuff in the bathroom," he said. She went after it, and he sat down next to Danny and slipped an arm around his shoulders. "After we spray your hand, I want to take some Polaroids of it, doc. Then you sleep the rest of the night with us, Tay?" "Sure," Danny said. "But why are you going to take pictures?" "So maybe we can sue the ass out of some people." Wendy came back with a spray tube in the shape of a chemical fire extinguisher. "This won't hurt, honey," she said, taking off the cap. Danny held out his hand and she sprayed both sides until it gleamed. He let out a long, shuddery sigh. "Does it smart?" she asked. "No. Feels better." "Now these. Crunch them up." She held out five orangeflavored baby aspirin. Danny took them and popped them into his mouth one by one. "Isn't that a lot of aspirin?" Jack asked. "It's a lot of stings," she snapped at him angrily. "You go and get rid of that nest, John Torrance. Right now." "Just a minute." He went to the dresser and took his Polaroid Square Shooter out of the top drawer. He rummaged deeper and found some flashcubes. "Jack, what are you doing?" she asked, a little hysterically. "He's gonna take some pictures of my hand," Danny said gravely, "and then we're gonna sue the ass out of some people. Right, Dad?" "Right," Jack said grimly. He had found the flash attachment, and he jabbed it onto the camera. "Hold it out, son. I figure about five thousand dollars a sting." "What are you talking about?" Wendy nearly screamed. "I'll tell you what," he said. "I followed the directions on that fucking bug bomb. We're going to sue them. The damn thing was defective. Had to have been. How else can you explain this?" "Oh," she said in a small voice. He took four pictures, pulling out each covered print for Wendy to time on the small locket watch she wore around her neck. Danny, fascinated with the idea that his stung hand might be worth thousands and thousands of dollars, began to lose some of his fright and take an active interest. The hand throbbed dully, and he had a small headache. When Jack had put the camera away and spread the prints out on top of the dresser to dry, Wendy said: "Should we take him to the doctor tonight?" "Not unless he's really in pain," Jack said. "If a person has a strong allergy to wasp venom, it hits within thirty seconds." "Hits? What do you — " "A coma. Or convulsions." "Oh. Oh my Jesus." She cupped her hands over her elbows and hugged herself, looking pale and wan. "How do you feel, son? Think you could sleep?"
Danny blinked at them. The nightmare had faded to a dull, featureless background in his mind, but he was still frightened. "If I can sleep with you." "Of course," Wendy said. "Oh honey, I'm so sorry." "It's okay, Mommy." She began to cry again, and Jack put his hands on her shoulders. "Wendy, I swear to you that I followed the directions." "Will you get rid of it in the morning? Please?" "Of course I will." The three of them got in bed together, and Jack was about to snap off the light over the bed when he paused and pushed the covers back instead. "Want a picture of the nest, too." "Come right back." "I will." He went to the dresser, got the camera and the last flashcube, and gave Danny a closed thumb-and-forefinger circle. Danny smiled and gave it back with his good hand. Quite a kid he thought as he walked down to Danny's room. All of that and then some. The overhead was still on. Jack crossed to the bunk setup, and as he glanced at the table beside it, his skin crawled into goose flesh. The short hairs on his neck prickled and tried to stand erect. He could hardly see the nest through the clear Pyrex bowl. The inside of the glass was crawling with wasps. It was hard to tell how many. Fifty at least. Maybe a hundred. His heart thudding slowly in his chest, he took his pictures and then set the camera down to wait for them to develop. He wiped his lips with the palm of his hand. One thought played over and over in his mind, echoing with (You lost your temper. You lost your temper. You lost your temper.) an almost superstitious dread. They had come back. He had killed the wasps but they had come back. In his mind he heard himself screaming into his frightened, crying son's face: Don't stutter! He wiped his lips again. He went to Danny's worktable, rummaged in its drawers, and came up with a big jigsaw puzzle with a fiberboard backing. He took it over to the bedtable and carefully slid the bowl and the nest onto it. The wasps buzzed angrily inside their prison. Then, putting his hand firmly on top of the bowl so it wouldn't slip, he went out into the hall. "Coming to bed, Jack?" Wendy asked. "Coming to bed, Daddy?" "Have to go downstairs for a minute," he said, making his voice light. How had it happened? How in God's name? The bomb sure hadn't been a dud. He had seen the thick white smoke start to puff out of it when he had pulled the ring. And when he had gone up two hours later, he had shaken a drift of small dead bodies out of the hole in the top. Then how? Spontaneous regeneration? That was crazy. Seventeenth-century bullshit. Insects didn't regenerate. And
even if wasp eggs could mature full-grown insects in twelve hours, this wasn't the season in which the queen laid. That happened in April or May. Fall was their dying time. A living contradiction, the wasps buzzed furiously under the bowl. He took them downstairs and through the kitchen. In back there was a door which gave on the outside. A cold night wind blew against his nearly naked body, and his feet went numb almost instantly against the cold concrete of the platform he was standing on, the platform where milk deliveries were made during the hotel's operating season. He put the puzzle and the bowl down carefully, and when he stood up he looked at the thermometer nailed outside the door. FRESH UP WITH 7-up, the thermometer said, and the mercury stood at an even twenty-five degrees. The cold would kill them by morning. He went in and shut the door firmly. After a moment's thought he locked it, too. He crossed the kitchen again and shut off the lights. He stood in the darkness for a moment, thinking, wanting a drink. Suddenly the hotel seemed full of a thousand stealthy sounds: creakings and groans and the sly sniff of the wind under the eaves where more wasps' nests might be hanging like deadly fruit. They had come back. And suddenly he found that he didn't like the Overlook so well anymore, as if it wasn't wasps that had stung his son, wasps that had miraculously lived through the bug bomb assault, but the hotel itself. His last thought before going upstairs to his wife and son (from now on you will hold your temper. No Mattes What.) was firm and hard and sure. As he went down the hall to them he wiped his lips with the back of his hand.
<< 17 >>
THE DOCTOR'S OFFICE
Stripped to his underpants, lying on the examination table, Danny Torrance looked very small. He was looking up at Dr. ("Just call me Bill") Edmonds, who was wheeling a large black machine up beside him. Danny rolled his eyes to get a better look at it. "Don't let it scare you, guy," Bill Edmonds said. "It's an electroencephalograph, and it doesn't hurt." "Electro — " "We call it EEG for short. I'm going to hook a bunch of wires to your head — no, not stick them in, only tape them — and the pens in this part of the gadget will record your brain waves." "Like on `The Six Million Dollar Man'?" "About the same. Would you like to be like Steve Austin when you grow up?" "No way," Danny said as the nurse began to tape the wires to a number of tiny
shaved spots on his scalp. "My daddy says that someday he'll get a short circuit and then he'll be up sh ... he'll be up the creek." "I know that creek well," Dr. Edmonds said amiably. "I've been up it a few times myself, sans paddle. An EEG can tell us lots of things, Danny." "Like what?" "Like for instance if you have epilepsy. That's a little problem where — " "Yeah, I know what epilespy is." "Really?" "Sure. There was a kid in my nursery school back in Vermont — I went to nursery school when I was a little kid — and he had it. He wasn't supposed to use the flashboard." "What was that, Dan?" He had turned on the machine. Thin lines began to trace their way across graph paper. "It had all these lights, all different colors. And when you turned it on, some colors would flash but not all. And you had to count the colors and if you pushed the right button, you could turn it off. Brent couldn't use that." "That's because bright flashing lights sometimes cause an epileptic seizure." "You mean using the flashboard might've made Brent pitch a fit?" Edmonds and the nurse exchanged a brief, amused glance. "Inelegantly but accurately put, Danny." "What?" "I said you're right, except you should say `seizure' instead of `pitch a fit.' That's not nice ... okay, lie just as still as a mouse now." "Okay." "Danny, when you have these ... whatever they ares, do you ever recall seeing bright flashing lights before?" "No... " "Funny noises? Ringing? Or chimes like a doorbell?" "Huh-uh." "How about a funny smell, maybe like oranges or sawdust? Or a smell like something rotten?" "No, Sir." "Sometimes do you feel like crying before you pass out? Even though you don't feel sad?" "No way." "That's fine, then." "Have I got epilepsy, Dr. Bill?" "I don't think so, Danny. Just lie still. Almost done." The machine hummed and scratched for another five minutes and then Dr. Edmonds shut it off. "All done, guy," Edmonds said briskly. "Let Sally get those electrodes off you and then come into the next room. I want to have a little talk with you. Okay?" "Sure." "Sally, you go ahead and give him a tine test before he comes in." "All right." Edmonds ripped off the long curl of paper the machine had extruded and went into the next room, looking at it. "I'm going to prick your arm just a little," the nurse said after Danny had
pulled up his pants. "It's to make sure you don't have TB." "They gave me that at my school just last year," Danny said without much hope. "But that was a long time ago and you're a big boy now, right?" "I guess so," Danny sighed, and offered his arm up for sacrifice. When he had his shirt and shoes on, he went through the sliding door and into Dr. Edmonds's office. Edmonds was sitting on the edge of his desk, swinging his legs thoughtfully. "Hi, Danny." "Hi." "How's that hand now?" He pointed at Danny's left hand, which was lightly bandaged. "Pretty good." "Good. I looked at your EEG and it seems fine. But I'm going to send it to a friend of mine in Denver who makes his living reading those things. I just want to make sure." "Yes, Sir." "Tell me about Tony, Dan." Danny shuffled his feet. "He's just an invisible friend," he said. "I made him up. To keep me company." Edmonds laughed and put his hands on Danny's shoulders. "Now that's what your Mom and Dad say. But this is just between us, guy. I'm your doctor. Tell me the truth and I'll promise not to tell them unless you say I can." Danny thought about it. He looked at Edmonds and then, with a small effort of concentration, he tried to catch Edmonds's thoughts or at least the color of his mood. And suddenly he got an oddly comforting image in his head: file cabinets, their doors sliding shut one after another, locking with a click. Written on the small tabs in the center of each door was: A-C, SECRET; D-G, SECRET; and so on. This made Danny feel a little easier. Cautiously he said: "I don't know who Tony is." "Is he your age?" "No. He's at least eleven. I think he might be even older. I've never seen him right up close. He might be old enough to drive a car." "You just see him at a distance, huh?" "Yes, Sir." "And he always comes just before you pass out?" "Well, I don't pass out. It's like I go with him. And he shows me things." "What kind of things?" "Well ..." Danny debated for a moment and then told Edmonds about Daddy's trunk with all his writing in it, and about how the movers hadn't lost it between Vermont and Colorado after all. It had been right under the stairs all along. "And your daddy found it where Tony said he would?" "Oh yes, sir. Only Tony didn't tell me. He showed me." "I understand. Danny, what did Tony show you last night? When you locked yourself in the bathroom?" "I don't remember," Danny said quickly. "Are you sure?" "Yes, sir." "A moment ago I said you locked the bathroom door. But that wasn't right, was
it? Tony locked the door." "No, sir. Tony couldn't lock the door because he isn't real. He wanted me to do it, so I did. I locked it." "Does Tony always show you where lost things are?" "No, sir. Sometimes he shows me things that are going to happen." "Really?" "Sure. Like one time Tony showed me the amusements and wild animal park in Great Barrington. Tony said Daddy was going to take me there for my birthday. He did, too." "What else does he show you?" Danny frowned. "Signs. He's always showing me stupid old signs. And I can't read them, hardly ever." "Why do you suppose Tony would do that, Danny?" "I don't know." Danny brightened. "But my daddy and mommy are teaching me to read, and I'm trying real hard." "So you can read Tony's signs." "Well, I really want to learn. But that too, yeah." "Do you like Tony, Danny?" Danny looked at the tile floor and said nothing. "Danny?" "It's hard to tell," Danny said. "I used to. I used to hope he'd come every day, because he always showed me good things, especially since Mommy and Daddy don't think about DIVORCE anymore." Dr. Edmonds's gaze sharpened, but Danny didn't notice. He was looking hard at the floor, concentrating on expressing himself. "But now whenever he comes he shows me bad things. Awful things. Like in the bathroom last night. The things he shows me, they sting me like those wasps stung me. Only Tony's things sting me up here." He cocked a finger gravely at his temple, a small boy unconsciously burlesquing suicide. "What things, Danny?" "I can't remember!" Danny cried out, agonized. "I'd tell you if I could! It's like I can't remember because it's so bad I don't want to remember. All I can remember when I wake up is REDRUM." "Red drum or red rum?" "Rum. " "What's that, Danny?" "I don't know." "Danny?" "Yes, sir?" "Can you make Tony come now?" "I don't know. He doesn't always come. I don't even know if I want him to come anymore." "Try, Danny. I'll be right here." Danny looked at Edmonds doubtfully. Edmonds nodded encouragement. Danny let out a long, sighing breath and nodded. "But I don't know if it will work. I never did it with anyone looking at me before. And Tony doesn't always come, anyway." "If he doesn't, he doesn't," Edmonds said. "I just want you to try." "Okay." He dropped his gaze to Edmonds's slowly swinging loafers and cast his mind
outward toward his mommy and daddy. They were here someplace ... right beyond that wall with the picture on it, as a matter of fact. In the waiting room where they had come in. Sitting side by side but not talking. Leafing through magazines. Worried. About him. He concentrated harder, his brow furrowing, trying to get Into the feeling of his mommy's thoughts. It was always harder when they weren't right there in the room with him. Then he began to get it. Mommy was thinking about a sister. Her sister. The sister was dead. His mommy was thinking that was the main thing that turned her mommy into such a (bitch?) into such an old biddy. Because her sister had died. As a little girl she was (hit by a car oh god i could never stand anything like that again like aileen but what if he's sick really sick cancer spinal meningitis leukemia brain tumor like john gunther's son or muscular dystrophy oh jeez kids his age get leukemia all the time radium treatments chemotherapy we couldn't afford anything like that but of course they just can't turn you out to die on the street can they and anyway he's all right all right all right you really shouldn't let yourself think) (Danny — ) (about aileen and) (Dannee — ) (that car) (Dannee — ) But Tony wasn't there. Only his voice. And as it faded, Danny followed it down into darkness, falling and tumbling down some magic hole between Dr. Bill's swinging loafers, past a loud knocking sound, further, a bathtub cruised silently by in the darkness with some horrible thing lolling in it, past a sound like sweetly chiming church bells, past a clock under a dome of glass. Then the dark was pierced feebly by a single light, festooned with cobwebs. The weak glow disclosed a stone floor that looked damp and unpleasant. Somewhere not far distant was a steady mechanical roaring sound, but muted, not frightening. Soporific. It was the thing that would be forgotten, Danny thought with dreamy surprise. As his eyes adjusted to the gloom he could see Tony just ahead of him, a silhouette. Tony was looking at something and Danny strained his eyes to see what it was. (Your daddy. See your daddy?) Of course he did. How could he have missed him, even in the basement light's feeble glow? Daddy was kneeling on the floor, casting the beam of a flashlight over old cardboard boxes and wooden crates. The cardboard boxes were mushy and old; some of them had split open and spilled drifts of paper onto the floor. Newspapers, books, printed pieces of paper that looked like bills. His daddy was examining them with great interest. And then Daddy looked up and shone his flashlight in another direction. Its beam of light impaled another book, a large white one bound with gold string. The cover looked like white leather. It was a scrapbook. Danny suddenly needed to cry out to his daddy, to tell him to leave that book alone, that some books should not be opened. But his daddy was climbing toward it.
The mechanical roaring sound, which he now recognized as the boiler at the Overlook which Daddy checked three or four times every day, had developed an ominous, rhythmic hitching. It began to sound like ... like pounding. And the smell of mildew and wet, rotting paper was changing to something else — the high, junipery smell of the Bad Stuff. It hung around his daddy like a vapor as he reached for the book ... and grasped it. Tony was somewhere in the darkness (This inhuman place makes human monsters. This inhuman place) repeating the same incomprehensible thing over and over. (makes human monsters.) Falling through darkness again, now accompanied by the heavy, pounding thunder that was no longer the boiler but the sound of a whistling mallet striking silk- papered walls, knocking out whiffs of plaster dust. Crouching helplessly on the blue-black woven jungle rug. (Come out) (This inhuman place) (and take your medicine!) (makes human monsters.) With a gasp that echoed in his own head he jerked himself out of the darkness. Hands were on him and at first he shrank back, thinking that the dark thing in the Overlook of Tony's world had somehow followed him back into the world of real things — and then Dr. Edmonds was saying: "You're all right, Danny. You're all right. Everything is fine." Danny recognized the doctor, then his surroundings in the office. He began to shudder helplessly. Edmonds held him. When the reaction began to subside, Edmonds asked, "You said something about monsters, Danny — what was it?" "This inhuman place," he said gutturally. "Tony told me... this inhuman place ... makes ... makes ..." He shook his head. "Can't remember." "Try!" "I can't." "Did Tony come?" "Yes." "What did he show you?" "Dark. Pounding. I don't remember." "Where were you?" "Leave me alone! I don't remember! Leave me alone!" He began to sob helplessly in fear and frustration. It was all gone, dissolved into a sticky mess like a wet bundle of paper, the memory unreadable. Edmonds went to the water cooler and got him a paper cup of water. Danny drank it and Edmonds got him another one. "Better?" "Yes." "Danny, I don't want to badger you ... tease you about this, I mean. But can you remember anything about before Tony came?" "My mommy," Danny said slowly. "She's worried about me." "Mothers always are, guy." "No ... she had a sister that died when she was a little girl. Aileen. She
was thinking about how Aileen got hit by a car and that made her worried about me. I don't remember anything else." Edmonds was looking at him sharply. "Just now she was thinking that? Out in the waiting room?" "Yes, sir." "Danny, how would you know that?" "I don't know," Danny said wanly. "The shining, I guess." "The what?" Danny shook his head very slowly. "I'm awful tired. Can't I go see my mommy and daddy? I don't want to answer any more questions. I'm tired. And my stomach hurts." "Are you going to throw up?" "No, sir. I just want to go see my mommy and daddy." "Okay, Dan." Edmonds stood up. "You go on out and see them for a minute, then send them in so I can talk to them. Okay?." "Yes, sir." "There are books out there to look at. You like books, don't you?" "Yes, sir," Danny said dutifully. "You're a good boy, Danny." Danny gave him a faint smile.
* * *
"I can't find a thing wrong with him," Dr. Edmonds said to the Torrances. "Not physically. Mentally, he's bright and rather too imaginative. It happens. Children have to grow into their imaginations like a pair of oversized shoes. Danny's is still way too big for him. Ever had his IQ tested?" "I don't believe in them," Jack said. "They straight-jacket the expectations of both parents and teachers." Dr. Edmonds nodded. "That may be. But if you did test him, I think you'd find he's right off the scale for his age group. His verbal ability, for a boy who is five going on six, is amazing." "We don't talk down to him," Jack said with a trace of pride. "I doubt if you've ever had to in order to make yourself understood." Edmonds paused, fiddling with a pen. "He went into a trance while I was with him. At my request. Exactly as you described him in the bathroom last night. All his muscles went lax, his body slumped, his eyeballs rotated outward. Textbook auto- hypnosis. I was amazed. I still am." The Torrances sat forward. "What happened?" Wendy asked tensely, and Edmonds carefully related Danny's trance, the muttered phrase from which Edmonds had only been able to pluck the word "monsters," the "dark," the "pounding." The aftermath of tears, near-hysteria, and nervous stomach. "Tony again," Jack said. "What does it mean?" Wendy asked. "Have you any idea?" "A few. You might not like them." "Go ahead anyway," Jack told him. "From what Danny told me, his `invisible friend' was truly a friend until you folks moved out here from New England. Tony has only become a threatening figure
since that move. The pleasant interludes have become nightmarish, even more frightening to your son because he can't remember exactly what the nightmares are about. That's common enough. We all remember our pleasant dreams more clearly than the scary ones. There seems to be a buffer somewhere between the conscious and the subconscious, and one hell of a bluenose lives in there. This censor only lets through a small amount, and often what does come through is only symbolic. That's oversimplified Freud, but it does pretty much describe what we know of the mind's interaction with itself." "You think moving has upset Danny that badly?" Wendy asked. "It may have, if the move took place under traumatic circumstances," Edmonds said. "Did it?" Wendy and Jack exchanged a glance. "I was teaching at a prep school," Jack said slowly. "I lost my job." "I see," Edmonds said. He put the pen he bad been playing with firmly back in its holder. "There's more here, I'm afraid. It may be painful to you. Your son seems to believe you two have seriously contemplated divorce. He spoke of it in an offhand way, but only because he believes you are no longer considering it." Jack's mouth dropped open, and Wendy recoiled as if slapped. The blood drained from her face. "We never even discussed it!" she said. "Not in front of him, not even in front of each other! We — " "I think it's best if you understand everything, Doctor," Jack said. "Shortly after Danny was born, I became an alcoholic. I'd had a drinking problem all the way through college, it subsided a little after Wendy and I met, cropped up worse than ever after Danny was born and the writing I consider to be my real work was going badly. When Danny was three and a half, he spilled some beer on a bunch of papers I was working on ... papers I was shuffling around, anyway ... and I ... well ... oh shit." His voice broke, but his eyes remained dry and unflinching. "It sounds so goddam beastly said out loud. I broke his arm turning him around to spank him. Three months later I gave up drinking. I haven't touched it since." "I see," Edmonds said neutrally. "I knew the arm had been broken, of course. It was set well." He pushed back from his desk a little and crossed his legs. "If I may be frank, it's obvious that he's been in no way abused since then. Other than the stings, there's nothing on him but the normal bruises and scabs that any kid has in abundance." "Of course not," Wendy said hotly. "Jack didn't mean— " "No, Wendy," Jack said. "I meant to do it. I guess someplace inside I really did mean to do that to him. Or something even worse." He looked back at Edmonds again. "You know something, Doctor? This is the first time the word divorce has been mentioned between us. And alcoholism. And child-beating. Three firsts in five minutes." "That may be at the root of the problem," Edmonds said. "I am not a psychiatrist. If you want Danny to see a child psychiatrist, I can recommend a good one who works out of the Mission Ridge Medical Center in Boulder. But I am fairly confident of my diagnosis. Danny is an intelligent, imaginative, perceptive boy. I don't believe he would have been as upset by your marital problems as you believed. Small children are great accepters. They don't
understand shame, or the need to hide things." Jack was studying his hands. Wendy took one of them and squeezed it. "But he sensed the things that were wrong. Chief among them from his point of view was not the broken arm but the broken — or breaking — link between you two. He mentioned divorce to me, but not the broken arm. When my nurse mentioned the set to him, he simply shrugged if off. It was no pressure thing. `It happened a long time ago' is what I think he said." "That kid," Jack muttered. His jaws were clamped together, the muscles in the cheeks standing out. "We don't deserve him." "You have him, all the same," Edmonds said dryly. "At any rate, he retires into a fantasy world from time to time. Nothing unusual about that; lots of kids do. As I recall, I had my own invisible friend when I was Danny's age, a talking rooster named Chug-Chug. Of course no one could see Chug-Chug but me. I had two older brothers who often left me behind, and in such a situation Chug-Chug came in mighty handy. And of course you two must understand why Danny's invisible friend is named Tony instead of Mike or Hal or Dutch." "Yes," Wendy said. "Have you ever pointed it out to him?" "No," Jack said. "Should we?" "Why bother? Let him realize it in his own time, by his own logic. You see, Danny's fantasies were considerably deeper than those that grow around the ordinary invisible friend syndrome, but he felt he needed Tony that much more. Tony would come and show him pleasant things. Sometimes amazing things. Always good things. Once Tony showed him where Daddy's lost trunk was ... under the stairs. Another time Tony showed him that Mommy and Daddy were going to take him to an amusement park for his birthday — " "At Great Barrington!" Wendy cried. "But how could he know those things? It's eerie, the things he comes out with sometimes. Almost as if — " "He had second sight?" Edmonds asked, smiling. "He was born with a caul," Wendy said weakly. Edmonds's smile became a good, hearty laugh. Jack and Wendy exchanged a glance and then also smiled, both of them amazed at how easy it was. Danny's occasional "lucky guesses" about things was something else they had not discussed much. "Next you'll be telling me he can levitate," Edmonds said, still smiling. "No, no, no, I'm afraid not. It's not extrasensory but good old human perception, which in Danny's case is unusually keen. Mr. Torrance, he knew your trunk was under the stairs because you had looked everywhere else. Process of elimination, what? It's so simple Ellery Queen would laugh at it. Sooner or later you would have thought of it yourself. "As for the amusement park at Great Barrington, whose idea was that originally? Yours or his?" "His, of course," Wendy said. "They advertised on all the morning children's programs. He was wild to go. But the thing is, Doctor, we couldn't afford to take him. And we had told him so." "Then a men's magazine I'd sold a story to back in 1971 sent a check for fifty dollars," Jack said. "They were reprinting the story in an annual, or something. So we decided to spend it on Danny." Edmonds shrugged. "Wish fulfillment plus a lucky coincidence."
"Goddammit, I bet that's just right," Jack said. Edmonds smiled a little. "And Danny himself told me that Tony often showed him things that never occurred. Visions based on faulty perception, that's all. Danny is doing subconsciously what these so-called mystics and mind readers do quite consciously and cynically. I admire him for it. If life doesn't cause him to retract his antennae, I think he'll be quite a man." Wendy nodded — of course she thought Danny would be quite a man — but the doctor's explanation struck her as glib. It tasted more like margarine than butter. Edmonds had not lived with them. He had not been there when Danny found lost buttons, told her that maybe the TV Guide was under the bed, that he thought he better wear his rubbers to nursery school even though the sun was out ... and later that day they had walked home under her umbrella through the pouring rain. Edmonds couldn't know of the curious way Danny had of preguessing them both. She would decide to have an unusual evening cup of tea, go out in the kitchen and find her cup out with a tea bag in it. She would remember that the books were due at the library and find them all neatly piled up on the hall table, her library card on top. Or Jack would take it into his head to wax the Volkswagen and find Danny already out there, listening to tinny top-forty music on his crystal radio as he sat on the curb to watch. Aloud she said, "Then why the nightmares now? Why did Tony tell him to lock the bathroom door?" "I believe it's because Tony has outlived his usefulness," Edmonds said. "He was born — Tony, not Danny — at a time when you and your husband were straining to keep your marriage together. Your husband was drinking too much. There was the incident of the broken arm. The ominous quiet between you." Ominous quiet, yes, that phrase was the real thing, anyway. The stiff, tense meals where the only conversation had been please pass the butter or Danny, eat the rest of your carrots or may I be excused, please. The nights when Jack was gone and she had lain down, dry-eyed, on the couch while Danny watched TV. The mornings when she and Jack had stalked around each other like two angry cats with a quivering, frightened mouse between them. It all rang true; (dear God, do old scars ever stop hurting?) horribly, horribly true. Edmonds resumed, "But things have changed. You know, schizoid behavior is a pretty common thing in children. It's accepted, because all we adults have this unspoken agreement that children are lunatics. They have invisible friends. They may go and sit in the closet when they're depressed, withdrawing from the world. They attach talismanic importance to a special blanket, or a teddy bear, or a stuffed tiger. They suck their thumbs. When an adult sees things that aren't there, we consider him ready for the rubber room. When a child says he's seen a troll in his bedroom or a vampire outside the window, we simply smile indulgently. We have a one-sentence explanation that explains the whole range of such phenomena in children — " "He'll grow out of it," Jack said. Edmonds blinked. "My very words," he said. "Yes. Now I would guess that Danny was in a pretty good position to develop a full-fledged psychosis. Unhappy home life, a big imagination, the invisible friend who was so real to him that he nearly became real to you. Instead of `growing out of' his childhood
schizophrenia, he might well have grown into it." "And become autistic?" Wendy asked. She had read about autism. The word itself frightened her; it sounded like dread and white silence. "Possible but not necessarily. He might simply have entered Tony's world someday and never come back to what he calls `real things.' " "God," Jack said. "But now the basic situation has changed drastically. Mr. Torrance no longer drinks. You are in a new place where conditions have forced the three of you into a tighter family unit than ever before — certainly tighter than my own, where my wife and kids may see me for only two or three hours a day. To my mind, he is in the perfect healing situation. And I think the very fact that he is able to differentiate so sharply between Tony's world and `real things' says a lot about the fundamentally healthy state of his mind. He says that you two are no longer considering divorce. Is he as right as I think he is?" "Yes," Wendy said, and Jack squeezed her hand tightly, almost painfully. She squeezed back. Edmonds nodded. "He really doesn't need Tony anymore. Danny is flushing him out of his system. Tony no longer brings pleasant visions but hostile nightmares that are too frightening for him to remember except fragmentarily. He internalized Tony during a difficult — desperate — life situation, and Tony is not leaving easily. But he is leaving. Your son is a little like a junkie kicking the habit." He stood up, and the Torrances stood also. "As I said, I'm not a psychiatrist. If the nightmares are still continuing when your job at the Overlook ends next spring, Mr. Torrance, I would strongly urge you to take him to this man in Boulder." "I will." "Well, let's go out and tell him he can go home," Edmonds said. "I want to thank you," Jack told him painfully. "I feel better about all this than I have in a very long time." "So do I," Wendy said. At the door, Edmonds paused and looked at Wendy. "Do you or did you have a sister, Mrs. Torrance? Named Aileen?" Wendy looked at him, surprised. "Yes, I did. She was killed outside our home in Somersworth, New Hampshire, when she was six and I was ten. She chased a ball into the street and was struck by a delivery van." "Does Danny know that?" "I don't know. I don't think so." "He says you were thinking about her in the waiting room." "I was," Wendy said slowly. "For the first time in ... oh, I don't know how long." "Does the word 'redrum' mean anything to either of you?" Wendy shook her head but Jack said, "He mentioned that word last night, just before he went to sleep. Red drum." "No, rum," Edmonds corrected. "He was quite emphatic about that. Rum. As in the drink. The alcoholic drink." "Oh," Jack said. "It fits in, doesn't it?" He took his handkerchief out of his back pocket and wiped his lips with it.
"Does the phrase `the shining' mean anything to you?" This time they both shook their heads. "Doesn't matter, I guess," Edmonds said. He opened the door into the waiting room. "Anybody here named Danny Torrance that would like to go home?" "Hi, Daddy! Hi, Mommy!" He stood up from the small table where he had been leafing slowly through a copy of Where the Wild Things Are and muttering the words he knew aloud. He ran to Jack, who scooped him up. Wendy ruffled his hair. Edmonds peered at him. "If you don't love your mommy and daddy, you can stay with good old Bill." "No, sir!" Danny said emphatically. He slung one arm around Jack's neck, one arm around Wendy's, and looked radiantly happy. "Okay," Edmonds said, smiling. He looked at Wendy. "You call if you have any problems." "Yes." "I don't think you will," Edmonds said, smiling.
<< 18 >> THE SCRAPBOOK
Jack found the scrapbook on the first of November, while his wife and son were hiking up the rutted old road that ran from behind the roque court to a deserted sawmill two miles further up. The fine weather still held, and all three of them had acquired improbable autumn suntans. He had gone down in the basement to knock the press down on the boiler and then, on impulse, he had taken the flashlight from the shelf where the plumbing schematics were and decided to look at some of the old papers. He was also looking for good places to set his traps, although he didn't plan to do that for another month — I want them all to be home from vacation, he had told Wendy. Shining the flashlight ahead of him, he stepped past the elevator shaft (at Wendy's insistence they hadn't used the elevator since they moved in) and through the small stone arch. His nose wrinkled at the smell of rotting paper. Behind him the boiler kicked on with a thundering whoosh, making him jump. He flickered the light around, whistling tunelessly between his teeth. There was a scale-model Andes range down here: dozens of boxes and crates stuffed with papers, most of them white and shapeless with age and damp. Others had broken open and spilled yellowed sheaves of paper onto the stone floor. There were bales of newspaper tied up with hayrope. Some boxes contained what looked like ledgers, and others contained invoices bound with rubber bands. Jack pulled one out and put the flashlight beam on it.
ROCKY MOUNTAIN EXPRESS, INC. To: OVERLOOK HOTEL From: SIDEY'S WAREHOUSE, 1210 16th Street, Denver, CO. Via: CANDIAN PACIFIC RR Contents: 400 CASES DELSEY TOILET TISSUE, 1 GROSS / CASE Signed D E F Date August 24, 1954
Smiling, Jack let the paper drop back into the box. He flashed the light above it and it speared a hanging lightbulb, almost buried in cobwebs. There was no chain pull. He stood on tiptoe and tried screwing the bulb in. It lit weakly. He picked up the toilet-paper invoice again and used it to wipe off some of the cobwebs. The glow didn't brighten much. Still using the flashlight, he wandered through the boxes and bales of paper, looking for rat spoor. They had been here, but not for quite a long time ... maybe years. He found some droppings that were powdery with age, and several nests of neatly shredded paper that were old and unused. Jack pulled a newspaper from one of the bundles and glanced down at the headline.
JOHNSON PROMISES ORDERLY TRANSITION Says Work Begun by JFK Will Go Forward in Coming Year
The paper was the Rocky Mountain News, dated December 19, 1963. He dropped it back onto its pile. He supposed he was fascinated by that commonplace sense of history that anyone can feel glancing through the fresh news of ten or twenty years ago. He found gaps in the piled newspapers and records; nothing from 1937 to 1945, from 1957 to 1960, from 1962 to 1963. Periods when the hotel had been closed, he guessed. When it had been between suckers grabbing for the brass ring. Ullman's explanations of the Overlook's checkered career still didn't ring quite true to him. It seemed that the Overlooks spectacular location alone should have guaranteed its continuing success. There had always been an American jetset, even before jets were invented, and it seemed to Jack that the Overlook should have been one of the bases they touched in their migrations. It even sounded right. The Waldorf in May, the Bar Harbor House in June and July, the Overlook in August and early September, before moving on to Bermuda, Havana, Rio, wherever. He found a pile of old desk registers and they bore him out. Nelson Rockefeller in 1950. Henry Ford & Fam. in 1927. Jean Harlow in 1930. Clark Gable and Carole Lombard. In 1956 the whole top floor had been taken for a week by "Darryl F. Zanuck & Party." The money must have rolled down the corridors and into the cash registers like a twentieth-century Comstock Lode. The management must have been spectacularly bad. There was history here, all right, and not just in newspaper headlines. It was buried between the entries in these ledgers and account books and room-service chits where you couldn't quite see it. In 1922 Warren G. Harding had ordered a
whole salmon at ten o'clock in the evening, and a case of Coors beer. But whom had he been eating and drinking with? Had it been a poker game? A strategy session? What? Jack glanced at his watch and was surprised to see that forty-five minutes had somehow slipped by since he had come down here. His hands and arms were grimy, and he probably smelled bad. He decided to go up and take a shower before Wendy and Danny got back. He walked slowly between the mountains of paper, his mind alive and ticking over possibilities in a speedy way that was exhilarating. He hadn't felt this way in years. It suddenly seemed that the book he had semijokingly promised himself might really happen. It might even be right here, buried in these untidy heaps of paper. It could be a work of fiction, or history, or both — a long book exploding out of this central place in a hundred directions. He stood beneath the cobwebby light, took his handkerchief from his back pocket without thinking, and scrubbed at his lips with it. And that was when he saw the scrapbook. A pile of five boxes stood on his left like some tottering Pisa. The one on top was stuffed with more invoices and ledgers. Balanced on top of those, keeping its angle of repose for who knew how many years, was a thick scrapbook with white leather covers, its pages bound with two hanks of gold string that bad been tied along the binding in gaudy bows. Curious, he went over and took it down. The top cover was thick with dust. He held it on a plane at lip level, blew the dust off in a cloud, and opened it. As he did so a card fluttered out and he grabbed it in mid-air before it could fall to the stone floor. It was rich and creamy, dominated by a raised engraving of the Overlook with every window alight. The lawn and playground were decorated with glowing Japanese lanterns. It looked almost as though you could step right into it, an Overlook Hotel that had existed thirty years ago.
Horace M. Derwent Requests The Pleasure of Your Company At a Masked Ball to Celebrate The Grand Opening of
THE OVERLOOK HOTEL
Dinner Will Be Served At 8 P.M. Unmasking And Dancing At Midnight August 29, 1945 RSVP
Dinner at eight! Unmasking at midnight! He could almost see them in the dining room, the richest men in America and their women. Tuxedos and glimmering starched shirts; evening gowns; the band playing; gleaming high-heeled pumps. The clink of glasses, the jocund pop of champagne corks. The war was over, or almost over. The future lay ahead, clean and shining. America was the colossus of the world and at last she knew it and accepted it. And later, at midnight, Derwent himself crying: "Unmask! Unmask!" The masks
coming off and... (The Red Death held sway over all!) He frowned. What left field had that come out of? That was Poe, the Great American Hack. And surely the Overlook — this shining, glowing Overlook on the invitation he held in his hands-was the farthest cry from E. A. Poe imaginable. He put the invitation back and turned to the next page. A paste-up from one of the Denver papers, and scratched beneath it the date: May 15, 1947.
POSH MOUNTAIN RESORT REOPENS WITH STELLAR GUEST REGISTER Derwent Says Overlook Will Be "Showplace of the World"
By David Felton, Features Editor The Overlook Hotel has been opened and reopened in its thirty-eight-year history, but rarely with such style and dash as that promised by Horace Derwent, the mysterious California millionaire who is the latest owner of the hostelry. Derwent, who makes no secret of having sunk more than one million dollars into his newest venture — and some say the figure is closer to three million — says that "The new Overlook will be one of the world's showplaces, the kind of hotel you will remember overnighting in thirty years later." When Derwent, who is rumored to have substantial Las Vegas holdings, was asked if his purchase and refurbishing of the Overlook signaled the opening gun in a battle to legalize casino-style gambling in Colorado, the aircraft, movie, munitions, and shipping magnate denied it ... with a smile. "The Overlook would be cheapened by gambling," he said, "and don't think I'm knocking Vegas! They've got too many of my markers out there for me to do that! I have no interest in lobbying for legalized gambling in Colorado. It would be spitting into the wind." When the Overlook opens officially (there was a gigantic and hugely successful party there some time ago when the actual work was finished), the newly painted, papered, and decorated rooms will be occupied by a stellar guest list, ranging from Chic designer Corbat Stani to...
Smiling bemusedly, Jack turned the page. Now he was looking at a full-page ad from the New York Sunday Times travel section. On the page after that a story on Derwent himself, a balding man with eyes that pierced you even from an old newsprint photo. He was wearing rimless spectacles and a forties-style pencil- line mustache that did nothing at all to make him look like Errol Flynn. His face was that of an accountant. It was the eyes that made him look like someone or something else. Jack skimmed the article rapidly. He knew most of the information from a Newsweek story on Derwent the year before. Born poor in St. Paul, never finished high school, joined the Navy instead. Rose rapidly, then left in a bitter wrangle over the patent on a new type of propeller that he had designed. In the tug of war between the Navy and an unknown young man named Horace Derwent, Uncle Sam came off the predictable winner. But Uncle Sam had never gotten another patent, and there had been a lot of them. In the late twenties and early thirties, Derwent turned to aviation. He bought out a bankrupt cropdusting company, turned it into an airmail service, and prospered. More patents followed: a new monoplane wing design, a bomb carriage
used on the Flying Fortresses that had rained fire on Hamburg and Dresden and Berlin, a machine gun that was cooled by alcohol, a prototype of the ejection seat later used in United States jets. And along the line, the accountant who lived in the same skin as the inventor kept piling up the investments. A piddling string of munition factories in New York and New Jersey. Five textile mills in New England. Chemical factories in the bankrupt and groaning South. At the end of the Depression his wealth had been nothing but a handful of controlling interests, bought at abysmally low prices, salable only at lower prices still. At one point Derwent boasted that he could liquidate completely and realize the price of a three-year-old Chevrolet. There had been rumors, Jack recalled, that some of the means employed by Derwent to keep his head above water were less than savory. Involvement with bootlegging. Prostitution in the Midwest. Smuggling in the coastal areas of the South where his fertilizer factories were. Finally an association with the nascent western gambling interests. Probably Derwent's most famous investment was the purchase of the foundering Top Mark Studios, which had not had a hit since their child star, Little Margery Morris, had died of a heroin overdose in 1934. She was fourteen. Little Margery, who had specialized in sweet seven-year-olds who saved marriages and the lives of dogs unjustly accused of killing chickens, had been given the biggest Hollywood funeral in history by Top Mark — the official story was that Little Margery had contracted a "wasting disease" while entertaining at a New York orphanage — and some cynics suggested the studio had laid out all that long green because it knew it was burying itself. Derwent hired a keen businessman and raging sex maniac named Henry Finkel to run Top Mark, and in the two years before Pearl Harbor the studio ground out sixty movies, fifty-five of which glided right into the face of the Hayes Office and spit on its large blue nose. The other five were government training films. The feature films were huge successes. During one of them an unnamed costume designer had juryrigged a strapless bra for the heroine to appear in during the Grand Ball scene, where she revealed everything except possibly the birthmark just below the cleft of her buttocks. Derwent received credit for this invention as well, and his reputation — or notoriety — grew. The war had made him rich and he was still rich. Living in Chicago, seldom seen except for Derwent Enterprises board meetings (which he ran with an iron hand), it was rumored that he owned United Air Lines, Las Vegas (where he was known to have controlling interests in four hotel-casinos and some involvement in at least six others), Los Angeles, and the U.S.A. itself. Reputed to be a friend of royalty, presidents, and underworld kingpins, it was supposed by many that he was the richest man in the world. But he had not been able to make a go of the Overlook, Jack thought. He put the scrapbook down for a moment and took the small notebook and mechanical pencil he always kept with him out of his breast pocket. He jotted "Look into H. Derwent, Sidwndr lbry?" He put the notebook back and picked up the scrapbook again. His face was preoccupied, his eyes distant. He wiped his mouth constantly with his hand as he turned the pages. He skimmed the material that followed, making a mental note to read it more closely later. Press releases were pasted into many of the pages. So-and-so was
expected at the Overlook next week, thus-and-such would be entertaining in the lounge (in Derwent's time it had been the Red-Eye Lounge). Many of the entertainers were Vegas names, and many of the guests were Top Mark executives and stars. Then, in a clipping marked February 1, 1952:
MILLIONAIRE EXEC TO SELL COLORADO INVESTMENTS Deal Made with California Investors on Overlook, Other Investments, Derwent Reveals
By Rodney Conklin, Financial Editor In a terse communique yesterday from the Chicago offices of the monolithic Derwent Enterprises, it was revealed that millionaire (perhaps billionaire) Horace Derwent has sold out of Colorado in a stunning financial power play that will be completed by October 1, 1954. Derwent's investments include natural gas, coal, hydroelectric power, and a land development company called Colorado Sunshine, Inc., which owns or holds options on better than 500,000 acres of Colorado land. The most famous Derwent holding in Colorado, the Overlook Hotel, has already been sold, Derwent revealed in a rare interview yesterday. The buyer was a California group of investors headed by Charles Grondin, a former director of the California Land Development Corporation. While Derwent refused to discuss price, informed sources ...
He had sold out everything, lock, stock, and barrel. It wasn't just the Overlook. But somehow.. . somehow... He wiped his lips with his hand and wished he had a drink. This would go better with a drink. He turned more pages. The California group had opened the hotel for two seasons, and then sold it to a Colorado group called Mountainview Resorts. Mountainview went bankrupt in 1957 amid charges of corruption, nest-feathering, and cheating the stockholders. The president of the company shot himself two days after being subpoenaed to appear before a grand jury. The hotel had been closed for the rest of the decade. There was a single story about it, a Sunday feature headlined FORMER GRAND HOTEL SINKING INTO DECAY. The accompanying photos wrenched at Jack's heart: the paint on the front porch peeling, the lawn a bald and scabrous mess, windows broken by storms and stones. This would be a part of the book, if he actually wrote it, too — the phoenix going down into the ashes to be reborn. He promised himself he would take care of the place, very good care. It seemed that before today he had never really understood the breadth of his responsibility to the Overlook. It was almost like having a responsibility to history. In 1961 four writers, two of them Pulitzer Prize winners, had leased the Overlook and reopened it as a writers' school. That had lasted one year. One of the students had gotten drunk in his third-floor room, crashed out of the window somehow, and fell to his death on the cement terrace below. The paper hinted that it might have been suicide. Any big hotel have got scandals, Watson had said, just like every big hotel has got a ghost. Why? Hell, people come and go...
Suddenly it seemed that he could almost feel the weight of the Overlook bearing down on him from above, one hundred and ten guest rooms, the storage rooms, kitchen, pantry, freezer, lounge, ballroom, dining room ... (In the room the women come and go) (... and the Red Death held sway over all.) He rubbed his lips and turned to the next page in the scrapbook. He was in the last third of it now, and for the first time he wondered consciously whose book this was, left atop the highest pile of records in the cellar. A new headline, this one dated April 10, 1963.
LAS VEGAS GROUP BUYS FAMED COLORADO HOTEL Scenic Overlook to Become Key Club
Robert T. Leffing, spokesman for a group of investors going under the name of High Country Investments, announced today in Las Vegas that High Country has negotiated a deal for the famous Overlook Hotel, a resort located high in the Rockies. Leffing declined to mention the names of specific investors, but said the hotel would be turned into an exclusive "key club." He said that the group he represents hopes to sell memberships to high echelon executives in American and foreign companies. High Country also owns hotels in Montana, Wyoming, and Utah. The Overlook became world-known in the years 1946 to 1952 when it was owned by elusive mega-millionaire Horace Derwent, who ...
The item on the next page was a mere squib, dated four months later. The Overlook had opened under its new management. Apparently the paper hadn't been able to find out or wasn't interested in who the key holders were, because no name was mentioned but High Country Investments — the most anonymous-sounding company name Jack had ever heard except for a chain of bike and appliance shops in western New England that went under the name of Business, Inc. He turned the page and blinked down at the clipping pasted there.
MILLIONAIRE DERWENT BACK IN COLO- RADO VIA BACK DOOR? High Country Exec Revealed to be Charles Grondin
By Rodney Conklin, Financial Editor The Overlook Hotel, a scenic pleasure palace in the Colorado high country and once the private plaything of millionaire Horace Derwent, is at the center of a financial tangle which is only now beginning to come to light. On April 10 of last year the hotel was purchased by a Las Vegas firm, High Country Investments, as a key club for wealthy executives of both foreign and domestic breeds. Now informed sources say that High Country is headed by Charles Grondin, 53, who was the head of California Land Development Corp. until 1959, when he resigned to take the position of executive veep in the Chicago home office of Derwent Enterprises. This has led to speculation that High Country Investments may be controlled by Derwent, who may have acquired the Overlook for the second time, and under decidedly peculiar circumstances. Grondin, who was indicted and acquitted on charges of tax evasion in 1960, could not be reached for comment, and Horace Derwent, who guards his own privacy jealously, had no comment when reached by telephone. State
Representative Dick Bows of Golden has called for a complete investigation into ...
That clipping was dated July 27, 1964. The next was a column from a Sunday paper that September. The byline belonged to Josh Brannigar, a muck-raking investigator of the Jack Anderson breed. Jack vaguely recalled that Brannigar had died in 1968 or '69.
MAFIA FREE-ZONE IN COLORADO?
By Josh Brannigar It now seems possible that the newest r&r spot of Organization overlords in the U.S. is located at an out-of-the-way hotel nestled in the center of the Rockies. The Overlook Hotel, a white elephant that has been run lucklessly by almost a dozen different groups and individuals since it first opened its doors in 1910, is now being operated as a security-jacketed "key club," ostensibly for unwinding businessmen. The question is, what business are the Overlook's key holders really in? The members present during the week of August 16-23 may give us an idea. The list below was obtained by a former employee of High Country Investments, a company first believed to be a dummy company owned by Derwent Enterprises. It now seems more likely that Derwent's interest in High Country (if any) is outweighed by those of several Las Vegas gambling barons. And these same gaming honchos have been linked in the past to both suspected and convicted underworld kingpins. Present at the Overlook during that sunny week in August were: Charles Grondin, President of High Country Investments. When it became known in July of this year that he was running the High Country ship it was announced — considerably after the fact — that he had resigned his position in Derwent Enterprises previously. The silver-maned Grondin, who refused to talk to me for this column, has been tried once and acquitted on tax evasion charges (1960) . Charles "Baby Charlie" Battaglia, a 60-year-old Vegas empressario (controlling interests in The Greenback and The Lucky Bones on the Strip). Battaglia is a close personal friend of Grondin. His arrest record stretches back to 1932, when he was tried and acquitted in the gangland-style murder of Jack "Dutchy" Morgan. Federal authorities suspect his involvement in the drug traffic, prostitution, and murder for hire, but "Baby Charlie" has only been behind bars once, for income tax evasion in 1955-56. Richard Scarne, the principal stockholder of Fun Time Automatic Machines. Fun Time makes slot machines for the Nevada crowd, pinball machines, and jukeboxes (Melody-Coin) for the rest of the country. He has done time for assault with a deadly weapon (1940), carrying a concealed weapon (1948), and conspiracy to commit tax fraud (1961) . Peter Zeiss, a Miami-based importer, now nearing 70. For the last five years Zeiss has been fighting deportation as an undesirable person. He has been convicted on charges of receiving and concealing stolen property (1958), and conspiracy to commit tax fraud (1954). Charming, distinguished, and courtly, Pete Zeiss is called "Poppa" by his intimates and has been tried on charges of murder and accessory to murder. A large stockholder in Scarne's Fun Time company, he also has known interests in four Las Vegas casinos. Vittorio Gienelli, also known as "Vito the Chopper," tried twice for gangland-style murders, one of them the ax-murder of Boston vice overlord
Frank Scoffy. Gienelli has been indicted twenty-three times, tried fourteen times, and convicted only once, for shoplifting in 1940. It has been said that in recent years Gienelli has become a power in the organization's western operation, which is centered in Las Vegas. Carl "Jimmy-Ricks" Prashkin, a San Francisco investor, reputed to be the heir apparent of the power Gienelli now wields. Prashkin owns large blocks of stock in Derwent Enterprises, High Country Investments, Fun Time Automatic Machines, and three Vegas casinos. Prashkin is clean in America, but was indicted in Mexico on fraud charges that were dropped quickly three weeks after they were brought. It has been suggested that Prashkin may be in charge of laundering money skimmed from Vegas casino operations and funneling the big bucks back into the organization's legitimate western operations. And such operations may now include the Overlook Hotel in Colorado. Other visitors during the current season include...
There was more but Jack only skimmed it, constantly wiping his lips with his hand. A banker with Las Vegas connections. Men from New York who were apparently doing more in the Garment District than making clothes. Men reputed to be involved with drugs, vice, robbery, murder. God, what a story! And they had all been here, right above him, in those empty rooms. Screwing expensive whores on the third floor, maybe. Drinking magnums of champagne. Making deals that would turn over millions of dollars, maybe in the very suite of rooms where Presidents had stayed. There was a story, all right. One hell of a story. A little frantically, he took out his notebook and jotted down another memo to check all of these people out at the library in Denver when the caretaking job was over. Every hotel has its ghost? The Overlook had a whole coven of them. First suicide, then the Mafia, what next? The next clipping was an angry denial of Brannigar's charges by Charles Grondin. Jack smirked at it. The clipping on the next page was so large that it had been folded. Jack unfolded it and gasped harshly. The picture there seemed to leap out at him: the wallpaper had been changed since June of 1966, but he knew that window and the view perfectly well. It was the western exposure of the Presidential Suite. Murder came next. The sitting room wall by the door leading into the bedroom was splashed with blood and what could only be white flecks of brain matter. A blank-faced cop was standing over a corpse hidden by a blanket. Jack stared, fascinated, and then his eyes moved up to the headline.
GANGLAND-STYLE SHOOTING AT COLORADO HOTEL Reputed Crime Overlord Shot at Mountain Key Club Two Others Dead
SIDEWINDER, COLO (UPI)-Forty miles from this sleepy Colorado town, a gangland-style execution has occurred in the heart of the Rocky Mountains. The Overlook Hotel, purchased three years ago as an exclusive key club by a Las Vegas firm, was the site of a triple shotgun slaying. Two of the men were either the companions or bodyguards of Vittorio Gienelli, also known as "The Chopper" for his reputed involvement in a Boston slaying twenty years ago. Police were summoned by Robert Norman, manager of the Overlook, who said
he heard shots and that some of the guests reported two men wearing stockings on their faces and carrying guns had fled down the fire escape and driven off in a late-model tan convertible. State Trooper Benjamin Moorer discovered two dead men, later identified as Victor T. Boorman and Roger Macassi, both of Las Vegas, outside the door of the Presidential Suite where two American Presidents have stayed. Inside, Moorer found the body of Gienelli sprawled on the floor. Gienelli was apparently fleeing his attackers when he was cut down. Moorer said Gienelli had been shot with heavy-gauge shotguns at close range. Charles Grondin, the representative of the company which now owns the Overlook, could not be reached for...
Below the clipping, in heavy strokes of a ball-point pen, someone had written: They took his balls along with them. Jack stared at that for a long time, feeling cold. Whose book was this? He turned the page at last, swallowing a click in his throat. Another column from Josh Brannigar, this one dated early 1967. He only read the headline: NOTORIOUS HOTEL SOLD FOLLOWING MURDER OF UNDERWORLD FIGURE. The sheets following that clipping were blank. (They took his balls along with them.) He flipped back to the beginning, looking for a name or address. Even a room number. Because he felt quite sure that whoever had kept this little book of memories had stayed at the hotel. But there was nothing. He was getting ready to go through all the clippings, more closely this time, when a voice called down the stairs: "Jack? Hon?" Wendy. He started, almost guiltily, as if he had been drinking secretly and she would smell the fumes on him. Ridiculous. He scrubbed his lips with his hand and called back, "Yeah, babe. Lookin for rats." She was coming down. He heard her on the stairs, then crossing the boiler room. Quickly, without thinking why he might be doing it, be stuffed the scrapbook under a pile of bills and invoices. He stood up as she came through the arch. "What in the world have you been doing down here? It's almost three o'clock!" He smiled. "Is it that late? I got rooting around through all this stuff. Trying to find out where the bodies are buried, I guess." The words clanged back viciously in his mind. She came closer, looking at him, and he unconsciously retreated a step, unable to help himself. He knew what she was doing. She was trying to smell liquor on him. Probably she wasn't even aware of it herself, but he was, and it made him feel both guilty and angry. "Your mouth is bleeding," she said in a curiously flat tone. "Huh?" He put his hand to his lips and winced at the thin stinging. His index finger came away bloody. His guilt increased. "You've been rubbing your mouth again," she said. He looked down and shrugged. "Yeah, I guess I have." "It's been hell for you, hasn't it?" "No, not so bad." "Has it gotten any easier?"
He looked up at her and made his feet start moving. Once they were actually in motion it was easier. He crossed to his wife and slipped an arm around her waist. He brushed aside a sheaf of her blond hair and kissed her neck. "Yes," he said. "Where's Danny?" "Oh, he's around somewhere. It's started to cloud up outside. Hungry?" He slipped a hand over her taut, jeans-clad bottom with counterfeit lechery. "Like ze bear, madame." "Watch out, slugger. Don't start something you can't finish." "Fig-fig, madame?" he asked, still rubbing. "Dirty peeotures? Unnatural positions?" As they went through the arch, he threw one glance back at the box where the scrapbook (whose?) was hidden. With the light out it was only a shadow. He was relieved that he had gotten Wendy away. His lust became less acted, more natural, as they approached the stairs. "Maybe," she said. "After we get you a sandwich-yeek!" She twisted away from him, giggling. "That tickles!" "It teekles nozzing like Jock Torrance would like to teekle you, madame." "Lay off, Jock. How about a ham and cheese ... for the first course?" They went up the stairs together, and Jack didn't look over his shoulder again. But he thought of Watson's words: Every big hotel has got a ghost. Why? Hell, people come and go... Then Wendy shut the basement door behind them, closing it into darkness.
<< 19 >>
OUTSIDE 217
Danny was remembering the words of someone else who had worked at the Overlook during the season: Her saying she'd seen something in one of the rooms where ... a bad thing happened. That was in Room 217 and I want you to promise me you won't go in there, Danny ... steer right clear ... It was a perfectly ordinary door, no different from any other door on the first two floors of the hotel. It was dark gray, halfway down a corridor that ran at right angles to the main second-floor hallway. The numbers on the door looked no different from the house numbers on the Boulder apartment building they had lived in. A 2, a 1, and a 7. Big deal. Just below them was a tiny glass circle, a peephole. Danny had tried several of them. From the inside you got a wide, fish-eye view of the corridor. From outside you could screw up your eye seven ways to Sunday and still not see a thing. A dirty gyp: (Why are you here?)
After the walk behind the Overlook, he and Mommy had come back and she had fixed him his favorite lunch, a cheese and bologna sandwich plus Campbell's Bean Soup. They ate in Dick's kitchen and talked. The radio was on, getting thin and crackly music from the Estes Park station. The kitchen was his favorite place in the hotel, and he guessed that Mommy and Daddy must feel the same way, because after trying their meals in the dining room for three days or so, they had begun eating in the kitchen by mutual consent, setting up chairs around Dick Hallorann's butcher block, which was almost as big as their dining room table back in Stovington, anyway. The dining room had been too depressing, even with the lights on and the music playing from the tape cassette system in the office. You were still just one of three people sitting at a table surrounded by dozens of other tables, all empty, all covered with those transparent plastic dustcloths. Mommy said it was like having dinner in the middle of a Horace Walpole novel, and Daddy had laughed and agreed. Danny had no idea who Horace Walpole was, but he did know that Mommy's cooking had begun to taste better as soon as they began to eat it in the kitchen. He kept discovering little flashes of Dick Hallorann's personality lying around, and they reassured him like a warm touch. Mommy had eaten half a sandwich, no soup. She said Daddy must have gone out for a walk of his own since both the VW and the hotel truck were in the parking lot. She said she was tired and might lie down for an hour or so, if he thought he could amuse himself and not get into trouble. Danny told her around a mouthful of cheese and bologna that he thought he could. "Why don't you go out into the playground?" she asked him. "I thought you'd love that place, with a sandbox for your trucks and all." He swallowed and the food went down his throat in a lump that was dry and hard. "Maybe I will," he said, turning to the radio and fiddling with it. "And all those neat hedge animals," she said, taking his empty plate. "Your father's got to get out and trim them pretty soon." "Yeah," he said. (Just nasty things ... once it had to do with those damn hedges clipped to look like animals ...) "If you see your father before I do, tell him I'm lying down." "Sure, Mom." She put the dirty dishes in the sink and came back over to him. "Are you happy here, Danny?" He looked at her guilelessly, a milk mustache on his lip. "Uh-huh." "No more bad dreams?" "No." Tony had come to him once, one night while he was lying in bed, calling his name faintly and from far away. Danny had squeezed his eyes tightly shut until Tony had gone. "You sure?" "Yes, Mom." She seemed satisfied. "How's your hand?" He flexed it for her. "All better." She nodded. Jack had taken the nest under the Pyrex bowl, full of frozen wasps, out to the incinerator in back of the equipment shed and burned it. They had seen no more wasps since. He had written to a lawyer in Boulder, enclosing
the snaps of Danny's hand, and the lawyer had called back two days ago — that had put Jack in a foul temper all afternoon. The lawyer doubted if the company that had manufactured the bug bomb could be sued successfully because there was only Jack to testify that he had followed directions printed on the package. Jack had asked the lawyer if they couldn't purchase some others and test them for the same defect. Yes, the lawyer said, but the results were highly doubtful even if all the test bombs malfunctioned. He told Jack of a case that involved an extension ladder company and a man who had broken his back. Wendy had commiserated with Jack, but privately she had just been glad that Danny had gotten off as cheaply as he had. It was best to leave lawsuits to people who understood them, and that did not include the Torrances. And they had seen no more wasps since. "Go and play, doc. Have fun." But he hadn't had fun. He had wandered aimlessly around the hotel, poking into the maids' closets and the janitor's rooms, looking for something interesting, not finding it, a small boy padding along a dark blue carpet woven with twisting black lines. He had tried a room door from time to time, but of course they were all locked. The passkey was hanging down in the office, he knew where, but Daddy had told him he shouldn't touch that. And he didn't want to. Did be? (Why are you here?) There was nothing aimless about it after all. He had been drawn to Room 217 by a morbid kind of curiosity. He remembered a story Daddy had read to him once when he was drunk. That had been a long time ago, but the story was just as vivid now as when Daddy had read it to him. Mommy had scolded Daddy and asked what he was doing, reading a three-year-old baby something so horrible. The name of the story was Bluebeard. That was clear in his mind too, because he had thought at first Daddy was saying Bluebird, and there were no bluebirds in the story, or birds of any kind for that matter. Actually the story was about Bluebeard's wife, a pretty lady that had corn-colored hair like Mommy. After Bluebeard married her, they lived in a big and ominous castle that was not unlike the Overlook. And every day Bluebeard went off to work and every day he would tell his pretty little wife not to look in a certain room, although the key to that room was hanging right on a hook, just like the passkey was hanging on the office wall downstairs. Bluebeard's wife had gotten more and more curious about the locked room. She tried to peep through the keyhole the way Danny had tried to look through Room 217's peephole with similar unsatisfying results. There was even a picture of her getting down on her knees and trying to look under the door, but the crack wasn't wide enough. The door swung wide and ... The old fairy tale book had depicted her discovery in ghastly, loving detail. The image was burned on Danny's mind. The severed heads of Bluebeard's seven previous wives were in the room, each one on its own pedestal, the eyes turned up to whites, the mouths unhinged and gaping in silent screams. They were somehow balanced on necks ragged from the broadsword's decapitating swing, and there was blood running down the pedestals. Terrified, she had turned to flee from the room and the castle, only to discover Bluebeard standing in the doorway, his terrible eyes blazing. "I told you not to enter this room," Bluebeard said, unsheathing his sword. "Alas, in your curiosity you are like the other seven, and though I loved you best of all
your ending shall be as was theirs. Prepare to die, wretched woman!" It seemed vaguely to Danny that the story had bad a happy ending, but that had paled to insignificance beside the two dominant images: the taunting, maddening locked door with some great secret behind it, and the grisly secret itself, repeated more than half a dozen times. The locked door and behind it the heads, the severed beads. His hand reached out and stroked the room's doorknob, almost furtively. He had no idea how long be had been here, standing hypnotized before the bland gray locked door. (And maybe three times I've thought I've seen things ... nasty things ...) But Mr. Hallorann — Dick — had also said he didn't think those things could hurt you. They were like scary pictures in a book, that was all. And maybe he wouldn't see anything. On the other hand ... He plunged his left hand into his pocket and it came out holding the passkey. It had been there all along, of course. He held it by the square metal tab on the end which had OFFICE printed on it in Magic Marker. He twirled the key on its chain, watching it go around and around. After several minutes of this he stopped and slipped the passkey into the lock. It slid in smoothly, with no hitch, as if it had wanted to be there all along. (I've thought I've seen things ... nasty things ... promise me you won't go in there.) (I promise.) And a promise was, of course, very important. Still, his curiosity itched at him as maddeningly as poison ivy in a place you aren't supposed to scratch. But it was a dreadful kind of curiosity, the kind that makes you peek through your fingers during the scariest parts of a scary movie. What was beyond that door would be no movie. (I don't think those things can hurt you ... like scary pictures in a book ...) Suddenly he reached out with his left hand, not sure of what it was going to do until it had removed the passkey and stuffed it back into his pocket. He stared at the door a moment longer, blue-gray eyes wide, then turned quickly and walked back down the corridor toward the main hallway that ran at right angles to the corridor he was in. Something made him pause there and he wasn't sure what for a moment. Then he remembered that directly around this corner, on the way back to the stairs, there was one of those old-fashioned fire extinguishers curled up against the wall. Curled there like a dozing snake. They weren't chemical-type extinguishers at all, Daddy said, although there were several of those in the kitchen. These were the forerunner of the modern sprinkler systems. The long canvas hoses hooked directly into the Overlook's plumbing system, and by turning a single valve you could become a one-man fire department. Daddy said that the chemical extinguishers, which sprayed foam or CO, were much better. The chemicals smothered fires, took away the oxygen they needed to burn, while a high-pressure spray might just spread the flames around. Daddy said that Mr. Ullman should replace the old-fashioned hoses right along with the old-fashioned boiler, but Mr. Ullman would probably do neither because he was a CHEAP PRICK. Danny knew that this was one of the worst epithets his
father could summon. It was applied to certain doctors, dentists, and appliance repairmen, and also to the head of his English Department at Stovington, who had disallowed some of Daddy's book orders because he said the books would put them over budget. "Over budget, hell," he had fumed to Wendy — Danny had been listening from his bedroom where he was supposed to be asleep. "He's just saving the last five hundred bucks for himself, the CHEAP PRICK." Danny looked around the corner. The extinguisher was there, a fiat hose folded back a dozen times on itself, the red tank attached to the wall. Above it was an ax in a glass case like a museum exhibit, with white words printed on a red background: IN CASE OF EMERGENCY, BREAK GLASS. Danny could read the word EMERGENCY, which was also the name of one of his favorite TV shows, but was unsure of the rest. But he didn't like the way the word was used in connection with that long fiat hose. EMERGENCY was', fire, explosions, car crashes, hospitals, sometimes death. And he didn't like the way that hose hung so blandly on the wall. When he was alone, he always skittered past these extinguishers as fast as he could. No particular reason. It just felt better to go fast. It felt safer. Now, heart thumping loudly in his chest, he came around the corner and looked down the hall past the extinguisher to the stairs. Mommy was down there, sleeping. And if Daddy was back from his walk, he would probably be sitting in the kitchen, eating a sandwich and reading a book. He would just walk right past that old extinguisher and go downstairs. He started toward it, moving closer to the far wall until his right arm was brushing the expensive silk paper. Twenty steps away. Fifteen. A dozen. When he was ten steps away, the brass nozzle suddenly rolled off the fat loop it had been lying (sleeping?) on and fell to the hall carpet with a dull thump. It lay there, the dark bore of its muzzle pointing at Danny. He stopped immediately, his shoulders twitching forward with the suddenness of his scare. His blood thumped thickly in his ears and temples. His mouth had gone dry and sour, his hands curled into fists. Yet the nozzle of the hose only lay there, its brass casing glowing mellowly, a loop of flat canvas leading back up to the red-painted frame bolted to the wall. So it had fallen off, so what? It was only a fire extinguisher, nothing else. It was stupid to think that it looked like some poison snake from "Wide World of Animals" that had heard him and woken up. Even if the stitched canvas did look a little bit like scales. He would just step over it and go down the hall to the stairs, walking a little bit fast, maybe, to make sure it didn't snap out after him and curl around his foot... He wiped his lips with his left hand, in unconscious imitation of his father, and took a step forward. No movement from the hose. Another step. Nothing. There, see how stupid you are? You got all worked up thinking about that dumb room and that dumb Bluebeard story and that hose was probably ready to fall off for the last five years. That's all. Danny stared at the hose on the floor and thought of wasps. Eight steps away, the nozzle of the hose gleamed peacefully at him from the rug as if to say: Don't worry. I'm just a hose, that's all. And even if that isn't all, what I do to you won't be much worse than a bee sting. Or a wasp
sting. What would I want to do to a nice little boy like you ... except bite... and bite ... and bite? Danny took another step, and another. His breath was dry and harsh in his throat. Panic was close now. He began to wish the hose would move, then at last he would know, he would be sure. He took another step and now he was within striking distance. But it's not going to strike at you, he thought hysterically. How can it strike at you, bite at you, when it's just a hose? Maybe it's full of wasps. His internal temperature plummeted to ten below zero. He stared at the black bore in the center of the nozzle, nearly hypnotized. Maybe it was full of wasps, secret wasps, their brown bodies bloated with poison, so full of autumn poison that it dripped from their stingers in clear drops of fluid. Suddenly he knew that he was nearly frozen with terror; if he did not make his feet go now, they would become locked to the carpet and he would stay here, staring at the black hole in the center of the brass nozzle like a bird staring at a snake, he would stay here until his daddy found him and then what would happen? With a high moan, he made himself run. As he reached the hose, some trick of the light made the nozzle seem to move, to revolve as if to strike, and he leaped high in the air above it; in his panicky state it seemed that his legs pushed him nearly all the way to the ceiling, that he could feel the stiff back hairs that formed his cowlick brushing the hallway's plaster ceiling, although later he knew that couldn't have been so. He came down on the other side of the hose and ran, and suddenly he heard it behind him, coming for him, the soft dry whicker of that brass snake's head as it slithered rapidly along the carpet after him like a rattlesnake moving swiftly through a dry field of grass. It was coming for him, and suddenly the stairs seemed very far away; they seemed to retreat a running step into the distance for each running step he took toward them. Daddy! he tried to scream, but his closed throat would not allow a word to pass. He was on his own. Behind him the sound grew louder, the dry sliding sound of the snake, slipping swiftly over the carpet's dry hackles. At his heels now, perhaps rising up with the clear poison dribbling from its brass snout. Danny reached the stairs and had to pinwheel his arms crazily for balance. For one moment it seemed sure that he would cartwheel over and go head-for-heels to the bottom. He threw a glance back over his shoulder. The hose had not moved. It lay as it had lain, one loop off the frame, the brass nozzle on the hall floor, the nozzle pointing disinterestedly away from him. You see, stupid? he berated himself. You made it all up, scaredy-cat. It was all your imagination, scaredy-cat, scaredy-cat. He clung to the stairway railing, his legs trembling in reaction. (It never chased you) his mind told him, and seized on that thought, and played it back. (never chased you, never chased you, never did, never did) It was nothing to be afraid of. Why, he could go back and put that hose right into its frame, if he wanted to. He could, but he didn't think he would. Because what if it had chased him and had gone back when it saw that it couldn't ...
quite ... catch him? The hose lay on the carpet, almost seeming to ask him if he would like to come back and try again. Panting, Danny ran downstairs.
<< 20 >> TALKING TO MR. ULLMAN
The Sidewinder Public Library was a small, retiring building one block down from the town's business area. It was a modest, vine-covered building, and the wide concrete walk up to the door was lined with the corpses of last summer's flowers. On the lawn was a large bronze statue of a Civil War general Jack had never heard of, although he had been something of a Civil War buff in his teenage years. The newspaper files were kept downstairs. They consisted of the Sidewinder Gazette that had gone bust in 1963, the Estes Park daily, and the Boulder Camera. No Denver papers at all. Sighing, Jack settled for the Camera. When the files reached 1965, the actual newspapers were replaced by spools of microfilm ("A federal grant," the librarian told him brightly. "We hope to do 1958 to '64 when the next check comes through, but they're so slow, aren't they? You will be careful, won't you? I just know you will. Call if you need me."). The only reading machine had a lens that had somehow gotten warped, and by the time Wendy put her hand on his shoulder some forty-five minutes after he had switched from the actual papers, he had a juicy thumper of a headache. "Danny's in the park," she said, "but I don't want him outside too long. How much longer do you think you'll be?" "Ten minutes," he said. Actually he had traced down the last of the Overlook's fascinating history ¯ the years between the gangland shooting and the takeover by Stuart Ullman & Co. But he felt the same reticence about telling Wendy. "What are you up to, anyway?" she asked. She ruffed his hair as she said it, but her voice was only half-teasing. "Looking up some old Overlook history," he said. "Any particular reason?" "No, (and why the hell are you so interested anyway?) just curiosity." "Find anything interesting?" "Not much," he said, having to strive to keep his voice pleasant now. She was prying, just the way she had always pried and poked at him when they had been at Stovington and Danny was still a crib-infant. Where are you going, Jack? When
will you be back? How much money do you have with you? Are you going to take the car? Is Al going to be with you? Will one of you stay sober? On and on. She had, pardon the expression, driven him to drink. Maybe that hadn't been the only reason, but by Christ let's tell the truth here and admit it was one of them. Nag and nag and nag until you wanted to clout her one just to shut her up and stop the (Where? When? How? Are you? Will you?) endless flow of questions. It could give you a real (headache? hangover?) headache. The reader. The damned reader with its distorted print. That was why he had such a cunt of a headache. "Jack, are you all right? You look pale — " He snapped his head away from her fingers. "I am fine!" She recoiled from his hot eyes and tried on a smile that was a size too small. "Well ... if you are ... I'll just go and wait in the park with Danny ..." She was starting away now, her smile dissolving into a bewildered expression of hurt. He called to her: "Wendy?" She looked back from the foot of the stairs. "What, Jack?" He got up and went over to her. "I'm sorry, babe. I guess I'm really not all right. That machine ... the lens is distorted. I've got a really bad headache. Got any aspirin?" "Sure." She pawed in her purse and came up with a tin of Anacin. "You keep them." He took the tin. "No Excedrin?" He saw the small recoil on her face and understood. It had been a bitter sort of joke between them at first, before the drinking had gotten too bad for jokes. He had claimed that Excedrin was the only nonprescription drug ever invented that could stop a hangover dead in its tracks. Absolutely the only one. He had begun to think of his morning-after thumpers as Excedrin Headache Number Vat 69. "No Excedrin," she said. "Sorry." "That's okay," he said, "these'll do just fine." But of course they wouldn't, and she should have known it, too. At times she could be the stupidest bitch ... "Want some water?" she asked brightly. (No I just want you to GET THE FUCK OUT OF HERE!) . "I'll get some at the drinking fountain when I go up. Thanks." "Okay." She started up the stairs, good legs moving gracefully under a short tan wool skirt. "We'll be in the park." "Right." He slipped the tin of Anacin absently into his pocket, went back to the reader, and turned it off. When he was sure she was gone, he went upstairs himself. God, but it was a lousy headache. If you were going to have a vise- gripper like this one, you ought to at least be allowed the pleasure of a few drinks to balance it off. He tried to put the thought from his mind, more ill tempered than ever. He went to the main desk, fingering a matchbook cover with a telephone number on it. "Ma'am, do you have a pay telephone?" "No, sir, but you can use mine if it's local."
"It's long-distance, sorry." "Well then, I guess the drugstore would be your best bet. They have a booth." "Thanks." He went out and down the walk, past the anonymous Civil War general. He began to walk toward the business block, hands stuffed in his pockets, head thudding like a leaden bell. The sky was also leaden; it was November 7, and with the new month the weather had become threatening. There had been a number of snow flurries. There had been snow in October too, but that had melted. The new flurries had stayed, a light frosting over everything it sparkled in the sunlight like fine crystal. But there had been no sunlight today, and even as he reached the drugstore it began to spit snow again. The phone booth was at the back of the building, and he was halfway down an aisle of patent medicines, jingling his change in his pocket, when his eyes fell on the white boxes with their green print. He took one of them to the cashier, paid, and went back to the telephone booth. He pulled the door closed, put his change and matchbook cover on the counter, and dialed O. "Your call, please?" "Fort Lauderdale, Florida, operator." He gave her the number there and the number in the booth. When she told him it would be a dollar ninety for the first three minutes, he dropped eight quarters into the slot, wincing each time the bell bonged in his ear. Then, left in limbo with only the faraway clickings and gabblings of connection-making, he took the green-bottle of Excedrin out of its box, pried up the white cap, and dropped the wad of cotton batting to the floor of the booth. Cradling the phone receiver between his ear and shoulder, he shook out three of the white tablets and lined them up on the counter beside his remaining change. He recapped the bottle and put it in his pocket. At the other end, the phone was picked up on the first ring. "Surf-Sand Resort, how may we help you?" the perky female voice asked. "I'd like to speak with the manager, please." "Do you mean Mr. Trent or — " "I mean Mr. Ullman." "I believe Mr. Ullman is busy, but if you would like me to check — " "I would. Tell him it's Jack Torrance calling from Colorado." "One moment, please." She put him on hold. Jack's dislike for that cheap, self-important little prick Ullman came flooding back. He took one of the Excedrins from the counter, regarded it for a moment, then put it into his mouth and began to chew it, slowly and with relish. The taste flooded back like memory, making his saliva squirt in mingled pleasure and unhappiness. A dry, bitter taste, but a compelling one. He swallowed with a grimace. Chewing aspirin had been a habit with him in his drinking days; he hadn't done it at all since then. But when your headache was bad enough, a hangover headache or one like this one, chewing them seemed to make them get to work quicker. He had read somewhere that chewing aspirin could become addictive. Where had he read that, anyway? Frowning, he tried to think. And then Ullman came on the line. "Torrance? What's the trouble?" "No trouble," he said. "The boiler's okay and I haven't even gotten around to
murdering my wife yet. I'm saving that until after the holidays, when things get dull." "Very funny. Why are you calling? I'm a busy — " "Busy man, yes, I understand that. I'm calling about some things that you didn't tell me during your history of the Overlooks great and honorable past. Like how Horace Derwent sold it to a bunch of Las Vegas sharpies who dealt it through so many dummy corporations that not even the IRS knew who really owned it. About how they waited until the time was right and then turned it into a playground for Mafia bigwigs, and about how it had to be shut down in 1966 when one of them got a little bit dead. Along with his bodyguards, who were standing outside the door to the Presidential Suite. Great place, the Overlook's Presidential Suite. Wilson, Harding, Roosevelt, Nixon, and Vito the Chopper, right?" There was a moment of surprised silence on the other end of the line, and then Ullman said quietly: "I don't see how that can have any bearing on your job, Mr. Torrance. It " "The best part happened after Gienelli was shot, though, don't you think? Two more quick shuffles, now you see it and now you don't, and then the Overlook is suddenly owned by a private citizen, a woman named Sylvia Hunter ... who just happened to be Sylvia Hunter Derwent from 1942 to 1948." "Your three minutes are up," the operator said. "Signal when through." "My dear Mr. Torrance, all of this is public knowledge ... and ancient history." "It formed no part of my knowledge," Jack said. "I doubt if many other people know it, either. Not all of it. They remember the Gienelli shooting, maybe, but I doubt if anybody has put together all the wondrous and strange shuffles the Overlook has been through since 1945. And it always seems like Derwent or a Derwent associate comes up with the door prize. What was Sylvia Hunter running up there in '67 and '68, Mr. Ullman? It was a whorehouse, wasn't it?" "Torrance!" His shock crackled across two thousand miles of telephone cable without losing a thing. Smiling, Jack popped another Excedrin into his mouth and chewed it. "She sold out after a rather well known U.S. senator died of a heart attack up there. There were rumors that he was found naked except for black nylon stockings and a garter belt and a pair of high-heeled pumps. Patent-leather pumps, as a matter of fact." "That's a vicious, damnable lie!" Ullman cried. "Is it?" Jack asked. He was beginning to feel better. The headache was draining away. He took the last Excedrin and chewed it up, enjoying the bitter, powdery taste as the tablet shredded in his mouth. "It was a very unfortunate occurrence," Ullman said. "Now what is the point, Torrance? If you're planning to write some ugly smear article ... if this is some illconceived, stupid blackmail idea..." "Nothing of the sort," Jack said. "I called because I didn't think you played square with me. And because — " "Didn't play square?" Ullman cried. "My God, did you think I was going to share a large pile of dirty laundry with the hotel's caretaker? Who in heaven's name do you think you are? And how could those old stories possibly affect you
anyway? Or do you think there are ghosts parading up and down the halls of the west wing wearing bedsheets and crying 'Woe!'?" "No, I don't think there are any ghosts. But you raked up a lot of my personal history before you gave me the job. You had me on the carpet, quizzing me about my ability to take care of your hotel like a little boy in front of the teacher's desk for peeing in the coatroom. You embarrassed me." "I just do not believe your cheek, your bloody damned impertinence," Ullman said. He sounded as if he might be choking. "I'd like to sack you. And perhaps I will." "I think Al Shockley might object. Strenuously." "And I think you may have finally overestimated Mr. Shockley's commitment to you, Mr. Torrance." For a moment Jack's headache came back in all its thudding glory, and he closed his eyes against the pain. As if from a distance away he heard himself ask: "Who owns the Overlook now? Is it still Derwent Enterprises? Or are you too smallfry to know?" "I think that will do, Mr. Torrance. You are an employee of the hotel, no different from a busboy or a kitchen pot scrubber. I have no intention of — " "Okay, I'll write Al," Jack said. "He'll know; after all, he's on the Board of Directors. And I might just add a little P.S. to the effect that — " "Derwent doesn't own it." "What? I couldn't quite make that out." "I said Derwent doesn't own it. The stockholders are all Easterners. Your friend Mr. Shockley owns the largest block of stock himself, better than thirty- five per cent. You would know better than I if he has any ties to Derwent." "Who else?" "I have no intention of divulging the names of the other stockholders to you, Mr. Torrance. I intend to bring this whole matter to the attention of — " "One other question." "I am under no obligation to you." "Most of the Overlook's history — savory and unsavory alike — I found in a scrapbook that was in the cellar. Big thing with white leather covers. Gold thread for binding. Do you have any idea whose scrapbook that might be?" "None at all." "Is it possible it could have belonged to Grady? The caretaker who killed himself?" "Mr. Torrance," Ullman said in tones of deepest frost, "I am by no means sure that Mr. Grady could read, let alone dig out the rotten apples you have been wasting my time with." "I'm thinking of writing a book about the Overlook Hotel. I thought if I actually got through it, the owner of the scrapbook would like to have an acknowledgment at the front." "I think writing a book about the Overlook would be very unwise," Ullman said. "Especially a book done from your ... uh, point of view." "Your opinion doesn't surprise me." His headache was all gone now. There had been that one flash of pain, and that was all. His mind felt sharp and accurate, all the way down to millimeters. It was the way he usually felt only when the writing was going extremely well or when he had a threedrink buzz on. That was
another thing he had forgotten about Excedrin; he didn't know if it worked for others, but for him crunching three tablets was like an instant high. Now he said: "What you'd like is some sort of commissioned guidebook that you could hand out free to the guests when they checked in. Something with a lot of glossy photos of the mountains at sunrise and sunset and a lemon-meringue text to go with it. Also a section on the colorful people who have stayed there, of course excluding the really colorful ones like Gienelli and his friends." "If I felt I could fire you and be a hundred per cent certain of my own job instead of just ninety-five per cent," UIIman said in clipped, strangled tones, "I would fire you right this minute, over the telephone. But since I feel that five per cent of uncertainty, I intend to call Mr. Shockley the moment you're off the line ... which will be soon, or so I devoutly hope." Jack said, "There isn't going to be anything in the book that isn't true, you know. There's no need to dress it up." (Why are you baiting him? Do you want to be fired?) "I don't care if Chapter Five is about the Pope of Rome screwing the shade of the Virgin Mary," Ullman said, his voice rising. "I want you out of my hotel!" "It's not your hotel!" Jack screamed, and slammed the receiver into its cradle. He sat on the stool breathing hard, a little scared now, (a little? hell, a lot) wondering why in the name of God he had called Ullman in the first place. (You lost your temper again, Jack.) Yes. Yes, he had. No sense trying to deny it. And the hell of it was, he had no idea how much influence that cheap little prick had over Al, no more than he knew how much bullshit Al would take from him in the name of auld lang syne. If Ullman was as good as he claimed to be, and if he gave Al a he-goes-or-I-go ultimatum, might not Al be forced to take it? He closed his eyes and tried to imagine telling Wendy. Guess what, babe? I lost another job. This time I had to go through two thousand miles of Bell Telephone cable to find someone to punch out, but I managed it. He opened his eyes and wiped his mouth with his handkerchief. He wanted a drink. Hell, he needed one. There was a cafe just down the street, surely he had time for a quick beer on his way up to the park, just one to lay the dust ... He clenched his hands together helplessly. The question recurred: Why had he called Ullman in the first place? The number of the Surf-Sand in Lauderdale had been written in a small notebook by the phone and the CB radio in the office-plumbers' numbers, carpenters, glaziers, electricians, others. Jack had copied it onto the matchbook cover shortly after getting out of bed, the idea of calling Ullman fullblown and gleeful in his mind. But to what purpose? Once, during the drinking phase, Wendy had accused him of desiring his own destruction but not possessing the necessary moral fiber to support a full-blown deathwish. So he manufactured ways in which other people could do it, lopping a piece at a time off himself and their family. Could it be true? Was be afraid somewhere inside that the Overlook might be just what he needed to finish his play and generally collect tip his shit and get it together? Was he blowing the whistle on himself? Please God no, don't let it be that way. Please.
He closed his eyes and an image immediately arose on the darkened screen of his inner lids: sticking his hand through that hole in the shingles to pull out the rotted flashing, the sudden needling sting, his own agonized, startled cry in the still and unheeding air: Oh you goddamn fucking son of a bitch ... Replaced with an image two years earlier, himself stumbling into the house at three in the morning, drunk, falling over a table and sprawling full-length on the floor, cursing, waking Wendy up on the couch. Wendy turning on the light, seeing his clothes ripped and smeared from some cloudy parking-lot scuffle that had occurred at a vaguely remembered honky-tonk just over the New Hampshire border hours before, crusted blood under his nose, now looking up at his wife, blinking stupidly in the light like a mole in the sunshine, and Wendy saying dully, You son of a bitch, you woke Danny up. If you don't care about yourself, can't you care a little bit about us? Oh, why do I even bother talking to you? The telephone rang, making him jump. He snatched it off the cradle, illogically sure it must be either Ullman or Al Shockley. "What?" he barked. "Your overtime, sir. Three dollars and fifty cents." "I'll have to break some ones," he said. "Wait a minute." He put the phone on the shelf, deposited his last six quarters, then went out to the cashier to get more. He performed the transaction automatically, his mind running in a single closed circle like a squirrel on an exercise wheel. Why had he called Ullman? Because Ullman had embarrassed him? He had been embarrassed before, and by real masters the Grand Master, of course, being himself. Simply to crow at the man, expose his hypocrisy? Jack didn't think he was that petty. His mind tried to seize on the scrapbook as a valid reason, but that wouldn't hold water either. The chances of Ullman knowing who the owner was were no more than two in a thousand. At the interview, he had treated the cellar as another country a nasty underdeveloped one at that. If he had really wanted to know, he would have called Watson, whose winter number was also in the office notebook. Even Watson would not have been a sure thing but surer than Ullman. And telling him about the book idea, that had been another stupid thing. Incredibly stupid. Besides jeopardizing his job, he could be closing off wide channels of information once Ullman called around and told people to beware of New Englanders bearing questions about the Overlook Hotel. He could have done his researches quietly, mailing off polite letters, perhaps even arranging some interviews in the spring ... and then laughed up his sleeve at Ullman's rage when the book came out and he was safely away The Masked Author Strikes Again. Instead he had made that damned senseless call, lost his temper, antagonized Ullman, and brought out all of the hotel manager's Little Caesar tendencies. Why? If it wasn't an effort to get himself thrown out of the good job Al had snagged for him, then what was it? He deposited the rest of the money in the slots and hung up the phone. It really was the senseless kind of thing he might have done if he had been drunk. But he had been sober; dead cold sober. Walking out of the drugstore be crunched another Excedrin into his mouth, grimacing yet relishing the bitter taste. On the walk outside he met Wendy and Danny. "Hey, we were just coming after you," Wendy said. "Snowing, don't you know."
Jack blinked up. "So it is." It was snowing hard. Sidewinder's main street was already heavily powdered, the center line obscured. Danny had his head tilted up to the white sky, his mouth open and his tongue out to catch some of the fat flakes drifting down. "Do you think this is it?" Wendy asked. Jack shrugged. "I don't know. I was hoping for another week or two of grace. We still might get it." Grace, that was it. (I'm sorry, Al. Grace, your mercy. For your mercy. One more chance. I am heartily sorry — ) How many times, over how many years, had he — a grown man — asked for the mercy of another chance? He was suddenly so sick of himself, so revolted, that he could have groaned aloud. "How's your headache?" she asked, studying him closely. He put an arm around her and hugged her tight. "Better. Come on, you two, let's go home while we still can." They walked back to where the hotel truck was slantparked against the curb, Jack in the middle, his left arm around Wendy's shoulders, his right hand holding Danny's hand. He had called it home for the first time, for better or worse. As he got behind the truck's wheel it occurred to him that while he was fascinated by the Overlook, he didn't much like it. He wasn't sure it was good for either his wife or his son or himself. Maybe that was why he had called Ullman. To be fired while there was still time. He backed the truck out of its parking space and headed them out of town and up into the mountains.
<< 21 >> NIGHT THOUGHTS
It was ten o'clock. Their quarters were filled with counterfeit sleep. Jack lay on his side facing the wall, eyes open, listening to Wendy's slow and regular breathing. The taste of dissolved aspirin was still on his tongue, making it feel rough and slightly numb. Al Shockley had called at quarter of six, quarter of eight back East. Wendy had been downstairs with Danny, sitting in front of the lobby fireplace and reading. "Person to person," the operator said, "for Mr. Jack Torrance." "Speaking." He had switched the phone to his right hand, had dug his handkerchief out of his back pocket with his left, and had wiped his tender lips with it. Then he lit a cigarette.
Al's voice then, strong in his ear: "Jacky-boy, what in the name of God are you up to?" "Hi, Al." He snuffed the cigarette and groped for the Excedrin bottle. "What's going on, Jack? I got this weird phone call from Stuart Ullman this afternoon. And when Stu Ullman calls long-distance out of his own pocket, you know the shit has hit the fan." "Ullman has nothing to worry about, Al. Neither do you." "What exactly is the nothing we don't have to worry about? Stu made it sound like a cross between blackmail and a National Enquirer feature on the Overlook. Talk to me, boy." "I wanted to poke him a little," Jack said. "When I came up here to be interviewed, he had to drag out all my dirty laundry. Drinking problem. Lost your last job for racking over a student. Wonder if you're the right man for this. Et cetera. The thing that bugged me was that he was bringing all this up because he loved the goddamn hotel so much. The beautiful Overlook. The traditional Overlook. The bloody sacred Overlook. Well, I found a scrapbook in the basement. Somebody had put together all the less savory aspects of Ullman's cathedral, and it looked to me like a little black mass had been going on after hours." "I hope that's metaphorical, Jack." Al's voice sounded frighteningly cold. "It is. But I did find out — " "I know the hotel's history." Jack ran a hand through his hair. "So I called him up and poked him with it. I admit it wasn't very bright, and I sure wouldn't do it again. End of story." "Stu says you're planning to do a little dirty-laundry-airing yourself." "Stu is an asshole!" he barked into the phone. "I told him I had an idea of writing about the Overlook, yes. I do. I think this place forms an index of the whole post-World War II American character. That sounds like an inflated claim, stated so baldly ... I know it does ... but it's all here, Al! My God, it could be a great book. But it's far in the future, I can promise you that, I've got more on my plate right now than I can eat, and — " "Jack, that's not good enough." He found himself gaping at the black receiver of the phone, unable to believe what he had surely heard. "What? Al, did you say — ?" "I said what I said. How long is far in the future, Jack? For you it may be two years, maybe five. For me it's thirty or forty, because I expect to be associated with the Overlook for a long time. The thought of you doing some sort of a scum-job on my hotel and passing it off as a great piece of American writing, that makes me sick." Jack was speechless. "I tried to help you, Jacky-boy. We went through the war together, and I thought I owed you some help. You remember the war?" "I remember it," he muttered, but the coals of resentment had begun to glow around his heart. First Ullman, then Wendy, now Al. What was this? National Let's Pick Jack Torrance Apart Week? He clamped his lips more tightly together, reached for his cigarettes, and knocked them off onto the floor. Had he ever liked this cheap prick talking to him from his mahogany-lined den in Vermont? Had he really?
"Before you hit that Hatfield kid," Al was saying, "I had talked the Board out of letting you go and even had them swung around to considering tenure. You blew that one for yourself. I got you this hotel thing, a nice quiet place for you to get yourself together, finish your play, and wait it out until Harry Effinger and I could convince the rest of those guys that they made a big mistake. Now it looks like you want to chew my arm off on your way to a bigger killing. Is that the way you say thanks to your friends, Jack?" "No," he whispered. He didn't dare say more. His head was throbbing with the hot, acid-etched words that wanted to get out. He tried desperately to think of Danny and Wendy, depending on him, Danny and Wendy sitting peacefully downstairs in front of the fire and working on the first of the second-grade reading primers, thinking everything was A-OK. If he lost this job, what then? Off to California in that tired old VW with the distintegrating fuel pump like a family of dustbowl Okies? He told himself he would get down on his knees and beg Al before he let that happen, but still the words struggled to pour out, and the hand holding the hot wires of his rage felt greased. "What?" Al said sharply. "No," he said. "That is not the way I treat my friends. And you know it." "How do I know it? At the worst, you're planning to smear my hotel by digging up bodies that were decently buried years ago. At the best, you call up my temperamental but extremely competent hotel manager and work him into a frenzy as part of some ... some stupid kid's game." "It was more than a game, Al. It's easier for you. You don't have to take some rich friend's charity. You don't need a friend in court because you are the court. The fact that you were one step from a brown-bag lush goes pretty much unmentioned, doesn't it?" "I suppose it does," Al said. His voice had dropped a notch and he sounded tired of the whole thing. "But Jack, Jack ... I can't help that. I can't change that." "I know," Jack said emptily. "Am I fired? I guess you better tell me if I am." "Not if you'll do two things for me." "All right." "Hadn't you better hear the conditions before you accept them?" "No. Give me your deal and I'll take it. There's Wendy and Danny to think about. If you want my balls, I'll send them airmail." "Are you sure selfpity is a luxury you can afford, Jack?" He had closed his eyes and slid an Excedrin between his dry lips. "At this point I feel it's the only one I can afford. Fire away ... no pun intended." Al was silent for a moment. Then he said: "First, no more calls to Ullman. Not even if the place burns down. If that happens, call the maintenance man, that guy who swears all the time, you know who I mean ..." "Watson." "Yes." "Okay. Done." "Second, you promise me, Jack. Word of honor. No book about a famous Colorado mountain hotel with a history." For a moment his rage was so great that be literally could not speak. The
blood beat loudly in his ears. It was like getting a call from some twentieth- century Medici prince ... no portraits of my family with their warts showing, please, or back to the rabble you'll go. I subsidize no pictures but pretty pictures. When you paint the daughter of my good friend and business partner, please omit birthmark or back to the rabble you'll go. Of course we're friends... we are both civilized men aren't we? We've shared bed and board and bottle. We'll always be friends, and the dog collar I have on you will always be ignored by mutual consent, and I'll take good and benevolent care of you. All I ask in return is your soul. Small item. We can even ignore the fact that you've handed it over, the way we ignore the dog collar. Remember, my talented friend, there are Michelangelos begging everywhere in the streets of Rome ... "Jack? You there?" He made a strangled noise that was intended to be the word yes. Al's voice was firm and very sure of itself. "I really don't think I'm asking so much, Jack. And there will be other books. You just can't expect me to subsidize you while you ..." "All right, agreed." "I don't want you to think I'm trying to control your artistic life, Jack. You know me better than that. It's just that " "What?" "Is Derwent still involved with the Overlook? Somehow?" "I don't see how that can possibly be any concern of yours, Jack." "No," he said distantly. "I suppose it isn't. Listen, Al, I think I hear Wendy calling me for something. I'll get back to you." "Sure thing, Jacky-boy. We'll have a good talk. How are things? Dry?" YOU'VE GOT YOUR POUND OF FLESH BLOOD AND ALL NOW CAN'T YOU LEAVE ME ALONE?) "As a bone." "Here too. I'm actually beginning to enjoy sobriety. If — " "I'll get back, Al. Wendy — " "Sure. Okay." And so he had hung up and that was when the cramps had come, hitting him like lightning bolts, making him curl up in front of the telephone like a penitent, hands over his belly, head throbbing like a monstrous bladder. The moving wasp, having stung moves on ... It had passed a little when Wendy came upstairs and asked him who had been on the phone. "Al," he said. "He called to ask how things were going. I said they were fine." "Jack, you look terrible. Are you sick?" "Headache's back. I'm going to bed early. No sense trying to write." "Can I get you some warm milk?" He smiled wanly. "That would be nice." And now he lay beside her, feeling her warm and sleeping thigh against his own. Thinking of the conversation with Al, how he had groveled, still made him hot and cold by turns. Someday there would be a reckoning. Someday there would be a book, not the soft and thoughtful thing he had first considered, but a gem- hard work of research, photo section and all, and he would pull apart the entire
Overlook history, nasty, incestuous ownership deals and all. He would spread it all out for the reader like a dissected crayfish. And if Al Shockley had connections with the Derwent empire, then God help him. Strung up like piano wire, he lay staring into the dark, knowing it might be hours yet before he could sleep.
* * *
Wendy Torrance lay on her back, eyes closed, listening to the sound of her husband's slumber — the long inhale, the brief hold, the slightly guttural exhale. Where did he go when he slept, she wondered. To some amusement park, a Great Barrington of dreams where all the rides were free and there was no wife- mother along to tell them they'd had enough hotdogs or that they'd better be going if they wanted to get home by dark? Or was it some fathoms-deep bar where the drinking never stopped and the batwings were always propped open and all the old companions were gathered around the electronic hockey game, glasses in hand, Al Shockley prominent among them with his tie loosened and the top button of his shirt undone? A place where both she and Danny were excluded and the boogie went on endlessly? Wendy was worried about him, the old, helpless worry that she had hoped was behind her forever in Vermont, as if worry could somehow not cross state lines. She didn't like what the Overlook seemed to be doing to Jack and Danny. The most frightening thing, vaporous and unmentioned, perhaps unmentionable, was that all of Jack's drinking symptoms had come back, one by one ... all but the drink itself. The constant wiping of the lips with hand or handkerchief, as if to rid them of excess moisture. Long pauses at the typewriter, more balls of paper in the wastebasket. There had been a bottle of Excedrin on the telephone table tonight after Al had called him, but no water glass. He had been chewing them again. He got irritated over little things. He would unconsciously start snapping his fingers in a nervous rhythm when things got too quiet. Increased profanity. She had begun to worry about his temper, too. It would almost come as a relief if he would lose it, blow off steam, in much the same way that he went down to the basement first thing in the morning and last thing at night to dump the press on the boiler. It would almost be good to see him curse and kick a chair across the room or slam a door. But those things, always an integral part of his temperament, had almost wholly ceased. Yet she had the feeling that Jack was more and more often angry with her or Danny, but was refusing to let it out. The boiler had a pressure gauge: old, cracked, clotted with grease, but still workable. Jack had none. She had never been able to read him very well. Danny could, but Danny wasn't talking. And the call from Al. At about the same time it had come, Danny had lost all interest in the story they had been reading. He left her to sit by the fire and crossed to the main desk where Jack had constructed a roadway for his matchbox cars and trucks. The Violent Violet Volkswagen was there and Danny had begun to push it rapidly back and forth. Pretending to read her own book but actually looking at Danny over the top of it, she had seen an odd amalgam of the ways she and Jack expressed anxiety. The wiping of the lips. Running both hands nervously through his hair, as she had done while waiting for Jack to come home from his
round of the bars. She couldn't believe Al had called just to "ask how things were going." If you wanted to shoot the bull, you called Al. When Al called you, that was business. Later, when she had come back downstairs, she had found Danny curled up by the fire again, reading the second-grade-primer adventures of Joe and Rachel at the circus with their daddy in complete, absorbed attention. The fidgety distraction had completely disappeared. Watching him, she had been struck again by the eerie certainty that Danny knew more and understood more than there was room for in Dr. ("Just call me Bill") Edmonds's philosophy. "Hey, time for bed, doc," she'd said. "Yeah, okay." He marked his place in the book and stood up. "Wash up and brush your teeth." "Okay." "Don't forget to use the floss." "I won't." They stood side by side for a moment, watching the wax and wane of the coals of the fire. Most of the lobby was chilly and drafty, but this circle around the fireplace was magically warm, and hard to leave. "It was Uncle Al on the phone," she said casually. "Oh yeah?" Totally unsurprised. "I wonder if Uncle Al was mad at Daddy," she said, still casually. "Yeah, he sure was," Danny said, still watching the fire. "He didn't want Daddy to write the book." "What book, Danny?" "About the hotel." The question framed on her lips was one she and Jack had asked Danny a thousand times: How do you know that? She hadn't asked him. She didn't want to upset him before bed, or make him aware that they were casually discussing his knowledge of things he had no way of knowing at all. And he did know, she was convinced of that. Dr. Edmonds's patter about inductive reasoning and subconscious logic was just that: patter. Her sister ... how had Danny known she was thinking about Aileen in the waiting room that day? And (I dreamed Daddy had an accident.) She shook her head, as if to clear it. "Go wash up, doc." "Okay." He ran up the stairs toward their quarters. Frowning, she had gone into the kitchen to warm Jack's milk in a saucepan. And now, lying wakeful in her bed and listening to her husband's breathing and the wind outside (miraculously, they'd had only another flurry that afternoon; still no heavy snow), she let her mind turn fully to her lovely, troubling son, born with a caul over his face, a simple tissue of membrane that doctors saw perhaps once in every seven hundred births, a tissue that the old wives' tales said betokened the second sight. She decided that it was time to talk to Danny about the Overlook ... and high time she tried to get Danny to talk to her. Tomorrow. For sure. The two of them would be going down to the Sidewinder Public Library to see if they could get him some second-grade-level books on an extended loan through the winter, and she would talk to him. And frankly. With that thought she felt a little easier, and at last began to drift toward sleep.
* * *
Danny lay awake in his bedroom, eyes open, left arm encircling his aged and slightly worse-for-wear Pooh (Pooh had lost one shoe-button eye and was oozing stuffing from half a dozen sprung seams), listening to his parents sleep in their bedroom. He felt as if he were standing unwilling guard over them. The nights were the worst of all. He hated the nights and the constant howl of the wind around the west side of the hotel. His glider floated overhead from a string. On his bureau the VW model, brought up from the roadway setup downstairs, glowed a dimly fluorescent purple. His books were in the bookcase, his coloring books on the desk. A place for everything and everything in its place. Mommy said. Then you know where it is when you want it. But now things had been misplaced. Things were missing. Worse still, things had been added, things you couldn't quite see, like in one of those pictures that said CAN YOU SEE THE INDIANS? And if you strained and squinted, you could see some of them the thing you had taken for a cactus at first glance was really a brave with a knife clamped in his teeth, and there were others hiding in the rocks, and you could even see one of their evil, merciless faces peering through the spokes of a covered wagon wheel. But you could never see all of them, and that was what made you uneasy. Because it was the ones you couldn't see that would sneak up behind you, a tomahawk in one hand and a scalping knife in the other ... He shifted uneasily in his bed, his eyes searching out the comforting glow of the night light. Things were worse here. He knew that much for sure. At first they hadn't been so bad, but little by little ... his daddy thought about drinking a lot more. Sometimes he was angry at Mommy and didn't know why. He went around wiping his lips with his handkerchief and his eyes were far away and cloudy. Mommy was worried about him and Danny, too. He didn't have to shine into her to know that; it had been in the anxious way she had questioned him on the day the fire hose had seemed to turn into a snake. Mr. Hallorann said he thought all mothers could shine a little bit, and she had known on that day that something had happened. But not what. He had almost told her, but a couple of things had held him back. He knew that the doctor in Sidewinder had dismissed Tony and the things that Tony showed him as perfectly (well almost) normal. His mother might not believe him if he told her about the hose. Worse, she might believe him in the wrong way, might think he was LOSING HIS MARBLES. He understood a little about LOSING YOUR MARBLES, not as much as he did about GETTING A BABY, which his mommy had explained to him the year before at some length, but enough. Once, at nursery school, his friend Scott had pointed out a boy named Robin Stenger, who was moping around the swings with a face almost long enough to step on. Robin's father taught arithmetic at Daddy's school, and Scott's daddy taught history there. Most of the kids at the nursery school were associated either with Stovington Prep or with the small IBM plant just outside of town. The prep kids chummed in one group, the IBM kids in another. There were cross-
friendships, of course, but it was natural enough for the kids whose fathers knew each other to more or less stick together. When there was an adult scandal in one group, it almost always filtered down to the children in some wildly mutated form or other, but it rarely jumped to the other group. He and Scotty were sitting in the play rocketship when Scotty jerked his thumb at Robin and said: "You know that kid?" "Yeah," Danny said. Scott leaned forward. "His dad LOST HIS MARBLES last night. They took him away." "Yeah? Just for losing some marbles?" Scotty looked disgusted. "He went crazy. You know." Scott crossed his eyes, flopped out his tongue, and twirled his index fingers in large elliptical orbits around his ears. "They took him to THE BUGHOUSE." "Wow," Danny said. "When will they let him come back?" "Never-never-never," Scotty said darkly. In the course of that day and the next, Danny heard that a.) Mr. Stenger had tried to kill everybody in his family, including Robin, with his World War II souvenir pistol; b.) Mr. Stenger ripped the house to pieces while he was STINKO; c.) Mr. Stenger had been discovered eating a bowl of dead bugs and grass like they were cereal and milk and crying while he did it; d.) Mr. Stenger had tried to strangle his wife with a stocking when the Red Sox lost a big ball game. Finally, too troubled to keep it to himself, he had asked Daddy about Mr. Stenger. His daddy had taken him on his lap and had explained that Mr. Stenger had been under a great deal of strain, some of it about his family and some about his job and some of it about things that nobody but doctors could understand. He had been having crying fits, and three nights ago he had gotten crying and couldn't stop it and had broken a lot of things in the Stenger home. It wasn't LOSING YOUR MARBLES, Daddy said, it was HAVING A BREAKDOWN, and Mr. Stenger wasn't in a BUGHOUSE but in a SANNY-TARIUM. But despite Daddy's careful explanations, Danny was scared. There didn't seem to be any difference at all between LOSING YOUR MARBLES and HAVING A BREAKDOWN, and whether you called it a BUGHOUSE or a SANNYTARIUM, there were still bars on the windows and they wouldn't let you out if you wanted to go. And his father, quite innocently, had confirmed another of Scotty's phrases unchanged, one that filled Danny with a vague and unformed dread. In the place where Mr. Stenger now lived, there were THE MEN IN THE WHITE COATS. They came to get you in a truck with no windows, a truck that was gravestone gray. It rolled up to the curb in front of your house and THE MEN IN THE WHITE COATS got out and took you away from your family and made you live in a room with soft walls. And if you wanted to write home, you had to do it with Crayolas. "When will they let him come back?" Danny asked his father. "Just as soon as he's better, doc." "But when will that be?" Danny had persisted. "Dan," Jack said, "NO ONE KNOWS." And that was the worst of all. It was another way of saying never-never-never. A month later, Robin's mother took him out of nursery school and they moved away
from Stovington without Mr. Stenger. That had been over a year ago, after Daddy stopped taking the Bad Stuff but before he had lost his job. Danny still thought about it often. Sometimes when he fell down or bumped his head or had a bellyache, he would begin to cry and the memory would flash over him, accompanied by the fear that he would not be able to stop crying, that he would just go on and on, weeping and wailing, until his daddy went to the phone, dialed it, and said: "Hello? This is Jack Torrance at 149 Mapleline Way. My son here can't stop crying. Please send THE MEN IN THE WHITE COATS to take him to the SANNY-TARIUM. That's right, he's LOST HIS MARBLES. Thank you." And the gray truck with no windows would come rolling up to his door, they would load him in, still weeping hysterically, and take him away. When would he see his mommy and daddy again? NO ONE KNOWS. It was this fear that had kept him silent. A year older, he was quite sure that his daddy and mommy wouldn't let him be taken away for thinking a fire hose was a snake, his rational mind was sure of that, but still, when he thought of telling them, that old memory rose up like a stone filling his mouth and blocking words. It wasn't like Tony; Tony had always seemed perfectly natural (until the bad dreams, of course), and his parents had also seemed to accept Tony as a more or less natural phenomenon. Things like Tony came from being BRIGHT, which they both assumed he was (the same way they assumed they were BRIGHT), but a fire hose that turned into a snake, or seeing blood and brains on the wall of the Presidential Sweet when no one else could, those things would not be natural. They had already taken him to see a regular doctor. Was it not reasonable to assume that THE MEN IN THE WHITE COATS might come next? Still he might have told them except he was sure, sooner or later, that they would want to take him away from the hotel. And he wanted desperately to get away from the Overlook. But he also knew that this was his daddy's last chance, that he was here at the Overlook to do more than take care of the place. He was here to work on his papers. To get over losing his job. To love Mommy / Wendy. And until very recently, it had seemed that all those things were happening. It was only lately that Daddy had begun to have trouble. Since he found those papers. (This inhuman place makes human monsters.) What did that mean? He had prayed to God, but God hadn't told him. And what would Daddy do if he stopped working here? He had tried to find out from Daddy's mind, and had become more and more convinced that Daddy didn't know. The strongest proof had come earlier this evening when Uncle Al had called his daddy up on the phone and said mean things and Daddy didn't dare say anything back because Uncle Al could fire him from this job just the way that Mr. Crommert, the Stovington headmaster, and the Board of Directors had fired him from his schoolteaching job. And Daddy was scared to death of that, for him and Mommy as well as himself. So he didn't dare say anything. He could only watch helplessly and hope that there really weren't any Indians at all, or if there were that they would be content to wait for bigger game and let their little three-wagon train pass unmolested. But he couldn't believe it, no matter how hard he tried. Things were worse at the Overlook now. The snow was coming, and when it did, any prior options he had would be
abrogated. And after the snow, what? What then, when they were shut in and at the mercy of whatever might have only been toying with them before? (Come out here and take your medicine!) What then? REDRUM. He shivered in his bed and turned over again. He could read more now. Tomorrow maybe he would try to call Tony, he would try to make Tony show him exactly what REDRUM was and if there was any way he could prevent it. He would risk the nightmares. He had to know. Danny was still awake long after his parents' false sleep had become the real thing. He rolled in his bed, twisting the sheets, grappling with a problem years too big for him, awake in the night like a single sentinel on picket. And sometime after midnight, he slept too and then only the wind was awake, prying at the hotel and hooting in its gables under the bright gimlet gaze of the stars.
<< 22 >> IN THE TRUCK
I see a bad moon a-rising. I see trouble on the way. I see earthquakes and lightnin' I see bad times today. Don't go 'round tonight, It's bound to take your life, There's a bad moon on the rise.*
Someone had added a very old Buick car radio under the hotel truck's dashboard, and now, tinny and choked with static, the distinctive sound of John Fogerty's Creedence Clearwater Revival band came out of the speaker. Wendy and Danny were on their way down to Sidewinder. The day was clear and bright. Danny was turning Jack's orange library card over and over in his hands and seemed cheerful enough, but Wendy thought he looked drawn and tired, as if be hadn't been sleeping enough and was going on nervous energy alone. The song ended and the disc jockey came on. "Yeah, that's Creedence. And speakin of bad moon, it looks like it may be risin over the KMTX listening area before long, hard as it is to believe with the beautiful, springlike weather we've enjoyed for the last couple-three days. The KMTX Fearless Forecaster says high pressure will give way by one o'clock this afternoon to a widespread low- pressure area which is just gonna grind to a stop in our KMTX area, up where the air is rare. Temperatures will fall rapidly, and precipitation should start
around dusk. Elevations under seven thousand feet, including the metro-Denver area, can expect a mixture of sleet and snow, perhaps freezing on some roads, and nothin but snow up here, cuz. We're lookin at one to three inches below seven thousand and possible accumulations of six to ten inches in Central Colorado and on the Slope. The Highway Advisory Board says that if you're plannin to tour the mountains in your car this afternoon or tonight, you should remember that the chain law will be in effect. And don't go nowhere unless you have to. Remember," the announcer added jocularly, "that's how the Donners got into trouble. They just weren't as close to the nearest Seven-Eleven as they thought." A Clairol commercial came on, and Wendy reached down and snapped the radio off. "You mind?" "Huh-uh, that's okay." He glanced out at the sky, which was bright blue. "Guess Daddy picked just the right day to trim those hedge animals, didn't he?" "I guess he did," Wendy said. "Sure doesn't look much like snow, though," Danny added hopefully. "Getting cold feet?" Wendy asked. She was still thinking about that crack the disc jockey had made about the Donner Party. "Nah, I guess not." Well, she thought, this is the time. If you're going to bring it up, do it now or forever hold your peace. "Danny," she said, making her voice as casual as possible, "would you be happier if we went away from the Overlook? If we didn't stay the winter?" Danny looked down at his hands. "I guess so," he said. "Yeah. But it's Daddy's job." "Sometimes," she said carefully, "I get the idea that Daddy might be happier away from the Overlook, too." They passed a sign which read SIDEWINDER 18 mi. and then she took the truck cautiously around a hairpin and shifted up into second. She took no chances on these downgrades; they scared her silly. "Do you really think so?" Danny asked. He looked at her with interest for a moment and then shook his head. "No, I don't think so." "Why not?" "Because he's worried about us," Danny said, choosing his words carefully. It was hard to explain, he understood so little of it himself. He found himself harking back to an incident he had told Mr. Hallorann about, the big kid looking at department store TV sets and wanting to steal one. That had been distressing, but at least it had been clear what was going on, even to Danny, then little more than an infant. But grownups were always in a turmoil, every possible action muddied over by thoughts of the consequences, by self-doubt, by selfimage, by feelings of love and responsibility. Every possible choice seemed to have drawbacks, and sometimes he didn't understand why the drawbacks were drawbacks. It was very hard. "He thinks ..." Danny began again, and then looked at his mother quickly. She was watching the road, not looking at him, and he felt he could go on. "He thinks maybe we'll be lonely. And then he thinks that he likes it here and it's a good place for us. He loves us and doesn't want us to be lonely ... or sad ... but he thinks even if we are, it might be okay in the LONGRUN. Do you know LONGRUN?"
She nodded. "Yes, dear. I do." "He's worried that if we left he couldn't get another job. That we'd have to beg, or something." "Is that all?" "No, but the rest is all mixed up. Because he's different now." "Yes," she said, almost sighing. The grade eased a little and she shifted cautiously back to third gear. "I'm not making this up, Mommy. Honest to God." "I know that," she said, and smiled. "Did Tony tell you?" "No," he said. "I just know. That doctor didn't believe in Tony, did he?" "Never mind that doctor," she said. "I believe in Tony. I don't know what he is or who he is, if he's a part of you that's special or if he comes from ... somewhere outside, but I do believe in him, Danny. And if you ... he ... think we should go, we will. The two of us will go and be together with Daddy again in the spring." He looked at her with sharp hope. "Where? A motel?" "Hon, we couldn't afford a motel. It would have to be at my mother's." The hope in Danny's face died out. "I know — " he said, and stopped. "What?" "Nothing," he muttered. She shifted back to second as the grade steepened again. "No, doc, please don't say that. This talk is something we should have had weeks ago, I think. So please. What is it you know? I won't be mad. I can't be mad, because this is too important. Talk straight to me." "I know how you feel about her," Danny said, and sighed. "How do I feel?" "Bad," Danny said, and then rhyming, singsong, frightening her: "Bad. Sad. Mad. It's like she wasn't your mommy at all. Like she wanted to eat you." He looked at her, frightened. "And I don't like it there. She's always thinking about how she would be better for me than you. And how she could get me away from you. Mommy, I don't want to go there. I'd rather be at the Overlook than there." Wendy was shaken. Was it that bad between her and hermother? God, what hell for the boy if it was and he could really read their thoughts for each other. She suddenly felt more naked than naked, as if she had been caught in an obscene act. "All right," she said. "All right, Danny." "You're mad at me," he said in a small, near-to-tears voice. "No, I'm not. Really I'm not. I'm just sort of shook up." They were passing a SIDEWINDER 15 mi. sign, and Wendy relaxed a little. From here on in the road was better. "I want to ask you one more question, Danny. I want you to answer it as truthfully as you can. Will you do that?" "Yes, Mommy," he said, almost whispering. "Has your daddy been drinking again?" "No," he said, and smothered the two words that rose behind his lips after that simple negative: Not yet. Wendy relaxed a little more. She put a hand on Danny's jeans-clad leg and
squeezed it. "Your daddy has tried very hard," she said softly. "Because he loves us. And we love him, don't we?" He nodded gravely. Speaking almost to herself she went on: "He's not a perfect man, but he has tried ... Danny, he's tried so hard! When he ... stopped ... he went through a kind of hell. He's still going through it. I think if it hadn't been for us, he would have just let go. I want to do what's right. And I don't know. Should we go? Stay? It's like a choice between the fat and the fire." "I know." "Would you do something for me, doc?" "What?" "Try to make Tony come. Right now. Ask him if we're safe at the Overlook." "I already tried," Danny said slowly. "This morning." "What happened?" Wendy asked. "What did he say?" "He didn't come," Danny said. "Tony didn't come." And he suddenly burst into tears. "Danny," she said, alarmed. "Honey, don't do that. Please " The truck swerved across the double yellow line and she pulled it back, scared. "Don't take me to Gramma's," Danny said through his tears. "Please, Mommy, I don't want to go there, I want to stay with Daddy " "All right," she said softly. "All right, that's what we'll do." She took a Kleenex out of the pocket of her Western-style shirt and handed it to him. "We'll stay. And everything will be fine. Just fine."
* "Bad Moon Rising," by J. C. Fogerty, (c) 1969 Jondora Music, Berkeley, California. Used by permission. All rights reserved. International copyright secured.
<< 23 >>
IN THE PLAYGROUND
Jack came out onto the porch, tugging the tab of his zipper up under his chin, blinking into the bright air. In his left hand he was holding a battery-powered hedge-clipper. He tugged a fresh handkerchief out of his back pocket with his right hand, wiped his lips with it, and tucked it away. Snow, they had said on the radio. It was hard to believe, even though he could see the clouds building up on the far horizon. He started down the path to the topiary, switching the hedge-clipper over to the other hand. It wouldn't be a long job, he thought; a little touch-up would do it. The cold nights had surely stunted their growth. The rabbit's ears looked a little fuzzy, and two of the dog's legs had grown fuzzy green bonespurs, but
the lions and the buffalo looked fine. Just a little haircut would do the trick, and then let the snow come. The concrete path ended as abruptly as a diving board. He stepped off it and walked past the drained pool to the gravel path which wound through the hedge sculptures and into the playground itself. He walked over to the rabbit and pushed the button on the handle of the clippers. It hummed into quiet life. "Hi, Br'er Rabbit," Jack said. "How are you today? A little off the top and get some of the extra off your ears? Fine. Say, did you hear the one about the traveling salesman and the old lady with a pet poodle?" His voice sounded unnatural and stupid in his ears, and he stopped. It occurred to him that he didn't care much for these hedge animals. It had always seemed slightly perverted to him to clip and torture a plain old hedge into something that it wasn't. Along one of the highways in Vermont there had been a hedge billboard on a high slope overlooking the road, advertising some kind of ice cream. Making nature peddle ice cream, that was just wrong. It was grotesque. (You weren't hired to philosophize, Torrance.) Ah, that was true. So true. He clipped along the rabbit's ears, brushing a small litter of sticks and twigs off onto the grass. The hedge-clipper hummed in that low and rather disgustingly metallic way that all battery-powered appliances seem to have. The sun was brilliant but it held no warmth, and now it wasn't so hard to believe that snow was coming. Working quickly, knowing that to stop and think when you were at this kind of a task usually meant making a mistake, Jack touched up the rabbit's "face" (up this close it didn't look like a face at all, but he knew that at a distance of twenty paces or so light and shadow would seem to suggest one; that, and the viewer's imagination) and then zipped the clippers along its belly. That done, he shut the clippers off, walked down toward the playground, and then turned back abruptly to get it all at once, the entire rabbit. Yes, it looked all right. Well, he would do the dog next. "But if it was my hotel," he said, "I'd cut the whole damn bunch of you down." He would, too. Just cut them down and resod the lawn where they'd been and put in half a dozen small metal tables with gaily colored umbrellas. People could have cocktails on the Overlook's lawn in the summer sun. Sloe gin fizzes and margaritas and pink ladies and all those sweet tourist drinks. A rum and tonic, maybe. Jack took his handkerchief out of his back pocket and slowly rubbed his lips with it. "Come on, come on," he said softly. That was nothing to be thinking about. He was going to start back, and then some impulse made him change his mind and he went down to the playground instead. It was funny how you never knew kids, he thought. He and Wendy had expected Danny would love the playground; it had everything a kid could want. But Jack didn't think the boy had been down half a dozen times, if that. He supposed if there had been another kid to play with, it would have been different. The gate squeaked slightly as he let himself in, and then there was crushed gravel crunching under his feet. He went first to the playhouse, the perfect scale model of the Overlook itself. It came up to his lower thigh, just about Danny's height when he was standing up. Jack hunkered down and looked in the
third-floor windows. "The giant has come to eat you all up in your beds," he said hollowly. "Kiss your Triple A rating goodbye." But that wasn't funny, either. You could open the house simply by pulling it apart — it opened on a hidden hinge. The inside was a disappointment. The walls were painted, but the place was mostly hollow. But of course it would have to be, he told himself, or how else could the kids get inside? What play furniture might go with the place in the summer was gone, probably packed away in the equipment shed. He closed it up and heard the small click as the latch closed. He walked over to the slide, set the hedge-clipper down, and after a glance back at the driveway to make sure Wendy and Danny hadn't returned, he climbed to the top and sat down. This was the big kids' slide, but the fit was still uncomfortably tight for his grownup ass. How long had it been since he had been on a slide? Twenty years? It didn't seem possible it could be that long, it didn't feel that long, but it had to be that, or more. He could remember his old man taking him to the park in Berlin when he had been Danny's age, and he had done the whole bit slide, swings, teeter-totters, everything. He and the old man would have a hotdog lunch and buy peanuts from the man with the cart afterward. They would sit on a bench to eat them and dusky clouds of pigeons would flock around their feet. "Goddam scavenger birds," his dad would say, "don't you feed them, Jacky." But they would both end up feeding them, and giggling at the way they ran after the nuts, the greedy way they ran after the nuts. Jack didn't think the old man had ever taken his brothers to the park. Jack had been his favorite, and even so Jack had taken his lumps when the old man was drunk, which was a lot of the time. But Jack had loved him for as long as he was able, long after the rest of the family could only hate and fear him. He pushed off with his hands and went to the bottom, but the trip was unsatisfying. The slide, unused, had too much friction and no really pleasant speed could be built up. And his ass was just too big. His adult feet thumped into the slight dip where thousands of children's feet had landed before him. He stood up, brushed at the seat of his pants, and looked at the hedge-clipper. But instead of going back to it he went to the swings, which were also a disappointment. The chains had built up rust since the close of the season, and they squealed like things in pain. Jack promised himself he would oil them in the spring. You better stop it, he advised himself. You're not a kid anymore. You don't need this place to prove it. But he went on to the cement rings they were too small for him and he passed them up and then to the security fence which marked the edge of the grounds. He curled his fingers through the links and looked through, the sun crosshatching shadow-lines on his face like a man behind bars. He recognized the similarity himself and he shook the chain link, put a harried expression on his face, and whispered: "Lemme outta here! Lemme outta here!" But for the third time, not funny. It was time to get back to work. That was when he heard the sound behind him. He turned around quickly, frowning, embarrassed, wondering if someone had seen him fooling around down here in kiddie country. His eyes ticked off the slides,
the opposing angles of the seesaws, the swings in which only the wind sat. Beyond all that to the gate and the low fence that divided the playground from the lawn and the topiary the lions gathered protectively around the path, the rabbit bent over as if to crop grass, the buffalo ready to charge, the crouching dog. Beyond them, the putting green and the hotel itself. From here he could even see the raised lip of the roque court on the Overlook's western side. Everything was just as it had been. So why had the flesh of his face and hands begun to creep, and why had the hair along the back of his neck begun to stand up, as if the flesh back there had suddenly tightened? He squinted up at the hotel again, but that was no answer. It simply stood there, its windows dark, a tiny thread of smoke curling from the chimney, coming from the banked fire in the lobby. (Buster, you better get going or they're going to come back and wonder if you were doing anything all the while.) Sure, get going. Because the snow was coming and he had to get the damn hedges trimmed. It was part of the agreement. Besides, they wouldn't dare (Who wouldn't? What wouldn't? Dare do what?) He began to walk back toward the hedge-clipper at the foot of the big kids' slide, and the sound of his feet crunching on the crushed stone seemed abnormally loud. Now the flesh on his testicles had begun to creep too, and his buttocks felt hard and heavy, like stone. (Jesus, what is this?) He stopped by the hedge-clipper, but made no move to pick it up. Yes, there was something different. In the topiary. And it was so simple, so easy to see, that he just wasn't picking it up. Come on, he scolded himself, you just trimmed the fucking rabbit, so what's the (that's it) His breath stopped in his throat. The rabbit was down on all fours, cropping grass. Its belly was against the ground. But not ten minutes ago it had been up on its hind legs, of course it had been, he had trimmed its ears ... and its belly. His eyes darted to the dog. When he had come down the path it had been sitting up, as if begging for a sweet. Now it was crouched, head tilted, the clipped wedge of mouth seeming to snarl silently. And the lions — (oh no, baby, oh no, uh-uh, no way) the lions were closer to the path. The two on his right had subtly changed positions, had drawn closer together. The tail of the one on the left now almost jutted out over the path. When he had come past them and through the gate, that lion had been on the right and he was quite sure its tail had been curled around it. They were no longer protecting the path; they were blocking it. Jack put his hand suddenly over his eyes and then took it away. The picture didn't change. A soft sigh, too quiet to be a groan, escaped him. In his drinking days he had always been afraid of something like this happening. But when you were a heavy drinker you called it the DTs — good old Ray Milland in Lost Weekend, seeing the bugs coming out of the walls. What did you call it when you were cold sober? The question was meant to be rhetorical, but his mind answered it
(you call it insanity) nevertheless. Staring at the hedge animals, he realized something had changed while he had his hand over his eyes. The dog had moved closer. No longer crouching, it seemed to be in a running posture, haunches flexed, one front leg forward, the other back. The hedge mouth yawned wider, the pruned sticks looked sharp and vicious. And now he fancied he could see faint eye indentations in the greenery as well. Looking at him. Why do they have to be trimmed? he thought hysterically. They're perfect. Another soft sound. He involuntarily backed up a step when he looked at the lions. One of the two on the right seemed to have drawn slightly ahead of the other. Its head was lowered. One paw had stolen almost all the way to the low fence. Dear God, what next? (next it leaps over and gobbles you up like something in an evil nursery fable) It was like that game they had played when they were kids, red light. One person was "it," and while he turned his back and counted to ten, the other players crept forward. When "it" got to ten, he whirled around and if he caught anyone moving, they were out of the game. The others remained frozen in statue postures until "it" turned his back and counted again. They got closer and closer, and at last, somewhere between five and ten, you would feel a hand on your back... Gravel rattled on the path. He jerked his head around to look at the dog and it was halfway down the pathway, just behind the lions now, its mouth wide and yawning. Before, it had only been a hedge clipped in the general shape of a dog, something that lost all definition when you got up close to it. But now Jack could see that it had been clipped to look like a German shepherd, and shepherds could be mean. You could train shepherds to kill. A low rustling sound. The lion on the left had advanced all the way to the fence now; its muzzle was touching the boards. It seemed to be grinning at him. Jack backed up another two steps. His head was thudding crazily and he could feel the dry rasp of his breath in his throat. Now the buffalo had moved, circling to the right, behind and around the rabbit. The head was lowered, the green hedge horns pointing at him. The thing was, you couldn't watch all of them. Not all at once. He began to make a whining sound, unaware in his locked concentration that he was making any sound at all. His eyes darted from one hedge creature to the next, trying to see them move. The wind gusted, making a hungry rattling sound in the close-matted branches. What kind of sound would there be if they got him? But of course he knew. A snapping, rending, breaking sound. It would be (no no NO NO I WILL NOT BELIEVE THIS NOT AT ALL!) He clapped his hands over his eyes, clutching at his hair, his forehead, his throbbing temples. And he stood like that for a long time, dread building until he could stand it no longer and he pulled his hands away with a cry. By the putting green the dog was sitting up, as if begging for a scrap. The buffalo was gazing with disinterest back toward the roque court, as it had been when Jack had come down with the clippers. The rabbit stood on its hind legs,
ears up to catch the faintest sound, freshly clipped belly exposed. The lions, rooted into place, stood beside the path. He stood frozen for a long time, the harsh breath in his throat finally slowing. He reached for his cigarettes and shook four of them out onto the gravel. He stooped down and picked them up, groped for them, never taking his eyes from the topiary for fear the animals would begin to move again. He picked them up, stuffed three carelessly back into the pack, and lit the fourth. After two deep drags he dropped it and crushed it out. He went to the hedge-clipper and picked it up. "I'm very tired," be said, and now it seemed okay to talk out loud. It didn't seem crazy at all. "I've been under a strain. The wasps ... the play ... Al calling me like that. But it's all right." He began to trudge back up to the hotel. Part of his mind tugged fretfully at him, tried to make him detour around the hedge animals, but he went directly up the gravel path, through them. A faint breeze rattled through them, that was all. He had imagined the whole thing. He had had a bad scare but it was over now. In the Overlook's kitchen he paused to take two Excedrin and then went downstairs and looked at papers until he heard the dim sound of the hotel truck rattling into the driveway. He went up to meet them. He felt all right. He saw no need to mention his hallucination. He'd had a bad scare but it was over now.
<< 24 >> SNOW
It was dusk. They stood on the porch in the fading light, Jack in the middle, his left arm around Danny's shoulders and his right arm around Wendy's waist. Together they watched as the decision was taken out of their hands. The sky had been completely clouded over by two-thirty and it had begun to snow an hour later, and this time you didn't need a weatherman to tell you it was serious snow, no flurry that was going to melt or blow away when the evening wind started to whoop. At first it had fallen in perfectly straight lines, building up a snowcover that coated everything evenly, but now, an hour after it had started, the wind had begun to blow from the northwest and the snow had begun to drift against the porch and the sides of the Overlook's driveway. Beyond the grounds the highway had disappeared under an even blanket of white. The hedge animals were also gone, but when Wendy and Danny had gotten home, she had commended him on the good job he had done. Do you think so? he had asked, and said no more. Now the hedges were buried under amorphous white cloaks. Curiously, all of them were thinking different thoughts but feeling the same
emotion: relief. The bridge had been crossed. "Will it ever be spring?" Wendy murmured. Jack squeezed her tighter. "Before you know it. What do you say we go in and have some supper? It's cold out here." She smiled. All afternoon Jack had seemed distant and ... well, odd. Now he sounded more like his normal self. "Fine by me. How about you, Danny?" "Sure." So they went in together, leaving the wind to build to the low-pitched scream that would go on all night a sound they would get to know well. Flakes of snow swirled and danced across the porch. The Overlook faced it as it had for nearly three quarters of a century, its darkened windows now bearded with snow, indifferent to the fact that it was now cut off from the world. Or possibly it was pleased with the prospect. Inside its shell the three of them went about their early evening routine, like microbes trapped in the intestine of a monster.
<< 25 >>
INSIDE 217
A week and a half later two feet of snow lay white and crisp and even on the grounds of the Overlook Hotel. The hedge menagerie was buried up to its haunches; the rabbit, frozen on its hind legs, seemed to be rising from a white pool. Some of the drifts were over five feet deep. The wind was constantly changing them, sculpting them into sinuous, dunelike shapes. Twice Jack had snowshoed clumsily around to the equipment shed for his shovel to clear the porch, the third time he shrugged, simply cleared a path through the towering drift lying against the door, and let Danny amuse himself by sledding to the right and left of the path. The truly heroic drifts lay against the Overlook's west side; some of them towered to a height of twenty feet, and beyond them the ground was scoured bare to the grass by the constant windflow. The first-floor windows were covered, and the view from the dining room which Jack had so admired on closing day was now no more exciting than a view of a blank movie screen. Their phone had been out for the last eight days, and the CB radio in Ullman's office was now their only communications link with the outside world. It snowed every day now, sometimes only brief flurries that powdered the glittering snow crust, sometimes for real, the low whistle of the wind cranking up to a womanish shriek that made the old hotel rock and groan alarmingly even in its deep cradle of snow. Night temperatures had not gotten above 10°, and although the thermometer by the kitchen service entrance sometimes got as high as 25° in the early afternoons, the steady knife edge of the wind made it uncomfortable to go out without a ski mask. But they all did go out on the days
when the sun shone, usually wearing two sets of clothing and mittens on over their gloves. Getting out was almost a compulsive thing; the hotel was circled with the double track of Danny's Flexible Flyer. The permutations were nearly endless: Danny riding while his parents pulled; Daddy riding and laughing while Wendy and Danny tried to pull (it was just possible for them to pull him on the icy crust, and flatly impossible when powder covered it); Danny and Mommy riding; Wendy riding by herself while her menfolk pulled and puffed white vapor like drayhorses, pretending she was heavier than she was. They laughed a great deal on these sled excursions around the house, but the whooping and impersonal voice of the wind, so huge and hollowly sincere, made their laughter seem tinny and forced. They had seen caribou tracks in the snow and once the caribou themselves, a group of five standing motionlessly below the security fence. They had all taken turns with Jack's Zeiss-Ikon binoculars to see them better, and looking at them had given Wendy a weird, unreal feeling: they were standing leg-deep in the snow that covered the highway, and it came to her that between now and the spring thaw, the road belonged more to the caribou than it did to them. Now the things that men had made up here were neutralized. The caribou understood that, she believed. She had put the binoculars down and had said something about starting lunch and in the kitchen she had cried a little, trying to rid herself of the awful pent-up feeling that sometimes fell on her like a large, pressing hand over her heart. She thought of the caribou. She thought of the wasps Jack had put out on the service entrance platform, under the Pyrex bowl, to freeze. There were plenty of snowshoes hung from nails in the equipment shed, and Jack found a pair to fit each of them, although Danny's pair was quite a bit outsized. Jack did well with them. Although he had not snowshoed since his boyhood in Berlin, New Hampshire, he retaught himself quickly. Wendy didn't care much for it — even fifteen minutes of tramping around on the outsized laced paddles made her legs and ankles ache outrageously but Danny was intrigued and working hard to pick up the knack. He still fell often, but Jack was pleased with his progress. He said that by February Danny would be skipping circles around both of them.
* * *
This day was overcast, and by noon the sky had already begun to spit snow. The radio was promising another eight to twelve inches and chanting hosannas to Precipitation, that great god of Colorado skiers. Wendy, sitting in the bedroom and knitting a scarf, thought to herself that she knew exactly what the skiers could do with all that snow. She knew exactly where they could put it. Jack was in the cellar. He had gone down to check the furnace and boiler — such checks had become a ritual with him since the snow had closed them in — and after satisfying himself that everything was going well he had wandered through the arch, screwed the lightbulb on, and had seated himself in an old and cobwebby camp chair he had found. He was leafing through the old records and papers, constantly wiping his mouth with his handkerchief as he did so. Confinement had leached his skin of its autumn tan, and as he sat hunched over the yellowed, crackling sheets, his reddish-blond hair tumbling untidily over his forehead, he
looked slightly lunatic. He had found some odd things tucked in among the invoices, bills of lading, receipts. Disquieting things. A bloody strip of sheeting. A dismembered teddy bear that seemed to have been slashed to pieces. A crumpled sheet of violet ladies' stationery, a ghost of perfume still clinging to it beneath the musk of age, a note begun and left unfinished in faded blue ink: "Dearest Tommy, I can't think so well up here as I'd hoped, about us I mean, of course, who else? Ha. Ha. Things keep getting in the way. I've had strange dreams about things going bump in the night, can you believe that and" That was all. The note was dated June 27, 1934. He found a hand puppet that seemed to be either a witch or a warlock ... something with long teeth and a pointy hat, at any rate. It had been improbably tucked between a bundle of natural-gas receipts and a bundle of receipts for Vichy water. And something that seemed to be a poem, scribbled on the back of a menu in dark pencil: "Medoc/are you here?/I've been sleepwalking again, my dear./The plants are moving under the rug." No date on the menu, and no name on the poem, if it was a poem. Elusive, but fascinating. It seemed to him that these things were like pieces in a jigsaw, things that would eventually fit together if he could find the right linking pieces. And so he kept looking, jumping and wiping his lips every time the furnace roared into life behind him.
* * *
Danny was standing outside Room 217 again. The passkey was in his pocket. He was staring at the door with a kind of drugged avidity, and his upper body seemed to twitch and jiggle beneath his flannel shirt. He was humming softly and tunelessly. He hadn't wanted to come here, not after the fire hose. He was scared to come here. He was scared that he had taken the passkey again, disobeying his father. He had wanted to come here. Curiosity (killed the cat; satisfaction brought him back) was like a constant fishhook in his brain, a kind of nagging siren song that would not be appeased. And hadn't Mr. Hallorann said, "I don't think there's anything here that can hurt you"? (You promised.) (Promises were made to be broken.) He jumped at that. It was as if that thought had come from outside, insectile, buzzing, softly cajoling. (Promises were made to be broken my dear redrum, to be broken. splintered. shattered. hammered apart. FORE!) His nervous humming broke into low, atonal song: "Lou, Lou, skip to m' Lou, skip to m' Lou my daaarlin..." Hadn't Mr. Hallorann been right? Hadn't that been, in the end, the reason why he had kept silent and allowed the snow to close them in? Just close your eyes and it will be gone. What he had seen in the Presidential Sweet had gone away. And the snake had only been a fire hose that had fallen onto the rug. Yes, even the blood in the Presidential Sweet had been harmless, something old, something that had happened long before he was born or even thought of, something that was done with. Like a
movie that only he could see. There was nothing, really nothing, in this hotel that could hurt him, and if he had to prove that to himself by going into this room, shouldn't he do so? "Lou, Lou, skip to m'Lou ..." (Curiosity killed the cat my dear redrum, redrum my dear, satisfaction brought him back safe and sound, from toes to crown; from head to ground he was safe and sound. He knew that those things) (are like scary pictures, they can't hurt you, but oh my god) (what big teeth you have grandma and is that a wolf in a BLUEBEARD suit or a BLUEBEARD in a wolf suit and i'm so) (glad you asked because curiosity killed that cat and it was the HOPE of satisfaction that brought him) up the hall, treading softly over the blue and twisting jungle carpet. He had stopped by the fire extinguisher, had put the brass nozzle back in the frame, and then had poked it repeatedly with his finger, heart thumping, whispering: "Come on and hurt me. Come on and hurt me, you cheap prick. Can't do it, can you? Huh? You're nothing but a cheap fire hose. Can't do nothin but lie there. Come on, come on!" He had felt insane with bravado. And nothing had happened. It was only a hose after all, only canvas and brass, you could hack it to pieces and it would never complain, never twist and jerk and bleed green slime all over the blue carpet, because it was only a hose, not a nose and not a rose, not glass buttons or satin bows, not a snake in a sleepy doze ... and he had hurried on, had hurried on because he was ("late, I'm late," said the white rabbit.) the white rabbit. Yes. Now there was a white rabbit out by the playground, once it had been green but now it was white, as if something had shocked it repeatedly on the snowy, windy nights and turned it old ... Danny took the passkey from his pocket and slid it into the lock. "Lou, Lou ..." (the white rabbit had been on its way to a croquet party to the Red Queen's croquet party storks for mallets hedgehogs for balls) He touched the key, let his fingers wander over it. His head felt dry and sick. He turned the key and the tumblers thumped back smoothly. (OFF WITH HIS HEAD! OFF WITH HIS HEAD! OFF WITH HIS HEAD!) (this game isn't croquet though the mallets are too short this game is) (WHACK-BOOM! Straight through the wicket.) (OFF WITH HIS HEEEEEAAAAAAAD —) Danny pushed the door open. It swung smoothly, without a creak. He was standing just outside a large combination bedsitting room, and although the snow had not reached up this far the highest drifts were still a foot below the second-floor windows the room was dark because Daddy had closed all the shutters on the western exposure two weeks ago. He stood in the doorway, fumbled to his right, and found the switch plate. Two bulbs in an overhead cut-glass fixture came on. Danny stepped further in and looked around. The rug was deep and soft, a quiet rose color. Soothing. A double bed with a white coverlet. A writing desk (Pray tell me: Why is a raven like a writing desk?) by the large shuttered window. During the season the Constant Writer
(having a wonderful time, wish you were fear) would have a pretty view of the mountains to describe to the folks back home. He stepped further in. Nothing here, nothing at all. Only an empty room, cold because Daddy was heating the east wing today. A bureau. A closet, its door open to reveal a clutch of hotel hangers, the kind you can't steal. A Gideon Bible on an endtable. To his left was the bathroom door, a full-length mirror on it reflecting his own white-faced image. That door was ajar and -- He watched his double nod slowly. Yes, that's where it was, whatever it was. In there. In the bathroom. His double walked forward, as if to escape the glass. It put its hand out, pressed it against his own. Then it fell away at an angle as the bathroom door swung open. He looked in. A long room, old-fashioned, like a Pullman car. Tiny white hexagonal tiles on the floor. At the far end, a toilet with the lid up. At the right, a washbasin and another mirror above it, the kind that hides a medicine cabinet. To the left, a huge white tub on claw feet, the shower curtain pulled closed. Danny stepped into the bathroom and walked toward the tub dreamily, as if propelled from outside himself, as if this whole thing were one of the dreams Tony had brought him, that he would perhaps see something nice when he pulled the shower curtain back, something Daddy had forgotten or Mommy had lost, something that would make them both happy -- So he pulled the shower curtain back. The woman in the tub had been dead for a long time. She was bloated and purple, her gas-filled belly rising out of the cold, ice-rimmed water like some fleshy island. Her eyes were fixed on Danny's, glassy and huge, like marbles. She was grinning, her purple lips pulled back in a grimace. Her breasts lolled. Her pubic hair floated. Her hands were frozen on the knurled porcelain sides of the tub like crab claws. Danny shrieked. But the sound never escaped his lips; turning inward and inward, it fell down in his darkness like a stone in a well. He took a single blundering step backward, hearing his heels clack on the white hexagonal tiles, and at the same moment his urine broke, spilling effortlessly out of him. The woman was sitting up. Still grinning, her huge marble eyes fixed on him, she was sitting up. Her dead palms made squittering noises on the porcelain. Her breasts swayed like ancient cracked punching bags. There was the minute sound of breaking ice shards. She was not breathing. She was a corpse, and dead long years. Danny turned and ran. Bolting through the bathroom door, his eyes starting from their sockets, his hair on end like the hair of a hedgehog about to be turned into a sacrificial (croquet? or roque?) ball, his mouth open and soundless. He ran full-tilt into the outside door of 217, which was now closed. He began hammering on it, far beyond realizing that it was unlocked, and he had only to turn the knob to let himself out. His mouth pealed forth deafening screams that were beyond human auditory range. He could only hammer on the door and hear the dead woman coming for him, bloated belly, dry hair, outstretched hands something that had lain slain in that tub for perhaps years, embalmed there in magic.
The door would not open, would not, would not, would not. And then the voice of Dick Hallorann came to him, so sudden and unexpected, so calm, that his locked vocal cords opened and he began to cry weakly not with fear but with blessed relief. (I don't think they can hurt you ... they're like pictures in a book ... close your eyes and they'll be gone.) His eyelids snapped down. His hands curled into balls. His shoulders hunched with the effort of his concentration: (Nothing there nothing there not there at all NOTHING THERE THERE IS NOTHING!) Time passed. And he was just beginning to relax, just beginning to realize that the door must be unlocked and he could go, when the years-damp, bloated, fish-smelling hands closed softly around his throat and he was turned implacably around to stare into that dead and purple face.
P A R T F O U R — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — --
Snowbound
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — --
<< 26 >> DREAMLAND
Knitting made her sleepy. Today even Bartok would have made her sleepy, and it wasn't Bartok on the little phonograph, it was Bach. Her hands grew slower and slower, and at the time her son was making the acquaintance of Room 217's long- term resident, Wendy was asleep with her knitting on her lap. The yarn and needles rose in the slow time of her breathing. Her sleep was deep and she did not dream.
* * *
Jack Torrance had fallen asleep too, but his sleep was light and uneasy, populated by dreams that seemed too vivid to be mere dreams — they were certainly more vivid than any dreams he had ever had before. His eyes had begun to get heavy as he leafed through packets of milk bills, a hundred to a packet, seemingly tens of thousands all together. Yet he gave each one a cursory glance, afraid that by not being thorough he might miss exactly the piece of Overlookiana he needed to make the mystic connection that he was sure must be here somewhere. He felt like a man with a power cord in one hand, groping around a dark and unfamiliar room for a socket. If he could find it he would be rewarded with a view of wonders. He had come to grips with Al Shockley's phone call and his request; his strange experience in the playground had helped him to do that. That had been too damned close to some kind of breakdown, and he was convinced that it was his mind in revolt against Al's high-goddam-handed request that he chuck his book project. It had maybe been a signal that his own sense of self-respect could only be pushed so far before disintegrating entirely. He would write the book. If it meant the end of his association with Al Shockley, that would have to be. He would write the hotel's biography, write it straight from the shoulder, and the introduction would be his hallucination that the topiary animals had moved. The title would be uninspired but workable: Strange Resort, The Story of the Overlook Hotel. Straight from the shoulder, yes, but it would not be written vindictively, in any effort to get back at Al or Stuart Ullman or George Hatfield or his father (miserable, bullying drunk that he had been) or anyone else, for that matter. He would write it because the Overlook had enchanted him — could any other explanation be so simple or so true? He would write it for the reason he felt that all great literature, fiction and nonfiction, was written: truth comes out, in the end it always comes out. He would write it because he felt he had to. Five hundred gals whole milk. One hundred gals skim milk. Pd. Billed to acc't. Three hundred pts orange juice. Pd. He slipped down further in his chair, still holding a clutch of the receipts, but his eyes no longer looking at what was printed there. They had come unfocused. His lids were slow and heavy. His mind had slipped from the Overlook to his father, who had been a male nurse at the Berlin Community Hospital. Big man. A fat man who had towered to six feet two inches, he had been taller than Jack even when Jack got his full growth of six feet even — not that the old man had still been around then. "Runt of the litter," he would say, and then cuff Jack lovingly and laugh. There had been two other brothers, both taller than their father, and Becky, who at five-ten had only been two inches shorter than Jack and taller than he for most of their childhood. His relationship with his father had been like the unfurling of some flower of beautiful potential, which, when wholly opened, turned out to be blighted inside. Until he had been seven he had loved the tall, big-bellied man uncritically and strongly in spite of the spankings, the black-and-blues, the occasional black eye. He could remember velvet summer nights, the house quiet, oldest brother Brett
out with his girl, middle brother Mike studying something, Becky and their mother in the living room, watching something on the balky old TV; and he would sit in the hall dressed in a pajama singlet and nothing else, ostensibly playing with his trucks, actually waiting for the moment when the silence would be broken by the door swinging open with a large bang, the bellow of his father's welcome when he saw Jacky was waiting, his own happy squeal in answer as this big man came down the hall, his pink scalp glowing beneath his crewcut in the glow of the hall light. In that light he always looked like some soft and flapping oversized ghost in his hospital whites, the shirt always untucked (and sometimes bloody), the pants cuffs drooping down over the black shoes. His father would sweep him into his arms and Jacky would be propelled deliriously upward, so fast it seemed he could feel air pressure settling against his skull like a cap made out of lead, up and up, both of them crying "Elevator! Elevator!"; and there had been nights when his father in his drunkenness had not stopped the upward lift of his slabmuscled arms soon enough and Jacky had gone right over his father's flattopped head like a human projectile to crash-land on the hall floor behind his dad. But on other nights his father would only sweep him into a giggling ecstasy, through the zone of air where beer hung around his father's face like a mist of raindrops, to be twisted and turned and shaken like a laughing rag, and finally to be set down on his feet, hiccupping with reaction. The receipts slipped from his relaxing hand and seesawed down through the air to land lazily on the floor; his eyelids, which had settled shut with his father's image tattooed on their backs like stereopticon images, opened a little bit and then slipped back down again. He twitched a little. Consciousness, like the receipts, like autumn aspen leaves, seesawed lazily downward. That had been the first phase of his relationship with his father, and as it was drawing to its end he had become aware that Becky and his brothers, all of them older, hated the father and that their mother, a nondescript woman who rarely spoke above a mutter, only suffered him because her Catholic upbringing said that she must. In those days it had not seemed strange to Jack that the father won all his arguments with his children by use of his fists, and it had not seemed strange that his own love should go hand-in-hand with his fear: fear of the elevator game which might end in a splintering crash on any given night; fear that his father's bearish good humor on his day off might suddenly change to boarish bellowing and the smack of his "good right hand"; and sometimes, he remembered, he had even been afraid that his father's shadow might fall over him while he was at play. It was near the end of this phase that he began to notice that Brett never brought his dates home, or Mike and Becky their chums. Love began to curdle at nine, when his father put his mother into the hospital with his cane. He had begun to carry the cane a year earlier, when a car accident had left him lame. After that he was never without it, long and black and thick and gold-headed. Now, dozing, Jack's body twitched in a remembered cringe at the sound it made in the air, a murderous swish, and its heavy crack against the wall ... or against flesh. He had beaten their mother for no good reason at all, suddenly and without warning. They had been at the supper table. The cane had been standing by his chair. It was a Sunday night, the end of a three-day weekend for Daddy, a weekend which he had boozed away in his usual
inimitable style. Roast chicken. Peas. Mashed potatoes. Daddy at the head of the table, his plate heaped high, snoozing or nearly snoozing. His mother passing plates. And suddenly Daddy had been wide awake, his eyes set deeply into their fat eyesockets, glittering with a kind of stupid, evil petulance. They flickered from one member of the family to the next, and the vein in the center of his forehead was standing out prominently, always a bad sign. One of his large freckled hands had dropped to the gold knob of his cane, caressing it. He said something about coffee ¯ to this day Jack was sure it had been "coffee" that his father said. Momma had opened her mouth to answer and then the cane was whickering through the air, smashing against her face. Blood spurted from her nose. Becky screamed. Momma's spectacles dropped into her gravy. The cane had been drawn back, had come down again, this time on top of her head, splitting the scalp. Momma had dropped to the floor. He had been out of his chair and around to where she lay dazed on the carpet, brandishing the cane, moving with a fat man's grotesque speed and agility, little eyes flashing, jowls quivering as he spoke to her just as he had always spoken to his children during such outbursts. "Now. Now by Christ. I guess you'll take your medicine now. Goddam puppy. Whelp. Come on and take your medicine." The cane had gone up and down on her seven more times before Brett and Mike got hold of him, dragged him away, wrestled the cane out of his hand. Jack (little Jacky now he was little Jacky now dozing and mumbling on a cobwebby camp chair while the furnace roared into hollow life behind him) knew exactly how many blows it had been because each soft whump against his mother's body had been engraved on his memory like the irrational swipe of a chisel on stone. Seven whumps. No more, no less. He and Becky crying, unbelieving, looking at their mother's spectacles lying in her mashed potatoes, one cracked lens smeared with gravy. Brett shouting at Daddy from the back hall, telling him he'd kill him if he moved. And Daddy saying over and over: "Damn little puppy. Damn little whelp. Give me my cane, you damn little pup. Give it to me." Brett brandishing it hysterically, saying yes, yes, I'll give it to you, just you move a little bit and I'll give you all you want and two extra. I'll give you plenty. Momma getting slowly to her feet, dazed, her face already puffed and swelling like an old tire with too much air in it, bleeding in four or five different places, and she had said a terrible thing, perhaps the only thing Momma had ever said which Jacky could recall word for word: "Who's got the newspaper? Your daddy wants the funnies. Is it raining yet?" And then she sank to her knees again, her hair hanging in her puffed and bleeding face. Mike calling the doctor, babbling into the phone. Could he come right away? It was their mother. No, he couldn't say what the trouble was, not over the phone, not over a party line he couldn't. Just come. The doctor came and took Momma away to the hospital where Daddy had worked all of his adult life. Daddy, sobered up some (or perhaps only with the stupid cunning of any hardpressed animal), told the doctor she had fallen downstairs. There was blood on the tablecloth because he had tried to wipe her dear face with it. Had her glasses flown all the way through the living room and into the dining room to land in her mashed potatoes and gravy? the doctor asked with a kind of horrid, grinning sarcasm. Is that what happened, Mark? I have heard of folks who can get a radio station on their gold fillings and I have seen a man get shot between the eyes and live to tell
about it, but that is a new one on me. Daddy had merely shook his head and said he didn't know; they must have fallen off her face when he brought her through the dining room. The four children had been stunned to silence by the calm stupendousness of the lie. Four days later Brett quit his job in the mill and joined the Army. Jack had always felt it was not just the sudden and irrational beating his father had administered at the dinner table but the fact that, in the hospital, their mother had corroborated their father's story while holding the hand of the parish priest. Revolted, Brett had left them to whatever might come. He had been killed in Dong Ho province in 1965, the year when Jack Torrance, undergraduate, had joined the active college agitation to end the war. He had waved his brother's bloody shirt at rallies that were increasingly well attended, but it was not Brett's face that hung before his eyes when he spoke it was the face of his mother, a dazed, uncomprehending face, his mother saying: "Who's got the newspaper?" Mike escaped three years later when Jack was twelve he went to UNH on a hefty Merit Scholarship. A year after that their father died of a sudden, massive stroke which occurred while he was prepping a patient for surgery. He had collapsed in his flapping and untucked hospital whites, dead possibly even before he hit the industrial black-and-red hospital tiles, and three days later the man who had dominated Jacky's life, the irrational white ghost-god, was under ground. The stone read Mark Anthony Torrance, Loving Father. To that Jack would have added one line: He Knew How to Play Elevator. There had been a great lot of insurance money. There are people who collect insurance as compulsively as others collect coins and stamps, and Mark Torrance had been that type. The insurance money came in at the same time the monthly policy payments and liquor bills stopped. For five years they had been rich. Nearly rich ... In his shallow, uneasy sleep his face rose before him as if in a glass, his face but not his face, the wide eyes and innocent bowed mouth of a boy sitting in the ball with his trucks, waiting for his daddy, waiting for the white ghost- god, waiting for the elevator to rise up with dizzying, exhilarating speed through the salt-and-sawdust mist of exhaled taverns, waiting perhaps for it to go crashing down, spilling old clocksprings out of his ears while his daddy roared with laughter, and it (transformed into Danny's face, so much like his own had been, his eyes had been light blue while Danny's were cloudy gray, but the lips still made a bow and the complexion was fair; Danny in his study, wearing training pants, all his papers soggy and the fine misty smell of beer rising ... a dreadful batter all in ferment, rising on the wings of yeast, the breath of taverns ... snap of bone ... his own voice, mewling drunkenly Danny, you okay doc? ... Oh God oh God your poor sweet arm ... and that face transformed into) (momma's dazed face rising up from below the table, punched and bleeding, and momma was saying) (" — from your father. I repeat, an enormously important announcement from your father. Please stay tuned or tune immediately to the Happy Jack frequency. Repeat, tune immediately to the Happy Hour frequency. I repeat — ") A slow dissolve. Disembodied voices echoing up to him as if along an endless,
cloudy hallway. (Things keep getting in the way, dear Tommy ...) (Medoc, are you here? I've been sleepwalking again, my dear. It's the inhuman monsters that I fear ...) ("Excuse me, Mr. Ullman, but isn't this the...") ... office, with its file cabinets, Ullman's big desk, a blank reservations book for next year already in place never misses a trick, that Ullman — all the keys hanging neatly on their hooks (except for one, which one, which key, passkey-passkey, passkey, who's got the passkey? if we went upstairs perhaps we'd see) and the big two-way radio on its shelf. He snapped it on. CB transmissions coming in short, crackly bursts. He switched the band and dialed across bursts of music, news, a preacher haranguing a softly moaning congregation, a weather report. And another voice which he dialed back to. It was his father's voice. " — kill him. You have to kill him, Jacky, and her, too. Because a real artist must suffer. Because each man kills the thing he loves. Because they'll always be conspiring against you, trying to hold you back and drag you down. Right this minute that boy of yours is in where he shouldn't be. Trespassing. That's what he's doing. He's a goddam little pup. Cane him for it, Jacky, cane him within an inch of his life. Have a drink Jacky my boy, and we'll play the elevator game. Then I'll go with you while you give him his medicine. I know you can do it, of course you can. You must kill him. You have to kill him, Jacky, and her, too. Because a real artist must suffer. Because each man — " His father's voice, going up higher and higher, becoming something maddening, not human at all, something squealing and petulant and maddening, the voice of the Ghost-God, the Pig-God, coming dead at him out of the radio and "No!" he screamed back. "You're dead, you're in your grave, you're not in me at all!" Because he had cut all the father out of him and it was not right that he should come back creeping through this hotel two thousand miles from the New England town where his father had lived and died. He raised the radio up and brought it down, and it smashed on the floor spilling old clocksprings and tubes like the result of some crazy elevator game gone awry, making his father's voice gone, leaving only his voice, Jack's voice, Jacky's voice, chanting in the cold reality of the office: " — dead, you're dead, you're dead!" And the startled sound of Wendy's feet hitting the floor over his head, and Wendy's startled, frightened voice: "Jack? Jack!" He stood, blinking down at the shattered radio. Now there was only the snowmobile in the equipment shed to link them to the outside world. He put his hands over his eyes and clutched at his temples. He was getting a headache.
<< 27 >>
CATATONIC
Wendy ran down the hall in her stocking feet and ran down the main stairs to the lobby two at a time. She didn't look up at the carpeted flight that led to the second floor, but if she had, she would have seen Danny standing at the top of them, still and silent, his unfocused eyes directed out into indifferent space, his thumb in his mouth, the collar and shoulders of his shirt damp. There were puffy bruises on his neck and just below his chin. Jack's cries had ceased, but that did nothing to ease her fear. Ripped out of her sleep by his voice, raised in that old hectoring pitch she remembered so well, she still felt that she was dreaming — but another part knew she was awake, and that terrified her more. She half-expected to burst into the office and find him standing over Danny's sprawled-out body, drunk and confused. She pushed through the door and Jack was standing there, rubbing at his temples with his fingers. His face was ghostwhite. The two-way CB radio lay at his feet in a sprinkling of broken glass. "Wendy?" he asked uncertainly. "Wendy — ?" The bewilderment seemed to grow and for a moment she saw his true face, the one he ordinarily kept so well hidden, and it was a face of desperate unhappiness, the face of an animal caught in a snare beyond its ability to decipher and render harmless. Then the muscles began to work, began to writhe under the skin, the mouth began to tremble infirmly, the Adam's apple began to rise and fall. Her own bewilderment and surprise were overlaid by shock: he was going to cry. She had seen him cry before, but never since he stopped drinking ... and never in those days unless he was very drunk and pathetically remorseful. He was a tight man, drum-tight, and his loss of control frightened her all over again. He came toward her, the tears brimming over his lower lids now, his head shaking involuntarily as if in a fruitless effort to ward off this emotional storm, and his chest drew in a convulsive gasp that was expelled in a huge, racking sob. His feet, clad in Hush Puppies, stumbled over the wreck of the radio and he almost fell into her arms, making her stagger back with his weight. His breath blew into her face and there was no smell of liquor on it. Of course not; there was no liquor up here. "What's wrong?" She held him as best she could. "Jack, what is it?" But he could do nothing at first but sob, clinging to her, almost crushing the wind from her, his head turning on her shoulder in that helpless, shaking, warding-off gesture. His sobs were heavy and fierce. He was shuddering all over, his muscles jerking beneath his plaid shirt and jeans. "Jack? What? Tell me what's wrong!" At last the sobs began to change themselves into words, most of them incoherent at first, but coming clearer as his tears began to spend themselves. "... dream, I guess it was a dream, but it was so real, I... it was my mother saying that Daddy was going to be on the radio and I ...
he was ... he was telling me to ... I don't know, he was yelling at me ... and so I broke the radio ... to shut him up. To shut him up. He's dead. I don't even want to dream about him. He's dead. My God, Wendy, my God. I never had a nightmare like that. I never want to have another one. Christ! It was awful." "You just fell asleep in the office?" "No ... not here. Downstairs." He was straightening a little now, his weight coming off her, and the steady back-and-forth motion of his head first slowed and then stopped. "I was looking through those old papers. Sitting on a chair I set up down there. Milk receipts. Dull stuff. And I guess I just drowsed off. That's when I started to dream. I must have sleepwalked up here." He essayed a shaky little laugh against her neck. "Another first." "Where is Danny, Jack?" "I don't know. Isn't he with you?" "He wasn't ... downstairs with you?" He looked over his shoulder and his face tightened at what he saw on her face. "Never going to let me forget that, are you, Wendy?" "Jack — " "When I'm on my deathbed you'll lean over and say, `It serves you right, remember the time you broke Danny's arm?' " "Jack!" "Jack what?" he asked hotly, and jumped to his feet. "Are you denying that's what you're thinking? That I hurt him? That I hurt him once before and I could hurt him again?" "I want to know where he is, that's all!" "Go ahead, yell your fucking head off, that'll make everything okay, won't it? " She turned and walked out the door. He watched her go, frozen for a moment, a blotter covered with fragments of broken glass in one hand. Then he dropped it into the wastebasket, went after her, and caught her by the lobby desk. He put his hands on her shoulders and turned her around. Her face was carefully set. "Wendy, I'm sorry. It was the dream. I'm upset. Forgive?" "Of course," she said, her face not changing expression. Her wooden shoulders slipped out of his hands. She walked to the middle of the lobby and called: "Hey, doc! Where are you?" Silence came back. She walked toward the double lobby doors, opened one of them, and stepped out onto the path Jack had shoveled. It was more like a trench; the packed and drifted snow through which the path was cut came to her shoulders. She called him again, her breath coming out in a white plume. When she came back in she had begun to look scared. Controlling his irritation with her, he said reasonably: "Are you sure he's not sleeping in his room?" "I told you, he was playing somewhere when I was knitting. I could hear him downstairs." "Did you fall asleep?" "What's that got to do with it? Yes. Danny?" "Did you look in his room when you came downstairs just now?"
"I — "She stopped. He nodded. "I didn't really think so." He started up the stairs without waiting for her. She followed him, half- running, but he was taking the risers two at a time. She almost crashed into his back when he came to a dead stop on the first-floor landing. He was rooted there, looking up, his eyes wide. "What — ?" she began, and followed his gaze. Danny still stood there, his eyes blank, sucking his thumb. The marks on his throat were cruelly visible in the light of the hall's electric flambeaux. "Danny!" she shrieked. It broke Jack's paralysis and they rushed up the stairs together to where he stood. Wendy fell on her knees beside him and swept the boy into her arms. Danny came pliantly enough, but he did not hug her back. It was like hugging a padded stick, and the sweet taste of horror flooded her mouth. He only sucked his thumb and stared with indifferent blankness out into the stairwell beyond both of them. "Danny, what happened?" Jack asked. He put out his hand to touch the puffy side of Danny's neck. "Who did this to — " "Don't you touch him!" Wendy hissed. She clutched Danny in her arms, lifted him, and had retreated halfway down the stairs before Jack could do more than stand up, confused. "What? Wendy, what the hell are you t — " "Don't you touch him! I'll kill you if you lay your hands on him again!" "Wendy — " "You bastard!" She turned and ran down the rest of the stairs to the first floor. Danny's head jounced mildly up and down as she ran. His thumb was lodged securely in his mouth. His eyes were soaped windows. She turned right at the foot of the stairs, and Jack heard her feet retreat to the end of it. Their bedroom door slammed. The bolt was run home. The lock turned. Brief silence. Then the soft, muttered sounds of comforting. He stood for an unknown length of time, literally paralyzed by all that had happened in such a short space of time. His dream was still with him, painting everything a slightly unreal shade. It was as if he had taken a very mild mescaline hit. Had he maybe hurt Danny as Wendy thought? Tried to strangle his son at his dead father's request? No. He would never hurt Danny. (He fell down the stairs, Doctor.) He would never hurt Danny now. (How could I know the bug bomb was defective?) Never in his life had he been willfully vicious when he was sober. (Except when you almost killed George Hatfield.) "No!" he cried into the darkness. He brought both fists crashing down on his legs, again and again and again.
* * *
Wendy sat in the overstuffed chair by the window with Danny on her lap, holding him, crooning the old meaningless words, the ones you never remember
afterward no matter how a thing turns out. He had folded onto her lap with neither protest nor gladness, like a paper cutout of himself, and his eyes didn't even shift toward the door when Jack cried out "No!" somewhere in the hallway. The confusion had receded a little bit in her mind, but she now discovered something even worse behind it. Panic. Jack had done this, she had no doubt of it. His denials meant nothing to her. She thought it was perfectly possible that Jack had tried to throttle Danny in his sleep just as he had smashed the CB radio in his sleep. He was having a breakdown of some kind. But what was she going to do about it? She couldn't stay locked in here forever. They would have to eat. There was really only one question, and it was asked in a mental voice of utter coldness and pragmatism, the voice of her maternity, a cold and passionless voice once it was directed away from the closed circle of mother and child and out toward Jack. It was a voice that spoke of self-preservation only after son-preservation and its question was: (Exactly how dangerous is he?) He had denied doing it. He had been horrified at the bruises, at Danny's soft and implacable disconnection. If he had done it, a separate section of himself had been responsible. The fact that he had done it when he was asleep was in a terrible, twisted way encouraging. Wasn't it possible that he could be trusted to get them out of here? To get them down and away. And after that ... But she could see no further than she and Danny arriving safe at Dr. Edmonds's office in Sidewinder. She had no particular need to see further. The present crisis was more than enough to keep her occupied. She crooned to Danny, rocking him on her breasts. Her fingers, on his shoulder, had noticed that his T-shirt was damp, but they had not bothered reporting the information to her brain in more than a cursory way. If it had been reported, she might have remembered that Jack's hands, as he had hugged her in the office and sobbed against her neck, bad been dry. It might have given her pause. But her mind was still on other things. The decision had to be made — to approach Jack or not? Actually it was not much of a decision. There was nothing she could do alone, not even carry Danny down to the office and call for help on the CB radio. He had suffered a great shock. He ought to be taken out quickly before any permanent damage could be done. She refused to let herself believe that permanent damage might already have been done. And still she agonized over it, looking for another alternative. She did not want to put Danny back within Jack's reach. She was aware now that she had made one bad decision when she had gone against her feelings (and Danny's) and allowed the snow to close them in ... for Jack's sake. Another bad decision when she had shelved the idea of divorce. Now she was nearly paralyzed by the idea that she might be making another mistake, one she would regret every minute of every day of the rest of her life. There was not a gun in the place. There were knives hanging from the magnetized runners in the kitchen, but Jack was between her and them. In her striving to make the right decision, to find the alternative, the bitter irony of her thoughts did not occur: an hour ago she had been asleep,
firmly convinced that things were all right and soon would be even better. Now she was considering the possibility of using a butcher knife on her husband if he tried to interfere with her and her son. At last she stood up with Danny in her arms, her legs trembling. There was no other way. She would have to assume that Jack awake was Jack sane, and that he would help her get Danny down to Sidewinder and Dr. Edmonds. And if Jack tried to do anything but help, God help him. She went to the door and unlocked it. Shifting Danny up to her shoulder, she opened it and went out into the hall. "Jack?" she called nervously, and got no answer. With growing trepidation she walked down to the stairwell, but Jack was not there. And as she stood there on the landing, wondering what to do next, the singing came up from below, rich, angry, bitterly satiric:
"Roll me over In the clo-ho-ver, Roll me over, lay me down and do it again."
She was frightened even more by the sound of him than she had been by his silence, but there was still no alternative. She started down the stairs.
<< 28 >> "IT WAS HER!"
Jack had stood on the stairs, listening to the crooning, comforting sounds coming muffled through the locked door, and slowly his confusion had given way to anger. Things had never really changed. Not to Wendy. He could be off the juice for twenty years and still when he came home at night and she embraced him at the door, he would see / sense that little flare of her nostrils as she tried to divine scotch or gin fumes riding the outbound train of his exhalation. She was always going to assume the worst; if he and Danny got in a car accident with a drunken blindman who had had a stroke just before the collision, she would silently blame Danny's injuries on him and turn away. Her face as she had snatched Danny away it rose up before him and he suddenly wanted to wipe the anger that had been on it out with his fist. She had no goddam right! Yes, maybe at first. He had been a lush, he had done terrible things. Breaking Danny's arm had been a terrible thing. But if a man reforms, doesn't he deserve to have his reformation credited sooner or later? And if he doesn't get it, doesn't he deserve the game to go with the name? If a father constantly accuses his virginal daughter of screwing every boy in junior high, must she not at last
grow weary (enough) of it to earn her scoldings? And if a wife secretly-and not so secretly-continues to believe that her teetotaling husband is a drunk ... He got up, walked slowly down to the first-floor landing, and stood there for a moment. He took his handkerchief from his back pocket, wiped his lips with it, and considered going down and pounding on the bedroom door, demanding to be let in so he could see his son. She had no right to be so goddam highhanded. Well, sooner or later she'd have to come out, unless she planned a radical sort of diet for the two of them. A rather ugly grin touched his lips at the thought. Let her come to him. She would in time. He went downstairs to the ground floor, stood aimlessly by the lobby desk for a moment, then turned right. He went into the dining room and stood just inside the door. The empty tables, their white linen cloths neatly cleaned and pressed beneath their clear plastic covers, glimmered up at him. All was deserted now but
(Dinner Will Be Served at 8 P.M. Un-Masking and Dancing At Midnight)
Jack walked among the tables, momentarily forgetting his wife and son upstairs, forgetting the dream, the smashed radio, the bruises. He trailed his fingers over the slick plastic dustcovers, trying to imagine how it must have been on that hot August night in 1945, the war won, the future stretching ahead so various and new, like a land of dreams. The bright and particolored Japanese lanterns hung the whole length of the circular drive, the golden-yellow light spilling from these high windows that were now drifted over with snow. Men and women in costume, here a glittering princess, there a high-booted cavalier, flashing jewelry and flashing wit every where, dancing, liquor flowing freely, first wine and then cocktails and then perhaps boilermakers the level of conversation going up and up and up until the jolly cry rang out from the bandmaster's podium, the cry of "Unmask! Unmask!" (And the Red Death held sway ...) He found himself standing on the other side of the dining room, just outside the stylized batwing doors of the Colorado Lounge where, on that night in 1945, all the booze would have been free. (Belly up to the bar, pardner, the drinks're on the house.) He stepped through the batwings and into the deep, folded shadows of the bar. And a strange thing occurred. He had been in here before, once to check the inventory sheet Ullman had left, and he knew the place had been stripped clean. The shelves were totally bare. But now, lit only murkily by the light which filtered through from the dining room (which was itself only dimly lit because of the snow blocking the windows), he thought he saw ranks and ranks of bottles twinkling mutedly behind the bar, and syphons, and even beer dripping from the spigots of all three highly polished taps. Yes, he could even smell beer, that damp and fermented and yeasty odor, no different from the smell that had hung finely misted around his father's face every night when he came home from work. Eyes widening, he fumbled for the wall switch, and the low, intimate bar- lighting came on, circles of twenty-watt bulbs emplanted on the tops of the three wagon-wheel chandeliers overhead.
The shelves were all empty. They had not even as yet gathered a good coat of dust. The beer taps were dry, as were the chrome drains beneath them. To his left and right, the velvet-upholstered booths stood like men with high backs, each one designed to give a maximum of privacy to the couple inside. Straight ahead, across the red-carpeted floor, forty barstools stood around the horseshoe-shaped bar. Each stool was upholstered in leather and embossed with cattle brands — Circle H, Bar D Bar (that was fitting), Rocking W, Lazy B. He approached it, giving his head a little shake of bewilderment as he did so. It was like that day on the playground when ... but there was no sense in thinking about that. Still he could have sworn he had seen those bottles, vaguely, it was true, the way you see the darkened shapes of furniture in a room where the curtains have been drawn. Mild glints on glass. The only thing that remained was that smell of beer, and Jack knew that was a smell that faded into the woodwork of every bar in the world after a certain period of time, not to be eradicated by any cleaner invented. Yet the smell here seemed sharp ... almost fresh. He sat down on one of the stools and propped his elbows on the bar's leather- cushioned edge. At his left hand was a bowl for peanuts now empty, of course. The first bar he'd been in for nineteen months and the damned thing was dry just his luck. All the same, a bitterly powerful wave of nostalgia swept over him, and the physical craving for a drink seemed to work itself up from his belly to his throat to his mouth and nose, shriveling and wrinkling the tissues as it went, making them cry out for something wet and long and cold. He glanced at the shelves again in wild, irrational hope but the shelves were just as empty as before. He grinned in pain and frustration. His fists, clenching slowly, made minute scratchings on the bar's leather-padded edge. "Hi, Lloyd," he said. "A little slow tonight, isn't it?" Lloyd said it was. Lloyd asked him what it would be. "Now I'm really glad you asked me that," Jack said, "really glad. Because I happen to have two twenties and two tens in my wallet and I was afraid they'd be sitting there until sometime next April. There isn't a Seven-Eleven around here, would you believe it? And I thought they had Seven-Elevens on the fucking moon." Lloyd sympathized. "So here's what," Jack said. "You set me up an even twenty martinis. An even twenty, just like that, kazang. One for every month I've been on the wagon and one to grow on. You can do that, can't you? You aren't too busy?" Lloyd said he wasn't busy at all. "Good man. You line those martians up right along the bar and I'm going to take them down, one by one. White man's burden, Lloyd my man." Lloyd turned to do the job. Jack reached into his pocket for his money clip and came out with an Excedrin bottle instead. His money clip was on the bedroom bureau, and of course his skinny-shanks wife had locked him out of the bedroom. Nice going, Wendy. You bleeding bitch. "I seem to be momentarily light," Jack said. "How's my credit in this joint, anyhow?" Lloyd said his credit was fine. "That's super. I like you, Lloyd. You were always the best of them. Best damned barkeep between Barre and Portland, Maine. Portland, Oregon, for that
matter." Lloyd thanked him for saying so. Jack thumped the cap from his Excedrin bottle, shook two tablets out, and flipped them into his mouth. The familiar acid-compelling taste flooded in. He had a sudden sensation that people were watching him, curiously and with some contempt. The booths behind him were full there were graying, distinguished men and beautiful young girls, all of them in costume, watching this sad exercise in the dramatic arts with cold amusement. Jack whirled on his stool. The booths were all empty, stretching away from the lounge door to the left and right, the line on his left cornering to flank the bar's horseshoe curve down the short length of the room. Padded leather seats and backs. Gleaming dark Formica tables, an ashtray on each one, a book of matches in each ashtray, the words Colorado Lounge stamped on each in gold leaf above the batwing-door logo. He turned back, swallowing the rest of the dissolving Excedrin with a grimace. "Lloyd, you're a wonder," he said. "Set up already. Your speed is only exceeded by the soulful beauty of your Neapolitan eyes. Salud." Jack contemplated the twenty imaginary drinks, the martini glasses blushing droplets of condensation, each with a swizzle poked through a plump green olive. He could almost smell gin on the air. "The wagon," he said. "Have you ever been acquainted with a gentleman who has hopped up on the wagon?" Lloyd allowed as how he had met such men from time to time. "Have you ever renewed acquaintances with such a man after he hopped back off?" Lloyd could not, in all honesty, recall. "You never did, then," Jack said. He curled his hand around the first drink, carried his fist to his mouth, which was open, and turned his fist up. He swallowed and then tossed the imaginary glass over his shoulder. The people were back again, fresh from their costume ball, studying him, laughing behind their hands. He could feel them. If the backbar had featured a mirror instead of those damn stupid empty shelves, he could have seen them. Let them stare. Fuck them. Let anybody stare who wanted to stare. "No, you never did," he told Lloyd. "Few men ever return from the fabled Wagon, but those who do come with a fearful tale to tell. When you jump on, it seems like the brightest, cleanest Wagon you ever saw, with ten-foot wheels to keep the bed of it high out of the gutter where all the drunks are laying around with their brown bags and their Thunderbird and their Granddad Flash's Popskull Bourbon. You're away from all the people who throw you nasty looks and tell you to clean up your act or go put it on in another town. From the gutter, that's the finest-lookin Wagon you ever saw, Lloyd my boy. All hung with bunting and a brass band in front and three majorettes to each side, twirling their batons and flashing their panties at you. Man, you got to get on that Wagon and away from the juicers that are straining canned heat and smelling their own puke to get high again and poking along the gutter for butts with half an inch left below the filter." He drained two more imaginary drinks and tossed the glasses back over his shoulder. He could almost hear them smashing on the floor. And goddam if he wasn't starting to feel high. It was the Excedrin.
"So you climb up," he told Lloyd. "and ain't you glad to be there. My God yes, that's affirmative. That Wagon is the biggest and best float in the whole parade, and everybody is lining the streets and clapping and cheering and waving, all for you. Except for the winos passed out in the gutter. Those guys used to be your friends, but that's all behind you now." He carried his empty fist to his mouth and sluiced down another — four down, sixteen to go. Making excellent progress. He swayed a little on the stool. Let em stare, if that was how they got off. Take a picture, folks, it'll last longer. "Then you start to see things, Lloydy-my-boy. Things you missed from the gutter. Like how the floor of the Wagon is nothing but straight pine boards, so fresh they're still bleeding sap, and if you took your shoes off you'd be sure to get a splinter. Like how the only furniture in the Wagon is these long benches with high backs and no cushions to sit on, and in fact they are nothing but pews with a songbook every five feet or so. Like how all the people sitting in the pews on the Wagon are these flatchested el birdos in long dresses with a little lace around the collar and their hair pulled back into buns until it's so tight you can almost hear it screaming. And every face is flat and pale and shiny, and they're all singing `Shall we gather at the riiiiver, the beautiful, the beautiful, the riiiiiver,' and up front there's this reekin bitch with blond hair playing the organ and tellin em to sing louder, sing louder. And somebody slams a songbook into your hands and says, `Sing it out, brother. If you expect to stay on this Wagon, you got to sing morning, noon, and night. Especially at night.' And that's when you realize what the Wagon really is, Lloyd. It's a church with bars on the windows, a church for women and a prison for you." He stopped. Lloyd was gone. Worse still, he had never been there. The drinks had never been there. Only the people in the booths, the people from the costume party, and he could almost hear their muffled laughter as they held their hands to their mouths and pointed, their eyes sparkling with cruel pinpoints of light. He whirled around again. "Leave me — " (alone?) All the booths were empty. The sound of laughter had died like a stir of autumn leaves. Jack stared at the empty lounge for a tick of time, his eyes wide and dark. A pulse beat noticeably in the center of his forehead. In the very center of him a cold certainty was forming and the certainty was that he was losing his mind. He felt an urge to pick up the bar stool next to him, reverse it, and go through the place like an avenging whirlwind. Instead he whirled back around to the bar and began to bellow:
"Roll me over In the clo-ho-ver, Roll me over, lay me down and do it again."
Danny's face rose before him, not Danny's normal face, lively and alert, the eyes sparkling and open, but the catatonic, zombielike face of a stranger, the eyes dull and opaque, the mouth pursed babyishly around his thumb. What was he doing, sitting here and talking to himself like a sulky teen-ager when his son was upstairs, someplace, acting like something that belonged in a padded room,
acting the way Wally Hollis said Vic Stenger had been before the men in the white coats had to come and take him away? (But I never put a hand on him! Goddammit, I didn't!) "Jack?" The voice was timid, hesitant. He was so startled he almost fell off the stool whirling it around. Wendy was standing just inside the batwing doors, Danny cradled in her arms like some waxen horror show dummy. The three of them made a tableau that Jack felt very strongly; it was just before the curtain of Act II in some oldtime temperance play, one so poorly mounted that the prop man had forgotten to stock the shelves of the Den of Iniquity. "I never touched him," Jack said thickly. "I never have since the night I broke his arm. Not even to spank him." "Jack, that doesn't matter now. What matters is " "This matters!" he shouted. He brought one fist crashing down on the bar, hard enough to make the empty peanut dishes jump. "It matters, goddammit, it matters!" "Jack, we have to get him off the mountain. He's " Danny began to stir in her arms. The slack, empty expression on his face had begun to break up like a thick matte of ice over some buried surface. His lips twisted, as if at some weird taste. His eyes widened. His hands came up as if to cover them and then dropped back. Abruptly he stiffened in her arms. His back arched into a bow, making Wendy stagger. And he suddenly began to shriek, mad sounds that escaped his straining throat in bolt after crazy, echoing bolt. The sound seemed to fill the empty downstairs and come back at them like banshees. There might have been a hundred Dannys, all screaming at once. "Jack!" she cried in terror. "Oh God Jack what's wrong with him?" He came off the stool, numb from the waist down, more frightened than he had ever been in his life. What hole had his son poked through and into? What dark nest? And what had been in there to sting him? "Danny!" he roared. "Danny!" Danny saw him. He broke his mother's grip with a sudden, fierce strength that gave her no chance to hold him. She stumbled back against one of the booths and nearly fell into it. "Daddy!" he screamed, running to Jack, his eyes huge and affrighted. "Oh Daddy Daddy, it was her! Her! Her! Oh Daaaaahdeee — " He slammed into Jack's arms like a blunt arrow, making Jack rock on his feet. Danny clutched at him furiously, at first seeming to pummel him like a fighter, then clutching his belt and sobbing against his shirt. Jack could feel his son's face, hot and working, against his belly. Daddy, it was her. Jack looked slowly up into Wendy's face. His eyes were like small silver coins. "Wendy?" Voice soft, nearly purring. "Wendy, what did you do to him?" Wendy stared back at him in stunned disbelief, her face pallid. She shook her head. "Oh Jack, you must know — " Outside it had begun to snow again.
<< 29 >>
KITCHEN TALK
Jack carried Danny into the kitchen. The boy was still sobbing wildly, refusing to look up from Jack's chest. In the kitchen he gave Danny back to Wendy, who still seemed stunned and disbelieving. "Jack, I don't know what he's talking about. Please, you must believe that." "I do believe it," he said, although he had to admit to himself that it gave him a certain amount of pleasure to see the shoe switched to the other foot with such dazzling, unexpected speed. But his anger at Wendy had been only a passing gut twitch. In his heart he knew Wendy would pour a can of gasoline over herself and strike a match before harming Danny. The large tea kettle was on the back burner, poking along on low heat. Jack dropped a teabag into his own large ceramic cup and poured hot water halfway. "Got cooking sherry, don't you?" he asked Wendy. "What? ... oh, sure. Two or three bottles of it." "Which cupboard?" She pointed, and Jack took one of the bottles down. He poured a hefty dollop into the teacup, put the sherry back, and filled the last quarter of the cup with milk. Then he added three tablespoons of sugar and stirred. He brought it to Danny, whose sobs had tapered off to snifflings and hitchings. But he was trembling all over, and his eyes were wide and starey. "Want you to drink this, doc," Jack said. "It's going to taste frigging awful, but it'll make you feel better. Can you drink it for your daddy?" Danny nodded that he could and took the cup. He drank a little, grimaced, and looked questioningly at Jack. Jack nodded and Danny drank again. Wendy felt the familiar twist of jealousy somewhere in her middle, knowing the boy would not have drunk it for her. On the heels of that came an uncomfortable, even startling thought: Had she wanted to think Jack was to blame? Was she that jealous? It was the way her mother would have thought, that was the really horrible thing. She could remember a Sunday when her Dad had taken her to the park and she had toppled from the second tier of the jungle gym, cutting both knees. When her father brought her home, her mother had shrieked at him: What did you do? Why weren't you watching her? What kind of a father are you? (She had hounded him to his grave; by the time he divorced her it was too late.) She had never even given Jack the benefit of the doubt. Not the smallest. Wendy felt her face burn yet knew with a kind of helpless finality that if the whole thing were to be played over again, she would do and think the same way. She carried part of her mother with her always, for good or bad.
"Jack — " she began, not sure if she meant to apologize or justify. Either, she knew, would be useless. "Not now," he said. It took Danny fifteen minutes to drink half of the big cup's contents, and by that time he had calmed visibly. The shakes were almost gone. Jack put his hands solemnly on his son's shoulders. "Danny, do you think you can tell us exactly what happened to you? It's very important." Danny looked from Jack to Wendy, then back again. In the silent pause, their setting and situation made themselves known: the whoop of the wind outside, driving fresh snow down from the northwest; the creaking and groaning of the old hotel as it settled into another storm. The fact of their disconnect came to Wendy with unexpected force as it sometimes did, like a blow under the heart. "I want ... to tell you everything," Danny said. "I wish I had before." He picked up the cup and held it, as if comforted by the warmth. "Why didn't you, son?" Jack brushed Danny's sweaty, tumbled hair back gently from his brow. "Because Uncle Al got you the job. And I couldn't figure out how it was good for you here and bad for you here at the same time. It was ..." He looked at them for help. He did not have the necessary word. "A dilemma?" Wendy asked gently. "When neither choice seems any good?" "Yes, that." He nodded, relieved. Wendy said: "The day that you trimmed the hedges, Danny and I had a talk in the truck. The day the first real snow came. Remember?" Jack nodded. The day he had trimmed the hedges was very clear in his mind. Wendy sighed. "I guess we didn't talk enough. Did we, doc?" Danny, the picture of woe, shook his head. "Exactly what did you talk about?" Jack asked. "I'm not sure how much I like my wife and son — " " — discussing how much they love you?" "Whatever it was, I don't understand it. I feel like I came into a movie just after the intermission." "We were discussing you," Wendy said quietly. "And maybe we didn't say it all in words, but we both knew. Me because I'm your wife and Danny because he ... just understands things." Jack was silent. "Danny said it just right. The place seemed good for you. You were away from all the pressures that made you so unhappy at Stovington. You were your own boss, working with your hands so you could save your brain — all of your brain — for your evenings writing. Then ... I don't know just when ... the place began to seem bad for you. Spending all that time down in the cellar, sifting through those old papers, all that old history. Talking in your sleep — " "In my sleep?" Jack asked. His face wore a cautious, startled expression. "I talk in my sleep?" "Most of it is slurry. Once I got up to use the bathroom and you were saying, 'To hell with it, bring in the slots at least, no one will know, no one will ever know.' Another time you woke me right up, practically yelling, `Unmask, unmask, unmask."' "Jesus Christ," he said, and rubbed a hand over his face. He looked ill.
"All your old drinking habits, too. Chewing Excedrin. Wiping your mouth all the time. Cranky in the morning. And you haven't been able to finish the play yet, have you?" "No. Not yet, but it's only a matter of time. I've been thinking about something else ... a new project — " "This hotel. The project Al Shockley called you about. The one he wanted you to drop." "How do you know about that?" Jack barked. "Were you listening in? You — " "No," she said. "I couldn't have listened in if I'd wanted to, and you'd know that if you were thinking straight. Danny and I were downstairs that night. The switchboard is shut down. Our phone upstairs was the only one in the hotel that was working, because it's patched directly into the outside line. You told me so yourself." "Then how could you know what Al told me?" "Danny told me. Danny knew. The same way he sometimes knows when things are misplaced, or when people are thinking about divorce." "The doctor said — " She shook her head impatiently. "The doctor was full of shit and we both know it. We've known it all the time. Remember when Danny said he wanted to see the firetrucks? That was no hunch. He was just a baby. He knows things. And now I'm afraid ..." She looked at the bruises on Danny's neck. "Did you really know Uncle Al had called me, Danny?" Danny nodded. "He was really mad, Daddy. Because you called Mr. Ullman and Mr. Ullman called him. Uncle Al didn't want you to write anything about the hotel." "Jesus," Jack said again. "The bruises, Danny. Who tried to strangle you?" Danny's face went dark. "Her," he said. "The woman in that room. In 217. The dead lady." His lips began to tremble again, and he seized the teacup and drank. Jack and Wendy exchanged a scared look over his bowed head. "Do you know anything about this?" he asked her. She shook her head. "Not about this, no." "Danny?" He raised the boy's frightened face. "Try, son. We're right here." "I knew it was bad here," Danny said in a low voice. "Ever since we were in Boulder. Because Tony gave me dreams about it." "What dreams?" "I can't remember everything. He showed me the Overlook at night, with a skull and crossbones on the front. And there was pounding. Something ... I don't remember what . .chasing after me. A monster. Tony showed me about redrum." "What's that, doc?" Wendy asked. He shook his head. "I don't know." "Rum, like yo-ho-ho and a bottle of rum?" Jack asked. Danny shook his head again. "I don't know. Then we got here, and Mr. Hallorann talked to me in his car. Because he has the shine, too." "Shine?" "It's ..." Danny made a sweeping, all-encompassing gesture with his hands. "It's being able to understand things. To know things. Sometimes you see things. Like me knowing Uncle Al called. And Mr. Hallorann knowing you call me doc. Mr. Hallorann, he was peeling potatoes in the Army when he knew his brother got killed in a train crash. And when he called home it was true."
"Holy God," Jack whispered. "You're not making this up, are you, Dan?" Danny shook his head violently. "No, I swear to God." Then, with a touch of pride he added: "Mr. Hallorann said I had the best shine of anyone he ever met. We could talk back and forth to each other without hardly opening our mouths." His parents looked at each other again, frankly stunned. "Mr. Hallorann got me alone because he was worried," Danny went on. "He said this was a bad place for people who shine. He said he'd seen things. I saw something, too; Right after I talked to him. When Mr. Ullman was taking us around." "What was it?" Jack asked. "In the Presidential Sweet. On the wall by the door going into the bedroom. A whole lot of blood and some other stuff. Gushy stuff. I think ... that the gushy stuff must have been brains." "Oh my God," Jack said. Wendy was now very pale, her lips nearly gray. "This place," Jack said. "Some pretty bad types owned it awhile back. Organization people from Las Vegas." "Crooks?" Danny asked. "Yeah, crooks." He looked at Wendy. "In 1966 a big-time hood named Vito Gienelli got killed up there, along with his two bodyguards. There was a picture in the newspaper. Danny just described the picture." "Mr. Hallorann said he saw some other stuff," Danny told them. "Once about the playground. And once it was something bad in that room. 217. A maid saw it and lost her job because she talked about it. So Mr. Hallorann went up and he saw it too. But he didn't talk about it because he didn't want to lose his job. Except he told me never to go in there. But I did. Because I believed him when he said the things you saw here couldn't hurt you." This last was nearly whispered in a low, husky voice, and Danny touched the puffed circle of bruises on his neck. "What about the playground?" Jack asked in a strange, casual voice. "I don't know. The playground, he said. And the hedge animals." Jack jumped a little, and Wendy looked at him curiously. "Have you seen anything down there, Jack?" "No," he said. "Nothing." Danny was looking at him. "Nothing," he said again, more calmly. And that was true. He had been the victim of an hallucination. And that was all. "Danny, we have to hear about the woman," Wendy said gently. So Danny told them, but his words came in cyclic bursts, sometimes almost verging on incomprehensible garble in his hurry to spit it out and be free of it. He pushed tighter and tighter against his mother's breasts as he talked. "I went in," he said. "I stole the passkey and went in. It was like I couldn't help myself. I had to know. And she ... the lady ... was in the tub. She was dead. All swelled up. She was nuh-nuh ... didn't have no clothes on." He looked miserably at his mother. "And she started to get up and she wanted me. I know she did because I could feel it. She wasn't even thinking, not the way you and Daddy think. It was black ... it was hurt-think ... like ... like the wasps that night in my room! Only wanting to hurt. Like the wasps." He swallowed and there was silence for a moment, all quiet while the image of
the wasps sank into them. "So I ran," Danny said. "I ran but the door was closed. I left it open but it was closed. I didn't think about just opening it again and running out. I was scared. So I just ... I leaned against the door and closed my eyes and thought of how Mr. Hallorann said the things here were just like pictures in a book and if I .... kept saying to myself ... you're not there, go away, you're not there ... she would go away. But it didn't work." His voice began to rise hysterically. "She grabbed me ... turned me around ... I could see her eyes ... how her eyes were ... and she started to choke me ... I could smell her ... I could smell how dead she was... " "Stop now, shhh," Wendy said, alarmed. "Stop, Danny. It's all right. It — " She was getting ready to go into her croon again. The Wendy Torrance All- purpose Croon. Pat. Pending. "Let him finish," Jack said curtly. "There isn't any more," Danny said. "I passed out. Either because she was choking me or just because I was scared. When I came to, I was dreaming you and Mommy were fighting over me and you wanted to do the Bad Thing again, Daddy. Then I knew it wasn't a dream at all ... and I was awake ... and ... I wet my pants. I wet my pants like a baby." His head fell back against Wendy's sweater and he began to cry with horrible weakness, his hands lying limp and spent in his lap. Jack got up. "Take care of him." "What are you going to do?" Her face was full of dread. "I'm going up to that room, what did you think I was going to do? Have coffee?" "No! Don't, Jack, please don't!" "Wendy, if there's someone else in the hotel, we have to know." "Don't you dare leave us alone!" she shrieked at him. Spittle flew from her lips with the force of her cry. Jack said: "Wendy, that's a remarkable imitation of your mom." She burst into tears then, unable to cover her face because Danny was on her lap. "I'm sorry," Jack said. "But I have to, you know. I'm the goddam caretaker. It's what I'm paid for." She only cried harder and he left her that way, going out of the kitchen, rubbing his mouth with his handkerchief as the door swung shut behind him. "Don't worry, mommy," Danny said. "He'll be all right. He doesn't shine. Nothing here can hurt him." Through her tears she said, "No, I don't believe that."
<< 30 >>
217 REVISITED
He took the elevator up and it was strange, because none of them had used the elevator since they moved in. He threw the brass handle over and it wheezed vibratoriously up the shaft, the brass grate rattling madly. Wendy had a true claustrophobe's horror of the elevator, he knew. She envisioned the three of them trapped in it between floors while the winter storms raged outside, she could see them growing thinner and weaker, starving to death. Or perhaps dining on each other, the way those Rugby players had. He remembered a bumper sticker he had seen in Boulder, RUGBY PLAYERS EAT THEIR OWN DEAD. He could think of others. YOU ARE WHAT YOU EAT. Or menu items. Welcome to the Overlook Dining Room, Pride of the Rockies. Eat in Splendor at the Roof of the World. Human Haunch Broiled Over Matches La Specialite de la Maison. The contemptuous smile flicked over his features again. As the number 2 rose on the shaft wall, he threw the brass handle back to the home position and the elevator car creaked to a stop. He took his Excedrin from his pocket, shook three of them into his hand, and opened the elevator door. Nothing in the Overlook frightened him. He felt that he and it were simpatico. He walked up the hall flipping his Excedrin into his mouth and chewing them one by one. He rounded the corner into the short corridor off the main hall. The door to Room 217 was ajar, and the passkey hung from the lock on its white paddle. He frowned, feeling a wave of irritation and even real anger. Whatever had come of it, the boy had been trespassing. He had been told, and told bluntly, that certain areas of the hotel were off limits: the equipment shed, the basement, and all of the guest rooms. He would talk to Danny about that just as soon as the boy was over his fright. He would talk to him reasonably but sternly. There were plenty of fathers who would have done more than just talk. They would have administered a good shaking, and perhaps that was what Danny needed. If the boy had gotten a scare, wasn't that at least his just deserts? He walked down to the door, removed the passkey, dropped it into his pocket, and stepped inside. The overhead light was on. He glanced at the bed, saw it was not rumpled, and then walked directly across to the bathroom door. A curious certainty had grown in him. Although Watson had mentioned no names or room numbers, Jack felt sure that this was the room the lawyer's wife and her stud had shared, that this was the bathroom where she had been found dead, full of barbiturates and Colorado Lounge booze. He pushed the mirror-backed bathroom door open and stepped through. The light in here was off. He turned it on and observed the long, Pullman-car room, furnished in the distinctive early nineteen-hundreds-remodeled-in-the-twenties style that seemed common to all Overlook bathrooms, except for the ones on the third floor — those were properly Byzantine, as befitted the royalty, politicians, movie stars, and capos who had stayed there over the years. The shower curtain, a pallid pastel pink, was drawn protectively around the long claw-footed tub. (nevertheless they did move) And for the first time he felt his new sense of sureness (almost cockiness) that had come over him when Danny ran to him shouting It was her! It was her!
deserting him. A chilled finger pressed gently against the base of his spine, cooling him off ten degrees. It was joined by others and they suddenly rippled all the way up his back to his medulla oblongata, playing his spine like a jungle instrument. His anger at Danny evaporated, and as he stepped forward and pushed the shower curtain back his mouth was dry and he felt only sympathy for his son and terror for himself. The tub was dry and empty. Relief and irritation vented in a sudden "Pah!" sound that escaped his compressed lips like a very small explosive. The tub had been scrubbed clean at the end of the season; except for the rust stain under the twin faucets, it sparkled. There was a faint but definable smell of cleanser, the kind that can irritate your nose with the smell of its own righteousness for weeks, even months, after it has been used. He bent down and ran his fingertips along the bottom of the tub. Dry as a bone. Not even a hint of moisture. The boy had been either hallucinating or outright lying. He felt angry again. That was when the bathmat on the floor caught his attention. He frowned down at it. What was a bathmat doing in here? It should be down in the linen cupboard at the end of the wing with the rest of the sheets and towels and pillow slips. All the linen was supposed to be there. Not even the beds were really made up in these guest rooms; the mattresses had been zipped into clear plastic and then covered with bedspreads. He supposed Danny might have gone down and gotten it — the passkey would open the linen cupboard — but why? He brushed the tips of his fingers back and forth across it. The bathmat was bone dry. He went back to the bathroom door and stood in it. Everything was all right. The boy had been dreaming. There was not a thing out of place. It was a little puzzling about the bathmat, granted, but the logical explanation was that some chambermaid, hurrying like mad on the last day of the season, had just forgotten to pick it up. Other than that, everything was -- His nostrils flared a little. Disinfectant, that self-righteous smell, cleaner-than-thou. And -- Soap? Surely not. But once the smell had been identified, it was too clear to dismiss. Soap. And not one of those postcard-size bars of Ivory they provide you with in hotels and motels, either. This scent was light and perfumed, a lady's soap. It had a pink sort of smell. Camay or Lowila, the brand that Wendy had always used in Stovington. (It's nothing. It's your imagination.) (yes like the hedges nevertheless they did move) (They did not move!) He crossed jerkily to the door which gave on the hall, feeling the irregular thump of a headache beginning at his temples. Too much had happened today, too much by far. He wouldn't spank the boy or shake him, just talk to him, but by God, he wasn't going to add Room 217 to his problems. Not on the basis of a dry bathmat and a faint smell of Lowila soap. He -- There was a sudden rattling, metallic sound behind him. It came just as his hand closed around the doorknob, and an observer might have thought the brushed
steel of the knob carried an electric charge. He jerked convulsively, eyes widening, other facial features drawing in, grimacing. Then he had control of himself, a little, anyway, and he let go of the doorknob and turned carefully around. His joints creaked. He began to walk back to the bathroom door, step by leaden step. The shower curtain, which he had pushed back to look into the tub, was now drawn. The metallic rattle, which had sounded to him like a stir of bones in a crypt, had been the curtain rings on the overhead bar. Jack stared at the curtain. His face felt as if it had been heavily waxed, all dead skin on the outside, live, hot rivulets of fear on the inside. The way he had felt on the playground. There was something behind the pink plastic shower curtain. There was something in the tub. He could see it, ill defined and obscure through the plastic, a nearly amorphous shape. It could have been anything. A trick of the light. The shadow of the shower attachment. A woman long dead and reclining in her bath, a bar of Lowila in one stiffening hand as she waited patiently for whatever lover might come. Jack told himself to step forward boldly and rake the shower curtain back. To expose whatever might be there. Instead he turned with jerky, marionette strides, his heart whamming frightfully in his chest, and went back into the bed/ sitting room. The door to the hall was shut. He stared at it for a long, immobile second. He could taste his terror now. It was in the back of his throat like a taste of gone-over cherries. He walked to the door with that same jerky stride and forced his fingers to curl around the knob. (It won't open.) But it did. He turned off the light with a fumbling gesture, stepped out into the hall, and pulled the door shut without looking back. From inside, he seemed to hear an odd wet thumping sound, far off, dim, as if something had just scrambled belatedly out of the tub, as if to greet a caller, as if it had realized the caller was leaving before the social amenities had been completed and so it was now rushing to the door, all purple and grinning, to invite the caller back inside. Perhaps forever. Footsteps approaching the door or only the heartbeat in his ears? He fumbled at the passkey. It seemed sludgy, unwilling to turn in the lock. He attacked the passkey. The tumblers suddenly fell and he stepped back against the corridor's far wall, a little groan of relief escaping him. He closed his eyes and all the old phrases began to parade through his mind, it seemed there must be hundreds of them, (cracking up not playing with a full deck lost ya marbles guy just went loony tunes he went up and over the high side went bananas lost his football crackers nuts half a seabag) all meaning the same thing: losing your mind. "No," he whimpered, hardly aware that he had been reduced to this, whimpering with his eyes shut like a child. "Oh no, God. Please, God, no."
But below the tumble of his chaotic thoughts, below the triphammer beat of his heart, he could hear the soft and futile sound of the doorknob being turned to and fro as something locked in tried helplessly to get out, something that wanted to meet him, something that would like to be introduced to his family as the storm shrieked around them and white daylight became black night. If he opened his eyes and saw that doorknob moving he would go mad. So he kept them shut, and after an unknowable time, there was stillness. Jack forced himself to open his eyes, half-convinced that when he did, she would be standing before him. But the hall was empty. He felt watched just the same. He looked at the peephole in the center of the door and wondered what would happen if he approached it, stared into it. What would he be eyeball to eyeball with? His feet were moving (feets don't fail me now) before he realized it. He turned them away from the door and walked down to the main hall, his feet whispering on the blue-black jungle carpet. He stopped halfway to the stairs and looked at the fire extinguisher. He thought that the folds of canvas were arranged in a slightly different manner. And he was quite sure that the brass nozzle had been pointing toward the elevator when he came up the hall. Now it was pointing the other way. "I didn't see that at all," Jack Torrance said quite clearly. His face was white and haggard and his mouth kept trying to grin. But he didn't take the elevator back down. It was too much like an open mouth. Too much by half. He took the stairs.
<< 31 >> THE VERDICT
He stepped into the kitchen and looked at them, bouncing the passkey a few inches up off his left hand, making the chain on the white metal tongue jingle, then catching it again. Danny was pallid and worn out. Wendy had been crying, he saw; her eyes were red and darkly circled. He felt a sudden burst of gladness at this. He wasn't suffering alone, that was sure. They looked at him without speaking. "Nothing there," he said, astounded by the heartiness of his voice. "Not a thing." He bounced the passkey up and down, up and down, smiling reassuringly at them, watching the relief spread over their faces, and thought he had never in his life wanted a drink so badly as he did right now.
<< 32 >>
THE BEDROOM
Late that afternoon Jack got a cot from the first-floor storage room and put it in the corner of their bedroom. Wendy had expected that the boy would be half the night getting to sleep, but Danny was nodding before "The Waltons" was half over, and fifteen minutes after they had tucked him in he was far down in sleep, moveless, one hand tucked under his cheek. Wendy sat watching him, holding her place in a fat paperback copy of Cashelmara with one finger. Jack sat at his desk, looking at his play. "Oh shit," Jack said. Wendy looked up from her contemplation of Danny. "What?" "Nothing." He looked down at the play with smoldering ill-temper. How could he have thought it was good? It was puerile. It had been done a thousand times. Worse, he had no idea how to finish it. Once it had seemed simple enough. Denker, in a fit of rage, seizes the poker from beside the fireplace and beats saintly Gary to death. Then, standing spread-legged over the body, the bloody poker in one hand, he screams at the audience: "It's here somewhere and I will find it!" Then, as the lights dim and the curtain is slowly drawn, the audience sees Gary's body face down on the forestage as Denker strides to the upstage bookcase and feverishly begins pulling books from the shelves, looking at them, throwing them aside. He had thought it was something old enough to be new, a play whose novelty alone might be enough to see it through a successful Broadway run: a tragedy in five acts. But, in addition to his sudden diversion of interest to the Overlooks history, something else had happened. He had developed opposing feelings about his characters. This was something quite new. Ordinarily he liked all of his characters, the good and the bad. He was glad he did. It allowed him to try to see all of their sides and understand their motivations more clearly. His favorite story, sold to a small southern Maine magazine called Contraband for copies, had been a piece called "The Monkey Is Here, Paul DeLong." It had been about a child molester about to commit suicide in his furnished room. The child molester's name had been Paul DeLong, Monkey to his friends. Jack had liked Monkey very much. He sympathized with Monkey's bizarre needs, knowing that Monkey was not the only one to blame for the three rape-murders in his past. There had been bad parents, the father a beater as his own father had been, the mother a limp and silent dishrag as his mother had been. A homosexual experience in grammar school. Public humiliation. Worse experiences in high school and college. He had been arrested and sent to an institution after exposing himself to a pair of little girls getting off a school bus. Worst of all, he had been
dismissed from the institution, let back out onto the streets, because the man in charge had decided he was all right. This man's name had been Grimmer. Grimmer had known that Monkey DeLong was exhibiting deviant symptoms, but he had written the good, hopeful report and had let him go anyway. Jack liked and sympathized with Grimmer, too. Grimmer had to run an understaffed and underfunded institution and try to keep the whole thing together with spit, baling wire, and nickle-and-dime appropriations from a state legislature who had to go back and face the voters. Grimmer knew that Monkey could interact with other people, that he did not soil his pants or try to stab his fellow inmates with the scissors. He did not think he was Napoleon. The staff psychiatrist in charge of Monkey's case thought there was a better-than-even chance that Monkey could make it on the street, and they both knew that the longer a man is in an institution the more he comes to need that closed environment, like a junkie with his smack. And meanwhile, people were knocking down the doors. Paranoids, schizoids, cycloids, semicatatonics, men who claimed to have gone to heaven in flying saucers, women who had burned their children's sex organs off with Bic lighters, alcoholics, pyromaniacs, kleptomaniacs, manic-depressives, suicidals. Tough old world, baby. If you're not bolted together tightly, you're gonna shake, rattle, and roll before you turn thirty. Jack could sympathize with Grimmer's problem. He could sympathize with the parents of the murder victims. With the murdered children themselves, of course. And with Monkey DeLong. Let the reader lay blame. In those days he hadn't wanted to judge. The cloak of the moralist sat badly on his shoulders. He had started The Little School in the same optimistic vein. But lately he had begun to choose up sides, and worse still, he had come to loathe his hero, Gary Benson. Originally conceived as a bright boy more cursed with money than blessed with it, a boy who wanted more than anything to compile a good record so he could go to a good university because he had earned admission and not because his father had pulled strings, he had become to Jack a kind of simpering Goody Two-shoes, a postulant before the altar of knowledge rather than a sincere acolyte, an outward paragon of Boy Scout virtues, inwardly cynical, filled not with real brilliance (as he had first been conceived) but only with sly animal cunning. All through the play he unfailingly addressed Denker as "sir," just as Jack had taught his own son to address those older and those in authority as "sir." He thought that Danny used the word quite sincerely, and Gary Benson as originally conceived had too, but as he had begun Act V, it had come more and more strongly to him that Gary was using the word satirically, outwardly straight-faced while the Gary Benson inside was mugging and leering at Denker. Denker, who had never had any of the things Gary had. Denker, who had had to work all his life just to become head of a single little school. Who was now faced with ruin over this handsome, innocent-seeming rich boy who had cheated on his Final Composition and had then cunningly covered his tracks. Jack had seen Denker the teacher as not much different from the strutting South American little Caesars in their banana kingdoms, standing dissidents up against the wall of the handiest squash or handball court, a super-zealot in a comparatively small puddle, a man whose every whim becomes a crusade. In the beginning he had wanted to use his play as a microcosm to say something about the abuse of power. Now he tended more and more to see Denker as a Mr. Chips figure, and the tragedy
was not the intellectual racking of Gary Benson but rather the destruction of a kindly old teacher and headmaster unable to see through the cynical wiles of this monster masquerading as a boy. He hadn't been able to finish the play. Now he sat looking down at it, scowling, wondering if there was any way he could salvage the situation. He didn't really think there was. He bad begun with one play and it had somehow turned into another, presto-chango. Well, what the hell. Either way it had been done before. Either way it was a load of shit. And why was he driving himself crazy about it tonight anyway? After the day just gone by it was no wonder he couldn't think straight. " — get him down?" He looked up, trying to blink the cobwebs away. "Huh?" "I said, how are we going to get him down? We've got to get him out of here, Jack." For a moment his wits were so scattered that he wasn't even sure what she was talking about. Then he realized and uttered a short, barking laugh. "You say that as if it were so easy." "I didn't mean — " "No problem, Wendy. I'll just change clothes in that telephone booth down in the lobby and fly him to Denver on my back. Superman Jack Torrance, they called me in my salad days." Her face registered slow hurt. "I understand the problem, Jack. The radio is broken. The snow ... but you have to understand Danny's problem. My God, don't you? He was nearly catatonic, Jack! What if he hadn't come out of that?" "But he did," Jack said, a trifle shortly. He had been frightened at Danny's blank-eyed, slack-faced state too, of course he had. At first. But the more he thought about it, the more he wondered if it hadn't been a piece of play-acting put on to escape his punishment. He had, after all, been trespassing. "All the same," she said. She came to him and sat on the end of the bed by his desk. Her face was both surprised and worried. "Jack, the bruises on his neck! Something got at him! And I want him away from it!" "Don't shout," he said. "My head aches, Wendy. I'm as worried about this as you are, so please ... don't ... shout." "All right," she said, lowering her voice. "I won't shout. But I don't understand you, Jack. Someone is in here with us. And not a very nice someone, either. We have to get down to Sidewinder, not just Danny but all of us. Quickly. And you ... you're sitting there reading your play!" " 'We have to get down, we have to get down,' you keep saying that. You must think I really am Superman." "I think you're my husband," she said softly, and looked down at her hands. His temper flared. He slammed the playscript down, knocking the edges of the pile out of true again and crumpling the sheets on the bottom. "It's time you got some of the home truths into you, Wendy. You don't seem to have internalized them, as the sociologists say. They're knocking around up in your head like a bunch of loose cueballs. You need to shoot them into the pockets. You need to understand that we are snowed in." Danny had suddenly become active in his bed. Still sleeping, he had begun to
twist and turn. The way he always did when we fought, Wendy thought dismally. And we're doing it again. "Don't wake him up, Jack. Please." He glanced over at Danny and some of the flush went out of his cheeks. "Okay. I'm sorry. I'm sorry I sounded mad, Wendy. It's not really for you. But I broke the radio. If it's anybody's fault it's mine. That was our big link to the outside. Olly-olly-in-for-free. Please come get us, Mister Ranger. We can't stay out this late." "Don't," she said, and put a hand on his shoulder. He leaned his head against it. She brushed his hair with her other hand. "I guess you've got a right, after what I accused you of. Sometimes I am like my mother. I can be a bitch. But you have to understand that some things ... are hard to get over. You have to understand that." "Do you mean his arm?" His lips had thinned. "Yes," Wendy said, and then she rushed on: "But it's not just you. I worry when he goes out to play. I worry about him wanting a two-wheeler next year, even one with training wheels. I worry about his teeth and his eyesight and about this thing, what he calls his shine. I worry. Because he's little and he seems very fragile and because ... because something in this hotel seems to want him. And it will go through us to get him if it has to. That's why we must get him out, Jack. I know that! I feel that! We must get him out!" Her hand had tightened painfully on his shoulder in her agitation, but he didn't move away. One hand found the firm weight of her left breast and he began to stroke it through her shirt. "Wendy," he said, and stopped. She waited for him to rearrange whatever he had to say. His strong hand on her breast felt good, soothing. "I could maybe snowshoe him down. He could walk part of the way himself, but I would mostly have to carry him. It would mean camping out one, two, maybe three nights. That would mean building a travois to carry supplies and bedrolls on. We have the AM / FM radio, so we could pick a day when the weather forecast called for a three-day spell of good weather. But if the forecast was wrong," he finished, his voice soft and measured, "I think we might die." Her face had paled. It looked shiny, almost ghostly. He continued to stroke her breast, rubbing the ball of his thumb gently over the nipple. She made a soft sound — from his words or in reaction to his gentle pressure on her breast, he couldn't tell. He raised his hand slightly and undid the top button of her shirt. Wendy shifted her legs slightly. All at once her jeans seemed too tight, slightly irritating in a pleasant sort of way. "It would mean leaving you alone because you can't snowshoe worth beans. It would be maybe three days of not knowing. Would you want that?" His hand dropped to the second button, slipped it, and the beginning of her cleavage was exposed. "No," she said in a voice that was slightly thick. She glanced over at Danny. He had stopped twisting and turning. His thumb had crept back into his mouth. So that was all right. But Jack was leaving something out of the picture. It was too bleak. There was something else ... what? "If we stay put," Jack said, unbuttoning the third and fourth buttons with that same deliberate slowness, "a ranger from the park or a game warden is going to poke in here just to find out how we're doing. At that point we simply tell
him we want down. He'll see to it." He slipped her naked breasts into the wide V of the open shirt, bent, and molded his lips around the stem of a nipple. It was hard and erect. He slipped his tongue slowly back and forth across it in a way he knew she liked. Wendy moaned a little and arched her back. (?Something I've forgotten?) "Honey?" she asked. On their own her hands sought the back of his head so that when he answered his voice was muffled against her flesh. "How would the ranger take us out?" He raised his head slightly to answer and then settled his mouth against the other nipple. "If the helicopter was spoken for I guess it would have to be by snowmobile." (!!!) "But we have one of those! Ullman said so!" His mouth froze against her breast for a moment, and then he sat up. Her own face was slightly flushed, her eyes overbright. Jack's on the other hand, was calm, as if he had been reading a rather dull book instead of engaging in foreplay with his wife. "If there's a snowmobile there's no problem," she said excitedly. "We can all three go down together." "Wendy, I've never driven a snowmobile in my life." "It can't be that hard to learn. Back in Vermont you see ten-year-olds driving them in the fields ... although what their parents can be thinking of I don't know. And you had a motorcycle when we met." He had, a Honda 350cc. He had traded it in on a Saab shortly after he and Wendy took up residence together. "I suppose I could," he said slowly. "But I wonder how well it's been maintained. Ullman and Watson ... they run this place from May to October. They have summertime minds. I know it won't have gas in it. There may not be plugs or a battery, either. I don't want you to get your hopes up over your head, Wendy." She was totally excited now, leaning over him, her breasts tumbling out of her shirt. He had a sudden impulse to seize one and twist it until she shrieked. Maybe that would teach her to shut up. "The gas is no problem," she said. "The VW and the hotel truck are both full. There's gas for the emergency generator downstairs, too. And there must be a gascan out in that shed so you could carry extra." "Yes," he said. "There is." Actually there were three of them, two five-gallons and a two-gallon. "I'll bet the sparkplugs and the battery are out there too. Nobody would store their snowmobile in one place and the plugs and battery someplace else, would they?" "Doesn't seem likely, does it?" He got up and walked over to where Danny lay sleeping. A spill of hair had fallen across his forehead and Jack brushed it away gently. Danny didn't stir. "And if you can get it running you'll take us out?" she asked from behind him. "On the first day the radio says good weather?" For a moment he didn't answer. He stood looking down at his son, and his mixed feelings dissolved in a wave of love. He was the way she had said, vulnerable, fragile. The marks on his neck were very prominent.
"Yes," he said. "I'll get it running and we'll get out as quick as we can." "Thank God!" He turned around. She had taken off her shirt and lay on the bed, her belly flat, her breasts aimed perkily at the ceiling. She was playing with them lazily, flicking at the nipples. "Hurry up, gentlemen," she said softly, "time."
* * *
After, with no light burning in the room but the night light that Danny had brought with him from his room, she lay in the crook of his arm, feeling deliciously at peace. She found it hard to believe they could be sharing the Overlook with a murderous stowaway. "Jack?" "Hmmmm?" "What got at him?" He didn't answer her directly. "He does have something. Some talent the rest of us are missing. The most of us, beg pardon. And maybe the Overlook has something, too." "Ghosts?" "I don't know. Not in the Algernon Blackwood sense, that's for sure. More like the residues of the feelings of the people who have stayed here. Good things and bad things. In that sense, I suppose that every big hotel has got its ghosts. Especially the old ones." "But a dead woman in the tub ... Jack, he's not losing his mind, is he?" He gave her a brief squeeze. "We know he goes into ... well, trances, for want of a better word ... from time to time. We know that when he's in them he sometimes ... sees? ... things he doesn't understand. If precognitive trances are possible, they're probably functions of the subconscious mind. Freud said that the subconscious never speaks to us in literal language. Only in symbols. If you dream about being in a bakery where no one speaks English, you may be worried about your ability to support your family. Or maybe just that no one understands you. I've read that the falling dream is a standard outlet for feelings of insecurity. Games, little games. Conscious on one side of the net, subconscious on the other, serving some cockamamie image back and forth. Same with mental illness, with hunches, all of that. Why should precognition be any different? Maybe Danny really did see blood all over the walls of the Presidential Suite. To a kid his age, the image of blood and the concept of death are nearly interchangeable. To kids, the image is always more accessible than the concept, anyway. William Carlos Williams knew that, he was a pediatrician. When we grow up, concepts gradually get easier and we leave the images to the poets ... and I'm just rambling on." "I like to hear you ramble." "She said it, folks. She said it. You all heard it." "The marks on his neck, Jack. Those are real." "Yes." There was nothing else for a long time. She had begun to think he must have gone to sleep and she was slipping into a drowse herself when he said: "I can think of two explanations for those. And neither of them involves a
fourth party in the hotel." "What?" She came up on one elbow. "Stigmata, maybe," he said. "Stigmata? Isn't that when people bleed on Good Friday or something?" "Yes. Sometimes people who believe deeply in Christ's divinity exhibit bleeding marks on their hands and feet during the Holy Week. It was more common in the Middle Ages than now. In those days such people were considered blessed by God. I don't think the Catholic Church proclaimed any of it as out-and-out miracles, which was pretty smart of them. Stigmata isn't much different from some of the things the yogis can do. It's better understood now, that's all. The people who understand the interaction between the mind and the body study it, I mean, no one understands it — believe we have a lot more control over our involuntary functions than they used to think. You can slow your heartbeat if you think about it enough. Speed up your own metabolism. Make yourself sweat more. Or make yourself bleed." "You think Danny thought those bruises onto his neck? Jack, I just can't believe that." "I can believe it's possible, although it seems unlikely to me, too. What's more likely is that he did it to himself." "To himself?" "He's gone into these 'trances' and hurt himself in the past. Do you remember the time at the supper table? About two years ago, I think. We were super-pissed at each other. Nobody talking very much. Then, all at once, his eyes rolled up in his head and he went face-first into his dinner. Then onto the floor. Remember?" "Yes," she said. "I sure do. I thought he was having a convulsion." "Another time we were in the park," he said. "Just Danny and I. Saturday afternoon. He was sitting on a swing, coasting back and forth. He collapsed onto the ground. It was like he'd been shot. I ran over and picked him up and all of a sudden he just came around. He sort of blinked at me and said, `I hurt my tummy. Tell Mommy to close the bedroom windows if it rains.' And that night it rained like hell." "Yes, but — " "And he's always coming in with cuts and scraped elbows. His shins look like a battlefield in distress. And when you ask him how he got this one or that one, he just says `Oh, I was playing,' and that's the end of it." "Jack, all kids get bumped and bruised up. With little boys it's almost constant from the time they learn to walk until they're twelve or thirteen." "And I'm sure Danny gets his share," Jack responded. "He's an active kid. But I remember that day in the park and that night at the supper table. And I wonder if some of our kid's bumps and bruises come from just keeling over. That Dr. Edmonds said Danny did it right in his office, for Christ's sake!" "All right. But those bruises were fingers. I'd swear to it. He didn't get them falling down." "He goes into a trance," Jack said. "Maybe he sees something that happened in that room. An argument. Maybe a suicide. Violent emotions. It isn't like watching a movie; he's in a highly suggestible state. He's right in the damn thing. His subconscious is maybe visualizing whatever happened in a symbolic way
... as a dead woman who's alive again, zombie, undead, ghoul, you pick your term." "You're giving me goose-bumps," she said thickly. "I'm giving myself a few. I'm no psychiatrist, but it seems to fit so well. The walking dead woman as a symbol for dead emotions, dead lives, that just won't give up and go away ... but because she's a subconscious figure, she's also him. In the trance state, the conscious Danny is submerged. The subconscious figure is pulling the strings. So Danny put his hands around his own neck and — " "Stop," she said. "I get the picture. I think that's more frightening than having a stranger creeping around the halls, Jack. You can move away from a stranger. You can't move away from yourself. You're talking about schizophrenia." "Of a very limited type," he said, but a trifle uneasily. "And of a very special nature. Because he does seem able to read thoughts, and he really does seem to have precognitive flashes from time to time. I can't think of that as mental illness no matter how hard I try. We all have schizo deposits in us anyway. I think as Danny gets older, he'll get this under control." "If you're right, then it's imperative that we get him out. Whatever he has, this hotel is making it worse." "I wouldn't say that," he objected. "If he'd done as he was told, he never would have gone up to that room in the first place. It never would have happened." "My God, Jack! Are you implying that being half-strangled was a ... a fitting punishment for being off limits?" "No ... no. Of course not. But — " "No buts," she said, shaking her head violently. "The truth is, we're guessing. We don't have any idea when he might turn a corner and run into one of those ... air pockets, one-reel horror movies, whatever they are. We have to get him away." She laughed a little in the darkness. "Next thing we'll be seeing things." "Don't talk nonsense," he said, and in the darkness of the room he saw the hedge lions bunching around the path, no longer flanking it but guarding it, hungry November lions. Cold sweat sprang out on his brow. "You didn't really see anything, did you?" she was asking. "I mean, when you went up to that room. You didn't see anything?" The lions were gone. Now he saw a pink pastel shower curtain with a dark shape lounging behind it. The closed door. That muffled, hurried thump, and sounds after it that might have been running footsteps. The horrible, lurching beat of his own heart as he struggled with the passkey. "Nothing," he said, and that was true. He had been strung up, not sure of what was happening. He hadn't had a chance to sift through his thoughts for a reasonable explanation concerning the bruises on his son's neck. He had been pretty damn suggestible himself. Hallucinations could sometimes be catching. "And you haven't changed your mind? About the snowmobile, I mean?" His hands clamped into sudden tight fists (Stop nagging me! ) by his sides. "I said I would, didn't I? I will. Now go to sleep. It's been a
long hard day." "And how," she said. There was a rustle of bedclothes as she turned toward him and kissed his shoulder. "I love you, Jack." "I love you too," he said, but he was only mouthing the words. His hands were still clenched into fists. They felt like rocks on the ends of his arms. The pulse beat prominently in his forehead. She hadn't said a word about what was going to happen to them after they got down, when the party was over. Not one word. It had been Danny this and Danny that and Jack I'm so scared. Oh yes, she was scared of a lot of closet boogeymen and jumping shadows, plenty scared. But there was no lack of real ones, either. When they got down to Sidewinder they would arrive with sixty dollars and the clothes they stood up in. Not even a car. Even if Sidewinder bad a pawnshop, which it didn't, they had nothing to hock but Wendy's ninety-dollar diamond engagement ring and the Sony AM/FM radio. A pawnbroker might give them twenty bucks. A kind pawnbroker. There would be no job, not even part-time or seasonal, except maybe shoveling out driveways for three dollars a shot. The picture of John Torrance, thirty years old, who had once published in Esquire and who had harbored dreams — not at all unreasonable dreams, he felt, of becoming a major American writer during the next decade, with a shovel from the Sidewinder Western Auto on his shoulder, ringing doorbells... that picture suddenly came to him much more clearly than the hedge lions and he clenched his fists tighter still, feeling the fingernails sink into his palms and draw blood in mystic quarter-moon shapes. John Torrance, standing in line to change his sixty dollars into food stamps, standing in line again at the Sidewinder Methodist Church to get donated commodities and dirty looks from the locals. John Torrance explaining to Al that they'd just had to leave, had to shut down the boiler, had to leave the Overlook and all it contained open to vandals or thieves on snow machines because, you see, Al, attendez-vous, Al, there are ghosts up there and they have it in for my boy. Good-by, Al. Thoughts of Chapter Four, Spring Comes for John Torrance. What then? Whatever then? They might be able to get to the West Coast in the VW, he supposed. A new fuel pump would do it. Fifty miles west of here and it was all downhill, you could damn near put the bug in neutral and coast to Utah. On to sunny California, land of oranges and opportunity. A man with his sterling record of alcoholism, student- beating, and ghost-chasing would undoubtedly be able to write his own ticket. Anything you like. Custodial engineer — swamping out Greyhound buses. The automotive business — washing cars in a rubber suit. The culinary arts, perhaps, washing dishes in a diner. Or possibly a more responsible position, such as pumping gas. A job like that even held the intellectual stimulation of making change and writing out credit slips. I can give you twenty-five hours a week at the minimum wage. That was heavy tunes in a year when Wonder bread went for sixty cents a loaf. Blood had begun to trickle down from his palms. Like stigmata, oh yes. He squeezed tighter, savaging himself with pain. His wife was asleep beside him, why not? There were no problems. He had agreed to take her and Danny away from the big bad boogeyman and there were no problems. So you see, Al, I thought the best thing to do would be to (kill her.) The thought rose up from nowhere, naked and unadorned. The urge to tumble her
out of bed, naked, bewildered, just beginning to wake up; to pounce on her, seize her neck like the green limb of a young aspen and to throttle her, thumbs on windpipe, fingers pressing against the top of her spine, jerking her head up and ramming it back down against the floorboards, again and again, whamming, whacking, smashing, crashing. Jitter and jive, baby. Shake, rattle, and roll. He would make her take her medicine. Every drop. Every last bitter drop. He was dimly aware of a muffled noise somewhere, just outside his hot and racing inner world. He looked across the room and Danny was thrashing again, twisting in his bed and rumpling the blankets. The boy was moaning deep in his throat, a small, caged sound. What nightmare? A purple woman, long dead, shambling after him down twisting hotel corridors? Somehow he didn't think so. Something else chased Danny in his dreams. Something worse. The bitter lock of his emotions was broken. He got out of bed and went across to the boy, feeling sick and ashamed of himself. It was Danny he had to think of, not Wendy, not himself. Only Danny. And no matter what shape he wrestled the facts into, he knew in his heart that Danny must be taken out. He straightened the boy's blankets and added the quilt from the foot of the bed. Danny had quieted again now. Jack touched the sleeping forehead (what monsters capering just behind that ridge of bone?) and found it warm, but not overly so. And he was sleeping peacefully again. Queer. He got back into bed and tried to sleep. It eluded him. It was so unfair that things should turn out this way — bad luck seemed to stalk them. They hadn't been able to shake it by coming up here after all. By the time they arrived in Sidewinder tomorrow afternoon, the golden opportunity would have evaporated — gone the way of the blue suede shoe, as an old roommate of his had been wont to say. Consider the difference if they didn't go down, if they could somehow stick it out. The play would get finished. One way or the other, he would tack an ending onto it. His own uncertainty about his characters might add an appealing touch of ambiguity to his original ending. Perhaps it would even make him some money, it wasn't impossible. Even lacking that, Al might well convince the Stovington Board to rehire him. He would be on pro of course, maybe for as long as three years, but if he could stay sober and keep writing, he might not have to stay at Stovington for three years. Of course he hadn't cared much for Stovington before, he had felt stifled, buried alive, but that had been an immature reaction. Furthermore, how much could a man enjoy teaching when he went through his first three classes with a skull-busting hangover every second or third day? It wouldn't be that way again. He would be able to handle his responsibilities much better. He was sure of it. Somewhere in the midst of that thought, things began to break up and he drifted down into sleep. His last thought followed him down like a sounding bell: It seemed that he might be able to find peace here. At last. If they would only let him.
* * *
When he woke up he was standing in the bathroom of 217.
(been walking in my sleep again — why? — no radios to break up here) The bathroom light was on, the room behind him in darkness. The shower curtain was drawn around the long claw-footed tub. The bathmat beside it was wrinkled and wet. He began to feel afraid, but the very dreamlike quality of his fear told him this was not real. Yet that could not contain the fear. So many things at the Overlook seemed like dreams. He moved across the floor to the tub, not wanting to be helpless to turn his feet back. He flung the curtain open. Lying in the tub, naked, lolling almost weightless in the water, was George Hatfield, a knife stuck in his chest. The water around him was stained a bright pink. George's eyes were closed. His penis floated limply, like kelp. "George — " he heard himself say. At the word, George's eyes snapped open. They were silver, not human eyes at all. George's hands, fish-white, found the sides of the tub and he pulled himself up to a sitting position. The knife stuck straight out from his chest, equidistantly placed between nipples. The wound was lipless. "You set the timer ahead," silver-eyed George told him. "No, George, I didn't. I — " "I don't stutter." George was standing now, still fixing him with that inhuman silver glare, but his mouth had drawn back in a dead and grimacing smile. He threw one leg over the porcelained side of the tub. One white and wrinkled foot placed itself on the bathmat. "First you tried to run me over on my bike and then you set the timer ahead and then you tried to stab me to death but I still don't stutter." George was coming for him, his hands out, the fingers slightly curled. He smelled moldy and wet, like leaves that had been rained on. "It was for your own good," Jack said, backing up. "I set it ahead for your own good. Furthermore, I happen to know you cheated on your Final Composition." "I don't cheat ... and I don't stutter." George's hands touched his neck. Jack turned and ran, ran with the floating, weightless slowness that is so common to dreams. "You did! You did cheat!" he screamed in fear and anger as he crossed the darkened bed/ sitting room. "I'll prove it!" George's hands were on his neck again. Jack's heart swelled with fear until he was sure it would burst. And then, at last, his hand curled around the doorknob and it turned under his hand and he yanked the door open. He plunged out, not into the second-floor hallway, but into the basement room beyond the arch. The cobwebby light was on. His campchair, stark and geometrical, stood beneath it. And all around it was a miniature mountain range of boxes and crates and banded bundles of records and invoices and God knew what. Relief surged through him. "I'll find it!" he heard himself screaming. He seized a damp and moldering cardboard box; it split apart in his hands, spilling out a waterfall of yellow flimsies. "It's here somewhere! I will find it!" He plunged his hands deep into the pile of papers and came up with a dry, papery wasps' nest in one hand and a
timer in the other. The timer was ticking. Attached to its back was a length of electrical cord and attached to the other end of the cord was a bundle of dynamite. "Here!" he screamed. "Here, take it!" His relief became absolute triumph. He had done more than escape George; he had conquered. With these talismanic objects in his hands, George would never touch him again. George would flee in terror. He began to turn so he could confront George, and that was when George's hands settled around his neck, squeezing, stopping his breath, damming up his respiration entirely after one final dragging gasp. "I don't stutter," whispered George from behind him. He dropped the wasps' nest and wasps boiled out of it in a furious brown and yellow wave. His lungs were on fire. His wavering sight fell on the timer and the sense of triumph returned, along with a cresting wave of righteous wrath. Instead of connecting the timer to dynamite, the cord ran to the gold knob of a stout black cane, like the one his father had carried after the accident with the milk truck. He grasped it and the cord parted. The cane felt heavy and right in his hands. He swung it back over his shoulder. On the way up it glanced against the wire from which the light bulb depended and the light began to swing back and forth, making the room's hooded shadows rock monstrously against the floor and walls. On the way down the cane struck something much harder. George screamed. The grip on Jack's throatloosened. He tore free of George's grip and whirled. George was on his knees, his head drooping, his hands laced together on top of it. Blood welled through his fingers. "Please," George whispered humbly. "Give me a break, Mr. Torrance," "Now you'll take your medicine," Jack grunted. "Now by God, won't you. Young pup. Young worthless cur. Now by God, right now. Every drop. Every single damn drop!" As the light swayed above him and the shadows danced and flapped, he began to swing the cane, bringing it down again and again, his arm rising and falling like a machine. George's bloody protecting fingers fell away from his head and Jack brought the cane down again and again, and on his neck and shoulders and back and arms. Except that the cane was no longer precisely a cane; it seemed to be a mallet with some kind of brightly striped handle. A mallet with a hard side and soft side. The business end was clotted with blood and hair. And the flat, whacking sound of the mallet against flesh had been replaced with a hollow booming sound, echoing and reverberating. His own voice had taken on this same quality, bellowing, disembodied. And yet, paradoxically, it sounded weaker, slurred, petulant ... as if he were drunk. The figure on its knees slowly raised its head, as if in supplication. There was not a face, precisely, but only a mask of blood through which eyes peered. He brought the mallet back for a final whistling downstroke and it was fully launched before he saw that the supplicating face below him was not George's but Danny's. It was the face of his son. "Daddy — " And then the mallet crashed home, striking Danny right between the eyes, closing them forever. And something somewhere seemed to be laughing --
(! No !)
* * *
He came out of it standing naked over Danny's bed, his hands empty, his body sheened with sweat. His final scream had only been in his mind. He voiced it again, this time in a whisper. "No. No, Danny. Never." He went back to bed on legs that had turned to rubber. Wendy was sleeping deeply. The clock on the nightstand said it was quarter to five. He lay sleepless until seven, when Danny began to stir awake. Then he put his legs over the edge of the bed and began to dress. It was time to go downstairs and check the boiler.
<< 33 >> THE SNOWMOBILE
Sometime after midnight, while they all slept uneasily, the snow had stopped after dumping a fresh eight inches on the old crust. The clouds had broken, a fresh wind had swept them away, and now Jack stood in a dusty ingot of sunlight, which slanted through the dirty window set into the eastern side of the equipment shed. The place was about as long as a freight car, and about as high. It smelled of grease and oil and gasoline and — faint, nostalgic smell — sweet grass. Four power lawnmowers were ranked like soldiers on review against the south wall, two of them the riding type that look like small tractors. To their left were posthole diggers, round-bladed shovels made for doing surgery on the putting green, a chain saw, the electric hedge-clippers, and a long thin steel pole with a red flag at the top. Caddy, fetch my ball in under ten seconds and there's a quarter in it for you. Yes, sir. Against the eastern wall, where the morning sun slanted in most strongly, three Ping-Pong tables leaned one against the other like a drunken house of cards. Their nets had been removed and flopped down from the shelf above. In the corner was a stack of shuffleboard weights and a roque set — the wickets banded together with twists of wire, the brightly painted balls in an egg-carton sort of thing (strange hens you have up here, Watson ... yes, and you should see the animals down on the front lawn, ha-ha), and the mallets, two sets of them, standing in their racks. He walked over to them, stepping over an old eight-cell battery (which had once sat beneath the hood of the hotel truck, no doubt) and a battery charger and a pair of J. C. Penney jumper cables coiled between them. He slipped one of
the short-handled mallets out of the front rack and held it up in front of his face, like a knight bound for battle saluting his king. Fragments of his dream (it was all jumbled now, fading) recurred, something about George Hatfield and his father's cane, just enough to make him uneasy and, absurdly enough, a trifle guilty about holding a plain old garden-variety roque mallet. Not that roque was such a common garden-variety game anymore; its more modern cousin, croquet, was much more popular now ... and a child's version of the game at that. Roque, however... that must have been quite a game. Jack had found a mildewed rule book down in the basement, from one of the years in the early twenties when a North American Roque Tournament had been held at the Overlook. Quite a game. (schizo) He frowned a little, then smiled. Yes, it was a schizo sort of game at that. The mallet expressed that perfectly. A soft end and a hard end. A game of finesse and aim, and a game of raw, bludgeoning power. He swung the mallet through the air ... whhhoooop. He smiled a little at the powerful, whistling sound it made. Then he replaced it in the rack and turned to his left. What he saw there made him frown again. The snowmobile sat almost in the middle of the equipment shed, a fairly new one, and Jack didn't care for its looks at all. Bombardier Skidoo was written on the side of the engine cowling facing him in black letters which had been raked backward, presumably to connote speed. The protruding skis were also black. There was black piping to the right and left of the cowling, what they would call racing stripes on a sports car. But the actual paintjob was a bright, sneering yellow, and that was what he didn't like about it. Sitting there in its shaft of morning sun, yellow body and black piping, black skis and black upholstered open cockpit, it looked like a monstrous mechanized wasp. When it was running it would sound like that too. Whining and buzzing and ready to sting. But then, what else should it look like? It wasn't flying under false colors, at least. Because after it had done its job, they were going to be hurting plenty. All of them. By spring the Torrance family would be hurting so badly that what those wasps had done to Danny's hand would look like a mother's kisses. He pulled his handkerchief from his back pocket, wiped his mouth with it, and walked over to the Skidoo. He stood looking down at it, the frown very deep now, and stuffed his handkerchief back into his pocket. Outside a sudden gust of wind slammed against the equipment shed, making it rock and creak. He looked out the window and saw the gust carrying a sheet of sparkling snow crystals toward the drifted-in rear of the hotel, whirling them high into the hard blue sky. The wind dropped and he went back to looking at the machine. It was a disgusting thing, really. You almost expected to see a long, limber stinger protruding from the rear of it. He had always disliked the goddam snowmobiles. They shivered the cathedral silence of winter into a million rattling fragments. They startled the wildlife. They sent out huge and pollutive clouds of blue and billowing oilsmoke behind them — cough, cough, gag, gag, let me breathe. They were perhaps the final grotesque toy of the unwinding fossil fuel age, given to ten-year-olds for Christmas. He remembered a newspaper article he had read in Stovington, a story datelined
someplace in Maine. A kid on a snowmobile, barrel-assing up a road he'd never traveled before at better than thirty miles an hour. Night. His headlight off. There had been a heavy chain strung between two posts with a NO TRESPASSING sign hung from the middle. They said that in all probability the kid never saw it. The moon might have gone behind a cloud. The chain had decapitated him. Reading the story Jack had been almost glad, and now, looking down at this machine, the feeling recurred. (If it wasn't for Danny, I would take great pleasure in grabbing one of those mallets, opening the cowling, and just pounding until) He let his pent-up breath escape him in a long slow sigh. Wendy was right. Come hell, high water, or the welfare line, Wendy was right. Pounding this machine to death would be the height of folly, no matter how pleasant an aspect that folly made. It would almost be tantamount to pounding his own son to death. "Fucking Luddite," he said aloud. He went to the back of the machine and unscrewed the gascap. He found a dipstick on one of the shelves that ran at chest-height around the walls and slipped it in. The last eighth of an inch came out wet. Not very much, but enough to see if the damn thing would run. Later he could siphon more from the Volks and the hotel truck. He screwed the cap back on and opened the cowling. No sparkplugs, no battery. He went to the shelf again and began to poke along it, pushing aside screwdrivers and adjustable wrenches, a one-lung carburetor that had been taken out of an old lawnmower, plastic boxes of screws and nails and bolts of varying sizes. The shelf was thick and dark with old grease, and the years' accumulation of dust had stuck to it like fur. He didn't like touching it. He found a small, oil-stained box with the abbreviation Skid. laconically marked on it in pencil. He shook it and something rattled inside. Plugs. He held one of them up to the light, trying to estimate the gap without hunting around for the gapping tool. Fuck it, he thought resentfully, and dropped the plug back into the box. If the gap's wrong, that's just too damn bad. Tough fucking titty. There was a stool behind the door. He dragged it over, sat down, and installed the four sparkplugs, then fitted the small rubber caps over each. That done, he let his fingers play briefly over the magneto. They laughed when I sat down at the piano. Back to the shelves. This time he couldn't find what he wanted, a small battery. A three- or four-cell. There were socket wrenches, a case filled with drills and drillbits, bags of lawn fertilizer and Vigoro for the flower beds, but no snowmobile battery. It didn't bother him in the slightest. In fact, it made him feel glad. He was relieved. I did my best, Captain, but I could not get through. That's fine, son. I'm going to put you in for the Silver Star and the Purple Snowmobile. You're a credit to your regiment. Thank you, sir. I did try. He began to whistle "Red River Valley" uptempo as he poked along the last two or three feet of shelf. The notes came out in little puffs of white smoke. He had made a complete circuit of the shed and the thing wasn't there. Maybe somebody had lifted it. Maybe Watson had. He laughed aloud. The old office bootleg trick. A few paperclips, a couple of reams of paper, nobody will miss this tablecloth or this Golden Regal place setting ... and what about this fine snowmobile battery? Yes, that might come in handy. Toss it in the sack.
White-collar crime, Baby. Everybody has sticky fingers. Under-the-jacket discount, we used to call it when we were kids. He walked back to the snowmobile and gave the side of it a good healthy kick as he went by. Well, that was the end of it. He would just have to tell Wendy sorry, baby, but -- There was a box sitting in the corner by the door. The stool bad been right over it. Written on the top, in pencil, was the abbreviation Skid. He looked at it, the smile drying up on his lips. Look, sir, it's the cavalry. Looks like your smoke signals must have worked after all. It wasn't fair. Goddammit, it just wasn't fair. Something — luck, fate, providence — had been trying to save him. Some other luck, white luck. And at the last moment bad old Jack Torrance luck had stepped back in. The lousy run of cards wasn't over yet. Resentment, a gray, sullen wave of it, pushed up his throat. His hands had clenched into fists again. (Not fair, goddammit, not fair!) Why couldn't he have looked someplace else? Anyplace! Why hadn't he had a crick in his neck or an itch in his nose or the need to blink? Just one of those little things. He never would have seen it. Well, he hadn't. That was all. It was an hallucination, no different from what had happened yesterday outside that room on the second floor or the goddam hedge menagerie. A momentary strain, that was all. Fancy, I thought I saw a snowmobile battery in that corner. Nothing there now. Combat fatigue, I guess, sir. Sorry. Keep your pecker up, son. It happens to all of us sooner or later. He yanked the door open almost hard enough to snap the hinges and pulled his snowshoes inside. They were clotted with snow and he slapped them down hard enough on the floor to raise a cloud of it. He put his left foot on the left shoe ... and paused. Danny was out there, by the milk platform. Trying to make a snowman, by the looks. Not much luck; the snow was too cold to stick together. Still, he was giving it the old college try, out there in the flashing morning, a speck of a bundled-up boy above the brilliant snow and below the brilliant sky. Wearing his hat turned around backward like Carlton Fiske. (What in the name of God were you thinking of?) The answer came back with no pause. (Me. I was thinking of me.) He suddenly remembered lying in bed the night before, lying there and suddenly he had been contemplating the murder of his wife. In that instant, kneeling there, everything came clear to him. It was not just Danny the Overlook was working on. It was working on him, too. It wasn't Danny who was the weak link, it was him. He was the vulnerable one, the one who could be bent and twisted until something snapped. (until i let go and sleep ... and when i do that if i do that) He looked up at the banks of windows and the sun threw back an almost blinding glare from their many-paned surfaces but he looked anyway. For the first time he noticed how much they seemed like eyes. They reflected away the sun and held their own darkness within. It was not Danny they were looking at. It was him.
In those few seconds he understood everything. There was a certain black-and- white picture he remembered seeing as a child, in catechism class. The nun had presented it to them on an easel and called it a miracle of God. The class had looked at it blankly, seeing nothing but a jumble of whites and blacks, senseless and patternless Then one of the children in the third row had gasped, "It's Jesus!" and that child had gone home with a brand-new Testament and also a calendar because he had been first. The others stared even harder, Jacky Torrance among them. One by one the other kids had given a similar gasp, one little girl transported in near-ecstasy, crying out shrilly: "I see Him! I see Him!" She had also been rewarded with a Testament. At last everyone had seen the face of Jesus in the jumble of blacks and whites except Jacky. He strained harder and harder, scared now, part of him cynically thinking that everyone else was simply putting on to please Sister Beatrice, part of him secretly convinced that he wasn't seeing it because God had decided he was the worst sinner in the class. "Don't you see it, Jacky?" Sister Beatrice had asked him in her sad, sweet manner. I see your tits, he had thought in vicious desperation. He began to shake his head, then faked excitement and said: "Yes, I do! Wow! It is Jesus! " And everyone in class had laughed and applauded him, making him feel triumphant, ashamed, and scared. Later, when everyone else had tumbled their way up from the church basement and out onto the street he had lingered behind, looking at the meaningless black-and-white jumble that Sister Beatrice had left on the easel. He hated it. They had all made it up the way he had, even Sister herself. It was a big fake. "Shitfire-hellfire-shitfire," he had whispered under his breath, and as he turned to go he bad seen the face of Jesus from the corner of his eye, sad and. wise. He turned back, his heart in his throat. Everything had suddenly clicked into place and he had stared at the picture with fearful wonder, unable to believe he had missed it. The eyes, the zigzag of shadow across the care-worn brow, the fine nose, the compassionate lips. Looking at Jack Torrance. What had only been a meaningless sprawl had suddenly been transformed into a stark black-and-white etching of the face of Christ Our Lord. Fearful wonder became terror. He had cussed in front of a picture of Jesus. He would be damned. He would be in hell with the sinners. The face of Christ had been in the picture all along. All along. Now, kneeling in the sun and watching his son playing in the shadow of the hotel, he knew that it was all true. The hotel wanted Danny, maybe all of them but Danny for sure. The hedges had really walked. There was a dead woman in 217, a woman that was perhaps only a spirit and harmless under most circumstances, but a woman who was now an active danger. Like some malevolent clockwork toy she had been wound up and set in motion by Danny's own odd mind ... and his own. Had it been Watson who had told him a man had dropped dead of a stroke one day on the roque court? Or had it been Ullman? It didn't matter. There had been an assassination on the third floor. How many old quarrels, suicides, strokes? How many murders? Was Grady lurking somewhere in the west wing with his ax, just waiting for Danny to start him up so he could come back out of the woodwork? The puffed circle of bruises around Danny's neck. The twinkling, half-seen bottles in the deserted lounge. The radio. The dreams.
The scrapbook he had found in the cellar. (Medoc, are you here? I've been sleepwalking again, my dear...) He got up suddenly, thrusting the snowshoes back out the door. He was shaking all over. He slammed the door and picked up the box with the battery in it. It slipped through his shaking fingers (oh christ what if i cracked it) and thumped over on its side. He pulled the flaps of the carton open and yanked the battery out, heedless of the acid that might be leaking through the battery's casing if it had cracked. But it hadn't. It was whole. A little sigh escaped his lips. Cradling it, he took it over to the Skidoo and put it on its platform near the front of the engine. He found a small adjustable wrench on one of the shelves and attached the battery cables quickly and with no trouble. The battery was live; no need to use the charger on it. There had been a crackle of electricity and a small odor of ozone when he slipped the positive cable onto its terminal. The job done, he stood away, wiping his hands nervously on his faded denim jacket. There. It should work. No reason why not. No reason at all except that it was part of the Overlook and the Overlook really didn't want them out of here. Not at all. The Overlook was having one hell of a good time. There was a little boy to terrorize a man and his woman to set one against the other, and if it played its cards right they could end up flitting through the Overlook's halls like insubstantial shades in a Shirley Jackson novel, whatever walked in Hill House walked alone, but you wouldn't be alone in the Overlook, oh no, there would be plenty of company here. But there was really no reason why the snowmobile shouldn't start. Except of course (Except he still didn't really want to go.) yes, except for that. He stood looking at the Skidoo, his breath puffing out in frozen little plumes. He wanted it to be the way it had been. When he had come in here he'd had no doubts. Going down would be the wrong decision, he had known that then. Wendy was only scared of the boogeyman summoned up by a single hysterical little boy. Now suddenly, he could see her side. It was like his play, his damnable play. He no longer knew which side he was on, or how things should come out. Once you saw the face of a god in those jumbled blacks and whites, it was everybody out of the pool — you could never unsee it. Others might laugh and say it's nothing, just a lot of splotches with no meaning, give me a good old Craft- master paint-by-the-numbers any day, but you would always see the face of Christ-Our-Lord looking out at you. You had seen it in one gestalt leap, the conscious and unconscious melding in that one shocking moment of understanding. You would always see it. You were damned to always see it. (I've been sleepwalking again, my dear ...) It had been all right until he had seen Danny playing in the snow. It was Danny's fault. Everything had been Danny's fault. He was the one with the shining, or whatever it was. It wasn't a shining. It was a curse. If he and Wendy had been here alone, they could have passed the winter quite nicely. No pain, no strain on the brain. (Don't want to leave. ?Can't?) The Overlook didn't want them to go and he didn't want them to go either. Not
even Danny. Maybe he was a part of it, now. Perhaps the Overlook, large and rambling Samuel Johnson that it was, had picked him to be its Boswell. You say the new caretaker writes? Very good, sign him on. Time we told our side. Let's get rid of the woman and his snotnosed kid first, however. We don't want him to be distracted. We don't -- He was standing by the snowmobile's cockpit, his head starting to ache again. What did it come down to? Go or stay. Very simple. Keep it simple. Shall we go or shall we stay? If we go, how long will it be before you find the local hole in Sidewinder? a voice inside him asked. The dark place with the lousy color TV that unshaven and unemployed men spend the day watching game shows on? Where the piss in the men's room smells two thousand years old and there's always a sodden Camel butt unraveling in the toilet bowl? Where the beer is thirty cents a glass and you cut it with salt and the jukebox is loaded with seventy country oldies? How long? Oh Christ, he was so afraid it wouldn't be long at all. "I can't win," he said, very softly. That was it. It was like trying to play solitaire with one of the aces missing from the deck. Abruptly he leaned over the Skidoo's motor compartment and yanked off the magneto. It came off with sickening ease. He looked at it for a moment, then went to the equipment shed's back door and opened it. From here the view of the mountains was unobstructed, picture-postcard beautiful in the twinkling brightness of morning. An unbroken field of snow rose to the first pines about a mile distant. He flung the magneto as far out into the snow as he could. It went much further than it should have. There was a light puff of snow when it fell. The light breeze carried the snow granules away to fresh resting places. Disperse there, I say. There's nothing to see. It's all over. Disperse. He felt at peace. He stood in the doorway for a long time, breathing the good mountain air, and then he closed it firmly and went back out the other door to tell Wendy they would be staying. On the way, he stopped and had a snowball fight with Danny.
<< 34 >> THE HEDGES
It was November 29, three days after Thanksgiving. The last week had been a good one, the Thanksgiving dinner the best they'd ever had as a family. Wendy had cooked Dick Hallorann's turkey to a turn and they had all eaten to bursting without even coming close to demolishing the jolly bird. Jack had groaned that they would be eating turkey for the rest of the winter — creamed turkey, turkey sandwiches, turkey and noodles, turkey surprise.
No, Wendy told him with a little smile. Only until Christmas. Then we have the capon. Jack and Danny groaned together. The bruises on Danny's neck had faded, and their fears seemed to have faded with them. On Thanksgiving afternoon Wendy had been pulling Danny around on his sled while Jack worked on the play, which was now almost done. "Are you still afraid, doc?" she had asked, not knowing bow to put the question less baldly. "Yes," he answered simply. "But now I stay in the safe places." "Your daddy says that sooner or later the forest rangers will wonder why we're not checking in on the CB radio. They'll come to see if anything is wrong. We might go down then. You and I. And let your daddy finish the winter. He has good reasons for wanting to. In a way, doc ... I know this is hard for you to understand ... our backs are against the wall." "Yes," he had answered noncommittally. On this sparkling afternoon the two of them were upstairs, and Danny knew that they had been making love. They were dozing now. They were happy, he knew. His mother was still a little bit afraid, but his father's attitude was strange. It was a feeling that he had done something that was very hard and had done it right. But Danny could not seem to see exactly what the something was. His father was guarding that carefully, even in his own mind. Was it possible, Danny wondered, to be glad you had done something and still be so ashamed of that something that you tried not to think of it? The question was a disturbing one. He didn't think such a thing was possible ... in a normal mind. His hardest probings at his father had only brought him a dim picture of something like an octopus, whirling up into the hard blue sky. And on both occasions that he had concentrated hard enough to get this, Daddy had suddenly been staring at him in a sharp and frightening way, as if he knew what Danny was doing. Now he was in the lobby, getting ready to go out. He went out a lot, taking his sled or wearing his snowshoes. He liked to get out of the hotel. When he was out in the sunshine, it seemed like a weight had slipped from his shoulders. He pulled a chair over, stood on it, and got his parka and snow pants out of the ballroom closet, and then sat down on the chair to put them on. His boots were in the boot box and he pulled them on, his tongue creeping out into the corner of his mouth in concentration as he laced them and tied the rawhide into careful granny knots. He pulled on his mittens and his ski mask and was ready. He tramped out through the kitchen to the back door, then paused. He was tired of playing out back, and at this time of day the hotel's shadow would be cast over his play area. He didn't even like being in the Overlook's shadow. He decided be would put on his snowshoes and go down to the playground instead. Dick Hallorann had told him to stay away from the topiary, but the thought of the hedge animals did not bother him much. They were buried under snowdrifts now, nothing showing but a vague hump that was the rabbit's head and the lions' tails. Sticking out of the snow the way they were, the tails looked more absurd than frightening. Danny opened the back door and got his snowshoes from the milk platform. Five minutes later he was strapping them to his feet on the front porch. His daddy had told him that he (Danny) had the hang of using the snowshoes — the lazy,
shuffling stride, the twist of ankle that shook the powdery snow from the lacings just before the boot came back down — and all that remained was for him to build up the necessary muscles in his thighs and calves and ankles. Danny found that his ankles got tired the fastest. Snowshoeing was almost as hard on your ankles as skating, because you had to keep clearing the lacings. Every five minutes or so he had to stop with his legs spread and the snowshoes fat on the snow to rest them. But he didn't have to rest on his way down to the playground because it was all downhill. Less than ten minutes after he struggled up and over the monstrous snow-dune that had drifted in on the Overlook's front porch he was standing with his mittened hand on the playground slide. He wasn't even breathing hard. The playground seemed much nicer in the deep snow than it ever had during the autumn. It looked like a fairyland sculpture. The swing chains had been frozen in strange positions, the seats of the big kids' swings resting flush against the snow. The jungle gym was an ice-cave guarded by dripping icicle teeth. Only the chimneys of the play-Overlook stuck up over the snow (wish the other one was buried that way only not with us in it) and the tops of the cement rings protruded in two places like Eskimo igloos. Danny tramped over there, squatted, and began to dig. Before long he had uncovered the dark mouth of one of them and he slipped into the cold tunnel. In his mind he was Patrick McGoohan, the Secret Agent Man (they had shown the reruns of that program twice on the Burlington TV channel and his daddy never missed them; he would skip a party to stay home and watch "Secret Agent" or "The Avengers" and Danny had always watched with him), on the run from KGB agents in the mountains of Switzerland. There had been avalanches in the area and the notorious KGB agent Slobbo had killed his girlfriend with a poison dart, but somewhere near was the Russian antigravity machine. Perhaps at the end of this very tunnel. He drew his automatic and went along the concrete tunnel, his eyes wide and alert, his breath pluming out. The far end of the concrete ring was solidly blocked with snow. He tried digging through it and was amazed (and a little uneasy) to see how solid it was, almost like ice from the cold and the constant weight of more snow on top of it. His make-believe game collapsed around him and he was suddenly aware that he felt closed in and extremely nervous in this tight ring of cement. He could hear his breathing; it sounded dank and quick and hollow. He was under the snow, and hardly any light filtered down the hole he had dug to get in here. Suddenly he wanted to be out in the sunlight more than anything, suddenly he remembered his daddy and mommy were sleeping and didn't know there he was, that if the hole he dug caved in he would be trapped, and the Overlook didn't like him. Danny got turned around with some difficulty and crawled back along the length of the concrete ring, his snowshoes clacking woodenly together behind him, his palms crackling in last fall's dead aspen leaves beneath him. He had just reached the end and the cold spill of light coming down from above when the snow did give in, a minor fall, but enough to powder his face and clog the opening he had wriggled down through and leave him in darkness. For a moment his brain froze in utter panic and he could not think. Then, as if from far off, he heard his daddy telling him that he must never play at the Stovington dump, because sometimes stupid people hauled old refrigerators off to
the dump without removing the doors and if you got in one and the door happened to shut on you, there was no way to get out. You would die in the darkness. (You wouldn't want a thing like that to happen to you, would you, doc?) (No, Daddy.) But it had happened, his frenzied mind told him, it had happened, he was in the dark, he was closed in, and it was as cold as a refrigerator. And — (something is in here with me.) His breath stopped in a gasp. An almost drowsy terror stole through his veins. Yes. Yes. There was something in here with him, some awful thing the Overlook had saved for just such a chance as this. Maybe a huge spider that had burrowed down under the dead leaves, or a rat ... or maybe the corpse of some little kid that had died here on the playground. Had that ever happened? Yes, he thought maybe it had. He thought of the woman in the tub. The blood and brains on the wall of the Presidential Sweet. Of some little kid, its head split open from a fall from the monkey bars or a swing, crawling after him in the dark, grinning, looking for one final playmate in its endless playground. Forever. In a moment he would hear it coming. At the far end of the concrete ring, Danny heard the stealthy crackle of dead leaves as something came for him on its hands and knees. At any moment he would feel its cold hand close over his ankle -- That thought broke his paralysis. He was digging at the loose fall of snow that choked the end of the concrete ring, throwing it back between his legs in powdery bursts like a dog digging for a bone. Blue light filtered down from above and Danny thrust himself up at it like a diver coming out of deep water. He scraped his back on the lip of the concrete ring. One of his snowshoes twisted behind the other. Snow spilled down inside his ski mask and into the collar of his parka. He dug at the snow, clawed at it. It seemed to be trying to hold him, to suck him back down, back into the concrete ring where that unseen, leaf-crackling thing was, and keep him there. Forever. Then he was out, his face was turned up to the sun, and he was crawling through the snow, crawling away from the half-buried cement ring, gasping harshly, his face almost comically white with powdered snow — a living fright- mask. He hobbled over to the jungle gym and sat down to readjust his snowshoes and get his breath. As he set them to rights and tightened the straps again, he never took his eyes from the hole at the end of the concrete ring. He waited to see if something would come out. Nothing did, and after three or four minutes, Danny's breathing began to slow down. Whatever it was, it couldn't stand the sunlight. It was cooped up down there, maybe only able to come out when it was dark... or when both ends of its circular prison were plugged with snow. (but i'm safe now i'm safe i'll just go back because now i'm ) Something thumped softly behind him. He turned around, toward the hotel, and looked. But even before he looked (Can you see the Indians in this picture?) he knew what he would see, because he knew what that soft thumping sound had been. It was the sound of a large clump of snow falling, the way it sounded when it slid off the roof of the hotel and fell to the ground. (Can you see — ?) Yes. He could. The snow had fallen off the hedge dog. When he came down it had
only been a harmless lump of snow outside the playground. Now it stood revealed, an incongruous splash of green in all the eye-watering whiteness. It was sitting up, as if to beg a sweet or a scrap. But this time he wouldn't go crazy, he wouldn't blow his cool. Because at least he wasn't trapped in some dark old hole. He was in the sunlight. And it was just a dog. It's pretty warm out today, he thought hopefully. Maybe the sun just melted enough snow off that old dog so the rest fell off in a bunch. Maybe that's all it is. (Don't go near that place ... steer right clear.) His snowshoe bindings were as tight as they were ever going to be. He stood up and stared back at the concrete ring, almost completely submerged in the snow, and what he saw at the end he had exited from froze his heart. There was a circular patch of darkness at the end of it, a fold of shadow that marked the hole he'd dug to get down inside. Now, in spite of the snow-dazzle, he thought he could see something there. Something moving. A hand. The waving hand of some desperately unhappy child, waving hand, pleading hand, drowning hand. (Save me O please save me If you can't save me at least come play with me... Forever. And Forever. And Forever.) "No," Danny whispered huskily. The word fell dry and bare from his mouth, which was stripped of moisture. He could feel his mind wavering now, trying to go away the way it had when the woman in the room had ... no, better not think of that. He grasped at the strings of reality and held them tightly. He had to get out of here. Concentrate on that. Be cool. Be like the Secret Agent Man. Would Patrick McGoohan be crying and peeing in his pants like a little baby? Would his daddy? That calmed him somewhat. From behind him, that soft Hump sound of falling snow came again. He turned around and the head of one of the hedge lions was sticking out of the snow now, snarling at him. It was closer than it should have been, almost up to the gate of the playground. Terror tried to rise up and he quelled it. He was the Secret Agent Man, and he would escape. He began to walk out of the playground, taking the same roundabout course his father had taken on the day that the snow flew. He concentrated on operating the snowshoes. Slow, flat strides. Don't lift your foot too high or you'll lose your balance. Twist your ankle and spill the snow off the crisscrossed lacings. It seemed so slow. He reached the corner of the playground. The snow was drifted high here and he was able to step over the fence. He got halfway over and then almost fell flat when the snowshoe on his behind foot caught on one of the fence posts. He leaned on the outside edge of gravity, pinwheeling his arms, remembering how hard it was to get up once you fell down. From his right, that soft sound again, falling clumps of snow. He looked over and saw the other two lions, clear of snow now down to their forepaws, side by side, about sixty paces away. The green indentations that were their eyes were fixed on him. The dog had turned its head. (It only happens when you're not looking.) "Oh! Hey — "
His snowshoes had crossed and he plunged forward into the snow, arms waving uselessly. More snow got inside his hood and down his neck and into the tops of his boots. He struggled out of the snow and tried to get the snowshoes under him, heart hammering crazily now (Secret Agent Man remember you're the Secret Agent) and overbalanced backward. For a moment he lay there looking at the sky, thinking it would be simpler to just give up. Then he thought of the thing in the concrete tunnel and knew he could not. He gained his feet and stared over at the topiary. All three lions were bunched together now, not forty feet away. The dog had ranged off to their left, as if to block Danny's retreat. They were bare of snow except for powdery ruffs around their necks and muzzles. They were all staring at him. His breath was racing now, and the panic was like a rat behind his forehead, twisting and gnawing. He fought the panic and he fought the snowshoes. (Daddy's voice: No, don't fight them, doc. Walk on them like they were your own feet. Walk with them.) (Yes, Daddy.) He began to walk again, trying to regain the easy rhythm he had practiced with his daddy. Little by little it began to come, but with the rhythm came an awareness of just how tired he was, how much his fear had exhausted him. The tendons of his thighs and calves and ankles were hot and trembly. Ahead he could see the Overlook, mockingly distant, seeming to stare at him with its many windows, as if this were some sort of contest in which it was mildly interested. Danny looked back over his shoulder and his hurried breathing caught for a moment and then hurried on even faster. The nearest lion was now only twenty feet behind, breasting through the snow like a dog paddling in a pond. The two others were to its right and left, pacing it. They were like an army platoon on patrol, the dog, still off to their left, the scout. The closest lion had its head down. The shoulders bunched powerfully above its neck. The tail was up, as if in the instant before he had turned to look it had been swishing back and forth, back and forth. He thought it looked like a great big housecat that was having a good time playing with a mouse before killing it. ( — falling — ) No, if he fell he was dead. They would never let him get up. They would pounce. He pinwheeled his arms madly and lunged ahead, his center of gravity dancing just beyond his nose. He caught it and hurried on, snapping glances back over his shoulder. The air whistled in and out of his dry throat like hot glass. The world closed down to the dazzling snow, the green hedges, and the whispery sound of his snowshoes. And something else. A soft, muffled padding sound. He tried to hurry faster and couldn't. He was walking over the buried driveway now, a small boy with his face almost buried in the shadow of his parka hood. The afternoon was still and bright. When he looked back again, the point lion was only five feet behind. It was grinning. Its mouth was open, its haunches tensed down like a clockspring. Behind it and the others he could see the rabbit, its head now sticking out of the snow, bright green, as if it had turned its horrid blank face to watch the end of the stalk. Now, on the Overlook's front lawn between the circular drive and the porch, he
let the panic loose and began to run clumsily in the snowshoes, not daring to look back now, tilting further and further forward, his arms out ahead of him like a blind man feeling for obstacles. His hood fell back, revealing his complexion, paste white giving way to hectic red blotches on his cheeks, his eyes bulging with terror. The porch was very close now. Behind him he heard the sudden hard crunch of snow as something leaped. He fell on the porch steps, screaming without sound, and scrambled up them on his hands and knees, snowshoes clattering and askew behind him. There was a slashing sound in the air and sudden pain in his leg. The ripping sound of cloth. Something else that might have — must have — been in his mind. Bellowing, angry roar. Smell of blood and evergreen. He fell full-length on the porch, sobbing hoarsely, the rich, metallic taste of copper in his mouth. His heart was thundering in his chest. There was a small trickle of blood coming from his nose. He had no idea how long he lay there before the lobby doors flew open and Jack ran out, wearing just his jeans and a pair of slippers. Wendy was behind him. "Danny!" she screamed. "Doc! Danny, for Christ's sake! What's wrong? What happened?" Daddy was helping him up. Below the knee his snowpants were ripped open. Inside, his woollen ski sock had been ripped open and his calf had been shallowly scratched ... as if he had tried to push his way through a closely grown evergreen hedge and the branches had clawed him. He looked over his shoulder. Far down the lawn, past the putting green, were a number of vague, snow-cowled humps. The hedge animals. Between them and the playground. Between them and the road. His legs gave way. Jack caught him. He began to cry.
<< 35 >> THE LOBBY
He had told them everything except what had happened to him when the snow had blocked the end of the concrete ring. He couldn't bring himself to repeat that. And he didn't know the right words to express the creeping, lassitudinous sense of terror he had felt when he heard the dead aspen leaves begin to crackle furtively down there in the cold darkness. But he told them about the soft sound of snow falling in clumps. About the lion with its head and its bunched shoulders working its way up and out of the snow to chase him. He even told them about how the rabbit had turned its head to watch near the end. The three of them were in the lobby. Jack had built a roaring blaze in the fireplace. Danny was bundled up in a blanket on the small sofa where once, a
million years ago, three nuns had sat laughing like girls while they waited for the line at the desk to thin out. He was sipping hot noodle soup from a mug. Wendy sat beside him, stroking his hair. Jack had sat on the floor, his face seeming to grow more and more still, more and more set as Danny told his story. Twice he pulled his handkerchief out of his back pocket and rubbed his sorelooking lips with it. "Then they chased me," he finished. Jack got up and went over to the window, his back to them. He looked at his mommy. "They chased me all the way up to the porch." He was struggling to keep his voice calm, because if he stayed calm maybe they would believe him. Mr. Stenger hadn't stayed calm. He had started to cry and hadn't been able to stop SO THE MEN IN THE WHITE COATS had come to take him away because if you couldn't stop crying it meant you had LOST YOUR MARBLES and when would you be back? NO ONE KNOWS. His parka and snowpants and the clotted snowshoes lay on the rug just inside the big double doors. (I won't cry I won't let myself cry) And he thought he could do that, but he couldn't stop shaking. He looked into the fire and waited for Daddy to say something. High yellow flames danced on the dark stone hearth. A pine-knot exploded with a bang and sparks rushed up the flue. "Danny, come over here." Jack turned around. His face still had that pinched, deathly look. Danny didn't like to look at it. "Jack — " "I just want the boy over here for a minute." Danny slipped off the sofa and came over beside his daddy. "Good boy. Now what do you see?" Danny had known what he would see even before he got to the window. Below the clutter of boot tracks, sled tracks, and snowshoe tracks that marked their usual exercise area, the snowfield that covered the Overlook's lawns sloped down to the topiary and the playground beyond. It was marred by two sets of tracks, one of them in a straight line from the porch to the playground, the other a long, looping line coming back up. "Only my tracks, Daddy. But — " "What about the hedges, Danny?" Danny's lips began to tremble. He was going to cry. What if he couldn't stop? (i won't cry I Won't Cry Won't Won't WON'T) "All covered with snow," he whispered. "But, Daddy — " "What? I couldn't hear you!" "Jack, you're cross-examining him! Can't you see he's upset, he's — " "Shut up! Well, Danny?" "They scratched me, Daddy. My leg — " "You must have cut your leg on the crust of the snow." Then Wendy was between them, her face pale and angry. "What are you trying to make him do?" she asked him. "Confess to murder? What's wrong with you?" The strangeness in his eyes seemed to break then. "I'm trying to help him find the difference between something real and something that was only an hallucination, that's all." He squatted by Danny so they were on an eye-to-eye level, and then hugged him tight. "Danny, it didn't really happen. Okay? It was like one of those trances you have sometimes. That's all."
"Daddy?" "What, Dan?" "I didn't cut my leg on the crust. There isn't any crust. It's all powdery snow. It won't even stick together to make snowballs. Remember we tried to have a snowball fight and couldn't?" He felt his father stiffen against him. "The porch step, then." Danny pulled away. Suddenly he had it. It had flashed into his mind all at once, the way things sometimes did, the way it had about the woman wanting to be in that gray man's pants. He stared at his father with widening eyes. "You know I'm telling the truth," he whispered, shocked. "Danny — "Jack's face, tightening. "You know because you saw — " The sound of Jack's open palm striking Danny's face was flat, not dramatic at all. The boy's head rocked back, the palmprint reddening on his cheek like a brand. Wendy made a moaning noise. For a moment they were still, the three of them, and then Jack grabbed for his son and said, "Danny, I'm sorry, you okay, doc?" "You hit him, you bastardl" Wendy cried. "You dirty bastard!" She grabbed his other arm and for a moment Danny was pulled between them. "Oh please stop pulling me!" he screamed at them, and there was such agony in his voice that they both let go of him, and then the tears had to come and he collapsed, weeping, between the sofa and the window, his parents staring at him helplessly, the way children might stare at a toy broken in a furious tussle over to whom it belonged. In the fireplace another pine-knot exploded like a hand grenade, making them all jump.
* * *
Wendy gave him baby aspirin and Jack slipped him, unprotesting, between the sheets of his cot. He was asleep in no time with his thumb in his mouth. "I don't like that," she said. "It's a regression." Jack didn't reply. She looked at him softly, without anger, without a smile, either. "You want me to apologize for calling you a bastard? All right, I apologize. I'm sorry. You still shouldn't have hit him. "I know," he muttered. "I know that. I don't know what the hell came over me." "You promised you'd never hit him again." He looked at her furiously, and then the fury collapsed. Suddenly, with pity and horror, she saw what Jack would look like as an old man. She had never seen him look that way before. (?what way?) Defeated, she answered herself. He looks beaten. He said: "I always thought I could keep my promises." She went to him and put her hands on his arm. "All right, it's over. And when the ranger comes to check us, we'll tell him we all want to go down. All right?" "All right," Jack said, and at that moment, at least, he meant it. The same way he had always meant it on those mornings after, looking at his pale and
haggard face in the bathroom mirror. I'm going to stop, going to cut it off flat. But morning gave way to afternoon, and in the afternoons he felt a little better. And afternoon gave way to night. As some great twentieth-century thinker had said, night must fall. He found himself wishing that Wendy would ask him about the hedges, would ask him what Danny meant, when he said You know because you saw — If she did, he would tell her everything. Everything. The hedges, the woman in the room, even about the fire hose that seemed to have switched positions. But where did confession stop? Could he tell her he'd thrown the magneto away, that they could all be down in Sidewinder right now if he hadn't done that? What she said was, "Do you want tea?" "Yes. A cup of tea would be good." She went to the door and paused there, rubbing her forearms through her sweater. "It's my fault as much as yours," she said. "What were we doing while he was going through that ... dream, or whatever it was?" "Wendy — " "We were sleeping," she said. "Sleeping like a couple of teenage kids with their itch nicely scratched." "Stop it," he said. "It's over." "No," Wendy answered, and gave him a strange, restless smile. "It's not over." She went out to make tea, leaving him to keep watch over their son.
<< 36 >> THE ELEVATOR
Jack awoke from a thin and uneasy sleep where huge and ill-defined shapes chased him through endless snowfields to what he first thought was another dream: darkness, and in it, a sudden mechanical jumble of noises — clicks and clanks, hummings, rattlings, snaps and whooshes. Then Wendy sat up beside him and he knew it was no dream. "What's that?" Her hand, cold marble, gripped his wrist. He restrained an urge to shake it off — how in the hell was he supposed to know what it was? The illuminated clock on his nightstand said it was five minutes to twelve. The humming sound again. Loud and steady, varying the slightest bit. Followed by a clank as the humming ceased. A rattling bang. A thump. Then the humming resumed. It was the elevator. Danny was sitting up. "Daddy? Daddy?" His voice was sleepy and scared. "Right here, doc," Jack said. "Come on over and jump in. Your mom's awake, too." The bedclothes rustled as Danny got on the bed between them. "It's the
elevator," he whispered. "That's right," Jack said. "Just the elevator." "What do you mean, just?" Wendy demanded. There was an ice-skim of hysteria on her voice. "It's the middle of the night. Who's running it?" Hummmmmmm. Click /clank. Above them now. The rattle of the gate accordioning back, the bump of the doors opening and closing. Then the hum of the motor and the cables again. Danny began to whimper. Jack swung his feet out of bed and onto the floor. "It's probably a short. I'll check." "Don't you dare go out of this room!" "Don't be stupid," he said, pulling on his robe. "It's my job." She was out of bed herself a moment later, pulling Danny with her. "We'll go, too." "Wendy — " "What's wrong?" Danny asked somberly. "What's wrong, Daddy?" Instead of answering he turned away, his face angry and set. He belted his robe around him at the door, opened it, and stepped out into the dark hall. Wendy hesitated for a moment, and it was actually Danny who began to move first. She caught up quickly, and they went out together. Jack hadn't bothered with the lights. She fumbled for the switch that lit the four spaced overheads in the hallway that led to the main corridor. Up ahead, Jack was already turning the corner. This time Danny found the switchplate and flicked all three switches up. The hallway leading down to the stairs and the elevator shaft came alight. Jack was standing at the elevator station, which was flanked by benches and cigarette urns. He was standing motionless in front of the closed elevator door. In his faded tartan bathrobe and brown leather slippers with the rundown heels, his hair all in sleep corkscrews and Alfalfa cowlicks, he looked to her like an absurd twentieth-century Hamlet, an indecisive figure so mesmerized by onrushing tragedy that he was helpless to divert its course or alter it in any way. (jesus stop thinking so crazy — ) Danny's hand bad tightened painfully on her own. He was looking up at her intently, his face strained and anxious. He had been catching the drift of her thoughts, she realized. Just how much or how little of them he was getting was impossible to say, but she flushed, feeling much the same as if he had caught her in a masturbatory act. "Come on," she said, and they went down the hall to Jack. The hummings and clankings and thumpings were louder here, terrifying in a disconnected, benumbed way. Jack was staring at the closed door with feverish intensity. Through the diamond-shaped window in the center of the elevator door she thought she could make out the cables, thrumming slightly. The elevator clanked to a stop below them, at lobby level. They heard the doors thump open. And ... (party) Why had she thought party? The word had simply jumped into her head for no reason at all. The silence in the Overlook was complete and intense except for the weird noises coming up the elevator shaft.
(must have been quite a party) (???WHAT PARTY???) For just a moment her mind had filled with an image so real that it seemed to be a memory ... not just any memory but one of those you treasure, one of those you keep for very special occasions and rarely mention aloud. Lights ... hundreds, maybe thousands of them. Lights and colors, the pop of champagne corks, a forty-piece orchestra playing Glenn Miller's "In the Mood." But Glenn Miller had gone down in his bomber before she was born, how could she have a memory of Glenn Miller? She looked down at Danny and saw his head had cocked to one side, as if he was hearing something she couldn't hear. His face was very pale. Thump. The door had slid shut down there. A humming whine as the elevator began to rise. She saw the engine housing on top of the car first through the diamond- shaped window, then the interior of the car, seen through the further diamond shapes made by the brass gate. Warm yellow light from the car's overhead. It was empty. The car was empty. It was empty but (on the night of the party they must have crowded in by the dozens, crowded the car way beyond its safety limit but of course it had been new then and all of them wearing masks) (????WHAT MASKS????) The car stopped above them, on the third floor. She looked at Danny. His face was all eyes. His mouth was pressed into a frightened, bloodless slit. Above them, the brass gate rattled back. The elevator door thumped open, it thumped open because it was time, the time had come, it was time to say (Goodnight ... goodnight ... yes, it was lovely ... no, i really can't stay for the unmasking ... early to bed, early to rise ... oh, was that Sheila? ... the monk? ... isn't that witty, Sheila coming as a monk? ... yes, goodnight ...good) Thump. Gears clashed. The motor engaged. The car began to whine back down. "Jack," she whispered. "What is it? What's wrong with it?" "A short circuit," he said. His face was like wood. "I told you, it was a short circuit." "I keep hearing voices in my head!" she cried. "What is it? What's wrong? I feel like I'm going crazy!" "What voices?" He looked at her with deadly blandness. She turned to Danny. "Did you — ?" Danny nodded slowly. "Yes. And music. Like from a long time ago. In my head." The elevator car stopped again. The hotel was silent, creaking, deserted. Outside, the wind whined around the eaves in the darkness. "Maybe you are both crazy," Jack said conversationally. "I don't hear a goddamned thing except that elevator having a case of the electrical hiccups. If you two want to have duet hysterics, fine. But count me out." The elevator was coming down again. Jack stepped to the right, where a glass-fronted box was mounted on the wall at chest height. He smashed his bare fist against it. Glass tinkled inward. Blood dripped from two of his knuckles. He reached in and took out a key with a
long, smooth barrel. "Jack, no. Don't." "I am going to do my job. Now leave me alone, Wendy!" She tried to grab his arm. He pushed her backward. Her feet tangled in the hem of her robe and she fell to the carpet with an ungainly thump. Danny cried out shrilly and fell on his knees beside her. Jack turned back to the elevator and thrust the key into the socket. The elevator cables disappeared and the bottom of the car came into view in the small window. A second later Jack turned the key hard. There was a grating, screeching sound as the elevator car came to an instant standstill. For a moment the declutched motor in the basement whined even louder, and then its circuit breaker cut in and the Overlook went unearthly still. The night wind outside seemed very loud by comparison. Jack looked stupidly at the gray metal elevator door. There were three splotches of blood below the keyhole from his lacerated knuckles. He turned back to Wendy and Danny for a moment. She was sitting up, and Danny had his arm around her. They were both staring at him carefully, as if he was a stranger they had never seen before, possibly a dangerous one. He opened his mouth, not sure what was going to come out. "It... Wendy, it's my job." She said clearly: "Fuck your job" He turned back to the elevator, worked his fingers into the crack that ran down the right side of the door, and got it to open a little way. Then he was able to get his whole weight on it and threw the door open. The car had stopped halfway, its floor at Jack's chest level. Warm light still spilled out of it, contrasting with the oily darkness of the shaft below. He looked in for what seemed a long time. "It's empty," he said then. "A short circuit, like I said." He hooked his fingers into the slot behind the door and began to pull it closed ... then her hand was on his shoulder, surprisingly strong, yanking him away. "Wendy!" he shouted. But she had already caught the car's bottom edge and pulled herself up enough so she could look in. Then, with a convulsive heave of her shoulder and belly muscles, she tried to boost herself all the way up. For a moment the issue was in doubt. Her feet tottered over the blackness of the shaft and one pink slipper fell from her foot and slipped out of sight. "Mommy!" Danny screamed. Then she was up, her cheeks flushed, her forehead as pale and shining as a spirit lamp. "What about this, Jack? Is this a short circuit?" She threw something and suddenly the hall was full of drifting confetti, red and white and blue and yellow. "Is this?" A green party streamer, faded to a pale pastel color with age. "And this?" She tossed it out and it came to rest on the blue-black jungle carpet, a black silk cat's-eye mask, dusted with sequins at the temples. "Does that look like a short circuit to you, Jack?" she screamed at him. Jack stepped slowly away from it, shaking his head mechanically back and forth. The cat's-eye mask stared up blankly at the ceiling from the confetti- strewn hallway carpet.
<< 37 >>
THE BALLROOM
It was the first of December. Danny was in the east-wing ballroom, standing on an over-stuffed, high-backed wing chair, looking at the clock under glass. It stood in the center of the ballroom's high, ornamental mantelpiece, flanked by two large ivory elephants. He almost expected the elephants would begin to move and try to gore him with their tusks as he stood there, but they were moveless. They were "safe." Since the night of the elevator he had come to divide all things at the Overlook into two categories. The elevator, the basement, the playground, Room 217, and the Presidential Suite (it was Suite, not Sweet; he had seen the correct spelling in an account book Daddy had been reading at supper last night and had memorized it carefully) — those places were "unsafe." Their quarters, the lobby, and the porch were "safe." Apparently the ballroom was, too. (The elephants are, anyway.) He was not sure about other places and so avoided them on general principle. He looked at the clock inside the glass dome. It was under glass because all its wheels and cogs and springs were showing. A chrome or steel track ran around the outside of these works, and directly below the clockface there was a small axis bar with a pair of meshing cogs at either end. The hands of the clock stood at quarter past XI, and although he didn't know Roman numerals he could guess by the configuration of the hands at what time the clock had stopped. The clock stood on a velvet base. In front of it, slightly distorted by the curve of the dome, was a carefully carved silver key. He supposed that the clock was one of the things he wasn't supposed to touch, like the decorative fire-tools in their brass-bound cabinet by the lobby fireplace or the tall china highboy at the back of the dining room. A sense of injustice and a feeling of angry rebellion suddenly rose in him and (never mind what i'm not supposed to touch, just never mind. touched me, hasn't it? played with me, hasn't it?) It had. And it hadn't been particularly careful not to break him, either. Danny put his hands out, grasped the glass dome, and lifted it aside. He let one finger play over the works for a moment, the pad of his index finger denting against the cogs, running smoothly over the wheels. He picked up the silver key. For an adult it would have been uncomfortably small, but it fitted his own fingers perfectly. He placed it in the keyhole at the center of the clockface. It went firmly home with a tiny click, more felt than heard. It wound to the right, of course; clockwise. Danny turned the key until it would turn no more and then removed it. The
clock began to tick. Cogs turned. A large balance wheel rocked back and forth in semicircles. The hands were moving. If you kept your head perfectly motionless and your eyes wide open, you could see the minute hand inching along toward its meeting some forty-five minutes from now with the hour hand. At XII. (And the Red Death held sway over all.) He frowned, and then shook the thought away. It was a thought with no meaning or reference for him. He reached his index finger out again and pushed the minute band up to the hour, curious about what might happen. It obviously wasn't a cuckoo clock, but that steel rail had to have some purpose. There was a small, ratcheting series of clicks, and then the clock began to tinkle Strauss's "Blue Danube Waltz." A punched roll of cloth no more than two inches in width began to unwind. A small series of brass strikers rose and fell. From behind the clockface two figures glided into view along the steel track, ballet dancers, on the left a girl in a fluffy skirt and white stockings, on the right a boy in a black leotard and ballet slippers. Their hands were held in arches over their beads. They came together in the middle, in front of VI. Danny espied tiny grooves in their sides, just below their armpits. The axis bar slipped into these grooves and he heard another small click. The cogs at either end of the bar began to turn. "The Blue Danube" tinkled. The dancers' arms came down around each other. The boy flipped the girl up over his head and then whirled over the bar. They were now lying prone, the boy's head buried beneath the girl's short ballet skirt, the girl's face pressed against the center of the boy's leotard. They writhed in a mechanical frenzy. Danny's nose wrinkled. They were kissing peepees. That made him feel sick. A moment later and things began to run backward. The boy whirled back over the axis bar. He flipped the girl into an upright position. They seemed to nod knowingly at each other as their hands arched back over their heads. They retreated the way they had come, disappearing just as "The Blue Danube" finished. The clock began to strike a count of silver chimes. (Midnight! Stroke of midnight!) (Hooray for masks!) Danny whirled on the chair, almost falling down. The ballroom was empty. Beyond the double cathedral window he could see fresh snow beginning to sift down. The huge ballroom rug (rolled up for dancing, of course), a rich tangle of red and gold embroidery, lay undisturbed on the floor. Spaced around it were small, intimate tables for two, the spidery chairs that went with each upended with legs pointing at the ceiling. The whole place was empty. But it wasn't really empty. Because here in the Overlook things just went on and on. Here in the Overlook all times were one. There was an endless night in August of 1945, with laughter and drinks and a chosen shining few going up and coming down in the elevator, drinking champagne and popping party favors in each other's faces. It was a not-yet-light morning in June some twenty years later and the organization hitters endlessly pumped shotgun shells into the torn and bleeding bodies of three men who went through their agony endlessly. In a room on the second floor a woman lolled in her tub and waited for visitors. In the Overlook all things had a sort of life. It was as if the whole place
had been wound up with a silver key. The clock was running. The clock was running. He was that key, Danny thought sadly. Tony had warned him and he had just let things go on. (I'm just five!) he cried to some half-felt presence in the room. (Doesn't it make any deference that I'm just five?) There was no answer. He turned reluctantly back to the clock. He had been putting it off, hoping that something would happen to help him avoid trying to call Tony again, that a ranger would come, or a helicopter, or the rescue team; they always came in time on his TV programs, the people were saved. On TV the rangers and the SWAT squad and the paramedics were a friendly white force counterbalancing the confused evil that he perceived in the world; when people got in trouble they were helped out of it, they were fixed up. They did not have to help themselves out of trouble. (Please?) There was no answer. No answer, and if Tony came would it be the same nightmare? The booming, the coarse and petulant voice, the blueblack rug like snakes? Redrum? But what else? (Please oh please) No answer. With a trembling sigh, he looked at the clockface. Cogs turned and meshed with other cogs. The balance wheel rocked hypnotically back and forth. And if you held your head perfectly still, you could see the minute hand creeping inexorably down from XII to V. If you held your bead perfectly still you could see that -- The clockface was gone. In its place was a round black hole. It led down into forever. It began to swell. The clock was gone. The room behind it. Danny tottered and then fell into the darkness that had been hiding behind the clockface all along. The small boy in the chair suddenly collapsed and lay in it at a crooked unnatural angle, his head thrown back, his eyes staring sightlessly at the high ballroom ceiling. Down and down and down and down to --
But there was another figure in the hallway. Slouched nonchalantly against the wall just behind him. Like a ghost. No, not a ghost, but all dressed in white. Dressed in whites. (I'll find you, you goddam little whoremastering RUNT!) Danny cringed back from the sound. Coming up the main third-floor hall now.
Soon the owner of that voice would round the corner. (Come here! Come here, you little shit!) The figure dressed in white straightened up a little, removed a cigarette from the corner of his mouth, and plucked a shred of tobacco from his full lower lip. It was Hallorann, Danny saw. Dressed in his cook's whites instead of the blue suit he had been wearing on closing day. "If there is trouble," Hallorann said, "you give a call. A big loud holler like the one that knocked me back a few minutes ago. I might hear you even way down in Florida. And if I do, I'll come on the run. I'll come on the run. I'll come on the — " (Come now, then! Come now, come NOW! Oh Dick I need you we all need) " — run. Sorry, but I got to run. Sorry, Danny ole kid ole doc, but I got to run. It's sure been fun, you son of a gun, but I got to hurry, I got to run." (No!) But as he watched, Dick Hallorann turned, put his cigarette back into the corner of his mouth, and stepped nonchalantly through the wall. Leaving him alone. And that was when the shadow-figure turned the corner, huge in the hallway's gloom, only the reflected red of its eyes clear. (There you are! Now I've got you, you fuck! Now I'll teach you!) It lurched toward him in a horrible, shambling run, the roque mallet swinging up and up and up. Danny scrambled backward, screaming, and suddenly he was through the wall and falling, tumbling over and over, down the hole, down the rabbit hole and into a land full of sick wonders. Tony was far below him, also falling. (I can't come anymore, Danny ... he won't let me near you ... none of them will let me near you ... get Dick .. . get Dick ...) "Tony!" he screamed. But Tony was gone and suddenly he was in a dark room. But not entirely dark. Muted light spilling from somewhere. It was Mommy and Daddy's bedroom. He could see Daddy's desk. But the room was a dreadful shambles. He had been in this room before. Mommy's record player overturned on the floor. Her records scattered on the rug. The mattress half off the bed. Pictures ripped from the walls. His cot lying on its side like a dead dog, the Violent Violet Volkswagen crushed to purple shards of plastic. The light was coming from the bathroom door, half-open. Just beyond it a hand dangled limply, blood dripping from the tips of the fingers. And in the medicine cabinet mirror, the word REDRUM flashing off and on. Suddenly a huge clock in a glass bowl materialized in front of it. There were no hands or numbers on the clockface, only a date written in red: DECEMBER 2. And then, eyes widening in horror, he saw the word REDRUM reflecting dimly from the glass dome, now reflected twice. And he saw that it spelled MURDER. Danny Torrance screamed in wretched terror. The date was gone from the clockface. The clockface itself was gone, replaced by a circular black hole that swelled and swelled like a dilating iris. It blotted out everything and he fell forward, beginning to fall, falling, he was --
* * *
For a moment he lay on the ballroom floor, breathing bard.
REDRUM. MURDER. REDRUM. MURDER.
(The Red Death held sway over all!) (Unmask! Unmask!) And behind each glittering lovely mask, the as-yet unseen face of the shape that chased him down these dark hallways, its red eyes widening, blank and homicidal. Oh, he was afraid of what face might come to light when the time for unmasking came around at last. (DICK!) he screamed with all his might. His head seemed to shiver with the force of it. (!!! OH DICK OH PLEASE PLEASE PLEASE COME !!!) Above him the clock he had wound with the silver key continued to mark off the seconds and minutes and hours.
P A R T F I V E — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — --
Matters of Life and Death
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — --
<< 38 >> FLORIDA
Mrs. Hallorann's third son, Dick, dressed in his cook's whites, a Lucky Strike parked in the corner of his mouth, backed his reclaimed Cadillac limo out of its space behind the One-A Wholesale Vegetable Mart and drove slowly around the building. Masterton, part owner now but still walking with the patented shuffle he had adopted back before World War II, was pushing a bin of lettuces into the high, dark building. Hallorann pushed the button that lowered the passenger side window and hollered: "Those avocadoes is too damn high, you cheapskate!" Masterton looked back over his shoulder, grinned widely enough to expose all three gold teeth, and yelled back, "And I know exactly where you can put em, my good buddy." "Remarks like that I keep track of, bro." Masterton gave him the finger. Hallorann returned the compliment. "Get your cukes, did you?" Masterton asked. "I did." "You come back early tomorrow, I gonna give you some of the nicest new potatoes you ever seen." "I send the boy," Hallorann said. "You comin up tonight?" "You supplyin the juice, bro?" "That's a big ten-four." "I be there. You keep that thing off the top end goin home, you hear me? Every cop between here an St. Pete knows your name." "You know all about it, huh?" Hallorann asked, grinning. "I know more than you'll ever learn, my man." "Listen to this sassy nigger. Would you listen?" "Go on, get outta here fore I start throwin these lettuces." "Go on an throw em. I'll take anything for free." Masterton made as if to throw one. Hallorann ducked, rolled up the window, and drove on. He was feeling fine. For the last half hour or so he had been smelling oranges, but he didn't find that queer. For the last half hour he had been in a fruit and vegetable market. It was 4:30 p.m., EST, the first day of December, Old Man Winter settling his frostbitten rump firmly onto most of the country, but down here the men wore open-throated shortsleeve shirts and the women were in light summer dresses and shorts. On top of the First Bank of Florida building, a digital thermometer bordered with huge grapefruits was flashing 79° over and over. Thank God for Florida, Hallorann thought, mosquitoes and all. In the back of the limo were two dozen avocados, a crate of cucumbers, ditto oranges, ditto grapefruit. Three shopping sacks filled with Bermuda onions, the sweetest vegetable a loving God ever created, some pretty good sweet peas, which would be served with the entree and come back uneaten nine times out of ten, and a single blue Hubbard squash that was strictly for personal consumption. Hallorann stopped in the turn lane at the Vermont Street light, and when the green arrow showed he pulled out onto state highway 219, pushing up to forty and holding it there until the town began to trickle away into an exurban sprawl of gas stations, Burger Kings, and McDonalds. It was a small order today, he could
have sent Baedecker after it, but Baedecker had been chafing for his chance to buy the meat, and besides, Hallorann never missed a chance to bang it back and forth with Frank Masterton if he could help it. Masterton might show up tonight to watch some TV and drink Hallorann's Bushmill's, or he might not. Either way was all right. But seeing him mattered. Every time it mattered now, because they weren't young anymore. In the last few days it seemed he was thinking of that very fact a great deal. Not so young anymore, when you got up near sixty years old (or tell the truth and save a lie — past it) you had to start thinking about stepping out. You could go anytime. And that had been on his mind this week, not in a heavy way but as a fact. Dying was a part of living. You had to keep tuning in to that if you expected to be a whole person. And if the fact of your own death was hard to understand, at least it wasn't impossible to accept. Why this should have been on his mind he could not have said, but his other reason for getting this small order himself was so he could step upstairs to the small office over Frank's Bar and Grill. There was a lawyer up there now (the dentist who had been there last year had apparently gone broke), a young black fellow named McIver. Hallorann had stepped in and told this McIver that he wanted to make a will, and could McIver help him out? Well, McIver asked, how soon do you want the document? Yesterday, said Hallorann, and threw his head back and laughed. Have you got anything complicated in mind? was McIver's next question. Hallorann did not. He had his Cadillac, his bank account — some nine thousand dollars — a piddling checking account, and a closet of clothes. He wanted it all to go to his sister. And if your sister predeceases you? McIver asked. Never mind, Hallorann said. If that happens, I'll make a new will. The document had been completed and signed in less than three hours — fast work for a shyster — and now resided in Hallorann's breast pocket, folded into a stiff blue envelope with the word WILL on the outside in Old English letters. He could not have said why he had chosen this warm sunny day when he felt so well to do something he had been putting off for years, but the impulse had come on him and he hadn't said no. He was used to following his hunches. He was pretty well out of town now. He cranked the limo up to an illegal sixty and let it ride there in the left-hand lane, sucking up most of the Petersburg- bound traffic. He knew from experience that the limo would still ride as solid as iron at ninety, and even at a hundred and twenty it didn't seem to lighten up much. But his screamin days were long gone. The thought of putting the limo up to a hundred and twenty on a straight stretch only scared him. He was getting old. (Jesus, those oranges smell strong. Wonder if they gone over?) Bugs splattered against the window. He dialed the radio to a Miami soul station and got the soft, wailing voice of Al Green.
"What a beautiful time we had together, Now it's getting late and we must leave each other..."
He unrolled the window, pitched his cigarette butt out, then rolled it further down to clear out the smell of the oranges. He tapped his fingers against the wheel and hummed along under his breath. Hooked over the rearview mirror, his St. Christopher's medal swung gently back and forth.
And suddenly the smell of oranges intensified and he knew it was coming, something was coming at him. He saw his own eyes in the rearview, widening, surprised. And then it came all at once, came in a huge blast that drove out everything else: the music, the road ahead, his own absent awareness of himself as a unique human creature. It was as if someone had put a psychic gun to his head and shot him with a .45 caliber scream. (!!! OH DICK OH PLEASE PLEASE PLEASE COME!!!) The limo had just drawn even with a Pinto station wagon driven by a man in workman's clothes. The workman saw the limo drifting into his lane and laid on the born. When the Cadillac continued to drift he snapped a look at the driver and saw a big black man bolt upright behind the wheel, his eyes looking vaguely upward. Later the workman told his wife that he knew it was just one of those niggery hairdos they were all wearing these days, but at the time it had looked just as if every hair on that coon's head was standing on end. He thought the black man was having a heart attack. The workman braked hard, dropping back into a luckily empty space behind him. The rear end of the Cadillac pulled ahead of him, still cutting in, and the workman stared with bemused horror as the long, rocket-shaped rear taillights cut into his lane no more than a quarter of an inch in front of his bumper. The workman cut to the left, still laying on his horn, and roared around the drunkenly weaving limousine. He invited the driver of the limo to perform an illegal sex act on himself. To engage in oral congress with various rodents and birds. He articulated his own proposal that all persons of Negro blood return to their native continent. He expressed his sincere belief in the position the limo-driver's soul would occupy in the afterlife. He finished by saying that he believed be had met the limo-driver's mother in a New Orleans house of prostitution. Then he was ahead and out of danger and suddenly aware that he had wet his pants. In Hallorann's mind the thought kept repeating (COME DICK PLEASE COME DICK PLEASE) but it began to fade off the way a radio station will as you approach the limits of its broadcasting area. He became fuzzily aware that his car was tooling along the soft shoulder at better than fifty miles an hour. He guided it back onto the road, feeling the rear end fishtail for a moment before regaining the composition surface. There was an A&W Rootbeer stand just ahead. Hallorann signaled and turned in, his heart thudding painfully in his chest, his face a sickly gray color. He pulled into a parking slot, took his handkerchief out of his pocket, and mopped his forehead with it. (Lord God!) "May I help you?" The voice startled him again, even though it wasn't the voice of God but that of a cute little carhop, standing by his open window with an order pad. "Yeah, baby, a rootbeer float. Two scoops of vanilla, okay?" "Yes, sir." She walked away, hips rolling nicely beneath her red nylon uniform. Hallorann leaned back against the leather seat and closed his eyes. There was
nothing left to pick up. The last of it had faded out between pulling in here and giving the waitress his order. All that was left was a sick, thudding headache, as if his brain had been twisted and wrung out and hung up to dry. Like the headache he'd gotten from letting that boy Danny shine at him up there at Ullman's Folly. But this had been much louder. Then the boy had only been playing a game with him. This had been pure panic, each word screamed aloud in his bead. He looked down at his arms. Hot sunshine lay on them but they had still goose- bumped. He had told the boy to call him if he needed help, he remembered that. And now the boy was calling. He suddenly wondered how he could have left that boy up there at all, shining the way he did. There was bound to be trouble, maybe bad trouble. He suddenly keyed the limo, put it in reverse, and pulled back onto the highway, peeling rubber. The waitress with the rolling hips stood in the A&W stand's archway, a tray with a rootbeer float on it in her hands. "What is it with you, a fire?" she shouted, but Hallorann was gone.
* * *
The manager was a man named Queems, and when Hallorann came in Queems was conversing with his bookie. He wanted the four-horse at Rockaway. No, no parlay, no quinella, no exacta, no goddam futura. Just the little old four, six hundred dollars on the nose. And the Jets on Sunday. What did he mean, the Jets were playing the Bills? Didn't he know who the Jets were playing? Five hundred, seven-point spread. When Queems hung up, looking put-out, Hallorann understood how a man could make fifty grand a year running this little spa and still wear suits with shiny seats. He regarded Hallorann with an eye that was still bloodshot from too many glances into last night's bourbon bottle. "Problems, Dick?" "Yes, sir, Mr. Queems, I guess so. I need three days off." There was a package of Kents in the breast pocket of Queems's sheer yellow shirt. He reached one out of the pocket without removing the pack, tweezing it out, and bit down morosely on the patented Micronite filter. He lit it with his desktop Cricket. "So do I," he said. "But what's on your mind?" "I need three days," Hallorann repeated. "It's my boy." Queems's eyes dropped to Hallorann's left hand, which was ringless. "I been divorced since 1964," Hallorann said patiently. "Dick, you know what the weekend situation is. We're full. To the gunnels. Even the cheap seats. We're even filled up in the Florida Room on Sunday night. So take my watch, my wallet, my pension fund. Hell, you can even take my wife if you can stand the sharp edges. But please don't ask me for time off. What is he, sick?" "Yes, sir," Hallorann said, still trying to visualize himself twisting a cheap cloth hat and rolling his eyeballs. "He shot." "Shot!" Queems said. He put his Kent down in an ashtray which bore the emblem of Ole Miss, of which he was a business admin graduate. "Yes, sir," Hallorann said somberly.
"Hunting accident?" "No, sir," Hallorann said, and let his voice drop to a lower, huskier note. "Jana, she's been livin with this truck driver. A white man. He shot my boy. He's in a hospital in Denver, Colorado. Critical condition." "How in hell did you find out? I thought you were buying vegetables." "Yes, sir, I was." He had stopped at the Western Union office just before coming here to reserve an Avis car at Stapleton Airport. Before leaving he had swiped a Western Union flimsy. Now he took the folded and crumpled blank form from his pocket and flashed it before Queems's bloodshot eyes. He put it back in his pocket and, allowing his voice to drop another notch, said: "Jana sent it. It was waitin in my letterbox when I got back just now." "Jesus. Jesus Christ," Queems said. There was a peculiar tight expression of concern on his face, one Hallorann was familiar with. It was as close to an expression of sympathy as a white man who thought of himself as "good with the coloreds" could get when the object was a black man or his mythical black son. "Yeah, okay, you get going," Queems said. "Baedecker can take over for three days, I guess. The potboy can help out." Hallorann nodded, letting his face get longer still, but the thought of the potboy helping out Baedecker made him grin inside. Even on a good day Hallorann doubted if the potboy could hit the urinal on the first squirt. "I want to rebate back this week's pay," Hallorann said. "The whole thing. I know what a bind this puttin you in, Mr. Queems, sir." Queems's expression got tighter still it looked as if he might have a fishbone caught in his throat. "We can talk about that later. You go on and pack. I'll talk to Baedecker. Want me to make you a plane reservation?" "No, sir, I'll do it." "All right." Queems stood up, leaned sincerely forward, and inhaled a raft of ascending smoke from his Kent. He coughed heartily, his thin white face turning red. Hallorann struggled hard to keep his somber expression. "I hope everything turns out, Dick. Call when you get word." "I'll do that." They shook hands over the desk. Hallorann made himself get down to the ground floor and across to the hired help's compound before bursting into rich, bead-shaking laughter. He was still grinning and mopping his streaming eyes with his handkerchief when the smell of oranges came, thick and gagging, and the bolt followed it, striking him in the head, sending him back against the pink stucco wall in a drunken stagger.
(!!! PLEASE COME DICK PLEASE COME COME QUICK !!!)
He recovered a little at a time and at last felt capable of climbing the outside stairs to his apartment. He kept the latchkey under the rush-plaited doormat, and when he reached down to get it, something fell out of his inner pocket and fell to the second-floor decking with a flat thump. His mind was still so much on the voice that had shivered through his head that for a moment he could only look at the blue envelope blankly, not knowing what it was. Then he turned it over and the word WILL stared up at him in the black spidery
letters. (Oh my God is it like that?) He didn't know. But it could be. All week long the thought of his own ending had been on his mind like a ... well, like a (Go on, say it) like a premonition,. Death? For a moment his whole life seemed to flash before him, not in a historical sense, no topography of the ups and downs that Mrs. Hallorann's third son, Dick, had lived through, but his life as it was now. Martin Luther King had told them not long before the bullet took him down to his martyr's grave that he had been to the mountain. Dick could not claim that. No mountain, but he had reached a sunny plateau after years of struggle. He had good friends. He had all the references he would ever need to get a job anywhere. When he wanted fuck, why, he could find a friendly one with no questions asked and no big shitty struggle about what it all meant. He had come to terms with his blackness — happy terms. He was up past sixty and thank God, he was cruising. Was he going to chance the end of that — the end of him — for three white people he didn't even know? But that was a lie, wasn't it? He knew the boy. They had shared each other the way good friends can't even after forty years of it. He knew the boy and the boy knew him, because they each had a kind of searchlight in their heads, something they hadn't asked for, something that had just been given. (Naw, you got a flashlight, he the one with the searchlight.) And sometimes that light, that shine, seemed like a pretty nice thing. You could pick the horses, or like the boy had said, you could tell your daddy where his trunk was when it turned up missing. But that was only dressing, the sauce on the salad, and down below there was as much bitter vetch in that salad as there was cool cucumber. You could taste pain and death and tears. And now the boy was stuck in that place, and he would go. For the boy. Because, speaking to the boy, they had only been different colors when they used their mouths. So he would go. He would do what he could, because if he didn't, the boy was going to die right inside his head. But because he was human he could not help a bitter wish that the cup had never been passed his way.
* * *
(She had started to get out and come after him.) He had been dumping a change of clothes into an overnight bag when the thought came to him, freezing him with the power of the memory as it always did when he thought of it. He tried to think of it as seldom as possible. The maid, Delores Vickery her name was, had been hysterical. Had said some things to the other chambermaids, and worse still, to some of the guests. When the word got back to Ullman, as the silly quiff should have known it would do, he had fired her out of hand. She had come to Hallorann in tears, not about being fired, but about the thing she had seen in that second-floor room. She had gone into 217 to change the towels, she said, and there had been that Mrs.
Massey, lying dead in the tub. That, of course, was impossible. Mrs. Massey had been discreetly taken away the day before and was even then winging her way back to New York — in the shipping hold instead of the first class she'd been accustomed to. Hallorann hadn't liked Delores much, but he had gone up to look that evening. The maid was an olive-complected girl of twenty-three who waited tables near the end of the season when things slowed down. She had a small shining, Hallorann judged, really not more than a twinkle; a mousy-looking man and his escort, wearing a faded cloth coat, would come in for dinner and Delores would trade one of her tables for theirs. The mousy little man would leave a picture of Alexander Hamilton under his plate, bad enough for the girl who had made the trade, but worse, Delores would crow over it. She was lazy, a goof-off in an operation run by a man who allowed no goof-offs. She would sit in a linen closet, reading a confession magazine and smoking, but whenever Ullman went on one of his unscheduled prowls (and woe to the girl he caught resting her feet) he found her working industriously, her magazine hidden under the sheets on a high shelf, her ashtray tucked safely into her uniform pocket. Yeah, Hallorann thought, she'd been a goof-off and a sloven and the other girls had resented her, but Delores had had that little twinkle. It had always greased the skids for her. But what she had seen in 217 had scared her badly enough so she was more than glad to pick up the walking papers Ullman had issued her and go. Why had she come to him? A shine knows a shine, Hallorann thought, grinning at the pun. So he had gone up that night and had let himself into the room, which was to be reoccupied the next day. He had used the office passkey to get in, and if Ullman had caught him with that key, he would have joined Delores Vickery on the unemployment line. The shower curtain around the tub had been drawn. He had pushed it back, but even before he did he'd had a premonition of what he was going to see. Mrs. Massey, swollen and purple, lay soggily in the tub, which was half-full of water. He had stood looking down at her, a pulse beating thickly in his throat. There had been other things at the Overlook: a bad dream that recurred at irregular intervals — some sort of costume party and he was catering it in the Overlook's ballroom and at the shout to unmask, everybody exposed faces that were those of rotting insects — and there had been the hedge animals. Twice, maybe three times, he had (or thought he had) seen them move, ever so slightly. That dog would seem to change from his sitting-up posture to a slightly crouched one, and the lions seemed to move forward, as if menacing the little tykes on the playground. Last year in May Ullman had sent him up to the attic to look for the ornate set of firetools that now stood beside the lobby fireplace. While he had been up there the three lightbulbs strung overhead had gone out and he had lost his way back to the trapdoor. He had stumbled around for an unknown length of time, closer and closer to panic, barking his shins on boxes and bumping into things, with a stronger and stronger feeling that something was stalking him in the dark. Some great and frightening creature that had just oozed out of the woodwork when the lights went out. And when he had literally stumbled over the trapdoor's ringbolt he had hurried down as fast as he could, leaving the trap open, sooty and disheveled, with a feeling of disaster barely averted. Later
Ullman had come down to the kitchen personally, to inform him he had left the attic trapdoor open and the lights burning up there. Did Hallorann think the guests wanted to go up there and play treasure hunt? Did he think electricity was free? And he suspected — no, was nearly positive — that several of the guests had seen or heard things, too. In the three years he had been there, the Presidential Suite had been booked nineteen times. Six of the guests who had put up there had left the hotel early, some of them looking markedly ill. Other guests had left other rooms with the same abruptness. One night in August of 1974, near dusk, a man who had won the Bronze and Silver Stars in Korea (that man now sat on the boards of three major corporations and was said to have personally pink-slipped a famous TV news anchorman) unaccountably went into a fit of screaming hysterics on the putting green. And there had been dozens of children during Hallorann's association with the Overlook who simply refused to go into the playground. One child had had a convulsion while playing in the concrete rings, but Hallorann didn't know if that could be attributed to the Overlook's deadly siren song or not — word had gone around among the help that the child, the only daughter of a handsome movie actor, was a medically controlled epileptic who had simply forgotten her medicine that day. And so, staring down at the corpse of Mrs. Massey, he had been frightened but not completely terrified. It was not completely unexpected. Terror came when she opened her eyes to disclose blank silver pupils and began to grin at him. Horror came when (she had started to get out and come after him.) He had fled, heart racing, and had not felt safe even with the door shut and locked behind him. In fact, he admitted to himself now as he zipped the fiightbag shut, he had never felt safe anywhere in the Overlook again. And now the boy — calling, screaming for help. He looked at his watch. It was 5:30 P.m. He went to the apartment's door, remembered it would be heavy winter now in Colorado, especially up in the mountains, and went back to his closet. He pulled his long, sheepskin-lined overcoat out of its polyurethane dry-cleaning bag and put it over his arm. It was the only winter garment he owned. He turned off all the lights and looked around. Had he forgotten anything? Yes. One thing. He took the will out of his breast pocket and slipped it into the margin of the dressing table mirror. With luck he would be back to get it. Sure, with luck. He left the apartment, locked the door behind him, put the key under the rush mat, and ran down the outside steps to his converted Cadillac.
* * *
Halfway to Miami International, comfortably away from the switchboard where Queems or Queems's toadies were known to listen in, Hallorann stopped at a shopping center Laundromat and called United Air Lines. Flights to Denver? There was one due out at 6:36 p.m. Could the gentleman make that? Hallorann looked at his watch, which showed 6:02, and said he could. What about vacancies on the flight?
Just let me check. A clunking sound in his ear followed by saccharine Montavani, which was supposed to make being on hold more pleasant. It didn't. Hallorann danced from one foot to the other, alternating glances between his watch and a young girl with a sleeping baby, in a hammock on her back unloading a coin-op Maytag. She was afraid she was going to get home later than she planned and the roast would burn and her husband — Mark? Mike? Matt? — would be mad. A minute passed. Two. He had just about made up his mind to drive ahead and take his chances when the cannedsounding voice of the flight reservations clerk came back on. There was an empty seat, a cancellation. It was in first class. Did that make any difference? No. He wanted it. Would that be cash or credit card? Cash, baby, cash. I've got to fly. And the name was — ? Hallorann, two l's, two n's. Catch you later. He hung up and hurried toward the door. The girl's simple thought, worry for the roast, broadcast at him over and over until be thought he would go mad. Sometimes it was like that, for no reason at all you would catch a thought, completely isolated, completely pure and clear ... and usually completely useless.
* * *
He almost made it. He had the limo cranked up to eighty and the airport was actually in sight when one of Florida's Finest pulled him over. Hallorann unrolled the electric window and opened his mouth at the cop, who was flipping up pages in his citation book. "I know," the cop said comfortingly. "It's a funeral in Cleveland. Your father. It's a wedding in Seattle. Your sister. A fire in San Jose that wiped out your gramp's candy store. Some really fine Cambodian Red just waiting in a terminal locker in New York City. I love this piece of road just outside the airport. Even as a kid, story hour was my favorite part of school." "Listen, officer, my son is — " "The only part of the story I can never figure out until the end," the officer said, finding the right page in his citation book, "is the driver's-license number of the offending motorist / storyteller and his registration information- So be a nice guy. Let me peek." Hallorann looked into the cop's calm blue eyes, debated telling his my-son-is- in-critical-condition story anyway, and decided that would make things worse. This Smokey was no Queems. He dug out his wallet. "Wonderful," the cop said. "Would you take them out for me, please? I just have to see how it's all going to come out in the end." Silently, Hallorann took out his driver's license and his Florida registration and gave them to the traffic cop. "That's very good. That's so good you win a present."
"What?" Hallorann asked hopefully. "When I finish writing down these numbers, I'm going to let you blow up a little balloon for me." "Oh, Jeeeesus!" Hallorann moaned. "Officer, my flight — " "Shhhh," the traffic cop said. "Don't be naughty." Hallorann closed his eyes.
* * *
He got to the United desk at 6:49, hoping against hope that the flight had been delayed. He didn't even have to ask. The departure monitor over the incoming passengers desk told the story. Flight 901 for Denver, due out at 6:36 EST, had left at 6:40. Nine minutes before. "Oh shit," Dick Hallorann said. And suddenly the smell of oranges, heavy and cloying, he had just time to reach the men's room before it came, deafening, terrified: (!!! COME PLEASE COME DICK PLEASE PLEASE COME !!!)
<< 39 >> ON THE STAIRS
One of the things they had sold to swell their liquid assets a little before moving from Vermont to Colorado was Jack's collection of two hundred old rock 'n' roll and r & b albums; they had gone at the yard sale for a dollar apiece. One of these albums, Danny's personal favorite, had been an Eddie Cochran double-record set with four pages of bound-in liner notes by Lenny Kaye. Wendy had often been struck by Danny's fascination for this one particular album by a manboy who had lived fast and died young ... had died, in fact, when she herself had only been ten years old. Now, at quarter past seven (mountain time), as Dick Hallorann was telling Queems about his ex-wife's white boyfriend, she came upon Danny sitting halfway up the stairs between the lobby and the first floor, tossing a red rubber ball from hand to band and singing one of the songs from that album. His voice was low and tuneless. "So I climb one-two flight three flight four," Danny sang, "five flight six flight seven flight more ... when I get to the top, I'm too tired to rock............. " She came around him, sat down on one of the stair risers, and saw that his lower lip had swelled to twice its size and that there was dried blood on his chin. Her heart took a frightened leap in her chest, but she managed to speak neutrally.
"What happened, doc?" she asked, although she was sure she knew. Jack had hit him. Well, of course. That came next, didn't it? The wheels of progress; sooner or later they took you back to where you started from. "I called Tony," Danny said. "In the ballroom. I guess I fell off the chair. It doesn't hurt anymore. Just feels ... like my lip's too big." "Is that what really happened?" she asked, looking at him, troubled. "Daddy didn't do it," he answered. "Not today." She gazed at him, feeling eerie. The ball traveled from one band to the other. He had read her mind. Her son had read her mind. "What ... what did Tony tell you, Danny?" "It doesn't matter." His face was calm, his voice chillingly indifferent. "Danny — " She gripped his shoulder, harder than she had intended. But he didn't wince, or even try to shake her off. (Oh we are wrecking this boy. It's not just Jack, it's me too, and maybe it's not even just us, Jack's father, my mother, are they here too? Sure, why not? The place is lousy with ghosts anyway, why not a couple more? Oh Lord in heaven he's like one of those suitcases they show on TV, run over, dropped from planes, going through factory crushers. Or a Timex watch. Takes a licking and keeps on ticking. Oh Danny I'm so sorry) "It doesn't matter," he said again. The ball went from hand to hand. "Tony can't come anymore. They won't let him. He's licked." "Who won't?" "The people in the hotel," he said. He looked at her then, and his eyes weren't indifferent at all. They were deep and scared. "And the ... the things in the hotel. There's all kinds of them. The hotel is stuffed with them." "You can see — " "I don't want to see," he said low, and then looked back at the rubber ball, arcing from hand to hand. "But I can hear them sometimes, late at night. They're like the wind, all sighing together. In the attic. The basement. The rooms. All over. I thought it was my fault, because of the way I am. The key. The little silver key." "Danny, don't ... don't upset yourself this way." "But it's him too," Danny said. "It's Daddy. And it's you. It wants all of us. It's tricking Daddy, it's fooling him, trying to make him think it wants him the most. It wants me the most, but it will take all of us." "If only that snowmobile — " "They wouldn't let him," Danny said in that same low voice. "They made him throw part of it away into the snow. Far away. I dreamed it. And he knows that woman really is in 217." He looked at her with his dark, frightened eyes. "It doesn't matter whether you believe me or not." She slipped an arm around him. "I believe you, Danny, tell me the truth. Is Jack ... is he going to try to hurt us?" "They'll try to make him," Danny said. "I've been calling for Mr. Hallorann. He said if I ever needed him to just call. And I have been. But it's awful hard. It makes me tired. And the worst part is I don't know if he's hearing me or not. I don't think he can call back because it's too far for him. And I don't know if it's too far for me or not. Tomorrow — "
"What about tomorrow?" He shook his head. "Nothing." "Where is he now?" she asked. "Your daddy?" "He's in the basement. I don't think he'll be up tonight." She stood up suddenly. "Wait right here for me. Five minutes."
* * *
The kitchen was cold and deserted under the overhead fluorescent bars. She went to the rack where the carving knives hung from their magnetized strips. She took the longest and sharpest, wrapped it in a dish towel, and left the kitchen, turning off the lights as she went.
* * *
Danny sat on the stairs, his eyes following the course of his red rubber ball from hand to hand. He sang: "She lives on the twentieth floor uptown, the elevator is broken down. So I walk one-two flight three flight four. . :' ( — Lou, Lou, skip to m' Lou — ) His singing broke off. He listened. ( — Skip to m' Lou my darlin' — ) The voice was in his head, so much a part of him, so frighteningly close that it might have been a part of his own thoughts. It was soft and infinitely sly. Mocking him. Seeming to say: (Oh yes, you'll like it here. Try it, you'll like it. Try it, you'll liiiiike it — ) Now his ears were open and he could hear them again, the gathering, ghosts or spirits or maybe the hotel itself, a dreadful funhouse where all the sideshows ended in death, where all the specially painted boogies were really alive, where hedges walked, where a small silver key could start the obscenity. Soft and sighing, rustling like the endless winter wind that played under the eaves at night, the deadly lulling wind the summer tourists never heard. It was like the somnolent hum of summer wasps in a ground nest, sleepy, deadly, beginning to wake up. They were ten thousand feet high. (Why is a raven like a writing desk? The higher the fewer, of course! Have another cup of tea!) It was a living sound, but not voices, not breath. A man of a philosophical bent might have called it the sound of souls. Dick Hallorann's Nana, who had grown up on southern roads in the years before the turn of the century, would have called it ha'ants. A psychic investigator might have had a long name for it — psychic echo, psychokinesis, a telesmic sport. But to Danny it was only the sound of the hotel, the old monster, creaking steadily and ever more closely around them: halls that now stretched back through time as well as distance, hungry shadows, unquiet guests who did not rest easy. In the darkened ballroom the clock under glass struck seven-thirty with a single musical note. A hoarse voice, made brutal with drink, shouted: "Unmask and let's fuck!" Wendy, halfway across the lobby, jerked to a standstill.
She looked at Danny on the stairs, still tossing the ball from hand to hand. "Did you hear something?" Danny only looked at her and continued to toss the ball from hand to hand. There would be little sleep for them that night, although they slept together behind a locked door. And in the dark, his eyes open, Danny thought: (He wants to be one of them and live forever. That's what he wants.) Wendy thought: (If I have to, I'll take him further up. If we're going to die I'd rather do it in the mountains.) She had left the butcher knife, still wrapped in the towel, under the bed. She kept her hand close to it. They dozed off and on. The hotel creaked around them. Outside snow had begun to spit down from the sky like lead.
<< 40 >>
IN THE BASEMENT
(!!! The boiler the goddam boiler !!!) The thought came into Jack Torrance's mind full-blown, edged in bright, warning red. On its heels, the voice of Watson: (If you forget it'll just creep an creep and like as not you an your fambly wilt end up on the fuckin moon ... she's rated for two-fifty but she'd blow long before that now ... I'd be scared to come down and stand next to her at a hundred and eighty.) He'd been down here all night, poring over the boxes of old records, possessed by a frantic feeling that time was getting short and he would have to hurry. Still the vital clues, the connections that would make everything clear, eluded him. His fingers were yellow and grimy with crumbling old paper. And he'd become so absorbed he hadn't checked the boiler once. He'd dumped it the previous evening around six o'clock, when he first came down. It was now... He looked at his watch and jumped up, kicking over e stack of old invoices. Christ, it was quarter of five in the morning. Behind him, the furnace kicked on. The boiler was making a groaning, whistling sound. He ran to it. His face, which had become thinner in the last month or so, was now heavily shadowed with beardstubble and he had a hollow concentration-camp look. The boiler pressure gauge stood at two hundred and ten pounds per square inch. He fancied he could almost see the sides of the old patched and welded boiler heaving out with the lethal strain. (She creeps ... I'd be scared to come down and stand next to her at a
hundred and eighty ...) Suddenly a cold and tempting inner voice spoke to him. (Let it go. Go get Wendy and Danny and get the fuck out of here. Let it blow sky-high.) He could visualize the explosion. A double thunderclap that would first rip the heart from this place, then the soul. The boiler would go with an orange- violet flash that would rain hot and burning shrapnel all over the cellar. In his mind he could see the redhot trinkets of metal careening from floor to walls to ceiling like strange billiard balls, whistling jagged death through the air. Some of them, surely, would whizz right through that stone arch, light on the old papers on the other side, and they would burn merry hell. Destroy the secrets, burn the clues, it's a mystery no living hand will ever solve. Then the gas explosion, a great rumbling crackle of flame, a giant pilot light that would turn the whole center of the hotel into a broiler. Stairs and hallways and ceilings and rooms aflame like the castle in the last reel of a Frankenstein movie. The flame spreading into the wings, hurrying up the black-and-blue-twined carpets like eager guests. The silk wallpaper charring and curling. There were no sprinklers, only those outmoded hoses and no one to use them. And there wasn't a fire engine in the world that could get here before late March. Burn, baby, burn. In twelve hours there would be nothing left but the bare bones. The needle on the gauge had moved up to two-twelve. The boiler was creaking and groaning like an old woman trying to get out of bed. Hissing jets of steam had begun to play around the edges of old patches; beads of solder had begun to sizzle. He didn't see, he didn't hear. Frozen with his hand on the valve that would dump off the pressure and damp the fire, Jack's eyes glittered from their sockets like sapphires. (It's my last chance.) The only thing not cashed in now was the life-insurance policy he had taken out jointly with Wendy in the summer between his first and second years at Stovington. Forty-thousand-dollar death benefit, double indemnity if he or she died in a train crash, a plane crash, or a fire. Seven-come-eleven, die the secret death and win a hundred dollars. (A fire ... eighty thousand dollars.) They would have time to get out. Even if they were sleeping, they would have time to get out. He believed that. And he didn't think the hedges or anything else would try to hold them back if the Overlook was going up in flames. (Flames.) The needle inside the greasy, almost opaque dial had danced up to two hundred and fifteen pounds per square inch. Another memory occurred to him, a childhood memory. There had been a wasps' nest in the lower branches of their apple tree behind the house. One of his older brothers — he couldn't remember which one now — had been stung while swinging in the old tire Daddy had hung from one of the tree's lower branches. It had been late summer, when wasps tend to be at their ugliest. Their father, just home from work, dressed in his whites, the smell of beer hanging around his face in a fine mist, had gathered all three boys, Brett, Mike, and little Jacky, and told them he was going to get rid of the wasps.
"Now watch," he had said, smiling and staggering a little (he hadn't been using the cane then, the collision with the milk truck was years in the future). "Maybe you'll learn something. My father showed me this." He had raked a big pile of rain-dampened leaves under the branch where the wasps' nest rested, a deadlier fruit than the shrunken but tasty apples their tree usually produced in late September, which was then still half a month away. He lit the leaves. The day was clear and windless. The leaves smoldered but didn't really burn, and they made a smell — a fragrance that had echoed back to him each fall when men in Saturday pants and light Windbreakers raked leaves together and burned them. A sweet smell with a bitter undertone, rich and evocative. The smoldering leaves produced great rafts of smoke that drifted up to obscure the nest. Their father had let the leaves smolder all that afternoon, drinking beer on the porch and dropping the empty Black Label cans into his wife's plastic floorbucket while his two older sons flanked him and little Jacky sat on the steps at his feet, playing with his Bolo Bouncer and singing monotonously over and over: "Your cheating heart ... will make you weep ... your cheating heart ... is gonna tell on you." At quarter of six, just before supper, Daddy had gone out to the apple tree with his sons grouped carefully behind him. In one hand he had a garden hoe. He knocked the leaves apart, leaving little clots spread around to smolder and die. Then he reached the hoe handle up, weaving and blinking, and after two or three tries he knocked the nest to the ground. The boys fled for the safety of the porch, but Daddy only stood over the nest, swaying and blinking down at it. Jacky crept back to see. A few wasps were crawling sluggishly over the paper terrain of their property, but they were not trying to fly. From the inside of the nest, the black and alien place, came a never-to-be-forgotten sound: a low, somnolent buzz, like the sound of high- tension wires. "Why don't they try to sting you, Daddy?" he had asked. "The smoke makes em drunk, Jacky. Go get my gascan." He ran to fetch it. Daddy doused the nest with amber gasoline. "Now step away, Jacky, unless you want to lose your eyebrows." He had stepped away. From somewhere in the voluminous folds of his white overblouse, Daddy had produced a wooden kitchen match. He lit it with his thumbnail and flung it onto the nest. There had been a white-orange explosion, almost soundless in its ferocity. Daddy had stepped away, cackling wildly. The wasps' nest had gone up in no time. "Fire," Daddy had said, turning to Jacky with a smile. "Fire will kill anything." After supper the boys had come out in the day's waning light to stand solemnly around the charred and blackened nest. From the hot interior had come the sound of wasp bodies popping like corn. The pressure gauge stood at two-twenty. A low iron wailing sound was building up in the guts of the thing. Jets of steam stood out erect in a hundred places like porcupine quills. (Fire will kill anything.) Jack suddenly started. He had been dozing off ... and he had almost dozed
himself right into kingdom cone. What in God's name had he been thinking of? Protecting the hotel was his job. He was the caretaker. A sweat of terror sprang to his hands so quickly that at first he missed his grip on the large valve. Then he curled his fingers around its spokes. He whirled it one turn, two, three. There was a giant hiss of steam, dragon's breath. A warm tropical mist rose from beneath the boiler and veiled him. For a moment he could no longer see the dial but thought he must have waited too long; the groaning, clanking sound inside the boiler increased, followed by a series of heavy rattling sounds and the wrenching screech of metal. When some of the steam blew away he saw that the pressure gauge had dropped back to two hundred and was still sinking. The jets of steam escaping around the soldered patches began to lose their force. The wrenching, grinding sounds began to diminish. One-ninety... one-eighty ... one seventy-five ... (He was going downhill, going ninety miles an hour, when the whistle broke into a scream — ) But he didn't think it would blow now. The press was down to one-sixty. ( — they found him in the wreck with his hand on the throttle, he was scalded to death by the steam.) He stepped away from the boiler, breathing hard, trembling. He looked at his hands and saw that blisters were already rising on his palms. Hell with the blisters, he thought, and laughed shakily. He had almost died with his hand on the throttle, like Casey the engineer in "The Wreck of the Old 97." Worse still, he would have killed the Overlook. The final crashing failure. He had failed as a teacher, a writer, a husband, and a father. He had even failed as a drunk. But you couldn't do much better in the old failure category than to blow up the building you were supposed to be taking care of. And this was no ordinary building. By no means. Christ, but he needed a drink. The press had dropped down to eighty psi. Cautiously, wincing a little at the pain in his hands, he closed the dump valve again. But from now on the boiler would have to be watched more closely than ever. It might have been seriously weakened. He wouldn't trust it at more than one hundred psi for the rest of the winter. And if they were a little chilly, they would just have to grin and bear it. He had broken two of the blisters. His hands throbbed like rotten teeth. A drink. A drink would fix him up, and there wasn't a thing in the goddamn house besides cooking sherry. At this point a drink would be medicinal. That was just it, by God. An anesthetic. He had done his duty and now he could use a little anesthetic — something stronger than Excedrin. But there was nothing. He remembered bottles glittering in the shadows. He had saved the hotel. The hotel would want to reward him. He felt sure of it. He took his handkerchief out of his back pocket and went to the stairs. He rubbed at his mouth. Just a little drink. Just one. To ease the pain. He had served the Overlook, and now the Overlook would serve him. He was sure of it. His feet on the stair risers were quick and eager, the hurrying steps of a man who has come home from a long and bitter war. It was 5:20 A.M., MST.
<< 41 >>
DAYLIGHT
Danny awoke with a muffled gasp from a terrible dream. There had been an explosion. A fire. The Overlook was burning up. He and his mommy were watching it from the front lawn. Mommy had said: "Look, Danny, look at the hedges." He looked at them and they were all dead. Their leaves had turned a suffocant brown. The tightly packed branches showed through like the skeletons of half- dismembered corpses. And then his daddy had burst out of the Overlook's big double doors, and he was burning like a torch. His clothes were in flames, his skin had acquired a dark and sinister tan that was growing darker by the moment, his hair was a burning bush. That was when he woke up, his throat tight with fear, his hands clutching at the sheet and blankets. Had he screamed? He looked over at his mother. Wendy lay on her side, the blankets up to her chin, a sheaf of straw-colored hair lying against her cheek. She looked like a child herself. No, he hadn't screamed. Lying in bed, looking upward, the nightmare began to drain away. He had a curious feeling that some great tragedy (fire? explosion?) had been averted by inches. He let his mind drift out, searching for his daddy, and found him standing somewhere below. In the lobby. Danny pushed a little harder, trying to get inside his father. It was not good. Because Daddy was thinking about the Bad Thing. He was thinking how (good just one or two would be i don't care sun's over the yardarm somewhere in the world remember how we used to say that al? gin and tonic bourbon with just a dash of bitters scotch and soda rum and coke tweedledum and tweedledee a drink for me and a drink for thee the martians have landed somewhere in the world princeton or houston or stokely on carmichael some fucking place after all tis the season and none of us are) (GET OUT OF HIS MIND, YOU LITTLE SHIT!) He recoiled in terror from that mental voice, his eyes widening, his hands tightening into claws on the counterpane. It hadn't been the voice of his father but a clever mimic. A voice he knew. Hoarse, brutal, yet underpointed with a vacuous sort of humor. Was it so near, then? He threw the covers back and swung his feet out onto the floor. He kicked his slippers out from under the bed and put them on. He went to the door and pulled it open and hurried up to the main corridor, his slippered feet whispering on the nap of the carpet runner. He turned the corner.
There was a man on all fours halfway down the corridor, between him and the stairs. Danny froze. The man looked up at him. His eyes were tiny and red. He was dressed in some sort of silvery, spangled costume. A dog costume, Danny realized. Protruding from the rump of this strange creation was a long and floppy tail with a puff on the end. A zipper ran up the back of the costume to the neck. To the left of him was a dog's or wolf's head, blank eyesockets above the muzzle, the mouth open in a meaningless snarl that showed the rug's black and blue pattern between fangs that appeared to be papier-mache. The man's mouth and chin and cheeks were smeared with blood. He began to growl at Danny. He was grinning, but the growl was real. It was deep in his throat, a chilling primitive sound. Then he began to bark. His teeth were also stained red. He began to crawl toward Danny, dragging his boneless tail behind him. The costume dog's head lay unheeded on the carpet, glaring vacantly over Danny's shoulder. "Let me by," Danny said. "I'm going to eat you, little boy," the dogman answered, and suddenly a fusillade of barks came from his grinning mouth. They were human imitations, but the savagery in them was real. The man's hair was dark, greased with sweat from his confining costume. There was a mixture of scotch and champagne on his breath. Danny flinched back but didn't run. "Let me by." "Not by the hair of my chinny-chin-chin," the dogman replied. His small red eyes were fixed attentively on Danny's face. He continued to grin. "I'm going to eat you up, little boy. And I think I'll start with your plump little cock." He began to prance skittishly forward, making little leaps and snarling. Danny's nerve broke. He fled back into the short hallway that led to their quarters, looking back over his shoulder. There was a series of mixed howls and barks and growls, broken by slurred mutterings and giggles. Danny stood in the hallway, trembling. "Get it up!" the drunken dogman cried out from around the corner. His voice was both violent and despairing. "Get it up, Harry you bitch-bastard! I don't care how many casinos and airlines and movie companies you own! I know what you like in the privacy of your own h-home! Get it up! I'll huff... and I'll puff ... until Harry Derwent's all bloowwwwn down!" He ended with a long, chilling howl that seemed to turn into a scream of rage and pain just before it dwindled off. Danny turned apprehensively to the closed bedroom door at the end of the hallway and walked quietly down to it. He opened it and poked his head through. His mommy was sleeping in exactly the same position. No one was hearing this but him. He closed the door softly and went back up to the intersection of their corridor and the main hall, hoping the dogman would be gone, the way the blood on the walls of the Presidential Suite had been gone. He peeked around the corner carefully. The man in the dog costume was still there. He had put his head back on and was now prancing on all fours by the stairwell, chasing his tail. He
occasionally leaped off the rug and came down making dog grunts in his throat. "Woof! Woof! Bowwowwow! Grrrrrr!" These sounds came hollowly out of the mask's stylized snarling mouth, and among them were sounds that might have been sobs or laughter. Danny went back to the bedroom and sat down on his cot, covering his eyes with his hands. The hotel was running things now. Maybe at first the things that had happened had only been accidents. Maybe at first the things he had seen really were like scary pictures that couldn't hurt him. But now the hotel was controlling those things and they could hurt. The Overlook hadn't wanted him to go to his father. That might spoil all the fun. So it had put the dogman in his way, just as it had put the hedge animals between them and the road. But his daddy could come here. And sooner or later his daddy would. He began to cry, the tears rolling silently down his cheeks. It was too late. They were going to die, all three of them, and when the Overlook opened next late spring, they would be right here to greet the guests along with the rest of the spooks. The woman in the tub. The dogman. The horrible dark thing that had been in the cement tunnel. They would be -- (Stop! Stop that now!) He knuckled the tears furiously from his eyes. He would try as hard as he could to keep that from happening. Not to himself, not to his daddy and mommy. He would try as hard as he could. He closed his eyes and sent his mind out in a high, hard crystal bolt. (!!! DICK PLEASE COME QUICK WE'RE IN BAD TROUBLE DICK WE NEED) And suddenly, in the darkness behind his eyes the thing that chased him down the Overlook's dark halls in his dreams was there, right there, a huge creature dressed in white, its prehistoric club raised over its head: "I'll make you stop it! You goddam puppy! I'll make you stop it because I am your FATHER!" "No!" He jerked back to the reality of the bedroom, his eyes wide and staring, the screams tumbling helplessly from his mouth as his mother bolted awake, clutching the sheet to her breasts. "No Daddy no no no — " And they both heard the vicious, descending swing of the invisible club, cutting the air somewhere very close, then fading away to silence as he ran to his mother and hugged her, trembling like a rabbit in a snare. The Overlook was not going to let him call Dick. That might spoil the fun, too. They were alone. Outside the snow came harder, curtaining them off from the world.
<< 42 >>
MID-AIR
Dick Hallorann's flight was called at 6:45 A.M., EST, and the boarding clerk held him by Gate 31, shifting his flight bag nervously from hand to hand, until the last call at 6:55. They were both looking for a man named Carlton Vecker, the only passenger on TWA's flight 196 from Miami to Denver who hadn't checked in. "Okay," the clerk said, and issued Hallorann a blue firstclass boarding pass. "You lucked out. You can board, sir." Hallorann hurried up the enclosed boarding ramp and let the mechanically grinning stewardess tear his pass off and give him the stub. "We're serving breakfast on the flight," the stew said. "If you'd like — " "Just coffee, babe," he said, and went down the aisle to a seat in the smoking section. He kept expecting the no-show Vecker to pop through the door like a jack-in-the-box at the last second. The woman in the seat by the window was reading You Can Be Your Own Best Friend with a sour, unbelieving expression on her face. Hallorann buckled his seat belt and then wrapped his large black hands around the seat's armrests and promised the absent Carlton Vecker that it would take him and five strong TWA flight attendants to drag him out of his seat. He kept his eye on his watch. It dragged off the minutes to the 7:00 takeoff time with maddening slowness. At 7:05 the stewardess informed them that there would be a slight delay while the ground crew rechecked one of the latches on the cargo door. "Shit for brains," Dick Hallorann muttered. The sharp-faced woman turned her sour, unbelieving expression on him and then went back to her book. He had spent the night at the airport, going from counter to counter — United, American, TWA, Continental, Braniff — haunting the ticket clerks. Sometime after midnight, drinking his eighth or ninth cup of coffee in the canteen, he had decided he was being an asshole to have taken this whole thing on his own shoulders. There were authorities. He had gone down to the nearest bank of telephones, and after talking to three different operators, he had gotten the emergency number of the Rocky Mountain National Park Authority. The man who answered the telephone sounded utterly worn out. Hallorann had given a false name and said there was trouble at the Overlook Hotel, west of Sidewinder. Bad trouble. He was put on hold. The ranger (Hallorann assumed he was a ranger) came back on in about five minutes. "They've got a CB," the ranger said. "Sure they've got a CB," Hallorann said. "We haven't had a Mayday call from them." "Man, that don't matter. They — " "Exactly what kind of trouble are they in, Mr. Hall?" "Well, there's a family. The caretaker and his family. I think maybe he's gone a little nuts, you know. I think maybe he might hurt his wife and his little boy."
"May I ask how you've come by this information, sir?" Hallorann closed his eyes. "What's your name, fellow?" "Tom Staunton, sir." "Well, Tom, I know. Now I'll be just as straight with you as I can be. There's bad trouble up there. Maybe killin bad, do you dig what I'm sayin?" "Mr. Hall, I really have to know how you — " "Look," Hallorann had said. "I'm telling you I know. A few years back there was a fellow up there name of Grady. He killed his wife and his two daughters and then pulled the string on himself. I'm telling you it's going to happen again if you guys don't haul your asses out there and stop it!" "Mr. Hall, you're not calling from Colorado." "No. But what difference — " "If you're not in Colorado, you're not in CB range of the Overlook Hotel. If you're not in CB range you can't possibly have been in contact with the, uh ..." Faint rattle of papers. "The Torrance family. While I had you on hold I tried to telephone. It's out, which is nothing unusual. There are still twenty-five miles of aboveground telephone lines between the hotel and the Sidewinder switching station. My conclusion is that you must be some sort of crank." "Oh man, you stupid ..." But his despair was too great to find a noun to go with the adjective. Suddenly, illumination. "Call them!" he cried. "Sir?" "You got the CB, they got the CB. So call them! Call them and ask them what's up!" There was a brief silence, and the humming of long-distance wires. "You tried that too, didn't you?" Hallorann asked. "That's why you had me on hold so long. You tried the phone and then you tried the CB and you didn't get nothing but you don't think nothing's wrong ... what are you guys doing up there? Sitting on your asses and playing gin rummy?" "No, we are not," Staunton said angrily. Hallorann was relieved at the sound of anger in the voice. For the first time he felt he was speaking to a man and not to a recording. "I'm the only man here, sir. Every other ranger in the park, plus game wardens, plus volunteers, are up in Hasty Notch, risking their lives because three stupid assholes with six months' experience decided to try the north face of King's Ram. They're stuck halfway up there and maybe they'll get down and maybe they won't. There are two choppers up there and the men who are flying them are risking their lives because it's night here and it's starting to snow. So if you're still having trouble putting it all together, I'll give you a hand with it. Number one, I don't have anybody to send to the Overlook. Number two, the Overlook isn't a priority here — what happens in the park is a priority. Number three, by daybreak neither one of those choppers will be able to fly because it's going to snow like crazy, according to the National Weather Service. Do you understand the situation?" "Yeah," Hallorann had said softly. "I understand." "Now my guess as to why I couldn't raise them on the CB is very simple. I don't know what time it is where you are, but out here it's nine-thirty. I think they may have turned it off and gone to bed. Now if you — " "Good luck with your climbers, man," Hallorann said. "But I want you to know that they are not the only ones who are stuck up high because they didn't know
what they were getting into." He had hung up the phone.
* * *
At 7:20 A.M. the TWA 747 backed lumberingly out of its stall, turned, and rolled out toward the runway. Hallorann let out a long, soundless exhale. Carlton Vecker, wherever you are, eat your heart out. Flight 196 parted company with the ground at 7:28, and at 7:31, as it gained altitude, the thought-pistol went off in Dick Hallorann's head again. His shoulders hunched uselessly against the smell of oranges and then jerked spasmodically. His forehead wrinkled, his mouth drew down in a grimace of pain. (!!! DICK PLEASE COME QUICK WE'RE IN BAD TROUBLE DICK WE NEED) And that was all. It was suddenly gone. No fading out this time. The communication had been chopped off cleanly, as if with a knife. It scared him. His hands, still clutching the seat rests, had gone almost white. His mouth was dry. Something had happened to the boy. He was sure of it. If anyone had hurt that little child -- "Do you always react so violently to takeoffs?" He looked around. It was the woman in the horn-rimmed glasses. "It wasn't that," Hallorann said. "I've got a steel plate in my head. From Korea. Every now and then it gives me a twinge. Vibrates, don't you know. Scrambles the signal." "Is that so?" "Yes, ma'am." "It is the line soldier who ultimately pays for any foreign intervention," the sharp-faced woman said grimly. "Is that so?" "It is. This country must swear off its dirty little wars. The CIA has been at the root of every dirty little war America has fought in this century. The CIA and dollar diplomacy." She opened her book and began to read. The No SMOKING sign went off. Hallorann watched the receding land and wondered if the boy was all right. He had developed an affectionate feeling for that boy, although his folks hadn't seemed all that much. He hoped to God they were watching out for Danny.
<< 43 >> DRINKS ON THE HOUSE
Jack stood in the dining room just outside the batwing doors leading into the Colorado Lounge, his head cocked, listening. He was smiling faintly. Around him, he could hear the Overlook Hotel coming to life. It was hard to say just how he knew, but he guessed it wasn't greatly different from the perceptions Danny had from time to time ... like father, like son. Wasn't that how it was popularly expressed? It wasn't a perception of sight or sound, although it was very near to those things, separated from those senses by the filmiest of perceptual curtains. It was as if another Overlook now lay scant inches beyond this one, separated from the real world (if there is such a thing as a "real world," Jack thought) but gradually coming into balance with it. He was reminded of the 3-D movies he'd seen as a kid. If you looked at the screen without the special glasses, you saw a double image — the sort of thing he was feeling now. But when you put the glasses on, it made sense. All the hotel's eras were together now, all but this current one, the Torrance Era. And this would be together with the rest very soon now. That was good. That was very good. He could almost hear the self-important ding!ding! of the silver-plated bell on the registration desk, summoning bellboys to the front as men in the fashionable flannels of the 1920s checked in and men in fashionable 1940s double-breasted pinstripes checked out. There would be three nuns sitting in front of the fireplace as they waited for the check-out line to thin, and standing behind them, nattily dressed with diamond stickpins holding their blue- and-white-figured ties, Charles Grondin and Vito Gienelli discussed profit and loss, life and death. There were a dozen trucks in the loading bays out back, some laid one over the other like bad time exposures. In the east-wing ballroom, a dozen different business conventions were going on at the same time within temporal centimeters of each other. There was a costume ball going on. There were soirees, wedding receptions, birthday and anniversary parties. Men talking about Neville Chamberlain and the Archduke of Austria. Music. Laughter. Drunkenness. Hysteria. Little love, not here, but a steady undercurrent of sensuousness. And he could almost hear all of them together, drifting through the hotel and making a graceful cacophony. In the dining room where he stood, breakfast, lunch, and dinner for seventy years were all being served simultaneously just behind him. He could almost ... no, strike the almost. He could hear them, faintly as yet, but clearly — the way one can hear thunder miles off on a hot summer's day. He could hear all of them, the beautiful strangers. He was becoming aware of them as they must have been aware of him from the very start. All the rooms of the Overlook were occupied this morning. A full house. And beyond the batwings, a low murmur of conversation drifted and swirled like lazy cigarette smoke. More sophisticated, more private. Low, throaty female laughter, the kind that seems to vibrate in a fairy ring around the viscera and the genitals. The sound of a cash register, its window softly lighted in the warm halfdark, ringing up the price of a gin rickey, a Manhattan, a depression bomber, a sloe gin fizz, a zombie. The jukebox, pouring out its drinkers' melodies, each one overlapping the other in time.
He pushed the batwings open and stepped through "Hello, boys," Jack Torrance said softly. "I've been away but now I'm back." "Good evening, Mr. Torrance," Lloyd said, genuinely pleased. "It's good to see you." "It's good to be back, Lloyd," he said gravely, and hooked his leg over a stool between a man in a sharp blue suit and a bleary-eyed woman in a black dress who was peering into the depths of a singapore sling. "What will it be, Mr. Torrance?" "Martini," he said with great pleasure. He looked at the backbar with its rows of dimly gleaming bottles, capped with their silver siphons. Jim Beam. Wild Turkey. Gilby's. Sharrod's Private Label. Toro. Seagram's. And home again. "One large martian, if you please," he said. "They've landed somewhere in the world, Lloyd." He took his wallet out and laid a twenty carefully on the bar. As Lloyd made his drink, Jack looked over his shoulder. Every booth was occupied. Some of the occupants were dressed in costumes ... a woman in gauzy harem pants and a rhinestone-sparkled brassiere, a man with a foxhead rising slyly out of his evening dress, a man in a silvery dog outfit who was tickling the nose of a woman in a sarong with the puff on the end of his long tail, to the general amusement of all. "No charge to you, Mr. Torrance," Lloyd said, putting the drink down on Jack's twenty. "Your money is no good here. Orders from the manager." "Manager?" A faint unease came over him; nevertheless he picked up the martini glass and swirled it, watching the olive at the bottom bob slightly in the drink's chilly depths. "Of course. The manager." Lloyd's smile broadened, but his eyes were socketed in shadow and his skin was horribly white, like the skin of a corpse. "Later he expects to see to your son's well-being himself. He is very interested in your son. Danny is a talented boy." The juniper fumes of the gin were pleasantly maddening, but they also seemed to be blurring his reason. Danny? What was all of this about Danny? And what was he doing in a bar with a drink in his hand? He had TAKEN THE PLEDGE. He had GONE ON THE WAGON. He had SWORN OFF. What could they want with his son? What could they want with Danny? Wendy and Danny weren't in it. He tried to see into Lloyd's shadowed eyes, but it was too dark, too dark, it was like trying to read emotion into the empty orbs of a skull. (It's me they must want ... isn't it? I am the one. Not Danny, not Wendy. I'm the one who loves it here. They wanted to leave. I'm the one who took care of the snowmobile ... went through the old records ... dumped the press on the boiler ... lied ... practically sold my soul ... what can they want with him?) "Where is the manager?" He tried to ask it casually but his words seemed to come out between lips already numbed by the first drink, like words from a nightmare rather than those in a sweet dream. Lloyd only smiled. "What do you want with my son? Danny's not in this ... is he?" He heard the naked plea in his own voice.
Lloyd's face seemed to be running, changing, becoming something pestilent. The white skin becoming a hepatitic yellow, cracking. Red sores erupting on the skin, bleeding foul smelling liquid. Droplets of blood sprang out on Lloyd's forehead like sweat and somewhere a silver chime was striking the quarter-hour. (Unmask, unmask!) "Drink your drink, Mr. Torrance," Lloyd said softly. "It isn't a matter that concerns you. Not at this point." He picked his drink up again, raised it to his lips, and hesitated. He heard the hard, horrible snap as Danny's arm broke. He saw the bicycle flying brokenly up over the hood of Al's car, starring the windshield. He saw a single wheel lying in the road, twisted spokes pointing into the sky like jags of piano wire. He became aware that all conversation had stopped. He looked back over his shoulder. They were all looking at him expectantly, silently. The man beside the woman in the sarong had removed his foxhead and Jack saw that it was Horace Derwent, his pallid blond hair spilling across his forehead. Everyone at the bar was watching, too. The woman beside him was looking at him closely, as if trying to focus. Her dress had slipped off one shoulder and looking down he could see a loosely puckered nipple capping one sagging breast. Looking back at her face he began to think that this might be the woman from 217, the one who had tried to strangle Danny. On his other hand, the man in the sharp blue suit had removed a small pearl-handled .32 from his jacket pocket and was idly spinning it on the bar, like a man with Russian roulette on his mind. (I want — ) He realized the words were not passing through his frozen vocal cords and tried again. "I want to see the manager. I ... I don't think he understands. My son is not a part of this. He ... " "Mr. Torrance," Lloyd said, his voice coming with hideous gentleness from inside his plague-raddled face, "you will meet the manager in due time. He has, in fact, decided to make you his agent in this matter. Now drink your drink." "Drink your drink," they all echoed. He picked it up with a badly trembling hand. It was raw gin. He looked into it, and looking was like drowning. The woman beside him began to sing in a flat, dead voice: "Roll ... out... the barrel ... and we'll have... a barrel ... of fun..." Lloyd picked it up. Then the man in the blue suit. The dog-man joined in, thumping one paw against the table "Now's the time to roll the barrel — " Derwent added his voice to the rest. A cigarette was cocked in one corner of his mouth at a jaunty angle. His right arm was around the shoulders of the woman in the sarong, and his right band was gently and absently stroking her right breast. He was looking at the dog-man with amused contempt as he sang. " — because the gang's ... all ... here!" Jack brought the drink to his mouth and downed it in three long gulps, the gin highballing down his throat like a moving van in a tunnel, exploding in his stomach, rebounding up to his brain in one leap where it seized hold of him with a final convulsing fit of the shakes.
When that passed off, he felt fine. "Do it again, please," he said, and pushed the empty glass toward Lloyd. "Yes, sir," Lloyd said, taking the glass. Lloyd looked perfectly normal again. The olive-skinned man had put his .32 away. The woman on his right was staring into her singapore sling again. One breast was wholly exposed now, leaning on the bar's leather buffer. A vacuous crooning noise came from her slack mouth. The loom of conversation had begun again, weaving and weaving. His new drink appeared in front of him. " Muchas gracias, Lloyd," he said, picking it up. "Always a pleasure to serve you, Mr. Torrance." Lloyd smiled. "You were always the best of them, Lloyd." "Why, thank you, sir." He drank slowly this time, letting it trickle down his throat, tossing a few peanuts down the chute for good luck. The drink was gone in no time, and he ordered another. Mr. President, I have met the martians and am pleased to report they are friendly. While Lloyd fixed another, he began searching his pockets for a quarter to put in the jukebox. He thought of Danny again, but Danny's face was pleasantly fuzzed and nondescript now. He had hurt Danny once, but that had been before he had learned how to handle his liquor. Those days were behind him now. He would never hurt Danny again. Not for the world.
<< 44 >> CONVERSATIONS AT THE PARTY
He was dancing with a beautiful woman. He had no idea what time it was, how long he had spent in the Colorado Lounge or how long he had been here in the ballroom. Time had ceased to matter. He had vague memories: listening to a man who had once been a successful radio comic and then a variety star in TV, infant days telling a very long and very hilarious joke about incest between Siamese twins; seeing the woman in the harem pants and the sequined bra do a slow and sinuous striptease to some bumping-and- grinding music from the jukebox (it seemed it had been David Rose's theme music from The Stripper); crossing the lobby as one of three, the other two men in evening dress that predated the twenties, all of them singing about the stiff patch on Rosie O'Grady's knickers. He seemed to remember looking out the big double doors and seeing Japanese lanterns strung in graceful, curving arcs that followed the sweep of the driveway — they gleamed in soft pastel colors like dusky jewels. The big glass globe on the porch ceiling was on, and night-insects bumped and flittered against it, and a part of him, perhaps the last tiny spark
of sobriety, tried to tell him that it was 6 A.M. on a morning in December. But time had been canceled. (The arguments against insanity fall through with a soft shurring sound / layer on layer ...) Who was that? Some poet he had read as an undergraduate? Some undergraduate poet who was now selling washers in Wausau or insurance in Indianapolis? Perhaps an original thought? Didn't matter. (The night is dark/ the stars are high / a disembodied custard pie / is floating in the sky ...) He giggled helplessly. "What's funny, honey?" And here he was again, in the ballroom. The chandelier was lit and couples were circling all around them, some in costume and some not, to the smooth sounds of some postwar band — but which war? Can you be certain? No, of course not. He was certain of only one thing: he was dancing with a beautiful woman. She was tall and auburn-haired, dressed in clinging white satin, and she was dancing close to him, her breasts pressed softly and sweetly against his chest. Her white hand was entwined in his. She was wearing a small and sparkly cat's- eye mask and her hair had been brushed over to one side in a soft and gleaming fall that seemed to pool in the valley between their touching shoulders. Her dress was full-skirted but be could feel her thighs against his legs from time to time and had become more and more sure that she was smooth-and-powdered naked under her dress, (the better to feet your erection with, my dear) and he was sporting a regular railspike. If it offended her she concealed it well; she snuggled even closer to him. "Nothing funny, honey," he said, and giggled again. "I like you," she whispered, and he thought that her scent was like lilies, secret and hidden in cracks furred with green moss — places where sunshine is short and shadows long. "I like you, too." "We could go upstairs, if you want. I'm supposed to be with Harry, but he'll never notice. He's too busy teasing poor Roger." The number ended. There was a spatter of applause and then the band swung into "Mood Indigo" with scarcely a pause. Jack looked over her bare shoulder and saw Derwent standing by the refreshment table. The girl in the sarong was with him. There were bottles of champagne in ice buckets ranged along the white lawn covering the table, and Derwent held a foaming bottle in his hand. A knot of people had gathered, laughing. In front of Derwent and the girl in the sarong, Roger capered grotesquely on all fours, his tail dragging limply behind him. He was barking. "Speak, boy, speak!" Harry Derwent cried. "Rowf! Rowf!" Roger responded. Everyone clapped; a few of the men whistled. "Now sit up. Sit up, doggy!" Roger clambered up on his haunches. The muzzle of his mask was frozen in its eternal snarl. Inside the eyeholes, Roger's eyes rolled with frantic, sweaty hilarity. He held his arms out, dangling the paws.
"Rowf! Rowf!" Derwent upended the bottle of champagne and it fell in a foamy Niagara onto the upturned mask. Roger made frantic slurping sounds, and everyone applauded again. Some of the women screamed with laughter. "Isn't Harry a card?" his partner asked him, pressing close again. "Everyone says so. He's AC / DC, you know. Poor Roger's only DC. He spent a weekend with Harry in Cuba once ... oh, months ago. Now he follows Harry everywhere, wagging his little tail behind him." She giggled. The shy scent of lilies drifted up. "But of course Harry never goes back for seconds ... not on his DC side, anyway ... and Roger is just wild. Harry told him if he came to the masked ball as a doggy, a cute little doggy, he might reconsider, and Roger is such a silly that he ..." The number ended. There was more applause. The band members were filing down for a break. "Excuse me, sweetness," she said. "There's someone I just roust ... Darla! Darla, you dear girl, where have you been?" She wove her way into the eating, drinking throng and he gazed after her stupidly, wondering how they had happened to be dancing together in the first place. He didn't remember. Incidents seemed to have occurred with no connections. First here, then there, then everywhere. His head was spinning. He smelled lilies and juniper berries. Up by the refreshment table Derwent was now holding a tiny triangular sandwich over Roger's head and urging him, to the general merriment of the onlookers, to do a somersault. The dogmask was turned upward. The silver sides of the dog costume bellowsed in and out. Roger suddenly leaped, tucking his head under, and tried to roll in mid-air. His leap was too low and too exhausted; he landed awkwardly on his back, rapping his head smartly on the tiles. A hollow groan drifted out of the dogmask. Derwent led the applause. "Try again, doggy! Try again!" The onlookers took up the chant — try again, try again — and Jack staggered off the other way, feeling vaguely ill. He almost fell over the drinks cart that was being wheeled along by a low- browed man in a white mess jacket. His foot rapped the lower chromed shelf of the cart; the bottles and siphons on top chattered together musically. "Sorry," Jack said thickly. He suddenly felt closed in and claustrophobic; he wanted to get out. He wanted the Overlook back the way it had been ... free of these unwanted guests. His place was not honored, as the true opener of the way; he was only another of the ten thousand cheering extras, a doggy rolling over and sitting up on command. "Quite all right," the man in the white mess jacket said. The polite, clipped English coming from that thug's face was surreal. "A drink?" "Martini." From behind him, another comber of laughter broke; Roger was howling to the tune of "Home on the Range." Someone was picking out accompaniment on the Steinway baby grand. "Here you are." The frosty cold glass was pressed into his hand. Jack drank gratefully, feeling the gin hit and crumble away the first inroads of sobriety.
"Is it all right, sir?" "Fine." "Thank you, sir." The cart began to roll again. Jack suddenly reached out and touched the man's shoulder. "Yes, sir?" "Pardon me, but... what's your name?" The other showed no surprise. "Grady, sir. Delbert Grady." "But you ... I mean that..." The bartender was looking at him politely. Jack tried again, although his mouth was mushed by gin and unreality; each word felt as large as an ice cube. "Weren't you once the caretaker here? When you ... when..." But he couldn't finish. He couldn't say it. "Why no, sir. I don't believe so." "But your wife ... your daughters. . "My wife is helping in the kitchen, sir. The girls are asleep, of course. It's much too late for them." "You were the caretaker. You — " Oh say it! "You killed them." Grady's face remained blankly polite. "I don't have any recollection of that at all, sir." His glass was empty. Grady plucked it from Jack's unresisting fingers and set about making another drink for him. There was a small white plastic bucket on his cart that was filled with olives. For some reason they reminded Jack of tiny severed heads. Grady speared one deftly, dropped it into the glass, and handed it to him. "But you — " "You're the caretaker, sir," Grady said mildly. "You've always been the caretaker. I should know, sir. I've always been here. The same manager hired us both, at the same time. Is it all right, sir?" Jack gulped at his drink. His head was swirling. "Mr. Ullman — " "I know no one by that name, sir." "But he — " "The manager," Grady said. "The hotel, sir. Surely you realize who hired you, sir." "No," he said thickly. "No, I — " "I believe you must take it up further with your son, Mr. Torrance, sir. He understands everything, although he hasn't enlightened you. Rather naughty of him, if I may be so bold, sir. In fact, he's crossed you at almost every turn, hasn't he? And him not yet six." "Yes," Jack said. "He has." There was another wave of laughter from behind them. "He needs to be corrected, if you don't mind me saying so. He needs a good talking-to, and perhaps a bit more. My own girls, sir, didn't care for the Overlook at first. One of them actually stole a pack of my matches and tried to burn it down. I corrected them. I corrected them most harshly. And when my wife tried to stop me from doing my duty, I corrected her." He offered Jack a bland, meaningless smile. "I find it a sad but true fact that women rarely understand a father's responsibility to his children. Husbands and fathers do have certain responsibilities, don't they, sir?" "Yes," Jack said.
"They didn't love the Overlook as I did," Grady said, beginning to make him another drink. Silver bubbles rose in the upended gin bottle. "Just as your son and wife don't love it. Not at present, anyway. But they will come to love it. You must show them the error of their ways, Mr. Torrance. Do you agree?" "Yes. I do." He did see. He had been too easy with them. Husbands and fathers did have certain responsibilities. Father Knows Best. They did not understand. That in itself was no crime, but they were willfully not understanding. He was not ordinarily a harsh man. But he did believe in punishment. And if his son and his wife had willfully set themselves against his wishes, against the things he knew were best for them, then didn't he have a certain duty — ? "A thankless child is sharper than a serpent's tooth," Grady said, handing him his drink. "I do believe that the manager could bring your son into line. And your wife would shortly follow. Do you agree, sir?" He was suddenly uncertain. "I ... but ... if they could just leave ... I mean, after all, it's me the manager wants, isn't it? It must be. Because — " Because why? He should know but suddenly he didn't. Oh, his poor brain was swimming. "Bad dog!" Derwent was saying loudly, to a counterpoint of laughter. "Bad dog to piddle on the floor." "Of course you know," Grady said, leaning confidentially over the cart, "your son is attempting to bring an outside party into it. Your son has a very great talent, one that the manager could use to even further improve the Overlook, to further ... enrich it, shall we say? But your son is attempting to use that very talent against us. He is willful, Mr. Torrance, Sir. Willful." "Outside party?" Jack asked stupidly. Grady nodded. "Who?" "A nigger," Grady said. "A nigger cook." "Hallorann?" "I believe that is his name, sir, yes." Another burst of laughter from behind them was followed by Roger saying something in a whining, protesting voice. "Yes! Yes! Yes!" Derwent began to chant. The others around him took it up, but before Jack could hear what they wanted Roger to do now, the band began to play again — the tune was "Tuxedo Junction," with a lot of mellow sax in it but not much soul. (Soul? Soul hasn't even been invented yet. Or has it?) (A nigger ... a nigger cook.) He opened his mouth to speak, not knowing what might come out. What did was: "I was told you hadn't finished high school. But you don't talk like an uneducated man." "It's true that I left organized education very early, sir. But the manager takes care of his help. He finds that it pays. Education always pays, don't you agree, sir?" "Yes," Jack said dazedly. "For instance, you show a great interest in learning more about the Overlook Hotel. Very wise of you, sir. Very noble. A certain scrapbook was left in the
basement for you to find — " "By whom?" Jack asked eagerly. "By the manager, of course. Certain other materials could be put at your disposal, if you wished them ... " "I do. Very much." He tried to control the eagerness in his voice and failed miserably. "You're a true scholar," Grady said. "Pursue the topic to the end. Exhaust all sources." He dipped his low-browed head, pulled out the lapel of his white mess jacket, and buffed his knuckles at a spot of dirt that was invisible to Jack. "And the manager puts no strings on his largess," Grady went on. "Not at all. Look at me, a tenth-grade dropout. Think how much further you yourself could go in the Overlook's organizational structure. Perhaps ... in time ... to the very top." "Really?" Jack whispered. "But that's really up to your son to decide, isn't it?" Grady asked, raising his eyebrows. The delicate gesture went oddly with the brows themselves, which were bushy and somehow savage. "Up to Danny?" Jack frowned at Grady. "No, of course not. I wouldn't allow my son to make decisions concerning my career. Not at all. What do you take me for? " "A dedicated man," Grady said warmly. "Perhaps I put it badly, sir. Let us say that your future here is contingent upon how you decide to deal with your son's waywardness." "I make my own decisions," Jack whispered. "But you must deal with him." "I will." "Firmly " "I will." "A man who cannot control his own family holds very little interest for our manager. A man who cannot guide the courses of his own wife and son can hardly be expected to guide himself, let alone assume a position of responsibility in an operation of this magnitude. He — " "I said I'll handle him!" Jack shouted suddenly, enraged. "Tuxedo Junction" had just concluded and a new tune hadn't begun. His shout fell perfectly into the gap, and conversation suddenly ceased behind him. His skin suddenly felt hot all over. He became fixedly positive that everyone was staring at him. They had finished with Roger and would now commence with him. Roll over. Sit up. Play dead. If you play the game with us, we'll play the game with you. Position of responsibility. They wanted him to sacrifice his son. ( — Now he follows Harry everywhere, wagging his little tail behind him — ) (Roll over. Play dead. Chastise your son.) "Right this way, sir," Grady was saying. "Something that might interest you." The conversation had begun again, lifting and dropping in its own rhythm, weaving in and out of the band music, now doing a swing version of Lennon and McCartney's "Ticket to Ride." (I've heard better over supermarket loudspeakers.) He giggled foolishly. He looked down at his left hand and saw there was another drink in it, half-full. He emptied it at a gulp. Now he was standing in front of the mantelpiece, the heat from the crackling
fire that had been laid in the hearth warming his legs. (a fire? ... in August? ... yes ... and no ... all times are one) There was a clock under a glass dome, flanked by two carved ivory elephants. Its hands stood at a minute to midnight. He gazed at it blearily. Had this been what Grady wanted him to see? He turned around to ask, but Grady had left him. Halfway through "Ticket to Ride," the band wound up in a brassy flourish. "The hour is at hand!" Horace Derwent proclaimed. "Midnight! Unmask! Unmask!" He tried to turn again, to see what famous faces were hidden beneath the glitter and paint and masks, but he was frozen now, unable to look away from the clock — its hands had come together and pointed straight up. "Unmask! Unmask!" the chant went up. The clock began to chime delicately. Along the steel runner below the clockface, from the left and right, two figures advanced. Jack watched, fascinated, the unmasking forgotten. Clockwork whirred. Cogs turned and meshed, brass warmly glowing. The balance wheel rocked back and forth precisely. One of the figures was a man standing on tiptoe, with what looked like a tiny club clasped in his hands. The other was a small boy wearing a dunce cap. The clockwork figures glittered, fantastically precise. Across the front of the boy's dunce cap he could read the engraved word FOOLE. The two figures slipped onto the opposing ends of a steel axis bar. Somewhere, tinkling on and on, were the strains of a Strauss waltz. An insane commercial jingle began to run through his mind to the tune: Buy dog food, rowf-rowf, rowf- rowf, buy dog food ... The steel mallet in the clockwork daddy's hands came down on the boy's head. The clockwork son crumpled forward. The mallet rose and fell, rose and fell. The boy's upstretched, protesting hands began to falter. The boy sagged from his crouch to a prone position. And still the hammer rose and fell to the light, tinkling air of the Strauss melody, and it seemed that he could see the man's face, working and knotting and constricting, could see the clockwork daddy's mouth opening and closing as he berated the unconscious, bludgeoned figure of the son. A spot of red flew up against the inside of the glass dome. Another followed. Two more splattered beside it. Now the red liquid was spraying up like an obscene rain shower, striking the glass sides of the dome and running, obscuring what was going on inside, and flecked through the scarlet were tiny gray ribbons of tissue, fragments of bone and brain. And still he could see the hammer rising and falling as the clockwork continued to turn and the cogs continued to mesh the gears and teeth of this cunningly made machine. "Unmask! Unmask!" Derwent was shrieking behind him, and somewhere a dog was howling in human tones. (But clockwork can't bleed clockwork can't bleed) The entire dome was splashed with blood, he could see clotted bits of hair but nothing else thank God he could see nothing else, and still he thought he would be sick because he could hear the hammerblows still falling, could hear them through the glass just as he could hear the phrases of "The Blue Danube." But the sounds were no longer the mechanical tink-tink-tink noises of a mechanical hammer striking a mechanical head, but the soft and squashy thudding sounds of a
real hammer slicing down and whacking into a spongy, muddy ruin. A ruin that once had been -- "UNMASK!" ( — the Red Death held sway over all!) With a miserable, rising scream, he turned away from the clock, his hands outstretched, his feet stumbling against one another like wooden blocks as he begged them to stop, to take him, Danny, Wendy, to take the whole world if they wanted it, but only to stop and leave him a little sanity, a little light. The ballroom was empty. The chairs with their spindly legs were upended on tables covered with plastic dust drops. The red rug with its golden tracings was back on the dance floor, protecting the polished hardwood surface. The bandstand was deserted except for a disassembled microphone stand and a dusty guitar leaning stringless against the wall. Cold morning light, winterlight, fell languidly through the high windows. His head was still reeling, he still felt drunk, but when he turned back to the mantelpiece, his drink was gone. There were only the ivory elephants ... and the clock. He stumbled back across the cold, shadowy lobby and through the dining room. His foot hooked around a table leg and he fell full-length, upsetting the table with a clatter. He struck his nose hard on the floor and it began to bleed. He got up, snufing back blood and wiping his nose with the back of his hand. He crossed to the Colorado Lounge and shoved through the batwing doors, making them fly back and bang into the walls. The place was empty ... but the bar was fully stocked: God be praised! Glass and the silver edging on labels glowed warmly in the dark. Once, he remembered, a very long time ago, he had been angry that there was no backbar mirror. Now he was glad. Looking into it he would have seen just another drunk fresh off the wagon: bloody nose, untucked shirt, hair rumpled, cheeks stubbly. (This is what it's like to stick your whole hand into the nest.) Loneliness surged over him suddenly and completely. He cried out with sudden wretchedness and honestly wished he were dead. His wife and son were upstairs with the door locked against him. The others bad all left. The party was over. He lurched forward again, reaching the bar. "Lloyd, where the fuck are you?" he screamed. There was no answer. In this well-padded (cell) room, his words did not even echo back to give the illusion of company. "Grady!" No answer. Only the bottles, standing stiffly at attention. (Roll over. Play dead. Fetch. Play dead. Sit up. Play dead.) "Never mind, I'll do it myself, goddammit." Halfway over the bar he lost his balance and pitched forward, hitting his head a muffled blow on the floor. He got up on his hands and knees, his eyeballs moving disjointed from side to side, fuzzy muttering sounds coming from his mouth. Then he collapsed, his face turned to one side, breathing in harsh snores.
Outside, the wind whooped louder, driving the thickening snow before it. It was 8:30 A.M.
<< 45 >> STAPLETON AIRPORT,DENVER
At 8:31 A.M., MST, a woman on TWA's Flight 196 burst into tears and began to bugle her own opinion, which was perhaps not unshared among some of the other passengers (or even the crew, for that matter), that the plane was going to crash. The sharp-faced woman next to Hallorann looked up from her book and offered a brief character analysis: "Ninny," and went back to her book. She had downed two screwdrivers during the flight, but they seemed not to have thawed her at all. "It's going to crash!" the woman was crying out shrilly. "Oh, I just know it is!" A stewardess hurried to her seat and squatted beside her. Hallorann thought to himself that only stewardesses and very young housewives seemed able to squat with any degree of grace; it was a rare and wonderful talent. He thought about this while the stewardess talked softly and soothingly to the woman, quieting her bit by bit. Hallorann didn't know about anyone else on 196, but he personally was almost scared enough to shit peachpits. Outside the window there was nothing to be seen but a buffeting curtain of white. The plane rocked sickeningly from side to side with gusts that seemed to come from everywhere. The engines were cranked up to provide partial compensation and as a result the floor was vibrating under their feet. There were several people moaning in Tourist behind them, one stew had gone back with a handful of fresh airsick bags, and a man three rows in front of Hallorann had whoopsed into his National Observer and had grinned apologetically at the stewardess who came to help him clean up. "That's all right," she comforted him, "that's how I feel about the Reader's Digest." Hallorann had flown enough to be able to surmise what had happened. They had been flying against bad headwinds most of the way, the weather over Denver had worsened suddenly and unexpectedly, and now it was just a little late to divert for someplace where the weather was better. Feets don't fail me now. (Buddy-boy, this is some fucked-up cavalry charge.) The stewardess seemed to have succeeded in curbing the worst of the woman's hysterics. She was snuffling and honking into a lace handkerchief, but had ceased broadcasting her opinions about the flight's possible conclusion to the cabin at large. The stew gave her a final pat on the shoulder and stood up just as the 747 gave its worst lurch yet. The stewardess stumbled backward and landed
in the lap of the man who had whoopsed into his paper, exposing a lovely length of nyloned thigh. The man blinked and then patted her kindly on the shoulder. She smiled back, but Hallorann thought the strain was showing. It had been one hell of a hard flight this morning. There was a little ping as the No SMOKING light reappeared. "This is the captain speaking," a soft, slightly southern voice informed them. "We're ready to begin our descent to Stapleton International Airport. It's been a rough flight, for which I apologize. The landing may be a bit rough also, but we anticipate no real difficulty. Please observe the FASTEN SEAT BELTS and NO SMOKING signs, and we hope you enjoy your stay in the Denver metro area. And we also hope — " Another hard bump rocked the plane and then dropped her with a sickening elevator plunge. Hallorann's stomach did a queasy hornpipe. Several people — not all women by any means — screamed. " — that we'll see you again on another TWA flight real soon." "Not bloody likely," someone behind Hallorann said. "So silly," the sharp-faced woman next to Hallorann remarked, putting a matchbook cover into her book and shutting it as the plane began to descend. "When one has seen the horrors of a dirty little war ... as you have ... or sensed the degrading immorality of CIA dollar-diplomacy intervention ... as I have ... a rough landing pales into insignificance. Am I right, Mr. Hallorann? " "As rain, ma'am," he said, and looked bleakly out into the wildly blowing snow. "How is your steel plate reacting to all of this, if I might inquire?" "Oh, my head's fine," Hallorann said. "It's just my stomach that's a mite queasy." "A shame." She reopened her book. As they descended through the impenetrable clouds of snow, Hallorann thought of a crash that had occurred at Boston's Logan Airport a few years ago. The conditions had been similar, only fog instead of snow had reduced visibility to zero. The plane had caught its undercarriage on a retaining wall near the end of the landing strip. What had been left of the eighty-nine people aboard hadn't looked much different from a Hamburger Helper casserole. He wouldn't mind so much if it was just himself. He was pretty much alone in the world now, and attendance at his funeral would be mostly held down to the people he had worked with and that old renegade Masterton, who would at least drink to him. But the boy ... the boy was depending on him. He was maybe all the help that child could expect, and he didn't like the way the boy's last call had been snapped off. He kept thinking of the way those hedge animals had seemed to move ... A thin white hand appeared over his. The woman with the sharp face had taken off her glasses. Without them her features seemed much softer. "It will be all right," she said. Hallorann made a smile and nodded. As advertised the plane came down hard, reuniting with the earth forcefully enough to knock most of the magazines out of the rack at the front and to send plastic trays cascading out of the galley like oversized playing cards. No one
screamed, but Hallorann heard several sets of teeth clicking violently together like gypsy castanets. Then the turbine engines rose to a howl, braking the plane, and as they dropped in volume the pilot's soft southern voice, perhaps not completely steady, came over the intercom system. "Ladies and gentlemen, we have landed at Stapleton Airport. Please remain in your seats until the plane has come to a complete stop at the terminal. Thank you." The woman beside Hallorann closed her book and uttered a long sigh. "We live to fight another day, Mr. Hallorann." "Ma'am, we aren't done with this one, yet." "True. Very true. Would you care to have a drink in the lounge with me?" "I would, but I have an appointment to keep." "Pressing?" "Very pressing," Hallorann said gravely. "Something that will improve the general situation in some small way, I hope." "I hope so too," Hallorann said, and smiled. She smiled back at him, ten years dropping silently from her face as she did so.
* * *
Because he had only the flight bag he'd carried for luggage, Hallorann beat the crowd to the Hertz desk on the lower level. Outside the smoked glass windows he could see the snow still falling steadily. The gusting wind drove white clouds of it back and forth, and the people walking across to the parking area were struggling against it. One man lost his hat and Hallorann could commiserate with him as it whirled high, wide, and handsome. The man stared after it and Hallorann thought: (Aw, just forget it, man. That homburg ain't comin down until it gets to Arizona.) On the heels of that thought: (If it's this bad in Denver, what's it going to be like west of Boulder?) Best not to think about that, maybe. "Can I help you, sir?" a girl in Hertz yellow asked him. "If you got a car, you can help me," he said with a big grin. For a heavier-than-average charge he was able to get a heavier-than-average car, a silver and black Buick Electra. He was thinking of the winding mountain roads rather than style; he would still have to stop somewhere along the way and get chains put on. He wouldn't get far without them. "How bad is it?" he asked as she handed him the rental agreement to sign. "They say it's the worst storm since 1969," she answered brightly. "Do you have far to drive, sir?" "Farther than I'd like." "If you'd like, sir, I can phone ahead to the Texaco station at the Route 270 junction. They'll put chains on for you.' "That would be a great blessing, dear." She picked up the phone and made the call. "They'll be expecting you." "Thank you much." Leaving the desk, he saw the sharp-faced woman standing on one of the queues
that had formed in front of the luggage carousel. She was still reading her book. Hallorann winked at her as he went by. She looked up, smiled at him, and gave him a peace sign. (shine) He turned up his overcoat collar, smiling, and shifted his flight bag to the other hand. Only a little one, but it made him feel better. He was sorry he'd told her that fish story about having a steel plate in his head. He mentally wished her well and as he went out into the howling wind and snow, he thought she wished him the same in return
* * *
The charge for putting on the chains at the service station was a modest one, but Hallorann slipped the man at work in the garage bay an extra ten to get moved up a little way on the waiting list. It was still quarter of ten before he was actually on the road, the windshield wipers clicking and the chains clinking with tuneless monotony on the Buick's big wheels. The turnpike was a mess. Even with the chains he could go no faster than thirty. Cars had gone off the road at crazy angles, and on several of the grades traffic was barely struggling along, summer tires spinning helplessly in the drifting powder. It was the first big storm of the winter down here in the lowlands (if you could call a mile above sealevel "low"), and it was a mother. Many of them were unprepared, common enough, but Hallorann still found himself cursing them as he inched around them, peering into his snow-clogged outside mirror to be sure nothing was (Dashing through the snow ...) coming up in the left-hand lane to cream his black ass. There was more bad luck waiting for him at the Route 36 entrance ramp. Route 36, the Denver-Boulder turnpike, also goes west to Estes Park, where it connects with Route 7. That road, also known as the Upland Highway, goes through Sidewinder, passes the Overlook Hotel, and finally winds down the Western Slope and into Utah. The entrance ramp had been blocked by an overturned semi. Bright-burning flares had been scattered around it like birthday candles on some idiot child's cake. He came to a stop and rolled his window down. A cop with a fur Cossack hat jammed down over his ears gestured with one gloved hand toward the flow of traffic moving north on I-25. "You can't get up here!" he bawled to Hallorann over the wind. "Go down two exits, get on 91, and connect with 36 at Broomfield!" "I think I could get around him on the left!" Hallorann shouted back. "That's twenty miles out of my way, what you're rappin!" "I'll rap your friggin head!" the cop shouted back. "This ramp's closed!" Hallorann backed up, waited for a break in traffic, and continued on his way up Route 25. The signs informed him it was only a hundred miles to Cheyenne, Wyoming. If he didn't look out for his ramp, he'd wind up there. He inched his speed up to thirty-five but dared no more; already snow was threatening to clog his wiper blades and the traffic patterns were decidedly
crazy. Twenty-mile detour. He cursed, and the feeling that time was growing shorter for the boy welled up in him again, nearly suffocating with its urgency. And at the same time he felt a fatalistic certainty that he would not be coming back from this trip. He turned on the radio, dialed past Christmas ads, and found a weather forecast. " — six inches already, and another foot is expected in the Denver metro area by nightfall. Local and state police urge you not to take your car out of the garage unless it's absolutely necessary, and warn that most mountain passes have already been closed. So stay home and wax up your boards and keep tuned to — " "Thanks, mother," Hallorann said, and turned the radio off savagely.
<< 46 >> WENDY
Around noon, after Danny had gone into the bathroom to use the toilet, Wendy took the towel-wrapped knife from under her pillow, put it in the pocket of her bathrobe, and went over to the bathroom door. "Danny?" "What?" "I'm going down to make us some lunch. 'Kay?" "Okay. Do you want me to come down?" "No, I'll bring it up. How about a cheese omelet and some soup?" "Sure." She hesitated outside the closed door a moment longer, "Danny, are you sure it's okay?" "Yeah," he said. "Just be careful." "Where's your father? Do you know?" His voice came back, curiously flat: "No. But it's okay." She stifled an urge to keep asking, to keep picking around the edges of the thing. The thing was there, they knew what it was, picking at it was only going to frighten Danny more ... and herself. Jack had lost his mind. They had sat together on Danny's cot as the storm began to pick up clout and meanness around eight o'clock this morning and had listened to him downstairs, bellowing and stumbling from one place to another. Most of it had seemed to come from the ballroom. Jack singing tuneless bits of song, Jack holding up one side of an argument, Jack screaming loudly at one point, freezing both of their faces as they stared into one another's eyes. Finally they had heard him stumbling back across the lobby, and Wendy thought she had heard a loud banging noise, as if he had fallen down or pushed a door violently open. Since eightthirty or so — three and a half hours now — there had been only silence.
She went down the short hall, turned into the main first floor corridor, and went to the stairs. She stood on the firstfloor landing looking down into the lobby. It appeared deserted, but the gray and snowy day had left much of the long room in shadow. Danny could be wrong. Jack could be behind a chair or couch ... maybe behind the registration desk ... waiting for her to come down... She wet her lips. "Jack?" No answer. Her hand found the handle of the knife and she began to go down. She had seen the end of her marriage many times, in divorce, in Jack's death at the scene of a drunken car accident (a regular vision in the dark two o'clock of Stovington mornings), and occasionally in daydreams of being discovered by another man, a soap opera Galahad who would sweep Danny and her onto the saddle of his snow- white charger and take them away. But she had never envisioned herself prowling halls and staircases like a nervous felon, with a knife clasped in one hand to use against Jack. A wave of despair struck through her at the thought and she had to stop halfway down the stairs and hold the railing, afraid her knees would buckle. (Admit it. It isn't just Jack, he's just the one solid thing in all of this you can hang the other things on, the things you can't believe and yet are being forced to believe, that thing about the hedges, the party favor in the elevator, the mask) She tried to stop the thought but it was too late. (and the voices.) Because from time to time it had not seemed that there was a solitary crazy man below them, shouting at and holding conversations with the phantoms in his own crumbling mind. From time to time, like a radio signal fading in and out, she had heard — or thought she had — other voices, and music, and laughter. At one moment she would hear Jack holding a conversation with someone named Grady (the name was vaguely familiar to her but she made no actual connection), making statements and asking questions into silence, yet speaking loudly, as if to make himself heard over a steady background racket. And then, eerily, other sounds would be there, seeming to slip into places — a dance band, people clapping, a man with an amused yet authoritative voice who seemed to be trying to persuade somebody to make a speech. For a period of thirty seconds to a minute she would hear this, long enough to grow faint with terror, and then it would be gone again and she would only hear Jack, talking in that commanding yet slightly slurred way she remembered as his drunk-speak voice. But there was nothing in the hotel to drink except cooking sherry. Wasn't that right? Yes, but if she could imagine that the hotel was full of voices and music, couldn't Jack imagine that he was drunk? She didn't like that thought. Not at all. Wendy reached the lobby and looked around. The velvet rope that had cordoned off the ballroom had been taken down; the steel post it had been clipped to had been knocked over, as if someone had carelessly bumped it going by. Mellow white light fell through the open door onto the lobby rug from the ballroom's high, narrow windows. Heart thumping, she went to the open ballroom doors and looked in. It was empty and silent, the only sound that curious subaural echo that seems to linger in all large rooms, from the largest cathedral to the smallest
hometown bingo parlor. She went back to the registration desk and stood undecided for a moment, listening to the wind howl outside. It was the worst storm so far, and it was still building up force. Somewhere on the west side a shutter latch had broken and the shutter banged back and forth with a steady flat cracking sound, like a shooting gallery with only one customer. (Jack, you really should take care of that. Before something gets in.) What would she do if he came at her right now, she wondered. If he should pop up from behind the dark, varnished registration desk with its pile of triplicate forms and its little silver-plated bell, like some murderous jack-in-the-box, pun intended, a grinning jack-in-the-box with a cleaver in one hand and no sense at all left behind his eyes. Would she stand frozen with terror, or was there enough of the primal mother in her to fight him for her son until one of them was dead? She didn't know. The very thought made her sick — made her feel that her whole life had been a long and easy dream to lull her helplessly into this waking nightmare. She was soft. When trouble came, she slept. Her past was unremarkable. She had never been tried in fire. Now the trial was upon her, not fire but ice, and she would not be allowed to sleep through this. Her son was waiting for her upstairs. Clutching the haft of the knife tighter, she peered over the desk. Nothing there. Her relieved breath escaped her in a long, hitching sigh. She put the gate up and went through, pausing to glance into the inner office before going in herself. She fumbled through the next door for the bank of kitchen light switches, coldly expecting a hand to close over hers at any second. Then the fluorescents were coming on with minuscule ticking and humming sounds and she could see Mr. Hallorann's kitchen — her kitchen now, for better or worse — pale green tiles, gleaming Formica, spotless porcelain, glowing chrome edgings. She had promised him she would keep his kitchen clean, and she had. She felt as if it was one of Danny's safe places. Dick Hallorann's presence seemed to enfold and comfort her. Danny had called for Mr. Hallorann, and upstairs, sitting next to Danny in fear as her husband ranted and raved below, that had seemed like the faintest of all hopes. But standing here, in Mr. Hallorann's place, it seemed almost possible. Perhaps he was on his way now, intent on getting to them regardless of the storm. Perhaps it was so. She went across to the pantry, shot the bolt back, and stepped inside. She got a can of tomato soup and closed the pantry door again, and bolted it. The door was tight against the floor. If you kept it bolted, you didn't have to worry about rat or mouse droppings in the rice or flour or sugar. She opened the can and dropped the slightly jellied contents into a saucepan — plop. She went to the refrigerator and got milk and eggs for the omelet. Then to the walk-in freezer for cheese. All of these actions, so common and so much a part of her life before the Overlook had been a part of her life, helped to calm her. She melted butter in the frying pan, diluted the soup with milk, and then poured the beaten eggs into the pan. A sudden feeling that someone was standing behind her, reaching for her throat.
She wheeled around, clutching the knife. No one there. (! Get ahold of yourself, girl!) She grated a bowl of cheese from the block, added it to the omelet, flipped it, and turned the gas ring down to a bare blue flame. The soup was hot. She put the pot on a large tray with silverware, two bowls, two plates, the salt and pepper shakers. When the omelet had puffed slightly, Wendy slid it off onto one of the plates and covered it. (Now back the way you came. Turn off the kitchen lights. Go through the inner office. Through the desk gate, collect two hundred dollars.) She stopped on the lobby side of the registration desk and set the tray down beside the silver bell. Unreality would stretch only so far; this was like some surreal game of hide-and-seek. She stood in the shadowy lobby, frowning in thought. (Don't push the facts away this time, girl. There are certain realities, as lunatic as this situation may seem. One of them is that you may be the only responsible person left in this grotesque pile. You have a five-going-on-six son to look out for. And your husband, whatever has happened to him and no matter how dangerous he may be ... maybe he's part of your responsibility, too. And even if he isn't consider this: Today is December second. You could be stuck up here another four months if a ranger doesn't happen by. Even if they do start to wonder why they haven't heard from us on the CB, no one is going to come today ... or tomorrow ... maybe not for weeks. Are you going to spend a month sneaking down to get meals with a knife in your pocket and jumping at every shadow? Do you really think you can avoid Jack for a month? Do you think you can keep Jack out of the upstairs quarters if he wants to get in? He has the passkey and one hard kick would snap the bolt.) Leaving the tray on the desk, she walked slowly down to the dining room and looked in. It was deserted. There was one table with the chairs set up around it, the table they had tried eating at until the dining room's emptiness began to freak them out. "Jack?" she called hesitantly. At that moment the wind rose in a gust, driving snow against the shutters, but it seemed to her that there had been something. A muffled sort of groan. "Jack?" No returning sound this time, but her eyes fell on something beneath the batwing doors of the Colorado Lounge, something that gleamed faintly in the subdued light. Jack's cigarette lighter. Plucking up her courage, she crossed to the batwings and pushed them open. The smell of gin was so strong that her breath snagged in her throat. It wasn't even right to call it a smell; it was a positive reek. But the shelves were empty. Where in God's name had he found it? A bottle hidden at the back of one of the cupboards? Where? There was another groan, low and fuzzy, but perfectly audible this time. Wendy walked slowly to the bar. "Jack?" No answer. She looked over the bar and there he was, sprawled out on the floor in a stupor. Drunk as a lord, by the smell. He must have tried to go right over the
top and lost his balance. A wonder he hadn't broken his neck. An old proverb recurred to her: God looks after drunks and little children. Amen. Yet she was not angry with him; looking down at him she thought be looked like a horribly overtired little boy who had tried to do too much and had fallen asleep in the middle of the living room floor. He had stopped drinking and it was not Jack who had made the decision to start again; there had been no liquor for him to start with ... so where had it come from? Resting at every five or six feet along the horseshoe-shaped bar there were wine bottles wrapped in straw, their mouths plugged with candles. Supposed to look bohemian, she supposed. She picked one up and shook it, half-expecting to hear the slosh of gin inside it (new wine in old bottles) but there was nothing. She set it back down. Jack was stirring. She went around the bar, found the gate, and walked back on the inside to where Jack lay, pausing only to look at the gleaming chromium taps. They were dry, but when she passed close to them she could smell beer, wet and new, like a fine mist. As she reached Jack he rolled over, opened his eyes, and looked up at her. For a moment his gaze was utterly blank, and then it cleared. "Wendy?" he asked. "That you?" "Yes," she said. "Do you think you can make it upstairs? If you put your arms around me? Jack, where did you — " His hand closed brutally around her ankle. "Jack! What are you — " "Gotcha!" he said, and began to grin. There was a stale odor of gin and olives about him that seemed to set off an old terror in her, a worse terror than any hotel could provide by itself. A distant part of her thought that the worst thing was that it had all come back to this, she and her drunken husband. "Jack, I want to help." "Oh yeah. You and Danny only want to help." The grip on her ankle was crushing now. Still holding onto her, Jack was getting shakily to his knees. "You wanted to help us all right out of here. But now ... I ... gotcha!" "Jack, you're hurting my ankle — " "I'll hurt more than your ankle, you bitch." The word stunned her so completely that she made no effort to move when he let go of her ankle and stumbled from his knees to his feet, where he stood swaying in front of her. "You never loved me," he said. "You want us to leave because you know that'll be the end of me. Did you ever think about my re ... res ... respons'bilities? No, I guess to fuck you didn't. All you ever think about is ways to drag me down. You're just like my mother, you milksop bitch!" "Stop it," she said, crying. "You don't know what you're saying. You're drunk. I don't know how, but you're drunk." "Oh, I know. I know now. You and him. That little pup upstairs. The two of you, planning together. Isn't that right?" "No, no! We never planned anything! What are you — " "You liar!" he screamed. "Oh, I know how you do it! I guess I know that! When I say, `We're going to stay here and I'm going to do my job,' you say, `Yes,
dear,' and he says, `Yes, Daddy,' and then you lay your plans. You planned to use the snowmobile. You planned that. But I knew. I figured it out. Did you think I wouldn't figure it out? Did you think I was stupid?" She stared at him, unable to speak now. He was going to kill her, and then he was going to kill Danny. Then maybe the hotel would be satisfied and allow him to kill himself. Just like that other caretaker. Just like (Grady.) With almost swooning horror, she realized at last who it was that Jack had been conversing with in the ballroom. "You turned my son against me. That was the worst." His face sagged into lines of selfpity. "My little boy. Now he hates me, too. You saw to that. That was your plan all along, wasn't it? You've always been jealous, haven't you? Just like your mother. You couldn't be satisfied unless you had all the cake, could you? Could you?" She couldn't talk. "Well, I'll fix you," he said, and tried to put his hands around her throat. She took a step backward, then another, and he stumbled against her. She remembered the knife in the pocket of her robe and groped for it, but now his left arm had swept around her, pinning her arm against her side. She could smell sharp gin and the sour odor of his sweat. "Have to be punished," he was grunting. "Chastised. Chastised ... harshly." His right hand found her throat. As her breath stopped, pure panic took over. His left hand joined his right and now the knife was free to her own hand, but she forgot about it. Both of her hands came up and began to yank helplessly at his larger, stronger ones. "Mommy!" Danny shrieked from somewhere. "Daddy, stop! You're hurting Mommyl" He screamed piercingly, a high and crystal sound that she heard from far off. Red flashes of light leaped in front of her eyes like ballet dancers. The room grew darker. She saw her son clamber up on the bar and throw himself at Jack's shoulders. Suddenly one of the hands that had been crushing her throat was gone as Jack cuffed Danny away with a snarl. The boy fell back against the empty shelves and dropped to the floor, dazed. The hand was on her throat again. The red flashes began to turn black. Danny was crying weakly. Her chest was burning. Jack was shouting into her face: "I'll fix you! Goddam you, I'll show you who is boss around here! I'll show you — " But all sounds were fading down a long dark corridor. Her struggles began to weaken. One of her hands fell away from his and dropped slowly until the arm was stretched out at right angles to her body, the hand dangling limply from the wrist like the hand of a drowning woman. It touched a bottle — one of the straw-wrapped wine bottles that served as decorative candleholders. Sightlessly, with the last of her strength, she groped for the bottle's neck and found it, feeling the greasy beads of wax against her hand. (and U God if it slips) She brought it up and then down, praying for aim, knowing that if it only struck his shoulder or upper arm she was dead. But the bottle came down squarely on Jack Torrance's head, the glass
shattering violently inside the straw. The base of it was thick and heavy, and it made a sound against his skull like a medicine ball dropped on a hardwood floor. He rocked back on his heels, his eyes rolling up in their sockets. The pressure on her throat loosened, then gave way entirely. He put his hands out, as if to steady himself, and then crashed over on his back. Wendy drew a long, sobbing breath. She almost fell herself, clutched the edge of the bar, and managed to hold herself up. Consciousness wavered in and out. She could hear Danny crying, but she had no idea where he was. It sounded like crying in an echo chamber. Dimly she saw dime-sized drops of blood falling to the dark surface of the bar-from her nose, she thought. She cleared her throat and spat on the floor. It sent a wave of agony up the column of her throat, but the agony subsided to a steady dull press of pain... just bearable. Little by little, she managed to get control of herself. She let go of the bar, turned around, and saw Jack lying full-length, the shattered bottle beside him. He looked like a felled giant. Danny was crouched below the lounge's cash register, both hands in his mouth, staring at his unconscious father. Wendy went to him unsteadily and touched his shoulder. Danny cringed away from her. "Danny, listen to me — " "No, no," he muttered in a husky old man's voice. "Daddy hurt you ... you hurt Daddy ... Daddy hurt you ... I want to go to sleep. Danny wants to go to sleep." "Danny — " "Sleep, sleep. Nighty-night." "No!" Pain ripping up her throat again. She winced against it. But he opened his eyes. They looked at her warily from bluish, shadowed sockets. She made herself speak calmly, her eyes never leaving his. Her voice was low and husky, almost a whisper. It hurt to talk. "Listen to me, Danny. It wasn't your daddy trying to hurt me. And I didn't want to hurt him. The hotel has gotten into him, Danny. The Overlook has gotten into your daddy. Do you understand me?" Some kind of knowledge came slowly back into Danny's eyes. "The Bad Stuff," he whispered. "There was none of it here before, was there?" "No. The hotel put it here. The ... ' She broke off in a fit of coughing and spat out more blood. Her throat already felt puffed to twice its size. "The hotel made him drink it. Did you hear those people he was talking to this morning?" "Yes ... the hotel people..." "I heard them too. And that means the hotel is getting stronger. It wants to hurt all of us. But I think ... I hope ... that it can only do that through your daddy. He was the only one it could catch. Are you understanding me, Danny? It's desperately important that you understand." "The hotel caught Daddy." He looked at Jack and groaned helplessly. "I know you love your daddy. I do too. We have to remember that the hotel is trying to hurt him as much as it is us." And she was convinced that was true. More, she thought that Danny might be the one the hotel really wanted, the
reason it was going so far ... maybe the reason it was able to go so far. It might even be that in some unknown fashion it was Danny's shine that was powering it, the way a battery powers the electrical equipment in a car ... the way a battery gets a car to start. If they got out of here, the Overlook might subside to its old semi-sentient state, able to do no more than present penny-dreadful horror slides to the more psychically aware guests who entered
Danny's shine or lifeforce or spirit ... whatever you wanted to call it ... into itself — what would it be then? The thought made her cold all over. "I wish Daddy was all better," Danny said, and the tears began to flow again. "Me too," she said, and hugged Danny tightly. "And honey, that's why you've got to help me put your daddy somewhere. Somewhere that the hotel can't make him hurt us and where he can't hurt himself. Then ... if your friend Dick comes, or a park ranger, we can take him away. And I think he might be all right again. All of us might be all right. I think there's still a chance for that, if we're strong and brave, like you were when you jumped on his back. Do you understand?" She looked at him pleadingly and thought how strange it was; she had never seen him when he looked so much like Jack. "Yes," he said, and nodded. "I think ... if we can get away from here ... everything will be like it was. Where could we put him?" "The pantry. There's food in there, and a good strong bolt on the outside. It's warm. And we can eat up the things from the refrigerator and the freezer. There will be plenty for all three of us until help comes." "Do we do it now?" "Yes, right now. Before he wakes up.," Danny put the bargate up while she folded Jack's hands on his chest and listened to his breathing for a moment. It was slow but regular. From the smell of him she thought he must have drunk a great deal ... and he was out of the habit. She thought it might be liquor as much as the crack on the head with the bottle that had put him out. She picked up his legs and began to drag him along the floor. She had been married to him for nearly seven years, he had lain on top of her countless times — in the thousands — but she had never realized how heavy he was. Her breath whistled painfully in and out of her hurt throat. Nevertheless, she felt better than she had in days. She was alive. Having just brushed so close to death, that was precious. And Jack was alive, too. By blind luck rather than plan, they had perhaps found the only way that would bring them all safely out. Panting harshly, she paused a moment, holding Jack's feet against her hips. The surroundings reminded her of the old seafaring captain's cry in Treasure Island after old blind Pew had passed him the Black Spot: he'll do em yet. And then she remembered, uncomfortably, that the old seadog had dropped dead mere seconds later. "Are you all right, Mommy? Is he.. . is he too heavy?" "I'll manage." She began to drag him again. Danny was beside Jack. One of his hands had fallen off his chest, and Danny replaced it gently, with love.
"Are you sure, Mommy?" "Yes. It's the best thing, Danny." "It's like putting him in jail." "Only for awhile." "Okay, then. Are you sure you can do it?" "Yes." But it was a near thing, at that. Danny had been cradling his father's head when they went over the doorsills, but his hands slipped in Jack's greasy hair as they went into the kitchen. The back of his head struck the tiles, and Jack began to moan and stir. "You got to use smoke," Jack muttered quickly. "Now run and get me that gascan." Wendy and Danny exchanged tight, fearful glances. "Help me," she said in a low voice. For a moment Danny stood as if paralyzed by his father's face, and then he moved jerkily to her side and helped her hold the left leg. They dragged him across the kitchen floor in a nightmare kind of slow motion, the only sounds the faint, insectile buzz of the fluorescent lights and their own labored breathing. When they reached the pantry, Wendy put Jack's feet down and turned to fumble with the bolt. Danny looked down at Jack, who was lying limp and relaxed again. The shirttail had pulled out of the back of his pants as they dragged him and Danny wondered if Daddy was too drunk to be cold. It seemed wrong to lock him in the pantry like a wild animal, but he had seen what he tried to do to Mommy. Even upstairs he had known Daddy was going to do that. He had heard them arguing in his head. (If only we could all be out of here. Or if it was a dream I was having, back in Stovington. If only.) The bolt was stuck. Wendy pulled at it as hard as she could, but it wouldn't move. She couldn't retract the goddam bolt. It was stupid and unfair ... she had opened it with no trouble at all when she had gone in to get the can of soup. Now it wouldn't move, and what was she going to do? They couldn't put him in the walk-in refrigerator; he would freeze or smother to death. But if they left him out and he woke up ... Jack stirred again on the floor. "I'll take care of it," he muttered. "I understand" "He's waking up, Mommy!" Danny warned. Sobbing now, she yanked at the bolt with both hands. "Danny?" There was something softly menacing, if still blurry, in Jack's voice. "That you, ole doc?" "Just go to sleep, Daddy," Danny said nervously. "It's bedtime, you know." He looked up at his mother, still struggling with the bolt, and saw what was wrong immediately. She had forgotten to rotate the bolt before trying to withdraw it. The little catch was stuck in its notch. "Here," he said low, and brushed her trembling hands aside; his own were shaking almost as badly. He knocked the catch loose with the heel of his hand and the bolt drew back easily. "Quick," he said. He looked down. Jack's eyes bad fluttered open again and
this time Daddy was looking directly at him, his gaze strangely flat and speculative. "You copied it," Daddy told him. "I know you did, But it's here somewhere. And I'll find it. That I promise you. I'll find it..." His words slurred off again. Wendy pushed the pantry door open with her knee, hardly noticing the pungent odor of dried fruit that wafted out. She picked up Jack's feet again and dragged him in. She was gasping harshly now, at the limit of her strength. As she yanked the chain pull that turned on the light, Jack's eyes fluttered open again. "What are you doing? Wendy? What are you doing?" She stepped over him. He was quick; amazingly quick. One hand lashed out and she had to sidestep and nearly fall out the door to avoid his grasp. Still, he had caught a handful of her bathrobe and there was a heavy purring noise as it ripped. He was up on his hands and knees now, his hair hanging in his eyes, like some heavy animal. A large dog ... or a lion. "Damn you both, I know what you want. But you're not going to get it. This hotel ... it's mine. It's me they want. Me! Me!" "The door, Danny!" she screamed. "Shut the door!" He pushed the heavy wooden door shut with a slam, just as Jack leaped. The door latched and Jack thudded uselessly against it. Danny's small hands groped at the bolt. Wendy was too far away to help; the issue of whether he would be locked in or free was going to be decided in two seconds. Danny missed his grip, found it again, and shot the bolt across just as the latch began to jiggle madly up and down below it. Then it stayed up and there was a series of thuds as Jack slammed his shoulder against the door. The bolt, a quarter inch of steel in diameter, showed no signs of loosening. Wendy let her breath out slowly. "Let me out of here!" Jack raged. "Let me out! Danny, doggone it, this is your father and I want to get out! Now do what I tell you!" Danny's hand moved automatically toward the bolt. Wendy caught it and pressed it between her breasts. "You mind your daddy, Danny! You do what I say! You do it or I'll give you a hiding you'll never forget. Open this door or I'll bash your fucking brains in!" Danny looked at her, pale as window glass. They could hear his breath tearing in and out behind the half inch of solid oak. "Wendy, you let me out! Let me out right now! You cheap pickle-plated cold- cunt bitch! You let me out! I mean it! Let me out of here and I'll let it go! If you don't, I'll mess you up! I mean it! I'll mess you up so bad your own mother would pass you on the street! Now open this door!" Danny moaned. Wendy looked at him and saw he was going to faint in a moment. "Come on, doc," she said, surprised at the calmness of her own voices "It's not your daddy talking, remember. It's the hotel." "Come hack here and let me out right NOW!" Jack screamed. There was a scraping, breaking sound as he attacked the inside of the door with his fingernails. "It's the hotel," Danny said. "It's the hotel. I remember." But he looked back over his shoulder and his face was crumpled and terrified.
<< 47 >>
DANNY
It was three in the afternoon of a long, long day. They were sitting on the big bed in their quarters. Danny was turning the purple VW model with the monster sticking out of the sun roof over and over in his hands, compulsively. They had heard Daddy's batterings at the door all the way across the lobby, the batterings and his voice, hoarse and petulantly angry in a weak-king sort of a way, vomiting promises of punishment, vomiting profanity, promising both of them that they would live to regret betraying him after he had slaved his guts out for them over the years. Danny thought they would no longer be able to hear it upstairs, but the sounds of his rage carried perfectly up the dumb-waiter shaft: Mommy's face was pale, and there were horrible brownish bruises on her neck where Daddy had tried to... He turned the model over and over in his hands, Daddy's prize for having learned his reading lessons. (... where Daddy had tried to hug her too tight.) Mommy put some of her music on the little record player, scratchy and full of horns and flutes. She smiled at him tiredly. He tried to smile back and failed. Even with the volume turned up loud he thought he could still hear Daddy screaming at them and battering the pantry door like an animal in a zoo cage: What if Daddy had to go to the bathroom? What would he do then? Danny began to cry. Wendy turned the volume down on the record player at once, held him, rocked him on her lap. "Danny, love, it will be all right. It will. If Mr. Hallorann didn't get your message, someone else will. As soon as the storm is over. No one could get up here until then anyway. Mr. Hallorann or anyone else. But when the storm is over, everything will be fine again. We'll leave here. And do you know what we'll do next spring? The three of us?" Danny shook his head against her breasts. He didn't know. It seemed there could never be spring again. "We'll go fishing. We'll rent a boat and go fishing, just like we did last year on Chatterton Lake. You and me and your daddy. And maybe you'll catch a bass for our supper. And maybe we won't catch anything, but we're sure to have a good time." "I love you, Mommy," he said, and hugged her. "Oh, Danny, I love you, too." Outside, the wind whooped and screamed,
* * *
Around four-thirty, just as the daylight began to fail, the screams ceased. They had both been dozing uneasily, Wendy still holding Danny in her arms, and she didn't wake. But Danny did. Somehow the silence was worse, more ominous than the screams and the blows against the strong pantry door. Was Daddy asleep again? Or dead? Or what? (Did he get out?) Fifteen minutes later the silence was broken by a hard, grating, metallic rattle. There was a heavy grinding, then a mechanical humming. Wendy came awake with a cry. The elevator was running again. They listened to it, wide-eyed, hugging each other. It went from floor to floor, the grate rattling back, the brass door slamming open. There was laughter, drunken shouts, occasional screams, and the sounds of breakage. The Overlook was coming to life around them.
<< 48 >> JACK
He sat on the floor of the pantry with his legs out in front of him, a box of Triscuit crackers between them, looking at the door. He was eating the crackers one by one, not tasting them, only eating them because he had to eat something. When he got out of here, he was going to need his strength. All of it. At this precise instant, he thought he had never felt quite so miserable in his entire life. His mind and body together made up a large-writ scripture of pain. His head ached terribly, the sick throb of a hangover. The attendant symptoms were there, too: his mouth tasted like a manure rake had taken a swing through it, his ears rung, his heart had an extra-heavy, thudding beat, like a tom-tom. In addition, both shoulders ached fiercely from throwing himself against the door and his throat felt raw and peeled from useless shouting. He had cut his right hand on the doorlatch. And when he got out of here, he was going to kick some ass. He munched the Triscuits one by one, refusing to give in to his wretched stomach, which wanted to vomit up everything. He thought of the Excedrins in his pocket and decided to wait until his stomach had quieted a bit. No sense swallowing a painkiller if you were going to throw it right back up. Have to use your brain. The celebrated Jack Torrance brain. Aren't you the fellow who once was going to live by his wits? Jack Torrance, best-selling author. Jack Torrance, acclaimed playwright and winner of the New York Critics Circle Award.
John Torrance, man of letters, esteemed thinker, winner of the Pulitzer Prize at seventy for his trenchant book of memoirs, My Life in the Twentieth Century. All any of that shit boiled down to was living by your wits. Living by your wits is always knowing where the wasps are. He put another Triscuit into his mouth and crunched it up. What it really came down to, he supposed, was their lack of trust in him. Their failure to believe that he knew what was best for them and how to get it. His wife had tried to usurp him, first by fair (sort of) means, then by foul. When her little hints and whining objections had been overturned by his own well-reasoned arguments, she had turned his boy against him, tried to kill him with a bottle, and then had locked him, of all places, in the goddamned fucking pantry. Still, a small interior voice nagged him. (Yes but where did the liquor come from? Isn't that really the central point? You know what happens when you drink, you know it from bitter experience. When you drink, you lose your wits.) He hurled the box of Triscuits across the small room. They struck a shelf of canned goods and fell to the floor. He looked at the box, wiped his lips with his hand, and then looked at his watch. It was almost six-thirty. He had been in here for hours. His wife had locked him in here and he'd been here for fucking hours. He could begin to sympathize with his father The thing he'd never asked himself, Jack realized now, was exactly what had driven his daddy to drink in the first place. And really ... when you came right down to what his old students had been pleased to call the nifty-gritty ... hadn't it been the woman he was married to? A milksop sponge of a woman, always dragging silently around the house with an expression of doomed martyrdom on her face? A ball and chain around Daddy's ankle? No, not ball and chain. She had never actively tried to make Daddy a prisoner, the way Wendy had done to him. For Jack's father it must have been more like the fate of McTeague the dentist at the end of Frank Norris's great novel: handcuffed to a dead man in the wasteland. Yes, that was better. Mentally and spiritually dead, his mother had been handcuffed to his father by matrimony. Still, Daddy had tried to do right as he dragged her rotting corpse through life. He had tried to bring the four children up to know right from wrong, to understand discipline, and above all, to respect their father. Well, they had been ingrates, all of them, himself included. And now he was paying the price; his own son had turned out to be an ingrate, too. But there was hope. He would get out of here somehow. He would chastise them both, and harshly. He would set Danny an example, so that the day might come when Danny was grown, a day when Danny would know what to do better than he himself had known. He remembered the Sunday dinner when his father had caned his mother at the table ... how horrified he and the others had been. Now he could see how necessary that bad been, how his father had only been feigning drunkenness, how his wits had been sharp and alive underneath all along, watching for the slightest sign of disrespect.
Jack crawled after the Triscuits and began to eat them again, sitting by the door she had so treacherously bolted. He wondered exactly what his father had seen, and how he had caught her out by his playacting. Had she been sneering at him behind her hand? Sticking her tongue out? Making obscene finger gestures? Or only looking at him insolently and arrogantly, convinced that he was too stupidly drunk to see? Whatever it had been, he had caught her at it, and he had chastised her sharply. And now, twenty years later, he could finally appreciate Daddy's wisdom. Of course you could say Daddy had been foolish to marry such a woman, to have handcuffed himself to that corpse in the first place ... and a disrespectful corpse at that. But when the young marry in haste they must repent in leisure, and perhaps Daddy's daddy had married the same type of woman, so that unconsciously Jack's daddy had also married one, as Jack himself had. Except that his wife, instead of being satisfied with the passive role of having wrecked one career and crippled another, had opted for the poisonously active task of trying to destroy his last and best chance: to become a member of the Overlook's staff, and possibly to rise ... all the way to the position of manager, in time. She was trying to deny him Danny, and Danny was his ticket of admission. That was foolish, of course — why would they want the son when they could have the father? — but employers often had foolish ideas and that was the condition that had been made. He wasn't going to be able to reason with her, he could see that now. He had tried to reason with her in the Colorado Lounge, and she had refused to listen, had hit him over the head with a bottle for his pains. But there would be another time, and soon. He would get out of here. He suddenly held his breath and cocked his head. Somewhere a piano was playing boogie-woogie and people were laughing and clapping along. The sound was muffled through the heavy wooden door, but audible. The song was "There'll Be a Hot Time in the Old Town Tonight." His hands curled helplessly into fists; he had to restrain himself from battering at the door with them. The party had begun again. The liquor would be flowing freely. Somewhere, dancing with someone else, would be the girl who had felt so maddeningly nude under her white silk gown. "You'll pay for this!" he howled. "Goddam you two, you'll pay! You'll take your goddam medicine for this, I promise you! You — " "Here, here, now," a mild voice said just outside the door, "No need to shout, old fellow. I can hear you perfectly well." Jack lurched to his feet "Grady? Is that you?" "Yes, sir. Indeed it is. You appear to have been locked in." "Let me out, Grady. Quickly." "I see you can hardly have taken care of the business we discussed, sir. The correction of your wife and son." "They're the ones who locked me in. Pull the bolt, for God's sake!" "You let them lock you in?" Grady's voice registered well-bred surprise. "Oh, dear. A woman half your size and a little boy? Hardly sets you off as being of top managerial timber, does it?" A pulse began to beat in the clockspring of veins at Jack's right temple. "Let
me out, Grady. I'll take care of them." "Will you indeed, sir? I wonder." Well-bred surprise was replaced by well-bred regret. "I'm pained to say that I doubt it. I — and others — have really come to believe that your heart is not in this, sir. That you haven't the ... the belly for it" "I do!" Jack shouted. "I do, I swear it!" "You would bring us your son?" "Yes! Yes!" "Your wife would object to that very strongly, Mr. Torrance. And she appears to be ... somewhat stronger than we had imagined. Somewhat more resourceful. She certainly seems to have gotten the better of you." Grady tittered. "Perhaps, Mr. Torrance, we should have been dealing with her all along." "I'll bring him, I swear it," Jack said. His face was against the door now. He was sweating. "She won't object. I swear she won't. She won't be able to." "You would have to kill her, I fear," Grady said coldly. "I'll do what I have to do. Just let me out." "You'll give your word on it, sir?" Grady persisted. "My word, my promise, my sacred vow, whatever in hell you want. If you — " There was a flat snap as the bolt was drawn back. The door shivered open a quarter of an inch. Jack's words and breath halted. For a moment he felt that death itself was outside that door. The feeling passed. He whispered: "Thank you, Grady. I swear you won't regret it. I swear you won't." There was no answer. He became aware that all sounds had stopped except for the cold swooping of the wind outside. He pushed the pantry door open; the hinges squealed faintly. The kitchen was empty. Grady was gone. Everything was still and frozen beneath the cold white glare of the fluorescent bars. His eyes caught on the large chopping block where the three of them had eaten their meals. Standing on top of it was a martini glass, a fifth of gin, and a plastic dish filled with olives. Leaning against it was one of the roque mallets from the equipment shed. He looked at it for a long time. Then a voice much deeper and much more powerful than Grady's, spoke from somewhere, everywhere ... from inside him. (Keep your promise, Mr. Torrance.) "I will," he said. He heard the fawning servility in his own voice but was unable to control it. "I will." He walked to the chopping block and put his hand on the handle of the mallet. He hefted it. Swung it. It hissed viciously through the air. Jack Torrance began to smile.
<< 49 >>
HALLORANN, GOING UP THE COUNTRY
It was quarter of two in the afternoon and according to the snow-clotted signs and the Hertz Buick's odometer, he was less than three miles from Estes Park when he finally went off the road. In the hills, the snow was falling faster and more furiously than Hallorann had ever seen (which was, perhaps, not to say a great deal, since Hallorann had seen as little snow as he could manage in his lifetime), and the wind was blowing a capricious gale — now from the west, now backing around to the north, sending clouds of powdery snow across his field of vision, making him coldly aware again and again that if he missed a turn he might well plunge two hundred feet off the road, the Electra cartwheeling ass over teapot as it went down. Making it worse was his own amateur status as a winter driver. It scared him to have the yellow center line buried under swirling, drifting snow, and it scared him when the heavy gusts of wind came unimpeded through the notches in the hills and actually made the heavy Buick slew around. It scared him that the road information signs were mostly masked with snow and you could flip a coin as to whether the road was going to break right or left up ahead in the white drive-in movie screen he seemed to be driving through. He was scared, all right. He had driven in a cold sweat since climbing into the hills west of Boulder and Lyons, handling the accelerator and brake as if they were Ming vases. Between rock 'n' roll tunes on the radio, the disc jockey constantly adjured motorists to stay off the main highways and under no conditions to go into the mountains, because many roads were impassable and all of them were dangerous. Scores of minor accidents had been reported, and two serious ones: a party of skiers in a VW microbus and a family that had been bound for Albuquerque through the Sangre de Cristo Mountains. The combined score on both was four dead and five wounded. "So stay off those roads and get into the good music here at KTLK," the jock concluded cheerily, and then compounded Hallorann's misery by playing "Seasons in the Sun." "We had joy, we had fun, we had — " Terry Jacks gibbered happily, and Hallorann snapped the radio off viciously, knowing he would have it back on in five minutes. No matter how bad it was, it was better than riding alone through this white madness. (Admit it. Dis heah black boy has got at least one long stripe of yaller ... and it runs rant up his ebberlubbin back!) It wasn't even funny. He would have backed off before he even cleared Boulder if it hadn't been for his compulsion that the boy was in terrible trouble. Even now a small voice in the back of his skull — more the voice of reason than of cowardice, he thought — was telling him to hole up in an Estes Park motel for the night and wait for the plows to at least expose the center stripe again. That voice kept reminding him of the jet's shaky landing at Stapleton, of that
sinking feeling that it was going to come in nose-first, delivering its passengers to the gates of hell rather than at Gate 39, Concourse B. But reason would not stand against the compulsion. It had to be today. The snowstorm was his own bad luck. He would have to cope with it. He was afraid that if he didn't, he might have something much worse to cope with in his dreams. The wind gusted again, this time from the northeast, a little English on the ball if you please, and he was again cut off from the vague shapes of the hills and even from the embankments on either side of the road. He was driving through white null. And then the high sodium lights of the snowplow loomed out of the soup, bearing down, and to his horror he saw that instead of being to one side, the Buick's nose was pointed directly between those headlamps. The plow was being none too choosy about keeping its own side of the road, and Hallorann had allowed the Buick to drift. The grinding roar of the plow's diesel engine intruded over the bellow of the wind, and then the sound of its airhorn, hard, long, almost deafening. Hallorann's testicles turned into two small wrinkled sacs filled with shaved ice. His guts seemed to have been transformed into a large mass of Silly Putty. Color was materializing out of the white now, snow-clotted orange. He could see the high cab, even the gesticulating figure of the driver behind the single long wiper blade. He could see the V shape of the plow's wing blades, spewing more snow up onto the road's left-hand embankment like pallid, smoking exhaust. WHAAAAAAAAA! the airhorn bellowed indignantly. He squeezed the accelerator like the breast of a muchloved woman and the Buick scooted forward and toward the right. There was no embankment over here; the plows headed up instead of down had only to push the snow directly over the drop. (The drop, ah yes, the drop — ) The wingblades on Hallorann's left, fully four feet higher than the Electra's roof, flirted by with no more than an inch or two to spare. Until the plow had actually cleared him, Hallorann had thought a crash inevitable. A prayer which was half an inarticulate apology to the boy flitted through his mind like a torn rag. Then the plow was past, its revolving blue lights glinting and flashing in Hallorann's rearview mirror. He jockeyed the Buick's steering wheel back to the left, but nothing doing. The scoot had turned into a skid, and the Buick was floating dreamily toward the lip of the drop, spurning snow from under its mudguards. He flicked the wheel back the other way, in the skid's direction, and the car's front and rear began to swap places. Panicked now, he pumped the brake hard, and then felt a hard bump. In front of him the road was gone ... he was looking into a bottomless chasm of swirling snow and vague greenish-gray pines far away and far below. (I'm going holy mother of Jesus I'm going off) And that was where the car stopped, canting forward at a thirty-degree angle, the left fender jammed against a guardrail, the rear wheels nearly off the ground. When Hallorann tried reverse, the wheels only spun helplessly. His heart was doing a Gene Krupa drumroll.
He got out — very carefully he got out — and went around to the Buick's back deck. He was standing there, looking at the back wheels helplessly, when a cheerful voice behind him said: "Hello there, fella. You must be shit right out of your mind." He turned around and saw the plow forty yards further down the road, obscured in the blowing snow except for the raftered dark brown streak of its exhaust and the revolving blue lights on top. The driver was standing just behind him, dressed in a long sheepskin coat and a slicker over it. A blue-and-white pinstriped engineer's cap was perched on his head, and Hallorann could hardly believe it was staying on in the teeth of the wind. (Glue. It sure-God must be glue.) "Hi," he said. "Can you pull me back onto the road?" "Oh, I guess I could," the plow driver said. "What the hell you doing way up here, mister? Good way to kill your ass." "Urgent business." "Nothin is that urgent," the plow driver said slowly and kindly, as if speaking to a mental defective. "If you'd 'a hit that post a leetle mite harder, nobody woulda got you out till All Fools' Day. Don't come from these parts, do you?" "No. And I wouldn't be here unless my business was as urgent as I say." "That so?" The driver shifted his stance companionably as if they were having a desultory chat on the back steps instead of standing in a blizzard halfway between hoot and holler, with Hallorann's car balanced three hundred feet above the tops of the trees below. "Where you headed? Estes?" "No, a place called the Overlook Hotel," Hallorann said. "It's a little way above Sidewinder — " But the driver was shaking his head dolefully. "I guess I know well enough where that is," he said. "Mister, you'll never get up to the old Overlook. Roads between Estes Park and Sidewinder is bloody damn hell. It's driftin in right behind us no matter how hard we push. I come through drifts a few miles back that was damn near six feet through the middle. And even if you could make Sidewinder, why, the road's closed from there all the way across to Buckland, Utah. Nope." He shook his head. "Never make it, mister. Never make it at all." "I have to try," Hallorann said, calling on his last reserves of patience to keep his voice normal. "There's a boy up there — " "Boy? Naw. The Overlook closes down at the last end of September. No percentage keepin it open longer. Too many shit-storms like this." "He's the son of the caretaker. He's in trouble." "How would you know that?" His patience snapped. "For Christ's sake are you going to stand there and flap y'jaw at me the rest of the day? I know, I know! Now are you going to pull me back on the road or not?" "Kind of testy, aren't you?" the driver observed, not particularly perturbed. "Sure, get back in there. I got a chain behind the seat."
Hallorann got back behind the wheel, beginning to shake with delayed reaction now. His hands were numbed almost clear through. He had forgotten to bring gloves. The plow backed up to the rear of the Buick, and he saw the driver get out with a long coil of chain. Hallorann opened the door and shouted: "What can I do to help?" "Stay out of the way, is all," the driver shouted back. "This ain't gonna take a blink," Which was true. A shudder ran through the Buick's frame as the chain pulled tight, and a second later it was back on the road, pointed more or less toward Estes Park. The plow driver walked up beside the window and knocked on the safety glass. Hallorann rolled down the window. "Thanks," he said. "I'm sorry I shouted at you." "I been shouted at before," the driver said with a grin. "I guess you're sorta strung up. You take these." A pair of bulky blue mittens dropped into Hallorann's lap. "You'll need em when you go off the road again, I guess. Cold out. You wear em unless you want to spend the rest of your life pickin your nose with a crochetin hook. And you send em back. My wife knitted em and I'm partial to em. Name and address is sewed right into the linin. I'm Howard Cottrell, by the way. You just send em back when you don't need em anymore. And I don't want to have to go payin no postage due, mind." "All right," Hallorann said. "Thanks. One hell of a lot." "You be careful. I'd take you myself, but I'm busy as a cat in a mess of guitar strings." "That's okay. Thanks again." He started to roll up the window, but Cottrell stopped him. "When you get to Sidewinder — if you get to Sidewinder — you go to Durkin's Conoco. It's right next to the li'brey. Can't miss it. You ask for Larry Durkin. Tell him Howie Cottrell sent you and you want to rent one of his snowmobiles. You mention my name and show those mittens, you'll get the cut rate." "Thanks again," Hallorann said. Cottrell nodded. "It's funny. Ain't no way you could know someone's in trouble up there at the Overlook ... the phone's out, sure as hell. But I believe you. Sometimes I get feelins." Hallorann nodded. "Sometimes I do, too." "Yeah. I know you do. But you take care." "I will." Cottrell disappeared into the blowing dimness with a final wave, his engineer cap still mounted perkily on his head. Hallorann got going again, the chains flailing at the snowcover on the road, finally digging in enough to start the Buick moving. Behind him, Howard Cottrell gave a final good-luck blast on his plow's airhorn, although it was really unnecessary; Hallorann could feel him wishing him good luck. That's two shines in one day, he thought, and that ought to be some kind of good omen. But he distrusted omens, good or bad. And meeting two people with the shine in one day (when he usually didn't run across more than four or five in the course of a year) might not mean anything. That feeling of finality, a feeling
(like things are all wrapped up) he could not completely define was still very much with him. It was The Buick wanted to skid sideways around a tight curve and Hallorann jockeyed it carefully, hardly daring to breathe. He turned on the radio again and it was Aretha, and Aretha was just fine. He'd share his Hertz Buick with her any day. Another gust of wind struck the car, making it rock and slip around. Hallorann cursed it and hunched more closely over the wheel. Aretha finished her song and then the jock was on again, telling him that driving today was a good way to get killed. Hallorann snapped the radio off.
* * *
He did make it to Sidewinder, although he was four and a half hours on the road between Estes Park and there. By the time he got to the Upland Highway it was full dark, but the snowstorm showed no sign of abating. Twice he'd had to stop in front of drifts that were as high as his car's hood and wait for the plows to come along and knock holes in them. At one of the drifts the plow had come up on his side of the road and there had been another close call. The driver had merely swung around his car, not getting out to chew the fat, but he did deliver one of the two finger gestures that all Americans above the age of ten recognize, and it was not the peace sign. It seemed that as he drew closer to the Overlook, his need to hurry became more and more compulsive. He found himself glancing at his wristwatch almost constantly. The hands seemed to be flying along. Ten minutes after he had turned onto the Upland, he passed two signs. The whooping wind had cleared both of their snow pack so he was able to read them. SIDEWINDER 10, the first said. The second: ROAD CLOSED 12 MILES AHEAD DURING WINTER MONTHS. "Larry Durkin," Hallorann muttered to himself. His dark face was strained and tense in the muted green glow of the dashboard instruments. It was ten after six. "The Conoco by the library. Larry — " And that was when it struck him full-force, the smell of oranges and the thought-force, heavy and hateful, murderous: (GET OUT OF HERE YOU DIRTY NIGGER THIS IS NONE OF YOUR BUSINESS YOU NIGGER TURN AROUND TURN AROUND OR WE'LL KILL YOU HANG YOU UP FROM A TREE LIMB YOU FUCKING JUNGLE-BUNNY COON AND THEN BURN THE BODY THAT'S WHAT WE DO WITH NIGGERS SO TURN AROUND NOW) Hallorann screamed in the close confines of the car. The message did not come to him in words but in a series of rebuslike images that were slammed into his head with terrific force. He took his hands from the steering wheel to blot the pictures out. Then the car smashed broadside into one of the embankments, rebounded, slewed halfway around, and came to a stop. The rear wheels spun uselessly. Hallorann snapped the gearshift into park, and then covered his face with his hands. He did not precisely cry; what escaped him was an uneven huh-huh-huh sound. His chest heaved. He knew that if that blast had taken him on a stretch of road with a dropoff on one side or the other, he might well be dead now.
Maybe that had been the idea. And it might hit him again, at any time. He would have to protect against it. He was surrounded by a red force of immense power that might have been memory. He was drowning in instinct. He took his hands away from his face and opened his eyes cautiously. Nothing. If there was something trying to scare him again, it wasn't getting through. He was closed off. Had that happened to the boy? Dear God, had that happened to the little boy? And of all the images, the one that bothered him the roost was that dull whacking sound, like a hammer splatting into thick cheese. What did that mean? . (Jesus, not that little boy. Jesus, please.) He dropped the gearshift lever into low range and fed the engine gas a little at a time. The wheels spun, caught, spun, and caught again. The Buick began to move, its headlights cutting weakly through the swirling snow. He looked at his watch. Almost six-thirty now. And he was beginning to feel that was very late indeed.
<< 50 >> REDRUM
Wendy Torrance stood indecisive in the middle of the bedroom, looking at her son, who had fallen fast asleep. Half an hour ago the sounds had ceased. All of them, all at once. The elevator, the party, the sound of room doors opening and closing. Instead of easing her mind it made the tension that had been building in her even worse; it was like a malefic hush before the storm's final brutal push. But Danny had dozed off almost at once; first into a light, twitching doze, and in the last ten minutes or so a heavier sleep. Even looking directly at him she could barely see the slow rise and fall of his narrow chest. She wondered when he had last gotten a full night's sleep, one without tormenting dreams or long periods of dark wakefulness, listening to revels that had only become audible — and visible — to her in the last couple of days, as the Overlook's grip on the three of them tightened. (Real psychic phenomena or group hypnosis?) She didn't know, and didn't think it mattered. What had been happening was just as deadly either way. She looked at Danny and thought (God grant he lie still) that if he was undisturbed, he might sleep the rest of the night through. Whatever talent he had, he was still a small boy and he needed his rest. It was Jack she had begun to worry about. She grimaced with sudden pain, took her hand away from her mouth, and saw she had torn off one of her fingernails. And her nails were one thing she'd always
tried to keep nice. They weren't long enough to be called hooks, but still nicely shaped and (and what are you worrying about your fingernails for?) She laughed a little, but it was a shaky sound, without amusement. First Jack had stopped howling and battering at the door. Then the party had begun again (or did it ever stop? did it sometimes just drift into a slightly different angle of time where they weren't meant to hear it?) counterpointed by the crashing, banging elevator. Then that had stopped. In that new silence, as Danny had been falling asleep, she had fancied she heard low, conspiratorial voices coming from the kitchen almost directly below them. At first she had dismissed it as the wind, which could mimic many different human vocal ranges, from a papery deathbed whisper around the doors and window frames to a full-out scream around the eaves ... the sound of a woman fleeing a murderer in a cheap melodrama. Yet, sitting stiffly beside Danny, the idea that it was indeed voices became more and more convincing. Jack and someone else, discussing his escape from the pan try. Discussing the murder of his wife and son. It would be nothing new inside these walls; murder had been done here before. She had gone to the heating vent and had placed her ear against it, but at that exact moment the furnace had come on, and any sound was lost in the rush of warm air coming up from the basement. When the furnace had kicked off again, five minutes ago, the place was completely silent except for the wind, the gritty spatter of snow against the building, and the occasional groan of a board. She looked down at her ripped fingernail. Small beads of blood were oozing up from beneath it. (Jack's gotten out.) (Don't talk nonsense.) (Yes, he's out. He's gotten a knife from the kitchen or maybe the meat cleaver. He's on his way up here right now, walking along the sides of the risers so the stairs won't creak.) (! You're insane !) Her lips were trembling, and for a moment it seemed that she must have cried the words out loud. But the silence held. She felt watched. She whirled around and stared at the night-blackened window, and a hideous white face with circles of darkness for eyes was gibbering in at her, the face of a monstrous lunatic that had been hiding in these groaning walls all along- It was only a pattern of frost on the outside of the glass. She let her breath out in a long, susurrating whisper of fear, and it seemed to her that she heard, quite clearly this time, amused titters from somewhere. (You're jumping at shadows. It's bad enough without that. By tomorrow morning, you'll be ready for the rubber room.) There was only one way to allay those fears and she knew what it was. She would have to go down and make sure Jack was still in the pantry. Very simple. Go downstairs. Have a peek. Come back up. Oh, by the way, stop and grab the tray on the registration counter. The omelet would be a washout,
but the soup could be reheated on the hotplate by Jack's typewriter. (Oh yes and don't get killed if he's down there with a knife.) She walked to the dresser, trying to shake off the mantle of fear that lay on her. Scattered across the dresser's top was a pile of change, a stack of gasoline chits for the hotel truck, the two pipes Jack brought with him everywhere but rarely smoked ... and his key ring. She picked it up, held it in her hand for a moment, and then put it back down. The idea of locking the bedroom door behind her had occurred, but it just didn't appeal. Danny was asleep. Vague thoughts of fire passed through her mind, and something else nibbled more strongly, but she let it go. Wendy crossed the room, stood indecisively by the door for a moment, then took the knife from the pocket of her robe and curled her right hand around the wooden haft. She pulled the door open. The short corridor leading to their quarters was bare. The electric wall flambeaux all shone brightly at their regular intervals, showing off the rug's blue background and sinuous, weaving pattern. (See? No boogies here.) (No, of course not. They want you out. They want you to do something silly and womanish, and that is exactly what you are doing.) She hesitated again, miserably caught, not wanting to leave Danny and the safety of the apartment and at the same time needing badly to reassure herself that Jack was still . safely packed away. (Of course he is.) (But the voices) (There were no voices. It was your imagination. It was the wind.) "It wasn't the wind." The sound of her own voice made her jump. But the deadly certainty in it made her go forward. The knife swung by her side, catching angles of light and throwing them on the silk wallpaper. Her slippers whispered against the carpet's nap. Her nerves were singing like wires. She reached the corner of the main corridor and peered around, her mind stiffened for whatever she might see there. There was nothing to see. After a moment's hesitation she rounded the corner and began down the main corridor. Each step toward the shadowy stairwell increased her dread and made her aware that she was leaving her sleeping son behind, alone and unprotected. The sound of her slippers against the carpet seemed louder and louder in her ears; twice she looked back over her shoulder to convince herself that someone wasn't creeping up behind her. She reached the stairwell and put her hand on the cold newel post at the top of the railing. There were nineteen wide steps down to the lobby. She had counted them enough times to know. Nineteen carpeted stair risers, and nary a Jack crouching on any one of them. Of course not. Jack was locked in the pantry behind a hefty steel bolt and a thick wooden door. But the lobby was dark and oh so full of shadows. Her pulse thudded steadily and deeply in her throat.
Ahead and slightly to the left, the brass yaw of the elevator stood mockingly open, inviting her to step in and take the ride of her life. (No thank you) The inside of the car had been draped with pink and white crepe streamers. Confetti had burst from two tubular party favors. Lying in the rear left corner was an empty bottle of champagne. She sensed movement above her and wheeled to look up the nineteen steps leading to the dark second-floor landing and saw nothing; yet there was a disturbing corner-of-the-eye sensation that things (things) had leaped back into the deeper darkness of the hallway up there just before her eyes could register them. She looked down the stairs again. Her right hand was sweating against the wooden handle of the knife; she switched it to her left, wiped her right palm against the pink terrycloth of her robe, and switched the knife back. Almost unaware that her mind had given her body the command to go forward, she began down the stairs, left foot then right, left foot then right, her free hand trailing lightly on the banister. (Where's the party? Don't let me scare you away, you bunch of moldy sheets! Not one scared woman with a knife! Let's have a little music around here! Let's have a little life!) Ten steps down, a dozen, a baker's dozen. The light from the first-floor hall filtered a dull yellow down here, and she remembered that she would have to turn on the lobby lights either beside the entrance to the dining room or inside the manager's office. Yet there was light coming from somewhere else, white and muted. The fluorescents, of course. In the kitchen. She paused on the thirteenth step, trying to remember if she had turned them off or left them on when she and Danny left. She simply couldn't remember. Below her, in the lobby, highbacked chairs hulked in pools of shadow. The glass in the lobby doors was pressed white with a uniform blanket of drifted snow. Brass studs in the sofa cushions gleamed faintly like cat's eyes. There were a hundred places to hide. Her legs stilted with fear, she continued down. Now seventeen, now eighteen, now nineteen. (Lobby level, madam. Step out carefully.) The ballroom doors were thrown wide, only blackness spilling out. From within came a steady ticking, like a bomb. She stiffened, then remembered the clock on the mantel, the clock under glass. Jack or Danny must have wound it ... or maybe it had wound itself up, like everything else in the Overlook. She turned toward the reception desk meaning to go through the gate and the manager's office and into the kitchen. Gleaming dull silver, she could see the intended lunch tray. Then the clock began to strike, little tinkling notes. Wendy stiffened, her tongue rising to the roof of her mouth. Then she relaxed. It was striking eight, that was all. Eight o'clock ... five, six, seven ... She counted the strokes. It suddenly seemed wrong to move again until the
clock had stilled ... ... eight ... nine ... (?? Nine ??) ... ten ... eleven ... Suddenly, belatedly, it came to her. She turned back clumsily for the stairs, knowing already she was too late. But how could she have known? Twelve. All the lights in the ballroom went on. There was a huge, shrieking flourish of brass. Wendy screamed aloud, the sound of her cry insignificant against the blare issuing from those brazen lungs. "Unmask!" the cry echoed. "Unmask! Unmask!" Then they faded, as if down a long corridor of time, leaving her alone again. No, not alone. She turned and he was coming for her. It was Jack and yet not Jack. His eyes were lit with a vacant, murderous glow; his familiar mouth now wore a quivering, joyless grin. He had the roque mallet in one hand. "Thought you'd lock me in? Is that what you thought you'd do?" The mallet whistled through the air. She stepped backward, tripped over a hassock, fell to the lobby rug. "Jack — " "You bitch," he whispered. "I know what you are." The mallet came down again with whistling, deadly velocity and buried itself in her soft stomach. She screamed, suddenly submerged in an ocean of pain. Dimly she saw the mallet rebound. It came to her with sudden numbing reality that he meant to beat her to death with the mallet he held in his hands. She tried to cry out to him again, to beg him to stop for Danny's sake, but her breath had been knocked loose. She could only force out a weak whimper, hardly a sound at all. "Now. Now, by Christ," he said, grinning. He kicked the hassock out of his way. "I guess you'll take your medicine now." The mallet whickered down. Wendy rolled to her left, her robe tangling above her knees. Jack's hold on the mallet was jarred loose when it hit the floor. He had to stoop and pick it up, and while he did she ran for the stairs, the breath at last sobbing back into her. Her stomach was a bruise of throbbing pain. "Bitch," he said through his grin, and began to come after her. "You stinking bitch, I guess you'll get what's coming to you. I guess you will." She heard the mallet whistle through the air and then agony exploded on her right side as the mallet-head took her just below the line of her breasts, breaking two ribs. She fell forward on the steps and new agony ripped her as she struck on the wounded side. Yet instinct made her roll over, roll away, and the mallet whizzed past the side of her face, missing by a naked inch. It struck the deep pile of the stair carpeting with a muffled thud. That was when she saw the knife, which had been jarred out of her hand by her fall. It lay glittering on the fourth stair riser. "Bitch," he repeated. The mallet came down. She shoved herself upward and it landed just below her kneecap. Her lower leg was suddenly on fire. Blood began to trickle down her calf. And then the mallet was coming down again. She jerked
her head away from it and it smashed into the stair riser in the hollow between her neck and shoulder, scraping away the flesh from her ear. He brought the mallet down again and this time she rolled toward him, down the stairs, inside the arc of his swing. A shriek escaped her as her broken ribs thumped and grated. She struck his shins with her body while he was offbalance and he fell backward with a yell of anger and surprise, his feet jigging to keep their purchase on the stair riser. Then he thumped to the floor, the mallet flying from his hand. He sat up, staring at her for a moment with shocked eyes. "I'll kill you for that," he said. He rolled over and stretched out for the handle of the mallet. Wendy forced herself to her feet. Her left leg sent bolt after bolt of pain all the way up to her hip. Her face was ashy pale but set. She leaped onto his back as his hand closed over the shaft of the roque mallet. "Oh dear God!" she screamed to the Overlook's shadowy lobby, and buried the kitchen knife in his lower back up to the handle. He stiffened beneath her and then shrieked. She thought she had never heard such an awful sound in her whole life; it was as if the very boards and windows and doors of the hotel had screamed. It seemed to go on and on while he remained board-stiff beneath her weight. They were like a parlor charade of horse and rider. Except that the back of his red-and-black-checked flannel shirt was growing darker, sodden, with spreading blood. Then he collapsed forward on his face, bucking her off on her hurt side, making her groan. She lay breathing harshly for a time, unable to move. She was an excruciating throb of pain from one end to the other. Every time she inhaled, something stabbed viciously at her, and her neck was wet with blood from her grazed ear. There was only the sound of her struggle to breathe, the wind, and the ticking clock in the ballroom. At last she forced herself to her feet and hobbled across to the stairway. When she got there she clung to the newel post, head down, waves of faintness washing over her. When it had passed a little, she began to climb, using her unhurt leg and pulling with her arms on the banister. Once she looked up, expecting to see Danny there, but the stairway was empty. (Thank God he slept through it thank God thank God) Six steps up she had to rest, her head down, her blond hair coiled on and over the banister. Air whistled painfully through her throat, as if it had grown barbs. Her right side was a swollen, hot mass. (Come on Wendy come on old girl get a locked door behind you and then look at the damage thirteen more to go not so bad. And when you get to the upstairs corridor you can crawl. I give my permission.) She drew in as much breath as her broken ribs would allow and half-pulled, half-fell up another riser. And another. She was on the ninth, almost halfway up, when Jack's voice came from behind and below her. He said thickly: "You bitch. You killed me." Terror as black as midnight swept through her. She looked over her shoulder and saw Jack getting slowly to his feet. His back was bowed over, and she could see the handle of the kitchen knife sticking out of it. His eyes seemed to have contracted, almost to have lost
themselves in the pale, sagging folds of the skin around them. He was grasping the roque mallet loosely in his left hand. The end of it was bloody. A scrap of her pink terrycloth robe stuck almost in the center. "I'll give you your medicine," he whispered, and began to stagger toward the stairs. Whimpering with fear, she began to pull herself upward again. Ten steps, a dozen, a baker's dozen. But still the first-floor hallway looked as far above her as an unattainable mountain peak. She was panting now, her side shrieking in protest. Her hair swung wildly back and forth in front of her face. Sweat stung her eyes. The ticking of the domed clock in the ballroom seemed to fill her cars, and counterpointing it, Jack's panting, agonized gasps as he began to mount the stairs.
<< 51 >> HALLORANN ARRIVES
Larry Durkin was a tall and skinny man with a morose face overtopped with a luxuriant mane of red hair. Hallorann had caught him just as he was leaving the Conoco station, the morose face buried deeply inside an army-issue parka. He was reluctant to do any more business that stormy day no matter how far Hallorann had come, and even more reluctant to rent one of his two snowmobiles out to this wild-eyed black man who insisted on going up to the old Overlook. Among people who had spent most of their lives in the little town of Sidewinder, the hotel had a smelly reputation. Murder had been done up there. A bunch of hoods had run the place for a while, and cutthroat businessmen had run it for a while, too. And things had been done up at the old Overlook that never made the papers, because money has a way of talking. But the people in Sidewinder had a pretty good idea. Most of the hotel's chambermaids came from here, and chambermaids see a lot. But when Hallorann mentioned Howard Cottrell's name and showed Durkin the tag inside one of the blue mittens, the gas station owner thawed. "Sent you here, did he?" Durkin asked, unlocking one of the garage bays and leading Hallorann inside. "Good to know the old rip's got some sense left. I thought he was plumb out of it." He flicked a switch and a bank of very old and very dirty fluorescents buzzed wearily into life. "Now what in the tarnal creation would you want up at that place, fella?" Hallorann's nerve had begun to crack. The last few miles into Sidewinder had been very bad. Once a gust of wind that must have been tooling along at better than sixty miles an hour had floated the Buick all the way around in a 360° turn. And there were still miles to travel with God alone knew what at the other end of them. He was terrified for the boy. Now it was almost ten minutes to
seven and he had this whole song and dance to go through again. "Somebody is in trouble up there," he said very carefully. "The son of the caretaker." "Who? Torrance's boy? Now what kind of trouble could he be in?" "I don't know," Hallorann muttered. He felt sick with the time this was taking. He was speaking with a country man, and he knew that all country men feel a similar need to approach their business obliquely, to smell around its corners and sides before plunging into the middle of dealing. But there was no time, because now he was one scared nigger and if this went on much longer he just might decide to cut and run. "Look," he said. "Please. I need to go up there and I have to have a snowmobile to get there. I'll pay your price, but for God's sake let me get on with my business!" "All right," Durkin said, unperturbed. "If Howard sent you, that's good enough. You take this ArcticCat. I'll put five gallons of gas in the can. Tank's full. She'll get you up and back down, I guess." "Thank you," Hallorann said, not quite steadily. "I'll take twenty dollars. That includes the ethyl." Hallorann fumbled a twenty out of his wallet and handed it over. Durkin tucked it into one of his shirt pockets with hardly a look. "Guess maybe we better trade jackets, too," Durkin said, pulling off his parka. "That overcoat of yours ain't gonna be worth nothin tonight. You trade me back when you return the snowsled." "Oh, hey, I couldn't —" "Don't fuss with me," Durkin interrupted, still mildly. "I ain't sending you out to freeze. I only got to walk down two blocks and I'm at my own supper table. Give it over." Slightly dazed, Hallorann traded his overcoat for Durkin's fur-lined parka. Overhead the fluorescents buzzed faintly, reminding him of the lights in the Overlook's kitchen. "Torrance's boy," Durkin said, and shook his head. "Good-lookin little tyke, ain't he? He'n his dad was in here a lot before the snow really flew. Drivin the hotel truck, mostly. Looked to me like the two of em was just about as tight as they could get. That's one little boy that loves his daddy. Hope he's all right." "So do I." Hallorann zipped the parka and tied the hood. "Lemme help you push that out," Durkin said. They rolled the snowmobile across the oil-stained concrete and toward the garage bay. "You ever drove one of these before?" "No. " "Well, there's nothing to it. The instructions are pasted there on the dashboard, but all there really is, is stop and go. Your throttle's here, just like a motorcycle throttle. Brake on the other side. Lean with it on the turns. This baby will do seventy on hardpack, but on this powder you'll get no more than fifty and that's pushing it." Now they were in the service station's snow-filled front lot, and Durkin had raised his voice to make himself heard over the battering of the wind. "Stay on the road!" he shouted at Hallorann's ear. "Keep your eye on the guardrail posts
and the signs and you'll be all right, I guess. If you get off the road, you're going to be dead. Understand?" Hallorann nodded. "Wait a minute!" Durkin told him, and ran back into the garage bay. While he was gone, Hallorann turned the key in the ignition and pumped the throttle a little. The snowmobile coughed into brash, choppy life. Durkin came back with a red and black ski mask. "Put this on under your hood!" he shouted. Hallorann dragged it on. It was a tight fit, but it cut the last of the numbing wind off from his cheeks and forehead and chin. Durkin leaned close to make himself heard. "I guess you must know about things the same way Howie does sometimes," he said. "It don't matter, except that place has got a bad reputation around here. I'll give you a rifle if you want it." "I don't think it would do any good," Hallorann shouted back. "You're the boss. But if you get that boy, you bring him to Sixteen Peach Lane. The wife'll have some soup on." "Okay. Thanks for everything." "You watch out!" Durkin yelled. "Stay on the road!" Hallorann nodded and twisted the throttle slowly. The snowmobile purred forward, the headlamp cutting a clean cone of light through the thickly falling snow. He saw Durkin's upraised hand in the rearview mirror, and raised his own in return. Then he nudged the handlebars to the left and was traveling up Main Street, the snowmobile coursing smoothly through the white light thrown by the streetlamps. The speedometer stood at thirty miles an hour. It was ten past seven. At the Overlook, Wendy and Danny were sleeping and Jack Torrance was discussing matters of life and death with the previous caretaker. Five blocks up Main, the streetlamps ended. For half a mile there were small houses, all buttoned tightly up against the storm, and then only wind-howling darkness. In the black again with no light but the thin spear of the snowmobile's headlamp, terror closed in on him again, a childlike fear, dismal and disheartening. He had never felt so alone. For several minutes, as the few lights of Sidewinder dwindled away and disappeared in the rearview, the urge to turn around and go back was almost insurmountable. He reflected that for all of Durkin's concern for Jack Torrance's boy, he had not offered to take the other snowmobile and come with him. (That place has got a bad reputation around here.) Clenching his teeth, he turned the throttle higher and watched the needle on the speedometer climb past forty and settle at forty-five. He seemed to be going horribly fast and yet he was afraid it wasn't fast enough. At this speed it would take him almost an hour to get to the Overlook. But at a higher speed he might not get there at all. He kept his eyes glued to the passing guardrails and the dime-sized reflectors mounted on top of each one. Many of them were buried under drifts. Twice he saw curve signs dangerously late and felt the snowmobile riding up the drifts that masked the dropoff before turning back onto where the road was in the summertime. The odometer counted off the miles at a maddeningly slow clip — five, ten, finally fifteen. Even behind the knitted ski mask his face was beginning to
stiffen up and his legs were growing numb. (Guess I'd give a hundred bucks for a pair of ski pants.) As each mile turned over, his terror grew — as if the place had a poison atmosphere that thickened as you neared it. Had it ever been like this before? He had never really liked the Overlook, and there had been others who shared his feeling, but it had never been like this. He could feel the voice that had almost wrecked him outside of Sidewinder still trying to get in, to get past his defenses to the soft meat inside. If it had been strong twenty-five miles back, how much stronger would it be now? He couldn't keep it out entirely. Some of it was slipping through, flooding his brain with sinister subliminal images. More and more he got the image of a badly hurt woman in a bathroom, holding her hands up uselessly to ward off a blow, and he felt more and more that the woman must be -- (Jesus, watch out!) The embankment was looming up ahead of him like a freight train. Wool- gathering, he had missed a turn sign. He jerked the snowmobile's steering gear hard right and it swung around, tilting as it did so. From underneath came the harsh grating sound of the snowtread on rock. He thought the snowmobile was going to dump him, and it did totter on the knife-edge of balance before half- driving, half-skidding back down to the more or less level surface of the snow- buried road. Then the dropoff was ahead of him, the headlamp showing an abrupt end to the snowcover and darkness beyond that. He turned the snowmobile the other way, a pulse beating sickly in his throat. (Keep it on the road Dicky old chum.) He forced himself to turn the throttle up another notch. Now the speedometer needle was pegged just below fifty. The wind howled and roared. The headlamp probed the dark. An unknown length of time later, he came around a driftbanked curve and saw a glimmering flash of light ahead. Just a glimpse, and then it was blotted out by a rising fold of land. The glimpse was so brief he was persuading himself it had been wishful thinking when another turn brought it in view again, slightly closer, for another few seconds. There was no question of its reality this time; he had seen it from just this angle too many times before. It was the Overlook. There were lights on the first floor and lobby levels, it looked like. Some of his terror — the part that had to do with driving off the road or wrecking the snowmobile on an unseen curve — melted entirely away. The snowmobile swept surely into the first half of an S curve that he now remembered confidently foot for foot, and that was when the headlamp picked out the (oh dear Jesus god what is it) in the road ahead of him. Limned in stark blacks and whites, Hallorann first thought it was some hideously huge timberwolf that had been driven down from the high country by the storm. Then, as he closed on it, he recognized it and horror closed his throat. Not a wolf but a lion. A hedge lion. Its features were a mask of black shadow and powdered snow, its haunches wound tight to spring. And it did spring, snow billowing around its pistoning rear legs in a silent burst of crystal glitter. Hallorann screamed and twisted the handlebars hard right, ducking low at the
same time. Scratching, ripping pain scrawled itself across his face, his neck, his shoulders. The ski mask was torn open down the back. He was hurled from the snowmobile. He hit the snow, plowed through it, rolled over. He could feel it coming for him. In his nostrils there was a bitter smell of green leaves and holly. A huge hedge paw batted him in the small of the back and he flew ten feet through the air, splayed out like a rag doll. He saw the snowmobile, riderless, strike the embankment and rear up, its headlamp searching the sky. It fell over with a thump and stalled. Then the hedge lion was on him. There was a crackling, rustling sound. Something raked across the front of the parka, shredding it. It might have been stiff twigs, but Hallorann knew it was claws. "You're not there!" Hallorann screamed at the circling, snarling hedge lion. "You're not there at all!" He struggled to his feet and made it halfway to the snowmobile before the lion lunged, batting him across the head with a needle- tipped paw. Hallorann saw silent, exploding lights. "Not there," he said again, but it was a fading mutter. His knees unhinged and dropped him into the snow. He crawled for the snowmobile, the right side of his face a scarf of blood. The lion struck him again, rolling him onto his back like a turtle. It roared playfully. Hallorann struggled to reach the snowmobile. What he needed was there. And then the lion was on him again, ripping and clawing.
<< 52 >> WENDY AND JACK
Wendy risked another glance over her shoulder. Jack was on the sixth riser, clinging to the banister much as she was doing herself. He was still grinning, and dark blood oozed slowly through the grin and slipped down the line of his jaw. He bared his teeth at her. "I'm going to bash your brains in. Bash them right to fuck in." He struggled up another riser. Panic spurred her, and the ache in her side diminished a little. She pulled herself up as fast as she could regardless of the pain, yanking convulsively at the banister. She reached the top and threw a glance behind her. He seemed to be gaining strength rather than losing it. He was only four risers from the top, measuring the distance with the rogue mallet in his left hand as he pulled himself up with his right. "Right behind you," he panted through his bloody grin, as if reading her mind. "Right behind you now, bitch. With your medicine." She fled stumblingly down the main corridor, hands pressed to her side. The door to one of the rooms jerked open and a man with a green ghoulmask on
popped out. "Great party, isn't it?" He screamed into her face, and pulled the waxed string of a party-favor. There was an echoing bang and suddenly crepe streamers were drifting all around her. The man in the ghoulmask cackled and slammed back into his room. She fell forward onto the carpet, full-length. Her right side seemed to explode with pain, and she fought off the blackness of unconsciousness desperately. Dimly she could hear the elevator running again, and beneath her splayed fingers she could see that the carpet pattern appeared to move, swaying and twining sinuously. The mallet slammed down behind her and she threw herself forward, sobbing. Over her shoulder she saw Jack stumble forward, overbalance, and bring the mallet down just before he crashed to the carpet, expelling a bright splash of blood onto the nap. The mallet head struck her squarely between the shoulder blades and for a moment the agony was so great that she could only writhe, hands opening and clenching. Something inside her had snapped — she had heard it clearly, and for a few moments she was aware only in a muted, muffled way, as if she were merely observing these things through a cloudy wrapping of gauze. Then full consciousness came back, terror and pain with it. Jack was trying to get up so he could finish the job. Wendy tried to stand and found it was impossible. Electric bolts seemed to course up and down her back at the effort. She began to crawl along in a sidestroke motion. Jack was crawling after her, using the roque mallet as a crutch or a cane. She reached the comer and pulled herself around it, using her hands to yank at the angle of the wall. Her terror deepened — she would not have believed that possible, but it was. It was a hundred times worse not to be able to see him or know how close he was getting. She tore out fistfuls of the carpet napping pulling herself along, and she was halfway down this short hall before she noticed the bedroom door was standing wide open. (Danny! O Jesus) She forced herself to her knees and then clawed her way to her feet, fingers slipping over the silk wallpaper. Her nails pulled little strips of it loose. She ignored the pain and halfwalked, half-shambled through the doorway as Jack came around the far corner and began to lunge his way down toward the open door, leaning on the roque mallet. She caught the edge of the dresser, held herself up against it, and grabbed the doorframe. Jack shouted at her: "Don't you shut that door! Goddam you, don't you dare shut it!" She slammed it closed and shot the bolt. Her left hand pawed wildly at the junk on the dresser, knocking loose coins onto the floor where they rolled in every direction. Her hand seized the key ring just as the mallet whistled down against the door, making it tremble in its frame. She got the key into the lock on the second stab and twisted it to the right. At the sound of the tumblers falling, Jack screamed. The mallet came down against the door in a volley of booming blows that made her flinch and step back. How could he be doing that with a knife in his back? Where was he finding the strength? She wanted to shriek Why aren't you dead? at the locked door.
Instead she turned around. She and Danny would have to go into the attached bathroom and lock that door, too, in case Jack actually could break through the bedroom door. The thought of escaping down the dumb-waiter shaft crossed her mind in a wild burst, and then she rejected it. Danny was small enough to fit into it, but she would be unable to control the rope pull. He might go crashing all the way to the bottom. The bathroom it would have to be. And if Jack broke through into there — But she wouldn't allow herself to think of it. "Danny, honey, you'll have to wake up n — " But the bed was empty. When he had begun to sleep more soundly, she had thrown the blankets and one of the quilts over him. Now they were thrown back. "I'll get you!" Jack howled. "I'll get .both of you!" Every other word was punctuated with a blow from the roque hammer, yet Wendy ignored both. All of her attention was focused on that empty bed. "Come out here! Unlock this goddam door!" "Danny?" she whispered. Of course ... when Jack had attacked her. It had come through to him, as violent emotions always seemed to. Perhaps he'd even seen the whole thing in a nightmare. He was hiding. She fell clumsily to her knees, enduring another bolt of pain from her swollen and bleeding leg, and looked under the bed. Nothing there but dustballs and Jack's bedroom slippers. Jack screamed her name, and this time when he swung the mallet, a long splinter of wood jumped from the door and clattered off the hardwood planking. The next blow brought a sickening, splintering crack, the sound of dry kindling under a hatchet. The bloody mallet head, now splintered and gouged in its own right, bashed through the new hole in the door, was withdrawn, and came down again, sending wooden shrapnel flying across the room. Wendy pulled herself to her feet again using the foot of the bed, and hobbled across the room to the closet. Her broken ribs stabbed at her, making her groan. "Danny?" She brushed the hung garments aside frantically; some of them slipped their hangers and ballooned gracelessly to the floor. He was not in the closet. She hobbled toward the bathroom and as she reached the door she glanced back over her shoulder. The mallet crashed through again, widening the hole, and then a hand appeared, groping for the bolt. She saw with horror that she had left Jack's key ring dangling from the lock. The hand yanked the bolt back, and as it did so it struck the bunched keys. They jingled merrily. The hand clutched them victoriously. With a sob, she pushed her way into the bathroom and slammed the door just as the bedroom door burst open and Jack charged through, bellowing. Wendy ran the bolt and twisted the spring lock, looking around desperately. The bathroom was empty. Danny wasn't here, either. And as she caught sight of her own bloodsmeared, horrified face in the medicine cabinet mirror, she was glad. She had never believed that children should be witness to the little quarrels of their parents. And perhaps the thing that was now raving through the bedroom, overturning things and smashing them, would finally collapse before it
could go after her son. Perhaps, she thought, it might be possible for her to inflict even more damage on it ... kill it, perhaps. Her eyes skated quickly over the bathroom's machine-produced porcelain surfaces, looking for anything that might serve as a weapon. There was a bar of soap, but even wrapped in a towel she didn't think it would be lethal enough. Everything else was bolted down. God, was there nothing she could do? Beyond the door, the animal sounds of destruction went on and on, accompanied by thick shouts that they would "take their medicine" and "pay for what they'd done to him." He would "show them who's boss," They were "worthless puppies," the both of them. There was a thump as her record player was overturned, a hollow crash as the secondhand TV's picture tube was smashed, the tinkle of windowglass followed by a cold draft under the bathroom door. A dull thud as the mattresses were ripped from the twin beds where they had slept together, hip to hip. Boomings as Jack struck the walls indiscriminately with the mallet. There was nothing of the real Jack in that howling, maundering, petulant voice, though. It alternately whined in tones of selfpity and rose in lurid screams; it reminded her chillingly of the screams that sometimes rose in the geriatrics ward of the hospital where she had worked summers as a high school kid. Senile dementia. Jack wasn't out there anymore. She was hearing the lunatic, raving voice of the Overlook itself. The mallet smashed into the bathroom door, knocking out a huge chunk of the thin paneling. Half of a crazed and working face stared in at her. The mouth and cheeks and throat were lathered in blood, the single eye she could see was tiny and piggish and glittering. "Nowhere left to run, you cunt," it panted at her through its grin. The mallet descended again, knocking wood splinters into the tub and against the reflecting surface of the medicine cabinet (!! The medicine cabinet !!) A desperate whining noise began to escape her as she whirled, pain temporarily forgotten, and threw the mirror door of the cabinet back. She began to paw through its contents. Behind her that hoarse voice bellowed: "Here I come now! Here I come now, you pig!" It was demolishing the door in a machinelike frenzy. Bottles and jars fell before her madly searching fingers — cough syrup, Vaseline, Clairol Herbal Essence shampoo, hydrogen peroxide, benzocaine — they fell into the sink and shattered. Her hand closed over the dispenser of double-edged razor blades just as she heard the hand again, fumbling for the bolt and the spring lock. She slipped one of the razor blades out, fumbling at it, her breath coming in harsh little gasps. She had cut the ball of her thumb. She whirled around and slashed at the hand, which had turned the lock and was now fumbling for the bolt. Jack screamed. The hand was jerked back. Panting, holding the razor blade between her thumb and index finger, she waited for him to try again. He did, and she slashed. He screamed again, trying to grab her hand, and she slashed at him again. The razor blade turned in her hand, cutting her again, and dropped to the tile floor by the toilet. Wendy slipped another blade out of the dispenser and waited.
Movement in the other room — (?? going away ??) And a sound coming through the bedroom window. A motor. A high, insectile buzzing sound. A roar of anger from Jack and then — yes, yes, she was sure of it — he was leaving the caretaker's apartment, plowing through the wreckage and out into the hall. (?? Someone coming a ranger Dick Hallorann ??) "Oh God," she muttered brokenly through a mouth that seemed filled with broken sticks and old sawdust. "Oh God, oh please." She had to leave now, had to go find her son so they could face the rest of this nightmare side by side. She reached out and fumbled at the bolt. Her arm seemed to stretch for miles. At last she got it to come free. She pushed the door open, staggered out, and was suddenly overcome by the horrible certainty that Jack had only pretended to leave, that he was lying in wait for her: Wendy looked around. The room was empty, the living room too. Jumbled, broken stuff everywhere. The closet? Empty. Then the soft shades of gray began to wash over her and she fell down on the mattress Jack had ripped from the bed, semiconscious.
<< 53 >> HALLORANN LAID LOW
Hallorann reached the overturned snowmobile just as, a mile and a half away, Wendy was pulling herself around the corner and into the short hallway leading to the caretaker's apartment. It wasn't the snowmobile he wanted but the gascan held onto the back by a pair of elastic straps. His hands, still clad in Howard Cottrell's blue mittens, seized the top strap and pulled it free as the hedge lion roared behind him — a sound that seemed to be more in his head than outside of it. A hard, brambly slap to his left leg, making the knee sing with pain as it was driven in a way the joint had never been expected to bend. A groan escaped Hallorann's clenched teeth. It would come for the kill any time now, tired of playing with him. He fumbled for the second strap. Sticky blood ran in his eyes. (Roar! Slap!) That one raked across his buttocks, almost tumbling him over and away from the snowmobile again. He held on — no exaggeration — for dear life. Then he had freed the second strap. He clutched the gascan to him as the lion struck again, rolling him over on his back. He saw it again, only a shadow in the darkness and falling snow, as nightmarish as a moving gargoyle. Hallorann twisted at the can's cap as the moving shadow stalked him, kicking up snowpuffs.
As it moved in again the cap spun free, releasing the pungent smell of the gasoline. Hallorann gained his knees and as it came at him, lowslung and incredibly quick, he splashed it with the gas. There was a hissing, spitting sound and it drew back. "Gas!" Hallorann cried, his voice shrill and breaking. "Gonna burn you, baby! Dig on it awhile!" The lion came at him again, still spitting angrily. Hallorann splashed it again but this time the lion didn't give. It charged ahead. Hallorann sensed rather than saw its head angling at his face and he threw himself backward, partially avoiding it. Yet the lion still hit his upper rib cage a glancing blow, and a flare of pain struck there. Gas gurgled out of the can, which he still held, and doused his right hand and arm, cold as death. Now he lay on his back in a snow angel, to the right of the snowmobile by about ten paces. The hissing lion was a bulking presence to his left, closing in again. Hallorann thought he could see its tail twitching. He yanked Cottrell's mitten off his right hand, tasting sodden wool and gasoline. He ripped up the hem of the parka and jammed his hand into his pants pocket. Down in there, along with his keys and his change, was a very battered old Zippo lighter. He had bought it in Germany in 1954. Once the hinge had broken and he had returned it to the Zippo factory and they had repaired it without charge, just as advertised. A nightmare flood of thoughts flooding through his mind in a split second. (Dear Zippo my lighter was swallowed by a crocodile dropped from an airplane lost in the Pacific trench saved me from a Kraut bullet in the Battle of the Bulge dear Zippo if this fucker doesn't go that lion is going to rip my head off) The lighter was out. He clicked the hood back. The lion, rushing at him, a growl like ripping cloth, his finger flicking the striker wheel, spark, flame, (my hand) his gasoline-soaked hand suddenly ablaze, the flames running up the sleeve of the parka, no pain, no pain yet, the lion shying from the torch suddenly blazing in front of it, a hideous flickering hedge sculpture with eyes and a mouth, shying away, too late. Wincing at the pain, Hallorann drove his blazing arm into its stiff and scratchy side. In an instant the whole creature was in flames, a prancing, writhing pyre on the snow. It bellowed in rage and pain, seeming to chase its flaming tail as it zigzagged away from Hallorann. He thrust his own arm deep into the snow, killing the flames, unable to take his eyes from the hedge lion's death agonies for a moment. Then, gasping, he got to his feet. The arm of Durkin's parka was sooty but unburned, and that also described his hand. Thirty yards downhill from where he stood, the hedge lion had turned into a fireball. Sparks flew at the sky and were viciously snatched away by the wind. For a moment its ribs and skull were etched in orange flame and then it seemed to collapse, disintegrate, and fall into separate burning piles. (Never mind it. Get moving.)
He picked up the gascan and struggled over to the snowmobile. His consciousness seemed to be flickering in and out, offering him cuttings and snippets of home movies but never the whole picture. In one of these he was aware of yanking the snowmobile back onto its tread and then sitting on it, out of breath and incapable of moving for a few moments. In another, he was reattaching the gascan, which was still half-full. His head was thumping horribly from the gasfumes (and in reaction to his battle with the hedge lion, he supposed), and he saw by the steaming hole in the snow beside him that he had vomited, but he was unable to remember when. The snowmobile, the engine still warm, fired immediately. He twisted the throttle unevenly and started forward with a series of neck-snapping jerks that made his head ache even more fiercely. At first the snowmobile wove drunkenly from side to side, but by half-standing to get his face above the windscreen and into the sharp, needling blast of the wind, he drove some of the stupor out of himself. He opened the throttle wider. (Where are the rest of the hedge animals?) He didn't know, but at least he wouldn't be caught unaware again. The Overlook loomed in front of him, the lighted first-floor windows throwing long yellow rectangles onto the snow. The gate at the foot of the drive was locked and he dismounted after a wary look around, praying he hadn't lost his keys when he pulled his lighter out of his pocket ... no, they were there. He picked through them in the bright light thrown by the snowmobile headlamp. He found the right one and unsnapped the padlock, letting it drop into the snow. At first he didn't think he was going to be able to move the gate anyway; he pawed frantically at the snow surrounding it, disregarding the throbbing agony in his head and the fear that one of the other lions might be creeping up behind him. He managed to pull it a foot and a half away from the gatepost, squeezed into the gap, and pushed. He got it to move another two feet, enough room for the snowmobile, and threaded it through. He became aware of movement ahead of him in the dark. The hedge animals, all of them, were clustered at the base of the Overlook's steps, guarding the way in, the way out. The lions prowled. The dog stood with its front paws on the first step. Hallorann opened the throttle wide and the snowmobile leaped forward, puffing snow up behind it. In the caretaker's apartment, Jack Torrance's head jerked around at the high, wasplike buzz of the approaching engine, and suddenly began to move laboriously toward the hallway again. The bitch wasn't important now. The bitch could wait. Now it was this dirty nigger's turn. This dirty, interfering nigger with his nose in where it didn't belong. First him and then his son. He would show them. He would show them that ... that he ... that he was of managerial timber! Outside, the snowmobile rocketed along faster and faster. The hotel seemed to surge toward it. Snow flew in Hallorann's face. The headlamp's oncoming glare spotlighted the hedge shepherd's face, its blank and socketless eyes. Then it shrank away, leaving an opening. Hallorann yanked at the snowmobile's steering gear with all his remaining strength, and it kicked around in a sharp semicircle, throwing up clouds of snow, threatening to tip over. The rear end struck the foot of the porch steps and rebounded. Hallorann was off in a flash
and running up the steps. He stumbled, fell, picked himself up. The dog was growling — again in his head — close behind him. Something ripped at the shoulder of the parka and then he was on the porch, standing in the narrow corridor Jack had shoveled through the snow, and safe. They were too big to fit in here. He reached the big double doors which gave on the lobby and dug for his keys again. While he was getting them he tried the knob and it turned freely. He pushed his way in. "Danny!" he cried hoarsely. "Danny, where are you?" Silence came back. His eyes traveled across the lobby to the foot of the wide stairs and a harsh gasp escaped him. The rug was splashed and matted with blood. There was a scrap of pink terrycloth robe. The trail of blood led up the stairs. The banister was also splashed with it. "Oh Jesus," he muttered, and raised his voice again. "Danny! DANNY!" The hotel's silence seemed to mock him with echoes which were almost there, sly and oblique. (Danny? Who's Danny? Anybody here know a Danny? Danny, Danny, who's got the Danny? Anybody for a game of spin the Danny? Pin the tail on the Danny? Get out of here, black boy. No one here knows Danny from Adam.) Jesus, had he come through everything just to be too late? Had it been done? He ran up the stairs two at a time and stood at the top of the first floor. The blood led down toward the caretaker's apartment. Horror crept softly into his veins and into his brain as he began to walk toward the short hall. The hedge animals had been bad, but this was worse. In his heart he was already sure of what he was going to find when he got down there. He was in no hurry to see it. Jack had been hiding in the elevator when Hallorann came up the stairs. Now he crept up behind the figure in the snowcoated parka, a blood- and gore-streaked phantom with a smile upon its face. The roque mallet was lifted as high as the ugly, ripping pain in his back (?? did the bitch stick me can't remember ??) would allow. "Black boy," he whispered. "I'll teach you to go sticking your nose in other people's business." Hallorann heard the whisper and began to turn, to duck, and the roque mallet whistled down. The hood of the parka matted the blow, but not enough. A rocket exploded in his head, leaving a contrail of stars ... and then nothing. He staggered against the silk wallpaper and Jack hit him again, the roque mallet slicing sideways this time, shattering Hallorann's cheekbone and most of the teeth on the left side of his jaw. He went down limply. "Now," Jack whispered. "Now, by Christ" Where was Danny? He had business with his trespassing son. Three minutes later the elevator door banged open on the shadowed third floor. Jack Torrance was in it alone. The car had stopped only halfway into the doorway and he had to boost himself up onto the hall floor, wriggling painfully like a crippled thing. He dragged the splintered roque mallet after him. Outside the eaves, the wind howled and roared. Jack's eyes rolled wildly in their sockets.
There was blood and confetti in his hair. His son was up here, up here somewhere. He could feel it. Left to his own devices, he might do anything: scribble on the expensive silk wallpaper with his crayons, deface the furnishings, break the windows. He was a liar and a cheat and he would have to be chastised ... harshly. Jack Torrance struggled to his feet. "Danny?" he called. "Danny, come here a minute, will you? You've done something wrong and I want you to come and take your medicine like a man. Danny? Danny!"
<< 54 >> TONY
(Danny ...) (Dannneee ...) Darkness and hallways. He was wandering through darkness and hallways that were like those which lay within the body of the hotel but were somehow different. The silkpapered walls stretched up and up, and even when he craned his neck, Danny could not see the ceiling. It was lost in dimness. All the doors were locked, and they also rose up to dimness. Below the peepholes (in these giant doors they were the size of gunsights), tiny skulls and crossbones had been bolted to each door instead of room numbers. And somewhere, Tony was calling him. (Dannneee ...) There was a pounding noise, one he knew well, and hoarse shouts, faint with distance. He could not make out word for word, but he knew the text well enough by now. He had heard it before, in dreams and awake. He paused, a little boy not yet three years out of diapers, and tried to decide where he was, where he might be. There was fear, but it was a fear he could live with. He had been afraid every day for two months now, to a degree that ranged from dull disquiet to outright, mind-bending terror. This he could live with. But he wanted to know why Tony had come, why he was making the sound of his name in this hall that was neither a part of real things nor of the dreamland where Tony sometimes showed him things. Why, where — "Danny." Far down the giant hallway, almost as tiny as Danny himself, was a dark figure. Tony. "Where am I?" he called softly to Tony. "Sleeping," Tony said. "Sleeping in your mommy and daddy's bedroom." There was sadness in Tony's voice. "Danny," Tony said. "Your mother is going to be badly hurt. Perhaps killed.
Mr. Hallorann, too." "No!" He cried it out in a distant grief, a terror that seemed damped by these dreamy, dreary surroundings. Nonetheless, death images came to him: dead frog plastered to the turnpike like a grisly stamp; Daddy's broken watch lying on top of a box of junk to be thrown out; gravestones with a dead person under every one; dead jay by the telephone pole; the cold junk Mommy scraped off the plates and down the dark maw of the garbage disposal. Yet he could not equate these simple symbols with the shifting complex reality of his mother; she satisfied his childish definition of eternity. She had been when he was not. She would continue to be when he was not again. He could accept the possibility of his own death, he had dealt with that since the encounter in Room 217. But not hers. Not Daddy's. Not ever. He began to struggle, and the darkness and the hallway began to waver. Tony's form became chimerical, indistinct. "Don't!" Tony called. "Don't, Danny, don't do that!" "She's not going to be dead! She's not!" "Then you have to help her. Danny ... you're in a place deep down in your own mind. The place where I am. I'm a part of you, Danny." "You're Tony. You're not me. I want my mommy * . . I want my mommy... " "I didn't bring you here, Danny. You brought yourself. Because you knew." "No — " "You've always known," Tony continued, and he began to walk closer. For the first time, Tony began to walk closer. "You're deep down in yourself in a place where nothing comes through. We're alone here for a little while, Danny. This is an Overlook where no one can ever come. No clocks work here. None of the keys fit them and they can never be wound up. The doors have never been opened and no one has ever stayed in the rooms. But you can't stay long. Because it's coming." "It ..." Danny whispered fearfully, and as he did so the irregular pounding noise seemed to grow closer, louder. His terror, cool and distant a moment ago, became a more immediate thing. Now the words could be made out. Hoarse, huckstering; they were uttered in a coarse imitation of his father's voice, but it wasn't Daddy. He knew that now. He knew (You brought yourself. Because you knew.) "Oh Tony, is it my daddy?" Danny screamed. "Is it my daddy that's coming to get me?" Tony didn't answer. But Danny didn't need an answer. He knew. A long and nightmarish masquerade party went on here, and had gone on for years. Little by little a force had accrued, as secret and silent as interest in a bank account. Force, presence, shape, they were all only words and none of them mattered. It wore many masks, but it was all one. Now, somewhere, it was coming for him. It was hiding behind Daddy's face, it was imitating Daddy's voice, it was wearing Daddy's clothes. But it was not his daddy. It was not his daddy.
"I've got to help them!" he cried. And now Tony stood directly in front of him, and looking at Tony was like looking into a magic mirror and seeing himself in ten years, the eyes widely spaced and very dark, the chin firm, the mouth handsomely molded. The hair was light blond like his mother's, and yet the stamp on his features was that of his father, as if Tony — as if the Daniel Anthony Torrance that would someday be — was a halfling caught between father and son, a ghost of both, a fusion. "You have to try to help," Tony said. "But your father... he's with the hotel now, Danny. It's where he wants to be. It wants you too, because it's very greedy." Tony walked past him, into the shadows, "Wait!" Danny cried. "What can I — " "He's close now," Tony said, still walking away. "You'll have to run ... hide ... keep away from him. Keep away." "Tony, I can'tl" "But you've already started," Tony said. "You will remember what your father forgot." He was gone. And from somewhere near his father's voice came, coldly wheedling: "Danny? You can come out, doc. Just a little spanking, that's all. Take it like a man and it will be all over. We don't need her, doc. Just you and me, right? When we get this little ... spanking ... behind us, it will be just you and me." Danny ran. Behind him, the thing's temper broke through the shambling charade of normality. "Come here, you little shit! Right now! " Down a long hall, panting and gasping. Around a corner. Up a flight of stairs. And as he went, the walls that had been so high and remote began to come down; the rug which had only been a blur beneath his feet took on the familiar black and blue pattern, sinuously woven together; the doors became numbered again and behind them the parties that were all one went on and on, populated by generations of guests. The air seemed to be shimmering around him, the blows of the mallet against the walls echoing and re-echoing. He seemed to be bursting through some thin placental womb from sleep to
* * *
the rug outside the Presidential Suite on the third floor; lying near him in a bloody heap were the bodies of two men dressed in suits and narrow ties. They had been taken out by shotgun blasts and now they began to stir in front of him and get up. He drew in breath to scream but didn't. (!! FALSE FACES !! NOT REAL !!) They faded before his gaze like old photographs and were gone. But below him, the faint sound of the mallet against the walls went on and on, drifting up through the elevator shaft and the stairwell. The controlling force of the Overlook, in the shape of his father, blundering around on the first floor.
A door opened with a thin screeing sound behind him. A decayed woman in a rotten silk gown pranced out, her yellowed and splitting fingers dressed with verdigris-caked rings. Heavy-bodied wasps crawled sluggishly over her face. "Come in," she whispered to him, grinning with black lips. "Come in and we will daance the taaaango ..." "False face!" he hissed. "Not real!" She drew back from him in alarm, and in the act of drawing back she faded and was gone. "Where are you?" it screamed, but the voice was still only in his head. He could still hear the thing that was wearing Jack's face down on the first floor ... and something else. The high, whining sound of an approaching motor. Danny's breath stopped in his throat with a little gasp. Was it just another face of the hotel, another illusion? Or was it Dick? He wanted — wanted desperately — to believe it was Dick, but he didn't dare take the chance. He retreated down the main corridor, and then took one of the offshoots, his feet whispering on the nap of the carpet. Locked doors frowned down at him as they had done in the dreams, the visions, only now he was in the world of real things, where the game was played for keeps. He turned to the right and came to a halt, his heart thudding heavily in his chest. Heat was blowing around his ankles. From the registers, of course. This must have been Daddy's day to heat the west wing and (You will remember what your father forgot.) What was it? He almost knew. Something that might save him and Mommy? But Tony had said he would have to do it himself. What was it? He sank down against the wall, trying desperately to think. It was so hard ... the hotel kept trying to get into his head ... the image of that dark and slumped form swinging the mallet from side to side, gouging the wallpaper ... sending out puffs of plaster dust. "Help me," he muttered. "Tony, help me." And suddenly he became aware that the hotel had grown deathly silent. The whining sound of the motor had stopped (must not have been real) and the sounds of the party had stopped and there was only the wind, howling and whooping endlessly. The elevator whirred into sudden life. It was coming up. And Danny knew who — what — was in it. He bolted to his feet, eyes staring wildly. Panic clutched around his heart. Why had Tony sent him to the third floor? He was trapped up here. All the doors were locked. The attic! There was an attic, he knew. He had come up here with daddy the day he had salted the rattraps around up there. He hadn't allowed Danny to come up with him because of the rats. He was afraid Danny might be bitten. But the trapdoor which led to the attic was set into the ceiling of the last short corridor in this wing. There was a pole leaning against the wall. Daddy had pushed the trapdoor open with the pole, there had been a ratcheting whir of counterweights as the
door went up and a ladder had swung down. If he could get up there and pull the ladder after him ... Somewhere in the maze of corridors behind him, the elevator came to a stop. There was a metallic, rattling crash as the gate was thrown back. And then a voice — not in his head now but terribly real — called out: "Danny? Danny, come here a minute, will you? You've done something wrong and I want you to come and take your medicine like a man. Danny? Danny!" Obedience was so strongly ingrained in him that he actually took two automatic steps toward the sound of that voice before stopping. His hands curled into fists at his sides. (Not real! False face! I know what you are! Take off your mask!) "Danny!" it roared. "Come here, you pup! Come here and take it like a man!" A loud, hollow boom as the mallet struck the wall. When the voice roared out his name again it had changed location. It had come closer. In the world of real things, the hunt was beginning. Danny ran. Feet silent on the heavy carpet, he ran past the closed doors, past the silk figured wallpaper, past the fire extinguisher bolted to the corner of the wall. He hesitated, and then plunged down the final corridor. Nothing at the end but a bolted door, and nowhere left to run. But the pole was still there, still leaning against the wall where Daddy had left it. Danny snatched it up. He craned his neck to stare up at the trapdoor. There was a hook on the end of the pole and you had to catch it on a ring set into the trapdoor. You bad to -- There was a brand-new Yale padlock dangling from the trapdoor. The lock Jack Torrance had clipped around the hasp after laying his traps, just in case his son should take the notion into his head to go exploring up there someday. Locked. Terror swept him. Behind him it was coming, blundering and staggering past the Presidential Suite, the mallet whistling viciously through the air. Danny backed up against the last closed door and waited for it.
<< 55 >> THAT WHICH WASFORGOTTEN
Wendy came to a little at a time, the grayness draining away, pain replacing it: her back, her leg, her side ... she didn't think she would be able to move. Even her fingers hurt, and at first she didn't know why. (The razor blade, that's why.) Her blond hair, now dank and matted, hung in her eyes. She brushed it away and
her ribs stabbed inside, making her groan. Now she saw a field of blue and white mattress, spotted with blood. Her blood, or maybe Jack's. Either way it was still fresh. She hadn't been out long. And that was important because — (?Why?) Because -- It was the insectile, buzzing sound of the motor that she remembered first. For a moment she fixed stupidly on the memory, and then in a single vertiginous and nauseating swoop, her mind seemed to pan back, showing her everything at once. Hallorann. It must have been Hallorann. Why else would Jack have left so suddenly, without finishing it ... without finishing her? Because he was no longer at leisure. He had to find Danny quickly and ... and do it before Hallorann could put a stop to it. Or had it happened already? She could hear the whine of the elevator rising up the shaft. (No God please no the blood the blood's still fresh don't let it have happened already) Somehow she was able to find her feet and stagger through the bedroom and across the ruins of the living room to the shattered front door. She pushed it open and made it out into the hall. "Danny!" she cried, wincing at the pain in her chest. "Mr. Hallorann! Is anybody there? Anybody?" The elevator had been running again and now it came to a stop. She heard the metallic crash of the gate being thrown back and then thought she heard a speaking voice. It might have been her imagination. The wind was too loud to really be able to tell. Leaning against the wall, she made her way up to the corner of the short hallway. She was about to turn the corner when the scream froze her, floating down the stairwell and the elevator shaft: "Danny! Come here, you pup! Come here and take it like a man!" Jack. On the second or third floor. Looking for Danny. She got around the corner, stumbled, almost fell. Her breath caught in her throat. Something (someone?) huddled against the wall about a quarter of the way down from the stairwell. She began to hurry faster, wincing every time her weight came down on her hurt leg. It was a man, she saw, and as she drew closer, she understood the meaning of that buzzing motor. It was Mr. Hallorann. He had come after all. She eased to her knees beside him, offering up an incoherent prayer that he was not dead. His nose was bleeding, and a terrible gout of blood had spilled out of his mouth. The side of his face was a puffed purple bruise. But he was breathing, thank God for that. It was coming in long, harsh draws that shook his whole frame. Looking at him more closely, Wendy's eyes widened. One arm of the parka he was wearing was blackened and singed. One side of it had been ripped open. There was blood in his hair and a shallow but ugly scratch down the back of his neck. (My God, what's happened to him?)
"Danny!" the hoarse, petulant voice roared from above them. "Get out here, goddammit!" There was no time to wonder about it now. She began to shake him, her face twisting at the flare of agony in her ribs. Her side felt hot and massive and swollen. (What if they're poking my lung whenever I move?) There was no help for that, either. If Jack found Danny, he would kill him, beat him to death with that mallet as he had tried to do to her. So she shook Hallorann, and then began to slap the unbruised side of his face lightly. "Wake up," she said. "Mr. Hallorann, you've got to wake up. Please ... please ..." From overhead, the restless booming sounds of the mallet as Jack Torrance looked for his son.
* * *
Danny stood with his back against the door, looking at the right angle where the hallways joined. The steady, irregular booming sound of the mallet against the walls grew louder. The thing that was after him screamed and howled and cursed. Dream and reality had joined together without a seam. It came around the corner. In a way, what Danny felt was relief. It was not his father. The mask of face and body had been ripped and shredded and made into a bad joke. It was not his daddy, not this Saturday Night Shock Show horror with its rolling eyes and hunched and hulking shoulders and blood-drenched shirt. It was not his daddy. "Now, by God," it breathed. It wiped its lips with a shaking hand. "Now you'll find out who is the boss around here. You'll see. It's not you they want. It's
It slashed out with the scarred hammer, its double head now shapeless and splintered with countless impacts. It struck the wall, cutting a circle in the silk paper. Plaster dust puffed out. It began to grin. "Let's see you pull any of your fancy tricks now," it muttered. "I wasn't born yesterday, you know. Didn't just fall off the hay truck, by God. I'm going to do my fatherly duty by you, boy." Danny said: "You're not my daddy." It stopped. For a moment it actually looked uncertain, as if not sure who or what it was. Then it began to walk again. The hammer whistled out, struck a door panel and made it boom hollowly. "You're a liar," it said. "Who else would I be? I have the two birthmarks, I have the cupped navel, even the pecker, my boy. Ask your mother." "You're a mask," Danny said. "Just a false face. The only reason the hotel needs to use you is that you aren't as dead as the others. But when it's done with you, you won't be anything at all. You don't scare me." "I'll scare you!" it howled. The mallet whistled fiercely down, smashing into the rug between Danny's feet. Danny didn't flinch. "You lied about me! You connived with her! You plotted against me! And you cheated! You copied that final exam!" The eyes glared out at him from beneath the furred brows. There was
an expression of lunatic cunning in them. "I'll find it, too. It's down in the basement somewhere. I'll find it. They promised me I could look all I want." It raised the mallet again. "Yes, they promise," Danny said, "but they lie." The mallet hesitated at the top of its swing.
* * *
Hallorann had begun to come around, but Wendy had stopped patting his cheeks. A moment ago the words You cheated! You copied that final exam! had floated down through the elevator shaft, dim, barely audible over the wind. From somewhere deep in the west wing. She was nearly convinced they were on the third floor and that Jack — whatever had taken possession of Jack — had found Danny. There was nothing she or Hallorann could do now. "Oh doc," she murmured. Tears blurred her eyes. "Son of a bitch broke my jaw," Hallorann muttered thickly, "and my head ..." He worked to sit up. His right eye was purpling rapidly and swelling shut. Still, he saw Wendy. "Missus Torrance — " "Shhhh," she said. "Where is the boy, Missus Torrance?" "On the third floor," she said. "With his father."
* * *
"They lie," Danny said again. Something had gone through his mind, flashing like a meteor, too quick, too bright to catch and hold. Only the tail of the thought remained. (it's down in the basement somewhere) (you will remember what your father forgot) "You ... you shouldn't speak that way to your father," it said hoarsely. The mallet trembled, came down. "You'll only make things worse for yourself. Your... your punishment. Worse." It staggered drunkenly and stared at him with maudlin selfpity that began to turn to hate. The mallet began to rise again. "You're not my daddy," Danny told it again. "And if there's a little bit of my daddy left inside you, he knows they lie here. Everything is a lie and a cheat. Like the loaded dice my daddy got for my Christmas stocking last Christmas, like the presents they put in the store windows and my daddy says there's nothing in them, no presents, they're just empty boxes. Just for show, my daddy says. You're it, not my daddy. You're the hotel. And when you get what you want, you won't give my daddy anything because you're selfish. And my daddy knows that. You had to make him drink the Bad Stuff. That's the only way you could get him, you lying false face." "Liar! Liar!" The words came in a thin shriek. The mallet wavered wildly in the air. "Go on and hit me. But you'll never get what you want from me." The face in front of him changed. It was hard to say how; there was no melting or merging of the features. The body trembled slightly, and then the bloody
hands opened like broken claws. The mallet fell from them and thumped to the rug. That was all. But suddenly his daddy was there, looking at him in mortal agony, and a sorrow so great that Danny's heart flamed within his chest. The mouth drew down in a quivering bow. "Doc," Jack Torrance said. "Run away. Quick. And remember how much I love you." "No," Danny said. "Oh Danny, for God's sake — " "No," Danny said. He took one of his father's bloody hands and kissed it. "It's almost over."
* * *
Hallorann got to his feet by propping his back against the wall and pushing himself up. He and Wendy stared at each other like nightmare survivors from a bombed hospital. "We got to get up there," he said. "We have to help him." Her haunted eyes stared into his from her chalk-pale face. "It's too late," Wendy said. "Now he can only help himself." A minute passed, then two. Three. And they heard it above them, screaming, not in anger or triumph now, but in mortal terror. "Dear God," Hallorann whispered. "What's happening?" "I don't know," she said. "Has it killed him?" "I don't know." The elevator clashed into life and began to descend with the screaming, raving thing penned up inside.
* * *
Danny stood without moving. There was no place he could run where the Overlook was not. He recognized it suddenly, fully, painlessly. For the first time in his life he had an adult thought, an adult feeling, the essence of his experience in this bad place — a sorrowful distillation: (Mommy and Daddy can't help me and I'm alone.) "Go away," he said to the bloody stranger in front of him. "Go on. Get out of here." It bent over, exposing the knife handle in its back. Its hands closed around the mallet again, but instead of aiming at Danny, it reversed the handle, aiming the hard side of the roque mallet at its own face. Understanding rushed through Danny. Then the mallet began to rise and descend, destroying the last of Jack Torrance's image. The thing in the hall danced an eerie, shuffling polka, the beat counterpointed by the hideous sound of the mallet head striking again and again. Blood splattered across the wallpaper. Shards of bone leaped into the air like broken piano keys. It was impossible to say just how long it went on. But when it turned its attention back to Danny, his father was gone forever. What remained of the face became a strange, shifting composite, many faces mixed
imperfectly into one. Danny saw the woman in 217; the dogman; the hungry boy- thing that had been in the concrete ring. "Masks off, then," it whispered. "No more interruptions." The mallet rose for the final time. A ticking sound filled Danny's ears. "Anything else to say?" it inquired. "Are you sure you wouldn't like to run? A game of tag, perhaps? All we have is time, you know. An eternity of time. Or shall we end it? Might as well. After all, we're missing the party." It grinned with broken-toothed greed. And it came to him. What his father had forgotten. Sudden triumph filled his face; the thing saw it and hesitated, puzzled. "The boiler!" Danny screamed. "It hasn't been dumped since this morning! It's going up! It's going to explode!" An expression of grotesque terror and dawning realization swept across the broken features of the thing in front of him. The mallet dropped from its fisted hands and bounced harmlessly on the black and blue rug. "The boiler!" it cried. "Oh no! That can't be allowed! Certainly not! No! You goddamned little pup! Certainly not! Oh, oh, oh — " "It is!" Danny cried back at it fiercely. He began to shuffle and shake his fists at the ruined thing before him. "Any minute now! I know it! The boiler, Daddy forgot the boiler! And you forgot it, too!" "No, oh no, it mustn't, it can't, you dirty little boy, I'll make you take your medicine, I'll make you take every drop, oh no, oh no — " It suddenly turned tail and began to shamble away. For a moment its shadow bobbed on the wall, waxing and waning. It trailed cries behind itself like wornout party streamers. Moments later the elevator crashed into life. Suddenly the shining was on him (mommy mr. hallorann dick to my friends together alive they're alive got to get out it's going to blow going to blow sky-high) like a fierce and glaring sunrise and he ran. One foot kicked the bloody, misshapen roque mallet aside. He didn't notice. Crying, he ran for the stairs. They bad to get out.
<< 57 >> THE EXPLOSION
Hallorann could never be sure of the progression of things after that. He remembered that the elevator had gone down and past them without stopping, and something had been inside. But he made no attempt to try to see in through the small diamond-shaped window, because what was in there did not sound human. A
moment later there were running footsteps on the stairs. Wendy Torrance at first shrank back against him and then began to stumble down the main corridor to the stairs as fast as she could. "Danny! Danny! Oh, thank God! Thank God!" She swept him into a hug, groaning with joy as well as her pain. (Danny.) Danny looked at him from his mother's arms, and Hallorann saw how the boy had changed. His face was pale and pinched, his eyes dark and fathomless. He looked as if he had lost weight. Looking at the two of them together, Hallorann thought it was the mother who looked younger, in spite of the terrible beating she had taken. (Dick — we have to go — run — the place — it's going to) Picture of the Overlook, flames leaping out of its roof. Bricks raining down on the snow. Clang of firebells ... not that any fire truck would be able to get up here much before the end of March. Most of all what came through in Danny's thought was a sense of urgent immediacy, a feeling that it was going to happen at any time. "All right," Hallorann said. He began to move toward the two of them and at first it was like swimming through deep water. His sense of balance was screwed, and the eye on the right side of his face didn't want to focus. His jaw was sending giant throbbing bursts of pain up to his temple and down his neck, and his cheek felt as large as a cabbage. But the boy's urgency had gotten him going, and it got a little easier. "All right?" Wendy asked. She looked from Hallorann to her son and back to Hallorann. "What do you mean, all right?" "We have to go," Hallorann said. "I'm not dressed ... my clothes..." Danny darted out of her arms then and raced down the corridor. She looked after him, and as he vanished around the corner, back at Hallorann. "What if he comes back?" "Your husband?" "He's not Jack," she muttered. "Jack's dead. This place killed him. This damned place." She struck at the wall with her fist and cried out at the pain in her cut fingers. "It's the boiler, isn't it?" "Yes, ma'am. Danny says it's going to explode." "Good." The word was uttered with dead finality. "I don't know if I can get down those stairs again. My ribs ... he broke my ribs. And something in my back. It hurts." "You'll make it," Hallorann said. "We'll all make it." But suddenly he remembered the hedge animals, and wondered what they would do if they were guarding the way out.. Then Danny was coming back. He had Wendy's boots and coat and gloves, also his own coat and gloves. "Danny," she said. "Your boots." "It's too late," he said. His eyes stared at them with a desperate kind of madness. He looked at Dick and suddenly Hallorann's mind was fixed with an image of a clock under a glass dome, the clock in the ballroom that had been donated by a Swiss diplomat in 1949. The hands of the clock were standing at a minute to
midnight. "Oh my God," Hallorann said. "Oh my dear God." He clapped an arm around Wendy and picked her up. He clapped his other arm around Danny. He ran for the stairs. Wendy shrieked in pain as he squeezed the bad ribs, as something in her back ground together, but Hallorann did not slow. He plunged down the stairs with them in his arms. One eye wide and desperate, the other puffed shut to a slit. He looked like a one-eyed pirate abducting hostages to be ransomed later. Suddenly the shine was on him, and he understood what Danny had meant when he said it was too late. He could feel the explosion getting ready to rumble up from the basement and tear the guts out of this horrid place. He ran faster, bolting headlong across the lobby toward the double doors.
* * *
It hurried across the basement and into the feeble yellow glow of the furnace room's only light. It was slobbering with fear. It had been so close, so close to having the boy and the boy's remarkable power. It could not lose now. It must not happen. It would dump the boiler and then chastise the boy harshly. "Mustn't happen!" it cried. "Oh no, mustn't happen!" It stumbled across the floor to the boiler, which glowed a dull red halfway up its long tubular body. It was huffing and rattling and hissing off plumes of steam in a hundred directions, like a monster calliope. The pressure needle stood at the far end of the dial. "No, it won't be allowed!" the manager /caretaker cried. It laid its Jack Torrance hands on the valve, unmindful of the burning smell which arose or the searing of the flesh as the red-hot wheel sank in, as if into a mudrut. The wheel gave, and with a triumphant scream, the thing spun it wide open. A giant roar of escaping steam bellowed out of the boiler, a dozen dragons hissing in concert. But before the steam obscured the pressure needle entirely, the needle had visibly begun to swing back. "I WIN!" it cried. It capered obscenely in the hot, rising mist, waving its flaming hands over its head. "NOT TOO LATE! I WIN! NOT TOO LATE! NOT TOO LATE! NOT — " Words turned into a shriek of triumph, and the shriek was swallowed in a shattering roar as the Overlook's boiler exploded.
* * *
Hallorann burst out through the double doors and carried the two of them through the trench in the big snowdrift on the porch. He saw the hedge animals clearly, more clearly than before, and even as he realized his worst fears were true, that they were between the porch and the snowmobile, the hotel exploded. It seemed to him that it happened all at once, although later he knew that couldn't have been the way it happened. There was a flat explosion, a sound that seemed to exist on one low all- pervasive note
(WHUMMMMMMMMM — ) and then there was a blast of warm air at their backs that seemed to push gently at them. They were thrown from the porch on its breath, the three of them, and a confused thought (this is what superman must feel like) slipped through Hallorann's mind as they flew through the air. He lost his hold on them and then he struck the snow in a soft billow. It was down his shirt and up his nose and he was dimly aware that it felt good on his hurt cheek. Then he struggled to the top of it, for that moment not thinking about the hedge animals, or Wendy Torrance, or even the boy. He rolled over on his back so he could watch it die.
* * *
The Overlook's windows shattered. In the ballroom, the dome over the mantelpiece clock cracked, split in two pieces, and fell to the floor. The clock stopped ticking: cogs and gears and balance wheel all became motionless. There was a whispered, sighing noise, and a great billow of dust. In 217 the bathtub suddenly split in two, letting out a small flood of greenish, noxious-smelling water. In the Presidential Suite the wallpaper suddenly burst into flames. The batwing doors of the Colorado Lounge suddenly snapped their hinges and fell to the dining room floor. Beyond the basement arch, the great piles and stacks of old papers caught fire and went up with a blowtorch hiss. Boiling water rolled over the flames but did not quench them. Like burning autumn leaves below a wasps' nest, they whirled and blackened. The furnace exploded, shattering the basement's roofbeams, sending them crashing down like the bones of a dinosaur. The gasjet which had fed the furnace, unstoppered now, rose up in a bellowing pylon of flame through the riven floor of the lobby. The carpeting on the stair risers caught, racing up to the first-floor level as if to tell dreadful good news. A fusillade of explosions ripped the place. The chandelier in the dining room, a two-hundred-pound crystal bomb, fell with a splintering crash, knocking tables every which way. Flame belched out of the Overlook's five chimneys at the breaking clouds. (No! Mustn't! Mustn't! MUSTN'T!) It shrieked; it shrieked but now it was voiceless and it was only screaming panic and doom and damnation in its own ear, dissolving, losing thought and will, the webbing falling apart, searching, not finding, going out, going out to, fleeing, going out to emptiness, notness, crumbling. The party was over.
<< 57 >> EXIT
The roar shook the whole facade of the hotel. Glass belched out onto the snow and twinkled there like jagged diamonds. The hedge dog, which had been approaching Danny and his mother, recoiled away from it, its green and shadow- marbled ears flattening, its tail coming down between its legs as its haunches flattened abjectly. In his head, Hallorann heard it whine fearfully, and mixed with that sound was the fearful, confused yowling of the big cats. He struggled to his feet to go to the other two and help them, and as he did so he saw something more nightmarish than all the rest: the hedge rabbit, still coated with snow, was battering itself crazily at the chainlink fence at the far end of the playground, and the steel mesh was jingling with a kind of nightmare music, like a spectral zither. Even from here he could hear the sounds of the close-set twigs and branches which made up its body cracking and crunching like breaking bones. "Dick! Dick!" Danny cried out. He was trying to support his mother, help her over to the snowmobile. The clothes he had carried out for the two of them were scattered between where they had fallen and where they now stood. Hallorann was suddenly aware that the woman was in her nightclothes, Danny jacketless, and it was no more than ten above zero. (my gad she's in her bare feet) He struggled back through the snow, picking up her coat, her boots, Danny's coat, odd gloves. Then he ran back to them, plunging hip-deep in the snow from time to time, having to flounder his way out. Wendy was horribly pale, the side of her neck coated with blood, blood that was now freezing. "I can't," she muttered. She was no more than semiconscious. "No, I ... can't. Sorry." Danny looked up at Hallorann pleadingly. "Gonna be okay," Hallorann said, and gripped her again. "Come on." The three of them made it to where the snowmobile had slewed around and stalled out. Hallorann sat the woman down on the passenger seat and put her coat on. He lifted her feet up — they were very cold but not frozen yet — and rubbed them briskly with Danny's jacket before putting on her boots. Wendy's face was alabaster pale, her eyes halflidded and dazed, but she had begun to shiver. Hallorann thought that was a good sign. Behind them, a series of three explosions rocked the hotel. Orange flashes lit the snow. Danny put his mouth close to Hallorann's ear and screamed something. "What?" "I said do you need that?" The boy was pointing at the red gascan that leaned at an angle in the snow. "I guess we do." He picked it up and sloshed it. Still gas in there, he couldn't tell how much. He attached the can to the back of the snowmobile, fumbling the job several times before getting it right because his fingers were going numb. For the first time he became aware that he'd lost Howard Cottrell's mittens. (i get out of this i gonna have my sister knit you a dozen pair, howie)
"Get on!" Hallorann shouted at the boy. Danny shrank back. "We'll freeze!" "We have to go around to the equipment shed! There's stuff in there ... blankets ... stuff like that. Get on behind your mother!" Danny got on, and Hallorann twisted his head so he could shout into Wendy's face. "Missus Torrance! Hold onto me! You understand? Hold on!" She put her arms around him and rested her cheek against his back. Hallorann started the snowmobile and turned the throttle delicately so they would start up without a jerk. The woman had the weakest sort of grip on him, and if she shifted backward, her weight would tumble both her and the boy off. They began to move. He brought the snowmobile around in a circle and then they were traveling west parallel to the hotel. Hallorann cut in more to circle around behind it to the equipment shed. They had a momentarily clear view into the Overlook's lobby. The gasflame coming up through the shattered floor was like a giant birthday candle, fierce yellow at its heart and blue around its flickering edges. In that moment it seemed only to be lighting, not destroying. They could see the registration desk with its silver bell, the credit card decals, the old-fashioned, scrolled cash register, the small figured throw rugs, the highbacked chairs, horsehair hassocks. Danny could see the small sofa by the fireplace where the three nuns had sat on the day they had come up — closing day. But this was the real closing day. Then the drift on the porch blotted the view out. A moment later they were skirting the west side of the hotel. It was still light enough to see without the snowmobile's headlight. Both upper stories were flaming now, and pennants of flame shot out the windows. The gleaming white paint had begun to blacken and peel. The shutters which had covered the Presidential Suite's picture window — shutters Jack had carefully fastened as per instructions in mid-October — now hung in flaming brands, exposing the wide and shattered darkness behind them, like a toothless mouth yawing in a final, silent deathrattle. Wendy had pressed her face against Hallorann's back to cut out the wind, and Danny had likewise pressed his face against his mother's back, and so it was only Hallorann who saw the final thing, and he never spoke of it. From the window of the Presidential Suite he thought he saw a huge dark shape issue, blotting out the snowfield behind it. For a moment it assumed the shape of a huge, obscene manta, and then the wind seemed to catch it, to tear it and shred it like old dark paper. It fragmented, was caught in a whirling eddy of smoke, and a moment later it was gone as if it had never been. But in those few seconds as it whirled blackly, dancing like negative motes of light, he remembered something from his childhood ... fifty years ago, or more. He and his brother had come upon a huge nest of ground wasps just north of their farm. It had been tucked into a hollow between the earth and an old lightning-blasted tree. His brother had had a big old niggerchaser in the band of his hat, saved all the way from the Fourth of July. He had lighted it and tossed it at the nest. It had exploded with a loud bang, and an angry, rising hum — almost a low shriek — had risen from the blasted nest. They had run away as if demons had been at their beels. In a way, Hallorann supposed that demons had been. And looking back over
his shoulder, as he was now, he had on that day seen a large dark cloud of hornets rising in the hot air, swirling together, breaking apart, looking for whatever enemy had done this to their home so that they — the single group intelligence — could sting it to death. Then the thing in the sky was gone and it might only have been smoke or a great flapping swatch of wallpaper after all, and there was only the Overlook, a flaming pyre in the roaring throat of the night.
* * *
There was a key to the equipment shed's padlock on his key ring, but Hallorann saw there would be no need to use it. The door was ajar, the padlock hanging open on its hasp. "I can't go in there," Danny whispered. "That's okay. You stay with your mom. There used to be a pile of old horseblankets. Probably all moth-eaten by now, but better than freezin to death. Missus Torrance, you still with us?" "I don't know," the wan voice answered. "I think so." "Good. I'll be just a second." "Come back as quick as you can," Danny whispered. "Please." Hallorann nodded. He had trained the headlamp on the door and now he floundered through the snow, casting a long shadow in front of himself. He pushed the equipment shed door open and stepped in. The horseblankets were still in the corner, by the roque set. He picked up four of them — they smelled musty and old and the moths certainly had been having a free lunch — and then he paused. One of the rogue mallets was gone. (Was that what he hit me with?) Well, it didn't matter what he'd been hit with, did it? Still, his fingers went to the side of his face and began to explore the huge lump there. Six hundred dollars' worth of dental work undone at a single blow. And after all (maybe he didn't hit me with one of those. Maybe one got lost. Or stolen. Or took for a souvenir. After all) it didn't really matter. No one was going to be playing rogue here next summer. Or any summer in the foreseeable future. No, it didn't really matter, except that looking at the racked mallets with the single missing member had a kind of fascination. He found himself thinking of the hard wooden whack! of the mallet head striking the round wooden ball. A nice summery sound. Watching it skitter across the (bone. blood.) gravel. It conjured up images of (bone. blood.) iced tea, porch swings, ladies in white straw hats, the hum of mosquitoes, and (bad little boys who don't play by the rules.) all that stuff. Sure. Nice game. Out of style now, but ... nice. "Dick?" The voice was thin, frantic, and, he thought, rather unpleasant. "Are you all right, Dick? Come out now. Please!" ("Come on out now nigguh de massa callin youall.") His hand closed tightly around one of the mallet handles, liking its feel.
(spare the rod, spoil the child.) His eyes went blank in the flickering, fire-shot darkness. Really, it would be doing them both a favor. She was messed up ... in pain... and most of it (all of it) was that damn boy's fault. Sure. He had left his own daddy in there to burn. When you thought of it, it was damn close to murder. Patricide was what they called it. Pretty goddam low: "Mr. Hallorann?" Her voice was low, weak, querulous. He didn't much like the sound of it. "Dick!" The boy was sobbing now, in terror. Hallorann drew the mallet from the rack and turned toward the flood of white light from the snowmobile headlamp. His feet scratched unevenly over the boards of the equipment shed, like the feet of a clockwork toy that has been wound up and set in motion. Suddenly he stopped, looked wonderingly at the mallet in his hands, and asked himself with rising horror what it was he had been thinking of doing. Murder? Had he been thinking of murder? For a moment his entire mind seemed filled with an angry, weakly hectoring voice: (Do it! Do it, you weak-kneed no-balls nigger! Kill them! KILL THEM BOTH!) Then he flung the mallet behind him with a whispered, terrified cry. It clattered into the corner where the horseblankets had been, one of the two heads pointed toward him in an unspeakable invitation. He fled. Danny was sitting on the snowmobile seat and Wendy was holding him weakly. His face was shiny with tears, and he was shaking as if with ague. Between his clicking teeth he said: "Where were you? We were scared!" "It's a good place to be scared of," Hallorann said slowly. "Even if that place burns flat to the foundation, you'll never get me within a hundred miles of here again. Here, Missus Torrance, wrap these around you. I'll help. You too, Danny. Get yourself looking like an Arab." He swirled two of the blankets around Wendy, fashioning one of them into a hood to cover her head, and helped Danny tie his so they wouldn't fall off. "Now hold on for dear life," he said. "We got a long way to go, but the worst is behind us now." He circled the equipment shed and then pointed the snowmobile back along their trail. The Overlook was a torch now, flaming at the sky. Great holes had been eaten into its sides, and there was a red hell inside, waxing and waning. Snowmelt ran down the charred gutters in steaming waterfalls. They purred down the front lawns their way well lit. The snowdunes glowed scarlet. "Look!" Danny shouted as Hallorann slowed for the front gate. He was pointing toward the playground. The hedge creatures were all in their original positions, but they were denuded, blackened, seared. Their dead branches were a stark interlacing network in the fireglow, their small leaves scattered around their feet like fallen petals. "They're dead!" Danny screamed in hysterical triumph.
"Dead! They're dead!" "Shhh," Wendy said. "All right, honey. It's all right." "Hey, doc," Hallorann said. "Let's get to someplace warm. You ready?" "Yes," Danny whispered. "I've been ready for so long — " Hallorann edged through the gap between gate and post. A moment later they were on the road, pointed back toward Sidewinder. The sound of the snowmobile's engine dwindled until it was lost in the ceaseless roar of the wind. It rattled through the denuded branches of the hedge animals with a low, beating, desolate sound. The fire waxed and waned. Sometime after the sound of the snowmobile's engine had disappeared, the Overlooks roof caved in — first the west wing, then the east, and seconds later the central roof. A huge spiraling gout of sparks and flaming debris rushed up into the howling winter night. A bundle of flaming shingles and a wad of hot flashing were wafted through the open equipment shed door by the wind. After a while the shed began to burn, too.
* * *
They were still twenty miles from Sidewinder when Hallorann stopped to pour the rest of the gas into the snowmobile's tank. He was getting very worried about Wendy Torrance, who seemed to be drifting away from them. It was still so far to go. "Dick!" Danny cried. He was standing up on the seat, pointing. "Dick, look! Look there!" The snow had stopped and a silver-dollar moon had peeked out through the raftering clouds. Far down the road but coming toward them, coming upward through a series of S-shaped switchbacks, was a pearly chain of lights. The wind dropped for a moment and Hallorann heard the faraway buzzing snarl of snowmobile engines. Hallorann and Danny and Wendy reached them fifteen minutes later. They had brought extra clothes and brandy and Dr. Edmunds. And the long darkness was over.
<< 58 >> EPILOGUE/SUMMER
After he had finished checking over the salads his understudy had made and peeked in on the home-baked beans they were using as appetizers this week, Hallorann untied his apron, hung it on a hook, and slipped out the back door. He had maybe forty-five minutes before he had to crank up for dinner in earnest. The name of this place was the Red Arrow Lodge, and it was buried in the
western Maine mountains, thirty miles from the town of Rangely. It was a good gig, Hallorann thought. The trade wasn't too heavy, it tipped well, and so far there hadn't been a single meal sent back. Not bad at all, considering the season was nearly half over. He threaded his way between the outdoor bar and the swimming pool (although why anyone would want to use the pool with the lake so handy he would never know), crossed a greensward where a party of four was playing croquet and laughing, and crested a mild ridge. Pines took over here, and the wind soughed pleasantly in them, carrying the aroma of fir and sweet resin. On the other side, a number of cabins with views of the lake were placed discreetly among the trees. The last one was the nicest, and Hallorann had reserved it for a party of two back in April when he had gotten this gig. The woman was sitting on the porch in a rocking chair, a book in her hands. Hallorann was struck again by the change in her. Part of it was the stiff, almost formal way she sat, in spite of her informal surroundings — that was the back brace, of course. She'd had a shattered vertebra as well as three broken ribs and some internal injuries. The back was the slowest healing, and she was still in the brace ... hence the formal posture. But the change was more than that. She looked older, and some of the laughter had gone out of her face. Now, as she sat reading her book, Hallorann saw a grave sort of beauty there that had been missing on the day he had first met her, some nine months ago. Then she had still been mostly girl. Now she was a woman, a human being who had been dragged around to the dark side of the moon and had come back able to put the pieces back together. But those pieces, Hallorann thought, they never fit just the same way again. Never in this world. She heard his step and looked up, closing her book. "Dick! Hi!" She started to rise, and a little grimace of pain crossed her face. "Nope, don't get up," he said. "I don't stand on no ceremony unless it's white tie and tails." She smiled as he came up the steps and sat down next to her on the porch. "How is it going?" "Pretty fair," he admitted. "You try the shrimp creole tonight. You gonna like it." "That's a deal." "Where's Danny?" "Right down there." She pointed, and Hallorann saw a small figure sitting at the end of the dock. He was wearing jeans rolled up to the knee and a red- striped shirt. Further out on the calm water, a bobber floated. Every now and then Danny would reel it in, examine the sinker and hook below it, and then toss it out again. "He's gettin brown," Hallorann said. "Yes. Very brown." She looked at him fondly. He took out a cigarette, tamped it, lit it. The smoke raftered away lazily in the sunny afternoon. "What about those dreams he's been havin?" "Better," Wendy said. "Only one this week. It used to be every night, sometimes two and three times. The explosions. The hedges. And most of all ... you know." "Yeah. He's going to be okay, Wendy."
She looked at him. "Will he? I wonder." Hallorann nodded. "You and him, you're coming back. Different, maybe, but okay. You ain't what you were, you two, but that isn't necessarily bad." They were silent for a while, Wendy moving the rocking chair back and forth a little, Hallorann with his feet up on the porch rail, smoking. A little breeze came up, pushing its secret way through the pines but barely ruffling Wendy's hair. She had cut it short. "I've decided to take Al — Mr. Shockley — up on his offer," she said. Hallorann nodded. "It sounds like a good job. Something you could get interested in. When do you start?" "Right after Labor Day. When Danny and I leave here, we'll be going right on to Maryland to look for a place. It was really the Chamber of Commerce brochure that convinced me, you know. It looks like a nice town to raise a kid in. And I'd like to be working again before we dig too deeply into the insurance money Jack left. There's still over forty thousand dollars. Enough to send Danny to college with enough left over to get him a start, if it's invested right." Hallorann nodded. "Your mom?" She looked at him and smiled wanly. "I think Maryland is far enough." "You won't forget old friends, will you?" "Danny wouldn't let me. Go on down and see him, he's been waiting all day." "Well, so have I." He stood up and hitched his cook's whites at the hips. "The two of you are going to be okay," he repeated. "Can't you feel it?" She looked up at him and this time her smile was warmer. "Yes," she said. She took his hand and kissed it. "Sometimes I think I can." "The shrimp creole," he said, moving to the steps. "Don't forget." "I won't." He walked down the sloping, graveled path that led to the dock and then out along the weather-beaten boards to the end, where Danny sat with his feet in the clear water. Beyond, the lake widened out, mirroring the pines along its verge. The terrain was mountainous around here, but the mountains were old, rounded and humbled by time. Hallorann liked them just fine. "Catchin much?" Hallorann said, sitting down next to him. He took off one shoe, then the other. With a sigh, he let his hot feet down into the cool water. "No. But I had a nibble a little while ago." "We'll take a boat out tomorrow morning. Got to get out in the middle if you want to catch an eatin fish, my boy. Out yonder is where the big ones lay." "How big?" Hallorann shrugged. "Oh ... sharks, marlin, whales, that sort of thing." "There aren't any whales!" "No blue whales, no. Of course not. These ones here run to no more than eighty feet. Pink whales." "How could they get here from the ocean?" Hallorann put a hand on the boy's reddish-gold hair and rumpled it. "They swim upstream, my boy. That's how." "Really?" "Really." They were silent for a time, looking out over the stillness of the lake, Hallorann just thinking. When he looked back at Danny, he saw that his eyes had
filled with tears. Putting an arm around him, he said, "What's this?" "Nothing," Danny whispered. "You're missin your dad, aren't you?" Danny nodded. "You always know." One of the tears spilled from the corner of his right eye and trickled slowly down his cheek. "We can't have any secrets," Hallorann agreed. "That's just how it is." Looking at his pole, Danny said: "Sometimes I wish it had been me. It was my fault. All my fault." Hallorann said, "You don't like to talk about it around your mom, do you?" "No. She wants to forget it ever happened. So do I, but — " "But you can't." "No.°. "Do you need to cry?" The boy tried to answer, but the words were swallowed in a sob. He leaned his head against Hallorann's shoulder and wept, the tears now flooding down his face. Hallorann held him and said nothing. The boy would have to shed his tears again and again, he knew, and it was Danny's luck that he was still young enough to be able to do that. The tears that heal are also the tears that scald and scourge. When he had quieted a little, Hallorann said, "You're gonna get over this. You don't think you are right now, but you will. You got the shi — " "I wish I didn't!" Danny choked, his voice still thick with tears. "I wish I didn't have it!" "But you do," Hallorann said quietly. "For better or worse. You didn't get no say, little boy. But the worst is over. You can use it to talk to me when things get rough. And if they get too rough, you just call me and I'll come." "Even if I'm down in Maryland?" "Even there." They were quiet, watching Danny's bobber drift around thirty feet out from the end of the dock. Then Danny said, almost too low to be heard, "You'll be my friend?" "As long as you want me." The boy held him tight and Hallorann hugged him. "Danny? You listen to me. I'm going to talk to you about it this once and never again this same way. There's some things no six-year-old boy in the world should have to be told, but the way things should be and the way things are hardly ever get together. The world's a hard place, Danny. It don't care. It don't hate you and me, but it don't love us, either. Terrible things happen in the world, and they're things no one can explain. Good people die in bad, painful ways and leave the folks that love them all alone. Sometimes it seems like it's only the bad people who stay healthy and prosper. The world don't love you, but your momma does and so do I. You're a good boy. You grieve for your daddy, and when you feel you have to cry over what happened to him, you go into a closet or under your covers and cry until it's all out of you again. That's what a good son has to do. But see that you get on. That's your job in this hard world, to keep your love alive and see that you get on, no matter what. Pull your act together and just go on."
"All right," Danny whispered. "I'll come see you again next summer if you want ... if you don't mind. Next summer I'm going to be seven." "And I'll be sixty-two. And I'm gonna hug your brains out your ears. But let's finish one summer before we get on to the next." "Okay." He looked at Hallorann. "Dick?" "Hmm?" "You won't die for a long time, will you?" "I'm sure not studyin on it. Are you?" "No, sir. I — " "You got a bite, sonny." He pointed. The red and white bobber had ducked under. It came up again glistening, and then went under again. "Hey!" Danny gulped. Wendy had come down and now joined them, standing in back of Danny. "What is it?" she asked. "Pickerel?" "No, ma'am," Hallorann said, "I believe that's a pink whale." The tip of the fishing rod bent. Danny pulled it back and a long fish, rainbow-colored, flashed up in a sunny, winking parabola, and disappeared again. Danny reeled frantically, gulping. "Help me, Dick! I got him! I got him! Help me!" Hallorann laughed. "You're doin fine all by yourself, little man. I don't know if it's a pink whale or a trout, but it'll do. It'll do just fine." He put an arm around Danny's shoulders and the boy reeled the fish in, little by little. Wendy sat down on Danny's other side and the three of them sat on the end of the dock in the afternoon sun. 5/28/2023 0 Comments Terry Pratchet's the world of poo
From Snuff: 'Vimes' prompt arrival got a nod of approval from Sybil, who gingerly handed him a new book to read to Young Sam. Vimes looked at the cover. The title was The World of Poo. When his wife was out of eyeshot he carefully leafed through it. Well, okay, you had to accept that the world had moved on and these days fairy stories were probably not going to be about twinkly little things with wings. As he turned page after page, it dawned on him that whoever had written this book, they certainly knew what would make kids like Young Sam laugh until they were nearly sick. The bit about sailing down the river almost made him smile. But interspersed with the scatology was actually quite interesting stuff about septic tanks and dunnakin divers and gongfermors and how dog muck helped make the very best leather, and other things that you never thought you would need to know, but once heard somehow lodged in your mind.'
ContentsCover From Snuff Also by Miss Felicity Beedle Title Page Foreword and Hopeful Note to Parents by Miss Felicity Beedle, Author Chapter 1. Arriving for the First Time in Ankh-Morpork Chapter 2. A Trip to the Park and a New Friend Chapter 3. A Visit to the Dragon Sanctuary Chapter 4. A Trip to the Menagerie and Conversation with a Gargoyle Chapter 5. A Lunch at the Guild of Plumbers and Dunnakin Divers Chapter 6. An Adventure with Sir Harry King
‘Vimes looked at the cover. The title was The World of Poo. When his wife was out of eyeshot he carefully leafed through it. Well, okay, you had to accept that the world had moved on and these days fairy stories were probably not going to be about twinkly little things with wings. As he turned page after page, it dawned on him that whoever had written this book, they certainly knew what would make kids like Young Sam laugh until they were nearly sick. The bit about sailing down the river almost made him smile. But interspersed with the scatology was actually quite interesting stuff about septic tanks and dunnakin divers and gongfermors and how dog muck helped make the very best leather, and other things that you never thought you would need to know, but once heard somehow lodged in your mind. Apparently it was by the author of Wee and if Young Sam had one vote for the best book ever written, then it would go to Wee. His enthusiasm was perhaps fanned all the more because a rare imp of mischief in Vimes led him to do all the necessary straining noises.’ From Snuff
Also by Miss Felicity Beedle Melvin and the Enormous Boil Geoffrey and the Magic Pillow Case The Little Duckling Who Thought He Was an Elephant Daphne and the Nose Pickers Gaston’s Enormous Problem The Wee Wee Men The War with the Snot Goblins Geoffrey and the Land of Poo The Boy Who Didn’t Know How to Pick His Own Scabs The Joy of Earwax
TERRY PRATgHETT
PRESENTS
lphe C;e)0rld 0f P00 Assisted by Bernard and Isobel Pearson
FOREWORD AND HOPEFUL NOTE TO PARENTS BY MISS FELICITY BEEDLE, AUTHORWHAT TO TELL children about the reality of the human world is always a subject very close to the thoughts of all parents; traditionally, requests from young ones for enlightenment as to where babies come from can be steered in the direction of the stork and the gooseberry bush with no great harm done. Although, of course, when the child is, shall we say, of the age to understand, the parent should make haste to see that they are fully informed. In a well-run household this ought to be achievable without too much blushing, if the parents are sensible. However, I fervently believe that not to talk to children about what goes into and out of their bodies, is to let the subject become furtive with a tendency to cause sniggering. What we eat and subsequently excrete plays a major role in human society and especially in what we are pleased to call civilized society. In my experience the thinking of intelligent parents, faced with the subject, tends to fall between two stools, as it were. Surely we can do better than saying it’s nasty? Our touchstone here is the commonality of mankind: kings and queens and even the likes of our own Lord Vetinari have to eat and excrete. Why should this be a subject of comment or mirth to anyone? Therefore, I decided that young Geoffrey might have a little stroll through what we may call the underside of our world, facing it with interest, curiosity and common sense; after all, one man’s waste is another man’s compost. On this particular point, I must say that I was brought up in the countryside where, on a weekly basis, the night soil was buried in the garden, in an area set aside to be the recipient. I can recall, along with many of my countryfolk, that tomatoes would grow on that site the following year without anyone having to make shift to plant them. And what marvellous tomatoes they were! As they say, what goes around comes around, although you don’t have to look at it as it floats past. But acting like a cat and believing that if you can’t see it then it’s not there is no way for polite society to behave. Without muck, without dung, there would be no agriculture and without agriculture there would be no people worth talking about. And so I dedicate this book to my old friend Sir Harry King, a man who can turn dung into gold!
ARRIVING FOR THE FIRST TIME IN ANKH-MORPORKIT WAS A long journey for young Geoffrey from his home in the Shires to his Grand-mama’s house in the big city of Ankh-Morpork. For the first time in his life he was travelling alone in the coach and he sat, looking out of the window, feeling a bit scared but also a bit excited. There had been so much going on at home; Cook had said that Mama was having great expectations. Quite what that meant no one would tell him, but he did know he’d been moved out of his nursery and was promised a whole new room of his own with space to keep his model boats and his collection of interesting sticks and potato-shaped objects, which was some consolation. And Papa was always busy going off to foreign places on ‘business’, which meant that he was hardly ever there. The upshot of all this was a suggestion that Geoffrey visit his Grand-mama while developments took place.
The landscape gradually changed from hills and forests and farms to acres and acres of cabbages on either side of the road like an endless greeny-yellow sea. There was no sound apart from the rumbling of the coach wheels and the occasional soft trumpeting of the horses’ farting. What with that and the cabbages, Geoffrey’s world became quite a smelly place. If greeny-yellow could have a smell, Geoffrey thought, it would smell like this, as if the whole world had farted at once. He knew he was getting near the city when the smell changed to that of wood-smoke and sooty chimneys and, more than anything else, something a bit like the gardener’s outdoor privy at home.1 If this smell could have a colour, thought Geoffrey, it would probably be brown.2 The coach rumbled through the Least Gate and Geoffrey saw, for the first time, City Watchmen in uniforms, dray-horses pulling massive high-sided carts, and tall buildings looming up and blocking out the sky. He saw the commotion and hustle of a street market where pedlars and greengrocers and butchers were shouting out their wares: more people in one place than he had ever seen in his life. After a while, the streets lined with plane trees grew wider and quieter, and the houses had gardens and looked quite grand. The coach gradually slowed and stopped and Thomas, the groom, came around and opened the door with a flourish. ‘Here we are, young sir. Number five Nonesuch Street, your Grand-mama’s house.’
Geoffrey climbed down on to the wide pavement and looked up at the tall house. There were railings and a gate, and a short path leading to steps up to an imposing front door and portico.3 Thomas took him by the hand and together they climbed the steps. Thomas pulled the bell-pull and there came a distant ringing from inside the house. Geoffrey suddenly felt a little bit frightened. He had, of course, met his Grand-mama a few times, but only when she visited his home. Such occasions were always preceded by his Mama being a bit short-tempered, a lecture on remembering to say ‘please’ and ‘thank-you’, a scurrying of maids, a smell of polish and his Papa retiring hurriedly to his study. The door creaked open and a tall thin figure dressed all in black and wearing fearsome spectacles looked down at him. He recognized his Grand-mama, who quickly bent down to give him a kiss before he had time to flinch, or pull his head between his shoulder blades like a tortoise. She didn’t say, ‘My how you’ve grown’ or ‘How was your journey?’ or even, ‘How are you?’ But she took him by the hand, and said, ‘I’m so pleased you’ve come to stay, Geoffrey. I expect you’d like some cake.’
Standing behind his Grand-mama in the doorway was a sour-faced maid wearing black and white and looking like a penguin that had inexplicably found a lemon to suck on. ‘This is Lily,’ said Grand-mama. ‘She will take you to your room and show you where to wash your hands before we have tea.’ Lily looked so disapproving and unfriendly that Geoffrey was very grateful that she was just the maid and not someone who might be inclined to kiss him. He thought he’d be lucky to keep his nose if she did. He wasn’t to know, but Lily’s life had been somewhat enriched by being the eldest in a family that otherwise consisted of eleven boys. In her experience small boys were nothing but trouble and the main cause of dirt, untidiness and noise. In her somewhat jaundiced view, the only difference between small boys and small dogs was that small boys couldn’t be left chained up outside. Lily picked up Geoffrey’s small trunk and, indicating that he should follow her, started up a
series of narrowing staircases to the very top of the house and a door marked Nursery. Lily opened the door and put down the trunk.
‘There’s water in the basin for you to wash your face and hands,’ she said. ‘Don’t leave the soap in the water, don’t leave the towel on the floor and don’t splash about. When you’re done, young master, come straight down to the dining room for tea.’ With that Lily left, not exactly slamming the door, but closing it, he thought, with a half-slam – or perhaps it could be called a sl—, because it bounced back afterwards. Geoffrey could hardly take in all the treasures he could see in the room. There was a stuffed dragon hanging from the ceiling, piles of old books, a skipping rope which he looked at with a sneer, a very worn teddy bear and, best of all, a large wooden rocking horse which had a real mane and leather bridle. He was, however, feeling quite hungry and a bit scared of Lily, so after a quick look around and a wash he found his way downstairs to his Grand-mama and cake.
After tea, Grand-mama suggested that Geoffrey might like to explore the garden. She showed him the door to the conservatory, and at the far end of this the small glazed door that led down some steps to a gravelled path between tall hedges. Geoffrey wandered along the path, around a corner and found himself this time at the top of a large area of lawn and flowerbeds. In the distance he could see an
orchard and a vegetable patch and a collection of old sheds.4 Geoffrey made a bee-line towards the sheds. In his experience they were often the most interesting thing in a garden. As he walked under the ancient apple trees he felt something fall on his head. It was heavier than a leaf and was wet but not cold. He put his hand up to feel something slimy in his hair. As he looked with some dismay at the greeny-white mess across his fingers he heard a jolly voice behind him boom: ‘Do you know what that is, my lad?’
‘No,’ said Geoffrey, turning round. ‘That’s bird poo,’ said the voice’s owner, who was leaning on a fork, smoking a pipe. ‘It’s very good luck when a bird chooses to poo on your head,5 young shaver, and the first bit of good luck coming to you is a Sto Lat pippin, which is the sweetest apple in the world.’
As he spoke, the old man polished a shiny red apple industriously on his waistcoat before handing it to Geoffrey. ‘My name, as writ down on my birth certificate, is Humphrey Twaddle, but no one calls me that nowadays on account of when they do I hits them with my fork. You can call me Plain Old Humphrey. Although I owe it to my ancestors to tell you, young man, that far from meaning a load of old rubbish, “twaddle” is a valuable ingredient in the making of lemonade. Not many people know that, but now there’s one more,’ he said. ‘I’m the gardener here, and if I were you I’d wipe my hand on the grass over there rather than on that smart white shirt of yours.’
Geoffrey did as he was told and then decided that if bird poo was going to bring him good luck
he ought to try to keep what was left of it. He raced back through the conservatory into the house and looked around until he found a large pair of scissors in a sewing basket. He ran all the way up to the nursery and, peering into a mottled old mirror, cut off as much of the clumpy bird-poo-hair as he could and put it on the windowsill to dry out.
It was beginning to get too dark to see much outside and Geoffrey began to feel a bit lonely. He wandered downstairs to find his Grand-mama. ‘It’s been a long and busy day,’ said Grand-mama from her big armchair, ‘and I think it’s time for bed. You may take a candle to go up and you may leave it alight if you like. Don’t forget to say hello to Mister Lavatory on the way and I shall soon be up to tuck you in.’ Holding his candle, Geoffrey started back up the stairs. He wasn’t normally afraid of the dark but the flickering candlelight made strange shadows on the faces in the big old portraits hanging on the walls. He hurried along the passage to the big mahogany door Lily had pointed out earlier as the water closet. He’d heard the term before, but nothing had prepared him for the fantastic sight that now met his eyes. Shiny white tiles glistened like running water and there was a large china hand-basin with painted flowers and, at the far end of the room, a great throne-like construction. This had a huge wooden seat with a large hole in it and underneath what looked like a small chest of drawers but without the handles. A gleaming copper pipe joined the chest to a vast dark-green tank attached to the wall near the ceiling. Hanging down from the tank was a long chain finishing in a round knob. On the tank were letters that he had to think about and spell out in his head.
Geoffrey knew in theory the function of this marvel but he was mystified and intrigued by its operation. He worked out that the chain was there to be pulled, but it was too high for him to reach. He could only manage to do so by clambering on to the wooden seat and had to be careful not to fall
into the hole. Looking down into the still pool beneath him he gave the chain a sharp tug and was astonished at the torrent of water that rushed into the bowl: a deluge indeed. He was even more amazed when, as the water came down, the chain pulled him inexorably up into the air. He held on tightly and, as gently as he had risen, he was deposited back down on to the seat. Even so, Geoffrey wasn’t certain whether he wanted to be lifted up in the air twice in one day, especially when there was bubbling water beneath him. He decided that he needed daylight to get the full benefit of the contraption and, taking his candle, made his way up to his room. He set his candle on the small table beside the bed then searched in the usual place – which was, of course, under the bed – for the familiar receptacle known in polite circles as the pot, the po, the necessary, or the gazunder. His business done, Geoffrey jumped up into the small bed, which had a well-used, comfortable feel about it, and suddenly found himself missing his mother and his bedtime story. But before he had too much time to think, the door of the nursery opened gently and something wonderful happened. A small brown-and-white puppy with stubby little legs, floppy ears and a frantically wagging tail was pushed into the room. Without further ado, it rushed across the floor, jumped on his bed and started licking his face. Grand-mama followed the puppy into the room and pulled up a chair to the bedside. ‘I thought you might be a bit lonely, so I brought you a friend.’
‘What’s his name?’ asked Geoffrey with delight. ‘Well, from the little puddle he’s just left outside your bedroom door while we were waiting to come in, I think I’d call him Widdler if I were you,’ said Grand-mama. ‘Like you he’s very young and misses his mother, so you’ll just have to look after each other. Now, would you like me to read you a story?’
‘Oh, yes please,’ said Geoffrey, as he settled down under the covers. But with Widdler curled up beside him he was happily asleep within minutes. Grand-mama blew out the candle and quietly slipped back down the stairs.
In hot weather it was a rich olfactory experience, which enabled the user to find the place on a dark night and without a candle. In the circumstances, this was probably a good thing if it was a very old and ripe privy, because no one should be standing anywhere near it with a naked flame. In cold weather there was less impact on the nose but the nether parts could well be exposed to a chilly draught, and proceedings were often hasty and unsatisfactory. Sooner or later a hole in the ground, even if constructed carefully, would fill up. One solution was to move the privy and leave the hole behind. Eventually, the privy would have moved so far that a trip to the ‘Chapel of Easement’ might involve a walk of several miles and a packed lunch. The other option was to empty the privy. An intrepid band of craftsmen emerged; their sole job in life was to empty privies and dispose of their contents. These faecal heroes were known as night-soil men or gongfermors, and we shall meet them briefly later. They didn’t have many friends, except for those of the same occupation … However, they were well respected and as they walked down the street everyone would very quickly step out of their way and let them pass.
Bird poo is one of nature’s special garnishes. A bird’s insides are cunningly designed to preserve fluid and the slimy green poo is iced with white solid wee, as every schoolboy knows, or did, back in the days when schoolboys knew such things.
A TRIP TO THE PARK AND A NEW FRIENDVERY EARLY THE next morning Geoffrey ventured back into the water closet. He sat on the seat with his legs dangling while Widdler the dog ran round in circles unravelling a roll of soft paper, clearly in some kind of dog heaven. Geoffrey felt like a king on his grand throne. Indeed, like many a king, he was perched on the edge precariously, quite concerned that if he wasn’t careful he might slip off; in his case, into the great bowl and its contents below. Eventually, the business at hand being finished, Geoffrey was pleased to see he wouldn’t have to climb up again to reach the chain because someone had very kindly added a length of cord with a cotton reel on the end so it was low enough for him to reach with ease.
Picking up Widdler, Geoffrey wandered down to the kitchen hoping to find some breakfast. The big kitchen seemed empty but, as in many kitchens in old houses, there was a lot of life going on out of sight. There were rats romping along the drains, biting through pipes and the backs of cupboards, and popping up in the sink and through the skirting board. There were all manner of beetles and weevils and spiders and, in the damp corner under the sink, a collection of snails stuck to the wall. As Geoffrey opened a cupboard or two, hoping to find something to eat, he heard a scurrying scratchy sound coming from behind the pantry door. Between a pot of raspberry jam and a large jar of pickled eggs sat a small grey mouse. The mouse looked at Geoffrey and Geoffrey looked at the mouse. The mouse looked at Geoffrey again and then, possibly because it wanted to, or perhaps because it was frightened, did a poo, followed by another one and another one before running off.1 Mice are like that. And all that Geoffrey was left with was a number of small dark droppings, which he scooped up. I wonder if mouse poo is as lucky as bird poo, he thought. I must ask Mister Twaddle.
‘I wouldn’t put that in your pocket if I were you, my dear,’ said a friendly voice behind him. ‘Let me see what I can find for you.’
He turned round to see a jolly plump woman, standing in front of the old range. ‘My name is Hartley,’ she said, handing him an empty matchbox, ‘and I’m the cook. After you’ve washed your hands really well I’ll cook you some breakfast. How would you like a nice boiled egg and toast soldiers?’
After breakfast, Geoffrey helped Plain Old Humphrey feed the chickens and collect the eggs. ‘Some of these eggs must be quite lucky,’ said Geoffrey. ‘They’ve got chicken poo stuck to them.’2 Plain Old Humphrey scratched his head. ‘Well, there’s no doubt that when bird poo lands on your head it brings good luck, but the bird’s got to choose, see. Poo may not always be lucky but it’s certainly useful. I use it in the garden. Look over here. I mix horse apples and straw in with the garden waste and that rots down to the best compost you will find. And the thing is, you’ll also find lots of worms there, who burrow away, pooing to their hearts’ content, which helps to break it up and make it good and fine.’3 Geoffrey went to put his hand into the smelly compost heap to find some worm poo. ‘No, don’t do that,’ said Plain Old Humphrey. ‘I’m sure I can find something that will make it easier for a likely young lad such as you to start his own poo collection.’ He went off to one of his sheds and Geoffrey heard a clattering and rattling and a nasty boingggg
from within.4 Plain Old Humphrey emerged with a garden hose wrapped around him like a snake, which he finally managed to fight off and sling back into the shed. He disappeared again before returning moments later with a bucket and spade.
Taking the spade, Geoffrey carefully excavated a small hole at the bottom of the great heap and uncovered a tangled knot of wriggling pink worms. ‘What does worm poo look like?’ asked Geoffrey, bending down to get closer to the worms. ‘Well, it’s quite difficult to spot in there,’ said Plain Old Humphrey, ‘but see the little curly heaps of soil over here on the grass? That’s your worm poo, that is; it’s called worm casts.’ He brought out a cobwebby old jam jar and trowel for this delicate work, and with a bit of help, Geoffrey carefully transferred a sample of worm poo into the jar. Meanwhile, Widdler was running in circles and barking at nothing in particular or anything in general. In the vegetable patch Geoffrey could see a large black cat digging a hole. ‘What’s that cat doing?’ he asked. ‘That dratted cat,’ said Plain Old Humphrey through gritted teeth, ‘is digging up my champion leeks again! I’ll swing for him, I will.’ ‘Why is he digging?’ ‘Because he’s doing a poo. And because cats is a bit particular. They like to bury it when they’re done, and because they’re a bit lazy, they like to bury it where I’ve already been digging.’ As the cat finished its business and stalked off, Geoffrey moved purposefully towards the spot, holding the bucket and spade. ‘I’d let that cool down a bit before you dig it up,’ warned Plain Old Humphrey. ‘Mark the place with a stick and collect it in a day or so. Pretty strong stuff your cat poo.5 ‘Look, you must excuse me, lad, I need to pay a visit.’ Carefully lighting his pipe and picking up an old copy of the Almanak, Plain Old Humphrey made his way to his small personal privy between the compost heaps and the hedge. ‘Why don’t you take that puppy of yours for a walk in the park?’ he called over his shoulder. ‘Please may I wait until you come out?’ asked Geoffrey, holding up his bucket. ‘No, you may not,’ replied Plain Old Humphrey firmly. ‘There are some things a chap needs to do without being under observation, especially by a small boy holding a bucket. Even if you can’t see
him it tends to put you off your stride, so off you go.’ Geoffrey stood on a pile of old seed boxes and, holding Widdler in his arms, looked over the hedge and into the park. ‘Shall we go and explore, Widdler?’ he said. Widdler wagged his tail so hard with excitement that his whole body shook.
They crawled through a hole in the hedge together, ran across the grass and chased each other round and round in circles until Geoffrey fell over. Out of the corner of his eye and not far away he saw another dog stop, squat down and produce a small pile of poo before scuttling off. Geoffrey wished he’d brought his bucket, and was standing looking at the small brown heap, wondering how to get it home, when a voice asked: ‘Is that yours?’
‘No, I went before I came out,’ Geoffrey replied to the owner of the voice, a shabbily dressed
urchin with a bucket in his hand. The boy looked satisfied. ‘Well, it’s mine then.’ ‘What? Are you a poo collector, too?’ asked Geoffrey excitedly.
‘I most certainly am! My name is Louis and I collect dog poo for Sir Harry King. He’ll pay me a penny a bucketful if it’s well stamped down. Extra too if it’s white dog poo – that’s the very best. We in the business call it the “pure”.’ ‘Is Sir Harry a collector?’ enquired Geoffrey with some interest. ‘No, he sells it to the tanning yards.’ ‘Does he buy mouse poo?’ Geoffrey went on, fingering the matchbox in his pocket. ‘Don’t know,’ said Louis with a shrug of his shoulders, ‘but if there’s money in it Sir Harry King will collect it, trust me. He’s got a grand house down at the corner of Dimwell and Grunefair, but he doesn’t keep the poo there because Lady King won’t let him bring his work home. He collects all the poo in Ankh-Morpork and deposits it in big yards outside the City Gates.’ I’d very much like to meet Sir Harry, thought Geoffrey. He sounds like a very sensible person. ‘Right, I’m off to deliver this to Sir Harry’s yard now,’ Louis declared when the bucket was full and well stamped down. ‘Can I help you again tomorrow?’ asked Geoffrey. Louis looked at him sideways. ‘Can’t afford to pay you,’ he said quickly, ‘but if you like I’m mostly here in the early mornings when people walk their dogs.
‘This is my patch!’ he added with pride. ‘I fought hard for this. You just ask the Mitchell brothers: they won’t try to take it over again, oh no, indeed. It’s a dog-eat-dog world, my friend, is the world of the pure, and even if I say it myself, I’m one of the best. Sometimes I’m there with my trowel before little Fido even knows he’s going to go.’ And with that, spotting a small straining figure across the park, the lad was away as if he had wings on his heels – although what was really on his heels was probably not wings …
Geoffrey and Widdler crawled back under the hedge into Grand-mama’s garden. Plain Old Humphrey didn’t seem to be around so they climbed the stairs to the top of the house with a short diversion on the first-floor landing where Geoffrey tried to look round the back of the suit of armour. When he got to the nursery he saw with dismay that his lucky poo was not on the windowsill where he’d left it, and neither were the scissors. ‘Oh no! I’ve been tidied,’ he cried. ‘Being tidied’ was something that occasionally happened at home, but since the time his most precious stick had been tidied away (leading to long and recriminatory searches in the rubbish bins), he was usually given a bit of warning. He dashed down to the kitchen again, where Lily the maid was mopping the floor. ‘Have you seen my lucky poo?’ he asked frantically. ‘I left it on my windowsill with some scissors.’ ‘Is that what it was?’ shrieked Lily. ‘That’s disgustin’, that is. I threw it out the window and thems was my best scissors, too. Don’t you go bringing any more dirt up into your bedroom, young man, or I’ll tell your granny. And what’s that on your shoe?’
Geoffrey went back outside hurriedly to find Plain Old Humphrey, who was wandering down the path with the look of a man whose world was now a more comfortable place. ‘Lily tidied out my lucky poo,’ he said. ‘I don’t suppose I’ll ever be lucky enough to be chosen by a bird again.’ ‘Never mind, my lad. Just you wander across the park to the pigeon loft in Dimwell Street, and stand around there for a minute or two. But here’s a tip: put a bit of cardboard on your head first, then you can bring it back nice and easy. And I’ve got an old shed I’m not using where you can keep it safe.’
‘Can I keep my mouse poo there as well? Could I make a poo museum? I think poo is very interesting and it is not nasty,’ he said, his face going red. ‘After all, without poo everybody would explode.’ ‘Of course,’ said Plain Old Humphrey. ‘I shall ask Hartley if she’s got any more spare jam jars. I think they could be quite useful.’ At that point Geoffrey heard his Grand-mama calling from the house. ‘I think it’s time for your tea,’ said Plain Old Humphrey. ‘Better run along if I was you.’ Grand-mama met Geoffrey at the back door. ‘If you’d like to wipe your feet and wash your hands really well, Geoffrey, I think there might be cake for tea. But first tell me, what have you been doing today?’ ‘Well, I’ve started a collection,’ he said breathlessly, ‘and Plain Old Humphrey said I could use his old shed for a museum, and he gave me a bucket and spade and a trowel for collecting. And I took Widdler to the park, but I forgot my bucket and we met a boy called Louis. He was collecting dog poo in a bucket for Sir Harry King and he said I could help him again tomorrow.’ ‘He would be one of Sir Harry’s pureboys,’ interrupted Grand-mama. ‘It’s a very useful job. But
what exactly are you collecting, Geoffrey?’ ‘Oh, any poo at all,’ he said. ‘In fact I want to collect every sort of poo there is. Plain Old Humphrey says it can be very useful and it’s interesting and sometimes it can be lucky.’ ‘Are you sure that’s what you want to do?’ asked Grand-mama. ‘Your cousin Robert collects stamps. I believe they are quite interesting and can sometimes be quite valuable.’ ‘No, I think I’d rather collect poo,’ said Geoffrey without hesitation. ‘I don’t think anyone else in the world has a poo collection, so mine would be the first proper museum and I could charge people to come and see it.’6
Much to his surprise, his Grand-mama gave him a big, if rather strange smile. ‘You are a very original thinker, Geoffrey.’ She touched the pearl necklace strung around her neck. ‘Would it surprise you to learn that these very expensive pearls are the poo of oysters? Given your interesting predilection I shall think carefully about where would be the best places for us to visit while you are staying. Come and see me after breakfast tomorrow and I shall have a plan.’
residence in the kitchen and larder where food is stored and prepared. Mouse poo is about the same size and shape as a grain of rice but thankfully it’s much darker in colour so can be picked out, not just from carelessly stored rice, but also from bags of flour and other staples. Beware the short-sighted cook: not all the currants in the roly-poly pudding grew on a vine. And don’t ever eat black rice.
Even witches, who can use most things in creating spells, draw the line at cat poo. The Ting-Tang-Bang cats of the Counterweight Continent are revered for the vicious nature of their poo, which is collected, carefully dried and then used to make fireworks; and with minute attention to the cats’ diet the most skilled practitioners can get you displays of vivid blue, which are notoriously hard to achieve in the field of feline pyrotechnics.
A VISIT TO THE DRAGON SANCTUARYGEOFFREY WOKE UP excited. Today was the day that Emma, one of Grand-mama’s god-daughters, was going to take him to the dragon rescue centre and sanctuary. After breakfast, he put on his best jacket and stood in the hallway with Widdler, ready and waiting. Before long, his patience was rewarded when the bell rang. He opened the front door to a friendly and jolly girl who looked as if she ate hay and enjoyed a good run before breakfast. ‘Hello, Geoffrey. I’m Emma,’ she said in a booming voice. When he shook hands with her as he’d been taught to do, she gave him a grip he just knew would crack a walnut; he liked her immediately. ‘Now, Geoffrey,’ she continued, ‘your Grand-mama gave me five dollars so we could take a cab to Morphic Street. But it’s not far and if we walked instead we could buy some sweets on the way. What do you think?’ ‘Oh yes,’ said Geoffrey enthusiastically, ‘I’d much prefer to walk. You never know what you might see.’ They set off along Nonesuch Street past some very grand houses and as Geoffrey was admiring them he saw what looked like two ugly stone animals perched on the edge of a roof. ‘What are those creatures doing up there?’ he asked Emma. ‘Oh, they’re just gargoyles,’ she said. ‘If you’ve got a very big house and a grand piano and a butler and a carriage with your name on it, the next thing is to hire a gargoyle to sit on the corner and make your house look even more important.’ ‘But what do they do?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘Well, originally they would have lived on the tops of very old buildings like the Unseen University where they sat in the gutters and fed off what came through in the water. Now many of them are purely ornamental and have to have food left out. Some, I’m told, even allow themselves to be painted and made to hold up shields. They’re quite harmless unless you’re a pigeon; they hate pigeons.’ Geoffrey waved up at the gargoyles as they continued on their way and thought he got a wave back. It was not long before they came to a bridge. Geoffrey was amazed at the houses and shops that lined both sides of its crowded carriageway. Some had small rooms sticking out over the river and as Geoffrey watched he saw something fall from one into the river with a splat. He and Emma squeezed between two buildings and looked down on to the sluggish River Ankh
as it crawled its way to the sea. ‘It’s a bit smelly,’ said Geoffrey, ‘and why are those people in the boats holding up umbrellas? It’s not rain— Oh, I see,’ he nodded, as another splash and splatter reached their ears and the river was further enriched in its passage under the busy bridge.1
‘Some people are too mean to pay Sir Harry King to collect their privy buckets and it just goes in the river,’ explained Emma, ‘which makes it very smelly and extremely unpleasant for anyone going under a bridge.’ She added, ‘I think they’re making a law about it.’ ‘Does Sir Harry collect people poo as well as dog poo?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘Sir Harry collects everything; they don’t call him the King of the Golden River for nothing,’ she added. ‘Come along. Let’s go and buy those sweets.’ They entered a funny little shop with advertisements in the window for Jolly Sailor Tobacco and Gumption’s Snuff and a large sign above the door saying SWEETS. Behind the counter was the fattest man Geoffrey had ever seen. He had a stubbly grey moustache, and was wearing a hat with a tassel, and a brightly coloured woollen shawl. What really caught Geoffrey’s attention was the magnificent parrot sitting on his shoulder.
‘Hello, Mister Thwaite,’ said Emma. ‘May I have some Klatchian Delight, please? And what sweets do you like, Geoffrey?’ Geoffrey cast his eye around the shop, which had shelves of sweet jars from floor to ceiling. ‘How about some nutty slack or dragon drops or, if you like, chocolate?’ said Mister Thwaite. ‘I’ve just had a delivery of pig pellets for Hogswatch.’ ‘Wonderful!’ said Geoffrey. ‘And if I don’t eat them all I can put some in my poo collection.’ ‘Your what collection?’ ‘I have a poo museum,’ replied Geoffrey proudly. ‘Well, I never did,’ said Mister Thwaite. ‘You can have this packet of gnoll berries. Goodness knows what’s in them but I can’t shift them for love nor money.’ He turned and reached up to a high shelf. The parrot squawked but continued to watch Geoffrey with a beady eye. As Mister Thwaite turned, Geoffrey noticed that the back of his shawl was encrusted with bird poo. ‘You must be a very lucky man,’ said Geoffrey, ‘to have all that bird poo on you. Could I have a bit of that parrot poo for my museum, please?’ ‘Of course. I like to help a young man with his hobby,’ said Mister Thwaite. And, holding an empty tobacco packet, he let Geoffrey scrape the well-dried encrustation from the fringes of the shawl. Geoffrey put the bags of sweets and lucky parrot poo into his pockets and, having thanked
Mister Thwaite, turned to leave. As he opened the door the parrot suddenly sprang into life, flew to its perch and did one of those little dances that parrots are wont to do and then shouted very loudly, ‘NOW PISS OFF.’ Mister Thwaite smiled. ‘Don’t worry. He only says that if he really likes you,’ he said.
Geoffrey and Emma continued on their journey and before long they found themselves looking up at the most impressive gates Geoffrey had ever seen. As they stood there a change in the wind brought a smell of burning and fireworks that hit the back of his throat and made his eyes water. A shower of small sooty particles floated down around them. ‘That can’t be good,’ said Emma. She pushed the gate open in the manner of someone who knew she would always be welcomed, and they made their way into a yard surrounded by a collection of sheds and bigger stone buildings with thick, fortress-like walls. The roofs, however, looked very insubstantial and, in some cases, very new.
‘Those are the dragon sheds,’ explained Emma. ‘If one of the little dears explodes, the blast is channelled upwards. If we’re lucky we only lose a bit of roof.’ ‘What happens if we’re not so lucky?’ asked Geoffrey, looking anxious.
‘Oh, you’ll be all right,’ she assured him. ‘We’ve got good protective clothing. It’s only the people who forget to wear it who lose their hair and eyebrows, and sometimes their fingers.’ They went into one of the smaller sheds where they met a girl who seemed to be wearing armour from the neck down and held a large helmet in her gloved hands. ‘This is Emma,’ said Emma. ‘Emma, meet Geoffrey.’ ‘Hello, Geoffrey,’ said Emma Two. ‘Let’s get you and your dog kitted up.’ He was lifted up and lowered into big stiff leather trousers that didn’t bend at all, and was given big boots and gloves and a helmet. They even found a small helmet for Widdler, making him look like a snail peering out of its shell.
‘Let’s go,’ said the Emmas in unison, and ushered him from the shed into one of the big stone buildings. At first there didn’t seem much to look at. There was a series of concrete pens with small, grey-green, huddled lumps under piles of sticky ash. ‘Why are they all covered in ash?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘Well, we’ve not cleaned them out yet because Lady Sybil can usually tell what’s wrong with them from the colour and smell of their poo. They’ll have been eating quite the wrong thing.’ ‘What should their poo be like?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘And can I have some for my poo museum?’ ‘Well, like I said, in a healthy dragon there’s hardly any poo at all. Sometimes it’s just a fine ash that floats away in the air.’2 ‘I wish I could get some dragon poo,’ Geoffrey said. ‘I want to get poo from every animal in the world so that people can come to my museum and see it all and be amazed.’ To compensate for the lack of dragon poo thus far Geoffrey was given a baby dragon to hold. It perched on his hand blowing smoke rings and then suddenly, without any warning, deposited a small glowing ember on his gloved palm. Geoffrey couldn’t believe his luck! He closed his fist around it tightly for the rest of the tour in case one of the interchangeable Emmas decided that Lady Sybil needed to inspect it. When they came to leave, it seemed cool enough to surreptitiously transfer to his jacket pocket.
Geoffrey and Emma One set off back home hand in hand, with Widdler following so close to heel that he was often in danger of tripping them up. Geoffrey kept looking up at the grand houses hoping to see a gargoyle. They were not far from home when they reached a very grand mansion indeed with huge curly iron gates and tall stone pillars on either side. His eyes lit up in delight when he noticed that on top of each tall pillar was a genuine gargoyle holding a shield. ‘You must get very bored just sitting up there all day. Would you like a sweet?’ Geoffrey said to one of the gargoyles. ‘It’s more than my job’s worth,’ said the gargoyle,3 ‘and I don’t get off duty until the end of the week. But Old Pediment over at number eight,’ he croaked, ‘is always on the lookout for interesting tidbits. He’s got a sweet tooth too.’ ‘If I leave some sweets on my windowsill at number five do you think he’d find them?’ ‘Doesn’t miss a thing. Old Pediment, he clears all the bird-tables this side of the road and I don’t just mean the birds’ food.’
As they walked away, Emma said to Geoffrey, ‘You are funny. No one I know talks to gargoyles.’ ‘I want to know where they poo. Gargoyle poo would be a very interesting find for my museum.’ Lily opened the door to them when they arrived back at Grand-mama’s house. ‘Wipe your feet on the mat,’ she said, wrinkling her nose in distaste. ‘And who’s got a bonfire going?’ Geoffrey and Emma went into the drawing room to see Grand-mama, who was having a cup of tea. ‘My goodness,’ she said, ‘what is that smell? It’s as if someone’s been letting off fireworks.’ Her eyes went straight to Geoffrey’s jacket. ‘Whatever have you got in your pockets, my boy?’ Geoffrey reluctantly extracted the bags of sweets from one pocket. ‘Now come on, Geoffrey, you know I mean the other pocket.’ ‘It’s baby swamp-dragon poo for my museum,’ said Geoffrey defensively as Emma helped him off with his jacket while Grand-mama extracted the charred ember with the sugar tongs and transferred the hot little nodule to an empty snuff tin. ‘He just laid it in my hand.’
‘Well, let me tell you that you are going to wash those hands before you eat anything, my boy,’ said Grand-mama. ‘I shall also have to buy you a new jacket before we go to the Guild annual luncheon.’ She gave Geoffrey a severe look from top to bottom and continued, ‘Your late uncle Cedric was very much the same. If I remember rightly he had a very large collection of things that looked like other things; one of the largest such collections in the world, I’ve been given to understand.’ She made a tut-tutting noise and added, ‘There’s no doubt about it, incongruity runs in this family. Now I think you should take your new acquisitions down to your museum before it gets too dark.’ Geoffrey made his way down to the end of the garden, where in the dusk he saw the shape of Plain Old Humphrey leaning on a shovel. ‘Hello, young man, what have you been up to today?’ ‘I’ve had a lovely time,’ said Geoffrey. ‘I’ve spoken to a gargoyle and I’ve been to a sweet shop – would you like one? – and visited the dragon sanctuary and guess what I’ve got?’ He opened the snuff tin and showed the contents to Plain Old Humphrey. ‘Ah, that smells a bit like dragons to me. When I was a boy we had a little swamp dragon to light the fires. But one day my dad had a bit of an accident and my mum wouldn’t have them in the house after that.’ ‘It’s my best poo so far,’ said Geoffrey. ‘I must put it somewhere really safe so I can label it up tomorrow morning.’ Later that evening, before he got into bed, Geoffrey remembered to take a few lumps of toffee from the crumpled paper bag and laid them out on the windowsill just in case Old Pediment the gargoyle were to drop by.
Draco nobilis on the other hand is a carnivore. This species is particularly fond of virgins, but knights in armour are a bonus because they add a certain amount of roughage to the diet. Draco nobilis poo is like that of any carnivore, but if knights in armour have featured on the menu in the recent past, the dragons excrete small tin roundels not unlike corned beef, but still in the tin as it were.
A TRIP TO THE MENAGERIE AND CONVERSATION WITH A GARGOYLEGEOFFREY WAS USED to waking up to birdsong at home, and he’d got used to the early morning sounds of Ankh-Morpork, but what woke him this morning was quite different. A grinding of stone on stone and a crunching sound drew him to the window where, to his delight, he saw a very large gargoyle chewing the last of the toffee he’d left out. ‘Don’t go away,’ said Geoffrey. ‘I’m just going to get dressed.’ The gargoyle shuffled along to make room as Geoffrey and Widdler climbed out on to the windowsill to join him. ‘I saw you put that toffee out from across the road. I’ve not had a bit of toffee for a long time, very nice too.’ ‘What do you normally eat?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘Pigeons are good,’ munched the gargoyle and Geoffrey hardly liked to draw his attention to the pigeon sitting on his head wearing a very smug expression. But the gargoyle saw him looking and said, ‘Ah, that’s my decoy; it’s no good getting old if you don’t get artful. The silly buggers fly over thinking it’s a safe roost and Bob’s your uncle! A clever chap over in the Street of Cunning Artificers made it for me. In return I go down there every week or so and get rid of all of the pigeons on his skylight.’1
‘I’d better go down to breakfast; Grand-mama is taking me to the menagerie today. But I hope I’ll see you again,’ said Geoffrey, crawling back through the window. ‘If I can get back to the sweet shop I’ll bring you some more toffee.’ ‘Thank you, but the old grinding teeth are not what they were,’ replied the gargoyle. ‘Cake is a favourite, though, especially fruit cake, but not with nuts, they give me the tweaks.’ ‘There’s lots of cake here,’ said Geoffrey. ‘I’ll put some out for you tonight if I can.’
After breakfast, Geoffrey and Grand-mama set out for the Palace. ‘I think you should find this very interesting,’ said Grand-mama. ‘I’m sorry we can’t take Widdler with us, but they don’t allow dogs where we’re going.’ Geoffrey knew it would be somewhere important because Grand-mama was wearing a large hat that looked like the top of a big boat and Lily had pressed his trousers. After much muttering about the state of them, she’d also polished his shoes. They travelled by coach up Park Lane, across the Isle of Gods and over the Brass Bridge. Geoffrey saw several gargoyles perched up high on the buildings and he leaned out of the window to
wave at them. ‘A gargoyle came to visit me this morning, Grand-mama,’ he said, pulling his head back in the coach. ‘He was very friendly and I’ve promised him some cake.’ ‘Do be very careful, Geoffrey. No wandering around on the roof looking for gargoyle poo; I know that’s what you’re really after.’ The coach pulled up and they entered the Palace grounds by a small side gate. There was a pleasant stroll along a narrow path until they came to a small and mysterious studded door. Without any hesitation Grand-mama gave the end of the bell-pull, which was in the shape of a snake, a tug. Geoffrey moved quickly behind her, just in case. The door creaked open to reveal a short man with a very long beard and a flat-peaked cap. He wore tall rubber boots a bit like the ones that Geoffrey had for rainy days, but these were altogether more substantial, the sort of boot that laughed in the face of (or, come to that, the rear of) any animal’s nervous activity.
The beard, which seemed to have a life of its own, enquired politely as to who they were and what their business was. Grand-mama produced a small card from her pocket. ‘We are here at the personal invitation of Lord Vetinari.’ The keeper stood to attention, saluted, and a large smile broke
the crust between the moustache and beard.
‘Good morning, ma’am. My name is Pontoon, with an emphasis on the “oon”, and I have the privilege of being his lordship’s head keeper. Please do come in, we have been expecting you. What would you like to see first, young man? The largest animal we have here is the Hermit Elephant from Howondaland, and the smallest is the Llamedos Swimming Shrew. We’ve got Acrobatic Meerkats, Counting Camels, a Ring-maned Lion, a Reciprocating Ocelot – be very careful there – and Dancing Bears, to name but a few.’ ‘I would very much like to see the elephants first, please,’ said Geoffrey. The old man tapped a finger to his nose and, in the tone of a connoisseur, said, ‘Very wise choice, young man, everyone should see the elephants.’ As they walked towards a large enclosure Geoffrey started to explain to the keeper about his poo museum. ‘I’d really like to collect some poo from all of your animals. I’ve even brought my own bucket,’ he added. Mister Pontoon scratched his beard, causing a number of unidentified objects to fall out. ‘Well, young man, that is a rare and unusual hobby, but his lordship did say that I was to help you in every way. Your Grand-mama must be a very influential lady. But it wouldn’t be safe for you to go in their cages with your bucket and spade. Besides, all of the poo would get a bit mixed up in just one bucket and you would end up with what we in the industry call miscellaneous poo, and you don’t want that. ‘I’ll ask young Gus – he’s the junior assistant keeper – to get the wheelbarrow out. It’ll be good experience for him.’ He whistled sharply and a boy of about fourteen, with a shock of straw-coloured hair on which was perched, back to front, an old keeper’s hat, emerged from a shed pushing a very official-looking wheelbarrow. He seemed too big for his clothes, with the exception of his boots, which would have fitted a giant. ‘We’ve got some old feed bags,’ said Mister Pontoon, ‘and there’s some waxed-paper bags that my missus puts my sandwiches in. That should do us for now and we can gather your samples as we go, so to speak.’
They followed the boy pushing his barrow to a large enclosure, with a very high fence made of strong iron bars. Inside were a number of tea-cosy-shaped haystacks, some of which seemed to have door-openings, showing a dark interior. Quite suddenly one of the haystacks rose up on four stumpy grey legs and began to wander away. When it stopped a huge pile of poo dropped to the floor with a wet splatty sound. ‘Gosh,’ said Geoffrey, ‘I don’t think I’ve ever seen a poo as big as that before. If Plain Old Humphrey were here he’d want that for his compost heap.’2 Geoffrey and his Grand-mama continued past what they now knew to be elephants to a large cage holding a sulky-looking camel. Unusually, the bars of this cage were horizontal rather than vertical, with large spherical beads threaded at intervals, which the camel listlessly pushed to and fro.
‘That’s a Counting Camel from Djelibeybi,’ said Mister Pontoon. ‘He gets really bored if we don’t keep him occupied. Careful in there, young Gus, don’t spoil the arrangement. You know how bad it gets if you move the decimal point when he’s in the middle of something.’ ‘He does look very bad tempered,’ said Geoffrey. ‘He’ll spit at you as soon as look at you and I don’t think you want to start collecting that,’ said Mister Pontoon. ‘He’s very particular about his floating-point integers. So we’ll move on now, if you don’t mind. Now, look over there: that’s the Coat-Hanger Elk from Nothingfjord. It’s called that because its antlers make wonderful coat-hangers. Shame really, there’s not many left in the wild. If you want to have one you have to obtain a special permit and allow it to live in your wardrobe. It can get a bit whiffy, but you’ll always know where your best suit is.’
‘Ah, I think we’ve timed it just right here,’ said Mister Pontoon. ‘Wait for it … Oh, straight in the bag! Very neat, young Gus. Now, see that pond, we think we’ve got one of the famous Chameleon Alligators from Genua. Could be a log, mind you, because it hasn’t moved in a long while. But every now and then we see a few feathers near it and Bert, one of the other keepers, reckoned he left a pair of rubber boots on the bank over there last week and they went missing.’ Geoffrey peered at the log doubtfully. ‘Don’t you get too close, young Geoffrey, the paperwork can be a real trial and we already owe Igor for sorting out old Bert when he put his— Well, he got too close to the rotating nogo cage and I shall say no more with a lady present. Now, can you hear that noise?’ Geoffrey stopped and listened; in the distance he detected a boingy sort of sound. ‘That comes from the Bouncing Kangaroo enclosure just around the corner. Let’s make our way over. They come all the way from Fourecks, and they think that we don’t know that they’re digging a hole under that trampo-line to try to get home. Won’t get them anywhere, though, his lordship had us build a metal cage under the enclosure.’ Out of the corner of his eye Geoffrey spotted a small hunched-over kangaroo making a furtive dash towards an unfeasibly tall and precarious-looking pile of straw and earth in the corner of the enclosure. Mister Pontoon noticed it too. ‘Catch them on the hop if you can, Gus, there’s a good lad.’ ‘Do the animals often escape?’ asked Geoffrey earnestly, fearful that potential exhibits for his poo collection might be about to hop off over the fence. ‘Not often, but look across there at our troupe of Acrobatic Meerkats. They’re always trying to escape too – them and their three-ringed circus. It’s not even as if they can juggle very well. We could never keep them in their old cage because they’d form themselves into a pyramid, the one at the top would throw himself across the gap and the others would climb over and out of the top. Later on they’d send a little postcard.’
Geoffrey watched the cartwheeling meerkats for a minute. ‘Dreadful show-offs, your meerkats,’ said Mister Pontoon. ‘No, please don’t applaud, it only encourages them. Better be quick in there, Gus, or they’ll start their clown routine and you know what Lord Vetinari thinks about clowns.’ As they walked away, some of the meerkats paraded round the cage holding up a badly painted sign that said: ‘The Incomparable Meerkats’, and underneath: ‘Performances every 5 minits’. ‘Isn’t that amazing?’ said Geoffrey. The keeper shrugged. ‘I don’t think so. Sometimes they spell “performance” wrong.’
As they moved on, Mister Pontoon put his finger to his lips. ‘Now hush, walk as quietly as you can, otherwise you won’t see a thing. You wait outside with the wheelbarrow, Gus, I’ll call you if there’s anything to pick up.’ They entered a darkened shed with a large caged area to one side. ‘Here we have the last breeding pair of Bashful Pandas from the Agatean Empire,’ the keeper whispered. Geoffrey peered into the gloom. He could make out two large shapes sitting at opposite ends of the cage with their backs to the far wall. One of them seemed to be smoking a pipe and the other seemed to be knitting something. ‘We’re not holding our breath,’ said Mister Pontoon, ‘but it’s a funny old world. And you’re in luck – they’ve not got round to hiding their poo yet. Shy about all their bodily functions, they are, and, just like them, their poo comes out in black and white. Come along, Gus, bring in the shovel.’ ‘This must be very rare poo indeed,’ said Geoffrey. ‘It most certainly is,’ said Mister Pontoon, ‘and if they don’t get round to producing a Bashful Panda baby soon there won’t be any more of it. So you take good care of it.’ ‘I certainly will,’ said Geoffrey. ‘Mister Pontoon?’ said Grand-mama. ‘I wonder if I might make a suggestion. Why don’t you just
leave them in peace, you know, with a curtain or something? Or maybe some light music? I have no reason to get coarse with my grandson here, all ears, but I think that might be the way forward, as it were.’ ‘Ooh, are you a biologist, madam?’ ‘No, but I am a married woman and a married woman who is telling you to give these creatures some privacy. Then I guarantee you will reap dividends and, indeed, pandas.’ ‘How did all these animals get here?’ asked Geoffrey inquisitively. ‘They were mostly given as presents to his lordship from visiting indignitaries and ambassadors and the like,’ said Mister Pontoon. ‘A bit silly, really, because I reckon he’d prefer a nice book, but it’s become a bit of a tradition, see. You know, heads of state giving each other animals they don’t want. I can still remember the Sultan of Ymitury turning up with half a dozen creatures bound up in black cloth like oversized skittles. He told us to keep them warm and they would hatch out into giant butterflies. It took us a while to work out that they were his less-favoured concubines.’
‘What’s a concubine?’ asked Geoffrey. Before the keeper could answer, Grand-mama interjected in a voice of thunder, ‘It’s a kind of vegetable.’ ‘Are there any animals that I can feed?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘We’ve got some Woolly Goats from the Trollbone mountains,’ said the keeper. ‘Mind you, it’s not easy to tell them front from back at this time of year. Though old Bert is quite clever with them: he waits until they fart and that gives him a clue as to which end to feed.’
In their enclosure Geoffrey studied the incredibly hairy goats and, being an observant boy, and having a special interest, he looked at the ground and saw a pile of droppings. He duly collected these in his bucket and then walked to the other end with the handful of cabbage leaves the keeper had given him. He was rewarded with a long leathery tongue shooting out of the hairy thatch and taking the leaves out of his hand. ‘There must be an awful lot of poo every day,’ said Geoffrey as the small party walked back towards the gate. ‘The compost heaps would be as big as a mountain if you kept it all.’ ‘Anything we can’t use is taken away by Sir Harry King’s men; his lordship has a daily collection. Sir Harry pays us a bit extra if we keep the lion dung separate, so lucky for you I can give you a sample of that. It’s a bit pongy, mind.’ ‘Do you have a hippo or a wyvern in the Menagerie?’ ‘No,’ said Mister Pontoon, ‘they’re your heraldics, a different kettle of fish altogether, as it were, most exotic. There’s only one place you’ll find them, young Geoffrey, and that is at the Royal College of Heralds. They’ve rebuilt most of it since the fire but it’s a strange old place. You’ll have a job getting in there: you’ve got to be nobby before they’ll even answer the door. Apart from sirs and lords, the only other person I know who can get in is Doughnut Jimmy the vet. He looks after our animals and was called in there to look at their wyvern only last week.’ ‘Thank you very much for helping me, Mister Pontoon,’ said Geoffrey. ‘My pleasure, young man, and it’s made a nice change for young Gus. I’ll get him to pack up your specimens and we’ll put them on top of the carriage because I don’t suppose your Grand-mama will want to travel with that lot inside.’
‘I think we should go and have our picnic in the park; it’s a bit smelly in here, Geoffrey,’ said Grand-mama after they had said their farewells. And so they walked across a large area of lawn and trees, and under one particular tree Geoffrey saw a rather elderly and portly man sitting on a small stool. He was wearing a keeper’s hat but Geoffrey couldn’t see any animals. Geoffrey edged closer and very politely asked the keeper what he was keeping. ‘My job, young sir,’ said the man, ‘is of fundamental importance in this whole menagerie, because I, young sir, am the Re-Director.’ ‘The Re-Director?’ said Geoffrey. ‘That sounds very important. What do you re-direct?’ At Geoffrey’s feet and stretching for quite some distance was a thin stone trough filled with greenish water. ‘That,’ said the old keeper, ‘is one of the greatest achievements in engineering by the late and some would say unlamented B. S. Johnson, engineer, architect and scholar. And that, young sir, is the most unusual and peculiar fish stream in the entire world.’ Geoffrey stood on the edge of the narrow strip and saw a shape in the depths below, slowly moving towards him. ‘Stand back now, young sir,’ said the keeper, rising to his feet as the shape drew near to where he was sitting. ‘This re-directing requires years of experience.’ He picked up off the grass a most peculiar object. It was a large net, quite narrow but with a long and sturdy handle. It fitted perfectly into the channel and with a great effort the keeper plunged the net into the water, levered forth a very large, rectangular fish and then, stepping over the trough and turning hubwards, he placed the fish, this time facing the other way, back into the stream. He heaved the dripping net over his shoulder, lit his pipe and walked slowly to the other end of the stream where there was another small canvas stool with a parasol attached.
‘How often do you have to do this?’ Geoffrey asked the back of the receding figure. ‘Forty-eight and a half times a day, young sir.’ ‘What is the half time?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘Well, the fish and me aren’t getting any younger and so sometimes we just goes halfway. And once a week,’ said the keeper, ‘I do a bit of cleaning out after the fish has done his business.’ ‘So where do you put the business?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘Ah, well, young sir, fish business is not as useful for gardeners as most businesses are, but if you look carefully when you walk away, you will see the trees behind my chairs are slightly bigger than the rest of the trees in the park.’ Before he went to bed that evening Geoffrey carefully put a piece of fruit cake that he’d managed to smuggle up from the kitchen on the windowsill for Old Pediment the gargoyle.
it has been calculated, enough poo to fill the Ankh-Morpork Opera House up to the small trap door in the loft.
A LUNCH AT THE GUILD OF PLUMBERS AND DUNNAKIN DIVERSLIKE ALL CHILDREN, Geoffrey woke at dawn with every switch in his body turned full on. Older people generally check to see that nothing has fallen off in the night. There is always a careful but thorough audit of which limb to get out of bed first so the rest of the body can follow. Geoffrey, however, simply bounded out of bed and, after saying hello to the gleaming Mister Gazunder, went straight to the window to see if the cake had gone. It had, and Geoffrey, being of an observant mind and now informed in the ways of the world of digestion, climbed out on to the ledge to look downwards. He was overjoyed when he saw what he took to be a small deposit on the border of the flowerbed beneath his window. Without a thought he raced down the stairs, past an astonished Hartley, out through the back door – pausing only to pick up his bucket from the top step – and round the corner of the house, looking up until he was standing under his bedroom window. It was only then, looking down, that he realized he was barefoot. Luckily, gargoyle poo so much resembles gravel that you may think of it as gravel. Geoffrey was thankful to see he had not stepped in all of it and there was still enough to scrape up into his bucket. As he made his way back round to the scullery door, finding along the way some long grass on which to wipe his toes, he saw at the end of the garden two burly men hoisting on to their shoulders a pole from which hung a large container. A gentle morning breeze brought a whiff of the privy and he was about to go wandering off following his nose, as it were, when Hartley the cook came to the door and in a kindly voice said, ‘Now you come here, young man. Get washed and dressed and your breakfast will be ready when you come down.’
After breakfast Geoffrey took his bucket of gargoyle poo down to the sheds to put in his museum, hoping to see Plain Old Humphrey. Sure enough, he found the gardener sitting on a bench at the bottom of the garden, carefully cleaning his spade. There was no sign of the men Geoffrey had seen earlier, but there was still a whiff hanging around like a smelly ghost. ‘Plain Old Humphrey? Who were those men here early this morning?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘That was Jimmer and Bob the gongers. They should have been here last night,’ said Plain Old Humphrey, ‘but their cart got clamped down at The Soake so they were running a bit late.’ ‘What do gongers do?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘Jimmer and Bob work for Sir Harry King and they empty all the cesspits and privies around here,’ said Plain Old Humphrey.1 ‘I know about privies, but I don’t know what a cesspit is,’ said Geoffrey, determined to get to the bottom of this mysterious occupation. ‘Well, using these new-fangled lavatory contraptions, like the Deluge Supreme your Grand- mama has installed, means there is a lot of water in with the business. It all goes into a pit where the water can soak away and then every now and then you have to dig out what’s left, and I’m sure your Grand-mama wouldn’t want to do that.’ ‘And it all goes to Sir Harry?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘Yes, Sir Harry has collecting carts waiting all round the city to take this valuable night soil down to his yard.’ ‘I wish I could go to his yard!’ said Geoffrey, enthusiastically. ‘He must have the biggest collection of poo in the world!’
‘Watch out, here’s trouble,’ said Plain Old Humphrey. As he spoke, Lily the maid appeared. ‘Your Grand-mama has been looking all over for you, young man,’ she said to Geoffrey. ‘You’re to come straight inside.’ She turned on her heel and walked away without waiting for a reply. Plain Old Humphrey winked at Geoffrey, took his pipe out of his mouth and poked his tongue out at the retreating figure. Geoffrey giggled but obediently followed Lily into the kitchen where he found his Grand-mama, who was talking to Hartley the cook. ‘Geoffrey and I will be out for lunch, but we will be back for dinner,’ she was saying. ‘Geoffrey, oh there you are, we have been invited to a luncheon at the Guild of Plumbers and Dunnakin Divers by my good friend Sir Charles Lavatory, so you’ll need to look smart. I’ve bought you a new jacket; it’s in your room. Please don’t ruin this one because I’ve had it tailored especially for you.’
Geoffrey ran upstairs and was delighted to find his new jacket had at least eight pockets, and they were all lined with a rubbery material that looked as though nothing could stain or even seep through to the surface. How kind of Grand-mama, he thought. I could collect a lot of interesting stuff wearing this jacket. Their carriage took them up Nonesuch Street, along Park Lane, past the Opera House and across the Brass Bridge to the Street of Alchemists, where the coach stopped outside the grand entrance to the Plumbers’ Guild, which had a bell-pull that looked just like the chain and lever on Grand-mama’s water closet and a door knocker that was shaped like a long-handled spade with a rounded end. Grand as the entrance was, nothing prepared Geoffrey for the sight that greeted them when they went in. The room was vast and the walls were completely covered from floor to ceiling with shiny patterned tiles. There were large pictures, also made up of tiles, of serious men with expressions of stern contentment and jobs well done. ‘How nice to see you, Maud, and this must be your grandson Geoffrey.’ A tall, grey-haired, distinguished-looking man with mutton-chop whiskers approached, greeting Grand-mama with a bow, and a smile for Geoffrey.
‘This, Geoffrey, is Sir Charles Lavatory,’ said Grand-mama. Geoffrey shook Sir Charles’s hand politely like a pupil meeting his master. ‘Now, Geoffrey, in accordance with the rules of the Guild of Plumbers and Dunnakin Divers you need to wash your hands, and I shall do the same.’ Sir Charles pointed to a long line of shiny sinks along one wall, many in constant use as one plumber greeted another. The air had the deliciously sharp smell of lye soap. Ablutions completed, Sir Charles then led Geoffrey and Grand-mama into a lounge where a number of other gentlemen were seated together in small groups. ‘Sir Charles,’ said Geoffrey. ‘Do you mind if I ask whether you like having the name of Lavatory?’ For a moment the hubbub of noise from conversations around them fell silent as the whole room listened. Every eye was watching Sir Charles, whose face was at first blank and then all smiles. ‘What an excellent question!’ he cried. ‘To tell you the truth, young man, as you may expect, I was teased a lot when I went to school, but as they say, that which does not kill you makes you stronger. And so, as soon as I could, with the help of my late father, I set to work to make the Lavatory
the marble marvel of the age and a boon and blessing to all mankind. I can truly say that I have ended up flushed with pride, now knowing that the name is associated with satisfaction and ease.’ To his surprise, Geoffrey saw a small tear form in the corner of Sir Charles’s eye as he continued: ‘There are times of an evening when I go down to the workshops, all silent, and look at the work that’s going on on this year’s model, with the seat-warmer and the patented straining bars, and I can’t help thinking that I’ve done my best for mankind. I wonder how many men with hands cleaner than mine can say that.’ Every seat in the house was vacated as the plumbers got to their feet and clapped their scrupulously clean hands together until the echoes piled up. When it had all died away and conversations around the room restarted, Sir Charles took Geoffrey by the hand and said, ‘Now, come with me, Geoffrey, there is someone here whom I know you would like to meet and who, I think, would very much like to meet you as well.’ They walked into the large dining room which was filled with tables laid ready for lunch. Already sitting at one was a large, red-faced man with short, wiry grey hair and a grizzled beard. Geoffrey couldn’t help noticing the big golden rings on every finger and the large golden chain around his neck. ‘I’d like to introduce you, young man, to Sir Harry King,’ said Sir Charles. Geoffrey was speechless with delight and awe. ‘It’s not like you to have nothing to say,’ said Grand-mama, chivvying him forward. ‘I must tell you, Sir Harry, Geoffrey has a very keen interest in something dear to your heart, that is to say, muck in all its various ramifications.’ ‘Then come and sit beside me, young Geoffrey, and tell me all about it,’ said Sir Harry, in a gruff voice. Sir Harry was a man with daughters and granddaughters, none of whom really wanted to know anything about the source of the family fortune that they enjoyed. ‘Well,’ began Geoffrey, ‘I am very interested in poo and I’ve got this museum in Grand-mama’s garden with thirty-seven different sorts of poo and I’m trying to collect specimens from every animal in the world so that people will come and visit and they’ll be able to see rare and unusual poo.’ ‘Well,’ said Sir Harry, ‘I am so pleased to find a young man like you keen to make his way in the world, seeing that so many young men are skivers and slackers. But I have to tell you, Geoffrey, that I’m not sure there’s a living to be made out of simply collecting poo samples. I made my money in the bulk market by collecting poo from people who simply wanted to get rid of it – even paid me to take it away – and then selling it on to other people who could find a use for it.’ ‘Do you collect from the Royal College of Heralds?’ ‘I expect so,’ said Sir Harry, who had an instinct for when a question was more than just a polite enquiry. ‘Was there something in particular you wanted?’ ‘Well, I need wyvern poo and hippo poo. Mister Pontoon said that only sirs and lords and nobs can get in there, and sometimes the vet is allowed in when they need help with the wyvern.’ ‘I think I can help you there,’ said Sir Harry with a smile. ‘In fact, I have an appointment to visit them this afternoon to discuss my coat of arms. And if your Grand-mama allows it, you could always
come with me.’ He winked at Grand-mama. ‘May I go, Grand-mama, may I?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘Please? Please? Please?’ ‘If you promise to behave yourself and do what Sir Harry tells you and not bother the staff too much, then I think it would be fine.’ At this point large tureens of soup were brought to the table, shaped very much like outsize chamber pots emblazoned with the guild’s coat of arms. For the first time Geoffrey looked properly around the room. A large sideboard ran along one wall with great silver candlesticks and buckets and strange-shaped bowls and platters laid upon it. More pictures of serious men with forbidding beards lined the wall and there was a list of names painted in gold paint under the heading ‘Presidents of the Guild’.
A magnificent pie, that was served in a very deep dish reminiscent of a bucket, with lots of good gravy, followed the soup. But for Geoffrey the real treat was a huge trifle, just like Cook made, but presented here in a crystal glass dish modelled on one of Sir Charles’s recent creations. ‘Now, Geoffrey, before you go off with Sir Harry,’ Grand-mama warned, ‘I think you ought to visit the cloakroom.’ Geoffrey went in the direction indicated and found a large mahogany door with brass handles and a sign saying ‘Gentlemen’. Inside, shining white tiles covered the walls, floor and ceiling. Geoffrey felt as though he were in a giant upturned sink. A row of hand-basins decorated with flowers ran along one wall, and opposite them stood a row of cubicles. Inside these were water closets grander even than Grand-mama’s, with huge brass cisterns above flowery china bowls and polished copper pipes. Geoffrey washed his hands with the soap provided, noticing that even that had the guild coat of arms on it, then dried them on the spotless white fluffy towel.
‘That’s a very grand cloakroom,’ he said to Sir Harry as he emerged. ‘I’ll tell you this, young man,’ said Sir Harry. ‘The men who do the dirtiest jobs are always the cleanest whenever that is possible, and it is only right they should have the very best for themselves.’ ‘Goodness!’ said Geoffrey. ‘I expect that means that you must have an even grander cloakroom.’ ‘Personally, I’m not too worried,’ said Harry, ‘but Lady King has what she calls her en suites and I’m not allowed in the house without walking through a tray of disinfectant. Now, it’s coming up to the time of my appointment at the Royal College of Heralds,’ he said, turning to Grand-mama. ‘I’ll drop your boy home when we’re done, if that’s all right, ma’am. It’s just around the corner from you.’ They travelled in Sir Harry’s coach, which was painted a dark and glossy green with the letters H and K in shiny gold leaf on the doors. Fortunately for Geoffrey there was enough ventilation for him to escape the very worst of Harry King’s very large cigar.2
As they turned the corner by the Palace Sir Harry remarked, ‘See that, Geoffrey? My lads collect not far short of a tonne a week there. Not much paperwork to speak of because his lordship expects his employees to bring their own – and he expects me to do the collecting pro bono.’ ‘What does pro bono mean?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘For nothing, lad; free, gratis, goodwill. Still, mustn’t grumble. At least we’ve got a ruler who understands the worth of your working man.’ They had now reached Pseudopolis Yard, and, gesturing towards the Opera House, Sir Harry continued: ‘Even though the performers don’t eat very much, that place gets through so much fizzy wine it’s a golden river in its own right, and that, my boy, is why they call me King of the Golden River.’ ‘Sorry, Sir Harry,’ said Geoffrey. ‘I don’t know what you mean.’
Harry King smiled and said, ‘Well, lad, there’s poo, isn’t there? And there’s piss! And, to tell you the truth, I started my career leaving buckets outside every public house for people to piss in, and me and my lads would take them away when they were full. And we would sell it. Amazing stuff. I mean, it’s almost alchemical really. It’s astonishing what you can get out of it, even explosives if you’re careful – but don’t worry about that yourself, of course, it never actually happens while you’re doing it.’
As the journey progressed, every now and then Sir Harry would bang on the roof of the coach with his stick and give the driver instructions to either detour round the back of a building or turn off into an alley and stop near one of his collection points, where he would lean out of the window to make sure everything was in order. He seemed to know everyone by name and his gruff voice cut through the clamour of the street straight into the un-fragrant ears of his employees. ‘Just you clean up that spillage, Jake,’ he shouted to a young man trying to kick something into the gutter. ‘That’s money straight down the drain, that is!’ Just as the Royal College of Heralds came into view in the distance, Sir Harry said: ‘And after the piss pots I realized that there was money to be made in the things that people were throwing away. Everything. There’s always someone who could use something, and they have to get it from Harry King.’ They drew up at the large green gates, stepped down from the coach and rang the bell. A small wicket gate in the main door was opened by a liveried porter who asked them their business. ‘I have an appointment with the Herald, smart boy,’ said Sir Harry, taking his cigar out of his mouth. ‘To discuss the progress of my coat of arms.’ ‘Which herald would that be?’ asked the doorman, seeming a little unnerved. ‘Search me,’ said Harry. ‘Something like, er, reddish breakfast roll?’ The porter let them into the courtyard and Geoffrey looked around. It was much smaller than he expected, but quite smelly. In the middle was a muddy pond with a couple of hippos wallowing in it, and a small owl was perched on the handle of an old broom leaning against the wall. ‘If you would like to come this way, Sir Harold,’ said the returning porter, ‘we have a design mapped out for your approval. And is there anything we can do to help your young friend?’ he asked, eyeing Geoffrey.
‘Oh, I expect he’ll find something to do around here, he likes the animals,’ said Sir Harry, giving Geoffrey a big wink. ‘Very studious boy, this young lad, very interested in what you gentlemen would call, I suspect, animal excrement.’ ‘I’ll let old Joseph keep an eye on the young man. He cleans the yard for us and knows his way around all the pens,’ said the porter, leading Sir Harry away. A small elderly man, his head bent forward, emerged slowly from a shed and, transferring the owl to his shoulder, took hold of the broom, which he used as a support to walk across the yard. ‘Can I help you clean the animals’ cages?’ asked Geoffrey, seeing a definite poo opportunity.
‘Well, I’ve been round the hippos,’ said the old man, ‘but they’ll probably start again soon. You could give me a hand with the wyvern if you like, he always needs scraping out.’ Geoffrey and the old man walked towards a cage where a miserable-looking creature lay slumped on damp straw. ‘Here, use this,’ said the old man, handing Geoffrey a flat wooden shovel. Just scrape his doings into that bucket there.’
Geoffrey did as instructed and contrived at the same time to get a small amount of the surprisingly green poo into one of his lined pockets. They wandered slowly back towards the hippos. ‘Oh no, here we go, look out,’ said Joseph. ‘Mind your back against the wall, just stand with me in the corner here and we should be all right.’ Geoffrey watched with amazement as one of the hippos emerged from the pond and started whirling his short tail round like a windmill, spraying poo in a wide arc.3 ‘Goodness, do they always do that?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘Mostly they do,’ said the old man. ‘I cleans up what I can, but sometimes I can’t reach because it goes so high.’ Geoffrey looked at the wall behind him and sure enough there were lumps of dried hippo poo plastered across the stones above him. The old man pushed the broom across the yard. ‘I’ll move what I can now,’ he said, ‘because once it sets it’s a bugger to shift.’ Geoffrey managed to dislodge a dried lump and secrete it in another of his jacket pockets. He looked hopefully at the morpork still sitting on the old man’s shoulder. The owl, somehow knowing what was required, hunched down and obliged by doing a poo, which landed on the old man’s back. ‘Oh dear,’ said Geoffrey, suppressing a smile, ‘that owl’s done a poo on your jacket. Would you like me to wipe it off?’ He was just scraping his morpork specimen into yet another pocket when Sir Harry emerged into the yard. ‘Ready to go, Geoffrey?’ Sir Harry asked, taking in the scene. ‘Yes, thank you,’ said Geoffrey. And so they climbed into the coach and swiftly set off for Nonesuch Street. ‘Well, you certainly take your hobby seriously, young man,’ said Sir Harry. ‘I like a boy with purpose. How would you like to visit my yard tomorrow? I’ll send a coach to pick you up bright and early and we can go down the river together in my launch.’
Grand-mama came to the door as they arrived back home. ‘That is most kind of you, Sir Harry,’ she said, when Sir Harry proposed tomorrow’s outing. ‘I know Geoffrey has become very interested in your enterprise while he has been staying here in Ankh-Morpork, and as his visit’s coming to an end it’s a very good opportunity for him. Geoffrey, I think you probably need to take your new acquisitions into your museum, don’t you? And emphatically refrain from leaving them anywhere in the house,’ she added, her nose twitching in distaste. ‘And while you’re there ask Plain Old Humphrey to help you wash out your pockets with Doctor Painforth’s Hygienic Restorative.’
AN ADVENTURE WITH SIR HARRY KINGTHE DOORBELL RANG at 9 a.m. and Geoffrey raced to pick up his jacket and find Widdler’s lead. Sir Harry was standing outside on the top step, smoking a fat cigar and wearing a tall stovepipe hat and a coat with a velvet collar. He greeted Geoffrey with a wide smile and a puff of smoke. ‘Are you ready to see Harry’s world, young man? We’ll walk down to the Linnet Landing today; it’s a lovely morning and it’s no distance.’
‘Please may I bring Widdler?’ asked Geoffrey hopefully, indicating the little dog, who was wagging his tail expectantly. ‘Good name for a dog that,’ said Sir Harry with a laugh. ‘I don’t see why not, but be sure you keep him on a lead. And any little deposit he makes on my property belongs to me, especially if it’s white. The tanners love white,’ he said with a wink. As the trio walked up Nonesuch Street Sir Harry kept a close eye on the ground, using his stick to turn over the occasional pile of leaves in the gutter. Off in the distance a boy was assiduously scraping something into a bucket. As they approached, Geoffrey recognized Louis and waved at him. ‘That’s my friend Louis! I helped him collect dog poo in the park. He works for you, doesn’t he?’ ‘Yes, good lad that, works hard and knows his stuff. He’ll go far. Here, Louis, go back up to number sixty-four, there’s a little white pearl there as bright as a penny. And you know what, it’s got your name on it. Be quick before some other bugger gets it.’ ‘Thank you, Sir Harry,’ said Louis, disappearing up the road. They reached the river where Sir Harry’s boat, Lady Euphemia, was moored at the landing. It was a large rowing boat with three liveried oarsmen and a coxswain at the stern. At the bow was a
covered area with several seats, and amidships several large steel-lined wooden bins with a collection of nets, hooks and grappling irons alongside. ‘Just in case I see anything along the way I think should be mine,’ said Sir Harry, lighting another cigar. They cast off, the coxswain negotiating the craft into the main channel of the river. Sir Harry changed his hat for a nautical peaked cap emblazoned with the word ‘captain’ and a small embroidered anchor. He took the large seat in the centre, all the while looking around to see who and what was floating in his vicinity. There was a bell beside him so he could attract the coxswain’s attention to give him instructions, via a speaking tube, as to any change of course.
Geoffrey had never travelled in a boat before and to be there with Sir Harry was his best adventure yet. There was a lot to see: the river was very busy with barges and small ferries and water taxis. He reached over and made to dangle his fingers in the brown sludge. ‘I’d keep your hands out of the water if I were you,’ warned Sir Harry. ‘Are you enjoying youself?’ ‘Oh, yes,’ said Geoffrey. ‘At home I don’t get to see anything like this.’ ‘So what do you do to amuse yourself?’ asked Sir Harry. ‘Well, I’ve got lots of toys. I like playing with my soldiers and Papa bought me a Captain Carrot last Hogswatch, though I really wanted the Omnian Quisition game.’ ‘When I was a lad we had to make our own amusement,’ said Harry. ‘On rainy days if we couldn’t play foot-the-ball and if we were lucky, and in the right place at the right time, we might spot a brace of floaters coming down in the gutters. Oh, we used to have some fun wagering which one would hit the grating first. Like men-o’-war they were, a convoy of pure delight for us kids. We called it poo sticks.’ As they approached the Ankh Bridge the coxswain shouted, ‘Umbers up, lads.’ The oarsmen, who could not see where they were going, but only where other people had been, without breaking their rhythm pulled up a large tarpaulin canopy over their heads. ‘Folks think it’s funny to take a potty shot at me and my boat,’ said Sir Harry. ‘They didn’t laugh so much the day I took a marksman with a crossbow along for the ride. There’s still a few fools that can’t sit comfortably for trying it on with Harry King.’ He saw the expression on Geoffrey’s face and said, ‘Don’t worry, it was only rock salt. They’ll get better when it works off.’
They continued downriver, where on either side there were tall warehouses and queues of barges waiting to be unloaded. Large sailing ships were anchored by the wharves, and lighters and other small craft darted to and fro on the scummy, barely moving water. Occasionally, a warning shout of ‘Watch out below’ was to be heard as the stevedores scurried over a ship like ants. Suddenly Sir Harry leapt to his feet. ‘By Offler’s tooth, lad, we’ve got a couple,’ he cried, pointing out a pair of floaters. ‘Look, there, I’ll bet you a dollar to a penny that the one nearer the bank will hit that wall first.’
With a practised eye they both studied the movement of their movements in the current. ‘Ah, well, I reckon that one’s yours, lad; I’ll settle up with you later. And thank you very much for letting an old man revisit his boyhood for a while.’ As they rowed through the ancient portal of the River Gate, Sir Harry was hailed by a group of watchmen who were huddled smoking in the lee of one of the old battlements. ‘Any chance of an extra pick-up, Sir Harry?’ one of them shouted. ‘Trap four is full and some of the lads had a Klatchian last night.’ ‘What? I’m the bloody boss, ain’t I,’ said Harry, angrily. ‘There’s one of my lighters along in about fifteen minutes, they’ll help you out.’ Outside the city walls the view changed to ramshackle sheds and old farmhouses, reedy swamps and a tow-path. ‘Not far now,’ said Sir Harry. ‘You can just see the top of my biggest heap, over there.’
Geoffrey looked afresh at what he’d taken to be a small hill in the distance. As they drew nearer
he could see smoke rising, and the general miasma of smells grew much more concentrated. They came to what looked like a small city of shacks and lean-tos. ‘I let some of my workers live there free,’ said Sir Harry. ‘It means they’re always willing to make an effort and squeeze out the last drop, so to speak, and they’re never late for work.’ The boat turned towards a landing quay where the oarsmen helped Geoffrey, who was carrying Widdler under his arm, to disembark. ‘Now hold my hand, lad,’ said Sir Harry. ‘There’s a lot going on; you need to keep your wits about you.’ A maze of moving belts criss-crossed the vast yard and carts were being loaded and unloaded from various bins and heaps of rubbish. Above Geoffrey’s head pulleys with rows of buckets rattled along on heavy chains. The whole world around him seemed to be moving and, from the stink, Geoffrey guessed it was mainly poo on the move. There were two golems working on giant treadmills and more golems and trolls and humans and goblins working at the moving belts. Every now and then one of them would reach out, pick something off the belt and put it into one of several bins alongside them. Gnolls, with brushes and buckets and wearing muzzles over their mouths to stop them eating everything in sight – including the brush – were clearing anything that fell from the great creaking edifice. Geoffrey and Sir Harry climbed some steep stairs to Sir Harry’s office, which was like a crow’s nest with windows all around, designed so that he could see everything that was going on in every corner of his empire.
‘I’ve a couple of jobs I need to attend to,’ said Sir Harry, ‘so I’ll get my foreman to give you a
guided tour and I’ll join you later.’ Sir Harry opened one of the windows and, looking down, shouted, ‘Barker? Come on up here if you please, I’ve a job for you.’ He then held out a pair of stout waders. ‘Right, you better put these boots on, Geoffrey, and it’s probably best if you leave little Widdler in my office. I’ve got dogs down there that would have him for lunch.’ A short man with a broad grin but unsmiling, steely eyes came up the steps to the office. He was wearing a flat cap, a much-patched tweedy jacket, a big leather apron tied up with string and long boots. He looked at Geoffrey as if calculating how much he’d be worth in his component parts. ‘Would you show my young friend around the works for me, Barker? He’s a keen student of the world of waste. Make sure he comes to no harm and keep him well away from the thaumic dump,’ warned Sir Harry as he picked up his overcoat and disappeared down the stairs. ‘What’s the thaumic dump, Mister Barker?’ asked Geoffrey, as they descended into the maelstrom of the busy yard. ‘That’s where we store waste from the University. We have to keep it in a lead-lined pit or it gets out and crawls all over the place. Sir Harry doesn’t mind having it here because it generates so much heat, so it’s never cold down here, even in winter. Admittedly things walk around on their own, but I suppose that’s progress, that is.’ ‘Where exactly is it?’ asked Geoffrey, looking around keenly. ‘More than my job’s worth to take you there,’ said Barker, shaking his head. ‘We’ll start at goods inwards, shall we? You stay close beside me, don’t talk to anyone and don’t pick up anything. And I mean anything, right?’ They made their way, through large gates guarded by trolls and big fierce dogs, to the riverside, where men were shovelling the cargo from the barges into the backs of carts. ‘Right, as you see, most solid waste comes in by river these days and it’s all taken by cart to the moving belts for sorting.’ Geoffrey’s eyes were everywhere. ‘How do you know where it’s all come from?’ he asked. ‘Barge-master’s got a docket, but we can usually tell by the colour and smell. After you’ve worked here a few years you get to know if it’s from the privies in the Shades or down The Soake or from the Park Lane cesspits. It’s all down to diet in the end: what goes in must come out. This barge is from the Cable Street area, that’s mostly dwarfs, very concentrated and compact, needs to stand a bit before we can use it. The other problem is that some of the deep-downers use fine chain-mail for the paperwork and if a few links drop in and aren’t picked out it causes merry hell with the grinding machine.’ They walked back into the yard and Barker pointed to a covered area where several people with clipboards were walking up and down a long trestle table making notes and occasionally sniffing the contents of long-handled, saucer-like containers. ‘Over there are the nosers,’ he said. ‘They can tell, almost to the street, where the stuff comes from and what’s in it, then they can blend the right mix to go to the tanners or the dyers or perfume makers or whatever. Clever blokes. And you see that big heap of fish bones? That’s come from the Temple of Offler; it’s been a big feast day up there. And
over here is the remains of last year’s beetroot festival that the folks from Uberwald staged. The tanners had a real problem with pink leather until we separated it out for them.’
‘What happens to the stuff from the Menagerie?’ asked Geoffrey. ‘We keep that separate too, that comes under exotics, along with the stuff from the College of Heralds. Good thing is the elephant poo is bagged up and sold for compost as soon as it comes in, otherwise it’d take over the place.’ As Geoffrey and Barker walked along by one of the moving belts, Sir Harry joined them again. He’d taken off his hat and overcoat and was wearing a brown cotton smock with a row of cigars in the top pocket, a flat cap and leather boots. ‘I hope you’re impressed by what you’ve seen, lad?’ he asked. Before Geoffrey could answer, a dwarf climbed up to a platform in the centre of the yard and blew an enormous horn. ‘That’s old Helmhammerhand sounding the shift change,’ said Sir Harry, looking at his watch. ‘It must be time for a spot of lunch. Right, young lad, let’s go and see what we have to eat today. On your way up to my office use the facilities. Here’s the key, make sure you lock it after you.’ In this lavatory, Geoffrey was interested to see there was a large wad of old newspaper hanging on a hook; but the soap was scented and the towel was clean. He smiled and thought: Sir Harry King doesn’t waste anything.
The moment Geoffrey arrived back in the office Sir Harry lifted a large wicker hamper on to his desk, pulled out a packet of sandwiches and two slices of cake, and passed them across. ‘And here’s a bottle of lemonade and a glass, Geoffrey,’ said Sir Harry. ‘Are you going to have some?’ asked Geoffrey politely. ‘No, lad, I’m having a bottle of beer. As for food, I have to tell you, young man, that what I like most is leftovers. I love leftovers and my good lady wife, who has Cook send lunch up every day, has trained her in the art of creating leftovers without the necessity of the posh meal beforehand. I’ve got cold mutton chops with Merkle and Stingbat’s very fine brown sauce. Lovely! Tuck in, lad, and then I’ll get you taken home.’ ‘Thank you very much indeed, Sir Harry,’ said Geoffrey, finishing every drop of his lemonade so that there would be no leftover. ‘It’s been a really interesting day and I think I must have seen more poo than any other boy in the world!’ ‘Well, then, here’s a present for you,’ said Sir Harry. ‘I owe you a dollar for the poo-sticks race, and no doubt young Widdler has been leaving me a few presents around the place, so this here paperweight is a very special item indeed. They call them Pearls of the Pavement; I got young Derek Proust to do me a one-off.’ He handed Geoffrey a perfect replica of a small white dog turd in which a large gold dollar was embedded. ‘Put this in your museum, lad, it’s the only one of its kind and worth a bob or two. I’ve enjoyed our time together, Geoffrey, and if you ever want to come and work for me I’d take you like a shot. You’d have to start at the bottom, though,’ he said with a wink.
He escorted Geoffrey to where his coach was waiting. ‘Take the boy home now,’ he ordered the coachman. ‘And make sure you see him in the door.’ Geoffrey thanked Sir Harry again and waved from the coach until he was out of sight. As they passed the River Gate guard-house on their way back into the city, Geoffrey was pleased to see one of Harry King’s carts parked outside. They drove through a busy market and Geoffrey noticed a horse stop in the road. After a day spent with Sir Harry, he had no hesitation in politely asking the coachman to halt so that he could gather some fresh horse apples for Plain Old Humphrey to put on the roses.
When they got home, while the coachman waited, Widdler relieved himself on the gatepost then Geoffrey picked him up and carried him up the steps to the front door. To his great surprise and delight it was opened by his Mama even before he’d pulled the bell. ‘I’ve been looking out for you, Geoffrey!’ she cried. ‘I’ve missed you so much.’
Geoffrey knew he was theoretically too old for a kiss but he threw himself into her arms and she gathered him up. Over her shoulder he saw Grand-mama holding a very young baby. ‘This is your new sister Holly,’ said Grand-mama. ‘She’s very pretty, but she smells a bit. I’ll get Nanny to change her, shall I?’ Geoffrey looked at his Mama and Grand-mama. ‘Can I help?’ he asked, picking up his bucket.
The End Now don’t forget to wash your hands …
TRANSWORLD PUBLISHERS 61–63 Uxbridge Road, London W5 5SA A Random House Group Company www.transworldbooks.co.uk First published in Great Britain in 2012 by Doubleday an imprint of Transworld Publishers Copyright © Terry and Lyn Pratchett and The Discworld Emporium 2012 Illustrations by Peter Dennis Discworld® and Unseen University® are trademarks registered by Terry Pratchett Terry Pratchett and the partnership known as The Discworld Emporium have asserted their right under the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988 to be identified as the authors of this work. This book is a work of fiction and, except in the case of historical fact, any resemblance to actual persons, living or dead, is purely coincidental. A CIP catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library. Version 1.0 Epub ISBN 9781448127221 ISBN 9780857521217 This ebook is copyright material and must not be copied, reproduced, transferred, distributed, leased, licensed or publicly performed or used in any way except as specifically permitted in writing by the publishers, as allowed under the terms and conditions under which it was purchased or as strictly permitted by applicable copyright law. Any unauthorized distribution or use of this text may be a direct infringement of the author’s and publisher’s rights and those responsible may be liable in law accordingly. Addresses for Random House Group Ltd companies outside the UK can be found at: www.randomhouse.co.uk The Random House Group Ltd Reg. No. 954009 2 4 6 8 10 9 7 5 3 1
Elric of Melniboné, last of the emperors of a once mighty land, exiled bearer of the sword of deathpower called Stormbringer, found a ship waiting for him on a mist-wreathed alien seashore.
When he boarded the mysterious vessel, he learned from its shadowy captain that he was to undertake a strange quest, side by side with other heroes from other times. For this ship sailed no earthly waters. These warriors and champions fought sorcerers and demons in a journey spanning seas that seemed to connect not continents and coastlines but other eras and different worlds. For they were, all of them, sailors on the seas of fate.
The Sailor on the Seas of FateBook Two of the Elric Saga by Michael Moorcock
Book ONESAILING TO THE FUTURE
. . . and leaving his cousin Yyrkoon sitting as regent upon the Ruby Throne of Melnibonè, leaving his cousin Cymoril weeping for him and despairing of his ever returning, Elric sailed from Imrryr, the Dreaming City, and went to seek an unknown goal in the worlds of the Young Kingdoms where Melnibonèans were, at best, disliked.
THE CHRONICLE OF THE BLACK SWORD
IIt was as if the man stood in a vast cavern whose walls and roof were comprised of gloomy, unstable colors which would occasionally break and admit rays of light from the moon. That these walls were mere clouds massed above mountains and ocean was hard to believe, for all that the moonlight pierced them, stained them and revealed the black and turbulent sea washing the shore on which the man now stood.
Distant thunder rolled; distant lightning flickered. A thin rain fell. And the clouds were never still. From dusky jet to deadly white they swirled slowly, like the cloaks of men and women engaged in a trancelike and formalistic minuet: the man standing on the shingle of the grim beach was reminded of giants dancing to the music of the faraway storm and felt as one must feel who walks unwittingly into a hall where the gods are at play. He turned his gaze from the clouds to the ocean.
The sea seemed weary. Great waves heaved themselves together with difficulty and collapsed as if in relief, gasping as they struck sharp rocks. The man pulled his hood closer about his face and he looked over his leathern shoulder more than once as he trudged closer to the sea and let the surf spill upon the toes of his knee-length black boots. He tried to peer into the cavern formed by the clouds but could see only a short distance. There was no way of telling what lay on the other side of the ocean or, indeed, how far the water extended. He put his head on one side, listening carefully, but could hear nothing but the sounds of the sky and the sea. He sighed. For a moment a moonbeam touched him and from the white flesh
of his face there glowed two crimson, tormented eyes; then darkness came back. Again the man turned, plainly fearing that the light had revealed him to some enemy. Making as little sound as possible, he headed toward the shelter of the rocks on his left.
Elric was tired. In the city of Ryfel in the land of Pikarayd he had naively sought acceptance by offering his services as a mercenary in the army of the governor of that place. For his foolishness he had been imprisoned as a Melnibonèan spy (it was obvious to the governor that Elric could be nothing else) and had but recently escaped with the aid of bribes and some minor sorcery.
The pursuit, however, had been almost immediate. Dogs of great cunning had been employed and the governor himself had led the hunt beyond the borders of Pikarayd and into the lonely, uninhabited shale valleys of a world locally called the Dead Hills, in which little grew or tried to live.
Up the steep sides of small mountains, whose slopes consisted of gray, crumbling slate, which made a clatter to be heard a mile or more away, the white-faced one had ridden. Along dales all but grassless and whose river- bottoms had seen no water for scores of years, through cave- tunnels bare of even a stalactite, over plateaus from which rose cairns of stones erected by a forgotten folk, he had sought to escape his pursuers, and soon it seemed to him that he had left the world he knew forever, that he had crossed a supernatural frontier and had arrived in one of those bleak places of which he had read in the legends of his people, where once Law and Chaos had fought each other to a stalemate, leaving their battleground empty of life and the possibility of life.
And at last he had ridden his horse so hard that its heart had burst and he had abandoned its corpse and continued on foot, panting to the sea, to this narrow beach, unable to go farther forward and fearing to return lest his enemies should be lying in wait for him.
He thought that he would give much for a boat now. It would not be long before the dogs discovered his scent and led their masters to the beach. He shrugged. Best to die here alone, perhaps, slaughtered by those who did not even know his name. His only regret would be that Cymoril would wonder why he had not returned at the end of the year.
He had no food and few of the drugs which had of late sustained his energy. Without renewed energy he could not contemplate working a sorcery which might conjure for him some means of crossing the sea and making, perhaps, for the Isle of the Purple Towns where the people were least unfriendly to Melnibonèans.
It had been only a month since he had left behind his court and his queen-to-be, letting Yyrkoon sit on the throne of Melnibonè until his return. He had thought he might learn more of the human folk of the Young Kingdoms by mixing with them, but they had rejected him either with outright hatred or wary and insincere humility. Nowhere had he found one willing to believe that a Melnibonèan (and they did not know he was the emperor) would willingly throw in his lot with the human beings who had once been in thrall to that cruel and ancient race. And now, as he stood beside a bleak sea feeling trapped and already defeated, he knew himself to be alone in a malevolent universe, bereft of friends and purpose, a useless, sickly anachronism, a fool brought low by his own insufficiencies of character, by his profound inability to believe wholly in the tightness or the wrongness of anything at all. He lacked faith in his race, in
his birthright, in gods or men, and above all he lacked faith in himself. His pace slackened; his hand fell upon the pommel of his black runesword Stormbringer, the blade which had so recently defeated its twin, Mournblade, in the fleshy chamber within a sunless world of Limbo. Stormbringer, seemingly half-sentient, was now his only companion, his only confidant, and it had become his neurotic habit to talk to the sword as another might talk to his horse or as a prisoner might share his thoughts with a cockroach in his cell.
“Well, Stormbringer, shall we walk into the sea and end it now?” His voice was dead, barely a whisper. “At least we shall have the pleasure of thwarting those who follow us.” He made a halfhearted movement toward the sea, but to his fatigued brain it seemed that the sword murmured, stirred against his hip, pulled back. The albino chuckled. “You exist to live and to take lives. Do I exist, then, to die and bring both those I love and hate the mercy of death? Sometimes I think so. A sad pattern, if that should be the pattern. Yet there must be more to all this ”
He turned his back upon the sea, peering upward at the monstrous clouds forming and reforming above his head, letting the light ram fall upon his face, listening to the complex, melancholy music which the sea made as it washed over rocks and shingle and was carried this way and that by conflicting currents. The rain did little to refresh him. He had not slept at all for two nights and had slept hardly at all for several more. He must have ridden for almost a week before his horse collapsed.
At the base of a damp granite crag which rose nearly thirty feet above his head, he found a depression in the ground in which he could squat and be protected from the worst of the wind and the rain. Wrapping his heavy leather cloak tightly about him, he eased himself into the hole and was immediately asleep. Let them find while he slept. He wanted no warning of his death.
Harsh, gray light struck his eyes as he stirred. He raised his neck, holding back a groan at the stiffness of his muscles, and he opened his eyes. He blinked. It was morning-perhaps even later, for the sun was invisible -and a cold mist covered the beach. Through the mist the darker clouds could still be seen above, increasing the effect of his being inside a huge cavern. Muffled a little, the sea continued to splash and hiss, though it seemed calmer than it had on the previous night, and there were now no sounds of a storm. The air was very cold.
Elric began to stand up, leaning on his sword for support, listening carefully, but there was no sign that his enemies were close by. Doubtless they had given up the chase, perhaps after finding his dead horse. He reached into his belt pouch and took from it a sliver of smoked bacon and a vial of yellowish liquid. He sipped from the vial, replaced the stopper, and returned the vial to his pouch as he chewed on the meat. He was thirsty. He trudged farther up the beach and found a pool of rainwater not too tainted with salt. He drank his fill, staring around him. The mist was fairly thick and if he moved too far from the beach he knew he would become immediately lost. Yet did that matter? He had nowhere to go. Those who had pursued him must have realized that. Without a horse he could not cross back to Pikarayd, the most easterly of the Young Kingdoms. Without a boat he could not venture onto that sea and try to
steer a course back to the Isle of the Purple Towns. He recalled no map which showed an eastern sea and he had little idea of how far he had traveled from Pikarayd. He decided that his only hope of surviving was to go north, following the coast in the trust that sooner or later he would come upon a port or a fishing village where he might trade his few remaining belongings for a passage on a boat. Yet that hope was a small one, for his food and his drugs could hardly last more than a day or so.
He took a deep breath to steel himself for the march and then regretted it; the mist cut at his throat and his lungs like a thousand tiny knives. He coughed. He spat upon the shingle. And he heard something, something other than the moody whisperings of the sea: a regular creaking sound, as of a man walking in stiff leather. His right hand went to his left hip and the sword which rested there. He turned about, peering in every direction for the source of the noise, but the mist distorted it. It could have come from anywhere.
Elric crept back to the rock where he had sheltered. He leaned against it so that no swordsman could take him unawares from behind. He waited. The creaking came again, but other sounds were added. He heard a clanking; a splash; perhaps a voice, perhaps a footfall on timber; and he guessed that either he was experiencing a hallucination as a side effect of the drug he had just swallowed or he had heard a ship coming toward the beach and dropping its anchor.
He felt relieved and he was tempted to laugh at himself for assuming so readily that this coast must be uninhabited. He had thought that the bleak cliffs stretched for miles-perhaps
hundreds of miles-in all directions. The assumption could easily have been the subjective result of his depression, his weariness. It occurred to him that he might as easily have discovered a land not shown on maps, yet with a sophisticated culture of its own: with sailing ships, for instance, and harbors for them. Yet still he did not reveal himself.
Instead he withdrew behind the rock, peering into the mist toward the sea. And at last he discerned a shadow which had not been there the previous night. A black, angular shadow which could only be a ship. He made out the suggestion of ropes, he heard men grunting, he heard the creak and the rasp of a yard as it traveled up a mast. The sail was being furled.
Elric waited at least an hour, expecting the crew of the ship to disembark. They could have no other reason for entering this treacherous bay. But a silence had descended, as if the whole ship slept. Cautiously Elric emerged from behind the rock and walked down to the edge of the sea. Now he could see the ship a little more clearly. Red sunlight was behind it, thin and watery, diffused by the mist. It was a good-sized ship and fashioned throughout of the same dark wood. Its design was baroque and unfamiliar, with high decks fore and aft and no evidence of rowing ports. This was unusual in a ship either of Melnibonèan or Young Kingdoms design and it tended to prove his theory that he had stumbled upon a civilization for some reason cut off from the rest of the world, just as Elwher and the Unmapped Kingdoms were cut off by the vast stretches of the Sighing Desert and the Weeping Waste. He saw no movement aboard, heard none of the sounds one might usually expect to hear on a seagoing ship, even if the larger part of the crew was resting. The mist eddied and
more of the red light poured through to illuminate the vessel, revealing the large wheels on both the fore-deck and the reardeck, the slender mast with its furled sail, the complicated geometrical carvings of its rails and its figurehead, the great curving prow which gave the ship its main impression of power and strength and made Elric think it must be a warship rather than a trading vessel. But who was there to fight in such waters as these?
He cast aside his wariness and cupped his hands about his mouth, calling out: “Hail, the ship!”
The answering silence seemed to him to take on a peculiar hesitancy as if those on board heard him and wondered if they should answer. “Hail, the ship!”
Then a figure appeared on the port rail and, leaning over, looked casually toward him. The figure had on armor as dark and as strange as the design of his ship; he had a helmet obscuring most of his face and the main feature that Elric could distinguish was a thick, golden beard and sharp blue eyes.
“Hail, the shore,” said the armored man. His accent was unknown to Elric, his tone was as casual as his manner. Elric thought he smiled. “What do you seek with us?” “Aid,” said Elric. “I am stranded here. My horse is dead. I am lost.” “Lost? Aha!” The man’s voice echoed in the mist. “Lost. And you wish to come aboard?”
“I can pay a little. I can give my services in return for a passage, either to your next port of call or to some land close to the Young Kingdoms where maps are available so that I could make my own way thereafter......................................................... ” “Well,” said the other slowly, “there’s work for a swordsman.” “I have a sword,” said Elric.
“I see it. A good, big battle-blade.” “Then I can come aboard?” “We must confer first. If you would be good enough to wait awhile................. ” “Of course,” said Elric. He was nonplussed by the man’s manner, but the prospect of warmth and food on board the ship was cheering. He waited patiently until the blond- bearded warrior came back to the rail. “Your name, sir?” said the warrior. “I am Elric of Melnibonè.” The warrior seemed to be consulting a parchment, running his finger down a list until he nodded, satisfied, and put the list into his large-buckled belt. “Well,” he said, “there was some point in waiting here, after all. I found it difficult to believe.” “What was the dispute and why did you wait?”
“For you,” said the warrior, heaving a rope ladder over the side so that its end fell into the sea. “Will you board now, Elric of Melnibonè?”
IIElric was surprised by how shallow the water was and he wondered by what means such a large vessel could come so close to the shore. Shoulder-deep in the sea he reached up to grasp the ebony rungs of the ladder. He had great difficulty heaving himself from the water and was further hampered by the swaying of the ship and the weight of his runesword, but eventually he had clambered awkwardly over the side and stood on the deck with the water running from his clothes to the timbers and his body shivering with cold. He looked about him. Shining, red-tinted mist clung about the ship’s dark yards and rigging, white mist spread itself over the roofs and sides of the two large cabins set fore and aft of the mast, and this mist was not of the same character as the mist beyond the ship. Elric, for a moment, had the fanciful notion that the mist traveled permanently wherever the ship traveled. He smiled to himself, putting the dreamlike quality of his experience down to lack of food and sleep. When the ship sailed into sunnier waters he would see it for the relatively ordinary vessel it was.
The blond warrior took Elric’s arm. The man was as tall as Elric and massively built. Within his helm he smiled, saying: “Let us go below.”
They went to the cabin forward of the mast and the warrior drew back a sliding door, standing aside to let Elric enter first. Elric ducked his head and went into the warmth of the cabin. A lamp of red-gray glass gleamed, hanging from four silver chains attached to the roof, revealing several more bulky figures, fully dressed in a variety of armors, seated about a square and sturdy sea-table. All faces turned to
regard Elric as he came in, followed by the blond warrior who said: “This is he.”
One of the occupants of the cabin, who sat in the farthest corner and whose features were completely hidden by the shadow, nodded. “Aye,” he said. “That is he.” “You know me, sir,” said Elric, seating himself at the end of the bench and removing his sodden leather cloak. The warrior nearest him passed him a metal cup of hot wine and Elric accepted it gratefully, sipping at the spiced liquid and marveling at how quickly it dispersed the chill within him.
“In a sense,” said the man in the shadows. His voice was sardonic and at the same time had a melancholy ring, and Elric was not offended, for the bitterness in the voice seemed directed more at the owner than at any he addressed.
The blond warrior seated himself opposite Elric. “I am Brut,” he said, “once of Lashmar, where my family still holds land, but it is many a year since I have been there.” “From the Young Kingdoms, then?” said Elric. “Aye. Once.” “This ship journeys nowhere near those nations?” Elric asked. “I believe it does not,” said Brut. “It is not so long, I think, since I myself came aboard. I was seeking Tanelorn, but found this craft, instead.”
“Tanelorn?” Elric smiled. “How many must seek that mythical place? Do you know of one called Rackhir, once a warrior priest of Phum? We adventured together quite recently. He left to look for Tanelorn.” “I do not know him,” said Brut of Lashmar.
“And these waters,” said Elric, “do they lie far from the Young Kingdoms?” “Very far,” said the man in the shadows.
“Are you from Elwher, perhaps?” asked Elric. “Or from any other of what we in the west call the Unmapped Kingdoms?” “Most of our lands are not on your maps,” said the man in the shadows. And he laughed. Again Elric found that he was not offended. And he was not particularly troubled by the mysteries hinted at by the man in the shadows. Soldiers of fortune (as he deemed these men to be) were fond of their private jokes and references; it was usually all that united them save a common willingness to hire their swords to whomever could pay.
Outside the anchor was rattling and the ship rolled. Elric heard the yard being lowered and he heard the smack of the sail as it was unfurled. He wondered how they hoped to leave the bay with so little wind available. He noticed that the faces of the other warriors (where their faces were visible) had taken on a rather set look as the ship began to move. He looked from one grim, haunted face to another and he wondered if his own features bore the same cast.
“For where do we sail?” he asked.
Brut shrugged: “I know only that we had to stop to wait for you, Elric of Melnibonè.”
“You knew I would be there?”
The man in the shadows stirred and helped himself to more hot wine from the jug set into a hole in the center of the table. “You are the last one we need,” he said. “I was the first taken aboard. So far I have not regretted my decision to make the voyage.”
“Your name, sir?” Elric decided he would no longer be at that particular disadvantage. “Oh, names? Names? I have so many. The one I favor is Erekosë. But I have been called Urlik Skarsol and John Daker and Ilian of Garathorm to my certain knowledge. Some would have me believe that I have been Elric Womanslayer ”
“Womanslayer? An unpleasant nickname. Who is this other Elric?” “That I cannot completely answer,” said Erekosë. “But I share a name, it seems, with more than one aboard this ship. I, like Brut, sought Tanelorn and found myself here instead.” “We have that in common,” said another. He was a black- skinned warrior, the tallest of the company, his features oddly enhanced by a scar running like an inverted V from his forehead and over both eyes, down his cheeks to his jawbones. “I was in a land called Ghaja-Ki, a most unpleasant, swampy place, filled with perverse and diseased life. I had heard of a city said to exist there and I thought it might be Tanelorn. It was not. And it was inhabited by a blue-skinned, hermaphroditic race who determined to cure me of what they considered my malformations of hue and sexuality. This scar you see was their work. The pain of their operation gave me strength to escape them and I ran naked into the swamps, floundering for many a mile until the
swamp became a lake feeding a broad river over which hung black clouds of insects which set upon me hungrily. This ship appeared and I was more than glad to seek its sanctuary. I am Otto Blendker, once a scholar of Brunse, now a hireling sword for my sins.”
“This Brunse? Does it lie near Elwher?” said Elric. He had never heard of such a place, nor such an outlandish name, in the Young Kingdoms. The black man shook his head. “I know naught of Elwher.”
“Then the world is a considerably larger place than I imagined,” said Elric. “Indeed it is,” said Erekosë. “What would you say if I offered you the theory that the sea on which we sail spans more than one world?” “I would be inclined to believe you.” Elric smiled. “I have studied such theories. More, I have experienced adventures in worlds other than my own.” “It is a relief to hear it,” said Erekosë. “Not all on board this ship are willing to accept my theory.” “I come closer to accepting it,” said Otto Blendker, “though I find it terrifying.” “It is that,” agreed Erekosë. “More terrifying than you can imagine, friend Otto.” Elric leaned across the table and helped himself to a further mug of wine. His clothes were already drying and physically he had a sense of well-being. “I’ll be glad to leave this misty shore behind.”
“The shore has been left already,” said Brut, “but as for the mist, it is ever with us. Mist appears to follow the ship-or else the ship creates the mist wherever it travels. It is rare that we see land at all and when we do see it, as we saw it today, it is usually obscured, like a reflection in a dull and buckled shield.”
“We sail on a supernatural sea,” said another, holding out a gloved hand for the jug. Elric passed it to him. “In Hasghan, where I come from, we have a legend of a Bewitched Sea. If a mariner finds himself sailing in those waters he may never return and will be lost for eternity.”
“Your legend contains at least some truth, I fear, Terndrik of Hasghan,” Brut said. “How many warriors are on board?” Elric asked.
“Sixteen other than the Four,” said Erekosë. “Twenty in all. The crew numbers about ten and then there is the captain. You will see him soon, doubtless.” “The Four? Who are they?”
Erekosë laughed. “You and I are two of them. The other two occupy the aft cabin. And if you wish to know why we are called the Four, you must ask the captain, though I warn you his answers are rarely satisfying.” Elric realized that he was being pressed slightly to one side. “The ship makes good speed,” he said laconically, “considering how poor the wind was.” “Excellent speed,” agreed Erekosë’. He rose from his corner, a broad-shouldered man with an ageless face bearing the evidence of considerable experience. He was handsome and he had plainly seen much conflict, for both his hands and his
face were heavily scarred, though not disfigured. His eyes, though deep-set and dark, seemed of no particular color and yet were familiar to Elric. He felt that he might have seen those eyes in a dream once. “Have we met before?” Elric asked him.
“Oh, possibly-or shall meet. What does it matter? Our fates are the same. We share an identical doom. And possibly we share more than that.” “More? I hardly comprehend the first part of your statement.” “Then it is for the best,” said Erekosë, inching past his comrades and emerging on the other side of the table. He laid a surprisingly gentle hand on Elric’s shoulder. “Come, we must seek audience with the captain. He expressed a wish to see you shortly after you came aboard.”
Elric nodded and rose. “This captain-what is his name?”
“He has none he will reveal to us,” said Erekosë. Together they emerged onto the deck. The mist was if anything thicker and of the same deathly whiteness, no longer tinted by the sun’s rays. It was hard to see to the far ends of the ship and for all that they were evidently moving rapidly, there was no hint of a wind. Yet it was warmer than Elric might have expected. He followed Erekosë forward to the cabin set under the deck on which one of the ship’s twin wheels stood, tended by a tall man in sea-coat and leggings of quilted deerskin who was so still as to resemble a statue. The red-haired steersman did not look around or down as they advanced toward the cabin, but Elric caught a glimpse of his face.
The door seemed built of some kind of smooth metal possessing a sheen almost like the healthy coat of an animal. It was reddish-brown and the most colorful thing Elric had so far seen on the ship. Erekosë knocked softly upon the door. “Captain,” he said. “Elric is here.”
“Enter,” said a voice at once melodious and distant.
The door opened. Rosy light flooded out, half-blinding Elric as he walked in. As his eyes adapted, he could see a very tall, pale-clad man standing upon a richly hued carpet in the middle of the cabin. Elric heard the door close and realized that Erekosë had not accompanied him inside.
“Are you refreshed, Elric?” said the captain. “I am, sir, thanks to your wine.” The captain’s features were no more human than were Elric’s. They were at once finer and more powerful than those of the Melnibonèan, yet bore a slight resemblance in that the eyes were inclined to taper, as did the face, toward the chin. The captain’s long hair fell to his shoulders in red- gold waves and was kept back from his brow by a circlet of blue jade. His body was clad in buff-colored tunic and hose and there were sandals of silver and silver-thread laced to his calves. Apart from his clothing, he was twin to the steersman Elric had recently seen.
“Will you have more wine?”
The captain moved toward a chest on the far side of the cabin, near the porthole, which was closed. “Thank you,” said Elric. And now he realized why the eyes had not focused on him. The captain was blind.
For all that his movements were deft and assured, it was obvious that he could not see at all. He poured the wine from a silver jug into a silver cup and began to cross toward Elric, holding the cup out before him. Elric stepped forward and accepted it.
“I am grateful for your decision to join us,” said the captain. “I am much relieved, sir.” “You are courteous,” said Elric, “though I must add that my decision was not difficult to make. I had nowhere else to go.” “I understand that. It is why we put into shore when and where we did. You will find that all your companions were in a similar position before they, too, came aboard.” “You appear to have considerable knowledge of the movements of many men,” said Elric. He held the wine untasted in his left hand. “Many,” agreed the captain, “on many worlds. I understand that you are a person of culture, sir, so you will be aware of something of the nature of the sea upon which my ship sails.” “I think so.”
“She sails between the worlds, for the most part-between the planes of a variety of aspects of the same world, to be a little more exact.” The captain hesitated, turning his blind face away from Elric. “Please know that I do not deliberately mystify you. There are some things I do not understand and other things which I may not completely reveal. It is a trust I have and I hope you feel you can respect it.”
“I have no reason as yet to do otherwise,” replied the albino. And he took a sip of the wine.
“I find myself with a fine company,” said the captain. “I hope that you continue to think it worthwhile honoring my trust when we reach our destination.” “And what is that, Captain?”
“An island indigenous to these waters.” “That must be a rarity.” “Indeed, it is, and once undiscovered, uninhabited by those we must count our enemies. Now that they have found it and realize its power, we are in great danger.” “We? You mean your race or those aboard your ship?”
The captain smiled. “I have no race, save myself. I speak, I suppose, of all humanity.” “These enemies are not human, then?”
“No. They are inextricably involved in human affairs, but this fact has not instilled in them any loyalty to us. I use ‘humanity,’ of course, in its broader sense, to include yourself and myself.” “I understood,” said Elric. “What is this folk called?”
“Many things,” said the captain. “Forgive me, but I cannot continue longer now. If you will ready yourself for battle I assure you that I will reveal more to you as soon as the time is right.” Only when Elric stood again outside the reddish-brown door, watching Erekosë advancing up the deck through the mist, did the albino wonder if the captain had charmed him to the point where he had forgotten all common sense. Yet the
blind man had impressed him and he had, after all, nothing better to do than to sail on to the island. He shrugged. He could always alter his decision if he discovered that those upon the island were not, in his opinion, enemies. “Are you more mystified or less, Elric?” said Erekosë, smiling.
“More mystified in some ways, less in others,” Elric told him. “And, for some reason, I do not care.” “Then you share the feeling of the whole company,” Erekosë told him. It was only when Erekosë led him to the cabin aft of the mast that Elric realized he had not asked the captain what the significance of the Four might be.
IIISave that it faced in the opposite direction, the other cabin resembled the first in almost every detail. Here, too, were seated some dozen men, all experienced soldiers of fortune by their features and their clothing. Two sat together at the center of the table’s starboard side. One was bareheaded, fair, and careworn, the other had features resembling Elric’s own and he seemed to be wearing a silver gauntlet on his left hand while the right hand was naked; his armor was delicate and outlandish. He looked up as Elric entered and there was recognition in his single eye (the other was covered by a brocade-work patch).
“Elric of Melnibonè!” he exclaimed. “My theories become more meaningful!” He turned to his companion. “See, Hawkmoon, this is the one of whom I spoke.” “You know me, sir?” Elric was nonplussed.
“You recognize me, Elric. You must! At the Tower of Voilodion Ghagnasdiak? With Erekosë-though a different Erekosë.” “I know of no such tower, no name which resembles that, and this is the first I have seen of Erekosë. You know me and you know my name, but I do not know you. I find this disconcerting, sir.” “I, too, had never met Prince Corum before he came aboard,” said Erekosë, “yet he insists we fought together once. I am inclined to believe him. Time on the different planes does not always run concurrently. Prince Corum might well exist in what we would term the future.”
“I had thought to find some relief from such paradoxes here,” said Hawkmoon, passing his hand over his face. He smiled bleakly. “But it seems there is none at this present moment in the history of the planes. Everything is in flux and even our identities, it seems, are prone to alter at any moment.”
“We were Three,” said Corum. “Do you not recall it, Elric? The Three Who Are One?” Elric shook his head.
Corum shrugged, saying softly to himself, “Well, now we are Four. Did the captain say anything of an island we are supposed to invade?” “He did,” said Elric. “Do you know who these enemies might be?” “We know no more or less than do you, Elric,” said Hawkmoon. “I seek a place called Tanelorn and two children. Perhaps I seek the Runestaff, too. Of that I am not entirely sure.” “We found it once,” said Corum. “We three. In the Tower of Voilodion Ghagnasdiak. It was of considerable help to us.” “As it might be to me,” Hawkmoon told him. “I served it once. I gave it a great deal.” “We have much in common,” Erekosë put in, “as I told you, Elric. Perhaps we share masters in common, too?” Elric shrugged. “I serve no master but myself.”
And he wondered why they all smiled in the same strange way.
Erekosë said quietly, “On such ventures as these one is inclined to forget much, as one forgets a dream.” “This is a dream,” said Hawkmoon. “Of late I’ve dreamed many such.” “It is all dreaming, if you like,” said Corum. “All existence.”
Elric was not interested in such philosophizing. “Dream or reality, the experience amounts to the same, does it not?” “Quite right,” said Erekosë with a wan smile.
They talked on for another hour or two until Corum stretched and yawned and commented that he was feeling sleepy. The others agreed that they were all tired and so they left the cabin and went aft and below where there were bunks for all the warriors. As he stretched himself out in one of the bunks, Elric said to Brut of Lashmar, who had climbed into the bunk above:
“It would help to know when this fight begins.”
Brut looked over the edge, down at the prone albino. “I think it will be soon,” he said. Elric stood alone upon the deck, leaning upon the rail and trying to make out the sea, but the sea, like the rest of the world, was hidden by white curling mist. Elric wondered if there were waters flowing under the ship’s keel at all. He looked up to where the sail was tight and swollen at the mast, filled with a warm and powerful wind. It was light, but again it was not possible to tell the hour of the day. Puzzled by Corum’s comments concerning an earlier meeting, Elric wondered if there had been other dreams in his life such as this might be-dreams he had forgotten completely upon awakening. But the uselessness of such speculation became
quickly evident and he turned his attention to more immediate matters, wondering at the origin of the captain and his strange ship sailing on a stranger ocean. “The captain,” said Hawkmoon’s voice, and Elric turned to bid good morning to the tall, fair-haired man who bore a strange, regular scar in the center of his forehead, “has requested that we four visit him in his cabin.” The other two emerged from the mist and together they made their way to the prow, knocking on the reddish-brown door and being at once admitted into the presence of the blind captain, who had four silver wine-cups already poured for them. He gestured them toward the great chest on which the wine stood. “Please help yourselves, my friends.”
They did so, standing there with the cups in their hands, four tall, doom-haunted swordsmen, each of a strikingly different cast of features, yet each bearing a certain stamp which marked them as being of a like kind. Elric noticed it, for all that he was one of them, and he tried to recall the details of what Corum had told him on the previous evening.
“We are nearing our destination,” said the captain. “It will not be long before we disembark. I do not believe our enemies expect us, yet it will be a hard fight against those two.” “Two?” said Hawkmoon. “Only two?”
“Only two.” The captain smiled. “A brother and a sister. Sorcerers from quite another universe than ours. Due to recent disruptions in the fabric of our worlds- of which you know something, Hawkmoon, and you, too, Corum-certain beings have been released who would not otherwise have the power they now possess. And possessing great power, they crave for more-for all the power that there is in our
universe. These beings are amoral in a way in which the Lords of Law or Chaos are not. They do not fight for influence upon the Earth, as those gods do; their only wish is to convert the essential energy of our universe to their own uses. I believe they foster some ambition in their particular universe which would be furthered if they could achieve their wish. At present, in spite of conditions highly favorable to them, they have not attained their full strength, but the time is not far off before they do attain it. Agak and Gagak is how they are called in human tongue and they are outside the power of any of our gods, so a more powerful group has been summoned-yourselves. The Champion Eternal in four of his incarnations (and four is the maximum number we can risk without precipitating further unwelcome disruptions among the planes of Earth)-Erekosë, Elric, Corum, and Hawkmoon. Each of you will command four others, whose fates are linked with your own and who are great fighters in their own right, though they do not share your destinies in every sense. You may each pick the four with whom you wish to fight. I think you will find it easy enough to decide. We make landfall quite shortly now.”
“You will lead us?” Hawkmoon said.
“I cannot. I can only take you to the island and wait for those who survive-if any survive.” Elric frowned. “This fight is not mine, I think.”
“It is yours,” said the captain soberly. “And it is mine. I would land with you if that were permitted me, but it is not.” “Why so?” asked Corum.
“You will learn that one day. I have not the courage to tell you. I bear you nothing but goodwill, however. Be assured of that.”
Erekosë rubbed his jaw. “Well, since it is my destiny to fight, and since I, like Hawkmoon, continue to seek Tanelorn, and since I gather there is some chance of my fulfilling my ambition if I am successful, I for one agree to go against these two, Agak and Gagak.”
Hawkmoon nodded. “I go with Erekosë, for similar reasons.” “And I,” said Corum. “Not long since,” said Elric, “I counted myself without comrades. Now I have many. For that reason alone I will fight with them.” “It is perhaps the best of reasons,” said Erekosë approvingly.
“There is no reward for this work, save my assurance that your success will save the world much misery,” said the captain. “And for you, Elric, there is less reward than the rest may hope for.” “Perhaps not,” said Elric.
“As you say.” The captain gestured toward the jug of wine. “More wine, my friends?” They each accepted, while the captain continued, his blind face staring upward at the roof of the cabin. “Upon this island is a ruin-perhaps it was once a city called Tanelorn-and at the center of the ruin stands one whole building. It is this building which Agak and his sister use. It is that which you must attack. You will recognize it, I hope, at once.”
“And we must slay this pair?” said Erekosë.
“If you can. They have servants who help them. These must be slain, also. Then the building must be fired. This is important.” The captain paused. “Fired. It must be destroyed in no other way.” Elric smiled a dry smile. “There are few other ways of destroying buildings, Sir Captain.” The captain returned his smile and made a slight bow of acknowledgment. “Aye, it’s so. Nonetheless, it is worth remembering what I have said.” “Do you know what these two look like, these Agak and Gagak?” Corum asked. “No. It is possible that they resemble creatures of our own worlds; it is possible that they do not. Few have seen them. It is only recently that they have been able to materialize at all.” “And how may they best be overwhelmed?” asked Hawkmoon. “By courage and ingenuity,” said the captain. “You are not very explicit, sir,” said Elric. “I am as explicit as I can be. Now, my friends, I suggest you rest and prepare your arms.” As they returned to their cabins, Erekosë sighed.
“We are fated,” he said. “We have little free will, for all we deceive ourselves otherwise. If we perish or live through this venture, it will not count for much in the overall scheme of things.”
“I think you are of a gloomy turn of mind, friend,” said Hawkmoon. The mist snaked through the branches of the mast, writhing in the rigging, flooding the deck. It swirled across the faces of the other three men as Elric looked at them. “A realistic turn of mind,” said Corum.
The mist massed more thickly upon the deck, mantling each man like a shroud. The timbers of the ship creaked and to Elric’s ears took on the sound of a raven’s croak. It was colder now. In silence they went to their cabins to test the hooks and buckles of their armor, to polish and to sharpen their weapons and to pretend to sleep.
“Oh, I’ve no liking for sorcery,” said Brut of Lashmar, tugging at his golden beard, “for sorcery it was resulted in my shame.” Elric had told him all that the captain had said and had asked Brut to be one of the four who fought with him when they landed.
“It is all sorcery here,” Otto Blendker said. And he smiled wanly as he gave Elric his hand. “I’ll fight beside you, Elric.” His sea-green armor shimmering faintly in the lantern light, another rose, his casque pushed back from his face. It was a face almost as white as Elric’s, though the eyes were deep and near-black. “And I,” said Hown Serpent-tamer, “though I fear I’m little use on still land.”
The last to rise, at Elric’s glance, was a warrior who had said little during their earlier conversations. His voice was deep and hesitant. He wore a plain iron battle-cap and the red hair beneath it was braided. At the end of each braid was a small fingerbone which rattled on the shoulders of his byrnie as he moved. This was Ashnar the Lynx, whose eyes were
rarely less than fierce. “I lack the eloquence or the breeding of you other gentlemen,” said Ashnar. “And I’ve no familiarity with sorcery or those other things of which you speak, but I’m a good soldier and my joy is in fighting. I’ll take your orders, Elric, if you’ll have me.”
“Willingly,” said Elric.
“There is no dispute, it seems,” said Erekosë to the remaining four who had elected to join him. “All this is doubtless preordained. Our destinies have been linked from the first.” “Such philosophy can lead to unhealthy fatalism,” said Terndrik of Hasghan. “Best believe our fates are our own, even if the evidence denies it.” “You must think as you wish,” said Erekosë. “I have led many lives, though all, save one, are remembered but faintly.” He shrugged. “Yet I deceive myself, I suppose, in that I work for a time when I shall find this Tanelorn and perhaps be reunited with the one I seek. That ambition is what gives me energy, Terndrik.”
Elric smiled. “I fight, I think, because I relish the comradeship of battle. That, in itself, is a melancholy condition in which to find oneself, is it not?” “Aye.” Erekosë glanced at the floor. “Well, we must try to rest now.”
IVThe outlines of the coast were dim. They waded through white water and white mist, their swords held above their heads. Swords were their only weapons. Each of the Four possessed a blade of unusual size and design, but none bore a sword which occasionally murmured to itself as did Elric’s Stormbringer. Glancing back, Elric saw the captain standing at the rail, his blind face turned toward the island, his pale lips moving as if he spoke to himself. Now the water was waist-deep and the sand beneath Elric’s feet hardened and became smooth rock. He waded on, wary and ready to carry any attack to those who might be defending the island. But now the mist grew thinner, as if it could gain no hold on the land, and there were no obvious signs of defenders.
Tucked into his belt, each man had a brand, it’s end wrapped in oiled cloth so that it should not be wet when the time came to light it. Similarly, each was equipped with a handful of smoldering tinder in a little firebox in a pouch attached to his belt, so that the brands could be instantly ignited.
“Only fire will destroy this enemy forever,” the captain had said again as he handed them their brands and their tinderboxes. As the mist cleared, it revealed a landscape of dense shadows. The shadows spread over red rock and yellow vegetation and they were shadows of all shapes and dimensions, resembling all manner of things. They seemed cast by the huge blood-colored sun which stood at perpetual noon above the island, but what was disturbing about them was that the shadows themselves seemed without a source, as if the objects they represented were invisible or existed elsewhere than on the island itself. The sky, too, seemed full
of these shadows, but whereas those on the island were still, those in the sky sometimes moved, perhaps when the clouds moved. And all the while the red sun poured down its bloody light and touched the twenty men with its unwelcome radiance just as it touched the land.
And at times, as they advanced cautiously inland, a peculiar flickering light sometimes crossed the island so that the outlines of the place became unsteady for a few seconds before returning to focus. Elric suspected his eyes and said nothing until Hown Serpent-tamer (who was having difficulty finding his land-legs) remarked:
“I have rarely been ashore, it’s true, but I think the quality of this land is stranger than any other I’ve known. It shimmers. It distorts.” Several voices agreed with him.
“And from whence come all these shadows?” Ashnar the Lynx stared around him in unashamed superstitious awe. “Why cannot we see that which casts them?” “It could be,” Corum said, “that these are shadows cast by objects existing in other dimensions of the Earth. If all dimensions meet here, as has been suggested, that could be a likely explanation.” He put his silver hand to his embroidered eye-patch. “This is not the strangest example I have witnessed of such a conjunction.”
“Likely?” Otto Blendker snorted. “Pray let none give me an unlikely explanation, if you please!” They pressed on through the shadows and the lurid light until they arrived at the outskirts of the ruins.
These ruins, thought Elric, had something in common with the ramshackle city of Ameeron, which he had visited on his quest for the Black Sword. But they were altogether more vast-more a collection of smaller cities, each one in a radically different architectural style.
“Perhaps this is Tanelorn,” said Corum, who had visited the place, “or, rather, all the versions of Tanelorn there have ever been. For Tanelorn exists in many forms, each form depending upon the wishes of those who most desire to find her.”
“This is not the Tanelorn I expected to find,” said Hawkmoon bitterly. “Nor I,” added Erekosë bleakly.
“Perhaps it is not Tanelorn,” said Elric. “Perhaps it is not.”
“Or perhaps this is a graveyard,” said Corum distantly, frowning with his single eye. “A graveyard containing all the forgotten versions of that strange city.” They began to clamber over the ruins, their arms clattering as they moved, heading for the center of the place. Elric could tell by the introspective expressions in the faces of many of his companions that they, like him, were wondering if this were not a dream. Why else should they find themselves in this peculiar situation, unquestioningly risking their lives-perhaps their souls-in a fight with which none of them was identified?
Erekosë moved closer to Elric as they marched. “Have you noticed,” said he, “that the shadows now represent something?”
Elric nodded. “You can tell from the ruins what some of the buildings looked like when they were whole. The shadows are the shadows of those buildings-the original buildings before they became ruined.” “Just so,” said Erekosë. Together, they shuddered.
At last they approached the likely center of the place and here was a building which was not ruined. It stood in a cleared space, all curves and ribbons of metal and glowing tubes. “It resembles a machine more than a building,” said Hawkmoon. “And a musical instrument more than a machine,” Corum mused. The party came to a halt, each group of four gathering about its leader. There was no question but that they had arrived at their goal. Now that Elric looked carefully at the building he could see that it was in fact two buildings-both absolutely identical and joined at various points by curling systems of pipes which might be connecting corridors, though it was difficult to imagine what manner of being could utilize them.
“Two buildings,” said Erekosë. “We were not prepared for this. Shall we split up and attack both?” Instinctively Elric felt that this action would be unwise. He shook his head. “I think we should go together into one, else our strength will be weakened.” “I agree,” said Hawkmoon, and the rest nodded.
Thus, there being no cover to speak of, they marched boldly toward the nearest building to a point near the ground where a black opening of irregular proportions could be discerned. Ominously, there was still no sign of defenders. The buildings pulsed and glowed and occasionally whispered, but that was all. Elric and his party were the first to enter, finding themselves in a damp, warm passage which curved almost immediately to the right. They were followed by the others until all stood in this passage warily glaring ahead, expecting to be attacked. But no attack came.
With Elric at their head, they moved on for some moments before the passage began to tremble violently and sent Mown Serpent-tamer crashing to the floor cursing. As the man in the sea-green armor scrambled up, a voice began to echo along the passage, seemingly coming from a great distance yet nonetheless loud and irritable.
“Who? Who? Who?” shrieked the voice. “Who? Who? Who invades me?” The passage’s tremble subsided a little into a constant quivering motion. The voice became a muttering, detached and uncertain. “What attacks? What?”
The twenty men glanced at one another in puzzlement. At length Elric shrugged and led the party on and soon the passage had widened out into a hall whose walls, roof, and floor were damp with sticky fluid and whose air was hard to breathe. And now, somehow passing themselves through the walls of this hall, came the first of the defenders, ugly beasts
who must be the servants of that mysterious brother and sister Agak and Gagak. “Attack!” cried the distant voice. “Destroy this. Destroy it!”
The beasts were of a primitive sort, mostly gaping mouth and slithering body, but there were many of them oozing toward the twenty men, who quickly formed themselves into the four fighting units and prepared to defend themselves. The creatures made a dreadful slushing sound as they approached and the ridges of bone which served them as teeth clashed as they reared up to snap at Elric and his companions. Elric whirled his sword and it met hardly any resistance as it sliced through several of the things at once. But now the air was thicker than ever and a stench threatened to overwhelm them as fluid drenched the floor.
“Move on through them,” Elric instructed, “hacking a path through as you go. Head for yonder opening.” He pointed with his left hand. And so they advanced, cutting back hundreds of the primitive beasts and thus decreasing the breathability of the air. “The creatures are not hard to fight,” gasped Hown Serpent- tamer, “but each one we kill robs us a little of our own chances of life.” Elric was aware of the irony. “Cunningly planned by our enemies, no doubt.” He coughed and slashed again at a dozen of the beasts slithering toward him. The things were fearless, but they were stupid, too. They made no attempt at strategy. Finally Elric reached the next passage, where the air was slightly purer. He sucked gratefully at the sweeter
atmosphere and waved his companions on.
Sword-arms rising and falling, they gradually retreated back into the passage, followed by only a few of the beasts. The creatures seemed reluctant to enter the passage and Elric suspected that somewhere within it there must lie a danger which even they feared. There was nothing for it, however, but to press on and he was only grateful that all twenty had survived this initial ordeal.
Gasping, they rested for a moment, leaning against the trembling walls of the passage, listening to the tones of that distant voice, now muffled and indistinct. “I like not this castle at all,” growled Brut of Lashmar, inspecting a rent in his cloak where a creature had seized it. “High sorcery commands it.” “It is only what we knew,” Ashnar the Lynx reminded him, and Ashnar was plainly hard put to control his terror. The fingerbones in his braids kept time with the trembling of the walls and the huge barbarian looked almost pathetic as he steeled himself to go on. “They are cowards, these sorcerers,” Otto Blendker said. “They do not show themselves.” He raised his voice. “Is their aspect so loathsome that they are afraid lest we look upon them?” It was a challenge not taken up. As they pushed on through the passages there was no sign either of Agak or his sister Gagak. It became gloomier and brighter in turns. Sometimes the passages narrowed so that it was difficult to squeeze their bodies through, sometimes they widened into what were almost halls. Most of the time they appeared to be climbing higher into the building. Elric tried to guess the nature of the building’s inhabitants. There were no steps in the castle, no artifacts he could
recognize. For no particular reason he developed an image of Agak and Gagak as reptilian in form, for reptiles would prefer gently rising passages to steps and doubtless would have little need of conventional furniture. There again it was possible that they could change their shape at will, assuming human form when it suited them. He was becoming impatient to face either one or both of the sorcerers.
Ashnar the Lynx had other reasons-or so he said- for his own lack of patience. “They said there’d be treasure here,” he muttered. “I thought to stake my life against a fair reward, but there’s naught here of value.” He put a horny hand against the damp material of the wall. “Not even stone or brick. What are these walls made of, Elric?”
Elric shook his head. “That has puzzled me, also, Ashnar.”
Then Elric saw large, fierce eyes peering out of the gloom ahead. He heard a rattling noise, a rushing noise, and the eyes grew larger and larger. He saw a red mouth, yellow fangs, orange fur. Then the growling sounded and the beast sprang at him even as he raised Stormbringer to defend himself and shouted a warning to the others. The creature was a baboon, but huge, and there were at least a dozen others following the first. Elric drove his body forward behind his sword, taking the beast in its groin. Claws reached out and dug into his shoulders and waist. He groaned as he felt at least one set of claws draw blood. His arms were trapped and he could not pull Stormbringer free. All he could do was twist the sword in the wound he had already made. With all his might, he turned the hilt. The great ape shouted, its bloodshot eyes blazing, and it bared its yellow fangs as its muzzle shot toward Elric’s throat. The
teeth closed on his neck, the stinking breath threatened to choke him. Again he twisted the blade. Again the beast yelled in pain. The fangs were pressing into the metal of Elric’s gorget, the only thing saving him from immediate death. He struggled to free at least one arm, twisting the sword for the third time, then tugging it sideways to widen the wound in the groin. The growls and groans of the baboon grew more intense and the teeth tightened their hold on his neck, but now, mingled with the noises of the ape, he began to hear a murmuring and he felt Stormbringer pulse in his hand. He knew that the sword was drawing power from the ape even as the ape sought to destroy him. Some of that power began to flow into his body.
Desperately Elric put all his remaining strength into dragging the sword across the ape’s body, slitting its belly wide so that its blood and entrails spilled over him as he was suddenly free and staggering backward, wrenching the sword out in the same movement. The ape, too, was staggering back, staring down in stupefied awe at its own horrible wound before it fell to the floor of the passage.
Elric turned, ready to give aid to his nearest comrade, and he was in time to see Terndrik of Hasghan die, kicking in the clutches of an even larger ape, his head bitten clean from his shoulders and his red blood gouting. Elric drove Stormbringer cleanly between the shoulders of Terndrik’s slayer, taking the ape in the heart. Beast and human victim fell together. Two others were dead and several bore bad wounds, but the remaining warriors fought on, swords and armor smeared with crimson. The narrow passage stank of ape, of sweat, and of blood. Elric pressed into the fight, chopping at the skull of an ape which
grappled with Hown Serpent-tamer, who had lost his sword. Hown darted a look of thanks at Elric as he bent to retrieve his blade and together they set upon the largest of all the baboons. This creature stood much taller than Elric and had Erekosë pressed against the wall, Erekosë’s sword through its shoulder.
From two sides, Hown and Elric stabbed and the baboon snarled and screamed, turning to face the new attackers, Erekosë’s blade quivering in its shoulder. It rushed upon them and they stabbed again together, taking the monster in its heart and its lung so that when it roared at them blood vomited from its mouth. It fell to its knees, its eyes dimming, then sank slowly down.
And now there was silence in the passage and death lay all about them. Terndrik of Hasghan was dead. Two of Corum’s party were dead. All of Erekosë’s surviving men bore major wounds. One of Hawkmoon’s men was dead, but the remaining three were virtually unscathed. Brut of Lashmar’s helm was dented, but he was otherwise unwounded and Ashnar the Lynx was disheveled, nothing more. Ashnar had taken two of the baboons during the fight. But now the barbarian’s eyes rolled as he leaned, panting, against the wall.
“I begin to suspect this venture of being uneconomical,” he said with a half-grin. He rallied himself, stepping over a baboon’s corpse to join Elric. “The less time we take over it, the better. What think you, Elric?” “I would agree.” Elric returned his grin. “Come.” And he led the way through the passage and into a chamber whose walls gave off a pinkish light. He had not walked far before he felt something catch at his ankle and he stared down in
horror to see a long, thin snake winding itself about his leg. It was too late to use his sword; instead he seized the reptile behind its head and dragged it partially free of his leg before hacking the head from the body. The others were now stamping and shouting warnings to each other. The snakes did not appear to be venomous, but there were thousands of them, appearing, it seemed, from out of the floor itself. They were flesh-colored and had no eyes, more closely resembling earthworms than ordinary reptiles, but they were strong enough.
Hown Serpent-tamer sang a strange song now, with many liquid, hissing notes, and this seemed to have a calming effect upon the creatures. One by one at first and then in increasing numbers, they dropped back to the floor, apparently sleeping. Mown grinned at his success.
Elric said, “Now I understand how you came by your surname.” “I was not sure the song would work on these,” Hown told him, “for they are unlike any serpents I have ever seen in the seas of my own world.” They waded on through mounds of sleeping serpents, noticing that the next passage rose sharply. At times they were forced to use their hands to steady themselves as they climbed the peculiar, slippery material of the floor. It was much hotter in this passage and they were all sweating, pausing several times to rest and mop their brows. The passage seemed to extend upward forever, turning occasionally, but never leveling out for more than a few feet. At times it narrowed to little more than a tube through which they had to squirm on their stomachs and at other times the roof disappeared into the gloom over their heads. Elric had
long since given up trying to relate their position to what he had seen of the outside of the castle. From time to time small, shapeless creatures rushed toward them in shoals apparently with the intention of attacking them, but these were rarely more than an irritation and were soon all but ignored by the party as it continued its climb.
For a while they had not heard the strange voice which had greeted them upon their entering, but now it began to whisper again, its tones more urgent than before. “Where? Where? Oh, the pain!”
They paused, trying to locate the source of the voice, but it seemed to come from everywhere at once. Grim-faced, they continued, plagued by thousands of little creatures which bit at their exposed flesh like so many gnats, yet the creatures were not insects. Elric had seen nothing like them before. They were shapeless, primitive, and all but colorless. They battered at his face as he moved; they were like a wind. Half-blinded, choked, sweating, he felt his strength leaving him. The air was so thick now, so hot, so salty, it was as if he moved through liquid. The others were as badly affected as was he; some were staggering and two men fell, to be helped up again by comrades almost as exhausted. Elric was tempted to strip off his armor, but he knew this would leave more of his flesh to the mercy of the little flying creatures.
Still they climbed and now more of the serpentine things they had seen earlier began to writhe around their feet, hampering them further, for all that Mown sang his sleeping song until he was hoarse. “We can survive this only a little longer,” said Ashnar the Lynx, moving close to Elric. “We shall be in no condition to
meet the sorcerer if we ever find him or his sister.”
Elric nodded a gloomy head. “My thoughts, too, yet what else may we do, Ashnar?” “Nothing,” said Ashnar in a low voice. “Nothing.”
“Where? Where? Where?” The word rustled all about them. Many of the party were becoming openly nervous.
VThey had reached the top of the passage. The querulous voice was much louder now, but it quavered more. They saw an archway and beyond the archway a lighted chamber. “Agak’s room, without doubt,” said Ashnar, taking a better grip on his sword. “Possibly,” said Elric. He felt detached from his body. Perhaps it was the heat and the exhaustion, or his growing sense of disquiet, but something made him withdraw into himself and hesitate before entering the chamber. The place was octagonal and each of its eight sloping sides was of a different color and each color changed constantly. Occasionally the walls became semitransparent, revealing a complete view of the ruined city (or collection of cities) far below, and also a view of the twin castle to this one, still connected by tubes and wires.
It was the large pool in the center of the chamber which attracted their attention mostly. It seemed deep and was full of evil-smelling, viscous stuff. It bubbled. Shapes formed in it. Grotesque and strange, beautiful and familiar, the shapes seemed always upon the brink of taking permanent form before falling back into the stuff of the pool. And the voice was still louder and there was no question now that it came from the pool.
“What? What? Who invades?”
Elric forced himself closer to the pool and for a moment saw his own face staring out at him before it melted.
“Who invades? Ah! I am too weak!”
Elric spoke to the pool. “We are of those you would destroy,” he said. “We are those on whom you would feed.” “Ah! Agak! Agak! I am sick! Where are you?”
Ashnar and Brut joined Elric. The faces of the warriors were filled with disgust. “Agak,” growled Ashnar the Lynx, his eyes narrowing. “At last some sign that the sorcerer is here!” The others had all crowded in, to stand as far away from the pool as possible, but all stared, fascinated by the variety of the shapes forming and disintegrating in the viscous liquid. “I weaken. . . . My energy needs to be replenished........... We must begin now, Agak. . . . It took us so long to reach this place. I thought I could rest. But there is disease here. It fills my body. Agak. Awaken, Agak. Awaken!” “Some servant of Agak’s, charged with the defense of the chamber?” suggested Mown Serpent-tamer in a small voice. But Elric continued to stare into the pool as he began, he thought, to realize the truth. “Will Agak wake?” Brut said. “Will he come?” He glanced nervously around him. “Agak!” called Ashnar the Lynx. “Coward!”
“Agak!” cried many of the other warriors, brandishing their swords. But Elric said nothing and he noted, too, that Hawkmoon and Corum and Erekosë all remained silent. He guessed that
they must be filled with the same dawning understanding.
He looked at them. In Erekosë’s eyes he saw an agony, a pity both for himself and his comrades. “We are the Four Who Are One,” said Erekosë. His voice shook. Elric was seized by an alien impulse, an impulse which disgusted and terrified him. “No. . . .” He attempted to sheathe Stormbringer, but the sword refused to enter its scabbard. “Agak! Quickly!” said the voice from the pool.
“If we do not do this thing,” said Erekosë, “they will eat all our worlds. Nothing will remain.” Elric put his free hand to his head. He swayed upon the edge of that frightful pool. He moaned. “We must do it, then.” Corum’s voice was an echo. “I will not,” said Elric. “I am myself.” “And I!” said Hawkmoon.
But Corum Jhaelen Irsei said, “It is the only way for us, for the single thing that we are. Do you not see that? We are the only creatures of our worlds who possess the means of slaying the sorcerers-in the only manner in which they can be slain!”
Elric looked at Corum, at Hawkmoon, at Erekosë, and again he saw something of himself in all of them. “We are the Four Who Are One,” said Erekosë. “Our united strength is greater than the sum. We must come together,
brothers. We must conquer here before we can hope to conquer Agak.” “No. . . .” Elric moved away, but somehow he found himself standing at a corner of the bubbling, noxious pool from which the voice still murmured and complained, in which shapes still formed, reformed, and faded. And at each of the other three corners stood one of his companions. All had a set, fatalistic look to them.
The warriors who had accompanied the Four drew back to the walls. Otto Blendker and Brut of Lashmar stood near the doorway, listening for anything which might come up the passage to the chamber. Ashnar the Lynx fingered the brand at his belt, a look of pure horror on his rugged features.
Elric felt his arm begin to rise, drawn upward by his sword, and he saw that each of his three companions were also lifting their swords. The swords reached out across the pool and their tips met above the exact center. Elric yelled as something entered his being. Again he tried to break free, but the power was too strong. Other voices spoke in his head. “I understand.. . .” This was Corum’s distant murmur. “It is the only way.” “Oh, no, no. . . .” And this was Hawkmoon, but the words came from Elric’s lips. “Agak!” cried the pool. The stuff became more agitated, more alarmed. “Agak! Quickly! Wake!” Elric’s body began to shake, but his hand kept a firm hold upon the sword. The atoms of his body flew apart and then united again into a single flowing entity which traveled up
the blade of the sword toward the apex. And Elric was still Elric, shouting with the terror of it, sighing with the ecstasy of it. Elric was still Elric when he drew away from the pool and looked upon himself for a single moment, seeing himself wholly joined with his three other selves. A being hovered over the pool. On each side of its head was a face and each face belonged to one of the companions. Serene and terrible, the eyes did not blink. It had eight arms and the arms were still; it squatted over the pool on eight legs, and its armor and accouterments were of all colors blending and at the same time separate. The being clutched a single great sword in all eight hands and both he and the sword glowed with a ghastly golden light. Then Elric had rejoined this body and had become a different thing-himself and three others and something else which was the sum of that union. The Four Who Were One reversed its monstrous sword so that the point was directed downward at the frenetically boiling stuff in the pool below. The stuff feared the sword. It mewled. “Agak, Agak ”
The being of whom Elric was a part gathered its great strength and began to plunge the sword down. Shapeless waves appeared on the surface of the pool. Its whole color changed from sickly yellow to an unhealthy green. “Agak, I die................................... ”
Inexorably the sword moved down. It touched the surface.
The pool swept back and forth; it tried to ooze over the sides and onto the floor. The sword bit deeper and the Four Who Were One felt new strength flow up the blade. There came a moan; slowly the pool quieted. It became silent. It became still. It became gray.
Then the Four Who Were One descended into the pool to be absorbed. It could see clearly now. It tested its body. It controlled every limb, every function. It had triumphed; it had revitalized the pool. Through its single octagonal eye it looked in all directions at the same time over the wide ruins of the city; then it focused all its attention upon its twin.
Agak had awakened too late, but he was awakening at last, roused by the dying cries of his sister Gagak, whose body the mortals had first invaded and whose intelligence they had overwhelmed, whose eye they now used and whose powers they would soon attempt to utilize. Agak did not need to turn his head to look upon the being he still saw as his sister. Like hers, his intelligence was contained within the huge eight-sided eye. “Did you call me, sister?”
“I spoke your name, that is all, brother.” There were enough vestiges of Gagak’s life-force in the Four Who Were One for it to imitate her manner of speaking. “You cried out?”
“A dream.” The Four paused and then it spoke again: “A disease. I dreamed that there was something upon this
island which made me unwell.”
“Is that possible? We do not know sufficient about these dimensions or the creatures inhabiting them. Yet none is as powerful as Agak and Gagak. Fear not, sister. We must begin our work soon.” “It is nothing. Now I am awake.”
Agak was puzzled. “You speak oddly.”
“The dream . . .” answered the creature which had entered Gagak’s body and destroyed her. “We must begin,” said Agak. “The dimensions turn and the time has come. Ah, feel it. It waits for us to take it. So much rich energy. How we shall conquer when we go home!” “I feel it,” replied the Four, and it did. It felt its whole universe, dimension upon dimension, swirling all about it. Stars and planets and moons through plane upon plane, all full of the energy upon which Agak and Gagak had desired to feed. And there was enough of Gagak still within the Four to make the Four experience a deep, anticipatory hunger which, now that the dimensions attained the right conjunction, would soon be satisfied.
The Four was tempted to join with Agak and feast, though it knew if it did so it would rob its own universe of every shred of energy. Stars would fade, worlds would die. Even the Lords of Law and Chaos would perish, for they were part of the same universe. Yet to possess such power it might be worth committing such a tremendous crime. ... It controlled this desire and gathered itself for its attack before Agak became too wary.
“Shall we feast, sister?”
The Four realized that the ship had brought it to the island at exactly the proper moment. Indeed, they had almost come too late. “Sister?” Agak was again puzzled. “What...?”
The Four knew it must disconnect from Agak. The tubes and wires fell away from his body and were withdrawn into Gagak’s. “What’s this?” Agak’s strange body trembled for a moment. “Sister?” The Four prepared itself. For all that it had absorbed Gagak’s memories and instincts, it was still not confident that it would be able to attack Agak in her chosen form. And since the sorceress had possessed the power to change her form, the Four began to change, groaning greatly, experiencing dreadful pain, drawing all the materials of its stolen being together so that what had appeared to be a building now became pulpy, unformed flesh. And Agak, stunned, looked on.
“Sister? Your sanity...”
The building, the creature that was Gagak, threshed, melted, and erupted. It screamed in agony. It attained its form. It laughed. Four faces laughed upon a gigantic head. Eight arms waved in triumph, eight legs began to move. And over that head it waved a single, massive sword. And it was running.
It ran upon Agak while the alien sorcerer was still in his static form. Its sword was whirling and shards of ghastly golden light fell away from it as it moved, lashing the shadowed landscape. The Four was as large as Agak. And at this moment it was as strong.
But Agak, realizing his danger, began to suck. No longer would this be a pleasurable ritual shared with his sister. He must suck at the energy of this universe if he were to find the strength to defend himself, to gain what he needed to destroy his attacker, the slayer of his sister. Worlds died as Agak sucked.
But not enough. Agak tried cunning.
“This is the center of your universe. All its dimensions intersect here. Come, you can share the power. My sister is dead. I accept her death. You shall be my partner now. With this power we shall conquer a universe far richer than this!” “No!” said the Four, still advancing.
“Very well, but be assured of your defeat.”
The Four swung its sword. The sword fell upon the faceted eye within which Agak’s intelligence-pool bubbled, just as his sister’s had once bubbled. But Agak was stronger already and healed himself at once. Agak’s tendrils emerged and lashed at the Four and the Four cut at the tendrils as it sought his body. And Agak sucked more energy to himself. His body, which the mortals had mistaken for a building, began to glow burning scarlet and to radiate an impossible heat. The sword roared and flared so that black light mingled with the gold and flowed against the scarlet. And all the while the
Four could sense its own universe shrinking and dying. “Give back, Agak, what you have stolen!” said the Four. Planes and angles and curves, wires and tubes, flickered with deep red heat and Agak sighed. The universe whimpered. “I am stronger than you,” said Agak. “Now.” And Agak sucked again. The Four knew that Agak’s attention was diverted for just that short while as he fed. And the Four knew that it, too, must draw energy from its own universe if Agak were to be defeated. So the sword was raised. The sword was flung back, its blade slicing through tens of thousands of dimensions and drawing their power to it. Then it began to swing back. It swung and black light bellowed from its blade. It swung and Agak became aware of it. His body began to alter. Down toward the sorcerer’s great eye, down toward Agak’s intelligence-pool swept the black blade.
Agak’s many tendrils rose to defend the sorcerer against the sword, but the sword cut through them as if they were not there and it struck the eight-sided chamber which was Agak’s eyes and it plunged on down into Agak’s intelligence-pool, deep into the stuff of the sorcerer’s sensibility, drawing up Agak’s energy into itself and thence into its master, the Four Who Were One. And something screamed through the universe and something sent a tremor through the universe. And the universe was dead, even as Agak began to die. The Four did not dare wait to see if Agak were completely vanquished. It swept the sword out, back through the
dimensions, and everywhere the blade touched the energy was restored. The sword rang round and round, round and round, dispersing the energy. And the sword sang its triumph and its glee. And little shreds of black and golden light whispered away and were reabsorbed. For a moment the universe had been dead. Now it lived and Agak’s energy had been added to it. Agak lived, too, but he was frozen. He had attempted to change his shape. Now he still half-resembled the building Elric had seen when he first came to the island, but part of him resembled the Four Who Were One- here was part of Corum’s face, here a leg, there a fragment of sword-blade-as if Agak had believed, at the end, that the Four could only be defeated if its own form were assumed, just as the Four had assumed Gagak’s form.
“We had waited so long. . . .” Agak sighed and then he was dead. And the Four sheathed its sword.
Then there came a howling through the ruins of the many cities and a strong wind blustered against the body of the Four so that it was forced to kneel on its eight legs and bow its four-faced head before the gale. Then, gradually, it reassumed the shape of Gagak, the sorceress, and then it lay within Gagak’s stagnating intelligence-pool and then it rose over it, hovered for a moment, withdrew its sword from the pool. Then four beings fled apart and Elric and Hawkmoon and Erekosë and Corum stood with sword-blades touching over the center of the dead brain.
The four men sheathed their swords. They stared for a second into each other’s eyes and all saw terror and awe there. Elric turned away. He could find neither thoughts nor emotions in him which would relate to what had happened. There were no words he could use. He stood looking dumbly at Ashnar the Lynx and he wondered why Ashnar giggled and chewed at his beard and scraped at the flesh of his own face with his fingernails, his sword forgotten upon the floor of the gray chamber.
“Now I have flesh again. Now I have flesh,” Ashnar kept saying. Elric wondered why Mown Serpent-tamer lay curled in a ball at Ashnar’s feet, and why when Brut of Lashmar emerged from the passage he fell down and lay stretched upon the floor, stirring a little and moaning as if in disturbed slumber. Otto Blendker came into the chamber. His sword was in its scabbard. His eyes were tight shut and he hugged at himself, shivering.
Elric thought to himself: I must forget all this or sanity will disappear forever. He went to Brut and helped the blond warrior to his feet. “What did you see?” “More than I deserved, for all my sins. We were trapped- trapped in that skull. . . .” Then Brut began to weep as a small child might weep and Elric took the tall warrior in his own arms and stroked his head and could not find words or sounds with which to comfort him.
“We must go,” said Erekosë. His eyes were glazed. He staggered as he walked.
Thus, dragging those who had fainted, leading those who had gone mad, leaving those who had died behind, they fled through the dead passages of Gagak’s body, no longer plagued by the things she had created in her attempt to rid that body of those she had experienced as an invading disease. The passages and chambers were cold and brittle and the men were glad when they stood outside and saw the ruins, the sourceless shadows, the red, static sun.
Otto Blendker was the only one of the warriors who seemed to retain his sanity through the ordeal, when they had been absorbed, unknowingly, into the body of the Four Who Were One. He dragged his brand from his belt and he took out his tinder and ignited it. Soon the brand was flaming and the others lighted theirs from his. Elric trudged to where Agak’s remains still lay and he shuddered as he recognized in a monstrous stone face part of his own features. He felt that the stuff could not possibly burn, but it did. Behind him Gagak’s body blazed, too. They were swiftly consumed and pillars of growling fire jutted into the sky, sending up a smoke of white and crimson which for a little while obscured the red disk of the sun.
The men watched the corpses burn.
“I wonder,” said Corum, “if the captain knew why he sent us here?” “Or if he suspected what would happen?” said Hawkmoon. Hawkmoon’s tone was near to resentful. “Only we-only that being-could battle Agak and Gagak in anything resembling their own terms,” said Erekosë. “Other means would not have been successful, no other creature could have the particular qualities, the enormous power needed to slay such strange sorcerers.”
“So it seems,” said Elric, and he would talk no more of it.
“Hopefully,” said Corum, “you will forget this experience as you forgot-or will forget-the other.” Elric offered him a hard stare. “Hopefully, brother,” he said.
Erekosë’s chuckle was ironic. “Who could recall that?” And he, too, said no more. Ashnar the Lynx, who had ceased his gigglings as he watched the fire, shrieked suddenly and broke away from the main party. He ran toward the flickering column and then veered away, disappearing among the ruins and the shadows.
Otto Blendker gave Elric a questioning stare, but Elric shook his head. “Why follow him? What can we do for him?” He looked down at Hown Serpent-tamer. He had particularly liked the man in the sea-green armor. He shrugged. When they moved on, they left the curled body of Hown Serpent-tamer where it lay, helping only Brut of Lashmar across the rubble and down to the shore. Soon they saw the white mist ahead and knew they neared the sea, though the ship was not in sight. At the edge of the mist both Hawkmoon and Erekosë paused. “I will not rejoin the ship,” said Hawkmoon. “I feel I’ve served my passage now. If I can find Tanelorn, this, I suspect, is where I must look.” “My own feelings.” Erekosë nodded his head.
Elric looked to Corum. Corum smiled. “I have already found Tanelorn. I go back to the ship in the hope that soon it will deposit me upon a more familiar shore.” “That is my hope,” said Elric. His arm still supported Brut of Lashmar. Brut whispered, “What was it? What happened to us?”
Elric increased his grip upon the warrior’s shoulder. “Nothing,” he said. Then, as Elric tried to lead Brut into the mist, the blond warrior stepped back, breaking free. “I will stay,” he said. He moved away from Elric. “I am sorry.” Elric was puzzled. “Brut?”
“I am sorry,” Brut said again. “I fear you. I fear that ship.”
Elric made to follow the warrior, but Corum put a hard silver hand upon his shoulder. “Comrade, let us be gone from this place.” His smile was bleak. “It is what is back there that I fear more than the ship.” They stared over the ruins. In the distance they could see the remains of the fire and there were two shadows there now, the shadows of Gagak and Agak as they had first appeared to them. Elric drew a cold breath of air. “With that I agree,” he told Corum. Otto Blendker was the only warrior who chose to return to the ship with them. “If that is Tanelorn, it is not, after all, the place I sought,” he said.
Soon they were waist-deep in the water. They saw again the outlines of the dark ship; they saw the captain leaning on the rail, his arm raised as if in salute to someone or something upon the island. “Captain,” called Corum, “we come aboard.”
“You are welcome,” said the captain. “Yes, you are welcome.” The blind face turned toward them as Elric reached out for the rope ladder. “Would you care to sail for a while into the silent places, the restful places?” “I think so,” said Elric. He paused, halfway up the ladder, and he touched his head. “I have many wounds.” He reached the rail and with his own cool hands the captain helped him over. “They will heal, Elric.” Elric moved closer to the mast. He leaned against it and watched the silent crew as they unfurled the sail. Corum and Otto Blendker came aboard. Elric listened to the sharp sound of the anchor as it was drawn up. The ship swayed a little.
Otto Blendker looked at Elric, then at the captain, then he turned and went into his cabin, saying nothing at all as he closed the door. The sail filled, the ship began to move. The captain reached out and found Elric’s arm. He took Corum’s arm, too, and led them toward his cabin. “The wine,” he said. “It will heal all the wounds.” At the door of the captain’s cabin Elric paused. “And does the wine have other properties?” he asked. “Does it cloud a man’s reason? Was it that which made me accept your commission, Captain?”
The captain shrugged. “What is reason?”
The ship was gathering speed. The white mist was thicker and a cold wind blew at the rags of cloth and metal Elric wore. He sniffed, thinking for a moment that he smelled smoke upon that wind. He put his two hands to his face and touched his flesh. His face was cold. He let his hands fall to his sides and he followed the captain into the warmth of the cabin. The captain poured wine into silver cups from his silver jug. He stretched out a hand to offer a cup to Elric and to Corum. They drank. A little later the captain said, “How do you feel?” Elric said, “I feel nothing.” And that night he dreamed only of shadows and in the morning he could not understand his dream at all.
Book TWOSAILING TO THE PRESENT
IHis bone-white, long-fingered hand upon a carved demon’s head in black-brown hardwood (one of the few such decorations to be found anywhere about the vessel), the tall man stood alone in the ship’s fo’c’sle and stared through large, slanting crimson eyes at the mist into which they moved with a speed and sureness to make any mortal mariner marvel and become incredulous.
There were sounds in the distance, incongruent with the sounds of even this nameless, tuneless sea: thin sounds, agonized and terrible, for all that they remained remote-yet the ship followed them, as if drawn by them; they grew louder-pain and despair were there, but terror was predominant.
Elric had heard such sounds echoing from his cousin Yyrkoon’s sardonically named “Pleasure Chambers” in the days before he had fled the responsibilities of ruling all that remained of the old Melnibonèan Empire. These were the voices of men whose very souls were under siege; men to whom death meant not mere extinction, but a continuation of existence, forever in thrall to some cruel and supernatural master. He had heard men cry so when his salvation and his nemesis, his great black battle-blade Stormbringer, drank their souls.
He did not savor the sound: he hated it, turned his back away from the source and was about to descend the ladder to the main deck when he realized that Otto Blendker had come up behind him. Now that Corum had been borne off by friends with chariots which could ride upon the surface of the water, Blendker was the last of those comrades to have fought at Elric’s side against the two alien sorcerers Gagak and Agak.
Blendker’s black, scarred face was troubled. The ex-scholar, turned hireling sword, covered his ears with his huge palms. “Ach! By the Twelve Symbols of Reason, Elric, who makes that din? It’s as though we sail close to the shores of Hell itself!” Prince Elric of Melnibonè shrugged. “I’d be prepared to forego an answer and leave my curiosity unsatisfied, Master Blendker, if only our ship would change course. As it is, we sail closer and closer to the source.” Blendker grunted his agreement. “I’ve no wish to encounter whatever it is that causes those poor fellows to scream so! Perhaps we should inform the captain.”
“You think he does not know where his own ship sails?” Elric’s smile had little humor. The tall black man rubbed at the inverted V-shaped scar which ran from his forehead to his jawbones. “I wonder if he plans to put us into battle again.” “I’ll not fight another for him.” Elric’s hand moved from the carved rail to the pommel of his runesword. “I have business of my own to attend to, once I’m back on real land.”
A wind came from nowhere. There was a sudden rent in the mist. Now Elric could see that the ship sailed through rust- colored water. Peculiar lights gleamed in that water, just below the surface. There was an impression of creatures moving ponderously in the depths of the ocean and, for a moment, Elric thought he glimpsed a white, bloated face not dissimilar to his own-a Melnibonèan face. Impulsively he whirled, back to the rail, looking past Blendker as he strove to control the nausea in his throat.
For the first time since he had come aboard the Dark Ship he was able clearly to see the length of the vessel. Here were the two great wheels, one beside him on the foredeck, one at the far end of the ship on the reardeck, tended now as always by the steersman, the captain’s sighted twin. There was the great mast bearing the taut black sail, and fore and aft of this, the two deck cabins, one of which was entirely empty (its occupants having been killed during their last landfall) and one of which was occupied only by himself and Blendker. Elric’s gaze was drawn back to the steersman and not for the first time the albino wondered how much influence the captain’s twin had over the course of the Dark Ship. The man seemed tireless, rarely, to Elric’s knowledge, going below to his quarters, which occupied the stern deck as the captain’s occupied the foredeck. Once or twice Elric or Blendker had tried to involve the steersman in conversation, but he appeared to be as dumb as his brother was blind.
The cryptographic, geometrical carvings covering all the ship’s wood and most of its metal, from sternpost to figurehead, were picked out by the shreds of pale mist still clinging to them (and again Elric wondered if the ship actually generated the mist normally surrounding it) and, as he watched, the designs slowly turned to pale pink fire as
the light from that red star, which forever followed them, permeated the overhead cloud. A noise from below. The captain, his long red-gold hair drifting in a breeze which Elric could not feel, emerged from his cabin. The captain’s circlet of blue jade, worn like a diadem, had turned to something of a violet shade in the pink light, and even his buff-colored hose and tunic reflected the hue-even the silver sandals with their silver lacing glittered with the rosy tint.
Again Elric looked upon that mysterious blind face, as unhuman, in the accepted sense, as his own, and puzzled upon the origin of the one who would allow himself to be called nothing but “Captain.” As if at the captain’s summons, the mist drew itself about the ship again, as a woman might draw a froth of furs about her body. The red star’s light faded, but the distant screams continued. Did the captain notice the screams now for the first time, or was this a pantomime of surprise? His blind head tilted, a hand went to his ear. He murmured in a tone of satisfaction, “Aha!” The head lifted. “Elric?” “Here,” said the albino. “Above you.” “We are almost there, Elric.” The apparently fragile hand found the rail of the companionway. The captain began to climb. Elric faced him at the top of the ladder. “If it’s a battle...”
The captain’s smile was enigmatic, bitter. “It was a fight-or shall be one.”
“. . . we’ll have no part of it,” concluded the albino firmly.
“It is not one of the battles in which my ship is directly involved,” the blind man reassured him. “Those whom you can hear are the vanquished-lost in some future which, I think, you will experience close to the end of your present incarnation.”
Elric waved a dismissive hand. “I’ll be glad, Captain, if you would cease such vapid mystification. I’m weary of it.” “I’m sorry it offends you. I answer literally, according to my instincts.” The captain, going past Elric and Otto Blendker so that he could stand at the rail, seemed to be apologizing. He said nothing for a while, but listened to the disturbing and confused babble from the mist. Then he nodded, apparently satisfied.
“We’ll sight land shortly. If you would disembark and seek your own world, I should advise you to do so now. This is the closest we shall ever come again to your plane.” Elric let his anger show. He cursed, invoking Arioch’s name, and put a hand upon the blind man’s shoulder. “What? You cannot return me directly to my own plane?” “It is too late.” The captain’s dismay was apparently genuine. “The ship sails on. We near the end of our long voyage.” “But how shall I find my world? I have no sorcery great enough to move me between the spheres! And demonic assistance is denied me here.”
“There is one gateway to your world,” the captain told him. “That is why I suggest you disembark. Elsewhere there are none at all. Your sphere and this one intersect directly.” “But you say this lies in my future.”
“Be sure-you will return to your own time. Here you are timeless. It is why your memory is so poor. It is why you remember so little of what befalls you. Seek for the gateway- it is crimson and it emerges from the sea off the coast of the island.”
“Which island?”
“The one we approach.”
Elric hesitated. “And where shall you go, when I have landed?” “To Tanelorn,” said the captain. “There is something I must do there. My brother and I must complete our destiny. We carry cargo as well as men. Many will try to stop us now, for they fear our cargo. We might perish, but yet we must do all we can to reach Tanelorn.” “Was that not, then, Tanelorn, where we fought Agak and Gagak?” “That was nothing more than a broken dream of Tanelorn, Elric.” The Melnibonèan knew that he would receive no more information from the captain. “You offer me a poor choice-to sail with you into danger and never see my own world again, or to risk landing on yonder
island inhabited, by the sound of it, by the damned and those which prey upon the damned!” The captain’s blind eyes moved in Elric’s direction. “I know,” he said softly. “But it is the best I can offer you, nonetheless.” The screams, the imploring, terrified shouts, were closer now, but there were fewer of them. Glancing over the side, Elric thought he saw a pair of armored hands rising from the water; there was foam, red-flecked and noxious, and there was yellowish scum in which pieces of frightful flotsam drifted; there were broken timbers, scraps of canvas, tatters of flags and clothing, fragments of weapons, and, increasingly, there were floating corpses.
“But where was the battle?” Blendker whispered, fascinated and horrified by the sight. “Not on this plane,” the captain told him. “You see only the wreckage which has drifted over from one world to another.” “Then it was a supernatural battle?”
The captain smiled again. “I am not omniscient. But, yes, I believe there were supernatural agencies involved. The warriors of half a world fought in the sea-battle-to decide the fate of the multiverse. It is-or will be-one of the decisive battles to determine the fate of Mankind, to fix Man’s destiny for the coming Cycle.”
“Who were the participants?” asked Elric, voicing the question in spite of his resolve. “What were the issues as they understood them?” “You will know in time, I think.” The captain’s head faced the sea again.
Blendker sniffed the air. “Ach! It’s foul!”
Elric, too, found the odor increasingly unpleasant. Here and there now the water was lighted by guttering fires which revealed the faces of the drowning, some of whom still managed to cling to pieces of blackened driftwood. Not all the faces were human (though they had the appearance of having, once, been human): Things with the snouts of pigs and of bulls raised twisted hands to the Dark Ship and grunted plaintively for succor, but the captain ignored them and the steersman held his course.
Fires spluttered and water hissed; smoke mingled with the mist. Elric had his sleeve over his mouth and nose and was glad that the smoke and mist between them helped obscure the sights, for as the wreckage grew thicker not a few of the corpses he saw reminded him more of reptiles than of men, their pale, lizard bellies spilling something other than blood.
“If that is my future,” Elric told the captain, “I’ve a mind to remain on board, after all.” “You have a duty, as have I,” said the captain quietly. “The future must be served, as much as the past and the present.” Elric shook his head. “I fled the duties of an empire because I sought freedom,” the albino told him. “And freedom I must have.” “No,” murmured the captain. “There is no such thing. Not yet. Not for us. We must go through much more before we can even begin to guess what freedom is. The price for the knowledge alone is probably higher than any you would care to pay at this stage of your life. Indeed, life itself is often the price.”
“I also sought release from metaphysics when I left Melnibonè,” said Elric. “I’ll get the rest of my gear and take the land that’s offered. With luck this Crimson Gate will be quickly found and I’ll be back among dangers and torments which will, at least, be familiar.”
“It is the only decision you could have made.” The captain’s blind head turned toward Blendker. “And you, Otto Blendker? What shall you do?” “Elric’s world is not mine and I like not the sound of those screams. What can you promise me, sir, if I sail on with you?” “Nothing but a good death.” There was regret in the captain’s voice. “Death is the promise we’re all born with, sir. A good death is better than a poor one. I’ll sail on with you.” “As you like. I think you’re wise.” The captain sighed. “I’ll say farewell to you, then, Elric of Melnibonè. You fought well in my service and I thank you.” “Fought for what?” Elric asked.
“Oh, call it Mankind. Call it Fate. Call it a dream or an ideal, if you wish.” “Shall I never have a clearer answer?” “Not from me. I do not think there is one.” “You allow a man little faith.” Elric began to descend the companionway.
“There are two kinds of faith, Elric. Like freedom, there is a kind which is easily kept but proves not worth the keeping, and there is a kind which is hard-won. I agree, I offer little of the former.” Elric strode toward his cabin. He laughed, feeling genuine affection for the blind man at that moment. “I thought I had a penchant for such ambiguities, but I have met my match in you, Captain.” He noticed that the steersman had left his place at the wheel and was swinging out a boat on its davits, preparatory to lowering it. “Is that for me?”
The steersman nodded.
Elric ducked into his cabin. He was leaving the ship with nothing but that which he had brought aboard, only his clothing and his armor were in a poorer state of repair than they had been, and his mind was in a considerably greater state of confusion.
Without hesitation he gathered up his things, drawing his heavy cloak about him, pulling on his gauntlets, fastening buckles and thongs, then he left the cabin and returned to the deck. The captain was pointing through the mist at the dark outlines of a coast. “Can you see land, Elric?”
“I can.”
“You must go quickly, then.” “Willingly.”
Elric swung himself over the rail and into the boat. The boat struck the side of the ship several times, so that the hull boomed like the beating of some huge funeral drum. Otherwise there was silence now upon the misty waters and no sign of wreckage. Blendker saluted him. “I wish you luck, comrade.” “You, too, Master Blendker.” The boat began to sink toward the flat surface of the sea, the pulleys of the davits creaking. Elric clung to the rope, letting go as the boat hit the water. He stumbled and sat down heavily upon the seat, releasing the ropes so that the boat drifted at once away from the Dark Ship. He got out the oars and fitted them into their rowlocks.
As he pulled toward the shore he heard the captain’s voice calling to him, but the words were muffled by the mist and he would never know, now, if the blind man’s last communication had been a warning or merely some formal pleasantry. He did not care. The boat moved smoothly through the water; the mist began to thin, but so, too, did the light fade.
Suddenly he was under a twilight sky, the sun already gone and stars appearing. Before he had reached the shore it was already completely dark, with the moon not yet risen, and it was with difficulty that he beached the boat on what seemed flat rocks, and stumbled inland until he judged himself safe enough from any inrushing tide.
Then, with a sigh, he lay down, thinking just to order his thoughts before moving on; but, almost instantly, he was asleep.
IIElric dreamed.
He dreamed not merely of the end of his world but of the end of an entire cycle in the history of the cosmos. He dreamed that he was not only Elric of Melnibonè but that he was other men, too-men who were pledged to some numinous cause which even they could not describe. And he dreamed that he had dreamed of the Dark Ship and Tanelorn and Agak and Gagak while he lay exhausted upon a beach somewhere beyond the borders of Pikarayd; and when he woke up he was smiling sardonically, congratulating himself for the possession of a grandiose imagination. But he could not clear his head entirely of the impression left by that dream.
This shore was not the same, so plainly something had befallen him-perhaps he had been drugged by slavers, then later abandoned when they found him not what they expected. . . . But, no, the explanation would not do. If he could discover his whereabouts, he might also recall the true facts.
It was dawn, for certain. He sat up and looked about him.
He was sprawled upon a dark, sea-washed limestone pavement, cracked in a hundred places, the cracks so deep that the small streams of foaming salt water rushing through these many narrow channels made raucous what would otherwise have been a very still morning.
Elric climbed to his feet, using his scabbarded rune-sword to steady himself. His bone-white lids closed for a moment over
his crimson eyes as he sought, again, to recollect the events which had brought him here. He recalled his flight from Pikarayd, his panic, his falling into a coma of hopelessness, his dreams. And, because he was evidently neither dead nor a prisoner, he could at least conclude that his pursuers had, after all, given up the chase, for if they had found him they would have killed him.
Opening his eyes and casting about him, he remarked the peculiar blue quality of the light (doubtless a trick of the sun behind the gray clouds) which made the landscape ghastly and gave the sea a dull, metallic look. The limestone terraces which rose from the sea and stretched above him shone intermittently, like polished lead. On an impulse he held his hand to the light and inspected it. The normally lusterless white of his skin was now tinged with a faint, bluish luminosity. He found it pleasing and smiled as a child might smile, in innocent wonder.
He had expected to be tired, but he now realized that he felt unusually refreshed, as if he had slept long after a good meal, and, deciding not to question the fact of this fortunate (and unlikely) gift, he determined to climb the cliffs in the hope that he might get some idea of his bearings before he decided which direction he would take.
Limestone could be a little treacherous, but it made easy climbing, for there was almost always somewhere that one terrace met another. He climbed carefully and steadily, finding many footholds, and seemed to gain considerable height quite quickly, yet it was noon before he had reached the top and found himself standing at the edge of a broad, rocky plateau which fell away sharply to form a close horizon. Beyond the plateau
was only the sky. Save for sparse, brownish grass, little grew here and there were no signs at all of human habitation. It was now, for the first time, that Elric realized the absence of any form of wildlife. Not a single seabird flew in the air, not an insect crept through the grass. Instead, there was an enormous silence hanging over the brown plain.
Elric was still remarkably untired, so he decided to make the best use he could of his energy and reach the edge of the plateau in the hope that, from there, he would sight a town or a village. He pressed on, feeling no lack of food and water, and his stride was singularly energetic, still; but he had misjudged his distance and the sun had begun to set well before his journey to the edge was completed. The sky on all sides turned a deep, velvety blue and the few clouds that there were in it were also tinged blue, and now, for the first time, Elric realized that the sun itself was not its normal shade, that it burned blackish purple, and he wondered again if he still dreamed.
The ground began to rise sharply and it was with some effort that he walked, but before the light had completely faded he was on the steep flank of a hill, descending toward a wide valley which, though bereft of trees, contained a river which wound through rocks and russet turf and bracken.
After a short rest, Elric decided to press on, although night had fallen, and see if he could reach the river where he might at least drink and, possibly, in the morning find fish to eat. Again, no moon appeared to aid his progress and he walked for two or three hours in a darkness which was almost total, stumbling occasionally into large rocks, until the ground leveled and he felt sure he had reached the floor of the valley.
He had developed a strong thirst by now and was feeling somewhat hungry, but decided that it might be best to wait until morning before seeking the river when, rounding a particularly tall rock, he saw, with some astonishment, the light of a camp fire.
Hopefully this would be the fire of a company of merchants, a trading caravan on its way to some civilized country which would allow him to travel with it, perhaps in return for his services as a mercenary swordsman (it would not be the first time, since he had left Melnibonè, that he had earned his bread in such a way).
Yet Elric’s old instincts did not desert him; he approached the fire cautiously and let no one see him. Beneath an overhang of rock, made shadowy by the flame’s light, he stood and observed the group of fifteen or sixteen men who sat or lay close to the fire, playing some kind of game involving dice and slivers of numbered ivory.
Gold, bronze, and silver gleamed in the firelight as the men staked large sums on the fall of a dice and the turn of a slip of ivory. Elric guessed that, if they had not been so intent on their game, these men must certainly have detected his approach, for they were not, after all, merchants. By the evidence, they were warriors, wearing scarred leather and dented metal, their weapons ready to hand, yet they belonged to no army-unless it be an army of bandits- for they were of all races and (oddly) seemed to be from various periods in the history of the Young Kingdoms.
It was as if they had looted some scholar’s collection of relics. An axman of the later Lormyrian Republic, which had come to an end some two hundred years ago, lay with his
shoulder rubbing the elbow of a Chalalite bowman, from a period roughly contemporary with Elric’s own. Close to the Chalalite sat a short Ilmioran infantryman of a century past. Next to him was a Filkharian in the barbaric dress of that nation’s earliest times. Tarkeshites, Shazarians, Vilmirians, all mingled and the only thing they had in common, by the look of them, was a villainous, hungry cast to their features.
In other circumstances Elric might have skirted this encampment and moved on, but he was so glad to find human beings of any sort that he ignored the disturbing incongruities of the group; yet he remained content to watch them. One of the men, less unwholesome than the others, was a bulky, black-bearded, baldheaded sea-warrior clad in the casual leathers and silks of the people of the Purple Towns. It was when this man produced a large gold Melnibonèan wheel-a coin not minted, as most coins, but carved by craftsmen to a design both ancient and intricate-that Elric’s caution was fully conquered by his curiosity.
Very few of those coins existed in Melnibonè and none, that Elric had heard of, outside; for the coins were not used for trade with the Young Kingdoms. They were prized, even by the nobility of Melnibonè. It seemed to Elric that the baldheaded man could only have acquired the coin from another Melnibonèan traveler-and Elric knew of no other Melnibonèans who shared his penchant for exploration. His wariness dismissed, he stepped into the circle.
If he had not been completely obsessed by the thought of the Melnibonèan wheel he might have taken some satisfaction in the sudden scuffle to arms which resulted.
Within seconds, the majority of the men were on their feet, their weapons drawn. For a moment, the gold wheel was forgotten. His hand upon his runesword’s pommel, he presented the other in a placatory gesture. “Forgive the interruption, gentlemen. I am but one tired fellow soldier who seeks to join you. I would beg some information and purchase some food, if you have it to spare.” On foot, the warriors had an even more ruffianly appearance. They grinned among themselves, entertained by Elric’s courtesy but not impressed by it. One, in the feathered helmet of a Pan Tangian sea-chief, with features to match-swarthy, sinister-pushed his head forward on its long neck and said banteringly: “We’ve company enough, white-face. And few here are overfond of the man-demons of Melnibonè. You must be rich.” Elric recalled the animosity with which Melnibonèans were regarded in the Young Kingdoms, particularly by those from Pan Tang who envied the Dragon Isle her power and her wisdom and, of late, had begun crudely to imitate Melnibonè.
Increasingly on his guard, he said evenly, “I have a little money.” “Then we’ll take it, demon.” The Pan Tangian presented a dirty palm just below Elric’s nose as he growled, “Give it over and be on your way.”
Elric’s smile was polite and fastidious, as if he had been told a poor joke. . The Pan Tangian evidently thought the joke better than did Elric, for he laughed heartily and looked to his nearest fellows for approval. Coarse laughter infected the night and only the bald- headed, black-bearded man did not join in the jest, but took a step or two backward, while all the others pressed forward. The Pan Tangian’s face was close to Elric’s own; his breath was foul and Elric saw that his beard and hair were alive with lice, yet he kept his head, replying in the same equable tone: “Give me some decent food, a flask of water-some wine, if you have it-and I’ll gladly give you the money I have.” The laughter rose and fell again as Elric continued:
“But if you would take my money and leave me with naught- then I must defend myself. I have a good sword.” The Pan Tangian strove to imitate Elric’s irony. “But you will note, Sir Demon, that we outnumber you. Considerably.” Softly the albino spoke: “I’ve noticed that fact, but I’m not disturbed by it,” and he had drawn the black blade even as he finished speaking, for they had come at him with a rush. And the Pan Tangian was the first to die, sliced through the side, his vertebrae sheared, and Stormbringer, having taken its first soul, began to sing. A Chalalite died next, leaping with stabbing javelin poised, on the point of the runesword, and Stormbringer murmured
with pleasure.
But it was not until it had sliced the head clean off a Filkharian pike-master that the sword began to croon and come fully to life, black fire flickering up and down its length, its strange runes glowing. Now the warriors knew they battled sorcery and became more cautious, yet they scarcely paused in their attack, and Elric, thrusting and parrying, hacking and slicing, needed all of the fresh, dark energy the sword passed on to him. Lance, sword, ax, and dirk were blocked, wounds were given and received, but the dead had not yet outnumbered the living when Elric found himself with his back against the rock and nigh a dozen sharp weapons seeking his vitals. It was at this point, when Elric had become somewhat less than confident that he could best so many, that the baldheaded warrior, ax in one gloved hand, sword in the other, came swiftly into the firelight and set upon those of his fellows closest to him.
“I thank you, sir!” Elric was able to shout, during the short respite this sudden turn produced. His morale improved, he resumed the attack. The Lormyrian was cleaved from hip to pelvis as he dodged a feint; a Filkharian, who should have been dead four hundred years before, fell with the blood bubbling from lips and nostrils, and the corpses began to pile one upon the other. Still Stormbringer sang its sinister battle-song and still the runesword passed its power to its master so that with every death Elric found strength to slay more of the soldiers.
Those who remained now began to express their regret for their hasty attack. Where oaths and threats had issued from
their mouths, now came plaintive petitions for mercy and those who had laughed with such bold braggadocio now wept like young girls, but Elric, full of his old battle-joy, spared none. Meanwhile the man from the Purple Towns, unaided by sorcery, put ax and sword to good work and dealt with three more of his one-time comrades, exulting in his work as if “he had nursed a taste for it for some time. “Yoi! But this is worthwhile slaughter!” cried the black- bearded one. And then that busy butchery was suddenly done and Elric realized that none were left save himself and his new ally, who stood leaning on his ax, panting and grinning like a hound at the kill, replacing a steel skullcap upon his pate from where it had fallen during the fight, and wiping a bloody sleeve over the sweat glistening on his brow, and saying, in a deep, good-humored tone:
“Well, now, it is we who are wealthy, of a sudden.”
Elric sheathed a Stormbringer still reluctant to return to its scabbard. “You desire their gold. Is that why you aided me?” The black-bearded soldier laughed. “I owed them a debt and had been biding my time, waiting to pay. These rascals are all that were left of a pirate crew which slew everyone aboard my own ship when we wandered into strange waters- they would have slain me had I not told them I wished to join them. Now I am revenged. Not that I am above taking the gold, since much of it belongs to me and my dead brothers. It will go to their wives and their children when I return to the Purple Towns.”
“How did you convince them not to kill you, too?” Elric sought among the ruins of the fire for something to eat. He found some cheese and began to chew upon it. “They had no captain or navigator, it seemed. None were real sailors at all, but coast-huggers, based upon this island. They were stranded here, you see, and had taken to piracy as a last resort, but were too terrified to risk the open sea. Besides, after the fight, they had no ship. We had managed to sink that as we fought. We sailed mine to this shore, but provisions were already low and they had no stomach for setting sail without full holds, so I pretended that I knew this coast (may the gods take my soul if I ever see it again after this business) and offered to lead them inland to a village they might loot. They had heard of no such village, but believed me when I said it lay in a hidden valley. That way I prolonged my life while I waited for the opportunity to be revenged upon them. It was a foolish hope, I know. Yet”- grinning-“as it happened, it was well-founded, after all! Eh?”
The black-bearded man glanced a little warily at Elric, uncertain of what the albino might say, hoping, however, for comradeship, though it was well known how haughty Melnibonèans were. Elric could tell that all these thoughts went through his new acquaintance’s mind; he had seen many others make similar calculations. So he smiled openly and slapped the man on the shoulder.
“You saved my life, also, my friend. We are both fortunate.”
The man sighed in relief and slung his ax upon his back. “Aye-lucky’s the word. But shall our luck hold, I wonder?” “You do not know the island at all?”
“Nor the waters, either. How we came to them I’ll never guess. Enchanted waters, though, without question. You’ve
seen the color of the sun?” “I have.” “Well”-the seaman bent to remove a pendant from around the Pan Tangian’s throat-“you’d know more about enchantments and sorceries than I. How came you here, Sir Melnibonèan?” “I know not. I fled from some who hunted me. I came to a shore and could flee no further. Then I dreamed a great deal. When next I awoke I was on the shore again, but of this island.” “Spirits of some sort-maybe friendly to you-took you to safety, away from your enemies.” “That’s just possible,” Elric agreed, “for we have many allies among the elementals. I am called Elric and I am self-exiled from Melnibonè. I travel because I believe I have something to learn from the folk of the Young Kingdoms. I have no power, save what you see....................................................... ”
The black-bearded man’s eyes narrowed in appraisal as he pointed at himself with his thumb. “I’m Smiorgan Baldhead, once a sea-lord of the Purple Towns. I commanded a fleet of merchantmen. Perhaps I still do. I shall not know until I return-if I ever do return.” “Then let us pool our knowledge and our resources, Smiorgan Baldhead, and make plans to leave this island as soon as we can.” Elric walked back to where he saw traces of the abandoned game, trampled into the mud and the blood. From among the dice and the ivory slips, the silver and the bronze coins, he found the gold Melnibonèan wheel. He picked it up and
held it in his outstretched palm. The wheel almost covered the whole palm. In the old days, it had been the currency of kings. “This was yours, friend?” he asked Smiorgan.
Smiorgan Baldhead looked up from where he was still searching the Pan Tangian for his stolen possessions. He nodded. “Aye. Would you keep it as part of your share?”
Elric shrugged. “I’d rather know from whence it came. Who gave it you?” “It was not stolen. It’s Melnibonèan, then?” “Yes.” “I guessed it.”
“From whom did you obtain it?”
Smiorgan straightened up, having completed his search. He scratched at a slight wound on his forearm. “It was used to buy passage on our ship-before we were lost- before the raiders attacked us.” “Passage? By a Melnibonèan?”
“Maybe,” said Smiorgan. He seemed reluctant to speculate. “Was he a warrior?” Smiorgan smiled in his beard. “No. It was a woman gave that to me.” “How came she to take passage?”
Smiorgan began to pick up the rest of the money. “It’s a long tale and, in part, a familiar one to most merchant sailors. We were seeking new markets for our goods and had equipped a good-sized fleet, which I commanded as the largest shareholder.” He seated himself casually upon the big corpse of the Chalalite and began to count the money. “Would you hear the tale or do I bore you already?”
“I’d be glad to listen.”
Reaching behind him, Smiorgan pulled a wine-flask from the belt of the corpse and offered it to Elric, who accepted it and drank sparingly of a wine which was unusually good. Smiorgan took the flask when Elric had finished. “That’s part of our cargo,” he said. “We were proud of it. A good vintage, eh?” “Excellent. So you set off from the Purple Towns?”
“Aye. Going east toward the Unknown Kingdoms. We sailed due east for a couple of weeks, sighting some of the bleakest coasts I have ever seen, and then we saw no land at all for another week. That was when we entered a stretch of water we came to call the Roaring Rocks-like the Serpent’s Teeth off Shazar’s coast, but much greater in expanse, and larger, too. Huge volcanic cliffs which rose from the sea on every side and around which the waters heaved and boiled and howled with a fierceness I’ve rarely experienced. Well, in short, the fleet was dispersed and at least four ships were lost on those rocks. At last we were able to escape those waters and found ourselves becalmed and alone. We searched for our sister ships for a while and then decided to give ourselves another week before turning for home, for we had no liking to go back into the Roaring Rocks again. Low on provisions, we sighted land at last-grassy cliffs and
hospitable beaches and, inland, some signs of cultivation, so we knew we had found civilization again. We put into a small fishing port and satisfied the natives-who spoke no tongue used in the Young Kingdoms-that we were friendly. And that was when the woman approached us.” “The Melnibonèan woman?” “If Melnibonèan she was. She was a fine-looking woman, I’ll say that. We were short of provisions, as I told you, and short of any means of purchasing them, for the fishermen desired little of what we had to trade. Having given up our original quest, we were content to head westward again.”
“The woman?”
“She wished to buy passage to the Young Kingdoms- and was content to go with us as far as Menii, our home port. For her passage she gave us two of those wheels. One was used to buy provisions in the town-Graghin, I think it was called- and after making repairs we set off again.”
“You never reached the Purple Towns?”
“There were more storms-strange storms. Our instruments were useless, our lodestones were of no help to us at all. We became even more completely lost than before. Some of my men argued that we had gone beyond our own world altogether. Some blamed the woman, saying she was a sorceress who had no intention of going to Menii. But I believed her. Night fell and seemed to last forever until we sailed into a calm dawn beneath a blue sun. My men were close to panic-and it takes much to make my men panic- when we sighted the island. As we headed for it those pirates attacked us in a ship which belonged to history-it should have been on the bottom of the ocean, not on the surface. I’ve seen pictures of such craft in murals on a
temple wall in Tarkesh. In ramming us, she stove in half her port side and was sinking even when they swarmed aboard. They were desperate, savage men, Elric-half-starved and blood-hungry. We were weary after our voyage, but fought well. During the fighting the woman disappeared, killed herself, maybe, when she saw the stamp of our conquerors. After a long fight only myself and one other, who died soon after, were left. That was when I became cunning and decided to wait for revenge.”
“The woman had a name?”
“None she would give. I have thought the matter over and suspect that, after all, we were used by her. Perhaps she did not seek Menii and the Young Kingdoms. Perhaps it was this world she sought, and, by sorcery, led us here.” “This world? You think it different from our own?”
“If only because of the sun’s strange color. Do you not think so, too? You, with your Melnibonèan knowledge of such things, must believe it.” “I have dreamed of such things,” Elric admitted, but he would say no more. “Most of the pirates thought as I-they were from all the ages of the Young Kingdoms. That much I discovered. Some were from the earliest years of the era, some from our own time- and some were from the future. Adventurers, most of them, who, at some stage in their lives, sought a legendary land of great riches which lay on the other side of an ancient gateway, rising from the middle of the ocean; but they found themselves trapped here, unable to sail back through this mysterious gate. Others had been involved in sea-fights, thought themselves drowned and woken up on the shores of the island. Many, I suppose, had once had reasonable
virtues, but there is little to support life on the island and they had become wolves, living off one another or any ship unfortunate enough to pass, inadvertently, through this gate of theirs.” Elric recalled part of his dream. “Did any call it the ‘Crimson Gate’?” “Several did, aye.”
“And yet the theory is unlikely, if you’ll forgive my skepticism,” Elric said. “As one who has passed through the Shade Gate to Ameeron ...” “You know of other worlds, then?”
“I’ve never heard of this one. And I am versed in such matters. That is why I doubt the reasoning. And yet, there was the dream................................. ” “Dream?”
“Oh, it was nothing. I am used to such dreams and give them no significance.” “The theory cannot seem surprising to a Melnibonèan, Elric!” Smiorgan grinned again. “It’s I who should be skeptical, not you.” And Elric replied, half to himself: “Perhaps I fear the implications more.” He lifted his head, and with the shaft of a broken spear, began to poke at the fire. “Certain ancient sorcerers of Melnibonè proposed that an infinite number of worlds coexist with our own. Indeed, my dreams, of late, have hinted as much!” He forced himself to smile. “But I cannot afford to believe such things. Thus, I reject them.”
“Wait for the dawn,” said Smiorgan Baldhead. “The color of the sun shall prove the theory.” “Perhaps it will prove only that we both dream,” said Elric. The smell of death was strong in his nostrils. He pushed aside those corpses nearest to the fire and settled himself to sleep. Smiorgan Baldhead had begun to sing a strong yet lilting song in his own dialect, which Elric could scarcely follow. “Do you sing of your victory over your enemies?” the albino asked. Smiorgan paused for a moment, half-amused. “No, Sir Elric, I sing to keep the shades at bay. After all, these fellows’ ghosts must still be lurking nearby, in the dark, so little time has passed since they died.” “Fear not,” Elric told him. “Their souls are already eaten.”
But Smiorgan sang on, and his voice was louder, his song more intense, than ever it had been before. Just before he fell asleep, Elric thought he heard a horse whinny, and he meant to ask Smiorgan if any of the pirates had been mounted, but he fell asleep before he could do so.
IIIRecalling little of his voyage on the Dark Ship, Elric would never know how he came to reach the world in which he now found himself. In later years he would recall most of these experiences as dreams, and indeed they seemed dreamlike even as they occurred. He slept uneasily, and in the morning the clouds were heavier, shining with that strange, leaden light, though the sun itself was obscured. Smiorgan Baldhead of the Purple Towns was pointing upward, already on his feet, speaking with quiet triumph: “Will that evidence suffice to convince you, Elric of Melnibonè?” “I am convinced of a quality about the light-possibly about this terrain-which makes the sun appear blue,” Elric replied. He glanced with distaste around him at the carnage. The corpses made a wretched sight and he was filled with a nebulous misery that was neither remorse nor pity.
Smiorgan’s sigh was sardonic. “Well, Sir Skeptic, we had best retrace my steps and seek my ship. What say you?” “I agree,” the albino told him.
“How far had you marched from the coast when you found us?” Elric told him.
Smiorgan smiled. “You arrived in the nick of time, then. I should have been most embarrassed by today if the sea had
been reached and I could show my pirate friends no village! I shall not forget this favor you have done me, Elric. I am a count of the Purple Towns and have much influence. If there is any service I can perform for you when we return, you must let me know.”
“I thank you,” Elric said gravely. “But first we must discover a means of escape.” Smiorgan had gathered up a satchel of food, some water and some wine. Elric had no stomach to make his breakfast among the dead, so he slung the satchel over his shoulder. “I’m ready,” he said. Smiorgan was satisfied. “Come-we go this way.”
Elric began to follow the sea-lord over the dry, crunching turf. The steep sides of the valley loomed over them, tinged with a peculiar and unpleasant greenish hue, the result of the brown foliage being stained by the blue light from above. When they reached the river, which was narrow and ran rapidly through boulders giving easy means of crossing, they rested and ate. Both men were stiff from the previous night’s fighting; both were glad to wash the dried blood and mud from their bodies in the water.
Refreshed, the pair climbed over the boulders and left the river behind, ascending the slopes, speaking little so that their breath was saved for the exertion. It was noon by the time they reached the top of the valley and observed a plain not unlike the one which Elric had first crossed. Elric now had a fair idea of the island’s geography: it resembled the top of a mountain, with an indentation near the center which was the valley. Again he became sharply aware of the absence of any wildlife and remarked on this to Count
Smiorgan, who agreed that he had seen nothing-no bird, fish, nor beast since he had arrived. “It’s a barren little world, friend Elric, and a misfortune for a mariner to be wrecked upon its shores.” They moved on, until the sea could be observed meeting the horizon in the far distance. It was Elric who first heard the sound behind them, recognizing the steady thump of the hooves of a galloping horse, but when he looked back over his shoulder he could see no sign of a rider, nor anywhere that a rider could hide. He guessed that, in his tiredness, his ears were betraying him. It had been thunder that he had heard.
Smiorgan strode implacably onward, though he, too, must have heard the sound. Again it came. Again, Elric turned. Again he saw nothing. “Smiorgan? Did you hear a rider?” Smiorgan continued to walk without looking back. “I heard,” he grunted. “You have heard it before?”
“Many times since I arrived. The pirates heard it, too, and some believed it their nemesis-an Angel of Death seeking them out for retribution.” “You don’t know the source?”
Smiorgan paused, then stopped, and when he turned his face was grim. “Once or twice I have caught a glimpse of a horse, I think. A tall horse-white-richly dressed- but with no
man upon his back. Ignore it, Elric, as I do. We have larger mysteries with which to occupy our minds!” “You are afraid of it, Smiorgan?”
He accepted this. “Aye. I confess it. But neither fear nor speculation will rid us of it. Come!” Elric was bound to see the sense of Smiorgan’s statement and he accepted it; yet when the sound came again, about an hour later, he could not resist turning. Then he thought he glimpsed the outline of a large stallion, caparisoned for riding, but that might have been nothing more than an idea Smiorgan had put in his mind.
The day grew colder and in the air was a peculiar, bitter odor. Elric remarked on the smell to Count Smiorgan and learned that this, too, was familiar. “The smell comes and goes, but it is usually here in some strength.” “Like sulfur,” said Elric.
Count Smiorgan’s laugh had much irony in it, as if Elric made reference to some private joke of Smiorgan’s own. “Oh, aye! Sulfur right enough!” The drumming of hooves grew louder behind them as they neared the coast and at last Elric, and Smiorgan too, turned around again, to look. And now a horse could be seen plainly-riderless, but saddled and bridled, its dark eyes intelligent, its beautiful white head held proudly.
“Are you still convinced of the absence of sorcery here, Sir Elric?” Count Smiorgan asked with some satisfaction. “The horse was invisible. Now it is visible.” He shrugged the battle-ax on his shoulder into a better position. “Either that, or it moves from one world to another with-ease, so that all we mainly hear are its hoofbeats.”
“If so,” said Elric sardonically, eyeing the stallion, “it might bear us back to our own world.” “You admit, then, that we are marooned in some Limbo?” “Very well, yes. I admit the possibility.” “Have you no sorcery to trap the horse?”
“Sorcery does not come so easily to me, for I have no great liking for it,” the albino told him. As they spoke, they approached the horse, but it would let them get no closer. It snorted and moved backward, keeping the same distance between them and itself. At last, Elric said, “We waste time, Count Smiorgan. Let’s get to your ship with speed and forget blue suns and enchanted horses as quickly as we may. Once aboard the ship I can doubtless help you with a little incantation or two, for we’ll need aid of some sort if we’re to sail a large ship by ourselves.”
They marched on, but the horse continued to follow them. They came to the edge of the cliffs, standing high above a narrow, rocky bay in which a battered ship lay at anchor. The ship had the high, fine lines of a Purple Towns merchantman, but its decks were piled with shreds of torn canvas, pieces of broken rope, shards of timber, torn-open bales of cloth, smashed wine-jars, and all manner of other refuse, while in
several places her rails were smashed and two or three of her yards had splintered. It was evident that she had been through both storms and sea-fights and it was a wonder that she still floated. “We’ll have to tidy her up as best we can, using only the mains’l for motion,” mused Smiorgan. “Hopefully we can salvage enough food to last us...” “Look!” Elric pointed, sure that he had seen someone in the shadows near the afterdeck. “Did the pirates leave any of their company behind?” “None.”
“Did you see anyone on the ship, just then?”
“My eyes play filthy tricks on my mind,” Smiorgan told him. “It is this damned blue light. There is a rat or two aboard, that’s all. And that’s what you saw.” “Possibly.” Elric looked back. The horse appeared to be unaware of them as it cropped the brown grass. “Well, let’s finish the journey.” They scrambled down the steeply sloping cliff-face and were soon on the shore, wading through the shallows for the ship, clambering up the slippery ropes which still hung over the sides, and, at last, setting their feet with some relief upon the deck.
“I feel more secure already,” said Smiorgan. “This ship was my home for so long!” He searched through the scattered cargo until he found an unbroken wine-jar, carved off the seal, and handed it to Elric. Elric lifted the heavy jar and let a little of the good wine flow into his mouth. As Count
Smiorgan began to drink, Elric was sure he saw another movement near the afterdeck, and he moved closer. Now he was certain that he heard strained, rapid breathing- like the breathing of one who sought to stifle his need for air rather than be detected. They were slight sounds, but the albino’s ears, unlike his eyes, were sharp. His hand ready to draw his sword, he stalked toward the source of the sound, Smiorgan now behind him.
She emerged from her hiding place before he reached her. Her hair hung in heavy, dirty coils about her pale face; her shoulders were slumped and her soft arms hung limply at her sides, and her dress was stained and ripped. As Elric approached, she fell on her knees before him. “Take my life,” she said humbly, “but I beg you-do not take me back to Saxif D’Aan, though I know you must be his servant or his kinsman.” “It’s she!” cried Smiorgan in astonishment. “It’s our passenger. She must have been in hiding all this tune.” Elric stepped forward, lifting up the girl’s chin so that he could study her face. There was a Melnibonèan cast about her features, but she was, to his mind, of the Young Kingdoms; she lacked the pride of a Melnibonèan woman, too. “What name was that you used, girl?” he asked kindly. “Did you speak of Saxif D’Aan? Earl Saxif D’Aan of Melnibonè?
“I did, my lord.”
“Do not fear me as his servant,” Elric told her. “And as for being a kinsman, I suppose you could call me that, on my mother’s side-or rather my great-grandmother’s side. He was
an ancestor. He must have been dead for two centuries, at least!” “No,” she said. “He lives, my lord.” “On this island?” “This island is not his home, but it is in this plane that he exists. I sought to escape him through the Crimson Gate. I fled through the gate in a skiff, reached the town where you found me, Count Smiorgan, but he drew me back once I was aboard your ship. He drew me back and the ship with me. For that, I have remorse-and for what befell your crew. Now I know he seeks me. I can feel his presence growing nearer.” “Is he invisible?” Smiorgan asked suddenly. “Does he ride a white horse?” She gasped. “You see! He is near! Why else should the horse appear on this island?” “He rides it?” Elric asked.
“No, no! He fears the horse almost as much as I fear him. The horse pursues him!” Elric produced the Melnibonèan gold wheel from his purse. “Did you take this from Earl Saxif D’Aan?” “I did.”
The albino frowned.
“Who is this man, Elric?” Count Smiorgan asked. “You describe him as an ancestor-yet he lives in this world. What do you know of him?”
Elric weighed the large gold wheel in his hand before replacing it in his pouch. “He was something of a legend in Melnibonè. His story is part of our literature. He was a great sorcerer-one of the greatest-and he fell in love. It’s rare enough for Melnibonèans to fall in love, as others understand the emotion, but rarer for one to have such feelings for a girl who was not even of our own race. She was half-Melnibonèan, so I heard, but from a land which was, in those days, a Melnibonèan possession, a western province close to Dharijor. She was bought by him in a batch of slaves he planned to use for some sorcerous experiment, but he singled her out, saving her from whatever fate it was the others suffered. He lavished his attention upon her, giving her everything. For her, he abandoned his practices, retired to live quietly away from Imrryr, and I think she showed him a certain affection, though she did not seem to love him. There was another, you see, called Carolak, as I recall, and also half-Melnibonèan, who had become a mercenary in Shazar and risen in the favor of the Shazarian court. She had been pledged to this Carolak before her abduction................................................. ” “She loved him?” Count Smiorgan asked.
“She was pledged to marry him, but let me finish my story. . . .” Elric continued: “Well, at length Carolak, now a man of some substance, second only to the king in Shazar, heard of her fate and swore to rescue her. He came with raiders to Melnibonè’s shores, and aided by sorcery, sought out Saxif D’Aan’s palace. That done, he sought the girl, finding her at last in the apartments Saxif D’Aan had set aside for her use. He told her that he had come to claim her as his bride, to rescue her from persecution. Oddly, the girl resisted, suggesting that she had been too long a slave in the Melnibonèan harem to re-adapt to the life of a princess in the Shazarian court. Carolak scoffed at this and seized her. He managed to escape the castle and had the girl over the
saddle of his horse and was about to rejoin his men on the coast when Saxif D’Aan detected them. Carolak, I think, was slain, or else a spell was put on him, but Saxif D’Aan, in his terrible jealousy and certain that the girl had planned the escape with a lover, ordered her to die upon the Wheel of Chaos-a machine rather like that coin in design. Her limbs were broken slowly and Saxif D’Aan sat and watched, through long days, while she died. Her skin was peeled from her flesh, and Earl Saxif D’Aan observed every detail of her punishment. Soon it was evident that the drugs and sorcery used to sustain her life were failing and Saxif D’Aan ordered her taken from the Wheel of Chaos and laid upon a couch. ‘Well,’ he said, ‘you have been punished for betraying me and I am glad. Now you may die.’ And he saw that her lips, blood-caked and frightful, were moving, and he bent to hear her words.”
“Those words? Revenge? An oath?” asked Smiorgan.
“Her last gesture was an attempt to embrace him. And the words were those she had never uttered to him before, much as he had hoped that she would. She said simply, over and over again, until the last breath left her: ‘I love you. I love you. I love you.’ And then she died.” Smiorgan rubbed at his beard. “Gods! What then? What did your ancestor do?” “He knew remorse.” “Of course!” “Not so, for a Melnibonèan. Remorse is a rare emotion with us. Few have ever experienced it. Torn by guilt, Earl Saxif D’Aan left Melnibonè, never to return. It was assumed that he had died in some remote land, trying to make amends for what he had done to the only creature he had ever loved.
But now, it seems, he sought the Crimson Gate, perhaps thinking it an opening into Hell.” “But why should he plague me!” the girl cried. “I am not she! My name is Vassliss. I am a merchant’s daughter, from Jharkor. I was voyaging to visit my uncle in Vilmir when our ship was wrecked. A few of us escaped in an open boat. More storms seized us. I was flung from the boat and was drowning when”-she shuddered- “when his galley found me. I was grateful, then ...”
“What happened?” Elric pushed the matted hair away from her face and offered her some of their wine. She drank gratefully. “He took me to his palace and told me that he would marry me, that I should be his empress forever and rule beside him. But I was frightened. There was such pain in him-and such cruelty, too. I thought he must devour me, destroy me. Soon after my capture, I took the money and the boat and fled for the gateway, which he had told me about............................................................................ ”
“You could find this gateway for us?” Elric asked.
“I think so. I have some knowledge of seamanship, learned from my father. But what would be the use, sir? He would find us again and drag us back. And he must be very near, even now.” “I have a little sorcery myself,” Elric assured her, “and will pit it against Saxif D’Aan’s, if I must.” He turned to Count Smiorgan. “Can we get a sail aloft quickly?” “Fairly quickly.”
“Then let’s hurry, Count Smiorgan Baldhead. I might have the means of getting us through this Crimson Gate and free
from any further involvement in the dealings of the dead!”
IVWhile Count Smiorgan and Vassliss of Jharkor watched, Elric lowered himself to the deck, panting and pale. His first attempt to work sorcery in this world had failed and had exhausted him. “I am further convinced,” he told Smiorgan, “that we are in another plane of existence, for I should have worked my incantations with less effort.” “You have failed.”
Elric rose with some difficulty. “I shall try again.”
He turned his white face skyward; he closed his eyes; he stretched out his arms and his body tensed as he began the incantation again, his voice growing louder and louder, higher and higher, so that it resembled the shrieking of a gale. He forgot where he was; he forgot his own identity; he forgot those who were with him as his whole mind concentrated upon the summoning. He sent his call out beyond the confines of the world, into that strange plane where the elementals dwelled-where the powerful creatures of the air could still be found-the sylphs of the breeze, and the sharnahs, who lived in the storms, and the most powerful of all, the h’Haarshanns, creatures of the whirlwind.
And now at last some of them began to come at his summons, ready to serve him as, by virtue of an ancient pact, the elementals had served his forefathers. And slowly the sail of the ship began to fill, and the timbers creaked, and Smiorgan raised the anchor, and the ship was sailing
away from the island, through the rocky gap of the harbor, and out into the open sea, still beneath a strange blue sun. Soon a huge wave was forming around them, lifting up the ship and carrying it across the ocean, so that Count Smiorgan and the girl marveled at the speed of their progress, while Elric, his crimson eyes open now, but blank and unseeing, continued to croon to his unseen allies.
Thus the ship progressed across the waters of the sea, and at last the island was out of sight and the girl, checking their position against the position of the sun, was able to give Count Smiorgan sufficient information for him to steer a course. As soon as he could, Count Smiorgan went up to Elric, who still straddled the deck, still as stiff-limbed as before, and shook him. “Elric! You will kill yourself with this effort. We need your friends no longer!” At once the wind dropped and the wave dispersed and Elric, gasping, fell to the deck. “It is harder here,” he said. “It is so much harder here. It is as if I have to call across far greater gulfs than any I have known before.” And then Elric slept.
He lay in a warm bunk in a cool cabin. Through the porthole filtered diffused blue light. He sniffed. He caught the odor of hot food, and turning his head, saw that Vassliss stood there, a bowl of broth in her hands. “I was able to cook this,” she said. “It will improve your health. As far as I can tell, we are
nearing the Crimson Gate. The seas are always rough around the gate, so you will need your strength.” Elric thanked her pleasantly and began to eat the broth as she watched him. “You are very like Saxif D’Aan,” she said. “Yet harder in a way-and gentler, too. He is so remote. I know why that girl could never tell him that she loved him.” Elric smiled. “Oh, it’s nothing more than a folktale, probably, the story I told you. This Saxif D’Aan could be another person altogether-or an impostor, even, who has taken his name-or a sorcerer. Some sorcerers take the names of other sorcerers, for they think it gives them more power.”
There came a cry from above, but Elric could not make out the words. The girl’s expression became alarmed. Without a word to Elric, she hurried from the cabin. Elric, rising unsteadily, followed her up the companion-way.
Count Smiorgan Baldhead was at the wheel of his ship and he was pointing toward the horizon behind them. “What do you make of that, Elric?” Elric peered at the horizon, but could see nothing. Often his eyes were weak, as now. But the girl said in a voice of quiet despair: “It is a golden sail.”
“You recognize it?” Elric asked her.
“Oh, indeed I do. It is the galleon of Earl Saxif D’Aan. He has found us. Perhaps he was lying in wait along our route, knowing we must come this way.” “How far are we from the gate?” “I am not sure.” At that moment, there came a terrible noise from below, as if something sought to stave in the timbers of the ship. “It’s in the forward hatches!” cried Smiorgan. “See what it is, friend Elric! But take care, man!” Cautiously Elric prised back one of the hatch covers and peered into the murky fastness of the hold. The noise of stamping and thumping continued on, and as his eyes adjusted to the light, he saw the source. The white horse was there. It whinnied as it saw him, almost in greeting. “How did it come aboard?” Elric asked. “I saw nothing. I heard nothing.” The girl was almost as white as Elric. She sank to her knees beside the hatch, burying her face in her arms. “He has us! He has us!”
“There is still a chance we can reach the Crimson Gate in time,” Elric reassured her. “And once in my own world, why, I can work much stronger sorcery to protect us.” “No,” she sobbed, “it is too late. Why else would the white horse be here? He knows that Saxif D’Aan must soon board us.”
“He’ll have to fight us before he shall have you,” Elric promised her. “You have hot seen his men. Cutthroats all. Desperate and wolfish! They’ll show you no mercy. You would be best advised to hand me over to Saxif D’Aan at once and save yourselves. You’ll gain nothing from trying to protect me. But I’d ask you a favor.”
“What’s that?”
“Find me a small knife to carry, that I may kill myself as soon as I know you two are safe.” Elric laughed, dragging her to her feet. “I’ll have no such melodramatics from you, lass! We stand together. Perhaps we can bargain with Saxif D’Aan.” “What have you to barter?”
“Very little. But he is not aware of that.”
“He can read your thoughts, seemingly. He has great powers!” “I am Elric of Melnibonè. I am said to possess a certain facility in the sorcerous arts, myself.” “But you are not as single-minded as Saxif D’Aan,” she said simply. “Only one thing obsesses him-the need to make me his consort.” “Many girls would be flattered by the attention-glad to be an empress with a Melnibonèan emperor for a husband.” Elric was sardonic.
She ignored his tone. “That is why I fear him so,” she said in a murmur. “If I lost my determination for a moment, I could love him. I should be destroyed! It is what she must have known!”
VThe gleaming galleon, sails and sides all gilded so that it seemed the sun itself pursued them, moved rapidly upon them while the girl and Count Smiorgan watched aghast and Elric desperately attempted to recall his elemental allies, without success. Through the pale blue light the golden ship sailed relentlessly in their wake. Its proportions were monstrous, its sense of power vast, its gigantic prow sending up huge, foamy waves on both sides as it sped silently toward them. With the look of a man preparing himself to meet death, Count Smiorgan Baldhead of the Purple Towns unslung his battle-ax and loosened his sword in its scabbard, setting his little metal cap upon his bald pate. The girl made no sound, no movement at all, but she wept.
Elric shook his head and his long, milk-white hair formed a halo around his face for a moment. His moody crimson eyes began to focus on the world around him. He recognized the ship; it was of a pattern with the golden battle-barges of Melnibonè-doubtless the ship in which Earl Saxif D’Aan had fled his homeland, searching for the Crimson Gate. Now Elric was convinced that this must be that same Saxif D’Aan and he knew less fear than did his companions, but considerably greater curiosity. Indeed, it was almost with nostalgia that he noted the ball of fire, like a natural comet, glowing with green light, come hissing and spluttering toward them, flung by the ship’s forward catapult. He half expected to see a great dragon wheeling in the sky overhead, for it was with dragons and gilded battle-craft like these that Melnibonè had once conquered the world.
The fireball fell into the sea a few inches from their bow and was evidently placed there deliberately, as a warning. “Don’t stop!” cried Vassliss. “Let the flames slay us! It will be better!” Smiorgan was looking upward. “We have no choice. Look! He has banished the wind, it seems.” They were becalmed. Elric smiled a grim smile. He knew now what the folk of the Young Kingdoms must have felt when his ancestors had used these identical tactics against them. “Elric?” Smiorgan turned to the albino. “Are these your people? That ship’s Melnibonèan without question!” “So are the methods,” Elric told him. “I am of the blood royal of Melnibonè. I could be emperor, even now, if I chose to claim my throne. There is some small chance that Earl Saxif D’Aan, though an ancestor, will recognize me and, therefore, recognize my authority. We are a conservative people, the folk of the Dragon Isle.”
The girl spoke through dry lips, hopelessly: “He recognizes only the authority of the Lords of Chaos, who give him aid.” “All Melnibonèans recognize that authority,” Elric told her with a certain humor. From the forward hatch, the sound of the stallion’s stamping and snorting increased. “We’re besieged by enchantments!” Count Smiorgan’s normally ruddy features had paled. “Have you none of your own, Prince Elric, you can use to counter them?” “None, it seems.”
The golden ship loomed over them. Elric saw that the rails, high overhead, were crowded not with Imrryrian warriors but with cutthroats equally as desperate as those he had fought upon the island, and, apparently, drawn from the same variety of historical periods and nations. The galleon’s long sweeps scraped the sides of the smaller vessel as they folded, like the legs of some water insect, to enable the grappling irons to be flung out. Iron claws bit into the timbers of the little ship and the brigandly crowd overhead cheered, grinning at them, menacing them with their weapons.
The girl began to run to the seaward side of the ship, but Elric caught her by the arm. “Do not stop me, I beg you!” she cried. “Rather, jump with me and drown!” “You think that death will save you from Saxif D’Aan?” Elric said. “If he has the power you say, death will only bring you more firmly into his grasp!” “Oh!” The girl shuddered and then, as a voice called down to them from one of the tall decks of the gilded ship, she gave a moan and fainted into Elric’s arms, so that, weakened as he was by his spell-working, it was all that he could do to stop himself falling with her to the deck.
The voice rose over the coarse shouts and guffaws of the crew. It was pure, lilting, and sardonic. It was the voice of a Melnibonèan, though it spoke the common tongue of the Young Kingdoms, a corruption, in itself, of the speech of the Bright Empire.
“May I have the captain’s permission to come aboard?”
Count Smiorgan growled back: “You have us firm, sir! Don’t try to disguise an act of piracy with a polite speech!” “I take it I have your permission, then.” The unseen speaker’s tone remained exactly the same. Elric watched as part of the rail was drawn back to allow a gangplank, studded with golden nails to give firmer footing, to be lowered from the galleon’s deck to theirs. A tall figure appeared at the top of the gangplank. He had the fine features of a Melnibonèan nobleman, was thin, proud in his bearing, clad in voluminous robes of cloth-of- gold, an elaborate helmet in gold and ebony upon his long auburn locks. He had gray-blue eyes, pale, slightly flushed skin, and he carried, so far as Elric could see, no weapons of any kind.
With considerable dignity, Earl Saxif D’Aan began to descend, his rascals at his back. The contrast between this beautiful intellectual and those he commanded was remarkable. Where he walked with straight back, elegant and noble, they slouched, filthy, degenerate, unintelligent, grinning with pleasure at their easy victory. Not a man among them showed any sign of human dignity; each was overdressed in tattered and unclean finery, each had at least three weapons upon his person, and there was much evidence of looted jewelry, of nose-rings, earrings, bangles, necklaces, toe- and finger-rings, pendants, cloak-pins, and the like.
“Gods!” murmured Smiorgan. “I’ve rarely seen such a collection of scum, and I thought I’d encountered most kinds in my voyages. How can such a man bear to be in their company?” “Perhaps it suits his sense of irony,” Elric suggested.
Earl Saxif D’Aan reached their deck and stood looking up at them to where they still positioned themselves, in the poop. He gave a slight bow. His features were controlled and only his eyes suggested something of the intensity of emotion dwelling within bun, particularly as they fell upon the girl in Elric’s arms.
“I am Earl Saxif D’Aan of Melnibonè, now of the Islands Beyond the Crimson Gate. You have something with you which is mine. I would claim it from you.” “You mean the Lady Vassliss of Jharkor?” Elric said, his voice as steady as Saxif D’Aan’s. Saxif D’Aan seemed to note Elric for the first time. A slight frown crossed his brow and was quickly dismissed. “She is mine,” he said. “You may be assured that she will come to no harm at my hands.” Elric, seeking some advantage, knew that he risked much when he next spoke, in the High Tongue of Melnibonè, used between those of the blood royal. “Knowledge of your history does not reassure me, Saxif D’Aan.” Almost imperceptibly, the golden man stiffened and fire flared in his gray-blue eyes. “Who are you, to speak the Tongue of Kings? Who are you, who claims knowledge of my past?” “I am Elric, son of Sadric, and I am the four-hundred-and- twenty-eighth emperor of the folk of R’lin K’ren A’a, who landed upon the Dragon Isle ten thousand years ago. I am Elric, your emperor, Earl Saxif D’Aan, and I demand your fealty.” And Elric held up his right hand, upon which still gleamed a ring set with a single Actorios stone, the Ring of Kings.
Earl Saxif D’Aan now had firm control of himself again. He gave no sign that he was impressed. “Your sovereignty does not extend beyond your own world, noble emperor, though I greet you as a fellow monarch.” He spread his arms so that his long sleeves rustled. “This world is mine. All that exists beneath the blue sun do I rule. You trespass, therefore, in my domain. I have every right to do as I please.”
“Pirate pomp,” muttered Count Smiorgan, who had understood nothing of the conversation but had gathered something of what passed by the tone. “Pirate braggadocio. What does he say, Elric?” “He convinces me that he is not, in your sense, a pirate, Count Smiorgan. He claims that he is ruler of this plane. Since there is apparently no other, we must accept his claim.” “Gods! Then let him behave like a monarch and let us sail safely out of his waters!” “We may-if we give him the girl.”
Count Smiorgan shook his head. “I’ll not do that. She’s my passenger, in my charge. I must die rather than do that. It is the Code of the Sea-lords of the Purple Towns.” “You are famous for your adherence to that code,” Elric said. “As for myself, I have taken this girl into my protection and, as hereditary emperor of Melnibonè, I cannot allow myself to be browbeaten.” They had conversed in a murmur, but, somehow, Earl Saxif D’Aan had heard them. “I must let you know,” he said evenly, in the common tongue, “that the girl is mine. You steal her from me. Is that
the action of an emperor?”
“She is not a slave,” Elric said, “but the daughter of a free merchant in Jharkor. You have no rights upon her.” Earl Saxif D’Aan said, “Then I cannot open the Crimson Gate for you. You must remain in my world forever.” “You have closed the gate? Is it possible?” “To me.” “Do you know that the girl would rather die than be captured by you, Earl Saxif D’Aan? Does it give you pleasure to instill such fear?” The golden man looked directly into Elric’s eyes as if he made some cryptic challenge. “The gift of pain has ever been a favorite gift among our folk, has it not? Yet it is another gift I offer her. She calls herself Vassliss of Jharkor, but she does not know herself. I know her. She is Gratyesha, Princess of Fwem-Omeyo, and I would make her my bride.”
“How can it be that she does not know her own name?”
“She is reincarnated-soul and flesh are identical-that is how I know. And I have waited, Emperor of Melnibonè, for many scores of years for her. Now I shall not be cheated of her.” “As you cheated yourself, two centuries past, in Melnibonè?”
“You risk much with your directness of language, brother monarch!” There was a hint of a warning in Saxif D’Aan’s tone, a warning much fiercer than any implied by the words. “Well”-Elric shrugged-“you have more power than we do. My sorcery works poorly in your world. Your ruffians outnumber
“You must give her to me. Then you may go free, back to your own world and your own time.” Elric smiled. “There is sorcery here. She is no reincarnation. You’d bring your lost love’s spirit from the netherworld to inhabit this girl’s body. Am I not right? That is why she must be given freely, or your sorcery will rebound upon you-or might-and you would not take the risk.”
Earl Saxif D’Aan turned his head away so that Elric might not see his eyes. “She is the girl,” he said, in the High Tongue. “I know that she is. I mean her soul no harm. I would merely give it back its memory.” “Then it is stalemate,” said Elric.
“Have you no loyalty to a brother of the royal blood?” Saxif D’Aan murmured, still refusing to look at Elric. “You claimed no such loyalty, as I recall, Earl Saxif D’Aan. If you accept me as your emperor, then you must accept my decisions. I keep the girl in my custody. Or you must take her by force.” “I am too proud.”
“Such pride shall ever destroy love,” said Elric, almost in sympathy. “What now, King of Limbo? What shall you do with us?” Earl Saxif D’Aan lifted his noble head, about to reply, when from the hold the stamping and the snorting began again. His eyes widened. He looked questioningly at Elric, and there was something close to terror in his face.
“What’s that? What have you in the hold?”
“A mount, my lord, that is all,” said Elric equably. “A horse? An ordinary horse?” “A white one. A stallion, with bridle and saddle. It has no rider.” At once Saxif D’Aan’s voice rose as he shouted orders for his men. “Take those three aboard our ship. This one shall be sunk directly. Hurry! Hurry!” Elric and Smiorgan shook off the hands which sought to seize them and they moved toward the gangplank, carrying the girl between them, while Smiorgan muttered, “At least we are not slain, Elric. But what becomes of us now?” Elric shook his head. “We must hope that we can continue to use Earl Saxif D’Aan’s pride against him, to our advantage, though the gods alone know how we shall resolve the dilemma.” Earl Saxif D’Aan was already hurrying up the gangplank ahead of them. “Quickly,” he shouted. “Raise the plank!”
They stood upon the decks of the golden battle-barge and watched as the gangplank was drawn up, the length of rail replaced. “Bring up the catapults,” Saxif D’Aan commanded. “Use lead. Sink that vessel at once!” The noise from the forward hold increased. The horse’s voice echoed over ships and water. Hooves smashed at timber and
then, suddenly, it came crashing through the hatch-covers, scrambling for purchase on the deck with its front hooves, and then standing there, pawing at the planks, its neck arching, its nostrils dilating, and its eyes glaring, as if ready to do battle.
Now Saxif D’Aan made no attempt to hide the terror on his face. His voice rose to a scream as he threatened his rascals with every sort of horror if they did not obey him with utmost speed. The catapults were dragged up and huge globes of lead were lobbed onto the decks of Smiorgan’s ship, smashing through the planks like arrows through parchment so that almost immediately the ship began to sink.
“Cut the grappling hooks!” cried Saxif D’Aan, wrenching a blade from the hand of one of his men and sawing at the nearest rope. “Cast loose-quickly!” Even as Smiorgan’s ship groaned and roared like a drowning beast, the ropes were cut. The ship keeled over at once, and the horse disappeared. “Turn about!” shouted Saxif D’Aan. “Back to Fhaligarn and swiftly, or your souls shall feed my fiercest demons!” There came a peculiar, high-pitched neighing from the foaming water, as Smiorgan’s ship, stern uppermost, gasped and was swallowed. Elric caught a glimpse of the white stallion, swimming strongly. “Go below!” Saxif D’Aan ordered, indicating a hatchway. “The horse can smell the girl and thus is doubly difficult to lose.” “Why do you fear it?” Elric asked. “It is only a horse. It cannot harm you.”
Saxif D’Aan uttered a laugh of profound bitterness. “Can it not, brother monarch? Can it not?” As they carried the girl below, Elric was frowning, remembering a little more of the legend of Saxif D’Aan, of the girl he had punished so cruelly, and of her lover, Prince Carolak. The last he heard of Saxif D’Aan was the sorcerer crying:
“More sail! More sail!”
And then the hatch had closed behind them and they found themselves in an opulent Melnibonèan day-cabin, full of rich hangings, precious metal, decorations of exquisite beauty and, to Count Smiorgan, disturbing decadence. But it was Elric, as he lowered the girl to a couch, who noticed the smell.
“Augh! It’s the smell of a tomb-of damp and mold. Yet nothing rots. It is passing peculiar, friend Smiorgan, is it not?” “I scarcely noticed, Elric.” Smiorgan’s voice was hollow. “But I would agree with you on one thing. We are entombed. I doubt we’ll live to escape this world now.”
VIAn hour had passed since they had been forced aboard. The door had been locked behind them, and it seemed Saxif D’Aan was too preoccupied with escaping the white stallion to bother with them. Peering through the lattice of a porthole, Elric could look back to where their ship had been sunk. They were many leagues distant already; yet he still thought, from time to time, that he saw the head and shoulders of the stallion above the waves.
Vassliss had recovered and sat pale and shivering upon the couch. “What more do you know of that horse?” Elric asked her. “It would be helpful to me if you could recall anything you have heard.” She shook her head. “Saxif D’Aan spoke little of it, but I gather he fears the rider more than he does the horse.” “Ah!” Elric frowned. “I suspected it! Have you ever seen the rider?” “Never. I think that Saxif D’Aan has never seen him, either. I think he believes himself doomed if that rider should ever sit upon the white stallion.” Elric smiled to himself.
“Why do you ask so much about the horse?” Smiorgan wished to know. Elric shook his head. “I have an instinct, that is all. Half a memory. But I’ll say nothing and think as little as I may, for
there is no doubt Saxif D’Aan, as Vassliss suggests, has some power of reading the mind.” They heard a footfall above, descending to their door. A bolt was drawn and Saxif D’Aan, his composure fully restored, stood in the opening, his hands in his golden sleeves. “You will forgive, I hope, the peremptory way in which I sent you here. There was danger which had to be averted at all costs. As a result, my manners were not all that they should have been.” “Danger to us?” Elric asked. “Or to you, Earl Saxif D’Aan?” “In the circumstances, to all of us, I assure you.” “Who rides the horse?” Smiorgan asked bluntly. “And why do you fear him?” Earl Saxif D’Aan was master of himself again, so there was no sign of a reaction. “That is very much my private concern,” he said softly. “Will you dine with me now?” The girl made a noise in her throat and Earl Saxif D’Aan turned piercing eyes upon her. “Gratyesha, you will want to cleanse yourself and make yourself beautiful again. I will see that facilities are placed at your disposal.” “I am not Gratyesha,” she said. “I am Vassliss, the merchant’s daughter.” “You will remember,” he said. “In time, you will remember.” There was such certainty, such obsessive power, in his voice that even Elric experienced a frisson of awe. “The things will be brought to you, and you may use this cabin as your own until we return to my palace on Fhaligarn. My lords . . .” He indicated that they should leave.
Elric said, “I’ll not leave her, Saxif D’Aan. She is too afraid.” “She fears only the truth, brother.” “She fears you and your madness.”
Saxif D’Aan shrugged insouciantly. “I shall leave first, then. If you would accompany me, my lords . . .” He strode from the cabin and they followed. Elric said, over his shoulder, “Vassliss, you may depend upon my protection.” And he closed the cabin doors behind him. Earl Saxif D’Aan was standing upon the deck, exposing his noble face to the spray which was flung up by the ship as it moved with supernatural speed through the sea. “You called me mad, Prince Elric? Yet you must be versed in sorcery, yourself.” “Of course. I am of the blood royal. I am reckoned knowledgeable in my own world.” “But here? How well does your sorcery work?”
“Poorly, I’ll admit. The spaces between the planes seem greater.” “Exactly. But I have bridged them. I have time to learn how to bridge them.” “You are saying that you are more powerful than am I?” “It is a fact, is it not?” “It is. But I did not think we were about to indulge in sorcerous battles, Earl Saxif D’Aan.”
“Of course. Yet, if you were to think of besting me by sorcery, you would think twice, eh?” “I should be foolish to contemplate such a thing at all. It could cost me my soul. My life, at least.” “True. You are a realist, I see.” “I suppose so.” “Then we can progress on simpler lines, to settle the dispute between us.” “You propose a duel?” Elric was surprised.
Earl Saxif D’Aan’s laughter was light. “Of course not- against your sword? That has power in all worlds, though the magnitude varies.” “I’m glad that you are aware of that,” Elric said significantly.
“Besides,” added Earl Saxif D’Aan, his golden robes rustling as he moved a little nearer to the rail, “you would not kill me-for only I have the means of your escaping this world.” “Perhaps we’d elect to remain,” said Elric.
“Then you would be my subjects. But, no-you would not like it here. I am self-exiled. I could not return to my own world now, even if I wished to do so. It has cost me much, my knowledge. But I would found a dynasty here, beneath the blue sun. I must have my wife, Prince Elric. I must have Gratyesha.”
“Her name is Vassliss,” said Elric obstinately. “She thinks it is.”
“Then it is. I have sworn to protect her, as has Count Smiorgan. Protect her we shall. You will have to kill us all.” “Exactly,” said Earl Saxif D’Aan with the air of a man who has been coaching a poor student toward the correct answer to a problem, “Exactly. I shall have to kill you all. You leave me with little alternative, Prince Elric.” “Would that benefit you?”
“It would. It would put a certain powerful demon at my service for a few hours.” “We should resist.”
“I have many men. I do not value them. Eventually, they would overwhelm you. Would they not?” Elric remained silent.
“My men would be aided by sorcery,” added Saxif D’Aan. “Some would die, but not too many, I think.” Elric was looking beyond Saxif D’Aan, staring out to sea. He was sure that the horse still followed. He was sure that Saxif D’Aan knew, also. “And if we gave up the girl?”
“I should open the Crimson Gate for you. You would be honored guests. I should see that you were borne safely through, even taken safely to some hospitable land in your own world, for even if you passed through the gate there would be danger. The storms.”
Elric appeared to deliberate.
“You have only a little time to make your decision, Prince Elric. I had hoped to reach my palace, Fhaligarn, by now. I shall not allow you very much longer. Come, make your decision. You know I speak the truth.” “You know that I can work some sorcery in your world, do you not?” “You summoned a few friendly elementals to your aid, I know. But at what cost? Would you challenge me directly?” “It would be unwise of me,” said Elric.
Smiorgan was tugging at his sleeve. “Stop this useless talk. He knows that we have given our word to the girl and that we must fight him!” Earl Saxif D’Aan sighed. There seemed to be genuine sorrow in his voice. “If you are determined to lose your lives...” he began. “I should like to know why you set such importance upon the speed with which we make up our minds,” Elric said. “Why cannot we wait until we reach Fhaligarn?” Earl Saxif D’Aan’s expression was calculating, and again he looked full into Elric’s crimson eyes. “I think you know,” he said, almost inaudibly. But Elric shook his head. “I think you give me too much credit for intelligence.” “Perhaps.”
Elric knew that Saxif D’Aan was attempting to read his thoughts; he deliberately blanked his mind, and suspected that he sensed frustration in the sorcerer’s demeanor.
And then the albino had sprung at his kinsman, his hand chopping at Saxif D’Aan’s throat. The earl was taken completely off guard. He tried to call out, but his vocal chords were numbed. Another blow, and he fell to the deck, senseless.
“Quickly, Smiorgan,” Elric shouted, and he had leaped into the rigging, climbing swiftly upward to the top yards. Smiorgan, bewildered, followed, and Elric had drawn his sword, even as he reached the crow’s nest, driving upward through the rail so that the lookout was taken in the groin scarcely before he realized it. Next, Elric was hacking at the ropes holding the mainsail to the yard. Already a number of Saxif D’Aan’s ruffians were climbing after them. The heavy golden sail came loose, falling to envelop the pirates and take several of them down with it. Elric climbed into the crow’s nest and pitched the dead man over the rail in the wake of his comrades. Then he had raised his sword over his head, holding it in his two hands, his eyes blank again, his head raised to the blue sun, and Smiorgan, clinging to the mast below, shuddered as he heard a peculiar crooning come from the albino’s throat.
More of the cutthroats were ascending, and Smiorgan hacked at the rigging, having the satisfaction of seeing half a score go flying down to break their bones on the deck below, or be swallowed by the waves. Earl Saxif D’Aan was beginning to recover, but he was still stunned. “Fool!” he was crying. “Fool!” But it was not possible to tell if he referred to Elric or to himself.
Elric’s voice became a wail, rhythmical and chilling, as he chanted his incantation, and the strength from the man he had killed flowed into him and sustained him. His crimson eyes seemed to flicker with fires of another, nameless color, and his whole body shook as the strange runes shaped themselves in a throat which had never been made to speak such sounds.
His voice became a vibrant groan as the incantation continued, and Smiorgan, watching as more of the crew made efforts to climb the mainmast, felt an unearthly coldness creep through him. Earl Saxif D’Aan screamed from below:
“You would not dare!”
The sorcerer began to make passes in the air, his own incantation tumbling from his lips, and Smiorgan gasped as a creature made of smoke took shape only a few feet below him. The creature smacked its lips and grinned and stretched a paw, which became flesh even as it moved, toward Smiorgan. He hacked at the paw with his sword, whimpering.
“Elric!” cried Count Smiorgan, clambering higher so that he grasped the rail of the crow’s nest. “Elric! He sends demons against us now!” But Elric ignored him. His whole mind was in another world, a darker, bleaker world even than this one. Through gray mists, he saw a figure, and he cried a name. “Come!” he called in the ancient tongue of his ancestors. “Come!” Count Smiorgan cursed as the demon became increasingly substantial. Red fangs clashed and green eyes glared at him. A claw stroked his boot and no matter how much he struck
with his sword, the demon did not appear to notice the blows. There was no room for Smiorgan in the crow’s nest, but he stood on the outer rim, shouting with terror, desperate for aid. Still Elric continued to chant. “Elric! I am doomed!”
The demon’s paw grasped Smiorgan by his ankle. “Elric!” Thunder rolled out at sea; a bolt of lightning appeared for a second and then was gone. From nowhere there came the sound of a horse’s hooves pounding, and a human voice shouting in triumph. Elric sank back against the rail, opening his eyes in time to see Smiorgan being dragged slowly downward. With the last of his strength he flung himself forward, leaning far out to stab downward with Stormbringer. The runesword sank cleanly into the demon’s right eye and it roared, letting go of Smiorgan, striking at the blade which drew its energy from it, and as that energy passed into the blade and thence to Elric, the albino grinned a frightful grin so that, for a second, Smiorgan became more frightened of his friend than he had been of the demon. The demon began to dematerialize, its only means of escape from the sword which drank its life-force, but more of Saxif D’Aan’s rogues were behind it, and their blades rattled as they sought the pair.
Elric swung himself back over the rail, balanced precariously on the yard as he slashed at their attackers, yelling the old battle-cries of his people. Smiorgan could do little but watch.
He noted that Saxif D’Aan was no longer on deck and he shouted urgently to Elric: “Elric! Saxif D’Aan. He seeks out the girl.”
Elric now took the attack to the pirates, and they were more than anxious to avoid the moaning runesword, some even leaping into the sea rather than encounter it. Swiftly the two leaped from yard to yard until they were again upon the deck.
“What does he fear? Why does he not use more sorcery?” panted Count Smiorgan, as they ran toward the cabin. “I have summoned the one who rides the horse,” Elric told him. “I had so little time-and I could tell you nothing of it, knowing that Saxif D’Aan would read my intention in your mind, if he could not in mine!” The cabin doors were firmly secured from the inside. Elric began to hack at them with the black sword. But the door resisted as it should not have resisted. “Sealed by sorcery and I’ve no means of unsealing it,” said the albino. “Will he kill her?”
“I don’t know. He might try to take her into some other plane. We must-“ Hooves clattered on the deck and the white stallion reared behind them, only now it had a rider, clad in bright purple and yellow armor. He was bareheaded and youthful, though there were several old scars upon his face. His hair was thick and curly and blond and his eyes were a deep blue.
He drew tightly upon his reins, steadying the horse. He looked piercingly at Elric. “Was it you, Melnibonèan, who opened the pathway for me?” “It was.”
“Then I thank you, though I cannot repay you.”
“You have repaid me,” Elric told him, then drew Smiorgan aside as the rider leaned forward and spurred his horse directly at the closed doors, smashing through as though they were rotted cotton. There came a terrible cry from within and then Earl Saxif D’Aan, hampered by his complicated robes of gold, rushed from the cabin, seizing a sword from the hand of the nearest corpse, darting Elric a look not so much of hatred but of bewildered agony, as he turned to face the blond rider.
The rider had dismounted now and came from the cabin, one arm around the shivering girl, Vassliss, one hand upon the reins of his horse, and he said, sorrowfully: “You did me a great wrong, Earl Saxif D’Aan, but you did Gratyesha an infinitely more terrible one. Now you must pay.” Saxif D’Aan paused, drawing a deep breath, and when he looked up again, his eyes were steady, his dignity had returned. “Must I pay in full?” he said. “In full.” “It is all I deserve,” said Saxif D’Aan. “I escaped my doom for many years, but I could not escape the knowledge of my
crime. She loved me, you know. Not you.”
“She loved us both, I think. But the love she gave you was her entire soul and I should not want that from any woman.” “You would be the loser, then.”
“You never knew how much she loved you.” “Only-only afterward.................. ” “I pity you, Earl Saxif D’Aan.” The young man gave the reins of his horse to the girl, and he drew his sword. “We are strange rivals, are we not?” “You have been all these years in Limbo, where I banished you-in that garden on Melnibonè?” “All these years. Only my horse could follow you. The horse of Tendric, my father, also of Melnibonè, and also a sorcerer.” “If I had known that, then, I’d have slain you cleanly and sent the horse to Limbo.” “Jealousy weakened you, Earl Saxif D’Aan. But now we fight as we should have fought then-man to man, with steel, for the hand of the one who loves us both. It is more than you deserve.” “Much more,” agreed the sorcerer. And he brought up his sword to lunge at the young man who, Smiorgan guessed, could only be Prince Carolak himself. The fight was predetermined. Saxif D’Aan knew that, if Carolak did not. Saxif D’Aan’s skill in arms was up to the standard of any Melnibonèan nobleman, but it could not
match the skill of a professional soldier, who had fought for his life time after time. Back and forth across the deck, while Saxif D’Aan’s rascals looked on in openmouthed astonishment, the rivals fought a duel which should have been fought and resolved two centuries before, while the girl they both plainly thought was the reincarnation of Gratyesha watched them with as much concern as might her original have watched when Saxif D’Aan first encountered Prince Carolak in the gardens of his palace, so long ago.
Saxif D’Aan fought well, and Carolak fought nobly, for on many occasions he avoided an obvious advantage, but at length Saxif D’Aan threw away his sword, crying: “Enough. I’ll give you your vengeance, Prince Carolak. I’ll let you take the girl. But you’ll not give me your damned mercy-you’ll not take my pride.”
And Carolak nodded, stepped forward, and struck straight for Saxif D’Aan’s heart. The blade entered clean and Earl Saxif D’Aan should have died, but he did not. He crawled along the deck until he reached the base of the mast, and he rested his back against it, while the blood pumped from the wounded heart. And he smiled.
“It appears.” he said faintly, “that I cannot die, so long have I sustained my life by sorcery. I am no longer a man.” He did not seem pleased by this thought, but Prince Carolak, stepping forward and leaning over him, reassured him. “You will die,” he promised, “soon.” “What will you do with her-with Gratyesha?”
“Her name is Vassliss,” said Count Smiorgan insistently. “She is a merchant’s daughter, from Jharkor.” “She must make up her own mind,” Carolak said, ignoring Smiorgan. Earl Saxif D’Aan turned glazed eyes on Elric. “I must thank you,” he said. “You brought me the one who could bring me peace, though I feared him.” “Is that why, I wonder, your sorcery was so weak against me?” Elric said. “Because you wished Carolak to come and release you from your guilt?” “Possibly, Elric. You are wiser in some matters, it seems, than am I.” “What of the Crimson Gate?” Smiorgan growled. “Can that be opened? Have you still the power, Earl Saxif D’Aan?” “I think so.” From the folds of his bloodstained garments of gold, the sorcerer produced a large crystal which shone with the deep colors of a ruby. “This will not only lead you to the gate, it will enable you to pass through, only I must warn you . . .” Saxif D’Aan began to cough. “The ship-“ he gasped, “the ship---like my body-has been sustained by means of sorcery-therefore . . .” His head slumped forward. He raised it with a huge effort and stared beyond them at the girl who still held the reins of the white stallion. “Farewell, Gratyesha, Princess of Fwem-Omeyo. I loved you.” The eyes remained fixed upon her, but they were dead eyes now.
Carolak turned back to look at the girl. “How do you call yourself, Gratyesha?” “They call me Vassliss,” she told him. She smiled up into his youthful, battle-scarred face. “That is what they call me,
Prince Carolak.”
“You know who I am?” “I know you now.” “Will you come with me, Gratyesha? Will you be my bride, at last, in the strange new lands I have found, beyond the world?” “I will come,” she said.
He helped her up into the saddle of his white stallion and climbed so that he sat behind her. He bowed to Elric of Melnibonè. “I thank you again, Sir Sorcerer, though I never thought to be helped by one of the royal blood of Melnibonè.”
Elric’s expression was not without humor. “In Melnibonè,” he said, “I’m told it’s tainted blood.” “Tainted with mercy, perhaps.” “Perhaps.” Prince Carolak saluted them. “I hope you find peace, Prince Elric, as I have found it.” “I fear my peace will more resemble that which Saxif D’Aan found,” Elric said grimly. “Nonetheless, I thank you for your good words, Prince Carolak.” Then Carolak, laughing, had ridden his horse for the rail, leaped it, and vanished. There was a silence upon the ship. The remaining ruffians looked uncertainly from one to the other. Elric addressed them:
“Know you this-I have the key to the Crimson Gate -and only I have the knowledge to use it. Help me sail the ship, and you’ll have freedom from this world! What say you?” “Give us our orders, Captain,” said a toothless individual, and he cackled with mirth. “It’s the best offer we’ve had in a hundred years or more!”
VIIIt was Smiorgan who first saw the Crimson Gate. He held the great red gem in his hand and pointed ahead. “There! There, Elric! Saxif D’Aan has not betrayed us!” The sea had begun to heave with huge, turbulent waves, and with the mainsail still tangled upon the deck, it was all that the crew could do to control the ship, but the chance of escape from the world of the blue sun made them work with every ounce of energy and, slowly, the golden battle-barge neared the towering crimson pillars. The pillars rose from the gray, roaring water, casting a peculiar light upon the crests of the waves. They appeared to have little substance, and yet stood firm against the battering of the tons of water lashing around them. “Let us hope they are wider apart than they look,” said Elric. “It would be a hard enough task steering through them in calm waters, let alone this kind of sea.” “I’d best take the wheel, I think,” said Count Smiorgan, handing Elric the gem, and he strode back up the tilting deck, climbing to the covered wheelhouse and relieving the frightened man who stood there. There was nothing Elric could do but watch as Smiorgan turned the huge vessel into the waves, riding the tops as best he could, but sometimes descending with a rush which made Elric’s heart rise to his mouth. All around them, then, the cliffs of water threatened, but the ship was taking another wave before the main force of water could crash onto her decks. For all this, Elric was quickly soaked through
and, though sense told him he would be best below, he clung to the rail, watching as Smiorgan steered the ship with uncanny sureness toward the Crimson Gate. And then the deck was flooded with red light and Elric was half blinded. Gray water flew everywhere; there came a dreadful scraping sound, then a snapping as oars broke against the pillars. The ship shuddered and began to turn, sideways to the wind, but Smiorgan forced her around and suddenly the quality of the light changed subtly, though the sea remained as turbulent as ever and Elric knew, deep within him, that overhead, beyond the heavy clouds, a yellow sun was burning again.
But now there came a creaking and a crashing from within the bowels of the battle-barge. The smell of mold, which Elric had noted earlier, became stronger, almost overpowering. Smiorgan came hurrying back, having handed over the wheel. His face was pale again. “She’s breaking up, Elric,” he called out, over the noise of the wind and the waves. He staggered as a huge wall of water struck the ship and snatched away several planks from the deck. “She’s falling apart, man!”
“Saxif D’Aan tried to warn us of this!” Elric shouted back. “As he was kept alive by sorcery, so was his ship. She was old before he sailed her to that world. While there, the sorcery which sustained her remained strong- but on this plane it has no power at all. Look!” And he pulled at a piece of the rail, crumbling the rotten wood with his fingers. “We must find a length of timber which is still good.”
At that moment a yard came crashing from the mast and struck the deck, bouncing, then rolling toward them.
Elric crawled up the sloping deck until he could grasp the spar and test it. “This one’s still good. Use your belt or whatever else you can and tie yourself to it!” The wind wailed through the disintegrating rigging of the ship; the sea smashed at the sides, driving great holes below the waterline. The ruffians who had crewed her were in a state of complete panic, some trying to unship small boats which crumbled even as they swung them out, others lying flat against the rotted decks and praying to whatever gods they still worshiped.
Elric strapped himself to the broken yard as firmly as he could and Smiorgan followed his example. The next wave to hit the ship full on lifted them with it, cleanly over what remained of the rail and into the chilling, shouting waters of that terrible sea.
Elric kept his mouth tight shut against swallowing too much water and reflected on the irony of his situation. It seemed that, having escaped so much, he was to die a very ordinary death, by drowning. It was not long before his senses left him and he gave himself up to the swirling and somehow friendly waters of the ocean. He awoke, struggling.
There were hands upon him. He strove to fight them off, but he was too weak. Someone laughed, a rough, good-humored sound. The water no longer roared and crashed around him. The wind no longer howled. Instead there was a gentler
movement. He heard waves lapping against timber. He was aboard another ship. He opened his eyes, blinking in warm, yellow sunlight. Red- cheeked Vilmirian sailors grinned down at him. “You’re a lucky man-if man you be!” said one. “My friend?” Elric sought for Smiorgan.
“He was in better shape than were you. He’s down in Duke Avan’s cabin now.” “Duke Avan?” Elric knew the name, but in his dazed condition could remember nothing to help him place the man. “You saved us?” “Aye. We found you both drifting, tied to a broken yard carved with the strangest designs I’ve ever seen. A Melnibonèan craft, was she?” “Yes, but rather old.”
They helped him to his feet. They had stripped him of his clothes and wrapped him in woolen blankets. The sun was already drying his hair. He was very weak. He said: “My sword?”
“Duke Avan has it, below.” “Tell him to be careful of it.” “We’re sure he will.” “This way,” said another. “The duke awaits you.”
Book THREESAILING TO THE PAST
IElric sat back in the comfortable, well-padded chair and accepted the wine cup handed him by his host. While Smiorgan ate his fill of the hot food provided for them, Elric and Duke Avan appraised one another. Duke Avan was a man of about forty, with a square, handsome face. He was dressed in a gilded silver breastplate, over which was arranged a white cloak. His britches, tucked into black knee-length boots, were of cream-colored doeskin. On a small sea-table at his elbow rested his helmet, crested with scarlet feathers.
“I am honored, sir, to have you as my guest,” said Duke Avan. “I know you to be Elric of Melnibonè. I have been seeking you for several months, ever since news came to me that you had left your homeland (and your power) behind and were wandering, as it were, incognito in the Young Kingdoms.”
“You know much, sir.”
“I, too, am a traveler by choice. I almost caught up with you in Pikarayd, but I gather there was some sort of trouble there. You left quickly and then I lost your trail altogether. I was about to give up looking for your aid when, by the
greatest of good fortune, I found you floating in the water!” Duke Avan laughed. “You have the advantage of me,” said Elric, smiling. “You raise many questions.” “He’s Avan Astran of Old Hrolmar,” grunted Count Smiorgan from the other side of a huge ham bone. “He’s well known as an adventurer-explorer-trader. His reputation’s the best. We can trust him, Elric.” “I recall the name now,” Elric told the duke. “But why should you seek my aid?” The smell of the food from the table had at last impinged and Elric got up. “Would you mind if I ate something while you explained, Duke Avan?” “Eat your fill, Prince Elric. I am honored to have you as a guest.” “You have saved my life, sir. I have never had it saved so courteously!” Duke Avan smiled. “I have never before had the pleasure of, let us say, catching so courteous a fish. If I were a superstitious man, Prince Elric, I should guess that some other force threw us together in this way.” “I prefer to think of it as coincidence,” said the albino, beginning to eat. “Now, sir, tell me how I can aid you.” “I shall not hold you to any bargain, merely because I have been lucky enough to save your life,” said Duke Avan Astran; “please bear that in mind.” “I shall, sir.”
Duke Avan stroked the feathers of his helmet. “I have explored most of the world, as Count Smiorgan rightly says. I have been to your own Melnibonè and I have even ventured east, to Elwher and the Unknown Kingdoms. I have been to Myyrrhn, where the Winged Folk live. I have traveled as far as World’s Edge and hope one day to go beyond. But I have never crossed the Boiling Sea and I know only a small stretch of coast along the western continent-the continent that has no name. Have you been there, Elric, in your travels?”
The albino shook his head. “I seek experience of other cultures, other civilizations-that is why I travel. There has been nothing, so far, to take me there. The continent is largely uninhabited, and then, where it is inhabited, only by savages, is it not?”
“So we are told.”
“You have other intelligence?”
“You know that there is some evidence,” said Duke Avan in a deliberate tone, “that your own ancestors came originally from that mainland?” “Evidence?” Elric pretended lack of interest. “A few legends, that is all.” “One of those legends speaks of a city older than dreaming Imrryr. A city that still exists in the deep jungles of the west.” Elric recalled his conversation with Earl Saxif D’Aan, and he smiled to himself. “You mean R’lin K’ren A’a?” “Aye. A strange name.” Duke Avan Astran leaned forward, his eyes alight with delighted curiosity. “You pronounce it
more fluently than could I. You speak the secret tongue, the High Tongue, the Speech of Kings................ ” “Of course.”
“You are forbidden to teach it to any but your own children, are you not?” “You appear conversant with the customs of Melnibonè, Duke Avan,” Elric said, his lids falling so that they half covered his eyes. He leaned back in his seat as he bit into a piece of fresh bread with relish. “Do you know what the words mean?” “I have been told that they mean simply ‘Where the High Ones Meet’ in the ancient speech of Melnibonè,” Duke Avan Astran told him. Elric inclined his head. “That is so. Doubtless only a small town, in reality. Where local chiefs gathered, perhaps once a year, to discuss the price of grain.” “You believe that, Prince Elric?”
Elric inspected a covered dish. He helped himself to veal in a rich, sweet sauce. “No,” he said. “You believe, then, that there was an ancient civilization even before your own, from which your own culture sprang? You believe that R’lin K’ren A’a is still there, somewhere in the jungles of the west?” Elric waited until he had swallowed. He shook his head. “No,” he said. “I believe that it does not exist at all.” “You are not curious about your ancestors?”
“Should I be?”
“They were said to be different in character from those who founded Melnibonè. Gentler. . . .” Duke Avan Astran looked deep into Elric’s face. Elric laughed. “You are an intelligent man, Duke Avan of Old Hrolmar. You are a perceptive man. Oh, and indeed you are a cunning man, sir!” Duke Avan grinned at the compliment. “And you know much more of the legends than you are admitting, if I am not mistaken.” “Possibly.” Elric sighed as the food warmed him. “We are known as a secretive people, we of Melnibonè.” “Yet,” said Duke Avan, “you seem untypical. Who else would desert an empire to travel in lands where his very race was hated?” “An emperor rules better, Duke Avan Astran, if he has close knowledge of the world in which he rules.” “Melnibonè rules the Young Kingdoms no longer.”
“Her power is still great. But that, anyway, was not what I meant. I am of the opinion that the Young Kingdoms offer something which Melnibonè has lost.” “Vitality?” “Perhaps.” “Humanity!” grunted Count-Smiorgan Baldhead. “That is what your race has lost, Prince Elric. I say nothing of you-but look at Earl Saxif D’Aan. How can one so wise be such a
simpleton? He lost everything-pride, love, power—because he had no humanity. And what humanity he had-why, it destroyed him.” “Some say it will destroy me,” said Elric, “but perhaps ‘humanity’ is, indeed, what I seek to bring to Melnibonè, Count Smiorgan.” “Then you will destroy your kingdom!” said Smiorgan bluntly. “It is too late to save Melnibonè.” “Perhaps I can help you find what you seek, Prince Elric,” said Duke Avan Astran quietly. “Perhaps there is time to save Melnibonè, if you feel such a mighty nation is in danger.” “From within,” said Elric. “But I speak too freely.” “For a Melnibonèan, that is true.” “How did you come to hear of this city?” Elric wished to know. “No other man I have met in the Young Kingdoms has heard of R’lin K’ren A’a.” “It is marked on a map I have.”
Deliberately, Elric chewed his meat and swallowed it “The map is doubtless a forgery.” “Perhaps. Do you recall anything else of the legend of R’lin K’ren A’a?” “There is the story of the Creature Doomed to Live.” Elric pushed the food aside and poured wine for himself. “The city is said to have received its name because the Lords of the Higher Worlds once met there to decide the rules of the Cosmic Struggle. They were overheard by the one inhabitant of the city who had not flown when they came. When they
discovered him, they doomed him to remain alive forever, carrying the frightful knowledge in his head....................... ” “I have heard that story, too. But the one that interests me is that the inhabitants of R’lin K’ren A’a never returned to their city. Instead they struck northward and crossed the sea. Some reached an island we now call Sorcerer’s Isle while others went farther-blown by a great storm-and came at length to a larger island inhabited by dragons whose venom caused all it touched to burn ... to Melnibonè, in fact.” “And you wish to test the truth of that story. Your interest is that of a scholar?” Duke Avan laughed. “Partly. But my main interest in R’lin K’ren A’a is more materialistic. For your ancestors left a great treasure behind them when they fled their city. Particularly they abandoned an image of Arioch, the Lord of Chaos-a monstrous image, carved in jade, whose eyes were two huge, identical gems of a kind unknown anywhere else in all the lands of the Earth. Jewels from another plane of existence. Jewels which could reveal all the secrets of the Higher Worlds, of the past and the future, of the myriad planes of the cosmos ”
“All cultures have similar legends. Wishful thinking, Duke Avan, that is all................. ” “But the Melnibonèans had a culture unlike any others. The Melnibonèans are not true men, as you well know. Their powers are superior, their knowledge far greater............................ ” “It was once thus,” Elric said. “But that great power and knowledge is not mine. I have only a fragment of it........ ” “I did not seek you in Bakshaan and later in Jadmar because I believed you could verify what I have heard. I did not cross
the sea to Filkhar, then to Argimiliar and at last to Pikarayd because I thought you would instantly confirm all that I have spoken of-I sought you because I think you the only man who would wish to accompany me on a voyage which would give us the truth or falsehood to these legends once and for all.”
Elric tilted his head and drained his wine-cup.
“Cannot you do that for yourself? Why should you desire my company on the expedition? From what I have heard of you, Duke Avan, you are not one who needs support in his venturings ” Duke Avan laughed. “I went alone to Elwher when my men deserted me in the Weeping Waste. It is not in my nature to know physical fear. But I have survived my travels this long because I have shown proper foresight and caution before setting off. Now it seems I must face dangers I cannot anticipate-sorcery, perhaps. It struck me, therefore, that I needed an ally who had some experience of fighting sorcery. And since I would have no truck with the ordinary kind of wizard such as Pan Tang spawns, you were my only choice. You seek knowledge, Prince Elric, just as I do. Indeed, it could be said that if it had not been for your yearning for knowledge, your cousin would never have attempted to usurp the Ruby Throne of Melnibonè.......................................................... ” “Enough of that,” Elric said bitterly. “Let’s talk of this expedition. Where is the map?” “You will accompany me?” “Show me the map.” Duke Avan drew a scroll from his pouch. “Here it is.”
“Where did you find it?” “On Melnibonè.” “You have been there recently?” Elric felt anger rise in him.
Duke Avan raised a hand. “I went there with a group of traders and I gave much for a particular casket which had been sealed, it seemed, for an eternity. Within that casket was this map.” He spread out the scroll on the table. Elric recognized the style and the script-the old High Speech of Melnibonè. It was a map of part of the western continent- more than he had ever seen on any other map. It showed a great river winding into the interior for a hundred miles or more. The river appeared to flow through a jungle and then divide into two rivers which later rejoined. The “island” of land thus formed had a black circle marked on it. Against this circle, in the involved writing of ancient Melnibonè, was the name R’lin K’ren A’a. Elric inspected the scroll carefully. It did not seem to be a forgery.
“Is this all you found?” he asked.
“The scroll was sealed and this was embedded in the seal,” Duke Avan said, handing something to Elric. Elric held the object in his palm. It was a tiny ruby of a red so deep as to seem black at first, but when he turned it into the light he saw an image at the center of the ruby and he recognized that image. He frowned, then he said, “I will agree to your proposal, Duke Avan. Will you let me keep this?”
“Do you know what it is?”
“No. But I should like to find out. There is a memory somewhere in my head.... ”
“Very well, take it. I will keep the map.” “When did you have it in mind to set off?” Duke Avan’s smile was sardonic. “We are already sailing around the southern coast to the Boiling Sea.” “There are few who have returned from that ocean,” Elric murmured bitterly. He glanced across the table and saw that Smiorgan was imploring with his eyes for Elric not to have any part of Duke Avan’s scheme. Elric smiled at his friend. “The adventure is to my taste.”
Miserably, Smiorgan shrugged. “It seems it will be a little longer before I return to the Purple Towns.”
IIThe coast of Lormyr had disappeared in warm mist and Duke Avan Astran’s schooner dipped its graceful prow toward the west and the Boiling Sea. The Vilmirian crew of the schooner were used to a less demanding climate and more casual work than this and they went about their tasks, it seemed to Elric, with something of an aggrieved air. Standing beside Elric in the ship’s poop, Count Smiorgan Baldhead wiped sweat from his pate and growled: “Vilmirians are a lazy lot, Prince Elric. Duke Avan needs real sailors for a voyage of this kind. I could have picked him a crew, given the chance ”
Elric smiled. “Neither of us was given the chance, Count Smiorgan. It was a fait accompli. He’s a clever man, Duke Astran.” “It is not a cleverness I entirely respect, for he offered us no real choice. A free man is a better companion than a slave, says the old aphorism.” “Why did you not disembark when you had the chance, then, Count Smiorgan?” “Because of the promise of treasure,” said the black-bearded man frankly. “I would return with honor to the Purple Towns. Forget you not that I commanded the fleet that was lost............................ ” Elric understood.
“My motives are straightforward,” said Smiorgan. “Yours are much more complicated. You seem to desire danger as other men desire lovemaking or drinking-as if in danger you find forgetfulness.” “Is that not true of many professional soldiers?”
“You are not a mere professional soldier, Elric. That you know as well as I.” “Yet few of the dangers I have faced have helped me forget,” Elric pointed out. “Rather they have strengthened the reminder of what I am-of the dilemma I face. My own instincts war against the traditions of my race.” Elric drew a deep, melancholy breath. “I go where danger is because I think that an answer might lie there- some reason for all this tragedy and paradox. Yet I know I shall never find it.”
“But it is why you sail to R’lin K’ren A’a, eh? You hope that your remote ancestors had the answer you need?” “R’lin K’ren A’a is a myth. Even should the map prove genuine what shall we find but a few ruins? Imrryr has stood for ten thousand years and she was built at least two centuries after my people settled on Melnibonè. Time will have taken R’lin K’ren A’a away.”
“And this statue, this Jade Man, Avan spoke of?”
“If the statue ever existed, it could have been looted at any time in the past hundred centuries.” “And the Creature Doomed to Live?” “A myth.”
“But you hope, do you not, that it is all as Duke Avan says . . . ?” Count Smiorgan put a hand on Elric’s arm. “Do you not?”
Elric stared ahead, into the writhing steam which rose from the sea. He shook his head. “No, Count Smiorgan. I fear that it is all as Duke Avan says.”
The wind blew whimsically and the schooner’s passage was slow as the heat grew greater and the crew sweated still more and murmured fearfully. And upon each face, now, was a stricken look. Only Duke Avan seemed to retain his confidence. He called to them all to take heart; he told them that they should all be rich soon; and he gave orders for the oars to be unshipped, for the wind could no longer be trusted. They grumbled at this, stripping off their shirts to reveal skins as red as cooked lobsters. Duke Avan made a joke of that. But the Vilmirians no longer laughed at his jokes as they had done in the milder seas of their home waters.
Around the ship the sea bubbled and roared, and they navigated by their few instruments, for the steam obscured everything. Once a green thing erupted from the sea and glared at them before disappearing. They ate and slept little and Elric rarely left the poop. Count Smiorgan bore the heat silently and Duke Avan, seemingly oblivious to any discomfort, went cheerfully about the ship, calling encouragement to his men. Count Smiorgan was fascinated by the waters. He had heard of them, but never crossed them. “These are only the outer
reaches of this sea, Elric,” he said in some wonder. “Think what it must be like at the middle.” Elric grinned. “I would rather not. As it is, I fear I’ll be boiled to death before another day has passed.” Passing by, Duke Avan heard him and clapped him on the shoulder. “Nonsense, Prince Elric! The steam is good for you! There is nothing healthier!” Seemingly with pleasure, Duke Avan stretched his limbs. “It cleans all the poisons from the system.”
Count Smiorgan offered him a glowering look and Duke Avan laughed. “Be of better cheer, Count Smiorgan. According to my charts-such as they are-a couple of days will see us nearing the coasts of the western continent.” “The thought fails to raise my spirits very greatly,” said Count Smiorgan, but he smiled, infected by Avan’s good humor. But shortly thereafter the sea grew slowly less frenetic and the steam began to disperse until the heat became more tolerable. At last they emerged into a calm ocean beneath a shimmering blue sky in which hung a red-gold sun. But three of the Vilmirian crew had died to cross the Boiling Sea, and four more had a sickness in them which made them cough a great deal, and shiver, and cry out in the night. For a while they were becalmed, but at last a soft wind began to blow and fill the schooner’s sails and soon they had sighted their first land-a little yellow island where they found fruit and a spring of fresh water. Here, too, they buried the three men who had succumbed to the sickness of the
Boiling Sea, for the Vilmirians had refused to have them buried in the ocean on the grounds that the bodies would be “stewed like meat in a pot.” While the schooner lay at anchor, just off the island, Duke Avan called Elric to his cabin and showed him, for a second time, that ancient map. Pale golden sunlight filtered through the cabin’s ports and fell upon the old parchment, beaten from the skin of a beast long since extinct, as Elric and Duke Avan Astran of Old Hrolmar bent over it. “See,” Duke Avan said, pointing. “This island’s marked. The map’s scale seems reasonably accurate. Another three days and we shall be at the mouth of the river.” Elric nodded. “But it would be wise to rest here for a while until our strength is fully restored and the morale of the crew is raised higher. There are reasons, after all, why men have avoided the jungles of the west over the centuries.” “Certainly there are savages there-some say they are not even human-but I’m confident we can deal with those dangers. I have much experience of strange territories, Prince Elric.” “But you said yourself you feared other dangers.” “True. Very well, we’ll do as you suggest” On the fourth day a strong wind began to blow from the east and they raised anchor. The schooner leaped over the waves under only half her canvas and the crew saw this as a good omen.
“They are mindless fools,” Smiorgan said as they stood clinging to the rigging in the prow. “The time will come when they will wish they were suffering the cleaner hardships of the Boiling Sea. This journey, Elric, could benefit none of us, even if the riches of R’lin K’ren A’a are still there.”
But Elric did not answer. He was lost in strange thoughts, unusual thoughts for him, for he was remembering his childhood, his mother and his father. They had been the last true rulers of the Bright Empire-proud, insouciant, cruel. They had expected him-perhaps because of his strange albinism-to restore the glories of Melnibonè. Instead he threatened to destroy what was left of that glory. They, like himself, had had no real place in this new age of the Young Kingdoms, but they had refused to acknowledge it. This journey to the western continent, to the land of his ancestors, had a peculiar attraction for him. Here no new nations had emerged. The continent had, as far as he knew, remained the same since R’lin K’ren A’a had been abandoned. The jungles would be the jungles his folk had known, the land would be the land that had given birth to his peculiar race, molded the character of its people with their somber pleasures, then-melancholy arts, and their dark delights. Had his ancestors felt this agony of knowledge, this impotence in the face of the understanding that existence had no point, no purpose, no hope? Was this why they had built their civilization in that particular pattern, why they had disdained the more placid, spiritual values of mankind’s philosophers? He knew that many of the intellectuals of the Young Kingdoms pitied the powerful folk of Melnibonè as mad. But if they had been mad and if they had imposed a madness upon the world that had lasted a hundred centuries, what had made them so? Perhaps the secret did lie in R’lin K’ren A’a-not in any tangible form, but in the ambience created by the dark jungles and the deep, old
rivers. Perhaps here, at last, he would be able to feel at one with himself. He ran his fingers through his milk-white hair and there was a kind of innocent anguish in his crimson eyes. He might be the last of his kind and yet he was unlike his kind. Smiorgan had been wrong. Elric knew that everything that existed had its opposite. In danger he might find peace. And yet, of course, in peace there was danger. Being an imperfect creature in an imperfect world he would always know paradox. And that was why in paradox there was always a kind of truth. That was why philosophers and soothsayers flourished. In a perfect world there would be no place for them. In an imperfect world the mysteries were always without solution and that was why there was always a great choice of solutions.
It was on the morning of the third day that the coast was sighted and the schooner steered her way through the sandbanks of the great delta and anchored, at last, at the mouth of the dark and nameless river.
IIIEvening came and the sun began to set over the black outlines of the massive trees. A rich, ancient smell came from the jungle and through the twilight echoed the cries of strange birds and beasts. Elric was impatient to begin the quest up the river. Sleep-never welcome-was now impossible to achieve. He stood unmoving on the deck, his eyes hardly blinking, his brain barely active, as if expecting something to happen to him. The rays of the sun stained his face and threw black shadows over the deck and then it was dark and still under the moon and the stars. He wanted the jungle to absorb him. He wanted to be one with the trees and the shrubs and the creeping beasts. He wanted thought to disappear. He drew the heavily scented air into his lungs as if that alone would make him become what at that moment he desired to be. The drone of insects became a murmuring voice that called him into the heart of the old, old forest. And yet he could not move-could not answer. And at length Count Smiorgan came up on deck and touched his shoulder and said something and passively he went below to his bunk and wrapped himself in his cloak and lay there, still listening to the voice of the jungle.
Even Duke Avan seemed in a more introspective mood than usual when they upped anchor the next morning and began to row against the sluggish current. There were few gaps in the foliage above their heads and they had the impression that they were entering a huge, gloomy tunnel, leaving the sunlight behind with the sea. Bright plants twined among the vines that hung from the leafy canopy and caught in the ship’s masts as they moved. Ratlike animals with long arms swung through the branches and peered at them with bright, knowing eyes. The river turned and the sea was no
longer in sight. Shafts of sunlight filtered down to the deck and the light had a greenish tinge to it. Elric became more alert than he had ever been since he agreed to accompany Duke Avan. He took a keen interest in every detail of the jungle and the black river over which moved schools of insects like agitated clouds of mist and in which blossoms drifted like drops of blood in ink. Everywhere were rustlings, sudden squawks, barks and wet noises made by fish or river animals as they hunted the prey disturbed by the ship’s oars which cut into the great clumps of weed and sent the things that hid there scurrying. The others began to complain of insect bites, but Elric was not troubled by them, perhaps because no insect could desire his deficient blood.
Duke Avan passed him on the deck. The Vilmirian slapped at his forehead. “You seem more cheerful, Prince Elric.” Elric smiled absently. “Perhaps I am.”
“I must admit I personally find all this a bit oppressive. I’ll be glad when we reach the city.” “You are still convinced you’ll find it?”
“I’ll be convinced otherwise when I’ve explored every inch of the island we’re bound for.” So absorbed had he become in the atmosphere of the jungle that Elric was hardly aware of the ship or his companions. The ship beat very slowly up the river, moving at little more than walking speed. A few days passed, but Elric scarcely noticed, for the jungle did not change-and then the river widened and the canopy parted and the wide, hot sky was suddenly full of huge birds crowding upward as the ship disturbed them. All but Elric
were pleased to be under the open sky again and spirits rose. Elric went below. The attack on the ship came almost immediately. There was a whistling noise and a scream and a sailor writhed and fell over clutching at a gray thin semicircle of something which had buried itself in his stomach. An upper yard came crashing to the deck, bringing sail and rigging with it. A headless body took four paces toward the poop deck before collapsing, the blood pumping from the obscene bole that was its neck. And everywhere was the thin whistling noise. Elric heard the sounds from below and came back instantly, buckling on his sword. The first face he saw was Smiorgan’s. The bald-pated man looked perturbed as he crouched against a rail on the starboard side. Elric had the impression of gray blurs whistling past, slashing into flesh and rigging, wood and canvas. Some fell to the deck and he saw that they were thin disks of crystalline rock, about a foot in diameter. They were being hurled from both banks of the river and there was no protection against them.
He tried to see who was throwing the disks and glimpsed something moving in the trees along the right bank. Then the disks ceased suddenly and there was a pause before some of the sailors dashed across the deck to seek better cover. Duke Avan suddenly appeared in the stern. He had unsheathed his sword.
“Get below. Get your bucklers and any armor you can find. Bring bows. Arm yourselves, men, or you’re finished.” And as he spoke their attackers broke from the trees and began to wade into the water. No more disks came and it seemed likely they had exhausted their supply.
“By Chardros!” Avan gasped. “Are these real creatures or some sorcerer’s conjurings?” The things were essentially reptilian but with feathery crests and neck wattles, though their faces were almost human. Their forelegs were like the arms and hands of men, but their hindlegs were incredibly long and storklike. Balanced on these legs, their bodies towered over the water. They carried great clubs in which slits had been cut and doubtless these were what they used to hurl the crystalline disks. Staring at their faces, Elric was horrified. In some subtle way they reminded him of the characteristic faces of his own folk-the folk of Melnibonè. Were these creatures his cousins? Or were they a species from which his people had evolved? He stopped asking the questions as an intense hatred for the creatures filled him. They were obscene: sight of them brought bile into his throat. Without thinking, he drew Stormbringer from its sheath.
The Black Sword began to howl and the familiar black radiance spilled from it. The runes carved into its blade pulsed a vivid scarlet which turned slowly to a deep purple and then to black once more. The creatures were wading through the water on their stiltlike legs and they paused when they saw the sword, glancing at one another. And they were not the only ones unnerved by the sight, for Duke Avan and his men paled, too.
“Gods!” Avan yelled. “I know not which I prefer the look of- those who attack us or that which defends us!” “Stay well away from that sword,” Smiorgan warned. “It has the habit of killing more than its master chooses.”
And now the reptilian savages were upon them, clutching at the ship’s rails as the armed sailors rushed back on deck to meet the attack. Clubs came at Elric from all sides, but Stormbringer shrieked and parried each blow. He held the sword in both hands, whirling it this way and that, plowing great gashes in the scaly bodies. The creatures hissed and opened red mouths in agony and rage while their thick, black blood sank into the waters of the river. Although from the legs upward they were only slightly larger than a tall, well-built man, they had more vitality than any human and the deepest cuts hardly seemed to affect them, even when administered by Stormbringer. Elric was astonished at this resistance to the sword’s power. Often a nick was enough for the sword to draw a man’s soul from him. These things seemed immune. Perhaps they had no souls....
He fought on, his hatred giving him strength.
But elsewhere on the ship the sailors were being routed. Rails were torn off and the great clubs crushed planks and brought down more rigging. The savages were intent on destroying the ship as well as the crew. And there was little doubt, now, that they would be successful.
Avan shouted to Elric. “By the names of all the gods, Prince Elric, can you not summon some further sorcery? We are doomed else!” Elric knew Avan spoke truth. All around him the ship was being gradually pulled apart by the hissing reptilian creatures. Most of them had sustained horrible wounds from the defenders, but only one or two had collapsed. Elric
began to suspect that they did, in fact, fight supernatural enemies. He backed away and sought shelter beneath a half-crushed doorway as he tried to concentrate on a method of calling upon supernatural aid. He was panting with exhaustion and he clung to a beam as the ship rocked back and forth in the water. He fought to clear his head. And then the incantation came to him. He was not sure if it was appropriate, but it was the only one he could recall. His ancestors had made pacts, thousands of years before, with all the elementals who controlled the animal world. In the past he had summoned help from various of these spirits but never from the one he now sought to call. From his mouth began to issue the ancient, beautiful, and convoluted words of Melnibonè’s High Speech.
“King with Wings! Lord of all that work and are not seen, upon whose labors all else depends! Nnuuurrrr’c’c of the Insect Folk, I summon thee!” Save for the motion of the ship, Elric ceased to be aware of all else happening around him. The sounds of the fight dimmed and were heard no more as he sent his voice out beyond his plane of the Earth into another-the plane dominated by King Nnuuurrrr’c’c of the Insects, paramount lord of his people.
In his ears now Elric heard a buzzing and gradually the buzzing formed itself in words. “Who art thou, mortal? What right hast thee to summon me?”
“I am Elric, ruler of Melnibonè. My ancestors aided thee, Nnuuurrrr’c’c.” “Aye-but long ago.”
“And it is long ago that they last called on thee for thine aid!” “True. What aid dost thou now require, Elric of Melnibonè?” “Look upon my plane. Thou wilt see that I am in danger. Canst thou abolish this danger, friend of the Insects?”
Now a filmy shape formed and could be seen as if through several layers of cloudy silk. Elric tried to keep his eyes upon it, but it kept leaving his field of vision and then returning for a few moments. He knew that he looked into another plane of the Earth.
“Canst thou help me, Nnuuurrrr’c’c?”
“Hast thou no patron of thine own species? Some Lord of Chaos who can aid thee?” “My patron is Arioch and he is a temperamental demon at best. These days he aids me little.” “Then I must send thee allies, mortal. But call upon me no more when this is done.” “I shall not summon thee again, Nnuuurrrr’c’c.”
The layers of film disappeared and with them the shape.
The noise of the battle crashed once again on Elric’s consciousness and he heard with sharper clarity than before the screams of the sailors and the hissing of the reptilian
savages and when he looked out from his shelter he saw that at least half the crew were dead. As he came on deck Smiorgan ran up. “I thought you slain, Elric! What became of you?” He was plainly relieved to see his friend still lived. “I sought aid from another plane-but it does not seem to have materialized.” “I’m thinking we’re doomed and had best try to swim downstream away from here and seek a hiding place in the jungle,” Smiorgan said. “What of Duke Avan? Is he dead?”
“He lives. But those creatures are all but impervious to our weapons. This ship will sink ere long.” Smiorgan lurched as the deck tilted and he reached out to grab a trailing rope, letting his long sword dangle by its wrist-thong. “They are not attacking the stern at present. We can slip into the water there ”
“I made a bargain with Duke Avan,” Elric reminded the islander. “I cannot desert him.” “Then we’ll all perish!”
“What’s that?” Elric bent his head, listening intently. “I hear nothing.” It was a whine which deepened in tone until it became a drone. Now Smiorgan heard it also and looked about him, seeking the source of the sound. And suddenly he gasped, pointing upward. “Is that the aid you sought?”
There was a vast cloud of them, black against the blue of the sky. Every so often the sun would flash on a dazzling color-a rich blue, green, or red. They came spiraling down toward the ship and now both sides fell silent, staring skyward. The flying things were like huge dragonflies and the brightness and richness of their coloring was breathtaking. It was their wings which made the droning sound which now began to increase in loudness and heighten in pitch as the huge insects sped nearer.
Realizing that they were the object of the attack the reptile men stumbled backward on their long legs, trying to reach the shore before the gigantic insects were upon them. But it was too late for flight.
The dragonflies settled on the savages until nothing could be seen of their bodies. The hissing increased and sounded almost pitiful as the insects bore their victims down to the surface and then inflicted on them whatever terrible death it was. Perhaps they stung with their tails- it was not possible for the watchers to see.
Sometimes a storklike leg would emerge from the water and thrash in the air for a moment. But soon, just as the reptiles were covered by the insect bodies, so were their cries drowned by the strange and blood-chilling humming that arose on all sides.
A sweating Duke Avan, sword still in hand, ran up the deck. “Is this your doing, Prince Elric?” Elric looked on with satisfaction, but the others were plainly disgusted. “It was,” he said.
“Then I thank you for your aid. This ship is holed in a dozen places and is letting in water at a terrible rate. It’s a wonder we have not yet sunk. I’ve given orders to begin rowing and I hope we make it to the island in time.” He pointed upstream. “There, you can just see it.”
“What if there are more of those savages there?” Smiorgan asked. Avan smiled grimly, indicating the farther shore. “Look.” On their peculiar legs a dozen or more of the reptiles were fleeing into the jungle, having witnessed the fate of their comrades. “They’ll be reluctant to attack us again, I think.” Now the huge dragonflies were rising into the air again and Avan turned away as he glimpsed what they had left behind. “By the gods, you work fierce sorcery, Prince Elric! Ugh!” Elric smiled and shrugged. “It is effective, Duke Avan.” He sheathed his runesword. It seemed reluctant to enter the scabbard and it moaned as if in resentment. Smiorgan glanced at it. “That blade looks as if it will want to feast soon, Elric, whether you desire it or not.” “Doubtless it will find something to feed on in the forest,” said the albino. He stepped over a piece of broken mast and went below. Count Smiorgan Baldhead looked at the new scum on the surface of the water and he shuddered.
IVThe wrecked schooner was almost awash when the crew clambered overboard with lines and began the task of dragging it up the mud that formed the banks of the island. Before them was a wall of foliage that seemed impenetrable. Smiorgan followed Elric, lowering himself into the shallows. They began to wade ashore.
As they left the water and set foot on the hard, baked earth, Smiorgan stared at the forest. No wind moved the trees and a peculiar silence had descended. No birds called from the trees, no insects buzzed, there were none of the barks and cries of animals they had heard on their journey upriver.
“Those supernatural friends of yours seem to have frightened more than the savages away,” the black-bearded man murmured. “This place seems lifeless.” Elric nodded. “It is strange.”
Duke Avan joined them. He had discarded his finery-ruined in the fight anyway-and now wore a padded leather jerkin and doeskin breeches. His sword was at his side. “We’ll have to leave most of our men behind with the ship,” he said regretfully. “They’ll make what repairs they can while we press on to find R’lin K’ren A’a.” He tugged his light cloak about him. “Is it my imagination, or is there an odd atmosphere?”
“We have already remarked on it,” Smiorgan said. “Life seems to have fled the island.” Duke Avan grinned. “If all we face is as timid, we have nothing further to fear. I must admit, Prince Elric, that had I
wished you harm and then seen you conjure those monsters from thin air, I’d think twice about getting too close to you! Thank you, by the way, for what you did. We should have perished by now if it had not been for you.” “It was for my aid that you asked me to accompany you,” Elric said wearily. “Let’s eat and rest and then continue with our expedition.” A shadow passed over Duke Avan’s face then. Something in Elric’s manner had disturbed him. Entering the jungle was no easy matter. Armed with axes the six members of the crew (all that could be spared) began to hack at the undergrowth. And still the unnatural silence prevailed.... By nightfall they were less than half a mile into the forest and completely exhausted. The forest was so thick that there was barely room to pitch their tent. The only light in the camp came from the small, sputtering fire outside the tent. The crewmen slept where they could in the open.
Elric could not sleep, but now it was not the jungle which kept him awake. He was puzzled by the silence, for he was sure that it was not their presence which had driven all life away. There was not a single small rodent, bird, or insect anywhere to be seen. There were no traces of animal life. The island had been deserted of all but vegetation for a long while-perhaps for centuries or tens of centuries. He remembered another part of the old legend of R’lin K’ren A’a. It had been said that when the gods came to meet there not only the citizens fled, but also all the wildlife. Nothing had dared see the High Lords or listen to their conversation. Elric shivered, turning his white head this way and that on the rolled cloak that supported it, his crimson eyes tortured.
If there were dangers on this island, they would be subtler dangers than those they had faced on the river. The noise of their passage through the forest was the only sound to be heard on the island as they forced their way on the next morning. With lodestone in one hand and map in the other, Duke Avan Astran sought to guide them, directing his men where to cut their path. But the going became even slower and it was obvious that no creatures had come this way for many ages.
By the fourth day they had reached a natural clearing of flat volcanic rock and found a spring there. Gratefully they made camp. Elric began to wash his face in the cool water when he heard a yell behind him. He sprang up. One of the crewmen was reaching for an arrow and fitting it to his bow.
“What is it?” Duke Avan called. “I saw something, my lord!” “Nonsense, there are no-“ “Look!” The man drew back the string and let fly into the upper terraces of the forest. Something did seem to stir then and Elric thought he saw a flash of gray among the trees. “Did you see what kind of creature it was?” Smiorgan asked the man. “No, master. I feared at first it was those reptiles again.”
“They’re too frightened to follow us onto this island,” Duke Avan reassured him.
“I hope you’re right,” Smiorgan said nervously. “Then what could it have been?” Elric wondered. “I-I thought it was a man, master,” the crewman stuttered. Elric stared thoughtfully into the trees. “A man?” Smiorgan asked, “You were hoping for this, Elric?” “I am not sure..... ”
Duke Avan shrugged. “More likely the shadow of a cloud passing over the trees. According to my calculations we should have reached the city by now.” “You think, after all, that it does not exist?” Elric said.
“I am beginning not to care, Prince Elric.” The duke leaned against the bole of a huge tree, brushing aside a vine which touched his face. “Still there’s naught else to do. The ship won’t be ready to sail yet.” He looked up into the branches. “I did not think I should miss those damned insects that plagued us on our way here ”
The crewman who had shot the arrow suddenly shouted again. “There! I saw him! It is a man!” While the others stared but failed to discern anything Duke Avan continued to lean against the tree. “You saw nothing. There is nothing here to see.” Elric turned toward him. “Give me the map and the lodestone, Duke Avan. I have a feeling I can find the way.” The Vilmirian shrugged, an expression of doubt on his square, handsome face. He handed the things over to Elric.
They rested the night and in the morning they continued, with Elric leading the way. And at noon they broke out of the forest and saw the ruins of R’lin K’ren A’a.
VNothing grew among the ruins of the city. The streets were broken and the walls of the houses had fallen, but there were no weeds flowering in the cracks and it seemed that the city had but recently been brought down by an earthquake. Only one thing still stood intact, towering over the ruins. It was a gigantic statue of white, gray, and green jade-the statue of a naked youth with a face of almost feminine beauty that turned sightless eyes toward the north.
“The eyes!” Duke Avan Astran said. “They’re gone!”
The others said nothing as they stared at the statue and the ruins surrounding it. The area was relatively small and the buildings had had little decoration. The inhabitants seemed to have been a simple, well-to-do folk- totally unlike the Melnibonèans of the Bright Empire. Elric could not believe that the people of R’lin K’ren A’a had been his ancestors. They had been too sane.
“The statue’s already been looted,” Duke Avan continued. “Our damned journey’s been in vain!” Elric laughed. “Did you really think you would be able to prise the Jade Man’s eyes from their sockets, my lord?” The statue was as tall as any tower of the Dreaming City and the head alone must have been the size of a reasonably large building. Duke Avan pursed his lips and refused to listen to Elric’s mocking voice. “We may yet find the journey worth our while,” he said. “There were other treasures in R’lin K’ren A’a. Come ”
He led the way into the city.
Very few of the buildings were even partially standing, but they were nonetheless fascinating if only for the peculiar nature of their building materials, which were of a kind the travelers had never seen before. The colors were many, but faded by time-soft reds and yellows and blues-and they flowed together to make almost infinite combinations. Elric reached out to touch one wall and was surprised at the cool feel of the smooth material. It was neither stone nor wood nor metal. Perhaps it had been brought here from another plane? He tried to visualize the city as it had been before it was deserted. The streets had been wide, there had been no surrounding wall, the houses had been low and built around large courtyards. If this was, indeed, the original home of his people, what had happened to change them from the peaceful citizens of R’lin K’ren A’a to the insane builders of Imrryr’s bizarre and dreaming towers? Elric had thought he might find a solution to a mystery here, but instead he had found another mystery. It was his fate, he thought, shrugging to himself.
And then the first crystal disk hummed past his head and smashed against a collapsing wall. The next disk split the skull of a crewman and a third nicked Smiorgan’s ear before they had thrown themselves flat among the rubble. “They’re vengeful, those creatures,” Avan said with a hard smile. “They’ll risk much to pay us back for their comrades’ deaths!”
Terror was on the face of each surviving crewman and fear had begun to creep into Avan’s eyes. More disks clattered nearby, but it was plain that the party was temporarily out of sight of the reptiles. Smiorgan coughed as white dust rose from the rubble and caught in his throat. “You’d best summon those monstrous allies of yours again, Elric.” Elric shook his head. “I cannot. My ally said he would not serve me a second time.” He looked to his left where the four walls of a small house still stood. There seemed to be no door, only a window. “Then call something,” Count Smiorgan said urgently. “Anything.” “I am not sure..... ”
Then Elric rolled over and sprang for the shelter, flinging himself through the window to land on a pile of masonry that grazed his hands and knees. He staggered upright. In the distance he could see the huge blind statue of the god dominating the city. This was said to be an image of Arioch-though it resembled no image of Arioch Elric had ever seen manifested. Did that image protect R’lin K’ren A’a-or did it threaten it? Someone screamed. He glanced through the opening and saw that a disk had landed and chopped through a man’s forearm.
He drew Stormbringer and raised it, facing the jade statue. “Arioch!” he cried. “Arioch-aid me!”
Black light burst from the blade and it began to sing, as if joining in Elric’s incantation. “Arioch!”
Would the demon come? Often the patron of the kings of Melnibonè refused to materialize, claiming that more urgent business called him-business concerning the eternal struggle between Law and Chaos. “Arioch!”
Sword and man were now wreathed in a palpitating black mist and Elric’s white face was flung back, seeming to writhe as the mist writhed. “Arioch! I beg thee to aid me! It is Elric who calls thee!”
And then a voice reached his ears. It was a soft, purring, reasonable voice. It was a tender voice. “Elric, I am fondest of thee. I love thee more than any other mortal-but aid thee I cannot-not yet.” Elric cried desperately: “Then we are doomed to perish here!” “Thou canst escape this danger. Flee alone into the forest. Leave the others while thou hast time. Thou hast a destiny to fulfill elsewhere and elsewhen ” “I will not desert them.” “Thou art foolish, sweet Elric.” “Arioch-since Melnibonè’s founding thou hast aided her kings. Aid her last king this day!”
“I cannot dissipate my energies. A great struggle looms. And it would cost me much to return to R’lin K’ren A’a. Flee now. Thou shalt be saved. Only the others will die.” And then the Duke of Hell had gone. Elric sensed the passing of his presence. He frowned, fingering his belt pouch, trying to recall something he had once heard. Slowly, he resheathed the reluctant sword. Then there was a thump and Smiorgan stood panting before him. “Well, is aid on the way?”
“I fear not.” Elric shook his head in despair. “Once again Arioch refuses me. Once again he speaks of a greater destiny-a need to conserve his strength.” “Your ancestors could have picked a more tractable demon as their patron. Our reptilian friends are closing in. Look......................... ” Smiorgan pointed to the outskirts of the city. A band of about a dozen stilt-legged creatures were advancing, their huge clubs at the ready. There was a scuffling noise from the rubble on the other side of the wall and Avan appeared, leading his men through the opening. He was cursing. “No extra aid is coming, I fear,” Elric told him.
The Vilmirian smiled grimly. “Then the monsters out there knew more than did we!” “It seems so.”
“We’ll have to try to hide from them,” Smiorgan said without much conviction. “We’d not survive a fight.”
The little party left the ruined house and began to inch its way through what cover it could find, moving gradually nearer to the center of the city and the statue of the Jade Man. A sharp hiss from behind them told them that the reptile warriors had sighted them again and another Vilmirian fell with a crystal disk protruding from his back. They broke into a panicky run. Ahead now was a red building of several stories which still had its roof. “In there!” Duke Avan shouted.
With some relief they dashed unhesitatingly up worn steps and through a series of dusty passages until they paused to catch their breath in a great, gloomy hall. The hall was completely empty and a little light filtered through cracks in the wall. “This place has lasted better than the others,” Duke Avan said. “I wonder what its function was. A fortress, perhaps.” “They seem not to have been a warlike race,” Smiorgan pointed out. “I suspect the building had some other function.” The three surviving crewmen were looking fearfully about them. They looked as if they would have preferred to have faced the reptile warriors outside. Elric began to cross the floor and then paused as he saw something painted on the far wall. Smiorgan saw it too. “What’s that, friend Elric?”
Elric recognized the symbols as the written High Speech of old Melnibonè, but it was subtly different and it took him a short time to decipher its meaning. “Know you what it says, Elric?” Duke Avan murmured, joining them. “Aye-but it’s cryptic enough. It says: If thou hast come to slay me, then thou art welcome. If thou hast come without the means to awaken the Jade Man, then begone................................. ” “Is it addressed to us, I wonder,” Avan mused, “of has it been there for a long while?” Elric shrugged. “It could have been inscribed at any time during the past ten thousand years................... ” Smiorgan walked up to the wall and reached out to touch it. “I would say it was fairly recent,” he said. “The paint still being wet.” Elric frowned. “Then there are inhabitants here still. Why do they not reveal themselves?” “Could those reptiles out there be the denizens of R’lin K’ren A’a?” Avan said. “There is nothing in the legends that says they were humans who fled this place........................... ” Elric’s face clouded and he was about to make an angry reply when Smiorgan interrupted. “Perhaps there is just one inhabitant. Is that what you are thinking, Elric? The Creature Doomed to Live? Those sentiments could be his............................ ” Elric put his hands to his face and made no reply.
“Come,” Avan said. “We’ve no time to debate on legends.” He strode across the floor and entered another doorway, beginning to descend steps. As he reached the bottom they heard him gasp. The others joined him and saw that he stood on the threshold of another hall. But this one was ankle-deep in fragments of stuff that had been thin leaves of a metallic material which had the flexibility of parchment. Around the walls were thousands of small holes, rank upon rank, each with a character painted over it.
“What is it?” Smiorgan asked.
Elric stooped and picked up one of the fragments. This had half a Melnibonèan character engraved on it. There had even been an attempt to obliterate this. “It was a library,” he said softly. “The library of my ancestors. Someone has tried to destroy it. These scrolls must have been virtually indestructible, yet a great deal of effort has gone into making them indecipherable.” He kicked at the fragments. “Plainly our friend-or friends- is a consistent hater of learning.”
“Plainly,” Avan said bitterly. “Oh, the value of those scrolls to the scholar! All destroyed!” Elric shrugged. “To Limbo with the scholar-their value to me was quite considerable!” Smiorgan put a hand on his friend’s arm and Elric shrugged it off. “I had hoped...” Smiorgan cocked his bald head. “Those reptiles have followed us into the building, by the sound of it.”
They heard the distant sound of strange footsteps in the passages behind them. The little band of men moved as silently as they could through the ruined scrolls and crossed the hall until they entered another corridor which led sharply upward. Then, suddenly, daylight was visible.
Elric peered ahead. “The corridor has collapsed ahead of us and is blocked, by the look of it. The roof has caved in and we may be able to escape through the hole.” They clambered upward over the fallen stones, glancing warily behind them for signs of their pursuers. At last they emerged in the central square of the city. On the far sides of this square were placed the feet of the great statue, which now towered high above their heads. Directly before them were two peculiar constructions which, unlike the rest of the buildings, were completely whole. They were domed and faceted and were made of some glasslike substance which defracted the rays of the sun. From below they heard the reptile men advancing down the corridor. “We’ll seek shelter in the nearest of those domes,” Elric said. He broke into a trot, leading the way. The others followed him through the irregularly shaped opening at the base of the dome. Once inside, however, they hesitated, shielding their eyes and blinking heavily as they tried to discern their way.
“It’s like a maze of mirrors!” Smiorgan gasped. “By the gods, I’ve never seen a better. Was that its function, I wonder.” Corridors seemed to go off in all directions-yet they might be nothing more than reflections of the passage they were in. Cautiously Elric began to continue farther into the maze, the five others following him. “This smells of sorcery to me,” Smiorgan muttered as they advanced. “Have we been forced into a trap, I wonder.” Elric drew his sword. It murmured softly-almost querulously.
Everything shifted suddenly and the shapes of his companions grew dim. “Smiorgan! Duke Avan!”
He heard voices murmuring, but they were not the voices of his friends. “Count Smiorgan!”
But then the burly sea-lord faded away altogether and Elric was alone.
VIHe turned and a wall of red brilliance struck his eyes and blinded him. He called out and his voice was turned into a dismal wail which mocked him. He tried to move, but he could not tell whether he remained in the same spot or walked a dozen miles. Now there was someone standing a few yards away, seemingly obscured by a screen of multicolored transparent gems. He stepped forward and made to dash away the screen, but it vanished and he stopped suddenly. He looked on a face of infinite sorrow.
And the face was his own face, save that the man’s coloring was normal and his hair was black. “What are you?” Elric said thickly.
“I have had many names. One is Erekosë. I have been many men. Perhaps I am all men.” “But you are like me!” “I am you.” “No!”
The phantom’s eyes held tears as it stared in pity at Elric.
“Do not weep for me!” Elric roared. “I need no sympathy from you!”
“Perhaps I weep for myself, for I know our fate.” “And what is that?” “You would not understand.” “Tell me.” “Ask your gods.”
Elric raised his sword. Fiercely he said, “No-I’ll have my answer from you!” And the phantom faded away.
Elric shivered. Now the corridor was populated by a thousand such phantoms. Each murmured a different name. Each wore different clothes. But each had his face, if not his coloring. “Begone!” he screamed. “Oh, Gods, what is this place?” And at his command they disappeared. “Elric?”
The albino whirled, sword ready. But it was Duke Avan Astran of Old Hrolmar. He touched his own face with trembling fingers, but said levelly, “I must tell you that I believe I am losing my sanity, Prince Elric..................................................... ” “What have you seen?”
“Many things. I cannot describe them.” “Where are Smiorgan and the others?” “Doubtless each went his separate way, as we did.”
Elric raised Stormbringer and brought the blade crashing against a crystal wall. The Black Sword moaned, but the wall merely changed its position. But through a gap now Elric saw ordinary daylight “Come, Duke Avan-there is escape!” Avan, dazed, followed him and they stepped out of the crystal and found themselves in the central square of R’lin K’ren A’a. But there were noises. Carts and chariots moved about the square. Stalls were erected on one side. People moved peacefully about. And the Jade Man did not dominate the sky above the city. Here, there was no Jade Man at all. Elric looked at the faces. They were the eldritch features of the folk of Melnibonè. Yet these had a different cast to them which he could not at first define. Then he recognized what they had. It was tranquillity. He reached out his hand to touch one of the people. “Tell me, friend, what year... ?”
But the man did not hear him. He walked by.
Elric tried to stop several of the passersby, but not one could see or hear him. “How did they lose this peace?” Duke Avan asked wonderingly. “How did they become like you, Prince Elric?” Elric almost snarled as he turned sharply to face the Vilmirian. “Be silent!” Duke Avan shrugged. “Perhaps this is merely an illusion.”
“Perhaps,” Elric said sadly, “but I am sure this is how they lived-until the coming of the High Ones.” “You blame the gods, then?”
“I blame the despair that the gods brought” Duke Avan nodded gravely. “I understand.” He turned back toward the great crystal and then stood listening. “Do you hear that voice, Prince Elric? What is it saying?” Elric heard the voice. It seemed to be coming from the crystal. It was speaking the old tongue of Melnibonè, but with a strange accent. “This way,” it said. “This way.” Elric paused. “I have no liking to return there.” Avan said, “What choice have we?” They stepped together through the entrance.
Again they were in the maze that could be one corridor or many and the voice was clearer. “Take two paces to your right,” it instructed. Avan glanced at Elric. “What was that?” Elric told him. “Shall we obey?” Avan asked. “Aye.” There was resignation in the albino’s voice. They took two paces to their right. “Now four to your left,” said the voice. They took four paces to their left.
“Now one forward.”
They emerged into the ruined square of R’lin K’ren A’a. Smiorgan and one Vilmirian crewman stood there. “Where are the others?” Avan demanded. “Ask him,” Smiorgan said wearily, gesturing with the sword in his right hand. They stared at the man who was either an albino or a leper. He was completely naked and he bore a distinct likeness to Elric. At first Elric thought this was another phantom, but then he saw that there were also several differences in their faces. There was something sticking from the man’s side, just above the third rib. With a shock, Elric recognized it as the broken shaft of a Vilmirian arrow.
The naked man nodded. “Aye-the arrow found its mark. But it could not slay me, for I am J’osui C’reln Reyr .................... ” “You believe yourself to be the Creature Doomed to Live,” Elric murmured. “I am he.” The man gave a bitter smile. “Do you think I try to deceive you?” Elric glanced at the arrow shaft and then shook his head. “You are ten thousand years old?” Avan stared at him. “What does he say?” asked J’osui C’reln Reyr of Elric. Elric translated. “Is that all it has been?” The man sighed. Then he looked intently at Elric. “You are of my race?”
“It seems so.”
“Of what family?” “Of the royal line.” “Then you have come at last. I, too, am of that line.” “I believe you.” “I notice that the Olab seek you.” “The Olab?” “Those primitives with the clubs.”
“Aye. We encountered them on our journey upriver.” “I will lead you to safety. Come.” Elric allowed J’osui C’reln Reyr to take them across the square to where part of a tottering wall still stood. The man then lifted a flagstone and showed them the steps leading down into darkness. They followed him, descending cautiously as he caused the flagstone to lower itself above their heads. And then they found themselves in a room lit by crude oil lamps. Save for a bed of dried grasses the room was empty.
“You live sparely,” Elric said.
“I have need for nothing else. My head is sufficiently furnished..... ” “Where do the Olab come from?” Elric asked.
“They are but recently arrived in these parts. Scarcely a thousand years ago-or perhaps half that time-they came
from farther upriver after some quarrel with another tribe. They do not usually come to the island. You must have killed many of them for them to wish you such harm.” “We killed many.”
J’osui C’reln Reyr gestured at the others who were staring at him in some discomfort. “And these? Primitives, also, eh? They are not of our folk.” “There are few of our folk left.” “What does he say?” Duke Avan asked.
“He says that those reptile warriors are called the Olab,” Elric told him. “And was it these Olab who stole the Jade Man’s eyes?”
When Elric translated the question the Creature Doomed to Live was astonished. “Did you not know, then?” “Know what?”
“Why, you have been in the Jade Man’s eyes! Those great crystals in which you wandered-that is what they are!”
VIIWhen Elric offered this information to Duke Avan, the Vilmirian burst into laughter. He flung his head back and roared with mirth while the others looked gloomily on. The cloud that had fallen across his features of late suddenly cleared and he became again the man whom Elric had first met.
Smiorgan was the next to smile and even Elric acknowledged the irony of what had happened to them. “Those crystals fell from his face like tears soon after the High Ones departed,” continued J’osui C’reln Reyr. “So the High Ones did come here.”
“Aye-the Jade Man brought the message and all the folk departed, having made their bargain with him.” “The Jade Man was not built by your people?”
“The Jade Man is Duke Arioch of Hell. He strode from the forest one day and stood in the square and told the people what was to come about-that our city lay at the center of some particular configuration and that it was only there that the Lords of the Higher Worlds could meet.”
“And the bargain?”
“In return for their city, our royal line might in the future increase their power with Arioch as their patron. He would give them great knowledge and the means to build a new city elsewhere.” “And they accepted this bargain without question?”
“There was little choice, kinsman.”
Elric lowered his eyes to regard the dusty floor. “And thus they were corrupted,” he murmured. “Only I refused to accept the pact. I did not wish to leave this city and I mistrusted Arioch. When all others set off down the river, I remained here-where we are now-and I heard the Lords of the Higher Worlds arrive and I heard them speak, laying down the rules under which Law and Chaos would fight thereafter. When they had gone, I emerged. But Arioch-the Jade Man-was still here. He looked down on me through his crystal eyes and he cursed me. When that was done the crystals fell and landed where you now see them. Arioch’s spirit departed, but his jade image was left behind.”
“And you still retain all memory of what transpired between the Lords of Law and Chaos?” “That is my doom.”
“Perhaps your fate was less harsh than that which befell those who left,” Elric said quietly. “I am the last inheritor of that particular doom................................... ” J’osui C’reln Reyr looked puzzled and then he stared into Elric’s eyes and an expression of pity crossed his face. “I had not thought there was a worse fate-but now I believe there might be ” Elric said urgently, “Ease my soul, at least. I must know what passed between the High Lords in those days. I must understand the nature of my existence-as you, at least, understand yours. Tell me, I beg you!” J’osui C’reln Reyr frowned and he stared deeply into Elric’s eyes. “Do you not know all my story, then?”
“Is there more?”
“I can only remember what passed between the High Lords- but when I try to tell my knowledge aloud or try to write it down, I cannot..................... ” Elric grasped the man’s shoulder. “You must try! You must try!” “I know that I cannot.”
Seeing the torture in Elric’s face, Smiorgan came up to him. “What is it, Elric?” Elric’s hand clutched his head. “Our journey has been useless.” Unconsciously he used the old Melnibonèan tongue. “It need not be,” said J’osui C’reln Reyr. “For me, at least.” He paused. “Tell me, how did you find this city? Was there a map?” Elric produced the map. “This one.”
“Aye, that is the one. Many centuries ago I put it into a casket which I placed in a small trunk. I launched the trunk into the river, hoping that it would follow my people and they would know what it was.” “The casket was found in Melnibonè, but no one had bothered to open it,” Elric explained. “That will give you an idea of what happened to the folk who left here............................... ” The strange man nodded gravely. “And was there still a seal upon the map?” “There was. I have it.”
“An image of one of the manifestations of Arioch, embedded in a small ruby?” “Aye. I thought I recognized the image, but I could not place it.” “The Image in the Gem,” murmured J’osui C’reln Reyr. “As I prayed, it has returned-borne by one of the royal line!” “What is its significance?”
Smiorgan interrupted. “Will this fellow help us to escape, Elric? We are becoming somewhat impatient..................... ” “Wait,” the albino said. “I will tell you everything later.”
“The Image in the Gem could be the instrument of my release,” said the Creature Doomed to Live. “If he who possesses it is of the royal line, then he can command the Jade Man.” “But why did you not use it?”
“Because of the curse that was put on me. I had the power to command, but not to summon the demon. It was a joke, I understand, of the High Lords.” Elric saw bitter sadness in the eyes of J’osui C’reln Reyr. He looked at the white, naked flesh and the white hair and the body that was neither old nor young, at the shaft of the arrow sticking out above the third rib on the left side. “What must I do?” he asked.
“You must summon Arioch and then you must command him to enter his body again and recover his eyes so that he may see to walk away from R’lin K’ren A’a.”
“And when he walks away?” “The curse goes with him.” Elric was thoughtful. If he did summon Arioch-who was plainly reluctant to come-and then commanded him to do something he did not wish to do, he stood the chance of making an enemy of that powerful, if unpredictable entity. Yet they were trapped here by the Olab warriors, with no means of escaping them. If the Jade Man walked, the Olab would almost certainly flee and there would be time to get back to the ship and reach the sea. He explained everything to his companions. Both Smiorgan and Avan looked dubious and the remaining Vilmirian crewman looked positively terrified.
“I must do it,” Elric decided, “for the sake of this man. I must call Arioch and lift the doom that is on R’lin K’ren A’a.” “And bring a greater doom to us!” Duke Avan said, putting his hand automatically upon his sword-hilt. “No. I think we should take our chances with the Olab. Leave this man-he is mad-he raves. Let’s be on our way.” “Go if you choose,” Elric said. “But I will stay with the Creature Doomed to Live.” “Then you will stay here forever. You cannot believe his story!” “But I do believe it.”
“You must come with us. Your sword will help. Without it, the Olab will certainly destroy us.” “You saw that Stormbringer has little effect against the Olab.”
“And yet it has some. Do not desert me, Elric!”
“I am not deserting you. I must summon Arioch. That summoning will be to your benefit, if not to mine.” “I am unconvinced.”
“It was my sorcery you wanted on this venture. Now you shall have my sorcery.” Avan backed away. He seemed to fear something more than the Olab, more than the summoning. He seemed to read a threat in Elric’s face of which even Elric was unaware. “We must go outside,” said J’osui C’reln Reyr. “We must stand beneath the Jade Man.” “And when this is done,” Elric asked suddenly, “how will we leave R’lin K’ren A’a?” “There is a boat. It has no provisions, but much of the city’s treasure is on it. It lies at the west end of the island.” “That is some comfort,” Elric said. “And you could not use it yourself?” “I could not leave.”
“Is that part of the curse?” “Aye-the curse of my timidity.” “Timidity has kept you here ten thousand years?” “Aye............. ” They left the chamber and went out into the square. Night had fallen and a huge moon was in the sky. From where Elric
stood it seemed to frame the Jade Man’s sightless head like a halo. It was completely silent. Elric took the Image in the Gem from his pouch and held it between the forefinger and thumb of his left hand. With his right he drew Stormbringer. Avan, Smiorgan, and the Vilmirian crewman fell back.
He stared up at the huge jade legs, the genitals, the torso, the arms, the head, and he raised his sword in both hands and screamed: “Arioch!”
Stormbringer’s voice almost drowned his. It pulled in his hands; it threatened to leave his grasp altogether as it howled. “Arioch!”
All the watchers saw now was the throbbing, radiant sword, the white face and hands of the albino and his crimson eyes glaring through the blackness. “Arioch!”
And then a voice which was not Arioch’s came to Elric’s ears and it seemed that the sword itself spoke. “Elric-Arioch must have blood and souls. Blood and souls, my lord ” “No. These are my friends and the Olab cannot be harmed by Stormbringer. Arioch must come without the blood, without the souls.” “Only those can summon him for certain!” said a voice, more clearly now. It was sardonic and it seemed to come from behind him. He turned, but there was nothing there.
He saw Duke Avan’s nervous face, and as his eyes fixed on the Vilmirian’s countenance, the sword swung around, twisting against Elric’s grip, and plunging toward the duke. “No!” cried Elric. “Stop!”
But Stormbringer would not stop until it had plunged deep into Duke Avan’s heart and quenched its thirst. The crewman stood transfixed as he watched his master die. Duke Avan writhed. “Elric! What treachery do you ... ?” He screamed. “Ah, no!” He jerked. “Please...”
He quivered. “My soul...” He died. Elric withdrew the sword and cut the crewman down as he ran to his master’s aid. The action had been without thought. “Now Arioch has his blood and his souls,” he said coldly. “Let Arioch come!” Smiorgan and the Creature Doomed to Live had retreated, staring at the possessed Elric in horror. The albino’s face was cruel. “Let Arioch come!” “I am here, Elric.” Elric whirled and saw that something stood in the shadow of the statue’s legs-a shadow within a shadow.
“Arioch-thou must return to this manifestation and make it leave R’lin K’ren A’a forever.” “I do not choose to, Elric.”
“Then I must command thee, Duke Arioch.”
“Command? Only he who possesses the Image in the Gem may command Arioch-and then only once.” “I have the Image in the Gem.” Elric held up the tiny object. “See.” The shadow within a shadow swirled for a moment as if in anger. “If I obey your command, you will set in motion a chain of events which you might not desire,” Arioch said, speaking suddenly in Low Melnibonèan as if to give extra gravity to his words. “Then let it be. I command you to enter the Jade Man and pick up its eyes so that it might walk again. Then I command you to leave here and take the curse of the High Ones with you.” Arioch replied, “When the Jade Man ceases to guard the place where the High Ones meet, then the great struggle of the Upper Worlds begins on this plane.” “I command thee, Arioch. Go into the Jade Man!” “You are an obstinate creature, Elric.” “Go!” Elric raised Stormbringer. It seemed to sing in monstrous glee and it seemed at that moment to be more
powerful than Arioch himself, more powerful than all the Lords of the Higher Worlds. The ground shook. Fire suddenly blazed around the form of the great statue. The shadow within a shadow disappeared. And the Jade Man stooped.
Its great bulk bent over Elric and its hands reached past him and it groped for the two crystals that lay on the ground. Then it found them and took one in each hand, straightening its back. Elric stumbled toward the far corner of the square where Smiorgan and J’osui C’reln Reyr already crouched in terror. A fierce light now blazed from the Jade Man’s eyes and the jade lips parted. “It is done, Elric!” said a huge voice. J’osui C’reln Reyr began to sob. “Then go, Arioch.” “I go. The curse is lifted from R’lin K’ren A’a and from J’osui C’reln Reyr-but a greater curse now lies upon your whole plane.” “What is this, Arioch? Explain yourself!” Elric cried. “Soon you will have your explanation. Farewell!” The enormous legs of jade moved suddenly and in a single step had cleared the ruins and had begun to crash through the jungle. In a moment the Jade Man had disappeared.
Then the Creature Doomed to Live laughed. It was a strange joy that he voiced. Smiorgan blocked his ears. “And now!” shouted J’osui C’reln Reyr. “Now your blade must take my life. I can die at last!” Elric passed his hand across his face. He had hardly been aware of any of the recent events. “No,” he said in a dazed tone. “I cannot................................. ” And Stormbringer flew from his hand-flew to the body of the Creature Doomed to Live and buried itself in its chest. And as he died, J’osui C’reln Reyr laughed. He fell to the ground and his lips moved. A whisper came from them. Elric stepped nearer to hear. “The sword has my knowledge now. My burden has left me.” The eyes closed. J’osui C’reln Reyr’s ten-thousand-year life-span had ended.
Weakly, Elric withdrew Stormbringer and sheathed it. He stared down at the body of the Creature Doomed to Live and then he looked up, questioningly, at Smiorgan. The burly sea-lord turned away.
The sun began to rise. Gray dawn came. Elric watched the corpse of J’osui C’reln Reyr turn to powder that was stirred by the wind and mixed with the dust of the ruins. He walked back across the square to where Duke Avan’s twisted body lay and he fell to his knees beside it.
“You were warned, Duke Avan Astran of Old Hrolmar, that ill befell those who linked their fortunes with Elric of
Melnibonè. But you thought otherwise. Now you know.” With a sigh he got to his feet. Smiorgan stood beside him. The sun was now touching the taller parts of the ruins. Smiorgan reached out and gripped his friend’s shoulder. “The Olab have vanished. I think they’ve had their fill of sorcery.” “Another man has been destroyed by me, Smiorgan. Am I forever to be tied to this cursed sword? I must discover a way to rid myself of it or my heavy conscience will bear me down so that I cannot rise at all.” Smiorgan cleared his throat, but was otherwise silent.
“I will lay Duke Avan to rest,” Elric said. “You go back to where we left the ship and tell the men that we come.” Smiorgan began to stride across the square toward the east.
Elric tenderly picked up the body of Duke Avan and went toward the opposite side of the square, to the underground room where the Creature Doomed to Live had lived out his life for ten thousand years. It seemed so unreal to Elric now, but he knew that it had not been a dream, for the Jade Man had gone. His tracks could be seen through the jungle. Whole clumps of trees had been flattened. He reached the place and descended the stairs and laid Duke Avan down on the bed of dried grasses. Then he took the duke’s dagger and, for want of anything else, dipped it in the duke’s blood and wrote on the wall above the corpse:
This was Duke Avan Astran of Old Hrolmar. He explored the world and brought much knowledge and treasure back to Vilmir, his land. He dreamed and became lost in the dream of another and so died. He enriched the Young Kingdoms- and thus encouraged another dream. He died so that the Creature Doomed to Live might die, as he desired....
Elric paused. Then he threw down the dagger. He could not justify his own feelings of guilt by composing a high- sounding epitaph for the man he had slain. He stood there, breathing heavily, then once again picked up the dagger. He died because Elric of Melnibonè desired a peace and a knowledge he could never find. He died by the Black Sword. Outside in the middle of the square, at noon, still lay the lonely body of the last Vilmirian crewman. Nobody had known his name. Nobody felt grief for him or tried to compose an epitaph for him. The dead Vilmirian had died for no high purpose, followed no fabulous dream. Even in death his body would fulfill no function. On this island there was no carrion to feed. In the dust of the city there was no earth to fertilize.
Elric came back into the square and saw the body. For a moment, to Elric it symbolized everything that had transpired here and would transpire later. “There is no purpose,” he murmured.
Perhaps his remote ancestors had, after all, realized that, but had not cared. It had taken the Jade Man to make them care and then go mad in their anguish. The knowledge had caused them to close their minds to much.
“Elric!”
Elric of Melniboné is a requisite title in the hard fantasy canon, a book no fantasy fan should leave unread. Author Michael Moorcock, already a major player in science fiction, cemented his position in the fantasy pantheon with the five-book Elric saga, of which Elric of Melniboné is the first installment. The book's namesake, the brooding albino emperor of the dying nation of Melniboné, is a sort of Superman for Goths, truly an archetype of the genre.
The youthful Elric is a cynical and melancholy king, heir to a nation whose 100,000-year rule of the world ended less than 500 years hence. More interested in brooding contemplation than holding the throne, Elric is a reluctant ruler, but he also realizes that no other worthy successor exists and the survival of his once-powerful, decadent nation depends on him alone. Elric's nefarious, brutish cousin Yrkoon has no patience for his physically weak kinsman, and he plots constantly to seize Elric's throne, usually over his dead body. Elric of Melniboné follows Yrkoon's scheming, reaching its climax in a battle between Elric and Yrkoon with the demonic runeblades Stormbringer and Mournblade. In this battle, Elric gains control of the soul-stealing Stormbringer, an event that proves pivotal to the Elric saga. --Paul Hughes
Elric of Melnibone
by Michael Moorcock
Book One of the Elric Saga
Epilogue
BOOK ONE
On the island kingdom of Melnibone all the old rituals are still observed, though the nation's power has waned for five hundred years, and now her way of life is maintained only by her trade with the Young Kingdoms and the fact that the city of Imrryr has become the meeting place of merchants. Are those rituals no longer useful; can the rituals be denied and doom avoided? One who would rule in Emperor Elric's stead prefers to think not. He says that Elric will bring destruction to Melnibone by his refusal to honour all the rituals (Elric honours many). And now opens the tragedy which will close many years from now and precipitate the destruction of this world.
Chapter 1
A Melancholy King:
A Court Strives to Honour Him
IT IS THE colour of a bleached skull, his flesh; and the long hair which flows below his shoulders is milk-white. From the tapering, beautiful head stare two slanting eyes, crimson and moody, and from the loose sleeves of his yellow gown emerge two slender hands, also the colour of bone, resting on each arm of a seat which has been carved from a single, massive ruby.
The crimson eyes are troubled and sometimes one hand will rise to finger the light helm which sits upon the white locks: a helm made from some dark, greenish alloy and exquisitely moulded into the likeness of a dragon about to take wing. And on the hand which absently caresses the crown there is a ring in which is set a single rare Actorios stone whose core sometimes shifts sluggishly and reshapes itself, as if it were sentient smoke and as restless in its jewelled prison as the young albino on his Ruby Throne.
He looks down the long flight of quartz steps to where his court disports itself, dancing with such delicacy and whispering grace that it might be a court of ghosts. Mentally he debates moral issues and in itself this activity divides him from the great majority of his subjects, for these people are not human.
These are the people of Melnibone, the Dragon Isle, which ruled the world for ten thousand years and has ceased to rule it for less than five hundred years. And they are cruel
and clever and to them 'morality' means little more than a proper respect for the traditions of a hundred centuries. To the young man, four hundred and twenty-eighth in direct line of descent from the first Sorcerer Emperor of Melnibone, their assumptions seem not only arrogant but foolish; it is plain that the Dragon Isle has lost most of her power and will soon be threatened, in another century or two, by a direct conflict with the emerging human nations whom they call, somewhat patronisingly, the Young Kingdoms. Already pirate fleets have made unsuccessful attacks on Imrryr the Beautiful, the Dreaming City, capital of the Dragon Isle of Melnibone.
Yet even the emperor's closest friends refuse to discuss the prospect of Melnibone's fall. They are not pleased when he mentions the idea, considering his remarks not only unthinkable, but also a singular breach of good taste. So, alone, the emperor broods. He mourns that his father, Sadric the Eighty-Sixth, did not sire more children, for then a more suitable monarch might have been available to take his place on the Ruby Throne. Sadric has been dead a year; whispering a glad welcome to that which came to claim his soul. Through most of his life Sadric had never known another woman than his wife, for the Empress had died bringing her sole thin-blooded issue into the world. But, with Melnibonean emotions (oddly different from those of the human newcomers), Sadric had loved his wife and had been unable to find pleasure in any other company, even that of the son who had killed her and who was all that was left of her. By magic potions and the chanting of runes, by rare herbs had her son been nurtured, his strength sustained artificially by every art known to the Sorcerer Kings of Melnibone. And he had lived--still lives--thanks to sorcery alone, for he is naturally lassitudinous and, without his
drugs, would barely be able to raise his hand from his side through most of a normal day. If the young emperor has found any advantage in his lifelong weakness it must be in that, perforce, he has read much. Before he was fifteen he had read every book in his father's library, some more than once. His sorcerous powers, learned initially from Sadric, are now greater than any possessed by his ancestors for many a generation. His knowledge of the world beyond the shores of Melnibone is profound, though he has as yet had little direct experience of it. If he wishes he could resurrect the Dragon Isle's former might and rule both his own land and the Young Kingdoms as an invulnerable tyrant. But his reading has also taught him to question the uses to which power is put, to question his motives, to question whether his own power should be used at all, in any cause. His reading has led him to this 'morality', which, still, he barely understands. Thus, to his subjects, he is an enigma and, to some, he is a threat, for he neither thinks nor acts in accordance with their conception of how a true Melnibonean (and a Melnibonean emperor, at that) should think and act. His cousin Yyrkoon, for instance, has been heard more than once to voice strong doubts concerning the emperor's right to rule the people of Melnibone. 'This feeble scholar will bring doom to us all,' he said one night to Dyvim Tvar, Lord of the Dragon Caves.
Dyvim Tvar is one of the emperor's few friends and he had duly reported the conversation, but the youth had dismissed the remarks as 'only a trivial treason', whereas any of his ancestors would have rewarded such sentiments with a very slow and exquisite public execution.
The emperor's attitude is further complicated by the fact that Yyrkoon, who is even now making precious little secret of his feelings that he should be emperor, is the brother of
Cymoril, a girl whom the albino considers the closest of his friends, and who will one day become his empress. Down on the mosaic floor of the court Prince Yyrkoon can be seen in all his finest silks and furs, his jewels and his brocades, dancing with a hundred women, all of whom are rumoured to have been mistresses of his at one time or another. His dark features, at once handsome and saturnine, are framed by long black hair, waved and oiled, and his expression, as ever, is sardonic while his bearing is arrogant. The heavy brocade cloak swings this way and that, striking other dancers with some force. He wears it almost as if it is armour or, perhaps, a weapon. Amongst many of the courtiers there is more than a little respect for Prince Yyrkoon. Few resent his arrogance and those who do keep silent, for Yyrkoon is known to be a considerable sorcerer himself. Also his behaviour is what the court expects and welcomes in a Melnibonean noble; it is what they would welcome in their emperor.
The emperor knows this. He wishes he could please his court as it strives to honour him with its dancing and its wit, but he cannot bring himself to take part in what he privately considers a wearisome and irritating sequence of ritual posturings. In this he is, perhaps, somewhat more arrogant than Yyrkoon who is, at least, a conventional boor.
From the galleries, the music grows louder and more complex as the slaves; specially trained and surgically operated upon to sing but one perfect note each, are stimulated to more passionate efforts. Even the young emperor is moved by the sinister harmony of their song which in few ways resembles anything previously uttered by the human voice. Why should their pain produce such marvellous beauty? he wonders. Or is all beauty created
through pain? Is that the secret of great art, both human and Melnibonean? The Emperor Elric closes his eyes.
There is a stir in the hall below. The gates have opened and the dancing courtiers cease their motion, drawing back and bowing low as soldiers enter. The soldiers are clad all in light blue, their ornamental helms cast in fantastic shapes, their long, broad-bladed lances decorated with jewelled ribbons. They surround a young woman whose blue dress matches their uniforms and whose bare arms are encircled by five or six bracelets of diamonds, sapphires and gold. Strings of diamonds and sapphires are wound into her hair. Unlike most of the women of the court, her face has no designs painted upon the eyelids or cheekbones. Elric smiles. This is Cymoril. The soldiers are her personal ceremonial guard who, according to tradition, must escort her into the court. They ascend the steps leading to the Ruby Throne. Slowly Elric rises and stretches out his hands.
'Cymoril. I thought you had decided not to grace the court tonight?' She returns his smile. 'My emperor, I found that I was in the mood for conversation, after all.' Elric is grateful. She knows that he is bored and she knows, too, that she is one of the few people of Melnibone whose conversation interests him. If protocol allowed, he would offer her the throne, but as it is she must sit on the topmost step at his feet.
'Please sit, sweet Cymoril.' He resumes his place upon the throne and leans forward as she seats herself and looks into his eyes with a mixed expression of humour and tenderness. She speaks softly as her guard withdraws to mingle at the
sides of the steps with Elric's own guard. Her voice can be heard only by Elric. 'Would you ride out to the wild region of the island with me tomorrow, my lord?' 'There are matters to which I must give my attention...' He is attracted by the idea. It is weeks since he left the city and rode with her, their escort keeping a discreet distance away. 'Are they urgent?'
He shrugs. 'What matters are urgent in Melnibone? After ten thousand years, most problems may be seen in a certain perspective.' His smile is almost a grin, rather like that of a young scholar who plans to play truant from his tutor. 'Very well--early in the morning, we'll leave, before the others are up.'
'The air beyond Imrryr will be clear and sharp. The sun will be warm for the season. The sky will be blue and unclouded.' Elric laughs. 'Such sorcery you must have worked!'
Cymoril lowers her eyes and traces a pattern on the marble of the dais. 'Well, perhaps a little. I am not without friends among the weakest of the elementals...' Elric stretches down to touch her fine, fair hair. 'Does Yyrkoon know?' 'No.'
Prince Yyrkoon has forbidden his sister to meddle in magical matters. Prince Yyrkoon's friends are only among the darker of the supernatural beings and he knows that they are dangerous to deal with; thus he assumes that all sorcerous
dealings bear a similar element of danger. Besides this, he hates to think that others possess the power that he possesses. Perhaps this is what, in Elric, he hates most of all. 'Let us hope that all Melnibone needs fine weather for tomorrow,' says Elric. Cymoril stares curiously at him. She is still a Melnibonean. It has not occurred to her that her sorcery might prove unwelcome to some. Then she shrugs her lovely shoulders and touches her lord lightly upon the hand.
'This "guilt",' she says. 'This searching of the conscience. Its purpose is beyond my simple brain.' 'And mine, I must admit. It seems to have no practical function. Yet more than one of our ancestors predicted a change in the nature of our earth. A spiritual as well as a physical change. Perhaps I have glimmerings of this change when I think my stranger, un-Melnibonean, thoughts?'
The music swells. The music fades. The courtiers dance on, though many eyes are upon Elric and Cymoril as they talk at the top of the dais. There is speculation. When will Elric announce Cymoril as his empress-to-be? Will Elric revive the custom that Sadric dismissed, of sacrificing twelve brides and their bridegrooms to the Lords of Chaos in order to ensure a good marriage for the rulers of Melnibone? It was obvious that Sadric's refusal to allow the custom to continue brought misery upon him and death upon his wife; brought him a sickly son and threatened the very continuity of the monarchy. Elric must revive the custom. Even Elric must fear a repetition of the doom which visited his father. But some say that Elric will do nothing in accordance with tradition and that he threatens not only his own life, but the existence of Melnibone itself and all it stands for. And those who speak thus are often seen to be on good terms with
Prince Yyrkoon who dances on, seemingly unaware of their conversation or, indeed, unaware that his sister talks quietly with the cousin who sits on the Ruby Throne; who sits on the edge of the seat, forgetful of his dignity, who exhibits none of the ferocious and disdainful pride which has, in the past, marked virtually every-other emperor of Melnibone; who chats animatedly, forgetful that the court is supposed to be dancing for his entertainment.
And then suddenly Prince Yyrkoon freezes in midpirouette and raises his dark eyes to look up at his emperor. In one corner of the hall, Dyvim Tvar's attention is attracted by Yyrkoon's calculated and dramatic posture and the Lord of the Dragon Caves frowns. His hand falls to where his sword would normally be, but no swords are worn at a court ball. Dyvim Tvar looks warily and intently at Prince Yyrkoon as the tall nobleman begins to ascend the stairs to the Ruby Throne. Many eyes follow the emperor's cousin and now hardly anyone dances, though the music grows wilder as the masters of the music slaves goad their charges to even greater exertions.
Elric looks up to see Yyrkoon standing one step below that on which Cymoril sits. Yyrkoon makes a bow which is subtly insulting. 'I present myself to my emperor,' he says.
Chapter 2
An Upstart Prince:
He Confronts His Cousin
'AND HOW DO you enjoy the ball, cousin?' Elric asked, aware that Yyrkoon's melodramatic presentation had been designed to catch him off-guard and, if possible, humiliate him. 'Is the music to your taste?' Yyrkoon lowered his eyes and let his lips form a secret little smile. 'Everything is to my taste, my liege. But what of yourself?. Does something displease you? You do not join the dance.' Elric raised one pale finger to his chin and stared at Yyrkoon's hidden eyes. 'I enjoy the dance, cousin, nonetheless. Surely it is possible to take pleasure in the pleasure of others?' Yyrkoon seemed genuinely astonished. His eyes opened fully and met Elric's. Elric felt a slight shock and then turned his own gaze away, indicating the music galleries with a languid hand. 'Or perhaps it is the pain of others which brings me pleasure. Fear not, for my sake, cousin. I am pleased. I am pleased. You may dance on, assured that your emperor enjoys the ball.'
But Yyrkoon was not to be diverted from his object. 'Surely, if his subjects are not to go away saddened and troubled that they have not pleased their ruler, the emperor should demonstrate his enjoyment...?'
'I would remind you, cousin,' said Elric quietly, 'that the emperor has no duty to his subjects at all, save to rule them. Their duty is to him. That is the tradition of Melnibone.' Yyrkoon had not expected Elric to use such arguments against him, but he rallied with his next retort. 'I agree, my lord. The emperor's duty is to rule his subjects. Perhaps that is why so many of them do not, themselves, enjoy the ball as much as they might.' 'I do not follow you, cousin.'
Cymoril had risen and stood with her hands clenched on the step above her brother. She was tense and anxious, worried by her brother's bantering tone, his disdainful bearing. 'Yyrkoon...' she said.
He acknowledged her presence. 'Sister. I see you share our emperor's reluctance to dance.' 'Yyrkoon,' she murmured, 'you are going too far. The emperor is tolerant, but...' 'Tolerant? Or is he careless? Is he careless of the traditions of our great race? Is he contemptuous of that race's pride?' Dyvim Tvar was now mounting the steps. It was plain that he, too, sensed that Yyrkoon had chosen this moment to test Elric's power. Cymoril was aghast. She said urgently: 'Yyrkoon. If you would live...' 'I would not care to live if the soul of Melnibone perished. And the guardianship of our nation's soul is the responsibility of the emperor. And what if we should have an
emperor who failed in that responsibility? An emperor who was weak? An emperor who cared nothing for the greatness of the Dragon Isle and its folk?' 'A hypothetical question, cousin.' Elric had recovered his composure and his voice was an icy drawl. 'For such an emperor has never sat upon the Ruby Throne and such an emperor never shall.' Dyvim Tvar came up, touching Yyrkoon on the shoulder. 'Prince, if you value your dignity and your life...' Elric raised his hand. 'There is no need for that, Dyvim Tvar. Prince Yyrkoon merely entertains us with an intellectual debate. Fearing that I was bored by the music and the dance--which I am not--he thought he would provide the subject for a stimulating discourse. I am certain that we are most stimulated, Prince Yyrkoon.' Elric allowed a patronising warmth to colour his last sentence.
Yyrkoon flushed with anger and bit his lip.
'But go on, dear cousin Yyrkoon,' Elric said. 'I am interested. Enlarge further on your argument.' Yyrkoon looked around him, as if for support. But all his supporters were on the floor of the hall. Only Elric's friends, Dyvim Tvar and Cymoril, were nearby. Yet Yyrkoon knew that his supporters were hearing every word and that he would lose face if he did not retaliate. Elric could tell that Yyrkoon would have preferred to have retired from this confrontation and choose another day and another ground on which to continue the battle, but that was not possible. Elric, himself, had no wish to continue the foolish banter which was, no matter how disguised, a little better than the quarrelling of two little girls over who should play with the slaves first. He decided to make an end to it.
Yyrkoon began: 'Then let me suggest that an emperor who was physically weak might also be weak in his will to rule as befitted...' And Elric raised his hand. 'You have done enough, dear cousin. More than enough. You have wearied yourself with this conversation when you would have preferred to dance. I am touched by your concern. But now I, too, feel weariness steal upon me.' Elric signaled for his old servant Tanglebones who stood on the far side of the throne dais, amongst the soldiers: 'Tanglebones! My cloak.'
Elric stood up. 'I thank you again for your thoughtfulness, cousin.' He addressed the court in general. 'I was entertained. Now I retire.' Tanglebones brought the cloak of white fox fur and placed it around his master's shoulders. Tangle-bones was very old and much taller than Elric, though his back was stooped and all his limbs seemed knotted and twisted back on themselves, like the limbs of a strong, old tree.
Elric walked across the dais and through the door which opened onto a corridor which led to his private apartments. Yyrkoon was left fuming. He whirled round on the dais and opened his mouth as if to address the watching courtiers. Some, who did not support him, were smiling quite openly. Yyrkoon clenched his fists at his sides and glowered. He glared at Dyvim Tvar and opened his thin lips to speak. Dyvim Tvar coolly returned the glare, daring Yyrkoon to say more.
Then Yyrkoon flung back his head so that the locks of his hair, all curled and oiled, swayed against his back. And Yyrkoon laughed.
The harsh sound filled the hall. The music stopped. The laughter continued. Yyrkoon stepped up so that he stood on the dais. He dragged his heavy cloak round him so that it engulfed his body. Cymoril came forward. 'Yyrkoon, please do not...' He pushed her back with a motion of his shoulder. Yyrkoon walked stiffly towards the Ruby Throne. It became plain that he was about to seat himself in it and thus perform one of the most traitorous actions possible in the code of Melnibone. Cymoril ran the few steps to him and pulled at his arm.
Yyrkoon's laughter grew. 'It is Yyrkoon they would wish to see on the Ruby Throne,' he told his sister. She gasped and looked in horror at Dyvim Tvar whose face was grim and angry. Dyvim Tvar signed to the guards and suddenly there were two ranks of armoured men between Yyrkoon and the throne. Yyrkoon glared back at the Lord of the Dragon Caves. 'You had best hope you perish with your master,' he hissed. 'This guard of honour will escort you from the hall,' Dyvim Tvar said evenly. 'We were all stimulated by your conversation this evening, Prince Yyrkoon.' Yyrkoon paused, looked about him, then relaxed. He shrugged. 'There's time enough. If Elric will not abdicate, then he must be deposed.'
Cymoril's slender body was rigid. Her eyes blazed. She said to her brother: 'If you harm Elric in any way, I will slay you myself, Yyrkoon.'
He raised his tapering eyebrows and smiled. At that moment he seemed to hate his sister even more than he hated his cousin. 'Your loyalty to that creature has ensured your own doom, Cymoril. I would rather you died than that you should give birth to any progeny of his. I will not have the blood of our house diluted, tainted--even touched--by his blood. Look to your own life, sister, before you threaten mine.'
And he stormed down the steps, pushing through those who came up to congratulate him. He knew that he had lost and the murmurs of his sycophants only irritated him further. The great doors of the hall crashed together and closed. Yyrkoon was gone from the hall. Dyvim Tvar raised both his arms. 'Dance on, courtiers. Pleasure yourselves with all that the hall provides. It is what will please the emperor most.' But it was plain there would be little more dancing done tonight. Courtiers were already deep in conversation as, excitedly, they debated the events. Dyvim Tvar turned to Cymoril. 'Elric refuses to understand the danger, Princess Cymoril. Yyrkoon's ambition could bring disaster to all of us.' 'Including Yyrkoon.' Cymoril sighed.
'Aye, including Yyrkoon. But how can we avoid this, Cymoril, if Elric will not give orders for your brother's arrest?'
'He believes that such as Yyrkoon should be allowed to say what they please. It is part of his philosophy. I can barely understand it, but it seems integral to his whole belief. If he destroys Yyrkoon, he destroys the basis on which his logic works. That at any rate, Dragon Master, is what he has tried to explain to me.'
Dyvim Tvar sighed and he frowned. Though unable to understand Elric, he was afraid that he could sometimes sympathise with Yyrkoon's viewpoint. At least Yyrkoon's motives and arguments were relatively straightforward. He knew Elric's character too well, however, to believe that Elric acted from weakness or lassitude. The paradox was that Elric tolerated Yyrkoon's treachery because he was strong, because he had the power to destroy Yyrkoon whenever he cared. And Yyrkoon's own character was such that he must constantly be testing that strength of Elric's, for he knew instinctively that if Elric did weaken and order him slain, then he would have won. It was a complicated situation and Dyvim Tvar dearly wished that he was not embroiled in it. But his loyalty to the royal line of Melnibone was strong and his personal loyalty to Elric was great. He considered the idea of having Yyrkoon secretly assassinated, but he knew that such a plan would almost certainly come to nothing. Yyrkoon was a sorcerer of immense power and doubtless would be forewarned of any attempt on his life.
'Princess Cymoril,' said Dyvim Tvar, 'I can only pray that your brother swallows so much of his rage that it eventually poisons him.' 'I will join you in that prayer, Lord of the Dragon Caves.' Together, they left the hall.
Chapter 3
Riding Through the Morning: A Moment of Tranquillity THE LIGHT OF the early morning touched the tall towers of Imrryr and made them scintillate. Each tower was of a different hue; there were a thousand soft colours. There were rose pinks and pollen yellows, there were purples and pale greens, mauves and browns and oranges, hazy blues, whites and powdery golds, all lovely in the sunlight. Two riders left the Dreaming City behind them and rode away from the walls, over the green turf towards a pine forest where, among the shadowy trunks, a little of the night seemed to remain. Squirrels were stirring and foxes crept homeward; birds were singing and forest flowers opened their petals and filled the air with delicate scent. A few insects wandered sluggishly aloft. The contrast between life in the nearby city and this lazy rusticity was very great and seemed to mirror some of the contrasts existing in the mind of at least one of the riders who now dismounted and led his horse, walking knee-deep through a mass of blue flowers. The other rider, a girl, brought her own horse to a halt but did not dismount. Instead, she leaned casually on her: high Melnibonean pommel and smiled at the man, her lover.
'Elric? Would you stop so near to Imrryr?'
He smiled back at her, over his shoulder. 'For the moment. Our flight was hasty. I would collect my thoughts before we ride on.' 'How did you sleep last night?'
'Well enough, Cymoril, though I must have dreamed without knowing it, for there were--there were little intimations in my head when I awoke. But then, the meeting with Yyrkoon was not pleasant...' 'Do you think he plots to use sorcery against you?'
Elric shrugged. 'I would know if he brought a large sorcery against me. And he knows my power, I doubt if he would dare employ wizardry.' 'He has reason to believe you might not use your power. He has worried at your personality for so long--is there not a danger he will begin to worry at your skills? Testing your sorcery as he has tested your patience?' Elric frowned. 'Yes, I suppose there is that danger. But not yet, I should have thought.' 'He will not be happy until you are destroyed, Elric.'
'Or is destroyed himself, Cymoril.' Elric stooped and picked one of the flowers. He smiled. 'Your brother is inclined to absolutes, is he not? How the weak hate weakness.' Cymoril took his meaning. She dismounted and came towards him. Her thin gown matched, almost perfectly, the colour of the flowers through which she moved. He handed her the flower and she accepted it, touching its petals with her perfect lips. 'And how the strong hate strength, my love. Yyrkoon is my kin and yet I give you this advice--use your strength against him.'
'I could not slay him. I have not the right.' Elric's face fell into familiar, brooding lines. "You could exile him.'
'Is not exile the same as death to a Melnibonean?'
'You, yourself, have talked of travelling in the lands of the Young Kingdoms.' Elric laughed somewhat bitterly. 'But perhaps I am not a true Melnibonean. Yyrkoon has said as much--and others echo his thoughts.' 'He hates you because you are contemplative. Your father was contemplative and no one denied that he was a fitting emperor.' 'My father chose not to put the results of his contemplation into his personal actions. He ruled as an emperor should. Yyrkoon, I must admit, would also rule as an emperor should. He, too, has the opportunity to make Melnibone great again. If he were emperor, he would embark on a campaign of conquest to restore our trade to its former volume, to extend our power across the earth. And that is what the majority of our folk would wish. Is it my right to deny that wish?'
'It is your right to do what you think, for you are the emperor. All who are loyal to you think as I do.' 'Perhaps their loyalty is misguided. Perhaps Yyrkoon is right and I will betray that loyalty, bring doom to the Dragon Isle?' His moody, crimson eyes looked directly into hers. 'Perhaps I should have died as I left my mother's womb. Then Yyrkoon would have become emperor. Has Fate been thwarted?'
'Fate is never thwarted. What has happened has happened because Fate willed it thus--if, indeed, there is such a thing as Fate and if men's actions are not merely a response to other men's actions.'
Elric drew a deep breath and offered her an expression tinged with irony. 'Your logic leads you close to heresy, Cymoril, if we are to believe the traditions of Melnibone. Perhaps it would be better if you forgot your friendship with me.'
She laughed. 'You begin to sound like my brother. Are you testing my love for you, my lord?' He began to remount his horse. 'No, Cymoril, but I would advise you to test your love yourself, for I sense there is tragedy implicit in our love.' As she swung herself back into her saddle she smiled and shook her head. 'You see doom in all things, Can you not accept the good gifts granted you? They are few enough, my lord.' 'Aye. I'll agree with that.'
They turned in their saddles, hearing hoofbeats behind them. Some distance away they saw a company of yellow- clad horsemen riding about in confusion. It was their guard, which they had left behind, wishing to ride alone. 'Come!' cried Elric. 'Through the woods and over yonder hill and they'll never find us!' They spurred their steeds through the sun-speared wood and up the steep sides of the hill beyond, racing down the other side and away across a plain where noidel bushes grew, their lush, poison fruit glimmering a purplish blue, a night-colour which even the light of day could not disperse. There were many such peculiar berries and herbs on Melnibone and it was to some of them that Elric owed his life. Others were used for sorcerous potions and had been sown generations before by Elric's ancestors. Now few
Melniboneans left Imrryr even to collect these harvests. Only slaves visited the greater part of the island, seeking the roots and the shrubs which made men dream monstrous and magnificent dreams, for it was in their dreams that the nobles of Melnibone found most of their pleasures; they had ever been a moody, inward-looking race and it was for this quality that Imrryr had come to be named the Dreaming City. There, even the meanest slaves chewed berries to bring them oblivion and thus were easily controlled, for they came to depend on their dreams. Only Elric himself refused such drugs, perhaps because he required so many others simply to ensure his remaining alive.
The yellow-clad guards were lost behind them and once across the plain where the noidel bushes grew they slowed their flight and came at length to cliffs and then the sea. The sea shone brightly and languidly washed the white beaches below the cliffs. Seabirds wheeled in the clear sky and their cries were distant, serving only to emphasise the sense of peace which both Elric and Cymoril now had. In silence the lovers guided their horses down steep paths to the shore and there they tethered the steeds and began to walk across the sand, their hair--his white, hers jet black-- waving in the wind which blew from the east.
They found a great, dry cave which caught the sounds the sea made and replied in a whispering echo. They removed their silken garments and made love tenderly in the shadows of the cave. They lay in each other's arms as the day warmed and the wind dropped. Then they went to bathe in the waters, filling the empty sky with their laughter.
When they were dry and were dressing themselves they noticed a darkening of the horizon and Elric said: 'We shall
be wet again before we return to Imrryr. No matter how fast we ride, the storm will catch us.' 'Perhaps we should remain in the cave until it is past?' she suggested, coming close and holding her soft body against him. 'No,' he said. 'I must return soon, for there are potions in Imrryr I must take if my body is to retain its strength. An hour or two longer and I shall begin to weaken. You have seen me weak before, Cymoril.' She stroked his face and her eyes were sympathetic. 'Aye. I've seen you weak before, Elric. Come, let's find the horses.' By the time they reached the horses the sky was grey overhead and full of boiling blackness not far away in the east. They heard the grumble of thunder and the crash of lightning. The sea was threshing as if infected by the sky's hysteria. The horses snorted and pawed at the sand, anxious to return. Even as Elric and Cymoril climbed into their saddles large spots of rain began to fall on their heads and spread over their cloaks.
Then, suddenly, they were riding at full tilt back to Imrryr while the lightning flashed around them and the thunder roared like a furious giant, like some great old Lord of Chaos attempting to break through, unbidden, into the Realm of Earth.
Cymoril glanced at Elric's pale face, illuminated for a moment by a flash of sky-fire, and she felt a chill come upon her then and the chill had nothing to do with the wind or the rain, for it seemed to her in that second that the gentle scholar she loved had been transformed by the elements into a hell-driven demon, into a monster with barely a semblance of humanity. His crimson eyes had flared from the
whiteness of his skull like the very flames of the Higher Hell; his hair had been whipped upward so that it had become the crest of a sinister warhelm and, by a trick of the stormlight, his mouth had seemed twisted in a mixture of rage and agony.
And suddenly Cymoril knew.
She knew, profoundly, that their morning's ride was the last moment of peace the two of them would ever experience again. The storm was a sign from the gods themselves--a warning of storms to come. She looked again at her lover. Elric was laughing. He had turned his face upward so that the warm rain fell upon it, so that the water splashed into his open mouth. The laughter was the easy, unsophisticated laughter of a happy child. Cymoril tried to laugh back, but then she had to turn her face away so that he should not see it. For Cymoril had begun to weep. She was weeping still when Imrryr came in sight a black and grotesque silhouette against a line of brightness which was the as yet untainted western horizon.
Chapter 4
Prisoners:
Their Secrets Are Taken from Them
THE MEN IN yellow armour saw Elric and Cymoril as the two approached the smallest of the eastern gates. 'They have found us at last,' smiled Elric through the rain, 'but somewhat belatedly, eh, Cymoril?' Cymoril, still embattled with her sense of doom, merely nodded and tried to smile in reply. Elric took this as an expression of disappointment, nothing more, and called to his guards: 'Ho, men! Soon we shall all be dry again!' But the captain of the guard rode up urgently, crying: 'My lord emperor is needed at Monshanjik Tower where spies are held.' 'Spies?' 'Aye, my lord.' The man's face was pale. Water cascaded from his helm and darkened his thin cloak. His horse was hard to control and kept sidestepping through pools of water, which had gathered wherever the road was in disrepair. 'Caught in the maze this morning. Southern barbarians, by their chequered dress. We are holding them until the emperor himself can question them.'
Elric waved his hand. 'Then lead on, captain. Let's see the brave fools who dare Melnibone's sea-maze.'
The Tower of Monshanjik had been named for the wizard- architect who had designed the sea-maze millennia before. The maze was the only means of reaching the great harbour of Imrryr and its secrets had been carefully guarded, for it was their greatest protection against sudden attack. The maze was complicated and pilots had to be specially trained to steer ships through it. Before the maze had been built, the harbour had been a kind of 'inland lagoon, fed by the sea which swept in through a system of natural caverns in the towering cliff which rose between lagoon and ocean. There were five separate routes through the sea-maze and any individual pilot knew but one. In the outer wall of the cliff there were five entrances. Here Young Kingdom ships waited until a pilot came aboard. Then one of the gates to one of the entrances would be lifted, all aboard the ship would be blindfolded and sent below save for the oar-master and the steersman who would also be masked in heavy steel helms so that they could see nothing, do nothing but obey the complicated instructions of the pilot. And if a Young Kingdom ship should fail to obey any of those instructions and should crush itself against the rock walls, well Melnibone did not mourn for it and any survivors from the crew would be taken as slaves. All who sought to trade with the Dreaming City understood the risks, but scores of merchants came every month to dare the dangers of the maze and trade their own poor goods for the splendid riches of Melnibone.
The Tower of Monshanjik stood overlooking the harbour and the massive mole which jutted out into the middle of the lagoon. It was a sea-green tower and was squat compared with most of those in Imrryr, though still a beautiful and tapering construction, with wide windows so that the whole of the harbour could be seen from it. From Monshanjik Tower most of the business of the harbour was done and in its lower cellars were kept any prisoners who had broken any of
the myriad rules governing the functioning of the harbour. Leaving Cymoril to return to the palace with a guard, Elric entered the tower, riding through the great archway at the base, scattering not a few merchants who were waiting for permission to begin their bartering, for the whole of the ground floor was full of sailors, merchants and Melnibonean officials engaged in the business of trade, though it was not here that the actual wares were displayed. The great echoing babble of a thousand voices engaged in a thousand separate aspects of bargaining slowly stilled as Elric and his guard rode arrogantly through to another dark arch at the far end of the hall. This arch opened onto a ramp which sloped and curved down into the bowels of the tower.
Down this ramp clattered the horsemen, passing slaves, servants and officials who stepped hastily aside, bowing low as they recognised the emperor. Great brands illuminated the tunnel, guttering and smoking and casting distorted shadows onto the smooth, obsidian walls. A chill was in the air now, and a dampness, for water washed about the outer walls below the quays of Imrryr. And still the emperor rode on and still the ramp struck lower through the glassy rock. And then a wave of heat rose to meet them and shifting light could be seen ahead and they passed into a chamber that was full of smoke and the scent of fear. From the low ceiling hung chains and from eight of the chains, swinging by their feet, hung four people. Their clothes had been torn from them, but their bodies were clothed in blood from tiny wounds, precise but severe, made by the artist who stood, scalpel in hand, surveying his handiwork.
The artist was tail and very thin, almost like a skeleton in his stained, white garments. His lips were thin, his eyes were slits, his fingers were thin, his hair was thin and the scalpel he held was thin, too, almost invisible save when it flashed in the light from the fire which erupted from a pit on the far
side of the cavern. The artist was named Doctor Jest and the art he practised was a performing art rather than a creative one (though he could argue otherwise with some conviction): the art of drawing secrets from those who kept them. Doctor Jest was the Chief Interrogator of Melnibone. He turned sinuously as Elric entered, the scalpel held between the thin thumb and the thin forefinger of his fight hand; he stood poised and expectant, almost like a dancer, and then bowed from the waist.
'My sweet emperor!' His voice was thin. It rushed from his thin throat as if bent on escape and one was inclined to wonder if one had heard the words at all, so quickly had they come and gone. 'Doctor. Are these the southlanders caught this morning?'
'Indeed they are, my lord.' Another sinuous bow. 'For your pleasure.' Coldly Elric inspected the prisoners. He felt no sympathy for them. They were spies. Their actions had led them to this pass. They had known what would happen to them if caught. But one of them was a boy and another a woman, it appeared, though they writhed so in their chains it was quite difficult to tell at first. It seemed a shame. Then the woman snapped what remained of her teeth at him and hissed: 'Demon!' And Elric stepped back, saying:
'Have they informed you of what they were doing in our maze, doctor?' 'They still tantalise me with hints. They have a fine sense of drama. I appreciate that. They are here, I would say, to map a route through the maze which a force of raiders might then follow: But they have so far withheld the details. That is the game. We ail understand how it must be played.'
'And when will they tell you, Doctor Jest?' 'Oh, very soon, my lord.' 'It would be best to know if we are to expect attackers. The sooner we know, the less time we shall lose dealing with the attack when it comes. Do you not agree, doctor?' 'I do, my lord.'
'Very well.' Elric was irritated by this break in his day. It had spoiled the pleasure of the ride, it had brought him face to face with his duties too quickly. Doctor Jest returned to his charges and, reaching out with his free hand, expertly seized the genitals of one of the male prisoners. The scalpel flashed. There was a groan. Doctor Jest tossed something onto the fire. Elric sat in the chair prepared for him. He was bored rather than disgusted by the rituals attendant upon the gathering of information and the discordant screams, the clash of the chains, the thin whisperings of Doctor Jest, all served to ruin the feeling of well-being he had retained even as he reached the chamber. But it was one of his kingly duties to attend such rituals and attend this one he must until the information was presented to him and he could congratulate his Chief Interrogator and issue orders as to the means of dealing with any attack and even when that was over he must confer with admirals and with generals, probably through the rest of the night, choosing between arguments, deciding on the deposition of men and ships. With a poorly disguised yawn he leaned back and watched as Doctor Jest ran fingers and scalpel, tongue, tongs and pincers over the bodies. He was soon thinking' of other matters: philosophical problems which he had still failed to resolve.
It was not that Elric was inhumane; it was that he was, still, a Melnibonean. He had been used to such sights since childhood. He could not have saved the prisoners, even if he had desired, without going against every tradition of the Dragon Isle. And in this case it was a simple matter of a threat being met by the best methods available. He had become used to shutting off those feelings which conflicted with his duties as emperor. If there had been any point in freeing the four who danced now at Doctor Jest's pleasure he would have freed them, but there was no point and the four would have been astonished if they had received any other treatment than this. Where moral decisions were concerned Elric was, by and large, practical. He would make his decision in the context of what action he could take. In this case, he could take no action. Such a reaction had become second nature to him. His desire was not to reform Melnibone but to reform himself, not to initiate action but to know the best way of responding to the actions of others. Here, the decision was easy to make. A spy was an aggressor. One defended oneself against aggressors in the best possible way. The methods employed by Doctor Jest were the best methods.
'My lord?'
Absently, Elric looked up.
'We have the information now, my lord.' Doctor Jest's thin voice whispered across the chamber. Two sets of chains were now empty and slaves were gathering things up from the floor and flinging them on the fire. The two remaining shapeless lumps reminded Elric of meat carefully prepared by a chef.
One of the lumps still quivered a little, but the other was still.
Doctor Jest slid his instruments into a thin case he carried in a pouch at his belt. His white garments were almost completely covered in stains. 'It seems there have been other spies before these,' Doctor Jest told his master. 'These came merely to confirm the route. If they do not return in time, the barbarians will still sail.' 'But surely they will know that we expect them?' Elric said.
'Probably not, my lord. Rumours have been spread amongst the Young Kingdom merchants and sailors that four spies were seen in the maze and were speared--slain whilst trying to escape.' 'I see.' Elric frowned. 'Then our best plan will be to lay a trap for the raiders.' 'Aye, my lord.'
'You know the route they have chosen?' 'Aye, my lord.' Elric turned to one of his guards. 'Have messages sent to all our generals and admirals. What's the hour?' 'The hour of sunset is just past, my liege.'
'Tell them to assemble before the Ruby Throne at two hours past sunset.' Wearily, Elric rose. 'You have done well, as usual, Doctor Jest.' The thin artist bowed low, seeming to fold himself in two. A thin and somewhat unctuous sigh was his reply.
Chapter 5
A Battle: The King Proves His War-Skill YYRKOON WAS THE first to arrive, all clad in martial finery, accompanied by two massive guards, each holding one of the prince's ornate war-banners. 'My emperor!' Yyrkoon's shout was proud and disdainful. 'Would you let me command the warriors? It will relieve you of that care when, doubtless, you have many other concerns with which to occupy your time.' Elric replied impatiently: 'You are most thoughtful, Prince Yyrkoon, but fear not for me. I shall command the armies and the navies of Melnibone, for that is the duty of the emperor.' Yyrkoon glowered and stepped to one side as Dyvim Tvar, Lord of the Dragon Caves, entered. He had no guard whatsoever with him and it seemed he had dressed hastily. He carried his helmet under his arm. 'My emperor--I bring news of the dragons...'
'I thank you, Dyvim Tvar, but wait until all my commanders are assembled and impart that news to them, too.' Dyvim Tvar bowed and went to stand on the opposite side of the hall to that on which Prince Yyrkoon stood. Gradually the warriors arrived until a score of great captains waited at the foot of the steps which led to the Ruby Throne where Elric sat. Elric himself still wore the clothes in which
he had gone riding that morning. He had not had time to change and had until a little while before been consulting maps of the mazes-maps which only he could read and which, at normal times, were hidden by magical means from any who might attempt to find them.
'Southlanders would steal Imrryr's wealth and slay us all,' Elric began. 'They believe they have found a way through our sea-maze. A fleet of a hundred warships sails on Melnibone even now. Tomorrow it will wait below the horizon until dusk, then it will sail to the maze and enter. By midnight it expects to reach the harbour and to have taken the Dreaming City before dawn. Is that possible, I wonder?'
'No!' Many spoke the single word.
'No.' Elric smiled. 'But how shall we best enjoy this little war they offer us?' Yyrkoon, as ever, was first to shout. 'Let us go to meet them now, with dragons and with battle-barges. Let us pursue them to their own land and take their war to them. Let us attack their nations and burn their cities! Let us conquer them and thus ensure our own security!'
Dyvim Tvar spoke up again:
'No dragons,' he said.
'What?' Yyrkoon whirled. 'What?'
'No dragons, prince. They will not be awakened. The dragons sleep in their caverns, exhausted by their last engagement on your behalf.' 'Mine?'
'You would use them in our conflict with the Vilmirian pirates. I told you that I would prefer to save them for a larger engagement. But you flew them against the pirates and you burned their little boats and now the dragons sleep.'
Yyrkoon glowered. He looked up at Elric. 'I did not expect...'
Elric raised his hand. 'We need not use our dragons until such a time as we really need them. This attack from the southlander fleet is nothing. But we will conserve our strength if we bide our time. Let them think we are unready. Let them enter the maze. Once the whole hundred are through, we close in, blocking off all routes in or out of the maze. Trapped, they will be crushed by us.'
Yyrkoon looked pettishly at his feet, evidently wishing he could think of some flaw in the plan. Tall, old Admiral Magum Colim in his sea-green armour stepped forward and bowed. 'The golden battle-barges of Imrryr are ready to defend their city, my liege. It will take time, however, to manoeuvre them into position. It is doubtful if all will fit into the maze at once.'
'Then sail some of them out now and hide them around the coast, so that they can wait for any survivors that may escape our attack,' Elric instructed him. 'A useful plan, my liege.' Magum Colim bowed and sank back into the crowd of his peers. The debate continued for some time and then they were ready and about to leave. But then Prince Yyrkoon bellowed once more: 'I repeat my offer to the emperor. His person is too valuable to risk in battle. My person--it is worthless. Let me command
the warriors of both land and sea while the emperor may remain at the palace, untroubled by the battle, confident that it will be won and the southlanders trounced--perhaps there is a book he wishes to finish?' Elric smiled. 'Again I thank you for your concern, Prince Yyrkoon. But an emperor must exercise his body as well as his mind. I will command the warriors tomorrow.' When Elric arrived back at his apartments it was to discover that Tanglebones had already laid out his heavy, black wargear. Here was the armour which had served a hundred Melnibonean emperors; an armour which was forged by sorcery to give it a strength unequalled on the Realm of Earth, which could, so rumour went, even withstand the bite of the mythical runeblades, Stormbringer and Mournblade, which had been wielded by the wickedest of Melnibone's many wicked rulers before being seized by the Lords of the Higher Worlds and hidden forever in a realm where even those Lords might rarely venture.
The face of the tangled man was full of joy as he touched each piece of armour, each finely balanced weapon, with his long, gnarled fingers. His seamed face looked up to regard Elric's care-ravaged features. 'Oh, my lord! Oh, my king! Soon you will know the joy of the fight!'
'Aye, Tanglebones--and let us hope it will be a joy.'
'I taught you all the skills--the art of the sword and the poignard--the art of the bow--the art of the spear, both mounted and on foot. And you learned well, for all they say you are weak. Save one, there's no better swordsman in Melnibone.'
'Prince Yyrkoon could be better than me,' Elric said reflectively. 'Could he not?'
'I said "save one", my lord.'
'And Yyrkoon is that one. Well, one day perhaps we'll be able to test the matter. I'll bathe before I don all that metal.' 'Best make speed, master. From what I hear, there is much to do.' 'And I'll sleep after I've bathed.' Elric smiled at his old friend's consternation. 'It will be better thus, for I cannot personally direct the barges into position. I am needed to command the fray--and that I will do better when I've rested.' 'If you think it good, lord king, then it is good.'
'And you are astonished. You are too eager, Tanglebones, to get me into all that stuff and see me strut about in it as if I were Arioch himself...' Tanglebones's hand flew to his mouth as if he had spoken the words, not his master, and he was trying to block them. His eyes widened. Elric laughed. 'You think I speak bold heresies, eh? Well, I've spoken worse without any ill befalling me. On Melnibone, Tanglebones, the emperors control the demons, not the reverse.' 'So you say, my liege.'
'It is the truth.' Elric swept from the room, calling for his slaves. The war-fever filled him and he was jubilant. Now he was in all his black gear: the massive breastplate, the padded jerkin, the long greaves, the mail gauntlets. At his side was a five-foot broadsword which, it was said, had
belonged to a human hero called Aubec. Resting on the deck against the golden rail of the bridge was the great round warboard, his shield, bearing the sign of the swooping dragon. And a helm was on his head; a black helm, with a dragon's head craning over the peak, and dragon's wings flaring backward above it, and a dragon's tail curling down the back. All the helm was black, but within the helm there was a white shadow from which glared two crimson orbs, and from the sides of the helm strayed wisps of milk-white hair, almost like smoke escaping from a burning building. And, as the helm turned in what little light came from the lantern hanging at the base of the mainmast, the white shadow sharpened to reveal features--fine, handsome features--a straight nose, curved lips, up-slanting eyes. The face Of Emperor Elric of Melnibone peered into the gloom of the maze as he listened for the first sounds of the sea- raider's approach.
He stood on the high bridge of the great golden battle-barge which, like all its kind, resembled a floating ziggurat equipped with masts and sails and oars and catapults. The ship was called The Son of the Pyaray and it was the flagship of the fleet. The Grand Admiral Magum Colim stood beside Elric. Like Dyvim Tvar, the admiral was one of Elric's few close friends. He had known Elric all his life and had encouraged him to learn all he could concerning the running of fighting ships and fighting fleets. Privately Magum Colim might fear that Elric was too scholarly and introspective to rule Melnibone, but he accepted Elric's right to rule and was made angry and impatient by the talk of the likes of Yyrkoon. Prince Yyrkoon was also aboard the flagship, though at this moment he was below, inspecting the war- engines.
The Son of the Pyaray lay at anchor in a huge grotto, one of hundreds built into the walls of the maze when the maze
itself was built, and designed for just this purpose--to hide a battle-barge. There was just enough height for the masts and enough width for the oars to move freely. Each of the golden battle-barges was equipped with banks of oars, each bank containing between twenty and thirty oars on either side. The banks were four, five or six decks high and, as in the case of The Son of the Pyaray, might have three independent steering systems, fore and aft. Being armoured all in gold, the ships were virtually indestructible, and, for all their massive size, they could move swiftly and manoeuvre delicately when occasion demanded. It was not the first time they had waited for their enemies in these grottoes. It would not be the last (though when next they waited it would be in greatly different circumstances).
The battle-barges of Melnibone were rarely seen on the open seas these days, but once they had sailed the oceans of the world like fearsome floating mountains of gold and .they had brought terror whenever they were sighted. The fleet had been larger then, comprising hundreds of craft. Now there were less than forty ships. But forty would suffice. Now, in damp darkness, they awaited their enemies.
Listening to the hollow slap of the water against the sides of the ship, Elric wished that he had been able to conceive a better plan than this. He was sure that this one would work, but he regretted the waste of lives, both Melnibonean and barbarian. It would have been better if some way could have been devised of frightening the barbarians away rather than trapping them in the sea-maze. The southlander fleet was not the first to have been attracted by Imrryr's fabulous wealth. The southlander crews were not the first to entertain the belief that the Melniboneans, because they never now ventured far from the Dreaming City, had become decadent and unable to defend their treasures. And so the southlanders must be destroyed in order to make the lesson
clear. Melnibone was still strong. She was strong enough, in Yyrkoon's view, to resume her former dominance of the world--strong in sorcery if not in soldiery. 'Hist!' Admiral Magum Colim craned forward. 'Was that the sound of an oar?' Elric nodded. 'I think so.'
Now they heard regular splashes, as of rows of oars dipping in and out of the water, and they heard the creak of timbers. The southlanders were corning. The Son of the Pyaray was the ship nearest to the entrance and it would be the first to move out, but only when the last of the southlanders' ships had passed them. Admiral Magum Colim bent and extinguished the lantern, then, quickly, quietly, he descended to inform his crew of the raiders' coming.
Not long before, Yyrkoon had used his sorcery to summon a peculiar mist, which hid the golden barges from view, but through which those on the Melnibonean ships could peer. Now Elric saw torches burning in the channel ahead as carefully the reavers negotiated the maze. Within the space of a few minutes ten of the galleys had passed the grotto. Admiral Magum Colim rejoined Elric on the bridge and now Prince Yyrkoon was with him. Yyrkoon, too, wore a dragon helm, though less magnificent than Elric's, for Elric was chief of the few surviving Dragon Princes of Melnibone. Yyrkoon was grinning through the gloom and his eyes gleamed in anticipation of the bloodletting to come. Elric wished that Prince Yyrkoon had chosen another ship than this, but it was Yyrkoon's right to be aboard the flagship and he could not deny it.
Now half the hundred vessels had gone past.
Yyrkoon's armour creaked as, impatiently, he waited, pacing the bridge, his gauntletted hand on the hilt of his broadsword. 'Soon' he kept saying to himself. 'Soon.' And then their anchor was groaning upwards and their oars were plunging into the water as the last southland ship went by and they shot from the grotto into the channel ramming the enemy galley amidships and smashing it in two. A great yell went up from the barbarian crew. Men were flung in all directions. Torches danced erratically on the remains of the deck as men tried to save themselves from slipping into the dark, chill waters of the channel. A few brave spears rattled against the sides of the Melnibonean flag-galley as it began to turn amongst the debris it had created. But Imrryrian archers returned the shots and the few survivors went down.
The sound of this swift conflict was the signal to the other battle-barges. In perfect order they came from both sides of the high rock walls and it must have seemed to the astonished barbarians that the great golden ships had actually emerged from solid stone--ghost ships filled with demons who rained spears, arrows and brands upon them. Now the whole of the twisting channel was confusion and a medley of war-shouts echoed and boomed and the clash of steel upon steel was like the savage hissing of some monstrous snake, and the raiding fleet itself resembled a snake which had been broken into a hundred pieces by the tall, implacable golden ships of Melnibone. These ships seemed almost serene as they moved against their enemies, their grappling irons flashing out to catch wooden decks and rails and draw the galleys nearer so that they might be destroyed.
But the southlanders were brave and they kept their heads after their initial astonishment. Three of their galleys headed directly for The Son of the Pyaray, recognising it as the flagship. Fire arrows sailed high and dropped down into the decks which were wooden and not protected by the golden armour, starting fires wherever they fell, or else bringing blazing death to the men they struck.
Elric raised his shield above his head and two arrows struck it, bouncing, still flaring, to a lower deck. He leapt over the rail, following the arrows, jumping down to the widest and most exposed deck where his warriors were grouping, ready to deal with the attacking galleys. Catapults thudded and balls of blue fire swished through the blackness, narrowly missing all three galleys. Another volley followed and one mass of flame struck the far galley's mast and then burst upon the deck, scattering huge flames wherever it touched. Grapples snaked out and seized the first galley, dragging it close and Elric was amongst the first to leap down onto the deck, rushing forward to where he saw the southland captain, dressed all in crude, chequered armour, a chequered surcoat over that, a big sword in both his huge hands, bellowing at his men to resist the Melnibonean dogs.
As Elric approached the bridge three barbarians armed with curved swords and small, oblong shields ran at him. Their faces were full of fear, but there was determination there as well, as if they knew they must die but planned to wreak as much destruction as they could before their souls were taken.
Shifting his war-board onto his arm, Elric took his own broadsword in both hands and Charged the sailors, knocking one off his feet with the lip of the-shield and smashing the collar-bone of another. The remaining barbarian skipped aside and thrust his curved sword at Elric's face. Elric barely
escaped the thrust and the sharp edge of the sword grazed his cheek, bringing out a drop or two of blood. Elric swung the broadsword like a scythe and it bit deep into the barbarian's waist, almost cutting him in two. He struggled for a moment, unable to believe that he was dead but then, as Elric yanked the sword free, he closed his eyes and dropped. The man who had been struck by Elric's shield was staggering to his feet as Elric whirled, saw him, and smashed the broadsword into his skull. Now the way was clear to the bridge. Elric began to climb the ladder, noting that the captain had seen him and was waiting for him at the top.
Elric raised his shield to take the captain's first blow. Through all the noise he thought he heard the man shouting at him. 'Die, you white-faced demon! Die! You have no place in this earth any longer!' Elric was almost diverted from defending himself by these words. They rang true to him. Perhaps he really had no place on the earth, perhaps that was why Melnibone was slowly collapsing, why fewer children were born every year, why the dragons themselves were no longer breeding. He let the captain strike another blow at the shield, then he reached under it and swung at the man's legs. But the captain had anticipated the move and jumped backwards. This, however, gave Elric time to run up the few remaining steps and stand on the deck, facing the captain.
The man's face was almost as pale as Elric's. He was sweating and he was panting and his eyes had misery in them as well as a wild fear.
'You should leave us alone,' Elric heard himself saying. 'We offer you no harm, barbarian. When did Melnibone last sail against the Young Kingdoms?' 'You offer us harm by your very presence, Whiteface. There is your sorcery. There are your customs. And there is your arrogance.' 'Is that why you came here? Was your attack motivated by disgust for us? Or would you help yourselves to our wealth? Admit it, captain--greed brought you to Melnibone.' 'At least greed is an honest quality, an understandable one. But you creatures are not human. Worse--you are not gods, though you behave as if you were. Your day is over and you must be wiped out, your city destroyed, your sorceries forgotten.' Elric nodded. 'Perhaps you are right, captain.' 'I am right. Our holy men say so. Our seers predict your downfall. The Chaos Lords whom you serve will themselves bring about that downfall.' 'The Chaos Lords no longer have any interest in the affairs of Melnibone. They took away their power nearly a thousand years since.' Elric watched the captain carefully, judging the distance between them. 'Perhaps that is why our own power waned. Or perhaps we merely became tired of power.'
'Be that as it may,' the captain said, wiping his sweating brow, 'your time is over. You must be destroyed once and for all.' And then he groaned, for Elric's broadsword had come under his chequered breastplate and gone up through his stomach and into his lungs.
One knee bent, one leg stretched behind him, Elric began to withdraw the long sword, looking up into the barbarian's face which had now assumed an expression of reconciliation. 'That was unfair, Whiteface. We had barely begun to talk and you cut the conversation short. You are most skillful. May you writhe forever in the Higher Hell. Farewell.'
Elric hardly knew why, after the captain had fallen face down on the deck, he hacked twice at the neck until the head rolled off the body, rolled to the side of the bridge and was then kicked over the side so that it sank into the cold, deep water.
And then Yyrkoon came up behind Elric and he was still grinning. 'You fight fiercely and well, my lord emperor. That dead man was right.' 'Right?' Elric glared at his cousin. 'Right?'
'Aye--in his assessment of your prowess.' And, chuckling, Yyrkoon went to supervise his men who were finishing off the few remaining raiders. Elric did not know why he had refused to hate Yyrkoon before. But now he did hate Yyrkoon. At that moment he would gladly have slain him. It was as if Yyrkoon had looked deeply into Elric's soul and expressed contempt for what he had seen there.
Suddenly Elric was overwhelmed by an angry misery and he wished with all his heart that he was not a Melnibonean, that he was not an emperor and that Yyrkoon had never been born.
Chapter 6
Pursuit:
A Deliberate Treachery
LIKE HAUGHTY Leviathans the great golden battle-barges swam through the wreckage of the reaver fleet. A few ships burned and a few were still sinking, but most had sunk into the unplumbable depths of the channel. The burning ships sent strange shadows dancing against the dank walls of the sea-caverns, as if the ghosts of the slain offered a last salute before departing to the sea-depths where, it was said, a Chaos king still ruled, crewing his eerie fleets with the souls of all who died in conflict upon the oceans of the world. Or perhaps they went to a gentler doom, serving Straasha, Lord of the Water Elementals, who ruled the upper reaches of the sea.
But a few had escaped. Somehow the southland sailors had got past the massive battle-barges, sailed back through the channel and must even now have reached the open sea. This was reported to the flagship where Elric, Magum Colim and Prince Yyrkoon now stood together again on the bridge, surveying the destruction they had wreaked.
'Then we must pursue them and finish them, 'said Yyrkoon. He was sweating and his dark face glistened; his eyes were alight with fever. 'We must follow them.' Elric shrugged. He was weak. He had brought no extra drugs with him to replenish his strength. He wished to go back to Imrryr and rest. He was tired of bloodletting, tired of Yyrkoon and tired, most of all, of himself. The hatred he felt for his
cousin was draining him still further--and he hated the hatred; that was the worst part. 'No,' he said. 'Let them go.' 'Let them go? Unpunished? Come now, my lord king! That is not our way!' Prince Yyrkoon turned to the aging admiral. 'Is that our way, Admiral Magum Colim?' Magum Colim shrugged. He, too, was tired, but privately he agreed with Prince Yyrkoon. An enemy of Melnibone should be punished for daring even to think of attacking the Dreaming City. Yet he said: 'The emperor must decide.' 'Let them go,' said Elric again. He leant heavily against the rail. 'Let them carry the news back to their own barbarian land. Let them say how the Dragon Princes defeated them. The news will spread. I believe we shall not be troubled by raiders again for some time.'
'The Young Kingdoms are full of fools,' Yyrkoon replied. 'They will not believe the news. There will always be raiders. The best way to warn them will be to make sure that not one southlander remains alive or uncaptured.' Elric drew a deep breath and tried to fight the faintness which threatened to overwhelm him. 'Prince Yyrkoon, you are trying my patience...' 'But, my emperor, I think only of the good of Melnibone. Surely you do not want your people to say that you are weak, that you fear a fight with but five southland galleys?' This time Elric's anger brought him strength. 'Who will say that Elric is weak? Will it be you, Yyrkoon?' He knew that his next statement was senseless, but there was nothing he could do to stop it. 'Very well, let us pursue these poor little boats and sink them. And let us make haste. I am weary of it all.'
There was a mysterious light in Yyrkoon's eyes as he turned away to relay the orders. The sky was turning from black to grey when the Melnibonean fleet reached the open sea and turned its prows south towards the Boiling Sea and the southern continent beyond. The barbarian ships would not sail through the Boiling Sea--no mortal ship could do that, it was said--but would sail around it. Not that the barbarian ships would even reach the edges of the Boiling Sea, for the huge battle-barges were fast-sailing vessels. The slaves who pulled the oars were full of a drug which increased their speed and their strength for a score or so of hours, before it slew them. And now the sails billowed out, catching the breeze. Golden mountains, skimming rapidly over the sea, these ships; their method of construction was a secret lost even to the Melniboneans (who had forgotten so much of their lore). It was easy to imagine how men of the Young Kingdoms hated Melnibone and its inventions, for it did seem that the battle-barges belonged to an older, alien age, as they bore down upon the fleeing galleys now sighted on the horizon.
The Son of the Pyaray was in the lead of the rest of the fleet and was priming its catapults well before any of its fellows had seen the enemy. Perspiring slaves gingerly manhandled the viscous stuff of the fireballs, getting them into the bronze cups of the catapults by means of long, spoon-ended tongs. It flickered in the pre-dawn gloom.
Now slaves climbed the steps to the bridge and brought wine and food on platinum platters for the three Dragon Princes who had remained there since the pursuit had begun. Elric could not summon the strength to eat, but he seized a tall cup of yellow wine and drained it. The stuff was strong and revived him a trifle. He had another cup poured
and drank that as swiftly as the other. He peered ahead. It was almost dawn. There was a line of purple light on the horizon. 'At the first sign of the sun's disc,' Elric said, 'let loose the fireballs.' 'I will give the order,' said Magum Colim, wiping his lips and putting down the meat bone on which he had been chewing. He left the bridge. Elric heard his feet striking the steps heavily. All at once the albino felt surrounded by enemies. There had been something strange in Magum Colim's manner during the argument with Prince Yyrkoon. Elric tried to shake off such foolish thoughts. But the weariness, the self-doubt, the open mockery of his cousin, all succeeded in increasing the feeling that he was alone and without friends in the world. Even Cymoril and Dyvim Tvar were, finally, Melniboneans and could not understand the peculiar concerns which moved him and dictated his actions. Perhaps it would be wise to renounce everything Melnibonean and wander the world as an anonymous soldier of fortune, serving whoever needed his aid?
The dull red semicircle of the sun showed above the black line of the distant water. There came a series of booming sounds from the forward decks of the flagship as the catapults released their fiery shot; there was a whistling scream, fading away, and it seemed that a dozen meteors leapt through the sky, hurtling towards the five galleys which Were now little more than thirty ship-lengths away.
Elric saw two galleys flare, but the remaining three began to sail a zig-zag course and avoided the fireballs which landed on the water and burned fitfully for a while before sinking (still burning) into the depths. More fireballs were prepared and Elric heard Yyrkoon shout from the other side of the bridge, ordering the slaves to
greater exertions. Then the fleeing vessels changed their tactics, evidently realising that they could not save themselves for long, and, spreading out, sailed towards The Son of the Pyaray, just as the other ships had done in the sea-maze. It was not merely their courage that Elric admired but their manoeuvring skill and the speed at which they had arrived at this logical, if hopeless, decision.
The sun was behind the southland ships as they turned. Three brave silhouettes drew nearer to the Melnibonean flagship as scarlet stained the sea, as if in anticipation of the bloodletting to come. Another volley of fireballs was flung from the flagship and the leading galley tried to tack round and avoid it, but two of the fiery globes spattered directly on its deck and soon the whole ship was alive with flame. Burning men leapt into the water. Burning men shot arrows at the flagship. Burning men fell slowly from their Positions in the rigging. The burning men died, but the burning ship came on; someone had lashed the steering arm and directed the galley at The Son of the Pyaray. It crashed into the golden side of the battle-barge and some of the fire splashed on the deck where the main catapults were in position. A cauldron containing the fire-stuff caught and immediately men were running from all quarters of the ship to try to douse the flame. Elric grinned as he saw what the barbarians had done. Perhaps that ship had deliberately allowed itself to be fired. Now the majority of the flagship's complement was engaged with putting out the blaze--while the southland ships drew alongside, threw up their own grapples, and began to board.
'Ware boarders!' Elric shouted, long after he might have warned his crew. 'Barbarians attack.'
He saw Yyrkoon whirl round, see the situation, and rush down the steps from the bridge. 'You stay there, my lord king,' he flung at Elric as he disappeared. 'You are plainly too weary to fight.' And Elric summoned all that was left of his strength and stumbled after his cousin, to help in the defense of the ship. The barbarians were not fighting for their lives--they knew those to be taken already. They were fighting for their pride. They wanted to take one Melnibonean ship down with them and that ship must be the flagship itself. It was hard to be contemptuous of such men. They knew that even if they took the flagship the other ships of the golden fleet would soon overwhelm them.
But the other ships were still some distance away. Many lives would be lost before they reached the flagship. On the lowest deck Elric found himself facing a pair of tall barbarians, each armed with a curved blade and a small, oblong shield. He lunged forward, but his armour seemed to drag at his limbs, his own shield and sword were so heavy that he could barely lift them. Two swords struck his helm, almost simultaneously. He lunged back and caught a man in the arm, rammed the other with his shield. A curved blade clanged on his backplate and he all but lost his footing. There was choking smoke everywhere, and heat, and the tumult of battle. Desperately he swung about him and felt his broadsword bite deep into flesh. One of his opponents fell, gurgling, with blood spouting from his mouth and nose. The other lunged. Elric stepped backwards, fell over the corpse of the man he had slain, and went down, his broadsword held out before him in one hand. And as the triumphant barbarian leapt forward to finish the albino, Elric caught him on the point of the broadsword, running him
through. The dead man fell towards Elric who did not feel the impact, for he had already fainted. Not for the first time had his deficient blood, no longer enriched by drugs, betrayed him. He tasted salt and thought at first it was blood. But it was sea water. A wave had risen over the deck and momentarily revived him. He struggled to crawl from under the dead man and then he heard a voice he recognised. He twisted his head and looked up.
Prince Yyrkoon stood there. He was grinning. He was full of glee at Elric's plight. Black, oily smoke still drifted everywhere, but the sounds of the fight had died. 'Are--are we victorious, cousin?' Elric spoke painfully.
'Aye. The barbarians are all dead now. We are about to sail for Imrryr.' Elric was relieved. He would begin to die soon if he could not get to his store of potions. His relief must have been evident, for Yyrkoon laughed. 'It is as well the battle did not last longer, my lord, or we should have been without our leader.' 'Help me up, cousin.' Elric hated to ask Prince Yyrkoon any favour, but he had no choice. He stretched out his empty hand. 'I am fit enough to inspect the ship.' Yyrkoon came forward as if to take the hand, but then he hesitated, still grinning. 'But, my lord, I disagree. You will be dead by the time this ship turns eastward again.' 'Nonsense. Even without the drugs I can live for a considerable time, though movement is difficult. Help me
up, Yyrkoon, I command you.'
'You cannot command me, Elric. I am emperor now, you see.'
'Be wary, cousin. I can overlook such treachery, but others will not. I shall be forced to...' Yyrkoon swung his legs over Elric's body and went to the rail. Here were bolts which fixed one section of the rail in place when it was not used for the gangplank. Yyrkoon slowly released the bolts and kicked the section of rail into the water.
Now Elric's efforts to free himself became more desperate. But he could hardly move at all. Yyrkoon, on the other hand, seemed possessed of unnatural strength. He bent and easily flung the corpse away from Elric. 'Yyrkoon,' said Elric, 'this is unwise of you.'
'I was never a cautious man, cousin, as well as you know.' Yyrkoon placed a booted foot against Elric's ribs and began to shove. Elric slid towards the gap in the rail. He could see the black sea heaving below. 'Farewell, Elric. Now a true Melnibonean shall sit upon the Ruby Throne. And, who knows, might even make Cymoril his queen? It has not been unheard of...'
And Elric felt himself rolling, felt himself fall, felt himself strike the water, felt his armour pulling him below the surface. And Yyrkoon's last words drummed in Elric's ears like the persistent booming of the waves against the sides of the golden battle-barge.
BOOK TWO
Less certain of himself or his destiny than ever, the albino king must perforce bring his powers of sorcery into play, conscious that he has embarked upon a course of action by no means at one with his original conception of the way he wished to live his life. And now matters must be settled. He must begin to rule. He must become cruel. But even in this he will find himself thwarted.
Chapter 1 The Caverns of the Sea King
ELRIC SANK RAPIDLY, desperately trying to keep the last of his breath in his body. He had no strength to swim and the weight of the armour denied any hope of his rising to the surface and being sighted by Magum Colim or one of the others still loyal to him.
The roaring in his ears gradually faded to a whisper so that it sounded as if little voices were speaking to him, the voices of the water elementals with whom, in his youth, he had had a kind of friendship. And the pain in his lungs faded; the red
mist cleared from his eyes and he thought he saw the face of his father, Sadric, of Cymoril and, fleetingly, of Yyrkoon. Stupid Yyrkoon: for all that he prided himself that he was a Melnibonean, he lacked the Melnibonean subtlety. He was as brutal and direct as some of the Young Kingdom barbarians he so much despised. And now Elric began to feel almost grateful to his cousin. His life was over. The conflicts which tore his mind would no longer trouble him. His fears, his torments, his loves and his hatreds all lay in the past and only oblivion lay before him. As the last of his breath left his body, he gave himself wholly to the sea; to Straasha, Lord of all the Water Elementals, once the comrade of the Melnibonean folk. And as he did this he remembered the old spell which his ancestors had used to summon Straasha. The spell came unbidden into his dying brain.
Waters of the sea, thou gave us birth And were our milk and mother both In days when skies were overcast You who were first shall be the last. Sea-rulers, fathers of our blood,
Thine aid is sought, thine aid is sought, Your salt is blood, our blood your salt, Your blood the blood of Man. Straasha, eternal king, eternal sea Thine aid is sought by me; For enemies of thine and mine
Seek to defeat our destiny, and drain away our sea. Either the words had an old, symbolic meaning or they referred to some incident in Melnibonean history which even Elric had not read about. The words meant very little to him and yet they continued to repeat themselves as his body sank deeper and deeper into the green waters. Even when blackness overwhelmed him and his lungs filled with water, the words continued to whisper through the corridors of his brain. It was strange that he should be dead and still hear the incantation.
It seemed a long while later that his eyes opened and revealed swirling water and, through it, huge, indistinct figures gliding towards him. Death, it appeared, took a long time to come and, while he died, he dreamed. The leading figure had a turquoise beard and hair, pale green skin that seemed made of the sea itself and, when he spoke, a voice that was like a rushing tide. He smiled at Elric.
Straasha answers thy summons, mortal. Our destinies are bound together. How may I aid thee, and, in aiding thee, aid myself? Elric's mouth was filled with water and yet he still seemed capable of speech (thus proving he dreamed). He said:
'King Straasha. The paintings in the Tower of D'a'rputna--in the library. When I was a boy I saw them, King Straasha.' The sea-king stretched out his sea-green hands. 'Aye. You sent the summons. You need our aid. We honour our ancient pact with your folk.'
'No. I did not mean to summon you. The summons came unbidden to my dying mind. I am happy to drown, King Straasha.' 'That cannot be. If your mind summoned us it means you wish to live. We will aid you.' King Straasha's beard streamed in the tide and his deep, green eyes were gentle, almost tender, as they regarded the albino. Elric closed his own eyes again. 'I dream,' he said. 'I deceive myself with fantasies of hope.' He felt the water in his lungs and he knew he no longer breathed. It stood to reason, therefore, that he was dead. 'But if you were real, old friend, and you wished to aid me, you would return me to Melnibone so that I might deal with the usurper, Yyrkoon, and save Cymoril, before it is too late. That is my only regret- -the torment which Cymoril will suffer if her brother becomes Emperor of Melnibone.' 'Is that all you ask of the water elementals?' King Straasha seemed almost disappointed. 'I do not even ask that of you. I only voice what I would have wished, had this been reality and I was speaking, which I know is impossible. Now I shall die.' 'That cannot be, Lord Elric, for our destinies are truly intertwined and I know that it is not yet your destiny to perish. Therefore I will aid you as you have suggested.' Elric was surprised at the sharpness of detail of this fantasy. He said to himself. 'What a cruel torment I subject myself to. Now I must set about admitting my death...' 'You cannot die. Not yet.'
Now it was as if the sea-king's gentle hands had picked him up and bore him through twisting corridors of a delicate coral pink texture, slightly shadowed, no longer in water. And Elric felt the water vanish from his lungs and stomach and he breathed. Could it be that he had actually been brought to the legendary plane of the elemental folk--a plane which intersected that of the earth and in which they dwelled, for the most part?
In a huge, circular cavern, which shone with pink and blue mother-of-pearl, they came to rest at last. The sea-king laid Elric down upon the floor of the cavern, which seemed to be covered with fine, white sand which was yet not sand for it yielded and then sprang back when he moved.
When King Straasha moved, it was with a sound like the tide drawing itself back over shingle. The sea-king crossed the white sand, walking towards a large throne of milky jade. He seated himself upon this throne and placed his green head on his green fist, regarding Elric with puzzled, yet compassionate eyes.
Elric was still physically weak, but he could breathe. It was as if the sea water had filled him and then cleansed him when it was driven out. He felt clear-headed. And now he was much less sure that he dreamed. 'I still find it hard to know why you saved me, King Straasha,' he murmured from where he lay on the sand. 'The rune. We heard it on this plane and we came. That is all.' 'Aye. But there is more to sorcery-working than that. There are chants, symbols, rituals of all sorts. Previously that has always been true.'
'Perhaps the rituals take the place of urgent need of the kind which sent out your summons to us. Though you say you wished to die, it was evident you did not really want to die or the summoning would not have been so clear and have reached us so swiftly. Forget all this now. When you have rested, we shall do what you have requested of us.'
Painfully, Elric raised himself into a sitting position. 'You spoke earlier of "intertwined destinies". Do you, then, know something of my destiny?' 'A little, I think. Our world grows old. Once the elementals were powerful on your plane and the people of Melnibone all shared that power. But now our power wanes, as does yours. Something is changing. There are intimations that the Lords of the Higher Worlds are again taking an interest in your world. Perhaps they fear that the folk of the Young Kingdoms have forgotten them. Perhaps the folk of the Young Kingdoms threaten to bring in a new age, where gods and beings such as myself no longer shall have a place. I suspect there is a certain unease upon the planes of the Higher Worlds.'
'You know no more?'
King Straasha raised his head and looked directly into Elric's eyes. 'There is no more I can tell you, son of my old friends, save that you would be happier if you gave yourself up entirely to your destiny when you understand it.' Elric sighed. 'I think I know of what you speak, King Straasha. I shall try to follow your advice.' 'And now that you have rested, it is time to return.'
The sea-king rose from his throne of milky jade and flowed towards Elric, lifting him up in strong, green arms.
'We shall meet again before your life ends, Elric. I hope that I shall be able to aid you once more. And remember that our brothers of the air and of fire will try to aid you also. And remember the beasts--they, too, can be of service to you. There is no need to suspect their help. But beware of gods, Elric. Beware of the Lords of the Higher Worlds and remember that their aid and their gifts must always be paid for.'
These were the last words Elric heard the sea-king speak before they rushed again through the sinuous tunnels of this other plane, moving at such a speed that Elric could distinguish no details and, at times, did not know whether they remained in King Straasha's kingdom or had returned to the depths of his own world's sea.
Chapter 2
A New Emperor and an Emperor Renewed STRANGE CLOUDS FILLED the sky and the sun hung heavy and huge and red behind them and the ocean was black as the golden galleys swept homeward before their battered flagship The Son of the Pyaray which moved slowly with dead slaves at her oars and her tattered sails limp at their masts and smoke-begrimed men on her decks and a new emperor upon her war-wrecked bridge. The new emperor was the only jubilant man in the fleet and he was jubilant indeed. It was his banner now, not Elric's, which took pride of place on the flagmast, for he had lost no time in proclaiming Elric slain and himself ruler of Melnibone.
To Yyrkoon, the peculiar sky was an omen of change, of a return to the old ways and the old power of the Dragon Isle. When he issued orders, his voice was a veritable croon of pleasure, and Admiral Magum Colim, who had ever been wary of Elric but who now had to obey Yyrkoon's orders, wondered if, perhaps, it would not have been preferable to have dealt with Yyrkoon in the manner in which (he suspected) Yyrkoon had dealt with Elric.
Dyvim Tvar leaned on the rail of his own ship,
Terhali's Particular Satisfaction, and he also paid attention to the sky, though he saw omens of doom, for he mourned for Elric and considered how he might take vengeance on Prince Yyrkoon; should it emerge that Yyrkoon had murdered his cousin for possession of the Ruby Throne.
Melnibone appeared on the horizon, a brooding silhouette of crags, a dark monster squatting in the sea, calling her own back to the heated pleasures of her womb, the Dreaming City of Imrryr. The great cliffs loomed, the central gate to the sea-maze opened, water slapped and gasped as the golden prows disturbed it and the golden ships were swallowed into the murky dankness of the tunnels where bits of wreckage still floated from the previous night's encounter; where white, bloated corpses could still be Seen when the brandlight touch them. The prows nosed arrogantly through the remains of their prey, but there was no joy aboard the golden battle-barges, for they brought news of their old emperor's death in battle (Yyrkoon had told them what had happened). Next night and for seven nights in all the Wild Dance of Melnibone would fill the streets. Potions and petty spells would ensure that no one slept, for sleep was forbidden to any Melnibonean, old or young, while a dead emperor was mourned. Naked, the Dragon Princes would prowl the city, taking any young woman they found and filling her with their seed for it was traditional that if an emperor died then the nobles of Melnibone must create as many children of aristocratic blood as was possible. Music- slaves would howl from the top of every tower. Other slaves would be slain and some eaten. It was a dreadful dance, the Dance of Misery, and it took as many lives as it created. A tower would be pulled down and a new one erected during those seven days and the tower would be called for Elric VIII, the Albino Emperor, slain upon the sea, defending Melnibone against the southland pirates.
Slain upon the sea and his body taken by the waves. That was not a good portent, for it meant that Elric had gone to serve Pyaray, the Tentacled Whisperer of Impossible Secrets, the Chaos Lord who commanded the Chaos Fleet--dead ships, dead sailors, forever in his thrall--and it was not fitting that such a fate should befall one of the Royal Line of
Melnibone. Ah, but the mourning would be long, thought Dyvim Tvar. He had loved Elric, for all that he had sometimes disapproved of his methods of ruling the Dragon Isle. Secretly he would go to the Dragon Caves that night and spend the period of mourning with the sleeping dragons who, now that Elric was dead, were all he had left to love. And Dyvim Tvar then thought of Cymoril, awaiting Elric's return.
The ships began to emerge into the half-light of the evening. Torches and braziers already burned on the quays of Imrryr which were deserted save for a small group of figures who stood around a chariot which had been driven out to the end of the central mole. A cold wind blew. Dyvim Tvar knew that it was the Princess Cymoril who waited, with her guards, for the fleet.
Though the flagship was the last to pass through the maze, the rest of the ships had to wait until it could be towed into position and dock first. If this had not been the required tradition, Dyvim Tvar would have left his ship and gone to speak to Cymoril, escort her from the quay and tell her what he knew of the circumstances of Elric's death. But it was impossible. Even before Terhali's Particular Satisfaction had dropped anchor, the main gangplank of The Son of the Pyaray had been lowered and the Emperor Yyrkoon, all swaggering pride, had stepped down it, his arms raised in triumphant salute to his sister who could be seen, even now, searching the decks of the ships for a sign of her beloved albino.
Suddenly Cymoril knew that Elric was dead and she suspected that Yyrkoon had, in some way, been responsible for Elric's death. Either Yyrkoon had allowed Elric to be borne down by a group of southland reavers or else he had managed to slay Elric himself. She knew her brother and she
recognised his expression. He was pleased with himself as he always had been when successful in some form of treachery or another. Anger flashed in her tear-filled eyes and she threw back her head and shouted at the shifting, ominous sky:
'Oh! Yyrkoon has destroyed him!'
Her guards were startled. The captain spoke solicitously. 'Madam?' 'He is dead--and that brother slew him. Take Prince Yyrkoon, captain. Kill Prince Yyrkoon, captain.' Unhappily, the captain put his right hand on the hilt of his sword. A young warrior, more impetuous, drew his blade, murmuring: 'I will slay him, princess, if that is your desire.' The young warrior loved Cymoril with considerable and unthinking intensity.
The captain offered the warrior a cautionary glance, but the warrior was blind to it. Now two others slid swords from scabbards as Yyrkoon, a red cloak wound about him, his dragon crest catching the light from the brands guttering in the wind, stalked forward and cried:
'Yyrkoon is emperor now!'
'No!' shrieked Yyrkoon's sister. 'Elric! Elric! Where are you?'
'Serving his new master, Pyaray of Chaos. His dead hands pull at the sweep of a Chaos ship, sister. His dead eyes see nothing at all. His dead ears hear only the crack of Pyaray's whips and his dead flesh cringes, feeling nought but that unearthly scourge. Elric sank in his armour to the bottom of the sea.'
'Murderer! Traitor!' Cymoril began to sob.
The captain, who was a practical man, said to his warriors in a low voice: 'Sheath your weapons and salute your new emperor.' Only the young guardsman who loved Cymoril disobeyed. 'But he slew the emperor! My lady Cymoril said so!' 'What of it? He is emperor now. Kneel or you'll be dead within the minute.' The young warrior gave a wild shout and leapt towards Yyrkoon, who stepped back, trying to free his arms from the folds of his cloak. He had not expected this. But it was the captain who leapt forward, his own sword drawn; and hacked down the youngster so that he gasped, half-turned, then fell at Yyrkoon's feet. This demonstration of the captain's was confirmation of his real power and Yyrkoon almost smirked with satisfaction as he looked down at the corpse. The captain fell to one knee, the bloody sword still in his hand. 'My emperor,' he said. 'You show a proper loyalty, captain.' 'My loyalty is to the Ruby Throne.' 'Quite so.' Cymoril shook with grief and rage, but her rage was impotent. She knew now that she had no friends. Leering, the Emperor Yyrkoon presented himself before her. He reached out his hand and he caressed her neck, her
cheek, her mouth. He let his hand fall so that it grazed her breast. 'Sister,' he said, 'thou art mine entirely now.' And Cymoril was the second to fall at his feet, for she had fainted. 'Pick her up,' Yyrkoon said to the guard. 'Take her back to her own tower and there be sure she remains. Two guards will be with her at all times, in even her most private moments they must observe her, for she may plan treachery against the Ruby Throne.'
The captain bowed and signed to his men to obey the emperor. 'Aye, my lord. It shall be done.' Yyrkoon looked back at the corpse of the young warrior. 'And feed that to her slaves tonight, so that he can continue serving her.' He smiled. The captain smiled, too, appreciating the joke. He felt it was good to have a proper emperor in Melnibone again. An emperor who knew how to behave, who knew how to treat his enemies and who accepted unswerving loyalty as his right. The captain fancied that fine, martial times lay ahead for Melnibone. The golden battle-barges and the warriors of Imrryr could go a-spoiling again and instil in the barbarians of the Young Kingdoms a sweet and satisfactory sense of fear. Already, in his mind, the captain helped himself to the treasures of Lormyr, Argimiliar and Pikarayd, of Ilmiora and Jadmar. He might even be made governor, say, of the Isle of the Purple Towns. What luxuries of torment would he bring to those upstart sealords, particularly Count Smiorgan Baldhead who was even now beginning to try to make the isle a rival to Melnibone as a trading port. As he escorted the limp body of the Princess Cymoril back to her tower, the captain looked on that body and felt the swellings of lust
within him. Yyrkoon would reward his loyalty, there was no doubt of that. Despite the cold wind, the captain began to sweat in his anticipation. He, himself, would guard the Princess Cymoril. He would relish it. Marching at the head of his army, Yyrkoon strutted for the Tower of D'arputna, the Tower of Emperors, and the Ruby Throne within. He preferred to ignore the litter which had been brought for him and to go on foot, so that he might savour every small moment of his triumph. He approached the tower, tall among its fellows at the very centre of Imrryr, as he might approach a beloved woman. He approached it with a sense of delicacy and without haste, for he knew that it was his.
He looked about him. His army marched behind him. Magum Colim and Dyvim Tvar led the army. People lined the twisting streets and bowed low to him. Slaves prostrated themselves. Even the beasts of burden were made to kneel as he strode by. Yyrkoon could almost taste the power as one might taste a luscious fruit. He drew deep breaths of the air. Even the air was his. All Imrryr was his. All Melnibone, Soon would all the world be his. And he would squander it all. How he would squander it! Such a grand terror would he bring back to the earth; such a munificence of fear! In ecstasy, almost blindly, did the Emperor Yyrkoon enter the tower. He hesitated at the great doors of the throne room. He signed for the doors to be opened and as they opened he deliberately took in the scene tiny bit by tiny bit. The walls, the banners, the trophies, the galleries, all were his. The throne room was empty now, but soon he would fill it with colour and celebration and true, Melnibonean entertainments. It had been too long since blood had sweetened the air of this hall. Now he let his eyes linger upon the steps leading up to the Ruby Throne itself, but, before he looked at the throne, he heard Dyvim Tvar gasp behind him and his gaze went
suddenly to the Ruby Throne and his jaw slackened at what he saw. His eyes widened in incredulity. 'An illusion!'
'An apparition, ' said Dyvim Tvar with some satisfaction.
'Heresy!' cried the Emperor Yyrkoon, staggering forward, finger pointing at the robed and cowled figure which sat so still upon the Ruby Throne. 'Mine! Mine!' The figure made no reply.
'Mine! Begone! The throne belongs to Yyrkoon. Yyrkoon is emperor now! What are you? Why would you thwart me thus?' The cowl fell back and a bone-white face was revealed, surrounded by flowing, milk-white hair. Crimson eyes looked coolly down at the shrieking, stumbling thing which came towards them. 'You are dead, Elric! I know that you are dead!'
The apparition made no reply, but a thin smile touched the white lips. 'You could not have survived. You drowned. You cannot come back. Pyaray owns your soul!' 'There are others who rule in the sea, 'said the figure on the Ruby Throne. 'Why did you slay me, cousin?' Yyrkoon's guile had deserted him, making way for terror and confusion. 'Because it is my right to rule! Because you were not strong enough, nor cruel enough, nor humorous enough...'
'Is this not a good joke, cousin?'
'Begone! Begone! Begone! I shall not be ousted by a spectre! A dead emperor cannot rule Melnibone!' 'We shall see,' said Elric, signing to Dyvim Tvar and his soldiers.
Chapter 3
A Traditional Justice
'NOW INDEED I shall rule as you would have had me rule, cousin.' Elric watched as Dyvim Tvar's soldiers surrounded the would-be usurper and seized his arms, relieving him of his weapons. Yyrkoon panted like a captured wolf. He glared around him as if hoping to find support from the assembled warriors, but they stared back at him either neutrally or with open contempt. 'And you, Prince Yyrkoon, will be the first to benefit from this new rule of mine. Are you pleased?' Yyrkoon lowered his head. He was trembling now. Elric laughed, 'Speak up, cousin.' 'May Arioch and all the Dukes of Hell torment you for eternity,' growled Yyrkoon. He flung back his head, his wild eyes rolling, his lips curling: 'Arioch! Arioch! Curse this feeble albino! Arioch! Destroy him or see Melnibone fall!' Elric continued to laugh. 'Arioch does not hear you. Chaos is weak upon the earth now. It needs a greater sorcery than yours to bring the Chaos Lords back to aid you as they aided our ancestors. And now, Yyrkoon, tell me--where is the Lady Cymoril?'
But Yyrkoon had lapsed, again, into a sullen silence.
'She is at her own tower, my emperor,' said Magum Colim.
'A creature of Yyrkoon's took her there,' said Dyvim Tvar. 'The captain of Cymoril's own guard, he slew a warrior who tried to defend his mistress against Yyrkoon. It could be that Princess Cymoril is in danger, my lord.' 'Then go quickly to the tower. Take a force of men. Bring both Cymoril and the captain of her guard to me.' 'And Yyrkoon, my lord?' asked Dyvim Tvar. 'Let him remain here until his sister returns.' Dyvim Tvar bowed and, selecting a body of warriors, left the throne room. All noticed that Dyvim Tvar's step was lighter and his expression less grim than when he had first approached the throne room at Prince Yyrkoon's back. Yyrkoon straightened his head and looked about the court. For a moment he seemed like a pathetic and bewildered child. All the lines of hate and anger had disappeared and Elric felt sympathy for his cousin growing again within him. But this time Elric quelled the feeling.
'Be grateful, cousin, that for a few hours you were totally powerful, that you enjoyed domination over all the folk of Melnibone.' Yyrkoon said in a small, puzzled voice: 'How did you escape? You had no time for making a sorcery, no strength for it. You could barely move your limbs and your armour must have dragged you deep to the bottom of the sea so that you should have drowned. It is unfair, Elric. You should have drowned.'
Elric shrugged, 'I have friends in the sea. They recognise my royal blood and my right to rule if you do not.'
Yyrkoon tried to disguise the astonishment he felt. Evidently his respect for Elric had increased, as had his hatred for the albino emperor. 'Friends.' 'Aye,' said Elric with a thin grin.
'I--I thought, too, you had vowed not to use your powers of sorcery.' 'But you thought that a vow which was unbefitting for a Melnibonean monarch to make, did you not? Well, I agree with you. You see, Yyrkoon, you have won a victory, after all.' Yyrkoon stared narrowly at Elric, as if trying to divine a secret meaning behind Elric's words. 'You will bring back the Chaos Lords?' 'No sorcerer, however powerful, can summon the Chaos Lords or, for that matter, the Lords of Law, if they do not wish to be summoned. That you know. You must know it, Yyrkoon. Have you not, yourself, tried. And Arioch did not come, did he? Did he bring you the gift you sought--the gift of the two black swords?'
'You know that?'
'I did not. I guessed. Now I know.'
Yyrkoon tried to speak but his voice would not form words, so angry was he. Instead, a strangled growl escaped his throat and for a few moments he struggled in the grip of his guards. Dyvim Tvar returned with Cymoril. The girl was pale but she was smiling. She ran into the throne room. 'Elric!' 'Cymoril! Are you harmed?'
Cymoril glanced at the crestfallen captain of her guard who had been brought with her. A look of disgust crossed her fine face. Then she shook her head. 'No. I am not harmed.' The captain of Cymoril's guard was shaking with terror. He looked pleadingly at Yyrkoon as if hoping that his fellow prisoner could help him. But Yyrkoon continued to stare at the floor. 'Have that one brought closer.' Elric pointed at the captain of the guard. The man was dragged to the foot of the steps leading to the Ruby Throne. He moaned. 'What a petty traitor you are,' said Elric. 'At least Yyrkoon had the courage to attempt to slay me. And his ambitions were high. Your ambition was merely to become one of his pet curs. So you betrayed your mistress and slew one of your own men. What is your name?'
The man had difficulty speaking, but at last he murmured, 'It is Valharik, my name. What could I do? I serve the Ruby Throne, whoever sits upon it.' 'So the traitor claims that loyalty motivated him. I think not.'
'It was, my lord. It was.' The captain began to whine. He fell to his knees. 'Slay me swiftly. Do not punish me more.' Elric's impulse was to heed the man's request, but he looked at Yyrkoon and then remembered the expression on Cymoril's face when she had looked at the guard. He knew that he must make a point now, whilst making an example of Captain Valharik. So he shook his head. 'No. I will punish you more. Tonight you will die here according to the traditions of Melnibone, while my nobles feast to celebrate this new era of my rule.'
Valharik began to sob. Then he stopped himself and got slowly to his feet, a Melnibonean again. He bowed low and stepped backward, giving himself into the grip of his guards. 'I must consider a way in which your fate may be shared with the one you wished to serve,' Elric went on. 'How did you slay the young warrior who sought to obey Cymoril?' 'With my sword. I cut him down. It was a clean stroke. But one.' 'And what became of the corpse.'
'Prince Yyrkoon told me to feed it to Princess Cymoril's slaves.' 'I understand. Very well, Prince Yyrkoon, you may join us at the feast tonight while Captain Valharik entertains us with his dying.' Yyrkoon's face was almost as pale as Elric's. 'What do you mean?' 'The little pieces of Captain Valharik's flesh which our Doctor Jest will carve from his limbs will be the meat on which you feast. You may give instructions as to how you wish the captain's flesh prepared. We should not expect you to eat it raw, cousin.'
Even Dyvim Tvar looked astonished at Elric's decision. Certainly it was in the spirit of Melnibone and a clever irony improving on Prince Yyrkoon's own idea, but it was unlike Elric-- or, at least, it was unlike the Elric he had known up until a day earlier.
As he heard his fate, Captain Valharik gave a great scream of terror and glared at Prince Yyrkoon as if the would-be
usurper were already tasting his flesh. Yyrkoon tried to turn away, his shoulders shaking. 'And that will be the beginning of it,' said Elric. 'The feast will start at midnight. Until that time, confine Yyrkoon to his own tower.' After Prince Yyrkoon and Captain Valharik had been led away, Dyvim Tvar and Princess Cymoril came and stood beside Elric who had sunk back in his great throne and was staring bitterly into the middle-distance. 'That was a clever cruelty,' Dyvim Tvar said. Cymoril said: 'It is what they both deserve.' 'Aye,' murmured Elric. 'It is what my father would have done. It is what Yyrkoon would have done had our positions been reversed. I but follow the traditions. I no longer pretend that I am my own man. Here I shall stay until I die, trapped upon the Ruby Throne--serving the Ruby Throne as Valharik claimed to serve it,'
'Could you not kill them both quickly?' Cymoril asked. 'You know that I do not plead for my brother because he is my brother. I hate him most of all. But it might destroy you, Elric, to follow through with your plan.' 'What if it does? Let me be destroyed. Let me merely become an unthinking extension of my ancestors. The puppet of ghosts and memories, dancing to strings which extend back through time for ten thousand years.' 'Perhaps if you slept...' Dyvim Tvar suggested.
'I shall not sleep, I feel, for many nights after this. But your brother is not going to die, Cymoril. After his punishment-- after he has eaten the flesh of Captain Valharik--I intend to
send him into exile. He will go alone into the Young Kingdoms and he will not be allowed to take his grimoires with him. He must make his way as best he can in the lands of the barbarian. That is not too severe a punishment, I think.'
'It is too lenient,' said Cymoril. 'You would be best advised to slay him. Send soldiers now. Give him no time to consider counterplots.' 'I do not fear his counterplots.' Elric rose wearily. 'Now I should like it if you would both leave me, until an hour or so before the feasting begins. I must think.' 'I will return to my tower and prepare myself for tonight,' said Cymoril. She kissed Elric lightly upon his pale forehead. He looked up, filled with love and tenderness for her. He reached out and touched her hair and her cheek. 'Remember that I love you, Elric,' she said.
'I will see that you are safely escorted homeward,' Dyvim Tvar said to her. 'And you must choose a new commander of your guard. Can I assist in that?' 'I should be grateful, Dyvim Tvar.'
They left Elric still upon the Ruby Throne, still staring into space. The hand that he lifted from time to time to his pale head shook a little and now the torment showed in his strange, crimson eyes. Later, he rose up from the Ruby Throne and walked slowly, head bowed, to his own apartments, followed by his guards. He hesitated at the door which led onto the steps going up to the library. Instinctively he sought the consolation and forgetfulness of a certain kind of knowledge, but at that moment he suddenly hated his scrolls and his books. He
blamed them for his ridiculous concerns regarding 'morality' and 'justice'; he blamed them for the feelings of guilt and despair which now filled him as a result of his decision to behave as a Melnibonean monarch was expected to behave. So he passed the door to the library and went on to his apartments, but even his apartments displeased him now. They were austere. They were not furnished according to the luxurious tastes of all Melniboneans (save for his father) with their delight in lush mixtures of colour and bizarre design. He would have them changed as soon as possible. He would give himself up to those ghosts who ruled him. For some time he stalked from room to room, trying to push back that part of him which demanded he be merciful to Valharik and to Yyrkoon--at very least to slay them and be done with it or, better, to send them both into exile. But it was impossible to reverse his decision now.
At last he lowered himself to a couch which rested beside a window looking out over the whole of the city. The sky was still full of turbulent cloud, but now the moon shone through, like the yellow eye of an unhealthy beast. It seemed to stare with a certain triumphant irony at him, as if relishing the defeat of his conscience. Elric sank his head into his arms.
Later the servants came to tell him that the courtiers were assembling for the celebration feast. He allowed them to dress him in his yellow robes of state and to place the dragon crown upon his head and then he returned to the throne room to be greeted by a mighty cheer, more wholehearted than any he had ever received before. He acknowledged the greeting and then seated himself in the Ruby Throne, looking out over the banqueting tables which now filled the hall. A table was brought and set before him and two extra seats were brought, for Dyvim Tvar and Cymoril would sit beside him. But Dyvim Tvar and Cymoril
were not yet here and neither had the renegade Valharik been brought. And where was Yyrkoon? They should, even now, be at the centre of the hall--Valharik in chains and Yyrkoon seated beneath him. Doctor Jest was there, heating his brazier on which rested his cooking pans, testing and sharpening his knives. The hall was filled with excited talk as the court waited to be entertained. Already the food was being brought in, though no one might eat until the emperor ate first.
Elric signed to the commander of his own guard. 'Has the Princess Cymoril or Lord Dyvim Tvar arrived at the tower yet?' 'No, my lord.'
Cymoril was rarely late and Dyvim Tvar never. Elric frowned. Perhaps they did not relish the entertainment. 'And what of the prisoners?'
'They have been sent for, my lord.'
Doctor Jest looked up expectantly, his thin body tensed in anticipation. And then Elric heard a sound above the din of the conversation. A groaning sound which seemed to come from all around the tower. He bent his head and listened closely. Others were hearing it now. They stopped talking and also listened intently. Soon the whole hall was in silence and the groaning increased. Then, all at once, the doors of the throne room burst open and there was Dyvim Tvar, gasping and bloody, his clothes slashed and his flesh gashed. And following him in came a
mist--a swirling mist of dark purples and unpleasant blues and it was this mist that groaned. Elric sprang from his throne and knocked the table aside. He leapt down the steps towards his friend. The groaning mist began to creep further into the throne room, as if reaching out for Dyvim Tvar. Elric took his friend in his arms. 'Dyvim Tvar! What is this sorcery?' Dyvim Tvar's face was full of horror and his lips seemed frozen until at last he said: 'It is Yyrkoon's sorcery. He conjured the groaning mist to aid him in his escape. I tried to follow him from the city but the mist engulfed me and I lost my senses. I went to his tower to bring him and his accessory here, but the sorcery had already been accomplished.'
'Cymoril? Where is she?'
'He took her, Elric. She is with him. Valharik is with him and so are a hundred warriors who remained secretly loyal to him.' 'Then we must pursue him. We shall soon capture him.'
'You can do nothing against the groaning mist. Ah! It comes!' And sure enough the mist was beginning to surround them. Elric tried to disperse it by waving his arms, but then it had gathered thickly around him and its melancholy groaning filled his ears, its hideous colours blinded his eyes. He tried to rush through it, but it remained with him. And now he
thought he heard words amongst the groans. 'Elric is weak. Elric is foolish. Elric must die!' 'Stop this!' he cried. He bumped into another body and fell to his knees. He began to crawl, desperately trying to peer through the mist. Now faces formed in the mist--frightful faces, more terrifying than any he had ever seen, even in his worst nightmares.
'Cymoril!' he cried. 'Cymoril!'
And one of the faces became the face of Cymoril--a Cymoril who leered at him and mocked him and whose face slowly aged until he saw a filthy crone and, ultimately, a skull on which the flesh rotted. He closed his eyes, but the image remained.
'Cymoril,' whispered the voices. 'Cymoril,'
And Elric grew weaker as he became more desperate. He cried out for Dyvim Tvar, but heard only a mocking echo of the name, as he had heard Cymoril's. He shut his lips and he shut his eyes and, still crawling, tried to free himself from the groaning mist. But hours seemed to pass before the groans became whines and the whines became faint strands of sound and he tried to rise, opening his eyes to see the mist fading, but then his legs buckled and he fell down against the first step which led to the Ruby Throne. Again he had ignored Cymoril's advice concerning her brother--and again she was in danger. Elric's last thought was a simple one:
'I am not fit to live,' he thought.
Chapter 4
To Call the Chaos Lord
AS SOON AS he recovered from the blow which had knocked him unconscious and thus wasted even more time, Elric sent for Dyvim Tvar. He was eager for news. But Dyvim Tvar could report nothing. Yyrkoon had summoned sorcerous aid to free him, sorcerous aid to effect his escape. 'He must have had some magical means of leaving the island, for he could not have gone by ship,' said Dyvim Tvar.
'You must send out expeditions,' said Elric. 'Send a thousand detachments if you must. Send every man in Melnibone. Strive to wake the dragons that they might be used. Equip the golden battle-barges. Cover the world with our men if you must, but find Cymoril.'
'All those things I have already done,' said Dyvim Tvar, 'save that I have not yet found Cymoril.' A month passed and Imrryrian warriors marched and rode through the Young Kingdoms seeking news of their renegade countrymen. 'I worried more for myself than for Cymoril and I called that "morality",' thought the albino. 'I tested my sensibilities, not my conscience.' A second month passed and Imrryrian dragons sailed the skies to South and East, West and North, but though they flew across mountains, and seas, and forests and plains and, unwittingly, brought terror to many a city, they found no sign of Yyrkoon and his band.
'For, finally, one can only judge oneself by one's actions,' thought Elric. 'I have looked at what I have done, not at what I meant to do or thought I would like to do, and what I have done has, in the main, been foolish, destructive and with little point. Yyrkoon was right to despise me and that was why I hated him so.'
A fourth month came and Imrryrian ships stopped in remote ports and Imrryrian sailors questioned other travelers and explorers for news of Yyrkoon. But Yyrkoon's sorcery had been strong and none had seen him (or remembered seeing him).
'I must now consider the implications of all these thoughts,' said Elric to himself. Wearily, the swiftest of the soldiers began to return to Melnibone, bearing their useless news. And as faith disappeared and hope faded, Elric's determination increased. He made himself strong, both physically and mentally. He experimented with new drugs which would increase his energy rather than replenish the energy he did not share with other men. He read much in the library, though this time he read only certain grimoires and he read those over and over again.
These grimoires were written in the High Speech of Melnibone--the ancient language of sorcery with which Elric's ancestors had been able to communicate with the supernatural beings they had summoned. And at last Elric was satisfied that he understood them fully, though what he read sometimes threatened to stop him in his present course of action.
And when he was satisfied--for the dangers of misunderstanding the implications of the things described
in the grimoires were catastrophic--he slept for three nights in a drugged slumber. And then Elric was ready. He ordered all slaves and servants from his quarters. He placed guards at the doors with instructions to admit no one, no matter how urgent their business. He cleared one great chamber of all furniture so that it was completely empty save for one grimoire which he had placed in the very centre of the room. Then he seated himself beside the book and began to think.
When he had meditated for more than five hours Elric took a brush and a jar of ink and began to paint both walls and floor with complicated symbols, some of which were so intricate, that they seemed to disappear at an angle to the surface on which they had been laid. At last this was done and Elric spreadeagled himself in the very centre of his huge rune, face down, one hand upon his grimoire, the other (with the Actorios upon it) stretched palm down. The moon was full. A shaft of its light fell directly upon Elric's head, turning the hair to silver. And then the Summoning began.
Elric sent his mind into twisting tunnels of logic, across endless plains of ideas, through mountains of symbolism and endless universes of alternate truths; he sent his mind out further and further and as it went he sent with it the words which issued from his writhing lips--words that few of his contemporaries would understand, though their very sound would chill the blood of any listener. And his body heaved as he forced it to remain in its original position and from time to time a groan would escape him. And through all this a few words came again and again.
One of these words was a name. 'Arioch'.
Arioch, the patron demon of Elric's ancestors; one of the most powerful of all the Dukes of Hell, who was called Knight of the Swords, Lord of the Seven Darks, Lord of the Higher Hell and many more names besides. 'Arioch!'
It was on Arioch whom Yyrkoon had called, asking the Lord of Chaos to curse Elric. It was Arioch whom Yyrkoon had sought to summon to aid him in his attempt upon the Ruby Throne. It was Arioch who was known as the Keeper of the Two Black Swords--the swords of unearthly manufacture and infinite power which had once been wielded by emperors of Melnibone.
'Arioch! I summon thee.'
Runes, both rhythmic and fragmented, howled now from Elric's throat. His brain had reached the plane on which Arioch dwelt. Now it sought Arioch himself. 'Arioch! It is Elric of Melnibone who summons thee.'
Elric glimpsed an eye staring down at him. The eye floated, joined another. The two eyes regarded him. 'Arioch! My Lord of Chaos! Aid me!' The eyes blinked--and vanished. 'Oh, Arioch! Come to me! Come to me! Aid me and I will serve you!' A silhouette that was not a human form, turned slowly until a black, faceless head looked down upon Elric. A halo of red light gleamed behind the head.
Then that, too, vanished.
Exhausted, Elric let the image fade. His mind raced back through plane upon plane. His lips no longer chanted the runes and the names. He lay exhausted upon the floor of his chamber, unable to move, in silence. He was certain that he had failed.
There was a small sound. Painfully he raised his weary head.
A fly had come into the chamber. It buzzed about erratically, seeming almost to follow the lines of the runes Elric had so recently painted. The fly settled first upon one rune and then on another.
It must have come in through the window, thought Elric. He was annoyed by the distraction but still fascinated by it. The fly settled on Elric's forehead. It was a large, black fly and its buzz was loud, obscene. It rubbed its forelegs together, and it seemed to be taking a particular interest in Elric's face as it moved over it. Elric shuddered, but he did not have the strength to swat it. When it came into his field of vision, he watched it. When it was not visible he felt its legs covering every inch of his face. Then it flew up and, still buzzing loudly, hovered a short distance from Elric's nose. And then Elric could see the fly's eyes and recognise something in them. They were the eyes--and yet not the eyes--he had seen on that other plane.
It began to dawn on him that this fly was no ordinary creature. It had features that were in some way faintly human. The fly smiled at him.
From his hoarse throat and through his parched lips Elric was able to utter but one word.: 'Arioch?' And a beautiful youth stood where the fly had hovered. The beautiful youth spoke in a beautiful voice--soft and sympathetic and yet manly. He was clad in a robe that was like a liquid jewel and yet which did not dazzle Elric, for in some way no light seemed to come from it. There was a slender sword at the youth's belt and he wore no helm, but a circlet of red fire. His eyes were wise and his eyes were old and when they were looked at closely they could be seen to contain an ancient and confident evil.
'Elric.'
That was all the youth said, but it revived the albino so that he could raise himself to his knees. 'Elric.'
And Elric could stand. He was filled with energy.
The youth was taller, now, than Elric. He looked down at the Emperor of Melnibone and he smiled the smile that the fly had smiled. 'You alone are fit to serve Arioch. It is long since I was invited to this plane, but now that I am here I shall aid you, Elric. I shall become your patron. I shall protect you and give you strength and the source of strength, though master I be and slave you be.'
'How must I serve you, Duke Arioch?' Elric asked, having made a monstrous effort of self-control, for he was filled with terror by the implications of Arioch's words. 'You will serve me by serving yourself for the moment. Later a time will come when I shall call upon you to serve me in
specific ways, but (for the moment) I ask little of you, save that you swear to serve me.' Elric hesitated.
'You must swear that,' said Arioch reasonably, 'or I cannot help you in the matter of your cousin Yyrkoon or his sister Cymoril.' 'I swear to serve you,' said Elric. And his body was flooded with ecstatic fire and he trembled with joy and he fell to his knees. 'Then I can tell you that, from time to time, you can call on my aid and I will come if your need is truly desperate. I will come in whichever form is appropriate, or no form at all if that should prove appropriate. And now you may ask me one question before I depart.'
'I need the answers to two questions.'
'Your first question I cannot answer. I will not answer. You must accept that you have now sworn to serve me. I will not tell you what the future holds. But you need not fear, if you serve me well.' 'Then my second question is this: Where is Prince Yyrkoon.'
'Prince Yyrkoon is in the south, in a land of barbarians. By sorcery and by superior weapons and intelligence he has effected the conquest of two mean nations, one of which is called Oin and the other of which is called Yu. Even now he trains the men of Oin and the men of Yu to march upon Melnibone, for he knows that your forces are spread thinly across the earth, searching for him.'
'How has he hidden?'
'He has not. But he has gained possession of the Mirror of Memory--a magical device whose hiding place he discovered by his sorceries. Those who look into this mirror have their memories taken. The mirror contains a million memories: the memories of all who have looked into it. Thus anyone who ventures into Oin or Yu or travels by sea to the capital which serves both is confronted by the mirror and forgets that he has seen Prince Yyrkoon and his Imrryrians in those lands. It is the best way of remaining undiscovered.'
'It is.' Elric drew his brows together. 'Therefore it might be wise to consider destroying the mirror. But what would happen then, I wonder?' Arioch raised his beautiful hand. 'Although I have answered further questions which are, one could argue, part of the same question, I will answer no more. It could be in your interest to destroy the mirror, but it might be better to consider other means of countering its effects, for it does, I remind you, contain many memories, some of which have been imprisoned for thousands of years. Now I must go. And you must go--to the lands of Oin and Yu which lie several months' journey from here, to the south and well beyond Lormyr. They are best reached by the Ship Which Sails Over Both Land and Sea. Farewell, Elric.'
And a fly buzzed for a moment upon the wall before vanishing. Elric rushed from the room, shouting for his slaves.
Chapter 5
The Ship Which Sails Over Land and Sea 'AND HOW MANY dragons still sleep in the caverns?' Elric paced the gallery overlooking the city. It was morning, but no sun came through the dull clouds which hung low upon the towers of the Dreaming City. Imrryr's life continued unchanged in the streets below, save for the absence of the majority of her soldiers who had not yet returned home from their fruitless quests and would not be home for many months to come.
Dyvim Tvar leaned on the parapet of the gallery and stared unseeingly into the streets. His face was tired and his arms were folded on his chest as if he sought to contain what was left of his strength. 'Two perhaps. It would take a great deal to wake them and even then I doubt if they'd be useful to us. What is this "Ship Which Sails Over Land and Sea" which Arioch spoke of?' 'I've read of it before--in the Silver Grimoire and in other tomes. A magic ship. Used by a Melnibonean hero even before there was Melnibone and the empire. But where it exists, and if it exists, I do not know.' 'Who would know?' Dyvim Tvar straightened his back and turned it on the scene below. 'Arioch?' Elric shrugged. 'But he would not tell me.'
'What of your friends the Water Elementals. Have they not promised you aid? And would they not be knowledgeable in
the matter of ships?'
Elric frowned, deepening the lines which now marked his face. 'Aye--Straasha might know. But I'm loath to call on his aid again. The Water Elementals are not the powerful creatures that the Lords of Chaos are. Their strength is limited and, moreover, they are inclined to be capricious, in the manner of the elements. What is more, Dyvim Tvar, I hesitate to use sorcery, save where absolutely imperative...'
'You are a sorcerer, Elric. You have but lately proved your greatness in that respect, involving the most powerful of all sorceries, the summoning of a Chaos Lord--and you still hold back? I would suggest, my lord king, that you consider such logic and that you judge it unsound. You decided to use sorcery in your pursuit of Prince Yyrkoon. The die is already cast. It would be wise to use sorcery now.'
'You cannot conceive of the mental and physical effort involved...' 'I can conceive of it, my lord. I am your friend. I do not wish to see you pained--and yet...' 'There is also the difficulty, Dyvim Tvar, of my physical weakness,' Elric reminded his friend. 'How long can I continue in the use of these overstrong potions that now sustain me? They supply me with energy, aye--but they do so by using up my few resources. I might die before I find Cymoril.'
'I stand rebuked.'
But Elric came forward and put his white hand on Dyvim Tvar's butter-coloured cloak. 'But what have I to lose, eh? No. You are right. I am a coward to hesitate when Cymoril's life is at stake. I repeat my stupidities--the stupidities which
first brought this pass upon us all. I'll do it. Will you come with me to the ocean?' 'Aye.'
Dyvim Tvar began to feel the burden of Elric's conscience settling upon him also. It was a peculiar feeling to come to a Melnibonean and Dyvim Tvar knew very well that he liked it not at all. Elric had last ridden these paths when he and Cymoril were happy. It seemed a long age ago. He had been a fool to trust that happiness. He turned his white stallion's head towards the cliffs and the sea beyond them. A light rain fell. Winter was descending swiftly on Melnibone.
They left their horses on the cliffs, lest they be disturbed by Elric's sorcery-working, and clambered down to the shore. The rain fell into the sea. A mist hung over the water little more than five ship lengths from the beach. It was deathly still and, with the tall, dark cliffs behind them and the wall of mist before them, it seemed to Dyvim Tvar that they had entered a silent netherworld where might easily be encountered the melancholy souls of those who, in legend, had committed suicide by a process of slow self-mutilation. The sound of the two men's boots on shingle was loud and yet was at once muffled by the mist which seemed to suck at noise and swallow it greedily as if it sustained its life on sound.
'Now,' Elric murmured. He seemed not to notice the brooding and depressive surroundings. 'Now I must recall the rune which came so easily, unsummoned, to my brain not many months since.' He left Dyvim Tvar's side and went down to the place where the chill water lapped the land and
there, carefully, he seated himself, cross-legged. His eyes stared, unseeingly, into the mist. To Dyvim Tvar the tall albino appeared to shrink as he sat down. He seemed to become like a vulnerable child and Dyvim Tvar's heart went out to Elric as it might go out to a brave, nervous boy, and Dyvim Tvar had it in mind to suggest that the sorcery be done with and they seek the lands of Oin and Yu by ordinary means.
But Elric was already lifting his head as a dog lifts its head to the moon. And strange, thrilling words began to tumble from his lips and it became plain that, even if Dyvim Tvar did speak now, Elric would not hear him. Dyvim Tvar was no stranger to the High Speech--as a Melnibonean noble he had been taught it as a matter of course--but the words seemed nonetheless strange to him, for Elric used peculiar inflections and emphases, giving the words a special and secret weight and chanting them in a voice which ranged from bass groan to falsetto shriek. It was not pleasant to listen to such noises coming from a mortal throat and now Dyvim Tvar had some clear understanding of why Elric was reluctant to use sorcery. The Lord of the Dragon Caves, Melnibonean though he was, found himself inclined to step backward a pace or two, even to retire to the cliff-tops and watch over Elric from there, and he had to force himself to hold his ground as the summoning continued.
For a good space of time the rune-chanting went on. The rain beat harder upon the pebbles of the shore and made them glisten. It dashed most ferociously into the still, dark sea, lashed about the fragile head of the chanting, pale- haired figure, and caused Dyvim Tvar to shiver and draw his cloak more closely about his shoulders.
'Straasha--Straasha--Straasha...'
The words mingled with the sound of the rain. They were now barely words at all but sounds which the wind might make or a language which the sea might speak. 'Straasha . . .'
Again Dyvim Tvar had the impulse to move, but this time he desired to go to Elric and tell him to stop, to consider some other means of reaching the lands of Oin and Yu. 'Straasha!'
There was a cryptic agony in the shout. 'Straasha! ' Elric's name formed on Dyvim Tvar's lips, but he found that he could not speak it. 'Straasha!'
The cross-legged figure swayed. The word became the calling of the wind through the Caverns of Time. 'Straasha!'
It was plain to Dyvim Tvar that the rune was, for some reason, not working and that Elric was using up all his strength to no effect. And yet there was nothing the Lord of the Dragon Caves could do. His tongue was frozen. His feet seemed frozen. His feet seemed frozen to the ground.
He looked at the mist. Had it crept closer to the shore? Had it taken on a strange, almost luminous, green tinge? He peered closely.
There was a massive disturbance of the water. The sea rushed up the beach. The shingle crackled. The mist retreated. Vague lights flickered in the air and Dyvim Tvar thought he saw the shining silhouette of a gigantic figure emerging from the sea and he realised that Elric's chant had ceased.
'King Straasha,' Elric was saying in something approaching his normal tone. 'You have come. I thank you.' The silhouette spoke and the voice reminded Dyvim Tvar of slow, heavy waves rolling beneath a friendly sun. 'We elementals are concerned, Elric, for there are rumours that you have invited Chaos Lords back to your plane and the elementals have never loved the Lords of Chaos. Yet I know that if you have done this it is because you are fated to do it and therefore we hold no enmity against you.'
'The decision was forced upon me, King Straasha. There was no other decision I could make. If you are therefore reluctant to aid me, I shall understand that and call on you no more.' 'I will help you, though helping you is harder now, not for what happens in the immediate future but what is hinted will happen in years to come. Now you must tell me quickly how we of the water can be of service to you.' 'Do you know ought of the Ship Which Sails Over Land and Sea? I need to find that ship if I am to fulfil my vow to find my love, Cymoril.' 'I know much of that ship, for it is mine. Grome also lays claim to it. But it is mine. Fairly, it is mine.' 'Grome of the Earth?'
'Grome of the Land Below the Roots. Grome of the Ground and all that lives, under it. My brother. Grome. Long since, even as we elementals count time, Grome and I built that ship so that we could travel between the realms of Earth and Water whenever we chose. But we quarrelled (may we be cursed for such foolishness) and we fought. There were earthquakes, tidal waves, volcanic eruptions, typhoons and battles in which all the elementals joined, with the result that new continents were flung up and old ones drowned. It was not the first time we had fought each other, but it was the last. And finally, lest we destroy each other completely, we made a peace. I gave Grome part of my domain and he gave me the Ship Which Sails Over Land and Sea. But he gave it somewhat unwillingly and thus it sails the sea better than it sails the land, for Grome thwarts its progress whenever he can. Still, if the ship is of use to you, you shall have it.'
'I thank you, King Straasha. Where shall I find it?'
'It will come. And now I grow weary, for the further from my own realm I venture, the harder it is to sustain my mortal form. Farewell, Elric--and be cautious. You have a greater power than you know and many would make use of it to their own ends,'
'Shall I wait here for the Ship Which Sails Over Land and sea?' 'No...' the Sea King's voice was fading as his form faded. Grey mist drifted back where the silhouette and the green lights had been. The sea again was still. 'Wait. Wait in your tower... It will come...' A few wavelets lapped the shore and then it was as if the king of the Water Elementals had never been there at all.
Dyvim Tvar rubbed his eyes. Slowly at first he began to move to where Elric still sat. Gently he bent down and offered the albino his hand. Elric looked up in some surprise. 'Ah, Dyvim Tvar. How much time has passed?' 'Some hours, Elric. It will soon be night. What little light there is begins to wane. We had best ride back for Imrryr.' Stiffly Elric rose to his feet, with Dyvim Tvar's assistance. 'Aye...' he murmured absently. 'The Sea King said...' 'I heard the Sea King, Elric. I heard his advice and I heard his warning. You must remember to heed both. I like too little the sound of this magic boat. Like most things of sorcerous origin, the ship appears to have vices as well as virtues, like a double-bladed knife which you raise to stab your enemy and which, instead, stabs you...'
'That must be expected where sorcery is concerned. It was you who urged me on, my friend.' 'Aye,' said Dyvim Tvar almost to himself as he led the way up the cliff-path towards the horses. 'Aye. I have not forgotten that, my lord king.' Elric smiled wanly and touched Dyvim Tvar's arm. 'Worry not. The summoning is over and now we have the vessel we need to take us swiftly to Prince Yyrkoon and the lands of Oin and Yu.' 'Let us hope so.' Dyvim Tvar was privately sceptical about the benefits they would gain from the Ship Which Sails Over Land and Sea. They reached the horses and he began to wipe the water off the flanks of his own roan. 'I regret,' he said, 'that we have once again allowed the dragons to expend their energy on a useless endeavour. With a squadron of my beasts, we could do much against Prince
Yyrkoon. And it would be fine and wild, my friend, to ride the skies again, side by side, as we used to.' 'When all this is done and Princess Cymoril brought home, we shall do that,' said Elric, hauling himself wearily into the saddle of his white stallion. 'You shall blow the Dragon Horn and our dragon brothers will hear it and you and I shall sing the Song of the Dragon Masters and our goads shall flash as we straddle Flamefang and his mate Sweetclaw. Ah, that will be like the days of old Melnibone, when we no longer equate freedom with power, but let the Young Kingdoms go their own way and be certain that they let us go ours!'
Dyvim Tvar pulled on his horse's reins. His brow was clouded. 'Let us pray that day will come, my lord. But I cannot help this nagging thought which tells me that Imrryr's days are numbered and that my own life nears its close...'
'Nonsense, Dyvim Tvar. You'll survive me. There's little doubt of that, though you be my elder.' Dyvim Tvar said, as they galloped back through the closing day: 'I have two sons. Did you know that, Elric?' 'You have never mentioned them.' 'They are by old mistresses.' 'I am happy for you.'
'They are fine Melniboneans.'
'Why do you mention this, Dyvim Tvar?' Elric tried to read his friend's expression.
'It is that I love them and would have them enjoy the pleasures of the Dragon Isle.' 'And why should they not?'
'I do not know.' Dyvim Tvar looked hard at Elric. 'I could suggest that it is your responsibility, the fate of my sons, Elric.' 'Mine?'
'It seems to me, from what I gathered from the Water Elemental's words, that your decisions could decide the fate of the Dragon Isle. I ask you to remember my sons, Elric.' 'I shall, Dyvim Tvar. I am certain they shall grow into superb Dragon Masters and that one of them shall succeed you as Lord of the Dragon Caves.' 'I think you miss my meaning, my lord emperor.'
And Elric looked solemnly at his friend and shook his head. 'I do not miss your meaning, old friend. But I think you judge me harshly if you fear I'll do ought to threaten Melnibone and all she is.' 'Forgive me, then.' Dyvim Tvar lowered his head. But the expression in his eyes did not change. In Imrryr they changed their clothes and drank hot wine and had spiced food brought. Elric, for all his weariness, was in better spirits than he had been for many a month. And yet there was still a tinge of something behind his surface mood which suggested he encouraged himself to speak gaily and put vitality into his movements. Admittedly, thought Dyvim Tvar, the prospects had improved and soon they would be confronting Prince Yyrkoon. But the dangers ahead of them
were unknown, the pitfalls probably considerable. Still, he did not, out of sympathy for his friend, want to dispel Elric's mood. He was glad, in fact, that Elric seemed in a more positive frame of mind. There was talk of the equipment they would need in their expedition to the mysterious lands of Yu and Oin, speculation concerning the capacity of the Ship Which Sails Over Land and Sea--how many men it would take, what provisions they should put aboard and so on.
When Elric went to his bed, he did not walk with the dragging tiredness which had previously accompanied his step and again, bidding him goodnight, Dyvim Tvar was struck by the same emotion which had filled him on the beach, watching Elric begin his rune. Perhaps it was not by chance that he had used the example of his sons when speaking to Elric earlier that day, for he had a feeling that was almost protective, as if Elric were a boy looking forward to some treat which might not bring him the joy he expected.
Dyvim Tvar dismissed the thoughts, as best he could, and went to his own bed. Elric might blame himself for all that had occurred in the question of Yyrkoon and Cymoril, but Dyvim Tvar wondered if he, too, were not to blame in some part. Perhaps he should have offered his advice more cogently--more vehemently, even--earlier and made a stronger attempt to influence the young emperor. And then, in the Melnibonean manner, he dismissed such doubts and questions as pointless. There was only one rule--seek pleasure however you would. But had that always been the Melnibonean way? Dyvim Tvar wondered suddenly if Elric might not have regressive rather than deficient blood. Could Elric be a reincarnation of one of their most distant ancestors? Had it always been in the Melnibonean character to think only of oneself and one's own gratification?
And again Dyvim Tvar dismissed the questions. What use was there in questions, after all? The world was the world. A man was a man. Before he sought his own bed he went to visit both his old mistresses, waking them up and insisting that he see his sons, Dyvim Slorm and Dyvim Mav and when his sons, sleepy-eyed, bewildered, had been brought to him, he stared at them for a long while before sending them back. He had said nothing to either, but he had brought his brows together frequently and rubbed at his face and shaken his head and, when they had gone, had said to Niopal and Saramal, his mistresses, who were as bewildered as their offspring, 'Let them be taken to the Dragon Caves tomorrow and begin their learning.'
'So soon, Dyvim Tvar?' said Niopal. 'Aye. There's little time left, I fear.' He would not amplify on this remark because he could not. It was merely a feeling he had. But it was a feeling that was growing almost to the point where it was becoming an obsession with him. In the morning Dyvim Tvar returned to Elric's tower and found the emperor pacing the gallery above the city, asking eagerly for any news of a ship sighted off the coast of the island. But no such ship had been seen. Servants answered earnestly that if their emperor could describe the ship, it would be easier for them to know for what to look, but he could not describe the ship, and could only hint that it might not be seen on water at all, but might appear on land. He was all dressed up in his black war gear and it was plain to Dyvim Tvar that Elric was indulging in even larger quantities of the potions which replenished his blood. The crimson eyes gleamed with a hot vitality, the speech was rapid and the
bone-white hands moved with unnatural speed when Elric made even the lightest gesture. 'Are you well this morning, my lord?' asked the Dragon Master. 'In excellent spirits, thank you, Dyvim Tvar.' Elric grinned. 'Though I'd feel even better if the Ship Which Sails Over Land and Sea were here now.' He went to the balustrade and leaned upon it, peering over the towers and beyond the city walls, looking first to the sea and then to the land. 'Where can it be? I wish that King Straasha had been able to be more specific.'
'I'll agree with that.' Dyvim Tvar, who had not breakfasted, helped himself from the variety of succulent foods laid upon the table. It was evident that Elric had eaten nothing. Dyvim Tvar began to wonder if the volume of potions had not affected his old friend's brain; perhaps madness, brought about by his involvement with complicated sorcery, his anxiety for Cymoril, his hatred of Yyrkoon, had begun to overwhelm Elric.
'Would it not be better to rest and to wait until the ship is sighted?' he suggested quietly as he wiped his lips. 'Aye--there's reason in that,' Elric agreed. 'But I cannot. I have an urge to be off, Dyvim Tvar, to come face to face with Yyrkoon, to have my revenge on him, to be united with Cymoril again.' 'I understand that. Yet, still...'
Elric's laugh was loud and ragged. 'You fret like Tanglebones over my well-being. I do not need two nursemaids, Lord of the Dragon Caves.'
With an effort Dyvim Tvar smiled. 'You are right. Well, I pray that this magical vessel--what is that?' He pointed out across the island. 'A movement in yonder forest. As if the wind passes through it. But there is no sign of wind elsewhere.' Elric followed his gaze. 'You are right. I wonder...'
And then they saw something emerge from the forest and the land itself seemed to ripple. It was something which glinted white and blue and black. It came closer. 'A sail,' said Dyvim Tvar. 'It is your ship, I think, my lord.'
'Aye,' Elric whispered, craning forward. 'My ship. Make yourself ready, Dyvim Tvar. By midday we shall be gone from Imrryr.'
Chapter 6
What the Earth God Desired
THE SHIP WAS tall and slender and she was delicate. Her rails, masts and bulwarks were exquisitely carved and obviously not the work of a mortal craftsman. Though built of wood, the wood was not painted but naturally shone blue and black and green and a kind of deep smoky red, and her rigging was the colour of sea-weed and there were veins in the planks of her polished deck, like the roots of trees, and the sails on her three tapering masts were as fat and white and light as clouds on a fine summer day. The ship was everything that was lovely in nature; few could look upon her and not feel delighted, as they might be delighted upon sighting a perfect view. In a word, the ship radiated harmony, and Elric could think of no finer vessel in which to sail against Prince Yyrkoon and the dangers of the lands of Oin and Yu.
The ship sailed gently in the ground as if upon the surface of a river and the earth beneath the keel rippled as if turned momentarily to water. Wherever the keel of the ship touched, and a few feet around it, this effect became evident, though, after the ship had passed, the ground would return to its usual stable state. This was why the trees of the forest had swayed as the ship passed through them, parting before the keel as the ship sailed towards Imrryr.
The Ship Which Sails Over Land and Sea was not particularly large. Certainly she was considerably smaller than a Melnibonean battle-barge and only a little bigger than a southern galley. But the grace of her; the curve of her line; the pride of her bearing--in these, she had no rival at all.
Already her gangplanks had been lowered down to the ground and she was being made ready for her journey. Elric, hands on his slim hips, stood looking up at King Straasha's gift. From the gates of the city wall slaves were bearing provisions and arms and carrying them up the gangways. Meanwhile Dyvim Tvar was assembling the Imrryrian warriors and assigning them their ranks and duties while on the expedition. There were not many warriors. Only half the available strength could come with the ship, for the other half must remain behind under the command of Admiral Magum Colim and protect the city. It was unlikely that there would be any large attack on Melnibone after the punishment meted out to the barbarian fleet, but it was wise to take precautions, particularly since Prince Yyrkoon had vowed to conquer Imrryr. Also, for some strange reason that none of the onlookers could divine, Dyvim Tvar had called for volunteers--veterans who shared a common disability-- and made up a special detachment of these men who, so the onlookers thought, could be of no use at all on the expedition. Still, neither were they of use when it came to defending the city, so they might as well go. These veterans were led aboard first.
Last to climb the gangway was Elric himself. He walked slowly, heavily, a proud figure in his black armour, until he reached the deck. Then he turned, saluted his city, and ordered the gangplank raised. Dyvim Tvar was waiting for him on the poop-deck. The Lord of the Dragon Caves had stripped off one of his gauntlets and was running his naked hand over the oddly coloured wood of the rail. 'This is not a ship made for war, Elric,' he said. 'I should not like to see it harmed.'
'How can it be harmed?' Elric asked lightly as Imrryian's began to climb the rigging and adjust the sails. 'Would
Straasha let it be destroyed? Would Grome? Fear not for the Ship Which Sails Over Land and Sea, Dyvim Tvar. Fear only for our own safety and the success of our expedition. Now, let us consult the charts. Remembering Straasha's warning concerning his brother Grome, I suggest we travel by sea for as far as possible, calling in here...' he pointed to a sea-port on the western coast of Lormyr--'to get our bearings and learn what we can of the lands of Oin and Yu and how those lands are defended.'
'Few travellers have ever ventured beyond Lormyr. It is said that the edge of the world lies not far from that country's most southerly borders.' Dyvim Tvar frowned. 'Could not this whole mission be a trap, I wonder? Arioch's trap? What if he is in league with Prince Yyrkoon and we have been completely deceived into embarking upon an expedition which will destroy us?'
'I have considered that,' said Elric. 'But there is no other choice. We must trust Arioch.' 'I suppose we must.' Dyvim Tvar smiled ironically. 'Another matter now occurs to me. How does the ship move? I saw no anchors we could raise and there are no tides that I know of that sweep across the land. The wind fills the sails--see.' It was true. The sails were billowing and the masts creaked slightly as they took the strain.
Elric shrugged and spread his hands. 'I suppose we must tell the ship,' he suggested. 'Ship--we are ready to sail.' Elric took some pleasure in Dyvim Tvar's expression of astonishment as, with a lurch, the ship began to move. It sailed smoothly, as over a calm sea, and Dyvim Tvar instinctively clutched the rail, shouting: 'But we are heading directly for the city wall!'
Elric crossed quickly to the centre of the poop where a large lever lay, horizontally attached to a ratchet which in turn was attached to a spindle. This was almost certainly the steering gear. Elric grasped the lever as one might grasp an oar and pushed it round a notch or two. Immediately the ship responded--and turned towards another part of the wall! Elric hauled back on the lever and the ship leaned, protesting a little as she yawed around and began to head out across the island. Elric laughed in delight. 'You see, Dyvim Tvar, it is easy? A slight effort of logic was all it took!'
'Nonetheless,' said Dyvim Tvar suspiciously, 'I'd rather we rode dragons. At least they are beasts and may be understood. But this sorcery, it troubles me.' 'Those are not fitting words for a noble of. Melnibone!' Elric shouted above the sound of the wind in the rigging, the creaking of the ship's timbers, the slap of the great white sails. 'Perhaps not,' said Dyvim Tvar. 'Perhaps that explains why I stand beside you now, my lord.' Elric darted his friend a puzzled look before he went below to find a helmsman whom he could teach how to steer the ship. The ship sped swiftly over rocky slopes and up gorse- covered hills; she cut her way through forests and sailed grandly over grassy plains. She moved like a low-flying hawk which keeps close to the ground but progresses with incredible speed and accuracy as it searches for its prey, altering its course with an imperceptible flick of a wing. The soldiers of Imrryr crowded her decks, gasping in amazement at the ship's progress over the land, and many of the men had to be clouted back to their positions at the sails or
elsewhere about the ship. The huge warrior who acted as bosun seemed the only member of the crew unaffected by the miracle of the ship. He was behaving as he would normally behave aboard one of the golden battle-barges; going solidly about his duties and seeing to it that all was done in a proper seamanly manner. The helmsman Elric had selected was, on the other hand, wide-eyed and somewhat nervous of the ship he handled. You could see that he felt he was, at any moment, going to be dashed against a slab of rock or smash the ship apart in a tangle of thick-trunked pines. He was forever wetting his lips and wiping sweat from his brow, even though the air was sharp and his breath steamed as it left his throat. Yet he was a good helmsman and gradually he became used to handling the ship, though his movements were, perforce, more rapid, for there was little time to deliberate upon a decision, the ship travelled with such speed over the land. The speed was breathtaking; they sped more swiftly than any horse--were swifter, even, than Dyvim Tvar's beloved dragons. Yet the motion was exhilarating, too, as the expressions on the faces of all the Imrryrians told.
Elric's delighted laughter rang through the ship and infected many another member of the crew. 'Well, if Grome of the Roots is trying to block our progress, I hesitate to guess how fast we shall travel when we reach water!' he called to Dyvim Tvar. Dyvim Tvar had lost some of his earlier mood. His long, fine hair streamed around his face as he smiled at his friend. 'Aye--we shall all be whisked off the deck and into the sea!' And then, as if in answer to their words, the ship began suddenly to buck and at the same time sway from side to side, like a ship caught in powerful cross-currents. The
helmsman went white and clung to his lever, trying to get the ship back under control. There came a brief, terrified yell and a sailor fell from the highest cross-tree in the main mast and crashed onto the deck, breaking every bone in his body. And then the ship swayed once or twice and the turbulence was behind them and they continued on their course.
Elric stared at the body of the fallen sailor. Suddenly the mood of gaiety left him completely and he gripped the rail in his black gauntleted hands and he gritted his strong teeth and his crimson eyes glowed and his lips curled in self- mockery. 'What a fool I am. What a fool I am to tempt the gods so!'
Still, though the ship moved almost as swiftly as it had done, there seemed to be something dragging at it, as if Grome's minions clung on to the bottom as barnacles might cling in the sea. And Elric sensed something around him in the air, something in the rustling of the trees through which they passed, something in the movement of the grass and the bushes and the flowers over which they crossed, something in the weight of the rocks, of the angle of the hills. And he knew that what he sensed was the presence of Grome of the Ground--Grome of the Land Below the Roots--Grome, who desired to own what he and his brother Straasha had once owned jointly, what they had had made as a sign of the unity between them and over which they had then fought. Grome wanted very much to take back the Ship Which Sails Over Land and Sea. And Elric, staring down at the black earth, became afraid.
Chapter 7
King Grome
BUT AT LAST, with the land tugging at their keel, they reached the sea, sliding into the water and gathering speed with every moment, until Melnibone was gone behind them and they were sighting the thick clouds of steam which hung forever over the Boiling Sea. Elric thought it unwise to risk even this magical vessel in those peculiar waters, so the vessel was turned and headed for the coast of Lormyr, sweetest and most tranquil of the Young Kingdom nations, and the port of Ramasaz on Lormyr's western shore. If the southern barbarians with whom they had so recently fought had been from Lormyr, Elric would have considered making for some other port, but the barbarians had almost certainly been from the South-East on the far side of the continent, beyond Pikarayd. The Lormyrians, under their fat, cautious King Fadan, were not likely to join a raid unless its success were completely assured. Sailing slowly into Ramasaz, Elric gave instructions that their ship be moored in a conventional way and treated like any ordinary ship. It attracted attention, nonetheless, for its beauty, and the inhabitants of the port were astonished to find Melniboneans crewing the vessel. Though Melniboneans were disliked throughout the Young Kingdoms, they were also feared. Thus, outwardly at any rate, Elric and his men were treated with respect and were served reasonably good food and wine in the hostelries they entered.
In the largest of the waterfront inns, a place called Heading Outward and Coming Safely Home Again, Elric found a garrulous host who had, until he bought the inn, been a prosperous fisherman and who knew the southernmost
shores reasonably well. He certainly knew the lands of Oin and Yu, but he had no respect for them at all. 'You think they could be massing for war, my lord.' He raised his eyebrows at Elric before hiding his face in his wine-mug. Wiping his lips, he shook his red head. "Then they must war against sparrows. Oin and Yu are barely nations at all. Their only halfway decent city is Dhoz-Kam--and that is shared between them, half being on one side of the River Ar and half being on the other. As for the rest of Oin and Yu--it is inhabited by peasants who are for the most part so ill- educated and superstition-ridden that they are poverty- striken. Not a potential soldier among 'em.'
'You've heard nothing of a Melnibonean renegade who has conquered Oin and Yu and set about training these peasants to make war?' Dyvim Tvar leaned on the bar next to Elric. He sipped fastidiously from a thick cup of wine. 'Prince Yyrkoon is the renegade's name.' 'Is that whom you seek?' The innkeeper became more interested. 'A dispute between the Dragon Princes, eh?' 'That's our business,' said Elric haughtily. 'Of course, my lords.' 'You know nothing of a great mirror which steals men's memories?' Dyvim Tvar asked. 'A magical mirror!' The innkeeper threw back his head and laughed heartily. 'I doubt if there's one decent mirror in the whole of Oin or Yu! No, my lords, I think you are misled if you fear danger from those lands!" 'Doubtless you are right, ' said Elric, staring down into his own untasted wine. 'But it would be wise if we were to check
for ourselves--and it would be in Lormyr's interests, too, if we were to find what we seek and warn you accordingly.' 'Fear not for Lormyr. We can deal easily with any silly attempt to make war from that quarter. But if you'd see for yourselves, you must follow the coast for three days until you come to a great bay. The River Ar runs into that bay and on the shores of the river lies Dhoz-Kam--a seedy sort of city, particularly for a capital serving two nations. The inhabitants are corrupt, dirty and disease-ridden, but fortunately they are also lazy and thus afford little trouble, especially if you keep a sword by you. When you have spent an hour in Dhoz-Kam, you will realise the impossibility of such folk becoming a menace to anyone else, unless they should get close enough to you to infect you with one of their several plagues!' Again the innkeeper laughed hugely at his own wit. As he ceased shaking, he added: 'Or unless you fear their navy. It consists of a dozen or so filthy fishing boats, most of which are so unseaworthy they dare only fish the shallows of the estuary.'
Elric pushed his wine-cup aside. 'We thank you, landlord.' He placed a Melnibonean silver piece upon the counter. 'This will be hard to change,' said the innkeeper craftily. 'There is no need to change it on our account,' Elric told him. 'I thank you, masters. Would you stay the night at my establishment. I can offer you the finest beds in Ramasaz.' 'I think not,' Elric told him. 'We shall sleep aboard out ship tonight, that we might be ready to sail at dawn.' The landlord watched the Melniboneans depart. Instinctively he bit at the silver piece and then, suspecting he tasted something odd about it, removed it from his mouth. He
stared at the coin, turning it this way and that. Could Melnibonean silver be poisonous to an ordinary mortal? he wondered. It was best not to take risks. He tucked the coin into his purse and collected up the two wine-cups they had left behind. Though he hated waste, he decided it would be wiser to throw the cups out lest they should have become tainted in some way.
The Ship Which Sails Over Land and Sea reached the bay at noon on the following day and now it lay close inshore, hidden from the distant city by a short isthmus on which grew thick, near-tropical foliage. Elric and Dyvim Tvar waded through the clear, shallow water to the beach and entered the forest. They had decided to be cautious and not make their presence known until they had determined the truth of the innkeeper's contemptuous description of Dhoz-Kam. Near the tip of the isthmus was a reasonably high hill and growing on the hill were several good-sized trees. Elric and Dyvim Tvar used their swords to clear a path through the undergrowth and made their way up the hill until they stood under the trees, picking out the one most easily climbed. Elric selected a tree whose trunk bent and then straightened out again. He sheathed his sword, got his hands onto the trunk and hauled himself up, clambering along until he reached a succession of thick branches which would bear his weight. In the meantime Dyvim Tvar climbed another nearby tree until at last both men could get a good view across the bay where the city of Dhoz-Kam could be clearly seen. Certainly the city itself deserved the innkeeper's description. It was squat and grimy and evidently poor. Doubtless this was why Yyrkoon had chosen it, for the lands of Oin and Yu could not have been hard to conquer with the help of a handful of well-trained Imrryrians and some of Yyrkoon's sorcerous allies. Indeed, few would have bothered to conquer such a place, since its wealth was plainly virtually non-existent and its geographical position of no
strategic importance. Yyrkoon had chosen well, for purposes of secrecy if nothing else. But the landlord had been wrong about Dhoz-Kam's fleet. Even from here Elric and Dyvim Tvar could make out a good thirty good-sized warships in the harbour and there seemed to be more anchored up-river. But the ships did not interest them as much as the thing which flashed and glittered above the city--something which had been mounted on huge pillars which supported an axle which, in turn, supported a vast, circular mirror set in a frame whose workmanship was as plainly non-mortal as that of the ship which had brought the Melniboneans here. There was no doubt that they looked upon the Mirror of Memory and that any who had sailed into t. he harbour after it had been erected must have had their memory of what they had seen stolen from them instantly.
'It seems to me, my lord,' said Dyvim Tvar from his perch a yard or two away from Elric, 'that it would be unwise of us to sail directly into the harbour of Dhoz-Kam. Indeed, we could be in danger if we entered the bay. I think that we look upon the mirror, even now, only because it is not pointed directly at us. But you notice there is machinery to turn it in any direction its user chooses--save one. It cannot be turned inland, behind the city. There is no need for it, for who would approach Oin and Yu from the wastelands beyond their borders and who but the inhabitants of Oin or Yu would need to come overland to their capital?'
'I think I take your meaning, Dyvim Tvar. You suggest that we would be wise to make use of the special properties of our ship and...' '... and go overland to Dhoz-Kam, striking suddenly and making full use of those veterans we brought with us, moving swiftly and ignoring Prince Yyrkoon's new allies-- seeking the prince himself, and his renegades. Could we do
that, Elric? Dash into the city--seize Yyrkoon, rescue Cymoril- -then speed out again and away?'
'Since we have too few men to make a direct assault, it is all we can do, though it's dangerous. The advantage of surprise would be lost, of course, once we had made the attempt. If we failed in our first attempt it would become much harder to attack a second time. The alternative is to sneak into the city at night and hope to locate Yyrkoon and Cymoril alone, but then we should not be making use of our one important weapon, the Ship Which Sails Over Land and Sea. I think your plan is the best one, Dyvim Tvar. Let us turn the ship inland, now, and hope that Grome takes his time in finding us--for I still worry lest he try seriously to wrest the ship from our possession.' Elric began to climb down towards the ground.
Standing once more upon the poop-deck of the lovely ship, Elric ordered the helmsman to turn the vessel once again towards the land. Under half-sail the ship moved gracefully through the water and up the curve of the bank and the flowering shrubs of the forest parted before its prow and then they were sailing through the green dark of the jungle, while startled birds cawed and shrilled and little animals paused in astonishment and peered down from the trees at the Ship Which Sails Over Land and Sea and some almost lost their balance as the graceful boat progressed calmly over the floor of the forest, turning aside for only the thickest of the trees.
And thus they made their way to the interior of the land called Oin, which lay to the north of the River Ar, which marked the border between Oin and the land called Yu with which Oin shared a single capital.
Oin was a country consisting largely of unforested jungle and infertile plains where the inhabitants farmed, for they feared the forest and would not go into it, even though that was where Oin's wealth might be found. The ship sailed well enough through the forest and out over the plain and soon they could see a large lake glinting ahead of them and Dyvim Tvar, glancing at the crude map with which he had furnished himself in Ramasaz, suggested that they begin to turn towards the south again and approach Dhoz-Kam by means of a wide semi-circle. Elric agreed and the ship began to tack round.
It was then that the land began to heave again and huge waves of grassy earth this time rolled around the ship and blotted out the surrounding view. The ship pitched wildly up and down and from side to side. Two more Imrryrians fell from the rigging and were killed on the deck below. The bosun was shouting loudly--though in fact all this upheaval was happening in silence--and the silence made the situation seem that much more menacing. The bosun yelled to his men to tie themselves to their positions. 'And all those not doing anything--get below at once!' he added.
Elric had wound a scarf around the rail and tied the other end to his wrist. Dyvim Tvar had used a long belt for the same purpose. But still they were flung in all directions, often losing their footing as the ship bucked this way and that, and every bone in Elric's body seemed about to crack and every inch of his flesh seemed bruised. And the ship was creaking and protesting and threatening to break up under the awful strain of riding the heaving land.
'Is this Grome's work, Elric?' Dyvim Tvar panted. 'Or is it some sorcery of Yyrkoon's?'
Elric shook his head. 'Not Yyrkoon. It is Grome. And I know no way to placate him. Not Grome, who thinks least of all the Kings of the Elements, yet, perhaps, is the most powerful.' 'But surely he breaks his bargain with his brother by doing this to us?' 'No. I think not. King Straasha warned us this might happen. We can only hope that Grome expends all his energy and that the ship survives, as it might survive a natural storm at sea.' 'This is worse than a sea-storm, Elric!'
Elric nodded his agreement but could say nothing, for the deck was tilting at a crazy angle and he had to cling to the rails with both hands in order to retain any kind of footing. And now the silence stopped.
Instead they heard a rumbling and a roaring that seemed to have something of the character of laughter. 'King Grome!' Elric shouted. 'King Grome! Let us be! We have done you no harm!' But the laughter increased and it made the whole ship quiver as the land rose and fell around it, as trees and hills and rocks rushed towards the ship and then fell away again, never quite engulfing them, for Grome doubtless wanted his ship intact.
'Grome! You have no quarrel with mortals!' Elric cried again. 'Let us be! Ask a favour of us if you must, but grant us this favour in return!'
Elric was shouting almost anything that came into his head. Really, he had no hope of being heard by the earth god and he did not expect King Grome to bother to listen even if the elemental did hear. But there was nothing else to do. 'Grome! Grome! Grome! Listen to me!'
Elric's only response was in the louder laughter which made every nerve in him tremble. And the earth heaved higher and dropped lower and the ship spun round and round until Elric was sure he would lose his senses entirely. 'King Grome! King Grome! Is it just to slay those who have never done you harm?' And then, slowly, the heaving earth subsided and the ship was still and a huge, brown figure stood looking down at the ship. The figure was the colour of earth and looked like a vast, old oak. His hair and his beard were the colour of leaves and his eyes were the colour of gold ore and his teeth were the colour of granite and his feet were like roots and his skin seemed covered in tiny green shoots in place of hair and he smelled rich and musty and good and he was King Grome of the Earth Elementals. He sniffed and he frowned and he said in a soft, mighty voice that was yet coarse and grumpy: 'I want my ship.'
'It is not our ship to give, King Grome,' said Elric. Grome's tone of petulance increased. 'I want my ship,' he said slowly. 'I want the thing. It is mine.' 'Of what use is it to you, King Grome?' 'Use? It is mine.'
Grome stamped and the land rippled.
Elric said desperately: 'It is your brother's ship, King Grome. It is King Straasha's ship. He gave you part of his domain and you allowed him to keep the ship. That was the bargain.' 'I know nothing of a bargain. The ship is mine.'
'You know that if you take the ship then King Straasha will have to take back the land he gave you.' 'I want my ship.' The huge figure shifted its position and bits of earth fell from it, landing with distinctly heard thuds on the ground below and on the deck of the ship. 'Then you must kill us to obtain it,' Elric said.
'Kill? Grome does not kill mortals. He kills nothing. Grome builds. Grome brings to life.' 'You have already killed three of our company,' Elric pointed out. 'Three are dead, King Grome, because you made the land-storm.' Grome's great brows drew together and he scratched his great head, causing an immense rustling noise to sound. 'Grome does not kill,' he said again. 'King Grome has killed,' said Elric reasonably. 'Three lives lost.' ' Grome grunted. 'But I want my ship,'
'The ship is lent to us by your brother. We cannot give it to you. Besides, we sail in it for a purpose--a noble purpose, I think. We...'
'I know nothing of "purposes"--and care nothing for you. I want my ship. My brother should not have lent it to you. I had almost forgotten it. But now that I remember it, I want it.' 'Will you not accept something else in place of the ship, King Grome?' said Dyvim Tvar suddenly. 'Some other gift.' Grome shook his monstrous head. 'How could a mortal give me something? It is mortals who take from me all the time. They steal my bones and my blood and my flesh. Could you give me back all that your kind has taken?' 'Is there not one thing?' Elric said. Grome closed his eyes. 'Precious metals? Jewels?' suggested Dyvim Tvar. 'We have many such in Melnibone.' 'I have plenty,' said King Grome.
Elric shrugged in despair. 'How can we bargain with a god, Dyvim Tvar?' He gave a bitter smile. 'What can the Lord of the Soil desire? More sun, more rain? These are not ours to give.' 'I am a rough sort of god,' said Grome, 'if indeed god I am. But I did not mean to kill your comrades. I have an idea. Give me the bodies of the slain. Bury them in my earth.' Elric's heart leapt. 'That is all you wish of us.' 'It would seem much to me.' 'And for that you will let us sail on?'
'On water, aye,' growled Grome. 'But I do not see why I should allow you to sail over my land. It is too much to expect of me. You can go to yonder lake, but from now this ship will only possess the properties bestowed upon it by my brother Straasha. No longer shall it cross my domain.'
'But, King Grome, we need this ship. We are upon urgent business. We need to sail to the city yonder.' Elric pointed in the direction of Dhoz-Kam. 'You may go to the lake, but after that the ship will sail only on water. Now give me what I ask.' Elric called down to the bosun who, for the first time, seemed amazed by what he was witnessing. 'Bring up the bodies of the three dead men.' The bodies were brought up from below. Grome stretched out one of his great, earthy hands and picked them up. 'I thank you,' he growled. 'Farewell.'
And slowly Grome began to descend into the ground, his whole huge frame becoming, atom by atom, absorbed with the earth until he was gone. And then the ship was moving again, slowly towards the lake, on the last short voyage it would ever make upon the land. 'And thus our plans are thwarted,' said Elric.
Dyvim Tvar looked miserably towards the shining lake. 'Aye. So much for that scheme. I hesitate to suggest this to you, Elric, but I fear we must resort to sorcery again if we are to stand any chance of achieving our goal.'
Elric sighed.
'I fear we must,' he said.
Chapter 8
The City and the Mirror
PRINCE YYRKOON WAS pleased. His plans went well. He peered through the high fence which enclosed the flat roof of his house (three storeys high and the finest in Dhoz-Kam); he looked out towards the harbour at his splendid, captured fleet. Every ship which had come to Dhoz-Kam and which had not flown the standard of a powerful nation had been easily taken after its crew had looked upon the great mirror which squatted on its pillars above the city. Demons had built those pillars and Prince Yyrkoon had paid them for their work with the souls of all those in Oin and Yu who had resisted him. Now there was one last ambition to fulfil and then he and his new followers would be on their way to Melnibone...
He turned and spoke to his sister. Cymoril lay on a wooden bench, staring unseeingly at the sky, clad in the filthy tatters of the dress she had been wearing when Yyrkoon abducted her from her tower. 'See our fleet, Cymoril! While the golden barges are scattered we shall sail unhampered into Imrryr and declare the city ours. Elric cannot defend himself against us now. He fell so easily into my trap. He is a fool! And you were a fool to give him your affection!'
Cymoril made no response. Through all the months she had been away, Yyrkoon had drugged her food and drink and produced in her a lassitude which rivalled Elric's undrugged condition. Yyrkoon's own experiments with his sorcerous powers had turned him gaunt, wild-eyed and somewhat mangy; he ceased to take any pains with his physical
appearance. But Cymoril had a wasted, haunted look to her, for all that beauty remained. It was as if Dhoz-Kam's rundown seediness had infected them both in different ways. 'Fear not for your own future, however, my sister,' Yyrkoon continued. He chuckled. 'You shall still be empress and sit beside the emperor on his Ruby Throne. Only I shall be emperor and Elric shall die for many days and the manner of his death will be more inventive than anything he thought to do to me.'
Cymoril's voice was hollow and distant. She did not turn her head when she spoke. 'You are insane, Yyrkoon.' 'Insane? Come now, sister, is that a word that a true Melnibonean should use? We Melniboneans judge nothing sane or insane. What a man is--he is. What he does--he does. Perhaps you have stayed too long in the Young Kingdoms and its judgments are becoming yours. But that shall soon be righted. We shall return to the Dragon Isle in triumph and you will forget all this, just as if you yourself had - looked into the Mirror of Memory.' He darted a nervous glance upwards, as if he half-expected the mirror to be turned on him.
Cymoril closed her eyes. Her breathing was heavy and very slow; she was bearing this nightmare with fortitude, certain that Elric must eventually rescue her from it. That hope was all that had stopped her from destroying herself. If the hope went altogether, then she would bring about her own death and be done with Yyrkoon and all his horrors.
'Did I tell you that last night I was successful? I raised demons, Cymoril. Such powerful, dark demons. I learned from them all that was left for me to learn. And I opened the
Shade Gate at last. Soon I shall pass through it and there I shall find what I seek. I shall become the most powerful mortal on earth. Did I tell you all this, Cymoril?' He had, in fact, repeated himself several times that morning, but Cymoril had paid no more attention to him than she did now. She felt so tired. She tried to sleep. She said slowly, as if to remind herself of something: 'I hate you, Yyrkoon.' 'Ah, but you shall love me soon, Cymoril. Soon.' 'Elric will come...' 'Elric! Ha! He sits twiddling his thumbs in his tower, waiting for news that will never come--save when I bring it to him!' 'Elric will come,' she said.
Yyrkoon snarled. A brute-faced Oinish girl brought him his morning wine. Yyrkoon seized the cup and sipped the stuff. Then he spat it at the girl who, trembling, ducked away. Yyrkoon took the jug and emptied it onto the white dust of the roof. 'This is Elric's thin blood. This is how it will flow away!'
But again Cymoril was not listening, She was trying to remember her albino lover and the few sweet days they had spent together since they were children. Yyrkoon hurled the empty jug at the girl's head, but she was adept at dodging him. As she dodged, she murmured her standard response to all his attacks and insults. 'Thank you, Demon Lord,' she said. 'Thank you, Demon Lord.' Yyrkoon laughed. 'Aye. Demon Lord. Your folk are right to call me that, for I rule more demons than I rule men. My power increases every day!'
The Oinish girl hurried away to fetch more wine, for she knew he would be calling for it in a moment. Yyrkoon crossed the roof to stare through the slats in the fence at the proof of his power, but as he looked upon his ships he heard sounds of confusion from the other side of the roof. Could the Yurits and the Oinish be fighting amongst themselves? Where were their Imrryrian centurions. Where was Captain Valharik?
He almost ran across the roof, passing Cymoril who appeared to be sleeping, and peered down into the streets. 'Fire?' he murmured. 'Fire?'
It was true that the streets appeared to be on fire. And yet it was not an ordinary fire. Balls of fire seemed to drift about, igniting rush-thatched roofs, doors, anything which would easily burn--as an invading army might put a village to the torch.
Yyrkoon scowled, thinking at first that he had been careless and some spell of his had turned against him, but then he looked over the burning houses at the river and he saw a strange ship sailing there, a ship of great grace and beauty, that somehow seemed more a creation of nature than of man--and he knew they were under attack. But who would attack Dhoz-Kam? There was no loot worth the effort. It could not be Imrryrians...
It could not be Elric.
'It must not be Elric,' he growled. 'The Mirror. It must be turned upon the invaders.' 'And upon yourself, brother?' Cymoril had risen unsteadily and leaned against a table. She was smiling. 'You were too confident, Yyrkoon. Elric comes.'
'Elric! Nonsense! Merely a few barbarian raiders from the interior. Once they are in the centre of the city, we shall be able to use the Mirror of Memory upon them.' He ran to the trapdoor which led down into his house. 'Captain Valharik! Valharik where are you?'
Valharik appeared in the room below. He was sweating. There was a blade in his gloved hand, though he did not seem to have been in any fighting as yet. 'Make the mirror ready, Valharik. Turn it upon the attackers.' 'But, my lord, we might...' 'Hurry! Do as I say. We'll soon have these barbarians added to our own strength--along with their ships.' 'Barbarians, my lord? Can barbarians command the fire elementals? These things we fight are flame spirits. They cannot be slain any more than fire itself can be slain.' 'Fire can be slain by water,' Prince Yyrkoon reminded his lieutenant. 'By water, Captain Valharik. Have you forgotten?' 'But, Prince Yyrkoon, we have tried to quench the spirits with water--and the water will not move from our buckets. Some powerful sorcerer commands the invaders. He has the aid of the spirits of fire and water.' 'You are mad, Captain Valharik,' said Yyrkoon firmly. 'Mad. Prepare the mirror and let us have no more of these stupidities.' Valharik wetted his dry lips. 'Aye, my lord.' He bowed his head and went to do his master's bidding.
Again Yyrkoon went to the fence and looked through. There were men in the streets now, fighting his own warriors, but smoke obscured his view, he could not make out the identities of any of the invaders. 'Enjoy your petty victory,' Yyrkoon chuckled, 'for soon the mirror will take away your minds and you will become my slaves.'
'It is Elric,' said Cymoril quietly. She smiled. 'Elric comes to take vengeance on you, brother.' Yyrkoon sniggered. 'Think you? Think you? Well, should that be the case, he'll find me gone, for I still have a means of evading him--and he'll find you in a condition which will not please him (though it will cause him considerable anguish). But it is not Elric. It is some crude shaman from the steppes to the east of here. He will soon be in my power.'
Cymoril, too, was peering through the fence. 'Elric,' she said. 'I can see his helm.' 'What?' Yyrkoon pushed her aside. There, in the streets, Imrryrian fought Imrryrian, there was no longer any doubt of that. Yyrkoon's men--Imrryrian, Oinish and Yurit--were being pushed back. And at the head of the attacking Imrryrians could be seen a black dragon helm such as only one Melnibonean wore. It was Elric's helm. And Elric's sword, that had once belonged to Earl Aubec of Malador, rose and fell and was bright with blood which glistened in the morning sunshine.
For a moment Yyrkoon was overwhelmed with despair. He groaned. 'Elric. Elric. Elric. Ah, how we continue to underestimate each other. What curse is on us?' Cymoril had flung back her head and her face had come to life again. 'I said he would come, brother!'
Yyrkoon whirled on her. 'Aye--he has come--and the mirror will rob him of his brain and he will turn into my slave, believing anything I care to put in his skull. This is even sweeter than I planned, sister. Ha!' He looked up and then flung his arms across his eyes as he realised what he had done. 'Quickly--below--into the house--the mirror begins to turn.' There came a great creaking of gears and pulleys and chains as the terrible Mirror of Memory began to focus on the streets below. 'It will be only a little while before Elric has added himself and his men to my strength. What a splendid irony!' Yyrkoon hurried his sister down the steps leading from the roof and he closed the trapdoor behind him. 'Elric himself will help in the attack on Imrryr. He will destroy his own kind. He will oust himself from the Ruby Throne!'
'Do you not think that Elric has anticipated the threat of the Mirror of Memory, brother?' Cymoril said with relish. 'Anticipate it, aye--but resist it he cannot. He must see to fight. He must either be cut down or open his eyes. No man with eyes can be safe from the power of the mirror.' He glanced around the crudely furnished room. 'Where is Valharik? Where is the cur?'
Valharik came running in. 'The mirror is being turned, my lord, but it will affect our own men, too. I fear...' 'Then cease to fear. What if our own men are drawn under its influence? We can soon feed what they need to know back into their brains--at the same time as we feed our defeated foes. You are too nervous, Captain Valharik.' 'But Elric leads them...'
'And Elric's eyes are eyes--though they look like crimson stones. He will fare no better than his men.'
In the streets around Prince Yyrkoon's house Elric, Dyvim Tvar and their Imrryrians pushed on, forcing back their demoralised opponents. The attackers had lost barely a man, whereas many Oinish and Yurits lay dead in the streets, beside a few of their renegade Imrryrian commanders. The flame elementals, whom Elric had summoned with some effort, were beginning to disperse, for it cost them dear to spend so much time entirely within Elric's plane, but the necessary advantage had been gained and there was now little question of who would win as a hundred or more houses blazed throughout the city, igniting others and requiring attention from the defenders lest the whole squalid place burn down about their ears. In the harbour, too, ships were burning.
Dyvim Tvar was the first to notice the mirror beginning to swing into focus on the streets. He pointed a warning finger, then turned, blowing on his war-horn and ordering forward the troops who, up to now, had played no part in the fighting. 'Now you must lead us!' he cried, and he lowered his helm over his face. The eyeholes of the helm had been blocked so that he could not see through.
Slowly Elric lowered his own helm until he was in darkness. The sound of fighting continued however, as the veterans who had sailed with them from Melnibone, set to work in their place and the other troops fell back. The leading Imrryrians had not blocked their eyeholes.
Elric prayed that the scheme would work.
Yyrkoon, peeking cautiously through a chink in a heavy curtain, said querulously: 'Valharik? They fight on. Why is that? Is not the mirror focussed?' 'It should be, my lord.'
'Then, see for yourself, the Imrryrians continue to forge through our defenders--and our men are beginning to come under the influence of the mirror. What is wrong, Valharik? What is wrong?' Valharik drew air between his teeth and there was a certain admiration in his expression as he looked upon the fighting Imrryrians. 'They are blind,' he said. 'They fight by sound and touch and smell. They are blind, my lord emperor--and they lead Elric and his men whose helms are so designed they can see nothing.' 'Blind?' Yyrkoon spoke almost pathetically, refusing to understand. 'Blind?' 'Aye. Blind warriors--men wounded in earlier wars, but good fighters nonetheless. That is how Elric defeats our mirror, my lord.' 'Agh! No! No!' Yyrkoon beat heavily on his captain's back and the man shrank away. 'Elric is not cunning. He is not cunning. Some powerful demon gives him these ideas.' 'Perhaps, my lord. But are there demons more powerful than those who have aided you?' 'No," said Yyrkoon. 'There are none. Oh, that I could summon some of them now. But I have expended my powers in opening the Shade Gate. I should have anticipated... I could not anticipate... Oh Elric! I shall yet destroy you, when the runeblades are mine!' Then Yyrkoon frowned. 'But how could he have been prepared? What demon .... ? Unless he summoned Arioch himself? But he has not the power to summon Arioch. I could not summon him..."
And then, as if in reply, Yyrkoon heard Elric's battle song sounding from the nearby streets. And that song answered the question. 'Arioch! Arioch! Blood and souls for my lord Arioch !'
'Then I must have the runeblades. I must pass through the Shade Gate. There I still have allies--supernatural allies who shall deal easily with Elric, if need be. But I need time...' Yyrkoon mumbled to himself as he paced about the room. Valharik continued to watch the fighting.
'They come closer,' said the captain.
Cymoril smiled. 'Closer, Yyrkoon? Who is the fool now? Elric? Or you?' 'Be still! I think. I think...' Yyrkoon fingered his lips.
Then a light came into his eye and he looked cunningly at Cymoril for a second before turning his attention to Captain Valharik. 'Valharik, you must destroy the Mirror of Memory.'
'Destroy it? But it is our only weapon, my lord?' 'Exactly--but is it not useless now?' 'Aye.'
'Destroy it and it will serve us again.' Yyrkoon flicked a long finger in the direction of the door. 'Go. Destroy the mirror.' 'But, Prince Yyrkoon--emperor, I mean--will that not have the effect of robbing us of our only weapon?' 'Do as I say, Valharik! Or perish!'
'But how shall I destroy it, my lord?'
'Your sword. You must climb the column behind the face of the mirror. Then, without looking into the mirror itself, you must swing your sword against it and smash it. It will break easily. You know the precautions I have had to take to make sure that it was not harmed.'
'Is that all I must do?'
'Aye. Then you are free from my service--you may escape or do whatever else you wish to do.' 'Do we not sail against Melnibone?' 'Of course not. I have devised another method of taking the Dragon Isle.' Valharik shrugged. His expression showed that he had never really believed Yyrkoon's assurances. But what else had he to do but follow Yyrkoon, when fearful torture awaited him at Elric's hands? With shoulders bowed, the captain slunk away to do his prince's work.
'And now, Cymoril...' Yyrkoon grinned like a ferret as he reached out to grab his sister's soft shoulders. 'Now to prepare you for your lover, Elric.' One of the blind warriors cried: 'They no longer resist us, my lord. They are limp and allow themselves to be cut down where they stand. Why is this?'
At last they stood within what appeared to Elric, as he lifted his helm, to be a warehouse of some kind. Luckily it was large enough to hold their entire force and when they were all inside Elric had the doors shut while they debated their next action.
'We should find Yyrkoon,' Dyvim Tvar said. 'Let us interrogate one of those warriors...' 'There'll be little point in that, my friend,' Elric reminded him. 'Their minds are gone. They'll remember nothing at all. They do not at present remember even what they are, let alone who. Go to the shutters yonder, where the mirror's influence cannot reach, and see if you can see the building most likely to be occupied by my cousin.'
Dyvim Tvar crossed swiftly to the shutters and looked cautiously out. 'Aye--there's a building larger than the rest and I see some movement within, as if the surviving warriors were regrouping. It's likely that's Yyrkoon's stronghold. It should be easily taken.'
Elric joined him. 'Aye. I agree with you. We'll find Yyrkoon there. But we must hurry, lest he decides to slay Cymoril. We must work out the best means of reaching the place and instruct our blind warriors as to how many streets, how many houses and so forth, we must pass.'
'What is that strange sound?' One of the blind warriors raised his head. 'Like the distant ringing of a gong.' 'I hear it too,' said another blind man.
And now Elric heard it. A sinister noise. It came from the air above them. It shivered through the atmosphere.
'The mirror!' Dyvim Tvar looked up. 'Has the mirror some property we did not anticipate?' 'Possibly...' Elric tried to remember what Arioch had told him. But Arioch had been vague. He had said nothing of this dreadful, mighty sound, this shattering clangour as if... 'He is breaking the mirror!' he said. 'But why?' There was something more now, something brushing at his brain. As if the sound were, itself, sentient.
'Perhaps Yyrkoon is dead and his magic dies with him,' Dyvim Tvar began. And then he broke off with a groan. The noise was louder, more intense, bringing sharp pain to his ears. And now Elric knew. He blocked his ears with his gauntleted hands. The memories in the mirror. They were flooding into his mind. The mirror had been smashed and was releasing all the memories it had stolen over the centuries--the aeons, perhaps. Many of those memories were not mortal. Many were the memories of beasts and intelligent creatures which had existed even before Melnibone. And the memories warred for a place in Elric's skull--in the skulls of all the Imrryrians--in the poor, tortured skulls of the men outside whose pitiful screams could be heard rising from the streets- -and in the skull of Captain Valharik, the turncoat, as he lost his footing on the great column and fell with the shards from the mirror to the ground far below. But Elric did not hear Captain Valharik scream and he did not hear Valharik's body crash first to a roof-top and then into the street where it lay all broken beneath the broken mirror. Elric lay upon the stone floor of the warehouse and he writhed, as his comrades writhed, trying to clear his head of
a million memories that were not his own--of loves, of hatreds, of strange experiences and ordinary experiences, of wars and journeys, of the faces of relatives who were not his relatives, of men and women and children, of animals, of ships and cities; of fights, of lovemaking, of fears and desires--and the memories fought each other for possession of his crowded skull, threatening to drive his own memories (and thus his own character) from his head. And as Elric writhed upon the ground, clutching at his ears, he spoke a word over and over again in an effort to cling to his own identity.
'Elric. Elric. Elric.'
And gradually, by an effort which he had experienced only once before when he had summoned Arioch to the plane of the Earth, he managed to extinguish all those alien memories and assert his own until, shaken and feeble, he lowered his hands from his ears and no longer shouted his own name. And then he stood up and looked about him.
More than two thirds of his men were dead, blind or otherwise. The big bosun was dead, his eyes wide and staring, his lips frozen in a scream, his right eye-socket raw and bleeding from where he had tried to drag his eye from it. All the corpses lay in unnatural positions, all had their eyes open (if they had eyes) and many bore the marks of self- mutilation, while others had vomited and others had dashed their brains against the wall. Dyvim Tvar was alive, but curled up in a corner, mumbling to himself and Elric thought he might be mad. Some of the other survivors were, indeed, mad, but they were quiet, they afforded no danger. Only five, including Elric, seemed to have resisted the alien memories and retained their own sanity. It seemed to Elric, as he stumbled from corpse to corpse, that most of the men had had their hearts fail.
'Dyvim Tvar?' Elric put his hand on his friend's shoulder. 'Dyvim Tvar?' Dyvim Tvar took his head from his arm and looked into Elric's eyes. In Dyvim Tvar's own eyes was the experience of a score of millennia and there was irony there, too. 'I live, Elric.' 'Few of us live now.'
A little later they left the warehouse, no longer needing to fear the mirror, and found that all the streets were full of the dead who had received the mirror's memories. Stiff bodies reached out hands to them. Dead lips formed silent pleas for help. Elric tried not to look at them as he pressed through them, but his desire for vengeance upon his cousin was even stronger now.
They reached the house. The door was open and the ground floor was crammed with corpses. There was no sign of Prince Yyrkoon. Elric and Dyvim Tvar led the few Imrryrians who were still sane up the steps, past more imploring corpses, until they reached the top floor of the house. And here they found Cymoril.
She was lying upon a couch and she was naked. There were runes painted on her flesh and the runes were, in themselves, obscene. Her eyelids were heavy and she did not at first recognise them. Elric rushed to her side and cradled her body in his arms. The body was oddly cold. 'He--he makes me--sleep...' said Cymoril. 'A sorcerous sleep-- from which--only he can wake me...' She gave a great yawn.
'I have stayed awake --this long--by an effort of--will--for Elric comes...' 'Elric is here,' said her lover, softly. 'I am Elric, Cymoril.'
'Elric?' She relaxed in his arms. 'You--you must find Yyrkoon-- for only he can wake me...' 'Where has he gone?' Elric's face had hardened. His crimson eyes were fierce. 'Where?' 'To find the two black swords--the runeswords--of--our ancestors--Mournblade...' 'And Stormbringer,' said Elric grimly. 'Those swords are cursed. But where has he gone, Cymoril? How has he escaped us?' 'Through--through--through the--Shade Gate--he conjured it- -he made the most fearful pacts with demons to go through... The--other--room . . .' Now Cymoril slept, but there seemed to be a certain peace on her face. Elric watched as Dyvim Tvar crossed the room, sword in hand, and flung the door open. A dreadful stench came from the next room, which was in darkness. Something flickered on the far side. 'Aye--that's sorcery, right enough,' said Elric. 'And Yyrkoon has thwarted me. He conjured the Shade Gate and passed through it into some nether-world. Which one, I'll never know, for there is an infinity of them. Oh, Arioch, I would give much to follow my cousin!'
'Then follow him you shall,' said a sweet, sardonic voice in Elric's head. At first the albino thought it was a vestige of a memory still fighting for possession of his head, but then he knew that Arioch spoke to him. 'Dismiss your followers that I may speak with thee,' said Arioch. Elric hesitated. He wished to be alone--but not with Arioch. He wished to be with Cymoril, for Cymoril was making him weep. Tears already flowed from his crimson eyes. 'What I have to say could result in Cymoril being restored to her normal state,' said the voice. 'And, moreover, it will help you defeat Yyrkoon and be revenged upon him. Indeed, it could make you the most powerful mortal there has ever been.'
Elric looked up at Dyvim Tvar. 'Would you and your men leave me alone for a few moments?' 'Of course.' Dyvim Tvar led his men away and shut the door behind him. Arioch stood leaning against the same door. Again he had assumed the shape and poise of a handsome youth. His smile was friendly and open and only the ancient eyes belied his appearance. 'It is time to seek the black swords yourself, Elric,' said Arioch. 'Lest Yyrkoon reach them first. I warn you of this-- with the runeblades Yyrkoon will be so powerful he will be able to destroy half the world without thinking of it. That is why your cousin risks the dangers of the world beyond the Shade Gate. If Yyrkoon possesses those swords before you
find them, it will mean the end of you, of Cymoril, of the Young Kingdoms and, quite possibly, the destruction of Melnibone, too. I will help you enter the netherworld to seek for the twin runeswords.' Elric said musingly: 'I have often been warned of the dangers of seeking the swords--and the worse dangers of owning them. I think I must consider another plan, my lord Arioch.' 'There is no other plan. Yyrkoon desires the swords if you do not. With Mournblade in one hand and Stormbringer in the other, he will be invincible, for the swords give their user power. Immense power.' Arioch paused. 'You must do as I say. It is to your advantage.' 'And to yours, Lord Arioch?' 'Aye--to mine. I am not entirely selfless.'
Elric shook his head. 'I am confused. There has been too much of the supernatural about this affair. I suspect the gods of manipulating us...' 'The gods serve only those who are willing to serve them. And the gods serve destiny, also.' 'I like it not. To stop Yyrkoon is one thing, to assume his ambitions and take the swords myself--that is another thing.' 'It is your destiny.'
'Cannot I change my destiny?'
Arioch shook his head. 'No more than can I.'
Elric stroked sleeping Cymoril's hair. 'I love her. She is all I desire.' 'You shall not wake her if Yyrkoon finds the blades before you do.' 'And how shall I find the blades?'
'Enter the Shade Gate--I have kept it open, though Yyrkoon thinks it closed--then you must seek the Tunnel Under the Marsh which leads to the Pulsing Cavern. In that chamber the runeswords are kept. They have been kept there ever since your ancestors relinquished them...' 'Why were they relinquished.' 'Your ancestors lacked courage.' 'Courage to face what?' 'Themselves.' 'You are cryptic, my lord Arioch.'
'That is the way of the Lords of the Higher Worlds. Hurry. Even I cannot keep the Shade Gate open long.' 'Very well. I will go.'
And Arioch vanished immediately.
Elric called in a hoarse, cracking voice for Dyvim Tvar. Dyvim Tvar entered at once. 'Elric? What has happened in here? Is it Cymoril? You look...'
'I am going to follow Yyrkoon--alone, Dyvim Tvar.' You must make your way back to Melnibone with those of our men
who remain. Take Cymoril with you. If I do not return in reasonable time, you must declare her empress. If she still sleeps, then you must rule as regent until she wakes.' Dyvim Tvar said softly: 'Do you know what you do, Elric?' Elric shook his head. 'No, Dyvim Tvar, I do not.'
He got to his feet and staggered towards the other room where the Shade Gate waited for him.
BOOK THREE
And now there is no turning back at all Elric's destiny has been forged and fixed as surely as the hellswords were forged and fixed aeons before. Was there ever a point where he might have turned off this road to despair, damnation and destruction? Or has he been doomed since before his birth? Doomed through a thousand incarnations to know little else but sadness and struggle, loneliness and remorse-- eternally the champion of some unknown cause?
Chapter 1 Through the Shade Gate
AND ELRIC STEPPED into a shadow and found himself in a world of shadows. He turned, but the shadow through which he had entered now faded and was gone. Old Aubec's sword was in Elric's hand, the black helm and the black armour were upon his body and only these were familiar, for the land was dark and gloomy as if contained in a vast cave whose walls, though invisible, were oppressive and tangible. And Elric regretted the hysteria, the weariness of brain, which had given him the impulse to obey his patron demon Arioch and plunge through the Shade Gate. But regret was useless now, so he forgot it.
Yyrkoon was nowhere to be seen. Either Elric's cousin had had a steed awaiting him or else, more likely, he had entered this world at a slightly different angle (for all the planes were said to turn about each other) and was thus either nearer or farther from their mutual goal. The air was rich with brine--so rich that Elric's nostrils felt as if they had been packed with salt--it was almost like walking under water and just being able to breathe the water itself. Perhaps this explained why it was so difficult to see any great distance in any direction, why there were so many shadows, why the sky was like a veil which hid the roof of a cavern. Elric sheathed his sword, there being no evident danger present at that moment, and turned slowly, trying to get some kind of bearing.
It was possible that there were jagged mountains in what he judged the east, and perhaps a forest to the west. Without sun, or stars, or moon, it was hard to gauge distance or direction. He stood on a rocky plain over which whistled a cold and sluggish wind, which tugged at his cloak as if it wished to possess it. There were a few stunted, leafless trees standing in a clump about a hundred paces away. It was all that relieved the bleak plain, save for a large, shapeless slab of rock which stood a fair way beyond the trees. It was a world which seemed to have been drained of all life, where Law and Chaos had once battled and, in their conflict, destroyed all. Were there many planes such as this one? Elric wondered. And for a moment he was filled with a dreadful presentiment concerning the fate of his own rich world. He shook this mood off at once and began to walk towards the trees and the rock beyond.
He reached the trees and passed them, and the touch of his cloak on a branch broke the brittle thing which turned almost at once to ash which was scattered on the wind. Elric drew the cloak closer about his body.
As he approached the rock he became conscious of a sound which seemed to emanate from it. He slowed his pace and put his hand upon the pommel of his sword. The noise continued--a small, rhythmic noise. Through the gloom Elric peered carefully at the rock, trying to locate the source of the sound. And then the noise stopped and was replaced by another--a soft scuffle, a padding footfall, and then silence. Elric took a pace backward and drew Aubec's sword. The first sound had been that of a man sleeping. The second sound was that of a man waking and preparing himself either for attack or to defend himself.
Elric said: 'I am Elric of Melnibone. I am a stranger here.'
And an arrow slid past his helm almost at the same moment as a bowstring sounded. Elric flung himself to one side and sought about for cover, but there was no cover save the rock behind which the archer hid. And now a voice came from behind the rock. It was a firm, rather bleak voice. It said: 'That was not meant to harm you but to display my skill in case you considered harming me. I have had my fill of demons in this world and you look like the most dangerous demon of all, Whiteface.' 'I am mortal,' said Elric, straightening up and deciding that if he must die it would be best to die with some sort of dignity. 'You spoke of Melnibone. I have heard of the place. An isle of demons.'
'Then you have not heard enough of Melnibone. I am mortal as are all my folk. Only the ignorant think us demons.' 'I am not ignorant, my friend. I am a Warrior Priest of Phum, born to that caste and the inheritor of all its knowledge and, until recently, the Lords of Chaos themselves were my patrons. Then I refused to serve them longer and was exiled to this plane by them. Perhaps the same fate befell you, for the folk of Melnibone serve Chaos do they not?'
'Aye. And I know of Phum--it lies in the unmapped East-- beyond the Weeping Waste, beyond the Sighing Desert, beyond even Elwher. It is one of the oldest of the Young Kingdoms.' 'All that is so--though I dispute that the East is unmapped, save by the savages of the West. So you are, indeed, to share my exile, it seems.' 'I am not exiled. I am upon a quest. When the quest is done, I shall return to my own world.' 'Return, say you? That interests me, my pale friend. I had thought return impossible.' 'Perhaps it is and I have been tricked. And if your own powers have not found you a way to another plane, perhaps mine will not save me either.' 'Powers? I have none since I relinquished my servitude to Chaos. Well, friend, do you intend to fight me?' 'There is only one upon this plane I would fight and it is not you, Warrior Priest of Phum.' Elric sheathed his sword and at the same moment the speaker rose from behind the rock, replacing a scarlet-fletched arrow in a scarlet quiver.
'I am Rackhir,' said the man. 'Called the Red Archer for, as you see, I affect scarlet dress. It is a habit of the Warrior Priests of Phum to choose but a single colour to wear. It is the only loyalty to tradition I still possess.' He had on a scarlet jerkin, scarlet breeks, scarlet shoes and a scarlet cap with a scarlet feather in it. His bow was scarlet and the pommel of his sword glowed ruby-red. His face, which was aquiline and gaunt, as if carved from fleshless bone, was weather-beaten, and that was brown. He was tall and he was thin, but muscles rippled on his arms and torso. There was irony in his eyes and something of a smile upon his thin lips, though the face showed that it had been through much experience, little of it pleasant.
'An odd place to choose for a quest,' said the Red Archer, standing with hands on hips and looking Elric up and down. 'But I'll strike a bargain with you if you're interested.' 'If the bargain suits me, archer, I'll agree to it, for you seem to know more of this world than do I.' 'Well--you must find something here and then leave, whereas I have nothing at all to do here and wish to leave. If I help you in your quest, will you take me with you when you return to our own plane?' 'That seems a fair bargain, but I cannot promise what I have no power to give. I will say only this--if it is possible for me to take you back with me to our own plane, either before or after I have finished my quest, I will do it.' 'That is reasonable,' said Rackhir the Red Archer. 'Now--tell me what you seek.' 'I seek two swords, forged millennia ago by immortals, used by my ancestors but then relinquished by them and placed upon this plane. The swords are large and heavy and black
and they have cryptic runes carved into their blades. I was told that I would find them in the Pulsing Cavern which is reached through the Tunnel Under the Marsh. Have you heard of either of these places?' 'I have not. Nor have I heard of the two black swords.' Rackhir rubbed his bony chin. 'Though I remember reading something in one of the Books of Phum and what I read disturbed me...' 'The swords are legendary. Many books make some small reference to them--almost always mysterious. There is said to be one tome which records the history of the swords and all who have used them--and all who will use them in the future--a timeless book which contains all time. Some call it the Chronicle of the Black Sword and in it, it is said, men may read their whole destinies.'
'I know nothing of that, either. It is not one of the Books of Phum. I fear, Comrade Elric, that we shall have to venture to the City of Ameeron and ask your questions of the inhabitants there.' 'There is a city upon this plane?'
'Aye--a city. I stayed but a short time in it, preferring the wilderness. But with a friend, it might be possible to bear the place a little longer.' 'Why is Ameeron unsuited to your taste?'
'Its citizens are not happy, indeed, they are a most depressed and depressing group, for they are all, you see, exiles or refugees or travelers between the worlds who lost their way and never found it again. No one lives in Ameeron by choice.'
'A veritable City of the Damned.'
'As the poet might remark, aye.' Rackhir offered Elric a sardonic wink. 'But I sometimes think all cities are that.' 'What is the nature of this plane where are, as far as I can tell, no planets, no moon, no sun. It has something of the air of a great cavern.' 'There is, indeed, a theory that it is a sphere buried in an infinity of rock. Others say that it lies in the future of our own Earth--a future where the universe has died. I heard a thousand theories during the short space of time I spend in the City of Ameeron. All, it seemed to me, were of equal value. All, it seemed to me, could be correct. Why not? There are some who believe that everything is a Lie. Conversely, everything could be the Truth.'
It was Elric's turn to remark ironically: 'You are a philosopher, then, as well as an archer, friend Rackhir of Phum?' Rackhir laughed. 'If you like! It is such thinking that weakened my loyalty to Chaos and led me to this pass. I have heard that there is a city called Tanelorn which may sometimes be found on the shifting shores of the Sighing Desert. If I ever return to our own world, Comrade Elric, I shall seek that city, for I have heard that peace may be found there--that such debates as the nature of Truth are considered meaningless. That men are content merely to exist in Tanelorn.'
'I envy those who dwell in Tanelorn,' said Elric.
Rackhir sniffed. 'Aye. But it would probably prove a disappointment, if found. Legends are best left as legends and attempts to make them real are rarely successful. Come-
-yonder lies Ameeron and that, sad to say, is more typical of most cities one comes across--on any plane.' The two tall men, both outcasts in their different ways, began to trudge through the gloom of that desolate wasteland.
Chapter 2
In the City of Ameeron
THE CITY OF AMEERON came in sight and Elric had never seen such a place before. Ameeron made Dhoz-Kam seem like the cleanest and most well-run settlement there could be. The city lay below the plain of rocks, in a shallow valley over which hung perpetual smoke: a filthy, tattered cloak meant to hide the place from the sight of men and gods.
The buildings were mostly in a state of semi-ruin or else were wholly ruined and shacks and tents erected in their place. The mixture of architectural styles--some familiar, some most alien--was such that Elric was hard put to see one building which resembled another. There were shanties and castles, cottages, towers and forts, plain, square villas and wooden huts heavy with carved ornamentation. Others seemed merely piles of rock with a jagged opening at one end for a door. But none looked well--could not have looked well in that landscape under that perpetually gloomy sky.
Here and there red fires sputtered, adding to the smoke, and the smell as Elric and Rackhir reached the outskirts was rich with a great variety of stinks. 'Arrogance, rather than pride, is the paramount quality of most of Ameeron's residents,' said Rackhir, wrinkling his hawklike nose. 'Where they have any qualities of character left at all.' Elric trudged through filth. Shadows scuttled amongst the close-packed buildings. 'Is there an inn, perhaps, where we can enquire after the Tunnel Under the Marsh and its whereabouts?'
'No inn. By and large the inhabitants keep themselves to themselves...' 'A city square where folk meet?'
'This city has no centre. Each resident or group of residents built their own dwelling where they felt like it, or where there was space, and they come from all planes and all ages, thus the confusion, the decay and the oldness of many of the places. Thus the filth, the hopelessness, the decadence of the majority.'
'How do they live?'
'They live off each other, by and large. They trade with demons who occasionally visit Ameeron from time to time...' 'Demons?' 'Aye. And the bravest hunt the rats which dwell in the caverns below the city.' 'What demons are these?'
'Just creatures, mainly minor minions of Chaos, who want something that the Ameeronese can supply--a stolen soul or two, a baby, perhaps (though few are born here)--you can imagine what else, if you've knowledge of what demons normally demand from sorcerers.'
'Aye. I can imagine. So Chaos can come and go on this plane as it pleases.' 'I'm not sure it's quite as easy. But it is certainly easier for the demons to travel back and forth here than it would be
for them to travel back and forth in our plane.' 'Have you seen any of these demons?' 'Aye. The usual bestial sort. Coarse, stupid and :powerful-- many of them were once human before electing to bargain with Chaos. Now they are mentally and physically warped into foul, demon shapes.' Elric found Rackhir's words not to his taste. 'Is that ever the fate of those who bargain with Chaos?' he said. 'You should know, if you come from Melnibone. I know that in Phum it is rarely the case. But it seems that the higher the stakes the subtler are the changes a man undergoes when Chaos agrees to trade with him.' Elric sighed. 'Where shall we enquire of our Tunnel Under the Marsh?' 'There was an old man...' Rackhir began, and then a grunt behind him made him pause. Another grunt.
A face with tusks in it emerged from a patch of darkness formed by a fallen slab of masonry. The face grunted again. 'Who are you?' said Elric, his sword-hand ready.
'Pig,' said the face with tusks in it. Elric was not certain whether he was being insulted or whether the creature was describing himself. 'Pig.'
Two more faces with tusks in them came out of the patch of darkness. 'Pig,' said one. 'Pig,' said another.
'Snake,' said a voice behind Elric and Rackhir. Elric turned while Rackhir continued to watch the pigs. A tall youth stood there. Where his head would have been sprouted the bodies of about fifteen good-sized snakes. The head of each snake glared at Elric. The tongues flickered and they all opened their mouths at exactly the same moment to say again:
'Snake.'
'Thing,' said another voice. Elric glanced in that direction, gasped, drew his sword and felt nausea sweep through him. Then Pigs, Snake and Thing were upon them.
Rackhir took one Pig before it could move three paces. His bow was off his back and strung and a red-fletched arrow nocked and shot, all in a second. He had time to shoot one more Pig and then drop his bow to draw his sword. Back to back he and Elric prepared to defend themselves against the demons' attack. Snake was bad enough, with its fifteen darting heads hissing and snapping with teeth which dripped venom, but Thing kept changing its form--first an arm would emerge, then a face would appear from the shapeless, heaving flesh which shuffled implacably closer.
'Thing!' it shouted. Two swords slashed at Elric who was dealing with the last Pig and missed his stroke so that instead of running the Pig through the heart, he took him in a lung. Pig staggered backward and slumped to the ground in a pool of muck, He crawled for a moment, but then collapsed. Thing had produced a spear and Elric barely managed to deflect the cast with the flat of his sword. Now
Rackhir was engaged with Snake and the two demons closed on the men, eager to make a finish of them. Half the heads of Snake lay writhing on the ground and Elric had managed to slice one hand off Thing, but the demon still seemed to have three other hands ready. It seemed to be created not from one creature but from several. Elric wondered if, through his bargaining with Arioch, this would ultimately be his fate, to be turned into a demon--a formless monster. But wasn't he already something of a monster? Didn't folk already mistake him for a demon?
These thoughts gave him strength. He yelled as he fought. 'Elric!' And: 'Thing!' replied his adversary, also eager to assert what he regarded as the essence of his being. Another hand flew off as Aubec's sword bit into it. Another javelin jabbed out and was knocked aside; another sword appeared and came down on Elric's helm with a force which dazed him and sent him reeling back against Rackhir who missed his thrust at Snake and was almost bitten by four of the heads. Elric chopped at the arm and the tentacle which held the sword and saw them part from the body but then become reabsorbed again. The nausea returned. Elric thrust his sword into the mass and the mass screamed: 'Thing! Thing! Thing!'
Elric thrust again and four swords and two spears waved and clashed and tried to deflect Aubec's blade. 'Thing!'
'This is Yyrkoon's work,' said Elric, 'without a doubt. He has heard that I have followed him and seeks to stop us with his demon allies.' He gritted his teeth and spoke through them.
'Unless one of these is Yyrkoon himself! Are you my cousin Yyrkoon, Thing?' 'Thing...' The voice was almost pathetic. The weapons waved and clashed but they no longer darted so fiercely at Elric. 'Or are you some other old, familiar friend?' 'Thing...' Elric stabbed again and again into the mass. Thick, reeking blood spurted and fell upon his armour. Elric could not understand why it had become so easy to take the attack to the demon. 'Now!' shouted a voice from above Elric's head. 'Quickly!'
Elric glanced up and saw a red face, a white beard, a waving arm. 'Don't look at me you fool! Now--strike!' And Elric put his two hands above his sword hilt and drove the blade deep into the shapeless creature which moaned and wept and said in a small whisper 'Frank...' before it died.
Rackhir thrust at the same moment and his blade went under the remaining snake heads and plunged into the chest and thence into the heart of the youth-body and his demon died, too. The white-haired man came clambering down from the ruined archway on which he had been perched. He was laughing. 'Niun's sorcery still has some effect, even here, eh? I heard the tall one call his demon friends and instruct them to set upon you. It did not seem fair to me that five should attack two--so I sat upon that wall and I drew the
many-armed demon's strength out of it. I still can. I still can. And now I have his strength (or a fair part of it) and feel considerably better than I have done for many a moon (if such a thing exists).' 'It said "Frank",' said Elric frowning. 'Was that a name, do you think? Its name before?' 'Perhaps,' said old Niun, 'perhaps. Poor creature. But still, it is dead now. You are not of Ameeron, you two--though I've seen you here before, red one.' 'And I've seen you,' said Rackhir with a smile. He wiped Snake's blood from his blade, using one of Snake's heads for the purpose. 'You are Niun Who Knew All.' 'Aye. Who Knew All but who now knows very little. Soon it will be over, when I have forgotten everything. Then! may return from this awful exile. It is the pact I made with Orland of the Staff. I was a fool who wished to know everything and my curiosity led me into an adventure concerning this Orland. Orland showed me the error of my ways and sent me here to forget. Sadly, as you noticed, I still remember some of my powers and my knowledge from time to time. I know you seek the Black Swords. I know you are Elric of Melnibone I know what will become of you.'
'You know my destiny?' said Elric eagerly. 'Tell me what it is Niun Who Knew All!' Niun opened his mouth as if to speak but then firmly shut it again. 'No,' he said. 'I have forgotten.' 'No!' Elric made as if to seize the old man. 'No! You remember! I can see that you remember!'
'I have forgotten.' Niun lowered his head.
Rackhir took hold of Elric's arm. 'He has forgotten, Elric.'
Elric nodded. 'Very well.' Then he said, 'But have you remembered where lies the Tunnel Under the Marsh?' 'Yes. It is only a short distance from Ameeron, the Marsh itself. You go that way. Then you look for a monument in the shape of an eagle carved in black marble. At the base of the monument is the entrance to the tunnel.' Niun repeated this information parrot-fashion and when he looked up his face was clearer. 'What did I just tell you?'
Elric said: 'You gave us instructions on how to reach the entrance to the Tunnel Under the Marsh.' 'Did I?' Niun clapped his old hands. 'Splendid. I have forgotten that now, too. Who are you?' 'We are best forgotten,' said Rackhir with a gentle smile. 'Farewell, Niun and thanks.' 'Thanks for what?'
'Both for remembering and for forgetting.'
They walked on through the miserable City of Ameeron, away from the happy old sorcerer, sighting the odd face staring at them from a doorway or a window, doing their best to breathe as little of the foul air as possible. 'I think perhaps that I envy Niun alone of all the inhabitants of this desolate place,' said Rackhir. 'I pity him,' said Elric. 'Why so?'
'It occurs to me that when he has forgotten everything, he may well forget that he is allowed to leave Ameeron.' Rackhir laughed and slapped the albino upon his black armoured back. 'You are a gloomy comrade, friend Elric. Are all your thoughts so hopeless?' 'They tend in that direction, I fear,' said Elric with a shadow of a smile.
Chapter 3
The Tunnel Under the Marsh
AND ON THEY travelled through that sad and murky world until at last they came to the marsh. The marsh was black. Black spiky vegetation grew in clumps here and there upon it. It was cold and it was dank; a dark mist swirled close to the surface and through the mist sometimes darted low shapes. From the mist rose a solid black object which could only be the monument described by Niun.
'The monument,' said Rackhir, stopping and leaning on his bow. 'It's well out into the marsh and there's no evident pathway leading to it. Is this a problem, do you think, Comrade Elric?' Elric waded cautiously into the edge of the marsh. He felt the cold ooze drag at his feet. He stepped back with some difficulty. 'There must be a path,' said Rackhir, fingering his bony nose. 'Else how would your cousin cross?' Elric looked over his shoulder at the Red Archer and he shrugged. 'Who knows? He could be travelling with sorcerous companions who have no difficulty where marshes are concerned.' Suddenly Elric found himself sitting down upon the damp rock. The stink of brine from the marsh seemed for a moment to have overwhelmed him. He was feeling weak.
The effectiveness of his drugs, last taken just as he stepped through the Shade Gate, was beginning to fade. Rackhir came and stood by the albino. He smiled with a certain amount of bantering sympathy. 'Well, Sir Sorcerer, cannot you summon similar aid?' Elric shook his head. 'I know little that is practical concerning the raising of small demons. Yyrkoon has all his grimoires, his favourite spells, his introductions to the demon worlds. We shall have to find a path of the ordinary kind if we wish to reach yonder monument, Warrior Priest of Phum.'
The Warrior Priest of Phum drew a red kerchief from within his tunic and blew his nose for some time. When he had finished he put down a hand, helped Elric to his feet, and began to walk along the rim of the marsh, keeping the black monument ever in sight.
It was some time later that they found a path at last and it was not a natural path but a slab of black marble extending out into the gloom of the mire, slippery to the feet and itself covered with a film of ooze. 'I would almost suspect this of being a false path--a lure to take us to our death,' said Rackhir as he and Elric stood and looked at the long slab, 'but what have we to lose now?' 'Come,' said Elric, setting foot on the slab and beginning to make his cautious way along it. In his hand he now held a torch of sorts, a bundle of sputtering reeds which gave off an unpleasant yellow light and a considerable amount of greenish smoke, but it was better than nothing.
Rackhir, testing each footstep with his unstrung bow-stave, followed behind, whistling a small, complicated tune as he
went along. Another of his race would have recognised the tune as the Song of the Son of the Hero of the High Hell who is about to Sacrifice his Life, a popular melody in Phum, particularly amongst the caste of the Warrior Priest. Elric found the tune irritating and distracting, but he said nothing, for he concentrated every fragment of his attention on keeping his balance upon the slippery surface of the slab, which now appeared to rock slightly, as if it floated on the surface of the marsh.
And now they were halfway to the monument whose shape could be clearly distinguished: A great eagle with spread wings and a savage beak and claws extended for the kill. An eagle in the same black marble as the slab on which they tried to keep their balance. And Elric was reminded of a tomb. Had some ancient hero been buried here? Or had the tomb been built to house the Black Swords--imprison them so that they might never enter the world of men again and steal men's souls?
The slab rocked more violently. Elric tried to remain upright but swayed first on one foot and then the other, the brand waving crazily. Both feet slid from under him and he went flying into the marsh and was instantly buried up to his knees. He began to sink. Somehow he had managed to keep his grip on the brand and by its light he could see the red-clad archer peering forward. 'Elric?'
'I'm here, Rackhir.'
'You're sinking?'
'The marsh seems intent on swallowing me, aye.' 'Can you lie flat?' 'I can lie forward, but my legs are trapped.' Elric tried to move his body in the ooze which pressed against it. Something rushed past him in front of his face, giving voice to a kind of muted gibbering. Elric did his best to control the fear which welled up in him. 'I think you must give me up, friend Rackhir.'
'What? And lose my means of getting out of this world? You must think me more selfless than I am, Comrade Elric. Here...' Rackhir carefully lowered himself to the slab and reached out his arm towards Elric. Both men were now covered in clinging slime; both shivered with cold. Rackhir stretched and stretched and Elric leaned forward as far as he could and tried to reach the hand, but it was impossible. And every second dragged him deeper into the stinking filth of the marsh.
Then Rackhir took up his bow-stave and pushed that out. 'Grab the bow, Elric. Can you?' Leaning forward and stretching every bone and muscle in his body, Elric just managed to get a grip on the bow-stave. 'Now, I must--Ah!' Rackhir, pulling at the bow, found his own feet slipping and the slab beginning to rock quite wildly. He flung out one arm to grab the far lip of the slab and with his other hand kept a grip on the bow, 'Hurry, Elric! Hurry!' Elric began painfully to pull himself from the ooze. The slab still rocked crazily and Rackhir's hawklike face was almost as
pale as Elric's own as he desperately strove to keep his hold on both slab and bow. And then Elric, all soaked in mire, managed to reach the slab and crawl onto it, the brand still sputtering in his hand, and lie there gasping and gasping and gasping.
Rackhir, too, was short of breath, but he laughed. 'What a fish I've caught!' he said. 'The biggest yet, I'd wager!' 'I am grateful to you, Rackhir the Red Archer. I am grateful, Warrior Priest of Phum. I owe you my life,' said Elric after a while. 'And I swear that whether I'm successful in my quest or not I'll use all my powers to see you through the Shade Gate and back into the world from which we have both come.'
Rackhir said quietly: 'You are a man, Elric of Melnibone. That is why I saved you. There are few men in any world.' He shrugged and grinned. 'Now I suggest we continue towards yonder monument on our knees. Undignified it might be, but safer it is also. And it is but a short way to crawl.'
Elric agreed.
Not much more time had passed in that timeless darkness before they had reached a little moss-grown island on which stood the Monument of the Eagle, huge and heavy and towering above them into the greater gloom which was either the sky or the roof of the cavern. And at the base of the plinth they saw a low doorway. And the doorway was open.
'A trap?' mused Rackhir.
'Or does Yyrkoon assume us perished in Ameeron?' said Elric, wiping himself free of slime as best he could. He sighed. 'Let's enter and be done with it.'
And so they entered.
They found themselves in a small room. Elric cast the faint light of a brand about the place and saw another doorway. The rest of the room was featureless-each wall made of the same faintly glistening black marble. The room was filled with silence.
Neither man spoke. Both walked unfalteringly towards the next doorway and, when they found steps, began to descend the steps, which wound down and down into total darkness. For a long time they descended, still without speaking, until eventually they reached the bottom and saw before them the entrance to a narrow tunnel which was irregularly shaped so that it seemed more the work of nature than of some intelligence. Moisture dripped from the roof of the tunnel and fell with the regularity of heartbeats to the floor, seeming to echo a deeper sound, far, far away, emanating from somewhere in the tunnel itself.
Elric heard Rackhir clear his throat.
'This is without doubt a tunnel,' said the Red Archer, 'and it, unquestionably leads under the marsh.' Elric felt that Rackhir shared his reluctance to enter the tunnel. He stood with the guttering brand held high, listening to the sound of the drops falling to the floor of the tunnel, trying to recognise that other sound which came so faintly from the depths. And then he forced himself forward, almost running into the tunnel, his ears filled with a sudden roaring which might have come from within his head or from some other source in the tunnel. He heard Rackhir's footfalls behind him. He drew his sword, the sword of the dead hero Aubec, and he
heard the hissing of his own breath echo from the walls of the tunnel which was now alive with sounds of every sort. Elric shuddered, but he did not pause.
The tunnel was warm. The floor felt spongy beneath his feet, the smell of brine persisted. And now he could see that the walls of the tunnel were smoother, that they seemed to shiver with quick, regular movement. He heard Rackhir gasp behind him as the archer, too, noted the peculiar nature of the tunnel.
'It's like flesh,' murmured the Warrior Priest of Phum. 'Like flesh.' Elric could not bring himself to reply. All his attention was required to force himself forward. He was consumed by terror. His whole body shook. He sweated and his legs threatened to buckle under him. His grip was so weak that he could barely keep his sword from falling to the floor. And there were hints of something in his memory, something which his brain refused to consider. Had he been here before? His trembling increased. His stomach turned. But he still stumbled on, the brand held before him.
And now the soft, steady thrumming sound grew louder and he saw ahead a small, almost circular aperture at the very end of the tunnel. He stopped, swaying. 'The tunnel ends,' whispered Rackhir. 'There is no way through.' The small aperture was pulsing with a swift, strong beat.
'The Pulsing Cavern,' Elric whispered. 'That is what we should find at the end of the Tunnel Under the Marsh. That must be the entrance, Rackhir.'
'It is too small for a man to enter, Elric,' said Rackhir reasonably. 'No...'
Elric stumbled forward until he stood close to the opening. He sheathed his sword. He handed the brand to Rackhir and then, before the Warrior Priest of Phum could stop him, he had flung himself headfirst through the gap, wriggling his body through--and the walls of the aperture parted for him and then closed behind him, leaving Rackhir on the other side.
Elric got slowly to his feet. A faint, pinkish light now came from the walls and ahead of him was another entrance, slightly larger than the other through which he had just come. The air was warm and thick and salty. It almost stifled him. His head throbbed and his body ached and he could barely act or think, save to force himself onward. On faltering legs he flung himself towards the next entrance as the great, muffled pulsing sounded louder and louder in his ears.
'Elric!'
Rackhir stood behind him, pale and sweating. He had abandoned the brand and followed Elric through. Elric licked dry lips and tried to speak. Rackhir came closer. Elric said thickly: 'Rackhir. You should not be here.' 'I said I would help.'
'Aye, but . . .' 'Then help I shall.' Elric had no strength for arguing, so he nodded and with his hands forced back the soft walls of the second aperture and saw that it led into a cavern whose round wall quivered to a steady pulsing. And in the centre of the cavern, hanging in the air without any support at all were two swords. Two identical swords, huge and fine and black.
And standing beneath the swords, his expression gloating and greedy, stood Prince Yyrkoon of Melnibone, reaching up for them, his lips moving but no words escaping from him. And Elric himself was able to voice but one word as he climbed through and stood upon that shuddering floor. 'No,' he said.
Yyrkoon heard the word. He turned with terror in his face. He snarled when he saw Elric and then he, too, voiced a word which was at once a scream of outrage. 'No!'
With an effort Elric dragged Aubec's blade from its scabbard. But it seemed too heavy to hold upright, it tugged his arm so that it rested on the floor, his arm hanging straight at his side. Elric drew deep breaths of heavy air into his lungs. His vision was dimming. Yyrkoon had become a shadow. Only the two black swords, standing still and cool in the very centre of the circular chamber, were in focus. Elric sensed Rackhir enter the chamber and stand beside him.
'Yyrkoon,' said Elric at last, 'those swords are mine.'
Yyrkoon smiled and reached up towards the blades. A peculiar moaning sound seemed to issue from them. A faint,
black radiance seemed to emanate from them. Elric saw the runes carved into them and he was afraid. Rackhir fitted an arrow to his bow. He drew the string back to his shoulder, sighting along the arrow at Prince Yyrkoon. 'If he must die, Elric, tell me.' 'Slay him,' said Elric.
And Rackhir released the string.
But the arrow moved very slowly through the air and then hung halfway between the archer and his intended target. Yyrkoon turned, a ghastly grin on his face. 'Mortal weapons are useless here,' he said. Elric said to Rackhir, 'He must be right. And your life is in danger, Rackhir. Go...' Rackhir gave him a puzzled look. 'No, I must stay here and help you...' Elric shook his head. 'You cannot help, you will only die if you stay. Go.' Reluctantly the Red Archer unstrung his bow, glanced suspiciously up at the two black swords, then squeezed his way through the doorway and was gone. 'Now, Yyrkoon,' said Elric, letting Aubec's sword fall to the floor. 'We must settle this, you and I.'
Chapter 4
Two Black Swords
AND THEN THE runeblades Stormbringer and Mournblade were gone from where they had hung so long. And Stormbringer had settled into Elric's right hand. And Mournblade lay in Prince Yyrkoon's right hand. And the two men stood on opposite sides of the Pulsing Cavern and regarded first each other and then the swords they held. The swords were singing. Their voices were faint but could be heard quite plainly. Elric lifted the huge blade easily and turned it this way and that, admiring its alien beauty. 'Stormbringer,' he said. And then he felt afraid. It was suddenly as if he had been born again and that this runesword was born with him. It was as if they had never been separate. 'Stormbringer.'
And the sword moaned sweetly and settled even more smoothly into his grasp. 'Stormbringer!' yelled Elric and he leapt at his cousin. 'Stormbringer!'
And he was full of fear--so full of fear. And the fear brought a wild kind of delight--a demonic need to fight and kill his cousin, to sink the blade deep into Yyrkoon's heart. To take vengeance. To spill blood. To send a soul to hell. And now Prince Yyrkoon's cry could be heard above the thrum of the sword-voices, the drumming of the pulse of the cavern. 'Mournblade!' And Mournblade came up to meet Stormbringer's blow and turn that blow and thrust back at Elric who swayed aside and brought Stormbringer round and down in a sidestroke which knocked Yyrkoon and Mournblade backward for an instant. But Stormbringer's next thrust was met again. And the next thrust was met. And the next. If the swordsmen were evenly matched, then so were the blades, which seemed possessed of their own wills, though they performed the wills of their wielders.
And the clang of the metal upon metal turned into a wild, metallic song which the swords sang. A joyful song as if they were glad at last to be back to battling, though they battled each other. And Elric barely saw his cousin, Prince Yyrkoon, at all, save for an occasional flash of his dark, wild face. Elric's attention was given entirely to the two black swords, for it seemed that the swords fought with the life of one of the swordsmen as a prize (or perhaps the lives of both, thought Elric) and that the rivalry between Elric and Yyrkoon was nothing compared with the brotherly rivalry between the swords who seemed full of pleasure at the chance to engage again after many millennia.
And this observation, as he fought--and fought for his soul as well as his life--gave Elric pause to consider his hatred of Yyrkoon. Kill Yyrkoon he would, but not at the will of another power. Not to give sport to these alien swords. Mournblade's point darted at his eyes and Stormbringer rose to deflect the thrust once more. Elric no longer fought his cousin. He fought the will of the two black swords. Stormbringer dashed for Yyrkoon's momentarily undefended throat. Elric clung to the sword and dragged it back, sparing his cousin's life. Stormbringer whined almost petulantly, like a dog stopped from biting an intruder. And Elric spoke through clenched teeth. 'I'll not be your puppet, runeblade. If we must be united, let it be upon a proper understanding.' The sword seemed to hesitate, to drop its guard, and Elric was hard put to defend himself against the whirling attack of Mournblade which, in turn, seemed to sense its advantage. Elric felt fresh energy pour up his right arm and into his body. This was what the sword could do. With it, he needed no drugs, would never be Weak again. In battle he would triumph. At peace, he could rule with pride. When he travelled, it could be alone and without fear. It was as if the sword reminded him of all these things, even as it returned Mournblade's attack.
And what must the sword have in return?
Elric knew. The sword told him, without words of any sort. Stormbringer needed to fight, for that was its reason for existence. Stormbringer needed to kill, for that was its source of energy, the lives and the souls of men, demons-- even gods.
And Elric hesitated, even as his cousin gave a huge, cackling yell and dashed at him so that Mournblade glanced off his helm and he was flung backwards and down and saw Yyrkoon gripping his moaning black sword in both hands to plunge the runeblade into Elric's body.
And Elric knew he would do anything to resist that fate--for his soul to be drawn into Mournblade and his strength to feed Prince Yyrkoon's strength. And he rolled aside, very quickly, and got to one knee and turned and lifted Stormbringer with one gauntleted hand upon the blade and the other upon the hilt to take the great blow Prince Yyrkoon brought upon it. And the two black swords shrieked as if in pain, and they shivered, and black radiance poured from them as blood might pour from a man pierced by many arrows. And Elric was driven, still on his knees, away from the radiance, gasping and sighing and peering here and there for sight of Yyrkoon who had disappeared.
And Elric knew that Stormbringer spoke to him again. If Elric did not wish to die by Mournblade, then Elric must accept the bargain which the Black Sword offered. 'He must not die!' said Elric. 'I will not slay him to make sport for you!' And through the black radiance ran Yyrkoon, snarling and snapping and whirling his runesword. Again Stormbringer darted through an opening, and again Elric made the blade pull back and Yyrkoon was only grazed.
Stormbringer writhed in Elric's hands. Elric said: 'You shall not be my master.' And Stormbringer seemed to understand and become quieter, as if reconciled. And Elric laughed, thinking that he now controlled the runesword and that from now on the blade would do his bidding. 'We shall disarm Yyrkoon,' said Elric. 'We shall not kill him.' Elric rose to his feet. Stormbringer moved with all the speed of a needle-thin rapier. It feinted, it parried, it thrust. Yyrkoon, who had been grinning in triumph, snarled and staggered back, the grin dropping from his sullen features. Stormbringer now worked for Elric. It made the moves that Elric wished to make. Both Yyrkoon and Mournblade seemed disconcerted by this turn of events. Mournblade shouted as if in astonishment at its brother's behaviour. Elric struck at Yyrkoon's sword-arm, pierced cloth--pierced flesh--pierced sinew--pierced bone. Blood came, soaking Yyrkoon's arm and dripping down onto the hilt of the sword. The blood was slippery. It weakened Yyrkoon's grip on his runesword. He took it in both hands, but he was unable to hold it firmly.
Elric, too, took Stormbringer in both hands. Unearthly strength surged through him. With a gigantic blow he dashed Stormbringer against Mournblade where blade met hilt. The runesword few from Yyrkoon's grasp. It sped across the Pulsing Cavern.
Elric smiled. He had defeated his own sword's will and, in turn, had defeated the brother sword.
Mournblade fell against the wall of the Pulsing Cavern and for a moment was still. A groan then seemed to escape the defeated runesword. A high-pitched shriek filled the Pulsing Cavern. Blackness flooded over the eery pink light and extinguished it. When the light returned Elric saw that a scabbard lay at his feet. The scabbard was black and of the same alien craftsmanship as the runesword. Elric saw Yyrkoon. The prince was on his knees and he was sobbing, his eyes darting about the Pulsing Cavern seeking Mournblade, looking at Elric with fright as if he knew he must now be slain.
'Mournblade?' Yyrkoon said hopelessly. He knew he was to die. Mournblade had vanished from the Pulsing Cavern. 'Your sword is gone,' said Elric quietly. Yyrkoon whimpered and tried to crawl towards the entrance of the cavern. But the entrance had shrunk to the size of a small coin. Yyrkoon wept. Stormbringer trembled, as if thirsty for Yyrkoon's soul. Elric stooped. Yyrkoon began to speak rapidly. 'Do not slay me, Elric--not with that runeblade. I will do anything you wish. I will die in any other way.' Elric said: 'We are victims, cousin, of a conspiracy--a game played by gods, demons and sentient swords. They wish one of us dead. I suspect they wish you dead more than they wish me dead. And that is the reason why I shall not slay you
here.' He picked up the scabbard. He forced Stormbringer into it and at once the sword was quiet. Elric took off his old scabbard and looked around for Aubec's sword, but that, too, was gone. He dropped the old scabbard and hooked the new one to his belt. He rested his left hand upon the pommel of Stormbringer and he looked not without sympathy upon the creature that was his cousin.
'You are a worm, Yyrkoon. But is that your fault?' Yyrkoon gave him a puzzled glance. 'I wonder, if you had all your desire, would you cease to be a worm, cousin?' Yyrkoon raised himself to his knees. A little hope began to show in his eyes. Elric smiled and drew a deep breath. 'We shall see,' he said. 'You must agree to wake Cymoril from her sorcerous slumber.' 'You have humbled me, Elric,' said Yyrkoon in a small, pitiful voice. 'I will wake her. Or would...' 'Can you not undo your spell?'
'We cannot escape from the Pulsing Cavern. It is past the time...' 'What's this?'
'I did not think you would follow me. And then I thought I would easily finish you. And now it is past the time. One can keep the entrance open for only a little while. It will admit anyone who cares to enter the Pulsing Cavern, but it will let
no-one out after the power of the spell dies. I gave much to know that spell.' 'You have given too much for everything,' said Elric. He went to the entrance and peered through. Rackhir waited on the other side. The Red Archer had an anxious expression. Elric said: 'Warrior Priest of Phum, it seems that my cousin and I are trapped in here. The entrance will not part for us.' Elric tested the warm, moist stuff of the wall. It would not open more than a tiny fraction. 'It seems that you can join us or else go back. If you do join us, you share our fate.'
'It is not much of a fate if I go back,' said Rackhir. 'What chances have you?' 'One,' said Elric. 'I can invoke my patron.'
'A Lord of Chaos?' Rackhir made a wry face. 'Exactly,' said Elric. 'I speak of Arioch.'. 'Arioch, eh? Well, he does not care for renegades from Phum.' 'What do you choose to do?'
Rackhir stepped forward. Elric stepped back. Through the opening came Rackhir's head, followed by his shoulders, followed by the rest of him. The entrance closed again immediately. Rackhir stood up and untangled the string of his bow from the stave, smoothing it. 'I agreed to share your fate--to gamble all on escaping from this plane,' said the Red Archer. He looked surprised when he saw Yyrkoon. 'Your enemy is still alive?'
'Aye.'
'You are merciful indeed!'
'Perhaps. Or obstinate. I would not slay him merely because some supernatural agency used him as a pawn, to be killed if I should win. The Lords of the higher Worlds do not as yet control me completely-nor will they if I have any power at all to resist them.'
Rackhir grinned. 'I share your view--though I'm not optimistic about its realism. I see you have one of those black swords at your belt. Will that not hack a way through the cavern?' 'No,' said Yyrkoon from his place against the wall. 'Nothing can harm the stuff of the Pulsing Cavern.' 'I'll believe you,' said Elric, 'for I do not intend to draw this new sword of mine often. I must learn how to control it first.' 'So Arioch must be summoned.' Rackhir sighed. ' If that is possible,' said Elric. 'He will doubtless destroy me,' said Rackhir, looking to Elric in the hope that the albino would deny this statement. Elric looked grave. 'I might be able to strike a bargain with him. It will also test something.' Elric turned his back on Rackhir and on Yyrkoon. He adjusted his mind. He sent it out through vast spaces and complicated mazes. And he cried: 'Arioch! Arioch! Aid me, Arioch!'
He had a sense of something listening to him. 'Arioch!' Something shifted in the places where his mind went. 'Arioch...'
And Arioch heard him. He knew it was Arioch.
Rackhir gave a horrified yell. Yyrkoon screamed. Elric turned and saw that something disgusting had appeared near the far wall. It was black and it was foul and it slobbered and its shape was intolerably alien. Was this Arioch? How could it be? Arioch was beautiful. But perhaps, thought Elric, this was Arioch's true shape. Upon this plane, in this peculiar cavern, Arioch could not deceive those who looked upon him.
But then the shape had disappeared and a beautiful youth with ancient eyes stood looking at the three mortals. 'You have won the sword, Elric,' said Arioch, ignoring the others. 'I congratulate you. And you have spared your cousin's life. Why so?' 'More than one reason,' said Elric. 'But let us say he must remain alive in order to wake Cymoril.' Arioch's face bore a little, secret smile for a moment and Elric realised that he had avoided a trap. If he had killed Yyrkoon, Cymoril would never have woken again. 'And what is this little traitor doing with you?' Arioch turned a cold eye on Rackhir who did his best to stare back at the Chaos Lord. 'He is my friend,' said Elric. 'I made a bargain with him. If he aided me to find the Black Sword, then I would take him back with me to our own plane.' 'That is impossible. Rackhir is an exile here. That is his punishment.'
'He comes back with me,' said Elric. And now he unhooked the scabbard holding Stormbringer from his belt and he held the sword out before him. 'Or I do not take the sword with me. Failing that, we all three remain here for eternity.' 'That is not sensible, Elric. Consider your responsibilities.' 'I have considered them. That is my decision.' Arioch's smooth face had just a tinge of anger. 'You must take the sword. It is your destiny.' 'So you say. But I now know that the sword may only be borne by me. You cannot bear it, Arioch, or you would. Only I--or another mortal like me--can take it from the Pulsing Cavern. Is that not so?' 'You are clever, Elric of Melnibone.' Arioch spoke with sardonic admiration. 'And you are a fitting servant of Chaos. Very well--that traitor can go with you. But he would be best warned to tread warily. 'The Lords of Chaos have been known to bear malice...'
Rackhir said hoarsely: 'So I have heard, My Lord Arioch.'
Arioch ignored the archer. 'The man of Phum is not, after all, important. And if you wish to spare your cousin's life, so be it, It matters little. Destiny can contain a few extra threads in her design and still accomplish her original aims.' 'Very well then,' said Elric. 'Take us from this place.' 'Where to?' 'Why, to Melnibone, if you please.'
With a smile that was almost tender Arioch looked down on Elric and a silky hand stroked Elric's cheek. Arioch had grown to twice his original size. 'Oh, you are surely the sweetest of all my slaves,' said the Lord of Chaos. And there was a whirling. There was a sound like the roar of the sea. There was a dreadful sense of nausea. And three weary men stood on the floor of the great throne room in Imrryr. The throne room was deserted, save that in one corner a black shape, like smoke, writhed for a moment and then was gone.
Rackhir crossed the floor and seated himself carefully upon the first step to the Ruby Throne. Yyrkoon and Elric remained where they were, staring into each other's eyes. Then Elric laughed and slapped his scabbarded sword. 'Now you must fulfil your promises to me, cousin. Then I have a proposition to put to you.'
'It is like a market place,' said Rackhir, leaning on one elbow and inspecting the feather in his scarlet hat. 'So many bargains!'
Chapter 5
The Pale King's Mercy
YYRKOON STEPPED BACK from his sister's bed. He was worn and his features were drawn and there was no spirit in him as he said: 'It is done.' He turned away and looked through the window at the towers of Imrryr, at the harbour where the returned golden battle-barges rode at anchor, together with the ship which had been King Straasha's gift to Elric. 'She will wake in a moment,' added Yyrkoon absently.
Dyvim Tvar and Rackhir the Red Archer looked inquiringly at Elric who kneeled by the bed, staring into the face of Cymoril. Her face grew peaceful as he watched and for one terrible moment he suspected Prince Yyrkoon of tricking him and of killing Cymoril. But then the eyelids moved and the eyes opened and she saw him and she smiled. 'Elric? The dreams... You are safe?'
'I am safe, Cymoril. As are you.' 'Yyrkoon...?' 'He woke you.'
'But you swore to slay him...'
'I was as much subject to sorcery as you. My mind was confused. It is still confused where some matters are concerned. But Yyrkoon is changed now. I defeated him. He does not doubt my power. He no longer lusts to usurp me.' 'You are merciful, Elric.' She brushed raven hair from her face.
Elric exchanged a glance with Rackhir.
'It might not be mercy which moves me,' said Elric. 'It might merely be a sense of fellowship with Yyrkoon.' 'Fellowship? Surely you cannot feel... ?'
'We are both mortal. We were both victims of a game played between the Lords of the Higher Worlds. My loyalty must, finally, be to my own kind--and that is why I ceased to hate Yyrkoon.' 'And that is mercy,' said Cymoril.
Yyrkoon walked towards the door. 'May I leave, my lord emperor?' Elric thought he detected a strange light in his defeated cousin's eyes. But perhaps it was only humility or despair. He nodded. Yyrkoon went from the room, closing the door softly. Dyvim Tvar said: 'Trust Yyrkoon not at all, Elric. He will betray you again.' The Lord of the Dragon Caves was troubled. 'No,' said Elric. 'If he does not fear me, he fears the sword I now carry.' 'And you should fear that sword,' said Dyvim Tvar. 'No,' said Elric. 'I am the master of the sword.' Dyvim Tvar made to speak again but then shook his head almost sorrowfully, bowed and, together with Rackhir the Red Archer, left Elric and Cymoril alone. Cymoril took Elric in her arms. They kissed. They wept.
There were celebrations in Melnibone for a week.
Now almost all the ships and men and dragons were home. And Elric was home, having proved his right to rule so well that all his strange quirks of character (this 'mercy' of his was perhaps the strangest) were accepted by the populace. In the throne room there was a ball and it was the most lavish ball any of the courtiers had ever known. Elric danced with Cymoril, taking a full part in the activities. Only Yyrkoon did not dance, preferring to remain in a quiet corner below the gallery of the music-slaves; ignored by the guests. Rackhir the Red Archer danced with several Melnibonean ladies and made assignations with them all, for he was a hero now in Melnibone. Dyvim Tvar danced, too, though his eyes were often brooding when they fell upon Prince Yyrkoon.
And later, when people ate, Elric spoke to Cymoril as they sat together on the dais of the Ruby Throne. 'Would you be empress, Cymoril?'
'You know I will marry you, Elric. We have both known that for many a year, have we not?' 'So you would be my wife?'
'Aye.' She laughed for she thought he joked. 'And not be empress? For a year at least?' 'What mean you, my lord.' 'I must go away from Melnibone, Cymoril, for a year. What I have learned in recent months has made me want to travel the Young Kingdoms--see how other nations conduct their
affairs. For I think Melnibone must change if she is to survive. She could become a great force for good in the world, for she still has much power.' 'For good?' Cymoril was surprised and there was a little alarm in her voice, too. 'Melnibone has never stood for good or for evil, but for herself and the satisfaction of her desires.' 'I would see that changed.'
'You intend to alter everything?'
'I intend to travel the world and then decide if there is any point to such a decision. The Lords of the Higher Worlds have ambitions in our world. Though they have given me aid, of late, I fear them. I should like to see if it is possible for men to rule their own affairs.'
'And you will go?' There were tears in her eyes. 'When?'
'Tomorrow--when Rackhir leaves. We will take King Straasha's ship and make for the Isle of the Purple Towns where Rackhir has friends. Will you come?' 'I cannot imagine--I cannot. Oh, Elric, why spoil this happiness we now have?' 'Because I feel that the happiness cannot last unless we know completely what we are.' She frowned. 'Then you must discover that, if that is what you wish,' she said slowly. 'But it is for you to discover alone, Elric, for I have no such desire. You must go by yourself into those barbarian lands.' 'You will not accompany me?'
'It is not possible. I--I am Melnibonean...' She sighed. ' I love you, Elric.' 'And I you, Cymoril.'
'Then we shall be married when you return. In a year.'
Elric was full of sorrow, but he knew that his decision was correct. If he did not leave, he would grow restless soon enough and if he grew restless he might come to regard Cymoril as an enemy, someone who had trapped him. 'Then you must rule as empress until I return,' he said. 'No, Elric I cannot take that responsibility.' 'Then, who...? Dyvim Tvar...'
'I know Dyvim Tvar. He will not take such power. Magum Colim, perhaps . . .' 'No.'
'Then you must stay, Elric.'
But Elric's gaze had travelled through the crowd in the throne room below. It stopped when it reached a lonely figure seated by itself under the gallery of the music-slaves. And Elric smiled ironically and said: 'Then it must be Yyrkoon.'
Cymoril was horrified. 'No, Elric. He will abuse any power...'
'Not now. And it is just. He is the only one who wanted to be emperor. Now he can rule as emperor for a year in my stead. If he rules well, I may consider abdicating in his favour. If he
rules badly, it will prove, once and for all, that his ambitions were misguided.' 'Elric,' said Cymoril. 'I love you. But you are a fool--a criminal, if you trust Yyrkoon again.' 'No,' he said evenly. 'I am not a fool. All I am is Elric. I cannot help that, Cymoril.' 'It is Elric that I love!' she cried. 'But Elric is doomed. We are all doomed unless you remain here now.' 'I cannot. Because I love you, Cymoril, I cannot.' · She stood up. She was weeping. She was lost. 'And I am Cymoril,' she said. 'You will destroy us both.' Her voice softened and she stroked his hair. 'You will destroy us, Elric.' 'No,' he said. 'I will build something that will be better. I will discover things. When I return we shall marry and we shall live long and we shall be happy, Cymoril.' And now, Elric had told three lies. The first concerned his cousin Yyrkoon. The second concerned the Black Sword. The third concerned Cymoril. And upon those three lies was Elric's destiny to be built, for it is only about things which concern us most profoundly that we lie clearly and with profound conviction.
EPILOGUE
THERE WAS A port called Menii which was one of the humblest and friendliest of the Purple Towns. Like the others on the isle it was built mainly of the purple stone which gave the towns their name. And there were red roofs on the houses and there were bright-sailed boats of all kinds in the harbour as Elric and Rackhir the Red Archer came ashore in the early morning when just a few sailors were beginning to make their way down to their ships.
King Straasha's lovely ship lay some way out beyond the harbour wall. They had used a small boat to cross the water between it and the town. They turned and looked back at the ship, They had sailed it themselves, without crew, and the ship had sailed well. 'So, I must seek peace and mythic Tanelorn,' said Rackhir, with a certain amount of self-mockery. He stretched and yawned and the bow and the quiver danced on his back. Elric was dressed in simple costume that might have marked any soldier-of-fortune of the Young Kingdoms. He looked fit and relaxed. He smiled into the sun. The only remarkable thing about his garb was the great, black runesword at his side. Since he had donned the sword, he had needed no drugs to sustain him at all.
'And I must seek knowledge in the lands I find marked upon my map,' said Elric. 'I must learn and I must carry what I learn back to Melnibone at the end of a year. I wish that Cymoril had accompanied me, but I understand her reluctance.' 'You will go back?' Rackhir said. 'When a year is over?'
'She will draw me back!' Elric laughed. 'My only fear is that I will weaken and return before my quest is finished.' 'I should like to come with you,' said Rackhir, 'for I have travelled in most lands and would be as good a guide as I was in the netherworld. But I am sworn to find Tanelorn, for all I know it does not really exist.' 'I hope that you find it, Warrior Priest of Phum,' said Elric.
'I shall never be that again,' said Rackhir. Then his eyes widened a little. 'Why, look--your ship!' And Elric looked and saw the ship that had once been called The Ship Which Sails Over Land and Sea, and he saw that slowly it was sinking. King Straasha was taking it back. 'The elementals are friends, at least,' he said. 'But I fear their power wanes as the power of Melnibone wanes. For all that we of the Dragon Isle are considered evil by the folk of the Young Kingdoms, we share much in common with the spirits of Air, Earth, Fire and Water.'
Rackhir said, as the masts of the ship disappeared beneath the waves: 'I envy you those friends, Elric. You may trust them.' 'Aye.'
Rackhir looked at the runesword hanging on Elric's hip. 'But you would be wise to trust nothing else,' he added. Elric laughed. 'Fear not for me, Rackhir, for I am my own master--for a year at least. And I am master of this sword now!'
The sword seemed to stir at his side and he took firm hold of its grip and slapped Rackhir on the back and he laughed and shook his white hair so that it drifted in the air and he lifted his strange, red eyes to the sky and he said: 'I shall be a new man when I return to Melnibone.'
Here ends Book One of the Elric Saga
Tarl Cabot has always believed himself to be a citizen of Earth. He has no inkling that his destiny is far greater than the small planet he has inhabited for the first twenty-odd years of his life. One frosty winter night in the New England woods, he finds himself transported to the planet of Gor, also known as Counter-Earth, where everything is dramatically different from anything he has ever experienced. It emerges that Tarl is to be trained as a Tarnsman, one of the most honored positions in the rigid, caste-bound Gorean society. He is disciplined by the best teachers and warriors that Gor has to offer…but to what end?
This is the first book of John Norman's popular and controversial Gorean Saga, a series of novels the author began in 1967 with Tarnsman of Gor and are now considered cult classics.
TARNSMAN OFGOR Volume one of the Chronicles of Counter- Earth by John Norman Dec, 1966 Published 1967, by DelRey/Ballantine Cover art by Boris Vallejo
This ePub edition v1.0 by Dead^Man Dec, 2010
Earth could never know of Gor, the world always on the opposite side of the sun. But Gor somehow knew about Earth, as Tarl Cabot soon discovered. Taken by force to that savage world, Cabot was forced to become a tarnsman - a warrior who could control the great war birds of Ko-ro-ba.
Gor was a world of slaves snd beautiful women, of human domination by the alien, secret Priest Kings. And it was also the world of Talena, tempestuous daughter of the greatest warlord of Gor. She waited for the man who could subdue her - the man who would be her master.
But was Tarl Cabot that man?
CONTENTS Chapter One: A HANDFUL OF EARTH Chapter Two: THE COUNTER- EARTH Chapter Three: THE TARN Chapter Four: THE MISSION Chapter Five: LIGHTS OF THE Chapter Six: NAR THE SPIDER Chapter Seven: A UBAR’S Chapter Eight: I ACQUIRE A COMPANION Chapter Nine: KAZRAK OF PORT KAR
Chapter Eleven: THE CITY OF TENTS Chapter Twelve: IN THE TARN’S NEST Chapter Thirteen: MARLENUS, UBAR OF AR Chapter Fourteen: THE TARN DEATH Chapter Fifteen: IN MINTAR’S COMPOUND Chapter Sixteen1: THE GIRL IN THE CAGE Chapter Seventeen: CHAINS OF GOLD Chapter Eighteen: IN THE CENTRAL CYLINDER
Chapter One:A HANDFUL OF EARTH
My name is Tarl Cabot. The name is supposed to have been shortened in the fifteenth century from the Italian surname Cabato. As far as I know, however, I have no connection with the Venetian explorer who carried the banner of Henry VII to the New World. Such a connection seems unlikely for a number of reasons, among them the fact that my people were simple
tradesmen of Bristol, and uniformly fair-complexioned and topped with a blaze of the most outrageous red hair. None the less, such coincidences, even if they are only geographical, linger in family memory – our small challenge to the ledgers and arithmetic of an existence measured in bolts of cloth sold. I like to think there may have been a Cabot in Bristol, one of us, who watched our Italian namesake weigh anchor in the early morning of that second of May, 1497. You may remark my first name, and I assure you that it gave me quite as much trouble as it might
you, particularly during my early school years, when it occasioned almost as many contests of physical skill as my red hair. Let us say simply that it is not a common name, not common on this world of ours. It was given to me by my father, who disappeared when I was quite young. I thought him dead until I received his strange message, more than twenty years after he had vanished. My mother, whom he inquired after, had died when I was about six, somewhere about the time I entered school. Biographical details are tedious, so suffice it to say that I was a bright child, fairly
large for my age, and was given a creditable upbringing by an aunt who furnished everything that a child might need, with the possible exception of love. Surprisingly enough, I managed to gain entrance to the University of Oxford, but I shall not choose to embarrass my college by entering its somewhat too revered name in this narrative. I graduated decently, having failed to astound either myself or my tutors. Like a large number of young men, I found myself passably educated, able to parse a sentence or so in Greek, and familiar enough with the
abstractions of philosophy and economics to know that I would not be likely to fit into that world to which they claimed to bear some obscure relation. I was not, however, reconciled to ending up on the shelves of my aunt’s shop, along with the cloth and ribbon, and so I embarked upon a wild, but not too wild, adventure, all things considered. Being literate and not too dull, and having read enough history to tell the Renaissance from the Industrial Revolution, I applied to several small American colleges for an instructorship in history –
English history, of course. I told them I was somewhat more advanced academically than I was, and they believed me, and my tutors, in their letters of recommendation, being good fellows, were kind enough not to disabuse them of this illusion. I believe my tutors thoroughly enjoyed the situation, which they, naturally, did not officially allow me to know they understood. It was the Revolutionary War all over again. On1e of the colleges to which I applied, one perhaps somewhat less perceptive than the rest, a small liberal arts college for
men in New Hampshire, entered into negotations, and I had soon received what was to be my first and, I suppose, my last appointment in the academic world. In time I assumed I would be found out, but meanwhile I had my passage to America paid and a position for at least one year. This outcome struck me as being a pleasant if perplexing state of affairs. I admit I was annoyed by the suspicion that I had been given the appointment largely on the grounds that I would be faculty exotica. Surely I had no publications, and I am confident there must have been several
candidates from American universities whose credentials and capacities would have far outshone my own, except for the desiderated British accent. Yes, there would be the round of teas and the cocktail and supper invitations. I liked America very much, though I was quite busy the first semester, smashing through numerous texts in an undignified manner, attempting to commit enough English history to memory to keep at least a reign or so ahead of my students. I discovered, to my dismay, that being English does not automatically qualify one as an
authority on English history. Fortunately, my departmental chairman, a gentle, bespectacled man, whose speciality was American economic history, knew even less than I did, or, at least, was considerate enough to allow me to believe so. The Christmas vacation helped greatly. I was especially counting on the time between semesters to catch up, or, better, to lengthen my lead on the students. But after the term papers, the tests, and the grading of the first semester, I was afflicted with a rather irresistible desire to chuck the British Empire
and go for a long, long walk – indeed, even a camping trip to the nearby White Mountains. I borrowed some camp gear, mostly a knapsack and a sleeping bag, from one of the few friends I had made on the faculty – an instructor also, but in the deplorable subject of physical education. He and I had fenced occasionally and had gone for infrequent walks. I sometimes wonder if he is curious about what happened to his camp gear or to Tarl Cabot. Surely the administration of the college was curious, and angry at the
inconvenience of having to replace an instructor in the middle of the year, for Tarl Cabot was never heard of again on the campus of that college. My friend in the physical education department drove me a few miles into the mountains and dropped me off. We agreed to meet again in three days at the same place. The first thing I did was check my compass, as if I knew what I was up to, and then proceeded to leave the highway well behind me. More quickly than I realised, I was alone in the woods, climbing. Bristol, as you
know, is a heavily urbanised area, and I was not well prepared for my first encounter with nature. Surely the college, though somewhat rural, was at least one of the outworks of, say, material civilisation. I was not frightened, being confident that walking steadily in any given direction would be sure to bring me to one highway or another, or some stream or another, and that it would be impossible to become lost, or at least for long. Primarily, I was exhilarated, being alone, with myself and the green pines and the patches of snow. I trudged for the better part of
two hours before I finally yielded to the weight of the pack. I ate a cold lunch and was on my way again, getting deeper into the mountains. I was pleased that I had regularly taken a turn or two around the college track. That evening I dropped my pack near a rock platform and set about gathering some wood for a fire. I had gone a bit from my makeshift lamp when I stopped, startled for a moment. Something in1 the darkness, to the left, lying on the ground, seemed to be glowing. It held a calm, hazy blue radiance. I put down the wood I had gathered
and approached the object, more curious than anything else. It appeared to be a rectangular metal envelope, rather thin, not much larger than the normal envelope one customarily uses for correspondence. I touched it; it seemed to be hot. My hair rose on the back of my head; my eyes widened. I read, in a rather archaic English script inscribed on the envelope, two words – my name, Tarl Cabot. It was a joke. Somehow my friend had followed me, must be hiding somewhere in the darkness. I called his name, laughing. There
was no answer. I raced about in the woods a moment, shaking bushes, batting the snow from the low- hanging branches of pines. I then walked more slowly, more carefully, being quiet. I would find him! Some fifteen minutes passed, and I was growing cold, angry. I shouted to him. I widened my search, keeping that strange metal envelope with its blue ambience the centre of my movements. At last I realised he must have planted the odd object, left it for me to discover, and was probably on his way home by now or was perhaps
camping somewhere nearby. I was confident he was not within earshot or he would eventually have responded. It was no longer funny, not if he was near. I returned to the object and picked it up. It seemed to be cooler now, though it still had the distinct impression of warmth. It was a strange object. I brought it back to my camp and built my fire, against the darkness and cold. I was shivering in spite of my heavy clothing. I was sweating. My heart was beating. My breath was short. I was frightened. Accordingly, slowly and calmly,
I set about tending the fire, opened a can of chili, and set up sticks to hold the tiny cooking pot over the fire. These domestic activities slowed my pulse and succeeded in convincing me that I could be patient and was even not too much interested in the contents of the metal envelope. When the chili was heating, and not before, I turned my attention to the puzzling object. I turned it over and over in my hands and studied it by the light of the campfire. It was about twelve inches long and four inches high. It weighed, I guessed, about four ounces. The colour of the metal was
blue, and something of its ambience continued to characterise it, but the glow was fading. Also, the envelope no longer seemed warm to the touch. How long had it been waiting for me in the woods? How long ago had it been placed there? While I considered this, the glow faded abruptly. If it had faded earlier, I never would have discovered it in the woods. It was almost as if the glow had been connected with the intent of the sender, as if the glow, no longer needed, had been allowed to fade. “The message has been delivered,” I said to myself, feeling a bit silly
as I said it. I did not find my private joke very funny. I looked closely at the lettering. It resembled some now outdated English script, but I knew too little of such things to hazard much of a guess at the date. Something about the lettering reminded me of that on a colonial charter, a page of which had been photocopied for an illustration in one of my books. Seventeenth century perhaps. The lettering iteslf seemed to be inset in the envelope, bonded in its metallic structure. I could find no seam or flap in the envelope. I tried to crease the envelope with my
thumbnail, but failed. Feeling rather foolish, I took out the can opener I had used on the chili can and attempted to force the metal point through the envelope. Light as the envelope seemed to be, it resisted the point as if I were trying to open an anvil. I leaned on the can opener with both arms, pressing down with all my weight. The point of the can ope1ner bent into a right angle, but the envelope had not been scratched. I handled the envelope carefully, puzzled, trying to determine if it might be opened. There was a small circle on the back of the envelope,
and in the circle seemed to be the print of a thumb. I wiped it on my sleeve, but it did not disappear. The other prints on the envelope, from my fingers, wiped away immediately. As well as I could, I scrutinised the print in the circle. It, too, like the lettering, seemed a part of the metal, yet its ridges and lineaments were exceedingly delicate. At last I was confident that it was a part of the envelope. I pressed it with my finger; nothing happened. Tired of this strange business, I set the envelope aside and my attention to the chili, which was now
bubbling over the small campfire. After I had eaten, I removed my boots and coat and crawled into the sleeping bag. I lay there beside the dying fire, looking up at the branch-lined sky and the mineral glory of the unconscious universe. I lay awake for a long time, feeling alone, yet not alone, as one sometimes does in the wilderness, feeling as if one were the only living object on the planet and as if the closest things to o n e – one’s fate and destiny perhaps – lay outside our small world, somewhere in the remote, alien pastures of the stars.
A thought struck me with sudden swiftness, and I was afraid, but I knew what I must do. The matter of the envelope was not a hoax, not a trick. Somewhere, deep in whatever I am, I knew that and had known it from the beginning. Almost as if dreaming, yet with vivid clarity, I inched partly out of my sleeping bag. I rolled over and threw some wood on the fire and reached for the envelope. Sitting in the sleeping bag, I waited for the fire to rise a bit. Then I carefully placed my right thumb in the impression in the envelope, pressing down firmly. It answered to my touch, as I had
expected it to, as I had feared it would. Perhaps only one man could open that envelope – he whose print fitted the strange lock, he whose name was Tarl Cabot. The apparently seamless envelope crackled open, almost with the sound of cellophane. An object fell from the envelope, a ring of red metal bearing the simple crest ‘C’. I barely noticed it in my excitement. There was lettering on the inside of the envelope, which had opened in a manner surprisingly like a foreign air-mail letter, where the envelope serves also as stationery. The
lettering was in the same script as my name on the outside of the envelope. I noticed the date and froze, my hands clenched on the metallic paper. It was dated the third of February, 1640. It was dated more than three hundred years ago, and I was reading it in the sixth decade of the twentieth century. Oddly enough, also, the day on which I was reading it was the third of February. The signature at the bottom was not in the old script, but might have been done in modern cursive English. I had seen the signature once or twice before, on some letters my
aunt had saved. I knew the signature, though I could not remember the man. It was the signature of my father, Matthew Cabot, who had disappeared when I was an infant. I was dizzy, unsettled. It seemed my vision reeled; I couldn’t move. Things grew black for a moment, but I shook myself and clenched my teeth, breathed in the sharp, cold mountain air, once, twice, three times, slowly, gathering the piercing contact of reality into my lungs, reassuring myself that I was alive, not dreaming, that I held in my hands a letter with an incredible
date, delivered more than three hundred years later in the mountains of New Hampshire, written by a man who presumably, if still alive, was, as we reckon time, no more than fifty years of age – 1my father. Even now I can remember the letter to the last word. I think I will carry its simple, abrupt message burned into the cells of my brain until, as it is elsewhere said, I have returned to the Cities of Dust.
The third day of February, in the Year of Our Lord 1640.
Tarl Cabot, Son:
Forgive me, but I have little choice in these matters. It has been decided. Do whatever you think is in your own best interest, but the fate is upon you, and you will not escape. I wish health to you and to your mother. Carry on your person the ring of red metal, and bring me, if you would, a handful of our green earth. Discard this letter. It will be destroyed.
With affection, Matthew Cabot I read and reread the letter and had become unnaturally calm. It seemed clear to me that I was not
insane, or if I was, that insanity was a state of mental clarity and comprehension quite apart from the torment that I had conceived it to be. I placed the letter in my knapsack. What I must do was fairly obvious – make my way out of the mountains as soon as it was light. No, that might be too late. It would be mad, scrambling about in the darkness, but there seemed to be nothing else that would serve. I did not know how much time I had, but even if it was only a few hours, I might be able to reach some highway or stream or perhaps a cabin.
I checked my compass to get the bearing back to the highway. I looked uneasily about in the darkness. An owl hooted once, perhaps a hundred yards to the right. Something out there might be watching me. It was an unpleasant feeling. I pulled on my boots and coat, rolled my sleeping bag, and fixed the pack. I kicked the fire to pieces, stamping out the embers, scuffing dirt over the sparks. Just as the fire was sputtering out, I noticed a glint in the ashes. Bending down, I retrieved the ring. It was warm from the ashes, hard, substantial – a piece of reality. It
was there. I dropped it into the pocket of my coat and started off on my compass-bearing, trying to make my way back to the highway. I felt stupid trying to hike in the dark. I was asking for a broken leg or ankle, if not a neck. Still, if I could put a mile or so between myself and the old camp, that should be sufficient to give myself the margin of safety I needed – from what I didn’t know. I might then wait until morning and start off in the light, secure, confident. Moreover, it would be a simple matter to cover one’s tracks in the light. The important thing was not to
be at the old camp. I had made my way perilously through the darkness for perhaps twenty minutes when, to my horror, my knapsack and bedroll seemed to burst into blue flame on my back. It was an instant’s action to hurl them from me, and I gaze1d, bewildered, awe-stricken, at what seemed to be a furious blue combustion that lit the pines on all sides as if with acetylene flames. It was like staring into a furnace. I knew that it was the envelope that had burst into flame, taking with it my knapsack and bedroll. I shuddered, thinking of what might have happened if I had
been carrying it in the pocket of my coat. Strangely enough, now that I think of it, I didn’t run headlong from the spot, though I can’t see why, and the thought did cross my mind that the bright, flarelike luminescence would reveal my position, if it was of interest to anyone or anything. With a small flashlight I knelt beside the flakes of my knapsack and bedroll. The stones on which they had fallen were blackened. There was no trace of the envelope. It seemed to have been totally consumed. There was an unpleasant, acrid odour in the air,
some fumes of a sort that I was not familiar with. The thought came to me that the ring, which I had dropped in my pocket, might similarly burst into flame, but, unaccountably perhaps, I doubted it. There might be a point in someone’s destroying the letter, but presumably there would be little point or no point in destroying the ring. Why should it have been sent if not to have been kept? Besides, I had been warned about the letter – a warning I had foolishly neglected – but had been asked to carry the ring. Whatever it was, father or no, that was the source of these frightening
events, it did not seem to wish me harm, but then, I thought, somewhat bitterly, floods and earthquakes presumably wish no one harm either. Who knew the nature of the things or forces that were afoot that night in the mountains, things and forces that might perhaps smash me, casually, as one innocently steps on an insect without being aware of it or caring? I still had the compass, and that constituted a firm link to reality. The silent but intense explosion of the envelope into flames had caused me momentarily to become confused – that and the sudden return to the darkness from
the hideous glaring light of the disintegrating envelope. My compass would get me out. With my flashlight I examined it. As the thin, sharp beam struck the face of the compass, my heart stopped. The needle was spinning crazily, and oscillating backward and forward, as if the laws of nature had suddenly been abridged in its vicinity. For the first time since I had opened the envelope, I began to lose my control. The compass had been my anchor and trust. I had counted on it. Now it had gone crazy. There was a loud noise, but
now I think it must have been the sound of my own voice, a sudden frightened shriek for which I shall always bear the shame. The next thing I was running like a demented animal, in any direction, every direction. How long I ran I don’t know. It may have been hours, perhaps only a few minutes. I slipped and fell dozens of times and ran into the prickly branches of pines, the needles stabbing at my face. I may have been sobbing; I remember the taste of salt in my mouth. But mostly I remember a blind, headlong flight, a panic- stricken, unworthy, sickening flight.
Once I saw two eyes in the darkness and screamed and ran from them, hearing the flap of wings behind me and the startled cry of an owl. Once I startled a small band of deer and found myself in the midst of their bounding shapes buffeting me in the darkness. The moon came out, and the mountainside was suddenly lit with its cold beauty, white on the snow in the trees and on the side of the slope, sparkling on the rocks. I could run no further. I fell to the ground, gasping for breath, suddenly asking myself why I had run. For the first time in my life I
had felt full, unreasoning fear, and it had gripped me like the paws of some grotesque predatory animal. I had surrendered to it for just a moment, and it had become a force that had carr1ied me, hurling me about as if I were a swimmer captured in surging waves – a force that could not be resisted. It had departed now. I must never surrender to it again. I looked around and recognised the platform of rock near which I had set my bedroll. I saw the ashes of my fire. I had returned to my camp. Somehow I’d known that I would. As I lay there in the moonlight, I
felt the earth beneath me, against my aching muscles and the body that was covered with the foul-smelling sheen of fear and sweat. I felt then that it was good even to feel pain. Feeling was the important thing, I was alive. I saw the ship descend. For a moment it looked like a falling star, but then it suddenly became clear and substantial, like a broad, thick disc of silver. It was silent and settled on the rock platform, scarcely disturbing the light snow that was scattered on it. There was a slight wind in the pine needles, and I rose to my feet. As I did so, a
door in the side of the ship slid quietly upward. I must go in. My father’s words recurred in my memory: “The fate is upon you.” Before entering the ship, I stopped at the side of the large, flat rock on which it rested. I bent down and scooped up, as my father had asked, a handful of our green earth. I, too, felt that it was important to take something with me, something which, in a way, was my native soil. The soil of my planet, my world.
Chapter Two:THE COUNTER-EARTH
I remembered nothing from the time I’d boarded the silver disc in the mountains of New Hampshire until now. I awoke, feeling rested, and opened my eyes, half expecting to see my room in the alumni house at the college. I turned my head, without pain or discomfort. I seemed to be lying on some hard, flat object, perhaps a table, in a circular room with a low ceiling some seven feet high. There were five narrow windows, not large
enough to let a man through; they rather reminded me of ports for bowmen in a castle tower, yet they admitted sufficient light to allow me to recognise my surroundings. There was a tapestry to the right, a well-woven depiction of some hunting scene, I took it, but fancifully done, the spear-carrying hunters mounted on birds of a sort and attacking an ugly animal that reminded me of a boar, except that it appeared to be too large, out of proportion to the hunters. Its jaws carried four tusks, curved like scimitars. It reminded me, with the vegetation and background and the
classic serenity of the faces, of a Renaissance tapestry I had once seen on a vacation tour I had taken to Florence in my second year at the University. Opposite the tapestry – for decoration, I assumed – hung a round shield with crossed spears behind it. The shield was rather like the old Greek shields on some of the red-figured vases in the London Museum. The design on the shield was unintelligible to me. I could not be sure that it was supposed to mean anything. It might have been an alphabetic monogram or perhaps a mere delight to the artist. Above
the shield was a suspended helmet, again reminiscent of a Greek helmet, perhaps of the Homeric period. It had a somewhat ‘Y’- shaped slot for the eyes, nose, and mouth in the nearly solid metal. There was a savage dignity about it, with the shield and spears, all of them stable on the wall, as if ready, like the famous colonial rifle over the fireplace, for instant use; they were all polished and gleamed dully in the half light. Aside from these things and two stone blocks, perhaps chairs, and a mat to one side, the room was ba1re; the walls and ceiling and
floor were smooth as marble, and a classic white. I could see no door in the room. I rose from the stone table, which was indeed what it was, and went to the window. I looked out and saw the sun – our sun it had to be. It seemed perhaps a fraction larger, but it was difficult to be sure. I was confident that it was our own brilliant yellow star. The sky, like that of the earth, was blue. My first thought was that this must be the earth and the sun’s apparent size an illusion. Obviously, I was breathing, and that meant necessarily an atmosphere containing a large
percentage of oxygen. It must be the earth. But as I stood at the window, I knew that this could not be my mother planet. The building in which I found myself was apparently one of an indefinite number of towers, like endless flat cylinders of varying sizes and colours, joined by narrow, colourful bridges that arched lightly between them. I could not lean far enough outside the window to see the ground. In the distance I could see hills covered by some type of green vegetation, but I could not determine whether or not it was
grass. Wondering at my predicament, I turned back to the table. I strode over to it and nearly bruised my thigh on the stone structure. I felt for a moment as though I must have stumbled, have been dizzy. I walked around the room. I leaped to the top of the table almost as I would have climbed a stair in the alumni house. It was different, a different movement. Less gravity. It had to be. The planet, then, was smaller than our earth, and, given the apparent size of the sun, perhaps somewhat closer to it. My clothes had been changed. My hunting boots
were gone, my fur cap and the heavy coat and the rest of it. I was clad in some sort of tunic of a reddish colour, which was tied at the waist with a yellow cord. It occurred to me that I was clean, in spite of my adventures, my panic- stricken rout in the mountains. I had been washed. I saw that the ring of red metal, with the crest of a ‘C’, had been placed on the second finger of my right hand. I was hungry. I tried to put my thoughts together, sitting on the table, but there was too much. I felt like a child, knowing nothing, taken to some complex factory or store,
unable to sort out his impressions, unable to comprehend the new and strange things that flash incessantly upon him. A panel in the wall slid sideways, and a tall red-haired man, somewhere in his late forties, dressed much as I was, stepped through. I hadn’t known what to expect, what these people would be like. This man was an earthman, apparently. He smiled at me and came forward, placing his hands on my shoulders and looking into my eyes. He said, I thought rather proudly, “You are my son, Tarl Cabot.”
“I am Tarl Cabot,” I said. “I am your father,” he said, and shook me powerfully by the shoulders. We shook hands, on my part rather stiffly, yet this gesture of our common homeland somehow reassured me. I was surprised to find myself accepting this stranger not only as being of my world, but as the father I couldn’t remember. “Your mother?” he asked, his eyes concerned. “Dead, years ago,” I said. He looked at me. “She, of all of them, I loved most,” he said, turning away, crossing the room. He appeared to be affected keenly,
shaken. I wanted to feel no sympathy with him, yet I found that I could not help it. I was angry with myself. He had deserted my mother and me, had he not? And what was it now that he felt some regret? And how was it that he had spoken so innocently of ‘all of them’, whoever they might be. I did not want to find out. Yet, someh1ow, in spite of these things, I found that I wanted to cross the room, to put my hand on his arm, to touch him. I felt somehow a kinship with him, with this stranger and his sorrow. My eyes were moist. Something stirred in me,
obscure, painful memories that had been silent, quiet for many years – the memory of a woman I had barely known, of a gentle face, of arms that had protected a child who had awakened frightened in the night. And I remembered suddenly another face, behind hers. “Father,” I said. He straightened and turned to face me across that simple, strange room. It was impossible to tell if he had wept. He looked at me with sadness in his eyes, and his rather stern features seemed for a moment to be tender. Looking into his eyes, I realised, with an
incomprehensible suddenness and a joy that still bewilders me, that someone existed who loved me. “My son,” he said. We met in the centre of the room and embraced. I wept, and he did, too, without shame. I learned later that on this alien world a strong man may feel and express emotions, and that the hypocrisy of constraint is not honoured on this planet as it is on mine. At last we moved apart. My father regarded me evenly. “She will be the last,” he said. “I had no right to let her love me.” I was silent.
He sensed my feeling and spoke brusquely. “Thank you for your gift, Tarl Cabot,” he said. I looked puzzled. “The handful of earth,” he said. “A handful of my native ground.” I nodded, not wanting to speak, wanting him to tell me the thousand things I had to know, to dispel the mysteries that had torn me from my native world and brought me to this strange room, this planet, to him, my father. “You must be hungry,” he said. “I want to know where I am and what I am doing here,” I said. “Of course,” he said, “but you
must eat.” He smiled. “While you satisfy your hunger, I shall speak to you.” He clapped his hands twice, and the panel slid back again. I was startled. Through the opening came a young girl, somewhat younger than myself, with blonde hair bound back. She wore a sleeveless garment of diagonal stripes, the brief skirt of which terminated some inches above her knees. She was barefoot, and as her eyes shyly met mine, I saw they were blue and deferential. My eyes suddenly noted her one piece of jewelry – a light, steel-like band she wore as a
collar. As quickly as she had come, she departed. “You may have her this evening if you wish,” said my father, who had scarcely seemed to notice the girl. I wasn’t sure what he meant, but I said no. At my father’s insistence, I began to eat, reluctantly, never taking my eyes from him, hardly tasting the food, which was simple but excellent. The meat reminded me of venison; it was not the meat of an animal raised on domestic grains. It had been roasted over an open flame. The bread was still hot from
the oven. The fruit – grapes and peaches of some sort – was fresh and as cold as mountain snow. After the meal I tasted the drink, which might not inappropriately be described as an almost incandescent wine, bright, dry, and powerful. I learned later it was called Ka-la-na. While I ate, and afterwards, my father spoke. “Gor,” h1e said, “is the name of this world. In all the languages of this planet, the word means Home Stone.” He paused, noting my lack of comprehension. “Home Stone,” he repeated. “Simply that.” “In peasant villages on this
world,” he continued, “each hut was originally built around a flat stone which was placed in the centre of the circular dwelling. It was carved with the family sign and was called the Home Stone. It was, so to speak, a symbol of sovereignty, or territory, and each peasant, in his own hut, was a sovereign.” “Later,” said my father, “Home Stones were used for villages, and later still for cities. The Home Stone of a village was always placed in the market; in a city, on the top of the highest tower. The Home Stone came naturally, in time,
to acquire a mystique, and something of the hot, sweet emotions as our native peoples of Earth feel towards their flags became invested in it.” My father had risen to his feet and had begun to pace the room, and his eyes seemed strangely alive. In time I would come to understand more of what he felt. Indeed, there is a saying on Gor, a saying whose origin is lost in the past of this strange planet, that one who speaks of Home Stones should stand, for matters of honour are here involved, and honour is respected in the barbaric codes of Gor.
“These stones,” said my father, “are various, of different colours, shapes, and sizes, and many of them are intricately carved. Some of the largest cities have small, rather insignificant Home Stones, but of incredible antiquity, dating back to the time when the city was a village or only a mounted pride of warriors with no settled abode.” My father paused at the narrow window in the circular room and looked out on to the hills beyond and fell silent. At last he spoke again. “Where a man sets his Home Stone, he claims, by law, that land for himself. Good land is protected
only by the swords of the strongest owners in the vicinity.” “Swords?” I asked. “Yes,” said my father, as if there was nothing incredible in this admission. He smiled. “You have much to learn of Gor,” he said. “Yet there is a hierarchy of Home Stones, one might say, and two soldiers who would cut one another down with their steel blades for an acre of fertile ground will fight side by side to the death for the Home Stone of their village or of the city within whose ambit their village lies. I shall show you someday,” he said, “my own small Home Stone,
which I keep in my chambers. It encloses a handful of soil from the Earth, a handful of soil that I first brought with me when I came to this w or l d – a long time ago.” He looked at me evenly. “I shall keep the handful of earth you brought,” he said, his voice very quiet, “and someday it may be yours.” His eyes seemed moist. He added, “If you should live to earn a Home Stone.” I rose to my feet and looked at him. He had turned away, as if lost in thought. “It is the occasional dream of a conqueror or statesman,” he said, “to have but a single Supreme
Home Stone for the planet.” Then, after a long moment, not looking at me, he said, “It is rumoured that there is such a stone, but it lies in the Sacred Place and is the source of the Priest-Kings’ power.” “Who are the Priest-Kings?” I asked. My father faced me, and he seemed troubled, as if he might have said more than he intended. Neither of us spoke for perhaps a minute. “Yes,” said my father at last, “I must speak to you of Pri1est-Kings.” He smiled. “But let me begin in my own way, that you may better understand the nature of
that whereof I speak.” We both sat down again, the stone table between us, and my father calmly and methodically explained many things to me. As he spoke, my father often referred to the planet Gor as the Counter-Earth, taking the name from the writings of the Pythagoreans who had first speculated on the existence of such a body. Oddly enough, one of the expressions in the tongue of Gor for our sun was Lar-Torvis, which means The Central Fire, another Pythagorean expression, except that it had not been, as I understand it, originally
used by the Pythagoreans to refer to the sun but to another body. The more common expression for the sun was Tor-tu-Gor, which means Light Upon the Home Stone. There was a sect among the people that worshipped the sun, but it was insignificant both in numbers and power when compared with the worship of the Priest-Kings who, whatever they were, were accorded the honours of divinity. Theirs, it seems, was the honour of being enshrined as the most ancient gods of Gor, and in time of danger a prayer to the Priest-Kings might escape the lips of even the bravest
men. “The Priest-Kings,” said my father, “are immortal, or so most here believe.” “Do you believe it?” I asked. “I don’t know,” said my father. “I think perhaps I do.” “What sort of men are they?” I asked. “It is not known that they are men,” said my father. “Then what are they?” “Perhaps gods.” “You’re not serious?” “I am,” he said. “Is not a creature beyond death, of immense power and wisdom, worthy to be so
spoken of?” I was quiet. “My speculation, however,” said my father, “is that the Priest-Kings are indeed men – men much as we, or humanoid organisms of some type – who possess a science and technology as far beyond our normal ken as that of our own twentieth century would be to the alchemists and astrologers of the medieval universities.” His supposition seemed plausible to me, for from the very beginning I had understood that in something or someone existed a force and clarity of understanding
beside which the customary habits of rationality as I knew them were little more than the tropisms of the unicellular animal. Even the technology of the envelope with its patterned thumb-lock, the disorientation of my compass, and the ship that had brought me, unconscious, to this strange world, argued for an incredible grasp of unusual, precise, and manipulable forces. “The Priest-Kings,” said my father, “maintain the Sacred Place in the Sardar Mountains, a wild vastness into which no man penetrates. The Sacred Place, to the
minds of most men here, is taboo, perilous. Surely none have returned from those mountains.” My father’s eyes seemed faraway, as if focused on sights he might have preferred to forget. “Idealists and rebels have been dashed to pieces on the frozen escarpments of those mountains. If one approaches the mountains, one must go on foot. Our beasts will not approach them. Parts of outlaws and fugitives who sought refuge in them have been found on the plains below, like scraps of meat cast from an incredible distance to the beaks and teeth of wandering scavengers.”
My hand clenched on the metal goblet. The wine moved in the vessel. I saw my image in the 1wine, shattered by the tiny forces in the vessel. Then the wine was still. “Sometimes,” said my father, his eyes still faraway, “when men are old or have had enough of life, they assault the mountains, looking for the secret of immortality in the barren crags. If they have found their immortality, none have confirmed it, for none have returned to the Tower Cities.” He looked at me. “Some think that such men in time become Priest-Kings
themselves. My own speculations, which I judge as likely or unlikely to be true as the more popular superstitious stories, is that it is death to learn the secret of the Priest-Kings.” “You do not know that,” I said. “No,” admitted my father. “I do not know it.” My father then explained to me something of the legends of the Priest-Kings, and I gathered that they seemed to be true to this degree at least – that the Priest- Kings could destroy or control whatever they wished, that they were, in effect, the divinities of this
world. It was supposed that they were aware of all that transpired on their planet, but, if so, I was informed that they seemed, on the whole, to take little note of it. It was rumoured, according to my father, that they cultivated holiness in their mountains, and in their contemplation could not be concerned with the realities and evils of the outside and unimportant world. They were, so to speak, absentee divinities, existent but remote, not to be bothered with the fears and turmoil of the mortals beyond their mountains. This conjecture, the seeking of holiness,
however, seemed to me to fit not well with the sickening fate apparently awaiting those who attempted the mountains. I found it difficult to conceive of one of those theoretical saints rousing himself from contemplation to hurl the scraps of interlopers to the plains below. “There is at least one area, however,” said my father, “in which the Priest-Kings do take a most active interest in this world, and that is the area of technology. They limit, selectively, the technology available to us, the Men Below the Mountains. For example,
incredibly enough, weapon technology is controlled to the point where the most powerful devices of war are the crossbow and lance. Further, there is no mechanised transportation or communication equipment or detection devices such as the radar and sonar equipment so much in evidence in the military establishments of yoyr world.” “On the other hand,” he said, “you will learn that in lighting, shelter, agricultural techniques, and medicine, for example, the Mortals, or Men Below the Mountains, are relatively advanced.” He looked at
m e – amused, I think. “You wonder,” he said, “why the numerous, rather obvious deficits in our technology have not been repaired – in spite of the Priest- Kings. It crosses your mind that there must exist minds on this world capable of designing such things as, say, rifles and armoured vehicles.” “Surely such things must be produced,” I urged. “And you are right,” he said grimly. “From time to time they are, but their owners are then destroyed, bursting into flame.” “Like the envelope of blue metal?”
“Yes,” he said. “It is Flame Death merely to possess a weapon of the interdicted sort. Sometimes bold individuals create or acquire such war materials and sometimes for as long as a year escape the Flame Death, but sooner or later they are struck down.” His eyes were hard. “I once saw it happen,” he said. Clearly, he did not wish to discuss the topic further. “What of the ship that brought me here?” I asked. “Surely that is a marvellous example of your technology?” “Not of our technology, but of
that of the Priest-Kings,” he said. “I do not believe the ship was manned by any of the Men Below the Mountains.” “By Priest-Kings?” I asked. “Frankly,” said my father, “I believe the ship was remotely controlled from the Sardar Mountains, as are said to be all the Voyages of Acquisition.” “Of Acquisition?” “Yes,” said my father. “And long ago I made the same strange journey. As have others.” “But for what end, to what purpose?” I demanded. “Each perhaps for a different
end, for each perhaps a different purpose,” he said. My father then spoke to me of the world on which I found myself. He said, from what he could learn from the Initiates, who claimed to serve as the intermediaries of Priest- Kings to men, that the planet Gor had originally been a satellite of a distant sun, in one of the fantastically remote Blue Galaxies. It was moved by the science of the Priest-Kings several times in its history, seeking again and again a new star. I regarded this story as improbable, at least in part, for several reasons, primarily having to
do with the sheer spacial improbabilities of such a migration, which, even at a speed approximating light, would have taken billions of years. Moreover, in moving through space, without a sun for photosynthesis and warmth, all life would surely have been destroyed. If the planet had been moved at all, and I knew enough to understand that this was empirically impossible, it must have been brought into our system from a closer star. Perhaps it had once been a satellite of Alpha Centauri, but, even so, the distances still
seemed almost unimaginable. Theoretically, I did admit that the planet might have been moved without destroying its life, but the engineering magnitude of such a feat staggered the imagination. Perhaps life might have been suspended temporarily or hidden beneath the planet’s surface with sufficient sustenance and oxygen for the incredible journey. In effect, the planet would have functioned as a gigantic sealed spacecraft. There was another possibility I mentioned to my father – perhaps the planet had been in our system all the time, but had been
undiscovered, unlikely though that might be, given the thousands of years of study of the skies by men, from the shambling creatures of the Neander Valley to the brilliant intellects of Mount Wilson and Palomar. To my surprise, this absurd hypothesis was welcomed by my father. “That,” he said with animation, “is the Theory of the Sun Shield.” He added, “That is why I like to think of the planet as the Counter- Earth, not only because of its resemblance to our native world, but because, as a matter of fact, it is placed as a counterpoise to the
Earth. It has the same plane of orbit and maintains its orbit in such a way as always to keep The Central Fire between it and its planetary sister, our Earth, even though this necessitates occasional adjustments in its speed of revolution.” “But surely,” I protested, “its existence could be discovered. One can’t hide a planet the size of the Earth in our own solar system! It’s impossible!” “You underestimate the Priest- Kings and their science,” said my father, smiling. “Any power that is capable of moving a planet – and I believe the Priest-Kings poss1ess
this power – is capable of effecting adjustments in the motion of the planet, such adjustments as might allow it to use the sun indefinitely as a concealing shield.” “The orbits of the other planets would be affected,” I pointed out. “Gravitational perturbations,” said my father, “can be neutralised.” His eyes shone. “It is my belief,” he said, “that the Priest- Kings can control the forces of gravity, at least in localised areas, and, indeed, that they do so. In all probability their control over the motion of the planet is somehow connected with this capacity.
Consider certain consequences of this power. Physical evidence, such as light or radio waves, which might reveal the presence of the planet, can be prevented from doing so. The Priest-Kings might gravitationally warp the space in their vicinity, causing light or radio waves to be diffused, curved, or deflected in such a way as not to expose their world.” I must have appeared unconvinced. “Exploratory satellites can be similarly dealt with,” added my father. He paused. “Of course, I only propose hypotheses, for what
the Priest-Kings do and how it is done is known only to them.” I drained the last sip of the heady wine in the metal goblet. “Actually,” said my father, “there is evidence of the existence of the Counter-Earth.” I looked at him. “Certain natural signals in the radio band of the spectrum,” said my father. My astonishment must have been obvious. “Yes,” he said, “but since the hypothesis of another world is regarded as so incredible, this evidence has been interpreted to
accord with other theories; sometimes even imperfections in instrumentation have been supposed rather than admit the presence of another world in our solar system.” “But why would this evidence not be understood?” I asked. “Surely you know,” he laughed, “one must distinguish between the data to be interpreted and the interpretation of the data, and one chooses, normally, the interpretation that preserves as much as possible of the old world view, and, in the thinking of the Earth, there is no place for Gor, its true sister planet, the Counter-
Earth.” My father had finished speaking. He rose and gripped me by the shoulders, held me for a moment and smiled. Then silently the door in the wall slid aside, and he strode from the room. He had not spoken to me of my role or destiny, whatever it was to be. He did not wish to discuss the reason for which I had been brought to the Counter-Earth, nor did he explain to me the comparatively minor mysteries of the envelope and its strange letter. Most keenly perhaps, I missed that he had not spoken to me of himself, for I wanted to know
him, that kindly, remote stranger whose bones were in my body, whose blood flowed in mine – my father. I now inform you that what I write of my own experience I know to be true, and that what I have accepted on authority I believe to be true, but I shall not be offended if you disbelieve, for I, too, in your place, would refuse to believe. Indeed, on the small evidence I can present in this narrative, you are obliged, in all honesty, to reject my testimony or at the very least suspend judgement. In fact, there is so little probability that this tale
will be believed that the Priest- Kings of Sardar, the Keepers of the Sacred Place, have apparently granted that it may be recorded. I am glad of this, because1 I must tell this story. I have seen things of which I must speak, even if, as it is said here, only to the Towers. Why have the Priest-Kings been so lenient in this case – those who control this second earth? I think the answer is simple. Enough humanity remains in them, if they are human, for we have never seen them, to be vain; enough vanity remains in them to wish to inform you of their existence, if only in a way that you
will not accept or be able to consider seriously. Perhaps there is humour in the Sacred Place, or irony. After all, suppose you should accept this tale, should learn of the Counter-Earth and of the Voyages of Acquisition, what could you do? You could do nothing, you with your rudimentary technology of which you are so proud – you could do nothing at least for a thousand years, and by that time, if the Priest- Kings choose, this planet will have found a new sun, and new peoples to populate its verdant surface. Chapter Three:THE TARN
“Ho!” cried Torm, that most improbable member of the Caste of Scribes, throwing his blue robes over his head as though he could not bear to see the light of day. Out of the robes then popped the sandy- haired head of the scribe, his pale blue eyes twinkling on each side of that sharp needle of a nose. He looked me over. “Yes,” he cried, “I deserve it!” Back went his head into the robes. Muffled, his voice reached me. “Why must I, an idiot, be always afflicted with idiots?” Out came the head. “Have I nothing better to do? Have I not a thousand
scrolls gathering dust on my shelves, unread, unstudied?” “I don’t know,” I said. “Look,” he cried in actual despair, waving his blue-robed arms hopelessly at the messiest chamber I had seen on Gor. His desk, a vast wooden table, was piled with papers and pots of ink, and pens and scissors and leather fasteners and binders. There was no square foot of the chamber that did not contain racks of scrolls, and others, hundreds perhaps, were piled like cord wood here and there. His sleeping mat was unrolled, and his blankets must not
have been aired for weeks. His personal belongings, which seemed to be negligible, were stuffed into the meanest of the scroll racks. One of the windows into Torm’s chamber was quite irregular, and I noted that it had been forcibly enlarged. I imagined him with a carpenter’s hammer, angrily cracking and banging away at the wall, chipping away the stone that more light might enter his room. And always under his table a brazier filled with hot coals burned near the feet of the scribe, perilously close to the scholarly litter with which the floor was
strewn. It seemed that Torm was always cold or, at best, never quite warm enough. The hottest days would be likely to find him wiping his nose on the sleeve of his blue robes, shivering miserably and lamenting the price of fuel. Torm was of slight build and reminded me of an angry bird which enjoys nothing so much as scolding squirrels. His blue robes were worn through in a dozen spots, only two or three of which had been ineptly attacked by thread. One of his sandals had a broken strap that had been carelessly knotted back together. The Goreans I had seen in
the past few weeks had tended to be meticulous in their dress, taking great pride in their appearance, but Torm apparently had better things on which to spend his time. Among these things, unfortunately, was berating those like myself who were hapless enough to fall within the ambit of his wrath. Yet, in spite of his incomparable eccentricities, his petulance and exasperatio1n, I felt drawn to the man and sensed in him something I admired – a shrewd and kind spirit, a sense of humour, and a love of learning, which can be one of the deepest and most honest of loves. It
was this love for his scrolls and for the men who had written them, perhaps centuries before, that most impressed me about Torm. In his way, he linked me, this moment, and himself with generations of men who had pondered on the world and its meaning. Incredible as it may seem, I did not doubt that he was the finest scholar in the City of Cylinders, as my father had said. With annoyance, Torm poked through one of the enormous piles of scrolls and at last, on his hands and knees, fished out one skimpy scroll, set it in the reading device – a metal frame with rollers at the top
and bottom – and, pushing a button, spun the scroll to its opening mark, a single sign. “Al-Ka!” said Torm, pointing one long, authoritative finger at the sign. “Al-Ka,” he said. “Al-Ka,” I repeated. We looked at one another, and both of us laughed. A tear of amusement formed along the side of his sharp nose, and his pale blue eyes twinkled. I had begun to learn the Gorean alphabet.
In the next few weeks I found myself immersed in intensive
activity, interspersed with carefully calculated rest and feeding periods. At first only Torm and my father were my teachers, but as I began to master the language of my new home, numerous others, apparently of Earth stock, assumed responsibility for my lessons in special areas. Torm’s English, incidentally, was spoken with a Gorean accent. He had learned our tongue from my father. Most Goreans would have regarded it as a worthless tongue, since it is nowhere spoken on the planet, but Torm had mastered it, apparently only for the delight of seeing how
living thought could express itself in yet another garb. The schedule that was forced upon me was meticulous and gruelling, and except for rest and feeding, alternated between times of study and times of training, largely in arms, but partly in the use of various devices as common to the Goreans as adding machines and scales are to us. One of the most interesting was the Translator, which could be set for various languages. Whereas there was a main common tongue on Gor, with apparently several related dialects or sublanguages, some of the
Gorean languages bore in sound little resemblance to anything I had heard before, at least as languages; they resembled rather the cries of birds and the growls of animals; they were sounds I knew could not have been produced by a human throat. Although the machines could be set for various languages, one term of the translation symmetry, at least in the machines I saw, was always Gorean. If I set the machine to, say, Language A and spoke Gorean into it, it would, after a fraction of a second, emit a succession of noises, which was the translation of my Gorean sentences
into A. On the other hand, a new succession of noises in A would be received by the machine and emitted as a message in Gorean. My father, to my delight, had taped one of these translation devices with English, and accordingly it was a most useful tool in working out equivalent phrases. Also, of course, he and Torm worked intensively with me. The machine, however, particularly to Torm’s relief, allowed me to practise on my own. These translation machines are a marvel of miniaturisation, each of them, about the size of a portable
typewriter, being programmed for four none-Gorean languages. The translations, of course, are rather literal, and the vocabulary is limited to recognitions of only about 25,000 equivalencies for each language. Accordingly, for subtle communicat1ion or the fullest expression of thought, the machine was inferior to a skilled linguist. The machine, however, according to my father, retained the advantage that its mistakes would not be intentional, and that its translations, even if inadequate, would be honest. “You must learn,” Torm had said
matter-of-factly, “the history and legends of Gor, its geography and economics, its social structures and customs, such as the caste system and clan groups, the right of placing the Home Stone, the Places of Sanctuary, when quarter is and is not permitted in war, and so on.” And I learned these things, or as much as I could in the time I was given. Occasionally Torm would cry out in horror as I made a mistake, incomprehension and disbelief written on his features, and he would then sadly take up a large scroll, containing the work of an author of whom he disapproved,
and strike me smartly on the head with it. One way or another, he was determined that I should profit by his instruction. Oddly enough, there was little religious instruction, other than to encourage awe of the Priest-Kings, and what there was, Torm refused to administer, insisting it was the province of the Initiates. Religious matters on this world tend to be rather carefully guarded by the Caste of Initiates, who allow members of other castes little participation in their sacrifices and ceremonies. I was given some prayers to the Priest- Kings to memorise, but they were in
Old Gorean, a language cultivated by the Initiates but not spoken generally on the planet, and I never bothered to learn them. To my delight, I learned that Torm, whose memory was phenomenal, had forgotten them years ago. I sensed that a certain distrust existed between the Caste of Scribes and the Caste of Initiates. The ethical teachings of Gor, which are independent of the claims and propositions of the Initiates, amount to little more than the Caste Co d e s – collections of sayings whose origins are lost in antiquity. I was specially drilled in the Code of
the Warrior Caste. “It’s just as well,” said Torm. “You would never make a Scribe.” The Code of the Warrior was, in general, characterised by a rudimentary chivalry, emphasising loyalty to the Pride Chiefs and the Home Stone. It was harsh, but with a certain gallantry, a sense of humour that I could respect. A man could do worse than live by such a code. I was also instructed in the Double Knowledge – that is, I was instructed in what the people, on the whole, believed, and then I was instructed in what the intellectuals were expected to know. Sometimes
there was a surprising discrepancy between the two. For example, the population as a whole, the castes below the High Castes, were encouraged to believe that their world was a broad flat disc. Perhaps this was to discourage them from exploration or to develop in them a habit of relying on common-sense prejudices – something of a social control device. On the other hand, the High Castes, specifically the Warriors, Builders, Scribes, Initiates and Physicians, were told the truth in such matters, perhaps because it
was thought they would eventually determine it for themselves, from observations such as the shadow of their planet on one or another of Gor’s three small moons during eclipses, the phenomenon of sighting the tops of distant objects first, and the fact that certain stars could not be seen from certain geographical positions; if the planet had been flat, precisely the same set of stars would have been observable from every position on its surface. I wondered, however, if the Second Knowledge, that of the intellectuals, might not be as
carefully tailored to preclude inquiry on their level as the First Knowledge apparently was to preclude inquiry on the level of the Lower Castes. I1 would guess that there is a Third Knowledge, that reserved to the Priest-Kings. “The city-state,” said my father, speaking to me late one afternoon, “is the basic political division on G o r – hostile cities controlling what territory they can in their environs, surrounded by a no-man’s land of open ground on every side.” “How is leadership decided in these cities?” I asked. “Rulers,” he said, “are chosen
from any High Caste.” “High Caste?” I asked. “Yes, of course,” was the answer. “In fact, in the First Knowledge, there is a story told to the young in their public nurseries, that if a man from Lower Caste should come to rule in a city, the city would come to ruin.” I must have appeared annoyed. “The caste structure,” said my father patiently, with perhaps the trace of a smile on his face, “is relatively immobile, but not frozen, and depends on more than birth. For example, if a child in his schooling shows that he can raise caste, as the
expression is, he is permitted to do so. But similarly, if a child does not show the aptitude expected of his caste, whether it be, say, that of a physician or warrior, he is lowered in caste.” “I see,” I said, not much reassured. “The High Castes in a given city,” said my father, “elect an administrator and council for stated terms. In times of crisis, a war chief, or Ubar, is named, who rules without check and by decree until, in his judgement, the crisis is passed.” “In his judgement?” I asked
sceptically. “Normally the office is surrendered after the passing of the crisis,” said my father. “It is part of the Warrior’s Code.” “But what if he does not give up the office?” I asked. I had learned enough of Gor by now to know that one could not always count on the Caste Codes being observed. “Those who do not desire to surrender their power,” said my father, “are usually deserted by their men. The offending war chief is simply abandoned, left alone in his palace to be impaled by the citizens of the city he has tried to
usurp.” I nodded, imagining a palace, empty save for one man sitting alone on his throne, clad in his robes of state, waiting for the angry people outside the gates to break through and work their wrath. “But,” said my father, “sometimes such a war chief, or Ubar, wins the hearts of his men, and they refuse to withdraw their allegiance.” “What happens then?” I asked. “He becomes a tyrant,” said my father, “and rules until eventually, in one way or another, he is ruthlessly deposed.” My father’s
eyes were hard and seemed fixed in thought. It was not mere political theory he spoke to me. I gathered that he knew of such a man. “Until,” he repeated slowly, “he is ruthlessly deposed.”
The next morning it was back to Torm and his interminable lessons. In large outline Gor, as would be expected, was not a sphere, but a spheroid. It was somewhat heavier in its southern hemisphere and was shaped somewhat like the Earth – like a rounded, inverted top. The angle of its axis was somewhat sharper than the Earth’s, but not
enough to prevent its having a glorious periodicity of seasons. Moreover, like the Earth, it had two polar r1egions and an equatorial belt, interspersed with northern and southern temperate zones. Much of the area of Gor, surprisingly enough, was blank on the map, but I was overwhelmed trying to commit as many of the rivers, seas, plains, and peninsulas to memory as I could. Economically, the base of the Gorean life was the free peasant, which was perhaps the lowest but undoubtedly the most fundamental caste, and the staple crop was a
yellow grain called Sa-Tarns, or Life-Daughter. Interestingly enough, the word for meat is Sa-Tassna, which means Life-Mother. Incidentally, when one speaks of food in general, one always speaks of Sa-Tassna. The expression for the yellow grain seems to be a secondary expression, derivative. This would seem to indicate that a hunting economy underlay or was prior to the agricultural economy. This would be the normal supposotion in any case, but what intrigued me here, perhaps for no sufficient reason, was the complex nature of the expressions involved.
This suggested to me that perhaps a well-developed language or mode of conceptual thought existed prior to the primitive hunting groups that must have flourished long ago on the planet. People had come, or had been brought to Gor possibly, with a fully developed language. I wondered at the possible antiquity of the Voyages of Acquisition I had heard my father speak of. I had been the object of one such voyage, he, apparently, of another. I had little time for speculation, however, as I was trying to bear up under an arduous schedule which seemed designed to force me to
become a Gorean in a matter of weeks or perhaps see me die in the attempt. But I enjoyed those weeks, as one is likely to when learning and developing oneself, though to what end I was still ignorant. I met many Goreans, other than Torm, in these weeks – free Goreans, mostly of the Caste of Scribes and the Caste of Warriors. The scribes, of course, are the scholars and clerks of Gor, and there divisions and rankings within the group, from simple copiers to the savants of the city. I had seen few women, but knew that they, when free, were promoted
or demoted within the caste system according to the same standards and criteria as the men, although this varied, I was told, considerably from city to city. On the whole, I liked the people I met, and I was confident that they were largely of Earth stock, that their ancestors had been brought to the planet in Voyages of Acquisition. Apparently after having been brought to the planet, they had simply been released, much as animals might be released in a forest preserve, or fish stocked free in a river. The ancestors of some of them might have been Chaldeans or Celts
or Syrians or Englishmen brought to this world over a period of centuries from different civilisations. But the chldren, of course, and their children eventually became simply Gorean. In the long ages on Gor almost all traces of Earth origin had vanished. Occasionally, however, an English word in Gorean, like “axe” or “ship”, would delight me. Certain other expressions seemed clearly to be of Greek or German origin. If I had been a skilled linguist, I undoubtedly would have discovered hundred of parallels and affinities, grammatical and
otherwise, between Gorean and various of the Earth languages. Earth origin, incidentally, was not a part of the First Knowledge, though it was of the second. “Torm,” I once asked, “why is Earth origin not part of the First Knowledge?” “Is it not self-evident?” he asked. “No,” I said. “Ah!” he said, and closed his eyes very slowly and kept them shut for about a minute, during which time he was apparently subjecting the matter to the most intense scru1tiny. “You’re right,” he said at last,
opening his eyes. “It is not self- evident.” “Then what do we do?” I asked. “We continue with our lessons,” said Torm. The caste system was socially efficient, given its openness with respect to merit, but I regarded it as somehow ethically objectionable. It was still too rigid, in my opinion, particularly with respect to the selection of rulers from the High Castes and with respect to the Double Knowledge. But far more deplorable than the caste system was the institution of slavery. There were only three statuses
conceivable to the Gorean mind outside the caste system: slave, outlaw, and Priest-King. A man who refused to practise his livelihood or strove to alter status without the consent of the Council of High Castes was, by definition, an outlaw and subject to impalement. The girl I had originally seen had been a slave, and what I had taken to be the jewellery at her throat had been a badge of servitude. Another such badge was a brand concealed by her clothing. The latter marked her as a slave, and the former identified her master. One might
change one’s collar, but not one’s brand. I had not seen the girl since the first day. I wondered what had become of her, but did not inquire. One of the first lessons I was taight on Gor was that concern for a slave was out of place. I decided to wait. I did learn, casually from a Scribe, not Torm, that slaves were not permitted to impart instruction to a free man, since it would place him in their debt, and nothing was owed to a slave. If it was in my power, I resolved to do what I could to abolish what seemed to me a degrading condition. I once talked to my father about the matter, and he
merely said that there were many things on Gor worse than the lot of slavery, particularly that of a Tower Slave.
Without warning, with blinding speed, the bronze-headed spear flew towards my breast, the heavy shaft blurred like a comet’s tail behind it. I twisted, and the blade cut my tunic cleanly, creasing the skin with a line of blood as sharp as a razor. It sunk eight inches into the heavy wooden beams behind me. Had it struck me with that force, it would have passed through my body.
“He’s fast enough,” said the man who had cast the spear. “I shall accept him.” This was my introduction to my instructor in arms, whose name was also Tarl. I shall call him the Older Tarl. He was a blond Viking giant of a man, a bearded fellow with a cheerful, craggy face and fierce blue eyes, who strode about as though he owned the earth on which he stood. His whole body, his carriage, the holding of his head bespoke the warrior, a man who knew his weapons and, on the simple world of Gor, knew that he could kill almost any man who
might stand against him. If there was one outstanding impression I gathered of the Older Tarl in that first terrifying meeting, it was that he was a proud man, not arrogant, but proud, and rightfully so. I would come to know this skilled, powerful, proud man well. Indeed, the largest part of my education was to be in arms, mostly training in the spear and sword. The spear seemed light to me because of the gravity, and I soon developed a dexterity in casting it with considerable force and accuracy. I could penetrate a shield at close distance, and I managed to develop
a skill sufficient to hurl it through a thrown hoop about the size of a dinner plate at twenty yards. I was also forced to learn to throw the spear with my left hand. Once I objected. “What if you are wounded in the right arm?” demanded the Older Tarl. “What will you d1o then?” “Run?” suggested Torm, who occasionally observed these practice sessions. “No!” cried the Older Tarl. “You must stand and be slain like a warrior!” Torm tucked a scroll, which he had been pretending to read, under
his arm. He wiped his nose sagely on the sleeve of his blue robe. “Is that rational?” he asked. The Older Tarl seized a spear, and Torm, lifting his robes, hastily departed the training area. In despair, with my left arm I lifted another spear from the spear- rack, to try once more. Eventually, perhaps more to my surprise than that of the Older Tarl, my performance became almost creditable. I had increased my margin of survival by some obscure percentage. My training in the short, stabbing sword of the Goreans was as
thorough as they could make it. I had belonged to a fencing club at Oxford and had fenced for sport and pleasure at the college in New Hampshire, but this current business was serious. Once again, I was supposed to learn to wield the weapon equally well with either hand, but, again, I could never manage to develop the skill to my genuine satisfaction. I acknowledged to myself that I was inveterately, stubbornly right- handed, for better or worse. During my training with the sword, the Older Tarl cut me unpleasantly a number of times,
shouting out, annoyingly enough, I thought, “You are dead!” At last, near the end of my training, I managed to break through his guard and, pulling my stroke, to drive my blade against his chest. I withdrew it bright with his blood. He flung down his sword with a crash on the stone tiles and clasped me to his bleeding chest, laughing. “I am dead!” he shouted in triumph. He slapped me on the shoulders, proud as a father who has taught his son chess and has been defeated for the first time. I also learned the use of the shield, primarily to meet the cast
spear obliquely so that it would deflect harmlessly. Towards the end of my training I always fought with shield and helmet. I would have supposed that armour, or chain mail perhaps, would have been a desirable addition to the accoutrements of the Gorean warrior, but it had been forbidden by the Priest-Kings. A possible hypothesis to explain this is that the Priest-Kings may have wished war to be a biologically selective process in which the weaker and slower perish and fail to reproduce themselves. This might account for the relatively primitive weapons
allowed to the Men Below the Mountains. On Gor it was not the case that a cavern-chested toothpick could close a switch and devastate an army. Also, the primitive weapons guaranteed that what selection went on would proceed with sufficient slowness to establish its direction, and alter it, if necessary. Besides the spear and sword, the crossbow and longbow were permitted, and these latter weapons perhaps tended to redistribute the probabilities of survival somewhat more broadly than the former. It may be, of course, that the Priest-
Kings controlled weapons as they did simply because they feared for their own safety. I doubted that they stood against one another, man to man, sword to sword, in their holy mountains, putting their principles of selection to the test in their own cases. Incidentally, speaking of the crossbow and longbow, I did receive some instruction in them, but not much. The Older Tarl, my redoubtable instructor in arms, did not care for them, regarding them as secondary weapons almost unworthy for the hand of a warrior. I did not share his contempt, and occasionally during my rest periods
had sought to improve my proficiency with them.
I gathered tha1t my education was coming to an end. perhaps it was in the lengthening of the rest periods; perhaps it was in the repetition of materials I had already encountered; perhaps it was something in the attitude of my instructors. I felt that I was nearly ready – but for what I had no idea. One pleasure of these final days was that I had begun to speak Gorean with the facility that comes from constant contact with and intensive study of the language. I
had begun to dream in Gorean and to understand easily the small talk of my teachers among themselves when they were speaking for one another and not for the ears of an outlander. I had begun to think in Gorean as well, and after a time I was conscious of a deliberate mental shift involved in thinking in English. After a few English sentences or a page or so in one of my father’s books, I would be at home again in my native tongue, but the shift was there, and necessary. I was fluent in Gorean. Once, when struck by the Older Tarl, I had cursed in Gorean, and he had
laughed. This afternoon, when it was time for our lesson, he was not laughing. He entered my apartment, carrying a metal rod about two feet long, with a leather loop attached. It had a switch in the handle, which could be set in two positions, on and off, like a simple torch. He wore another such instrument slung from his belt. “This is not a weapon,” he said. “It is not to be used as a weapon.” “What is it?” I asked. “A tarn-goad,” he replied. He snapped the switch in the barrel to the “on” position and struck the table. It showered sparks in a
sudden cascade of yellow light, but left the table unmarked. He turned off the goad and extended it to me. As I reached for it, he snapped it on and slapped it in my palm. A billion tiny yellow stars, like pieces of fiery needles, seemed to explode in my hand. I cried out in shock. I thrust my hand to my mouth. It had been like a sudden, severe electric charge, like the striking of a snake in my hand. I examined my hand; it was unhurt. “Be careful of a tarn- goad,” said the Older Tarl. “It is not for children.” I took it from him, this time being careful to take it near the leather loop, which I
fastened around my wrist. The Older Tarl was leaving, and I understood that I was to follow him. We ascended a spiral staircase inside the cylinder and climbed for what must have been dozens of apartment levels. At last we emerged on the flat roof of the cylinder. The wind swept across the flat, circular roof, tugging one towards the edge. There was no protective rail. I braced myself, wondering what was to occur. Some dust blew against my face. I shut my eyes. The Older Tarl took a tarn whistle, or tarn call, from his tunic and blew a piercing blast.
I had never seen one of the tarns before, except on the tapestry in my apartment and in illustrations in certain books I had studied devoted to the care, breeding, and equipment of trans. That I had not been trained for this moment was intentional, as I later discovered. The Goreans believe, incredibly enough, that the capacity to master a tarn is innate and that some men possess this characteristic and that some do not. One does not learn to master a tarn. It is a matter of blood and spirit, of beast and man, of a relation between two beings which must be immediate, intuitive, spontaneous. It
is said that a tarn knows who is a tarnsman and who is not, and that those who are not die in this first meeting. My first impression was that of a rush of wind and a great snapping sound, as if a giant might be snapping an enormous towel or scarf; then I was cowering, awe- stricken, in a great winged shadow, and an immense tarn, his talons extended like gigantic steel hooks, his wings sputtering fiercely in the air, hung above me, motionless except for the beating of his wings. “Stand c1lear of the wings,” shouted the Older Tarl. I needed no urging. I darted from
under the bird. One of those wings would hurl me yards from the top of the cylinder. The tarn dropped to the roof of the cylinder and regarded us with his bright black eyes. Though the tarn, like most birds, is surprisingly light for its size, this primarily having to do with the hollowness of the bones, it is an extremely powerful bird, powerful even beyond what one would expect from such a monster. Whereas large Earth birds, such as the eagle, must, when taking flights from the ground, begin with a running start, the tarn, with its
incredible musculature, aided undoubtedly by the somewhat lighter gravity of Gor, can with a spring and a sudden flurry of its giant wings, lift both himself and his rider into the air. In Gorean, these birds are sometimes spoken of as Brothers of the Wind. The plumage of tarns is various, and they are bred for their colours as well as their strength and intelligence. Black tarns are used for night raids, white tarns in winter campaigns, and multicoloured, resplendent tarns are bred for warriors who wish to ride proudly, regardless of the lack of
camouflage. The most common tarn, however, is greenish brown. Disregarding the disproportion in size, the Earth bird which the tarn most closely resembles is the hawk, with the exception that it has a crest somewhat of the nature of a jay’s. Tarns, who are vicious things, are seldom more than half tamed and, like their diminutive counterparts the hawks, are carnivorous. It is not unknown for a tarn to attack and devour his own rider. They fear nothing but the tarn- goad. They are trained by men of the Caste of Tarn Keepers to respond to it while still young,
when they can be fastened by wires to the training perches. Whenever a young bird soars away or refuses obedience in some fashion, he is dragged back to the perch and beaten with the tarn-goad. Rings, comparable to those which are fastened on the legs of the young birds, are worn by the adult birds to reinforce the memory of the hobbling wire and the tarn-goad. Later, of course, the adult birds are not fastened, but the conditioning given them in their youth usually holds except when they become abnormally disturbed or have not been able to obtain food. The tarn is
one of the two most common mounts of a Gorean warrior; the other is the high tharlarion, a species of saddle- lizrd, used mostly by clans who have never mastered tarns. No one in the City of Cylinders, as far as I knew, maintained tharlarions, though they were supposedly quite common on Gor, particularly in the lower areas – in swampland and on the deserts. The Older Tarl had mounted his tarn, climbing up the five-rung leather mounting ladder which hangs on the left side of the saddle and is pulled up in flight. He fastened himself in the saddle with
a broad purple strap. He tossed me a small object which nearly fell from my fumbling hands. it was a tarn whistle, with its own note, which would summon one tarn, and one tarn only, the mount which was intended for me. Never since the panic of the disoriented compass back in the mountains of New Hampshire had I been so frightened, but this time I refused to allow my fear the fatal inch it required. if I was to die, it would be; if I was not to die, I would not. I smiled to myself in spite of my fear, amused at the remark I had addressed to myself. It sounded like
something out of the Code of the Warrior, something which, if taken literally, would encourage its believer to take not the slightest or most sane precautions for his safety. I blew a note on the whistle, and it was shrill and different, of a new pitch from that of the Older Tarl. Almost immediately from somewhere, perhaps from a ledge out of sight, rose a fantastic object, another giant tarn, even larger than the first, a glossy sable tarn which circled the cylinder once and then wheeled towards me, landing a few feet away, his talons striking on the roof with a sound like hurled
gauntlets. His talons were shod with steel – a war tarn. He raised his curved beak to the sky and screamed, lifting and shaking his wings. His enormous head turned towards me, and his round, wicked eyes blazed in my direction. The next thing I knew his beak was open; I caught a brief sight of his thin, sharp tongue, as long as a man’s arm, darting out and back, and then, snapping at me, he lunged forward, striking at me with that monstrous beak, and I heard the Older Tarl cry out in horror, “The goad! the goad!” Chapter Four:
THE MISSION
I threw my right arm up to protect myself, the goad, attached by its strap to my wrist, flying wildly. I seized it, using it like a puny stick, striking at the great snapping beak that was trying to seize me, as if I were a scrap of food on the high, flat plate of the cylinder’s roof. He lunged twice, and I struck it twice. He drew back his head again, spreading his beak, preparing to slash downward again. In that instant I switched the tarn-goad to the “on” position, and when the great beak flashed downward again,
I struck it viciously, trying to force it away from me. The effect was startling: there was the sudden bright flash of yellow glittering light, the splash of sparks, and a scream of pain and rage from the tarn as he immediately beat his wings, lifting himself out of my reach in a rush of air that nearly forced me over the edge of the roof. I was on my hands and knees, trying to get back to my feet, too near the edge. The tarn was circling the cylinder, uttering piercing cries; then he began to fly away from the city. Without knowing why, and
thinking I was better off to have the thing in retreat, I seized my tarn whistle and blew its shrill note. The giant bird seemed almost to shudder in the air, and then he reeled, losing altitude, gaining it again. If he had not been simply a winged beast, I would have believed him to be struggling with himself, a creature locked inwardly in mental torture. It was the wild nature of the tarn, the call of the distant hills, the open sky, against the puny conditioning he had been subjected to, against the will of tiny men with their private objectives, their elementary psychology of stimulus and
response, their training wires and tarn-goads. At last, with a wild cry of rage, the tarn returned to the cylinder. I seized the short mounting ladder swinging wildly from the saddle and climbed it, seating myself in the saddle, fastening the broad purple belt that would keep me from tumbling to my death. The tarn is guided by virtue of a throat strap, to which are attached, normally, six leather streamers, or reins, which are fixed in a metal ring on the forward portion of the saddle. The reins are of different colours, but one learns them by ring
position and not colour. Each of the reins attaches to a small ring on the throat strap, and the rings are spaced evenly. Accordingly, the mechanics are simple. One draws on the streamer, or rein, which is attached to the ring most nearly approximating the direction one wishes to go. For example, to land or lose altitude, one uses the four- strap which exerts pressure on the four-ring, which is located beneath the throat of the tarn. To rise into flight, or gain altitude, one draws on the one-strap, which exerts pressure on the one-ring, which is located on the back of the tarn’s
neck. The throat-strap rings, corresponding to the1 position of the reins on the main saddle ring, are numbered in a clockwise fashion. The tarn-goad also is occasionally used in guiding the bird. One strikes the bird in the direction opposite to which one wishes to go, and the bird, withdrawing from the goad, moves in that direction. There is very little precision in this method, however, because the reactions of the bird are merely instinctive, and he may not withdraw in the exact tangent desired. Moreover, there is danger
in using the goad excessively. It tends to become less effective when it is often used, and the rider is then at the mercy of the tarn. I drew back on the one-strap and, filled with terror and exhilaration, felt the power of the gigantic wings beating on the invisible air. My body lurched wildly, but the saddle belt held. I couldn’t breathe for a minute, but clung, frightened and thrilled, to the saddle-ring, my hand wrapped in the one-strap. The tarn continued to climb, and I saw the City of Cylinders dropping far below me, like a set of rounded children’s blocks set in the
gleaming green hills. I had never experienced anything like this, and if man ever felt godlike I suppose I did in those first savage, exhilarating moments. I looked below and saw the Older Tarl, mounted on his own tarn, climbing to overtake me. When he was near, he shouted to me, the words merry but indistinct in the rush of air. “Ho, child,” he called. “Do you seek to climb to the Moons of Gor?” I suddenly realised I felt dizzy, or slightly so, but the magnificent black tarn was still climbing, though now struggling, his wings
beating fiercely with frustrated persistence against the thinning, less resistant air. The hills and plains of Gor were a blaze of colours far below me, and it may have been my imagination, but it seemed almost as if I could see the curve of the world. I realise now it must have been the thin air and my excitement. Fortunately, before losing consciousness, I drew on the four- strap, and the tarn levelled out and then lifted his wings over his back and dropped like a striking hawk, with a speed that left me without breath in my body. I released the reins, letting them hang on the
saddle-ring, which is the signal for a constant and straight flight, no pressure on the throat strap. The great tarn snapped his wings out, catching the air under them, and smoothly began to fly a straight course, his wings beating slowly but steadily in a cruising speed that would soon take us far beyond the towers of the city. The Older Tarl, who seemed pleased, drew near. He pointed back towards the city, which was now several miles in the distance. “I’ll race you,” I cried. “Agreed!” he shouted, wheeling his tarn in the instant he spoke, and
turning him to the city. I was dismayed. His skill was such that he had taken a lead that it would be impossible to overcome. At last I managed to turn the bird, and we were streaking along in the wake of the Older Tarl. Certain of his cries drifted back to us. He was urging his tran to greater speed by a series of shouts intended to communicate his excitement to his winged mount. The thought flashed through my mind that tarns should be trained to respond to voice commands as well as to the numbered straps and the tarn-goad. That they had not been seemed astounding to me.
I shouted to my tarn, in Gorean and in English. “Har-ta! Har-ta! Faster! Faster!” The great bird seemed to sense what I intended, or perhaps it was merely his sudden realisation that the other tarn was in the lead, but a remarkable transformation swept over my sable, plumed steed. His neck straightened and his wings suddenly cracked 1like whips in the sky; his eyes became fiery and his every bone and muscle seemed to leap with power. In a dizzying minute or two we had passed the Older Tarl, to his amazement, and had settled again in a flurry of
wings on the top of the cylinder from which we had departed a few minutes before. “By the beards of the Priest- Kings,” roared the Older Tarl as he brought his bird to the roof, “that is a tarn of tarns!” The tarns, released, winged their way back to the tarn cots, and the Older Tarl and I descended to my apartment. He was bursting with pride. “What a tarn!” he marvelled. “I had a full pasang start, and yet you passed me!” The pasang is a measure of distance on Gor, equivalent to approximately. 7 of a mile. “That tarn,” he said, “was
bred for you, specially selected from the best broods of the finest of our war tarns. It was with you in mind that the keepers of the tarns worked, breeding and crossbreeding, training and retraining.” “I thought,” I said, “on the roof it would kill me. It seems the tarn keepers do not train their prodigies as well as they might.” “No!” cried the Older Tarl. “The training is perfect. The spirit of the tarn must not be broken, not that of a war tarn. He is trained to the point where it is necessary for a strong master to decide whether he shall
serve him or slay him. You will come to know your tarn, and he will come to know you. You will be as one in the sky, the tarn the body, you the mind and will. You will live in an armed truce with the tarn. If you become weak or helpless, he will kill you. As long as you remain strong, his master, he will serve you, respect you, obey you.” He paused. “We were not sure of you, your father and myself, but today I am sure. You have mastered a tarn, a war tarn. In your veins must flow the blood of your father, once Ubar, War Chieftain, now Administrator of Ko-ro-ba, this City of
Cylinders.” I was surprised, for this was the first time I had known that my father had been War Chieftain of the city, or that he was even now its supreme civil official, or, for that matter, that the city was named Ko- ro-ba, a now archaic expression for a village market. The Goreans have a habit of not revealing names easily. For themselves, particularly among the Lower Castes, they often have a real name and what is called a use name. Often only the closest relatives know the real name. On the level of the First Knowledge, it is maintained that
knowing the real name gives one power over a person, a capacity to use that name in spells and insidious magical practices. Perhaps something of the same sort lingers even on our native Earth, where the first name of a person is reserved for use by those who know him intimately and presumably wish him no harm. The second name, which would correspond to the use- name on Gor, is common property, a public sound not sacred or to be protected. At the level of the Second Knowledge, of course, the High Castes, at least in general, recognise the baseless superstition
of the Lower Castes and use their own names comparatively freely, usually followed by the name of their city. For example, I would have given my name as Tarl Cabot of Ko-ro-ba, or, more simply, as Tarl of Ko-ro-ba. The Lower Castes, incidentally, commonly believe that the names of the High Castes are actually use-names and that the High Castes conceal the real names. Our discussion terminated abruptly. There was a rush of wings outside the window of my apartment, and the Older Tarl flung himself across the room and
dragged me to the floor. At the same moment the iron bolt of a crossbow, fired through one the narrow windows, struck the wall behind my chair-stone and ricocheted viciously about the room. I caught1 a glimpse of a black helmet through the port as a warrior, still clutcing a crossbow and mounted on his tarn, hauled up on the one-strap and flew from the window. There were shouts, and, rushing to the window, I saw several answering bolts leave the cylinder and fly in the direction of the retreating assailant, who was now almost half a pasang away and making good his escape.
“A member of the Caste of Assassins,” said the Older Tarl, gazing at the retreating speck in the distance. “Marlenus, who would be Ubar of all Gor, knows of your existence.” “Who is Marlenus?” I asked, shaken. “You will learn in the morning,” said the Older Tarl. “And in the morning you will learn why you have been brought to Gor.” “Why can’t I know now?” I demanded. “Because the morning will come soon enough,” said the Older Tarl. I looked at him.
“Yes,” he said, “tomorrow will be soon enough.” “And tonight?” I asked. “Tonight,” he said, “we will get drunk.”
In the morning I awoke on the sleeping mat in the corner of my apartment, cold and shivering. It was shortly before dawn. I turned off the power switch on the mat and folded back its blanket sides. It was chilly to the touch now, because I had set the chronometric temperature device to turn to cold an hour before the first light. One has little inclination to remain in a
freezing bed. I decided I disapproved of the Gorean devices for separating mortals from their beds as much as I loathed the alarm clock radios of my own world. Besides, I had a headache like the beating of spears on a bronze shield, a headache that drove all lesser considerations, such as the attempt on my life yesterday, from my mind. The planet might be exploding and a man would stop to remove a burr from his sandal. I sat up, cross-legged, on the mat, which was now returning to room temperature. I struggled to my feet and staggered to the laving bowl on
the table and splashed some water in my face. I could remember something of the night before, but not much. The Older Tarl and I had made a round of taverns in the various cylinders, and I recall toddling precariously, singing obscene camp lyrics along different narrow bridges, about a yard wide without rails, and the earth somewhere below – how far I had no idea at the time. If we were on the high bridges, it would have been more than a thousand feet away. The Older Tarl and I may have drunk too much of that fermented brew concocted with
fiendish skill from the yellow grain, Sa-Tarna, and called Pagar Sa- Tarna, Pleasure of the Life- Daughter, but almost always “Paga” for short. I doubted that I would ever touch the stuff again. I remembered, too, the girls in the last tavern, if it was a tavern, lascivious in their dancing silks, pleasure slaves bred like animals for passion. If there were natural slaves and natural free men, as the Older Tarl had insisted, those girls were natural slaves. It was impossible to conceive of them as other than they had been, but somewhere they, too, must be
awakening painfully, struggling to their feet, needing to clean themselves. One in particular I remembered, young, her body like a cheetah, he black hair wild on her brown shoulders, the bangles on her ankles, their sound in the curtained alcove. I found the thought crossing my mind that I would have liked to have owned that one for more than the hour I had paid for. I shook the thought from my aching head, made an unsuccessful effort to muster a decent sense of shame, failed, and was belting my tunic when the Older 1Tarl entered the room. “We are going to the Chamber of
the Council,” he said. I followed him. The Chamber of the Council is the room in which the elected representatives of the High Castes of Ko-ro-ba hold their meetings. Each city has such a chamber. It was in the widest of cylinders, and the ceiling was at least six times the height of the normal living level. The ceiling was lit as if by stars, and the walls were of five colours, applied laterally, beginning from the bottom – white, blue, yellow, green, and red, caste colours. Benches of stone, on which the members of the Council sat, rose in
five monumental tiers about the walls, one tier for each of the High Castes. These tiers shared the colour of that portion of the wall behind them, the caste colours. The tier nearest the floor, which denoted some preferential status, the white tier, was occupied by Initiates, Interpreters of the Will of Priest-Kings. In order, the ascending tiers, blue, yellow, green, and red, were occupied by representatives of the Scribes, Builders, Physicians, and Warriors. Torm, I observed, was not seated in the tier of Scribes. I smiled to myself. “I am,” Torm had said, “too
practical to involve myself in the frivolities of government.” I supposed the city might be under siege and Torm would fail to notice. I was pleased to note that my own caste, that of the Warriors, was accorded the least status; if I had had my will, the warriors would not have been a High Caste. On the other hand, I objected to the Initiates being in the place of honour, as it seemed to me that they, even more than the Warriors, were nonproductive members of society. For the Warriors, at least, one could say that they afforded
protection to the city. but for the Initiates one could say very little, perhaps only that they provided some comfort for ills and plagues largely of their own manufacture. In the centre of the amphitheatre was a throne of office, and on this throne, in his robe of state – a plain brown garment, the humblest cloth in the hall – sat my father, Administrator of Ko-ro-ba, once Ubar, War Chieftain of the city. At his feet lay a helmet, shield, spear, and sword. “Come forward, Tarl Cabot,” said my father, and I stood before his throne of office, feeling the eyes
of everyone in the chamber on me. Behind me stood the Older Tarl. I had noted that those blue Viking eyes showed almost no evidence if the previous night. I hated him, briefly. The Older Tarl was speaking. “I, Tarl, Swordsman of Ko-ro-ba, give my word that this man is fit to become a member of the High Caste of Warriors.” My father answered him, speaking in ritual phrases. “No tower in Ko-ro-ba is stronger than the word of Tarl, this Swordman of our city. I, Matthew Cabot of Ko- ro-ba, accept his word.”
Then, beginning with the lowest tier, each member of the Council spoke in succession, giving his name and pronouncing that he, too, accepted the word of the blond swordsman. When they had finished, my father invested me with the arms which had lain before the throne. About my shoulder he slung the steel sword, fastened on my left arm the round shield, placed in my right hand the spear, and slowly lowered the helmet on my head. “Will you keep the Code of the Warrior?” asked my father. “Yes,” I said, “I will keep the Code.”
“What is your Home Stone?” asked my father. Sensing what was wanted, I replied, “My Home Stone is the Home Stone of Ko-ro-ba.” “Is it to that city that you pledge your life, your honour, your sword?” asked my father. “Yes,” I said. “Then,” said my father, placing his hands solemnly on my shoulders, “in virtue of my authority as Administrator of this city and in the presence of the Council of High Castes, I declare you to be a Warrior of Ko-ro-ba.” My father was smiling. I
removed my helmet, feeling proud as I heard the approval of the Council, both in voice and by Gorean applause, the quick, repeated striking of the left shoulder with the palm of the right hand. Aside from candidates for the status of Warrior, none of my caste was permitted to enter the Council armed. Had they been armed, my caste brothers would have struck their spear blades on their shields. As it was, they smote their shoulders in the civilian manner, more exuberantly perhaps than was compatible with the decorum of that weighty chamber. Somehow I had
the feeling they were genuinely proud of me, though I had no idea why. I had surely done nothing to warrant their commendation. With the Older Tarl I left the Chamber of the Council and entered a room off the chamber to wait for my father. In the room was a table, and on the table was a set of maps. The Older Tarl immediately went to the maps, and, calling me to his side, began to pore over them, pointing out this mark and that. “And there,” he said, poking downward with his finger, “is the City of Ar, hereditary enemy of Ko- ro-ba, the central city of Marlenus,
who intends to be Ubar of all Gor.” “This has something to do with me?” I asked. “Yes,” said the Older Tarl. “You are going to Ar. You are going to steal the Home Stone of Ar and bring it to Ko-ro-ba.”
Chapter Five:LIGHTS OF THE PLANTING FEAST
I mounted my tarn, that fierce, black magnificent bird. My shield and spear were secured by saddle straps; my sword was slung over
my shoulder. On each side of the saddle hung a missile weapon, a crossbow with a quiver of a dozen quarrels, or bolts, on the left, a longbow with a quiver of thirty arrows on the right. The saddle pack contained the light gear carried by raiding tarnsmen – in particular, rations, a compass, maps, binding fibre, and extra bowstrings. Bound in the saddle in front of me, drugged, her head completely covered with a slave hood buckled under her chin, was a girl. It was Sana, the Tower Slave whom I had seen on my first day in Gor.
I waved a farewell to the Older Tarl and to my father, drew back on the one-strap, and was off, leaving the tower and their tiny figures nehind me. I levelled the tarn and drew on the six-strap, setting my course for Ar. As I passed the cylinder in which Torm kept his scrolls, I was happy to catch a glimpse of the little scribe standing at his rough-hewn window. I now realise he might have been waiting there for hours. He lifted his blue- clad arm in a gesture of farewell – rather sadly, I thought. I waved back at him and then turned my eyes away from Ko-ro-ba and towards
the hills beyond. I felt little of the exhilaration I had felt in my first soaring adventure on the back of the tarn. I was troubled and angry, dismayed at the ugly details of the project before me. I thought of the innocent girl bound senseless before me. How surprised I had been when she had appeared in the small room outside the Chamber of the Council, after my father! She had knelt at his feet in the position of the Tower Slave as he had explained to me the plan of the Council. The power of Marlenus, or much of it, lay in the mystique of victory
that had never ceased to attend him, acting like a magic spell on his soldiers and the people of his city. Never defeated in combat, Ubar of Ubars, he had boldly refused to relinquish his title after a Valley War some twelve years ago, and his men had refused to withdraw from him, refused to abandon him to the traditional fate of the overambitious Ubar. The soldiers, and the Council of his city, had succumbed to his blandishments, his promises of wealth and power for Ar. Indeed, it seemed their confidence had been well placed, for now Ar, instead of being a
single beleaguered city like so many others on Gor, was a central city in which were kept the Home Stones of a dozen hitherto free cities. There was now an empire of Ar, a robust, arrogant, warlike polity only too obviously involved in the work of dividing its enemies and extending its political hegemony city by city across the plains, hills, and deserts of Gor. In a matter of time Ko-ro-ba would be forced to match its comparative handful of tarnsmen against those of the Empire of Ar. My father, in his office as Administrator of Ko-ro-ba, had
attempted to develop an alliance against Ar, but the free cities of Gor had, in their pride and suspicion, their almost fanatical commitment to protecting their own independent destinies, refused the alliance. Indeed, they had, in the fashion of Gor, driven my father’s envoys from their Council Chambers with the whips normally used on slaves, an insult which, at another time, would have been answered by the War Call of Ko-ro-ba. But, as my father knew, strife among the free cities would be the very madness which Marlenus of Ar would welcome most; better even that Ko-
ro-ba should suffer the indignity of being thought a city of cowards. Yet if the Home Stone of Ar, the very symbol and significance of the empire, could be removed from Ar, the spell of Marlenus might be broken. He would become a laughing-stock, suspect to his own men, a leader who had lost the Home Stone. He would be fortunate if he was not publicly impaled. The girl on the saddle before me stirred, the effect of the drug wearing off. She moaned softly and leaned back against me. As soon as we had taken flight, I had unfastened the restraining straps on
her legs and wrists, leaving only the broad belt which lashed her securely to the back of the tarn. I would not permit the plan of the Council to be followed completely, not in her case, even though she had agreed to play her part in the plan, knowing it meant her life. I knew a little more about her than her name, Sana, and the fact that she was a slave from the City of Thentis. The Older Tarl had told me that Thentis is a city famed for its tarn flocks and remote in the mountains from which the city takes its name. Raiders from Ar had struck at the tarn flocks and the outlying
cylinders of Thentis, and the girl had been captured. She had been sold in Ar on the Day of the Love Feast and had been purchased by an agent of my father. He, in accordance with the plan of the Council, had need of a girl who would be willing to give her life to be avenged on the men of Ar. I could not help feeling sorry for her, even in the stern world of Gor. She had been through too much and was clearly not of the stock of the tavern girls; slavery would not have been a good life for her, as it might have been for them. I felt that, somehow, in spite of her collar, she
was free. I had felt this even when my father had commanded her to rise and submit to me1, accepting me as her new master. She had risen and walked across the room, her feet bare on the stone floor, and dropped to her knees before me, lowering her head and lifting and extending her hands to me, the wrists crossed. The ritual significance of the gesture of submission was not lost on me; her wrists were offered to me, as if for binding. Her part in the plan was simple, though ultimately fatal. The Home Stone of Ar, like most Home Stones in the cylinder cities,
was kept free on the tallest tower, as if in open defiance of the tarnsmen of rival cities. It was, of course, kept well-guarded and at the first sign of serious danger would undoubtedly be carried to safety. Any attempt on the Home Stone was regarded by the citizens of the city as sacrilege of the most heinous variety and punishable by the most painful of deaths, but paradoxically, it was regarded as the greatest of glories to purloin the Home Stone of another city, and the warrior who managed this was acclaimed, accorded the highest honours of the city, and was
believed to be favoured by the Priest-Kings themselves. The Home Stone of a city is the centre of various rituals. The next would be the Planting Feast of Sa- Tarna, the Life-Daughter, celebrated early in the growing season to ensure a good harvest. This is a complex feast, celebrated by most Gorean cities, and the observances are numerous and intricate. The details of the rituals are arranged and mostly executed by the Initiates of a given city. Certain portions of the ceremonies, however, are often allotted to members of the High Castes.
In Ar, for example, early in the day, a member of the Builders will go to the roof on which the Home Stone is kept and place the primitive symbol of his trade, a metal angle square, before the Stone, praying to the Priest-Kings for the prosperity of his caste in the coming year; later in the day a Warrior will, similarly, place his arms before the Stone, to be followed by other representatives of each caste. Most significantly, while these members of the High Castes perform their portions of the ritual, the Guards of the Home Stone temporarily withdraw to the
interior of the cylinder, leaving the celebrant, it is said, alone with the Priest-Kings. Lastly, as the culmination of Ar’s Planting Feast, and of the greatest importance to the plan of the Council of Ko-ro-ba, a member of the Ubar’s family goes to the roof at night, under the three full moons with which the feast is correlated, and casts grain upon the stone and drops of a red, winelike drink made from the fruit of the Ka-la-na tree. The member of the Ubar’s family then prays to the Priest-Kings for an abundant harvest and returns to the interior of the cylinder, at which
point the Guards of the Home Stone resume their vigil. This year the honour of the grain sacrifice was to be accorded to the daughter of the Ubar. I knew nothing about her except that her name was Talena, that she was rumoured to be one of the beauties of Ar, and that I was supposed to kill her. According to the plan of the Council of Ko-ro-ba, exactly at the time of the sacrifice, at the twentieth Gorean hour, or midnight, I was to drop to the roof of the highest cylinder in Ar, slay the daughter of the Ubar, and carry away her body and the Home Stone,
discarding the former in the swamp country north of Ar and carrying the latter home to Ko-ro-ba. The girl, Sana, whom I carried on the saddle before me, would dress in the heavy robes and veils of the Ubar’s daughter and return in her place to the interior of the cylinder. Presumably, it would be at least a matter of minutes before her identity was discovered, and, before that, she would take the poison provided by the Council. Two girls were supposed to di1e that I might have time to escape with the Home Stone before the alarm could be given. In my heart I
knew I could not carry out this plan. Abruptly I changed course, drawing on the four-strap, guiding my tarn towards the blue, shimmering wave of a mountain range in the distance. The girl before me groaned and shook herself, her hands, unsteady, going to the slave hood, which was buckled over her head. I helped her unbuckle the hood and felt delighted at the sudden flash of her long blonde hair streaking out beside my cheek. I placed the hood in the saddle pack, admiring her, not only her beauty but even more that she did not seem frightened. Surely there was enough
to frighten any girl – the height at which she found herself, the savage mount on which she rode, the prospect of the terrible fate that she believed to await he at our journey’s end. But she was, of course, a girl of mountainous Thentis, famed for its fierce tarn flocks. Such a girl would not frighten easily. She didn’t turn to look at me, but she examined her wrists, rubbing them gently. The marks of the original restraining straps, which I had removed, were just visible. “You unbound me,” she said. “And you removed my hood –
why?” “I thought you would be more comfortable,” I replied. “You treat a slave with unexpected consideration,” she said. “Thank you.” “You’re not – frightened?” I asked, stumbling on the words, feeling stupid. “I mean – about the tarn. You must have ridden tarns before. I was frightened my first time.” The girl looked at me, puzzled. “Women are seldom permitted to ride on the backs of tarns,” she said. “In the carrying baskets, but not as a warrior rides.” She paused,
and the wind whistled past, a steady sound mingling with the rhythmical stroke of the tarn’s beating wings. “You said you were frightened – when you first rode a tarn.” “I was,” I laughed, recalling the excitement and the sense of danger. “Why do you tell a slave that you were frightened?” she asked. “I don’t know,” I replied. “But I was.” She turned her head away again and looked, unseeing, at the head of the great tarn as ehe ploughed the wind. “I did ride once before on the back of a tarn,” she said bitterly,
“to Ar, bound across the saddle, before I was sold in the Street of Brands.” It was not easy to talk on the back of the great tarn, with the wind, and, besides, though I wanted to communicate with the girl, I felt I could not. She was looking at the horizon, and suddenly her body tensed. “This is not the way to Ar,” she cried. “I know,” I said. “What are you doing?” She turned bodily in the straps, looking at me, her eyes wide. “Where are you going, Master?”
The word ‘Master’, though it had come appropriately enough from the girl, who was, legally at least, my property, startled me. “Don’t call me Master,” I said. “But you are my Master,” she said. I took from my tunic the key my father had given me, the key to Sana’s collar. I reached to the lock behind her neck, inserted the key and turned, springing open the mechanism. I1 jerked the collar away from her throat and threw it and the key from the tarn’s back and watched them fly downward in a long, graceful parabola.
“You are free,” I said. “And we are going to Thentis.” She sat before me, stunned, her hands unbelievingly at her throat. “Why?” she asked. “Why?” What could I tell her? That I had come from another world, that I was determined that all the ways of Gor should not be mine, or that I had cared for her, somehow, so helpless in her condition – that she had moved me to regard her not as an instrumentality of mine or of the Council, but as a girl, young, rich with life, not to be sacrificed in the games of statecraft? “I have my reasons for freeing
you,” I said, “but I am not sure that you would understand them,” and I added, under my breath, to myself, that I was not altogether sure I understood them myself. “My father,” she said, “and my brothers will reward you.” “No,” I said. “If you wish, they are bound in honour to grant me to you, without bride price.” “The ride to Thentis will be long,” I said. She replied proudly, “My bride price would be a hundred tarns.” I whistled softly to myself – my ex-slave would have come high. On
a Warrior’s allowance I would not have been able to afford her. “If you wish to land,” said Sana, apparently determined to see me compensated in some fashion, “I will serve you pleasure.” It occurred to me that there was at least one reply which she, bred in the honour codes of Gor, should understand, one reply that should silence her. “Would you diminish the worth of my gift to you?” I asked, feigning anger. She thought for a moment and then gently kissed me on the lips. “No, Tarl Cabot of Ko-ro-ba,” she said, “but you well know that I
could do nothing that would diminish the worth of your gift to me. Tarl Cabot, I care for you.” I realised that she had spoken to me as a free woman, using my name. I put my arms around her, sheltering her as well as I could from the swift, chilling blast of the wind. Then I thought to myself, a hundred tarns indeed! Forty perhaps, because she was a beauty. For a hundred tarns one might have the daughter of an Administrator, for a thousand perhaps even the daughter of the Ubar of Ar! A thousand tarns would make a formidable addition to the cavalry
forces of a Gorean warlord. Sana, collar or no, had the infuriating, endearing vanity of the young and beautiful of her sex. On a tower of Thentis I left her, kissing her, removing from my neck her clinging hands. She was crying, with all the incomprehensible absurdity of the female kind. I hauled the tarn aloft, waving back at the small figure still wearing the diagonally striped livery of the slave. Her white arm was lifted, and her blonde hair was swept behind her on the windy roof of the cylinder. I turned towards Ar. As I crossed the Vosk, that
mighty river, some forty pasangs in width, which hurtles past the frontiers of Ar to pour into the Tamber Gulf, I realised that I was at last within the borders of the Empire of Ar. Sana had insisted that I keep the pellet of poison which the Council had given me to spare her from the otherwise inevitable tortures that would follow the disclosure of her identity in the cylinders of Ar. However, I took the pellet from my tu1nic and dropped it into the wide waters of the Vosk. It constituted a temptation to which I had no inclination to succumb. If death was easy, I might
seek life less strenuously. There would come times when, in my weakness, I would regret my decision. It took three days to reach the environs of the city of Ar. Shortly after crossing the Vosk, I had descended and made camp, thereafter travelling only at night. during the day I freed my tarn, to allow him to feed as he would. They are diurnal hunters and eat only what they catch themselves, usually one of the fleet Gorean antelopes or a wild bull, taken on the run and lifted in the monstrous talons to a high place, where it is
torn to pieces and devoured. Needless to say, tarns are a threat to any living matter that is luckless enough to fall within the shadow of their wings, even human beings. During the first day, sheltered in the occasional knots of trees that dot the border plains of Ar, I slept, fed on my rations, and practised with my weapons, trying to keep my muscles vital in spite of the stiffness that attends prolonged periods on tarnback. But I was bored. At first even the countryside was depressing, for the men of Ar, as a military policy, had devasted and area of some two or three
hundred pasangs on their borders, cutting down fruit trees, filling wells, and salting the fertile areas. Ar had, for most practical purposes, surrounded itself with an invisible wall, a bleached region, forbidding and almost impassable to those on foot. I was more pleased on the second day and made camp in a grassy veldt, dotted with the Ka-la- na trees. The night before, I had ridden over fields of grain, silvery yellow beneath me in the light of the three moons. I kept my course by the luminescent dial of my Gor compass, the needle of which
pointed always to the Sardar Mountain Range, home of the Priest-Kings. Sometimes I guided my tarn by the stars, the same fixed stars I had seen from another angle above my head in the mountains of New Hampshire. The third day’s camp was made in the swamp forest that borders the city of Ar on the north. I had chosen this area because it is the most uninhabitable area within tarn strike of Ar. I had seen to many village cooking fires last night, and twice I had heard the tarn whistles of nearby patrols – groups of three warriors flying their rounds. The
thought crossed my mind, of giving up the project, turning outlaw, if you will, deserter, if you like, but of saving my own skin, trying to get out of this mad scheme if only with my life, and that only for a time. But an hour before midnight, on the day I knew was the Planting Feast of Sa-Tarna, I climbed again to the saddle of my tarn, drew back on the one-strap, and rose above the lush trees of the swamp forest. Almost simultaneously I heard the raucous cry of a patrol leader of Ar, “We have him!” They had followed my tarn, trailing it back from its feeding in
the swamp forest, and now, like the points of a rapidly converging triangle, three warriors of Ar were closing in on me. The apparently had no intention of taking me prisoner, for an instant after the shout the sharp hiss of a bolt from a crossbow passed over my head. Before I had time to gather my senses, a dark winged shape had materialised in front of me, and, in the light of the three moons, I saw a warrior on a tarn passing, thrusting out with his spear. He surely would have struck home had not my tarn veered wildly to the left, almost colliding with
another tarn and its rider, who fired a bolt that sank deep in the saddle pack with a sound like slapping leather. The third of the warriors of Ar was sweeping in from behind. I turned, raising the tarn-goad, which was looped to my wrist, to ward off the str1oke of his blade. Sword and tarn-goad met in a ringing clash and a shower of glittering yellow sparks. Somehow I must have turned the goad on. Both my tarn and that of the attacker withdrew as if by instinct from the flash of the goad, and I had inadvertently purchased a moment of time. I unslung my longbow and fitted
an arrow, yanking my tarn in an abrupt wing-shuddering arc. I think the first of my pursuers had not realised I would turn the bird. He had been expecting a chase. As I passed him, I saw his eyes wide in the “Y” of his helmet, as in that split second, he knew I could not miss. I saw him stiffen suddenly in the saddle and was dimly aware of his tarn streaking away, screaming. Now the other two men of the patrol were circling for their attack. They swept towards me, about five yards apart, to close on either side of me, to force the wings of my tarn up and hold it for the moment they
would need, trapped motionless between their own mounts. I had no time to think, but somehow I was aware that my sword was now in my hand and the tarn-goad thrust in my belt. As we crashed in the air, I sharply jerked back the one-strap, bringing the steel-shod talons of my war tarn into play. And to this day I bless the tarn keepers of Ko-ro-ba for the painstaking training they had given the great bird. Or perhaps I should bless the fighting spirit of that plumed giant, my war tarn, that terrible thing the Older Tarl had called a tarn of tarns. Beak and
talons rending, uttering ear- shattering screams, my tarn slashed at the other two birds. I crossed swords with the nearer of the two warriors in a brief passage that could have lasted only an instant. I was suddenly aware, dizzily conscious, that one of the enemy tarns was sinking downward, flopping wildly, falling into the recesses of the swamp forest below. The other warrior pulled his tarn about as if for another passage at arms, but then, as if suddenly realising that his duty was to give the alarm, he shouted at me in rage and wheeled his tarn
again, streaking for the lights of Ar. With his start, he would be confident, but I knew that my tarn would overtake him easily. I brought my tarn into line with the retreating speck and gave him his rein. As we neared the fleeing warrior, I fitted a second arrow to my bow. Rather than kill the warrior, I loosed the arrow into the wing of his tarn. The tarn spun about and began to favour the injured wing. The warrior could no longer control the mount, and I saw the tarn dropping awkwardly, descending in drunken circles to the darkness below.
I drew back on the one-strap, and when we had climbed to a height where my breath came in gasps, I levelled our course for Ar. I wished to fly above the normal patrol runs. When I neared Ar, I crouched low in the saddle and hoped that the speck against a moon which might be seen by the watchmen of the outlying towers would be taken for a wild tarn, flying high over the city. The city of Ar must have contained more than a hundred thousand cylinders, each ablaze with the lights of the Planting Feast. I did not question that Ar was the
greatest city of all known Gor. It was a magnificent and beautiful city, a worthy setting for the jewel of empire, that awesome jewel that had proved so tempting to its Ubar, the all-conquering Marlenus. And now, down there, somewhere in that monstrous blaze of light, was a humble piece of stone, the Home Stone of that great city, and I must seize it.
Chapter Six:NAR THE SPIDER
I had little difficulty in making
1out the tallest tower in Ar, the cylinder of the Ubar Marlenus. As I dropped closer, I saw that the bridges were lined with the celebrants of the Planting Feast, many perhaps reeling home drunk on Paga. Flying among the cylinders were tarnsmen, cavalry warriors revelling in the undisciplined liberty of the feast, racing one another, essaying mock passages at arms, sometimes dropping their tarns like thunderbolts towards the bridges, only to jerk them upward just inches above the terrified heads of the celebrants. Boldly I dipped my tarn
downward, into the midst of the cylinders, just another of the wild tarnsmen of Ar. I brought him to rest on one of the steel projections that occasionally jut forth from the cylinders and serve as tarn perches. The great bird opened and closed his wings, his steel-shod talons ringing on the metal perch as he changed his position, moving back and forth upon it. At last, satisfied, he brought his wings against his body and remained still, except for the alert movements of his great head and the flash of those wicked eyes scrutinising the streams of men and women on the nearby bridges.
My heart began to beat wildly, and I considered the facility with which I might yet wing my way from Ar. Once a warrior without a helmet flew near, drunk, and challenged me for the perch, a wild tarnsman of low rank, spoiling for a fight. If I had yielded the perch, it would have aroused suspicion immediately, for on Gor the only honourable reply to a challenge is to accept it promptly. “May the Priest-Kings blast your bones,” I shouted, as cheerfully as I could, adding, for good measure, “and may you thrive upon the excrement of tharlarions!” The
latter recommendation, with its allusion to the loathed riding lizards used by many of the primitive clans of Gor, seemed to please him. “May your tarn lose its feathers,” he roared, slapping his thigh, bringing his tarn to rest on the perch. He leaned over and tossed me a skin bag of Paga, from which I took a long swig, then hurled it contemptuously back into his arms. In a moment he had taken flight again, bawling out some semblance of a song about the woes of a camp girl, the bag of Paga flying behind him, dangling from its long straps. Like most Gor compasses, mine
contained a chronometer, and I took the compass, turned it over, and pressed the tab that would snap open the back and reveal the dial. It was two minutes past the twentieth hour! Vanished were my thoughts of escape and desertion. I abruptly forced my tarn into flight, streaking for the tower of the Ubar. In a moment it was below me. I dropped immediately, for no one without good reason rides a tarn in the vicinity of the tower of a Ubar. As I descended, I saw the wide, round roof of the cylinder. It seemed to be translucently lit from beneath – a bluish colour. In the
center of the circle was a low, round platform, some ten paces in diameter, reached by four circular steps that extended about the perimeter of the platform. On the platform, alone, was a dark robed figure. as my tarn struck down on the platform and I leaped from its back, I heard a girl’s scream. I lunged for the centre of the platform, breaking under my foot a small ceremonial basket filled with grain, kicking from my path a Ka- la-na container, splashing the fermented red liquid across the stone surface. I raced to the pile of stones at the centre of the platform,
the girl’s screaming in my ears. From a short distance away I heard the shouts of men and the clank of arms as warriors raced up the stairs to the roof. Which was the Home Stone? I kicked apart the rocks. One of them must be the Home Stone of Ar, but which? How could I tell it from the others, the Home Stones of those c1ities which had fallen to Ar? Yes! It would be the one that would be red with Ka-la-na, that would be sprinkled with the seeds of grain! I felt the stones in frenzy, but several were damp and dotted with the grains of Sa-Tarns. I felt
the heavily robed figure dragging me back, tearing at my shoulders and throat with her nails, pitting against me all the fury of her enraged body. I swung back, forcing her from me. She fell to her knees and suddenly crawled to one of the stones, seized it up, and turned to flee. A spear shattered on the platform near me. The Guards were on the roof! I leaped after the heavily robed figure, seized her, spun her around and tore from her hands the stone she carried. She struck at me and pursued me to the tarn which was excitedly shaking his wings,
preparing to forsake the tumultuous roof of the cylinder. I leaped upward and seized the saddle ring, inadvertently dislodging the mounting ladder. In an instant I had attained the saddle of the tarn and drew back savagely on the one- strap. The heavily robed figure was trying to climb the mounting ladder, but was impeded by the weight and ornate inflexibility of her garments. I cursed as an arrow creased my shoulder, as the tarn’s great wings smote the air and the monster took to flight. He was in the air, and the passage of arrows sang in my ears, the cries of enraged men, and the
long, piercing, terrified scream of a girl. I looked down, dismayed. The heavily robed figure was still clinging desperately to the mounting ladder. She was now clear of the roof, swinging free below the tarn, with the lights of Ar dropping rapidly into the distance below her. I drew my sword from its sheath, to cut the mounting ladder from the saddle, but stopped, and angrily drove the blade back into its sheath. I couldn’t afford to carry the extra weight, but neither could I bring myself to cut the ladder free and send the girl hurtling to her death.
I cursed as the frenzied notes of tarn whistles drifted up from below. All the tarnsmen of Ar would be flying tonight. I passed the outermost cylinder of Ar and found myself free in the Gorean night, streaking for Ko-ro-ba. I placed the Home Stone in the saddle pack, snapping the lock shut, and then reached down to haul in the mounting ladder. The girl was whimpering in terror, and her muscles and fingers seemed frozen. Even after I had drawn her to the saddle before me and belted her securely to the saddle ring, I had to force her
fingers from the rung of the mounting ladder. I folded the ladder and fastened it in its place at the side of the saddle. I felt sorry for the girl, a helpless pawn in this sorry man’s game of empire, and the tiny animal noises she uttered moved me to pity. “Try not to be afraid,” I said. She trembled, whimpering. “I won’t hurt you,” I said. “Once we’re beyond the swamp forest, I’ll set you down on some highway to Ar. You’ll be safe.” I wanted so to reassure her. “By morning you’ll be back in Ar,” I promised. Hopelessly, she seemed to
stammer some incoherent word of gratitude and turned trustfully to me, putting her arms around my waist as though for additional security; I felt her trembling, innocent body against mine, her dependence on me, and then she suddenly locked her arms around my waist and with a cry of rage hurled me from the saddle. In the sickening instant of falling I realised I had not fastened my own saddle belt in the wild flight from the roof of the Ubar’s cylinder. My hands flung out, grasping nothing, and I fell headlong downward into the night. I remember hearing for a
moment, fadi1ng like the wind, her triumphant laughter. I felt my body stiffening in the fall, setting itself for the impact. I remember wondering if I would feel the crushing jolt, and supposing that I would. Absurdly, I tried to loosen my body, relaxing the muscles, as if it would make any difference. I waited for the shock, was conscious of the flashing pain of breaking through branches and the plunge into some soft, articulated yielding substance. I lost consciousness. When I opened my eyes, I found myself partially adhering to a vast network of broad, elastic strands
that formed a structure, perhaps a pasang in width, and through which at numerous points projected the monstrous trees of the swamp forest. I felt the network, or web, tremble, and I struggled to rise, but found myself unable to gain my feet. My flesh adhered to the adhesive substance of the broad strands. Approaching me, stepping daintily for all its bulk, prancing over the strands, came one of the Swamp Spiders of Gor. I fastened my eyes on the blue sky, wanting it to be the last thing I looked upon. I shuddered as the beast paused near me, and I felt the light stroke of its
forelegs, felt the tactile investigation of the sensory hairs on its appendages. I looked at it, and it peered down, with its four pairs of pearly eyes – quizzically, I thought. Then, to my astonishment, I heard a mechanically reproduced sound say, “Who are you?” I shuddered, believing that my mind had broken at last. In a moment the voice repeated the question, the volume of the sound being slightly increased, and then added, “Are you from the city of Ar?” “No,” I said, taking part in what I believed must be some fantastic
hallucination in which I madly conversed with myself. “No, I am not,” I said. “I am from the Free City of Ko-ro-ba.” When I said this, the monstrous insect bent near me and I caught sight of the mandibles, liked curved knives. I tensed myself for the sudden lateral chopping of those pincerlike jaws. Instead, saliva or some related type of secretion or exudate was being applied to the web in my vicinity, which loosened its adhesive grip. When freed, I was lifted lightly in the mandibles and carried to the edge of the web, where the spider seized a hanging
strand and scurried downward, placing me on the ground. He then backed away from me on his eight legs, but never taking the pearly gaze of his several eyes from me. I heard the mechanically reproduced sound again. It said, “My name is Nar, and I am of the Spider People.” I then saw for the first time that strapped to his abdomen was a translation device, not unlike those I had seen in Ko-ro-ba. It apparently translated sound impulses, below my auditory threshold, into the sounds of human speech. My own replies were undoubtedly similarly
transformed into some medium the insect could understand. One of the insect’s legs twiddled with a knob on the translation device. “Can you hear this?” he asked. He had reduced the volume of the sound to its original level, the level at which he had asked his original question. “Yes,” I said. The insect seemed relieved. “I am pleased,” he said. “I do not think it is appropriate for rational creatures to speak loudly.” “You have saved my life,” I said. “Thank you.” “My web saved your life,” corrected the insect. He was still
for a moment, and then, as if sensing my apprehension, said, “I will not hurt you. The Spider People do not hurt rational creatures.” “I am grateful for that,” I said. The next remark took my breath away. “Was it you who stole the Home Stone of Ar?” I paused, then, being confident the creature had no love for the men of Ar, answered affirmatively. “That is pleasing to me,” said the insect, “for the men of Ar do not behave well towards the Spider People. They hunt us and leave only enough of us alive to spin the Cur-
lon Fibre used in the mills of Ar. If they were not rational creatures, we would fight them.” “How did you know the Home Stone of Ar was stolen?” I asked. “The word has spread from the city, carried by all the rational creatures, whether they crawl or fly or swim.” The insect lifted one foreleg, the sensory hairs trembling on my shoulder. “There is great rejoicing on Gor, but not in the city of Ar.” “I lost the Home Stone,” I said. “I was tricked by her I suppose to be the daughter of the Ubar, thrown from my own tarn, and saved from
death only by your web. I think tonight there will be gladness in Ar, when the daughter of the Ubar returns the Home Stone.” The mechanical voice spoke again. “How is it that the daughter of the Ubar will return the Home Stone of Ar when you carry in your belt the tarn-goad?” Suddenly I realised the truth of what he had said and was amazed that it had not occurred to me before. I imagined the girl alone on the back of the fierce tarn, unskilled in the mastery of such a mount, without even a tarn-goad to protect herself if the bird should turn on
her. Her chances of survival seemed now more slim than if I had cut the ladder over the cylinders of Ar when she hung helplessly in my power, the treacherous daughter of the Ubar Marlenus. Soon the tarn would be feeding. It must have been light for several hours. “I must return to Ko-ro-ba,” I said. “I have failed.” “I will take you to the edge of the swamp if you like,” said the insect. I assented, thanking him, this rational creature who lifted me gently to his back and moved with such dainty rapidity, picking his way exquisitely through the swamp
forest. We had proceeded for perhaps an hour when Nar, the spider, abruptly stopped and lifted his two forelegs into the air, testing the odours, straining to sift out something in the dense, humid air. “There is a carnivorous tharlarion, a wild tharlarion, in the vicinity,” he said. “Hold tightly.” Luckily I did immediately as he had advised, fixing my grip deep in the long black hairs that covered his thorax, for Nar suddenly raced to a nearby swamp tree and scuttled high into its branches. About two or three minutes later I heard the
hunger grunt of a wild tharlarion and a moment afterwards the piercing scream of a terrified girl. From the back of Nar I could see the marsh, with its reeds and clouds of tiny flying insects below. From a wall of reeds about fifty paces to the right and thirty feet below, stumbling and screaming, came the bundled figure of a human being, running in horror, its hands flung out before it. In that instant I recognised the heavy brocaded robes, now mud-splattered and torn, of the daughter of the Ubar. Scarcely had she broken into the clearing, splashing through the
shallow greenish waters near us, than the fearsome head of a wild tharlarion poked through the reeds, its round, shining eyes gleaming with excitement, its vast arc of a mouth swung open. Almost too rapid to1 be visible, a long brown lash of a tongue darted from its mouth and curled around the slender, helpless figure of the girl. She screamed hysterically, trying to force the adhesive band from her waist. It began to withdraw towards the mouth of the beast. Without thinking, I leaped from the back of Nar, seizing one of the long, tendril-like vines that
parasitically interlace the gnarled forms of the swamp trees. In an instant I had splashed into the marsh at the foot of the tree and raced towards the tharlarion, my sword raised. I rushed between its mouth and the girl, and with a swift downward slash of my blade severed that foul brown tongue. A shattering squeal of pain rent the heavy air of the swamp forest, and the tharlarion actually reared on its hind legs and spun about in pain, sucking the brown stump of its tongue back into its mouth with an ugly popping noise. Then it splashed on its back in the water,
rolled quickly on to its legs, and began to move its head in rapid scanning motions. Almost immediately its eyes fixed on me; its mouth, now filled with a colourlesss scum, opened, revealing its teeth ridges. It charged, its great webbed feet striking the marsh water like explosions. In an instant the mouth had snapped for me, and I had left the mark of my blade deep in the teeth ridges of its lower jaw. It snapped again, and I knelt, the jaws passing over me as I thrust upward with the sword, piercing the neck. It backed away to about four or five
paces, slowly, unsteadily. The tongue, or rather its stump, flitted in and out of its mouth two or three times, as if the creature could not understand that it was no longer at its disposal. The tharlarion sunk a bit lower in the marsh, half closing its eyes. I knew the fight was over. More of the colourless exudate was seeping from its throat. About its flanks, as it settled into the mud, there was a stirring in the water, and I realised the small water lizards of the swamp forest were engaged in their grisly work. I bent down and washed the blade of my sword as
well as I could in the green water, but my tunic was so splattered and soaked that I had no way to dry the blade. Accordingly, carrying the sword in my hand, I waded back to the foot of the swamp tree and climbed the small, dry knoll at its base. I looked around. The girl had fled. This made me angry, for some reason, though I thought myself well rid of her. After all, what did I expect? That she would thank me for saving her life? She had undoubtedly left me to the tharlarion, rejoicing in the luck of a Ubar’s daughter, that her enemies
might destroy one another while she escaped with her life. I wondered how far she would get in the swamps before another tharlarion caught her scent. I called out ‘Nar!’, looking for my spider comrade, but he, like the girl, had disappeared. Exhausted, I sat with my back against the tree, my hand never leaving the hilt of my sword. Idly, with repulsion, I watched the body of the tharlarion in the swamp. As the water lizards had fed, the carcass, lightened, had shifted position, rolling in the water. Now, in a matter of minutes, the skeleton was visible, picked
almost clean, the bones gleaming except where small lizards skittered about on them, seeking a last particle of flesh. There was a sound. I leaped to my feet, sword ready. But across the marsh, with his swift prancing stride, came Nar, and in his mandibles, held gently but firmly, the daughter of the Ubar Marlenus. She was striking at Nar with her tiny fists, cursing and kicking in a manner I thought most improper for the daughter of a Ubar. Nar pranced on to the knoll and set her down before me, his pearly luminescent eyes fixed on me like blank,
expressionless moons. “This is the daughter of the Ubar Marlenus,” said Nar, and added ironically, “She did not remember to thank you for saving her life, which is strange, is it not, for a rational creature?” “Silence, Insect,” said the daughter of the Ubar, her voice loud, clear, and imperious. She seemed to have no fear of Nar, perhaps because of the familiarity of the citizens of Ar with the Spider People, but it was obvious she loathed the touch of his mandibles, and she shivered slightly as she tried to wipe the exudate from the
sleeves of her gown. “Also,” said Nar, “she speaks rather loudly for a rational creature, does she not?” “Yes,” I said. I regarded the daughter of the Ubar, now a sorry sight. Her Robes of Concealment were splattered with mud and marsh water, and in several places the heavy brocade had stiffened and cracked. The dominant colours of her Robes of Concealment were subtle reds, yellows and purples, arrayed in intricate overlapping folds. I guessed it would have taken the slave girls hours to array her in
such garments. Many of the free women of Gor and almost always those of High Caste wear the Robes of Concealment, though, of course, their garments are seldom as complex or splendidly wrought as those of a Ubar’s daughter. The Robes of Concealment, in function, resemble the garments of Muslim women on my own planet, though they are undoubtedly more intricate and cumbersome. Normally, of men, only a father and a husband may look upon the woman unveiled. In the barbaric world of Gor, the Robes of Concealment are deemed necessary to protect the women
from the binding fibres of roving tarnsmen. Few warriors will risk their lives to capture a woman who may be as ugly as a tharlarion. Better to steal slaves, where the guilt is less and the charms of the captive are more readily ascertainable in advance. Now the eyes of the daughter of the Ubar were blazing at me furiously from the narrow aperture in her veil. I noted that they were greenish in cast, fiery and untamed, the eyes of a Ubar’s daughter, a girl accustomed to command men. I also noted, though with considerably less pleasure, that the daughter of
the Ubar was severl inches taller than myself. Indeed, her body seemed somehow to be out of proportion. “You will release me immediately,” announced the daughter of the Ubar, “and dismiss this filthy insect.” “Spiders are, as a matter of fact, particularly clean insects,” I remarked, my eyes informing her that I was inspecting her comparatively filthy garments. She shrugged haughtily. “Where is the tarn?” I demanded. “You should ask,” she said, “where is the Home Stone of Ar.”
“Where is the tarn?” I repeated, more interested at the moment in the fate of my fierce mount than in the ridiculous piece of rock I had risked my life to obtain. “I don’t know,” she said, “nor do I care.” “What happened?” I wanted to know. “I do not care to be questioned further,” she announced. I clenched my fists in rage. Then, gently, the mandibles of Nar closed around the girl’s throat. A sudden tremor of fear shook her heavily robed body, and the girl’s hand tried to force the implacable
chitinous pincers from her throat. Apparently the Spider Person was not as1 harmless as she had arrogantly assumed. “Tell it to stop,” she gasped, writhing in the insect’s grip, her fingers helplessly trying to loosen the mandibles. “Do you wish her head?” asked the mechanical voice of Nar. I knew that the insect, who would allow his kind to be exterminated before he would injure any rational creature, must have some plan in mind, or at least I assumed he did. At any rate, I said, “Yes.” The mandibles began to close on her throat like the blades of giant
scissors. “Stop!” screamed the girl, her voice a frenzied whisper. I motioned to Nar to relax his grip. “I was trying to bring the tarn back to Ar,” said the girl. “I was never on a tarn before. I made mistakes. It knew it. There was no tarn-goad.” I gestured, and Nar removed his mandibles from the girl’s throat. “We were somewhere over the swamp forest,” said the girl, “when we flew into a flock of wild tarns. My tarn attacked the leader of the flock.”
She shuddered at the memory, and I pitied her for what must have been a horrifying experience, lashed helpless to the saddle of a giant tarn reeling in a death struggle for the mastery of a flock, high over the trees of the swamp forest. “My tarn killed the other,” said the girl, “and followed it to the ground, where he tore it to pieces.” She shook with the memory. “I slipped free and ran under the wing and hid in the trees. After a few minutes, his beak and talons wet with blood and feathers, your tarn took flight. I last saw him at the head of the tarn flock.”
That was that, I thought. The tarn had turned wild, all his instincts triumphant over the tarn whistle, the memory of men. “And the Home Stone of Ar?” I asked. “In the saddle pack,” she said, confirming my expectations. I had locked the pack when I had placed the Home Stone inside, and the pack is an integral part of the tarn saddle. When she had spoken, her voice had burned with shame, and I sensed the humiliation she felt at having failed to save the Home Stone. So now the tarn was gone, returned to his natural wild state, the Home Stone was in the saddle
pack, and I had failed, and the daughter of the Ubar had failed, and we stood facing one another on a green knoll in the swamp forest of Ar.
Chapter Seven:A UBAR’S DAUGHTER
The girl straightened, somehow proud but ludicrous in her mud- bedaubed regalia. She stepped away from Nar, as if apprehensive that those fierce mandibles might threaten her again. Her eyes flashed from the narrow opening in her veil.
“It pleased the daughter of Marlenus,” she said, “to inform you and your eight-legged brother of the fate of your tarn and of the Home Stone you sought.” Nar’s mandibles opened and shut once in annoyance. It was the nearest to anger I had ever seen the gentle creature come. “You will release me immediately,” announced the daughter of the Ubar. “You are free now,” I said. She looked at me, stunned, and backed away, being careful to avoid Nar by a safe distance. She kept her eyes on my sword, as if she
expected me to strike her down if she turned her back. “It is well,” she finally said, “that you obey my command. Perhaps your death will be made easier in consequence.” “Who could refuse anything to the daughter of a Ubar?” I said, and then added – maliciously, it seems now – “Good luck in the swamps.” She stopped and shuddered. Her robes still bore the wide lateral stain where the tongue of the tharlarion had wrapped itself. I glanced no more at her, but put my hand on the foreleg of Nar, gently, so that I might not injure any of the
sensory hairs. “Well, Brother,” I said, remembering the insult of the daughter of the Ubar, “shall we continue our journey?” I wanted Nar to understand that not all humankind were as contemptuous of the Spider People as the daughter of the Ubar. “Indeed, Brother,” responded the mechanical voice of Nar. And surely I would rather have been a brother to that gentle, rational monster than many of the barbarians I had met on Gor. Indeed, perhaps I should be honoured that he had addressed me as brother – I who
failed to meet his standards, I who had so many times, intentionally or unintentionally, injured those of the rational kind. Nar, with me on his back, moved from the knoll. “Wait!” cried the daughter of the Ubar. “You can’t leave me here!” She stumbled a bit from the knoll, tripped and fell in the water. She knelt in the green stagnant water, her hands held out to me, pleading, as if she suddenly realised the full horror of her plight, what it would mean to be abandoned in the swamp forest. “Take me with you,” she begged.
“Wait,” I said to Nar, and the giant spider paused. The Ubar’s daughter tried to stand up, but, ridiculously enough, it seemed as if one leg were suddenly far shorter than the other. She stumbled again and fell once more into the water. She swore like a tarnsman. I laughed and slid from Nar’s back. I waded to her side and lifted her to carry her back to the knoll. She was surprisingly light, considering her apparent size. I had hardly taken her in my arms when she struck my face viciously with one muddy hand. “How dare you touch the daughter of a Ubar!”
she exclaimed. I shrugged and dropped her back in the water. Angrily she scrambled to her feet as best she could and, hopping and stumbling, regained the knoll. I joined her and examined he leg. One monstrous platform shoe had broken from her small foot and flopped beside her ankle, still attached by its straps. The shoe was at least ten inches high. I laughed. This explained the incredible height of the Ubar’s daughter. “It’s broken,” I said. “I’m sorry.” She tried to rise, but one foot was, of course, some ten inches higher than the other. She fell again,
and I unstrapped the remaining shoe. “No wonder you can hardly walk,” I said. “Why do you wear these silly things?” “The daughter of a Ubar must look down on her subjects,” was the simple if extraordinary reply. When she stood up, now barefoot, her head came only a little higher than my chin. She might have been a bit taller than the average Gorean girl, but not much. She kept her eyes sullenly down, unwilling to raise them to look into my own. The daughter of a Ubar looked up to no man. “I order you to protect me,” she
said, never taking her eyes from the ground. “I do not take orders from the daughter of the Ubar of Ar,” 1I said. “You must take me with you,” she said, eyes still downcast. “Why?” I asked. After all, according to the rude codes of Gor, I owed her nothing; indeed, considering her attempt on my life, which had been foiled only by the fortuitous net of Nar’s web, I would have been within my rights to slay her, abandoning her body to the water lizards. Naturally, I was not looking at things from precisely the Gorean point of view, but she
would have no way of knowing that. How could she know that I would not treat her as – according to the rough justice of Gor – she deserved? “You must protect me,” she said. There was something of a pleading note in her voice. “Why?” I asked, feeling angry. “Because I need your help,” she said. Then she angrily snapped, “You need not have made me say that!” She had lifted her head in fury, and she looked up into my eyes for an instant, and then suddenly lowered her head again, trembling with rage.
“Do you ask my favour?” I asked, which, on Gor, was much like asking if the person was willing to make a request – more simply, to say, ‘Please’. To that small particle of respect it seemed I had a right. Suddenly she seemed strangely docile. “Yes,” she said. “Stranger, I, the daughter of the Ubar of Ar, ask your favour. I ask you to protect me.” “You tried to kill me,” I said. “For all I know, you may still be an enemy.” There was a long pause in which neither of us spoke. “I know what you are waiting
for,” said the daughter of the Ubar, strangely calm after her earlier fury – unnaturally calm, it seemed to me. I didn’t understand her. What was it she thought I was waiting for? Then, to my astonishment, that daughter of the Ubar Marlenus, daughter of the Ubar of Ar, knelt before me, a simple warrior of Ko-ro-ba, and lowered her head, lifting and extending her arms, the wrists crossed. It was that same simple ceremony that Sana had performed before me in the chamber of my father, back at Ko-ro-ba – the submission of the captive female. Without raising her eyes from the
ground, the daughter of the Ubar said in a clear, distinct voice: “I submit myself.” Later I wished that I had had binding fibre to lash her so innocently proffered wrists. I was speechless for a moment, but then, remembering that harsh Gorean custom required me either to accept the submission or slay the captive, I took her wrists in my hands and said, “I accept your submission.” I then lifted her gently to her feet. I led her by the hand towards Nar, helped her to the glossy, hairy back of the spider, and climbed up after her. Wordlessly Nar moved
rapidly through the marsh, his eight delicate feet scarcely seeming to dip into the greenish water. Once he stepped into quicksand, and his back tilted suddenly. I held the daughter of the Ubar tightly as the insect righted himself, floating in the muck for a second, and then managing to free himself with his eight scrambling legs. After a journey of an hour or so Nar stopped and pointed ahead with one of his forelegs. About three or four pasangs distant, through the thinning swamp trees, I could see the verdant meadows of Ar’s Sa- Tarna land. The mechanical voice
of Nar spoke. “I do not wish to approach nearer to the land. It is dangerous for the Spider People.” I slid from his back and helped the daughter of the Uba1r down. We stood together in the shallow water at the side of the gigantic insect. I placed my hand on Nar’s grotesque face, and the gentle monster lightly closed his mandibles on my arm and then opened them. “I wish you well,” said Nar, using a common Gorean phrase of farewell. I responded similarly and further wished health and safety to his people. The insect placed his forelegs on
my shoulders. “I do not ask your name, Warrior,” he said, “nor will I repeat the name of your city before the Submitted One, but I know that you and your city are honoured by the Spider People.” “Thank you,” I said. “My city and I are honoured.” The mechanical voice spoke once more. “Beware the daughter of the Ubar.” “She has submitted herself,” I replied, confident that the promise of her submission would be fulfilled. As Nar raced backward, he lifted a foreleg in a gesture that I
interpreted as an attempt to wave. I waved back at him, touched, and my grotesque ally disappeared into the marshes. “Let’s go,” I said to the girl, and I made for the fields of Sa-Tarna. The daughter of the Ubar followed, some yards behind. We had been wading for about twenty minutes when the girl suddenly screamed, and I spun around. She had sunk to her waist in the marsh water. She had slipped into a pocket of quicksand. She cried out hysterically. Cautiously I tried to approach her, but felt the ooze slipping away beneath my feet.
I tried to reach her with my sword belt, but it was too short. The tarn- goad, which had been thrust in the belt, dropped into the water, and I lost it. The girl sank deeper in the mire, the surface of the water circling her armpits. She was screaming wildly, all control lost in the face of the slow, ugly death awaiting her. “Don’t struggle!” I cried. But her movements were hysterical, like those of a mad animal. “The veil!” I cried. “Unwind it, throw it to me!” Her hands tried to tear at the veil, but she was unable to unwind it, in her terror at an in the moment of
time left to her. Then the muck crept upward to her horrified eyes, and her head slipped under the greenish waters, her hands clutching wildly at the air. I frantically looked about, caught sight of a half-submerged log some yards away, protruding upward out of the marsh water. Regardless of the possible danger, not feeling my way, I splashed to the log, jerking on it, hauling on it with all my might. In what seemed like hours but must have been a matter of only a few seconds, it gave, leaping upward out of the mud. I half- carried, half-floated it, shoving it
towards the place where the daughter of the Ubar had slipped under the water. I clung to the log, floating in the shallow water over the quicksand, and reached down again and again into the mire. At last my hand clutched something – the girl’s wrist – and I drew her slowly upward out of the sand. My heart leaped with joy as I heard her whimpering, choking gasps, her lungs spasmodically sucking in the fetid but vivifying air. I shoved the log back and finally, carrying the filthy body soaked in its absurd garments, made my way to a ledge of green, dry land at the
edge of the swamp. I set her down on a bed of green clover. Beyond it, some hundred yards away, I could see the border of a yellow field of Sa-Tarna and a yellow thicket of Ka-la-na trees. I sat beside the girl, exhausted. I smiled to myself; the proud daughter of the Ubar in all her imperial regalia quite literally stank, stank of the swamps and t1he mud and of the perspiration exuded beneath that heavy covering, stank of heat and fear. “You saved my life again,” said the daughter of the Ubar. I nodded, not wanting to talk
about anything. “Are we out of the swamp?” she asked. I assented. This seemed to please her. With an animal movement, contradicting the formality of her garments, she lay backward on the clover, looking up at the sky, undoubtedly as exhausted as I was. Moreover, she was only a girl. I felt tender towards her. “I ask your favour,” she said. “What do you want?” I asked. “I’m hungry,” she said. “I am, too,” I laughed, suddenly aware that I had not eaten anything
since the night before. I was ravenous. “Over there,” I said, “are some Ka-la-na trees. Wait here and I’ll gather some fruit.” “No, I’ll come with you – if you permit me,” she said. I was surprised at this deference on the part of the daughter of the Ubar, but recalled that she had submitted herself. “Surely,” I said. “I would be pleased with your company.” I took her arm, but she drew back. “Having submitted myself,” she said, “it is my part to follow.” “That’s silly,” I said. “Walk with me.”
But she dropped her head shyly, shaking it. “I may not,” she said. “Do as you please,” I laughed, and set out for the Ka-la-na trees. She followed, meekly, I thought. We were near the Ka-la-na trees when I heard a slight rustle of brocade behind me. I turned, just in time to seize the wrist of the daughter of the Ubar as she struck savagely down at my back with a long, slender dagger. She howled with rage as I twisted the weapon from her hand. “You animal!” I yelled, blind with fury. “You dirty, filthy, stinking, ungrateful animal!”
Wild with anger, I picked up the dagger and for an instant felt tempted to plunge it into the heart of the treacherous girl. Angrily I shoved it in my belt. “You submitted,” I said to her. In spite of my hold on her wrist, which must have been tight and painful, the daughter of Marlenus straightened herself before me and said arrogantly, “You tharlarion! Do you think that the daughter of the Ubar of all Gor would submit to such as you?” Cruelly I forced her to her knees before me, the filthy, proud wench. “You submitted,” I said.
She cursed me, her greenish eyes blazing with hatred. “Is this how you treat the daughter of a Ubar?” she cried. “I will show you how I treat the most treacherous wench on all Gor,” I exclaimed, releasing her wrist. With both hands I wrenched the veil back from her face, thrusting my hand under it to fasten my fist in her hair, and then, as if she were a common tavern girl or a camp slut, I dragged the daughter of the Ubar of all Gor to the shelter of the Ka-la-na trees. Among the trees, on the clover, I threw her to my feet. She tried frantically to readjust
the folds of her veil, but with both hands I tore it fully away, and she lay a1t my feet, as it is said on Gor, face-stripped. A marvellous cascade of hair, as black as the wing of my tarn, loosened behind her, falling to the ground. I saw magnificent olive skin and those wild green eyes and features that were breathtakingly beautiful. The mouth, which might have been magnificent, was twisted with rage. “I like it better,” I said, “being able to see the face of my enemy. Do not replace your veil.” In fury she glared up at me, shamed as my eyes boldly regarded
the beauty of her face. She made no move to replace the veil. As I looked upon her, incredibly perhaps, my rage dissipated and with it the vengeful desires that had filled me. In anger I had dragged her, helpless, mine by all the Codes of Gor, to the shelter of the trees. Yet now once again I saw her as a girl, this time as a beautiful girl, not to be abused. “You will understand,” I said, “that I can no longer trust you.” “Of course not,” she said. “I am your enemy.” “Accordingly I can take no chances with you.”
“I am not afraid to die,” she said, her lip trembling slightly. “Be quick.” “Remove your clothing,” I said. “No!” she cried, shrinking back. She rose to her knees before me, putting her head to my feet. “With all my heart, Warrior,” she pleaded, “the daughter of a Ubar, on her knees, begs your favour. Let it be only the blade and quickly.” I threw back my head and laughed. The daughter of the Ubar feared that I would force her to serve my pleasure – I, a common soldier. But then, shamefacedly, I admitted to myself that I had, while
dragging her to the trees, intended to take her and that it had only been the sudden spell of her beauty which, paradoxically enough, had claimed my respect, forced me to recognise that selfishly I was about to injure or dominate what Nar would have referred to as a rational creature. I felt ashamed and resolved that I would do no harm to this girl, though she was as wicked and faithless as a tharlarion. “I do not intend to force you to serve my pleasure,” I said, “nor do I intend to injure you.” She lifted her head and looked at me wonderingly.
Then, to my amazement, she stood up and regarded me contemptuously. “If you had been a true warrior,” she said, “you would have taken me on the back of your tarn, above the clouds, even before we had passed the outermost ramparts of Ar, and you would have thrown my robes to the streets below to show my people what had been the fate of the daughter of their Ubar.” Evidently she believed that I had been afraid to harm her and that she, the daughter of a Ubar, remained above the perils and obligations of the common captive. She looked at me insolently, angry
that she had so demeaned herself to kneel before a coward. She tossed her head back and snorted. “Well, Warrior,” she said, “what would you have me do?” “Remove your clothing,” I said. She looked at me in rage. “I told you,” I said, “I am not going to take any more chances with you. I have to find out if you have any more weapons.” “No man may look upon the daughter of the Ubar,” she said. “Either you will remove your robes,” I said, “or I shall.” In fury the hands of the Ubar’s dau1ghter began to fumble with the
hooks of her heavy robes. She had scarcely removed a braided loop from its hook when here eyes suddenly lit with triumph and a sound of joy escaped her lips. “Don’t move,” said a voice behind me. “You are covered with a crossbow.” “Well done, Men of Ar,” exclaimed the daughter of the Ubar. I turned slowly, my hands away from my body, and found myself facing two of the foot soldiers of Ar, one of them an officer, the other of common rank. The latter had trained his crossbow on my breast. At that distance he could not have
missed, and if he had fired at that range, most probably the quarrel would have passed through my body and disappeared in the woods behind. The initial velocity of a quarrel is the better part of a pasang per second. The officer, a swaggering fellow whose helmet, though polished, bore the marks of combat, approached me, holding his sword to me, and seized my weapon from its scabbard and the girl’s dagger from my belt. He looked at the signet on the dagger hilt and seemed pleased. He placed it in his own belt and took from a pouch at his
side a pair of manacles, which he snapped on my wrists. He then turned to the girl. “You are Talena,” he said, tapping the dagger, “daughter of Marlenus?” “You see I wear the robes of the Ubar’s daughter,” said the girl, scarcely deigning to respond to the officer’s question. She paid her rescuers no more attention, treating them as if they were no more worthy of her gratitude than the dust beneath her feet. She strode to face me, her eyes mocking and triumphant, seeing me shackled and in her power. She spat viciously in
my face, which insult I accepted, unmoving. Then, with her right hand, she slapped me savagely with all the force and fury of her body. My cheek felt as though it had been branded. “Are you Talena?” asked the officer, once again, patiently. “Daughter of Marlenus?” “I am indeed, Heroes of Ar,” replied the girl proudly, turning to the soldiers. “I am Talena, daughter of Marlenus, Ubar of all Gor.” “Good,” said the officer, and then nodded to his subordinate. “Strip her and put her in slave bracelets.”
Chapter Eight:I ACQUIRE A COMPANION
I lunged forward, but was checked by the point of the officer’s sword. The common soldier, setting the crossbow on the ground, strode to the daughter of the Ubar, who stood as though stunned, her face drained of colour. The soldier, beginning at the high, ornate collar of the girl’s robes, began to break the braided loops, ripping them loose from their hooks; methodically he tore her robes apart
and pulled them down and over her shoulders; in half a dozen tugs the heavy layers of her garments had been jerked downward until she stood naked, her robes in a filthy pile about her feet. Her body, though stained with the mire of the swamp, was exquisitely beautiful. “Why are you doing this?” I demanded. “Marlenus has fled,” said the officer. “The city is in chaos. The Initiates have assumed command and have ordered that Marlenus and all members of his household and family are to be publicly impaled on the walls of Ar.”
A moan escaped the girl. The offic1er continued: “Marlenus lost the Home Stone, the Luck of Ar. He, with fifty tarnsmen, disloyal to the city, seized what they could of the treasury and escaped. In the streets there is civil war, fighting between the factions that would master Ar. There is looting and pillaging. The city is under martial law.” Unresisting, the girl extended her wrists, and the soldier snapped slave bracelets on them – light, restraining bracelets of gold and blue stones that might have served as jewellery if it had not been for
their function. She seemed unable to speak. In a moment her world had crumbled. She was nothing now but the abominated daughter of the villain in whose reign the Home Stone, the Luck of Ar, had been stolen. Now she, like all other members of the household of Marlenus, slave or free, would be subjected to the vengeance of the outraged citizens, citizens who had marched in the processions of the Ubar in the days of his glory, carrying flasks of Ka-la-na wine and sheaves of Sa-Tarna grain, singing his praises in the melodious litanies of Gor.
“I am the one who stole the Home Stone,” I said. The officer prodded me with the sword. “We presumed so, finding you in the company of the offspring of Marlenus.” He chuckled. “Do not fear – though there are many in Ar who rejoice in your deed, your death will not be pleasant or swift.” “Release the girl,” I said. “She has done no harm. She did her best to save the Home Stone of your city.” Talena seemed startled that I had asked for her freedom. “The Initiates have pronounced their sentence,” said the officer.
“They have decreed a sacrifice to the Priest-Kings to ask them to have mercy and to restore the Home Stone.” In that moment I detested the Initiates of Ar, who, like other members of their caste throughout Gor, were only too eager to seize some particle of the political power they had supposedly renounced in choosing to wear the white robes of their calling. The real purpose of the “sacrifice to the Priest-Kings” was probably to remove possible claimants to the throne of Ar and thereby strengthen their own political position.
The officer’s eyes narrowed. He jabbed me with his sword. “Where,” he demanded, “is the Home Stone?” “I don’t know,” I said. The blade was at my throat. Then, to my amazement, the daughter of the Ubar spoke. “He tells the truth.” The officer regarded her calmly, and she blushed, realising her body was no longer sacred in his sight, no longer protected by the power of the Ubar. She raised her head and said quietly, “The Home Stone was in the saddle pack of his tarn. The tarn
escaped. The Stone is gone.” The officer cursed under his breath. “Take me back to Ar,” said Talena. “I am ready.” She stepped from the pile of filthy garments at her feet and stood proudly among the trees, the wind slightly moving her long black hair. The officer looked her over, slowly, carefully, his eyes gleaming. Without glancing at the common soldier, he ordered him to leash me, to fasten around my throat the leading chain often used on Gor for slaves and prisoners. The officer sheathed his sword,
not taking his eyes from Talena, who drew back. “This one I’ll leash myself,” he said, drawing a leading chain from hi1s pouch and approaching the girl. She stood still, not quivering. “The leash will not be necessary,” she said proudly. “That is for me to decide,” said the officer, and laughed as he snapped the chain on the throat of the girl. It clicked shut. He gave it a playful tug. “I never thought that I would have my chain on Talena, the daughter of Marlenus,” he said. “You beast!” she hissed. “I see that I must teach you to
respect an officer,” he said, putting his hand between her throat and the chain, drawing her to him. He suddenly, savagely, thrust his mouth on her throat, and she screamed, being pressed backward, down to the clover. The common soldier was watching with delight, perhaps expecting that he, too, might take his turn. With all the weight of the heavy manacles on my wrist, I struck him across the temple, and he sank to his knees. The officer turned from Talena, scrambling to his feet and growling with rage, unsheathing his blade. It was only halfway from its sheath
when I leaped upon him, my manacled hands seeking his throat. He struggled furiously, his hands trying to pry apart my fingers, his sword slipping from the sheath. My hands were on his throat like the talons of a tarn. His hand drew Talena’s dagger from his belt, and, manacled as I was, I could not have prevented the blow. Suddenly his eyes emitted a wordless scream, and I saw a bloody stump at the end of his arm. Talena had picked up his sword and struck off the hand that held the dagger. I released my grip. The officer shuddered convulsively on
the grass and was dead. Talena, naked, still held the bloody sword, her eyes glassy with the horror of what she had done. “Drop the sword,” I commanded harshly, fearing it would occur to her to strike me with it. The girl dropped the weapon, sinking to her knees and covering her face with her hands. The daughter of the Ubar was apparently not as inhuman as I had supposed. I took the sword and approached the other soldier, asking myself if I would kill him if he was still alive. I suppose now that I would have spared him, but I was not given the
opportunity. He lay on the grass, motionless. The heavy manacles had broken in the side of his skull. He hadn’t bled much. I fumbled through the officer’s pouch and found the key to the manacles. It was hard to put the key in the lock, restrained as I was. “Let me,” said Talena, and took the key and opened the lock. I threw the manacles to the ground, rubbing my wrists. “I ask your favour,” said Talena, standing meekly by my side, her hands confined in front of her by the colourful slave bracelets, the leading chain still dangling from her
throat. “Of course,” I said. “I’m sorry.” I dug about in the pouch and found the tiny key to the slave bracelets, which I opened immediately. I then removed her leading chain, and she removed mine. I examined with greater detail the pouches and equipment of the soldiers. “What are you going to do?” she asked. “Take what I can use,” I said, sorting out the articles in the pouches. Most importantly, I found a compass-chronometer, some rations, two water flasks,
bowstrings, binding fibre, and some oil for the mechanism of the crossbow. I decided to carry my own sword and the soldier’s crossbow, which I unwound, relaxing the tension on the metal span. His quiver contained some ten quarrels. 1Neither soldier had carried a spear or shield. I didn’t want to be burdened with a helmet. I tossed to one side the leading chains, manacles, and slave bracelets that Talena and I had worn. There was also a slave hood, which I similarly discarded. I then carried the two bodies down to the swamp and pitched them into the
mire. When I returned to the glade, Talena was sitting in the grass, near the garments that had been ripped from her. I was surprised that she had not tried to dress herself. Her chin was on her knees, and when she saw me she asked – rather humbly, I thought, “May I clothe myself?” “Surely,” I said. She smiled. “As you can see, I carry no weapons.” “You underestimate yourself,” I said. She seemed flattered, then bent to the task of poking about in that pile
of heavy, filthy garments. They must have been as offensive to her nostrils as to mine. At last she took a relatively unsoiled undergarment, something blue and silk, bare at the shoulders, and drew it on, belting it with a strip of what had been her veil. It was all she wore. Surprisingly, she no longer seemed as concerned about her modesty. Perhaps she felt it would be foolish after her utter exposure. On the other hand, I think that Talena was actually pleased to be rid of the encumbering, ornate robes of the daughter of the Ubar. Her garment was, of course, too long, as it had
originally reached to the ground, covering the absurd platformlike shoes she had worn. At her request I cut the garment until it hung a few inches above her ankles. “Thank you,” she said. I smiled at her. It seemed so unlike Talena to express any consideration. She walked about in the glade, pleased with herself, and twirled once or twice, delighted with the comparative freedom of movement she now enjoyed. I picked some Ka-la-na fruit and opened one of the packages of rations. Talena returned and sat
beside me on the grass. I shared the food with her. “I’m sorry about your father,” I said. “He was a Ubar of Ubars,” she said. She hesitated for a moment. “The life of a Ubar is uncertain.” She gazed thoughtfully at the grass. “He must have known it would happen sometime.” “Did he speak to you about it?” I asked. She tossed her head back and laughed. “Are you of Gor or not? I have never seen my father except on the days of public festivals. High Caste daughters in Ar are raised in
the Walled Gardens, like flowers, until some highborn suitor, preferably a Ubar or Administrator, will pay the bride price set by their fathers.” “You mean you never knew your father?” I asked. “Is it different in your city, Warrior?” “Yes,” I said, remembering that in Ko-ro-ba, primitive though it was, the family was respected and maintained. I then wondered if that might be due to the influence of my father, whose Earth ways sometimes seemed at variance with the rude customs of Gor.
“I think I might like that,” she said. then she looked at me closely. “What is your city, Warrior?” “Not Ar,” I replied. “May I ask your name?” she asked tactfully. “I am Tarl.” “Is that a use-name?” “No,” I said, “it is my true name.” “Talena is my true name,” she said. Of High Caste, it was natural that she was above the common superstitions connected with revealing one’s name. Then she asked suddenly, “You are Tarl Cabot of Ko-ro-ba, are you not?”
I failed to conceal my astonishment, and she laughed merrily. “I knew it,” she said. “How?” I asked. “The ring,” she said, pointing to the red metal band that encircled the second finger of my right hand. “It bears the crest of Cabot, Administrator of Ko-ro-ba, and you are the son, Tarl, whom the warriors of Ko-ro-ba were training in the arts of war.” “The spies of Ar are effective,” I said. “More effective than the Assassins of Ar,” she said. “Pa- Kur, Ar’s Master Assassin, was
dispatched to kill you, but failed.” I recalled the attempt on my life in the cylinder of my father, an attempt that would have been successful except for the alertness of the Older Tarl. “Ko-ro-ba is one of the few cities my father feared,” said Talena, “because he realised it might someday be effective in organising other cities against him. We of Ar thought they might be training you for this work, and so we decided to kill you.” She stopped and looked at me, something of admiration in her eyes. “We never believed you would try
for the Home Stone.” “How do you know all this?” I asked. “The women of the Walled Gardens know whatever happens on Gor,” she replied, and I sensed the intrigue, the spying and treachery that must ferment within the gardens. “I forced my slave girls to lie with soldiers, with merchants and builders, physicians and scribes,” she said, “and I found out a great deal.” I was dismayed at t h i s – the cool, calculating exploitation of her girls by the daughter of the Ubar, merely to gain information.
“What if your slaves refused to do this for you?” I asked. “I would whip them,” said the daughter of the Ubar coldly. I began to divide the rations I had taken from the pouches of the soldiers. “What are you doing?” asked Talena. “I am giving you half of the food,” I said. “But why?” she asked, her eyes apprehensive. “Because I am leaving you,” I said, shoving her share of the food towards her, also one of the water flasks. I then tossed her dagger on
top of the pile. “You may want this,” I said. “You may need it.” For the first time since she had learned of the fall of Marlenus, the daughter of the Ubar seemed stunned. Her eyes widened questioningly, but she read only resolve in my face. I packed my gear and was ready to leave the glade. The girl rose and shouldered her small bag of rations. “I’m coming with you,” she said. “And you cannot prevent me.” “Suppose I chain you to a tree,” I suggested. “And leave me for the soldiers?” “Yes,” I said.
“You will not do that,” she said. “Why I do not know, but you wil1l not do that.” “Perhaps I shall,” I said. “You are not like the other warriors of Ar,” she said. “You are different.” “Do not follow me,” I said. “Alone,” she said, “I will be eaten by animals or found by soldiers.” She shuddered. “At best, I would be picked up by slavers and sold in the Street of Brands.” I knew that she spoke the truth or something much like it. A defenceless woman on the plains of Gor would not have much chance.
“How can I trust you?” I asked, weakening. “You can’t,” she admitted. “For I am of Ar and must remain your enemy.” “Then it is to my best interest to abandon you,” I said. “I can force you to take me,” she said. “How?” I asked. “Like this,” she responded, kneeling before me, lowering her head and lifting her arms, the wrists crossed. She laughed. “Now you must take me with you or slay me,” she said, “and I know that you cannot slay me.”
I cursed her, for she took unfair advantage of the Warrior Codes of Gor. “What is the submission of Talena, the daughter of the Ubar, worth?” I taunted. “Nothing,” she said. “But you must accept it or slay me.” Furious beyond reason, I saw in the grass the discarded slave bracelets, the hood and leading chains. To Talena’s indignation, I snapped the slave bracelets on her wrists, hooded her, and put her on a leading chain. “If you would be captive,” I said,
“you will be treated as a captive. I accept your submission, and I intend to enforce it.” I removed the dagger from her sash and placed it in my belt. Angrily I slung both bags of rations about her shoulders. Then I picked up the crossbow and left the glade, dragging after me, none too gently, the hooded, stumbling daughter of the Ubar. Beneath the hood, to my amazement, I heard her laugh.
Chapter Nine:KAZRAK OF PORT KAR
We travelled together through the night, making our way through the silvery yellow fields of Sa-Tarns, fugitives under the three moons of Gor. Soon after we had left the glade, to Talena’s amusement, I had removed her hood and, a few minutes later, her leading chain and slave bracelets. As we crossed the grain fields, she explained to me the dangers we would most likely face, primarily from the beasts of the plains and from passing strangers. It is interesting, incidentally, that in the Gorean language, the word for stranger is the same as the word for enemy.
Talena seemed to be animated, as if excited beyond comprehension at her escape from the seclusion of the Walled Gardens and the role of the Ubar’s daughter. She was now a free though submitted person, at large on the plains of the empire. The wind shook her hair and tore at her gown, and she would throw back her head, exposing her throat and shoulders to its rough caress, drinking it in as though it were Ka- la-na wine. I sensed that with me, nominal captive though she was, she was freer than she had ever been before; she was like a natu1rally wild bird which has been
raised in a cage and at last escapes from the confining wire bars. Somehow her happiness was contagious, and, almost as though we were not mortal enemies, we talked to one another and joked as we made our way across the plains. I was heading, as nearly as I could determine, in the general direction of Ko-ro-ba. Surely Ar was out of the question. It would be death for us both. And, I supposed, a similar fate would await us in most Gorean cities. Impaling the stranger is a not unusual form of hospitality on Gor. Moreover, owing to the almost universal
hatred borne to the city of Ar by most Gorean cities, it would be imperative in any case to keep the identity of my fair companion secret. Theoretically, given the seclusion of the High Caste women of Ar, their gilded confinement in the Walled Gardens, it should be reasonably easy to conceal her identity. But I was troubled. What would happen to Talena if we did, by some outstanding stroke of fortune, reach Ko-ro-ba? Would she be publicly impaled, returned to the mercies of the Initiates of Ar, or would she perhaps spend the rest of
her days in the dungeons beneath the cylinders? Perhaps she would be permitted to live as a slave? If Talena was interested in these remote considerations, she gave no sign of her concern. She explained to me what, in her opinion, would give us our best chance to travel the plains of Gor in safety. “I will be the daughter of a rich merchant whom you have captured,” she explained. “Your tarn was killed by my father’s men, and you are taking me back to your city, to be your slave.” I grudgingly assented to this fabrication, or much of it. It was a
plausible story on Gor and would be likely to provoke little sceptism. Indeed, some such account seemed to be in order. Free women on Gor do not travel attended by only a single warrior, not of their own free will. Both Talena and I agreed that there was little danger of being recognised for what we really were. It would be generally assumed that the mysterious tarnsman who had stolen the Home Stone and disappeared with the daughter of the Ubar must long ago have reached whatever unknown city it was to which he had pledged his sword.
Towards morning we ate some of the rations and refilled the water flasks at a secluded spring. I allowed Talena to bathe first, which seemed to surprise her. She was further surprised when I left her to herself. “Aren’t you going to watch?” she asked brazenly. “No,” I said. “But I may escape,” she laughed. “That would be my good fortune,” I remarked. She laughed again and disappeared, and I soon heard the sounds of her splashing delightedely in the water. She
emerged a few minutes later, having washed her hair and the blue silk gown she wore. Her skin was radiant, the dried mire of the swamp forest at last washed away. She knelt and spread her hair to dry, letting it fall forward over her head and shoulders. I entered the pool and rejoiced in the invigorating, cleansing water. We slept afterwards. To her annoyance, but as a safety measure I thought essential, I secured her a few feet from me, fastening her arms about a sapling by means of the slave bracelets. I had no wish to awake to a dagger being thrust into
my breast. In the afternoon we moved on again, this time daring to make use of the wide paved highways that lead from Ar, highways built like walls in the earth, of solid, fitted stones intended to last a thousan1d years. Even so, the surface of the highway had been worn smooth, and the ruts of tharlarion carts were clearly visible, ruts worn deep by centuries of caravans. We met very little on the highway, perhaps because of the anarchy in the city of Ar. If there were refugees, they must have been behind us, and few merchants were approaching Ar.
Who would risk his goods in a situation of chaos? When we did pass an occasional traveller, we passed warily. On Gor, as in my native England, one keeps to the left side of the road. This practice, as once in England, is more than a simple matter of convention. When one keeps to the left side of the road, one’s sword arm faces the passing stranger. It seemed we had little to fear, and we had passed several of the pasang stones that line the side of the highway without seeing anything more threatening than a line of peasants carrying brushwoodon
their backs, and a pair of hurrying Initiates. Once, however, Talena dragged me to the side of the road, and scarcely able to conceal our horror, we watched while a sufferer from the incurable Dar-kosis disease, bent in his yellow shrouds, hobbled by, periodically clacking that wooden device which warns all within hearing to stand clear from his path. “An Afflicted One,” said Talena, gravely, using the expression common for such plagued wretches on Gor. The name of the disease itself, Dar-kosis, is almost never mentioned. I glimpsed the face beneath the hood and felt
sick. Its one bleared eye regarded us blankly for a moment, and then the thing moved on. It gradually became clear that the road was becoming less travelled. Weeds were growing between cracks in the stone flooring of the highway, and the ruts of the tharlarion carts had all but disappeared. We passed several crossroads, but I kept moving generally in the direction of Ko-ro- ba. What I would do when we reached the Margin of Desolation and the broad Vosk River, I didn’t know. The fields of Sa-Tarns were thinning out.
Late in the day we glimpsed a solitary tarnsman high above the road, a lonely image that depressed both myself and Talena. “We will never reach Ko-ro-ba,” she said. That night we finished the rations and one of the water flasks. As I prepared to bracelet her for the night, she became practical once again, her optimism and good spirits apparently restored by the food. “We must make a better arrangement than this,” she said, pushing away the bracelets. “It’s uncomfortable.”
“What do you suggest?” I asked. She looked about and suddenly smiled brightly. “Here,” she said, “I have it!” She took a lead chain from my pouch, wrapped it several times about her slim ankle and snapped it shut, placing the key in my hand. Then, carrying the chain, which was still attached to her ankle, she walked to a nearby tree, bent down, and looped the loose end of the chain around the trunk. “Give me the slave bracelets!” she ordered. I gave them to her, and she placed the bracelets through two links of the part of the chain that encircled the
tree, snapping them shut and handing me the key. She stood up and jerked her foot against the chain, demonstrating that she was perfectly secured. “There, bold Tarnsman,” she said, “I will teach you how to keep a prisoner. Now sleep in peace, and I promise I won’t cut your throat tonight.” I laughed and held her briefly in my arms. I suddenly sensed the rush of blood in her and in myself. I wanted never to release her. I wanted her always thus, so locked in my arms, mine to hold and love. Summoning all my strength, I put her from me.
“So,” she said contemptuously, “that is how a Warrior tarnsman treats the daughter of a rich merchant?” I rolled on to the ground, turning away from her, unable to sleep.
In the morning we left our camp early. A swallow of water from the flask and small, dry berries gathered from the nearby shrubbery were our only sustenance. We had not been on the road long when Talena clutched my arm. I listened carefully, hearing the distant clank of a shod tharlarion on the road. “A warrior,” I guessed.
“Quick,” she commanded. “Hood me.” I hooded her and snapped her wrists together in the slave bracelets. The ringing of the tharlarion’s shod claws on the road grew louder. In a minute the rider appeared in view – a fine, bearded warrior with a golden helmet and a tharlarion lance. He drew the riding lizard to a halt a few paces from me. He rode the species of tharlarion which ran on its two back feet in great bounding strides. Its cavernous mouth was lined with long, gleaming teeth. Its two small,
ridiculously disproportionate forelegs dangled absurdly in front of its body. “Who are you?” demanded the warrior. “I am Tarl of Bristol,” I said. “Bristol?” asked the warrior, puzzled. “Have you never heard of it?” I challenged, as if insulted. “No,” admitted the warrior. “I am Kazrak of Port Kar,” he said, “in the service of Mintar, of the Merchant Caste.” I did not need to ask about Port Kar. It is a city in the delta of the Vosk and as much a den of pirates
as anything else. The warrior gestured at Talena with his lance. “Who is she?” he asked. “You need not know her name of lineage,” I said. The warrior laughed and slapped his thigh. “You would have me believe that she is of High Caste,” he said. “She is probably the daughter of a goat keeper.” I could see Talena move under the hood, her fists clenched in the slave bracelets. “What news of Ar?” I asked. “War,” said the mounted spearman approvingly. “Now,
while the men of Ar fight among themselves for the cylinders, an army is gathering from fifty cities, massing on the banks of the Vosk to invade Ar. There is a camp there such as you have never seen – a city of tents, pasangs of tharlarion corrals; the wings of the tarns sound like thunder overhead. The cooking fires of the soldiers can be seen two days’ ride from the river.” Talena spoke, her voice muffled in the hood. “Scavengers come to feast on the bodies of wounded tarnsmen.” It was a Gorean proverb, which seemed to be singularly inappropriate, coming
from a hooded captive. “I did not speak to the girl,” said the warrior. I excused Talena. “She has not worn the bracelets long,” I said. “She has spirit,” said the warrior. “Where are you bound for?” I asked. “To the banks of the Vosk, to the City of Tents,” said the warrior. “What news of Marlenus, the Ubar?” demanded Talen1a. “You should beat her,” said the warrior, but responded to the girl. “None. He has fled.” “What news of the Home Stone
of Ar and the daughter of Marlenus?” I asked, feeling it would be the sort of thing the warrior would expect me to be interested in. “The Home Stone is rumoured to be in a hundred cities,” he said. “Some say it has been destroyed. Only the Priest-Kings know.” “And the daughter of Marlenus?” I insisted. “She is undoubtedly in the Pleasure Gardens of the boldest tarnsman on Gor,” laughed the warrior. “I hope he has as much luck with her as the Home Stone. I have heard she has the temper of a
tharlarion and a face to match!” Talena stiffened, her pride offended. “I have heard,” she said imperiously, “that the daughter of the Ubar is the most beautiful woman on all Gor.” “I like this girl,” said the warrior. “Yield her to me!” “No,” I said. “Yield her or I will have my tharlarion trample you,” he snapped, “or would you prefer to be spitted on my lance?” “You know the codes,” I said evenly. “If you want her, you must challenge for her and meet me with
the weapon of my choice.” The warrior’s face clouded, but only for an instant. He threw back his fine head and laughed, his teeth white in his bushy beard. “Done!” he cried, fastening his lance in its saddle sheath and slipping from the back of the tharlarion. “I challenge you for her!” “The sword,” I said. “Agreed,” he said. We shoved Talena, who was now frightened, to the side of the road. Hooded, she cowered there, the prize, her ears filled with the sudden violent ringing of blade on
blade as two warriors fought to the death to possess her. Kazrak of Port Kar was a superb swordsman, but in the first few moments we both knew that I was his master. His face was white beneath his helmet as he wildly attempted to parry my devasting attack. Once I stepped back, gesturing to the ground with my sword, the symbolic granting of quarter should it be desired. But Kazrak would not lay his sword on the stones at my feet. Rather, he suddenly launched a vicious attack, forcing me to defend myself as best I could. He seemed to fight with new fury, perhaps enraged that he
had been offered quarter. At last, terminating a frenzied exchange, I managed to drive my blade into his shoulder, and as his sword arm dropped, I kicked the weapon from his grasp. He stood proudly in the road, waiting for me to kill him. I turned and went to Talena, who was standing piteously by the side of the road, waiting to see who it was that would unhood her. As I lifted the hood, she uttered a small, joyful sound, her green eyes bright with pleasure. Then she saw the wounded warrior. She shuddered slightly. “Kill him,” she
commanded. “No,” I replied. The warrior, who held his shoulder, blood streaming down from his hand, smiled bitterly. “It was worth it,” he said, his gaze sweeping over Talena. “I’d challenge you again.” Talena seized her dagger from my belt and raced to the warri1or. I caught her braceleted hands as she was going to drive the dagger into his breast. he had not moved. “You must kill him,” said Talena, struggling. Angrily I removed her bracelets and replaced them so that her wrists were bound behind her
back. “You should use the whip on her,” said the warrior matter-of- factly. I tore some inches from the bottom of Talena’s gown to make a bandage for Kazrak’s shoulder. She endured this in fury, her head in the air, not watching me. I had scarcely finished bandaging his wound when I was aware of a ringing on metal, and, lifting my head, I saw myself surrounded by mounted spearmen, who wore the same livery as Kazrak. Behind them, stretching into the distance, came a long line of broad tharlarions, or the four-footed
draft monsters of Gor. These beasts, yoked in braces, were drawing mighty wagons, filled with merchandise protected under the lashings of its red rain-canvas. “It is the caravan of Mintar, of the Merchant Caste,” said Kazrak.
Chapter Ten:THE CARAVAN
“Do not harm him,” said Kazrak. “He is my sword brother, Tarl of Bristol.” Kazrak’s remark was in accord with the strange warrior codes of Gor, codes which were as natural to him as the air he
breathed, and codes which I, in the Chamber of the Council of Ko-ro- ba, had sworn to uphold. One who has shed your blood, or whose blood you have shed, becomes your sword brother, unless you formally repudiate the blood on your weapons. It is part of the kinship of Gorean warriors regardless of what city it is to which they owe their allegiance. It is a matter of caste, an expression of respect for those who share their station and profession, having nothing to do with cities or Home Stones. As I stood tensely, ringed by the lances of the caravan guards, the
wall of tharlarions parted to allow the approach of Mintar, of the Merchant Caste. A bejewelled, curtained platform slung beneath the slow, swaying bodies of two of the broad tharlarions appeared. The beasts were halted by their strap- master, and after some seconds the curtains parted. Seated inside on several pillows of tasselled silk was a mammoth toad of a man, whose head was as round as a tarn’s egg, the eyes nearly lost in the folds of fat, pocked skin. A slender straggling wisp of hair dropped languidly from the fat chin. The little eyes of the merchant
swept the scene quickly, like a bird’s, startling in their contrast with the plethoric giganticism of his frame. “So,” said the merchant, “Kazrak of Port Kar has met his match?” “It is the first challenge I have ever lost,” replied Kazrak proudly. “Who are you?” asked Mintar, leaning forward a bit, inspecting first me and then Talena, whom he regarded with small interest. “Tarl of Bristol,” I said. “And this is my woman, whom I claim by sword-right.” Mintar closed his eyes and opened them and pulled on his
beard. He had, of course, never heard of Bristol, but did not wish to admit it, at least before his men. Moreover, he was far too shrewd to pretend that he had heard of the city. After all, what if there was no such city? Mintar looked at the ring of mounted spearmen encircling me. “Does any man in my service challenge for the woman of Tarl of Bristol?” he asked. The warriors shif1ted nervously. Kazrak laughed, a derisive snort. One of the mounted warriors said, “Kazrak of Port Kar is the best sword in the caravan.”
Mintar’s face clouded. “Tarl of Bristol,” he said, “you have disabled my finest sword.” One or two of the mounted warriors readjusted their grip on their lances. I became acutely conscious of the proximity of the several points. “You owe me a debt,” said Mintar. “Can you pay the hiring price of such a sword?” “I have no goods other than this girl,” I said, “and I will not give her up.” Mintar sniffed. “In the wagons I have four hundred fully as beautiful, destined for the City of Tents.” He
looked at Talena carefully, but his appraisal was remote, detached. “Her sale price would not bring half the hiring price of a sword such as that of Kazrak of Port Kar.” Talena reacted as if slapped. “Then I cannot pay the debt I owe you,” I said. “I am a merchant,” said Mintar, “and it is in my code to see that I am paid.” I set myself to sell my life dearly. Oddly enough, my only fear was what would happen to the girl. “Kazrak of Port Kar,” said Mintar, “do you agree to surrender the balance of your hiring price to
Tarl of Bristol if he takes your place in my service?” “Yes,” responded Kazrak. “He has done me honour and is my sword brother.” Mintar seemed satisfied. He looked at me. “Tarl of Bristol,” he said, “do you take service with Mintar, of the Merchant Caste?” “If I do not?” I asked. “Then I shall order my men to kill you,” sighed Mintar, “and we shall both suffer a loss.” “Oh, Ubar of Merchants,” I said, “I would not willingly see your profits jeopardised.” Mintae relaxed on the cushions
and seemed pleased. I realised, to my amusement, that he had been afraid that some particle of his investment might have been sacrificed. He would have had a man killed rather than risk the loss of a tenth of a tarn disc, so well he knew the codes of his caste. “What about the girl?” asked Mintar. “She must accompany me,” I said. “If you wish,” he said, “I will buy her.” “She is not for sale.” “Twenty tarn discs,” Mintar proposed.
I laughed. Mintar smiled, too. “Forty,” he said. “No,” I said. He seemed less pleased. “Forty-five,” he said, his voice flat. “No,” I said. “Is she of High Caste?” asked Mintar, apparently puzzled at my lack of interest in his bargaining. Perhaps his price was too low for a girl of High Caste. “I am,” announced Talena proudly, “the daughter of a rich merchant, the richest on Gor, stolen from her father by this tarnsman.
His tarn was killed, and he is taking me to – to Bristol – to be his slave.” “I am the richest merchant on Gor,” said Mintar calmly. Talena gulped. “If your father is a merchant, tell me his name,” he said. “I will know of him.” “Great Mintar,” I spoke up, “forgive this she-tharlarion. Her father was a goat keeper by the swamp forests of Ar, and I did steal her, but she begged me to take her from the village. She foolishly ran away with me, thinking I would take her to Ar, to dress her in jewels and
silks and give her quarters in the high cylinders. As soon as we left the village, I put the bracelets on her and am taking her to Bristol, where she will tend my goats.” The soldiers laughed uproariously, Kazrak loudest of all. For a moment I was afraid Talena was going to announce that she was the daughter of the Ubar Marlenus, preferring possible impalement to the insult of being considered the offspring of a goat keeper. Mintar seemed amused. “While in my service, you may keep her on my chain if you wish,” he said. “Mintar is generous,” I granted.
“No,” said Talena. “I will share the tent of my warrior.” “If you like,” said Mintar, paying no attention to Talena, “I will arrange her sale in the City of Tents and add her price to your wages.” “If I sell her, I will sell her myself,” I said. “I am an honest merchant,” said Mintar, “and I would not cheat you, but you do well to handle your own affairs.” Mintar eased his great frame deeper into the silken pillows and motioned the strap-master of his tharlarions to close the curtains. Before the swept shut, he said,
“You will never get forty-five tarn discs.” I suspected he was right. He undoubtedly had better merchandise, more reasonably priced. Led by Kazrak, I went with Talena, walking back along the line of wagons to see where she would be placed. Beside one of several long wagons of the sort covered with yellow and blue silk, I removed the bracelets from her wrists and turned her over to an attendant. “I have a spare ankle ring,” he said, and took Talena by the arm,
thrusting her inside the wagon. In the wagon there were some twenty girls, dressed in the slave livery of Gor, perhaps ten on a side, chained to a metal bar which ran the length of the wagon. Talena would not like that. Before she disappeared, she called over her shoulder, saucily, “You’re not rid of me as easily as this, Tarl of Bristol.” “See if you can slip the ankle ring,” laughed Kazrak, and led me back among the supply wagons. We had gone scarcely ten paces and Talena could hardly have been fastened in the wagon before we heard a female scream of pain and a
bevy of howls and shrieks. From the wagon came the sound of rolling bodies, slamming and cracking against the sides, and the rattle of chains on wood, pierced by sqeals of pain and anger. The attendant leaped into the back of the wagon with his strap, and there was added to the din the sound of his curses and the crack of the strap as he smartly laid about him. As Kazrak and I watched, the attendant, puffing and furious, emerged from the wagon, dragging Talena by the hair. As Talena struggled and kicked and the girls in the wagon shouted their approval and encouragement to the
attendant, he angrily hurled Talena into my arms. Her hair was in wild disarray; there were nail marks on her shoulder and four strap welts o1n her back. Her arm was bruised. Her dress had been half torn from her. “Keep her in your tent,” snarled the attendant. “Let the Priest-Kings blast me if she didn’t do it,” said Kazrak with admiration, “A true she-tharlarion,” Talena lifted a bloody nose to me and smiled brightly.
The next few days were among the happiest of my life, as Talena
and I became a part of Mintar’s slow, ample caravan, members of its graceful, interminable, colourful procession. It seemed the routine of the journey would never end, and I grew enamoured of the long line of wagons, each filled with its various goods, those mysterious metals and gems, rolls of cloth, foodstuffs, wines and Paga, weapons and harness, cosmetics and perfume, medicines and slaves. Mintar’s caravan, like most, was harnessed long before dawn and travelled until the heat of the day. Camp would be made early in the afternoon. The beasts would be
watered and fed, the guards set, the wagons secured, and the members of the caravan would turn to their cooking fires. In the evening the strap-masters and warriors would amuse themselves with stories and songs, recounting their exploits, fictitious and otherwise, and bawling out their raucous harmonies under the influence of Paga. In those days I learned to master the high tharlarion, one of which had been assigned to me by the caravan’s tharlarion master. These gigantic lizards had been bred on Gor for a thousand generations
before the first tarn was tamed, and were raised from the leathery shell to carry warriors. They responded to voice signals, conditioned into their tiny brains in the training years. None the less, the butt of one’s lance, striking about the eye or ear openings, for there are few other sensitive areas in their scaled hides, is occasionally necessary to impress your will on the monster. The high tharlarions, unlike their draught brethren, the slow-moving, four-footed broad tharlarion, were carnivorous. However, their metabolism was slower than that of a tarn, whose mind never seemed
far from food and, if it was available, could consume half its weight in a single day. Moreover, they needed far less water than tarns. To me, the most puzzling thing about the domesticated tharlarions, and the way in which they differed most obviously from wild tharlarions and the lizards of my native planet, was their stamina, their capacity for sustained movement. When the high tharlarion moves slowly, its stride is best described as a proud, stalking movement, each great clawed foot striking the earth with a measured rhythm. When urged to speed,
however, the high tharlarion bounds, in great leaping movements that carry it twenty paces at a time. The tharlarion saddle, unlike the tarn saddle, is constructed to absorb shock. Primarily, this is done by constructing the tree of the saddle in such a way that the leather seat is mounted on a hydraulic fitting which actually floats in a thick lubricant. Not only does this lubricant absorb much of the shock involved, but it tends, except under abnormal stress, to keep the seat of the saddle parallel to the ground. In spite of this invention, the mounted warriors always wear, as an
essential porion of their equipment, a thick leather belt, tightly buckled about their abdomen. In addition, the mounted warriors inevitably wear a high, soft pair of boots called tharlarion boots. These protect their legs from the abrasive hides of their mounts. When a tharlarion runs, its hide could tear the unprotected flesh from a man’s bones. Kazrak, as he had promised, turned over the balance of his hiring price to me – a very respectable eighty tarn1 discs. I argued with him to accept forty, on the ground that he was a sword brother, and at
last convinced him to accept half of his own wages back. I felt better about this arrangement. Also, I didn’t want Kazrak, when his wound was healed, to be reduced to challenging some luckless warrior for a bottle of Ka-la-na wine. We, with Talena, shared a tent, and, to Kazrak’s amusement, I set aside a portion of the tent for the girl’s private use, protecting it with a silk hanging. Because of the miserable condition of Talena’s single garment, Kazrak and I procured from the supply master some changes of slave livery for the girl.
This seemed to me the most appropriate way to diminish any possible suspicion as to her true identity. From his own tarn discs, Kazrak purchased two additional articles which he regarded as essential – a collar, which he had properly engraved, and a slave whip. We returned to the tent, handing the new livery to Talena, who, in fury, regarded the brief, diagonally striped garments. She bit her lower lip, and, if Kazrak had not been present, would undoubtedly have roundly informed me of her displeasure.
“Did you expect to be dressed as a free woman?” I snapped. She glared at me, knowing that she must play her role, at least in the presence of Kazrak. She tossed her head haughtily. “Of course not,” she said, adding ironically, “Master.” Her back straight as a tarn-goad, she disappeared behind the silk hanging. A moment later the torn rag of blue silk flew out from behind the hanging. A moment or two after, Talena stepped forth for our inspection, brazen and insolent. She wore the diagonally striped slave livery of Gor, as had Sana – that briefly
skirted, simple, sleeveless garment. She turned before us. “Do I please you?” she asked. It was obvious she did. Talena was a most beautiful girl. “Kneel,” I said, drawing out the collar. Talena blanched, but, as Kazrak chuckled, she knelt before me, her fists clenched. “Read it,” I ordered. Talena looked at the engraved collar and shook with rage. “Read it,” I said. “Out loud.” She read the simple legend aloud: “I AM THE PROPERTY OF TARL OF BRISTOL.”
I snapped the slender steel collar on her throat, placing the key in my pouch. “Shall I call for the iron?” asked Kazrak. “No,” begged Talena, now, for the first time, frightened. “I shall not brand her today,” I said, keeping a straight face. “By the Priest-Kings,” laughed Kazrak, “I believe you care for the she-tharlarion.” “Leave us, Warrior,” I said. Kazrak laughed again, winked at me, and backed with mock ceremony from the tent. Talena sprang to her feet, her two
fists flying for my face. I caught her wrists. “How dare you?” she raged. “Take this thing off,” she commanded. She struggled fiercely, futilely. When in sheer frustration she stopped squirming, I released her. She pulled at the circle of steel on her throat. “Re1move this degrading object,” she commanded, “now!” She faced me, her mouth trembling with rage. “The daughter of the Ubar of Ar wears no man’s collar.” “The daughter of the Ubar of Ar,” I said, “wears the collar of Tarl of Bristol.”
There was a long pause. “I suppose,” she said, attempting to save face, “it would be perhaps appropriate for a tarnsman to place his collar on the captive daughter of a rich merchant.” “Or the daughter of a goat keeper,” I added. Her eyes snapped. “Yes, perhaps,” she said. “Very well. I concede the reasonableness of your plan.” Then she held out her small hand imperiously. “Give me the key,” she said, “so that I may remove this when I please.” “I will keep the key,” I said. “And it will be removed, if at all,
when I please.” She straightened and turned away, enraged but helpless. “Very well,” she said. Then, her eyes lit on the second object Kazrak had donated to the project of taming what he called the she-tharlarion – the slave whip. “What is the meaning of that?” “Surely you are familiar with a slave whip?” I asked, picking it up and, with amusement, slapping it once or twice in my palm. “Yes,” she said, regarding me evenly. “I have often used it on my own slaves. Is it now to be used on me?”
“If necessary,” I said. “You wouldn’t have the nerve,” she said. “More likely the inclination,” I said. She smiled. Her next remark astonished me. “Use it on me if I do not please you, Tarl of Bristol,” she said. I pondered this, but she had turned away. In the next few days, to my surprise, Talena was buoyant, cheerful, and excited. She became interested in the caravan and would spend hours walking alongside the coloured wagons, sometimes
hitching rides with the strap- masters, wheedling from them a piece of fruit or a sweetmeat. She even conversed delightedly with the inmates of the blue and yellow wagons, bringing them precious tid- bits of camp news, teasing them as to how handsome their new masters would be. She became a favourite of the caravan. Once or twice mounted warriors of the caravan had accosted her, but on reading her collar had backed grumblingly away, enduring with good humour her jibes and taunts. In the early afternoon, when the caravan halted,
she would help Kazrak and me set up our tent and would then gather wood for a fire. She cooked for us, kneeling by the fire, her hair bound back so as not to catch the sparks, her face sweaty and intent on the piece of meat she was most likely burning. After the meal she would clean and polish our gear, sitting on the tent carpet between us, chatting about the small, pleasant inconsequentialities of her day. “Slavery apparently agrees with her,” I remarked to Kazrak. “Not slavery,” he smiled. And I puzzled as to the meaning of his remark. Talena blushed and
lowered her face, rubbing vigorously on the leather of my tharlarion boots.
Chapter Eleven:THE CITY OF TENTS
For several days1, to the sound of the caravan bells, we made our way through the Margin of Desolation, that wild, barren strip of soil with which the Empire of Ar had girded its borders. Now, in the distance, we could hear the muffled roar of the mighty Vosk. As the caravan mounted a rise, we saw far
below us, on the banks of the Vosk, a sight of incredible barbaric splendour – pasangs of brightly coloured tents stretching as far as the eye could see, a vast assemblage of tents housing one of the greatest armies ever gathered on the plains of Gor. The flags of a hundred cities flew above the tents, and, against the steady roar of the river, the sound of the great tarn drums reached us, those huge drums whose signals control the complex war formations of Gor’s flying cavalries. Talena ran to the foot of my tharlarion, and with my lance I hoisted her to the saddle so that she
could see. For the first time in days her eyes filled with anger. “Scavengers,” she said, “come to feast on the bodies of wounded tarnsmen.” I said nothing, knowing in my heart that I, in my way, had been responsible for this vast martial array on the banks of the Vosk. It was I who had stolen the Home Stone of Ar, who had brought about the downfall of Marlenus, the Ubar, who had set the spark that had brought Ar to anarchy and the vultures below to feed on the divided carcass of what had been Gor’s greatest city.
Talena leaned back against my shoulder. Without looking at me, her shoulders shook, and I knew she was weeping. If I could have, I would in that moment have rewritten the past, would have selfishly abandoned the quest for the Home Stone – yes, willingly would have left the scattered hostile cities of Gor to face, one by one, the imperialistic depradations of Ar, if it were not for one thing – the girl I held in my arms. The caravan of Mintar did not camp as usual in the heat of the day but moved on, attempting to reach
the City of Tents before darkness. As it was, my fellow guards and I earned our pay those last few pasangs to the banks of the Vosk. We fought off three groups of raiders from the camp on the river, two of them small, undisciplined contingents of mounted warriors, but the other a lightning strike of a dozen tarnsmen on the weapons wagon. They withdrew in good order, driven off by our crossbows, and couldn’t have got much. I saw Mintar again, the first time since I had joined the caravan. His palanquin swayed past. His face was sweating, and he fumbled in his
heavy wallet, taking out tarn discs and tossing them to the warriors for their work. I snapped a tarn disc from the air and put it in my pouch. That night we brought the caravan into the palisaded keep prepared for Mintar by Pa-Kur, the Master Assassin, who was the Ubar of this vast, scarcely organised, predatory horde. The caravan was secured, and in a few hours trade would begin. The caravan, with its varied goods, was needed by the camp, and its merchandise would command the highest prices. I noted with satisfaction that Pa-Kur, Master Assassin, proud leader of
perhaps the greatest horde ever assembled on the plains of Gor, had need of Mintar, who was only of the Merchant Caste. My plan, as I explained to Talena, was simple. It amounted to little more than buying a tarn, if I could afford it, or stealing one if I could not, and making a run for Ko- ro-ba. The venture might be risky, particularly if I had to steal the tarn and elude pursuit, but, all things considered, an escape on tarnback seemed to me far safer than trying to cross the Vosk and make our way on foot or tharlarion through the hills and wilderness to the distant
cylinders of Ko-ro-ba. Talena seemed depressed, in odd contrast to he1r liveliness of the caravan days. “What will become of me in Ko-ro-ba?” she asked. “I don’t know,” I said, smiling. “Perhaps you could be a tavern slave.” She smiled wryly. “No, Tarl of Bristol,” she said. “More likely I would be impaled, for I am still the daughter of Marlenus.” I did not tell her, but if that was decreed to be her fate and I could not prevent it, I knew she would not be impaled alone. There would be two bodies on the walls of Ko-ro-
Talena stood up. “Tonight,” she said, “let us drink wine.” It was a Gorean expression, a fatalistic maxim in which the events of the morrow were cast into the laps of the Priest-Kings. “Let us drink wine,” I agreed. That night I took Talena into the City of Tents, and by the light of torches set on lances we walked arm in arm through the crowded streets, among the colourful tents and market stalls. Not only warriors were in evidence, but tradesmen and artisans, peddlers and peasants,
camp women and slaves. Talena clung to my arm, fascinated. We watched in one stall a bronzed giant apparently swallowing balls of fire, in the next a silk merchant crying the glories of his cloth, in another a hawker of Paga; in still another we watched the swaying bodies of dancing slave girls as their master proclaimed their rent price. “I want to see the market,” Talena said eagerly, and I knew the market she meant. This vast city of silk would surely have its Street of Brands. Reluctantly I took Talena to the great tent of blue and yellow silk, and we pressed in among the
hot, smelling bodies of the buyers, forcing our way towards the front. There Talena watched, thrilled, as girls, several of whom she had known in the caravan, were placed on the large, rounded wooden block and sold, one by one, to the highest bidder. “She’s beautiful,” Talena would say of one as the auctioneer would tug the single loop on the right shoulder of the slave livery, dropping it to the girl’s ankles. Of another, Talena would sniff scornfully. She seemed to be pleased when her friends were bought by handsome tarnsmen, and
laughed delightedly when one girl, to whom she had taken a dislike, was purchased by a fat, odious fellow, of the Caste of Tarn Keepers. To my surprise, most of the girls seemed excited by their sale and displayed their charms with brazen gusto, each seeming to compete with the one before to bring a higher price. It was, of course, far more desirable to bring a high price, thereby guaranteeing that one’s master would be well-fixed. Accordingly, the girls did their best to move the interest of the buyers. I noted that Talena, like others in the
room, did not seem in the least to feel that there was anything objectionable or untoward in this commerce in beauty. It was an accepted, ordinary part of the life of Gor. I wondered if, on my own planet, there was not a similar market, invisible but present, and just as much accepted, a market in which women were sold, except that they sold themselves, were themselves both merchandise and merchant. How many of the women of my native planet, I wondered, did not with care consider the finances, the property of their prospective
mates? How many of them did not, for all practical purposes, sell themselves, bartering their bodies for the goods of the world? Here on Gor, however, I observed ironically, bitterly, there was a clear division between merchandise and merchant. The girls would not collect their own profit, not on Gor. I had noticed that there was among the crowd one tall, sombre figure who sat alone on a high, wooden throne, surrounded by tarnsmen. He wore the black helmet of a member of the Caste of Assassins. I took Talena by the elbow and, though she protested,
moved her gently through the crowd and out into the air. We purchased a bottle of Ka-la- na wine and shared it as we walked through the streets. She begged a tenth of a tarn disc from me, and I gave it to her. Like a child she went to one or two stalls, making me look the other way. In a few minutes she returned, carrying a small package. She gave me the change and leaned against my shoulder, claiming that she was weary. We returned to our tent. Kazrak was gone, and my suspicion was that he was gone for the night, that he was even now tangled in the sleeping
robes of one of the torchlit booths of the City of Tents. Talena retired behind the silk partition, and I built up the fire in the centre of the tent, not wishing to retire as yet. I could not forget the figure on the throne, he of the black helmet, and I thought perhaps that he had noticed me and had reacted. It had been, perhaps, my imagination. I sat on the tenth carpet, poking at the small fire in the cooking hole. I could hear from a tent nearby the sound of a flute, some soft drums, and the rhythmic jangle of some tiny cymbals. As I mused, Talena stepped forth
from behind the silk curtain. I had thought she had retired. Instead, she stood before me in the diaphanous, scarlet dancing silks of Gor. She had rouged her lips. My head swam at the sudden intoxicating scent of a wild perfume. Her olive ankles bore dancing bangles with tiny bells. Attached to the thumb and index finger of each hand were tiny finger cymbals. She bent her knees ever so slightly and raised her arms gracefully above her head. There was a sudden bright clash of the finger cymbals, and, to the music of the nearby tent, Talena, daughter of the Ubar of Ar, began to dance for
me. As she moved slowly before me, she asked softly, “Do I please you, Master?” There had been no scorn, no irony in her voice. “Yes,” I said, not thinking to repudiate the title by which she had addressed me. She paused for a moment and walked lightly to the side of the tent. She seemed to hesitate for an instant, then quickly gathered up the slave whip and a leading chain. She placed them firmly in my hands and knelt on the tent carpet before me, her eyes filled with a strange light, her knees not in the position of a
Tower Slave but of a Pleasure Slave. “If you wish,” she said, “I will dance the Whip Dance for you, or the Chain Dance.” I threw the whip and chain to the wall of the tent. “No,” I said angrily. I would not have Talena dance those cruel dances of Gor, which so humbled a woman. “Then I shall show you a love dance,” she said happily, “a dance I learned in the Walled Gardens of Ar.” “I should like that,” I said, and, as I watched, Talena performed Ar’s strangely beautiful dance of
passion. She danced before me for several minutes, her scarlet dancing silks flashing in the firelight, her bare feet, with their belled ankles, striking softly on the carpet. With a last flash of the finger cymbals, she fell to the carpet before me, her breath hot and quick, her eyes blazing with desire. I was at her side, and she was in my arms. Her heart beat wildly against my breast. She looked into my eyes, her lips trembling, the words stumbling but audible. “Call for the iron,” she said. “1Brand me, Master.”
“No, Talena,” I said, kissing her mouth. “No.” “I want to be owned,” she whimpered. “I want to belong to you, fully, completely, in every way. I want your brand, Tarl of Bristol, don’t you understand? I want to be your branded slave.” I fumbled with the collar at her throat, unlocked it, threw it aside. “You’re free, my love,” I whispered. “Always free.” She sobbed, shaking her head, her lashes wet with tears. “No,” she wept. “I am your slave.” She clenched her body against mine, the buckles of the wide tharlarion belt
cutting into her belly. “You own me,” she whispered. “Use me.” There was a sudden rush of men behind me as tarnsmen broke into the tent. I remember turning swiftly and seeing for the fraction of a second the butt of a spear crashing towards my face. I heard Talena scream. There was a sudden flash of light, and then darkness.
Chapter Twelve:IN THE TARN’S NEST
My wrists and ankles were bound to a hollow, floating frame.
The ropes sawed into my flesh as the weight of my body drew on them. I turned my head, sick to my stomach, and threw up into the turbid waters of the Vosk. I blinked my eyes against the hot sun and tried to move my wrists and ankles. A voice said, “He’s awake.” Dimly I felt spear butts thrust against the side of the hollow frame, ready to edge it out into the current. I cleared my head as best I could, and into my uncertain field of vision moved a dark object, which became the black helmet of a member of the Caste of Assassins. Slowly, with a
stylised movement, the helmet was lifted, and I found myself staring up into a grey, lean, cruel face, a face that might have been made of metal. The eyes were inscrutable, as if they had been made of glass or stone and set artificially in that metallic mask of a countenance. “I am Pa-Kur,” said the man. It was he, the Master Assassin of Ar, leader of the assembled horde. “We meet again,” I said. The eyes, like glass or stone, revealed nothing. “The cylinder at Ko-ro-ba,” I said. “The crossbow.” He said nothing.
“You failed to kill me that time,” I taunted. “Perhaps you would care to risk another shot now. Perhaps the mark would be more suited to your skills.” The men behind Pa-Kur muttered at my impudence. He himself showed no impatience. “My weapon,” he said, simply extending his hand. A crossbow was immediately placed in his grip. It was a large steel bow, wound and set, the iron quarrel placed in the guide. I prepared to welcome the bolt flashing through my body. I was curious to know if I would be
conscious of its strike. Pa-Kur raised his hand with an imperious gesture. From somewhere I saw a small, round object sailing high into the air, out over the river. It was a tarn disc hurled by one of Pa-Kur’s men. Just as the tiny object, black against the blue sky, reached its apogee, I heard the click of the trigger, the vibration of the string,1 and the swift hiss of the quarrel. Before the tarn disc could begin its fall, the quarrel pierced it, carrying it, I would judge, some two hundred and fifty yards out into the river. The men of Pa-Kur stamped their feet in the sand and clanged their
spears on their shields. “I spoke as a fool,” I said to Pa- Kur. “And you will die the death of a fool,” he said. He spoke with no trace of anger or emotion of any kind. He motioned to the men to thrust the frame out into the river, where it would be swept away. “Wait,” I said, “I ask your favour.” The words came hard. Pa-Kur gestured to the men to desist. “What have you done with the girl?” “She is Talena, daughter of the
Ubar Marlenus,” said Pa-Kur. “She will rule in Ar, as my queen.” “She would die first,” I said. “She has accepted me,” said Pa- Kur, “and will rule by my side.” The stone eyes regarded me, expressionless. “It was her wish that you die the death of a villain,” he said, “on the Frame of Humiliation, unworthy to stain our weapons.” I closed my eyes. I should have known that the proud Talena, daughter of a Ubar, would leap at the first chance to return to power in Ar, even though it be at the head of a plundering host of brigands.
And I, her protector, was now to be discarded. Indeed, the Frame of Humiliation would be ample vengeance to satisfy even Talena for the indignities she had suffered at my hands. It, if anything, would wipe out forever from her mind the offensive memory that she had once needed my help and had pretended to love me. Then, each of the men of Pa-Kur, as is the custom before a frame is surrendered to the waters of the Vosk, spit on my body. Lastly, Pa- Kur spit on his hand and then placed his hand on my chest. “Were it not for the daughter of Marlenus,”
said Pa-Kur, his metallic face as placid as the quicksilver behind a mirror, “I would have slain you honourably. That I swear by the black helmet of my caste.” “I believe you,” I said, my voice choked, no longer caring if I lived or died. The spear butts pressed against the frame, shoving it away from the bank. The current soon caught it, and it began to spin in slow circles farther and farther out into the midst of that vast force of nature called the Vosk. The death would not be a pleasant one. Bound helplessly,
without food or water, my own body would torture me by its weight dragging on the hand and ankle ropes, suspended a few inches above the roiling, muddy surface under the fiery sun. I knew that I would not, some days hence, reach the delta of the Vosk and the cities in the delta except perhaps as a bound corpse, withered by exposure and the lack of water. Indeed, it was unlikely my body would reach the delta at all. It was far more likely that one of the water lizards of the Vosk or one of the great hook-beaked turtles of the river would seize my body and drag
it and the frame under the water, destroying me in the mud below. There was also the chance that a wild tarn might swoop down and feed on the helpless living morsel fastened to that degrading frame. Of one thing I was certain – there would be no human assistance or even pity, for the poor wretches on the frames are none but villains, betrayers, and blasphemers against the Priest-Kings, and it is a sacrilegious act even to consider terminating the sufferings. My wrists and an1kles had turned white and were numb. The oppressive, blinding glare of the
sun, the heavy weight of its heat bore down on me. My throat was parched, and, hanging only an inch or so above the Vosk, I burned with thirst. Thoughts, like prodding needles, vexed my brain. The image of the treacherous, beautiful Talena, in her dancing silks, as she had lain in my arms, tormented me – she who would gladly give her kisses to the cold Pa-Kur for a place on the throne of Ar, she whose implacable hatred had sent me to this terrible death, not even permitting me the honour of a warrior’s end. I wanted to hate her – so much I wanted to hate her – but I found that I could
not. I had come to love her. In the glade by the swamp forests, in the grain fields of the empire, on the great highway of Ar, in the regal, exotic caravan of Mintar, I had found the woman I loved, a scion of a barbaric race on a remote and unknown world. The night came with infinite slowness, but at last the blinding sun was gone and I welcomed the chill, windy darkness. The water lapped against the side of the frame, the stars sparkled above in frosty detachment. Once, to my horror, a scaled body crested under the frame, its glistening hide rubbing
my body as it snapped its tail and suddenly darted beneath the water. It apparently was not carnivorous. Oddly enough, I cried out to the stars in joy, still clinging to life, unwilling to lament the fact that my miseries must now be prolonged. The sun swept into the sky again, and my second day on the Vosk began. I remember being afraid that I would never be able to use my hands and feet again, that they would never withstand the punishment of the ropes. Then I remembered laughing foolishly, like a madman, when I considered that it wouldn’t matter, that I would never
have any further use for them. Perhaps it was my wild, almost demented laughter that attracted the tarn. I saw him coming, making his silent strike with the sun at his back, his talons extended like hooks. Savagely those vast talons struck and closed on my body, forcing the frame for an instant beneath the water, then the tarn was beating the air angrily with its wings, struggling to lift his prey, and suddenly both myself and the heavy frame were pulled free from the water. The sudden weight of the frame swinging against my roped wrists and ankles, while the talons of the
bird gripped my body, almost tore me apart. Then, mercifully, the ropes, not meant to sustain the weight of the heavy frame, broke loose, and the tarn triumphantly climbed skyward, still clutching me in his wild talons. I would have a few moments more of life, the same brief reprieve nature grants the mouse carried by the hawk to its nest; then on some barren crag my body would be torn to pieces by the beast whose prey I was. The tarn, a brown tarn with a black crest like most wild tarns, streaked for that vague, distant smudge I knew
marked the escarpments of some mountain wilderness. The Vosk became a broad, glimmering ribbon in the distance. Far below, I could see the burned, dead Margin of Desolation was dotted here and there with patches of green, where some handfuls of seed had blindly asserted themselves, reclaiming something of that devastated country for life and growth. Near one of the green stretches I saw what I first thought was a shadow, but as the tarn passed, it scattered into a scampering flock of tiny creatures, probably the small, three-toed
mammals called qualae, dun- coloured and with a stiff brushy mane of black hair. As nearly as I could determine, we did not pass over or near the great highway that ran to the Vosk. Had we done so, I might have seen the war horde of Pa-Kur on its way to Ar, with its marching columns, its lines of tharlarion riders, its foraging cavalries of tar1nsmen, its supply wagons and pack animals. And somewhere in that vast array, among the flags and the booming of tarn drums, would have been the girl who had betrayed me. As well as I could, I opened and
closed my hands and moved my feet, trying to restore in them some semblance of feeling. The flight of the tarn was serene, and I, grateful to be free at last of the painful Frame of Humiliation, found myself, strangely enough, almost reconciled to the savage but swift fate I knew awaited me. But suddenly the flight of the tarn became much more rapid and then in another minute almost erratic and frenzied. He was fleeing! I twisted about in his claws, and my heart seemed to jerk spasmodically in my breast. My hair froze as I heard the shrill, angry cry of another tarn; he
was an enormous creature as sable as the helmet of Pa-Kur, his wings beating like whips, bearing down relentlessly on my captor. My bird swerved dizzily, and the great assailant’s talons passed harmlessly. Then he attacked again, and my bird swerved again, but the attacking tarn had allowed for the manoeuvre, compensating for it an instant before my own bird turned, with the result that it met my bird in full collision. I was conscious in that mad, terrible instant of the flash of steel- shod talons at the breast of my bird, and then my bird shook as though
seized with a convulsion and opened his talons. I began to drop towards the wastes below. In that wild instant I saw my bird beginning to fall, flopping downward, and saw his attacker wheeling in my direction. Falling, I twisted madly, unsupported in the air, a wordless cry of anguish in my throat, and watched in horror as the ground seemed to rush upward to meet me. But I never reached it, for the attacking bird had swooped to intercept me and seize me in his beak much as one gull might seize a fish dropped by another. The beak, curved like an instrument of war,
slit with its narrow nostrils, closed on my body, and I was once more the prize of a tarn. Soon my swift captor had reached his mountains, and the vague, distant smudge that I had seen had become a lonely, frightening, inaccessible wilderness of reddish cliffs. High on a sunlit mountain ledge, the sable tarn dropped me to the sticks and brush of its nest and set one steel-shod taloned foot across my body, to hold me steady as the great beak did its work. As the beak reached down for me, I managed to get one leg between it and my body and kicked
it back, cursing wildly. The sound of my voice had an unusual effect on the bird. He tilted his head to one side quizzically. I shouted at him again and again. And then, fool that I was, half demented with hunger and terror, I only then realised that the tarn was none other than my own! I shoved the steel- shod foot that pressed me into the sticks of the nest, uttering my command with ringing authority. The bird lifted his foot and backed away, still uncertain as to what to do. I sprang to my feet, standing well within the reach of his beak, showing no fear. I slapped his beak
affectionately, as if we were in a tarn cot, and shoved my hands into his neck feathers, the area where the tarns can’t preen, as the tarn keepers do when searching for parasites. I withdrew some of the lice, the size of marbles, which tend to infest the wild tarns, and slapped them roughly into the mouth of the tarn, wiping them off on his tongue. I did this again and again, and the tarn stretched out his neck. The saddle and reins of the tarn were no longer on the bird and had undoubtedly rotted off or had been rubbed from his back by scraping against the
rock escarpment backing its nest ledge. After a few minutes of my ministrations the tarn, satisfied, spread his wings and took flight, to continue the search for food which had been interrupted. Appa1rently, in his limited fashion, he no longer conceived of me as being in the immediate category of the edible. That he might soon change his mind, particularly if he found nothing on the plains below, was only too obvious. I cursed because I had lost the tarn-goad in the quicksands of Ar’s swamp forest. I examined the ledge for some means of escape, but the cliffs above and below were
almost smooth. Suddenly a great shadow covered the ledge. My tarn had returned. I looked up and, to my horror, saw that it was not my tarn. It was another tarn, a wild tarn. He lit on the ledge, snapping his beak. This time I had none of the careful conditioning of the tarn keepers working in my favour. I frantically looked about for a weapon, and then, hardly believing my eyes, I saw woven roughly into the nest sticks, the remains of my harness and saddle. I seized my spear from the saddle sheath and turned. The beast had waited a
moment too long; he had been too confident of his trapped quarry. As he stalked forward, oblivious of the spear, I hurled the broad-headed weapon deep into his breast. His legs gave way, and his body, wings outspread, sank to the granite flooring of the ledge. Head jerking and eyes glassy, the bird twitched and trembled uncontrollably – a cluster of spasmodic reflexes. He had died the instant the spear had entered his heart. I withdrew the weapon and, using it as a lever, rolled the twitching body to the brink of the ledge and sent it flopping to the depths below.
I returned to the nest and salvaged what I could of the tarn harness and saddle. The crossbow and longbow, with their respective missiles, were nowhere in evidence. The shield was also gone. With the spear blade I cut into the locked saddle pack. It contained, as I’d known it would, the Home Stone of Ar. It was unimpressive, small, flat, and of a dull brown colour. Carved on it, crudely, was a single letter in an archaic Gorean script, that single letter which, in the old spelling, would have been the name of the city. At the time the stone was
carved, Ar, in all probability, had been one of dozens of inconspicuous villages on the plains of Gor. Impatiently I set the stone aside. The pack also contained, and more importantly from my point of view, the balance of my supplies, intended for the home flight to Ko- ro-ba. The first thing I did was unseal one of the two water flasks and open the dried rations. And there on that windy ledge, in that abode of the tarn, I ate the meal that satisfied me as no other had ever done, though it consisted only of some mouthfuls of water, some
stale biscuits, and a wrapper of dried meat. I poked through the other contents of the saddle pack, delighted to find my old maps and that device that serves Goreans as both compass and chronometer. As nearly as I could determine from the map and my memory of the location of the Vosk and the direction I had been carried, I was somewhere in the Voltai Range, sometimes called the Red Mountains, south of the river and to the east of Ar. That would mean that I had unknowingly passed over the great highway, but whether ahead of or behind Pa-Kur’s horde I
had no idea. My calculations as to my locale tended to be confirmed by the dull reddish colour of the cliffs, due to the presence of large deposits of iron oxide. I then took the binding fibre and extra bowstrings from the pack. I would use them in repairing the saddle and harness. I cursed myself for not having carried an extra tarn- goad somewhere in the saddle gear. Also I should have carried an extra tarn whistle. Mine had been lost when Talena had thrown me from the back of the tarn, shortly after we had fled the walls of Ar. I wasn’t sure I could control the
tarn without a tarn-goad. I had used it 1sparingly in my flights with him, even more sparingly than is recommended, but it had always been there, ready to be used if needed. Now it was no longer there. Whether I could control the tarn or not would probably, at least for a time, depend on whether or not he had been successful in his hunt and on how well the tarn keepers had done their work with the young bird. And would it not also depend on how deep the bite of freedom had been felt by the bird, how ready he would be to be controlled once more by man? With
my spear I could kill him, but that would not rescue me from the ledge. I had no desire to die eventually of starvation in the lonely aerie of my tarn. I would leave on his back or die. In the hours that remained before the tarn returned to his nest, I used the binding fibre and bowstrings to repair, as well as I could, the harness and saddle. By the time my great mount had settled again on his ledge, I had finished my work, even to restoring the gear in my saddle pack. Almost as an afterthought I had included the Home Stone of Ar, that simple, uncomely piece of rock
that had so transformed my destiny and that of an empire. Gripped in the talons of the tarn was the dead body of an antelope, one of the one-horned, yellow antelopes called tabuks that frequent the bright Ka-la-na thickets of Gor. The antelope’s back had been broken, apparently in the tarn’s strike, and its neck and head lolled aimlessly to one side. When the tarn had fed, I walked over to him, speaking familiarly, as if I might be doing the most customary thing on Gor. Letting him see the harness fully, I slowly and with measured care fastened it
around his neck. I then threw the saddle over the bird’s back and crawled under its stomach to fasten the girth straps. Then I calmly climbed the newly repaired mounting ladder, drew it up, and fastened it to the side of the saddle. I sat still for a moment and then decisively drew back on the one- strap. I breathed a sigh of relief as the black monster lifted himself in flight.
Chapter Thirteen:MARLENUS, UBAR OF AR
I set my course for Ko-ro-ba, carrying in my saddle pack the trophy that was now, at least to me, worthless. It had done its work. Its loss to Ar had already riven an empire and, for the time at least, had guaranteed the independence of Ko-ro-ba and her hostile sister cities. Yet my victory, if victory it was, brought me no satisfaction. My mission might have been concluded, but I did not rejoice. I had lost the girl I had loved, cruel and treacherous though she might have been. I took the tarn high, to bring a circle of some two hundred pasangs
or so under my view. In the far distance I could see the silver wire I knew must be the great Vosk, could see the abrupt shift from the grassy plains to the Margin of Desolation. From the height I could look down on a portion of the Voltai Range, with its arrogant reddish heights, as it faded away to the east. To the southwest I could see dimly the evening light reflected from the spires of Ar, and to the north, approaching from the Vosk, I could see the glow from what must be thousands of cooking fires, the night’s camp of Pa-Kur. As I was drawing on the two
strap, to guide the tarn to Ko-ro-ba, I saw something I did not expect to see, something directly below, which startled me. Shielded among the crags of the Volta, invisible except from directly above, I saw four or five small cooking fires, such as might mark the camp of a mountain patrol or a small company of hunters, perhaps after the agile and bellicose Gorean mountain goat, the long-haired, spiral-horned verr, or, more dan1gerously, the larl, a tawny leopardlike beast indigenous to the Voltai and several of Gor’s ranges, standing an incredible seven feet high at the
shoulder and feared for its occasional hunger-driven visitations to the civilised plains below. Curious, I dropped the tarn lower, not willing to believe the fires belonged to either a patrol or hunters. It did not seem likely that one of Ar’s patrols would be presently bivouacked in the Voltai, nor did it seem likely the fires below would be those of hunters. As I dropped lower, my suspicions were confirmed. Perhaps the men of the mysterious camp heard the beating of the tarn’s wings, perhaps I had been outlined for an instant against one of Gor’s
three circling moons, but suddenly the fires disappeared, kicked apart in a flash of sparks, and the glowing embers were smothered almost immediately. Outlaws, I supposed, or perhaps deserters from Ar. There would be many who would leave the city to seek the comparative safety of the mountains. Feeling that I had satisfied my curiosity and not wanting to risk a landing in the darkness, where a spear might dart from any shadow, I drew back on the one-strap and prepared to return at last to Ko-ro-ba, whence I had departed several days – an eternity – before.
As the tarn wheeled upward, I heard the wild, uncanny hunting cry of the larl, piercing the dusk from somewhere in the peaks below. Even the tarn seemed to shiver in its flight. The hunting cry was answered from elsewhere in the peaks and then again from a farther distance. When the larl hunts alone, it hunts silently, never uttering a sound until the sudden roar that momentarily precedes its charge, the roar calculated to terrify the quarry into a fatal instant of immobility. But tonight a pride of larls was hunting, and the cries of the three beasts were driving cries,
herding the prey, usually several animals, towards the region of silence, herding them in the direction from which no cries would come, the direction in which the remainder of the pride waited. The light of the three moons was bright that night, and in the resultant exotic patchwork of shadows below, I caught sight of one of the larls, padding softly along, its body almost white in the moonlight. It paused, lifted its wide, fierce head, some two or three feet in diameter, and uttered the hunting scream once more. Momentarily it was answered, once from about two
pasangs to the west and once from about the same distance to the south-west. It appeared ready to resume its pace when suddenly it stopped, its head absolutely motionless, its sharp, pointed ears tense and lifted. I thought perhaps he had heard the tarn, but he seemed to show no awareness of us. I brought the bird somewhat lower, in long, slow circles, keeping the larl in view. The tail of the animal began to lash angrily. It crouched, holding its long, terrible body close to the ground. It then began to move forward, swiftly but stealthily, its shoulders hunched
forward, its hind quarters almost touching the ground. Its ears were lying back, flat against the sides of its wide head. As it moved, for all its speed, it placed each paw carefully on the ground, first the toes and then the ball of the foot, as silently as the wind might bend grass, in a motion that was as beautiful as it was terrifying. Something unusual was apparently happening. Some animal must be trying to break the hunting circle. One would suppose that the larl might be unconcerned with a single animal escaping its net of noise and fear and would neglect an
isolated kill in order to keep the hunting circle closed, but that is not true. For whatever reason, the larl will always prefer ruining a hunt, even one involving a quarry of several animals, to allowing a given animal to move past it to freedom. Though I suppose this is purely instinctive on 1the larl’s part, it does have the effect, over a series of generations, of weeding out animals which, if they survived, might transmit their intelligence, or perhaps their erratic running patterns, to their offspring. As it is, when the larl loses its hunt, the animals which escape are those
which haven’t tried to break the circle, those which allow themselves to be herded easily. Suddenly, to my horror, I saw the quarry of the larl. It was a human being, moving with surprising alacrity over the rough ground. To my astonishment, I saw it wore the yellow cerements of the sufferer of Dar-Kosis, that virulent, incurable, wasting disease of Gor. Without bothering to think, I seized my spear and, dragging harshly on the four-strap, brought the tarn into a sharp, abrupt descent. The bird struck the ground between the diseased victim and the
approaching larl. Rather than risk casting my spear from the safe but unsteady saddle of the tarn, I leaped to the ground, just as the larl, furious that it had been discovered, uttered the paralysing hunting roar and charged. For an instant I could not move, literally. Somehow the shock of that great, wild cry gripped me in a steel fist of terror. It was uncontrollable, an immobility as much a physiological reflex as the jerking of a knee or the blinking of an eye. Then, as swiftly as it had come, that nightmarish instant of immobility passed and I set my
spear to take the jolt of the larl’s attack. Perhaps my sudden appearance had disoriented the beast or shaken its marvellous instincts, because it must have uttered its killing cry an instant too soon, or perhaps my muscles and nerves responded to my will more rapidly than it had anticipated. When, twenty feet away, the great, bounding beast, fangs bared, leaped for its prey, it encountered instead only the slender needle of my spear, set like a stake in the ground, braced by the half-naked body of a warrior of Ko-ro-ba. The spearhead disappeared from sight
in the furry breast of the larl, and the shaft of the spear began to sink into it as the weight of the animal forced it deeper into its body. I leaped from under the tawny, monstrous body, narrowly escaping the slashings of its clawed forefeet. The spear shaft snapped and the beast fell to the earth, rolling on its back, pawing at the air, uttering piercing, enraged shrieks, trying to bite the toothpick-like object from its body. With a convulsive shudder, the great head rolled to one side and the eyes half closed, leaving a milky slit of death between the lids.
I turned to regard the individual whose life I had saved. He was now bent and crooked, like a broke, blasted shrub in his yellow shroudlike robe. The hood concealed his face. “There are more of these things about,” I said. “You’d better come with me. It won’t be safe here.” The figure seemed to shrink backward and grow smaller in its yellow rags. Pointing to its shadowed, concealed face, it whispered, “The Holy Disease.” That was the literal translation of Dar-Kosis – the Holy Disease – or, equivalently, the Sacred Affliction.
The disease is named that because it is regarded as being holy to the Priest-Kings, and those who suffer from it are regarded as consecrated to the Priest-Kings. Accordingly, it is regarded as heresy to shed their blood. On the other hand, the Afflicted, as they are called, have little to fear from their fellow men. Their disease is so highly contagious, so invariably devastating in its effect, and so feared on the planet that even the boldest of outlaws gives them a wide berth. Accordingly, the Afflicted enjoy a large amount of freedom of movement on Gor. They
are, of course, warned to stay away from the hab1itations of men, and, if they approach too closely, they are sometimes stoned. Oddly enough, casuistically, stoning the Afflicted is not regarded as a violation of the Priest-Kings’s supposed injunction against shedding their blood. As an act of charity, Initiates have arranged at various places Dar-Kosis Pits where the Afflicted may voluntarily imprison themselves, to be fed with food hurled downwards from the backs of passing tarns. Once in a Dar- Kosis Pit, the Afflicted are not allowed to depart. Finding this poor
fellow in the Voltai, so far from the natural routes and fertile areas of Gor, I suspected he might have escaped, if that was possible, from one of the Pits. “What is your name?” I asked. “I am of the Afflicted,” said the weird, cringing figure. “The Afflicted are dead. The dead are nameless.” The voice was little more than a hoarse whisper. I was glad that it was night and that the hood of the man was drawn, for I had no desire to look on what pieces of flesh might still cling to his skull. “Did you escape from one of the
Dar-Kosis Pits?” I asked. The man seemed to cringe even more. “You are safe with me,” I said. I gestured to the tarn, which was impatiently opening and closing his wings. “Hurry. There are more larls about.” “The Holy Disease,” the man protested, pointing into the hideously dark recesses of his drawn hood. “I can’t leave you here to die,” I said. I shivered at the thought of taking this dread creature, this whispering corpse, with me. I feared the disease as I had not
feared the larl, but I could not leave him alone here in the mountains to fall prey to one beast or another. The man cackled – a thin, whining noise. “I am already dead,” he laughed insanely. “I am of the Afflicted.” Again the weird cackle came from the folds of the yellow shroud. “Would you like the Holy Disease?” he asked, stretching out one hand in the darkness, as if trying to clutch my hand. I drew back my hand in horror. The thing stumbled forward, reaching for me, and fell to the ground with a tiny, moaning sound. It sat on the ground, wrapped in its
yellow cerements – a mound of decay and desolation under the three Gorean moons. It rocked back and forth, uttering mad little noises, as if grieving or whimpering. From perhaps a pasang away I hear the frustrated roar of a larl, probably one of the companions of the beast I had killed, puzzled about the failure of the hunt. “Get up,” I said. “There isn’t much time.” “Help me,” whined the yellow mound. I stilled a shiver of disgust and extended my hand to the object. “Take my hand,” I said. “I’ll help
you.” From the bent heap of rags that was a fellow human being, a hand reached up to me, fingers crooked, as though they might have been the claws of a chicken. Disregarding my misgivings, I took the hand, to draw the unfortunate creature to its feet. To my amazement, the hand that clasped mine firmly was as solid and hardened as saddle leather. Before I realised what was happening, my arm had been jerked downward and twisted, and I had been thrown on my back at the feet of the man, who leaped up and set
his boot on my thro1at. In his hand was a warrior’s sword, and the point was at my breast. He laughed a mighty, roaring laugh and threw his head back, causing the hood to fall to his shoulders. I saw a massive, lionlike head, with wild long hair and a beard as unkempt and magnificent as the crags of the Voltai itself. The man, who seemed to leap into gigantic stature as he lifted himself into full height, took from under his yellow robes a tarn whistle and blew a long, shrill note. Almost instantly the whistle had been answered by other whistles, responding from a dozen places in
the nearby mountains. Within a minute the air was filled with the beating of wings, as some half a hundred wild tarnsmen brought their birds down about us. “I am Marlenus, Ubar of Ar,” said the man.
Chapter Fourteen:THE TARN DEATH
Shackled in a kneeling position, my back open and bleeding from the lash, I was thrown before the Ubar. Nine days I had been a prisoner in his camp, subjected to torture and
abuse. Yet this was the first time since I had saved his life that I had seen him. I gathered that he had finally seen fit to terminate the sufferings of the warrior who had stolen the Home Stone of his city. One of the tarnsmen of Marlenus thrust his hand in my hair and forced my lips down to his sandal. I forced my head up and kept my back straight, my eyes granting my captor no satisfaction. I knelt on the granite floor of a shallow cave in one of tha Voltai peaks, a sheltered fire on each side of me. Before me, on a rough throne of piled rocks, sat Marlenus, his long hair over his
shoulders, his great beard reaching almost to his sword belt. He was a gigantic man, larger even than the Older Tarl, and in his eyes, wild and green, I saw the masterful flame which had, in its way, also burned in the eyes of Talena, his daughter. Die though I must at the hands of this magnificent barbarian, I could feel no ill will towards him. If I had to kill him, I would have done so not with hatred or rancour, but rather with respect. Around his neck he wore the golden chain of the Ubar, carrying the medallionlike replica of the Home Stone of Ar. In his hands he
held the Stone itself, that humble source of so much strife, bloodshed and honour. He held it gently, as though it might have been a child. At the entrance of the cave two of his men had set a tharlarion lance, of the sort carried by Kazrak and his men, in a crevice obviously prepared to receive it. I supposed it was to serve for my impalement. There are various ways in which this cruel mode of execution can be accomplished, and, needless to say, some are more merciful than others. I did not expect that I would be granted a swift death. “You are he who stole the Home
Stone of Ar,” said Marlenus. “Yes,” I said. “It was well done,” said Marlenus, looking at the Stone, holding it so the light reflected variously from its worn surface. I waited, kneeling at his feet, puzzled that he, like the others in his camp, evinced no interest in the fate of his daughter. “You realise clearly that you must die,” said Marlenus, not looking at me. “Yes,” I said. Holding the Home Stone in both hands, Marlenus leaned forward. “You are a young and brave and
foolish warrior,” he said. He looked into my eyes for a long time, then le1aned back against his rough throne. “I was once as young and brave as you,” he said, “and perhaps as foolish – yes, perhaps as foolish.” The eyes of Marlenus stared over my head, into the darkness outside. “I risked my life a thousand times and gave the years of my youth to the vision of Ar and its empire, that there might be on all Gor but one language, but one commerce, but one set of codes, that the highways and passes might be safe, that the peasants might cultivate their fields in peace, that
there might be but one Council to decide matters of policy, that there might be but one supreme city to unite the cylinders of a hundred severed, hostile cities – and all this you have destroyed.” Marlenus looked down at me. “What can you, a simple tarnsman, know of these things?” he asked. “But I, Marlenus, though a warrior, was more than a warrior, always more than a warrior. Where others could see no more than the codes of their castes, where others could sense no call of duty beyond that of their Home Stone, I dared to dream the dream of Ar – that there might be an end to
meaningless warfare, bloodshed, and terror, an end to the anxiety and peril, the retribution and cruelty that cloud our lives – I dreamed that there might arise from the ashes of the conquests of Ar a new world, a world of honour and law, of power and justice.” “Your justice,” I said. “Mine, if you like,” he agreed. Marlenus set the Home Stone on the ground before him and drew his sword, which he laid across his knees; he looked like some remote and terrible god of war. “Do you know, Tarnsman,” he asked, “that there is no justice
without the sword?” He smiled down on me grimly. “This is a terrible truth,” he said, “and so consider it carefully.” He paused. “Without this,” he said, touching the blade, “there is nothing – no justice, no civilisation, no society, no community, no peace. Without the sword there is nothing.” “By what right,” I challenged, “is it the sword of Marlenus that must bring justice to Gor?” “You do not understand,” said Marlenus. “Right itself – that right of which you speak so reverently – owes its very existence to the sword.”
“I think that is false,” I said. “I hope it is false.” I shifted, even that small movement irritating the whip cuts on my back. Marlenus was patient. “Before the sword,” he said, “there is no right, no wrong, only fact – a world of what is and what is not, rather than a world of what should be and what should not be. There is no justice until the sword creates it, establishes it, guarantees it, gives it substance and significance.” He lifted the weapon, wielding the heavy metal blade as though it were a straw. “First the sword –” he said, “then government – then law –
then justice.” “But,” I asked, “what of the dream of Ar, that dream of which you spoke, that dream that you believed it right to bring about?” “Yes?” said Marlenus. “Is that a right dream?” I asked. “It is a right dream,” he said. “And yet,” I said, “your sword has not yet found the strength to bring it into being.” Marlenus looked at me thoughtfully, then laughed. “By the Priest-Kings,” he said, “I th1ink I have lost the exchange.” I shrugged, somewhat incongruously in the chains; it hurt.
“But,” went on Marlenus, “if what you say is true, how shall we separate the right dreams from the wrong dreams?” It seemed to me a difficult question. “I will tell you,” laughed Marlenus. He slapped the blade fondly. “With this!” The Ubar then rose and sheathed his sword. As if this were a signal, some of his tarnsmen entered the cave and seized me. “Impale him,” said Marlenus. The tarnsmen began to unlock the shackles, that I might be impaled freely on the lance, perhaps so that
my struggles might provide a more interesting spectacle to the onlookers. I felt numb, even my back, which presumably would have been a riot of pain if I had not felt myself near death. “Your daughter, Talena, is alive,” I said to Marlenus. He had not asked and did not now appear to have much interest in the matter. Still, if he was human at all, I assumed this remote, kingly, dream- obsessed man would want to know. “She would have brought a thousand tarns,” said Marlenus. “Proceed with the impalement.”
The tarnsmen grasped my arms more securely. Two others removed the tharlarion lance from its crevice and brought it forward. It would be forced into my body, and I would then be lifted, with it, into place. “She’s your daughter,” I said to Marlenus. “She’s alive.” “Did she submit to you?” asked Marlenus. “Yes,” I said. “Then she valued her life more than my honour.” Suddenly my feeling of numbness, of incapacity, departed as if in a lightning flash of fury. “Damn your honour!” I shouted.
“Damn your percious stinking honour!” Without realising what I was doing, I had shaken the two restraining tarnsmen from my arms as if they had been children, and I rushed on Marlenus and struck him violently in the face with my fist, causing him to reel backward, his face contorted with astonishment and pain. I turned just in time to knock the impaling lance aside as, carried by two men, it plunged towards my back. I seized, twisted it, and, using it like a bar held by the men, leaped into the air, kicking at them. I heard two screams of pain
and found that I held the lance. Some five or six tarnsmen ran towards the wide opening of the shallow cave, but I rushed forward, holding the lance parallel to my body, striking them with almost superhuman strength and forcing them over the ledge near the mouth of the cave. Their screams mingled with the shouts of rage as the other tarnsmen rushed forward to capture me. One tarnsman levelled a crossbow, and in that instant I hurled the lance and he toppled backward, the shaft of the weapon protruding from his chest, the bolt
from his crossbow ricocheting from the rock above my head with a flash of sparks. One of the men I had kicked lay writhing at my feet. I seized the sword from his scabbard. I engaged and dropped the first of the tarnsmen to reach me and wounded the second, but was pressed back towards the rear of the cave. I was doomed, but resolved to die well. As I fought, I could hear the lion laughter of Marlenus behind me, as what had been a simple impalement turned into a fight of the1 sort after his own heart. As I found a moment’s respite, I spun to face
him, hoping to have it out with the Ubar himself, but as I did so, the shackles that I had worn struck me forcibly in the face and throat, thrown like a bolo by Marlenus. I choked, and shook my head to clear the blood from my eyes, and in that instant was seized by three or four of the Ubar’s tarnsmen. “Well done, young warrior,” acclaimed Marlenus. “I thought I would see if you would die like a slave.” He addressed his men, pointing to me. “What say you?” he laughed. “Has this warrior not earned his right to the tarn death?” “He has indeed,” said one of the
tarnsmen, who held a wadded lump of tunic over his slashed rib cage. I was dragged outside, and binding fibre was fastened to my wrists and ankles. The loose ends of the fibre were then attached by broad leather straps to two tarns, one of them my own sable giant. “You will be torn to pieces,” said Marlenus. “Not pleasant, but better than impalement.” I was fastened securely. A tarnsman mounted one tarn; another tarnsman mounted the other tarn. “I’m not dead yet,” I said. It was a stupid thing to say, but I felt that it was not yet my time to die.
Marlenus did not deride me. “You it was who stole the Home Stone of Ar,” he said. “You have luck.” “No man can escape the tarn death,” said one of the men. The warriors of the Ubar had moved back, to give the tarns room. Marlenus himself knelt in the darkness to check the knots in the binding fibre, tightening them carefully. As he checked the knots at my wrists, he spoke to me. “Do you wish me to kill you now?” he asked softly. “The tarn death is an ugly death.” His hand, shielded from his men by his body,
was on my throat. I felt it could have crushed it easily. “Why this kindness?” I asked. “For the sake of a girl,” he said. “But why?” I asked. “For the love she has for you,” he said. “Your daughter hates me,” I said. “She has agreed to be the mate of Pa-Kur, the Assassin,” he said, “in order that you might have one small chance of life, on the Frame of Humiliation.” “How do you know this?” I asked. “It is common knowledge in the camp of Pa-Kur,” replied Marlenus.
I could sense him smiling in the darkness. “I myself, as one of the Afflicted, learned it from Mintar, of the Merchant Caste. Merchants must keep their friends on both sides of the fence, for who knows if Marlenus may not once more sit upon the throne of Ar?” I must have uttered a sound of joy, for Marlenus quickly placed his hand over my mouth. He asked no more if he should kill me, but rose to his feet and walked away, under the snapping wing of one of the tarns, and waved farewell. “Goodbye, Warrior,” he called.
With a sickening lurch and sharp jolt of pain the two tarnsmen brought their birds into the air. For a moment I swung between the birds, and then, perhaps a hundred feet in the air, the tarnsmen, at a prearranged signal – a sharp blast of a tarn whistle from the1 ground – turned their birds in opposite directions. The sudden wrenching pain seemed to rip my body. I think I inadvertently screamed. The birds were pulling against one another, stabilised in their flight, each trying to pull away from the other. Now and again there would be a moment’s giddy respite from the
pain as one or the other of the birds failed to keep the ropes taut. I could hear the curses of the tarnsmen above me and saw once or twice the flash of the striking tarn-goad. Then the birds would throw their weight again on the ropes, bringing another flashing wrench of agony. Then, suddenly, there was a ripping sound as one of the wrist ropes broke. Without thinking, but responding blindly, with a surge of joy, I seized the other wrist rope and tried to force it over the wrist. When the bird drew again, there was a sharp pain as flesh was torn from my hand, but the rope darted
off into the darkness, and I was swinging by the ankles from the other ropes. It might take a moment for the tarnsmen to realise what had happened. The first guess would be that my body had been torn in two, and the darkness would conceal the truth for a moment, until the tarnsman himself would try the ropes, to test the weight of their burden. I swung myself up and began to climb one of the two ropes leading to the great bird above me. In a few wild moments I had gained the saddle straps of the bird and hauled myself nearly to the weapon rings.
Then the tarnsman saw me and shouted in rage, drawing his sword. He slashed downward, and I slipped down one talon of the bird, which screamed and became unmanageable. Then, with one hand, while clinging to the talon, I loosened the girth straps. In a moment given the wild motion of the bird, the entire saddle, to which the tarnsman was fixed by the saddle straps, slid from the bird’s back and flew wildly into the depths below. I heard the scream of the tarnsman and then the sudden silence.
The other tarnsman would be alerted now. Each moment was precious. Daring everything, I leaped in the darkness for the reins of the bird and with one scrambling hand managed to seize the guiding collar. The sudden tug downward caused the bird to respond as I had hoped it would, as if pressure had been exerted on the four-strap. It immediately descended, and a minute later I was on the ground, on a sort of rough plateau. There was a rim of red light over the mountains, and I knew it was nearly dawn. My ankles were still fastened to the bird, and I quickly untied the ropes.
In the first streak of the early light I saw a few hundred yards away what I had hoped to find – the saddle and twisted body of the tarnsman. I released the bird, ran to the saddle, and removed the crossbow which, to my joy, was intact. None of the bolts had escaped from the specially constructed quiver. I set the bow and fitted one of them on the guide. I could hear the flight of another tarn above me. As it swept in for the kill, its tarnsman, too late, saw my levelled bow. The missile left him sagging lifeless in the saddle. The tarn, my sable giant from
Ko-ro-ba, landed and stalked majestically forward. I waited uneasily until he thrust his head past me, over my shoulder, extending his neck for preening. Good-naturedly, I scratched out a handful or two of lice which I slopped on his tongue like candy. Then I slapped his leg with affection, climbed to the saddle, dropped the dead tarnsman to the ground, and fastened myself in the saddle straps. I felt ebullient. I had weapons again, and my tarn. There was even a tarn-goad and saddle gear. I rose into flight, not thinking about Ko-ro- ba again or the Home Stone.
Foolishly perhaps, but with invincible optimism, I li1fted the tarn above the Voltai and turned it towards Ar.
Chapter Fifteen:IN MINTAR’S COMPOUND
Ar, beleaguered and dauntless, was a magnificent sight. Its splendid, defiant shimmering cylinders loomed proudly behind the snowy marble ramparts, its double walls – the first three hundred feet high; the second, separated from the first by twenth
yards, four hundred feet high – walls wide enough to drive six tharlarion wagons abreast on their summits. Every fifty yards along the walls rose towers, jutting forth so as to expose any attempt at scaling to the fire from their numerous archer ports. Across the city, from the walls to the cylinders, I could occasionally see the slight flash of sunlight on the swaying tarn wires, literally hundreds of thousands of slender, almost invisible wires stretched in a protective net across the city. Dropping the tarn through such a maze of wire would be an almost impossible task. The wings
of a striking tarn would be cut from its body by such wires. Within the city the Initiates, who had seized control shortly after the flight of Marlenus, would have already tapped the siege reservoirs and begun to ration the stores of the huge grain cylinders. A city such as Ar, properly commanded, might withstand a siege for a generation. Beyond the walls were Pa-Kur’s lines of investment, set forth with all the skill of Gor’s most experienced siege engineers. Some hundreds of yards from the wall, just beyond crossbow range, a gigantic ditch was being dug by
thousands of siege slaves and prisoners. When completed, it would be fifty or sixty feet wide, and seventy or eighty feet deep. In back of the ditch slaves were piling up the earth which had been removed from the ditch, packing and hardening it into a rampart. On the summit of the rampart, where it was completed, were numerous archer blinds, movable wooden screens to shield archers and light missile equipment. Between the ditch and the walls of the city, under the cover of darkness, thousands of sharpened stakes had been set, inclined
towards the walls. I knew that the worst of such devices would be invisible. Indeed, several of the spaces between the stakes were probably occupied by covered pits, more sharpened stakes being fixed in the bottom. Also, half buried in the sands among the stakes and set in wooden blocks would be iron hooks, much like those used in ancient times on Earth and sometimes called spurs. Behind the great ditch, separated from it by some two hundred yards, there was a smaller ditch, perhaps twenty feet wide and twenty feet deep, also with a rampart formed from the
excavated earth. Surmounting this rampart was a palisade of logs, sharpened at the tips. In the walls, every hundred yards or so, was a log gate. Behind this wall were the innumerable tents of Pa-Kur’s horde. Here and there among the tents siege towers were being constructed. Nine towers were in evidence. It was unthinkable that they should top the walls of Ar, but with their battering rams they would attempt to break through at the lower levels. Tarnsmen would make the attack at the summit of the walls. When it came time for Pa-
Kur to attack, bridges would be constructed over the ditches. Over these bridges the siege towers would be rolled to the walls of Ar; over them his tharlarion cavalry would march; over them his horde would flow. Light engines, mostly catapults and ballistae, would be transported over the ditches by harnessed tarn teams. One aspect of the siege which I knew would exist but which I obviously could not witness would be the sensitive duel of mine and countermine which must 1be taking place between the camp of Pa-Kur and the city of Ar. There would be
numerous tunnels being worked even now towards the walls of Ar, and, from Ar, counter-tunnels to meet them. Some of the most hideous fighting in the siege would undoubtedly take place far under the earth in the cramped, foul, torchlit confines of those serpentine passageways, some of them hardly large enough to permit a man to crawl. Many of the tunnels would be collapsed and others flooded. Given the depth of the foundations of Ar’s mighty walls and the mantle of rock on which they were fixed, it would be extremely unlikely that her walls could be successfully
undermined to the extent of bringing down a significant section, but it was surely possible that if one of the tunnels managed to pass unnoticed beneath the ramparts, it could serve to spill a line of soldiers into the city at night, enough men to overcome a gate crew and expose Ar to the onslaught of Pa-Kur’s main forces. I noted one thing that seemed puzzling for a moment. Pa-Kur had not protected his rear with the customary third ditch and rampart. I could see foragers and merchants moving to and from the camp unimpeded. I reasoned that Pa-Kur
had nothing to fear and consequently chose not to employ his siege slaves and prisoners in unnecessary and time-consuming works. Still, it seemed that he had committed an error, if only according to the manuals of siege practice. If I had had a considerable force of men at my disposal, I could have exploited that error. I brought the tarn down near the far ranges of Pa-Kur’s tents, where his camp ended, seven or eight miles from the city. I was not too surprised when I was not challenged; Pa-Kur’s arrogance, or simply his rational assurance, was
such that no sentries, no signs and countersigns, had been arranged at the rear of the camp. Leading the tarn, I entered the camp as casually as I might have strolled into a carnival or fair. I had no realistic or clearheaded plan, but was determined somehow to find Talena and escape, or die in the attempt. I stopped a hurrying slave girl and inquired the way to the compound of Mintar, of the Merchant Caste, confident that he would have accompanied the horde back to the heartland of Ar. The girl was not pleased to be delayed on her errand, but a slave on Gor does
not wisely ignore the address of a free man. She spit the coins she carried in her mouth into her hand, and told me what I wanted to know. Few Gorean garments are deformed by pockets. An exception is the working aprons of artisans. Soon, my heart beating quickly, my features concealed by the helmet I had taken from the warrior in the Voltai, I approached the compound of Mintar. At the entrance to the compound was a gigantic, temporary wire cage, a tarn cot. I tossed a silver tarn disc to the tarn keeper and ordered him to care for the bird, to groom and feed it and
see that it was ready on an instant’s notice. His grumbling was silenced by an additional tarn disc. I wandered about the outskirts of Mintar’s compound, which was separated, like many of the merchant compounds, from the main camp by a tough fence of woven branches. Over the compound, as if it were a small city under siege, was stretched a set of interlaced tarn wires. The compound of Mintar enclosed several acres of ground and was the largest merchant compound in the camp. At last I reached the section of the tharlarion corrals. I waited until one of the
caravan guards passed. He didn’t recognise me. Glancing about to see that no one was watching, I lightly climbed the fence of woven branches and dropped down inside among a group of the broad tharlarions. I had carefully determined that the corral into which I had dropped did not contain the saddle lizards, the high tharlarions, those ridden b1y Kazrak and his tharlarion lancers. Such lizards are extremely short- tempered, as well as carnivorous, and I had no intention of attracting attention to myself by beating my way through them with a spear butt.
Their more dormant relatives, the broad tharlarions, barely lifted their snouts from the feed troughs. Shielded by the placid, heavy bodies, some as large as a bus, I worked my way towards the interior side of the corral. My luck held, and I scaled the interior corral wall and dropped to the trampled path between the corral and the tents of Mintar’s men. Normally, the merchant camp, like the better-organised military camps, not the melange that constituted the camp of Pa-Kur is laid out geometrically, and, night after night, one puts up one’s tent in
the same relative position. Whereas the military camp is usually laid out in a set of concentric squares, reflecting the fourfold principle of military organisation customary on Gor, the merchant camp is laid out in concentric circles, the guards’ tents occupying the outermost ring, the craftsmen’s, strap-masters’, attendants and slaves’ quarters occupying inner rings, and the centre being reserved for the merchant, his goods, and his body- guard. It was with this in mind that I had climbed the fence where I had. I was searching for Kazrak’s tent,
which lay in the outer ring near the tharlarion corrals. My calculations had been correct, and in a moment I had slipped the ring that I wore, with the crest of Cabot, to his sleeping mat. For what seemed an interminable hour, I waited in the dark interior of the tent. At last the weary figure of Kazrak, helmet in hand, bent down to enter the tent. I waited, not speaking, in the shadows. He came through the opening, dropped his helmet on the sleeping mat, and began to unsling his sword. Still I would not speak, not while he controlled a weapon; unfortunately,
the first thing a Gorean warrior is likely to do to the stranger in his tent is kill him, the second is to find out who he is. I saw the spark of Kazrak’s fire-maker, and I felt the flush of friendship as I saw his features briefly outlined in the glow. He lit the small hanging tent lamp, a wick set in a copper bowl of tharlarion oil, and in its flickering light turned to the sleeping mat. No sooner had he done so than he fell to his knees on the mat and grasped the ring. “By the Priest-Kings!” he cried. I leaped across the tent and clapped my hands across his mouth.
For a moment we struggled fiercely. “Kazrak!” I said. I took my hand from his mouth. He grasped me in his arms and crushed me to his chest, his eyes filled with tears. I shoved him away happily. “I looked for you,” he said. “For two days I rode down the banks of the Vosk. I would have cut you free.” “That’s heresy,” I laughed. “Let it be heresy,” he said. “I would have cut you free.” “We are together again,” I said simply. “I found the frame,” Kazrak said, “half a pasang from the Vosk,
broken. I thought you were dead.” The brave man wept, and I felt like weeping, too, for joy, because he was my friend. With affection I took him by the shoulders and shook him. I went to his locker near the mat and got out his Ka-la-na flask, taking a long draught myself and then shoving it into his hands. He drained the flask in one drink and wiped his hand across his beard, stained with the red juice of the fermented drink. “We are together again,” he said. “We a1re together again, Tarl of Bristol, my sword brother.” Kazrak and I sat in his tent, and I
recounted my adventures to him, while he listened, shaking his head. “You are one of destiny and luck,” he said, “raised by the Priest-Kings to do great deeds.” “Life is short,” I said. “Let us speak of things we know.” “In a hundred generations, among the thousand chains of fate,” said Kazrak, “there is but one strand like yours.” There was a sound at the entrance of Kazrak’s tent. I darted back into the shadows. It was one of the trusted strap- masters of Mintar, the man who guided the beasts that carried the
merchant’s palanquin. Without looking around the tent, the man addressed himself directly to Kazrak. “Will Kazrak and his guest, Tarl of Bristol, please accompany me to the tent of Mintar, of the Merchant Caste?” asked the man. Kazrak and I were stunned, but arose to follow the man. It was now dark, and as I wore my helmet, there was no chance of the casual observer determining my identity. Before I left Kazrak’s tent, I placed the ring of red metal, with the crest of Cabot, in my pouch. Hitherto I had worn the ring almost arrogantly,
but now it seemed to me that discretion, to alter a saying, was the better part of pride. Mintar’s tent was enormous and domed, similar in shape to the others in his camp; however, not only in size, but in splendour of appointment, it was a palace of silk. We passed through the guards at the entrance. In the centre of the great tent, seated alone on cushions before a small fire, were two men, a game board between them. One was Mintar, of the Merchant Caste, his great bulk resting like a sack of meal on the cushions. The other man, a gigantic man, wore the robes
of one of the Afflicted, but wore them as a king might. He sat cross- legged, his back straight and his head high, in the fashion of a warrior. Without needing to approach more closely, I knew the other man. It was Marlenus. “Do not interrupt the game,” commanded Marlenus. Kazrak and I stood to one side. Mintar was lost in thought, his small eyes fastened to the red and yellow squares of the board. Having recognised our presence, Marlenus, too, turned his attention to the game. A brief, craft light flickered momentarily in Mintar’s
small eyes, and his pudgy hand hovered, hesitating an instant, over one of the pieces of the hundred- squared board, a centred Tarnsman. He touched it, committing himself to move it. A brief exchange followed, like a chain reaction, neither man considering his moves for a moment, First Tarnsman took First Tarnsman, Second Spearman responded by neutralising First Tarnsman, City Neutralised Spearman, Assassin took City, Assassin fell to Second Tarnsman, Tarnsman to Spear Slave, Spear Slave to Spear Slave. Mintar relaxed on the cushions.
“You have taken the City,” he said, “but not the Home Stone.” His eyes gleamed with pleasure. “I permitted that, in order that I might capture the Spear Slave. Let us now adjudicate the game. The Spear Slave gives me the point I need, a small point but decisive.” Marlenus smiled, rather grimly. “But position must figure in any adjudication,” he said. Then, with an imperious gesture, Marlenus swept his Ubar into the file opened by the movement of Mintar” s capturing Spear Slave. It covered the Home Stone. Mintar bowed his head in m1ock
ceremony, a wry smile on his fat face, and with one short finger delicately tipped his own Ubar, causing it to fall. “It is a weakness in my game,” lamented Mintar. “I am ever too greedy for a profit, however small.” Marlenus looked at Kazrak and myself. “Mintar,” he said, “teaches me patience. He is normally a master of defence.” Mintar smiled. “And Marlenus invariably of the attack.” “An absorbing game,” said Marlenus, almost absent-mindedly. “To some men this game is music and women. It can give them
pleasure. It can help them forget. It is Ka-la-na wine, and the night on which such wine is drunk.” Neither Kazrak or myself spoke. “Look here,” said Marlenus, reconstructing the board. “I have used the Assassin to take the City. Then, the Assassin is felled by the Tarnsman … an unorthodox, but interesting variation …” “And the Tarnsman is felled by the Spear Slave,” I observed. “True,” said Marlenus, shaking his head, “but thusly did I win.” “And Pa-Kur,” I said, “is the Assassin.” “Yes,” agreed Marlenus, “and Ar
is the City.” “And I am the Tarnsman?” I asked. “Yes,” said Marlenus. “And who,” I asked, “is the Spear Slave?” “Does it matter?” asked Marlenus, sifting several of the Spear Slaves through his fingers, letting them drop, one by one, to the board. “Any of them will do.” “If the Assassin should take the city,” I said, “the rule of the Initiates will be broken, and eventually the horde with its loot will scatter, leaving a garrison. Mintar shifted comfortably,
settling his great bulk more deeply into the cushions. “The young tarnsman plays the game well,” he said. “And,” I went on, “when Pa-Kur falls, the garrison will be divided, and a revolution may take place –” “Led by a Ubar,” said Marlenus, looking fixedly at the game piece in his hand. It was a Ubar. He smashed it down on the board, scattering the other pieces to the silken cushions. “By a Ubar!” he exclaimed. “You are willing,” I asked, “to turn the city over to Pa-Kur – that his horde should swarm into the
cylinders, that the city may be looted and burned, the people destroyed or enslaved?” I shuffered involuntarily at the thought of the uncontrolled hordes of Pa-Kur among the spires of Ar, butchering, pillaging, burning, raping – or, as the Goreans will have it, washing the bridges in blood. The eyes of Marlenus flashed. “No,” he said. “But Ar will fall. The Initiates can only mumble prayers to the Priest-Kings, arrange the details of their meaningless, innumerable sacrifices. They crave political power, but can’t understand or manipulate it. They
will never withstand a well- mounted siege. They will never keep the city.” “Can’t you enter the city and take power?” I asked. “You could return the Home Stone. You could gather a following.” “Yes,” said Marlenus. “I could return the Home Stone – and there are those who would follow me – but there are not enough, not enough. Ho1w many would rally to the banner of an outlaw? No, the power of the Initiates must first be broken.” “Do you have a way into the city?” I asked.
Marlenus looked at me narrowly. “Perhaps,” he said. “Then I have a counterplan,” I said. “Strike for the Home Stones of those cities tributary to Ar – they are kept in the Central Cylinder. If you seize them, you can divide Pa- Kur’s horde, give the Home Stones to the contingents of the tributary cities, provided they withdraw their forces. If they do not, destroy the Stones.” “The soldiers of the Twelve Tributary Cities,” he said, “want loot, vengeance, the women of Ar, not just their Stones.” “Perhaps some of them fight for
their freedom – for the right to keep their own Home Stone,” I said. “Surely not all of Pa-Kur’s horde are adventurers, mercenaries.” Noting the Ubar’s interest, I went on. “Besides, few of the soldiers of Gor, barbarians though they might be, would risk the destruction of their city’s Home Stone – the luck of their birthplace.” “But,” said Marlenus, frowning, “if the siege is lifted, the Initiates will be left in power.” “And Marlenus will not resume the throne of Ar,” I said. “But the city will be safe.” I looked at Marlenus, tesing the man. “What is
it, Ubar, that you hold dearest – your city or your title? Do you seek the welfare of Ar or your private glory?” Marlenus leaped to his feet, hurling the yellow robes of the Afflicted from him, drawing his blade from its sheath with a metallic flash. “A Ubar,” he cried, “answers such a question only with his sword!” My weapon, too, had flashed from its sheath almost simultaneously. We faced each other for a long, terrible moment; then Marlenus threw back his head and laughed his great lion laugh, slamming his sword back into its
sheath. “Your plan is a good one,” he said. “My men and I will enter the city tonight.” “And I shall go with you,” I said. “No,” said Marlenus. “The men of Ar need no help from a warrior of Ko-ro-ba.” “Perhaps,” suggested Mintar, “the young tarnsman might attend to the matter of Talena, daughter of Marlenus.” “Where is she?” I demanded. “We are not certain,” said Mintar. “But it is presumed that she is kept in the tents of Pa-Kur.” For the first time Kazrak spoke. “On the day that Ar falls, she will
wed Pa-Kur and rule beside him. He hopes this will encourage the survivors of Ar to accept him as their rightful Ubar. He will proclaim himself their liberator, their deliverer from the despotism of the Initiates, the restorer of the old order, the glory of the empire.” Mintar was idly arranging the pieces on the game board, first in one pattern and then in another. “In large matters, as the pieces are now set,” he said, the girl is unimportant, but only the Priest-Kings can foresee all possible variations. It might be well to remove the girl from the board.’ So saying, he
picked a piece, the Ubar’s Consort, or Ubara, from the board and dropped it into the game box. Marlenus stared down at the board, his fists clenched. “Yes,” he said, “she must be removed from the board, but not simply for reasons of strategy. She has dishonoured me.” He scowled at me. “She has been alone with a w a r r i or – she has submitt1ed herself – she has even pledged to sit at the side of an assassin.” “She has not dishonoured you,” I said. “She submitted herself,” said Marlenus.
“Only to save her life,” I said. “And rumour has it,” said Mintar, not looking up from the board, “that she pledged herself to Pa-Kur only that some tarnsman she loved might be given a small chance of life.” “She would have brought a bride price of a thousand tarns,” said Marlenus bitterly, “and now she is of less value than a trained slave girl.” “She is your daughter,” I said, my temper rising. “If she were here now,” said Marlenus, “I would strangle her.” “And I would kill you,” I said. “Well, then,” said Marlenus,
smiling, “perhaps I would only beat her and throw her naked to my tarnsmen.” “And I would kill you,” I repeated. “Indeed,” said Marlenus, looking at me narrowly, “one of us would slay the other.” “Have you no love for her?” I asked. Marlenus seemed momentarily puzzled. “I am a Ubar,” he said. He drew the robes of the Afflicted once more around his gigantic frame and picked up a gnarled staff he carried. He dropped the hood of the yellow robe about his face, ready to go,
then turned to me once more. With the staff he poked me good- naturedly in the chest. “May the Priest-Kings favour you,” he said, and, inside the folds of the hood, I knew he was chuckling. Marlenus left the tent, seemingly one of the Afflicted, a bent wreck of humanity pathetically scratching at the earth in front of him with the staff. Mintar looked up, and he, too, seemed pleased. “You are the only man who has ever escaped the tarn death,” he said, something of wonder in his voice. “Perhaps it is true, as they say, that you are the
warrior brought every thousand years to Gor – brought by the Priest-Kings to change a world.” “How did you know I would come to the camp?” I asked. “Because of the girl,” said Mintar. “And it was logical, was it not, to expect you to enlist the aid of your Kazrak, your sword brother?” “Yes,” I said. Mintar reached into the pouch at his waist and drew forth a golden tarn disc, of double weight. He threw it to Kazrak. Kazrak caught it. “I understand you are leaving my service,” said Mintar.
“I must,” said Kazrak. “Of course,” said Mintar. “Where are the tents of Pa-Kur?” I asked. “On the highest ground in camp,” said Mintar, “near the second ditch and across from the great gate of Ar. You will see the black banner of the Caste of Assassins.” “Thank you,” I said. “Though you are of the Merchant Caste, you are a brave man.” “A merchant may be as brave as a warrior, young Tarnsman,” smiled Mintar. Then he seemed somewhat embarrassed. “Let us look at it this way. Suppose Marlenus rega1ins
A r – will Mintar not receive the monopolies he wishes?” “Yes,” I said, “but Pa-Kur will guarantee those monopolies as freely as Marlenus.” “Even more freely,” corrected Mintar, turning his attention again to the board, “but, you see, Pa-Kur does not play the game.”
Chapter Sixteen:THE GIRL IN THE CAGE
Kazrak and I returned to his tent, and until the early morning we discussed the possibilities of
rescuing Talena. We turned over a number of plans, none of them seemed likely to succeed. It would presumably be suicidal to make any direct attempt to cut through to her, and yet, if this was the last resort, I knew I would make the attempt. In the meantime, until the city fell or Pa-Kur altered his plans, she would presumably be safe. It seemed unlikely that Pa-Kur would be so politically naive as to use the girl before she had publicly accepted him as her Free Companion, according to the rites of Ar. Treated as a pleasure slave, she would have negligible political value. On the
other hand, the thought of her in the tents of Pa-Kur enraged me, and I knew I would be unable to restrain myself indefinitely. For the time being, however, Kazrak’s counsels of patience won me over, convincing me that any precipitous action would be almost surely doomed to failure. Accordingly, for the next few days, I remained with Kazrak and bided my time. I dyed my hair black and acquired the helmet and gear of an Assassin. Across the left temple of the black helmet I fixed the golden slash of the messenger. In this disguise I freely wandered
about the camp, observing the siege operations, the appointment of the compounds, the marshalling of the troops. Occasionally I would climb halfway up one of the siege towers under construction and observe the city of Ar and the skirmishes that took place between it and the first ditch. Periodically the shrill notes of alarm bugles would pierce the air, as forces from Ar emerged to do battle on the plains before the city. When this occurred, inevitably the spearmen and lancers of Pa-Kur, following the lead of siege slaves through the maze of stakes and
traps, would engage the men from Ar. Sometimes the forces of Pa-Kur drove the warriors of Ar back to the very walls of the city, forcing them through the gates. Sometimes the forces of Ar would drive the men of Pa-Kur back against the defensive stakes, and once they drove them to take refuge across the now constructed siege bridges spanning the great ditch. Still, there was little doubt that Pa-Kur’s men had the best of things. The human resources on which Pa- Kur could draw seemed inexhaustible, and, as important, he had at his command a considerable
force of tharlarion cavalry, an arm almost lacking to the men of Ar. In these battles the skies would be filled with tarnsmen, from Ar and from the camp, firing into the massed warriors below, engaging one another in savage duels hundreds of feet in the air. But gradually the tarnsmen of Ar were diminished, overwhelmed by the superior forces which Pa-Kur could, with ruthless liberality, throw against them. On the ninth day of the siege the sky belonged to Pa- Kur, and the forces of Ar no longer emerged from the great gate. All hope of lifting the siege by battle
was gone. The men of Ar remained within their walls, under their tarn wire, waiting for the attacks to come, while the Initiates of the city sacrificed to the Priest-Kings. On the tenth day of the siege small engines, such as covered catapults and ballistae, were flown across 1the ditches by tarn teams and soon were engaged in artillery duels with the engines mounted on the walls of Ar. Simultaneously, exposed chains of siege slaves began to move the stake lines forward. After some four days of bombardment, which probably had small effect, if any, the first assault
was mounted. It began several hours before dawn, as the giant siege towers, covered now with plates of steel to counter the effect of fire arrows and burning tar, were slowly rolled across the ditch bridges. By noon they were within crossbow range of the walls. After dark, in the light of torches, the first tower reached the walls. Within the hour three others had touched the first wall. Around these towers and on top of them warriors swarmed. Above them, tarnsman met tarnsman in battles to the death. Rope ladders from Ar brought defenders two hundred feet
down the wall to the level of the towers. Through small postern gates other defenders rushed against the towers on the ground, only to be met by Pa-Kur’s clustered support troops. From the height of the walls, some two hundred feet above the towers, missiles would be fired and stones cast. Within the towers, sweating, naked siege slaves, under the frenzied whips of their overseers, hauled on the great chains that swung the mighty steel rams into the wall and back. One of Pa-Kur’s towers was undermined, and it tilted crazily and crashed into the dust, amidst the
screaming of its doomed occupants. Another was captured and burned. But five more towers rolled slowly towards the walls of Ar. These towers were fortresses in themselves and would be maintained at all costs; hour in and hour out, they would continue their work, gnawing at the walls. Meanwhile, at several points in the city and at randomly selected times, picked tarnsmen of Pa-Kur, each of whose tarns carried a dangling, knotted rope of nine spearmen, dropped to the wires and the tops of cylinders, landing their small task forces of raiders. These
task forces seldom managed to return, but sometimes they were outstandingly successful. On the twentieth day of the siege there was great rejoicing in the camp of Pa-Kur, because in one place the wires had been cut and a squad of spearmen had reached the main siege reservoir, emptying their barrels of toxic kanda, a lethal poison extracted from one of Gor’s desert shrubs. The city would now have to depend primarily on its private wells and the hope of rain. It seemed probable that food and water would soon be scarce in the city and that the Initiates, whose
resistance had been unimaginative and who were apparently unable to protect the city, would be forced to face a hungry and desperate population. The fate of Marlenus during these days was in doubt. I was certain that he had entered the city in some manner and was presumably waiting for his chance to strike at the Home Stones of the tributary cities, in order, if possible, to divide the horde of Pa-Kur. Then, in the fourth week of the siege, my heart fell. Marlenus and several men had entered the city, it seemed, but had been discovered – and
sealed off in the very cylinder of the Home Stones – indeed, in that cylinder that had been his palace in the days of his glory. Marlenus and his men apparently had command of the top floor and roof of the cylinder, but there was little hope he could use the Home Stones that now lay within his grasp. He and his men had no tarns, and their retreat was cut off. Moreover, the ubiquitous tarn wire heavily netted in the area of the Central Cylinder would ward off any attempts at rescue, unless perhaps by a large force. Pa-Kur, of course, was pleased
to leave Marlenus precisely where he was, to be destroyed by the men of Ar. Also, Pa-Kur was not so much a fool a1s to bring the tributary Home Stones to his camp and risk disuniting his horde before the siege was completed. Indeed, it was probable that Pa-Kur had no intention of returning the Home Stones at all but was determined to follow in the imperial footsteps of Marlenus himself. I wondered how long Marlenus could hold out. It would surely depend, in part, on the food and water available and on the persistence of the Initiates’ attempts to dislodge him. I was confident
that there would be cisterns and canisters of water in the palace, and I supposed that Marlenus, as an enlightened precaution, in view of the unstable politics of Ar, would have outfitted his cylinder as a keep, laying in stores of food and missile weapons. At any rate, my plan for the division of the Home Stones had failed, and Marlenus, on whom I had depended, was, in the language of the game, neutralised if not removed from the board. In despair, Kazrak and I discussed these matters over and over. The probability of Ar’s resisting the siege was minimal.
One thing at least remained to be done: there must be an attempt to rescue Talena. Another plan entered my head, but I dismissed it as too far-fetched, as unworthy of consideration. Kazrak noticed my frown and demanded to know what I had thought. “The siege might be lifted,” I said, “if a force could take Pa-Kur by surprise, a force of some thousands of warriors attacking from the unprotected side of the camp.” Kazrak smiled. “That is true. Where will you find the army?” I hesitated for a moment, and then
said, “Ko-ro-ba, perhaps Thentis.” Kazrak looked at me in disbelief. “Are you rid of your senses?” he asked. “The fall of Ar will be Ka- la-na wine to the free cities of Gor. When Ar falls, there will be rejoicing in the streets. When Ar falls, the bridges will be hung with garlands, there will be free Paga, slaves will be freed, enemies will pledge friendship.” “How long will it last,” I queried, “with Pa-Kur on the throne of Ar?” Kazrak seemed suddenly to darken with thought. “Pa-Kur will not destroy the
city,” I said, “and he will keep as much of the horde as he can.” “Yes,” said Kazrak. “There will be little cause for rejoicing.” “Marlenus had a dream of empire,” I said, “but the ambition of Pa-Kur will yield only a nightmare of oppression and tyranny.” “It is unlikely that Marlenus will ever again be a danger,” said Kazrak. “Even should he survive, he outlawed in his own city.” “But Pa-Kur,” I said, “as Ubar of Ar will threaten all Gor.” “True,” said Kazrak, looking at me questioningly. “Why should not the free cities of
Gor unite to defeat Pa-Kur?” “The cities never unite,” responded Kazrak. “They never have,” I said. “But surely, if Pa-Kur is to be stopped, this is the time, not after he is master of Ar.” “The cities never unite,” repeated Kazrak, shaking his head. “Take this ring,” I said, giving him the ring that bore the crest of Cabot. “Show it to the Administrator of Ko-ro-ba and to the Administrator of Thentis and to the Ubars or Administrators of whatever cities you can. Tell them to raise the siege. Tell them they
must strike now, and that you come with this me1ssage from Tarl Cabot, Warrior of Ko-ro-ba.” “I will probably be impaled,” said Kazrak, rising to his feet, “but I will go.” With a heavy heart I watched Kazrak loop his sword belt over his shoulder and pick up his helmet. “Good bye, Sword Brother,” he said, and turned and left the tent, as if he might have been merely going to the tharlarion corrals or to take his post for guard duty, as in our caravan days. I felt a choking sensation in my throat and asked myself if I had sent my friend to his
death. In a few minutes I gathered together my own gear and put on the heavy black helmet of the Assassin, left the tent, and turned my steps in the direction of the tents of Pa-Kur. I made my way to the interior perimeter of the second ditch, opposite the great gate of Ar in the distance. There, on a hillock overlooking the palisades that rimmed the rampart to the ditch, I saw the wall of black silk that surrounded the compound of Pa- Kur. Inside were the dozens of tents that formed the quarters for his personal retinue and bodyguard.
Above them, at several places, flew the black banner of the Caste of Assassins. I had neared the compound a hundred times before, but this time I was determined to enter. I began to walk with a quickened pace, my heart began to beat powerfully, and I felt the elation of decision. I would act. It would be suicide to attempt to cut my way in, but Pa- Kur was in the environs of Ar, directing the siege operations, and I might, with luck, pass myself off as his messenger; who would be bold enough to deny entrance to one whose helmet bore the golden slash
of the courier? Without hesitation I climbed the hillock and presented myself impatiently to the guards. “A message from Pa-Kur,” I said, “for the ears of Talena, his Ubara-to-be.” “I will carry the message,” said one of the guards, a large man, his eyes suspicious. He regarded me closely. Obviously, I was not anyone he knew. “The message is for the Ubara- to-be, and for her alone,” I said angrily. “Do you deny admittance to the messenger of Pa-Kur?” “I do not know you,” he growled.
“Give me your name,” I demanded, “so that I may report to Pa-Kur who it is that denies his message to his future Ubara.” There was an agonised silence, and then the guard stepped aside. I entered the compound, not having a settled plan, but feeling that I must contact Talena. Perhaps together we could arrange an escape at some later time. For the moment I did not even know where in the compound she might be kept. Within the wall of black silk, there was a second wall, but this time of iron bars. Pa-Kur was not as careless about his own safety as
I had conjectured. Additionally, overhead I could see lines of tarn wire. I walked about the second wall until I came to a gate, where I repeated my story. Here I was admitted without question, as though my helmet were sufficient guarantee in itself of my right to be there. Inside the second wall, I was escorted among the tents by a tower slave, a black girl whose livery was golden and who wore large earrings that matched a golden collar. Behind me, two guards fell into line. We stopped before a resplendent tent of yellow-and-red silk, some
forty feet in diameter and twenty feet high at the dome. I turned to my escort and the guards. “Wait here,” I said. “My message is for the ears of she who is pledged to Pa-Kur, and for her ears alone.” My heart was beating so loudly I wondered that1 they didn’t hear it. I was amazed that my voice sounded so calm. The guards looked at one another, not having anticipated my request. The tower slave regarded me gravely, as though I had chosen to exercise some long-neglected or obsolescent privilege. “Wait here,” I commanded, and
stepped inside the tent. In the tent was a cage. It was perhaps a ten-foot cube, entirely enclosed. The heavy metal bars were coated with silver and set with precious stones. I noted with dismay that the cage had no door. It had literally been constructed about its prisoner. A girl sat within the cage, proudly, on a throne. She wore the concealing robes and veils, the full regalia of a Ubara. Something seemed to tell me to be careful. I don’t know what it was. Something seemed to be wrong. I suppressed an impulse to
call her name; I restrained an impulse to leap to the bars, to seize her and to crush her to them and to my lips. This must be Talena whom I loved, to whom my life belonged. Yet I approached slowly, almost cautiously. Perhaps it was something in the carriage of the muffled figure, something in the way the head was held. It was much like Talena, but not as she had been. Had she been injured or drugged? Did she not recognise me? I stood before the cage and lifted my helmet from my head. She gave no sign of recognition. I sought for some glimmer of awareness in those
green eyes, for the slightest sign of affection or welcome. My voice sounded far away. “I am the messenger of Pa-Kur,” I said. “He wishes me to say that the city will soon fall and that you shall soon sit beside him on the throne of Ar.” “Pa-Kur is kind,” said the girl. I was stunned, but I revealed not the slightest surprise. Indeed, I was momentarily overwhelmed with the cunning of Pa-Kur and rejoiced that I had followed something of Kazrak’s counsels of patience and caution, that I had not disclosed my identity, that I had not attempted to
cut my way to her side and bring her out by the blade of the sword. Yes, that would have been a mistake. The voice of the girl in the cage was not the voice of the girl I loved. The girl in the cage was not Talena.
Chapter Seventeen:CHAINS OF GOLD
I had been outwitted by the brilliance of Pa-Kur. It was with a heart filled with bitterness that I left the compound of the Assassin and returned to Kazrak’s tent. In the next
few days, frequenting the Paga tents and markets, I sought, by cornering slaves and challenging swordsmen, to learn the whereabouts of Talena. But the answer, when I received an answer, whether by virtue of a golden tarn disc or mortal fear, was always the same – that she was kept in the tent of red and yellow silk. I had no doubt that these minions of Pa-Kur whom I either cajoled or terrorised surely believed that the girl in the cage was Talena. Of those actually living in the compound of Pa-Kur, it was perhaps only he who knew the true location of the girl.
In despair I realised I had done nothing more than make clear the fact that someone was desparately interested in the whereabouts of the girl, and, if anything, this information would make Pa-Kur redouble his precautions for her security and doubtless attempt to apprehend the individual responsible for the inquiries. In these days I did not wear the garb of the Caste of Assassins, but dressed as a nondescript tarnsman, wearing the insignia of no city. Four times I eluded special patrols o1f Pa-Kur, led by men I had questioned at sword point.
In the tent of Kazrak, ruefully I understood that my efforts had been futile and that the Tarnsman of Marlenus, so to speak, had at last been neutralised. I considered attempting the destruction of Pa- Kur, but this would bring me no nearer my goal of rescuing Talena. Yet nothing but the sight of my beloved would have brought me more satisfaction than driving my sword into the heart of the Assassin. These were terrible days for me. In addition to my own failures, I received no word from Kazrak, and reports from Ar on the stand of
Marlenus in the Central Cylinder became obscure and contradictory. As nearly as I could determine, he and his men had been overcome, and the height of the Central Cylinder was again in the hands of the Initiates. If this had not yet taken place, it was momentarily expected. The siege was in its fifty-second day, and the forces of Pa-Kur had breached the first wall. It was being methodically razed in seven places, to allow for the passage of the siege towers to the second wall. Moreover, hundreds of light flying bridges were being constructed; at the moment of the final assault these
would be extended from the first wall to the second, and the men of Pa-Kur would scramble upward towards the looming ramparts of Ar’s last defence. Rumour had it that dozens of tunnels, unimpeded, now extended beneath the second wall and could be opened in a matter of hours at various places in the city. The countermining operations of the men of Ar had apparently been desultory or incompetent. It was Ar’s misfortune, at this most critical time in its long history, to be in the hands of the bleakest of all castes of men, the Initiates, skilled only in ritual,
mythology, and superstition. Worse, from the reports of deserters, it became clear that the city was starving and that water was running short. Some of the defenders were opening the veins of surviving tarns, to drink the blood. The tiny urt, a common rodent of Gorean cities, was bringing a silver tarn disc in the markets. Disease had broken out. Groups of looters from Ar itself prowled the streets. In the camp of Pa-Kur we expected the city to fall any day, any hour. Yet, indomitably, Ar refused to surrender. I truly believe that the brave men
of Ar, in their valorous if blind love for their city, would have maintained the walls until the last slain warrior had been thrown from them to the streets below, but the Initiates would not have it so. In a surprise move, which perhaps should have been anticipated, the High Initiate of the city of Ar appeared on the walls. This man claimed to be the Supreme Initiate of all Initiates on Gor and to take his appointment from the Priest- Kings themselves. Needless to say, his claim was not acknowledged by the Chief Initiates of Gor’s free cities, who regarded themselves as
sovereign in their own cities. The Supreme Initiate, as he called himself, raised a shield and then set it at his feet. He then raised a spear and set it, like the shield, at his feet. This gesture is a military convention employed by commanders of Gor when calling for a parley or conference. It signifies a truce, literally the temporary putting aside of weapons. In surrender, on the other hand, the shield straps and the shaft of the spear are broken, indicating that the vanquished has disarmed himself and places himself at the mercy of the conqueror.
In a short time Pa-Kur appeared on the first wall, opposite the Supreme Initiate, and performed the same gestures. That evening emissaries were exchanged, and by means of notes and conferences, conditions of surrender were arranged. By morning most of the important arrangements were known in the camp, and for all practical purposes Ar had fallen. The bargaining of the Initia1tes was largely to secure their own safety and, as much as possible, to prevent the utter ravaging of the city. The first condition for their surrender was that Pa-Kur grant a
general amnesty for themselves and their temples. This was typical of the Initiates. Although they alone, of all the men on Gor claim to be immortal, in virtue of the mysteries, forbidden to the profane, which they practise, they are perhaps the most timid of Goreans. Pa-Kur willingly granted this condition. Any indiscriminate slaughter of Initiates would be regarded by his troops as an ill omen, and, besides, they would be useful in controlling the population. Ubars have always employed the Initiates as tools, some of the boldest even contending that the
social function of the Initiates is to keep the lower castes contented with their servile lot. The second major condition requested by the Initiates was that the city be garrisoned by only ten thousand chosen troops, and that the balance of the horde be allowed to enter the gates only unarmed. There were a variety of smaller, more intricate concessions desired by the Initiates and granted by Pa-Kur, mostly having to do with the provisioning of the city and the protection of its tradesmen and peasants. Pa-Kur, for his part, demanded and was granted the usual savage
fees imposed by the Gorean conqueror. The population would be completely disarmed. Possession of a weapon would be regarded as a capital offence. Officers in the Warrior Caste and their families were to be impaled, and in the population at large every tenth man would be executed. The thousand most beautiful women of Ar would be given as pleasure slaves to Pa-Kur, for distribution among his highest officers. Of the other free women, the healthiest and most attractive thirty per cent would be auctioned to his troops in the Street of Brands, the proceeds
going to the coffers of Pa-Kur. A levy of seven thousand young men would be taken to fill the depleted ranks of his siege slaves. Children under twelve would be distributed at random among the free cities of Gor. As for the slaves of Ar, they would belong to the first man who changed their collar. Near dawn, to the brave sound of tarn drums, a mighty procession left the camp of Pa-Kur, and as it crossed the main bridge over the first ditch, I saw in the distance the great gate slowly opening. Perhaps I alone of that vast horde, with the possible exception of Mintar, of the
Merchant Caste, felt like weeping. Pa-Kur rode at the head of the garrison troops, ten thousand strong. They chanted a marching rhythm as they followed him, the sunlight on their spears. Pa-Kur himself rode a black tharlarion, one of the few I had seen. The beast was bejewelled and moved with a grave, regal stride. I was puzzled as the great procession halted and a palanquin was borne forward by eight members of the Caste of Assassins. Suddenly I became alert. The palanquin was set down beside the tharlarion of Pa-Kur. The figure of a girl was lifted from it. She was
unveiled. My heart leaped. It was Talena. But she did not wear the regalia of a Ubara, as had the girl in the cage. She was barefoot and clad in a single garment, a long white robe. To my amazement I saw that her wrists were fastened together by golden shackles. A chain of gold was slung to Pa-Kur, who fastened it to the saddle of his tharlarion. The free end of Pa-Kur’s saddle chain was then secured to Talena’s shackles. The procession resumed to the beat of the tarn drums and Talena, bound in chains of gold, walked, slowly, with dignity, beside the tharlarion of her captor,
Pa-Kur, the Assassin. My wonder and horror must have been written large on my face, because a tharlarion lancer standing beside me regarded me with amusement. “One of the conditions of the surrender,” he said. “The impalement of Talena, daughter o1f Marlenus, false Ubar of Ar.” “But why?” I demanded. “She was to be the bride of Pa-Kur, to be Ubara of Ar.” “When Marlenus fell,” said the man, “the Initiates decreed the impalement of all members of his family.” He smiled grimly. “To save face before the citizens of Ar,
they have demanded that Pa-Kur respect their decree and impale her.” “And Pa-Kur agreed?” “Of course,” said the man. “One key to open the gate of Ar is as good as another.” My head swirled, and I stumbled backwards through the ranks of soldiers watching the procession. I ran blindly through the now deserted streets of Pa-Kur’s camp and found myself at last in the compound of Mintar. I lurched into the tent of Kazrak and fell on the sleeping mat, shaking with emotion. I sobbed.
Then my hands clutched the mat, and I shook my head savagely to clear it of the uncontrolled tumult of emotion that rocked it. Suddenly I was again my own master, again rational. The shock of seeing her, of knowing the fate that awaited her had been too much. I must try not to be weak in the way of the things I love. It is unbefitting a warrior of Gor. It was as a warrior of Gor that I arose and donned the black helmet and the garments of the Caste of Assassins. I loosened my sword in its sheath, set my shield on my arm, and grasped my spear. My steps were determined when I left the
tent. I strode meaningfully to the great tarn cot at the entrance to Mintar’s compound and demanded my tarn. The tarn was brought into the open. He gleamed with health and energy. Still, the days in the tarn cot, gigantic though it was, must have been confining for that Ubar of the Skies, my tarn, and I knew he would relish flight, the chance to pit his wings once again against the fierce winds of Gor. I stroked hi with affection, surprised at the fondness I felt for the sable monster. I tossed the tarn keeper a golden
tarn disc. He had done his job well. He stammered, holding it out to me to take it back. A golden tarn disc was a small fortune. It would buy one of the great birds themselves, or as many as five slave girls. I climbed the mounting ladder and fastened myself in the saddle, telling the keeper that the coin was his. I suppose it was a gesture, nothing but a gesture, but, pitiful though it might be, it pleased me, and, to be honest, I did not expect to live to spend the coin. “For luck,” I said. Then, with the first flush of joy I had felt in weeks, I brought the great bird soaring into the sky.
Chapter Eighteen:IN THE CENTRAL CYLINDER
As the tarn climbed, I saw the camp of Pa-Kur, the ditches, the double walls of Ar with siege engines like leeches fastened to the inner wall, and, approaching the city, Pa-Kur’s long lines of chanting garrison troops, the morning sun flashing on their metal, their march measured by the beat of tarn drums. I thought of Marlenus who, if he survived, might be able to see much
of the same sight from the arrow ports of the Central Cylinder. I felt sorry for him, knowing that that sight, if any, would crush the heart of the fierce Ubar. His feelings towards Talena I could not conjecture. Perhaps, mercifully, he did not know what was to be her fate. I knew that I must try to rescue her. How much I would have given to have had Marlenus and his men at my side, few though they might be! Then, as if the pieces of 1a puzzle had suddenly, unexpectedly, snapped into shape, a plan sprang into my head. Marlenus had entered
the city. Somehow. I had puzzled on this for days, yet now it seemed obvious. The robes of the Afflicted. The Dar-Kosis Pits beyond the city. One of them, one of those pits must be a blind; one of them must allow an underground access to the city. Surely one of those pits had been prepared years ago by the wily Ubar as an escape route or emergency exit. I must find that pit and tunnel, somehow fight my way to his side, enlist his support. But first, as part of my plan, I raced my tarn directly for the walls of Ar, swiftly passing the slow procession on the plains below. In a
matter of perhaps less than a minute I hovered over the summit of the interior wall near the great gate. As soldiers scattered madly beneath me, I brought the tarn down. No one ventured to repel me. All were silent. I wore the garb of the Caste of Assassins, and on the left temple of the black helmet was the golden slash of the messenger. Without leaving the back of the tarn, I demanded the officer in charge. He was a dour, hard-bitten man with white hair cropped short. He had grey eyes that looked as though they had seen action and hadn’t flinched. He approached
sullenly. He did not enjoy being summoned by an enemy of Ar, and in particular by one who wore the habiliments of the hated Caste of Assassins. “Pa-Kur approaches the city,” I cried. “Ar is his.” The guards were silent. At a word from the officer a hundred spears would have sought my heart. “You welcome him,” I said scornfully, “by opening the great gate, but you have not retracted the tarn wire. Why is this? Take it down in order that his tarnsmen may enter the city unimpeded.” “That was not in the conditions
of surrender,” said the officer. “Ar has fallen,” I said. “Obey the word of Pa-Kur.” “Very well,” said the officer, gesturing to a subordinate. “Lower the wire.” The cry, rather forlorn, to lower the wire was echoed along the lengths of the walls and from tower to tower. Soon the great winches were in motion and, foot by foot, the frightful netting of tarn wire began to sag. When it reached the ground, it would be sectioned and rolled. I was not, of course, concerned with facilitating the entry of Pa-Kur’s tarnsmen who, as far as
I knew, did not even constitute a portion of the garrison force, but I was concerned with opening the sky over the city in case I, and others, might be able to utilise it as a road to freedom. I spoke once more, in haughty tones. “Pa-Kur wishes to know if the false Ubar, Marlenus, still lives.” “Yes,” said the officer. “Where is he?” I demanded. “In the Central Cylinder,” growled the man. “A prisoner?” “As good as a prisoner.” “See that he does not escape,” I
said. “He will not escape,” said the man. “Fifty guardsmen will see to that.” “What of the roof of the cylinder,” I asked, “when the tarn wire is down?” “Marlenus will not escape,” repeated the officer, adding in a surly tone, “unless he can fly.” “Perhaps you will retain your humour whe1n you writhe on an impaling spear,” I said. The eyes of the man narrowed, and he regarded me with hatred, for he well knew what was to be the fate of the officers of Ar.
“Where,” I asked, “shall Pa-Kur take the daughter of the false Ubar to be executed?” The officer pointed to a distant cylinder. “The Cylinder of Justice,” he said. “The execution will take place as soon as the girl can be presented.” The cylinder was white, a colour Goreans often associate with impartiality. More significant, it indicated that the justice dispensed therein was the justice of Initiates. There are two systems of courts on Gor – those of the City, under the jurisdiction of an Administrator or Ubar, and those of the Initiates,
under the jurisdiction of the High Initiate of the given city; the division corresponds roughly to that between civil and what, for lack of a better word, might be called ecclesiastical courts. The areas of jurisdiction of these two types of courts are not well defined; the Initiates claim ultimate jurisdiction in all matters, in virtue of their supposed relation to the Priest- Kings, but this claim is challenged by civil jurists. There would, of course, in these days be no challenging the justice of the Initiates. I noted with repulsion that on the roof of the Cylinder of
Justice there shimmered a public impaling spear of polished silver, some fifty feet high, gleaming, looking like a needle in the distance. I took the tarn into the air again. I had managed to bring down the tarn wire of Ar; I had learned that Marlenus still lived and held a portion of the Central Cylinder, and I had found out when and where the execution of Talena was supposed to take place. I streaked from the walls of Ar, noting with dismay that the procession of Pa-Kur was only a short distance from the great gate. I
could see the tharlarion on which he rode, the figure of the Assassin, and the slip of a girl, in her white robe, who, beside the animal, walked like a Ubara, though barefoot and chained to its saddle. I wondered if Pa-Kur might be curious to know who was the rider of that solitary sable tarn which flashed above his head. In what seemed like an hour, but must have been no more than three or four minutes, I was behind the camp of Pa-Kur and searching for the dreaded Dar-Kosis Pits, those prisons in which the Afflicted may freely incarcerate themselves and
be fed, but from which they are not allowed to depart. There were several, easily visible from above because of their broad, circular form, much like a great well sunk in the earth. When I came to one, I would bring the tarn lower. When I had completed my search, I had found only one pit deserted. The others were dotted with what appeared, from the height, to be yellow lice – the figures of the Afflicted. Boldly, giving no thought to the possible danger of lingering infection, I dropped the tarn into the deserted pit. The giant landed on the rock
floor of the circular pit, and I looked upward, my glance climbing the sheer artificially smoothed sides of the pit, which stretched perhaps a thousand feet above me on all sides. In spite of the breadth of the pit, perhaps two hundred feet, it was cold at the bottom, and as I looked up, I was startled to note that, in the blue sky, I could see the dim pin- pricks of light which, after dark, would become the blazing stars above Gor. In the centre of the pit a crude cistern had been carved from the living rock and was half filled with cold but foul water. As nearly as I could determine, there was no
way in and out of the pit except on tarnback. I did know that sometimes the pathetic inmates of Dar-Kosis Pits, repenting their decision to be incarcerated, had managed to cut footholds in the walls and 1escape, but the labour involved – a matter of years – the death penalty for being discovered, and the very risk of the climb made such attempts rare. If there was some secret way in and out of this particular pit, assuming it was the one prepared by Marlenus, I did not see what it was and had no time to conduct a thorough investigation. Looking about, I saw several of
the caves dug into the walls of the pit, which, at least in most pits, house the inmates. In desperate, frustrated haste, I examined several of them; some were shallow, little more than scooped-out depressions in the wall, but others were more extensive, containing two or three chambers connected by passageways. Some contained worn sleeping mats of cold, mouldy straw, some contained a few rusted metal utensils, such as kettles and pails, but most were completely empty, revealing no signs of life or use at all. After I emerged from one of these
cave I was surprised to see my tarn across the pit, his head tilted to one side, as if puzzled. He then reached his beak out to an apparently blank wall and withdrew it, repeating this three or four times, and then began to walk back and forth, snapping his wings impatiently. I raced across the pit. I began to examine the wall with fierce closeness. I scrutinised every inch and ran my hands carefully over every portion of its smooth surface. Nothing was revealed to my eyes or to my touch, but there was the almost imperceptible odour of tarn spoor.
For several minutes I examined the blank wall, sure that it held the secret of Marlenus’s entrance into the city. Then, in frustration, I backed slowly away, hoping to see some lever or perhaps some suspicious crevice higher in the escarpment, something that might play its role in opening the passage I was sure lay hidden somewhere behind that seemingly solid mass of stone. Yet no lever, handle, or device of any kind revealed itself. I widened my search, wandering about the walls, but they seemed sheer, impenetrable. There seemed to be no place in which a lever or
handle might be concealed. Then, with a shout of anger at my stupidity, I ran to the shallow cistern in the centre of the pit and fell on my stomach before the chill, foul water. I thrust my hand into the slimy water, desperately examining the bottom. My hand clutched a valve, and I turned it fiercely as far as it would go. At the same time from the escarpment came a smooth, rolling sound as a great weight was effortlessly balanced and lifted by hydraulic means. To my amazement, I saw that an immense opening had appeared in the wall. An enormous
slab, perhaps fifty feet square, had slid upward and backward, revealing a great, dim, squarish tunnel beyond, a tunnel large enough for a flying tarn. I seized the tarn reins and drew the beast into the opening. Inside the door I saw another valve, corresponding to the one hidden under the water of the cistern. Turning it, I closed the great gate behind me, thinking it wise to protect the secret of the tunnel as long as possible. Inside, the tunnel, though dim, was not altogether dark, being lit by domelike, wire-protected energy bulbs, spaced in pairs every
hundred yards or so. These bulbs, invented more than a century ago by the Caste of Builders, produce a clear, soft light for years without replacement. I mounted the tarn, who was visibly uneasy in this strange environment. Without much success, by hand and voice, I tried to soothe the beast’s apprehensions. Perhaps I spoke as much for my own benefit as his. The first time I hauled on the one-strap, the bird would not move; the second time he lifted into flight, almost immediately scraping the ceiling of the tunnel with his wings, protesting shrilly. My helmet protected me as
my head wa1s roughly dragged against the granite of the ceiling. Then, to my pleasure, instead of alighting, the tarn dropped a few feet down from the ceiling and began to streak through the tunnel, the energy bulbs flashing past me to form in my wake a gleaming chain of light. The end of the tunnel widened into a vast chamber, lit by hundreds of energy bulbs. In this chamber, though empty of human beings, was a monstrous tarn cot, in which some twenty gigantic, half-starved tarns huddled separately on the tarn perches. As soon as they saw us,
they lifted their heads, as if out of their shoulders, and regarded us with fierce attention. The floor of the tarn cot was littered with the bones of perhaps two dozen tarns. I reasoned that the tarns must be those of the men of Marlenus, left in the tarn cot when he entered the city. He had been cut off. Left without care for weeks, the tarns had had nothing to feed upon but one another. They were wild now, crazed by hunger into uncontrollable predators. Perhaps I could use them. Somehow I must liberate Marlenus. I knew that when I
entered the palace my presence would be inexplicable to the guardsmen and that I would not long be able to pass myself off as a herald of Pa-Kur, certainly not when it became clear that it was my intention to depart with Marlenus. Therefore, impossible though it might seem, I must devise some plan to scatter or overcome his besiegers. As I pondered, the fragments of a plan took form in my mind. Surely I was now beneath the Central Cylinder, and the embattled Marlenus and his men were somewhere above me, sealed off by the guardsmen of Ar. At the top of a
broad series of stairs I saw the door that must lead to the Central Cylinder and noted with satisfaction that its dimensions were large enough to permit the passage of a tarn. Fortunately, almost at the foot of the stairs lay one of the gates of the tarn cot. I took my tarn-goad and dismounted. I climbed the stairs that led to the portal into the cylinder, turned the valve, and as soon as the portal began to move, raced down to the tarn cot and swung open the barred gate which lay nearest the foot of the stairs. I stood back, partly shielding myself with the
gate. In less than a few seconds the first of the scraggy tarns had lit on the floor of the cot and poked his ugly head through the door. His eyes blazed as he saw me. To him, I was food, something to be killed and eaten. He stalked towards me, around the gate. I struck at him with the tarn-goad, but the instrument seemed to have no effect. The darting beak lunged at me again and again; the great claws grasped. The tarn-goad was torn from my hand. In that instant a great black shape hurtled into the fray, and the tarn had met his match. Ripping savagely with his steel-shod talons,
slashing with his scimitarlike beak, my sable war tarn in a matter of seconds left the attacking tarn a shuddering heap of feathers. With one of the great steel-shod talons on the body of his fallen foe, my tarn emitted the challenge scream of his kind. The other tarns, poking out of the tarn cot, seemed to hesitate and then to notice the open door into the cylinder. At that moment, to his own misfortune, a passing guardsman of Ar discovered the opened door that had mysteriously appeared in the wall of the first floor of the Central Cylinder. He stood framed for a
moment in the doorway and shouted, a shout half of discovery, half of mortal fear. One of the starved tarns, with a leap and stroke of his wings, lunged upward, catching the man in his beak. The man screamed horribly. Another tarn reached the portal and tried to pull the body from the beak of the possessor. There was another shout from within, and several more guardsmen rushed to the opening. Immediately the hunger-wild tarns surged upward, eager for flesh. The tarns, all of them, entered the cylinder, the palace of Marlenus. In the great hall
I could hear the fearful noise of unnatural carnage, the screams of the men, the screams of the tarns, the hiss of arrows, the wild blows of wings and talons. I heard someone shout, a weird, terrified cry “Tarns!” An alarm bar, a hollow metal tube struck by hammers, began to ring in frenzy. In two or three minutes I led my own tarn up the stairs and through the opening. I was sick at the sight that confronted me. Some fifteen tarns were feeding on the remains of a dozen or so guardsmen, detaching and devouring limbs. Several tarns were dead; some
were flopping about awkwardly on the marble floor, pierced by arrows. There were no living guardsmen in sight. Those who had survived had fled from the room, perhaps up the long, wide, circling stairwell that climbed the inside of the cylinder. Leaving my tarn below, I climbed the stairs, my sword drawn. When I reached that portion of the stairwell adjoining the upper floors, devoted to the private use of the Ubar, I saw some twenty or thirty guardsmen, behind them a barricade of tile and tarn wire which they had erected. It was not
simply that my sword was drawn. To them, my presence was unauthorised, and my Assassin’s garb, far from being a safe-conduct, was an incitement to attack. Some of the guardsmen had undoubtedly fought below with the tarns. They were drenched with sweat; their clothing was torn; their weapons, drawn, were red with blood. They would associate me with the tarn attack. Without waiting to call for my identity or engage in any protocol whatever, they raced towards me. “Die, Assassin!” one of them screamed, and struck downward
with his blade. I slipped under the blade and ran him through. The others were upon me. Much of what took place then is jumbled in my memory, like the fragments of some bizarre, incomprehensible dream. I remember them pressing downward, so many, and my blade, terrible, moving as if wielded by a god, meeting their steel, cutting its path upward. One man, two, three sprawled down the stairs, and then another and another. I struck and parried and struck again, my sword flashing forth and drinking blood again and again. I seemed to be
beside myself and fought as if I might not be what I knew I was, what I thought myself to be – Tarl Cabot, a simple warrior, one man. The thought flamed through me in the violent delirium of battle that in those moments I was many men, an army, that no man could stand against me, that it was not my blade or my heart they faced but something I myself only dimly sensed, something intangible but irresistible, an avalanche, a storm, a force of nature, the destiny of their world, something I could not name but knew in those moments could not be denied or conquered.
Suddenly I stood alone on the stairs, except for the dead. I became dimly aware that I was bleeding from minor cuts in a dozen places. Slowly I climbed the remainder of the stairs until I came to the barricade which had been erected by the guardsmen. I called out, as loudly as I could, “Marlenus, Ubar of Ar!” To my joy, from somewhere above, around the curve of the stairs, I heard the voice of the Ubar. “Who would speak with me?” “Tarl of Bristol,” I cried. There was silence. I wiped my sword, sheathed it,
and climbed to the top of the barricade. I stood for a moment on the crest of the barricade and then lowered myself down the other side. I slowly walked up the stairs, my hands open, free of weapons. I turned the bend in t1he stairs and, several yards above me, observed a wide doorway, jammed with chests and furniture. It was behind this makeshift rampart, which could be defended against a hundred men, that I saw the haggard but still blazing eyes of Marlenus. I removed my helmet and set it on the steps. In a moment he had burst through the obstruction as if it had
been made of kindling wood. Wordlessly we embraced.
Chapter Nineteen:THE DUEL
Marlenus and his men and I raced down the long stairs to the main hall of the Central Cylinder, where we came on the remains of the grisly feast of the tarns. The great birds, fed, were once again as tractable as such monsters ever are, and with the tarn-goads, Marlenus and his men were again in command. In spite of the urgency of our mission,
there was a detail that Marlenus did not neglect. He lifted a tile in the floor of the great hall and revealed a valve; with it, he closed the secret door through which the tarns had come. The secret of the tunnel would be kept. We led our tarns to one of the large circular ports of the cylinder. I climbed to the saddle of my own sable beast and brought it soaring into the air beyond the cylinder. Marlenus followed, and his men. In a minute we had attained the roof of the Central Cylinder and had all Ar and the surrounding countryside spread beneath us.
Marlenus was, in general, well informed of the political situation; indeed, to be so informed required only the vantage point he had so stoutly defended for several days and a particle of awareness. He swore violently when I told him of the proposed fate of Talena, yet refused to accompany me when I announced that I would attack the Cylinder of Justice. “Look!” cried Marlenus, pointing below. “The garrison of Pa-Kur is well within the city. The men of Ar discard their weapons!” “Will you not try to save your daughter?” I asked.
“Take what men of mine you will,” he said. “But I must fight for my city. I am Ubar of Ar, and while I live my city will not perish.” He lowered his helmet on to his head and loosened his shield and spear. “Look for me hereafter in the streets and on the bridges,” he said, “on the walls and in the hidden rooms of the highest cylinders. Wherever the free men of Ar retain their weapons, there you will find Marlenus.” I called after him, but his choice, painful though it must have been, had been made. He had brought his tarn to flight and was descending to
the streets below to rally the dispirited citizens of Ar, to call them again to arms, to challenge them to renounce the treacherous authority of the self-seeking Initiates, to strike again their blow for freedom, to die rather than yield their city to the foe. One by one, his men followed him, tarnsman by tarnsman. None left the roof of the cylinder to seek his safety beyond the city. Each was determined to die with his Ubar. And I, too, if a higher duty had not called me, might have chosen to follow Marlenus, ruthless Ubar of that vast and violated city.
Once again alone, sick at heart, I loosened my spear and shield in their saddle straps. I entertained no hope now but to die with the girl unjustly condemned on the distant, gleaming tower. I brought the tarn to flight and set its course for the Cylinder of Justice. I noted grimly, as I flew, that large portions of the horde of Pa-Kur were crossing the great bridges over the first ditch and moving towards the city, the sunlight flashing on their weaponry. It seem1ed that the conditions of surrender meant little to the horde and that it was determined to enter the city, now and in the full panoply
of war. By night Ar would be in flames, its coffers broken open, its gold and silver in the bedrolls of the looters, its men slaughtered, its women, stripped, lashed to the pleasure-racks of the victors. The Cylinder of Justice was a lofty cylinder of pure white marble, the flat roof of which was some two hundred yards in diameter. There were about two hundred people on the cylinder roof. I could see the white robes of Initiates and the variegated colours of soldiers, both of Ar and of Pa-Kur’s horde. And, dark among these shapes, like shadows, I could see the sombre
black of members of the Caste of Assassins. The high impaling post, normally visible on the top of the cylinder, had been lowered. When it was raised again, it would bear the body of Talena. I was over the cylinder and dropping the tarn to its centre. With cries of surprise and rage, men scattered from beneath the suddenly descending gigantic shape. I had expected to be fired on immediately but suddenly remembered that I still wore the garb of the messenger. No Assassin would fire on me, and no one else would dare. The tarn’s steel-shod talons
struck the marble roof of the cylinder with a flash of sparks. The great wings smote the air twice, raising a small hurrican that caused the startled onlookers to stagger backward. Lying on the ground, bound hand and foot, still clad in the white robe, was Talena. The point of the sharpened impaling post lay near her. As the tarn had landed, her executioners, two burly, hooded magistrates, had scrambled to their feet and fled to safety. The Initiates themselves do not execute their victims, as the shedding of blood is forbidden by those beliefs they regard as sacred. Now,
helpless, Talena lay almost within the wing span of my tarn, so near to me and yet a world away. “What is the meaning of this!” cried a strident voice, that of Pa- Kur. I turned to face him, and the fury of what he meant to me ripped through my body, surging like a volcano, almost dominating me. Yet I did not answer him. Instead I called out to the men of Ar on the cylinder. “Men of Ar,” I cried, “behold!” I gestured widely to the fields beyond the great gate. The approaching swarm of Pa-Kur’s horde was visible, and the dust rose
a thousand feet into the air. There were cries of rage. “Who are you?” cried Pa-Kur, drawing his sword. I threw off my helmet, flinging it down. “I am Tarl of Bristol,” I said. The cry of amazement and joy that broke from Talena’s lips told me all I wanted to know. “Impale her,” shouted Pa-Kur. As the burly magistrates hastened forward, I seized my spear and hurled it with such force as I would not have believed possible. The spear flashed through the air like a bolt of lightning and struck the oncoming magistrate in the chest,
passing through his body and burying itself in the heart of his companion. There was an awe-stricken silence as the immensity of what had occurred impressed itself on the onlookers. I was conscious of distant shouting in the streets far below. There was a smell of smoke. There was the faint clash of arms. “Men of Ar,” I cried, “listen! Even now, in the streets below, Marlenus, your Ubar, fights for the freedom of Ar!” The men of Ar looked at one another. “Will you surrender your city1?
Yield your lives and women to Assassins?” I challenged. “Are you truly the men of never-conquered, imperishable Ar? Or are you but slaves who will exchange your freedom for the collar of Pa-Kur?” “Down with the Initiates!” cried one man, drawing his sword. “Down with the Assassin!” cried another. There were shouts from the men of Ar and cries of terror from the Initiates as they cringed or fled. Almost as if by magic, the men of Ar had separated themselves from the others on the cylinder. Swords were drawn. In an instant they would join the battle raging in the
streets. “Stop!” A great, solemn, hollow voice boomed. All eyes on the roof returned to the sound of that voice. The Supreme Initiate of Ar himself stood forth, separating himself disdainfully from the cowering knot of white-robed figures that cringed behind him. He strode majestically across the roof. Both the men of Ar and those of Pa-Kur fell back. The Supreme Initiate was an emaciated, incredibly tall man, with smooth- shaven, bluish, sunken cheeks and wild, prophetic eyes. He was ascetic, fervent, sinister, fanatic.
One long, clawlike hand was raised grandly to the heavens. “Who will challenge the will of the Priest- Kings?” he demended. No one spoke. The men, of both sides, fell back even farther. Pa- Kur himself seemed awed. The spiritual power of the Supreme Initiate was almost sensible in the air. The religious conditioning of the men of Gor, based on superstition though it might be, was as powerful as a set of chains – more powerful than chains because they did not realise it existed. They feared the word, the curse, of this old man without weapons more than
they would have feared the massed swords of a thousand foemen. “If it is the will of the Priest- Kings,” I said, “to bring about the death of an innocent girl, then I challenge their will.” Such words had never before been spoken on Gor. Except for the wind, there was no sound on the great cylinder. The supreme Initiate turned and faced, pointing that long skeletal finger. “Die the Flame Death,” he said. I had heard of the Flame Death from my father and the Older Tarl – that legendary fate which overtook
those who had transgressed the will of the Priest-Kings. I knew almost nothing of the fabled Priest-Kings, but I did know that something of the sort must exist, for I had been brought to Gor by an advanced technology, and I knew that some force or power lay in the mysterious Sardar Mountains. I did not believe that the Priest-Kings were divine, but I did believe that they lived and that they were aware of what occurred on Gor and that from time to time they made known their will. I did not even know if they were human or non-human, but, whatever they might be, they were,
with their advanced science and technology, for all practical purposes, the gods of this world. On the back of my tarn, I waited, not knowing if I was to be singled out for the Flame Death, not knowing if I, like the mysterious blue envelope in the mountains of New Hampshire, so long ago, was doomed to explode in a devouring blue flame. “Die the Flame Death,” repeated the old man, once again jabbing that long finger in my direction. But this time the gesture was less grand; it seemed a bit hysterical; it seemed pathetic.
“Perhaps no man knows the will of the Priest-Kings,” I said. “I have decreed the death of the girl,” cried the old man w1ildly, his robes fluttering around his bony knees. “Kill her!” he shouted to the men of Ar. No one moved. Then, before anyone could stop him, he seized a sword from the scabbard of an Assassin and rushed to Talena, holding it over his head with both hands. He wobbled hysterically, his eyes mad, his mouth slobbering, his faith in the Priest-Kings shattered, and with it his mind. He wavered over the girl, ready to kill.
“No!” cried one of the Initiates. “It is forbidden!” Heedlessly, the insane old man tensed for the blow that would end the life of the girl. But in that instant he seemed to be concealed in a bluish haze, and then, suddenly, to the horror of all, he seemed, like a living bomb, to explode with fire. Not even a scream came from that fierce blue combustive mass that had been a human being, and in a minute the flame had departed, almost as quickly as it had come, and a dust of ashes scattered from the top of the cylinder in the wind. The voice of Pa-Kur was heard,
level and unnaturally calm. “The sword shall decide these matters,” he said. Accordingly, I slid from the saddle of the tarn, unsheathing my weapon. Pa-Kur was said to be the finest swordsman on Gor. From far below, the distant shouts of fighting in the streets drifted upward. The Initiates had vanished from the roof of the cylinder. One of the men of Ar said, “I choose for Marlenus.” “And I,” said another. Pa-Kur, without taking his eyes
off me, gestured with his sword towards the men of Ar. “Destroy this rabble.” Instantly the Assassins and the men from Pa-Kur’s horde fell upon the men of Ar, who stood firm under the sudden onslaught, meeting them blade for blade. The men of Ar were outnumbered perhaps three to one, but I knew they would give a good account of themselves. Pa-Kur approached warily, confident in his superior swordsmanship, but, as I expected, determined to take no chances. We met almost over the body of Talena, the tips of our blades
touching alertly, once, twice, each sounding the other out. Pa-Kur feinted, not exposing himself, his eyes seeming to watch my shoulder, noting how I parried the blow. He tested me again and seemed satisfied. he then began testing elsewhere, methodically, using his sword almost as a physician might use a stethoscope, applying it first to one area and then to another. I drove in once directly. Pa-Kur slid the blow lightly to one side, almost casually. While we touched blades, almost as if involved in some bizarre ritualistic dance, there was the ringing, the clanging of fiercer
swordplay around us, as the men of Pa-Kur engaged the men of Ar. At last Pa-Kur stepped back, out of the range of my blade. He seemed complacent. “I can kill you,” he said. I supposed what he said was true, but it may have been a calculated remark, something to put the enemy off balance, like announcing an unseen mate in chess to provoke an opponent into making an unnecessary defensive move, causing him to lose the initiative. That sort of thing would be effective only once with a given player, but in swordplay once would be sufficient.
I responded in kind, to taunt him. “How is it that you can kill me if I do not turn my back?” I asked. Somewhere within that inhumanly calm exterior there lay a vanity that must be vulnerable. I remembered the incident of the crossbow and the tarn disc over the Vosk. That, in its way, had been a rhetorical gesture on 1the part of Pa-Kur. A momentary annoyance flickered through the stony eyes of Pa-Kur, and then a small, sour smile appeared on his lips. He again approached, but cautiously as before, still taking no chances. My ruse had failed. His, if ruse it was,
had also. If it had not been a ruse, I would soon know, if only briefly. Our blades met again, this time in a flash of bright, clean sound. He had begun much as at first, moving towards the area, only with more familiarity, more rapidity. This led me to puzzle as to whether this was the weaker part of my defence and where his attack would come, or if it was a blind to keep my mind from another area until he suddenly drove through for the kill. Such questions I forced from my mind, keeping my eyes on his blade. In affairs of the sword, there is a place for outguessing the opponent,
but there is no place for anxious speculation; it paralyses, puts you on the defensive. He had toyed with me. Now I determined not to allow him to control the exchanges. If I was defeated, I determined that it would be a man that would defeat me, not a reputation. I began to press forward in attack, exposing myself more, but beating back his defence by the sheer weight and number of my blows. Pa-Kur withdrew coolly, meeting my attack effortlessly, letting me weary my sword arm; hating him, I admired him; wanting to destroy him, I acclaimed his skill.
When my attack lapsed, Pa-Kur did not press his own. He clearly wanted me to attack again. After several such onslaughts, my arm would be weakened to the point where it could not withstand the fury of his own offence, which was legendary on Gor. As we fought, the men of Ar, fighting brilliantly for their city, their honour and loved ones, pushed back the men of Pa-Kur again and again, but from the interior of the cylinder swarmed more men of the Assassin. For each enemy who fell, it seemed three sprang up to take his place. It was only a matter of time
before the last of the men of Ar would be forced over the edge of the cylinder. Pa-Kur and I engaged again and again, I pressing the attack, he withstanding it and waiting. During this time Talena, though bound hand and foot, had struggled to her knees, and she watched us fight, her hair and the folds of her robe blown by the wind that whipped across the roof of the cylinder. Seeing her and the fear for me in her eyes, I seemed to gain redoubled strength, and for the first time it seemed to me that Pa-Kur was not meeting my attack as surely as he had previously.
Suddenly there was a sound like thunder and a great shadow was cast across the roof of the cylinder, as if the sun had been obscured by clouds. Pa-Kur and I backed away from one another, each quickly trying to see what was happening. In our fighting we had been all but oblivious of the world around us. I heard the joyous cry, “Sword Brother!” It was Kazrak’s voice! “Tarl of Ko-ro-ba!” cried another familiar voice – that of my father. I looked up. The sky was filled with tarns. Thousands of the great birds, their wings clapping like thunder, were descending on the
city, flying on to the bridges and down to the streets, darting among those spires no longer protected with the terrible defence of the tarn wire. In the distance the camp of Pa-Kur was in flames. Across the bridges of the great ditch, rivers of warriors were flowing. In Ar the men of Marlenus had apparently reached the great gate, for it was slowly closing, locking the garrison inside, separating them from the horde without. The horde, taken by surprise, was disorganised, unformed for battle. It was milling about in confusion, panic-stricken.
Many of Pa-Kur’1s tarnsmen were already streaking from the city, seeking their own safety. Undoubtedly, the horde of Pa-Kur greatly outnumbered the attackers, but it did not understand this. It knew only that it had been taken by surprise, at a disadvantage by undetermined numbers of disciplined troops that were pouring down on them, while from above, enemy tarnsmen, unchallenged, emptied their quivers into their ranks. Moreover, with the closing of the great gate, there was no refuge in the city; they were trapped against the walls, packed
like cattle for the slaughter, trampling one another, unable to use their weapons. Kazrak’s tarn had alighted on the roof of the cylinder, and a moment afterward my father’s and perhaps fifty others. Behind Kazrak, sharing his saddle, in the leather of a tarnsman, rode the beautiful Sana of Thentis. The Assassins of Pa-Kur were throwing down their swords and removing their helmets. Even as I watched, my father’s tarnsmen were roping them together. Pa-Kur had seen what I had seen, and now once again we faced one another. I gestured to the ground
with my sword, offering quarter, Pa-Kur snarled and rushed forward. I met the attack cleanly, and after a minute of fierce interplay both Pa- Kur and I realised I could withstand the best he had to give. Then I seized the initiative and began to force him back. As we fought and I forced him back step by step towards the edge of the lofty marble cylinder, I said calmly, “I can kill you.” I knew I spoke the truth. I struck the blade from his hand. It rang on the marble surface. “Yield,” I said. “Or take your sword again.”
Like a striking cobra, Pa-Kur snatched up the sword. We engaged again, and twice my blade cut him; the second time I nearly had the opening I desired. It was now a matter of only a few strokes more and the Assassin would lie at my feet, lifeless. Suddenly Pa-Kur, who sensed this as well as I, hurled his sword. It slashed through my tunic, creasing the skin. I felt the warm, wet sensation of blood. Pa-Kur and I looked at each other, now without hatred. He stood straight before me, unarmed but with all the nonchalant arrogance of old.
“You will not lead me as a prisoner,” he said. Then, without another word, he turned and leapt into space. I walked slowly to the edge of the cylinder. There was only the sheer wall of the cylinder, broken once by a tarn perch some twenty feet below. There was no sign of the Assassin. His crushed body would be recovered from the streets below and publicly impaled. Pa- Kur was dead. I sheathed my sword and went to Talena. I unbound her. Trembling, she stood beside me, and we took one another in our arms, the blood
from my wound staining her robe. “I love you,” I said. We held one another, and her eyes, wet with tears, lifted to mine. “I love you,” she said. The lion laugh of Marlenus resounded from behind us. Talena and I broke apart. My hand was on my sword. The Ubar’s hand gently restrained mine. “It has done enough work for one day,” he smiled. “Let it rest.” The Ubar went to his daughter and took her fine head in his great hands. He turned her head from side to side and looked into her eyes. “Yes,” she said, as if he might have
seen his daughter for the first time, “she is fit to be the daughter of a Ubar.” Then he clapped his hands on my shoulders. “See that I have grandsons,” he said. I looked about. Sana stood in the arms of Kazrak, and I knew that the former slave girl had found the man to whom she would give herself, not for a hundred tarns but for love. My father stood watching me, approval in his eyes. In the distance Pa-Kur’s camp was only a framework of blackened poles. In the city his garrison had surrendered. Beyond the walls the horde had cast down its weapons.
Ar was saved. Talena looked into my eyes. “What will you do with me?” she asked. “I will take you to Ko-ro-ba,” I said, “to my city.” “As your slave?” she smiled. “If you will have me,” I said, “as my Free Companion.” “I accept you, Tarl of Ko-ro-ba,” said Talena with love in her eyes. “I accept you as my Free Companion.” “If you did not,” I laughed, “I would throw you across my saddle and carry you to Ko-ro-ba by force.”
She laughed and I swept her from her feet and lifted her to the saddle of my giant tarn. In the saddle, her arms were around my neck, her lips on mine. “Are you a true warrior?” she asked, her eyes bright with mischief, testing me, her voice breathless. “We shall see,” I laughed. Then, in accord with the rude bridal customs of Gor, as she furiously but playfully struggled, as she squirmed and protested and pretended to resist, I bound her bodily across the saddle of the tarn. Her wrists and ankles were secured, and she lay before me,
arched over the saddle, helpless, a captive, but of love and her own free will. The warriors laughed, Marlenus the loudest. “It seems I belong to you, bold Tarnsman,” she said, “What are you going to do with me?” In answer, I hauled on the one-strap, and the great bird rose into the air, higher and higher, even into the clouds, and she cried to me, “Let it be now, Tarl,” and even before we had passed the outermost ramparts of Ar, I had untied her ankles and flung her single garment to the streets below, to show her people what had been the fate of the daughter of their
Ubar.
Chapter Twenty:EPILOGUE
It is now time for a lonely man to conclude his narrative, without bitterness but without resignation. I have never surrendered the hope that someday, somehow, I might return to Gor, our Counter-Earth. These final sentences are written in a small apartment in Manhattan, some six floors above the street. The sounds of playing children carry through the open window. I
have refused to return to England, and I will remain in this country from which I departed, years ago, for that distant world which holds what I most love. I can see the blazing sun this July afternoon, and know that behind it, counter-poised with my native planet, lies another world. And I wonder if on that world a girl, now a woman, thinks of me, and perhaps, too, of the secrets I have told her lie behind her sun, Tor-tu-Gor, Light Upon the Home Stone. My destiny had been accomplished. I had served the Priest-Kings. The shape of a world
had been altered, the rivers of a planet’s history turned to new channels. Then, no longer needed, I was discarded. Perhaps the Priest- Kings, whoever or whatever they might be, reasoned that such a man was dangerous, that such a man might in time raise his own banner of dominion; perhaps they realised that I, of all on Gor, did not revere them, would not turn and bow my head in the1 direction of the Sardar Mountains; perhaps they envied me the flame of my love for Talena; perhaps, in the cold recesses of the Sardar Mountains, their intelligences could not accept that
this vulnerable, perishable creature was more blessed than they, in their wisdom and their power. Due, I believe, partly to my arguments and the prestige of what I had done, unprecedented lenience was shown to the surrendered armies of Pa-Kur. The Home Stones of the Twelve Tributary Cities were returned, and those men who had served Pa-Kur from those cities were allowed to return to their cities rejoicing. The large contingent of mercenaries who had flocked to his banner were kept as work slaves for a period of one year, to fill in the vast ditches and
siege tunnels, to repair the extensive damage to the walls of Ar, and to rebuild those of its buildings that had been injured or burned in the fighting. After a year of servitude, they were returned, weaponless, to the cities of their birth. The officers of Pa-Kur, instead of being impaled, were treated in the same manner as common soldiers, to their relief, if scandal. Those members of the Caste of Assassins, the most hated caste on Gor, who had served Pa- Kur, were taken in chains down the Vosk to become galley slaves on the cargo ships that ply Gor’s
oceans. Oddly enough, the body of Pa-Kur himself was never recovered from the foot of the Cylinder of Justice. I assume it was destroyed by the angry citizens of Ar. Marlenus, in spite of his heroic role in the victory, submitted himself to the judgement of Ar’s Council of High Castes. The sentence of death passed over him by the usurping government of the Initiates was rescinded, but because his imperialistic ambition was feared, he was exiled from his beloved city. Such a man as Marlenus can never be second in a
city, and the men of Ar were determined that he should never again be first. Accordingly, the Ubar, tears in his eyes, was publicly refused bread and salt, and, under penalty of death, was ordered to leave Ar by sundown, never again to come within ten pasangs of the city. With some fifty followers, who loved him even more than their native walls, he fled on tarnback to the Voltai Range, from whose peaks he could always look upon the distant towers of Ar. There, I suppose to this day, in that inhospitable vastness, he reigns; in
the scarlet mountains of the Voltai, Marlenus still rules, a larl among men, an outlaw king, to his followers always the Ubar of Ubars. The free cities of Gor appointed Kazrak, my sword brother, to be temporary administrator of Ar, for it was he who, with the help of my father and Sana of Thentis, had rallied the cities to raise the siege. His appointment was confirmed by Ar’s Council of High Castes, and his popularity in the city is such that it seems probable that in the future the office will be his by free election. In Ar democracy is a long-
forgotten way of life that will require careful remembering. When I returned to Ko-ro-ba with Talena, a great feast was held and we celebrated our Free Companionship. A holiday was declared, and the city was ablaze with light and song. Shimmering strings of bells pealed in the wind, and festive lanterns of a thousand colours swung from the innumerable flower-strewn bridges. There was shouting and laughter, and the glorious colours of the castes of Gor mingled equally in the cylinders. Gone for the night was even the distinction of master and
slave, and many a wretch in bondage would see the dawn as a free man. To my delight, even Torm, of the Caste of Scribes, appeared at the tables. I was honoured that the little scribe had separated himself from his beloved scrolls long enough to share my happiness, only that of a warrior. He was wearing a new robe and sandals, perhaps for the fir1st time in years. He clasped my hands, and, to my wonder, the little scribe was crying. And then, in his joy, he turned to Talena and in gracious salute lifted the symbolic cup of Ka-la-na wine to her beauty.
Talena and I swore to honour that day as long as either of us lived. I have tried to keep that promise, and I know that she has done so as well. That night, that glorious night, was a night of flowers, torches, and Ka- la-na wine, and late, after sweet hours of love, we fell asleep in each other’s arms. I awoke, perhaps weeks later, stiff and chilly in the mountains of New Hampshire, near the flat rock on which the silver spacecraft had landed. I was wearing the now so crude-seeming camp clothes I had originally worn. Men can die, but not of a broken heart, for if that
were possible, I would now be dead. I doubted my sanity; I was terrorised that what had occurred had been only a bizarre dream. I sat alone in the mountains, my head in my hands. Slowly, with agony, I began to believe that it had indeed been nothing but the cruellest of dreams and that I was now once again coming to my senses. I could not believe this in my heart of hearts, but my mind, forcefully and coolly, required this conclusion. I struggled to my feet, my heart torn with grief. But then, on the ground near my boot, I saw it – a small object, a tiny, round object. I
fell on my knees and snatched it up, my eyes bursting with tears, my heart knowing the full sweep of the saddest joy that can overwhelm a man. In my hand I held the ring of red metal, the ring that bore the crest of Cabot, the gift of my father. I cut my hand with the ring, to make myself bleed, and I laughed with joy as I felt the pain and saw the blood. The ring was real, and I was awake, and there was a Counter- Earth, and the girl, Talena. When I emerged from the mountains, I found I had been gone seven months. It was simple enough to feign amnesia, and what other
account of those seven months would my world accept? I spent a few days in a public hospital, under observation, and was then allowed to leave. I decided to take up quarters, at least temporarily, in New York. My position at the college had, of course, been filled, and I had no desire to return; there would be too many explanations. I sent my friend at the college a belated cheque for his camping equipment, which had been destroyed with the blue envelope in the mountains. Very kindly, he arranged for my books and other belongings to be sent to my new
address. When I arranged for the transfer of my bank business, I was surprised, but not too surprised, to discover that my savings account, in my absence, had been mysteriously augmented, and quite handsomely. I have not been forced to work since my return from the Counter-Earth. To be sure, I have worked, but only at what I wished and for as long as I wanted. I have given much more time to travelling, to reading and to keeping myself fit. I have even joined a fencing club, to keep my eye alert and my wrist strong, though the puny foils we use are sorry weapons compared to the
swords of Gor. Strangely, though it has now been six years since I left the Counter-Earth, I can discover no signs of ageing or physical alteration in my appearance. I have puzzled over this, trying to connect it with the mysterious letter, dated in the seventeenth century, ostensibly by my father, which I received in the blue envelope. Perhaps the serums of the Caste of Physicians, so skilled on Gor, have something to do with this, but I cannot tell. Two or three times a year I have returned to the mountains of New Hampshire, to look again on that
great flat rock, to spend a night there, in case I might see once again that silver disc in the sky, in case once again I might be summoned by the Priest-Kings to that other world. But if I am so summoned, they will do so wi1th the understanding that I am resolved to be no pawn in their vast games. Who or what are the Priest-Kings that they should so determine the lives of others, that they should rule a planet, terrorise the cities of a world, commit men to the Flame Death, tear lovers from each other’s arms? No matter how fearful their power, they must be challenged. If I should once again
walk the green fields of Gor, I know that I should enter the Sardar Mountains and confront them, whoever or whatever they might be. |
AuthorFree Library of Famous Authors Archives
May 2023
Categories |